2

Published by
Vedantu Innovations Private Limited
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
Vedantu Innovations Private Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by
any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the
publishers.
Notice : Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best of the resources and
knowledge. Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book
from sources regarded as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this
book. However, we as authors and publishers are not to be held responsible for unin-
tentional mistakes that might have crept in. Having stated that, errors (if any) brought
to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged and rectified in upcoming editions.

Printed by
Colours Imprint
475C, Adugodi Main Road,
8th Block, Koramangala, Bengaluru 560 095
www.coloursimprint.com
3
 4

Founder’s Message
Dear Student,

It gives me immense pleasure to present to you a Ready Reckoner and Practice booklet by
Vedantu - ‘TATVA’. Tatva in Sanskrit, means a collection of “Core” content/truth and isn’t that
what Vedantu brings to your table - the Core? Vedantu, at all times, ensures that you have
easy accessibility to a collection of essential concepts, theory, derivations, definitions, solved
examples, concept videos, and practice questions, important questions from competitive
examinations and I am pleased to say that all questions in ‘Tatva’ come with detailed solutions.

Tatva is the result of the constant endeavour and research done by our highly experienced
team of teachers and subject experts who compiled relevant content for you so that you come
out with flying colours in IIT JEE/NEET and Olympiads. We strongly believe and vouch for the
effectiveness and relevance of this booklet to grab the desired rank in IIT JEE/ NEET.

Key Points on ‘How to obtain optimal benefits from ‘Tatva’ ?

* We suggest starting with the Practice of ‘Tatva questions’ at the end of a chapter after
revision and Practice of basic questions.
* For daily practice of questions, we strongly recommend attempting session assignments
along with Vedantu live sessions
* Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you revise
concepts, mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary and eventually clear
all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
* Attempt Tatva questions post revision of 11th and 12th Grade topics. Take one topic at a
time to solve. Attempt any revision test series for NEET/JEE once you have solved Tatva
questions. Following this will not only help you during revision but also give a major
boost to your confidence.
* First solve basic level questions and gradually progress to the advanced level.
* Practice basic level questions regularly all through your journey of preparation.
* Your success is our dream-come-true

I wish you all the best.

Anand Prakash
Founder, Academic Head
Vedantu

Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing

Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1,6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
 5

Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Theodore Roosevelt

Tatva is the brainchild of the creative Vedans who The managers who understood every aspect of what
strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you. Our the leadership were trying to accomplish and brought
heartfelt thanks to the Super Vedans who give wings so much of their own to the table and managed the
to the vision of Vedantu. execution of ‘Tatva’ immaculately.

Our leaders who have been our guiding light and Kiran Kumari Harish Rao
encouragement in every step: Bhavya Bangera Shraddha
Vamsi Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Sir Sushmitha Akshatha
Charubak Chakrabarti
Our gratitude to the insightful leadership and
guidance of our leaders who dreamt about ‘Tatva’, Our heartfelt gratitude to ourcreative content
steered the project in the right direction and were developers, the dedicated master teachers and the
instrumental in making this dream into a reality: DTP team who have put in their hard work, insights,
eagerness to execute and nurtured Tatva into ‘your
Sahil Bhatia Shubam Gupta ready handbook’ and to bring positive learning
Arshad Shahid Ajay Mittal experience to you.
JaideepSontakke Sudhanshu Jain

Physics Team

Teachers SME DTP

Aarzoo Walia Satyam Kumar Atul Singh (Team Lead) Jitender Singh
Ishani Mitra Santosh Kumar Nanda Pukhraj Singh Yamala Santhosh Kumar
Shubham Ghar Anmol Gupta Saurabh Sharma
Anand M Tamanna Arora
Vijayalakshmi Viswanathan Kanchan Kumari
Pritesh Ranjan Pushp Raj Singh
Ravneet Wadhwa

A loud shout out for our media team - a bunch of creative minds with contagious energy. We cannot thank
them enough.

Suraj Bhan Singh

Gadde Ranjith
Ranjeeth Ramesh
Sreyoshi Biswas
Devika Ramachandran

Special thanks and appreciation for the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal,
Dipshi Shetty, Mohamed Anzar and Anuska Singh.

The journey of the imagination to the reality of ‘Tatva’ would not have been possible without our enthusiastic
Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated team of Teachers and our talented Tech
Team.
 Table of Contents

BASIC MATHEMATICS
 Theory ......................................................................................................................................... 9

 Exercise - 1 : Unit & Dimension, Error and Significant figures, Vectros ................................ 33

 Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................... 45

 Exercise - 3 : Calculus ................................................................................................................. 48

 Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .............................................................. 51

 Answer Key .................................................................................................................................. 54

KINEMATICS
 Theory ......................................................................................................................................... 57

 Solved Examples ......................................................................................................................... 71

 Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions .................................................................................... 90

 Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ..................................................................... 98

 Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ........................................................................... 102

 Exercise - 4 : Previous Year IIT Questions .................................................................................. 119

 Answer Key ................................................................................................................................. 123

 LAWS OF MOTION
 Theory ......................................................................................................................................... 126

 Solved Examples ......................................................................................................................... 140

 Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions .................................................................................... 157

 Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions .................................................................... 166

 Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ........................................................................... 171

 Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .............................................................. 187

 Answer Key ................................................................................................................................. 191

 01
BASIC MATHEMATICS
 9 BASIC MATHEMATICS

Basic Mathematics
VECTORS
In physics we study about physical phenomenon occuring Representation of vector
in nature. All physical phenomenon are governed by certain Arrow on head of a letter or bold letter is used to represent
laws. These laws are known as laws of physics and in a vector.
physics our motive will be to understand the different laws 
laws. Laws of physics are expressed in terms of physical A or A
quantities. 
A or | A | = Magnitude of vector
On the basis of mathematical operations a physical quantity 
can be divided into 2 categories : A  Read as a vector A
Graphical representation of vector is done with the help of
(1) Scalar (2) Vector
directed line segment.
1. Scalar : Those physical quantities which are fully
represented by magnitude and unit are called scalar (Tail)
Show direction (head)
quantities. The mathematical operations (addition,
substraction, multiplication etc) of these quantities are length
governed by ordinary algebra rules.
length magnitude of vector
For example :
Mass, distance, speed, time, work, energy, power, Current etc.
2. Vector : Those physical quantities which are fully
represented by magntitude, unit and direction are called
vector quantities. Two vectors are said to be equal if they have same direction,
Mathematical operations of these quantities are governed magnitude and having same physical meaning.
by vector algebra rules.
(We have different set of operation for vector) A vector said to be a constant vector if it direction and
magnitude both remain same all the time.
In general 2 kg + 2kg will be always 4kg but addition of 2N
and 2N can be anything between 0N to 4N so we need to
deal vectors in different way. A vector does not change if it is shifted parallel to itself.

Area, displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, momentum

etc. If a positive number is multiplied to a vector their its
magnitude changes but direction remains constant/same.

A A
Area is a vector quantity and direction of area is always 2A
perpendicular to plane or normal to surface. 2

If it is multiplied with negative scalar both direction and

A
A magnitude changes. Direction of vector is changed by 180°.

A A
–2A
2
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 10

1. UNIT VECTOR
A vector with unit magnitude is known as unit vector
 A vector with zero magnitude is called null vector.
A
Represented by  (  = read as A cap)   
|A| 2. ANGLE BETWEEN VECTOR

ˆ  |A| A
A ˆ  Direction Join two vectors tail to tail then smaller angle between them

 is known as angle between vectors.
Magnitude

Unit vector actually represent the direction of mother vector.

A
A angle between
Unit vector tells us a particular direction and it can be used vector A & B
to write any other vector in the direction of unit vector.

For example B B

 
If we want to write a B (B) in the direction of A (A) then we 3. ADDITION OF VECTORS

have to use magnitude of B and direction of A .
There are two methods of vector addition :

 A (1) Graphical method
Direction of A is  
A (2) Analytical method

Magnitude of B = B
3.1 Graphical method

so B   B  Aˆ   We have 2 technique of graphical method (a) Triangle law
Standard Unit Vector of vector addition (b) Parallelogram law of vector addition.
We have three standard unit vector (a) Triangle Law of Vector addition
(1) along x axis = + ˆi,  ˆi    
A  B  R ?? (What is R )
(2) along y axis = + ˆj,  ˆj Arrange vector in such a way, in which tail of second
vector should be on head of first vector then third side of
ˆ  kˆ
(3) along z axis = + k, possible  will be the resultant vector or resultant effect
of addition.
Example - 1
Write a force vector of magnitude 10 N along negative x A
axis.
R
B

 
Ans. F  10 N  ˆi  10 ˆi  N  B R

Exampler - 2 A
2
Write acceleration vector of magnitude 20 m/s along z  
axis.  = angle between A and B



Ans. a  20 m / s
2
  kˆ   20 kˆ  m / s 
2
 11 BASIC MATHEMATICS

2 2 2
(oc) = (od) + (cd)
2 2 2
R = (A + B cos ) + (B sin )
2 2 2 2 2 2
If 3 or more vectors, then also we can apply same concept R = A + B cos  + 2 AB cos  + B sin 
then it will be known as polygon law of vector addition.
    R  A 2  B2  2ABcos 
A  B  C  R ??
    
| R |  | A |2  | B |2 2 | A || B |cos 
C
B cd Bsin 
R tan   
C od A  B cos 
B
A
A  Bsin   
  tan 1   from A
 A  B cos  
Remark
 
Subtraction of vector can also be done by knowing addition. Maximum value of sum of two vectors will be | A |  | B |
    
AB R when  = 0° and its minimum value will be | A |  | B | when
    = 180° so we can say that
A  (B)  R
  
| R |min  | R |  | R |max
B
A     
| A || B | | R || A |  | B |

(–B) Remark
R
When angle between them is  = /2 then
A
  
| R | | A |2  | B |2
(b) Parallelogram Law of addition :
 
Take two vectors A and B with angle .
R
B
b c

(B) B R
A

O 
A (A) a d |B|
tan   
|A|
obca is a parallelogram that’s why it is known as

parallelogram law of addition. |A|
tan   
From given figure |B|
ad = ac cos  cd = ac sin 
3.2 Analytical Method
ad = B cos  cd = B sin 
od = oa + ad = A + B cos  In this method we convert a vector addition problem to an
ordinary addition problem by resolving the vector along 2
cd = B sin 
or 3 mutually  direction.
BASIC MATHEMATICS 12

Resolution of a vector : This can also be used to write a 

vector interm of standard unit vectors. | A | A 2x  A 2y  A 2z

y  From oab
2 2 2
oa is  to ab so (ob) = (oa) + (ab)

A ob = A 2x  A 2y
Ay
from obc
2 2 2
Ax ob is  to cb so (oc) = (ob) + (cb)
x 2

According to Triangle Law

A2   A 2x  A 2y  A 2
z

  
A  Ax  Ay A  A 2x  A 2y  A 2z
 
A x  A x ˆi A y  A y ˆj Example - 1

 ˆj
Write given vectors in terms of standard unit vectors.
A Ax ˆi  Ay
 
  y
x component
 y component

of A of A 2
E (20 m/s ) D (10N)
 
A x | A |cos  A y | A |sin 

= A cos  = A sin 
30° A (10N)
 x
A   A cos   ˆi   A sin   ˆj 53° 37°

This shows that we can always write a vector interm of its

C (15N) B (20 m/s)
components along x and y axis.
Just by symmetry we can say if a vector is in 3D then it can Point to remember
be written as sum of its component along x, y, and z axis.
37° 53°
z sin 3/5 4/5
cos 4/5 3/5
c tan 3/4 4/3

A
Az Example - 2

Ax O y A force of 20 N is applied on a block write its horizontal and

vertical components
a
Ay b 20 N
x

   
A  Ax  A y  Az 37°


A  A x ˆi  A y ˆj  A z kˆ
13 BASIC MATHEMATICS

Example - 3 Example - 8
Find the resultant of given two vectors also find angle made
 Write a velocity vector of magnitude 20 m/s in the direction
by resultant vector with B . 
of given force vector F  3iˆ  4ˆj  N  .

Example - 9
B (4N)
 
Find angle between A and B if
60°    
| A  B | | A  B |
A (2N)
Example - 10

Example - 4      |R|
If P  Q  R  0 and | P |  | Q | and they are coplaner
Write vector interms of standard unit vector with co- 2
ordinates of head and tail to be vectors then find angle between vectors.
(x2, y2, z2) and (x1, y1, z1).
4. PRODUCT OF VECTORS
Example - 5
There are two types of vector products
A car moves along north with speed of 50 m/s then it takes (1) Scalar Product (Dot Product)
a right turn and moves with 50 m/s along south. Find change
(b) Vector Product (Cross Product)
in speed and change in velocity.
4.1 DOT product
Example - 6
 
Find the magnitude of unknown forces (F1 & F3) if object is (a) If A and B are two vectors having anlge between them is 
in equilibrium in the presence of given forces. then dot product of vectors is defined as

F4 (15N)
Read as A dot B

object Dot product of two vectors results into scalar quantity. If a

53° physical quantity depends on dot product of two vector
physical quantity then that physical quantity should be
37° F1 (F1) scalar.

For example

 
W  F  d  Fd cos 
F3 (F3)
F2 (10N)

 
1. A.A  A A cos  0   A 2
Example - 7
2. A ˆ  12  1
ˆ .A
Write unit vector for given vector

A  2iˆ  3jˆ  6kˆ 3. ˆi . ˆi  1  ˆj . ˆj  kˆ . kˆ
BASIC MATHEMATICS 14
   
4. A . B  0 then A  B 4.2 Cross Product

ˆi . ˆj  ˆj .kˆ  kˆ . ˆj  0  
If A and B are two vectors and angle between them is 
    then cross product of two vectors will be
5. A.BB.A   
 AB  C
6. A  A x ˆi  A y ˆj  A z kˆ   
Magnitude of vector | C | | A | | B | sin 

B  Bx ˆi  By ˆj  Bz kˆ   
Direction of C will be perpendicular to both A and B .
 
A . B  A x B x  A y B y  A z Bz

7. Angle between two vectors

  Vector, result of A × B
A .B
cos    
|A||B|

B
A x B x  A y B y  A z Bz

A 2x  A 2y  A z2 B2x  B2y  Bz2

A
Example - 1
 
Find the value of A.B if Vector, result of B × A

A  ˆi  ˆj  3kˆ
    
B  2iˆ  3jˆ  kˆ | A  B |  | B A |

Example - 2    

A  B   B A 
 
Find the value of a so that A is  to B

A  2 ˆi  a ˆj  3kˆ

B  2 ˆi  ˆj  3a kˆ  
If A and B is represented in terms of unit vectors as
Example - 3 
A  A ˆi  A ˆj  A kˆ
x y z
 
Find angle between A and B given in previous problem.
B  Bx ˆi  By ˆj  Bz kˆ
Example - 4
then
 
A  6 ˆi  3jˆ  2kˆ , find angle made by A with x, y and z axis.
ˆi ˆj kˆ
 
Example - 5 A  B  Ax Ay Az
  Bx By Bz
Find component of A along B if

A  6 ˆi  3jˆ  2kˆ  ˆi  A y Bz  B y A z   ˆj  A x Bz  A z Bx   k̂  A x B y  A y Bx 

B  2 ˆi  ˆj  kˆ
15 BASIC MATHEMATICS

Example - 5
   
 
ˆ A
ˆ 0
  
What will be the value of A  B  A  B . 
AA  0 , A

ˆi  ˆi  0  ˆj  ˆj  kˆ  kˆ Example - 6
   
If angle between two vectors A & B is  and if | A |  | B |
Example - 1    
 
then angle between A  B and A  B .  
 
There are two vectors A  2iˆ  4ˆj  k,
ˆ B  ˆi  5jˆ  3kˆ . Find Solve problem by
    (1) Non Graphical Method
(1) A  B (2) Unit vector  to A & B
(2) Graphical Method

Example - 2 Example - 7
  If two vectors of equal magnitude (F) are inclined at angle 
Find angle between A & B if
then find resultant vector if
   
| AB | 3 A . B .  (a)  = 60°
(b)  = 90°
Example - 3 (c)  = 120°

  
Find value of A. A  B   Example - 8

Find resultant and of two vectors given in figures.

Example - 4
F2 (20N)
 
If angle between A & B is  then what will be angle
   

between A and  A  B  A  vector..  37°

F1 (20N)
Solve the problem with two methods.
BASIC MATHEMATICS 16

CALCULUS
1. DIFFERENTIATION OF A FUNCTION
dy
If we say y as a function of x then we write = slope of tangent on curve between y and x at one
dx
y = f (x)
point.
x = Independent variable
Mathematically that is called differentiation of y with respect
y = Dependent variable.
dy
In physics we study variation of a quantity y with respect to x = .
to quantity x and we also study rate at which y changes dx
when x changes.

y 1. Rate of change of y with respect to x

dy
y2 2. Slope of tangent on curve between y & x at one point
dx

3. Differentiation of y with respect to x

y1
In physics, first we will study the linear motion of an object
here position of object is represented by x which changes
x with time t, then
x1 x2

One simple way to see variation of y with x Rate of change of x with respect to t

y dx
Rate of change of y with change in x  Slope of tangent on curve between x & t at one point
x dt
y
Graphically one can see that  tan  Differentiation of x with respect to t
x
Now lets say x1 approaches to x2 then x  0 or it will be
very-very small and we write it dx. In that way y approaches and that is equal to velocity (Magnitude of velocity)
to y2 and y  0 and written as dy.
dx dx
So, v | v |  speed
dt dt
dy
Rate of change of y with respect to x = (at one point) Similarly when velocity changes with time then we say
dx
Graphically it is tangent of curve on given point. dv
 a  acceleration
dt
y
so we can define
Velocity  That is rate of change of position with respect
to t.
Acceleration  that is rate of change of velocity with
respect to t.
x
 17 BASIC MATHEMATICS

Tips
dy  dz 
if x = f (t)  f ' x   
dx  dx 

dx   differentiate in normal way 
v  x  f ' t 
dt
Example - 1

dv d  dx  d 2 x  1. Obtain first derivative of given functions

a     x  f ''  t 
dt dt  dt  dt 1
2
(1) y = x (2) y 
We are studying application of differentiation in physics. x7 / 2
2 x
[Explain v, a, acceleration and retardation]. (3) y = x sin x (4) y = e n (x)

Standard Rules and Formulas of differentiation : x2

(5) y 
x 3
(6) y = e tan x + x
tan x
n  n–1
1. y=x y =nx
x2
2. y = c  y = cx
0
y=0 2 x
(7) y = x a +  e x n  x 
sin x

3. y= sin x y = cos x Example - 2
A particle of mass 2 kg moves along x axis and if position co-

4. y = cos x y = – sin x ordinate varies with t,

 t 3 5t 2
5. y = tan x y = sec2 x xt    6t  4
3 2

6. y = cot x y = – cosec2 x Find
(a) Initial position
 1 (b) v (t) and Initial velocity
7. y = n (x) y
x
(c) a (t)
x
8. y = e (exponantial function)
(d) Time at which particle changes its direction

y = ex (e) Find time Interval during which particle accelerates and
retardation.
x 
y = ax n (x) * (explain  general meaning of acceleration and retardation)
9. y=a
(Take time to explain that) (Detail explanation latter)
Rules


Differentiation by Substitution
1. y = f1(x) + f2 (x) y = f1’(x) + f2’(x)
Example - 1

2. y = c f (x) y = cf’(x)
5 dy
y = (2x + 5) Find

dx
3. y = f1(x) f2(x) y = f1(x) f2’(x) + f1’(x) f2(x)
Sol. 2x + 5 = t t = 2x + 5
f1  x  f 2  x  f1 '  x   f1  x  f 2 '  x  dt
4. y  y=t
5
2
f2  x  [f 2 (x)]2 dx

Chain rule dy  dt 
 5t 4   (according to chain rule)
dx  dx 
1. y = f (x) Now if we want to differentiate with respect to 4 4
third variable say z. = 5 (2x + 5) (2) = 10 (2x + 5)
BASIC MATHEMATICS 18

Example -2
y

y  sin  x  Find y
Example - 3

Calculate first derivative of given functions

2
 1 
(1) y   x  
 x
2
x
(2) y = sin (x)
2 3
(3) y = x n (x )
(4) y = n ( (2x + 3)
1/2 2  1

Example -4 tan 2  tan 1

d2 y dy dy
4
For y = (2x – 3) find 
dx 2 dx 2 dx 1

(Here explain the meaning of second derivative) Slope decreasing that means first derivative is decreasing
that means second derivative will be negative.
1.1 Increasing and Decreasing function
d2 y
0
Increasing function dx 2

Suppose y = f (x) and if on  in x, y also  the function is

Example -1
increasing function. There are two types of possible
2
graphical variations. y = x (x > 1)

y 
Sol. y = 2x


x y


y=2>0

Increasing graph with increasing slope concave upward.

x
Example - 2

2  1 y x x>1

tan 2  tan 1
 1
Sol. y =
dy dy 2 x

dx 2 dx 1

x y
Slope increasing that mean first derivative is also increasing

d2 y d2 y   1
so second derivative should be +ve 0 2
 y   3/ 2  0
dx 2 dx 4x
 19 BASIC MATHEMATICS

Application in physics :

(i) Increasing graph with decreasing slope will be concave

downward. 1.
(ii) Increasing graph, with increasing slope will be concave
upward.

1.2 Decreasing Graphs

On increasing value of x, y decreases. There also two types

of graphs.

y
1.

2.
x


1   2 
2
tan 2 > tan 1

d2 y
Slope is negative but increasing so 0
dx 2

dy d2 y
 0, 2  0
dx dx

If the graph is parabola then second derivative will be

2. constant
2
x = at + bt + c if a > 0

 
x = 2at + b x  0 and constant


x  2a if a < 0


x  0 and constant.
1 > 2 So if acceleration is constant then x and t graph will be
tan 1 > tan 2 parabolla.
Slope decreasing and negative so second derivative is
negative.
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 20

1.3 Maxima Minima of Function Example - 1

A particle moves along x axis and its position varies with

y time according to given graph

A Maxima
y2 y

B G
B H
y1
Minima t
x O A C F
x1 x2
D E
Maxima
(Condition to locate and check point of maxima) (a) Region in which particle acceleration and retardation.
(b) Point at which v = 0, a  0
dy d2 y (c) Point at which v  0, a = 0
0 0
dx dx 2 x1
Example -2
Minima Find the maximum and minimum value function
3 2
(Condition to locate and check point to minima) y = x – 3x + 6

2. INTEGRATION
dy d2 y
 0, 0
dx dx 2 x Integration of a function. Let y = f (x)
2

Area of shaded region of curve is

Point of Inflexion dA = ydx
Concavity changes at A is known as the point of inflextion. Total area bounded by curve y = f (x)

y y

A y2
yA
y

y1
x
A x
x1 x2
dx
dy
0
dx x x2 x2

A 
x  x1
dA   dA
2 x1
d y
0
dx 2 That is called area of graph with integration from x1 to x2.
x1 = lower limit of integration
 21 BASIC MATHEMATICS

x2 = upper limit of integration

x2

 y dx = Definite Integral
x1
Like differentiation, rules of substitution is also applicable
to integration as well in a similar way.

 y dx = Indefinite Integral (without limit) Example-2

 Integration is reverse process of differentiation in which we
Integrate the functions
find a function for which the given function is the derivative
of function.
1 x
dx  dx
(i)  x
(ii)
x 2
4 
3

dx
(iii)  sin  2x  dx (iv)  4x  3

x dx
 dx
(v)
4x 2 (vi) x 2
 a2
Formulas

n x n 1  1 
2
1. x dx 
n 1
c (vii)  sin
2
 x  cos x dx (viii)   x   dx
 x

1
2.  x dx  n  x   c (ix)  cos  2x  3 dx (x)
2
 x  4 dx
3.  sin x dx   cos x  c  2x2 3 dx
(xi) xe
4.  cos x dx  sin x  c Example-3

5.  tan x dx  n  sec x   c 1

Calculate the value of  | x |dx

1
x x
6.  e dx  e c
Example-4

4
Example-1
2
Calculate the value of  | x  4 |dx
4
Find area under the curve of y = x from x = 1 to x = 2

2 Applications in Physics
A   x 2 dx x2 t2
1 dx
v  dx   v d t
dt x1 t1
Rule of Integration
t2
1.  dx  x  c x 2  x1   v dt = Change in position or displacement.
t1

2.  c f  x  dx  c f  x  dx (Area under the curve of v and t graph is displacement)

3.  f  x   g  x  dx   f  x  dx   g  x  dx a
dv
v 2

  dv   a dt
t

dt u t1
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 22

t2
dx
v  u   a dt = Change in velocity..  c  0 and v = c > 0
dt
t1

Constant and Positive

(Area under the curve of a and t graph is change in velocity)
Velocity
Mixed application of differentiation and integration
v = tan 
Example-1
dx
A particle is moving along x axis such that its position varies 2.  c  0, Negative constant.
dt
as
2 3
x = 8t – 3t x
(1) Find velocity at t = 2 sec.
(2) Position when v = 0
(3) Displacement of particle between t = 0 to t = 4 seconds

Example-2

A particle is moving x axis in such a way that its velocity

varies as t
2
v = t – 2t
At t = 0 the particle is at x = +1 m. Find the position of
x
particle at time t = 2 seconds also find acceleration of particle
3.
at x = 1 m.

Example-3 Parabolic
Velocity of particle varies as v = 2x + 1. Find
(a) Acceleration at x = 2m t
(b) Position of particle as a function of t if at t = 0, x = + 1m

Example-4

Derive equations of linear motion for a particle having initial dx

speed v and constant acceleration a. 0 v>0
dt
3. GRAPHS AND THEIR APPLICATION
d2 x
 0 (constant)
1. St. line graph dt 2
y = mx + c
x
x
4. Parabolic

y=c t
t0
t
dx
angle measured anticlockwise from +x axis taken positive. 0 v>0
dt
Positive constant slope.
 23 BASIC MATHEMATICS

d2 x a
 c <0 a=c<0
dt 2 8.

dx Area
tan  = slope = = velocity at a moment t0.
dt

v t
5. t1 t2

Area   adt   dv  v

= v (t2) – v (t1)
 Change in velocity..
t

dv 9.
Slope =  a  tan 
dt 1 Area
Slope is variable so acceleration is also variable. velo.

v
6. x1 x2
displacement

1
Area   dx   dt  t
v
t = Time taken to cover displacement from x1 to x2.

v
dv
Slope =  a  tan 
dt
10. v0
Constant slope so acceleration is constant.

v x
7. t0

Area dv
tan  
dx

t Acceleration at t0 will be
t1 t2
 dv 
 v0    v0  Slope 
 dx 
Area =  v dt   dx  x

displacement from t1 to t2.

BASIC MATHEMATICS 24

Example - 1 Example - 2
A particle is moving along x axis in such a way so that its Particle is moving along straight line such that its
veolcity vs time graph is acceleration varies with time as given graph.

v (m/s)
a (m/s2)

+4 2

t (sec.)
10 20 30 40 80
t (s)
10 sec. 30 sec.
–4
(a) Velocity at = t = 30 seconds if initial speed at t = 0, u = 0.
(b) Displacement in t = 0 to t = 30 sec.
Find :
(a) Acceleration of particle at t = 5 sec, 15 sec, 30 sec, t = 60
sec.
(b) Displacement of particle between t = 0 to t = 80 sec.
(c) Distance travelled by particle from t = 0 – 80 sec.
(d) Plote acceleration vs t graph for motion of particle..
 25 BASIC MATHEMATICS

UNIT AND DIMENSIONS

1. UNIT 1. Fundamental/Base quantity :
Standard value of a physical quantity is called unit of the 1. Mass  M  kg
quanity.
2. Length  L  meter (m)
unit
3. Time  T  sec.
Physical Quantity = n u 4. Current  A/I  Ampere

numerical value 5. Thermodynamic Temperature  /k  Kelvin

Remarks : When we convert a physical quantity from one 6. Luminous Intensity  cd  Candela
unit to another unit, then physical value of quantity does 7. Amount of Substance  mol  mole
not change but if n  u  2. Plane angle
Q = nu = n0v0 = n1u1

Example r

kg g
dw = 1000 1
m3 cm3
Characteristics of unit : r
1. The unit should be internationally acceptable.
2. The unit must not change with time and space. 
 (radian)
3. It should be easily accessible. r
4. It should be reproducable. 3. Solid angle
Different system of Units :
r
1. MKS system : Mass  kg, L m, T  sec.
2. CGS system : M  gm, L  cm, T  sec.
A
3. FPS system : M  pound, L  foot, T  sec.
4. SI system : System International
r
How SI is different from others :
1. Base quantity is 7 not 3.
A
2. Names given to the units derived from these 7 base units  steradian
r2
(Name of scientists used).
3. Two complementary quantities introduced. 2. DIMENSIONS
(1) Plane angle  radian
Power of base quantities are called dimensions.
(2) Solid angle  steratian
For example
4. Prefixes used, e.g., micro, milli, mega, pico etc.
Force = mass × acceleration
Types of physical Quantities
 length 
= (mass) ×  
  time 2 
 
Fundamental Derived Complementay 1 1
= (mass) (length) (time)
–2

(Base) Quantity Quantity

 BASIC MATHEMATICS 26

Dimension of mass in force = 1 3. With the help of dimensional analysis we can check the
Dimension of length in force = 1 physical relation between physical quantities.
Dimension of time in force = –2 Example - 3
When a physical quantity is expresed interms of power of
Check the formula for centrepetal force
base quantities then the exponent of base quantity that
enters into expression is called dimension of quantity in the mv 2
base. So dimensional formula for force will be F
1 1 –2
r2
Force = (mass) (length) (time)
1 1 –2 –2 [Dimension of LHS = Dimension of RHS]
= M L T = [MLT ]
2 2
–2  1
  L  1    ML2  2 T 2 
Example - 1 [MLT ] =  M LT   

Find dimensional formulas of given quantities.
 MLT 2   MLT 2 so given formula is incorrect.
 1 2
1. Energy  K  mv 
 2  Example–4

GM1M 2  Formula for displacement of particle in a linear motion is


2. Universal constant of Gravitation.  F   S = ut + at
2
 r2 
u = velocity (Initial) a = acceleration
 F
3. Gas constant  PV  nRT, P   t = time
 A 2
Dimension of S = Dimension of ut = Dimension of at
–1 1 –2 2
F v  [L] [LT × T ] [LT × T ]
4. Coefficient of Viscosity    
A   [L] = [L] = [L]

 2 W
5. Electric Resistance  P  I R P  
 t 
Uses of dimensional analysis : This formula looks correct according to dimensional
analysis but it is not a actual correct formula. If formula
1. With the help of dimensional analysis, we can write the unit contains a dimensionless number then it will not appear in
of quantity dimensional analysis.
 m3  We should take care that a, “Here dimensionally incorrect
–1 3 –2
G = [M L T ]  2  formula must be an incorrect formula but dimensionally
 kg sec 
correct need not to be correct always.”
2. With the help of dimensional analysis we can convert a
physical quantity from one unit system to another unit 4. With the help of dimensional analysis we can establish the
system. relation among physical quantities.

Example–1 Example
5
Prove that 1 N = 10 dyne  CGS unit of force. Time period of simple pendulum depends on (a)  (length)
–2
(b) g (acceleration) (c) m (mass).
F=MLT
Establish Relation for time period T  m x  y g z
 1  kg m sec 2 

= 1 [1000 g. 100 cm sec ]

–2
Sol. T  K m x  y g z (K  Dimensionless constant)
5 –2 5
= 10 [g cm sec ] = 10 dyne. Dimension of LHS = Dimension of RHS
0 0 1 x y –2 z x y+z –2z
Example–2 M L T = M L (LT ) = M L T
7
Prove 1 J = 10 egs CGS unit of energy. x=0 y+z=0 –2 z = 1
27 BASIC MATHEMATICS

1 1 Example - 3
x=0  z y
2 2 Young’s modulus of elasticity for a given material can be
worked out by

T  Km0 1/ 2 g 1/ 2  K
g
 cos   t x 
Y
y
 = angle t = time  = Torque
Here with dimensional analysis we can’t find K untill unless
any additional information is not given.  F/ A 
 = length Y young’s modulus  
 L / L 
MIXED EXAMPLES
Example - 4
Example - 1 Velocity sound gas depends on bulk modulus and density
Rate of heat transfer in radiation is of air. Establish the formula for velocity of sound.

Example - 5
dQ
  AT 4
dt Frequency of standing wave depends on length of wire ()
tension wire (T) and mass per unit length (). Establish
dQ  J  Relation for frequency.
  Rate of heat transfer
dt  sec  
Example - 6
A = Area 3
Flow rate of non ideal fluid (Q in m /sec) through a narrow
T = Temperature tube depends on radius of tube (r), coefficient of viscosity
 = Stefan’s constant.
 P 
Write dimensional formula of . () and pressure gradient   . Establish Relation for Q.
  
dQ / dt J/s Example - 7
  2 4
AT 4 mK
Displacement of particle from mean position in a wave motion
J ML T 2 2 is denoted by
  2 4
m 2 sK 4 L T y (x, t) = A sin  x  t   

   MT 34  Write the dimensional formula for  and A.

Example - 8
Example -2
If we consider universal constant of gravitation G, velocity
Write dimensional formula of D from given equation
of light C and plank’s constant h as a fundamental quantities
then write dimensional formula of mass, length and time.
 N  N1 
n  D  2 
 x 2  x1 

n = no. of particle per unit area.

N = Particles per unit volume.
x = Position of particles.
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 28

SIGNIFICANT FIGURES
When we measure a physical quantity from a measuring 1. All cyphers between 2 non-zero nos. will be significant.
instrument then we have to write the measurement in terms
of meaningful figure in the measured quantity. These Example - 1
meaning figures are called significant figures in the quantity.
10023 sig. figure  5
For example : Measuring length
00123 sig. figure  3
Instrument used = metre scale
2. All cyphers occuring on the left side of non zero are non-
Least count = 0.1 cm significant while those on its right side are significant.
 We can measure the length (cm) only uptil 1 place after
Example - 2
decimal.
Suppose length comes out to be 0.0
 . 300
 0.0
 230

   
non. sig significant non. sig significant
25 . 2 cm

 
  1.0230  all significant
surely partially
certain cetain
1.02300  all significant
Significant figure = Total certain figure + one partially certain 3. If we write a physical quant. without using decimal, then all
figure. the trailing cypers after a non-zero digit will be insignificant.
If written as 25.2  completely uncertain/meaningless. Example - 3
Suppose instrument used in verrier callipers of least count
= 0.01 12 000 100.0

25.2 only 2 sig. figures all significant

then length =  0  partially certain

completely 4. When a physical quantity is converted from 1 unit system
certain
to another then the significant figure in the quantity will
(Last digit it partially certain) remain unchanged.

Example - 4

Density of water  1 000 kg/m3

Diff. between accuracy and precision
significant figure
Rod
1 g/cm3
L0 = 25.5 cm
1 significant figure
Standard length

Suppose it is measured 2 times. Similarly  1 m 0.01 cm

1. With meter scale  25.4 cm  more accurate. 1 significant figure 1 significant figure

2. With vernier calliper  25.38 cm  more precise. Rules of doing mathematical operation with accounting
(1) is  accurate as it is closer to standard value. significant figures :
1. In multiplication or division the final result should be given
(2) is  precise because least count as (2)  0.01 and in no. of significant figure which were present in the original
(1)  0.1 least significant figure quantity.
Rule of counting significant figures 
29 BASIC MATHEMATICS

Example - 5 2. In addition or substraction the final result should be

expressed in terms of decimal place which were present in
a = 10.2 cm  S. F.  3 the least decimal place in original no.

a = 10.2 cm Example - 6

1 0.2 3 0
b = 2.0 cm 2.02
+ 14.5  result should last only uptil this decimal place.

S. F.  2  Result should have these much S.F.. 1 0. 2

2. 0
Area = a × b = 10.2 × 2.0 + 1 4. 5
2 6. 7
20.40
with accounting significant figure
4 S.F.

2 23.258 23.3
To make them 2 we will write it as  2.0 × 10 cm – 1.2 – 1.2
22.1
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 30

ERROR IN MEASUREMENT
Every measured quantity will have some uncertainity. This So Ammeter will always show current less than the original
uncertainity is called error in the measurement. current.
Example - 1 Random error : If error can be +ve or –ve both i.e. in any
direction then the error is called random error.
Measured value of a quantity = x
Example - 3
uncertainity = x  error in measurement
 absolute error in measurement Error due to least count of instrument, error due to
atmospheric fluctuations, human unbiased errors.

Remarks

(i) Relative/fractional error in measurement Error in the measurement occuring because of least count
of instument will either be equal to the least count or it may
x
 1
x be of least count.
2
(ii) Percentage error in the measurement
= Relative error × 100 Example - 4
x
  100 x = 25.4 cm
x
least count = 0.1 cm
Types of error in the measurement
error = ± 0.1 cm
Types of error in the measurement is broadly divided into 2 or = 0.05 cm
categories.
Propagation of error
(1) Systematic error
(2) Random error Every measured quantity from an instant will have error. If
we calculate another physical quantity by using measured
System error : If error in the measurement is unidirectional
quantity then this calculated quantity will also have error.
(either +ve or –ve) then that error is called systematic error.
Let a and b are measured quantities a and b are error in
Example - 2 the measured quantity.
0 error in the instrument, error due to the principle on which Let x is a calculated quantity (depends on a and b)
the instrument is based, human biased error. 1. If x = a + b
R
vvvvvv error x  a  b  valud if error is systematic

If Randome x   | a |  | b |  max possible error..

v v
I=— Similarly if x = a – b
R
R x = a – b  Systematic error.
vvvvvv
If random then, x   | a |  | b |
m n
A 2. If x = a × b m & n are number.
v I
n x = m na + n nb
RA Resistance in Ammeter
dx da db
V m n
Reading of Ammeter = –––––– x a b
R + RA
 31 BASIC MATHEMATICS

x a b Remember :
m m
x a b Rule 2 and Rule 3 will hold only when the magnitude is very
very less than the measured quantity.
 a b  a << a
x  x m  n   when error is systematic

absolute
 a b  b << b
error

Example - 5
If random then 
The sides of rectangle are (10.5 ± 0.2) cm and (5.2 ± 0.1) cm
 a b  Find
x   x  m n 
 a b  (i) perimeter of rectangle with error limit.
(ii) % error in the calculation of perimeter.
am (iii) Area of rectangle with error limit.
Similarly if  x n
b
(iv) % error in the calculation of area.
n x = m n a – n n b
Sol. a = 10.5 cm a = ± 0.2 cm
dx da db b = 5.2 cm b = ± 0.1 cm
 m n
x a b
(i) Perimeter (P)  31.4 ± 0.6 cm
x a b 0.6
m n 600
x a b (ii) % error in P   100   1.9%
31.4 314

 a b  (iii) Area = 54.60

x  x m  n  systematic
 a b 
 0.2 0.1 
x = ± 54.60°   
10.5 5.2 
 a b 
If random x   x  m a  n b  ± [1.04 + 1.05]
 
± 2.09
1 2
1 1 1 A = 54.60 ± 2.09 = (5.5 × 10 ± 2) cm
3. If   differentiating both sides
x a b
21.09 2090
(iv) % error in A   100   3.6%
dx da ab 54.60 546
 2  2  2
x a b
= 4%
dx da ab Example - 6
 
x 2 a 2 b2
In an experimental determining the density  of a
rectangular block of metal the dimension of the block are
x a b
  measured by vernier callipers having least count 0.01 cm
x 2 a 2 b2
and mass is measured with a beam balance of least count
0.1 gm. The error in the measurement is equivalent to least
 a b  count of measuring instrument. The measured values are :
x  x 2   
 a b  Systematic
mass  39.3 gm length = 5.12 cm width = 2.56 cm
thickness = 0.37 cm
 a
2 b 
x   x    Find the maximum possible error in determing the density
 a b  Random of block.
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 32

M M Example - 6
Sol.     M  x 1  y 1  z 1
V xyz
The error in the measurement of radius of sphere is ± 0.5%
then what is the % error in the measurement of volume of
 M x y z  the sphere.
       
 M x y z 
Sol. Let radius = r

39.3 3 4 3
 8.1 g/cm v r
5.12  2.56  0.37 3

 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.01  4

=  8.1       nV  n   nr 3
 39.3 5.12 2.56 0.37  3

= ± 0.286 V r
  03
= ± 0.3 V r
3
 = (8.1 ± 0.3) g/cm = V ± 3 (0.5 %)
= ± 1.5%
 33 BASIC MATHEMATICS

EXERCISE - 1 : UNIT & DIMENSION, ERROR AND SIGNIFICANT FIGURES

Unit and Dimension

1. The unit of momentum is hc Gc
(a) (b)
(a) N s (b) Ns –1 G h
(c) N m (d) N m –1
In the relation y = r sin (  t – kx), the dimensions of
hG
2.  /k (c) (d) hGc
are c
(a) [M0L0T0] (b) [M0L1T–1]
a
(c) [M0L0T1] (d) [M0L1T0] 8. In the equation Snth = u + (2n – 1), the letters have their
2
3. If the acceleration due to gravity is 10 ms–2 and the units of
usual meanings. The dimensional formula of Snth is
length and time are changed in kilometre and hour
respectively, the numerical value of acceleration is (a) [ML0T] (b) [ML–1T–1]

(a) 360000 (b) 72000 (c) [M0LT–1] (d) [M0LT0]

(c) 36000 (d) 129600 9. If L denotes the inductance of an inductor through which
4. The value of universal gas constant is R = 8.3 J/K – mol. a currect I is flowing, then the dimensional formula of LI2 is
The value of R in atmosphere litre per kelvin mol (a) [MLT–2]
(a) 8.12 (b) 0.00812 (b) [ML2T–2]
(c) 81.2 (d) 0.0812 (c) [M2L2T–2]
5. The expression for centripetal force depends upon mass
(d) not expressible in terms of M. L. T.
of body, speed of the body and the radius of circular path.
Find the expression for centripetal force A
10. If v   Bt 2  Ct 3 where v is velocity, t is time and A,
t
mv 2 mv 2 B and C are constants, then the dimensional formula of B
(a) F= (b) F 
2r 3 r is
(a) [M0LT0] (b) [ML0T0]
2 2 2
mv mv (c) [M0L0T] (d) [M0LT–3]
(c) F (d) F
r2 2r
11. The equation of alternating current is I = I0e–t/CR, where t is
6. The damping force of an oscillating particle us observed time, C is capacitance and R is resistance of coil, then the
to be proportional to velocity. The constant of dimensions of C R is
proportionality can be measured in (a) [MLT–1] (b) [M0LT]
(a) kg s –1 (b) kg s
(c) [M0L0T] (d) None of these
–1 –1 –1
(c) kg m s (d) kg m s
12. Taking frequency f, velocity v and density p to be the
7. Consider a new system of units in which c (speed of light fundamental quantities, then the dimensional formula for
in vacuum), h (Planck’s constant) and G (gravitational momentum will be
constant) are taken as fundamental units. Which of the
(a) [ pv4 f –3] (b) [ pv3 f –1]
following would correctly represent mass in this new
system ? (c) [ pv f 2] (d) [ p2v2 f 2]
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 34

13. If p represents radiation pressure, C represents speed of 20. If I is the moment of inertia and the angular velocity,
light and q represents radiation energy striking a unit area what is the dimensional formula of rotational kinetic energy
pre second, then non–zero integers a, b and c are such that 1 
paqbCc is dimensionless, then I 
2
(a) a = 1, b = 1, c = – 1 (b) a = 1, b = –1, c = 1
(a) [ML2T–1] (b) [M2L–1T–2]
(c) a = –1, b = 1, c = 1 (d) a = 1, b = 1, c = 1
(c) [ML2T–2] (d) [M2L–1T–2]
14. In the equation y = a sin(t + kx), the dimensional formula
21. A gas bubble from an explosion under water oscillates with
of  is
a time period T, depends upon static pressure p, density of
(a) [M0L0T–1] (b) [M0LT–1] water p and the total energy of explosion E. Find the
(c) [ML0T0] (d) [M0L–1T0] epression for the time period T. (where, k is a dimensionless
constant)
15. The expression [ML–1T–1] represents
(a) T = kp–5/6p1/2E1/3 (b) T = kp–4/7p1/2E1/3
(a) momentum (b) force
(c) pressure (d) coefficient of viscosity (c) T = kp–5/6p1/2E1/2 (d)T = kp–4/7p1/3E1/2

16. The maximum static friction on a body is F =  Here, 22. The magnetic force on a point moving charge is
N = normal reaction force on the body = coefiicient of   
F  q(v  B).
static friction.
Here, q = electric charge
The dimensions of  are

(a) [MLT–2] (b) [M0L0T0] v = velocity of the point charge
(c) Dimensionless (d) None of these

B = magnetic field
17. If F = 6arbvc Dimension of B is
where F = viscous force (a) [MLT–1A] (b) [MLT–2A–1]
 = coeffficient of viscosity (c) [MT–2A–1] (d) None of these
r = radius of spherical body 23. The velocity v of water waves may depend on their
v = terminal velocity of the body wavelenght (), the density of water (p) and the acceleration
due to gravity(g). The method of dimensions gives the
Find the values of a, b and c.
relation between these quantities as
(a) a = 1, b = 2,c = 1 (b) a = 1, b = 1,c = 1
(a) v2 –1 p–1 (b) v2  g 
(c) a = 2, b = 1,c = 1 (d) a = 2, b = 2,c = 2
(c) v2 g p (d) g–1  
F 24. If E, m, J and G represent energy, mass, angular momentum
18. The surface tension is T = , then the dimensions of and gravitational constant respectively, then the

dimensional formula of EJ2/m5G2 is
surface tension are
(a) [MLT–2] (b) [M0L0T]
(a) [MLT–2] (b) [MT–2]
(c) [M0L2T0] (d) dimensionless
(c) [M0L0T0] (d) None of these
25. The wavelength associated with a moving particle depends
1 3 upon power p of its mass m, qth power of its velocity v and
19. If S = ft ,f has the dimensions of rth power of Planck’s constant h. Then the correct set of
3
values of p, q and r is
(a) [M0L–1T3] (b) [MLT–3]
(a) p = 1, q = –1, r = 1 (b) p = 1, q = 1, r = 1
(c) [M0L1T–3] (d) [M0L–1T–3] (c) p = –1, q = –1, r = –1 (d) p = –1, q = –1, r = 1
 35 BASIC MATHEMATICS

26. The time dependence of a physical quantity P is given by

2
P = P0e–t where  is a constant and t is time. Then constnat ky
32. What is the unit of k in the relation U = where
 is y  a2
2

–2
(a) Dimensionless (b) Dimension of T
U represents the potential energy, y represents the
2
(c) Dimensions of P (d) Dimension of T displacement and a represents the maximum displacement
27. In the equation X = 3YZ2 , X and Z have dimensions of ie, amplitude?
capacitance and magnetic induction respectively. In MKSQ
(a) m s–1 (b) m s
system, the dimensional formula of Y is
(c) J m (d) J s–1
(a) [M–3L–2T–2Q–4] (b) [ML–2]
33. The velocity v (in cms–1) of a particle is given in terms of
(c) [M–3L–2Q4T8] (d) [M–3L–2Q4T4]
time t (in sec) by the equation.
n2  n1
28. The number of particles given by n = – D are b . The dimensions of a, b and c are
x2  x1 v  at 
t c
crossing a unit area perpendicular to x–axis in unit time,
a b c
where n1 and n2 are the number of particles per unit volume
2
for the values x1 and x2 of x respectively. Then the (a) [L ] [T] [LT2]
dimensional formula of diffusion constant D is (b) [LT2] [LT] [L]
(a) [M0LT0] (b) [M0L2T–4] (c) [LT–2] [L] [T]
(c) [M0LT–3] (d) [M0L2T–1] (d) [L] [LT] [T2]
29. Given X = (Gh / c3)1/2, where G, h and c are gravitational Error
constant, Planck’s cosntant and the velocity of light 34. If x = a – b, the the maximum percentage error in the
respectively. Dimensions of X are the same as those of measurement of x will be
(a) mass (b) time
 a  b 
(c) lenght (d) acceleration (a)    100%
 a b 
30. The dimensional formula of coefficient of permittivity for

1 q1q2  a b 
free space (0) in the equation F = , where (b)     100%
4 0 r2  a b 
symbols have their usual meanings, is
 a b 
(a) [ML3A–2T–4] (b) [M–1L–3T4A2] (c)     100%
 a a a b 
(c) [M–1L–3A–2T–4] (d) [ML3A2T–4]
31. The thrust developed by a rocket–motor is given by
 a b 
F = mv + A(p1 – p2), where m is the mass of the gas ejected (d)     100%
per unit time, v is velocity of the gas, A is area of cross–  a a a b 
section of the nozzle, p1, p2 are the pressures of the exhaust 35. If X = A×B and X, A and B are maximum absolute
gas and surrounding atmosphere. The formula is errors in X, A and B respectively, then the maximum relative
dimensionally eirror in X is given by
(a) Correct
(a) X = A + B (b) X = A – B
(b) Wrong
(c) Sometimes wrong, sometimes correct X A B X A B
(c)   (d)  
(d) Data is not adequate
X A B X A B
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 36

36. The percentage errors in the measurement of mass and 44. The internal and external diameters of a hollow cylinder are
speed are 2% and 3% respectively. How much will be the measured with the help of a vernier callipers. Their values
mzximum error in the estimate of kinetic energy obtained are 4.23± 0.01 cm and 3.87±0.01 cm respectively. The
by measuring mass and speed? thickness of the wall of the cylinder is
(a) 11% (b) 8% (a) 0.36± 0.02cm (b) 0.18± 0.02cm
(c) 5% (d) 1% (c) 0.36± 0.01cm (d) 0.18± 0.01cm
37. Error in the measurement of radius of sphere is 2%. The 45. In an experiment, we measure quantities a, b and c. Then x
error in the measurement of volume is
(a) 1% (b) 5% ab2
is calculated from the formula, x = . The percentage
(c) 3% (d) 6% c3
38. If there is a positve error of 50% in the measurement of errors in a, b, c are ± 1%, ± 3%, and ± 2% respectively. The
speed of a body, then the error in the measurement of kinetic percentage error in x can be
energy is (a) ±1% (b) ±4%
(a) 25% (b) 50% (c) 7% (d) ±13%
(c) 100% (d) 125% 46. The pressure on a square plate is measured by measuring
39. The radius of the sphere is (4.3 ± 0.1)cm. The percentage the force on the plate and the lenght of the sides of the
error in its volume is
F
plate by using the formula p = . If the maximum errors
0.1 0.1100 2
(a) × 100 (b) 3 ×
4.3 4.3 in the measurement of force and length are 4% and 2%
respectively, then the maximum error in the measurement
1 0.1100 1 0.1100
(c)  (d)  of pressure is
3 4.3 3 4.3
(a) 1% (b) 2%
40. A public park, in the form of a square, has an area of
(100±0.2) m2. The side of park is (c) 8% (d) 10%

(a) (10 ± 0.01) m (b) (10 ± 0.1) m 47. Given, potential difference V = (8±0.5) volt and currect I =
(2±0.2)A. the value of resistance R is
(c) (10.0 ± 0.1) m (d)(10.0 ± 0.2) m
(a) 4 ± 16.25% (b) 4 ± 6.25%
41. The specific resistance  of a circular wire of radius r,
(c) 4 ± 10% (d) 4 ± 8%
 r2R
resistance R and lenght  is given by p = .
 1 1 1
  where
48. The focal length of a mirror is given by
Given, r = (0.24 ± 0.02) cm, R = (30 ± 1)  and  = (4.80 ± f u v
0.01) cm. The percentage error in p is nearly
u and v represent object and image distances respectively.
(a) 7% (b) 9% The maximum relative error in f is
(c) 13% (d) 20%
42. If f = x2 , then the relative error in f is
f u v
(a)  
f u v
2 x (x) 2
(a) (b)
x x f 1 1
(b)  
x f u / u v / v
(c) (d) ( x ) 2
x
f u v  (u  v)
43. A physical quantity is represented by X = MaLbT–c . If (c)   
percentage errors in the measurements of M, L and T are f u v uv
and respectively, then total percentage error is
f u v u v
(a) (a + b – c)% (b) (a + b + c)%    
(d)
(c) (a – b – c)% (d) 0%
f u v uv uv
 37 BASIC MATHEMATICS

49. The lenght , breadth b and thickness t of a block are Representation of Vectors
measured with the help of a metre scale. Given l = 15.12 ± 57. A vector is not changed if
0.01 cm, b = 10.15 ± 0.01 cm, t = 5.28 ± 0.01cm.
(a) it is rotated through an arbitrary angle
The percentage error in volume is
(b) it is multipled by an arbitrary scalar
(a) 0.68% (b) 0.28%
(c) it is cross multiplied by a unit vector
(c) 0.37% (d) 0.48%
(d) it is slid parallel to itself.
50. A wire has a mass (0.3 ± 0.003)g, radius (0.5 + 0.005)mm
and length (6 ±0.06) cm. The maximum precentage error in Representation of Vectors in ˆi, ˆj, kˆ
the measurement of its density is
58. What is the numerical value of vector 3iˆ  4jˆ  5kˆ ?
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) 4 (a) 3 2 (b) 5 2

51. A student measures the time period of 100 oscillations of

(c) 7 2 (d) 9 2
a simple pendulum four times. The data set is 90 s, 91s, 95
s and 92 s. If the minimum division in the measuring clock 59. The x and y components of a force are 2 N and –3N. The
is 1 s, then the reported mean time should be : force is

(a) 92 ± 5.0 s (b) 92 ± 1.8 s (a) 2iˆ  3jˆ (b) 2iˆ  3jˆ
(c) 92 ± 3 s (d) 92 ± 2 s
Significant Figures (c) 2iˆ  3jˆ (d) 3iˆ  2ˆj

52. The value of 0.99 – 0.989 is Component of Vectors in standard and general directions
–1
(a) 0.001 (b) 0.010 × 10 60. One of the rectangular components of a velocity of 60 kmh
–1

–1
(c) 0.01 × 10–1 (d) 0.1 ×10–3 is 30 km h . The other rectangular component is
53. If 3.8 × 10–6 is added to 4.32 × 10–5 giving due regard to –1
(a) 30 km h (b) 30 3 Km h 1
significant figures, then the result will be
(a) 4.58 × 10–5 (b) 4.7 × 10–5
(c) 30 2 km h 1 (d) zero
–5
(c) 4.5 × 10 (d) None of these
61. A force is inclined at 60° to the horizontal. If its rectangular
54. A cube has a side of length 1.2 × 10–2 m. Calculate its volume
component in the horizontal direction is 50 N, then
(a) 1.7 × 10–6 m3 (b) 1.73 × 10–6 m3
magnitude of the force in the vertical direction is
(c) 1.70 × 10–6 m3 (d) 1.732 × 10–6 m3
(a) 25 N (b) 75 N

VECTOR (c) 87 N (d) 100 N

Definition of Vector Unit Vectors

55. Which one of the following is a scalar quantity ? 62. If 0.5iˆ  0.8 ˆj  ckˆ is a unit vector, then the value of c is
(a) Displacement (b) Electric field
(a) 0.11 (b) 0.22
(c) Acceleration (d) Work
56. Which one of the following is not the vector quantity ? (c) 0.33 (d) 0.89
(a) Torque (b) Displacement
(c) Velocity (d) Speed
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 38

69. Two forces, each equal to F, act as shown in figure. Their

63. What is the unit vector along ˆi  ˆj ?
resultant is

ˆi  ˆj
(a)
2
(b)  
2 ˆi  ˆj

(c) ˆi  ˆj (d) k̂

Addition of Vectors
 F
64. Two forces, each equal to P , act at right angles. Their (a) (b) F
2
effect may be neutralised by a third force acting along their
bisector in the opposite direction with a magnitude of (c) 3F (d) 5F
  
P 70. If A  B  C and A  3, B  3 and C = 3, then the angle
(a) P (b)
2  
between A and B is
P
(c) (d) 2P (a) 0° (b) 30°
2
(c) 60° (d) 90°
 
65. Two forces F1 and F2 are acting at right angles to each other.. 71. If the magnitude of the sum of the two vectors is equal to
Then their resultant is the difference of their magnitudes, then the angle between
vectors is
2 2
(a) F1  F2 (b) F F
1 2
(a) 0° (b) 45°

F1  F2 (c) 90° (d) 180°

(c) F12  F22 (d)
2 72. The simple sum of two co-initial vectors is 16 units. Their
    vectors sum is 8 units. The resultant of the vectors is
66. Given R  A  B and R = A = B. The angle between A and
perpendicular to the smaller vector. The magnitudes of the

B is two vectors are :
(a) 60° (b) 90° (a) 2 units and 14 units (b) 4 units and 12 units
(c) 120° (d) 180° (c) 6 units and 10 units (d) 8 units and 8 units
67. The resultant of two forces, each P, acting at an angle  is  
73. If the resultant of two forces A  B   
and A  B is 
 
(a) 2 P sin (b) 2 P cos
2 2 A 2  B2 , then the angle between these forces is

(c) 2 P cos  (d) P 2

cos 1
 

 A 2  B2   cos 1


 A 2  B2  
(a) (b)
68. The resultant of two vectors of magnitudes 2A and 2A  A  B2


  
 A   B2  
acting at an angle  is 10 A. The correct value of  is :

cos 1


A 2  B2 
 cos 1


 2 A   B2  
(a) 30° (b) 45° (c)

 2 A   B2   (d)  A 2  B2 
   
(c) 60° (d) 90°
 39 BASIC MATHEMATICS

        
74. If the resultant of A and B makes angle  with A and  81. If A and B are two vectors such that A  B  A  B

with B then  
the angle between vectors A and B is :
(a)  always (b)  , if A < B
(a) 0° (b) 60°
(c) , if A > B (d) , if A = B
75. The resultant of two forces at right angle is 5 N. When the (c) 90° (d) 120°

angle between them is 120°, the resultant is 13 . Then the     

82. Two vectors A and B are such that A  B  C and
force are 2 2 2
A +B =C .
(a) 12 N, 13 N (b) 20 N, 5 N  
If  is the angle between positive direction of A and B
(c) 3 N, 4 N (d) 40 N, 15 N then the correct statement is

76. If the sum of the two unit vectors is also a unit vector, then 2
magnitude of their difference is (a)  =  (b)  
3
(a) 2 (b) 3

(c) (d) (c)  = 0 (d)  
4 7 2
     
77. Given that A  B  C  0 . Out of three vectors, two are equal 83. Given that P = 12, Q = 5 and R = 13 also P  Q  R, then the
in magnitude and the magnitude of third vector 2 times  
angle between P and Q will be
that of either of the two having equal magnitude. Then the
angles between vectors are given by : (a)  (b) /2
(a) 45°, 45°, 90° (b) 90°, 135°, 135° (c) zero (d) /4
(c) 30°, 60°, 90° (d) 45°, 60°, 90°    
84. The angle between P  Q and P  Q will be
78. The sum of the magnitudes of two forces acting at a point is
16 N. The resultant of these forces is perpendicular to the (a) 90°
smaller force has a magnitude of 8 N. If the smaller force is (b) between 0° and 180°
magnitude x, then the value of x is
(c) 180° only
(a) 2 N (b) 4 N
(d) None of these
(c) 6 N (d) 7 N
 85. Two vectors of equal magnitude have a resultant equal to

79. Two vectors a and b are at an angle of 60° with each other.. either of them, then the angle between them will be
 
Their resultant makes an angle of 45° with a . If | b | = 2 unit, (a) 30° (b) 120°
 (c) 60° (d) 45°
then | a | is
  
(a) 3 (b) 86. Given that P  Q  R  0. Two out of the three vectors are
3 1
equal in magnitude. The magnitude of the third vector is
(c) 3 1 (d) 3/2
2 times that of the other two. Which of the following
80. Two equal forces (F each) act a point inclined to each other
can be the angles between these vectors ?
at an angle of 120°. The magnitude of their resultant is
(a) F/2 (b) F/4 (a) 90°, 135°, 135° (b) 45°, 45°, 90°

(c) F (s) 2F (c) 30°, 60°, 90° (d) 45°, 90°, 135°
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 40

93. A small sphere is hung by a string fixed to a wall. The

Addition in terms of ˆi, ˆj, kˆ
sphere is pushed away from the wall by a stick. The force
   acting on the sphere are shown in figure. Which of the
87. Given A  ˆi  2jˆ  3kˆ . When a vector B is added to A , we
following statements is wrong ?

get a unit vector along X–axis. Then, B is

(a)  2jˆ  3kˆ (b) ˆi  2ˆj

(c) ˆi  3kˆ (d) 2ˆj  3kˆ


88. The magnitude of the X and Y components of A are 7 and
    
6. Also the magnitudes of X and Y components of A  B (a) P = W tan  (b) T  P  W  0

are 11 and 9 resepectively. What is the magnitude of B ?
(c) T 2  P 2  W 2 (d) T = P + W
(a) 5 (b) 6

(c) 8 (d) 9 94. The X and Y components of vector A have numerical
 
  
89. If the resultant of the vectors ˆi  2ˆj  kˆ , ˆi  ˆj  2kˆ and
values 6 and 6 respectively and that of A  B have  

  numerical values 10 and 9. What is the numerical value of B ?
C is a unit vector along the y-direction, then C is
(a) 2 (b) 3
(a) 2iˆ  kˆ (b) 2iˆ  kˆ (c) 4 (d) 5

(c) 2iˆ  kˆ (d) 2iˆ  kˆ 95. There are two forces each of magnitude 10 units. One
inclined at an anlge of 30° and the other at an angle of 135°
90. What vector must be added to the sum of two vectors
to the positive direction of x-axis. The x and y components
2iˆ  ˆj  3kˆ and 3iˆ  2ˆj  2kˆ so that the resultant is a unit of the resultant are respectively.
vector along Z-axis
(a) 1.59 ˆi and 12.07 ˆj (b) 10 ˆi and 10 ˆj
(a) 5iˆ  kˆ (b)  5 ˆi  3 ˆj
(c) 1.59 ˆi (d) 15.9 ˆi and 12.07 ˆj
(c) 3ˆj  5kˆ (d)  3ˆj  2kˆ
96. A man 80 kg is supported by two cables as shown in the
91. Following forces start acting on a particle at rest at the origin figure. Then the ratio of tensions T1 and T2 is

of the co-ordinate system simultaneously F1  5iˆ  5jˆ  5kˆ ,
  
F2  2iˆ  8jˆ  6kˆ , F3  6iˆ  4ˆj  7kˆ , F4  ˆi  3jˆ  2kˆ .
The particle will move
(a) in x–y plane (b) in y–z plane
(c) in x–z plane (d) along x–axis
92. A boy is hanging from a horizontal branch of a tree. The
tension in the arms will be maximum when the angle (from
the following) between the arms is (a) 1 : 1 (b) 1: 3
(a) 0° (b) 60°
(c) 3 :1 (d) 1 : 3
(c) 90° (d) 120°
 41 BASIC MATHEMATICS

97. Three forces of magnitudes 6 N, 6 N and 102. A particle undergoes three successive displacements given by
72 N act at a
  
corner of a cube along three sides as shown in figure. S1  2 m north–east, S2  2 m due south and S3  4 m,
Resultant of these forces is
30° north of west, then magnitude of net displacement is :

(a) 14  4 3 (b) 14  4 3

(c) 14 (d) none of these

Subtraction of Vectors
103. In a two dimensional motion of a particle, the particle moves

from point A, position vector r1 to point B, position vector

r2 . If the magnitudes of these vectors are respectively, r1 =
(a) 12 N along OB (b) 18 N along OA 3 and r2 = 4 and the angles they make with the x-axis are 1 =
75° and 15°, respectively, then find the magnitude of the
(c) 18 N along OC (d) 12 N along OE displacement vector
 
98. A vector A when added to the vector B  3iˆ  4ˆj yields a
resultant vector that is in the positive y direction and has a
 
magnitude equal to that of B . Find the magnitude of A .

(a) 10 (b) 10

(c) 5 (d) 15 (a) 15 (b) 13

 
99. The resultant of two vectors A and B is perpendicular to (c) 17 (d) 15
 104. A car travelling north at 20 m/s turns and then travels
the vector A and its magnitude is equal to half of the
   south at 20 m/s. The change in its velocity is
magnitude of vector B . Then the angle between A and B (a) zero (b) 40 m/s north
is
(c) 40 m/s south (d) 20 m/s north
(a) 30° (b) 45°  
105. If vectors A and B have an angle  between them, then
(c) 150° (d) 120°
ˆ B
value of | A ˆ | will be :
100. The magnitude of resultant of three vectors of magnitude 1,
2 and 3 whose directions are those of the sides of an  
equilateral triangle taken in order is : (a) 2 cos (b) 2 tan
2 2
(a) zero (b) 2 2 unit 
(c) 2sin (d) none of these
2
(c) 4 3 units (d) 3 unit
101. Unit vector parallel to the resultant of vectors
106. A particle’s velocity changes from 2 ˆi  3 ˆj m/s to  
 
A  4 ˆi  3 ˆj and B  8 ˆi  8 ˆj will be  3iˆ  2 ˆj m/s in 2 s. The acceleration in m/s is : 2

(a)
24 ˆi  5 ˆj
(b)
12iˆ  5 ˆj

(a)  ˆi  5 ˆj  (b)
 ˆi  5 ˆj
13 13 2

(c)
6iˆ  5 ˆj
(d) None of these (c) zero (d)
 ˆi  5 ˆj
13 2
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 42

Dot Product  
114. If A1 and A 2 are two non-collinear unit vectors and if
 
107. If P  4iˆ  2ˆj  6kˆ and Q  ˆi  2jˆ  3kˆ , then the angle      
 

| A1  A 2 | 3 , then the value of A1  A 2 . 2A1  A 2 
which P  Q makes with x-axis is is
(a) 1 (b) 1/2
 3 
1  4 
1
(a) cos   (b) cos   (c) 3/2 (d) 2
 50   50 

115. Consider a vector F  4iˆ  3jˆ . Another vector that is
1  5  1  12  
(c) cos   (d) cos   perpendicular to F is
 50   50 

  (a) 4iˆ  3jˆ (b) 6ˆj

108. Given P  3jˆ  4kˆ and Q  2jˆ  5kˆ . The magnitude of the
scalar product of these vector is (c) 7ˆj (d) 3iˆ  4ˆj
(a) 20 (b) 23
Dot Product (Angle between Vectros)
(c) 26 (d) 5 33
116. The angle between the z–axis and the vector ˆi  ˆj  2 kˆ is
   
109. If P  2iˆ  3jˆ  kˆ and Q  3iˆ  2ˆj , then P  Q is (a) 30° (b) 45°
(a) zero (b) 6 (c) 60° (d) 90°
(c) 12 (d) 15  
117. If A  2iˆ  3jˆ  4kˆ and B  4iˆ  3jˆ  2kˆ , then angle
   
110. If A  B = AB, then the angle between A and B is  
between A and B is
(a) 0° (b) 45° –1 –1
(a) sin (25/29) (b) sin (29/25)
(c) 90° (d) 180° –1 –1
(c) cos (25/29) (d) cos (29/25)

 
111. A force of 10iˆ  3jˆ  6kˆ N acts on a body of mass 100 g
118. What is the angle between  ˆi  2ˆj  2kˆ  and î
   
and displaces it from 6iˆ  5jˆ  3kˆ m to 10iˆ  2ˆj  7kˆ m. (a) 0° (b) /6
The work done is (c) /3 (d) None of these
(a) 21 J (b) 121 J 
119. For what value of a, A  2iˆ  ajˆ  kˆ will be perpendicular to
(c) 361 J (d) 1000 J

 B  4iˆ  2ˆj  kˆ
112. A force F  2iˆ  2ˆj N displace a particle through
  (a) 4 (b) zero
S  2iˆ  2kˆ m in 16 s. The power developed by F is
(c) 3.5 (d) 1
–1 –1
(a) 0.25 J s (b) 25 J s
120. The vector sum of two forces is perpendicular to their
–1 –1
(c) 225 J s (d) 450 J s vector differences. In that case, the forces
 
113. If A  B , then which of the following is not correct (a) are not equal to each other in magnitude
(b) cannot be predicted
ˆ B
(a) A ˆ ˆ B
(b) A ˆ  AB
(c) are equal to each other
 
(c) | A |  | B | (d) AB ˆ
ˆ || BA (d) are equal to each other in magnitude
 43 BASIC MATHEMATICS

Dot Product (Component of one on other)      

129. If A  B = 0 and A  B  1 , then A and B are
 
121. Projection of P on Q is (a) perpendicular unit vectors
 
ˆ
(a) P  Q (b) P̂  Q (b) parallel unit vectors
   (c) parallel
ˆ
(c) P  Q (d) P  Q
(d) perpendicular

122. The component of vector A  a x ˆi  a y ˆj  a z kˆ along the 130. The magnitude of the vectors product of two vectors 3
times their scalar product. The angle between the two vectors
 
direction of ˆi  ˆj is
is
(a) (ax – ay + az) (b) (ax + ay) (a) 90° (b) 60°
(c) (ax – ay)/ 2 (d) (ax – ay + az) (c) 45° (d) 30°
 
Cross Product 131. A vector A points vertically upwards and B point towards
   
ˆ B
123. Given  is the angle between A and B . Then | A ˆ | is North. The vector product A  B is
equal to (a) zero
(a) sin  (b) cos  (b) along East
(c) tan  (d) cot  (c) along West
    (d) vectically downwards
124. If P  Q = 0, then | P  Q | is
    
  132. Three vectors A, B and C satisfy the relation A  B  0
(a) | P | |Q | (b) zero    
and A  C  0 . If B and C are not lying in the same line,
(c) 1 (d) PQ 
then A is parallel to
  
125. Given c  a  b . The angle which a makes with c is 
(a) B

(b) C
(a) 0° (b) 45°    
(c) B  C (d) B  C
(c) 90° (d) 180°
  133. If the magnitudes of scalar and vector products of two
126. The magnitudes of the two vectors a and b are a and b
vectors are 6 and 6 3 respectively, then the angle between
 
respectively. The vector product a and b cannot be two vectors is
(a) 15° (b) 30°
(a) equal to zero (b) less than ab
(c) 60° (d) 75°
(c) equal to ab (d) greater than ab
134. Given that A and B are greater than 1. The magnitude of
 
127. Given r  4ˆj and p  2iˆ  3jˆ  kˆ . The angular momentum is  
 
A  B can not be
(a) 4iˆ  8kˆ (b) 8iˆ  4kˆ (a) equal to AB (b) less than AB

(c) 8jˆ (d) 9kˆ (c) more than AB (d) equal to A/B
 
  135. If A  2iˆ  3jˆ  6kˆ and B  3iˆ  6ˆj  2kˆ then vector
128. Given A  4iˆ  6ˆj and B  2iˆ  3jˆ . Which of the following
 
is correct ? perpendicular to both A and B has magnitude k times that
    
(a) A  B  0 (b) A  B  24  
of 6 ˆi  2jˆ  3kˆ . That k is equal to
 (a) 1 (b) 4
|A| 1  
(c)   (d) A and B are anti-parallel (c) 7 (d) 9
|B| 2
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 44

 
136. A proton of velocity 3iˆ  2ˆj  10 ms enters a magnetic
5 1 142. The vectors 2iˆ  3jˆ  2kˆ , 5iˆ  ajˆ  kˆ and ˆi  2ˆj  3kˆ are
coplanar when a is
 
field 2iˆ  3kˆ T. If the specific charge is 9.6 × 10 C kg , the
7 –1
(a) –9 (b) 9
–2
acceleration of the proton in ms is (c) –18 (d) 18
143. The area of the parallelogram represented by the vectors,
 
(a) 6iˆ  9ˆj  4kˆ × 9.6 × 10
12
 
A  4iˆ  3jˆ and B  2iˆ  4ˆj as adjacent side is
 
(b) 6iˆ  9ˆj  4kˆ × 9.6 × 10
12
(a) 14 units (b) 7.5 units
(c) 10 units (d) 5 units
 
(c) 6iˆ  9ˆj  4kˆ × 9.6 × 10
12
 
144. If A and B denote the sides of a parallelogram and its area
 
(d) 6iˆ  9ˆj  4kˆ × 9.6 × 10
12
1  
is AB (A and B are the magnitude of A and B
  2
137. Angle between A and B is . What is the value of  
respectively), the angle between A and B is
  

A B A ?  (a) 30° (b) 60°
2 2
(a) A B cos  (b) A B sin  cos  (c) 45° (d) 120°
2
(c) A B sin  (d) zero      
145. Given, C  A  B and D  B  A . What is the angle
     
138. If A  B  B  A, then the angle between A and B is : between C and D ?
(a)  (b) /3 (a) 30° (b) 60°
(c) /2 (d) /4
(c) 90° (d) 180°
Cross Product (Properties)    
146. If A  B  B  A , then the angle between A and B is
139. The area of a parallelogram farmed from the vector
  (a)  (b) /3
A  ˆi  2ˆj  3kˆ and B  3iˆ  2jˆ  kˆ as adjacent side is
(c) /2 (d) /4
(a) 8 3 units (b) 64 units Miscellaneous
 
(c) 32 units (d) 4 6 units 147. The angle between A and B is . The value of the triple
  
 product A   B  A  is
140. A vector F1 is along the positive Y–axis. If its vector product
2
  (a) A B (b) zero
with another vector F2 is zero, then F2 could be 2 2
(c) A B sin  (d) A B cos 
(a) 4ˆj (b) ˆj  kˆ   
148. If vectors A and B are given by A  5iˆ  6ˆj  3kˆ and

(c) ˆj  kˆ (d) 4 ˆi B  6iˆ  2jˆ  6kˆ . Which is/are of the following correct ?
   
141. If the vectors A  2iˆ  4ˆj and B  5iˆ  pjˆ are parallel to (a) A and B are mutually perpendicular
    
each other, the magnitude of B is (b) Product of A  B is the same B  A
 
(a) 5 5 (b) 10 (c) The magnitude of A and B are equal

(c) 15 (d) 2 5  
(d) The magnitude of A  B is zero
 45 BASIC MATHEMATICS

149. Which of the following statements is/are correct  

150. Two vectors A and B are inclined to each other at an angle
(a) The magnitude of the vector 3iˆ  4ˆj is 5 . Which of the following is the unit vector perpendicular to
 
both A and B ?
(b) A force 3iˆ  4ˆj N acting on a particle cause a  
AB ˆ B
A ˆ
displacement 6ˆj . The work done by the force is 30N (a)   (b)
AB sin 
 
(c) If A and B represent two adacent sides of a  
AB ˆ B
A ˆ
  (c) (d)
parallelogram, then | A  B | give the area of that ABsin  ABcos 

parallelogram
(d) A force has magnitude 20 N. Its component in a direction
making an angle 60° with the force is 10 3 N.

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. Which of the following sets have different dimensions? 5. Two full turns of the circular scale of a screw gauge cover
(2005) a distance of 1 mm on its main scale. The total number of
(a) Pressure, young’s modulus, stress divisions on the circular scale is 50. Further, it is found
(b) Emf, potential difference, electric potential that the screw gauge has a zero error of –0.03 mm. While
measuring the diameter of a thin wire, a student notes the
(c) Heat, work done, energy
main scale reading of 3 mm and the number of circular
(d) Dipole moment, electric flux, electric field
scale divisions in the line with the main scale as 35. The
2. Out of the following pairs, which one does not have diameter of the wire is : (2008)
identical dimensions? (2005)
(a) 3.32 mm (b) 3.73 mm
(a) Angular momentum and Planck’s constant
(c) 3.67 mm (d) 3.38 mm
(b) Impulse and momentum
6. The dimensions of magnetic field in M, L, T and C
(c) Moment of inertia and moment of a force
(coulomb) is given as : (2008)
(d) Work and torque
(a) [MLT–1 C–1] (b) [ML2C–2]
3. Which of the following units denotes the dimensions
[ML2/Q2], where Q denotes the electric charges? (2006) (c) [ML–1C–1] (d) [ML–2C–1]
(a) Wbm–2 (b) henry (H) 7. In an experiment the angles are required to be measured
(c) Hm–2 (d) Weber (Wb) using an instrument. 29 division of the main scale exactly
coincide with the 30 division of the verneir scale. If the
4. A body of mass m = 3.513 kg is moving along the x-axis
with a speed of 5.00 ms–1. The magnitude of its momentum smallest division of the main scale is half-a-degree (=0.5°),
is recorded as : (2008) then the least count of the instrument is : (2009)

(a) 17.6 kg ms–1 (b) 17.565 mg ms–1 (a) one minute (b) half minute
(c) 17.56 kg ms–1 (d) 17.57 kg ms–1 (c) one degree (d) half degree
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 46

8. The respective number of significant figures for numbers 14. The current voltage relation of diode is given by I = (e100 V/
23.023, 0.0003 and 2.1×10–3 are : (2010) T
–1) mA, where the applied V is in volts and the temperature
(a) 5, 1, 2 (b) 5, 1, 5 T is in degree kelvin. If a student makes an error measuring
(c) 5, 5, 2 (d) 4, 2, 2 0.01V while measuring the current of 5 mA at 300 K,
9. A screw gauge gives the folliwng reading when used to what will be the error in the value of current in mA ?
measure the diameter of a wire. (2014)
Main scale reading : 0 mm (a) 0.2 mA (b) 0.02 mA
Circular scale reading : 52 divisions (c) 0.5 mA (d) 0.05 mA
Given that, 1 mm on main scale corresponds to 100 15. A student measures the time period of 100 oscillations of
divisions of the circular scale. a simple pendulum four times. The data set is 90s, 91s, 95s
The diamter of wire from the above data is : (2011) and 92s. If the minimum division in the measuring clock is
(a) 0.052 cm (b) 0.026 cm 1s, then the reported mean time should be : (2016)

(c) 0.005 cm (d) 0.52 cm (a) 92  5.0s (b) 92  1.8s

10. Resistance of a given wire is obtained by measuring the
(c) 92  3s (d) 92  2s
current flowing in it and the voltage difference applied
across it. If the percentage errors in the measurement of 16. A screw gauge with a pitch of 0.5 mm and a circular scale
the current and the voltage difference are 30% each, then with 50 divisions is used to measure the thickness of a
error in the vlaue of resistance of the wire is : (2012) thin sheet of Aluminium. Before starting the measurement,
(a) 6% (b) zero it is found that when the two jaws of the screw gauge are
brought in contact, the 45th division coincides with the
(c) 1% (d) 3%
main scale line and that the zero of the main scale is barely
11. A spectrometer gives the following reading when used to visible. What is the thickness of the sheet if the main
measure the angular of a prism. scale reading is 0.5mm and the 25th division coincides with
Main scale reading 58.5 degree. the main scale line? (2016)
Vernier scale reading 9 divsions (a) 0.80 mm (b) 0.70 mm
Given that, I division on main scale corresponds to 0.5 (c) 0.50 mm (d) 0.75 mm
degree. Total division on the vernier scale is 30 and match
17. The following observations were taken for determining
with 29 divisions of the main scale. The angular of the
surface tension T of water by capillary method :
prism from the above data is : (2012)
(a) 58.59° (b) 59.77° diameter of capillary, D  1.25  102 m .
(c) 58.65° (d) 59° rise of water, h  1.45  102 m .
12. Let [0] denotes the dimensional formula of the permittivity
of vacuum. If M = mass, L = length, T = time and A = Using g  9.80m/ s 2 and the simplified relation
electric current, then (2013)
(a) [0] = [M–1L–3T2A] (c) [0] = [M–1L–3T4A2] rhg
T 103 N/ m , the possible error in surface tension
(c) [0] = [M–2L2T–1A–2] (d) [0] = [M–1L2T–1A2] 2
is closest to : (2017)
13. A student measured the length of a rod and wrote it as
3.50 cm. Which instrument did he use to measure it : (2014) (a) 0.15% (b) 1.5%
(a) A meter scale (c) 2.4% (d) 10%
(b) A vernier calliper where the 10 division in vernier scale 18. The density of a material in the shape of a cube is
matches with 9 division in main scale and main scale has determined by measuring three sides of the cube and its
10 division in 1 cm mass. If the relative errors in measuring the mass and length
(c) A screw gauge having 100 divisions in the circular are respectively 1.5% amd 1% the maximum error in
scale and pitch as 1 mm determining the density is : (2018)
(d) A screw gauge havin 50 divisions in the circular scale (a) 4.5% (b) 6%
and pitch 1 mm (c) 2.5% (d) 3.5%
 47 BASIC MATHEMATICS

19. An experiment is performed to obtain the value of (c) 0.94  0.02 cm (d) 0.94  0.005 cm
acceleration due to gravity g by using a simple pendulum 25. Time (T), velocity (C) and angular momentum (h) are
of length L. In this experiment time for 100 oscillations is chosen as fundamental quantities instead of mass, length
measured by using a watch of 1 second least count and and time. In terms of these, the dimensions of mass would
the value is 90.0 seconds. The length L is measured by be : (2017 Online Set-1)
using a meter scale of least count 1 mm and the value is (a) [M] = [T–1 C–2 h] (b) [M] = [T–1 C2 h]
20.0 cm. The error in the determination of g would be: (c) [M] = [T–1 C–2 h–1] (d) [M] = [T C–2 h]
(2014 Online Set-1)
26. A physical quantity P is described by the relation
(a) 1.7 % (b) 2.7 %
(c) 4.4 % (d) 2.27 % P  a1/2 b2 c3 d 4
20. From the following combinations of physical constants If the relative errors in the measurement of a, b, c and d
(expressed through their usual symbols) the only respectively, are 2%, 1%, 3% and 5%, t the relative error in
combination, that would have the same value in different P will be : (2017 Online Set-2)
systems of units, is: (2014 Online Set-2)
(a) 8% (b) 12%
 O O G 2  O O h (c) 32% (d) 25%
(a) (b)
c2 he2 ce 2 G 27. In an experiment to determine the period of a simple
2 pendulum of length 1 m, it is attached to different spherical
e
(c) (me = mass of electron) bobs of radii r1 and r2. The two spherical bobs have uniform
2 O Gme 2
mass distribution. If the relative difference in the periods,
ch is found to be 5  104 s, the difference in radii, r1  r2 is
(d)
2 02
 best given by :    (r1 , r2 )  (2017 Online Set-2)
21. A vector A is rotated by a small angle  radians (<<1)
   (a) 1 cm (b) 0.05 cm
to get a new vector B. In that case B – A is :
(c) 0.1 cm (d) 0.01 cm
(2015 Online)
28. The relative error in the determination of the surface area
  
(a) A  (b) B   A of a sphere is  . Then the relative error in the determination
of its volume is : (2018 Online Set-1)
  2 
(c) A 1   (d) 0 3 
2  (a)  (b) 
 2 3
22. In the following ‘I’ refers to current and other symbols 5
have their usual meaning. Choose the option that (c)  (d) 
2
corresponds to the dimensions of electrical conductivity
29. The percentage errors in quantities P, Q, R and S are 0.5
: (2016 Online Set-1)
percent, 1 percent, 3 percent and 1.5 percent respectively
(a) ML”3 T”3 I2 (b) M”1 L3 T3 I
(c) M”1 L”3T3 I2 (d) M–1 L–3 T3 I P3Q 2
23. A, B, C and D are four different physical quantities having in the measurement of a physical quantity A = . The
RS
different dimensions. None of them is dimensionless. But we
know that the equation AD = C ln (BD) holds true. Then maximum percentage error in the value of A will be :
which of the combination is not a meaningful quantity ? (2018 Online Set-3)
(2016 Online Set-2) (a) 6.0 percent (b) 7.5 percent
(c) 8.5 percent (d) 6.5 percent
(A  C)  
(a) A 2  B2 C2 (b)
D 30.    
Let A = ˆi + ˆj and B = 2iˆ - ˆj . The magnitude of a
      
A C AD 2 coplanar vector C such that A.C = B.C = A.B, is given
(c) C (d) 
B BD C by: (2018 Online Set-3)
24. If the length of rod A is 3.25  0.01 cm and that of B is 4.19 10 5
 0.01 cm then the rod B is longer than rod A by : (a) (b)
9 9
(2016 Online Set-2)
(a) 0.94  0.00 cm (b) 0.94  0.01 cm 20 9
(c) (d)
9 12
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 48

EXERCISE - 3

CLACULUS QUESTIONS 1. y= x x
Differentiation
2. y = sin x + cos x
dy
Find of the given functions 3. y = sin x – 4 cos x
dx
n+2
1. y=x , where n is constant x n x n 1 cos x
3
4. y   where n is constant
2. y=x n n  2 n 1
–n
3. y = x , where n is constant
4. y=x
–4 x  n 2 1
5. y  2  x where n is constant and n  2
n xn
1
5. y = x n , where n is constant and n  0
e x x 3 sin x
1 6. y   where n is constant
6. y=x 2
n3 2 4

2 3 4

7. y=x 3 7. y  xn 1
 xn 1 where n is constant
3
8. y = ax , where a is a constant x 2  ax  b
8. y where a and b are constant
1 14 ab
9. y= x
2 2
9. y = x + e ax + e x where a is constant
10. y = ax a , where a is constant
10. y = sin 5x + cos 4x
x
11. y = ae , where a is constant n
11. y = e x + 4 + x 2  5e x where n is constant
12. y = b sin x , where b is constant
x
12. y = enx +sin  cos x 2 where n is constant
1 5
13. y = – cos x , where k is constant
k
2

14. y=x
n+2
+x
n–2
, where n is constant 13. y = ex  x 1

3 2 2
15. y = x – 6x + 1 14. y = sin (x + x + 1)
sin x
15. y=e
1
16. y = x 4 – 4  2x3
 x x  
2 n
x 16. y=e x n

 x where n, , ,  are constant

1 1
17. y=  17. y  sin  x 2  x 2  1 where  is constant
x x2
n n 1
18.
4
y = x + 7x + x – 5
3 2
18. y  ex  ex  e x where n is constant
4 x 3 2
19. y = x – e + sin x 19. y = 3x + 2x + 2
x 2
20. y = x + ae , where a is constant 20. y = 4x + ln x (ln x = loge x)
Chain Rule Maxima & Minima
Find the ‘x’ values at which following functions attain maxima &
dy minima
Find of the given functions 3 2
dx 1. f (x) = x – 6x + 9x – 8
 49 BASIC MATHEMATICS

d
3 45 1
2. f (x)   x 4  8x3  x 2  105
4 2 13. 
y   cos xdx, where k is constant
k
c
3
3. f (x) = 2x – 24 x + 107 in interval [1, 3]
3 2 5
4. f (x) = 2x – 3x – 12x + 5
x 
n2
14. y  x n 2 dx, where n is constant
1 1
5. f (x)  x 
x 1

x 
3
6. f (x) = x – 3x
3
15. y  6x 2  1 dx
Intergration 0

Find the given definite integral 1

x 
4
2 16. y  2x 3 dx
1. y  x n  2 dx where n is constant
 0

1 1
1 1 
2 17. 
y    2  dx
x x 
2. y  x 3 dx
 2

1 1

x 
4
2 18. y  7x 3  x 2  5 dx
3. y  x  n dx where n is constant
 0

1 b

x 
4
2 19. y  e x  sin x dx
4
4. y x 
1
dx a

  x  ae  dx , where a is constant
x
b 20. y
1
5. y x  n dx where n is constant and n  0 1

a Graphs :
4
1
Draw the graphs between ‘y’ and ‘x’ and compare :
6. y x 
3
2 dx 1. y = 2x and y = 3x
2. y = 3x – 1 and y = 3x + 1
2 3. y = –2x and y = – 3x
2
3
7. y x 
1
dx 4. x + y = 1 and x –2y = 2
5. x = 2y + 1 and x = –2y + 1
4 2 2
3
6. y = x and y = x – 2x + 1
8. 
y  ax dx where a is a constant
1
7. y = 2x + 2 and y = –2x + 2
8. y = 2x and y = 2x – 1
6
1 1 9. y = 2x + 3 and y = 4x + 6
9. y 2x
1
4 dx
10. y = x + 1 and 2y = 2x + 2

0 Differentiate the following functions with respect to x :

a
10. y 
1
ax dx where a is constant 1. sin (3x + 5) 2. tan x
2

d 3. sin (log x) 4. esin x

x
11. 
y  ae dx , where a is constant
c
5. e
tan x 2
6. sin (2x + 1)

 3 x
6 7. 2 x 8. 3e
12. y 

b sin xdx, where b is constant
3
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 50

2  2x x log x
9. 3x 10. 3 2 3x 2 sin x
21. log (3x + 2) – x log (2x –1) 22.
2 tan 3x 7  x2
11. (log sin x) 12. e
2 x
23. sin {log (2x + 3)} 24. e log sin 2x
cot x  sin x 
13. e 14. log  
 1  cos x  e x sin x –3x
25. 26. 3e log (1 + x)
(x 2  2)3
sin x
15. tan (e ) 16. log (x  x 2  1)

x2  2 x 2 (1  x 2 )3
x
e log x 27. 28.
17. 18. log (cosec x – cot x) cos x cos 2x
x2
2 2
29. log (3x + 2) – x log (2x –1) 30. cos (log x)
e 2x  e 2x x k 2 3
19. 20. x sin 2x + 5 + k + (tan x)
e 2x  e2x
 51 BASIC MATHEMATICS

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Objective Questions (Only one correct option) Codes :
1. A person measures the depth of a well by measuring the P Q R S
time interval between dripping a stone and receiving the (a) 3 1 2 4
sound of impact with the bottom of the well. The error in (b) 3 2 1 4
his measurement of time is T = 0.01s and he measures the (c) 4 2 1 3
depth of the well to be L = 20 m. Take the acceleration due (d) 4 1 2 3
to gravity g = 10 ms–2 and the velocity of sound is 300 ms–
 4 MLg 
L 5. In the determination of Young’s modulus  Y  
1
. Then the fractional error in the measurement, , is  d 2 
L
closet to: 2017 by using Searl’s method, a wire of length L = 2m and
diameter d = 0.5 mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an
(a) 1% (b) 5% extension l = 0.25 mm in the length of the wire is observed.
(c) 3% (d) 0.2% Quantities d and l are measured using a screw gauge and
2. During Searle’s experiment, zero of the vernier scale lies a micrometer, respectively. They have the same pitch of
between 3.20 × 10–2 m and 3.25 × 10–2 m of the main scale. 0.5 mm. The number of divisions on their circular scale is
The 20th division of the vernier scale exactly coincides 100. The contributions to the maximum probable error of
with one of the main scale divisions. When and additional the Y measurement is : (2012)
load of 2 kg is applied to the wire, the zero of the vernier (a) due to the errors in the measurement of d and l are the
scale still lies between 3.20×10–2 m and 3.25×10–2 m of the same.
main scale but not the 45th division of vernier scale (b) due to the error in the measurement of d is twice that
coincides with one of the main scale divisions. due to the error in the measurement of l
The length of the thin metallic wire is 2 m and its cross- (c) due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that
sectional area is 8×10–7 m2. The least count of the vernier due to the error in the measurement of d
scale is 1.0×10–5m. The maximum percentage error in the
Young’s modulus of the wire is: (2014) (d) due to the error in the measurement of d is four times
that due to the error in the measurement of d is four times
(a) 1 (b) 2 that due to the error in the measurement of l
(c) 4 (d) 8 6. To find the distance d over which a signal can be seen
3. The diameter of a cylinder is measured using a vernier clearly in foggy conditions, a railway engineer uses
callipers, with no zero error. It is found that the zero of the dimensional analysis and assumes that the distance
vernier scale lies between 5.10 cm and 5.15cm of the main depends on the mass density  of the fog, intensity
scale. The vernier scale has 50 division equivalent to 2.45 (power/area) S of the light from the signal and its frequency
cm. The 24th division of the vernier scale exactly coincides f. The engineer finds that d is proportional to S1/n. The
with one of the main scale divisions. The diameter of the value of n : (2011)
cylinder is: (2013) (a) 2 (c) 3
(a) 5.112 cm (b) 5.124 cm (c) 1 (d) 1
(c) 5.136 cm (d) 5.148 cm 7. The density of a solid ball is to be determined in an
4. Match the List I with List II and select the correct answer experiment. The diameter of the ball is measured with a
using the codes given below the lists: (2013) screw gauge, whose pitch is 0.5 mm and there are 50
List-I List-II divisions on the circular scale. The reading on the main
scale is 2.5 mm and that on the circular scale is 20 divisions.
(P) Boltzmann constant 1. [ML2T–1]
If the measured mass of the ball has a relative error of 2%,
(Q) Coefficient of viscosity 2. [ML–1T–1] the relative percentage error in the density is: (2011)
(R) Planck’s constant 3. [MLT–3K–1] (a) 0.9% (b) 2.4%
(S) Thermal conductivity 4. [ML2T–2K–1] (c) 3.1% (d) 4.2%
 BASIC MATHEMATICS 52

8. A vernier Callipers has 1mm marks on the main scale. It 11. A student performs an experiment for determination of
has 20 equal divisions on the vernier scale which match
 42  
with 16 mains scale divisions. For this vernier callipers, g   2  , where   1m, and he commits an error of
 T 
the least count is : (2010)  
(a) 0.02 mm (b) 0.05 mm  . For T he takes the time on n oscillations with the stop
(c) 0.1 mm (d) 0.2 mm watch of least count T and he commits a human error of
9. Student I, II and III perform an experiment for measuring 0.1 s. For which of the following data, the measurement of
the acceleration due to gravity (g) using a simple g will be most accurate? (2006)
pendulum. They use different lengths of the pendulum (a) L = 0.5, T = 0.1, n = 20
and/or record time for different number of oscillations. (b) L = 0.5, T = 0.1, n = 50
The observations are shown in the table.
(c) L = 0.5, T = 0.01, n = 20
Least count for length = 0.1 cm.
(d) L = 0.1, T = 0.05, n = 50
Least count for time = 0.1 s.
12. The circular scale of a screw gauge has 50 divisions and
Particular Length of Number of Total time Time
pitch of 0.5 mm. Find the diameter of sphere. Main scale
student the oscillations (n) for period
reading is 2. (2006)
pendulum (n) oscillations (s)
(cm) (s)
I 64.0 8 128.0 16.0
II 64.0 4 64.0 16.0
III 20.0 4 36.0 9.0
If EI, EII and EIII are the percentage errors in g, i.e.

 g 
  100  , for students I, II and III, respectively. (2008)
 g 

(a) EI = 0 (b) EI is minimum (a) 1.2 mm (b) 1.25 mm

(c) EI = EII (d) EII is maximum (c) 2.20 mm (d) 2.25 mm
10. A student performs an experiment to determine the Objective Questions (One or more correct option)
Young’s modulus of a wire, exactly 2 m long, by Searle’s
13. A length-scale () depends on the permittivity () of a
method. In a particular reading, the student measures the
extension in the length of the wire to be 0.8 mm with an dielectric material, Boltzmann constant (kB), the absolute
temperature (T), the number per unit volume (n) of certain
uncertainly of 0.005mm at a load of exactly 1.0 kg. The
charged particles, and the charge (q) carried by each of
student also measures the diamter of the wire to be 0.4 mm
the particles. Which of the following expression(s) for 
with an uncertainty of  0.01mm . Take, g = 9.8 ms–2
is(are) dimensionally correct? (2016)
(exact). The Young’s modulus obtained from the reading
is : (2007)  nq 2   k T 
(b)    nq 2 
B
(a)    k T 
(a) (2  0.3) × 1011 Nm–2  B   

(b) (2  0.2) × 1011 Nm–2

   
(c) (2  0.1) × 1011 Nm–2  q2   q2 
  2    1 
(c)  3 
(d)  3 
(d) (2  0.5) × 1011 Nm–2
 n k B T   n k B T 
 53 BASIC MATHEMATICS

14. In an experiment to determine the acceleration due to (a) Error T is measuring T, the time period is 0.05 s
gravity g, the formula used for the time period of a periodic (b) Error T in measuring T, the time period is 1 s
7 R  r (c) percentage error in the determination of g is 5%
motion is T  2 . The values of R and r are
5g (d) percentage error in the determination of g is 2.5%
16. A student performed the experiment of determination of
measured to be  60  1 mm and 10  1 mm, respectively..
focal length of a concave mirror by u–v method using an
In five successive measurements, the time period is found optical bench of length 1.5 m. The focal length of the mirror
to be 0.52 s, 0.56 s, 0.57 s,0.54 s and 0.59 s. The least count used is 24 cm. The maximum error in the location of the
of the watch used for the measurement of time period is image can be 0.2 cm. The 5 sets of (u, v) values recorded
0.01 s. Which of the following statement(s) is(are) true? by the student (in cm) are (42, 56), (48, 48), (60, 40), (66, 33),
(2016) (78, 39). The data set(s) that cannot come from experiment
and is(are) incorrectly recorded, is (are) : (2009)
(a) The error in the measurement of r is 10%
(a) (42, 56) (b) (48, 48)
(b) The error in the measurement of T is 3.57%
(c) (66, 33) (d) 78, 39)
(c) The error in the measurement of T is 2%
Integer Queston
(d) The error in the determined value of g is 11%  
17. Two vectors A and B are defined as
15. A student uses a simple pendulum of exactly 1m length to
determine g, the acceleration due to gravity. He uses a  
A  ai and B  a cos ti  sin t j , where a is a constant
 
stop watch with the least count of 1s for this and records
40s for 20 oscillations. For this observation, which of the     
following statement(s) is/are correct? (2010) and   rads 1 . If A  B  3 A  B at time t =  for
6
the first time, the value of  , in seconds, is _______.
(2018)


 BASIC MATHEMATICS 54

ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE - 1 : UNIT & DIMENSION, ERROR AND SIGNIFICANT FIGURES

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (d) 5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (c) 9. (b)

10. (d) 11. (c) 12. (a) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (d) 16. (c) 17. (b) 18. (b)
19. (c) 20. (c) 21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (d) 25. (d) 26. (b) 27. (d)
28. (d) 29. (c) 30. (b) 31. (a) 32. (c) 33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (d) 36. (b)
37. (d) 38. (c) 39. (b) 40. (a) 41. (d) 42. (a) 43. (b) 44. (b) 45. (d)
46. (c) 47. (a) 48. (d) 49. (c) 50. (d) 51. (d) 52. (c) 53. (b) 54. (a)
55. (d) 56. (d) 57. (d) 58. (b) 59. (a) 60. (b) 61. (c) 62. (a) 63. (a)
64. (d) 65. (b) 66. (c) 67. (b) 68. (b) 69. (b) 70. (c) 71. (d) 72. (c)
73. (c) 74. (c) 75. (c) 76. (b) 77. (b) 78. (c) 79. (b) 80. (c) 81. (c)
82. (d) 83. (b) 84. (b) 85. (b) 86. (a) 87. (a) 88. (a) 89. (a) 90. (b)
91. (b) 92. (d) 93. (d) 94. (d) 95. (a) 96. (c) 97. (d) 98. (a) 99. (c)
100. (d) 101. (b) 102. (b) 103. (b) 104. (c) 105. (c) 106. (d) 107. (c) 108. (c)
109. (c) 110. (a) 111. (b) 112. (a) 113. (b) 114. (b) 115. (d) 116. (b) 117. (c)
118. (d) 119. (c) 120. (d) 121. (a) 122. (c) 123. (a) 124. (a) 125. (c) 126. (d)
127. (a) 128. (a) 129. (d) 130. (b) 131. (c) 132. (c) 133. (c) 134. (c) 135. (c)
136. (c) 137. (d) 138. (a) 139. (d) 140. (a) 141. (a) 142. (d) 143. (c) 144. (a)
145. (d) 146. (a) 147. (b) 148. (a, d) 149. (a, c) 150. (b, c)

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (a)

10. (a) 11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (d) 16. (a) 17. (b) 18. (a)
19. (b) 20. (c) 21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (c) 25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (c)
28. (a) 29. (d) 30. (b)

EXERCISE - 3 : DIFFERENTIATE

2 1 cos x esin x
tan x 2
1. 3cos (3x + 5) 2. 2 tan x sec x 3. cos (log x) 4. 5. e . sec x
x 2 x

3 x x 2  2x
6. 2 sin (4x + 2) 7. 3x 2 .2 x log 2 8. 3e log 3.e x 9. (3 log 3).(2x  2)

x log x tan 3x 2 1 e cot x

10. 3 . log 3 . (1 + log x) 11. 2 (log sin x) cot x 12. 3e . sec 3x 13.  .cos ec 2 x
2 cot x

sin x 2 sin x sin x 1  1 2 

14. cot x  15. sec (e ).e . cos x 16. 17. e x .x 2  log x   log x 
1  cos x 2
x 1  x x 
 55 BASIC MATHEMATICS

8 x 5 2
18. cosec x 19. 2x 20. sin 2x + 2x cos 2x + 5 log 5 + 6 tan x sec x
(e  e 2x ) 2

3 2x 2 6x sin x  3x 2 cos x 3x 3 sin x

21.   2x log (2x  1) 22. 
3x  2 2x  1 7  x2 (7  x 2 )3 / 2

 2  x x
23. sin {2 log (2x  3)} .   24. 2e cot 2x + e log sin 2x
 2x  3 

e x sin x  e x cos x 6x e x sin x 1

25.  26. 3e3x  
 3log (x  1) 
(x 2  2)3 (x 2  2) 4  x  1 

1   x2  2   2 2 2 2
27.  2x    tan x  28. 2x (1–x ) sec2x {1–4x + x (1–x ) tan 2x}
cos x   2  

3 2x 2 2 log x sin (log x) 2

29.   2x log (2x  1) 30.
3x  2 2x  1 x

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (d)

9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (a) 13. (b, d) 14. (a, b, d) 15. (a, c) 16. (c, d)
17. (2)

Dream on !!

 02
KINEMATICS
57 KINEMATICS

Kinematics
MOTION IN ONE DIMENSION

IMPORTANT TERMS 2.3 Rest and Motion are relative

Rest and motion depends upon the observer. The object in

1. MECHANICS one situation may be at rest whereas the same object in
another situation may be in motion.
t is the branch of Physics, which deals with the study of
The driver of a moving car is in motion with respect to an
motion of physical bodies.
observer standing on the ground whereas, the same driver is at
Mechanics can be broadly classified into following branches rest with respect to the man(observer) in the passengers seat.
1.1 Statics 3. WHILE STUDYING THIS CHAPTER
It is the branch of mechanics, which deals with the study of  We will treat the objects as Point mass object
physical bodies at rest.  An object can be considered as a point mass object if
during the course of motion it covers distances much
1.2 Kinematics
greater than its own size.
It is the branch of mechanics, which deals with study of  We shall confine ourselves to the study of rectilinear motion
motion of physical bodies without taking into account the  Rectilinear motion is the study of motion of objects along
factors, which causes motion. a straight line.

1.3 Dynamics 4. POSITION, DISTANCE, DISPLACEMENT

It is the branch of mechanics, which deals with the study of 4.1 Position
motion of physical bodies taking into account the factors
which causes motion.  Position of an object is always defined with respect to
some reference point which we generally refer to as origin.
2. REST AND MOTION
 To define the change in position we have two physical
quantities
2.1 Rest
4.2 Distance
 An object is said to be at rest if it does not changes its
position with respect to the surrounding.  It is the actual path traversed by the body during the
course of motion
 The white board in the classroom is at rest with respect
 SI unit is ‘m’
to the classroom
 Dimensions [M0L1T0]
2.2 Motion
4.3 Displacement
 An object is said to be in motion if it changes its position  It is the difference between the final and initial positions
with respect to the surrounding. of the object during the course of motion
 When we walk, run or ride a bike we are in motion with  SI unit is ‘m’
respect to the ground.  Dimensions [M0L1T0]
KINEMATICS 58

Difference between Distance and Displacement

Distance Displacement

It is the actual path traversed by the object during It is the difference between the initial and the final positions
the course of motion xx2 – x1 where, x2 and x1 are final and initial
position respectively

It is a scalar quantity It is a vector quantity

The distance travelled by an object during the course of The displacement of an object may be positive,
motion is never negative or zero and is always positive negative or, zero during the course of motion

The distance travelled is either equal or greater The magnitude of displacement is less than or equal
than displacement and is never less than magnitude to the distance travelled during the course of motion
of displacement Distance  Displacement

The distance depends upon the path travelled The magnitude of displacement is independent of the
path taken by an object during the course of motion

Difference between Speed and Velocity

Speed Velocity

It is defined as the total path length travelled divided by It is defined as the change in position or displacement
the total time interval during which the motion has taken divided by the time intervals, in which displacement
place occurs of

It is a scalar quantity It is a vector quantity

It is always positive during the course of the motion It may be positive, negative or zero during the course of
the motion

It is greater than or equal to the magnitude of velocity It is less than or equal to the speed

NOTE Example:- mass, length, time, distance, speed, work,

temperature
If the motion of an object is along a straight line and in the
same direction, the magnitude of displacement is equal to the 5.2 Vector quantities
total path length. In that case, the magnitude of average velocity
is equal to the average speed. This is not always the case. The The physical quantities which have magnitude as well
average velocity tells us how fast an object has been moving as direction, are called vector quantities.
over a given interval but does not tell us how fast it moves at Example:- displacement, velocity, acceleration, force,
different instants of time during that interval. momentum, torque

5. SCALAR AND VECTOR QUANTITIES 6. AVERAGE VELOCITY AND AVERAGE SPEED

5.1 Scalar quantities 6.1 Average velocity

The physical quantities which have only magnitude but  It is defined as the change in position or
no direction, are called scalar quantities. displacement divided by the time intervals, in which
 59 KINEMATICS

displacement occurs
where, v2 and v1 are velocities at time t2 and t1.
 SI unit of velocity is m/s, although km/hr is used in
 It is the average change of velocity per unit time.
many everyday applications
 SI unit m/s2
 Dimensions [M0L1T-1]
 Dimensions [M0L1T-2]
6.2 Average speed
8.2 Instantaneous Acceleration
 It is defined as the total path length travelled
divided by the total time interval during which the  Instantaneous acceleration is defined in the same
motion has taken place way as the instantaneous velocity :
 SI unit m/s a = lim (v/t) = dv/dt
t 0
 Dimensions [M0L1T-1]  SI unit m/s2
7. INSTANTANEOUS VELOCITY AND  Dimensions [M0L1T-2]
INSTANTANEOUS SPEED  When the acceleration is uniform, obviously,
instantaneous acceleration equals the average
7.1 Instantaneous velocity acceleration over that period
 Since velocity is a quantity having both magnitude and
 It is velocity at an instant t. The velocity at an instant
direction, a change in the velocity may involve either or
is defined as the limit of the average velocity as the
both of these factors.
time interval t becomes infinitesimally small.
 Acceleration, therefore, may result from a change in the
 Instantaneous velocity = Lt (x/t) = dx/dt
speed(magnitude), a change in direction or changes in
 The quantity on the right hand side of Eq is the both.
differential coefficient of x with respect to t and is
 Like velocity, acceleration can also be positive, negative
denoted by dx/dt.
or zero.
 It is the rate of change of position with respect to
NOTE
time at that instant.
 SI unit is m/s We will restrict ourselves to the study of constant
acceleration for this chapter. In this case average acceleration
 Dimensions [M0L1T-1] equals the constant value of acceleration during the interval
7.2 Instantaneous Speed  If the velocity of an object is vo at t=0 and v at time t, we
have
 Instantaneous speed or speed is the magnitude of
v  v0
velocity o a
t0
 SI unit is m/s
or, v = vo + at — This is first equation of motion
 Dimensions [M0L1T-1]
o Other equations of motion are :
8. ACCELERATION
S = v0t + ½ at2

8.1 Average Acceleration v2 – v02 = 2aS

 The average acceleration over a time interval is a

S = v0 + (2n – 1)
defined as the change of velocity divided by the 2
time interval : o In all the above equations acceleration is assumed
a = (v2 – v1)/(t2 – t1) to be constant
KINEMATICS 60

9. GRAPHS

9.1 Uniform motion

 In an uniform motion a body covers equal distance in equal interval of time.

 Velocity is constant during the course of motion

 Acceleration is zero during the course of motion

If we try to represent the same on the number line with x, v, a on the Y-axis and t on the X-axis then we will have

displacement – time graph velocity – time graph acceleration – time graph

n
velocity = slope of x – t graph acc = slope of v – t graph

x v a

(i) t t t

Nautre of slope : positive nature of slope : zero nature of slope of a – t

magnitude of slope : constant magnitude of slope : constant

x v a

(ii) t t
t

nature of slope : negative nature of slope : zero

magnitude of slope : constant magnitude of slope : constant
61 KINEMATICS

9.2 Non-Uniform motion

Uniformly accelerated motion

Accelerated motion
Magnitude of Velocity increases or decreases with time

displacement – time graph velocity – time graph acceleration – time graph

n
velocity = slope of x – t graph acc = slope of v – t graph

v a

(i) t
t O

v a
a<0
O t
(ii) t

x v a

(iii)
t t
t

nature of slope : positive nature of slope : positive

magnitude of slope : Increasing magnitude of slope : constant

x v a

(iv) t
t t

nature of slope : positive nature of slope : negative

magnitude of slope : decreasing magnitude of slope : constant
KINEMATICS 62

displacement – time graph velocity – time graph acceleration – time graph

n
velocity = slope of x – t graph acc = slope of v – t graph

x v a

(v) 2 t t
t

nature of slope : negative nature of slope : negative

magnitude of slope : increasing magnitude of slope : constant

x v a

(vi) t t
t

nature of slope : negative nature of slope : positive

magnitude of slope : decreasing magnitude of slope : constant
63 KINEMATICS

MOTION IN TWO DIMENSION

 
10. SCALARS AND VECTORS Then, r1  r2  (a1  a 2 )iˆ  (b1  b2 )ˆj

 
Some quantities can be deseribed by single number. For e.g.: r1  r2  (a1  a 2 )iˆ  (b1  b2 )ˆj
Mass, time, distance, speed. One piece of infermation is
enough to describe them fully. These are called SCALAR Multiplication of a vector by scalar quantity.
quantities. 
cr1  c(a1ˆi  b1ˆj)  ca1ˆi  cb1ˆj
To tell someone how to get to Lakshya from some location,

one piece of information is not enough. To describe this fully, Representation of r1 on the co–ordinate axis
both distance and displacement are required. Quantities which
require both magnitude and direction to describe a situation
fully are known as VECTOR. For e.g.: displacement, velocity
The vectors are denoted by putting an arrow over the
symbols representing them.

For e.g.: AB vector can be represented by AB

10.1 Unit vector

A unit vector has a magnitude of one and so it really gives

just the direction of the vector.
A unit vector can be found by dividing the original vector by
its magnitude 
magnitude and direction of r1

a
â   
a Magnitude of r1( r1 )  a12  b12
unit vectors along different co–ordinate axis 
direction of r1

b1 component y  axis
tan = 
a1 component along x  axis

b 
  tan 1  1 
 a1 

10.3 Parallel vectors

Two vectors are parallel if and only if they have the same
10.2 Addition, subtraction and scalar multiplication direction. When any vector is multiplied by a scalar, a vector
of vectors
parallel to the original vector is formed.
Suppose, we have two vectors    
If b  ka then b and a are parallel vector. In general to find if

r1  a1ˆi  b1ˆj two vectors are parallel or not we must find their unit vectors.

r2  a 2ˆi  b 2ˆj
KINEMATICS 64

Another way is parallelogram rule of vector addition on

10.4 Equality of vectors  
this we draw vectors a and b, with both the tails co–
Two vectors (representing two values of the same physical inciding. Taking these two odjacent sides we complete the
quantity) are called equal if their magnitudes and directions parallelogram. the diagonal through the common tails gives
are same. the sum of two vectors.

For e.g. (3iˆ  4ˆj)m and (3iˆ  4ˆj)m / s

Cannot be compared as they represent two different

physical quantities.

10.5 Addition of vectors

When two or more vectors are added, the answer is called

the resultant. The resultant of two vectors is equivalent to  
Finding magnitude of a  b and its direction
the first vector followed immediately by the second vector.
|AD|2 = AE2 + ED2
AE = |a| + |b cos |
ED = b sin 
AD2 = a2 + b2 cos2 + 2ab cos  + b2 sin2
AD2 = a2 + b2 + 2ab cos 

AD = a 2  b 2  2ab cos 
 
To find the resultant of vectors a and b, the tail of vector  
where,  is the angle contained between a and b
   
b must join to the head of vector a . The resultant a  b
ED bsin 
 tan  = 
is the direct vector from the tail of vector a to the head of AE a  bcos 

vector b . where  is the angle which the resultant makes with + x axis

Subtraction of vectors :
   
Let a and b be two vectors. We define a  b as sum of
 
vectors a and the vectos  b . 
 
 
or, a   b

This is known as triangle rule of vector addition

65 KINEMATICS

Zero vector

a bc 0

Resolution of vectors

  

In this triangle PQ  QR  PR must be equal to zero as
the overall journey results in a return to the starting point.
   
PQ  QR  RP  O

 
OA  a

By vector addition rule,

  
OA  OB  OC

OB = a cos 


OC = a sin 

If ˆi and ˆj denote vectors of unit magnitude along OX and

along OY respecively, we get


OB = a cos  î

OC = a sin  ĵ


a  (a cos )iˆ  (a sin )ˆj
abcde 0

e  (a  b  c  d)
KINEMATICS 66

Suppose the particle moves along the path as shown to a


new position P1 with the position vector r

r1  x1ˆi  y1ˆj
change in position = displacement
10.6 Dot product or scalar product of two vector
 
 r1  r  (x1ˆi  y1ˆj)  (xiˆ  yj)
ˆ

 (x1  x)iˆ  (y1  y)ˆj

   
a  b  a b cos 
 xiˆ  yjˆ
from above figure we can see that
         
If,  = 0°  a  b  a b r   r  r1 or  r  r1  r

    (triangle law of vector addition)

 = 90°  a  b  a b cos 90° = 0
11.2 Average velocity
ˆi  ˆi  ˆi ˆi cos 0  i  1  1
2

  r xiˆ  yjˆ
vav  
ˆj  ˆj  1 t t
Similarly, kˆ  kˆ  1
vavg  v x ˆi  v y ˆj
ˆi  ˆj  ˆi ˆj cos90  1 1 0  0

Note : Direction of the average velocity is same as that of  r
Similarly, ˆj  kˆ  0 and kˆ  ˆi  0
11.3 Instantaneous velocity
The dot product is commutative and distributive
    
a b  ba  v dr
v  lim 
t 0 t dt
      
a  (b  c)  a  b  a  c 
v  v  ˆi  v y ˆj

11. MOTION IN 2D (PLANE)

11.1 Position vector and Displacement


The position vector r of a particle P located in a plane
with referecne to the origin of an xy–coordinate system is
given by

dx dy
where, vx = and v y 
dt dt

r = xiˆ + yjˆ 
v  v 2x  v 2y

vy  vy 
tan  = or  = tan–1  v 
vx  x
67 KINEMATICS

Note : The direction of instantaneous velocity at any point Horizontal axis Vertical axis
on the path of an object is tangent to the path at that point ux = u cos uy = u sin 
and is in the direction of motion.
ax = 0 ay = – g
11.4 Averge acceleration (In the absence of any sy = uyt + 1/2 ay t2
external force ax will be 0 – 0 = u sin  t – 1/2g t2

 v v x ˆ v y ˆ 2u sin  2u y
a avg   i j assumed to be zero) T= 
t t t g g
 sx = ux t + 1/2ax t2
a avg  a x ˆi  a y ˆj vy = uy + ay t
x – 0 = u cos  t vy = u sin  – gt
11.5 Instantaneous acceleration
x = u cos × 2uy/g It depends on time ‘t’

 dv dv x ˆ dv y ˆ 2u 2 cos  sin 
a  i j x= It in not constant
dt dt dt g

  u 2 sin 2
a  a x ˆi  a y ˆj
R= It’s magnitude first
g
12. PROJECTILE MOTION ( 2 cos  sin  = sin 2) decreases becomes zero
horizontal distance covered and then increases.
When a particle is projected obliquely near the earth
is known as Range
surface, it moves simultaneously in horizontal and vertical
vx = ux + ax t maximum height obtained
directions. Motion of such a particle is called projectile
by the particle
motion.
vx = u cos  Method 1 : using time of
It is independent of t ascent

1
It is constant sy = uyt1 + ay t12
2

u 2 sin 2 
time of ascent and time of H=
2g

descent
At top most point vy = 0 Method 2 : using third
vy = uy + ay t equation of motion
In this case a particle is projected at an angle  with an
 0 = u sin  – gt v 2y  u 2y  2a ys y
initial velocity u. For this particular case we will calculate
the following :
u sin 
(a) time taken to reach A from O t1 = 0 – u2 sin2 = – 2g sy
g
(b) horizontal distance covered (OA)
u sin  u sin  1 u 2 sin 2 
(c) maxm height reached during the motion t2 = T – t1 = = u sin  ×  g
g g 2 g2
(d) velocity at any time ‘t’ during the motion
T u sin  u 2 sin 2 
t1 = t2 =  H=
2 g 2g
KINEMATICS 68

Maximum Range 12.2 Equation of trajectory

u 2 sin 2 u2 Trajectory is the path traced by the body. To find the

R and R max 
g g trajectory we must find relation between y and x by
Range is maximum when sin 2is maximum eliminating time.

max (sin 2) = 1 or,  = 45° [Ref. to the earlier diag]

Horizontal Motion Vertical Motion

12.1 Analysis of velocity in case of a projectile
ux = u cos  uy = u sin 
ax = 0 ay = – g

1
sx = u cos  t = x sy = uyt + a t2
2 y

x  x  1 x2
t= y = u sin    g 2
u cos  u cos   2 u cos 2 

gx 2
y = x tan  –   y = bx – ax2
2u 2 cos 2 
From the above equations;
(i) v1x = v2x = v3x = v4x = ux = u cos  (i) This is a equation of a parabola
which means that the velocity along x axis remains constant (ii) Because the co–officient of x2 is negative, it is an inverted
parabola.
[as there is no external force acting along that direction]
(ii) a) magnitude of velocity along y axis first decreases and
then it increases after the top most point
b) at top most point magnitude of velocity is zero.
c) direction of velocity is in the upward direction while
ascending and is in the downward direction while
descending.
d) magnitude of velocity at A is same as magnitude of Path of the projectile is a parabola
velcoity at 0; but the direction is inverse
e) angle which the net velocity makes with the horizontal 2u 2 sin  cos  2u 2 R
R or, 
can be calculated by g g sin  cos 

vy Substituting this value in the above equation we have,

velocity along y axis
tan   
vx velocity along x axis
 x
y = x tan  1- 
 R
net velocity is always along the tangent
69 KINEMATICS

A boatman starts from point A on one bank of a river

13. RELATIVE MOTION 
with velocity vbr in the direction shown in figure. River
Relative is a very general term 
is flowing along positive x–direction with velocity vr .
In physics we use relative very oftenly. Width of the river is d. Then
For eg   
v b  v r  v br

Therefore, vbx = vrx + vbrx = vr – vbr sin 

and vby = vby + vbry = 0 + vbr cos = vbr cos

Case I : If you are observing a car moving on a straight

Vb
road then you say velocity of car is 20 m/s which Vbr d

means velocity of car relative to you is 20 m/s or, Vr

velocity of car relative to ground is 20 m/s (as you are A
standing on the ground. Now, time taken by the boatman to cross the river is :
Case II : If you go inside a car and observe you will find
that the car is at rest while the road is moving back d d d
t  or t  ...(i)
wards. you will say; vby v br cos  v br cos 
velocity of car relative to the car is 0 m/s
Further, displacement along x–axis when he reaches on
Mathematically, velocity of B relative to A is represented
the other bank (also called drift) is
as
   d
v BA = v B - v A x  v bx t   v r  v br sin  
v br cos 

This being a vector quantity direction is very important

d
or x   v r  v br sin   ...(ii)
 ≠  v br cos 
 v BA v AB
Condition when the boatman crosses the river in shortest
14. RIVER–BOAT PROBLEMS interval of time
From eq. (i) we can see that time (t) will be minimum
In river–boat problems we come across the following
when  = 0° i.e., the boatman should steer his boat
three terms :
perpendicular to the river current.

vr  absolute velocity of river.. Condition when the boat wants to reach point B, i.e., at a
 point just opposite from where he started (shortest
vbr  velocity of boatman with respect to river or
distance)

velocity of boatman in still water and v b  absolute In this case, the drift (x) should be zero.
velocity of boatman.
 x=0

Hence, it is important to note that vbr is the velocity of
 d
boatman with which he steers and vb is the actual or  v r  v br sin    0 or vr  v br sin 
v br cos 
velocity of boatman relative to ground. Further
  
v b  v br  v r vr v 
or sin   or   sin 1  r 
Now, let us derive some standard results and their v br  v br 
special cases.
Hence, to reach point B the boatman should row at an
KINEMATICS 70

 
v 
1
angle   sin  r  upstream from AB.
 
 vm  OC , which will be represented by diagonal
 v br  
OD of rectangle OBDC.

d d  v rm  v r2  v m2  2v r v m cos 90  v r2  v m2
t 
vb 2
v v 2
br r

Since sin  1 . So, if vr > vbr, the boatman can never

reach at point B. Because if vr = vbr, sin = 1 or  = 90°
and it is just impossible to reach at B if  = 90°. Similarly,
if vr > vbr, sin > 1, i.e., no such angle exists. Practically
it can be realized in this manner that it is not possible
to reach at B if river velocity (vr) is too high.

15. RELATIVE VELOCITY OF RAIN W.R.T

THE MOVING MAN
 
Consider a man walking west with velocity v m , If  is the angle which vrm makes with the vertical
 direction then
represented by OA . Let the rain be falling vertically
  BD v m v 
downwards with velocity vr , represented by OB . tan    or   tan 1  m 
OB vr  vr 
Figure. To find the relative velocity of rain with respect

to man ( i.e. vrm ) bring the man at rest by imposing a Here, angle  is from vertical towards west and is written
 as , west of vertical.
velocity  v m on man and apply this velocity on rain
also. Now the relative velocity of rain with respect to Note : In the above problem if the man wants to protect
  himself from the rain, he should hold his umbrella in

man will be the resultant velocity of vr  OB and  the direction of relative velocity of rain with respect
to man i.e. the umbrella should be held making an angle
 (= tan–1 vm/vr) west of vertical.
 71 KINEMATICS

SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1 Example - 6

State in the following cases, whether the motion is one, Can be body have a constant velocity but a varying speed ?
two or three dimensional motion :
(a) a kite flying on a windy day Sol. No, since velocity = speed + direction ; therefore a body can
(b) a speeding car on a long straight high way not possess a constant velocity but a varying speed.

(c) a carrom coin rebounding from the side of the board Example - 7

(d) a planet revolving around its star.

Are the magnitude of average velocity and speed equal ?

Sol. (a) The motion of kite in the sky is three dimensional motion
because the kite while flying may be changing as well as Sol. No, they are often unequal. Average velocity and average
losing or gaining the height, i.e., the motion is in space. speed will equal only in case of a uniform motion of a body
(b) The motion of speeding car on a long straight highway along a straight line. Then average velocity = average speed
is one dimensional motion, since the motion is confined = uniform of the body.
along a straight line. Example - 8
(c) The motion of a carrom coin rebounding the side of the Is it true that in one dimensional motion, a particle with
board is two dimensional motion, since the motion is zero speed may have non–zero velocity ?
confined in the plane of board.
(d) The motion of a planet revolving around its star is two Sol. It is not possible because, velocity = speed + direction. If
dimensional motion, because the motion is confined in a speed is zero, the velocity is also zero.
fixed plane.
Example - 2 Example - 9

What will be nature of velocity–time graph for a uniform Is magnitude of the displacement of an object and total
motion ? distance covered by it in centain time interval same ?
Explain.
Sol. A straight line parallel to time axis.

Example - 3 Sol. Not necessarily. If an object covers a complete circular track

of radius r, then its displacement is zero but distance travelled
What will be the nature of position–time graph for a is 2  r.
uniform motion ?
Example - 10
Sol. A straight line inclined to time axis.
Show that average velocity of the object over an interval of
Example - 4
time is either smaller than or equal to the average speed of
What does slope of position–time graph represent for a the object over the same interval.
uniform motion ? displaceme nt
Sol. Since, average velocity = total time taken and average speed
Sol. The uniform velocity of the object.
total distance travelled
Example – 5 = total time taken
Since displacement of an object can

What does the tangent at a point to the position–time be equal or less than total distance travelled in a given time,
graph for an object in non–uniform motion along a straight hence, average velocity of an object over an interval of time
line represent ? is either equal or smaller than the average speed of the object
Sol. Instantaneous speed or instantaneous velocity at the given over the same interval of time.
instant.
KINEMATICS 72

Example - 11 Differentiating it w.r.t. time t, we have

A ball is thrown up in air. What is the acceleration and ds 1 dv v 1 v

 t  or v  a  t 
velocity at the instant it reaches its highest point ? dt 2 dt 2 2 2

–2
Sol. Acceleration is 9.8 ms acting downwards and velocity is  dv 
  acceleration  a 
zero.  dt 
Example - 12 or at = v
A stone is thrown vertically upwards from the surface of Differentiating it again w.r.t. time t, we have
earth. What is the direction of the velocity and acceleration
of the stone (a) on its way up (b) on its way down. da dv da da
ta   a or t  0 or 0
dt dt dt dt
Sol. (a) Velocity is vertically upwards and acceleration is vertically Therefore ; a = a constant.
downwards (b) velocity is vertically downwards and
Example - 16
acceleration is also vertically downwards. –1
Brakes are applied to a train travelling at 72 km h . After
–1
Example - 13 passing over 200 m, its velocity is reduced to 36 km h . At
the same rate of retardation, how much further will it go
–1
An object is projected upward with a velocity of 100 ms .After before it is brought to rest ?
–2
what time will it strike the ground ? Use, g = 10 ms .
Sol. u = 72 km/h = 20m/s; v = 36 km/h = 10 m/s; S = 200 m; a =
–1 –2
Sol. Here, S = 0, u = 100 ms ; a = – 10 ms , t = ? ?

1 2 v2  u 2 102  202 3
Using the relation, S = ut + at , we have As, a    m / s2
2 2S 2  200 4
1 2
0 = 100 t + (–10) t or t = 20 s. 3
2 Now, u = 10 m/s; v = 0, a = m / s2 ; S = ?
4
Example - 14
v 2  u 2 0  (10) 2
Two balls of different masses (one lighter and other heavier) S  = 66.67 m.
2a 2( 3/ 4)
are thrown vertically upwards with the same speed. Which
one will passs through the point of projection in their Example - 17
downward direction with the greater speed ?
Exa A ball is dropped from the roof of a tower of height h. The
Sol. Let u be the initial velocity of projection of body and v be the total distance covered by it in the last second of its motion
velocity of the same body while passing downwards through is equal to the distance covered by it in first three seconds.
2
point of projection. The displacement of body s = 0. Using the What is the value of h ? (g = 10 m/s )
2 2
relation v = u + 2 as, It means the final speed is independent
of mass of the body. Hence, both the bodies will acquire the Sol. Let the ball remain in air for t seconds. Then,
same speed while passing through point of projection. a 10
Dt = u + (2t – 1) = 0 + (2t – 1)
Example - 15 2 2
= 10 t – 5 ...(i)
The distance traversed by a moving particle at any instant is
Distance covered in first three seconds.
half of the product of its velocity and the time of traverse.
Show that the acceleration of particle is constant. 1 1
S  gt 2   10  32  45 ...(ii)
2 2
Sol. Let at an instant t, v be the velocity of the moving particle and As per question, 10t – 5 = 45 or t = 5 s
S be the distance travelled by the particle. As per question. 1 2 1 2
S = v t/2  h  gt   10  5  125m
2 2
 73 KINEMATICS

Example - 18
x 2  x1
A ball is dropped from a bridge 122.5 m above a river. After velocity = slope = t  t = tan 
2 1
the ball has been falling for 2 s, a second ball is thrown
straight down after it. What must its initial velocity be so
that both hit the water at the same time ?

Sol. Time taken for the first ball to fall freely 122.5 m will be,

t  2S/ g  2 122.5 / 9.8  5s.

Thus, the second ball thrown after 2 seconds with velocity
u should cover a distance 122.5 m in 3 seconds. Taking
motion of second ball, we have
2
122.5 = u × 3 + (1/2) × 9.8 × 3 .
On solving we get u = 26.1 m/s Figure (b) shows the case when object had some initial
displacement (x0).
Example - 19
The slope is again positive and constant which indicates
What is position–time graph ? Discuss the position–time constant velocity.
graph of an object (i) at rest (ii) in uniform motion (iii) in
non–uniform motion. x 2  x1
velocity = slope = t  t = tan
2 1
Sol. When a body is in motion, its position changes with time. It
(iii) Object in non–uniform motion :
can be represented by a position–time graph for different
conditions. In this case the body initially has no displacement, then moves
with a velocity which goes on changing with time. The slope
(i) Object at rest :
is positive but variable which indicates variable velocity.
For an object which is stationary, the position–time graph is
parallel to the time axis as shown below.

(ii) Object in uniform motion :

For an object which moves with a velocity which remains
constant in magnitude and direction, the motion is called
uniform motion. Figure (a) shows the position–time graph Note :
for uniform motion.
When the motion is non–uniform motion, we find the average
speed and instantaneous speed as shown,

In this case, the object was initially at rest. The slope is

positive and constant, which indicates constant velocity.
KINEMATICS 74

vv
 a= 0
t

Displacement from A to B,
s = Area under v – t graph
 s = Area of rectangle OABC
 s=v×t
(ii) a) Object with uniform acceleration :
1) Initially at rest :
Average Speed between A and B,
The speed of the body increases uniformly from
x x 2  x1 zero, and the velocity–time graph is a straight line
vav = 
t t 2  t1 inclined to time axis.

Instantaneous speed at P,
vP = slope of tangent AB

 x 
 vP = lim  
t 0  t 

Example - 20

Explain the velocity–time graph of a particle having

(i) uniform velocity (ii) uniform acceleration/retardation
(iii) non–uniform acceleration/retardation.

Sol. When a body is in motion, its velocity may or may–not

change with respect to time. It can be represented by a
velocity–time graph. Acceleration from O to A,
(i) Object with no acceleration (uniform velocity) :
change in velocity
For an object with a constant uniform velocity, velocity– a=
time
time graph is a straight line parallel to time axis.
v0 v
 a= 
t t
Displacement from O to A,
s = Area under v – t graph
 s = Area of triangle OAB

1
s= (vt)
2
2) Initially moving with velocity u :
The speed of body increases uniformly from initial
velocity u and velocity–time graph is a straight line
Acceleration from A to B, inclined to time axis.
change in velocity
a=
time
75 KINEMATICS

Displacement from A to B,
s = Area of tringle OAB

1
s= ut
2
3) a) Object with non–uniform acceleration :
The speed of the object changes veriably with time,
having a variable positive slope for which
acceleration goes on increasing variably.
Acceleration from A to B,

change in velocity
a=
time

vu
a= ...(1)
t
Displacement from A to B,
s = Area region OABMCO
 s = Area of rectangle OAMC + Area of  ABM

1 b) Object with non–uniform retardation :

 s = ut + (v – u) t
2 The speed of the object decreases variably with
time, having a variable negative slope for which
1 2 acceleration goes on decreasing variably.
 s = ut + at ...[From (1)]
2
b) Object with uniform retardation :
The speed of the object decreases uniformly, such
that the velocity–time graph has negative slope.

Example - 21

Using velocity–time graph, derive the kinematic equations.

Acceleration from A to B, Sol.

change in velocity
a=
time

v  u 0  u u
a=   ...(1)
t t t
KINEMATICS 76

Let u be the initial velocity (at t = 0 s) and v be the final s = sn – sn – 1

velocity after t seconds.
1 2 1 2
(i) Acceleration from A to B,  s = un + an – [u (n – 1) + a (n – 1) ]
2 2
change in velocity 1 2 1 2
a=  s = un + an – [(un – u + a (n – 2n + 1)]
time 2 2

vu 1 2 1 2 1
 a=  s = un + an – un + u – an + an – a
t 2 2 2
 at = v – u 1
 s = u + an – a
 v = u + at ...(1) 2

This is the first kinematic equation of motion. 1

 s=u+ a (2n – 1)
(ii) Displacement from A to B, 2
(iii) For a body falling freely from its position of rest, the
s = Area of region OABDC th
height covered by it in n second is given by,
 s = Area of rectangle OADC + Area of  ABD
1
1 s=u+ g (2n – 1)
2
 s = ut + [(v – u) × t]
2
1
 s=0+ g (2n – 1)
1 2
 s = ut + (at × t) ...[From (1)]
2
1
 s= g (2n – 1)
1 2 2
 s ut + at ...(2)
2 Example - 23

This is the second kinematic equation of motion. A car is moving along a straight line, say OP in figure. It
(iii) Now, moves from O to P in 18 s and returns from P to Q in 6.0 s.
v = u + at What are the average velocity and average speed of the car in
Squaring, going (a) from O to P ? (b) from O to P and back to Q
2 2
v = (u + at)
2 2 2 2
 v = u + 2uat + a t
?
2 2 1 2
 v = u + 2a (ut + at )
2
2 2
 v = u + 2as ...[From (2)] Displacement
This is the third kinematic equation of motion. Sol. (a) Average velocity =
Time interval

Example - 22  360m
v  20 ms1
18s
Derive the expression for distance travelled by a body in
th
n second of its motion. Path length
Average speed = Time interval
Sol. (i) Let sn and s(n–1) be the distance travelled by a body in n
360 m
and (n – 1) seconds respectively.   20 ms 1
18 s
Then we know,
Thus, in this case the average speed is equal to the
1 2
sn = un + an magnitude of the average velocity.
2
(b) In this case,
1 2
s(n – 1) = u (n – 1) + a (n – 1)
2 Displacement 240 m –1
th
Average velocity = = = + 10 ms
(ii) The distance travelled in n second of its motion, Time interval (18  6.0) s
 77 KINEMATICS

Path length OP  PQ First Method : In the first method, we split the path in two
Average speed =  parts : the upward motion (A to B) and the downward motion
Time interval t
(B to C) and calculate the corresponding time taken t1 and t2.
(360  120)m
  20 ms 1 Since the velocity at B is zero, we have :
24 s
v = v0 + at
Thus, in this case the average speed is not equal to the 0 = 20 – 10t1
magnitude of the average velocity. This happens because Or, t1 = 2 s
the motion here involves change in direction so that the
This is the time in going from A to B. From B, or the point of
path length is greater than the magnitude of displacement.
the maximum height, the ball falls freely under the
This shows that speed is, in general, greater than the
acceleration due to gravity. The ball is moving in negative y
magnitude of the velocity.
direction. We use equation
Example - 24
1 2
y = y0 + v0t + at
A ball is thrown vertically upwards with a velocity of 2
–1
20 ms from the top of a multistorey building. The height –2
We have, y0 = 45m, y = 0, v0 = 0, a = – g = – 10 ms
of the point from where the ball is thrown is 25.0 m from 2
0 = 45 + (1/2) (–10) t2
the ground. (a) How high will the ball rise ? and (b) how
long will it be before the ball hits the ground ? Solving, we get t2 = 3s
–2
Take g = 10 ms . Therefore, the total time taken by the ball before it hits the
ground = t1 + t2 = 2 s+ 3 s = 5 s.
Sol. (a) Let us take the y–axis in the vertically upward direction Second Method : The total time taken can also be calculated
with zero at the ground, as shown in figure. by noting the coordinates of initial and final positions of
Now v0 = + 20 ms ,
–1 the ball with respect to the origin chosen and using equation
–2
a = – g = –10 ms , 1 2
y = y0 + v0t + at
v = 0 ms
–1 2
If the ball rises to height y from the point of launch, then Now y0 = 25 m y=0m
–1 –2
using the equation v0 = 20 ms , a = – 10 ms , t = ?
2 2 2
v = v0 + 2 a (y – y0) 0 = 25 + 20t + (1/2) (–10) t
2
we get Or, 5t – 20t – 25 = 0
2
0 = (20) + 2(–10) (y – y0) Solving this quadratic equation for t, we get t = 5s
Note that the second method is better since we do not have
Solving, we get, (y – y0) = 20 m.
to worry about the path of the motion as the motion is under
(b) We can solve this part of the problem in two ways. Note constant acceleration.
carefully the methods used.
Example - 25

Free–fall : Discuss the motion of an object under free fall.

Neglect air resistance.

Sol. An object released near the surface of the Earth is

accelerated downward under the influence of the force of
gravity. The magnitude of acceleration due to gravity is
represented by g. If air resistance is neglected, the object is
said to be in free fall. If the height through which the object
falls is small compared to the earth’s radius, g can be taken
–2
to be constant, equal to 9.8 ms . Free fall is thus a case of
motion with uniform acceleration.
We assume that the motion is in y–direction, more correctly
in –y–direction because we choose upward direction as
positive. Since the acceleration due to gravity is alway down
KINEMATICS 78

ward it is in the negative direction and we have Example - 26

–2
a = – g = – 9.8 ms Galileo’s law of odd numbers : “The distances traversed,
The object is released from rest at y = 0. Therefore, v0 = 0 during equal intervals of time, by a body falling from rest,
and the equations of motion become : stand to one another in the same ratio as the odd numbers
v = 0 – gt = –9.8 t ms
–1 beginning with unity [namely, 1:3:5:7.......].” Prove it.
2 2
y = 0 – 12 gt = –4.9 t m Sol. Let us divide the time interval of motion of an object under
2
v = 0 – 2 gy = – 19.6 y m s
2 –2 free fall into many equal intervals  and find out the distances
traversed during successive intervals of time. Since initial
These equations give the velocity and the distance travelled velocity is zero, we have
as a function of time and also the variation of velocity with
distance. The variation of acceleration, velocity and distance, 1 2
y gt
with time have been plotted in figure (a), (b) and (c). 2
Using this equation, we can calculate the position of the
object after different time intervals, o, , 2, 3... which are
2
given in second column of Table. If we take(– 12 ) g as y0
– the position coordinate after first time interval , then third
column gives the distances traversed in successive s. We
find that the distances are in the last column. This law was
established by Galileo Galilei (1564–1642) who was the the
first to make quantitative studies of free fall.

Example - 27

Stopping distance of vehicles : When brakes are applied to

a moving vehicle, the distance it travels before stopping is
called stopping distance. It is an important factor for road
safety and depends on the initial velocity (v0) and the braking
capacity, or deceleration, –a that is caused by the braking.
Derive an expression for stopping distance of a vehicle in
terms of v0 and a.

Sol. Let the distance travelled by the vehicle before it stops be

2 2
ds. Then, using equation of motion v = v0 + 2 ax, and noting
that v = 0, we have the stopping distance

v 20
ds 
2a
 79 KINEMATICS

Thus, the stopping distance is proportional to the square of Example - 29

the initial velocity. Doubling the initial velocity increases  
the stopping distance by a factor of 4 (for the same Can two equal vectors a and b at different locations in
deceleration). space necessarily have identical physical effects ?
For the car of a particular make, the braking distance was
found to be 10m, 20 m, 34 and 50m corresponding to velocity Sol. Yes, they have same physical effects because the two bodies
of 11, 15, 20 and 25 m/s which are nearly consistent with the while falling under gravity, will have same acceleration
above formula. though their locations may be different with respect to a
common origin.
Stopping distance is an important factor considered in
setting speed limits, for example, in school zones. Example - 30

Example - 28 Are the commutative law and associative law applicable to

vector subtraction.
Reaction time : When a situation demands our immediate
action. It takes some time before we really respond.
Reaction time is the time a person takes to observe, think Sol. Commutative law is not applicable to vector subtraction. It
   
and act. For example, if a person is driving and suddenly a is so because A  B  B  A.
boy appears on the road, then the time elapsed before he
Associative law is also not applicable to vector subtraction.
slams the brakes of the car is the reaction time. Reaction
It is so because
time depends on complexity of the situation and on an
     
individual. (A  B)  C  A  (B  C)
You can measure your reaction time by a simple
experiment. Take a ruler and ask your friend to drop it Example - 31

vertically through the gap between your thumb and

Define unit vector and give its physical significance.
forefinger figure. After you catch it, find the distance d
travelled by the ruler. In a particular case, d was found to
be 21.0 cm. Estimate reaction time. Sol. A vector having unit magnitude in a given direction is
called a unit vector.
 
(i) If P is a non–zero vector (i.e. P  0), the unit vector u P in

the diretion of P is given by,,

 P
uP 
P

 P  Pu P

(ii) The unit vector gives the direction of a given vector.

  
(iii) We use i , j and k as the unit vectors along the x, y and z
directions respectively of a cartesian (rectangular) three
Sol. The ruler drops under free fall. Therefore, v0 = 0, and g = –
–2 dimensional co–ordinate system.
9.8 ms . The distance travelled d and the reaction time tr are
related by Example - 32

1 2 2d Define : (i) Equal vectors (ii) Opposite vectors (iii) Zero

d gt r Or, tr  s vectors.
2 g
–2
Given d = 21.0 cm and g = 9.8 ms the reaction time is Sol. (i) Equal vectors :
Two or more vectors having the same magnitude and the
2  0.21 same direction irrespective of their positions in space are
tr  s  0.2 s.
9.8 called equal vectors
KINEMATICS 80

    
AB  CD or PQ R  Rx  Ry
    
 R  Rxi  Ry j
 
where i and j are unit vectors along the positive x–axis
and y–axis respectively.

(ii) Opposite or Negative Vectors :

Any two vetors of same type which are equal in
magnitude but opposite in direction are called opposite or
negative vectors.

AB  CD or P  Q


(vi) Now if  is the angle made by R with the x–axis, then

OA R x
cos   
OC R

 Rx = R cos  ...(i)
(iii) Zero Vectors :
A vector having zero magnitude and having a Ry
and sin  =
particular direction is called zero vector or a null vector. R
  Ry = R = sin  ...(ii)
It is represented by 0.
(vii) Squaring and adding equation (i) and equation (ii), we
Example - 33
get
Explain resolution of vector into rectangular components.
R 2x  R 2y  R 2 cos 2   R 2 sin 2 
Sol. The process of finding the components of a given vector is
called resolution of vectors.  R 2x  R 2y  R 2 (cos 2   sin 2 )
(i) The given vector can be split up into two or more
components such that the combined effect of these  R 2  R 2x  R 2y ...(iii)
components is same as the original vector.
(ii) The components can be found at any required angle,  R  R 2x  R 2y
but if they are at right angles to each other then they are
called rectangular components. (viii) Dividing equation (ii) by (i), we get

(iii)Consider a vector R  OC, starting from the origin ‘O’ Ry
= tan 
of a rectangular coordinate system as shown in figure. Rx
(iv) Draw perpendiculars from C to meet x–axis at A and y–
   Ry 
axis at B  R x  OA and R y  OB are the rectangular   = tan –1  
 ...(v)
 Rx 

components of R along the x–axis and y–axis 
respectively. Equation (v) gives direction of R.
(v) By the parallelogram law of vectors,
 81 KINEMATICS

Example - 34 Example - 38

Define the terms : (i) Projectile (ii) Velocity of projectiion Two bodies of 5 kg and 10 kg are thrown with the same
(iii) Angle of projection (iv) Trajetory. velocity in the same direction. Which body will reach the
ground first ?
Sol. (i) Projectile : Projectile is a body which is projected in
vertical x–y plane, making a certain angle with horizontal Sol. Both the bodies will reach the ground simultaneously
because both have same velocity and will experience same
and is allowed to move freely under the action of gravity.
acceleration due to gravity throughout the motion.
(ii) Velocity of projection : The velocity with which the
Example - 39
projectile is projected is called the velocity of projection.
A bird flies north at 20 m/s for 15 s. It rests for 5 s and then
(iii)Angle of projection : The angle made by velocity of
flies south at 25 m/s for 10 s. For the whole trip, find
projection with horizontal is called angle of projection.
(a) the average speed; (b) the average velocity
(iv) Trajectory : The path traced by the projectile in space (c) the average acceleration.
is called trajectory.
Sol. distance travelled towards north = AC = 20 m/s × 15 s = 300 m.
Example - 35
distance travelled towards south = CB = 25 m/s × 10 s = 250 m.
Prove that a projectile covers the maximum horizontal
dis tan ce
range when angle of projection is 45° with the horizontal Average Speed 
direction. time
C
u2
Sol. Horizontal range, R  sin 2; Horizontal range, R is 300  250 path
g  m / s  18.34 m / s
15  5  10
2
maximum if u sin 2 /g has maximum value. It will be so if sin B
2  has maximum value i.e. sin 2  = 1 or 2  = 90° or  = 45° A

Example - 36 displacement
Average velocity 
time
Why does the direction of motion of a projectile become
horizontal at the highest point of its trajectory ? 300  250
  1.67 m / s
15  5  10
Sol. At the highest point the vertical component velocity of the  v v f  vi
projectile becomes zero and the projectile has only horizontal Average Acceleration  a av  
t t
component velocity. Due to which, the direction of motion
of a projectile becomes horizontal at the highest point of its
 25   20 
trajectory.  m / s 2  1.5 m / s 2
30
Example - 37

At what point of the projectile-path, the speed is (i) Example - 40

minimum and (ii) maximum ?
A particle goes along az quadrant AB of a circle of radius
5 m with a constant speed 2.5 m/s as shown. Find the
Sol. A projectile when given angular projection has two average velocity and average acceleration over the interval
rectangular component velocities, acting horizontally and AB.
vertically. The horizontal component velocity remains
constant throughout the projectile path but vertical
component velocity of projectile decreases as it goes up B
and become zero at the highest point. That is why, the
projectile on its path, has minimum velocity at the highest
point and maximum velocity at the projection point or at a O A
point where it strikes the horizontal ground during its flight.
KINEMATICS 82

dis tan ce 1 2 1
Sol. Time taken  s  ut  at  0   0.8 100   40 m
speed 2 2
From B to C
3.14  5 s = BC = 584 – AB – CD
  3.14 s
2  2.5
= 584 – 40 – 64 = 480 m.

displacement 1
Average velocity  s  ut  a t 2
time 2

AB 52  52  480 = 8 t + 0  t = 60 seconds
  m / s  2.252 m / s
time 3.14 From C to D

v v B  v A v 2  u 2 0 2  82
Average Acceleration   a   0.5 m / s 2
t t 2s 2  64 

vu 08
 2.52   2.52 2 2
t
a

0.5
= 16 seconds.
 m / s = 1.126 m/s
3.14
 total time = tAB + tBC + tCD
vB 2.5 m/s = 10 + 60 + 16 = 86 seconds
2 2
aAB = 0.8 m/s and aCD = – 0.5 m/s
v Solve this by graphical method

vA Example - 42
–1
A balloon rising vertically with a velocity of 5 ms ,
releases a sand bag at an instant when the balloon is 20 m
The average velocity is directed along AB and the average
above the ground.
acceleration is directed perpendicular to AB towards O.
(a) Compute the position and velocity of the sand bag at
Example - 41 the following times after its releases :

A car starts from rest and accelerates uniformly for 10 s 1 1

s, s, 1s, 2s
to a velocity of 8 m/s. It then run at a constant velocity and 4 2
is finally brought to rest in 64 m with a constant (b) How many seconds after its release will the bag strike
retardation. The total distance covered by the car is 584 the ground ?
m. Find the value of acceleration, retardation and total
(c) With what velocity will it strike ?
time taken.

Sol.
Sol.
Step-1 : Visualize the motion and look into the possible
0 m/s 0 m/s qualitative answers to the questions.
8 m/s 8 m/s
Step-2 : Think about direction of velocity of sand bag when it is
A B C D released from balloon.
The car starts from A, accelerates from A to B, run at constant Since balloon is rising vertically up therefore initial
velocity from B to C an d retards to rest from C to D. velocity of sand bag will be 5 m/s in upward direction.
From A to B Step-3 : Take upward direction as positive and downward
direction as negative.
vu 80
a   0.8 m / s 2
t 10
 83 KINEMATICS
2
u = + 5 m/s, g = – 9.8 m/s at
1
t  s;
4 (c) You can calculate velocity with which sand bag strikes
1 the ground by two methods.
h  ut  gt 2 = 0.9 m
2 First method
height above the ground = 20 + 0.9 = 20.9 m u = u + at
2
1 u = + 5 m/s a = – 9.8 m/s
velocity  5  9.8   2.55 m / s
4 t = 2.59 sec (as we calculated above)
Conclusion : Balloon is located above the origin and moving Second method
upward. (Origin is taken to be the position where
balloon leaves the sand bag). If you have to solve this problem independently then use
2 2
v = u + 2a s
1 2
at t  s; u = 5 m/s, a = – 9.8 m/s
2
2
s = – 20 m
1 1 1
h  5    9.8     1.275 You can predict without any calculation that as per
2 2 2 sign convention we have adopted, velocity must be
height above the ground = 21.275 m negative.

1 Example - 43
v  g  9.8   0.1 m / s
2 A particle moving with a uniform acceleration along a
Conclusion : Balloon still above origin and moving up straight line ABC, crosses point A at t = 0 with a velocity
12 m/s. B is 40 m away from A and C is 64 m from A. The
at t = 1s particle passes B at t = 4 seconds.
1 2
h  5 1  9.8 1  0.1 m
2
height above the ground = 20.1 m
v = 5 – 9.8 x 1 = – 4.8 m/s
40 m
Conclusion : Balloon is moving down but is still above the
origin. 64 m

at t = 2 s (i) After what time will the particle be at C ?

1 2 (ii) What is its velocity at C ?
h  5  2   9.8  2   9.6 m
2
height above the ground Sol. (i) Let the uniform acceleration of the particle be ‘a’. For
motion between A and B : u = 12 m/s, s = 40 m, t = 4
= 20 – 9.6 = 10.4
seconds.
v = 5 – 9.5 × 2 = – 14.6 m/s
1 2 1 2
using ; s = ut  at  40  12  4   a   4 
Conclusion : Balloon is below the origin and moving 2 2
downward. 2
 a = –1 m/s
(b) h = – 20 m
1
1
20  5 t   9.8 t 2 For motion between A and C 64  12 t   1 t 2
2 2

t = 2.59 sec. 2
 t  24 t  128  0  1  8  t  16   0

 t = 8 seconds and 16 seconds.

 KINEMATICS 84

height at t = 2.53 is
2
y2 = 19.8 (2.5) – 4.9 (2.5) = 18.9 m.
displacement = y2 – y1 = 18.9 m – 8.68 m = + 10.2 m.
2
(e) 15 = 19.8 t – 4.9 t
40 m
 t = 1.01 s, 3.03 s.
64 m At t = 1.01 s, ball is going up and at t = 3.303 s, it is
coming down.
(ii) Velocity of the particle at C :
Example - 45
At t = 8 seconds, velocity of the particle is
A train travels from rest at one station to rest at another
v8 sec  12   1  8  4 m / s. in the same straight line distance l. It moves over the
2
firtst part of the distance with an acceleration of f1 m/s
v16 sec  12   1  16  4 m / s. 2
and for the remainder with retardation of f2 m/s . Find
time taken to complete the journey.

Sol. f1 m/s2 – f2 m/s2

AB = l

Let AC be the distance covered with acceleration and

As the acceleration of the particle is negative, it will CB be the distance covered with retardation. Let v be
retard as it moves along ABC. At a point beyond C (say the velocity at C.
at D), the particle will come to rest momentarily, and
   AC  BC
then it will move backward with increasing speed.
v 2  0 2 02  v 2 2f f
Example - 44     v2  1 2 
2 f1 2 f 2 f1  f 2
A ball thrown up from the ground reaches a maximum
height of 20 m. Find : v0 0v
Total time = t = tAC + tCB = f  f
(a) its initial velocity; 1 2

(b) the time taken to reach the highest point;

1 1
(c) its velocity just before hitting the ground;  t  v  
 f1 f 2 
(d) its displacement between 0.5 s and 2.5 s;
(e) the time at which it is 15 m above the ground.
 f1  f 2 2 2  f1  f 2  
 v2 
Sol.
2 2
(a) Using v = u + 2as for upward motion, f12 f 22 f1 f 2
2 2
0 = u + 2 (–g) (+20)  u = 19.8 m/s. Graphical Approach : The v – t graph has two straight
segments of slopes f1 and –f2 as shown.
v  u 0  19.8
(b) t    2.02 s.
a 9.8
v (t)
(c) For the complete up–down trip,
2 2
v = u + 2 a (0) v
2 2
 v = u  v = – u = – 19.8 m/s. v
(d) height at t = 0.5 s is
2
y1 = 19.8 (0.5) – 4.9 (0.5) = 8.68 m. O t t
 85 KINEMATICS

Area under graph =  (c) average speed

1 2 dis tan ce travelled

 vt    v Average Speed 
2 t time taken

v v v v 2  1 1  46.7
t          2.46 m / s
tan  tan  f1 f 2 t  f1 f 2  19

2   f1  f 2  Example - 47
 t f1 f 2
A particle is dropped from the top of a tower of height
Example - 46
h and at the same moment, another particle is projected
upward from the bottom. They meet when the upper
A rubber ball is released from a height of 4.90 m above one has descended one third of the height of the tower.
the floor. It bounces repeatedly, always rising to Find the ratio of their velocities when they meet and
81/100 of the height through which it falls. the initial velocity of the lower.
(a) Ignoring the practical fact that the ball has a
finite size (in other words, treating the ball as Sol. Let t = time taken before colliding. Taking the line of
point mass that bounces an infinite number of motion as X–axis and ground as origin. The final
times), show that its total distance of travel is positions of the particles after time t are :
46.7 m.
For the upper :
(b) Determine the time required for the infinite
A
number of bounces. 1
x1  x i  ut  at 2
(c) Determine the average speed. 2

1 2
Sol. Let h = 4.9 m  x1  h  0  gt O u
2
(a) distance travelled

2
For the lower :
 81  81  
 h  2 h  h  ...............
100  100   1 2
x 2  x i  ut  at
2

 0.81  9.8  0.81 1 2

 h  2h   4.9   46.7 m
 1  0.81  0.19  x 2  0  ut  gt
2
(b) time required to fall through infinite bounces at time t, x1 = x2

2h 1 2 1
time required to fall through height h   h gt  ut  gt 2
g 2 2
 h = ut ...(1)
 total time
Also we have for the upper particle,
2h  2nh 2n 2 h 
  2   ...........  1
g  g g  s1   h
 
3
where n = 81/100
 total time 1 h
  gt 2  
2 3
2h 2h  n  2h
 2    1  18  19 sec 3
g g  1  n 
g  h  gt 2 ...(2)
2
KINEMATICS 86

3 h2 1 2
Combining (1) and (2), we get : h  g Sol. Using h  gt we have,
2 u2 2

3gh 1 2 2h AB 2 4
 u h AB  gt AC or t AC  
2 2 g 9.8
Final velocities are : v1 = 0 – gt and v2 = u – gt
v
v1 gt A
 v  u  gt 4m
2

B C
h 3
using u   gt 5m
t 2
= 0.9 second
v1 gt
 =–2
v2 3 BC 5.0
gt  gt Further, BC = vtAC or v    5.55 m / s
2 t AC 0.9
ratio is negative because v1 and v2 are opposite
Example - 50
Hence the ratio of speed is 2 : 1.
A particle is projected with a velocity of 20 m/s at
an angle of 30° to an inclined plane of inclination
Example - 48
30° to the horizontal. The particle hits the
There are two angles of projection for which the inclined plane at an angle of 30°, during its
orizontal range is the same. Show that the sum of journey. Find the
the maximum heights for these two angles is
(a) time of impact
independent of the angle of projection.
(b) the height of the point of impact from the
horizontal plane passing through the point of
Sol. There are two angles of projection  and 90° – for
projection.
which the horizontal range R is same.

u 2 sin 2  Sol. The particle hits the plane at 30° (the angle of
Now, H1  inclination of plane). It means particle hits the plane
2g
horizontally.

u 2 sin 2  90    u 2 cos2 

and H2   u
2g 2g
30°
Thererore,
30°
u2 u2
H1  H 2 
2g

sin 2   cos 2  
2g
 T u sin 
(a) t  2  g
Clearly the sum of the height for the two angles of
projection is independent of the angles of projection. 20 sin  30  30 
 = 1.76 second
9.8
Example - 49 u 2 sin 2 
(b) H 
A ball rolls off the edge of a horizontal table top 4 m 2g
high. If it strikes the floor at a point 5 m
2
horizontally away from the edge of the table, what  20   sin 2 60
  1.53 m
was its speed at the instant it left the table. 2  9.8
 87 KINEMATICS

Example - 51 Sol. VmG = 6 m/s, VcG = 8 m/s.

A car accelerating at the rate of 2 m/s2 from rest If the velocity of running man relative to the cyclist = Vmc
from origin is carrying a man at the rear end who Vmc = VmG – VcG = 6 – 8 = – 2 m/s
has a gun in his hand. The car is always moving i.e., to the cyclist it will appear that the man is running
along positive x–axis. At t = 4 s, the man fires from with a speed of 2 m/s in backward direction.
the gun and the bullet hits a bird at t = 8 s. The bird
Example - 53
has a position vector 40 ˆi + 80 ˆj + 40kˆ . Find the
velocity of projection of the bullet. Take the y–axis A particle A is moving towards +X-axis with speed
in the horizontal plane. (g = 10 m/s2) 7 m/s. Another particle B is going towards -X-axis
with speed 3 m/s. Find the velocity B relative to A.

  

Sol. VBA  VB  VA = (–3 m/s) – (+7 m/s) = –10 m/s.
i.e. B appears to move towards -X-axis with 10 m/s if
observed from A.
Example - 54
Sol. Let velocity of bullet be,
 Two trains, one travelling at 54 kph and the other
v  v x ˆi  v y ˆj  v z zˆ at 72kph, are headed towards each other on a level
track. When they are two kilometers apart, both
At t = 4 sec, x co–ordinate of car is
drivers simultaneously apply their brakes. If their
1 2 1 brakes produces equal retardation in both the
xc  at   2 16  16 m trains at a rate of 0.15 m/s2, determine whether
2 2
there is a collision or not.
x–coordinate of bird is xb = 40 m

 x b  x c  v x  8  4  or 40 = 16 + 4vx Sol. Speed of first train is = 54 kph = 15 m/s

Speed of second train is = 72 kph = 20 m/s
 vx = 6 m/s
As both the trains are heated towards each other,
Similarly, yb = yc + vy (8 – 4)
relative velocity of one train with respect to other is
or 80 = 0 + 4 vy given as
or vy = 20 m/s vr = 15 + 20 = 35 m/s
and
Both trains are retarded by acceleration of 0.15 m/s2,
1 2 relative retardation is
z b  zc  vc  8  4   g  8  4 
2 ar = 0.15 + 0.15 = 0.3 m/s2

1 Now we assume one train is at rest and other is

or 40  0  4v z   5  16 coming at 35 m/s retarded by 0.3 m/s2 is at a distance
2
of two kilometer. The maximum distance travelled
or vz = 20 m/s2 by the moving train while retarding is
 Velocity of projection of bullet
2
 v 2r  35 

v  6 ˆi  20 ˆj  20 kˆ m / s  s max  
2a r 2  0.3
 2041.66 m

Example - 52 It is more than 2km, which shows that it will hit the
second train.
A man is running down the side of a road with speed
of 6 m/s. A cyclist is going in the same direction
with speed of 8 m/s.
KINEMATICS 88

Example - 55 Thus, the particle at A, appears to approach B, in a

direction making an angle of tan–1 (5/4) with its
Two particles move simultaneously from two points
direction of motion.
A and B, 300m apart. The particle at A, starts
towards, B with a velocity of 25 m/s and that at B, Let us draw a line from A, as AC,
moves normal to the former with a velocity of 20 m/s. such that BCA is equal to .
Find the relative velocity of the particle at A, w.r.t.
Thus, to B, A appears to move along AC. From B,
to that at B. Determine when are they closest to
draw a perpendicular to AC as BM.
each other.
BM is the shortest distance between them.
 
Sol. Let vA and vB be the respective velocities of the 4
 BM = AB cos = 300 ×  187.41m
particles at A and B. 41
The relative velocity of particle at A. w.r.t. to Also, AM = AB sin = 234.26 m
that at B is given by
 time taken to cover a distance
   
vA  v B  vA    vB  AB = 234.26 m with a velocity of 32.02 ms
234.26
  7.32 sec.
32.02

Example - 56
A B
V A = 25 m/s A man standing on a road has to hold his umbrella
300 m
at 30° with the vertical to keep the rain away. He
throws the umbrella and starts running at 10 km/
(see figure). From triangle law of velocities if hr. He finds that rain drop are hitting his head
    vertically. Find the speed of raindrops with respect
OP and PQ r epr esent v A and  v B , then the
to (a) road (b) the moving man.
 
required relative velocity v R is given by OQ.
Sol. Given that the velocity of rain drops with respect to

| v R |  252  20 2  625  400  32.02 m / s road is making an angle 30° with the vertical, and
the velocity of the man is 10kph, also the velocity of
25 rain drops with respect to main is vertical. We have
VA P
O   
–VR VRM  VR  VM

VB = 20 m/s
20   
VR hence VR  VRM  VM

The situation is shown in velocity traingle in fig.

Q
vM
25 5
If PQO  , then tan      tan 1   30°
20 4 vRM
vR
300 m
A B

It shows clearly that,

M vR = vM cosec  = 10 × 2 = 20kph

and vRM = VM cos = 10  3  10 3 kph.

C
 89 KINEMATICS

Example - 57 
In the first case v m = velocity of man  3iˆ

A man crosses the river in shortest time at an angle   

 vrm  v r  v m   a  3 ˆi  b ˆj
 = 60° to the direction of flow of water. If the speed
of water is vw = 5 km/hr, find the speed of the man. It seems to be in vertical direction.
Hence, a – 3 = 0 or a = 3
Sol. Refering to the theory, we know that for minimum

time of crossing the man should head perpendicular In the second case v m  6 ˆi
to the shore

   vm   a  6  ˆi  b ˆj  3iˆ  b ˆj
 vmw  v w
This seems to be at 45° with vertical.
Therefore,
Hence, |b| = 3
v
cos   w Therefor e, fro m eq. (i) sp eed of rain is
vm
 2 2 km
 cos 60° | vr |   3   3  3 2
hr
4 Example - 59
  vm  8 km / hr
mw
A man swims at an angle  = 120° to the direction
Example - 58
of water flow with a speed vmw = 5km/hr relative to
To a man walking at the rate of 3 km/hr the rain water. If the speed of water vw = 3km/hr, find the
appears to fall vertically. When he increases his speed speed of the man.
to 6 km/hr it appears to meet him at an angle of 45°
with vertical. Find the speed of rain.   
Sol. vmw  v m  v w
  
Sol. Let ˆi and ˆj be the unit vectors in horizontal and v m  v mw  v w

vertical directions respectively  

 vm  | vmw  v w |  v 2mw  v 2w  2vmw .v w cos 

Let velocity of rain be vr  a ˆi  b ˆj ...(i)
2 2
 vm  5  3  2  5  3 cos120
Then speed of rain will be | v |  a 2  b 2 ...(ii)

 v m  25  9  15  19 m / sec.
 KINEMATICS 90

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

MOTION IN ONE DIMENSION 8. An aeroplane moves 400 m towards the north, 300 m
towards west and then 1200 m vertically upwards, then
Kinematics (Introduction) its displacement from the initial position is :
1. A body moves 6 m north. 8 m east and 10m vertically (a) 1600 m (b) 1800 m
upwards, what is its resultant displacement from initial (c) 1500 m (d) 1300 m
position (only magnitude) Constant Speed Motion
9. If a car covers 2/5th of the total distance with 1 speed and
(a) 10 2 m (b) 10m
3/5th distance with 2 then average speed is
10 1 1   2
(c) m (d) 10 × 2m (a) 1 2 (b)
2 2 2
2. An athlete completes one round of a circular track of radius
R in 40 seconds. What will be his displacement at the end 21 2 51 2
(c)    (d) 3  2
of 2 minutes 20 seconds 1 2 1 2

(a) Zero (b) 2R 10. A person completes half of its his journey with speed 1 and
(c) 2R (d) 7R rest half with speed 2. The averge speed of the person is
3. A boy stops after travelling 3 km towards east and then 1   2 21 2
goes 4 km towards north along a plane road. The resultant (a)   (b)     
2 1 2
displacement of the boy is (only magnitude)
(a) 7 km (b) 4 km 1 2
(c)      (d)   1 2
(c) 5 km (d) 15 km 1 2

4. If the displacement of a particle is zero, then what can we 11. A car moving on a straight road covers one third of the
say about its distance covered distance with 20 km/hr and the rest with 60 km/hr. The
(a) It must be zero (b) It cannot be zero average speed is
(c) It is negative (d) It may or may not be zero (a) 40 km/hr (b) 80 km/hr
5. The location of a particle has changed. What can we say about 2
the displacement and the distance covered by the particle (c) 46 km/hr (d) 36 km/hr
3
(a) Both cannot be zero
12. A car travels first half the distance between two places
(b) One of the two may be zero with a speed of 30 km/h and the remaining half with a
(c) Both must be zero speed of 50 km/h. The average speed of the car is :
(d) If one is positive, the other is negative and vice versa (a) 45 km/h (b) 42.8 km/h
6. A man goes 10 m towards North, then 20 m towards east (c) 37.5 km/h (d) 48 km/h
then displacement is 13. If displacement of a particle is zero, the distance covered :
(a) 22.5 m (b) 25 m (a) must be zero
(b) may or may not be zero
(c) 25.5 m (d) 30 m
(c) cannot be zero
7. A body moves over one fourth of a circular arc in a circle
(d) depends upon the particle
of radius r. The magnitude of distance travelled and
displacement will be respectively 14. A body covers first one-third of the distance with a velocity
20 ms–1, the second one-third with a velocity of 30 ms–1
r r and last one-third with a velocity of 40 ms–1. The average
(a) ,r 2 (b) ,r
2 4 velocity is nearly :
r (a) 28 m/s (b) 38 m/s
(c) r, (d) r, r
2 (c) 18 m/s (d) 8 m/s
 91 KINEMATICS

Horizontal Motion
1 2 1 2
15. Find the total displacement of a body in 8 s starting from (a) gt (b) ut  gt
2 2
rest with an acceleration of 20 cm/s2 :
(c) (u – gt)t (d) ut
(a) 64 m (b) 64 cm
24. A man drops a ball downside from the roof of a tower of
(c) 640 cm (d) 0.064 m height 400 meters. At the same time another ball is thrown
16. A particle covers 150 m in 8th second starting from rest, its upside with a velocity 50 meter/sec. from the surface of
acceleration is : the tower, then they will meet at which height from the
surface of the tower
(a) 15 m/s2 (b) 20 ms2
(a) 100 meters (b) 320 meters
(c) 10 m/s2 (d) 8 m/s2
(c) 80 meters (d) 240 meters
17. By what velocity a ball be projected vertically upwards
25. A particle is thrown vertically upwards. If its velocity at
so that the distance covered in 5th second is twice of that half of the maximum height is 10 m/s, then maximum height
covered in 6th second ? (g = 10 m/s2) 2
attained by it is (Take g = 10 m/s )
(a) 40 m/s (b) 65 m/s (a) 8 m (b) 10 m
(c) 50 m/s (d) 60 m/s (c) 12 m (d) 16 m
18. A car accelerates from rest at constant rate for first 10 s 26. A body freely falling from the rest has a velocity ‘v’ after
and covers a distance x. It covers a distance y in next 10 it falls through a height ‘h’. The distance it has to fall
s at the same acceleration. Which of the following is true? down for its velocity to become double, is
(a) x = 3y (b) y = 3x (a) 2h (b) 4h
(c) x = y (d) y = 2x (c) 6h (d) 8h
19. The displacement of body is given to be proportional to 27. A body sliding on a smooth inclined plane requires 4
the cube of time elapsed. The magnitude of the seconds to reach the bottom starting from rest at the top.
acceleration of the body is : How much time does it take to cover one-fourth distance
starting from rest at the top
(a) decreasing with time (b) increasing with time
(a) 1 s (b) 2 s
(c) constant but not zero (d) zero
(c) 4 s (d) 16 s
20. Body A starts from rest with an acceleration a1. After 2 s
28. By which velocity a ball be projected vertically upward so
another body B starts from rest with an acceleration a2. If th
that the distance covered by it in 5 second is twice the
they travel equal distances in 5 s after the start of A, the th 2
distance it covers in its 6 second (g = 10 m/s )
ratio a1 : a2 will be equal to :
(a) 58.8 m/s (b) 49 m/s
(a) 9 : 25 (b) 5 : 7
(c) 65 m/s (d) 19.6 m/s
(c) 5 : 9 (d) 7 : 9 29. A body falls from rest, its velocity at the end of first
Vertical Motion (Free Fall) second is (g = 32 ft/sec)
21. If a body is thrown up with the velocity of 15 m/s then (a) 16 ft/sec (b) 32 ft/sec
2
maximum height attained by the body is (g = 10 m/s ) (c) 64 ft/sec (d) 24 ft/sec
(a) 11.25 m (b) 16.2 m 30. A stone thrown upward with a speed u from the top of
(c) 24.5 m (d) 7.62 m the tower reaches the ground with a velocity 3u. The
height of the tower is
22. A body falls from rest in the gravitational field of the earth.
The distance travelled in the fifth second of its motion is (a) 3u2/g (b) 4u2/g
2
(g = 10 m/s ) (c) 6u2/g (d) 9u2/g
(a) 25 m (b) 45 m 31. A stone is shot straight upward with a speed of 20 m/sec
(c) 90 m (d) 125 m from a tower 200 m high. The speed with which it strikes
the ground is approximately
23. If a ball is thrown vertically upwards with speed u, the
distance covered during the last t seconds of its ascent is (a) 60 m/sec (b) 65 m/sec
(c) 70 m/sec (d) 75 m/sec
KINEMATICS 92

32. A body projected vertically upwards with a velocity u initial velocity v0. The distance travelled by the particle in
returns to the starting point in 4 seconds. If g = 10 m/sec2, time t will be :
the value of u is
1 3 1
(a) 5 m/sec (b) 10 m/sec (a) v 0 t  bt (b) v 0 t  bt 3
6 3
(c) 15 m/sec (d) 20 m/sec
1 1 2
33. A body is thrown vertically up from the ground. It reaches (c) v 0 t  bt 2 (d) v 0 t  bt
a maximum height in 5sec. After what time it will reach the 3 2
ground from the maximum height position 40. A particle moves along a straight line such that its
(a) 1.2 sec (b) 5 sec displacement at any time t is given by s = 3t3 + 7t2 + 14t + 5
(c) 10 sec (d) 25 sec The acceleration of the particle at t = 1s is :
34. From the top of a tower, a particle is thrown vertically 2 2
(a) 18 m/s (b) 32 m/s
downwards with a velocity of 10 m/s. The ratio of the 2 2
(c) 29 m/s (d) 24 m/s
distances, covered by it in the 3rd and 2nd seconds of the
motion is (Take g = 10 m/s2) 41. The displacement x of a particle moving along a straight
(a) 5 : 7 (b) 7 : 5 line at time t is given by
(c) 3 : 6 (d) 6 : 3 x = a0 + a1t + a2t2
35. The water drops fall at regular intervals from a tap 5 m The acceleration of the particle is :
above the ground. The third drop is leaving the tap at the
instant the first drop touches the ground. How far above (a) 4a2 (b) 2a2
the ground is the second drop at that instant ? (c) 2a1 (d) a2
(a) 1.25 m (b) 2.50 m 42. Mark the correct statements :
(c) 3.75 m (d) 4.00 m (a) The magnitude of the velocity of a particle is equal to
36. A stone is dropped from certain height which can reach its speed.
the ground in 5 s. If the stone is stopped after 3 s of its fall (b) The magnitude of average velocity in an interval is
and then allowed to fall again, then the time taken by the
equal to its average speed in that interval.
stone to reach the ground for the remaining distance is :
(c) It is possible to have a situation in which the speed of a
(a) 3 s (b) 4 s
particle is always zero but the average speed is not zero.
(c) 2 s (d) none of these
(d) It is possible to have a situation in which the speed of
37. A ball is dropped from a bridge 122.5 m high. After the
the particle is never zero but the average speed in an
first ball has fallen for 2 s, a second ball is thrown straight
down after it, what must the initial velocity of the second interval is zero.
ball be, so that both the balls hit the surface on water at 43. Of the following situations, which one is impossible ?
the same time ? (a) A body is having zero velocity and non–zero
(a) 26.1 m/s (b) 9.8 m/s acceleration
(c) 55.5 m/s (d) 49 m/s (b) A body is having constant acceleration and variable
38. A body is released from the top of the tower H metre high. velocity
It takes t second to reach the ground. Where is the body (c) A body is having constant speed and variable
t/2s after release ? acceleration
(a) At 3H/4 m from the ground (d) A body is having constant velocity and variable
(b) At H/2 m from the ground acceleration
(c) At H/6 m from the ground 44. The displacement of a body at any time t after starting is
(d) At H/4 m from the ground given by s = 15t – 0.4t2. The velocity of the body will be 7
ms–1 after time :
Calculus Based Problem
(a) 20 s (b) 15s
39. The acceleration of a particle is increasing linearly with
time t as bt. The particle starts from the origin with an (c) 10 s (d) 5 s
 93 KINEMATICS

45. A particle moves along the X–axis according to the 51. A point moves in a straight line so that its displacement is x
2
equation x = 6 t , where x is in metres and t is in seconds. m at time t sec, given by x2 = t2 + 1. Its acceleration in m/s2 at
Then time t sec is :
2
(a) the acceleration of the particle is 6 m/s
1 1 1
(b) the particle follows a parabolic path (a) (b)  2
x x x
(c) each second the velocity of the particle changes by 12 m/s
t 1
(d) none of the above (c)  (d) 3
x2 x
46. An object starts from rest at x = 0 when t = 0. The object
52. A particle moves in space such that
moves in the x direction with positive velocity after t = 0. The
instantaneous velocity and average velocity are related by x = 2t3 + 3t + 4 ; y = t2 + 4t – 1 ;
z = 2 sin t
dx x
(a)  where x, y, z are measured in meter and t in second. The
dt t
acceleration of the particle at t = 3s is
dx x
(b)  (a) 36 i  2 j  k ms–2
dt t

dx x (b) 36 i  2 j  k ms-2

(c) 
(c) 36 i  2j ms–2
dt t

dx x
(d) can be smaller than, greater than or equal to (d) 12i  2j ms–2
dt t
47. The position of a particle along x-axis at time t is given by 53. The velocity of a particle moving on the x-axis is given by v
x = 1 + t – t2. The distance travelled by the particle in first = x2 + x where v is in m/s and x is in m. Find its acceleration
2 seconds is in m/s2 when passing through the point x = 2m
(a) 1m (b) 2m (a) 0 (b) 5
(c) 2.5 m (d) 3m (c) 11 (d) 30
48. A particle moves along a straight line such that at time t its Graphs
displacement from a fixed point O on the line is 3t2 – 2. The 54. The graph of displacement v/s time is
velocity of the particle when t = 2 is:
(a) 8 ms–1 (b) 4 ms–1
S
(c) 12 ms–1
(d) 0
t
49. Temperature of a body varies with time as T = (T0 + t2 + 
sint)K, where T0 is the temperature in Kelvin at t = 0 sec. &  =
2/. K/s2 &  = – 4 K, then rate of change of temperature at t = Its corresponding velocity-time graph will be
sec. is
(a) 8 K (b) 80C V V
(c) 8K/sec (d) 80C/sec
(a) (b)
50. A particle moves in a straight line, according to the law x =
t t

 t
4a [t + asin   ], where x is its position in meters, t in sec.
a
V V
& a is some constants, then the velocity is zero at
(c) (d)
(a) x = 4a2meters (b) t =  sec.
t t
(c) t = 0 sec. (d) none
KINEMATICS 94

55. A train moves from one station to another in 2 hours time.

(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 3
Its speed-time graph during this motion is shown in the
figure. The maximum acceleration during the journey is
(c) 3 :1 (d) 1 : 3

59. The graph below shows the velocity versus time graph
100 for a body
Speed in km/hours

80
D
60 
40
20 B C L t
N M E
A
0.25 0.75 1.00 1.5 2.00
Time in hours

Which of the following graphs represents the corresponding

(a) 140 km h–2 (b) 160 km h–2 acceleration versus time graphs
(c) 100 km h–2 (d) 120 km h–2 a a
56. The adjoining curve represents the velocity-time graph
of a particle, its acceleration values along OA, AB and BC
(a) t (b) t
in metre/sec2 are respectively

A B a a
10
Velocity (m/sec)

5 (c) t (d) t

O 10 20 30 40
Time (sec)
60. The displacement-time graph of a moving particle is shown
in figure. The instantaneous velocity of the particle is
negative at the point :
(a) 1, 0, – 0.5 (b) 1, 0, 0.5
(c) 1, 1, 0.5 (d) 1, 0.5, 0
57. Which of the following graph represents uniform motion

s
s

(a) (b)

t t (a) C (b) D
(c) E (d) F
s Approach and Separation velocity
s
61. A bus starts from rest with an acceleration of 1 m/s2. A
(c) (d) man who is 48 m behind the bus starts with a uniform
t velocity of 10 m/s. Then the minimum time after which the
t man will catch the bus :
58. The displacement-time graph for two particles A and B are (a) 4 s (b) 10 s
straight lines inclined at angles of 30o and 60o with the time (c) 12 s (d) 8 s
axis. The ratio of velocities of vA : vB is
 95 KINEMATICS

MOTION IN TWO DIMENSION (c) The force with which he pushes the ground and his
speed
General Projectile
62. In a projectile motion, velocity at maximum height is (d) The direction in which he leaps and the weight
69. For a projectile, the ratio of maximum height reached to
u cos 
(a) (b) u cos  the squareof flight time is (g = 10 ms–2)
2
(a) 5 : 4 (b) 5 : 2
u sin  (c) 5 : 1 (d) 10 : 1
(c) (d) None of these
2
70. A cricketer can throw a ball to a maximum horizontal
63. A body is thrown at angle 30o to the horizontal with the distance of 100 m. The speed with which he throws the
velocity of 30 m/s. After 1 sec, its velocity will be (in m/ ball is (to the nearest integer)
s) (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 30 ms–1 (b) 42 ms–1
(a) 10 7 (b) 700 10 (c) 32 ms–1 (d) 35 ms–1
(c) 100 7 (d) 40 71. If two bodies are projected at 30o and 60o respectively, with
the same speed, then
64. A projectile is fired at 30o to the horizontal. The vertical
component of its velocity is 80 ms–1. Its time of flight is T. (a) Their ranges are same
What will be the velocity of the projectile at t = T/2 (b) Their heights are same

(a) 80 ms–1 (b) 80 3 ms–1 (c) Their times of flight are same
(d) All of these
(c) (80/ 3 ) ms–1 (d) 40 ms–1
72. A particle covers 50 m distance when projected with an
65. For a given velocity, a projectile has the same range R for initial speed. On the same surface it will cover a distance,
two angles of projection if t1 and t2 are the times of flight when projected with double the initial speed
in the two cases then
(a) 100 m (b) 150 m
(a) t1t 2  R 2 (b) t1t 2  R (c) 200 m (d) 250 m
1 1 73. The speed of a projectile at the highest point
(c) t1t 2  (d) t1t 2 
R R2 1
becomes times its initial speed. The horizontal range
66. If for a given angle of projection, the horizontal range is 2
doubled, the time of flight becomes of the projectile will be
(a) 4 times (b) 2 times
u2 u2
(c) (a) (b)
2 times (d) 1/ 2 times g 2g
67. A boy playing on the roof of a 10m high building throws
a ball with a speed of 10 m/s at an angle of 30 o with the u2 u2
(c) (d)
horizontal. How far from the throwing point will the 3g 4g
ball be at the height of 10 m from the ground (g = 10 m/ 74. A projectile is projected with initial velocity

s2, sin 30o =

1
, cos30 
3
) (6iˆ  8j)m
ˆ / sec. If g = 10 ms–2, then horizontal range is
2 2
(a) 4.8 metre (b) 9.6 metre
(a) 8.66 m (b) 5.20 m
(c) 19.2 metre (d) 14.0 metre
(c) 4.33 m (d) 2.60 m
75. A projectile thrown with an initial speed u and angle of
68. Which of the following sets of factors will affect the
projection 15o to the horizontal has a range R. If the same
horizontal distance covered by an athlete in a long–jump
projectile is thrown at an angle of 45o to the horizontal
event
with speed 2u, its range will be
(a) Speed before he jumps and his weight
(a) 12 R (b) 3 R
(b) The direction in which he leaps and the initial speed
(c) 8 R (d) 4 R
KINEMATICS 96

76. The velocity at the maximum height of a projectile is half 84. A man projects a coin upwards from the gate of a uniformly
of its initial velocity of projection u. Its range on the moving train. The path of coin for the man will be
horizontal plane is
(a) Parabolic
2 2
(a) 3u / 2g (b) u /3g (b) Inclined straight line
(c) 3u2/2g (d) 3u2/g (c) Vertical straight line
77. A projectile is thrown from a point in a horizontal place (d) Horizontal straight line
such that its horizontal and vertical velocity component 85. In a projectile motion, the velocity
are 9.8 m/s and 19.6 m/s respectively. Its horizontal range is
(a) Is always perpendicular to the acceleration
(a) 4.9 m (b) 9.8 m
(b) Is never perpendicular to the acceleration
(c) 19.6 m (d) 39.2 m
(c) Is perpendicular to the acceleration for one instant only
78. A ball thrown by one player reaches the other in 2 sec.
(d) Is perpendicular to the acceleration for two instants
the maximum height attained by the ball above the point
of projection will be about 86. An aeroplane is moving with a horizontal velocity u at a
height h above the ground. If a packet is dropped from it
(a) 10 m (b) 7.5 m
the speed of the packet when it reaches the ground will be
(c) 5 m (d) 2.5 m
1/ 2
79. If the initial velocity of a projectile be doubled. Keeping (a) (u 2  2gh)1/ 2 (b) (2 gh)
the angle of projection same, the maximum height reached
(c) (u 2  2 gh)1/ 2 (d) 2 gh
by it will
(a) Remain the same (b) Be doubled 87. A particle is thrown upward with a speed u at an angle 
with the horizontal. When the particle makes an angle 
(c) Be quadrupled (d) Be halved
with the horizontal, its speed changes to v, then
80. The maximum horizontal range of a projectile is 400 m.
The maximum height attained by it will be (a) v  u cos  cos  (b) v  u cos  sec 

(a) 100 m (b) 200 m (c) v  u cos  (d) v = u sec  cos 

(c) 400 m (d) 800 m 88. A cricket ball is thrown with a velocity of 15 m/s at an
81. Two bodies are projected with the same velocity. If one is angle of 30o with the horizontal. The time of flight of the
projected at an angle of 30o and the other at an angle of ball will be (g = 10 m/s2)
60o to the horizontal, the ratio of the maximum heights (a) 1.5 s (b) 2.5 s
reached is
(c) 3.5 s (d) 4.5 s
(a) 3 : 1 (b) 1 : 3
89. A stone is thrown at an angle  to the horizontal reaches a
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 : 1 maximum height h. The time of flight of the stone is
82. If time of flight of a projectile is 10 seconds. Range is 500
m. The maximum height attained by it will be (a) (2h sin ) /g (b) 2 (2h sin ) /g

(a) 125 m (b) 50 m

(c) 2 (2h) /g (d) (2h) /g
(c) 100 m (d) 150 m
90. Which of the following is largest, when the height attained
83. At the top of the trajectory of a projectile, the directions
by the projectile is the largest
of its velocity and acceleration are
(a) Range
(a) Perpendicular to each other
(b) Time of flight
(b) Parallel to each other
(c) Angle of projectile with vertical
(c) Inclined to each other at an angle of 45o
(d) None of these
(d) Antiparallel to each other
 97 KINEMATICS

Rain man and River boat problem 93. A boat crosses a river of width 1 km along the shortest
91. A river is flowing from east to west at a speed of 5 m/min. path in 15 mintues. If the speed of boat in still water is 5
A man on south bank of river, capable of swimming 10 m/ km/hr, then what is the speed of the river ?
min in still water, wants to swim across the river in the
(a) 1 km/hr (b) 3 km/hr
shortest time; he should swim :
(a) due north (c) 2 km/hr (d) 5 km/hr

(b) due north-east Approach and Separation Velocity

(c) due north-east with double the speed of river 94. A 100 m long train at 15 m/s overtakes a man running on
(d) none of the above the platform in the same direction in 10 s. How long the
92. A steamer moves with velocity 3 km/h in and against the train will take to cross the man if he was running in the
direction of river water whose velocity is 2 km/h. Calculate opposite direction ?
the total time for total journey if the boat travels 2 km in (a) 7 s (b) 5 s
the direction of steam and then back to its place :
(c) 3 s (d) 1 s
(a) 2 hrs (b) 2.5 hrs
(c) 2.4 hrs (d) 3 hrs
 KINEMATICS 98

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. Speeds of two identical cars are u and 4u at a specific instant. given by (2003)
The ratio of the respective distances at which the two cars
are stopped from that instant is (2002) (a) 3t  2   2 (b) 3t 2  2  2
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 4
(c) t 2  2   2 (d)  2  2
(c) 1 : 8 (d) 1 : 16
   
2. A ball whose kinetic energy is E, is projected at an angle of 8. If A  B  B  A, then the angle between A and B is
45° to the horizontal. The kinetic energy of the ball at the
highest point of its flight will be (2002) (a)  (b) /3 (2004)

E (c) /2 (d) /4

(a) E (b) 9. A ball is released from the top of a tower of height h metre.
2
It takes T second to reach the ground. What is the position
(c) E (d) zero
2 T
of the ball in s ? (2004)
3. From a building two balls A and B are thrown such that A is 3
thrown upwards and B downwards (both vertically). If vA
and vB are their respective velocities on reaching the ground, (a) h/9 m from the ground
then (2002) (b) 7h/9 m from the ground
(a) vB > vA
(c) 8h/9 m from the ground
(b) vA = vB
(d) 17h/18 m from the ground
(c) vA > vB
10. An automobile travelling with a speed of 60 km/h, can brake to
(d) their velocities depend on their masses
stop within a distance of 20 m. If the car is going twice as fast, i.e,
4. If a body losses half of its velocity on penetrating 3 cm in a 120 km/h, the stopping distance will be (2004)
wooden block, then how much will it penetrate more before
coming to rest ? (2002) (a) 20 m (b) 40 m

(a) 1 cm (b) 2 cm (c) 60 m (d) 80 m

(c) 3 cm (d) 4 cm 11. A ball is thrown from a point with a speed v0 at an angle of
5. A car moving with a speed of 50 km/h, can be stopped by projection . From the same point and at the same instant a
brakes after at least 6 m. If the same car is moving at a speed of person starts running with a constant speed v0/2 to catch
100 km/h, the minimum stopping distance is (2003) the ball. Will the person be able to catch the ball ? If yes,
what should be the angle of projection ? (2004)
(a) 12m (b) 18 m
(a) yes, 60° (b) yes, 30°
(c) 24 m (d) 6 m
(c) no (d) yes, 45°
6. A boy playing on the roof of a 10 m high building throws a
ball with a speed of 10 m/s at an angle of 30° with the 12. A projectile can have the same range R for two angles of
horizontal. How far from the throwing point will the ball be projection. If T1 and T2 be the times of flights in the two
at the height of 10 m from the ground ? cases, then the product of the two time of flights is directly
proportional to (2004-05)
2 1 3 (a) 1/R
2
(b) 1/R
[g = 10 m/s , sin 30  , cos 30  ] (2003)
2 2 (c) R (d) R
2

(a) 5.20 m (b) 4.33 m 2

13. The relation between time t and distance x is t = ax + bx,
(c) 2.60 m (d) 8.66 m where a and b are constants. The acceleration is (2005)
2 3
7. The co–ordinates of a moving particle at any time t are given (a) –2 abv (b) 2 bv
3 3 3 2
by x = t and y = t . The speed of the particle at time t is (c) –2av (d) 2 av
 99 KINEMATICS

14. A car, starting from rest, accelerates at the rate f through a instant another body passes through x = 0 moving in the
distance s, Then continues at constant speed for time t and positive x-direction with a constant speed. The position of
then decelerates at the rate f/2 to come to rest. If the total the first body is given by x1(t) after time t and that of the
distance travelled is 15 s, then (2005) second body by x2(t) after the same time interval. Which of
1 2 the following graphs correctly describes (x1 – x2) as a function
(a) s = ft (b) s  ft
of time ? (2008)
6
1 2 1 2 (x1 – x2) (x1 – x2)
(c) s  ft (d) s  ft
72 4
15. A particle is moving eastwards with a velocity of 5 m/s. In 10
s the velocity changes to 5 m/s northwards. The average
(a) (b)
acceleration in this time is (2005)
(a) zero t t
O O
1
(b) ms 2 towards north (x1 – x2)
2 (x1 – x2)
1
(c) ms 2 towards north–east
2
1 (c) (d)
(d) ms 2 towards north–west
2 t
O t
16. A parachutist after bailing out falls 50 m without friction. O
When parachute opens, it decelerates at 2 ms–2. He reaches
the ground with a speed of 3 ms–1. At what height, did he 21. A particle has an initial velocity 3iˆ  4ˆj and an acceleration
bail out ? (2005) of 0.4iˆ  0.3jˆ . Its speed after 10 s is (2009)
(a) 91 m (b) 182 m
(a) 10 unit (b) 7 2 unit
(c) 293 m (d) 111 m
(c) 7 units (d) 8.5 unit
17. A particle located at x = 0 at time t = 0, starts moving along

the positive x-direction with a velocity v that varies as  
22. A particle is moving with velocity v  k yiˆ  xjˆ , where k
v   x . The displacement of the particle varies with time is a constant. The general equation for its path is (2010)
as (2006) 2
(a) y = x + constant
2
(b) y = x + constant
2 2
(a) t2 (b) t (c) xy = constant (d) y = x + constant
(c) t1/2 (d) t3 23. An object, moving with a speed of 6.25 m/s, is decelerated
2
18. The velocity of a particle is v = v0 + gt + ft . If its position is dv
at a rate given by  2.5 v where v is the
x = 0 at t = 0, then its displacement after unit time (t = 1) is dt
instantaneous speed. The time taken by the object, to come
g f
(a) v0 + 2g + 3f (b) v0   (2007) to rest, would be (2011)
2 3
(a) 2 s (b) 4 s
g (c) 8 s (d) 1 s
(c) v0 + g + f (d) v0   f
2 24. A water fountain on the ground sprinkles water all around
19. A particle is projected at 60° to the horizontal with a kinetic it. If the speed of water coming out of the fountain is v, the
energy K. The kinetic energy at the highest point is (2007) total area around the fountain that gets wet is (2011)
(a) K (b) zero
v4  v4
(a)  (b)
K K g2 2 g2
(c) (d)
4 2
20. A body is at rest at x = 0. At t = 0, it starts moving in the v2 v2
(c)  (d) 
positive x-direction with a constant acceleration. At the same g2 g
KINEMATICS 100

25. A body can throw a stone up to a maximum height of 10 m. 28. A body is thrown vertically upwards. Which one of the
The maximum horizontal distance that the boy can throw following graphs correctly represent the velocity vs time?
the same stone up to will be (2012) (2017)
(a) 20 2 m (b) 10 m

(c) 10 2 m (d) 20 m
26. From a tower of height H, a particle is thrown vertically (a) (b)
upwards with a speed u. The time taken by the particle, to
hit the ground, is n times that taken by it to reach the
highest point of its path.
The relation between H, u and n is : (2014)
2 2
(a) g H = (n – 2) u (c) (d)
(b) 2 g H = nu2 (n – 2)
(c) g H = (n – 2) u2
(d) 2 g H = n2u2 29. An object is dropped from a height h from the ground.
27. Two stones are thrown up simultaneously from the edge Every time it hits the ground it looses 50% of its kinetic
of a cliff 240 m high with initial speed of 10 m/s and 40 m/ energy. The total distance covered as t is : (2017)
s respectively. Which of the following graph best (a) 2h (b) 
represents the time variation of relative position of the
5 8
second stone with respect to the first ? (c) h (d) h
3 3
(Assume stones do not rebound after hitting the ground
and neglect air resistance, take g = 10 m/s2) 30. All the graphs below are intended to represent the same
(The figures are schematic and not drawn to scale)(2015) motion. One of them does it incorrectly. Pick it up.(2018)

(a) (b)
(a)

(c) (d)

(b)
31. The position of a projectile launched from the origin at t =

0 is given by r  40i  50j m at t = 2s. If the projectile
 
was launched at an angle from the horizontal, then  is
(take g = 10 ms–2). (2014 Online Set-1)
(c)
(a) tan–1 2/3 (b) tan–1 3/2
(c) tan–1 7/4 (d) tan–1 4/5
32. A person climbs up a stalled escalator in 60 s. If standing
on the same but escalator running with constant velocity
(d) he takes 40 s. How much time is taken by the person to
walk up the moving escalator? (2014 Online Set-2)
(a) 45 s (b) 37 s
(c) 24 s (d) 27 s
101 KINEMATICS

33. The initial speed of a bullet fired from a rifle is 630 m/s. The 38. The velocity-time graphs of a car and a scooter are shown
rifle is fired at the centre of a target 700 m away at the same in the figure. (i) The difference between the distance
level as the target. How far above the centre of the target travelled by the car and the scooter in 15 s and (ii) the time
the rifle must be aimed in order to hit the target?
at which the car will catch up with the scooter are,
(2014 Online Set-3)
respectively. (2018 Online Set-1)
(a) 9.8 m (b) 4.2 m
(c) 1.0 m (d) 6.1 m
th
1
34. A bullet looses   of its velocity passing through one
n
plank. The number of such planks that are required to
stop the bullet can be : (2014 Online Set-4)
(a) n (b) Infinite
n2 2n 2
(c) (d)
2n  1 n 1
35. A particle starts from rest. Its acceleration at time t = 0 is 5
ms–2 which varies with time as shown in Fig.. The maximum (a) 112.5 m and 22.5 s (b) 337.5 m and 25 s
speed of the particle will be: (2015 Online)
(c) 112.5 m and 15 s (d) 225.5 m and 10 s
39. An automobile, travelling at 40 km/h, can be stopped at a
distance of 40 m by applying brakes. If the same
automobile is travelling at 80 km/h, the minimum stopping
distance, in metres, is (assume no skidding):
(2018 Online Set-1)
(a) 75 m (b) 100 m
–1 –1
(a) 7.5 ms (b) 15 ms (c) 150 m (d) 160 m
(c) 30 ms–1 (d) 75 ms–1 40. A man in a car at location Q on a straight highway is
36. A car is standing 200 m behind a bus, which is also at rest.
moving with speed v. He decides to reach a point P in a
The two start moving at the same instant but with different field at a distance d from the highway (point M) as shown
forward accelerations. The bus has acceleration 2 m/s2
in the figure. Speed of the car in the field is half to that on
and the car has acceleration 4 m/s2. The car will catch up the highway. What should be the distance RM, so that
with the bus after a time of : (2017 Online Set-2)
the time taken to reach P is minimum ?
(a) 110 s (b) 120 s (2018 Online Set-2)

(c) 10 2 s (d) 15 s
37. Which graph corresponds to an object moving with a
constant negative acceleration and a positive velocity ?
(2017 Online Set-1)

d
(1) d (2)
(a) (b) 2

d d
(3) (4)
2 3

(c) (d)
 KINEMATICS 102

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

MOTION IN ONE DIMENSION Horizontal Motion
Introduction 5. What determines the nature of the path followed by a
particle ?
1. In 1.0 s, a particle goes from point A to point B, moving in
a semi–circle (as shown in the figure). The magnitude of (a) Velocity (b) Speed
the average velocity is (c) Acceleration (d) None of these
6. A body moving with a uniform acceleration has velocities
A of u and v when passing through points A and B in its
path. The velocity of the body midway between A and B is

1m uv u 2  v2
(a) (b)
2 2
B (c) (d) None of these
uv
(a) 3.14 m/s (b) 2.0 m/s 7. A body starts from rest and is uniformly accelerated for 30 s.
The distance travelled in the first 10s is x1. next 10s is x2
(c) 1.0 m/s (d) zero
and the last 10 s is x3. Then x1 : x2 : x3 is the same as
2. A wheel with radius 45 cm rolls without slipping along a
(a) 1 : 2 : 4 (b) 1 : 2 : 5
horizontal floor as shown in figure. P is a dot pointed on
the rim of the wheel. At time t1, P is at the point of contact (c) 1 : 3 : 5 (d) 1 : 3 : 9
between the wheel and the floor. At a later time t2, the 8. A bird flies for 4s with a velocity of (t–2) m/s in a straight
wheel has rolled, through one–half of a revolution. What line, where t = time in seconds. It covers a distance of
is the displacement of P during this interval (a) 2m (b) 4m
P (c) 6m (d) 8m
9. A particle travels 10m in first 5 sec and 10m in next 3 sec.
Assuming constant acceleration what is the distance
travelled in next 2 sec
P
(a) 8.3 m (b) 9.3 m
At time t1 At time t2 (c) 10.3 m (d) None of above

(a) 90 cm (b) 168 cm 10. An object moves along the x–axis. Its x coordinate is given
as a function of time as
(c) 40 cm (d) data insufficient 2
x = 7 t – 3t
3. A particle moving in a straight line covers half the distance
with speed of 3 m/s. The other half of the distance is covered where x is in metre and t is in second. Its average speed
in two equal time intervals with speed of 4.5 m/s and 7.5 m/ over the interval t = 0 to t = 4 s is
s respectively. The average speed of the particle during (a) 5 m/s (b) – 5 m/s
this motion is
(a) 4.0 m/s (b) 5.0 m/s 169 169
(c)  m/s (d) m/s
24 24
(c) 5.5 m/s (d) 4.8 m/s
Constant Speed Motion 11. A particle is moving with velocity of 4 m/s along + ve X
2
direction, an acceleration of 1 m/s is acted on the particle
4. A 150 m long train is moving with a uniform velocity of 45
along –ve X direction. Find the distance travelled by the
km/h. The time taken by the train to cross a bridge of
length 850 meters is particle in 10 s.

(a) 56 sec (b) 68 sec (a) 10 m (b) 26 m

(c) 80 sec (d) 92 sec (c) 16 m (d) 8 m
103 KINEMATICS

12. At a distance of 500 m from the traffic light, brakes are (a) a upward (b) (g–a) upward
applied to an automobile moving at a velocity of 20 m/s. The (c) (g–a) downward (d) g downward.
position of automobile relative to traffic light 50 s after
2 20. A person standing near the edge of the top of a building
applying the brakes, if its acceleration is –0.5 m/s , is
throws two balls A and B. The ball A is thrown vertically
(a) 125 m (b) 375 m upward and B is thrown vertically downward with the same
(c) 400 m (d) 100 m speed. The ball A hits the ground with a speed A and the
Vertical Motion (Free Fall) ball B hits the ground with a speed B. We have

13. A stone falls from a balloon that is descending at a uniform (a) A > B (b) A < B
rate of 12 m / s . The displacement of the stone from the (c) A = B
point of release after 10 sec is (d) the relation between A and B depends on height of
the building above the ground.
(a) 490m (b) 510m
(c) 610m (d) 725m 21. An object is thrown in vertical upward direction . During its
rising
14. Time taken by an object falling from rest to cover the height of
h1 and h 2 is respectively t1 and t2 then the ratio of t1 to t2 is (a) its velocity is downward and acceleration is in upward
direction
(a) h1 : h2 (b) h1 : h 2 (b) both velocity and acceleration are in upward direction
(c) h1 : 2h2 (d) 2h1 : h2 (c) both velocity and acceleration are in downward
direction
15. The acceleration due to gravity on the planet A is 9
times the acceleration due to gravity on planet B. A (d) velocity is in upward direction and acceleration is in
man jumps to a height of 2m on the surface of A. What is the downward direction
height of jump by the same person on the planet B 22. As a rocket is accelerating vertically upwards at 9.8 m/s
2

(a) 18m (b) 6m near the earth’s surface, it releases a projectile. Immediately
2
(c) 2m/3 (d) 2m/9 after release, the acceleration (in m/s ) of the projectile, is
2
16. A body, thrown upwards with some velocity reaches (Take g = 9.8 m/s )
the maximum height of 50 m. Another body with (a) zero (b) 9.8 m/s up
2
double the mass thrown up with double the initial 2 2
velocity will reach a maximum height of (c) 9.8 m/s down (d) 19.6 m/s up
(a) 100 m (b) 200 m 23. A body falls freely from rest. It covers as much distance in
(c) 300 m (d) 400 m the last second of its motion as covered in the first three
17. From the top of a tower two stones, whose masses are in seconds. The body has fallen for a time of
the ratio 1 : 2 are thrown one straight up with an initial (a) 3 s (b) 5 s
speed u and the second straight down with the same speed
(c) 7 s (d) 9 s
u. Then, neglecting air resistance
(a) The heavier stone hits the ground with a higher speed 24. A balloon starts rising from the ground with an acceleration
(b) The lighter stone hits the ground with a higher speed of 1.25 m/s2 after 8s, a stone is released from the balloon.
(c) Both the stones will have the same speed when they The stone will (g = 10 m/s2)
hit the ground. (a) Reach the ground in 4 second
(d) The speed can’t be determined with the given data. (b) Begin to move down after being released
18. When a ball is thrown up vertically with velocity Vo , it (c) Have a displacement of 50 m
reaches a maximum height of ‘h’. If one wishes to triple the
maximum height then the ball should be thrown with velocity (d) Cover a distance of 40 m in reaching the ground
25. A stone is released from a high flying balloon that is desending
(a) 3V0 (b) 3V0
at a constant speed of 10 m/s. After 20 s of dropping,
2
(c) 9V0 (d) 3/2V0 the velocity of the stone would be [Take g = 10 m/s ]
19. A stone is released from an elevator going up with an (a) 190 m/s down (b) 210 m/s down
acceleration a. The acceleration of the stone after the
release is (c) 10 m/s down (d) 25 m/s up
KINEMATICS 104

26. A particle is dropped under gravity from rest from a height Calculus Based Problem
2
h(g  9 . 8 m / sec ) and it travels a distance 9h/25 in the 31. A drag racing car starts from rest at t = 0 and moves along
2
a straight line with velocity given by v = bt , where b is a
last second, the height h is
constant. The expression for the distance travelled by the
(a) 100 m (b) 122.5 m car from its position at t = 0, is
(c) 145 m (d) 167.5 m
3 bt 2
27. A body A is projected upwards with a velocity of 98 m/s. The (a) bt (b)
3
second body B is projected upwards with the same initial
velocity but after 4 sec. Both the bodies will meet after bt 3
(c) (d) 2 bt
(a) 6 sec (b) 8 sec 3
(c) 10 sec (d) 12 sec 32. A particle moves along a straight line such that its
28. A particle is dropped vertically from rest from a height. displacement at any time t is give by :
The time taken by it to fall through successive distances s = (t3 – 3t2 + 2) m.
of 1 m each will then be The displacement when the acceleration becomes zero is :
(a) 0 m (b) 2m
(a) All equal, being equal to 2 / g second
(c) 3 m (d) – 2m
(b) In the ratio of the square roots of the integers 1, 2, 3.... 33. The displacement of a particle after time t is given by x =
(c) In the ratio of the difference in the square roots of the (k/b 2) (1 – e–bt), where b is a constant. What is the
acceleration of the particle ?
integers i.e. 1, ( 2  1), ( 3  2 ), ( 4  3 )...
(a) ke–bt (b) –ke–bt
(d) In the ratio of the reciprocal of the square roots of the
k –k
(c) e – bt (d) e – bt
integers i.e.,. 1 , 1 , 1 , 1 b2
2
b
1 2 3 4 34. The velocity v and displacement r of a body are related as
29. A stone is thrown vertically upward with an initial velocity v2 = kr, where k is a constant. What will be the velocity after
v0. The distance travelled in time 4v0/3g is 1 seconds ? (Given that the displacement is zero at t = 0)

(a) kr (b) kr3/2

2v 02 v 02
(a) (b) k 0
g 2g (c) r (d) Data is not sufficient
2

4v 02 5v 02 35. The velocity of a particle moving along x–axis is given as

(c) (d) v = x2 – 5x + 4 (in m/s) where x denotes the x–coordinate of
3g 9g
the particle in metres. Find the magnitude of acceleration
of the particle when the velocity of particle is zero ?
30. A parachutist jumps out of a plane. He falls freely for
(a) 0 m/s2 (b) 2 m/s2
sometime, and then opens his parachute. Shortly after his
parachute inflates, the parachutist (c) 3 m/s2 (d) none of these

(a) keeps falling but quickly slows down 36. Four particle are moving along X–axis. Their coordinates
(in metres) as function of time (in seconds) are given by
(b) momentarily stops, then starts falling again, but more 3
x1 (t) = 3.5 – 2.7 t
slowly 3
x2 (t) = 3.5 + 2.7 t
(c) suddenly shoots upwards, and then starts falling again 2
x3 (t) = 3.5 – 2.7 t
but more slowly 2
x4 (t) = 3.4 – 2.4 t – 2.7 t
(d) suddenly shoots upward, and then starts falling again,
Which of these particles is/are speeding up for t > 0 ?
eventually acquiring the same speed as before the
parachute opened (a) All the four (b) only 1
(c) only 2 and 3 (d) 2, 3 and 4 only
105 KINEMATICS

37. A particle is moving along X–axis whose acceleration is 41. Two particles A and B are moving along straight line, whose
given by a = 3x – 4, where x is the location of the particle. position–time graph is a shown in the figure below.
At t = 0, the particle is at rest at x = 4/3. The distance Determine the instant (aaprox) when both are moving with
travelled by the particle in 5 s is the same velocity.
(a) zero (b)  42 m
(c) infinite (d) none of these x

Graphs B
A
38. The displacement–time graph of a moving particle is shown
in figure. The instantaneous velocity of the particle is
negative at the point : t (s)
5 10 15 20

(a) 17 s (b) 12 s
(c) 6 s (d) no where
42. A particle starts from rest. Its acceleration (a) versus time
(t) is as shown in the figure. The maximum speed of the
particle will be
(a) D (b) F
a
(c) C (d) E
10 m/s2
39. Look at the graphs (a) to (d) carefully and indicate which
of these possible represents one dimensional motion of a
particle ?
t (s)
11

(a) 110 m/s (b) 55 m/s

(a) (b) (c) 550 m/s (d) 660 m/s
43. A body starts from rest moves along a straight line with
constant acceleration. The variation of speed v with
distance s is given by graph

(c) (d) V V

(a) (b)
40. A lift is going up from the ground. The variation in the O s O s
speed of the lift is as given in the graph. What is the
height to which the lift takes the passengers.
V V
Velocity (m/sec)

(c) (d)
O s O s
3.6
44. An object moving along a straight line has a constant
2
acceleration of 4 m/s . The position–time graph for this
object has a slope that
2 10 12
Time (sec) (a) is constant
(a) 3.6 m (b) 28.8 m (b) decreases with time

(c) 36.0 m (c) increases with time

(d) Cannot be calculated from the graph (d) first increases and then decreases with time
KINEMATICS 106

45. For 3 particles A, B and C moving along x–axis, x–t graph v

is as shown below. 2

x
Q 1 3

s
A
P
B At which of the points marked, the object speeding up ?
C
t (a) 1 (b) 2

Mark out the correct relationships between their average (c) 1 and 3 (d) 1, 2 and 3
velocities between the points P and Q. Approach and Separation Velocity
(a) av, A   av, B  av, C (b) av, A   av, B  av, C 49. A car travelling at constant speed of 20 m/s overtakes
another car which is moving at constant acceleration of 2
2
(c) av, A   av, B  av, C (d)  av, A  av, B   av, C m/s and it is initially at rest. Assume the length of each
car to be 5 m. The total road distance used in overtaking is
46. The acceleration of an object, starting from rest and moving
along a straight line is as shown in the figure below. (a) 394.74 m (b) 15.26 m

a (c) 200.00 m (d) 186.04 m

5
MOTION IN TWO DIMENSION
4 5
t(s)
1 3 Equation of Trajectory
–5 50. There are two values of time for which a projectile is at
the same height. The sum of these two times is equal to
Other than at t = 0, when is the velocity of the object equal (a) 3T/2 (b) 4T/3
to zero ? (c) 3T/4 (d) T
(a) At t = 3.5 s (b) During interval from 1s to 3s (T = time of flight of the projectile)
(c) At t = 5 s (d) At no other time on this graph 51. The trajectory of a projectile in a vertical plane is y = ax – bx2,
47. An elevator is moving upwards with constant acceleration. where a and b are constants and x and y are respectively
The broken curve shows the position y of the ceiling of horizontal and vertical distance of the projectile from the
the elevator as a function of time t. A bolt breaks loose and point of projection. The maximum height attained by the
drops from the ceiling. particle and the angle of projection from the horizontal are

y b2 a2
A (a) , tan 1  b  (b) , tan 1  2a 
2a b

a2 2a 2
B (c) , tan 1  a  (d) , tan 1  a 
4b b
C
D 52. A particle moves in the X-Y plane according to the law
t
x = kt and y =kt (1 – t), where k and  are positive
Which curve best represents the position of the bolt as a constants and t is time. What is the equation of trajectory
function of time ? of the particle
(a) A (b) B
x 2
(a) y = kx (b) y  x 
(c) C (d) D k
48. The velocity–displacement curve for an object moving
x 2
along a straight line is shown in the figure below. (c) y  (d) y  x
k
107 KINEMATICS

3 2
58. In projectile motion, the modulus of rate of change of speed
53. The equation of motion of a projectile is y  12 x  x .
(a) is constant
4
–2
Given that g =10 ms , what is the range of the projectile (b) first increases then decreases
(a) 12.4 m (b) 16 m (c) first decreases then increases

(c) 30.6 m (d) 36.0 m (d) none of these

59. Two particles A and B are projected simultaneously from
54. A ball is dropped from the top of a tower in a high speed
a point situated on a horizontal plane. The paritcle A is
wind. The wind exerts a steady force on the ball. The path projected vertically up with a velocity vA while the particle
followed by the ball will be B is projected up at an angle of 30o with horizontal with a
(a) Parabola (b) Circular arc velocity vB. After 5 sec the particles were observed moving
mutually perpenducular to each other. The velocity of
(c) Elliptical arc (d) Straight line projection of the particle vA and vB respectively are
General Projectile (a) 50 ms–1, 100 m/s
55. A particle is projected from the ground with an initial (b) 100 ms–1, 50 ms–1
speed of v at an angle  with horizontal. The average (c) vA > 25 m/s and vA  50 m/s
velocity of the particle between its point of projection (d) none of these
and highest point of trajectory is 60. A projectile is fired at an angle of 30o to the horizontal
such that the vertical component of its initial velocity is
v v 80 m/s. Its time of flight is T. Its velocity at t = T/4 has a
(a) 1  2 cos 2  (b) 1  cos 2 
2 2 magnitude of nearly
(a) 200 m/s (b) 300 m/s
v
(c) 1  3cos 2  (d) v cos  (c) 140 m/s (d) 100 m/s
2
61. A particle A is projected vertically upwards. Another
56. A particle A is projected from the ground with an initial
particle B of same mass is projected at an angle of 45o.
velocity of 10 m/s at an angle of 60o with horizontal. From
Both reach the same height. The ratio of the initial kinetic
what height h should an another particle B be projected
energy of A to that of B is
horizontally with velocity 5 m/s so that both the particles
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1
collide in ground at point C if both are projected
simultaneously (g = 10 m/s2) (c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 :1

5 m/s 62. A body of mass m is thrown upwards at an angle  with

B
the horizontal with velocity v. While rising up the velocity
of the mass after t seconds will be
h (a) (v cos )2  (v sin )2
10 m/s
60° (b) (v cos   v sin )2  gt
A C
(a) 10 m (b) 30 m
(c) v 2  g 2 t 2  (2 vsin ) gt
(c) 15 m (d) 25 m
57. A particle is projected at an angle of 60 o above the (d) v 2  g 2 t 2  (2 v cos ) gt
horizontal with a speed of 10 m/s. After some time the
direction of its velocity makes an anlge of 30o above the 63. From the top of a tower 19.6 m high, a ball is thrown
horizontal. The speed of the particle at this instant is horizontally. If the line joining the point of projection to
the point where it hits the ground makes an angle of 45o
5
(a) m/s (b) 5 3 m / s with the horizontal, then the initial velocity of the ball is
3
(a) 9.8 ms–1 (b) 4.9 ms–1
10
(c) 5 m/s (d) m/s (c) 14.7 ms–1 (d) 2.8 ms–1
3
KINEMATICS 108

64. A particle is projected with a speed V from a point O making (a) 8.2 m (b) 9.0 m
an angle of 30o with the vertical. At the same instant, a (c) 11.6 m (d) 12.7 m
second particle is thrown vertically upwards from a point
A. The two particle reach H, the highest point on the 70. From a point on the ground at a distance 2 metres from the
foot of a vertical wall, a ball is thrown at an angle of 45o
V
parabolic path of particle simultaneously. Then ratio is which just clears the top of the wall and afterward strikes
v
the ground at a distance 4m on the other side. The height
of the wall is
V
H
2 3
30° (a) m (b) m
3 4
60° 1 4
(c) m (d) m
O A 3 3

(a) 3 2 (b) 2 3 71. Two projectiles A and B are projected with angle of
projection 30° for the projectile A and 45° for the projectile
2 3 B. If RA and RB are the horizontal ranges for the two
(c) (d)
3 2 projectiles, then
65. A projectile is thrown in the upward direction making an (a) RA = RB
angle of 60o with the horizontal direction with a velocity of (b) RA > RB
147 ms–1. Then the time after which its inclination with the
horizontal is 45o is (c) RA < RB

(a) 15 s (b) 10.98 s (d) the information is insufficient to decide the relation
of RA and RB
(c) 5.49 s (d) 2.745 s
66. From the top of a tower of height 40 m a ball is projected 72. A projectile is projected at an angle of 15° to the horizontal
upwards with a speed of 20 m/s at an angle of elevation with some speed v. If another projectile is projected with
of 30 o. Then the ratio of the total time taken by the ball the same speed, then it must be projected at what angle
to hit the ground to its time of flight (time taken to come with the horizontal so as to have the same range.
back to the same elevation) is (take g = 10 ms2)
(a) It is never possible (b) 12.5°
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 3 : 1
(c) 75° (d) 65°
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 4 : 1
67. Three identical balls are thrown with same speed at angles 73. A fielder in a cricket match throws a ball from the boundary
of 15o, 45o and 75o with the horizontal respectively. The line to the wicket keeper. The ball describes a parabolic
ratio of their distances from the point of projection to the path. Which of the following quantities remains constant
where they hit the ground will be during the ball’s motion in air ? (neglect air resistance)

(a) 1: 2 :1 (b) 1 : 2 : 1 (a) its kinetic energy

(c) 2 : 4 : 3 (d) 1: 2 : 3 (b) its speed

68. A projectile is thrown at an angle of 40o with the horizontal (c) the horizontal component of its velocity
and its range is R1. Another projectile is thrown at an (d) the vertical component of its velocity
angle 40o with the vertical and its range is R2. What is the
relation between R1 and R2 74. The height y and the distance x along the horizontal plane of
(a) R1 = R2 (b) R1 = 2 R2 a projectile on a certain planet (with no surrounding

(c) R2 = 2 R1 (d) R1 = 4 R2/5 atmosphere) aregiven by y = (8t – 5t2) metre and x = 6t metre
where t is in seconds. The velocity of projection is
69. A cricketer hits a ball with a velocity 25 m/s at 60o above
the horizontal. How far above the ground it passes over a (a) 8 m/sec (b) 6 m/sec
fielder 50 m from the bat (assume the ball is struck very
close to the ground) (c) 10 m/sec (d) not obtained from the data
109 KINEMATICS

75. A body is projected horizontally with speed 20 m/s from on the ground near the target
top of a tower. What will be its speed nearly after 5 sec ?
(c) on a parabolic path as seen by an observer on the
Take g = 10 m/s2
ground near the target
(a) 54 m/s (b) 20 m/s
(d) on a zig-zag path as seen by pilot in the plane
(c) 50 m/s (d) 70 m/s
81. Three particles A, B and C are thrown from the top of a
76. In the above question, what will be the displacement of tower 100 m in height with the same speed 10 m/s. A is
the body
thrown straight up, B is thrown straight down and C is
(a) 100 m (b) 125 m thrown horizontally. They hit the ground with the speeds
(c) 160 m (d) 225 m vA, vB and vC respectively. Then
77. A body is projected at an angle of 30° to the horizontal
(a) vA > vB = vC (b) vB > vC > vA
with speed 30 m/s. What is the angle with the horizontal
after 1.5 seconds ? Take g = 10 m/s2. (c) vA = vB = vC (d) vA = vB > vC
(a) 0° (b) 30° 82. A body is thrown horizontally with a velocity 2gh from
(c) 60° (d) 90° the top of a tower of height h. It strikes the level ground
78. From certain height, two bodies are projected horizontally through the foot of the tower at a distance x from the tower.
with velocities 10 m/s and 20 m/s. They hit the ground in The value of x is
t1 and t2 seconds. Then (a) h (b) h/2
(a) t1 = t2 (b) t1 = 2 t2 (c) 2h (d) 2h/3
83. Consider a boy on a trolley who throws a ball with speed
(c) t2 = 2 t1 (d) t1  2 t 2
20 m/s at an angle 37° with respect to trolley in direction of
79. A body is projected with velocity v1 from the point A as motion of trolley which moves horizontally with speed 10
shown in figure. At the same time, another body is m/s then what will be maximum distance travelled by ball
parallel to road :
projected vertically upwards from B with velocity v2. The
point B lies vertically below the highest point. For both (a) 20.2 m (b) 12 m

v2 (c) 31.2 m (d) 62.4 m

the bodies to collide, v should be 84. Two men A and B, A standing on the extended floor nearby
1
a building and B is standing on the roof of the building.
Both throw a stone each towards each other. Then which
of the following will be correct.
(a) stone will hit A, but not B
(b) stone will hit B, but not A
(c) stone will not hit either of them, but will collide with
each other
(a) 2 (b) 0.5
(d) none of these
(c) 3/ 2 (d) 1 85. A particle is projected from a point (0, 1) on Y–axis (assume
80. An aeroplane is flying at a constant horizontal velocity + Y direction vertically upwards) aiming towards a point
of 600 km/h at an elevation of 6 km towards a point directly (4, 9). It fell on ground along x axis in 1 sec.
above the target on the earth’s surface. At an appropriate Taking g = 10 m/s2 and all coordinate in metres. Find the X–
time, the pilot released a ball so that it strikes the target coordinate where it fell.
on the earth. The ball will appear to be falling (a) (3, 0) (b) (4, 0)
(a) on a parabolic path as seen by pilot in the plane
(b) vertically along a straight path as seen by an observer (c) (2, 0) 
(d) 2 5, 0 
KINEMATICS 110

86. A stone is projected from a horizontal plane. It attains 90. A ball is projected horizontally with a speed v from the top
maximum height ‘H’ and strikes a stationary smooth wall of a plane inclined at an angle 45° with the horizontal. How
and falls on the ground vertically below the maximum far from the point of projection will the ball strike the plane ?
height. Assume the collision to be elastic, the height of the
point on the wall where ball will strike is v2 v2
(a) (b) 2
g g

2 v2  2 v2 
(c) (d) 2  
g  g 
H h
General 2-D Motion
91. Position vector of a particle moving in xy plane at time

t is r  a 1  cos  t  ˆi  a sin  t ˆj. the path of the
(a) H/2 (b) H/4
particle is
(c) 3H/4 (d) None of these
(a) a circle of radius a and centre at (a, 0)
87. The position vector of a particle is given as (b) a circle of radius a and centre at (0, 0)
 (c) an ellipse
r  t 2  4t  6 ˆi  t 2 ˆj. The time after which the
   
(d) neither a circle nor an ellipse
velocity vector and acceleration vector becomes
92. A particle moves in xy plane. The position vector of
perpendicular to each other is equal to 
(a) 1 sec (b) 2 sec
  
particle at any time t is r   2t  ˆi  2t 2 ˆj m. The rate
of change of  at time t = 2 second. (where  is the angle
(c) 1.5 sec (d) not possible which its velocity vector makes with positive x-axis) is
Inclined Projectile 2 1
(a) rad / s (b) rad / s
88. A particle is projected up an inclined plane with initial 17 14
speed v = 20 m/s at an angle   30o with plane. The 4 6
(c) rad / s (d) rad / s
component of its velocity perpendicular to plane when it 7 5
strike the plane is 93. A vector having magnitude 30 unit makes equal angles
with each of X, Y and Z axes. The components of vector
(a) 10 3 m / s (b) 10 m/s
along each of X, Y and Z axes are :

(c) 5 3 m / s (d) data is insufficient 10

(a) 10 3 unit (b) unit
3
89. A particle P is projected from a point on the surface of
smooth inclined plane (see figure). Simultaneously another (c) 15 3 unit (d) 10 unit
particle Q is released on the smooth inclined plane from the
same position. P and Q collide on the inclined plane after t = 94. A particle has an initial velocity of 3iˆ  4 ˆj and an
4 second. The speed of projection of P is : acceleration of 0.4 ˆi  0.3 ˆj . Its speed after 10 s is :
(a) 10 unit (b) 7 unit
P
Q
(c) 7 2 unit (d) 8.5 unit
95. Velocity and acceleration of a particle initial are
 
60°
   
v  3iˆ  4 ˆj m/s and a   6 ˆi  8 ˆj m/s2 respectively..
Initially particle is at origin. Maximum x–coordinate of
particle will be :
(a) 5 m/s (b) 10 m/s (a) 1.5 m (b) 0.75 m
(c) 15 m/s (d) 20 m/s (c) 2.25 m (d) 4.0 m
111 KINEMATICS
  101. A river is flowing from West to East at a speed of 5 metres
96. Let v and a denote the velocity and acceleration
per minute. A man on the south bank of the river, capable
respectively of a particle in one dimensional motion the
speed of the particle : of swimming at 10 metres per minute in still water, wants
  to swim across the river in shortest time. He should swim
(a) decreases when v . a  0 in a direction
  (a) due North (b) 30° East of North
(b) increases when v . a  0
  (c) 30° West of North (d) 60° East of North
(c) increases when v . a  0
Rain man and River boat problem
 
(d) decreases when | v |  | a |
102. A river is flowing from west to east at a speed of 8 m/min. A
Relative Motion (Introduction) man on the south bank of the river, capable of swimming at
97. A person walks up a stationary escalator in time t1. It he 20 m/min in still water, wants to swim across the river in the
remains stationary on the escalator, then it can take him shortest time. He should swim in a direction :
up in time t2. How much time would it take him to walk up (a) due north (b) 30° east of north
the moving escalator.
(c) 30° west of north (d) 60° east of north
t1  t 2 103. The rowing speed of a man relative to water is 5 km/h and
(a) (b) t1  t 2
2 the speed of water flow is 3 km/h. At what angle to the river
flow should he head if he wants to reach a point on the
t1 t 2
(c) t  t (d) t1  t 2 other bank, directly opposite to starting point :
1 2
(a) 127° (b) 143°
98. A horizontal wind is blowing with a velocity v towards (c) 120° (d) 150°
north-east. A man starts running towards north with
Approach and Separation Velocity
acceleration a. The time after which man will feel the wind
blowing towards east is : 104. Two cars are moving in the same direction with the same
speed of 30 km/h. They are separated by 5 km. What is the
v 2v speed of the car moving in the opposite direction if it
(a) (b)
a a meets the two cars at an interval of 4 minutes ?

v (a) 15 km/h (b) 30 km/h

2v
(c) (d) a (c) 45 km/h (d) 60 km/h
2a
105. A passenger is at a distance of x from a bus when the bus
99. Two trains are each 50 m long moving parallel towards
begins to move with constant acceleration a. What is the
each other at speeds 10 m/s and 15 m/s respectively, at
minimum velocity with which the passenger should run
what time will they pass each other ?
towards the bus so as to reach it ?
(a) 8 s (b) 4 s
(c) 2 s (d) 6 s (a) 2 ax (b) 2 ax
100. On a calm day a boat can go across a lake and return in time
T0 at a speed V. On a rough day there is uniform current at (c) ax (a) ax
speed v to help the onward journey and impede the return
journey. If the time taken to go across and return on the Multiple Answer Questions
rough day be T, then T/T0 is : 106. A particle is projected vertically upwards with a velocity u
 2
1 from a point O. When it returns to the point of projection :
(a) 1  (b)
V2 2 (a) its average velocity is zero
1 2
V (b) its displacement is zero
2 1
(c) 1 
 (d) (c) its average speed is u/2
V2 2 (d) its average speed is u.
1 2
V
KINEMATICS 112

107. Pick the correct statements : (a) In the motion between O and A the velocity is positive
(a) Average speed of a particle in a given time is never and acceleration is negative
less than the magnitude of the average velocity. (b) Between A and B the velocity and acceleration are

d positive
(b) It is possible to have a situation in which 0
dt (c) Between B and C the velocity is negative and
d  acceleration is positive
but  0
dt (d) Between D and E the acceleration is positive
(c) The average velocity of a particle is zero in a time 111. Which of the following statements about distance are true
interval. It is possible that the instantaneous velocity (a) It cannot be negative
is never zero in the interval.
(b) It cannot be zero
(d) The average velocity of a particle moving on a straight
(c) It can never be lesser than magnitude of displacement
line is zero in a time interval. It is possible that the
instantaneous velocity is never zero in the interval. (d) It can never decrease with time
(Infinite acceleration are not allowed) 112. If the displacement of a particle varies with time as x =
108. Which of the following statements are true for a moving t + 7, the
body ? (a) velocity of the particle is inversely proportional to t
(a) if its speed changes, its velocity must change and it (b) velocity of particle varies linearly with t
must have some acceleration
(c) velocity of particle is proportional to t
(b) if its velocity changes, its speed must change and it
must have some acceleration (d) the particle moves with a constant acceleration

(c) if its velocity changes, its speed may or may not 113. An observer moves with a constant speed along the line
change, and it must have some acceleration joining two stationary objects. He will observe that the
two objects.
(d) if its speed changes but direction of motion does not
change, its velocity may remain constant. (a) have the same speed

109. If velocity of the particle is given by v  x , where x (b) have the same velocity
denotes the position of the particle and initially particle (c) move in the same direction
was at x = 4, then which of the following are correct. (d) move in opposite direction
(a) at t = 2 sec, the position of the particle is at x = 9 114. The displacement (x) of a particle depends on time (t) as x
(b) Particle acceleration at t = 2 sec. is 1 m/s2. = t2 –  t3
(c) Particle acceleration is 1/2 m/s2 throughout the motion. (a) The particle will return to its starting point after 
(d) Particle will never go in negative direction from it’s (b) The particle will come to rest after time 
starting position.
(c) The initial velocity of the particle was zero but its initial
110. A particle has a rectilinear motion and the figure gives its
acceleration was not zero
displacement as a function of time. Which of the following
statements are true with respect to the motion. (d) No net force will act on the particle at t = 
115. A particle moves with an initial velocity v0 and retardation
v, where v is its velocity at any time t.
A
(a) The particle will cover a total distance v0/
B E (b) The particle will come a rest after time 1/
0
(c) The particle will continue to move for a very long time
C D (d) The velocity of the particle will become v0/after time 1/
113 KINEMATICS

Multiple Answer Questions (a) the particles will collide the plane with same speed

116. A particle is projected at an angle  from ground with speed (b) the times of flight of each particle are same
u (g = 10 m/s2) (c) both particles strike the plane perpendicularly
(a) if u = 10 m/s and  = 30°, then time of flight will be 1 sec. (d) the particles will collide in mid air if projected
simultaneously and time of flight of each particle is
(b) if u = 10 3 m/s and  = 60°, then time of flight will be less than the time of collision.
3 sec.
120. A particle moving along a straight line with uniform
(c) if u = 10 3 m/s and  = 60°, then after 2 sec velocity acceleration has velocities 7 m/s at P and 17 m/s at Q. R is
the mid point of PQ. Then
becomes perpendicular to initial velocity.
(a) the average velocity between R and Q is 15 m/s
(d) if u = 10 m/s and  = 30°, then velocity never becomes
(b) the ratio of time to go from P to R and that from R to Q
perpendicular to initial velocity during its flight.
is 3 : 2
117. A particle leaves the origin with an initial velocity (c) the velocity at R is 10 m/s

 
u  3iˆ m/s and a constant acceleration (d) the average velocity between P and R is 10 m/s.

 121. Choose the correct alternative(s)


a   1.0 ˆi  0.5 ˆj m/s2. Its velocity v and position (a) If the greatest height to which a man can throw a
 stone is h, then the greatest horizontal distance upto
vector r when it reaches its maximum x-co-ordinate are
which he can throw the stone is 2h
 
(a) v  2jˆ  
(b) v  1.5jˆ m / s (b) The angle of projection for a projectile motion whose
range R is n times the maximum height H is tan–1 (4/n)
  (c) The time of flight T and the horizontal range R of a

(c) r  4.5iˆ  2.25jˆ m   
(d) r  3iˆ  2ˆj m
projectile are connected by the equation gT2 = 2R tan
 where  is the angle of projection
118. In a projectile motion let tOA = t1 and tAB = t2. the horizontal
displacement from O to A is R1 and from A to B is R2. (d) A ball is thrown vertically up. Another ball is thrown
at an angle  with the vertical. Both of them remain in
Maximum height is H and time of flight is T. If air drag is to
air for the same period of time. Then the ratio of
be considered, then choose the correct alternative (s)
heights attained by the two balls is 1 : 1.
y 122. Two particles A and B are located in x-y plane at points
A (0, 0) and (0, 4 m). They simultaneously start moving with
velocities.
H
B  
x vA  2jˆ m/s and vB  2iˆ m/s. Select the correct
O
R1 R2 alternative(s)
(a) the distance between them is constant
(a) t1 will decrease while t2 will increase
(b) the distance between them first decreases and then
(b) H will increase
increases
(c) R1 will decrease while R2 will increase
(c) the shortest distance between them is 2 2 m
(d) T may increase or decrease
119. From an inclined plane two particles are projected with (d) time after which they are at minimum distance is 1 s
same speed at same angle , one up and other down the 123. The co-ordinate of the particle in x-y plane are given as
plane as shown in figure. Which of the following x = 2 + 2t + 4t2 and y = 4t + 8t2
statement(s) is/are correct ?
The motion of the particle is
(a) along a straight line
(b) uniformly accelerated
(c) along a parabolic path
(d) nonuniformly accelerated
KINEMATICS 114

 Reason : From position–time graph the only sign of

124. River is flowing with a velocity vR  4iˆ m/s. A boat is
acceleration can be determined but no information can be

 
moving with a velocity of v BR  2iˆ  4ˆj m/s relative to concluded about the magnitude of acceleration.
river. The width of the river is 100 m along y-direction. (a) A (b) B (c) C
Choose the correct alternative(s) (d) D (e) E
(a) the boatman will cross the river in 25 s
129. Assertion : For a particle moving along a straight line or
(b) absolute velocity of boatman is 2 5 m/s in a plane, the average velocity vector over a time interval
(c) drift of the boatman along the river current is 50 m can be equal to instantaneous velocity at the end of the
interval, even if velocity of particle is not constant.
(d) the boatman can never cross the river.   
r2  r1 d r
Assertion Reason Reason : 
t 2  t1 d t
(A) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true and reason
(a) A (b) B (c) C
is the correct explanation of the assertion.
(d) D (e) E
(B) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of the assertion. 130. Assertion : Two stones are simultaneously projected from
level ground from same point with same speeds but different
(C) If ASSERTION is true but REASON is false.
angles with horizontal. Both stones move in same vertical
(D) If ASSERTION is false but REASON is true. plane. Then the two stones may collide in mid air.
(E) If both ASSERTION and REASON are false. Reason : For two stones projected simultaneously from
same point with same speed at different angles with
125. Assertion : Magnitude of average velocity is equal to
horizontal, their trajectories may intersect at some point.
average speed.
Reason : Magnitude of instantaneous velocity is equal (a) A (b) B (c) C
to instantaneous speed. (d) D (e) E
(a) A (b) B (c) C 131. Assertion : In a plane to plane projectile motion, the angle
between instantaneous velocity vector and acceleration
(d) D (e) E vector can be anything between 0 to  (excluding the
126. Assertion : When velocity of a particle is zero then limiting case).
acceleration of a particle is also zero. Reason : In plane to plane projectile motion, acceleration
Reason : Acceleration is equal to rate of change of vector is always pointing vertical downwards. (Neglect
velocity. air friction).

(a) A (b) B (c) C (a) A (b) B (c) C

(d) D (e) E (d) D (e) E

132. Assertion : Two particles of different mass, projected with
127. Assertion : A particle moves in a straight line with
same velocity and angle of projection, the maximum height
constant acceleration. The average velocity of this particle
attained by both the particle will be same.
cannot be zero in any time interval.
Reason : The maximum height of projectile is independent
Reason : For a particle moving in straight line with constant
of particle mass.
acceleration, the average velocity in a time interval is
(a) A (b) B (c) C
uv
, where u and v are initial and final velocity of the (d) D (e) E
2
particle of the given time interval. 133. Assertion : When a body is dropped or thrown horizontally
from the same height, it would reach the ground at the
(a) A (b) B (c) C same time.
(d) D (e) E Reason : Horizontal velocity has no effect on the vertical
128. Assertion : Plotting the acceleration–time graph from a direction.
given position–time graph of a particle moving along a (a) A (b) B (c) C
straight line is possible. (d) D (e) E
115 KINEMATICS

134. Assertion : In order to hit a target, a man should point his 136. The displacement time graph will be best represented by :
rifle in the same direction as target.
x(m)
Reason : The horizontal range of the bullet is independent
of the angle of projection with horizontal.
(a) A (b) B (c) C (a) (b)
(d) D (e) E t(s)
10 20 30 60 70

Passage
Using the following comprehension, solve Q. 135 to Q. 138 x(m) x(m)

PASSAGE - 1
A car is moving on a straight road. The velocity of the car
(c) (d)
varies with time as shown in the figure. Initially (at t = 0),
(s) t(s)
the car was at x = 0, where, x is the position of the car at any 10 20 30 60 70 10 20 30 60 70

time ‘t’.
137. The maximum displacement from the starting position will
8 be :
v (m/sec.)

4 (a) 200 m (b) 250 m

60 70 (c) 160 m (d) 165 m
0 10 20 30 40 50 t (sec.) 138. Average speed from t = 0 to t = 70 s will be
–4
16 24
(a) m/s (b) m/s
7 7
135. The variation of acceleration (a) with time (t) will be best
20
represented by : (c) m/s (d) zero
7
a
Using the following comprehension, solve Q. 139 & 140
PASSAGE - 2
(a) Two particles A and B are moving along x–axis whose
position–time graphs are as shown in the figure below.
t
10 20 30 60 70
a x

(b) t
10 20 30 50 60 70 B

a t(s)
0 5 10 15 20

139. For the time inteval 0 to 5 s

70
(c) t (a) the particle A is speeding up while B is slowing down
10 20 30
(b) both the particles are initially speeding up and then
slowing down
a (c) both the particles are initially slowing down and then
speeding up
(d) particle A is speeding up first and then slowing down
(d) t
10 20 30 60 70 while particle B is slowing down first and then
speeding up
KINEMATICS 116

140. Mark the correct statement(s) 142. If the time taken by the ball A to fall back on ground is 4
(a) Initial velocity of A is less than that of B. seconds and that by ball B is 2 seconds. Then the time taken
by the ball C to reach the inclined plane after projection will
(b) There is exactly one instant when both the particles
be :
have the same velocity.
(c) There is no instant when both the particles have same (a) 6 sec. (b) 4 sec.
velocity. (c) 3 sec. (d) 5 sec.
(d) For time interval, 5 to 15 s average velocity of both the 143. The maximum height attained by ball ‘A’ from the ground is
particles are same.
(a) 10 m (b) 15 m

Using the following comprehension, solve Q. 141 to Q. 144 (c) 20 m

(d) insufficient information
PASSAGE - 3
We know how by neglecting the air resistance,the problems 144. The maximum height attained by ball B from ground is :
of projectile motion can be easily solved and analysed. (a) 20 m (b) 5 m
Now we consider the case of the collision of a ball with a (c) 15 m (d) none of these
wall. In this case the problem of collision can be simplified
by considering the case of elastic collision only. When a Using the following comprehension, solve Q. 145 & 146
ball collides with a wall we can divide its velocity into two
components, one perpendicular to the wall and other PASSAGE - 4
parallel to the wall. If the collision is elastic then the An aircraft moving with a speed of 250 m/s is at a height of
perpendicular component of velocity of the ball gets 6000 m, just overhead of an anti aircraft gun.
reversed with the same magnitude. 145. If the muzzle velocity is 500 m/s, the firing angle  should be
Vcos Vcos
250 m/s

v Vsin Vsin

Velocity just Components of velocity Components of velocity

before collision just before collision just after collision 6000 m

The other parallel component of velocity will remain 500 m/s

constant if wall is given smooth.
Now let us take a problem. Three balls ‘A’ and ‘B’ & ‘C’ are
projected from ground with same speed at same angle with
the horizontal. The balls A, B and C collide with the wall (a) 30° (b) 45°
during their flight in air and all three collide perpendicularly
(c) 60° (d) None of these
with the wall as shown in figure.
146. The time after which the aircraft is hit is :

(a) 20 3 s (b) 15 3 s
A C
B (c) 20 s (d) 10 3 s

141. Which of the following relation about the maximum height

Match the following
H of the three balls from the ground during their motion in
air is correct : 147. Column I gives some graphs for a particle moving along
x–axis in positive x–direction. The variables v, x and t
(a) HA = HC > HB (b) HA > HB = HC
represent speed of particle, x–coordinate of particle and
(c) HA > HC > HB (d) HA = HB = HC
117 KINEMATICS

time respectively. Column II gives certain resulting 149. A particle is projected vertically upwards with speed 20 m/s
interpretation. Match the graphs in Column I with the from top of a tower of height 20 m see the figure. Match the
statement in Column II. statements in column–I with results in column–II

Column I Column II B
v

20 m/s
A C
(a) x (p) Acceleration of
v - x graph
particle is uniform
2
D
v
Column–I Column–II
(A) ratio of maximum height from (P) 0
x ground (BD) to the initial
(b) (q) Acceleration of
v2 - x graph height from ground (AD) is
particle is nonuniform (B) ratio of distance travelled in (Q) 1
v 1st second to the distance
travelled in 2nd second is.
(C) ratio of initial speed at A to (R) 2
the final on ground (D) is
(c) t (r) Acceleration of
v - t graph greater than
particle is directly (D) ratio of time taken from A to C (S) 3
proportional to ‘t’ and time taken from A to B is
v
150. A ball is projected from the ground with velocity v such
that its range is maximum.
Column–I Column–II
2
(d) t (s) Acceleration of (A) Velocity at half of the (P) 3 v/2
v - t2 graph
maximum height
particle is directly
v
proportional to ‘x’. (B) Velocity at the maximum (Q)
2
148. The equation of motion of the particle is described in
height
column I. At t = 0, particle is at origin and at rest. Match
(C) Change in its velocity when (R) v 2
the column I with the statements in column II.
it return to the ground
Column I Column II
v 5
2
(a) x = (3t + 2t) m (p) velocity of particle at (D) Average velocity when it (S)
2 2
t = 1 s is 8 m/s reaches the maximum
(b) v = 8t m/s (q) particle moves with height

uniform acceleration Integer Type Questions

(c) a = 16 t (r) particle moves with
151. A particle of mass m = 2 kg is projected along X–axis with
variable acceleration velocity V0 = 5 ms–1. It is acted on by a variable force
(d) v = 6t – 3t2 (s) particle will change acting along Y–axis as shown in figure. What is the
–1
its direction some time. magnitude of its velocity at 2 seconds ? (in ms )
KINEMATICS 118

Y 155. A swimmer jumps from a bridge over a canal and swims 1

F0 = 5 N km upstream. After that first km, he passes a floating cork.
He continues swimming for half an hour and then turns
F around and swims back to the bridge. The swimmer and
the cork reach the bridge at the same time. The swimmer
X
1 2 3 has been swimming at a constant speed. How fast does
t (sec)
the water in the canal flow ?
152. A cat, on seeing a rat at a distance d = 5 m starts with  
–1
velocity u = 5 ms and moves with acceleration  = 2.5 m/
2
156.    
VA  x ˆi  2ˆj m/s and VB  3iˆ  2ˆj m/s find x such
s in order to catch it, while the rat with acceleration 
that, the relative speed of A with respect to B becomes 5 m/s.
starts from rest. For what value of , the cat will overtake
–2
the rat ? [in ms ] 157. A particle is projected up an inclined plane of inclination 
at an elevation  to the horizontal. Find the ratio between
153. A stone falls freely from rest and the total distance covered tan  and tan , if the particle strikes the plane horizontally.
by it in the last second of its motion is equal to the distance
covered by it in the first five seconds of its motion. For 158. A train takes 2 minutes to acquire its full speed 60kmph
how long the stone remained in air ? from rest and 1 minute to come to rest from the full speed.
If somewhere in between two stations 1 km of the track be
154. A man standing on a road has to hold his umbrella at 37°
under repair and the limited speed on this part be fixed to
with the vertical to keep the rain away. He throws the
20kmph, find the late running of the train on account of
umbrella and starts running at 12 km/h. He finds that
this repair work, assuming otherwise normal at running of
raindrops are hitting his head vertically. Find the speed (in
the train between the stations.
km/hr) of raindrops with resepect to the moving man.
119 KINEMATICS

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR IIT QUESTIONS

Single Answer Questions 5. A particle P is sliding down a frictionless hemispherical bowl.
It passes the point A at t = 0. At this instant of time, the
1. In the arrangement shown in the figure the ends P and Q
horizontal component of its velocity is v. A bead Q of the
of an unstretchable string move downwards with uniform
same masse as P is ejected from A at t = 0 along the horizontal
speed U. Pulley A and B are fixed.
string AB, with the speed v. Friction between the bead and
Mass M moves upwards with a speed (1982) the string may be neglected. Let tP and tQ be the respective
times taken by P and Q to reach the point B. Then (1993)

(a) tP < tQ (b) tP = tQ

tP length of arc ACB

(a) 2U cos  (b) U/cos  (c) tP > tQ (d) t  length of chord AB
Q
(c) 2U/cos  (d) U cos 
6. In 1.0 s, a particle goes from point A to point B, moving in
2. A particle is moving eastwards with a velocity of 5 m/s. In
a semicircle (see figure). The magnitude of the average
10 s the velocity changes to 5 m/s northwards. The average
velocity is (1999)
acceleration in this time is (1982)
A
(a) zero

1
(b) m/s2 towards north-east
2

1 B
(c) m/s2 towards north-west
2 (a) 3.14 m/s (b) 2.0 m/s
(c) 1.0 m/s (d) zero
1
(d) m/s2 toward north 7. A ball is dropped vertically from a height d above the
2
ground. It hits the ground and bounces up vertically to a
3. A river is flowing from west to east at a speed of 5 metre per height d/2. Neglecting subsequent motion and air
minute. A man on the south bank of the river, capable of resistance, its velocity v varies with height h above the
swimming at 10 metre per minute in still water, wants to ground as (2000)
swim across the river in the shortest time. He should swim V
V
in a direction (1983)
d
(a) due north (b) 30° east of north h
(a) (b)
(c) 30° west of north (d) 60° east of north
h
d
4. A boat which has a speed of 5 km/hr in still water crosses a
river of width 1 km along the shortest possible path in V V
15 minutes. The velocity of the river water in km/hr is (1988)
d d
(a) 1 (b) 3 h h
(c) (d)
(c) 4 (d) 41
 KINEMATICS 120

8. A body starts from rest at time t = 0, the acceleration time

graph is shown in the figure. The maximum velocity attained
by the body will be (2004)

10

(a) S = (1 – b2)P + bQ (b) S = (b – 1)P + bQ

11 t (sec)
(c) S = (1 – b)P + bQ (d) S = (1 – b)P + b2Q
(a) 110 m/s (b) 55 m/s Assertion and Reason
(c) 650 m/s (d) 550 m/s (a) If Statement I is true. Statement II is true; Statement II is the
9. A small block slides without friction down an inclined plane correct explanation for Statement I.
starting from rest. Let sn be the distance travelled from t = (b) If Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II is not
a correct explanation for Statement I.
Sn
n – 1 to t = n. Then is (2004) (c) If Statement I is true; Statement II is false.
Sn  1
(d) If Statement I is false; Statement II is true.
2n 1 2n  1 13. Statement–I : For an observer looking out through the
(a) (b)
2n 2n  1 window of a fast moving train, the nearby objects appear to
2n  1 2n move in the opposite direction to the train, while the distant
(c) (d) objects appear to be stationary.
2n  1 2n  1
Statement–II : If the observer and the object are moving at
10. The velocity displacement graph of a particle moving along  
velocities v1 and v2 respectively with reference to a
a straight line is shown in figure. The most suitable
laboratory frame, the velocity of the object with respect to
acceleration-displacement graph will be (2005)  
the observer is v 2  v1 . (2008)
v
v0 (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
Multiple Answer Question
x 14. A particle of mass m moves on the x–axis as follows : it
x0
starts from rest at t = 0 from the point x = 0, and comes to rest
a a
x at t = 1 at the point x = 1. No other information is available
about its motion at intermediate times (0 < t < 1). If  denotes
(a) (b) the instantaneous acceleration of the particle, then(1993)
(a)  cannot remain positive for all t in the interval 0 < t < 1
x
a (b) || cannot exceed 2 at any point in its path
a
x x (c) || mut be > 4 at some point or points in its path
(d)  must change sign during the motion, but no other
(c) (d)
assertion can be made with the information given.
15. The coordinates of a particle moving in a plane are given by
11. A projectile is given an initial velocity of (i + 2j) m/s, where x (t) = a cos (pt) and y (t) = b sin (pt) where a, b (<a) and p are
i is a along the ground and j is along the vertical. If g = 10 m/s2, positive constants of appropriate dimensions. Then (1999)
the equation of its trajectory is (2013) (a) the path of the particle is an ellipse
2 2
(a) y = x – 5x (b) y = 2x – 5x (b) the velocity and acceleration of the particle are normal to
(c) 4y = 2x – 5x 2
(d) 4y = 2x – 25x 2 each other at t = /2p
(c) the acceleration of the particle is always directed towards
12. Three vectors P, Q and R are shown in the figure. Let S be
a focus
any point on the vector R. The distance between the points
P and S is b[R]. The general relation among vectors P, Q and (d) the distance travelled by the particle in time interval t = 0
S is: (2017) to t = /2p is a
121 KINEMATICS

Fill in the blanks Both particles travel in the same vertical plane and undergo
16. A particle moves in a circle of radius R. In half the period a collision. After the collision, P retraces its path. Determine
of revolution its displacement is ................. and distance the position Q where it hits the ground. How much time
covered is ................. . (1983) after the collision does the particle Q take to reach the
17. Four persons K, L, M, N are initially at the four corners of ground ? (Take g = 9.8 m/s2)
a square of side d. Each person now moves with a uniform 23. A body falling freely from a given height H hits an inclined
speed v in such a way that K always moves directly towards plane in its path at a height h. As a result of this impact the
L, L directly towards M, M directly towards N and N
direction of the velocity of the body becomes horizontal.
directly towards K. The four persons will meet at a time
For what value of (h/H) the body will take maximum time to
................ (1984)
reach the ground ? (1986)
18. Spotlight S rotates in a horizontal plane with constant
angular velocity of 0.1 rad/s. The spot of light P moves 24. Two towers AB and CD are situated a distance d apart as
along the wall at a distance of 3 m. The velocity of the spot shown in figure. AB is 20 m high and CD is 30 m high from
P when  = 45° (see figure) is ................. m/s (1987) the ground. An object of mass m is thrown from the top of
AB horizontally with a velocity of 10 m/s towards CD.
S
Simultaneously another object of mass 2m is thrown from
the top of CD at an angle of 60° to the horizontal towards
3m
AB with the same magnitude of initial velocity as that of
P the first object. The two objects move in the same vertical
plane, collide in mid-air and stick to each other. (1994)
19. The trajectory of a projectile in a vertical plane is y = ax –
2 (a) Calculate the distance d between the towers.
bx , where a, b are constants, and x and y are respectively
the horizontal and vertical distances of the projectile from (b) Find the position where the objects hit the ground.
the point of projection. The maximum height attained is
............. and the angle of projection from the horizontal is
............. (1997)
True/False
20. Two balls of different masses are thrown vertically
upwards with the same speed. They pass through the
point of projection in their downward motion with the same
speed (Neglect air resistance). (1983)
21. A projectile fired from the ground follows a parabolic path.
The speed of the projectile is minimum at the top of its
path. (1984) 25. Two guns situated on the top of a hill of height 10 m fire
Subjective Questions
one shot each with the same speed 5 3 m/s at some
22. Particles P and Q of mass 20 g and 40 g respectively are interval of time. One gun fires horizontally and other fires
simultaneously projected from points A and B on the
upwards at an angle of 60° with the horizontal. The shots
ground. The initial velocities of P and Q make 45° and 135° 2
collide in air at point P (g = 10 m/s ) find (1996)
angle respectively with the horizontal AB as shown in the
figure. Each particle has an initial speed of 49 m/s. The (a) the time interval between the firings and
separation AB is 245 m. (b) the coordinates of the point P. Take origin of the
coordinate system at the foot of the hill right below
the muzzle and trajectories in x-y plane.
KINEMATICS 122

26. A cart is moving along x–direction with a velocity of 4 m/s. 29. An object A is kept fixed at the point x = 3 m and y = 1.25 m
A person on the cart throws a stone with a velocity of 6 m/s on a plank P raised above the ground. At time t = 0 the
relative to himself. In the frame of reference of the cart the plank starts moving along the +x-direction with an
stone is thrown in y–z plane making an angle of 30° with acceleration 1.5 m/s2. At the same instant a stone is
vertical z–axis. At the highest point of its trajectory the projected from the origin with a velocity u as shown.
stone hits an object of equal mass hung vertically from
y
branch of a tree by means of a string of length L. A
A
completely inelastic collision occurs, in which the stone
2 1.25 m P
gets embedded in the object. Determine (g = 9.8 m/s )
(1997)
u
(a) the speed of the combined mass immediately after the
collision with respect to an observer on the ground. x
O 3.0 m
(b) the length L of the string such that tension in the
A stationary person on the ground observes the stone
string becomes zero when the string becomes horizontal
hitting the object during its downwards motion at an angle
during the subsequent motion of the combined mass.
of 45° to the horizontal. All the motion are in x–y plane.
27.
–2
A particle of mass 10 kg is moving along the positive 
2
Find u and the time after which the stone hits the object.
x-axis under the influence of a force F(x) = – k/2x where
–2 2
k = 10 Nm . At time t = 0 it is at x = 1.0 m and its velocity (Take g = 10 m/s2).
v = 0. (1998) 30. On a frictionless horizontal surface, assumed to be the x-y
plane, a small trolley A is moving along a straight line
(a) find its velocity when it reaches x = 0.5 m.
parallel to the y-axis (see figure) with a constant velocity
(b) find the time at which it reaches x = 0.25 m.
28. A large heavy box is sliding without friction down a of  
3  1 m/s. At a particular instant when the line OA

smooth plane of inclination . From a point P on the makes an angle of 45° with the x-axis, a ball is thrown
bottom of the box, a particle is projected inside the box. along the surface from the origin O. Its velocity makes an
The initial speed of the particle with respect to the box is angle  with the x-axis and it hits the trolley. (2002)
u and the direction of projection makes an angle  with y
the bottom as shown in the figure.
A

45°
x
O
(a) The motion of the ball is observed from the frame of
the trolley. Calculate the angle made by the velocity
(a) Find the distance along the bottom of the box between vector of the ball with the x-axis in this frame.
the point of projection P and the point Q where the particle
(b) Find the speed of the ball with respect to the surface,
lands (Assume that the particle does not hit any other
if = 4/3.
surface of the box. Neglect air resistance.)
31. A train is moving along a straight line with a constant
(b) If the horizontal displacement of the particle as seen
acceleration a. A boy standing in the train throws a ball
by an observer on the ground is zero, find the speed of
forward with a speed of 10 m/s, at an angle of 60° to the
the box with respect to the ground at the instant when the
horizontal. The boy has to move forward by 1.15 m inside
particle was projected.
the train to catch the ball back at the initial height. The
2
acceleration of the train, in m/s , is. (2011)
123 KINEMATICS

32. Airplanes A and B are flying with constant velocity in the from its right end relative to the rocket. The time in seconds
same vertical plane of angle 30o and 60o with respect to the when the two balls hit each other is : (2014)
horizontal respectively as shown in figure. The speed of A
is 100 3 ms–1. At time t = 0s, an observer in A finds B at a
distance of 500 m. This observer sees B moving with a
constant velocity perpendicular to the line of motion of A.
If at t=to, A just escapes being hit by B, to in seconds is :
(2014)
34. A ball is projected from the ground at an angle of 45° with
the horizontal surface. It reaches a maximum height of 120
m and returns to the ground. Upon hitting the ground for
the first time, it loses half of its kinetic energy. Immediately
after the bounce, the velocity of the ball makes an angle of
30° with the horizontal surface. The maximum height it
reaches after the bounce, it metres, is........... (2018)
35. A particle of mass 10–3 kg and charge 1.0 C, is initially at
rest. At time t = 0, the particle comes under the influence of
33. A rocket is moving in a gravity free space with a constant 
an electric field E(t)  E 0 sin t ˆi, where E0 = 1.0 NC–1
acceleration of 2ms–2 along + x direction (see figure). The
and  = 103 rad s–1. Consider the effect of only the electrical
length of a chamber inside the rocket is 4m. A ball is thrown
force on the particle. Then the maximum speed, in ms–1,
from the left end of the chamber in + x direction with a
attained by the particle at subsequent time is .................
speed of 0.3 ms–1 relative to the rocket. At the same time, (2018)
another ball is thrown in -x direction with a speed of 0.2ms–1



ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (d) 5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (d) 9. (d)

10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (b)
19. (b) 20. (a) 21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (c) 25. (b) 26. (b) 27. (b)
28. (c) 29. (b) 30. (b) 31. (b) 32. (d) 33. (b) 34. (b) 35. (c) 36. (b)
37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (a) 40. (b) 41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (d) 44. (c) 45. (c)
46. (d) 47. (c) 48. (c) 49. (c) 50. (a) 51. (d) 52. (c) 53. (d) 54. (a)
55. (b) 56. (a) 57. (a) 58. (d) 59. (b) 60. (c) 61. (d) 62. (b) 63. (a)
64. (b) 65. (b) 66. (c) 67. (a) 68. (b) 69. (a) 70. (c) 71. (a) 72. (c)
73. (a) 74. (b) 75. (c) 76. (a) 77. (d) 78. (c) 79. (c) 80. (a) 81. (b)
82. (a) 83. (a) 84. (c) 85. (c) 86. (a) 87. (b) 88. (a) 89. (c) 90. (b)
91. (a) 92. (c) 93. (b) 94. (b)
 KINEMATICS 124

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (c)

10. (d) 11. (a) 12. (c) 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (b)
19. (c) 20. (b) 21. (b) 22. (d) 23. (a) 24. (a) 25. (d) 26. (b) 27. (a)
28. (c) 29. (c) 30. (d) 31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (d) 34. (c) 35. (b) 36. (c)
37. (c) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (d)
EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (c) 5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (a) 10. (d)
11. (b) 12. (d) 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (a) 16. (b) 17. (c) 18. (a) 19. (d) 20. (c)
21. (d) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (a) 25. (b) 26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (c) 29. (d) 30. (c)
31. (c) 32. (a) 33. (b) 34. (c) 35. (a) 36. (a) 37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (b) 40. (c)
41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (b) 44. (c) 45. (b) 46. (d) 47. (b) 48. (a) 49. (a) 50. (d)
51. (c) 52. (b) 53. (b) 54. (d) 55. (c) 56. (c) 57. (d) 58. (c) 59. (c) 60. (c)
61. (a) 62. (c) 63. (a) 64. (c) 65. (c) 66. (a) 67. (b) 68. (a) 69. (a) 70. (d)
71. (d) 72. (c) 73. (c) 74. (c) 75. (a) 76. (c) 77. (a) 78. (a) 79. (b) 80. (c)
81. (c) 82. (c) 83. (d) 84. (c) 85. (c) 86. (c) 87. (a) 88. (b) 89. (b) 90. (d)
91. (a) 92. (a) 93. (a) 94. (c) 95. (b) 96. (a, b) 97. (c) 98. (c) 99. (b) 100. (b)
101. (a) 102. (a) 103. (a) 104. (c) 105. (a) 106. (a,b,c) 107. (a,b,c) 108. (a,c) 109. (a,c,d)
110. (a,c,d) 111. (a,c,d) 112. (b,d) 113. (a,b,c) 114. (a,b,c,d) 115. (a,c) 116. (a,b,c,d)
117. (b, c) 118. (a, d) 119. (b) 120. (a,b,d) 121. (a,b,c,d) 122. (b,c,d) 123. (a, b)
124. (a,b,c) 125. (d) 126. (d) 127. (d) 128. (d) 129. (c) 130. (c) 131. (b) 132. (a) 133. (a)
134. (e) 135. (d) 136. (b) 137. (a) 138. (b) 139. (b) 140. (c) 141. (a) 142. (c) 143. (c)
144. (c) 145. (c) 146. (d) 147. (a q,s) (bp) (cp) (d q,r) 148. (a  p, q) (b  p, q) (c  p, r) (d  r, s)
149. (A  R; B  S; C  P; D  R) 150. (A  P; B  Q; C  R; D  S) 151. 0006 152. 0005
153. 0013 154. 16 155. 1 km/h 156. 0008 157. 0002 158. 160 sec

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (b)

9. (c) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (d) 13. (b) 14. (a, c) 15. (a, b, c) 16. 2R, R
2 –1
17. d/v 18. 0.6 19. a /4b, tan 20. True 21. True 22. Just midway between A and B, 3.53 s

23. 1/2 24. (a) Approximately 17.32 m, (b) 11.55 m from B 

25. (a) 1s, (b) 5 3 m,5m 
u 2 sin 2 u cos     
26. (a) 2.5 m/s, (b) 0.32 m 27. (a) – 1.0 m/s, (b) 1.48 s 28. (a) , (b) (down the plane)
g cos  cos 


 
29. u  3.75 ˆi  6.25 ˆj m / s, 1s 30. (a) 45°, (b) 2 m/s 31. (0005) 32. (0005) 33. (0008) 34. (30.00)

35. (0002)
Dream on !!

 03
LAWS OF MOTION
 LAWS OF MOTION 126

Laws of Motion
1. FORCE 2. BASIC FORCES
(a) A force is something which changes the state of rest or There are, basically, four forces, which are commonly
motion of a body. It causes a body to start moving if it is at encountered in mechanics.
rest or stop it, if it is in motion or deflect it from its initial (a) Weight : Weight of an object is the force with which earth
path of motion. attracts it. It is also called the force of gravity or the
(b) Force is also defined as an interaction between two bodies. gravitational force.
Two bodies can also exert force on each other even without (b) Contact Force : When two bodies come in contact they
being in physical contact, e.g., electric force between two exert forces on each other that are called contact forces.
charges, gravitational force between any two bodies of (i) Normal Force (N) : It is the component of contact
the universe. force normal to the surface. It measures how strongly
(c) Force is a vector quantity having SI unit Newton (N) and the surfaces in contact are pressed together.
dimension [MLT–2]. (ii) Frictional Force (f) : It is the component of contact
(d) Superposition of force : When many forces are acting on force parallel to the surface. It opposes the relative motion
a single body, the resultant force is obtained by using the (or attempted motion) of the two surfaces in contact.
   
laws of vector addition. F  F1  F2  ...Fn N F
  f
The resultant of the two forces F1 and F2 acting at angle
f
 is given by : F N

F  F12  F22  2F1F2 cos  (c) Tension : The force exerted by the end of a taut string,
rope or chain is called the tension. The direction of tension
The resultant force is directed at an angle  with respect is so as to pull the body while that of normal reaction is to
F2 sin  push the body.
to force F1 where tan   (d) Spring Force : Every spring resists any attempt to change
F1  F2 sin 
its length; the more you alter its length the harder it resists.
The force exerted by a spring is given by F = –kx, where x
(e) Lami’s theorem : If three forces F1, F2 and F3 are acting
is the change in length and k is the stiffness constant or
simultaneously on a body and the body is in equilibrium,
spring constant (unit Nm–1).
then according to Lami’s theorem,

F1 F2 F3
3. NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
  where  and 
sin      sin      sin      3.1 First law of motion
are the angles opposite to the forces F1, F2 & F3 respectively.
(a) Every body continues in its state of rest or of uniform
motion in a straight line unless it is compelled by a resultant
F1
force to change that state.
(b) This law is also known as law of inertia. Inertia is the
property of inability of a body to change its position of
rest or uniform motion in a straight line unless some external
F2 force acts on it.
F3
(c) Mass is a measure of inertia of a body.
127 LAWS OF MOTION

(d) A frame of reference in which Newton’s first law is valid is force by B on A (i.e., reaction represented FBA). Thus,
called inertial frame, i.e., if a frame of reference is at rest or FAB= – FBA.
in uniform motion it is called inertial, otherwise non-inertial. (b) The two forces involved in any interaction between two
3.2 Second law of motion bodies are called action and reaction. But we cannot say that
a particular force is action and the other one is reaction.
(a) This law gives the magnitude of force.
(c) Action and Reaction always act on different bodies.
(b) According to second law of motion, rate of change of
momentum of a body is proportional to the resultant force
4. LINEAR MOMENTUM

  
acting on the body, i.e., F   d p / dt  The linear momentum of a body is defined as the
 
product of the mass of the body and its velocity i.e.
Here, the change in momentum takes place in the direction Linear momentum = mass × velocity
 
of the applied resultant force. Momentum, p  m v is a 
If a body of mass m is moving with a velocity v , its linear
measure of sum of the motion contained in the body. 
momentum p is given by
(c) Unit force : It is defined as the force which changes the
momentum of a body by unity in unit time. According to  
pm v
 
 d p d   d v  dm
this, F    m v m v . Linear momentum is a vector quantity. Its direction is the
dt dt   dt dt same as the direction of velocity of the body.
If the mass of the system is finite and remains constant the SI unit of linear momentum is kg ms–1 and the cgs unit
w.r.t. time, then (dm/dt) = 0 and of linear momentum is g cm s–1.

 4.1 Impulse
   
  
F  m  d v/ dt   m a   p 2  p1  / t
    Impulse of a force, which is the product of average force
during impact and the time for which the impact lasts, is
(d) External force acting on a body may accelerate it either by
measured by the total change in linear momentum produced
changing the magnitude of velocity or direction of velocity
during the impact.
or both.
(i) If the force is parallel or antiparallel to the motion, it impulse of a force is a measure
 of total effect of the force.
changes only the magnitude of v but not the direction.
So, the path followed by the body is a straight line. The force which act on bodies for short time are called
(ii) If the force is acting  to the motion of body, it impulsive forces. For example :
changes only the direction but not the magnitude of (i) In hitting a ball with a bat,

v . So, the path followed by the body is a circle (ii) In driving a nail into a wooden block with a hammer,
(uniform circular motion). (iii) In firing a gun, etc.
(iii) If the force acts at an angle to the motion of a body, it An impulsive force does not remain constant, but changes

changes both the magnitude and direction of v . In first from zero to maximum and then from maximum to zero.
this case path followed by the body may be elliptical, Thus it is not possible to measure easily the value of
non-uniform circular, parabolic or hyperbolic. impulsive force because it changes with time. In such
(e) To apply Newton’s Second Law in non-inertial frame refer cases, we measure the total effect of the force, called
Section 17 (Page no. 10 impulse. Hence
   
3.3 Third law of motion I  Fav  t  p 2  p1

(a) According to this law, for every action there is an equal

5. APPARENT WEIGHT OF A BODY IN A LIFT
and opposite reaction. When two bodies A and B exert
force on each other, the force by A on B (i.e., action (a) When the lift is at rest or moving with uniform velocity,
represented by FAB), is always equal and opposite to the i.e., a=0 :
 LAWS OF MOTION 128

mg– R = 0 or R = mg  Wapp. = W0  
If FAB is force on A exerted by B, and FBA is force on B
(b) When the lift moves upwards with an acceleration a :
exerted by A,
 a then, according to Newton’s second law.
R – mg = ma or R = m(g + a) = mg 1  
 g   
FAB  t  change in linear momentum of A  p A'  p A
 a   
 Wapp. = W0 1   FBA  t  change in linear momentum of B  pB'  pB
g  
 
(c) When the lift moves downwards with an acceleration a : According to Newton’s third law, FAB   FBA

 a        
mg – R = ma or R = m (g–a) = mg  1   From eqns. p'A  p A    p 'B  p B  or p'A  p'B  p A  pB
 g
which shows that total final linear momentum of the
isolated system is equal to its total initial linear momentum.
 a
 Wapp. =W0  1   This proves the principle of conservation of linear
g
  momentum.

Here, if a > g, Wapp. will be negative. Negative apparent 7. FRICTION

weight will mean that the body is pressed against the roof Friction as an opposing force that comes into play when
of the lift instead of floor. one body actually moves (slides or rolls) or even tries to
(d) When the lift falls freely, i.e., a = g : move over the surface of another body.
R = m (g –g) = 0  Wapp. = 0 Thus force of friction is the force that developes at the
(Wapp. = R = reaction of supporting surface and W0= mg = surfaces of contact of two bodies and impedes (opposes)
true weight.) their relative motion.
(i) Frictional force is independent of the area of contact.
6. PRINCIPLE OF OF CONSERVATION This is because with increase in area of contact, force of
OF LINEAR MOMENTUM adhesion also increases (in the same ratio). And the
adhesive pressure responsible for friction, remains the
According to this principle, in an isolated system, the same.
vector sum of the linear momenta of all the bodies of the
(ii) When the surfaces in contact are extra smooth, distance
system is conserved and is not affected due to their mutual
between the molecules of the surfaces in contact decreases,
action and reaction.
increasing the adhesive force between them. Therefore,
Thus, in an isolated system (i.e., a system with no external the adhesive pressure increases, and so does the force of
force), mutual forces between pairs of particles in the friction.
system can cause changes in linear momentum of individual
particles. But as the mutual forces for each pair are equal 7.1 Static Friction, Limiting Friction and Kinetic Friction
and opposite, the linear momentum changes cancel in
The opposing force that comes into play when one body
pairs, and the total linear momentum remains unchanged.
tends to move over the surfac of another, but the actual
Hence the total linear momentum of an isolated system motion has yet not started in called Static friction.
of interacting particles is conserved. This principle is an
Limiting friction is the maximum opposing force that
important consequence of second and third laws of
comes into play, when one body is just at the verge of
motion.
moving over the surface of the other body.
Let us consider an isolated system comprising of two
  Kinetic frictioin or dynamic friction is the opposing force
bodies A and B, with initial linear momenta p A and p B . that comes into play when one body is actually moving
Let them collide for a small time t and separate with over the surface of another body.
 
final linear momenta p'A and p'B respectively. During Kinetic friction is always slightly
collision, less than the limiting friction.
129 LAWS OF MOTION

Cause of rolling friction. Let us consider a wheel which is

7.2 Laws of limiting friction
rolling along a road. As the wheel rolls along the road, it
(a) Static Friction slightly presses into the surface of the road and is itself
slightly compressed as shown in Fig.
(i) The force of friction always acts in a direction opposite
to the direction of relative motion, i.e., friction is of perverse
nature.
(ii) The maximum force of static friction, fms (called limiting
friction) is directly proportional to the normal reaction (R)
between the two surfaces in contact. i.e.,
ABC
f ms  R ...(1)
Thus, a rolling wheel :
(iii) The force of limiting friction depends upon the nature
(i) constantly climbs a ‘hill’ (BC) in front of it, and
and the state of polish of the two surfaces in contact and
it acts tangential to the interface between the two surfaces. (ii) has to simultaneously get itself detached from the road
(AB) behind it. The force of adhesion between the wheel
(iv) The force of limiting friction is independent of the
and the road opposes this process.
extent of the area of the surfaces in contact so long as the
normal reaction remains the same. Both these processes are responsible for rolling friction.

7.3 Coefficient of Static Friction 9. ANGLE OF FRICTION

We know that, f ms  R or f ms  s R
The angle of friction between any two surfaces in contact
is defined as the angle which the resultant of the force of
f ms
or s  ...(2) limiting friction F and normal reaction R makes with the
R direction of normal reaction R.
Here, s is a constant of proportionality and is called the It is represented by .
coefficient of static friction. Thus :
In fig. OA represents the normal reaction R which balances
Coefficient of static friction for any pair of surfaces in the weight mg of the body. OB represent F, the limiting
contact is equal to the ratio of the limiting friction and the force of sliding friction, when the body tends to move to
normal reaction. the right. Complete the parallelogram OACB. Join OC. This
s, being a pure ratio, has got no units and its value depends represents the resultant of R and F. By definition, AOC
upon the nature of the surfaces in contact. Further, s, is =  is the angle of friction between the two bodies in
usually less than unity and is never equal to zero. contact.
Since the force of static friction (fs) can have any value
C A
from zero to maximum (fms), i.e. fs < fms, eqn. (2) is generalised
to R

fs < sR ...(3)  P

Kinetic Friction B F O
The laws of kinetic friction are exactly the same as those
for static friction. Accordingly, the force of kinetic friction mg
is also directly proportional to the normal reaction, i.e.,
The value of angle of friction depends on the nature of
f k  R or fk   k R ...(4) materials of the surfaces in contact and the nature of the
surfaces.
8. ROLLING FRICTION
Relation between  and 
The opposing force that comes into play when a body rolls
over the surface of another body is called the rolling AC OB F
In AOC, tan      ...(5)
friction. OA OA R
LAWS OF MOTION 130

Hence   tan  ...(6) 11. METHODS OF CHANGING FRICTION

i.e. coefficient of limiting friction between any two surfaces Some of the ways of reducing friction are :
in contact is equal to tangent of the angle of friction (i) By polishing.
between them.
(ii) By lubrication.
10. ANGLE OF REPOSE OR ANGLE OF SLIDING (iii) By proper selection of materials.
(iv) By Streamlining.
Angle of repose or angle of sliding is defined as the
minimum angle of inclination of a plane with the (v) By using ball bearings.
horizontal, such that a body placed on the plane just begins
to slide down.
12. DYNAMICS OF UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
CONCETP OF CENTRIPETAL FORCE
It is represented by . Its value depends on material and
nature of the surfaces in contact. Centripetal force is the force required to move a body
In fig., AB is an inclined plane such that a body placed on uniformly in a circle. This force acts along the radius
it just begins to slide down. BAC  = angle of repose. and towards the centre of the circle.
Infact, when a body moves in a circle, its direction of motion
R
B at any instant is along the tangent to the circle at that
F
instant. From fig., we find that the direction of motion of
 
m gsin the body moving in a circle goes on changing continuously.
 mg mgcos
A C

The various forces involved are :

(i) weight, mg of the body, acting vertically downwards, F
F
(ii) normal reaction, R, acting perpendicular to AB, F
F
(iii) Force of friction F, acting up the plane AB. F
F
Now, mg can beresolved into two rectangular components :
mg cos  opposite to R and mg sin  opposite to F. In
equilibrium,
F = mg sin  ... (7) According to Newton’s first law of motion, a body cannot
R = mg cos  ... (8) change its direction of motion by itself. An external force
Dividing (7) by (8), we get is required for this purpose. It is this external force which
is called the centripetal force.
F mg sin 
 , i.e.,   tan  On account of a continuous change in the direction of
R mg cos  motion of the body, thre is a change in velocity of the
Hence coefficient of limiting friction between any two body, an hence it undergoes an acceleration, called
surfaces in contact is equal to the tangent of the angle of centripetal acceleration or radial acceleration.
repose between them. An expression for centripetal force is

i.e. F  m v 2 / r  m r 2

Combining (6) and (9), we obtain 13. CENTRIFUGAL FORCE

 = tan  = tan  The natural tendency of a body is to move uniformly along
a straight line. When we apply centripetal force on the
  body, it is forced to move along a circle. While moving
actually along a circle, the body has a constant tendency
i.e. angle of friction is equal to angle of repose.
to regain its natural straight line path. This tendency gives
131 LAWS OF MOTION

rise to a force called centrifugal force. Hence (i) The weight of the car, mg, acting vertically downwards,
Centrifugal force is a force that arises when a body is (ii) Normal reaction R of the road on the car, acting vertically
moving actually along a circular path, by virtue of upwards,
tendency of the body to regain its natural straight line (iii) Frictional Force F, along the surface of the road, towards
path. the centre of the turn, as explained already.
Centrifugal forces can be regarded as the reaction of centripetal As there is no acceleration in the vertical direction,
force. As forces of action and reaction are always equal and R – mg = 0 or R = mg ...(1)
opposite, therefore, magnitude of centrifugal force = m v2/r,
which is same as that of centripetal force. However, direction The centripetal force required for circular motion is along
the surface of the road, towards the centre of the turn. As
of centrifugal force is opposite to the direction of centripetal
explained above, it is the static friction that provides the
force i.e. centrifugal force acts along the radius and away
necessary centripetal force. Clearly,
from the centre of the circle.
Note that centripetal and centrifugal forces, being the forces mv 2
F ...(2)
of action and reaction act always on different bodies. For r
example, when a piece of stone tied to one end of a string is
rotated in a circle, centripetal force F1 is applied on the where v is velocity of car while turning and r is radius of
circular track.
stone by the hand. In turn, the hand is pulled outwards by
centrifugal force F2 acting on it, due to tendency of the As F = sR = s mg, [using (1)]
stone to regain its natural straight line path. The centripetal where s is coefficient of static friction between the tyres
and centrifugal forces are shown in Fig. and the road. Therefore, from (2),

Stone
mv 2
F2  s mg or v  s rg  v max  s rg ...(3)
F1 r
Hand Hence the maximum velocity with which a vehicle can go
round a level curve ; without skidding is

v   s rg .
14. ROUNDING A LEVEL CURVED ROAD The value of depends on radius r of the curve and on
coefficient of static friction (s) between the tyres and the
When a vehicle goes round a curved road, it requires some
road. Clearly, v is independent of mass of the car.
centripetal force. While rounding the curve, the wheels of
the vehicle have a tendency to leave the curved path and
15. BANKING OF ROADS
regain the straight line path. Force of friction between the
wheels and the road opposes this tendency of the wheels. The maximum permissible velocity with which a vehicle can
This force (of friction) therefore, acts, towards the centre go round a level curved road without skidding depends on
of the circular track and provides the necessary centripetal , the coefficient of friction between the tyres and the road.
force. The value of decreases when road is smooth or tyres of
Three forces are acting on the car, fig. the vehicle are worn out or the road is wet and so on. Thus
force of friction is not a reliable source for providing the
R required centripetal force to the vehicle.
A safer course of action would be to raise outer edge of
the curved road above the inner edge. By doing so, a
componenet of normal reaction of the road shall be spared
F to provide the centripetal force. The phenomenon of
raising outer edge of the curved road above the inner
edge is called banking of roads. We can calculate the
mg
angle of banking , as detailed below:
In Fig., OX is a horizontal line. OA is the level of banked
 LAWS OF MOTION 132

curved road whose outer edge has been raised. XOA = But F < s R, where s is coefficient of static friction
 = angle of banking. between the banked road and the tyres. To obtain vmax, we
put F = s R in (1) and (2).
R cos  = mg + s R sin  ...(3)
R Rcos
 mv 2
Rsin A and R sin  + s R cos  = ...(4)
OUTER r
EDGE

mg
RAISED From (3), R (cos – s sin ) = mg
O X
 B
mg
R ...(5)
cos   s sin 

mv 2
From (4), R(sin  + s cos ) =
r
R R sin
A
mg  sin   s cos   mv 2
 Using (5), 
F cos  cos   s sin   r
R sin 
rg  sin   s cos  
O
F sin 
X  v2  
mg  cos   s sin  
rg cos   tan   s 
Three forces are acting on the vehicle as shown in Fig.
cos  1  s tan  
(i) Weight mg of the vehicle acting vertically downwards.
(ii) Normal reaction R of the banked road acting upwards in a 1/ 2
 rg  s  tan   
direction perpendicular to OA. v  ...(6)
(iii) Force of friction F between the banked road and the tyres,  1  s tan   
acting along AO.
This is the max. velocity of vehicle on a banked road.
R can be resolved into two rectangular components :-
Discussion
(i) R cos , along vertically upward direction
(ii) R sin , along the horizontal, towards the centre of the 1. If s = 0, i.e., if banked road is perfectly smooth, then from
curved road. eqn. (51),

F can also be resolved into two rectangular components : 1/ 2

v 0   rg tan   ...(7)
(i) F cos , along the horizontal, towards the centre of curved
road This is the speed at which a banked road can be rounded
(ii) F sin , along vertically downward direction. even when there is no friction. Driving at this speed on a
As there is no acceleration along the vertical direction, banked road will cause almost no wear and tear of the
the net force along this direction must be zero. Therefore, tyres.

R cos = mg + F sin ...(1) 2

From (7), v02 = rg tan  or tan   v 0 / rg ...(8)
If v is velocity of the vehicle over the banked circular road
of radius r, then centripetal force required = mv2/r. This is 2. If speed of vehicle is less than v0, frictional force will be up
provided by the horizontal components of R and F as the slope. Therefore, the vehicle can be parked only if tan
shown in Fig.  < s.
Roads are usually banked for the average speed of vehicles
mv 2
 R sin   Fcos   ...(2) passing over them. However, if the speed of a vehicle is
r
133 LAWS OF MOTION

somewhat less or more than this, the self adjusting static In equilibrium, R cos  balances the weight of the cyclist i.e.
friction will operate between the tyres and the road, and
R cos  = mg ...(1)
the vehicle will not skid.
and R sin provides the necessary centripetal force (m v2/r)
The speed limit at which the curve can be negotiated safely
is clearly indicated on the sign boards erected along the m v2
curved roads.  R sin   ...(2)
r
Note that curved railway tracks are also banked for the
same reason. The level of outer rail is raised a little above R sin  m v 2
Dividing (2) by (1), we get 
the level of inner rail, while laying a curved railway track. R cos  r mg

16. BENDING OF A CYCLIST v2

tan  
When a cyclist takes a turn, he also requires some rg
centripetal force. If he keeps himself vertical while turning,
Clearly, would depend on v and r.
his weight is balanced by the normal reaction of the
ground. In that event, he has to depend upon force of For a safe turn,  should be small, for which v should be
friction between the tyres and the road for obtaining the small and r should be large i.e. turning should be at a slow
necessary centripetal force. As force of friction is small speed and along a track of larger radius. This means, a
and uncertain, dependence on it is not safe. safe turn should neither be fast nor sharp.
To avoid dependence on force of friction for obtaining
17. PSEUDO FORCE
centripetal force, the cyclist has to bend a little inwards
from his vertical position, while turning. By doing so, a 
If observer O is non-inertial with acceleration a 0 and still
component of normal reaction in the horizontal direction
provides the necessary centripetal force. To calculate the wants to apply Newton’s Second Law on particle P, then
angle of bending with vertical, suppose observer has to add a “Pseudo force” in addition to real
forces on particle P.
m = mass of the cyclist,
 
v = velocity of the cyclist while turning, FPseudo   m P a 0
r = radius of the circular path,
Thus, Newton Second Law with respect to O will be
 = angle of bending with vertical.
In Fig., we have shown weight of the cyclist (mg) acting
vertically downwards at the centre of gravity C. R is force O P
of reaction of the ground on the cyclist. It acts at an angle aP, O
with the vertical.   
FRe al  FPseudo  m P a P, O
R
Rcos   
 i.e., FRe al  m P a O  mP a P,O
Y
C
Rsin 
 Where a P, O is acceleration of P with respect to observer O.

mg

If observer is in rotating frame then Pseudo force is called

“Centrifugal force”.
O X

R can be resolved into two rectangular components: Remember : Pseudo force is required only and only if
R cos , along the vertical upward direction, observer is non-inertial.e.g.

R sin , along the horizontal, towards the centre of the (i) Study of motion with respect to accelerating lift.
circular track. (ii) Study of motion with respect to accelerating wedge.
 LAWS OF MOTION 134

18. FORCE (a) Weight : Weight of an object is the force with which earth
attracts it. It is also called the force of gravity or the
(a) A force is something which changes the state of rest or gravitational force.
motion of a body. It causes a body to start moving if it is
(b) Contact Force : When two bodies come in contact they
at rest or stop it, if it is in motion or deflect it from its initial
exert forces on each other that are called contact forces.
path of motion.
(i) Normal Force (N) : It is the component of contact
(b) Force is also defined as an interaction between two bodies. force normal to the surface. It measures how strongly
Two bodies can also exert force on each other even without the surfaces in contact are pressed together.
being in physical contact, e.g., electric force between two
(ii) Frictional Force (f) : It is the component of contact
charges, gravitational force between any two bodies of
force parallel to the surface. It opposes the relative motion
the universe.
(or attempted motion) of the two surfaces in contact.
(c) Force is a vector quantity having SI unit Newton (N) and
dimension [MLT–2]. N F
(d) Superposition of force : When many forces are acting on f
a single body, the resultant force is obtained by using the f
    F N
laws of vector addition. F  F1  F2  ...Fn
(c) Tension : The force exerted by the end of a taut string, rope or
  chain is called the tension. The direction of tension is so as to
The resultant of the two forces F1 and F2 acting at angle
pull the body while that of normal reaction is to push the body.
 is given by : (d) Spring Force : Every spring resists any attempt to change
its length; the more you alter its length the harder it resists.
F  F12  F22  2F1F2 cos  The force exerted by a spring is given by F = –kx, where x
is the change in length and k is the stiffness constant or
The resultant force is directed at an angle  with respect
spring constant (unit Nm–1).
F2 sin 
to force F1 where tan   20. NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
F1  F2 sin 
20.1 First law of motion
(e) Lami’s theorem : If three forces F1, F2 and F3 are acting
simultaneously on a body and the body is in equilibrium, (a) Every body continues in its state of rest or of uniform
then according to Lami’s theorem, motion in a straight line unless it is compelled by a
resultant force to change that state.
F1 F2 F3
  where  and  (b) This law is also known as law of inertia. Inertia is the
sin      sin      sin     
property of inability of a body to change its position of
are the angles opposite to the forces F 1, F 2 and F 3 rest or uniform motion in a straight line unless some
respectively. external force acts on it.
(c) Mass is a measure of inertia of a body.
F1 (d) A frame of reference in which Newton’s first law is valid is
called inertial frame, i.e., if a frame of reference is at rest
or in uniform motion it is called inertial, otherwise non-
inertial.
F2 20.2 Second law of motion
F3
(a) This law gives the magnitude of force.
(b) According to second law of motion, rate of change of
19. BASIC FORCES momentum of a body is proportional to the resultant force

There are, basically, five forces, which are commonly   
acting on the body, i.e., F   d p / dt 
encountered in mechanics.  
135 LAWS OF MOTION

Here, the change in momentum takes place in the direction (b) to predict the future motion of a body, given the body’s
  initial position and velocity and the forces acting on it.
of the applied resultant force. Momentum, p  m v is a
For either kind of proble, we use Newton’s second law
measure of sum of the motion contained in the body.
  F  ma  . The following general strategy is useful for
(c) Unit force : It is defined as the force which changes the
momentum of a body by unity in unit time. According to solving such problems :
  (i) Draw a simple, neat diagram of the system.
 d p d   d v  dm
this, F    m v m v . (ii) Isolate the object of interest whose motion is being
dt dt   dt dt analyzed. Draw a free body diagram for this object,
If the mass of the system is finite and remains constant that is, a diagram showing all external forces acting
on the object. For systems containing more than one
w.r.t. time, then (dm/dt) = 0 and
object, draw separate diagrams for each objects. Do

   
   not include forces that the object exerts on its
F  m  d v/ dt   m a   p 2  p1  / t surroundings.
   
(iii) Establish convenient coordinate axes for each body
(d) External force acting on a body may accelerate it either by and find the components of the forces along these
changing the magnitude of velocity or direction of velocity axes. Now, apply Newton’s second law,  F = ma, in
or both. component form. Check your dimensions to make
sure that all terms have units of force.
(i) If the force is parallel or antiparallel to the motion, it
 (iv) Solve the component equations for the unknowns.
changes only the magnitude of v but not the direction.
Remember that you must have as many independent
So, the path followed by the body is a straight line. equations as you have unknowns in order to obtain
(ii) If the force is acting  to the motion of body, it a complete solution.
changes only the direction but not the magnitude of (v) It is a good idea to check the predictions of your
 solutions for extreme values of the variables. You
v . So, the path followed by the body is a circle
can often detect errors in your results by doing so.
(uniform circular motion).
(iii) If the force acts at an angle to the motion of a body, it 21. SOME IMPORTANT POINTS CONCERNING
 NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
changes both the magnitude and direction of v . In
this case path followed by the body may be elliptical, (a) The forces of interaction between bodies composing a
non-uniform circular, parabolic or hyperbolic. system are called internal forces. The forces exerted on
bodies of a given system by bodies situated outside are
20.3 Third law of motion called external forces.
(a) According to this law, for every action there is an equal (b) Whenever one force acts on a body it gives rise to another
and opposite reaction. When two bodies A and B exert force called reaction i.e., a single isolated force is
physically impossible. This is why total internal force in
force on each other, the force by A on B (i.e., action
an isolated system is always zero.
represented by FAB), is always equal and opposite to the
force by B on A (i.e., reaction represented FBA). Thus,  
(c) According to Newton’s second law, F   d p/ dt  . If
FAB= – FBA.  
(b) The two forces involved in any interaction between two  
     
bodies are called action and reaction. But we cannot say F  0,  d p/ dt   0 or  d v/ dt   0 or v = constant or
   
that a particular force is action and the other one is reaction.
zero, i.e., a body remains at rest or moves with uniform
(c) Action and Reaction always act on different bodies.
velocity unless acted upon by an external force. This is
20.4 Applications of Newton’s Laws of Motion Newton’s Ist law.
(d) The ratio of times for which the same force acts on two
There are two kinds of problems in classical mechanics : bodies of different masses initially at rest to have
(a) To find unknown forces acting on a body, given the body’s
acceleration, and
(i) equal displacement is : (t1/t2) =  m1 / m2  ;
 LAWS OF MOTION 136

(ii) equal final velocity is : (t1/t2) = (m1/m2); translatory equilibrium), then T0 =mg.
(iii) equal final momentum is : (t1/t2) = 1/1. (b) If the carriage is accelerated up with an acceleration a,
Newton’s second law can also be expressed as : Ft= p2– then
p1. Hence, if a car and a truck are initially moving with the
 a
same momentum, then by the application of same breaking T = m(g + a) = mg  1  a  = T0  1  
force, both will come to rest in the same time.  g  g
(c) If the carriage is accelerated down with an acceleration
22. APPARENT WEIGHT OF A BODY IN A LIFT a, then
(a) When the lift is at rest or moving with uniform velocity,  a  a
i.e., a=0 : T = m(g – a) = mg 1    T0 1  
 g  g
mg– R = 0 or R = mg  Wapp. = W0
(d) If the carriage begins to fall freely, then the tension in
(b) When the lift moves upwards with an acceleration a :
the string becomes zero.
 a
R – mg = ma or R = m(g + a) = mg 1   (e) If the carriage is accelerated horizontally, then
 g
(i) mass m experiences a pseudo force ma opposite to
 a
 Wapp. = W0 1   acceleration;
 g
(ii) the mass m is in equilibrium inside the carriage and
(c) When the lift moves downwards with an acceleration a :
 a T sin  = ma, T cos  = mg, i.e.,
mg – R = ma or R = m (g–a) = mg 1  
 g
T = m g2  a 2 ;
 a
 Wapp. =W0 1   (iii) the string does not remain vertical but inclines to
 g
the vertical at an angle  = tan–1 (a/g) opposite to
Here, if a > g, Wapp. will be negative. Negative apparent acceleration;
weight will mean that the body is pressed against the roof (iv) This arrangement is called accelerometer and can be
of the lift instead of floor. used to determine the acceleration of a moving
(d) When the lift falls freely, i.e., a = g : carriage from inside by noting the deviation of a
plumbline suspended from it from the vertical.
R = m (g –g) = 0  Wapp. = 0
(Wapp. = R = reaction of supporting surface and W0= mg =
25. CONSTRAINED METHOD
true weight.)
Let us try to visualize this situation
23. PROBLEM OF MONKEY CLIMBING A ROPE
Let T be the tension in the rope. m3
(i) When the monkey climbs up with uniform speed :
T = mg.
(ii) When the monkey moves up with an acceleration a :
T – mg = ma or T = m (g + a).
(iii) When the monkey moves down with an acceleration a : m2
mg – T = ma or T = m (g – a). m1

24. PROBLEM OF A MASS SUSPENDED FROM (i) If m3 was stationary, then magnitude of displacements of
A VERTICAL STRING IN A MOVING CARRIAGE m1 and m2 would be same and in opposite direction.
Let us say x (displacement of m1 and m2 when m3 is
Following cases are possible : stationary).
(a) If the carriage (say lift) is at rest or moving uniformly (in (ii) Now consider the case when m3 displaces by x1, then
 137 LAWS OF MOTION

net displacement of m1 = x1 – x
l2 = x + x3
m2 = x1 + x
m3 = x1 Constant length is length is
(iii) Differentiate it twice we have increasing decreasing

a m3  a1 Note : If Length is decreasing then differentiation of that length

will be negative.
a m1  a 1  a
 On differentiating twice we have
a m2  a1  a 0 = a + (–a3)
a = a3
This problem can be approached in other way. Which is
more mathematical and do not require much of visualisation. Now, we can apply F = ma for different blocks.
Steps involved to approach problems of multiple pulleys Solve for a3, a1 a2 and Tension.
of system having different accelerations :
26. FORCE OF FRICTION
(i) Define a fixed point/axis.
Whenever two rough surfaces are in contact, sliding between
(ii) Locate positions of all movable points from fixed point/axis.
the surfaces is opposed by the force of friction which the surfaces
(iii) (a) Write down the relation between length of the string exert on each other. The force of friction acts parallel to the
and the position of different movable points. surfaces in contact and on both the surfaces.
(b) No. of relation must be equal to no. of string.
(iv) Differentiate it twice to get the relationship between 26.1 Static Friction
acceleration of different objects. If the tendency to slide against each other is too small to cause
actual sliding motion, the force of friction is called as the force of
fixed axis static friction. The magnitude of this force balances the net
x3
applied force. Hence if there is no sliding between the surfaces.
m3
fixed axis Force of static friction = net applied force parallel to the surfaces.

x2 x1 26.2 Critical Point (Maximum Static friction)

x

movable point-1 If the sliding between the surfaces is about to begin, the static
friction is at its maximum value which is equal to sN, where N =
movable point-2 m1 normal reaction between the surfaces and s = coefficient of static
movable point-3 m2 friction. In this situation, we say that the surfaces are at their
point of sliding and are exerting a force sN on each other so as to
For string connecting m1 and m2 : oppose sliding.

Let the length of the string be l1 26.3 Kinetic Friction

l1 2 1 If actual sliding is taking place between the surfaces, the force of

friction is called as force of kinetic friction or the force of sliding
Constant Constant friction (fk).

On differentiating it twice : fk   k N where k = coefficient of kinetic friction.

a1  a 2
0 = (a2 – a) + (a1 – a) + 0  a 
2
For string connective m3 and pulley :
Frictia always opposes relative motion between the
Let the string length be l2 surfaces in contact.
LAWS OF MOTION 138

SOME IMPORTANT CASES

Case Diagram Result

F m1F
(a) When two bodies are kept in contact a (i) a  , (ii) N 
m1  m 2 m1  m2
and force is applied on the body of F N N
m1 m2
mass m1.

F m2 F
(b) When two bodies are kept in contact a
(i) a  , (ii) N 
m1  m 2 m1  m2
and force is applied on the body of
mass m2. N' N' F
m1 m2

F m1 F
(c) When two bodies are connected by (i) a  , (ii) T 
a m1  m 2 m1  m 2
a string and placed on a smooth T T F
m1 m2

F
(d) When three bodies are connected (i) a 
a
m1  m 2  m 3 
T 1 T1 T 2 T2 F m1F
through strings as shown in fig and m1 m2 m3 (ii) T1 
(m1  m2  m3 )

placed on a smooth horizontal surface. (iii) T2 

m1  m 2  F
m1  m 2  m 3 

 m1  m 2  g
(e) When two bodies of masses m1 & m2 (i) a 
 m1  m 2 
 2m1 m 2 
are attached at the ends of a string (ii) T    g
T T  m1  m 2 
a a
passing over a pulley as shown in the T T

figure m1 m2

m1g m2g
139 LAWS OF MOTION

m 2g
(f) When two bodies of masses m1 & m2 (i) a  , (ii) T  m1 m 2 g
m1 m1  m 2   m1  m 2 
are attached at the ends of a string
passing over a pulley in such a way a
T
that mass m1 rests on a smooth
horizontal table and mass m2 is m2
hanging vertically.
m2g

(g) If in the above case, mass m1 is placed (i) a 

m 2  m1 sin  g
m1  m 2

a m1m 2 g 1  sin 
on a smooth inclined plane making an a (ii) T 
m1  m 2 
m2
angle with horizontal as shown in (iii) If the system remains in equilibrium,
figure, then. m2g then m1g sin  = m2g

g m1 sin   m 2 sin 

(h) In case (f), masses m1 and m2 are (i) a 
m1  m 2 
T
T
a
a
m1 m 2
placed on inclined planes making (ii) T  sin   sin  g
m1  m 2 
angles  &  with the horizontal

respectively, then

N
a
(i) When a body is moving on smooth a = g sin , N = mg cos 
inclined plane.
mg

f N
(j) When a body is moving down on aD
a rough inclined plane. g (sin  –  cos )

mg

N
(k) When a body is moving up on a au = g (sin +  cos )
aU
rough inclined plane.
f
mg
 LAWS OF MOTION 140

SOLVED EXAMPLES

Example - 1 Example - 3
The driver of a three-wheeler moving with a speed of Figure shows the position-time graph of a particle of mass
36 km/h sees a child standing in the middle of the road 4 kg. What is the :
and brings his vehicle to rest in 4 s just in time to save the
child. What is the average retarding force on the vehicle? x(m)
The mass of the three-wheeler is 400 kg and the mass of A
the driver is 65 kg. 3

Sol. We are given that

O 4 t(s)
initial speed of the three-wheeler, i.e.,

 5 (a) force on the particle for t < 0, t > 4s, 0 < t < 4s ?
v0  36 km / h   36   m / s  10 m / s
 18  (b) impulse at t = 0 and t = 4s ?

final speed of the three-wheeler, v = 0 (Consider one- dimensional motion only).

time taken by the vehicle to stop, t = 4 s Sol. (a) For t < 0 and t > 4 s, the particle is at rest as the position
does not change with respect to time. Obviously, no force
v  v 0 0  10
Clearly, a    2.5 m / s 2 acts during these two intervals.
t 4
Further, for 0 < t < 4, the position-time graph is a straight
Negative sign indicates the retarding nature of the force. line, it represents uniform motion and there is no acceleration.
Further, total mass of the driver and the three-wheeler, Obvisouly, no force acts during this interval as well.
M = 400 + 65 = 465 kg The force acting on the particle in all the three intervals is
Thus, the average retarding force on the vehicle, thus zero.
F = Ma = 465 × 2.5 = 1.2 × 103 N (b) Since the velocity from O to A is uniform,

Example - 2 velocity at O(v) = velocity at A(v) = slope of the graph

A ballon has a mass of 5 g in air. The air escapes at a 3

OA  m / s.
uniform rate with a velocity of 4 cm/s. If the balloon 4
shrinks cmpletely in 2.5 s, find the mean force acting on
Impulse (at t = 0) = change in momentum
the balloon.
= final momentum – initial momentum
Sol. Force acting on the balloon
3
= rate of change of momentum of = mv – 0 = 4   3 kg m / s
4
air escaping out of the balloon
Impulse at (t = 4 s) = change in momentum
dp d dm = final momentum – initial momentum
i.e., F   mv   v (as v is constant)
dt dt dt
3
= 0 – mv = –4 ×  3 kg m / s
dm 5g 4
Here,   2g / s, v  4 cm / s
dt 2.5s

Thus, F = (4 cm/s) (2 g/s) = 8 dyne

141 LAWS OF MOTION

Example - 4 Example - 6
Two masses 8 kg and 12 kg are connected at the two ends A constant retarding force of 50 N is applied to a body of
of a light inextensible string that goes over a frictionless mass 20 kg moving with a speed of 15 m/s. How long does
pulley. Find the acceleration of the masses and the tension the body take to stop ?
in the string when the masses are released.
Sol. We are given that
Sol. From eqn. (3), force acting on the body, F = 50 N
mass of the body, m =20 kg
 m  m1  12  8  initial speed of the body, v0 = 15 m/s
a  2 g   10  2.0 m / s 2
m
 1  m 2  8  12
final speed of the body, v = 0
From eqn. (4),
F 50
As F  ma, a    2.5 m / s 2
 2m1m 2  m 20
2  8 12
T g   10  96 N
 m1  m 2  8  12  Since the force is retarding in nature,
a = –2.5 m / s2
Example - 5
Let t be the time taken by the body to stop.
An object of weight, W is suspended with the help of three
cords 1, 2 and 3 with a knot at P as shown in the fig. The v  v 0 0  15
tension in cord-3 is 30 N. Find : As v  v0  at, t    6s
a 2.5
(a) tension in cord-2 and
Example - 7
(b) the weight of the object.
A constant force acting on a body of mass 3 kg changes
Sol. Let T 1 and T 2 be the tensions in the cords 1 and 2 its speed from 2 m/s to 3.5 m/s in 25 second. The direction
of motion of the body remains unchanged. What is the
respectively. The free-body diagram showing various forces
magnitude and direction of the force ?
acting on the knot at P is shown in fig.
Sol. With usual notation, we are given that
mass of the body, m = 3 kg
initial speed, v0 = 2 m/s
final speed after 25 s, i.e., v = 3.5 m/s

Thus, v  v 0 3.5  2 1.5

a   m / s2
t 25 25
If F is the magnitude of the force,

For the equilibrium of the knot, 1.5

F  ma  3   0.18 N
25
 Fx  0, i.e., 30N  T2 cos 40o  0 ...(i)
The force acts along the direction of motion of the body.
o
and  Fy  0, i.e., T2 sin 40  W  0 ...(ii) Example - 8
A force of 9 N pulls a block of mass 4 kg through a rope
30 N 30 N of mass 0.5 kg. The block is resting on a smooth surface.
(a) From eqn. (i), T2  o
  39.2 N
cos 40 0.7760 Calculate the force of reaction exerted by the block on
the rope ?
(b) From eqn. (ii) W = T2 sin 40o = (39.2N) 0.6428
= 25.2 N Sol. Total mass to be pulled,

Note that the tension in cord-1, i.e., T1 = W = 25.2 N M = 4kg + 0.5 kg = 4.5 kg
Force acting, F = 9N
 LAWS OF MOTION 142

Acceleration produced in the system of block and rope, or a = 50m/s2 (neglecting negative sign)

F 9N If F is the average force required to stop the ball,

a   2 m / s2
M 4.5 kg F = ma = (0.2 kg) (50 m/s2) = 10 N
Force of reaction exerted by the block on the rope = force Example - 12
acting on the block = 4 × 2 = 8 N A body of mass 5 kg is acted upon by two perpendicular
forces 8 N and 6 N. Give the magnitude and direction of
Example - 9
the acceleration of the body.
While launching a rocket of mass 2 × 104 kg, a force of
 
5 × 105 N is applied for 20 s. What is the velocity attained Sol. Let F1 and F2 be the two perpendicular forces where
by the rocket at the end of 20 s ?
F1 = 8 N and F2 = 6 N
Sol. Here, mass of the rocket, m = 2 × 10 kg 4
  
Let F be the resultant of F1 and F2 ,[Fig.]
force acting on the rocket, F = 5 × 105 N
time for which force acts, t = 20s
If a is the acceleration produced in the rocket, F = ma
F2 F
F 5 105
of a   25m / s
m 2 104

Let v be the velocity at the end of 20 s. Thus,
F1
v = v0 + at = 0 + 25 × 20
or v = 500 m/s 2 2
Clearly, F  F12  F22   8N    6N   10N
Example - 10
A force of 72 dyne is inclined to the horizontal at an angle Mass of the body, m = 5 kg
of 60o. Find the acceleration it produces in a mass of 9 g As F = ma,
which moves in a horizontal direction.
F 10N
a  2
o
Sol. Since the force (F) of 72 dyne makes an angle of 60 with the m 5 kg = 2 m/s in the direction of resultant force
horizontal, its component along horizontal, i.e.,  
If F makes an anlge  with F1 ,
Fx = 72cos 60o = 72 × 0.5 dyne = 36 dyne
As Fx = max, F2 6
tan     0.7500
F1 8
Fx 36 dyne
ax   (as m = 9 g) or = 36.9o with the direction of 8N force
m 9g
Example - 13
or ax = 4 cm/s2
A force acts for 10 second on a body of mass 10 g, after
Example - 11 which the force ceases to act and the body describes 50 cm
A cricket ball of mass 0.2 kg moving with a velocity of in next 5 second. Find the magnitude of the force.
20 m/s is brought to rest in 0.4 second. Find the average Sol. We are given that
force.
mass of the body, m = 10 g
Sol. We are given that initial velocity of the body, v0 = 0
mass of the cricket ball, m = 0.2 kg final velocity of the body after 10 second,
initial of the ball, v0 = 20 m/s
50
final velocity of the ball, v = 0 v  10 cm / s
5
time taken by the ball to come to rest, i.e., t = 0.4 s
(the body describes 50 cm in 5 second after the force stops
v  v 0 0  20 acting and assuming the velocity to be uniform, velocity =
Thus, a  distance travelled time taken).
t 0.4
 143 LAWS OF MOTION

If a is the acceleration produced in the body, then from

1 2
v = v0 + at,  10  30    20    30   8700m
2
v  v 0 10  0 During the next 70 s, there is no force and the particle moves
a   1cm / s 2
t 10 with the uniform velocity of –590 m/s and distance travelled
during this time, i.e.
Force acting on the body, F = ma
= 10g × 1 cm/s2 = 10 dyne x2 = –590 × 70 = – 41300m
Total distance covered in 100 s, i.e.,
Example - 14
x = x1 + x2 = – 8700 – 41300 = –50 km
A body of mass 0.4 kg moving with a constant speed of
10 m/s to the north is subject to a constant force of 8 N Example - 15
directed towards the south for 30 s. Take the instant the A stone of mass 5 kg falls from the top of a cliff 50m
force is applied to be t = 0, the position of the body at that high and buries itself 1 m in sand. Find the average
time to be x = 0, and predict its position at t = –5s, resistance offered by the sand and the time it takes to
25s, 100s. penetrate.
Sol. Taking the initial direction of motion (i.e., north) to be
Sol. Let V be the velocity acquired by stone after falling through
positive,
a height of 50 m.
initial velocity of the particle, v0 = 10 m/s
constant force acting on the particle due to south, F = –8N Clearly, V  2gh  2  9.8  50  980 m / s
mass of the particle, m = 0.4 kg Now V is the velocity with which the stone starts burying
Let a be the acceleration produced in the particle. clearly, itself into the sand and finally comes to rest in it after
travelling a distance of 1m.
F 8N
a   20 m / s 2 (due south) for 0 < t < 30s
m 0.4 kg From v 2  v 02  2as,

Let v be the velocity after 30 s. Clearly, 0–V2 = 2a × 1

v = v0 + at = 10 + (–20) × 30 = – 590 m/s (due south) (as v = 0,v0 = V, s = 1m)

At t = 0 (when the force is applied), V2

or a
x=0 2
(i) At t = – 5s (force does not exist) and as such a = 0. (neglecting negative sign)
Thus, x = v0t = 10 × (–5) = –50 m
(ii) At t = 25 s (force is acting on the particle) and as such 980 m 2 / s 2
or a  490 m / s 2
a = – 20m/s2, Thus, 2s

1 If F is the average resistance offered by the sand to the

x  v0 t  at 2
2 stone of mass (m) = 5 kg, then

1 2
F = ma = (5 kg) (490 m/s2) = 2450 N
 10  25    20    25 
2 Let t be the time taken by the stone to penetrate the sand.
or x = – 6000 m = – 6 km
From v  v 0  at, 0  980   490  t
(iii) At t = 100s. After 30 s, the force stops acting.
Distance covered during first 30 swhen the acceleration is (as v = 0, v0 = V = 980 m/s)
acting i.e.,
980 m / s
1 or t  0.06s
x1  v0 t  at 2 490 m / s 2
2
 LAWS OF MOTION 144

Example - 16 dm
A dish of mass 10 g is kept floating horizontally in air by  av  102  15  1000  kg / s  150 kg / s
dt
firing bullets, each of mass 5 g, with the same velocity, at
the rate of 10 bullets per second and the bullets rebound dm
with the same speed in opposite directions. Find the Clearly, F  v  15  150  N  2250 N
dt
velocity of each bullet at the time of impact.
Example - 18
Sol. If v (cm/s) is the velocity of impact of a bullet,
An elevator weighs 4000 kg. When the upward tension
change in momentum of a bullet due to each impact in the supporting cable is 48000 N, what is the upward
= mv – (– mv) acceleration? Starting from rest, how far does it rise in
= 2 mv = 2 × 5 × v = 10v 3 second ?
Upward force acting on the dish, i.e., Sol. Upward tension in the supporting cable,
F = rate of change of momentum of the bullets T = 48000 N
= change in momentum of one bullet Downward force due to teh weight of the elevator,
× number of bullets fired per second W = 4000 kg wt = 4000 × 9.8 N = 39200 N
= 10v × 10 = 100v Net upward force on the elevator,
Weight of the dish, W = 10 g wt T – W = 48000N – 39200N = 8800 N
= 10 × 980 = 9800 dyne If a is the upward acceleration in the elevator of mass (m),
For equilibrium of the dish, F = W
F 8800 N
or 100v = 9800 or v = 98 cm/s a   2.2 m / s 2
m 4000 kg
Example - 17 Distance covered by the elevator starting from rest
A stream of water flowing horizontally with a speed of (v0 = 0) in 3 s, i.e.,
15 m/s gushes out of a tube of cross-sectional area
10–2 m2, and hits at a vertical wall nearby. What is the 1 1 2
s  v0 t  at 2   2.2  3  9.9 m
force exerted on the wall by the impact of water, assuming 2 2
it does not rebound ? Example - 19
Sol. We are given that A cricket ball of mass 0.2 kg moving with a velocity of
20 m/s is brought to rest by a player in 0.1 s. Find the
speed of stream of water, v = 15 m/s
impulse of the force acting on the ball and the average
area of cross-section of the tube, force applied by the player.
a = 10–2 m2
Sol. We are given that
volume of the water coming out per second
mass of the body, m = 0.2 kg
= av = 15 × 10–2 m3
initial velocity of the body, v0 = 20 m/s
mass of water coming out per second
final velocity of the ball, v = 0
= (volume/s) × density
time taken by the player to bring the ball to rest, t = 0.1s As
= (15 × 10–2) × 1000 = 150 kg
v = v0 + at,
(as density of water = 1000kg/m3)
0 = 20 + a (0.1)
As on hitting the wall, water does not rebound,
or 0.1a = –20
force exerted on the wall by the impact of water
a = –200 m/s2 (– ve sign shows retardation)
= change in momentum per second
Average force applied by the player, i.e.,
= mass of water flowing out per second × velocity
F = ma = 0.2 × 200 = 40 N
= 150 × 15 = 2250 N
Impulse of the force
Alter : Rate at which water gushes out of the tube, i.e.,
= Ft = (40 N) (0.1 s) = 4 N s
145 LAWS OF MOTION

Example - 20 If F is the average force between the ball and the ground,
Two billiard balls each of mass 0.05 kg moving in opposite Ft = impulse = 0.38 N s
directions with speed 6 m/s collide and rebound with the
0.38 N s 0.38
same speed. What is the impulse imparted to each ball or F  N  3.8 N
due to the other ? t  in s  0.1

Sol. Initial momentum of each ball = 0.05 × 6 = 0.30 kg m/s Example - 22

Since the two balls rebound after collision with the same A shell of mass 0.02 kg is fired by a gun of mass 100 kg.
speed, velocity of each ball is reversed only in direction If the muzzle speed of the shell is 80 m/s, what is the
and so is its momentum. recoil speed of the gun ?
Final momentum of each ball = –0.30 kg m/s Sol. Mass of the shell, m = 0.02 kg
Change in momentum of each ball Mass of the gun, M = 100 kg
= 0.30 kg m/s – (– 30 kg m/s) = 0.60 kg m/s Speed of the shell, v = 80 m/s
Impulse imparted to each ball = 0.60 kg m/s Let V be recoil speed of the gun.
The impulse imparted to the two balls are opposite in Applying the law of conservation of momentum,
direction.
final momentum of the shell and the gun = initial momentum
Example - 21 of the shell and the gun, i.e.,
A rubber ball of mass 0.05 kg falls from a height of 1 m mv + MV = 0
and rebounds to a height of 0.5 m. Find the impulse and
the average force between the ball and the ground, if the or mv 0.02  80
V   0.016 m / s  1.6 cm / s
time during which they are in contact is 0.1 s. M 100

Sol. Let v be the velocity with which the ball strikes the ground As is obvious, negative sign indicates that gun kicks
at B, where Ab = 1 m, [Fig.] backwards as the bullet moves forward.
Example - 23
A A machine gun has a mass of 10 kg. It fires 30 g bullets
at the rate of 6 bullets per second with a speed of 400 m/s.
What force in newton must be applied to the gun to keep
it in position ?
1m C
Sol. We are given that
v’ 0.5 m mass of the gun, M = 10 kg
mass of the bullet, m = 30g = 0.03 kg
B(v)
velocity of the bullet, v = 400 m/s
Cleary, v  2gh  2  9.8  1  19.6 m / s If V is the velocity of recoil of the gun, then from the law of
conservation of linear momentum, MV + mv = 0
Let v’ be the velocity with which the ball rebounds. The ball
rises up and comes to rest at C after rising through a distance or MV = – mv
of 0.5 m. Clearly, Taking only the magnitude,
MV = mv = 0.03 × 400 = 12 kg m/s
v '  2gh '  2  9.8  0.5  9.8 m / s
Since initial momentum of the gun is zero, change in momen-
Momentum of the ball before striking the grund = mv tum of the gun after it has fired 1 bullet (i.e., in 1/6 second)
Momentum of the ball after striking the ground = –mv’
= MV – 0 = 12 kg m/s
(–ve sign shows that v’ is in a direction opposite to v).
If F is the required force, then
Impulse = change in momentum of the ball
impulse = change in momentum of the gun
= mv – (–mv’) = mv + mv’ = m (v + v’)
12
or Ft = 12 or F   72N [ast = 1/6 s]
= 0.05  
19.6  9.8 N s  0.38 N s 1/ 6
 LAWS OF MOTION 146

Example - 24 For the equilibrium of concurrent forces.

A shell is fired from a cannon with a velocity of v (m/s) at  Fx  0, i.e., T2 cos 30o  T1  0 ...(i)
an angle with the horizontal direction. At the highest
point in its path, it explodes into two pieces of equal masses. and  Fy  0, i.e., T2 sin 30o  mg  0 ...(ii)
One of the pieces retraces its path to the cannon. Find the From eqn. (ii),
speed of the other piece immediately after the explosion.
T2 (1/2) = mg or T2 = 2 mg
Sol. The flight of the shell before explosion is shown in Fig.
where H is the highest point. 3
From eqn. (i), T1 = T2 cos 30o = (2mg)  3 mg
2
Example - 26
Two weights W1 and W2 are attached to a rigid support
PQ with the help of ropes with knots at A and B as shown
in The Fig. If W1 = 300 N, find tensions in the ropes 1, 2
and 3. Also find W2.

The velocity fo the shell can be resolved into two

rectangular components :
(i) v cos  (i.e., vx) in the horizontal direction and
(ii) v sin  (i.e., vy) in the vertical direction.
At the highest point in its path, vy = 0 and as such the Sol. Let T1, T2 and T3 be the tensions in the ropes 1, 2 and 3
velocity of the shell at this point is vx. respectively.
Let the two pieces (each of mass m/2) into which the shell Consider the equilibrium of the knot A as shown in Fig.
explodes be denoted by 1 and 2. Since the piece-1 retraces
its path to the cannon, its velocity in the horizontal direction
is –vx. If v2 is the velocity of the piece-2 in the horizontal
direction, then applying the law of conservation of
momentum,
m m m 3
v 2    v x   mvx or v 2  mv x
2 2 2 2
or v2 = 3vx = 3 v cos 
Example - 25
A mass m is hung at P with a light inextensible string AB 300
As  Fy  0,T1 sin 37 o  300 N  0 or T1   500 N
as shown in the Fig. Find tension in the horizontal portion sin 37 o
AP of the string. Further, as  Fx  0, T1 cos 37 o  T2  0
Sol. The free-body diagram for the various forces acting at P is or T2 = T1 cos 37o = 400 N
shown in Fig. Now consider the equilibrium of concurrent forces acting
atthe knot B as shown in Fig.
From  Fx  0, T2  T3 cos 53o  0

T2
or T3   670 N
cos 53o

and from  Fy  0, T3 sin 53o  W2  0

or W2 = T3 sin 53o = 530 N
147 LAWS OF MOTION

Example - 27
A horizontal force of 500 N pulls two masses 10 kg and
20 kg (lying on a frictionless table) connected by alight
string. What is the tension in the string ? Does the answer
depend on which mass end the pull is applied ?

Sol. Let m1 (= 10 kg) and m2 (= 20 kg) be the two masses

connected by a light string and lying on a frictionless table.
Let F (= 500 N) be the horizontal force applied on the mass
m2 and let T be the tension acting in the string as shown in
Fig.

If a is the acceleration produced in the system,

for mass m1,
T = m1a ...(i) From Fig. (b), (c) and (d)
and for mass m2, T1 – mg = ma ...(i)
F – T = m2a ...(ii) 2mg – T1 = 2ma ...(ii)
Adding eqns. (i) and (ii), we get F = (m1 + m2)a and mg – T2 = ma ...(iii)
Adding eqns. (i) and (ii), mg = 3ma
F 500 N 50
or a   m / s2 or a = g/3
 m1  m 2  10  20  kg 3
4
From eqn. (i), T1 = mg + ma = mg + m(g / 3)  mg
50 3
Clearly T = m1a = 10   166.7 N
3
From eqn. (iii), T2 = mg – ma = mg – m(g / 3)  2 mg
In case the force is applied on m1 as shown Fig. 3
Example - 29
50
T '  m 2 a  20   333.3 N A block of 10 kg is pulled at a constant speed on a rough
3
horizontal surface by a force of 20 N. Calculate the
Since T '  T, the tension in the string depends on which coefficient of kinetic friction. Given g = 10 m/s2.
mass end the pull is applied. Sol. Since the force pulls the body with a constant speed; kinetic
Example - 28 friction, fk = 20 N.
Three equal weights A, B and C of mass m each are fk
hanging on a string over a fixed pulley as shown in Fig. Coefficient of kinetic friction,  k 
R
What are the tensions in the strings connecting weights
A to B and B to C ? On a horizontal surface, R = mg and as such

Sol. Let us draw free-body diagrams for the weights A, B and C fk 20

 k   0.2
as shown in Fig. (b), (c) and (d). mg 10 10
 LAWS OF MOTION 148

Example - 30
F
A man whose shoes have leather soles and heels is able to a  2g sin 
m
stand without slipping on a wooden surface that makes an
angle of 25o with the horizontal. What is the minimum If s is the distance covered by the block up the inclined,
coefficient of static friction for leather on wood ? then from

Sol. According to the condition of the problem, v 2  v 02  2as, we get

= angle of the friction = angle of sliding = 25o
0  v02  2  2g sin   s
If s is the minimum coefficient of static friction,
 
s = tan 25o = 0.4663 (as v0 and a are in opposite directions)

Example - 31 v 02
or s
A cubical block rests on a plane of s  1/ 3. Determine 4g sin 
the angle through which the plane be inclined to the Example - 33
horizontal so that the block just slides down.
Two bodies A and B of masses 5 kg and 10 kg in contact
Sol. When the block just slides down. with each other rest on a table against a rigid partition.
the anlge of incline of the plane with the horizontal The coefficient of friction between the bodies and the table
is 0.15. A force of 200 N is applied horizontally at A.
= angle of repose = 
(a) What are : (i) the reaction of the partition (ii) the action-
We know that, tan  = s reaction forces between A reaction of the partition (ii) the
action-reaction froces between A and B ? (b) What happens
1
or tan   or  = 30o when the partition is removed ? Do the answers to (ii)
3 change when the bodies are in motion ? Ignore difference
between s and k.
Example - 32
A block slides down an inclined plane of slope  with
constant velocity. It is them projected up the same plane
with an initial velocity v0. How far up the inclined plane
will it move before coming to rest ?

Sol. The situation is shown in Fig.

Sol. Let m1 and m2 be the masses of the bodies A and B

respectively. Clearly.
m1 = 5 kg and m2 = 10 kg
Force applied on the system, F = 200 N
Total downward force (F) on the block of mass m is given (a) When the partition is present
by
Refer to Fig. (a)
F = mg sin  + f
If f is the maximum force of friction acting on the system
or F = mg sin  + R (as f = R) formed by A and B, then
or F = mg sin  + (tan ) mg cos  f = R = (m1 + m2)g [as R = (m1 + m2)g]
or F = 2mg sin 
or f = 0.15 (5 + 10) 9.8 = 22 N
(for the slope ,  = tan  as the velocity of the block while
(i) As f acts in a direction opposite to F,
sliding down is constant, i.e., it is in the equilibrium)
reaction of the partition = F – f
Acceleration on the block, i.e.,
= 200 N – 22 N = 178 N ...(i)
 149 LAWS OF MOTION

(ii) Force of friction on A, i.e. fA = m1g

F  f  178
= 0.15 × 5 × 9.8 = 7.4 N or a   11.9 m / s 2
 m1  m 2  15
Force exerted by A on B (or by B on A)
Further, F = m1a + m2a + (fA + fB)
= F – fA = 200 – 7.4 = 192.6 N ...(ii)
(b) When the partition is removed wher f = fA (force of friction on A)

Refer to Fig. (b) + fB (force of friction on B)

Net force acting on the system Force exerted by A on B, i.e.,

= F – f = 178 N FBA = m2a + fB = F – fA – m1a

If a is the acceleration produced in the system, = 200 –7.4–5 × 11.9 = 133.1 N

(in the direction of motion)
F  f  178
a   11.9 m / s 2 Example - 34
 m1  m2   5  10 
Fig. (a) shows a man standing stationary with respect to a
Force producing acceleration (a) in A, i.e., horizontal conveyor belt that is accelerating with 1 m/s2.
What is the net force on the man ? If the coefficient of
f1 = m1a = 5 × 11.9 = 59.5 N
static friction between the man’s shoes and belt is 0.2, up
Net force acting on A, i.e., to what acceleration of the belt can the man continue to be
F’ = F – f1 = 200 – 59.5 = 140.5 N stationary relative to the belt ? (Mass of the man = 65 kg).
Force exerted by A on B
Sol. We are given that,
FBA = F’ – fA = 140.5 N –7.4 N =133.1 N
acceleration of the conveyor belt, a0 = 1 m/s2
(in the direction of motion)
coefficient of static friction between the man’s shoes and
Obviously, force exerted by B on A (i.e., FAB) is also 133.1 N.
the belt, s = 0.2
Thus, the answer to (a) (ii) changes.
mass of the man, m = 65 kg
Alter : Free–Body Diagram : We can solve this problem
by drawing free-body diagrams for various cases as shown
in Fig.

When the man is stationary, his weight (mg) is balanced by

the reaction (R) of the belt acting vertically upwards.
Net force acting on the man, F0 = ma0
= 65 × 1 = 65 N
(a) When the partititon is present
This force acts in a direction opposite to the motion of the
(i) From Fig. (a), reaction of the partition
belt (as the man is in an accelerated frame of reference).
= F – f = 200 N – 22N = 178 N
For the man to remain stationary,
(ii) From Fig. (b), force exerted by A on B (action)
F0 = maximum static friction (f)
= F – fA = 200 N – 7.4 N = 192.6 N
ma0 = sR = smg (as R = mg)
(b) When the partititon is removed
or a0 = sg = 0.2 × 10 = 2 m/s2
Refer to Fig. (c)
(F – f) = (m1 + m2)a
 LAWS OF MOTION 150

Example - 35
F m  a 0  g 
a 
The rear side of a truck is open and a box of 40 kg mass m m
is placed 5 m away from the open end, [Fig.]. The
= a0 – g = 2 – 0.15 × 10 = 0.5 m/s2
coefficient of friction between the box and the surface
below it is 0.15. On a straight road, the truck starts from If t is the time taken by the box to fall, i.e., to cover a distance
rest and accelerates with 2 m/s2. At what distance from of 5 m, then from
the starting point does the box fall off the truck (Ignore
1
the size of the box) ? s  v0 t  at 2 , we get
2

1
s  0.5 t 2 (as v0 = 0,s = 5 m)
2

10
Sol. The situation is shown in Fig. (a). We are given that mass or t2 
0.5
of the box, m = 40 kg
If s’ is the distance covered by the truck during this time
coefficient of friction between the box and the surface below
(i.e., t).
it, = 0.15
acceleration of the truck, a0 = 2 m/s2 1 1  10 
s '  v0 t  at 2   2   20 m
The pseudo-force (F0) acting on the box due to acceleration 2 2  0.5 
(a0) of the truck is opposed by the frictional force (f) between
(as v0 = 0, a0 = 2m/s2)
the box and the surface below it.
Example - 36
Resultant force acting on the box, i.e.,
Two blocks connected by a cord passing over a small
F = F0 – f
frictionless pulley rest on a smooth plane as shown.
or F = ma0 –R = ma0 – mg
(a) Which way will the system move ?
= m(a0 – g)
(b) What is the acceleration of the block ?
or F = 40 (2 – 0.15 × 10) = 20 N
(c) What is the tension in the cord ?
Let a be the acceleration produced in the box relative to the
truck. Clearly.

F 20 B
a   0.5 m / s 2 100 kg A
m 40 30° 53° 50 kg

Alter : Free-body diagram. To simplify, draw the free-body

diagram for the box as shown in Fig. (b) Sol. The effective component of gravity on
A (100 g sin 30°) is more than that on B (50 g sin 53°)
So A slides down and B goes up.
Drawing the force diagrams of A and B :
For A :
R1
A T
R
Clearly, R = mg and net force acting on the box, i.e.,
F = F0 – f = ma0 – mg
or F = m (a0 – g) 100 g sin 30° – T = 100 a ...(i)
Acceleration produced in the box relative to the truck, i.e., R1 = 100 g cos 30°
151 LAWS OF MOTION

For B : Example - 38
R2 Two blocks of masses m and M are connected to the ends
T
B a of a string passing over a pulley. M lies on the plane
inclined at an angle  with the horizontal and m is
hanging vertically as shown. The coefficient of static
friction between M and the plane is s. Find the minimum
and maximum values of m so that the system is at rest.
T – 50 g sin 53° = 50 a ...(ii)
R2 = 50g cos 53°
Adding (i) and (ii), we get :
M
–50 g sin 53° + 100 g sin 30° = 150 a m

Solve to get : a = + 0.65 m/s2.

From (i) T = 100 g sin 30° – 100 a Sol. If m is much heavier than M, then the block M will move
= 100 × 9.8 × 1/2 – 100 × (+ 0.65) upwards.
 T = 425 N If m is much lighter than M, then the block M will move
Example - 37 downwards.
A homogenous rod with length L is acted upon by two We will consider the following situations :
collinear force F1 and F2 (F1 > F2) applied to its ends and (i) m is at its maximum value so that M is about to start
directed oppositely. What is the tension force F at a cross sliding upwards.
section P, at a distance l from F1 end ? (ii) m is its minimum value so that M is about to start
L sliding downwards.
F1 F2 Case 1 : Upwards slipping tendency of M
A P B
(for maximum value of m)
Sol. Let a be the acceleration of the rod. As M is just at the point of sliding up, frictional force on M
To find the tension at P, we have to split the rod in two is sN down the plane.
parts : AP and PB. N T
(Mass of the part AP) = (mass per unit length) l T
= M/L
From the force diagram of part AP,

M 
F1  F    a mg
L 
From the force diagram of the rod AB :
F1 – F2 = Ma Balancing forces :
a a
N = Mg cos 
l (L – l)
T = Mg sin  + sN
F1 F F F2
A P P B T = mg

F2 Hence mg = Mg sin  + s Mg cos 

F1
A a B Maximum value of m = M (sin  + s cos )
M M   F1  F2  Cases 2 : Downwards slipping tendency of M
Hence F  F1  a  F1   
L L  M  (for minimum value of m)

 L    F1  F2 As M is about to start sliding down, the frictional force is

 sN upwards.
L
 LAWS OF MOTION 152

mg sin 30  mg cos30

N T 
T m
= g (sin 30° +  mg cos 30°)
 a = –g (sin 30° +  mg cos 30°)
= – 6.6 m/s2
mg Calculation of Time and displacement :  = + 10 m/s,
Using v2 = u2 + 2as, we get :
Balancing forces : 02 = 102 + 2 (–6.6) (s)
N = mg cos   s = 7.58 m
T + s N = mg sin  v = u + at
T = mg 0 = 10 – 6.6 × t
Hence mg + smg cos  = mg sin   t = 1.5 seconds
Minimum value of m = M (sin  – s cos ) Hence the block moves up the plane for 1.5 s covering 7.58 m.

M (sin  – s cos ) < m <M (sin  + s cos ) For the motion of block down the plane :

N
Example - 39
A 5 kg block is projected upwards with an initial speed of a
10 m/s from the bottom of a plane incline at 30° with
horizontal. The coefficient of kinetic friction between
the block and the plane is 0.2.
(a) How far does the block move up the plane ?
(b) How long does it move up the plane ? The magnitude of acceleration
(c) After what time from its projection does the block mg sin 30  mg cos30
again come back to the bottom ? With what speed 
m
does it arrive ?
= g (sin 30° – mg cos 30°)
Sol. Analysis of Upward Motion  a = 3.2 m/s2
* While the block is moving up, the frictional force acts As acceleration is in downward direction,
downward. a = – 3.2 m/s2
* As the block is slowing down, the velocity and Calculation of Time :
acceleration must be in opposite directions.
s = – 7.58 m (down the plane) and u = 0 m/s
* Velocity in this case is upwards, so acceleration is in s = ut + 1/2 at2
downward direction and hence negative.
– 7.58 = (0) + 1/2 (–3.2) t2
N  t = 2.18 sec.
So the total time taken to come back :
tup + tdown = 1.5 + 2.18 = 3.68 seconds
a
v = u + at
v = 0 + (–3.2) (2.18) = – 6.8 m/s
v = – 6.8 m/s.

the magnitude of acceleration So the block arrives at the bottom with a speed of 6.8 m/s.
153 LAWS OF MOTION

Example - 40 Example - 41
(a) Find the acceleration of the cart and the mass shown In Fig., m1 slides down without friction on an inclined
in Fig. The pulleys are light and all surfaces are plane. The pulleys P1 P2 are massless and frictionless.
frictionless. (b) What do these result predict in the limits Calculate the acceleration of m1 when it is moving up
m2 >> m1 and m1 >> m2 ? along the inclined plane.

Sol. For the pulley P1, T = T1 + T1 = 2T1 ...(i)

Sol. If m1 travels a distance x, m2 travels a distance (x/2). Thus, if
When m2 moves down through a distance x, P1 moves
acceleration of cart (of mass m1) is a, that of mass (m2) is (a/2).
along the inclined plane through the same distance, i.e., x.
But m1 moves through a distance 2x. Clearly, acceleration
of m1 is double that of m2 i.e.,
a1 = 2a2 ...(ii)
For the motion of m2, m2g – T = m2a2 ...(iii)
From eqns. (i), (ii) and (iii),

a 
m 2 g  2T1  m 2  1 
2

From Fig. (a) T = m1a ...(i) or 2m2g – 4T1 = m2a1 ...(iv)

From Fig. (b) m2g – 2T = m2(a/2) ...(ii) For the motion of m1,

From eqns. (i) and (ii), T1 – m1g sin = m1a1

2m2g – 4 m1a = m2a or 4T1 – 4m1g sin  = 4 m1a1 ...(v)
Adding eqns. (iv) and (v).
2m 2 g
or a 2m2g – 4m1g sin  = (m2 + 4m1) a1
4m1  m 2
2g  m 2  2m1 sin  
a m2 g or a1 
Acceleration of mass  m 2     m2  4m1 
2 4m1  m 2
Example - 42
In case, m2 >> m1 acceleration of cart In the figure, M moves on a plane
inclined at  = 30° with the
2m 2 g
a  2g (neglecting 4m1) horizontal. The masses are
m2
M = 16 Kg, m0 = 5 Kg & m = 4 Kg.
The system is released from rest m
a at t = 0. The string connecting m
M
and acceleration of mass m 2  g m0
2 and m0 is cut at t = 1 second. Find
In case, m1 >> m2, the further time taken by M to
come back to its original position
a  0, i.e., the system will not move.
on the inclined plane.
 LAWS OF MOTION 154

Sol. From t = 0 to t = 1 : Sol. Let T = tension in the rope.

As M sin  < m + m0. A = acceleration of bar in upwards direction.
M moves up the plane and (m + m0) move down. It means that the rope gripped by monkey will have a
downward acceleration of A m/s2. The monkey will have a
T net downward acceleration of (A – 2) m/s2.

T T
M m + m0
2 m/s2
A
(m + m0) g A
T – Mg sin  = Ma
mg mg
(m + m0)g – T = (m + m0) a

m  m 0  M sin  g  T – Mg = MA
g
a
m  m0  M 25 mg – T = m (A – 2)
Solving these equations, we get : A = 7.6 m/s2
d = 1/2 at2 = g/50
The acceleration of monkey = (7.6 – 2) m/s2
Velocity of M at t = 1 is : v = 0 + at = g/25.
After t = 1 : = 5.6 m/s2 downwards
When the string connecting m and m0 is cut, Example - 44
M sin  > m What is the minimum value of force F that can be applied
 M will have a downward acceleration. to the bar C to keep bodies A and B stationary relative to
the bar C ? The masses of the bodies A and B are equal,
The magnitue of acceleration is :
and the coefficientof friction between the bar and the
M sin   m g bodies is equal to . The masses of the pulley and the
a g  downwards
Mm 5 threads are negligible, the friction in the pulley is absent.
There is no friction between C and the floor.
To reach back to its original position, m
Displacement = s = – g/50 and  = g/25 A
s = ut + 1/2 at2 M m
2 F C B
–g/50 = (g/25) t – (g/10) t
2
5t – 2t – 1 = 0
Sol. For the blocks to be stationary relative to M, they must
  
t  1  6 / 5  0.69 seconds have acceleration which is same as that of M.
Example - 43 Let a (min) be the minimum acceleration for which blocks
remain at rest relative to M. It means that for a < a (min),
A small monkey of mass m = 20 kg is climbing up a
the block A will slip right and block B will slip down
rope with an acceleration 2 m/s2 relative to rope. The
relative to M. Hence at a = a (min), the slipping tendency
rope passes over a fixed pulley and carries a wooden
is as shown.
bar of mass M = 5 kg as shown in the figure. Find the
N1
acceleration of monkey and the bar.
Slipping te
a n
de
ncy

1 T
f1 f2 T

2 N2
mg
mg

a
155 LAWS OF MOTION

For block A : F sin  – s (mg + F cos ) = ma ...(iii)

T – f1 = ma When the block just slides, a = 0
N1 = mg From eqn. (iii),
For block B : F sin q – s (mg + F cos ) = 0
a mg
or F
sin   s cos 
Fmin Since F is positive and so is mg,
(sin  –  cos ) should also be positive.
N2 = ma i.e., sin  – s cos  > 0 or tan  > s
–1
mg = T + f2 or > tan (s)

For the system (A + B + C) Example - 46

Fmin = (M + 2m) a A ladder 4 m long (of mass 25 kg) rests with its upper end
At slipping point : against a smooth wall and lower end on rough ground.
Whay must be the least coefficient of friction between
a = a (min), f1  N1, f2 =  N2
the ground and the ladder for it to be inclined at 60o with
On combining all the equations, we get : the horizontal without slipping ? Take g = 10 m/s2.

Fmin  mg
1    Sol. Let AB be the ladder of weight W which is acting at its mid-
1    point G as shown in Fig. R and R’ represent the reactions of
Example - 45 the ground and the wall respectively on ladder at the points
A and B. fms is the force of limiting friction between the
A block is placed on the table and is pulled with a force F
ground and the ladder and it acts in the direction shown in
acting at an anglewith the vertical as shown in the Fig.
the Fig.
The coefficient of static friction between the block and
the surface is  k. Find the least value of for which the
block is able to slide on the floor.

Sol.

For vertical equilibrium, R = W

and for horizontal equilibrium, fms = R’
Further, taking moments about A.
For vertical equilibrium, R × 0 + W × AD – R’ × BC = 0
R = mg + F cos  ...(i)
AD 2 cos 60o
For horizontal motion, or R '  W  W '
BC 4sin 60o
F sin  – fms = ma
or F sin q – m sR = ma ... (ii)  AD AD BC BC 
o
 as cos 60   and sin 60o   
From eqns. (i) and (ii),  AG 2 AB 4 
 LAWS OF MOTION 156

Example - 48
2 1/ 2  W
Clearly, R'  W 
4  3/2  3 A hemispherical bowl of radius r is set rotating about its
axis of symeetry which is kept vertical. A small block kept
R in the bowl rotates with the bowl without slipping on its
or f ms   as R '  f ms and W  R  surface. If the surface of the bowl is smooth and the angle
2 3
made by the radius through the block with the vertical is ,
find the angular speed at which the bowl is rotating.
f ms 1 1
or s     0.29
R 2 3 2  1.732 Sol.
i.e., s = 0.29

Example - 47
A 40 kg slab rests on a frictionless floor. A 10 kg block
rests on the top of the slab. The static coefficient of
friction between the block and the slab is 0.60 , while the
kinetic coefficient of friction is 0.40. The 10 kg block is
acted upon by a horizontal force of 10 N. If g = 9.8 m/s2,
find the resulting acceleration of the slab.
The block of mass m is lying at A. Clearly, R cos = mg, and
Sol. R sin  = m (AB) 2 = m(r sin q)2

R cos  mg
Thus, 
R sin  mr sin 2

g
or 
Maximum frictional force acting on the block, r cos 
fms = 0.60 × 10 × 9.8 = 58.8 N
As F > fms, the block moves over the slab.
Force of kinetic friction, fk = 0.40 × 10 × 9.8 = 39.2 N
It is fk which is responsible for the motion of the slab.
Acceleration of the slab,

f k 39.2
a   0.98 m / s 2
40 40
 157 LAWS OF MOTION

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Newton Laws of Motion 6. A constant force acts on a body of mass 0.9 kg at rest for
1. A force vector applied on a mass is represented by 10 s. If the body moves a distance of 250 m, the magnitude
 of the force is
F  6 î  8 ĵ  10 k̂ and accelerates with 1 m/s2. What is the
(a) 3 N (b) 3.5 N
mass of the body ?
(c) 4 N (d) 4.5 N
(a) 10 kg (b) 10 2 kg
7. Two blocks are connected over a massless pulley as shown
in figure. The mass of block A is 10 kg and the coefficient
(c) 2 10 kg (d) 20 kg of kinetic friction is 0.2. Block A slides down the incline at
2. A mass M is suspended by a rope from a rigid support at constant speed. The mass of block B in kg is :
A as shown. Another rope is tied at the end B and it is
pulled horizontally with a force F. If the rope AB make an
angle  with the vertical, then the tension in the string AB is
A

B (a) 5.4 (b) 3.3

F
(c) 4.2 (d) 6.8
8. A block of mass 10 kg is suspended by three strings as
shown in the figure. The tension T2 is :
M

(a) F sin  (b) F/sin 

(c) F cos  (d) F/cos 
3. When a body is stationary
(a) there is no force acting on it
(b) the forces acting on its are not in contact with it
(c) the combination of forces acting on it balance each
100
other (a) 100 N (b) N
3
(d) the body is in vacuum
4. A force of 50 N is required topush a car on a level road (c) 3  100 N (d) 50 3 N
with constant speed of 10 m/s. The mass of the car is 9. Two blocks of mass 4 kg and 6 kg are placed in contact
500 kg. What force should be applied to make the car with each other on a frictionless horizontal surface. If we
accelerate at 1 m/s2 ? apply a push of 5 N on the heavier mass, the force on the
(a) 550 N (b) 450 N lighter mass will be
(c) 500 N (d) 2500 N
7
5. A ship of mass 3 × 10 kg initially at rest is pulled by a force 5N 6 kg
4 kg
of 5 × 104 N through a distance of 3 m. Assuming that the
resistance due to water is negligible, what will be the speed
of the ship ?
(a) 0.1 m/s (b) 1.5 m/s (a) 5 N (b) 4 N
(c) 5 m/s (d) 0.2 m/s (c) 2 N (d) None of the above
LAWS OF MOTION 158

10. In the above problem, if a push of 5 N is applied on the 16. In the following figure the masses of the blocks A and B
lighter mass, the force exerted by the lighter mass on the are same and each equal to m. The tensions in the strings
heavier mass will be
OA and AB are T2 and T1 respectively. The system is in
(a) 5 N
equilibrium with a constant horizontal force mg on B. The
(b) 4 N
T1 is
(c) 2 N
(d) None of the above O
11. In the above problem, the acceleration of the lighter mass
T2
will be 2

(a) 0 .5 ms 2 m A

5 T1
1
(b) ms  2 B
4 m mg

5
(c) ms  2
6
(a) mg (b) 2 mg
(d) None of the above
12. A rope of length L and mass M is hanging from a rigid
(c) 3 mg (d) 5 mg
support. The tension in the rope at a distance x from the
rigid support is :
17. Three blocks of masses 2 kg, 3 kg and 5 kg are connected
Lx  to each other with light string and are then placed on a
(a) Mg (b)   Mg
 L  frictionless surface as shown in the figure. The system is
 L  X pulled by a force F = 10N, then tension T1 = ]
(c)   Mg (d) Mg
Lx  L
13. If a body loses half of its velocity on penetrating 3 cm in
10N T1 T2
a wooden block, them how much will it penetrate more 3kg 5kg
2kg
before coming to rest ?
(a) 1 cm (b) 2 cm
(c) 3 cm (d) 74 N
(a) 1N (b) 5 N
14. In the game of tug of wars, a condition of equilibrium
exists. Both the teams pull the rope with a force of 104N. (c) 8 N (d) 10 N
The tension in the rope is 18. A block A of mass 7 kg is placed on a frictionless table. A
4
(a) 2 × 10 N (b) 0 thread tied to it passes over a frictionless pulley and carries
4
(c) 10 N (d) none a body B of mass 3 kg at the other end. The acceleration of
15. A 1 kg block and 0.5 kg block move together on a the system is (given g = 10 ms–2)
horizontal frictionless surface. Each block exerts a force of
6 N on the other. The blocks move a uniform acceleration
of A

F
1 kg 0.5 kg B

(a) 3 m/s2 (b) 6 m/s2 (a) 100 ms–2 (b) 3 ms–2

(c) 9 m/s2 (d) 12 m/s2 (c) 10 ms–2 (d) 30 ms–2
159 LAWS OF MOTION

19. Two masses m1 and m2 are attached to a string which passes (a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
over a frictionless smooth pulley. When m1 = 10 kg, m2 = 6 kg, (c) 1 : 3 (d) 1 : 4
the acceleration of masses is
23. Two blocks are connected by a string as shown in the
diagram. The upper block is hung by another string. A
force F applied on the upper string produces an
acceleration of 2m/s2 in the upward direction in both the
m2 6 kg blocks. If T and T be the tensions in the two parts of the
10 kg m1 string, then

(a) 20 m/s2 (b) 5 m/s2

F
T
(c) 2.5 m/s2 (d) 10 m/s2
2kg
20. A 50 kg boy stands on a plateform spring scale in a lift that
is going down with a constant speed 3 m/s. If the lift is T
brought to rest by a constant deceleration in a distance of 4kg
9 m, what does the scale read during this period ?
(g = 9.8 m/s2)
(a) T  70 . 8 N and T   47 . 2 N
(a) 500 N (b) 465 N
(c) 515 N (d) zero (b) T  58 .8 N and T   47 . 2 N

21. Two blocks are attached to the two ends of a string passing (c) T  70 . 8 N and T   58 .8 N
over a smooth pulley as shown in the figure. The
acceleration of the block will be (in m/s2) (d) T  70 .8 N and T   0
(sin 37o = 0.60, sin 53o = 0.80) 24. Two blocks are in contact on a frictionless table. One has
mass m and the other 2 m. A force F is applied on 2 m as
shown in figure. Now the same force F is applied from the
100 kg
50 kg
right on m. In the two cases the ratio of force of contact
o o
37 53
between the two blocks will be :

(a) 0.33 (b) 1.33 F

2m
m
(c) 1 (d) 0.066
22. The two pulley arrangements shown in the figure are
identical. The mass of the rope is negligible. In (a) the (a) same (b) 1 : 2
mass m is lifted up by attaching a mass 2m to the other end
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 3
of the rope. In (b). m is lifted up by pulling the other end of
the rope with a constant downward force of 2mg. The 25. A dynamometer D is attached to two bodies of masses
ratio of accelerations in two cases will be M = 6 kg and m = 4 kg. Forces F = 20 N and f = 10 N are
applied to the masses as shown. The dynamometer reads:

D
(a) (b)

F M m f
m m
(a) 10 N (b) 20 N
2mg
2m (c) 6 N (d) 14 N
LAWS OF MOTION 160

26. Ten coins are placed on top of each other on a horizontal (a) zero (b) 10 m/s2
table. If the mass of each coin is 10 g and acceleration due (c) 5 m/s2 upward (d) 5 m/s2 downward
to gravity is 10 ms–2, what is the magnitude and direction 32. A mass 'M' is connected to a rope of length  and m on
of the force on the 7th coin (counted from the bottom) due which an external force 'F, the tension force at A is
to all the coins above it ?
(a) 0.3 N downwards (b) 0.3 N upwards
(c) 0.7 N downwards (d) 0.7 N upwards
27. A sphere is accelerated upwards with the help of a cord
whose breaking strength is five times its weight. The Fm FM
(a) (b)
maximum acceleration with which the sphere can move up Mm Mm
without cord breaking is
F Fm
(a) 4g (b) 3g (c) (d)
Mm Mm
(c) 2g (d) g
33. In the above question, tension force at midpoint of the
28. A body of mass m is acted upon by a force F and the
rope is
acceleration produced is a. If three forces each equal to F
and inclined to each other at 120o act on the same body, F(M  m/2) FM/2
(a) (b)
the acceleration produced will be Mm Mm

(a) a / 3 (b) 2a Fm/2

(c) (d) none
Mm
(c) 3a (d) zero
29. An object is resting at the bottom of two strings which are 34. In the above question, acceleration of mass M is
inclined at an angle of 120° with each other. Each string F
F
can withstand a tension of 20 N. The maximum weight of (a) (b)
M M  m/
the object that can be sustained without breaking the string
is : F F
(c) (d)
(a) 10 N (b) 20 N Mm Mm
(c) 20 2 N (b) 40 N 35. A lift weighing 1000 kg is moving upwards with an
acceleration of 1 m/s2. The tension in the supporting
30. A monkey is accelerating down a string whose breaking
cable is
strength is two third of his weight. The minimum
acceleration of the monkey should be (a) 980 N (b) 10800 N
2 (c) 9800 N (d) 8800 N
(a) 0 (b) g
3 36. Two weights W1 and W2 are suspended from the ends to
g a light string passing over a smooth fixed pulley. If the
(c) g (d)
3 pulley is pulled up at an acceleration g. The tension in the
31. The acceleration of the 2 kg block, if the free end of string string will be :
is pulled with a force of 20 N as shown is :
4W1 W2 2W1 W2
(a) W  W (b) W  W
1 2 1 2

W1  W2 W1 W2
(c) W  W (d) 2  W  W 
1 2 1 2

37. In an elevator moving vertically up with an acceleration

‘g’, the force exerted on the floor by a passenger of mass
M is
(a) Mg (b) 1/2 Mg
(c) zero (d) 2 Mg
161 LAWS OF MOTION

38. The mass of a lift is 500 kg. What will be the tension in its 43. Two blocks, each having a mass M, rest on frictionless
cable when it is going up with an acceleration of 2.0 m/s2 ? surfaces as shown in the figure. If the pulley are light and
(a) 5000 N (b) 5600 N frictionless, and M on the incline is allowed to move down,
then the tension in the string will be :
(c) 5900 N (d) 6200 N
39. A man weighs 80 kg. He stands on a weighing scale in the
lift, which is moving upwards with a uniform acceleration
of 5 m/s2. What would be the reading on the scale ?
(g = 10 m/s2)
(a) Zero (b) 400 N
(c) 800 N (d) 1200 N 2 3
(a) Mg sin  (b) Mg sin 
40. Three equal weights A, B and C of mass 2 kg each are 3 2
hanging on a string passing over a fixed pulley which is
frictionless as shown in figure. The tension in the string Mg sin 
(c) (d) 2 Mg sin 
connecting weight B and C is : 2
44. Three forces acting on a body are shown in fig. To have
the resultant force only along the y-direction, the
magnitude of the minimm additional force neded along
OX is
A Y
4N
B

C o
30 1N
o
(a) zero (b) 13 N 60
O X
(c) 3.3 N (d) 19.6 N
41. Consider the shown arrangement. Assume all surfaces to 2N
be smooth. If N represents magnitudes of normal reaction
(a) 0.5 N (b) 1.5 N
between block and wedge, then acceleration of M along
horizontal is equal to : (c) 3/4 N (d) 3N
45. When a force F acts on a body of mass m, the acceleration
produced in the body is a. If three equal forces F1 = F2 = F3 = F
act on the same body as shown in figure. The acceleration
produced is :

N sin  N cos 
(a) along + ve x-axis (b) along –ve x-axis
M M

N sin  N sin 
(c) along –ve x-axis (d) along –ve x-axis
M mM

42. In the above question normal reaction between ground

and wedge will have magnitude equal to : (a)  
2 1 a (b)  
2 1 a
(a) N cos  + Mg (b) N cos  + Mg + mg
(c) N cos  – Mg (d) N sin  + Mg + mg (c) 2a (d) a
LAWS OF MOTION 162

46. A balloon of weight w is falling vertically downward with Momentum, Impulse and its Conservation (Basic)
a constant acceleration a (<g). The magnitude of the air
51. A 0.5 kg ball moving with a speed of 12 m/s strikes a hard
resistance is :
wall at an angle of 30o with the wall. It is reflected with the
 a same speed and at the same angle, as shown in fig. If the
(a) w (b) w 1   ball is in contact with the wall for 0.25 s, the average force
 g
acting on the wall is
 a a
(c) w 1   (d) w
 g g
30o
Pseduo Force
47. The pendulum hanging from the ceiling of a railway carriage
makes angle 30° with the vertical, when it is accelerating. 30
o

The acceleration of the carriage is :

3 2
(a) g (b) g (a) 96 N (b) 48 N
2 3
(c) 24 N (d) 12 N
g kinetic Friction
(c) g 3 (d)
3 52. A given object takes n times more time to slide down 45°
rough inclined plane as it takes to slide down a perfectly
48. A block is placed on the top of a smooth inclined plane of
smooth 45° incline. The coefficient of kinetic friction
inclination  kept on the floor of a lift. When the lift is between the object and the incline is
descending with a retardation a, the block is released. The
acceleration of the block relative to the incline is : 1 1
(a) (b) 1 
2  n2 n2
(a) g sin  (b) a sin 

(c) (g –a) sin  (d) (g + a) sin  1 1

(c) 1  (d)
49. A smooth inclined plane of length L, having an inclination n2 1 n2
 with horizontal is inside a lift which is moving down with 53. Determine the time in which the smaller block reaches other
retardation a. The time taken by a block to slide down the end of bigger block in the figure
inclined plane from rest will be :

2 kg u = 0.3
10 N
2L 2L
(a) (b) u = 0.0
a sin  g sin  8 kg

2L 2L
(c) (d) L = 3.0 m
 g  a  sin   g  a  sin 
(a) 4s (b) 8
50. A block of mass m is placed on a smooth wedge of
(c) 2.19 s (d) 2.13 s
inclination . The whole system is accelerated horizontally
54. A wooden box of mass 8 kg slides down an inclined plane
so that the block does not slip on the wedge. The force
of inclination 30° to the horizontal with a constant
exerted by the wedge on the block (g is acceleration due acceleration of 0.4 ms–2. What is the force of friction
to gravity) will be between the box and inclined plane ? (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) mg (b) mg/cos  (a) 36.8 N (b) 76.8 N
(c) mg cos  (d) mg sin  (c) 65.6 N (d) None of these
163 LAWS OF MOTION

55. A body is projected along a rough horizontal surface with 60. A block is gently placed on a conveyor belt moving
a velocity 6 m/s. If the body comes to rest after travelling horizontally with constant speed. After t = 4 s, the velocity
9 m, then coefficient of sliding friction, is : (g = 10 m/s2) of the block becomes equal to velocity of the belt. If the
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.4 coefficient of friction between the block and the belt is
 = 0.2, then the velocity of the conveyor belt is
(c) 0.6 (d) 0.2
(a) 8 m/s (b) 6 m/s
56. A block of mass m is given an initial downward velocity v0
and left on an inclined plane (coefficient of friction = 0.6). (c) 4 m/s (d) 2 m/s
The block will : 61. If a block moving up at  = 30o with a velocity 5 m/s, stops
after 0.5 sec, then is
(a) 0.5 (b) 1.25
V0
(c) 0.6 (d) none of the above.
30° 62. A car having a mass of 1000 kg is moving at a speed of
30 m/s. Brakes are applied to bring the car to rest. If the
(a) continue to move move down the plane with constant frictional force between the tyres and the road surface is
velocity v0 5000 N, the car will come to rest in
(b) accelerate downward (a) 5 s (b) 8 s
(c) decelerate and come to rest (c) 12 s (d) 6 s
(d) first accelerated then decelerate Static Friction
57. A block of mass 5 kg is kept on a horizontal floor having 63. Which of the following statements is true in a tug of war.
coefficient of friction 0.09. Two mutually perpendicular (a) The team which applies a greater force on the rope
horizontal forces of 3 N and 4 N act on this block. The than the other wins.
acceleration of the block is : (g = 10 m/s2) (b) The team which applies a smaller force on the other
wins.
(a) zero (b) 0.1 m/s2
(c) The team which pushes harder against the ground
(c) 0.2 m/s2 (d) 0.3 m/s2 wins.
58. A minimum force F is applied to a block of mass 102 kg to (d) none of these
prevent it from sliding on a plane with an inclination angle 64. A block of mass 4 kg is placed on a rough horizontal plane.
A time dependent force F = kt2 acts on the block, where
30° with the horizontal. If the coefficients of static and
k = 2N/s2. Coefficient of friction  = 0.8. Force of friction
kinetic friction between the block and the plane are 0.4
between block and the plane at t = 2 s is :
and 0.3 respectively, then the force F is :
(a) 8 N (b) 4 N
(a) 157 N (b) 224 N (c) 2 N (d) 32 N
(c) 315 N (d) zero 65. Pushing force making an angle  to the horizontal is
59. The upper half of an inclined plane of inclination  is applied on a block of weight W placed on a horizontal
perfectly smooth while the lower half rough. A block table. If the angle of friction is , the magnitude of force
starting from rest at the top of the plane will again come to required to move the body is equal to :
rest at the bottom, if the coefficient of friction between the
W cos  W sin 
block and the lower half of the plane is given by : (a) cos      (b) cos     
(a)  = 2 tan  (b)  = tan 
W tan  W sin 
2 1 (c) sin      (d) tan     
(c)   tan  (d)   tan 
LAWS OF MOTION 164

66. The coefficient of friction between the tyres and road is 70. A box of mass 8 kg is placed on a rough inclined plane of
0.4. The minimum distance covered before attaining a speed inclination . Its downward motion can be prevented by
of 8 m/s starting from rest is nearly : (g = 10 m/s2) applying an upward pull F and it can be made to slide
upwards by applying a force 2 F. The coefficient of friction
(a) 8.0 m (b) 4.0 m between the box and the inclined plane is :
(c) 10.0 m (d) 16.0 m
1
(a) tan  (b) 3 tan 
67. A mass m rests on a horizontal surface. The coefficient of 3
friction between the mass and the surface is . If mass is
pulled by a force F as shown in figure. The limiting friction 1
(c) tan  (d) 2 tan 
between mass and the surface will be : 2
1
71. The coefficient of friction of a surface is . What should
3
be the angle of inclination so that a body placed on the
60°
surface just begins to slide down ?
m (a) 30o (b) 45o
(c) 60o (d) 90o
72. A block of mass m, lying on a rough horizontal plane, is
  3  acted upon by a horizontal force P and another force Q,
(a) mg (b)   mg   2  F
    inclined at an angle  to the vertical upwards. The block
will remain in equilibrium, if minimum coefficient of friction
between it and the surface is :
  F    F 
(c)   mg     (d)   mg    
  2    2   P  Q sin   P cos   Q 
(a) mg  Q cos  (b) mg  Q sin 
   
68. An insect crawls up a hemispherical surface very slowly
(see the figure). The coefficient of friction between the
 P  Q cos    P sin   Q 
(c) mg  Qsin  (d) mg  Q cos 
1    
insect and the surface is . If the line joining the centre of
3
73. In the figure shown, if coefficient of friction is , then m2
the hemispherical surface to the insect makes an angle  will start moving upwards if :
with the vertical, the maximum possible value of  is given
by :

m2

(a) cot  = 3 (b) tan  = 3 m1

(c) sec  = 3 (d) cosec  = 3

69. A block of mass 0.1 kg is held against a wall applying
horizontal force of 5 N on the block. If coeff. of friction
m1 m1
between the block and the wall is 0.5, the magnitude of (a) m  sin    cos  (b) m  sin    cos 
2 2
frictional force acting on the block is
(a) 2.5 N (b) 0.49 N m1 m1
(c) m   sin   cos  (d) m   sin   cos 
(c) 0.98 N (d) 4.9 N 2 2
165 LAWS OF MOTION

74. A block of mass M rests on a rough horizontal surface as 78. Two cars of unequal masses use similar tyres. If they are
shown. Coefficient of friction between the block and the moving at the same initial speed, the minimum stopping
surface is . A force F = Mg acting at angle  with the
distance
vertical side of the block pulls it. In which of the following
cases the block can be pulled along the surface : (a) is smaller for the heavier car

F
(b) is smaller for the lighter car
(c) is same for both car
M (d) depends on the volume of the car
79. A block A kept on an inclined surface just begins to slide
if the inclination is 30°. The block is replaced by another

(a) tan    (b) tan     block B and it is found that it just begins to slide if the
2
inclination is 40°.
 (a) mass of A > mass of B
(c) cot    (d) cot    
2 (b) mass of A < mass of B
75. In a situation the contact force by a rough horizontal (c) mass of A = means of B
surface on a body placed on it has constant magnitude. If
(d) all the three are possible
the angle between this force and the vertical is decreased,
80. A boy of mass M is applying a horizontal force to slide a
the frictional force between the surface and the body will
box of mass M’ on a rough horizontal surface. The
(a) increase (b) decrease
coefficient of friction between the shoes of the boy and
(c) remain the same (d) may increase or decrease the floor is  and that between the box and the floor is ’.
76. While walking on ice, one should take small steps to avoid In which of the following cases it is certainly not possible
slipping. This is because smaller steps ensure to slide the box ?

(a) larger friction (b) smaller friction (a)  < ’, M < M’ (b)  > ’, M < M’

(c) larger normal force (d) smaller normal force (c)  < ’, M > M’ (d)  > ’, M > M’

77. A body of mass M is kept on a rough horizontal surface

(friction coefficient = ). A person is trying to pull the
body by applying a horizontal force but the body is not
moving. The force by the surface on A is F where
(a) F = Mg (b) F =  Mg

(c) Mg  F  Mg 1   2 (d) Mg  F  Mg 1   2
LAWS OF MOTION 166

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. A lift is moving down with acceleration a. A man in the lift (a) 16 (b) 6
drops a ball inside the lift. The acceleration of the ball as
(c) 4 (d) none of these
observed by the man in the lift and a man standing
stationary on the ground are respectively (2002) 7. A spring balance is attached to the ceiling of a lift. A man
hangs his bag on the spring and the spring reads 49 N,
(a) g, g (b) g – a, g – a
when the lift is stationary. If the lift moves downward with
(c) g – a, g (d) a, g an acceleration of 5 ms–2, the reading of the spring balance
2. Two forces are such that the sum of their magnitudes is 18 N will be : (2003)
and their resultant which has magnitude 12 N, is (a) 24 N (b) 74 N
perpendicular to the smaller force. Then the magnitude of
the forces are : (2002) (c) 15 N (d) 49 N

(a) 12 N, 6 N (b) 13 N, 5 N 8. Three forces start acting simultaneously on a particle


(c) 10 N, 8 N (d) 16 N, 2 N moving with velocity v . These forces are represented in
magnitude and direction by the three sides of a triangle
3. When forces F1, F2, F3 are acting on a particle of mass m ABC (as shown). The particle will now move with velocity
such that F2 and F3 are mutually perpendicular, then the (2003)
particle remains stationary. If the forces F1 is now removed,
then the acceleration of the particle is (2002)

F1 F2 F3
(a) (b) mF
m 1

 F2  F3  F2
(c) (d)
(a) less than v
m m
4. The minimum velocity (in ms–1) with which a car driver
must traverse a flat curve of radius 150 m and coefficient (b) greater than v
of friction 0.6 to avoid skidding is : (2002) (c) |v| in the direction of largest force BC
(a) 60 (b) 30
(d) v , remaining unchanged
(c) 15 (d) 25
9. A horizontal force of 10 N is necessary to just hold a block
5. A light string passing over a smooth light pulley connects
two blocks of masses m1 and m2 (vertically). If the stationary against a wall. The coefficient of friction between
acceleration of the system is g/8, then the ratio of the the block and the wall is 0.2. The weight of the block is :
masses is : (2002) (2003)
(a) 8 : 1 (b) 9 : 7
(c) 4 : 3 (d) 5 : 3
6. One end of massless rope, which passes over a massless
and frictionless pulley P is tied to a hook C while the other
end is free. Maximum tension that the rope can bear is 360 N.
With what value of maximum safe acceleration (in ms–2)
(a) 20 N (b) 50 N
can a man of 60 kg climb on the rope ? (2002)
(c) 100 N (d) 2 N
10. A marble block of mass 2 kg lying on ice when given a
velocity of 6 ms–1 is stopped by friction in 10 s. Then the
coefficient of friction is (2003)
(a) 0.02 (b) 0.03
(c) 0.06 (d) 0.01
 167 LAWS OF MOTION

11. A block of mass M is pulled along a horizontal frictionless (a) 2.0 (b) 4.0
surface by a rope of mass m. If a force P is applied at the (c) 1.6 (d) 2.5
free end of the rope, the force exerted by the rope on the
17. A block is kept on a frictionless inclined surface with angle
block is (2003)
of of inclination . The incline is given an acceleration a to
Pm Pm keep the block stationary. Then a is equal to (2005)
(a) (b)
Mm Mm
PM
(c) P (d)
Mm
12. A light spring balance hangs from the hook of the other
light spring balance and a block of mass M kg hangs from
the former one. Then the true statement about the scale
reading is : (2003) g
(a) tan  (b) g cosec 
(a) Both the scales read M kg each
(b) The scale of the lower one reads M kg and of the upper (c) g (d) g tan 
one zero
18. Consider a car moving on a straight road with a speed of
(c) The reading of the two scale can be anything but the
100 ms–1. The distance at which car can be stopped, is
sum of the readings will be M kg
[k = 0.5] (2005)
(d) Both the scale read M/2 kg
13. A rocket with a lift-off mass 3.5 × 104 kg is blasted upwards (a) 800 m (b) 1000 m
with an initial acceleration of 10 ms–2. Then the initial thrust (c) 100 m (d) 400 m
of the blast is : (2003)
19. A particle of mass 0.3 kg is subjected to a force F = – kx
(a) 3.5 × 105 N (b) 7.0 × 105 N
with k = 15 Nm–1. What will be its initial accleration, if it is
(c) 14.0 × 105 N (d) 1.75 × 105 N
released from a point 20 cm away the origin ? (2005)
13. A machine gun fires a bullet of mass 40 g with a velocity
1200 ms–1. The man holding it, can exert a maximum force (a) 3 ms–2 (b) 15 ms–2
of 144 N on the gun. How many bullets can be fire per (c) 5 ms–2 (d) 10 ms–2
second at the most ? (2004)
20. An annular ring with inner and outer radii R1 and R2 is
(a) 1 (b) 4
rolling without slipping with a uniform angular speed. The
(c) 2 (d) 3 ratio of the forces experienced by the two particles situated
15. Two masses m1 = 5 kg and m2 = 4.8 kg tied to a string are on the inner and outer parts of the ring F1/F2 is : (2005)
hanging over a light frictionless pulley. What is the
2
acceleration of the masses when lift is free to move ? R2  R1 
(g = 9.8 ms–2) (2004) (a) R (b)  
1  R2 

R1
(c) 1 (d) R
2

21. A smooth block is released at rest on a 45° incline and

then slides a distance d. The time taken to slide is n times
as much to slide on rough incline than on a smooth incline.
(a) 0.2 ms–2 (b) 9.8 ms–2 The coefficient of friction is : (2005)

(c) 5 ms–2 (d) 4.8 ms–2

1 1
16. A block rests on a rough inclined plane making an angle of (a)  k  1  (b)  k  1 
n2 n2
30° with the horizontal. The coefficient of static friction
between the block and the plane is 0.8. If the frictional
force on the block is 10 N, the mass of block (in kg) is 1 1
(c) s  1  (d) s  1 
n2 n2
(g = 10 m/s2) (2004)
LAWS OF MOTION 168

22. The upper half of an inclined plane with inclination  is (a) 4.9 ms–2 in horizontal direction
perfectly smooth, while the lower half is rough. A body (b) 9.8 ms–2 in vertical direction
starting from rest at the top will again come to rest at the
(c) zero
bottom, if the coefficient of friction for the lower half is
given by (2005) (d) 4.9 ms–2 in vertical direction

(a) 2 sin  (b) 2 cos  27. The minimum force required to start pushing a body up a
rough (frictional coefficient ) inlcined plane is F1 while the
(c) 2 tan  (d) tan  minimum force needed to prevent it from sliding down is
23. A player caught a cricket ball of mass 150 g moving at a F2. If the inclined plane makes an angle  from the horizontal
rate of 20 m/s. If the catching process is completed in 0.1 s, such that tan  = 2, then the ratio F1/F2 is : (2011)
the force of the blow exerted by the ball on the hand of the (a) 4 (b) 1
player is equal to (2006)
(c) 2 (d) 3
(a) 150 N (b) 3 N
28. A particle of mass m is at rest at the origin at time t = 0. It is
(c) 30 N (d) 300 N subjected to a force F (t) = f0e–bt in the x direction. It speed
24. A block of mass m is connected to another block of mass v(t) is depicted by which of the following curves ? (2012)
M by a spring (massless) of spring constant k. The blocks
are kept on a smooth horizontal plane. Initially the blocks
are at rest and the spring is unstretched. Then a constant
(a) (b)
force F starts acting on the block of mass M to pull it. Find
the force on the block of mass m. (2007)

mF M  m F
(a) (b)
M m
(c) (d)
mF MF
(c)  m  M  (d)  m  M 
29. A block of mass m is placed on a surface with a vertical
25. The figure shows the position-time (x–t) graph of one- x3
dimensional motion of a body of mass 0.4 kg. The cross section given by y  . If the coefficient of friction
6
magnitude of each impulse is : (2010) is 0.5, the maximum height above the ground at which the
block can be placed without slipping is : (2014)
2 1
(a) m (b) m
3 3
1 1
(c) m (d) m
2 6
30. Given in the figure are two blocks A and B of weight 20 N
(a) 0.4 Ns (b) 0.8 Ns
and 100 N, respectively. These are being pressed against
(c) 1.6 Ns (d) 0.2 Ns a wall by a force F as shown. If the coefficient of friction
26. Two fixed frictionless inclined plane making an angle 30° between the blocks is 0.1 and between block B and the
wall is 0.15, the frictional force applied by the wall on
and 60° with the vertical are shown in the figure. Two block
block B is: (2015)
A and B are placed on the two planes. What is the relative
vertical acceleration of A with respect to B ? (2010)

(a) 120 N (b) 150 N

(c) 100 N (d) 80 N
169 LAWS OF MOTION

31. A point particle of mass m, moves along the uniformly 35. A heavy box is to be dragged along a rough horizontal
rough track PQR as shown in the figure. The coefficient of floor. To do so, person A pushes it an angle 30° from the
friction, between the particle and the rough track equals horizontal and requires a miniumum force FA, while person
. The particle is released, from rest, from the point P and B pulls the box at an angle 60° from the horizontal and
it comes to rest at a point R. The energies, lost by the ball, needs minimum force FB.
over the parts, PQ and QR, of the track, are equal to each If the coefficient of friction between the box and the floor
other, and no energy is lost when particle changes direction
3 FA
from PQ to QR. The value of coefficient of friction  and is , and ratio F is : (2014 Online Set-4)
the distance x (= QR), are respectively close to: (2016) 5 B

5 3
(a) (b)
3 2

2
(c) 3 (d)
3
(a) 0.2 and 6.5 m (b) 0.2 and 3.5 m
36. A rocket is fired vertically from the earth with an
(b) 0.29 and 3.5 m (d) 0.29 and 6.5 m acceleration of 2g, where g is the gravitational acceleration.
32. Two masses m1= 5kg and m2 = 10kg connected by an On an inclined plane inside the rocket, making an angle θ
inextensible string over a frictionless pulley are moving with the horizontal, a point object of mass m is kept. The
as shown in the figure. The coefficient of friction of minimum coefficient of friction µmin between the mass and
horizontal surface is 0.15. The minimum weight m that the inclined surface such that the mass does not move is
: (2016 Online Set-1)
should be put on top of m2 to stop the motion is : (2018)
(a) tan  (b) 2 tan 
(c) 3 tan  (d) tan 2 
37. A particle of mass m is acted upon by a force F given by
R
the empirical law F = v(t). If this law is to be tested
t2
experimentally by observing the motion the best way is to
plot a straight line graph is: (2016 Online Set-2)
(a) 43.3 kg (b) 10.3 kg
(c) 23.33 kg (d) 27.3 kg (a) v(t) against t2

33. A block A of mass 4 kg is placed on another block B of 1

mass 5 kg, and the block B rests on a smooth horizontal (b) log v (t) against
t2
table. If the minimum force that can be applied on A so
(c) log v(t) against t
that both the blocks move together is 12 N, the maximum
force that can be applied on B for the blocks to move 1
together will be: (2014 Online Set-1) (d) log v(t) against
t
(a) 30 N (b) 25 N
38. The machine as shown has 2 rods of length 1m connected
(c) 27 N (d) 48 N by a pivot at the top. The end of one rod is connected to
the floor by a stationary pivot and the end of the other rod
34. A 4 g bullet is fired horizontally with a speed of 300m/s
has a roller that rolls along the floor in a slot. As the roller
into 0.8 kg block of wood at rest on a table. If the coefficient
goes back and forth, a 2 kg weight moves up and down. If
of friction between the block and the table is 0.3, how far
the roller is moving towards right at a constant speed, the
will the block slide approximately? (2014 Online Set-2)
weight moves up with a : (2017 Online Set-2)
(a) 0.379 m (b) 0.569 m
(c) 0.758 m (d) 0.19 m
LAWS OF MOTION 170

39. A given object takes n times more time to slide down a 450
rough inclined plane as it takes to slide down a perfectly
smooth 450 incline. The coefficient of kinetic friction
between the object and the incline is :
(2018 Online Set-1)

1 1
(a) 2 (b) 1-
2-n n2

(a) constant speed

1 1
(b) decreasing speed (c) 1- 2 (d)
n 1- n 2
(c) increasing speed
40. A body of mass 2kg slides down with an acceleration of 3
3 m/s2 on a rough inclined plane having slope of 300. The
(d) speed which is th of that of the roller when the external force required to take the same body up the plane
4
weight is 0.4 m above the ground with the same acceleration will be: (2018 Online Set-2)
(g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 14 N (b) 20 N
(c) 6 N (d) 4 N
 171 LAWS OF MOTION

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Newton Laws of Motion 6. A mass of 3 kg descending vertically downward supports
1. When a bird of weight W sits on a stretched wire, the a mass of 2 kg by means of a light string passing over a
pulley. At the end of 5 s the string breaks. How much high
tension T in the wire is
from now the 2 kg mass will go ? (g = 9.8 m/s2)
(a) > W/2 (b) = W
(a) 4.9 m (b) 9.8 m
(c) < W (d) None of these (c) 16.9 m (d) 2.45 m
2. In the figure, the blocks A, B and C of mass m each have 7. A man of mass 60 kg is standing on a horizontal conveyor
acceleration a1, a2 and a3 respectively. F1 and F2 are external belt. When the belt is given an acceleration of 1 ms–2, the
forces of magnitudes 2 mg and mg respectively. man remains stationary with respect to the moving belt. If
g = 10 ms–2, the net force acting on the man in :

a = 1 ms–2

m m m (a) zero (b) 120 N

A B C (c) 60 N (d) 600 N
F1 = 2mg 2m m 8. In the arrangement shown, if the surface is smooth, the
F2 = mg acceleration of the block m2 will be

(a) a1 = a2 = a3 (b) a1 > a3 > a2 m1

(c) a1 = a2, a2 > a3 (d) a1 > a2, a2 = a3
3. For the arrangement shown in the figure the tension in the
string is given by
m2

m 2g 2m 2 g
(a) 4m  m (b) 4m  m
1 2 1 2
2m
2m 2 g 2m1g
m (c) m  4m (d) m  m
30° 1 2 1 2

9. Two masses are connected by a string which passes over

mg a pulley accelerating upward at a rate as shown. If a1 and a2
(a) (b) mg be the accelerations of bodies 1 and 2 respectively, then :
2
A
3
(c) mg (d) 2 mg
2
4. A person swimming in a fresh water pool is obeying :
a1
(a) Newton’s second law (b) Gravitational law a2
1
(c) Newton’s third law (d) Newton’s first law
2
5. The passenger move forward when train stops, due to :
(a) A = a1 – a2 (b) A = a1 + a2
(a) inertia of passenger (b) inertia of train
a1  a 2 a1  a 2
(c) gravitation pull by earth (d) none of the above (c) A  (d) A 
2 2
LAWS OF MOTION 172

10. A block of mass m is resting on a wedge of angle  as

mg cos 
shown in the figure. The wedge is given an acceleration a. (a) T1   T2
What is the value of a so that the mass m falls freely sin   

A mg sin 
(b) T1   T2
sin   

a
mg cos  mg cos 
(c) T1  , T2 
C sin    sin    
B

(a) g (b) g cos  (d) none of these

(c) g cot  (d) g tan  14. An automobile enters a turn whose radius is R. The road is
11. A light string going over a clamped pulley of mass m banked at angle . Friction is negligible between the wheels
supports a block of mass M as shown in the figure. The of the automobile and road. Mass of the automobile is m
force on the pulley by the clamp is given by : and speed is u. Select the correct alternative :
(a) net force on the automobile is zero
(b) normal reaction on the automobile is mg cos 
(c) normal reaction on the automobile is mg sec 
(d) none of the above
15. A ball is suspended by a thread from the ceiling of a car.
The brakes are applied and the speed of the car changes
uniformly from 10 m/s to zero in 5s. The angle by which
(a) 2 Mg (b) 2 mg
the ball deviates from the vertical (g = 10 m/s2) is :
2 2
(c) g M  m  m2 (d) g M  m  M2 1  1  1  1 
(a) tan   (b) sin  
 3 5
12. Tension in the cable supporting an elevator, is equal to the
weight of the elevator. From this, we can conclude that the
elevator is going up or down with a 1  1  1  1 
(c) tan   (d) cot  
(a) uniform speed 5  3

(b) uniform acceleration 16. A force of 100 N need to be applied parallel to a smooth
(c) variable acceleration inclined plane just to hold a body on it. The angle of
inclination of the inclined plane is 30°. How much horizontal
(d) either (b) and (c).
force need to be applied to do the same ?
13. A boby of mass m is suspended by two strings making
(a) 50 N
angles  and  with the horizontal. Tensions in the two
strings are (b) 87 N
(c) 100 N
(d) 115 N
173 LAWS OF MOTION

17. A sphere of mass m is held between two smooth inclined

walls. For sin 37° = 3/5, the normal reaction of the wall (2)
is equal to :

mg 2 mg
(a) (b)
2k k

 M  m g mg
(c) (d)
2k k

21. Three identical blocks are suspended on two identical

springs one below the other as shown in figure. If thread
16 mg 25 mg is cut that suports block 1, then initially (choose one
(a) (b) alternative only) :
25 21

39 mg
(c) (d) mg
25
18. Three masses of 1 kg, 6 kg and 3 kg are connected to each
other with threads and are placed on a table as shown in
figure. If g = 10 ms–2, the acceleration with which the system
is moving is

(a) The second block falls with zero acceleration

(b) The first block falls with maximum acceleration
(c) Both (a) and (b) are wrong
(d) Both (a) and (b) are correct
22. A uniform rope of mass m hangs freely from a ceiling. A
bird of mass M climbs up the rope with an acceleration a.
The force exerted by the rope on the ceiling is :
(a) zero (b) 1 ms–2
(c) 2 ms–2 (d) 3 ms–2
19. The engine of a car produces acceleration of 4 m/s2 in car.
If this car pulls another car of same mass, what will be the
acceleration produced ?
(a) 8 m/s2 (b) 2 m/s2

1
(c) 4 m/s2 (d) m/s2
2 (a) Ma + mg
20. All surfaces shown in figure are smooth. System is released (b) M (a + g) + mg
with the spring unstretched. In equilibrium, compression (c) M (a + g)
in the spring will be : (d) dependent on the position of bird on the rope
LAWS OF MOTION 174

23. Two masses m and M are attached with strings as shown.

For the system to be in equilibrium we have :

(a)  = 
(b)  = 0°
(c) Tension in the string T = mg cos 
2M 2m (d) All of the above
(a) tan   1  (b) tan   1 
m M
28. A trolley car slides down a smooth inclined plane of angle
of inclination . If a body is suspended from the roof of
M m
(c) tan   1  (d) tan   1  the trolley car by an inextensible string, the corresponding
2m 2M
tension in the string will be :
24. In order to raise a mass of 100 kg a man of mass 60 kg
(a) mg (b) mg cos 
fastens a rope to it and passes the rope over a smooth
pulley. He climbs the rope with an acceleration 5g/4 relative (c) mg sin  (d) zero
to rope. The tension in the rope is 29. A mortor cycle and a car are moving on a horizontal road
(a) 1432 N (b) 928 N with the same velocity. If they are brought to rest by the
application of brakes, which provided equal retardation,
(c) 1218 N (d) 642 N
then
Pseduo Force
(a) motor cycle will stop at shorter distance
25. Two blocks of masses 5 kg and 3 kg are attached to the
(b) car will stop at a shorter distance
ends of a string passing over a smooth pulley fixed to the
(c) both will stop at the same distance
ceiling of an elevator. A man inside the elevator accelerated
upwards, finds the acceleration of the blocks to be 9/32g. (d) nothing can be predicted.
The acceleration of the elevator is : 30. A car is moving in a circular horizontal track of radius 10 m
with a constant speed of 10 m/s. A plumb bob is suspended
g g
(a) (b) from the roof of the car by a light rigid rod. The angle made
3 4 by the bob with the vertical is (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) zero (b) 30o
g g
(c) (d) (c) 45o (d) 60o
8 6
Kinetic Friction
26. A man has weight 80 N. He stands on a weighing scale in a
lift which is moving upwards with a uniform acceleration 31. A block slides down an inclined plane of slope of angle 
of 5 m/s2. What would be the reading on the scale ? with a constant velocity. It is then projected up the plane
with an initial velocity u. The distance up to which it will
(g = 10 m/s2)
rise before coming to rest is :
(a) 800 N (b) 120 N
u2 u2
(c) zero (d) 400 N (a) (b)
4 g sin  2g
27. A trolley is accelerating down an incline of angle  with
acceleration g sin . Which of the following is not correct ? ( u 2 sin 2  u sin 
(c) (d) 2g
is angle made by the string with vertical). 2g
175 LAWS OF MOTION

32. The time taken by a body to slide down a rough 45º incline 36. A body is moving down along an inclined plane of angle
plane is twice that required to slide down a smooth 45º incline of inclination . The coefficient of friction between the
plane. The coefficient of kinetic friction between the object and body and the plane varies as  = 0.5x, where x is the
rough plane is given by distance moved down the plane. The body will have the
maximum velocity when it has travelled a distance x given
(a) 1/3 (b) 3/4
by :
(c) 3/ 4 (d) 4/3
2
33. Two blocks are connected over a massless pulley as shown (a) x = 2 tan  (b) x  tan 
in figure. The mass of block A is 10 kg and the coefficient of
kinetic friction is 0.2. Block A slides down the incline at
constant speed. The mass of block B in kg is 2
(c) x  2 cot  (d) x 
cot 

37. In the shown arrangement mass of A = 1 kg, mass of B = 2 kg.

A Coefficient of friction between A and B = 0.2. There is no
B
friction between B and ground. The frictional force exerted
30° by A on B equals :

(a) 3.5 (b) > 2.5

(c) 3.3 (d) 3.0
34. A block of mass m is kept on an inclined plane of a lift
moving down with acceleration of 2 m/s–2. What should
be the coefficient of friction to let the block move down (a) 2 N (b) 3 N
with constant velocity relative to lift :
(c) 4 N (d) 5 N
Static Friction
38. A body of mass 60 kg is dragged along a horizontal surface
by a horizontal force which is just sufficient to start the
motion of the body from rest. If the coefficients of static
1 and kinetic friction are 0.5 and 0.4 respectively, the
(a)   (b)  = 0.4
3 acceleration of the body is

3 (a) 0.98 m/s2 (b) 9.8 m/s2

(c)  = 0.8 (d)  
2 (c) 0.54 m/s2 (d) 5.292 m/s2
35. Block A of mass m rests on the plank B of mass 3m which 39. Two blocks A and B are placed on a table and joined by a
is free to slide on a frictionless horizontal surface. The string (figure). The limiting friction for both blocks is F.
coefficient of friction between the block and plank is 0.2. If The tension in the string is T. The forces of friction acting
a horizontal force of magnitude 2 mg is applied to the
on the blocks are FA and FB. An external horizontal force P
plank B, the acceleration of A relative to the plank and
= 3F/2 acts on A, directed away from B. Then
relative to the ground respectively, are :

A
2 mg
B

g 2g 3F F
(a) 0, (b) 0, (a) FA  FB  T  (b) FA  , FB  F, T  F
2 3 4 2
3g g g 2g F F
(c) , (d) , (c) FA  FB  3 , T  0 (d) FA  F, FB  T 
5 5 5 5 4 2
LAWS OF MOTION 176

40. In the figure, mA = 2 kg and mB = 4 kg. For what minimum acceleration of 2 m/s2 on a straight road. The box will fall
value of F, A starts slipping over B ? (g = 10 m/s2) off the truck when it is at a distance from the starting point
equal to :
A  = 0.2
F B 1
(a) 4 m (b) 8 m
2 = 0.4 (c) 16 m (d) 32 m
(a) 24 N (b) 36 N 44. Two blocks A and B are pushed against the wall with the
force F. The wall is smooth but the surface in contact of A
(c) 12 N (d) 20 N
and B are rough. Which of the following is true for the
41. A block of mass m is placed on another block of mass M system of the blocks?
which itself is lying on a horizontal surface. The coefficient
of friction between two blocks is 1 and that between the
block of mass M and horizontal surface is 2. What
maximum horizontal force can be applied to the lower block, F A B
so that the two blocks move without separation ?

(a) F should be equal to weight of A and B.

(b) F should be less than the weight of A and B.
(c) F should be more than the weight of A and B
(d) The system cannot be in equilibrium (at rest).
(a) (M + m) (2 – 1) g (b) (M – m) (2 – 1) g
45. A block of mass M lies on a rough surface of coefficient of
(c) (M – m) (2 + 1) g (d) (M + m) (2 + 1) g
friction  A force is applied on it an angle  to the horizontal
42. In the arrangement shown in figure, there is a friction force as shown, and the block is at rest. The frictional force
between the blocks of masses m and 2m. The mass of the acting on the block will be
suspended block is m. The block of mass m is stationary
with respect to block of mass 2 m. The minimum value of
F
coefficient of friction between m and 2m is :
M

(a) F cos (b) (mg + F sin

(c) (mg – F sin (d) mg
46. A block of mass 3 kg is at rest on a rough inclined plane as
shown in the figure. The magnitude of net force exerted by
surface on the block will be

1 1
(a) (b)
2 2 3 kg

1 1
(c) (d) 30°
4 3

43. The rear side of a truck is open and a box of mass 20 kg is

placed on the truck 4 m away from the open end.  = 0.15 (a) 26 N (b) 19.5 N
and g = 10 m/s2. The truck starts from rest with an (c) 10 N (d) 30 N
177 LAWS OF MOTION

47. For the arrangement shown in the figure the tension in the
string is

m = 1 kg 12 N

37°
5N

(a) 6N (b) 6.4 N

(c) 0.4 N (d) zero (a) 7.2 N (b) 5 N
48. The force required to just move a body up the inclined (c) 12 N (d) 13 N
plane is double the force required to just prevent the body 52. A uniform chain of length l is placed on a rough table
from sliding down the plane. The coefficient of friction is
with length l/n (n > 1) hanging over the edge. If the chain
. The inclination  of the plane is
just begins to slide to off the table by itself from this
(a) tan–1 (b) tan–1( position the coefficient of friction between the chain and
(c) tan–1( (d) tan–1( the table is
49. A body of mass m rests on horizontal surface. The 1 1
(a) (b)
coefficient of friction between the body and the surface is n n 1
. If the mass is pulled by a force P as shown in the figure,
the limiting friction between body and surface will be : 1 n 1
(c) (d)
n 1 n 1
P 53. Two masses A and B of 7 kg and 3 kg respectively are
30° connected with a string passing over a frictionless pulley
m fixed at the corner of table as shown in the figure. The
coefficient of friction between A and horizontal surface is
0.3. The minimum mass of C that may be placed on A to
prevent it from moving is equal to
  P 
(a)  mg (b)  mg   
  2 
C
A
  P    3 P 
  mg   
(c)  mg   2  (d)  2 
     

50. A rough vertical board has an acceleration a along the B

horizontal, so that a block of mass M pressing against it
does not fall. The coefficient of friction between block and
the board is : (a) 15 kg (b) 10 kg

(a) > a/g (b) < g/a (c) 5 kg (d) 3 kg

(c) < a/g (d) > g/a 54. If  is coefficient of friction between the tyres and road,
then the minimum stopping distance for a car of mass m
51. A block of weight 5 N is pushed against a vertical wall by moving with velocity V is
a force of 12 N. The coefficient of friction between the wall
(a)  V g (b) V2 /2g
and the block is 0.6. The magnitude of total force exerted
by the wall on the block is (c) V2 g (d)  V/2g.
LAWS OF MOTION 178

55. A parabolic bowl with its bottom at origin has the shape (a) 0.10 (b) 0.20

x2 (c) 0.25 (d) 0.50

y . Here, x and y are in metres. The maximum height
20 59. During paddling of a bicycle, the force of friction exerted
at which a small mass m can be placed on the bowl without by the ground on the two wheels is such that it acts.
slipping (coefficient of static friction is 0.5) is : (a) in the backward direction on the front wheel and in the
forward direction on the rear wheel
y (vertical)
(b) in the forward direction on the front wheel and in the
backward direction on the rear wheel
(c) in the backward direction on both the front and the rear
wheels
x (horizontal)
(d) in the forward direction on both the front and the rear
(a) 2.5 m (b) 1.25 m wheels
(c) 1.0 m (d) 4.0 m 60. A block of mass 0.1 kg is held against a wall by applying a
56. The system is pushed by a force F as shown in figure All horizontal force of 5 N on the block. If the coefficient of
surfaces are smooth except between B and C. Friction friction between the block and the wall is 0.5, the magnitude
coefficient between B and C is . Minimum value of F to prevent of the frictional force acting on the block is
block B from downward slipping is (a) 2.5 N (b) 0.98 N
A B C (c) 4.9 N (d) 0.49 N
F m
2m 2m 61. What is the maximum value of the force F such that the
block shown in the arrangement, does not move?
m  3 kg
 3   5  F 1
(a)   mg (b)   mg 60o

 2   2  2 3

5 3
(c)    mg (d)    mg (a) 20 N (b) 10 N
2 2
(c) 12 N (d) 15 N
57. A homogeneous chain of length L lies on a table. The
Multiple Questions Answer
coefficient of friction between the chain and the table is .
The maximum length which can hang over the table in 62. Which of the following are correct ?
equilibrium is (a) A parachute of weight W strikes the ground with his
legs and comes to rest with an upwar acceleration of
   1   magnitude 3g. Force exerted on him by ground during
(a)  L (b)  L landing is 4 W.
  1   
(b) Two massless spring balances are hung vertically in
1    2  series from a fixed point and a mass M kg is attached
(c)  L (d)  L to the lower end of the lower spring balance. Each
1    2  1 
spring balance reads M kg.
58. A wedge of mass 2m and a cube of mass m are shown in
figure. Between cube and wedge, there is no friction. The (c) A rough vertical board has an acceleration a along
minimum coefficient of friction between wedge and ground the horizontal direction so that a block of mass m
so that wedge does not move is passing against it does not fall. The coefficient of
friction between the block and the board is greater
m than g/a.
(d) A man is standing at a spring platform. If man jumps
2m
away from the platform the reading of the spring
= 45o balance first increases and then decreases to zero.
179 LAWS OF MOTION

63. Two block of masses m1 and m2 are connected through a (a) vB = vA, aB = 0 (b) aB = 0
massless inextensible string. Block of mass m1 is placed at
the fixed rigid inclined surface while the block of mass m2 3 16 v 2A
(c) v B  vA (d) a B 
hanging at the other end of the string, which is passing 5 125
through a fixed massless frictionless pulley shown in the 66. In the figure, if F = 4N, m = 2kg, M = 4 kg then
figure. The coefficient of static friction between the block
and the inclined plane is 0.8. The system of masses m1 and
m2 is released from rest.

2
(a) The acceleration of m w.r.t. ground is m / s2 .
3
(b) The acceleration of m w.r.t. ground is 1.2 m/s2.
(a) The tension in the string is 20 N after releasing the (c) The acceleration of M is 0.4 m/s2.
system.
2
(b) The contact force by the inclined surface on the block (d) The acceleration of m w.r.t. ground is m / s2 .
is along normal to the inclined surface. 3

(c) The magnitude of contact force by the inclined surface 67. A 20 kg block is placed on top of 50 kg block as shown in
the figure. A horizontal force F acting on A causes an
on the block m1 is 20 3 N.
acceleration of 3 m/s2 to A and 2 m/s2 to B. For this situation
(d) None of these mark out the correct statement(s).
64. A body of mass 5 kg is suspended by the strings making
angles 60° and 30° with the horizontal as shown in the
figure (g = 10 m/s2)

(a) The friction force between A and B is 40 N.

(b) The net force acting on A is 150 N.
(c) The value of F is 190 N.
(d) The value of F is 150 N.
(a) T1 = 25 N (b) T2 = 25 N 68. Two block A and B masses mA and mB velocity v and 2v,
(c) T1  25 3 N (d) T2  25 3 N respectively, at a given instant (see figure). A horizontal
force F acts on the block A. There is no friction between
65. The string shown in the figure is passing over small smooth ground and block B and there is coefficient of friction
pulley rigidly attached to trolley A. If speed of trolley is between A and B is . The friction
constant and equal to V A. Speed and magnitude of
acceleration of block B at the instant shown in figure is

(a) on A oppose its motion.

(b) on B oppose its motion relative to A.
(c) on A and B is mAg.

m B
(d) on the block B is F..
 mA  mB 
LAWS OF MOTION 180

69. Two rough blocks A and B, A placed over B, move with 72. A block is resting over a rough horizontal floor. At t = 0, a
    time varying force starts acting on it, the force is described
acceleration a A and a B , velocity vA and vB by the
  by equation F = kt, where k is constant and t is in seconds.
action of horizontal forces FA and FB , respectively Mark the correct statement(s) for this situation.
(figure). When no friction exists between the blocks A
and B.

(a) Curve 1 shows acceleration-time graph.

(b) Curve 2 shows acceleration-time graph.
(c) Curve 3 shows velocity-time graph.
(a) vA = vB and aA = aB
(d) Curve 4 shows displacement-time graph.
(b) aA = aB
73. Two blocks A and B of mass 5 kg and 2 kg, respectively,
(c) both (a) and (b) connected by a spring of force constant 100 N/m are placed
FA FB on an inclined plane of inclination 30° as shown in the
(c) m  m and v A  v B figure. If the system is released from rest then
A B

70. Some statements are given below, which are in one way or
other can be explained by Newton’s law of motion. Mark
the correct statement(s).
(a) In a tug of war, the team that pushes the ground harder,
wins.
(a) There will be no compression or elongation in the
(b) In a tug of war, the team that pushes the ground harder
spring if all the surfaces are smooth.
(horizontally), wins
(c) Observers win two different inertial frames will (b) There will be elongation in the spring if A is rough
measure the same acceleration of a moving object and B is smooth.
then the velocity of the object w.r.t. two observers (c) Maximum elongation in the spring is 35 cm if all
would be also same. surfaces are smooth.
(d) A horizontal force acts on a body that is free to move. (d) There will be elongation in the spring if A is smooth
Can it produce an acceleration if this force is equal to and B is rough.
half of the weight of that body ?
74. The acceleration of a particle as observed from two
71. Mark the correct statement(s) regarding friction. different frames S1 and S2 have equal magnitudes of 2 ms–2.
(a) Friction force can be zero, even through the contact (a) The relative acceleration of the frame may either be 0
surface is rough. or 4 m/s2.
(b) Even though there is no relative motion between (b) Their relative acceleration may have any value
surfaces, frictional force may exist between them. between 0 and 4 m/s2.
(c) The expressions fL = sN or fK = kN are approsimate (c) Both of the frames may be stationary with respect to
expressions.
earth.
(d) Does the expression fL = sN tells that direction of fL
(d) The frames may be moving with same acceleration in
and N are the same.
same direction.
181 LAWS OF MOTION

75. In the figure, the blocks A, B and C of mass m each have Passage
acceleration a1, a2 and a3, respectively. F1 and F2 are external
Using the following passage, solve Q. 78 to 80
forces of magnitude 2 mg and mg, respectively, then
PASSAGE - 1
In the system shown in the figure, m1 > m2. System is held
at rest by thread BC. Now thread BC is burnt. Answer the
following :
78. Before burning the thread, what are the tensions is spring
and thread BC, respectively ?

(a) a1  a 2  a 3 (b) a1  a 2  a 3

(c) a1  a 2  a 3 (d) a1  a 2  a 3

76. A 10 kg block is placed on the top of a 40 kg block as

shown in the figure. A horizontal force F acting on B causes
an acceleration of 2 m/s2 to B. For this situation mark out
out the correct statement(s).
(a) m1g, m2g (b) m1g, m1g – m2g
(c) m2g, m1g (d) m1g, m1g + m2g
79. Just after burning the thread, what is the tension in the
spring ?
(a) m1g (b) m2g
(c) 0 (d) can’t say
80. Just after burning the thread, what is the accceleration of
(a) The acceleration of A may also be 2 m/s2. m2 ?
(b) The acceleration of A must also be 2 m/s2.
 m 2  m1   m1  m 2 
(c) The coefficient of friction between the blocks may be (a)  m g (b)  m  m g
0.2  2   1 2 
(d) The coefficient of friction between the blocks mut be
 m1  m 2 
0.2 only. (c) 0 (d)  m g
 2 
77. A block of mass m is at rest on an inclined surface having
a coefficient of friction  > tan  as shown in the figure. Using the following passage, solve Q. 81 to 83
The horizontal acceleration which should be given to the
PASSAGE -2
inclined plane, so that the force of friction between the
block and the plane becomes zero, is : A ball of mass 200 gm is thrown with a speed 20 ms–1. The
balls strikes a bat and rebounds along the same line at a
speed of 40 ms–1. Variation in the interaction force, as long
as the ball remains in contact with the bat, is as shown in
m the figure.
F

F0

(a) g sin , leftward (b) g tan , leftward

(c) g cot , rightward (d) g tan , rightward t
O 4 ms 6 ms
LAWS OF MOTION 182

81. Maximum force F0 exerted by the bat on the ball is

45 23
(a) 4,000 N (b) 5,000 N (a) m / s2 (b) m / s2
11 11
(c) 3,000 N (d) 2,500 N
13 8
82. Average force exerted by the bat on the ball is (c) m / s2 (d) m / s2
7 3
(a) 5,000 N (b) 2,000 N
(c) 2,500 N (d) 6,000 N 87. The least coefficient of friction between A and B is

83. What is the speed of the ball at the instant the force acting 9 3
5 2
on it is maximum ? (a) (b)
12 53
(a) 40 m/s (b) 30 m/s
(c) 20 m/s (d) 10 m/s 9 2 5 3
(c) (d)
Using the following passage, solve Q. 84 & 85 28 18

PASSAGE - 3 Using the following passage, solve Q. 88 to 90

In the following figure the weight w is 60.0 N.
PASSAGE - 5
Three blocks A, B and C of mass 3M, 2M and M,
respectively, are suspended vertically with the help of
springs PQ and TU and a string RS as shown. If
acceleration of block A, B and C are a 1, a 2 and a 3,
respectively.

84. The tension in the diagonal string is

(a) 60 N (b) 90 N
(c) 85 N (d) 100 N
85. Find the magnitudes of the horizontal forces F1 and F2 that
must be applied to hold the system in the position shown.
(a) 75 N, 90 N, respectively
(b) 60 N, 60 N, respectively
88. The value of acceleration a3 at the moment spring PQ is
(c) 90 N, 90 N, respectively
cut is
(d) 45 N, 90 N, respectively
(a) g downward (b) g upward
Using the following passage, solve Q. 86 to 87
(c) more than g downward (d) zero
PASSAGE - 4
89. The value of acceleration a1 at the moment string RS is
Block A has a mass of 40 kg and block B has a mass of 15
cut is
kg, and F of 500 N is applied parallel to smooth inclined
plane (figure). The system is moving together. (a) g downward (b) g upward
86. The acceleration of the system is (c) more than g downward (d) zero
90. The value of acceleration a2 at the moment spring TU is
cut is
(a) g/5 upward (b) g/5 downward
(c) g/3 upward (d) zero
 183 LAWS OF MOTION

Using the following passage, solve Q. 91 to 93 94. The coefficient of static friction between the block and
PASSAGE - 6 the floor is

In the following figure both the pulley and the string are (a) 0.45 (b) 0.5
massless and all the surfaces are frictionless. (c) 0.3 (d) 1.45
95. Which set of the readings of Experiment II is absolutely
wrong ?
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) none of these
Given m1 = 1kg, m2 = 2kg, m3 = 3kg 96. The speed of the block after 3s (beginning from the starting
of application of force) in set 2 for IInd experiment is
91. The tension in the string is
(a) 6 m/s (b) 2 m/s
120 240
(a) N (b) N (c) 3 m/s (d) Information is insufficient
7 7
Using the following passage, solve Q.97 to Q.101
130
(c) N (d) none of these PASSAGE - 8
7
92. The acceleration of m1 is When two masses are connected by a string (which we assume to
be weighless and does not stretch), they both have same
40 30
(a) m / s2 (b) m / s2 acceleration of the same magnitude. Two unequal masses are
7 7
attached by a lightweight string that passes over a pulley of
20 neglibile mass as shown in Fig. The block of mass m2 lies on a
(c) m / s2 (d) none of these
7 frictionless incline of angle .
93. The acceleration of m3 is

40 30
(a) m / s2 (b) m / s2
7 7

20
(c) m / s2 (d) none of these
7
Using the following passage, solve Q. 94 to 96
With the help of the comprehension given above, choose the
PASSAGE - 7
most appropriate alternative to each of the following questions.
A student performs two experiments to determine the
97. The acceleration of the two masses is
coefficient of static and kinetic friction between a block of
mass 100 kg and the horizontal floor. m1g  m 2 g sin  m1g  m 2 g sin 
Ist Experiment : He applies a gradual increasing force on (a) m1  m 2 (b) m1  m 2
the block and is just able to slide the block when force is
450 N m 2 g sin   m1g m1g  m 2 g
nd (c) m1  m 2 (d) m  m
II Experiement : He applies constant force of different 1 2
magnitudes for the duration of 2 s and determine the
distance travelled by the block in this duration. 98. The tension in the string is given by

Set Force Distance m 2 m 2 sin  m1m 2 g 1  sin  

(a) m  m (b)
1. 300 N 0.5 m 1 2 m1  m 2
2. 600 N 2.0 m
m1m 2 g 1  sin   m1m 2 g sin 
3. 750 N 3.0 m (c) (d)
m1  m 2 m1  m 2
Assume all the forces have been applied horizontally.
LAWS OF MOTION 184

99. The mass m2 accelerates down the incline if seen from another frame S2. We can say both the frames
(a) m2 sin  < m1 (b) m2 sin  > m1 are inertial.
Statement-2 : All frames moving uniformly with respect to
(c) m2 > m1 (d) m1 > m2 cos 
an inertial frame are themselves inertial.
100. The mass m2 accelerates up the incline if
(a) A (b) B
(a) m1 > m2 sin  (b) m2 sin  > m1
(c) C (d) D
(c) m1 > m2 (d) m1 < m2 cos  106. Statement-1 : In high jump, it hurts less when an athlete
101. If m1 = 10.0kg, m2 = 5.00kg, and  = 45o, the acceleration is lands on a heap of sand.
(a) 4.22 m/s2 (b) –4.22 m/s2 Statement-2 : Because of greater distance and hence
greater time over which the motion of an athlete is stopped,
(c) 8.44 m/s2 (d) –8.44 m/s2
the athlete experience less force when lands on heap of
Assertion and Reason sand.
(a) A (b) B
(A) Assertion is true, Reason is true; Reason is a correct
(c) C (d) D
explanation for Assertion.
107. Statement-1 : A body in equilibrium has to be at rest only.
(B) Assertion is true, Reason is true; Reason is NOT a correct
Statement-2 : A body is equilibrium may be moving with a
explanation for Assertion.
constant speed along a straight line path.
(C) Assertion is true, Reason is false.
(a) A (b) B
(D) Assertion is false, Reason is true.
(c) C (d) D
102. Statement-1 : Rate of change of linear momentum is equal
108. Statement-1 : Pulling (refer to the figure) is easier than
to external force. pushing [refer to the figure] on a rough surface.
Statement-2 : There is equal and opposite reaction to every Statement-2 : Normal reaction is less in pulling than is
action. pushing.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
103. Statement-1 : Newton’s first law is merely a special case
(a = 0) of the second law.
Statement-2 : Newton’s first law defines the frame from (a) A (b) B
  
where Newton second law; F  ma, F representing the (c) C (d) D
net real force acting on a body; is applicable. 109. Statement-1 : Static frictional force is always greater than
the kinetic frictional force.
(a) A (b) B
Statement-2 : (Coefficient of static friction) s > k
(c) C (d) D
(coefficient of kinetic friction).
104. Statement-1 : According to Netwton’s second law of
(a) A (b) B
motion action and reaction forces are equal and opposite.
(c) C (d) D
Statement-2 : Action and reaction forces never cancel out
110. Statement-1 : A concept of pseudo force is valid both for
each other because they are acting on different objects.
inertial as well as non-inertial frame of reference.
(a) A (b) B Statement-2 : A frame accelerated with respect to an inertial
(c) C (d) D frame is a non-inertial frame.
105. Statement-1 : A particle is found to be at rest when seen (a) A (b) B
from a frame S1 and moving with a constant velocity when (c) C (d) D
 185 LAWS OF MOTION

111. Statement-1 : In the figure the ground is smooth and the Match the Columns
masses of both the blocks are different. Net force acting
on each of the block is not same. 116. Match the entries of Column I with the entries of Column II.

Statement-2 : Acceleration of the blocks both will be Column I Column II

different. (A) Frictional force is less (p) m = tan 
than applied force
(B) Frictional force is (q) Limiting friction
equal to the applied
(a) A (b) B force
(c) C (d) D (C) An object is on the (r) Static
112. Statement-1 : Greater is the rate of the change in the verge of motion
momentum vector, the greater is the force applied.
(D) An object is about (s) Kinetic friction
 dp
Statement-2 : Newton’s second is law F  . to slide down when
dt
placed on an inclined
(a) A (b) B
plane, being the angle
(c) C (d) D
of inclination with the
113. Statement-1 : If a body is trying to slip over a surface then
horizontal
friction acting on the body is necessarily equal to the
117. For the situation shown in the figure, in Column I, the
limiting friction.
statements regarding friction forces are mentioned, while
Statement-2 : Static friction can be less than the limiting in Column II some information related to friction forces are
friction force. given. Match the entries of Column I with the entries of
(a) A (b) B Column II.

(c) C (d) D
114. Statement-1 : A man standing in a lift which is moving
2 kg
upwards, will feel his weight to be greater than when the
lift was at rest.
3 kg F = 100 N
Statement-2 : If the acceleration of the lift is a upward,
then the man of mass m shall feel his weight to be equal to 5 kg
normal reaction (N) exerted by the lift given by N = m (g +
a) (where g is acceleration due to gravity).
(a) A (b) B
Column - I Column - II
(c) C (d) D
(A) Total friction force on 3 kg (p) towards right
115. Statement-1 : On a rainy day, it is difficult to drive a car or block is
a bus at high speed.
(B) Total friction force on 5 kg (q) towards left
Statement-2 : The value of coefficient of friction is lowered
block is
due to wetting of the surface.
(C) Friction force on 2 kg block (r) zero
(a) A (b) B
due to 3 kg block is
(c) C (d) D
(D) Friction force on 3 kg block (s) non-zero
due to 5 kg block is
LAWS OF MOTION 186

118. The system shown in the figure is initially in equilibrium. 121. In the arrangement shown in figure, m1 = 1 kg and m2 = 2 kg.
The pulleys are massless and strings are light. The value
of M for which the mass m1 moves with constant velocity
(neglecting friction) is W kg. Find W.

Column - I Column - II
(A) Just after the Spring 2 (p) Accelerates up 122. A car is going at a speed of 6 m/sec when it encounters a
is cut, the block D slope of angle 37º. The length of the sloping slide is 7 m.
(B) Just after the Spring 2 (q) Accelerates down The friction coefficient between the road and the tyre is
is cut, the block C 0.5. The driver applied brakes. The minimum speed of the
car with which it can reach the bottom is W m/sec. Find W.
(C) Just after the Spring 2 (r) Momentarily at rest
is cut, the block A
(D) Just after the String (s) Moves up with
connecting A and B is acceleration g
cut, the block D
Integer type
123. A monkey of mass m = 1 kg clings to a rope slung over a
119. A light string fixed at one end to a clamp on ground passes
light frictionless pulley. The opposite end of the rope is
over a fixed pulley and hangs at the other side. It makes an
tied to a weight of mass M = 2 m lying on a smooth
angle of 30o with the ground. A monkey of mass 5 kg climbs
up the rope. The clamp can tolerate a vertical force of 40 N horizontal plane. The tension of the rope for the monkey
only. The maximum acceleration (in m/s2) in upward direction moves upwards with an acceleration a = 2 m/sec2 relative
with which the monkey can climb safely is to the rope is T = W N (neglect the mass of pulley and
rope). Find W.
120. An inclined plane makes an angle of 30° with the horizontal.
A groove OA = 5 m cuts in the plane makes an angle of 30°
with OX. A short smooth cylinder is free to slide down
under the influence of gravity. The time taken by the
cylinder to reach from A to O is W sec. Find W.
 187 LAWS OF MOTION

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Fill in the Blanks
1. A block of mass 1 kg lies on a horizontal surface in a truck. friction between the block and the wall is 0.5, the magnitude
The coefficient of static friction between the block and the of the frictional force acting on the block is : (1994)
surface is 0.6. If the acceleration of the truck is 5 m/s2, the (a) 2.5 N (b) 0.98 N
frictional force acting on the block is ............... newtons. (c) 4.9 N (d) 0.49 N
(1984) 8. A string of negligible mass going over a clamped pulley of
True/False mass m supports a block of mass M as shown in the figure.
The force on the pulley by the clamp is given by : (2001)
2. When a person walks on a rough surface, the frictional
force exerted by the surface on the person is opposite to
the direction of his motion. (1981)
m
3. The pulley arrangements of figure (a) and (b) are identical.
The mass of the rope is negligible. In (a) the mass m is
lifted up by attaching a mass 2m to the other end of the
rope. In (b), m is lifted up by pulling the other end of the M
rope with a constant downward force F = 2mg. The
acceleration of m is the same in both cases. (1984)
(a) 2 Mg (b) 2 mg

(c) M  m 2  m 2 g (d)  M  m 2  M 2  g
 
9. The pulleys and strings shown in the figure are smooth
and of negligible mass. For the system to remain in
equilibrium, the angle  should be : (2001)
m 2m m F = 2 mg

4. Two identical trains are moving on rails along the equator

on the earth in opposite directions with the same speed.
They will exert the same pressure on the rails. (1985)
Objective Questions (only one option is correct)
5. A ship of mass 3 × 107 kg initially at rest, is pulled by a force 2m
of 5 × 104 N through a distance of 3m. Assuming that the m m
resistance due to water is negligible, the speed of the ship
is : (1980)
(a) 0° (b) 30°
(a) 1.5 m/s (b) 60 m/s
(c) 45° (d) 60°
(c) 0.1 m/s (d) 5 m/s
10. What is the maximum value of the force F such that the
6. A block of mass 2 kg rests on a rough inclined plane making
block shown in the arrangement, does not move ? (2003)
an angle of 30° with the horizontal. The coefficient of static
friction between the block and the plane is 0.7. The frictional
F
force on the block is : (1980)
60°
(a) 9.8 N (b) 0.7 × 9.8 × 3 N

(c) 9.8 × 3 N (d) 0.7 × 9.8 N

(a) 20 N (b) 10 N
7. A block of mass 0.1 kg is held against a wall applying a
horizontal force of 5 N on the block. If the coefficient of (c) 12 N (d) 15 N
LAWS OF MOTION 188

11. Two blocks A and B of masses 2 m and m, respectively are a a

connected by a massless and inextensible string. The (a) gk (b) 2gk
whole system is suspended by a massless spring as
showin in the figure. The magnitudes of acceleration A 2a a
and B, immediately after the string is cut, are respectively (c) gk (d) 4gk
(IIT-JEE, 2006) 15. A block of mass m is on an inclined plane of angle . The
coefficient of friction between the block and the plane is 
and tan . The block is held stationary by applying a
force P parallel to the plane. The direction of force pointing
up the plane is taken to be positive. As P is varied from
P1 = mg (sin  –  cos ) to P2 = mg (sin  +  cos ), the
(a) g, g/2 (b) g/2, g frictional force f versus P graph will look like (2010)
(c) g, g (d) g/2, g/2
12. Two particles of mass m each are tied at the ends of a light
string of length 2a. The whole system is kept on a
frictionless horizontal surface with the string held tight so
that each mass is at a distance a from the centre P (as
shown in the figure). Now, the mid-point of the string is (a) (b)
pulled vertically upwards with a small but constant force
F. As a result, the particles moves towards each other on
the surface. The magnitude of acceleration, when the
separation between them becomes 2 x is (IIT-JEE, 2007)
(c) (d)

16. A block of mass m1 = 1 kg another mass m2 = 2 kg. are

placed together (see figure) on an inclined plane with angle
of inclination  . Various values of  are given in List I.
The coefficient of friction between the block m1 and the
plane is always zero. The coefficient of static and dynamic
F a F x friction between the block m2 and the plane are equal to
(a) 2m 2 2 (b) 2m  = 0.3. In List II expressions for the friction on block m2
a x a  x2
2

are given. Match the correct expression of the friction in

F x F a2  x2 List II with the angles given in List I, and choose the
(c) (d) correct option. The acceleration due to gravity is denoted
2m a 2m x
by g. [Useful information: tan (5.50)  0.1; tan (11.50)  0.2;
13. A particle moves in the X–Y plane under the influence of tan (16.50)  0.3] (2014)
a force such that its linear momentum is

p  t   A ˆi cos  kt   ˆjsin  kt   , where A and k are
constants. The angle between the force and the momentum
is : (IIT-JEE, 2007)
(a) 0° (b) 30°
(c) 45° (d) 90°
List I List II
14. A piece of wire is bent in the shape of a parabola y = kx2
(y-axis vertical) with a bead of mass m on it. The bead can P.  = 50 1. m2g sin 
slide on the wire without friction. It says at the lowest Q.  = 100 2. (m1+ m2) g sin 
point of the parabola when the wire is at rest. The wire is R.  = 15 0
3.  m2g cos 
now accelerated parallel to the x-axis with constant
S.  = 20 0
4.  (m1 + m2) g cos 
acceleration a. The distance of the new equilibrium position
of the bead, where the bead can stay at rest with respect (a) P -1, Q-1, R-1, S-3 (b) P-2, Q-2, R-2, S-3
to the wire, from the y–axis is : (IIT-JEE, 2009) (c) P-2, Q-2, R-2, S-4 (d) P-2, Q-2, R-3, S-3
189 LAWS OF MOTION

17. A uniform wooden stick of mass 1.6 kg and length l rests

P1
in an inclined manner on a smooth, vertical wall of height
h (<I) such that a small portion of the stick extends beyond
P2
the well. The reaction force of the wall on the stick is M2

perpendicular on the stick. The stick makers an angle of M1

37° M3
300 with the wall and the bottom of the stick is equal in
magnitude to the reaction of the floor on the stick. The
If the mass M1 moves downwards with a uniform velocity,
ratio h/l and the frictional force f at tatthe bottom of the
find :
stick are (g = 10 ms-2) : (2016)
(i) the mass of M1,
h 3 16 3 h 3 16 3 (ii) the tension in the horizontal portion of the string.
(a)  ,f  N (b)  ,f  N (g = 9.8 m/s2, sin 37°  3/5)
 16 3  16 3
21. A block of mass m rests on a horizontal floor with which it
has a coefficient of static friction . It is desired to make
h 3 3 8 3 h 3 3 16 3
(c)  ,f  N (d)  ,f  N the body move by applying the minimum possible force F.
 16 3  16 3 Find the magnitude of F and the direction in which it has to
Objective Question (More than one option are correct) be applied. (1987)
18. A reference frame attached to the earth : (1986) 22. Two blocks of mass 2.9 kg and 1.9 kg are suspended from
a rigid support S by two inextensible wires each of length
(a) is an inertial frame by definition
1 m (see figure). The upper wire has negligible mass and
(b) cannot be an inertial frame because the earth is the lower wire has a uniform mass of 0.2 kg/m. The whole
revolving round the sun system of blocks, wires and support have an upward
(c) is an inertial frame because Newton’s laws are acceleration of 0.2 m/s2. The acceleration due to gravity is
applicable in this frame 9.8 m/s2. (1989)
(d) cannot be an inertial frame because the earth is rotating S
about its own axis.
19. Consider a thin square plate floating on a viscous liquid in 2.9 kg

a large tank. The height h of the liquid in the tank is much

less than the width of the tank. The floating plate is pulled
horizontally with a constant velocity u0. Which of the 1.9 kg

following statements is (are) true ? (2018)

(i) Find the tension at the midpoint of the lower wire.
(a) The resistive force of liquid on the plate is inversely
(ii) Find the tension at the midpoint of the upper wire.
propotional to h
23. Block A of mass m and block B of mass 2m are placed on a
(b) The resistive force of liquid on the plate is independent fixed triangular wedge by means of a massless, in extensible
of the area of the plate string and a frictionless pulley as shown in figure. The
(c) The tangential (shear) stress on the floor of the tank wedge is inclined at 45° to the horizontal on both sides.
increases with u0 The coefficient of friction between block A and the wedge
is 2/3 and that between block B and the wedge is 1/3. If the
(d) The tangential (shear) stress on the plate varies linearly
system A and B is released from rest, find : (1997)
with the viscosity  of the liquid
Subjective Questions
20. Masses M 1, M 2 and M 3 are connected by strings of
ngeligible mass which pass over massless and frictionless
pulleys P1 and P2 as shown in figure. The masses move A B
such that the portion of the string between P1 and P2 is m 45° 45° 2m
parallel to the inclined plane and the portion of the string
between P2 and M3 is horizontal. The masses M2 and M3 (i) the acceleration of A,
are 4.0 kg each and the coefficient of kinetic friction between (ii) tension in the string and
the masses and the surfaces is 0.25. The inclined plane (iii) the magnitude and direction of the force of friction
makes an angle of 37° with the horizontal. (1981) acing on A.
LAWS OF MOTION 190

24. Two blocks A and B of equal masses are release from an (i) the common acceleration of two masses and
inclined plane of inclination 45° at t = 0. Both the blocks are
(ii) the tension in the string.
initially at rest. The coefficient of kinetic friction between
the block A and the inclined plane is 0.2 while it is 0.3 for block (sin 37° = 0.6, cos 37° = 0.8). [Take g = 9.8 ms–2] (1979)
B. Initially the block A is 2 m behind the block B. When and 29. A circular disc with a groove along its diameter is placed
where their front faces will come in a line. horizontally. A block of mass 1 kg is placed as shown in
(Take g = 10 m/s2) (2004) the figure. The co-efficient of friction between the block
and all surface of groove in contact is  = 2/5. The disc has
A
an acceleration of 25 m/s2. Find the acceleration of the
B
block with respect to disc. (2006)

B
A
45°

25. In the figure, the blocks A, B and C have masses 3 kg, 4 kg

and 8 kg respectively. The coefficient of sliding friction
between any two surfaces is 0.25. A is held at rest by a
massless rigid rod fixed to the wall, while B and C are 30. A block is moving on an inclined plane making an angle
connected by a light flexible cord passing around a fixed 45° with the horizontal and the coefficient of friction is .
frictionless pulley. Find the force F necessary to drag C The force required to just push it up the inclined plane is
along the horizontal surface to the left at a constant speed. 3 times the force required to just prevent it from sliding
Assume that the arrangement shown in the figure, i.e., B down. If we define N = 10 , then N is : (2011)
on C and A on B, is maintained throughout. (1978)
Assertion and Reason
(A) Assertion is true, Reason is true; Reason is a correct
explanation for Assertion.
A
(B) Assertion is true, Reason is true; Reason is NOT a correct
B
explanation for Assertion.
F
C (C) Assertion is true, Reason is false.
(D) Assertion is false, Reason is true.
26. A uniform rope of length L and mass M is pulled by a 31. Assertion : A cloth covers a table. Some dishes are kept
constant force F. What is the tension in the rope at a on it. The cloth can be pulled out without dislodging the
distance l from the end where the force is applied ? (1978) dishes from the table.
27. A block of mass 2 kg slides on an inclined plane which Reason : For every action there is an equal and opposite
makes an angle of 30° with the horizontal. The coefficient reaction. (2007)
(a) A (b) B
of friction between the block and the surface is 3/ 2 .
(c) C (d) D
What force should be applied to the block so that it moves
32. Assertion : A block of mass m starts moving on a rough
(a) down and
horizontal surface with a velocity v. It stops due to friction
(b) up without any acceleration. (1978) between the block and the surface after moving through a
28. Two blocks connected by a massless string slides down certain distance. The surface is now tilted to an angle of
an inclined plane having an angle of inclination of 37°. The 30° with the horizontal and the same block is made to go up
masses of the two blocks are M1 = 4 kg and M2 = 2 kg on the surface with the same initial velocity v. The decrease
respectively and the coefficient of friction of M1 and M2 in the mechanical energy in the second situation is smaller
with the inclined plane are 0.75 and 0.25 respectively. than that in the first situation.
Assuming the string to the taut, find Reason : The coefficient of friction between the block and
the surface decreases with the increase in the angle of
inclination. (2007)
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
37° 
191 LAWS OF MOTION

ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (d) 9. (c)
10. (d) 11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (b) 17. (c) 18. (b)
19. (c) 20. (c) 21. (b) 22. (c) 23. (a) 24. (b) 25. (d) 26. (a) 27. (a)
28. (d) 29. (b) 30. (d) 31. (b) 32. (b) 33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (b) 36. (a)
37. (d) 38. (c) 39. (d) 40. (b) 41. (c) 42. (a) 43. (c) 44. (a) 45. (a)
46. (c) 47. (d) 48. (d) 49. (d) 50. (b) 51. (c) 52. (b) 53. (c) 54. (a)
55. (d) 56. (c) 57. (b) 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (a) 61. (c) 62. (d) 63. (c)
64. (a) 65. (b) 66. (a) 67. (b) 68. (a) 69. (c) 70. (a) 71. (a) 72. (a)
73. (b) 74. (d) 75. (b) 76. (b) 77. (c) 78. (c) 79. (d) 80. (a)
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (a) 8. (d) 9. (d)
10. (c) 11. (d) 12. (a) 13. (a) 13. (d) 15. (a) 16. (a) 17. (d) 18. (b)
19. (d) 20. (d) 21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (c) 25. (b) 26. (d) 27. (d)
28. (c) 29. (d) 30. (a) 31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (d) 36. (a)
37. (d) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (b)

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (c)
10. (c) 11. (d) 12. (a) 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (d) 17. (d) 18. (c)
19. (b) 20. (d) 21. (d) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (c) 25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (b)
28. (b) 29. (c) 30. (c) 31. (a) 32. (b) 33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (d) 36. (a)
37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (b) 41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (c) 44. (d) 45. (a)
46. (d) 47. (d) 48. (d) 49. (c) 50. (d) 51. (d) 52. (b) 53. (d) 54. (b)
55. (b) 56. (b) 57. (a) 58. (b) 59. (a) 60. (b) 61. (a) 62. (a,b,c,d) 63. (a, b, c)
64. (a, d) 65. (c, d) 66. (b, c) 67. (a, b, c) 68. (b, c) 69. (a,b,c,d) 70. (b, d) 71. (a, b, c) 72. (b, c, d)
73. (a, d) 74. (b, c, d) 75. (a, b) 76. (b, c) 77. (b, c) 78. (b) 79. (a) 80. (d) 81. (a)
82. (b) 83. (c) 84. (c) 85. (b) 86. (a) 87. (b) 88. (d) 89. (b) 90. (a)
91. (a) 92. (a) 93. (b) 94. (a) 95. (a, b, c) 96. (c) 97. (b, c) 98. (b) 99. (b)
100. (a) 101. (a) 102. (b) 103. (d) 104. (d) 105. (b) 106. (a) 107. (d) 108. (a)
109. (a) 110. (d) 111. (c) 112. (a) 113. (d) 114. (d) 115. (a)
116. (A –s; B – q, r; C – q, r; D – p, q, r) 117. (A –q, s; B – r; C – p, s; D – q, s) 118. (A –p; B – p; C– r; D – r)
119. (0006) 120. (0002) 121. (0008) 122. (0008) 123. (0008)
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
1. 5 2. False 3. False 4. False 5. (c) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (d)
9. (c) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (b) 13. (d) 14. (b) 15. (a)
16. (d) 17. (d) 18. (b, d) 19. (a, c, d) 20. 4.2 kg, 9.8 N
2 2 mg mg
21. mg sin ,  = tan–1 () from horizontal 22. (i) 35.6 N, (ii) 1.18 N 23. (i) zero, (ii) , (iii) down the plane
3 3 2
 I
24. 8 2 m, 2s 25. F = 78.4 N 26. T  F 1   27. (a) 10.99 N, (b) 30.58 N
 L
28. (i) 1.3 m/s2, (ii) 5.24 N 29. 10 m/s2 30. (0005) 31. (b) 32. (c)
Dream on !!

 2

Published by
Vedantu Innovations Private Limited
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
Vedantu Innovations Private Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by
any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the
publishers.
Notice : Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best of the resources and
knowledge. Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book
from sources regarded as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this
book. However, we as authors and publishers are not to be held responsible for unin-
tentional mistakes that might have crept in. Having stated that, errors (if any) brought
to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged and rectified in upcoming editions.

Printed by
Colours Imprint
475C, Adugodi Main Road,
8th Block, Koramangala, Bengaluru 560 095
www.coloursimprint.com
3
 4

Founder’s Message
Dear Student,

It gives me immense pleasure to present to you a Ready Reckoner and Practice booklet by
Vedantu - ‘TATVA’. Tatva in Sanskrit, means a collection of “Core” content/truth and isn’t that
what Vedantu brings to your table - the Core? Vedantu, at all times, ensures that you have
easy accessibility to a collection of essential concepts, theory, derivations, definitions, solved
examples, concept videos, and practice questions, important questions from competitive
examinations and I am pleased to say that all questions in ‘Tatva’ come with detailed solutions.

Tatva is the result of the constant endeavour and research done by our highly experienced
team of teachers and subject experts who compiled relevant content for you so that you come
out with flying colours in IIT JEE/NEET and Olympiads. We strongly believe and vouch for the
effectiveness and relevance of this booklet to grab the desired rank in IIT JEE/ NEET.

Key Points on ‘How to obtain optimal benefits from ‘Tatva’ ?

* We suggest starting with the Practice of ‘Tatva questions’ at the end of a chapter after
revision and Practice of basic questions.
* For daily practice of questions, we strongly recommend attempting session assignments
along with Vedantu live sessions
* Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you revise
concepts, mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary and eventually clear
all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
* Attempt Tatva questions post revision of 11th and 12th Grade topics. Take one topic at a
time to solve. Attempt any revision test series for NEET/JEE once you have solved Tatva
questions. Following this will not only help you during revision but also give a major
boost to your confidence.
* First solve basic level questions and gradually progress to the advanced level.
* Practice basic level questions regularly all through your journey of preparation.
* Your success is our dream-come-true

I wish you all the best.

Anand Prakash
Founder, Academic Head
Vedantu

Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing

Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1,6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
 5

Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Theodore Roosevelt

Tatva is the brainchild of the creative Vedans who The managers who understood every aspect of what
strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you. Our the leadership were trying to accomplish and brought
heartfelt thanks to the Super Vedans who give wings so much of their own to the table and managed the
to the vision of Vedantu. execution of ‘Tatva’ immaculately.

Our leaders who have been our guiding light and Kiran Kumari Harish Rao
encouragement in every step: Bhavya Bangera Shraddha
Vamsi Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Sir Sushmitha Akshatha
Charubak Chakrabarti
Our gratitude to the insightful leadership and
guidance of our leaders who dreamt about ‘Tatva’, Our heartfelt gratitude to ourcreative content
steered the project in the right direction and were developers, the dedicated master teachers and the
instrumental in making this dream into a reality: DTP team who have put in their hard work, insights,
eagerness to execute and nurtured Tatva into ‘your
Sahil Bhatia Shubam Gupta ready handbook’ and to bring positive learning
Arshad Shahid Ajay Mittal experience to you.
JaideepSontakke Sudhanshu Jain

Physics Team

Teachers SME DTP

Aarzoo Walia Satyam Kumar Atul Singh (Team Lead) Jitender Singh
Ishani Mitra Santosh Kumar Nanda Pukhraj Singh Yamala Santhosh Kumar
Shubham Ghar Anmol Gupta Saurabh Sharma
Anand M Tamanna Arora
Vijayalakshmi Viswanathan Kanchan Kumari
Pritesh Ranjan Pushp Raj Singh
Ravneet Wadhwa

A loud shout out for our media team - a bunch of creative minds with contagious energy. We cannot thank
them enough.

Suraj Bhan Singh

Gadde Ranjith
Ranjeeth Ramesh
Sreyoshi Biswas
Devika Ramachandran

Special thanks and appreciation for the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal,
Dipshi Shetty, Mohamed Anzar and Anuska Singh.

The journey of the imagination to the reality of ‘Tatva’ would not have been possible without our enthusiastic
Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated team of Teachers and our talented Tech
Team.
 Table of Contents

WORK, POWER & ENERGY

 Theory .......................................................................................................................................... 9

 Solved Examples .......................................................................................................................... 19

 Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ..................................................................................... 25

 Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ..................................................................... 32

 Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ........................................................................... 36

 Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ............................................................... 47

 Answer Key .................................................................................................................................. 53

CIRCULAR MOTION
 Theory ........................................................................................................................................... 55

 Solved Examples .......................................................................................................................... 65

 Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ..................................................................................... 78

 Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ..................................................................... 85

 Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ............................................................................ 92

 Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ............................................................... 99

 Answer Key .................................................................................................................................. 101

 CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS
 Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 103
 Solved Examples .................................................................................................................... 109
 Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 115
 Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ............................................................... 122
 Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ...................................................................... 126
 Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 143
 Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 149

ROTATIONAL MOTION
 Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 152
 Solved Examples .................................................................................................................... 159
 Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 164
 Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................ 172
 Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 179
 Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 198
 Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 210

GRAVITATION
 Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 213
 Solved Examples .................................................................................................................... 224
 Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 238
 Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................ 242
 Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 247
 Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 259
 Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 262
 01
WORK, POWER & ENERGY
 9 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

Work, Power & Energy

1. WORK  
W  ˆi Fx  ˆjFy  kˆ Fz . ˆi x  ˆj y  kˆ z 
In Physics, work stands for ‘mechanical work’.
Work is said to be done by a force when the body is W  x Fx  y Fy  zFz
displaced actually through some distance in the direction
Obviously, work is a scalar quantity, i.e., it has magnitude
of the applied force.
only and no direction. However, work done by a force can
However, when there is no displacement in the direction be positive or negative or zero.
of the applied force, no work is said to be done, i.e., work
done is zero, when displacement of the body in the direction 2. DIMENSIONS AND UNITS OF WORK
of the force is zero. 1 1 –2
As work = force × distance  W = (M L T ) × L

Suppose a constant force F acting on a body produces a
 W   M1 L2 T 2 
displacement s in the body along the positive x-direction,
figure This is the dimensional formula of work.
The units of work are of two types :
F 1. Absolute units 2. Gravitational units
(a) Absolute unit
1. Joule. It is the absolute unit of work on SI.
Work done is said to be one joule, when a force of one
s newton actually moves a body through a distance of one
metre in the direction of applied force.

If  is the angle which F makes with the positive x– From W = F cos 
 1 joule = 1 newton × 1 metre × cos 0° = 1 N–m
direction of the displacement, then the component of F in
the direction of displacement is (F cos ). As work done 2. Erg. It is the absolute unit of work on cgs system.
by the force is the product of component of force in the Work done is said to be one erg, when a force of one dyne
direction of the displcement and the magnitude of the actually moves a body through a distance of one cm.in
displacement, the direction of applied force.
From W = Fs cos 
 W   F cos   s ...(1)
1 eg = 1 dyne × 1 cm × cos 0°
If displacement is in the direction of force applied,  = 0°. (b) Gravitational units
From (1), W = (F cos 0°) s = F s
These are also called the practical units of work.
 
Equation (1) can be rewritten as W  F.s ...(2) 1. Kilogram-metre (kg–m). It is the gravitational unit of
work on SI.
Thus, work done by a force is the dot product of force and Work done is said to be one kg–m, when a force of 1 kg f
displacement. move a body through a distance of 1 m in the direction of
  the applied force.
In terms of rectangular cmponent, F and s, may written as
 From W = F s cos 
ˆ and s  ˆix  ˆjy  kz
F  ˆi Fx  ˆjFy  kF ˆ
z 1 kg–m = 1 kg f × 1 m × cos 0° = 9.8 N × 1 m = 9.8 joule, i.e.,
  1kg  m  9.8 J
From (2), W  F.s
 WORK, POWER & ENERGY 10

2. Gram-centimetre (g-cm). It is the gravitational unit of (c) Zero work

work on cgs system.  
When force applied F or the displacement s or both are
Work done is said to be one g-cm, when a force of 1 g f zero, work done W = F s cos  is zero. Again, when angle
moves a body through a distance of 1 cm. in the direction  
of the applied force.  between F and s is 90°, cos  = cos 90° = 0. Therefore
work done is zero.
From W = F s cos 
For example :
1 g-cm = 1 g f × 1 cm × cos 0°
When we push hard against a wall, the force we exert on
1 g-cm = 980 dyne × 1 cm × 1 
the wall does no work, because s  0. However, in this
1g  m  980 ergs process, our muscles are contracting and relaxing
alternately and internal energy is being used up. That is
3. NATURE OF WORK DONE why we do get tired.

Although work done is a scalar quantity, its value may be 4. WORK DONE BY A VARIABLE FORCE
positive, negative, negative or even zero, as detailed below:
(a) Graphical Method
(a) Positive work
  A constant force is rare. It is the variable force which is
As W = F.s = F s cos  encountered more commonly. We can, therefore, learn to
when  is acute (< 90°), cos  is positive. Hence, work calculate work done by a variable force, let us consider a

done is positive. force acting along the fixed direction, say x–axis, but
having a variable magnitude.
For example :
We have to calculate work done in moving the body from
(i) When a body falls freely under the action of gravity, A to B under the action of this variable force. To do this,
 = 0°, cos  = cos 0° = + 1. Therefore, work done by we assume that the entire displacement from A to B is
gravity on a body falling freely is positive. made up of a large number of infinitesimal displacements.
(b) Negative work One such displacement shown in figure from P to Q.
  As the displacement PQ = dx is infinitesimally small, we
As W = F. s = F s cos 
consider that all along this displacement, force is constant
 When  is obtuse (> 90°), cos  is negative. Hence, work in magnitude (= PS) as well in same direction.
done is negative.  Small amount of work done in moving the body from P to
For example : Q is
(i) When a body is thrown up, its motion is opposed by dW = F × dx = (PS) (PQ) = area of strip PQRS
 Total work done in moving the body from A to B is given by
gravity. The angle  between gravitational force F and
the displacement s is 180°. As cos  = cos 180° = –1, W =  dW
therefore, work done by gravity on a body moving W =  F × dx
upwards is negative.
If the displacement are allowed to approach zero, then the
number of terms in the sum increases without limit. And
the sum approaches a definite value equal to the area under
Positive work Negative the curve CD.
done by work done by F (x)
Gravitational Gravitational C
Force Force
R
S
D

XA XB
O x
A PQ B
Distance
(a)
11 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

 
F (x) dW  F.ds
C

When ds  0, total work done in moving the body from A
to B can be obtained by integrating the above expression
D
between SA and SB.
Work S
 
B

 W   F.ds
O x SA
A B
(b)
5. CONSERVATIVE & NON-CONSERVATIVE FORCES
Hence, we may rewrite, W = limit  F  dx  Conservative force
dx  x

In the language of integral calculus, we may write it as A force is said to be conservative if work done by or against
the force in moving a body depends only on the initial and
xB
final positions of the body, and not on the nature of path
W   F  dx  , where xA = OA and xB = OB
followed between the initial and the final positions.
xA

This means, work done by or against a conservative force

xB
in moving a body over any path between fixed initial and
W   area of the strip PQRS
xA
final positions will be the same.
For example, gravitational force is a conservative force.
= total area under the curve between F and x-axis from
x = xA to x = xB Properties of Conservative forces :
1. Work done by or against a conservative force, in moving
W  Area ABCDA a body from one position to the other depends only on
the initial position and final position of the body.
Hence, work done by a variable force is numerically equal
to the area under the force curve and the displacement axis. 2. Work done by or against a conservative force does not
depend upon the nature of the path followed by the body
Mathematical Treatment (of work done by a variable
in going from initial position to the final position.
force).
3. Work done by or against a conservative force in moving a
Suppose we have to calculate work done in moving a body
body through any round trip (i.e., closed path, where final
from a point A (SA) to point B (SB) under the action of a
position coincides with the initial position of the body) is
varying force, figure. Here, SA and SB are the distance of
always zero.
the points A and B with respect to some reference point.
Non-conservative Forces
F A force is said to be non-conservative, if work done by or
against the force in moving a body from one position to
another, depends on the path followed between these two
positions.
A P ds Q B For example, frictional forces are non-conservative forces.
SA SB
6. POWER
At any stage, suppose the body is at P, where force on the
 Power of a person or machine is defined as the time rate at
body is F . Under the action of this force, let the body
  which work is done by it.
undergo an infinitesimally small displacement PQ  ds .
During such a small displacement, if we assume that the work done
i.e., Power = Rate of doing work =
force remains constant, then small amount of work done time taken
in moving the body from P to Q is
Thus, power of a body measures how fast it can do the
work.
 WORK, POWER & ENERGY 12

Formula for Kinetic Energy

dW
P Kinetic Energy of a body can be obtained either from
dt
  (i) the amount of work done in stopping the moving body, or
 
Now, dW = F.ds, where F is the force applied and ds is from
the small displacement. (ii) the amount of work done in giving the present velocity
  today he body from the state of rest.
F.ds
 P Let us use the second method :
dt
suppose m = mass of a body at rest (i.e., u = 0).

ds  F = Force applied on the body
But  v, the instantaneous velocity..
dt a = acceleration produced in the body in the direction of
force applied.
 
 P  F.v v = velocity acquired by the body in moving through a
distance s, figure
Dimensions of power can be deduced as :

W M1L2 T 2 F V
P  1
  M1 L2 T 3 
t T
s
Units of power
2 2
The absolute unit of power in SI is watt, which is denoted From v – u = 2 a s
2
by W. v – 0 = 2 as
From P = W/t
v2
a
1 joule 2s
1 watt = , i.e., 1W  1Js1
1sec
 v2 
Power of a body is said to be one watt, if it can do one As F = m a  using, F = m  
 2s 
joule of work in one second.
Work done on the body, W = Force × distance
1 h.p.  746 W
v2
Wm s
7. ENERGY 2s

Energy of a body is defined as the capacity or ability of

1
the body to do the work. W m v2
2
8. KINETIC ENERGY This work done on the body is a measure of kinetic energy
The kinetic energy of a boyd is the energy possessed by (K.E.) acquired by the body,
the body by virtue of its motion.
1
For example :  K.E. of body  W  m v2
2
(i) A bullet fired from a gun can pierce through a target on
account of kinetic energy of the bullet. Alternative method
(ii) Wind mills work on the kinetic energy of air. For example, The formula for kinetic energy of a body is also obtained
sailing ships use the kinetic energy of wind. by the method of calculus :
(iii) Water mills work on the kinetic energy of water. For Let m = mass of a body, which is initially at rest
example, fast flowing stream has been used to grind corn. (i.e., u = 0)
(iv) A nail is driven into a wooden block on account of kinetic 
energy of the hammer striking the nail. F = Force applied on the body,,
13 WORK, POWER & ENERGY
 This is shown in figure (b).
ds = small displacement produced in the body in the
2
direction of the force applied. If m = constant, p  K.E. or p  K.E.
 Small amount of work done by the force, This is shown in figure (c)
 
dW = F.ds = F ds cos = 0° = F ds

If a is acceleration produced by the force, then from

KE = constant
K p = constant p
dv
F= ma= m
dt

 dv   ds 
From, dW =  m  ds  m   dv m m
 dt   dt 
(a) (b)

 ds 
dW = m v d v   v 
 dt 

 Total work done by the force in increasing the velocity of K

the body from zero to v is m = constant

v v 2
2
W  mvd v m vdv  m 
0 0  2 0
p
1 (c)
W m v2
2
10. WORK ENERGY THEOREM OR
Thus, kinetic energy of a body is half the product of mass
of the body and square of velocity of the body.
WORK ENERGY PRINCIPLE
According to this principle, work done by net force in
9. RELATION BETWEEN KINETIC ENERGY
displacing a body is equal to change in kinetic energy of
AND LINEAR MOMENTUM the body.
Let m = mass of a body, v = velocity of the body. Thus, when a force does some work on a body, the kinetic
 Linear momentum of the body, p = mv energy of the body increases by the same amount.
Conversely, when an opposing (retarding) force is applied
1 1 on a body, its kinetic energy decreases. The decrease in
and K.E. of the body  2 mv  2 m  m v 
2 2 2

kinetic energy of the body is equal to the work done by

the body against the retarding force. Thus, according to
p2 work energy principle, work and kinetic energy are
 K.E. 
2m equivalent quantities.
Proof : To prove the work-energy theorem, we confine
This is an important relation. It shows that a body cannot
ourselves to motion in one dimension.
have K.E. without having linear momentum. The reverse
is also true. Suppose m = mass of a body, u = initial velocity of the
body, F = force applied on the body along it direction of
1 motion, a = acceleration produced in the body, v = final
Further, if p = constant, K.E. 
m velocity of the body after t second.
This is showin in figure (a) Small amount of work done by the applied force on the
2
If K.E. = constant, p  m or p  m body, dW = F (ds) when ds is the small distance moved by
the body in the direction of the force applied.
 WORK, POWER & ENERGY 14

 dv 
Now, F = ma = m  
 dt 

 dv   ds 
 dW = F (ds) = m   ds = m   dv = mv dv
 dt   dt  F h
 ds 
  v 
 dt 
Total work done by the applied force on the body in
increasing its velocity from u to v is If we assume that height h is not too large and the value of
g is practically constant over this height, then the force
v
v v
 v2  applied just to overcome gravitational attraction is
W  mvd v  m vd v  m 
u u  2 u F = mg
As the distance moved is in the direction of the force
1 1 1 applied, therefore,
W m  v 2  u 2   mv 2  mu 2
2 2 2 Work done = force × distance
W = F × h = mgh
1 2 1 2
But mv = Kf = final K.E. of the body and mu = Ki = Note that we have taken the upward direction to be positive.
2 2
Therefore, work done by applied force = + mgh. However,
initial K.E. of the body work done by gravitational force = – mgh.
 W = Kf – Ki = Increases in K.E. of body This work gets stored as potential energy. The gravitational
i.e., work done on the body = increase in K.E. of body. potential energy of a body, as a function of height (h) is
denoted by V (h), and it is negative of work done by the
11. POTENTIAL ENERGY gravitational force in raising the body to that height.

The potential energy of a body is defined as the energy Gravitational P.E. = V (h) = mgh
possessed by the body by virtue of its position or 11.2 Potential Energy of a spring
configuration in some field.
Potential energy of a spring is the energy associated with
Thus, potential energy is the energy that can be associated
the state of compression or expansion of an elastic spring.
with the configuration (or arrangement) of a system of
objects that exert forces on one another. Obviously, if To calculate it, consider an elastic spring OA of negligible
configuration of the system changes, then its potential mass. The end O of the spring is fixed to a rigid support
energy changes. and a body of mass m is attached to the free end A. Let the
spring be oriented along x–axis and the body of mass m lie
Two important types of potential energy are : on a perfectly frictionless horizontal table.
1. Gravitational potential energy
2. Elastic potential energy. O
11.1 Gravitational Potential Energy A

Gravitational potential energy of a body is the energy The position of the body A, when spring is unstretched is
possessed by the body by virtue of its position above the chosen as the origin.
surface of the earth. When the spring is compressed or elongated, it tends to
To calculate gravitational potential energy, suppose recover to its original length, on account of elasticity. The
force trying to bring the spring back to its original
m = mass of a body
configuration is called restoring force or spring force.
g = acceleration due to gravity on the surface of earth.
For a small stretch or compression, spring obeys Hook’s
h = height through which the body is raised, figure. law, i.e., for a spring,
15 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

Restoring Force  stretch or compression This is called the principle of conservation of total
– F  x or – F = kx mechanical energy.
where k is a constant of the spring and is called spring For simplicity, we assume the motion to be one dimensional
constant. only. Suppose a body undergoes a small displacement x
under the action of a conservative force F. According to
1 work energy theorem,
It is established that for a spring, k 
 change in K.E. = work done
i.e., smaller the length of the spring, greater will be the K = F (x) x
force constant and vice-versa. As the force is conservative, the potential energy function
The negative sign in equation indicates that the restoring V (x) is defined as
force is directed always towards the equilibrium position. – V = F (x) x or V = – F (x) x
Let the body be displaced further through an infinitesimally Adding, we get K + V = 0 or  (K + V) = 0,
small distance dx, against the resotring force.
which means
 Small amount of work done in increasing the length of the
spring by dx is  K  V   E  constant
dW = – F dx = kx dx
Total work done in giving displacement x to the body can 12.1 Illustration of the law of conservation
be obtained by integrating from x = 0 to x = x, i.e., of mechanical energy

x x x x To illustrate the law further, let us calculate kinetic energy

 x2   x2  1 2
W x0 k x dx  k  2  x0  k  2  0  2 kx K.E., potential nergy P.E. and total energy T.E. of a body
falling freely under gravity.
This work done is stored in the spring at the point B. Let m be the mass of the body held at A, at a height h
above the ground, figure.
1 2
 P.E. at B  W  kx
2 A

The variation of potential energy with distance x is shown x

in figure
h
B
P.E.
(h–x)
C
Ground

X' A X As the body is at rest at A, therefore,

x
At A : K. E. of the body = 0
12. MECHANICAL ENERGY AND ITS CONSERVATION P.E. of the body = mg, where g is acceleration due to gravity
at A.
The mechanical energy (E) of a body is the sum of kinetic
T.E. of the body = K.E. + P.E. = 0 + mgh
energy (K) and potential energy (V) of the body
E1 = mgh ...(1)
i.e., E  K  V Let the body be allowed to fall freely under under gravity,
Obviously, mechanical energy of a body is a scalar quantity when it strikes the ground at C with a velocity v.
2 2
measured in joule. From v – u = 2 a s
2
We can show that the total mechanical energy of a system v – 0 = 2 (g) h
is conserved if the force, doing work on the system are 2
v = 2 gh ...(2)
conservative.
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 16

particular configuration of its molecules and also their

1 1
 At C : K.E. of the body  mv 2  m  2 gh   mgh random motion. Thus, internal energy of a body is the
2 2
sum of potential energy and kinetic energy of the
P.E. of the body = mgh = mg (0) = 0 molecules of the body.
Total energy of the body = I.E. + P.E. 3. Electrical Energy
E2 = mgh + 0 = mgh ...(3) The flow of electric current causes bulbs to glow, fans to
In free fall, let the body cross any point B with a velocity rotate and bells to ring. A definite amount of work has to
v1, where AB = x be done in moving the free charge carriers in a particular
2 2
From v – u = 2 as direction through all the electrical appliances.
4. Chemical Energy
v12  0  2  g  x ...(4)
Chemical energy arises from the fact that the molecules
v12  2 gx participating in the chemical reaction have different
binding energies. A chemical reaction is basically a
1 1 rearrangement of atoms. For example, coal consists of
At B : K.E. of the body  mv12  m  2 gx   mgx
2 2 7
carbon and a kilogram of it. When burnt releases 3 × 10 J
Height of the body at B above the ground = CB = (h – x) of energy.
 P.E. of the body at B = mg (h – x) 5. Nuclear Energy
Total energy of the body at B = K.E. + P.E. It is the energy obtainable from an atomic nucleus. Two
E3 = mgx + mg (h – x) = mgx + mgh – mgx distinct modes of obtaining nuclear energy are (i) Nuclear
fission (ii) Nuclear fusion.
E3 = mgh ...(5)
Nuclear fission involves splitting of a heavy nucleus into
From (1), (3), (5) we find that
two or more lighter nuclei, whereas nuclear fusion involves
E1  E 2  E 3  mgh fusing of two or more lighter nuclei to form a heavy
nucleus.
13. DIFFERENT FORMS OF ENERGY
14. MASS ENERGY EQUIVALENCE
We have studies some details of potential energy and
kinetic energy. These are not the ony two forms of energy. Einstein made an incredible discovery that energy can
Energy may manifest itself in several other forms. Some of be transformed into mass and mass can be transformed
the examples are : into energy. One can be obtained at the cost of the other.
1. Heat Energy The mass energy equivalence relation as put forth by
Einstein is
It is the energy possessed by a body by virtue of random
motion of the molecules of the body.
E  mc2
Heat is also associated with the force of friction. When a
block of mass m sliding on a rough horizontal surface with where m = mass that disappears, E = energy that appears,
speed v, stops over a distance x, work done by the force of c = velocity of light in vacuum.
kinetic friction f over a distance x is –f (x). By the work Mass and energy are not conserved separately, but are
1 conserved as a single entity called ‘mass-energy’.
energy theorem, mv2  f  x  . We often say that K.E. of
2
15. THE PRINCIPLE OF CONSERVATION OF ENERGY
the block is lost due to frictional force, However, when we
examine the block and the horizontal surface carefully, we
If we account for all forms of energy, the total energy of an
detect a slight increase in their temperatures. Thus, work
isolated system does not change.
done by friction is not lost, but it is transferred as heat
energy of the system. The principle of conservation of energy cannot be proved
as such. However, no violation of this principle has ever
2. Internal Energy
been observed.
It is the total energy possessed by the body by virtue of
 17 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

16. WORK DONE BY A VARIABLE FORCE dU

which, in the limit, becomes F(x) = –
dx
When the force is an arbitrary function of position, we need the Integrating both sides for a displacement from x = a to x = b, we
techniques of calculus to evaluate the work done by it. The have :
figure shows F (x) as some function of the position x. To calculate b
work done by F from A to B, we find area under the graph from U b  U a   F x  dx
XA to XB.

a

18. DYNAMICS OF CIRCULAR MOTION

18.1 Force on the Particle

In uniform circular motion, acceleration is of magnitude v2/r and is

directed towards centre. Hence a force of magnitude mv2/r and
directed towards centre is required to keep a particle in circular
motion. This force (acting towards centre) is known as the
centripetal force. Centripetal force is not an extra force on a body.
Whatever force is responsible for circular motion becomes the
centripetal force.
Thus, the work done by a force F (x) form an initial point A to final
point B is Example : When a statellite revolves around the earth, the
gravitational attraction of earth becomes the centripetal force for
xB
WA B   Fx dx the circular motion of the satellite; when an electron revolves
xA
around the nucleus in an atom, the electrostatic attraction of
17. CONSERVATIVE & NON-CONSERVATIVE FORCES nucleus becomes the centripetal force for the electron’s circular
motion; in case of a conical pendulum, T sin  (component of
17.1 Conservative Forces tension) becomes the centripetal force.

There are two ways in which we can characterize a Conservative 18.2 Main steps for analysing forces
Force : in uniform circular motion
A force is conservative if :
Take one axis along the radius of circle (i.e., in direction of
 The net work done against the force in moving a mass acceleration) and other axis perpendicular to the radius. Resolve
between two points depends only on the location of two all the forces into components.
points and not on the path followed
Net force along perpendicular axis = 0
17.2 Non-Conservative Forces
Net force along radial axis (towards centre)
Those forces which do not satisfy the above mentioned criteria.
Friction and viscous forces are the most common examples of mv 2
  m2 r
non-conservative forces. r
17.3 Conservative Forces and Potential Energy 18.3 Main steps for analysing forces in
For every conservative force, there is a corresponding potential Non–uniform Circular Motion
energy function. In each cases, the potential energy expression
After resolving all the forces along tangential and radial axes :
depends only on position.
For every conservative force Fx that depends only on the position net tangential force = Ft = m at
x, there is an associated potential energy function U(x). When net radial force = Fr = m ar = mv2/r
conservative force does positive work, the potential energy of
Example of non-uniform circular motion : the motion of particle
the system decreases. Work done by, conservative force is
in verticle circle. If a particle is revolved in a vertical circle with the
F(x) x = – U help of a string, the forces are : tension (T) towards centre and
 F(x) = – U / x weight (mg). In case of a particle moving along the outside surface
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 18

of a circular track (or sphere), the forces are : normal reaction (N) its own weight & the tension in the string.
away from the centre and weight (mg). Let the radius of the circle = l
18.4 Conical Pendulum
A small block of mass m is rotated in a horizontal circle with the
help of a string of length l connected to m. The other end of the
string is fixed to a point O vertically above the cnetre of the circle
so that the string is always inclined with the vertical at an angle .
This arrangement is known as a conical pendulum. (a) At the top : Let vt = velocity at the top

mv 2t
net force towards centre =


l T
mv 2t mv 2t
T  mg  T  mg
 
r For the movement in the circle, the string should remain tight i.e.
mg the tension must be positive at all positions.
From the force diagram of the block. As the tension is minimum at the top Ttop 0
Along the vertical : T cos  = mg ...(i)
mv 2t
Net force towards centre : T sin  = ma   mg  0  v t  g

T sin  = m2 r ...(ii)
From (i) and (ii), we have  minimum or critical velocity at the top = 1 g

g tan  g tan  g
2   
r  sin   cos 

2  cos 
 Time period = T =  2
 g

(b) Let Vb be the velocity at the bottom. As the particle goes

 If h is the height of point O above the centre of the circle. up, its KE decreases and GPE increases.
then time period = 2 h / g  loss in KE = gain in GPE

 For a conical pendulum, 2  cos   g 1 1

 mv 2b  mv12  mg 21
2 2
   g /  (Because cos  < 1)
v 2b  v 2t  4 g

18.5 Motion in a Vertical Circle (vb)min = v 

2
t min  4 g  5 g

Example : A mass m is tied to a string of length l and is rotated in

a vertical circle with centre at the other end of the string.
(a) Find the minimum velocity of the mass at the top of the
When a particle moves in a vertical circle, its speed
circle so that it is able to complete the circle.
decreases as it goes up and its speed increases as it
(b) Find the minimum velocity at the bottom of the circle. comes down. Hence it is an example of non-uniform
At all positions, there are two forces acting on the mass : circular motion.
 19 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1 Sol. (a) Yes, For example, when a bomb explodes linear momentum
Can K.E. of a system be increased or decreased without is conserved, but KE changes.
applying any external force on the system ? (b) Yes, For example, in case of uniform circular motion. KE
remains unchanged, but linear momentum changes
Sol. Yes, by doing work through internal forces e.g., in explosion because of change in the direction of motion.
of a bomb. Example - 7
Example - 2 A stone is droped from the top of a high tower. Will the
mechanical energy of the stone be conserved or not if the
Name the largest and smallest practical unit of energy.
force of friction due to air is not neglected ?
Sol. ‘Kilowatt hour’ is the largest practical unit of energy and
Sol. Mechanical energy is conserved only when forces involved are
‘electron volt’ is the smallest practical unit of energy.
conservative. As force of friction due to air is non-conservative,
Example - 3 therefore, mechanical energy of the stone is not conserved.
Is it possible to have a collision in which the whole of KE Example - 8
is lost ? A man can jump higher on moon than on earth. With same
effort, can a runner improve his timing for 100 m race on
Sol. Yes. For example, in perfectly inelastic collision of two bodies moon as compared to that on earth ?
moving towards eachother with equal linear momenta.
Example - 4 Sol. The man can jump higher on moon than on earth, because
the accleration due to gravity on moon is less than
A short fired from a cannon explodes in the air. What will acceleration due to gravity on earth. However, acceleration
be the changes in momentum and K.E. ? due to gravity has no effect on horizontal motion. Therefore,
a runner cannot improve his timing on the moono for 100
Sol. There will be no change in linear momentum, but the K.E.
metre race.
will increase. This is because chemical potential energy of
the explosive in the shot in converted into K.E. Example - 9
Example - 5 Work done by external forces is always equal to the gain in
A man rowing a boat upstream is at rest with respect to kinetic energy. Is it always true ?
shore.
Sol. Yes. This is the universal work-energy theorem.
(a) Is the doing any work ?
Example - 10
(b) If the stops rowing and moves down with the stream,
is any work being done on him ? A body is moving at constant speed over a frictionless
surface. What is the work done by the weight ?
Sol. (a) No work is being done by the net force because
displacement of boat relative to the shore is zero. Sol. work done by the weight is zero, since the force and the
displacement are at right angles to each other.
(b) When he stops rowing, force of water flow will produce
displacement with respect to the shore. Therefore, work Example - 11
is done by force of flowing water. KE of the person will Assume that the Earth revolves around the Sun in a
increase. perfectly circular orbit. Does the Sun do any work on the
Example - 6 Earth ?

(a) Can kinetic energy of a system be changed without Sol. While the force is along the radius, the displacement is a
changing its momentum ? along the tangent. Since radius and tangent are
(b) Can momentum of a system be changed without perpendicular, therefore, E and S are also perpenedicular.
changing its kinetic energy ? Consequently, work done is zero.
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 20

Example - 12 Net work done on block = work done by T + work done by

mg
Will water at the foot of the waterfall be at a different
temperature from that at the top ? If yes, explain. = 147.5 + (–122.5) = 25 J
The answer is A  R, B  Q, C  S.
Sol. When water reaches the ground, its gravitational potential
energy is converted into kinetic energy which is further Example - 15
converted into heat energy. This raises the temperature of
A pump is required to lift 1000 kg of water per minute from
water. So, water at the foot of the waterfall is at a higher
a well 20 m deep and eject it at a rate of 20 m/s.
temperature as compared to the temperature of water at the
top of the waterfall. (a) How much work is done in lifting water ?
(b) How much work is done in giving it a KE ?
Example - 13
(c) What HP (horse power) engine is required for the
“Chemical, gravitational and nuclear energies are nothing purpose of lifting water ?
but potential energies for different types of force in
nature.” Explain the statement clearly with examples. Sol. (a) Work done in lifting water = gain in PE (potential
Sol. A system has potential energy, when various objects are energy)
held at certain distance against some force, by virtue of (b) Work = 1000 × g × 20 = 1.96 × 105 J per minute
their position or configuration. Chemical potential energy Work done (per minute) in giving it KE = 1/2 mv2
results from the chemical bonding of atoms, gravitational = 1/2 (1000) (20)2 = 2 × 105 J per minute
potential results when objects are held at some distance
(c) Power of the engine = work done per secon
against gravitational force while nuclear energy arises from
the nuclear force between the nucleous. = 1/60 (1.96 + 2) 105 J = 6.6 × 103 W (watts)
Since 1 HP = 746 W, HP required = 8.85
Example - 14
Example - 16
A block of mass 5 kg is being raised vertically upwards by
the help of a string attached to it. It rises with an (Car on a level curve) A flat on a highway has a radius of
acceleration of 2 m/s2. The block rises by 2.5 m. Match the 100 m and a car goes around this curve with a constant
correct choices : velocity. If the coefficient of static friction is 0.2, what
Column-I Column-II should be the maximum speed of the car to prevent
sliding ?
(A) Work done by gravity (P) 122.55
(B) Work done by tension (Q) 147.55 Sol. Let v be the maximum speed of the car. When the car goes
(C) Net work done on the block (R) –122.55 around a curve, it has a tendency to skid sideways i.e.
(S) 25 J away from the centre of the curve. Due to this tendency,
static friction acts towards the centre and provides the
Sol. Let us first calculate the tension. centripetal force necessary to go around the curve.
From force diagram : The force of static friction has a maximum value of sR.
T – mg = 5 a T = 5 (9.8 + 2) = 59 N. This corresponds to maximum speed of the car.

As the T and displacement S are in same direction

R
(upwards), work done by the tension T is :

m a
mg
mg
From force diagram :
W = T s = 59 (2.5) = 147.5 J sR = mv2/r
Work done by the gravity = – mgs = – 5 (9.8) (2.5)
smg = mv2/r  v   s rg  14 m / s
= – 122.5 J
 21 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

Example - 17 Example - 18
(Car on a banked Curve) A highway curve of radius r is to A ball of mass 100 gm is projected vertically upwards from
be banked so that a car travelling at speed v will have no the ground with a velocity of 49 m/s. At the same time
tendency to skid sideways. At what angle should it be another identical ball is dropped from a height of 98 m to
banked ? fall freely along the same path as that followed by the first
ball. After some time, two balls collide and stick together
Sol. When a car goes on a level curve, the centripetal force and finally fall to the ground. Find the time of flight of
required for motion along the arc must be provided by the balls.
force of friction. This causes a great wear and tear on the
tyres. To reduce this strain on the tyres and not have to rely
Sol. Let t be the time after which the balls collide.
upon friction, the curves on the roads are banked as shown.
The positions of the balls at time t (taking origin at the
ground) are :
B
1
x1  49 t  gt 2
2

A 1
x 2  98  gt 2
2
x1 = x2
AB = width of road. The figure shows back view of the car
taking a turn towards left. 1 1
 49 t  gt 2  98  gt 2  t  2 s
Due to banking, the normal reaction between car and the 2 2
road is not vertical now and has two components :
Velocities of balls before collision :
(i) N cos  : (vertical)
v1 = 49 – gt = 29.4 m/s
(ii) N sin  : (horizontal) towards the centre of the curve.
v2 = 0 – gt = – 19.6 m/s.
N cos  : mg ... (i)
Velocities of balls after collision :
Using momentum conservation, we have :
B mv1 + mv2 = 2mv

v1  v 2 29.4  19.6
 v   4.9 m / s
2 2
mg
A
Height of the point of collision :

1 2
x1 = x2 = 98 – gt = 98 – 19.6 = 78.4 m
N sin  provides the necessary centripetal force and hence 2
friction is not required.
Time interval after collision :
2
mv Let T = time taken by balls after collision to reach ground.
N sin   ... (iii)
r
1 2
2
 S  ut  at
v 2
From (i) and (ii), we get : tan  
rg  – 78.4 = 4.9 T – 1/2 gT2
 T = 4.53 s
 v2 
1
   tan    Time of flight = t + T = 2 + 4.53 = 6.53 s.
 rg 
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 22

Example - 19 Example - 21

An object of mass 5 kg falls from rest through a vertical A small mass m starts from rest and slides down the smooth
distance of 20 m and attaches a velocity of 10 m/s. How spherical surface of R. Assume zero potential energy at
much work is done by the resistance of the air on the the top. Find :
object ? (g = 10 m/s2) (a) the change in potential energy
(b) the kinetic energy
Sol. Applying work-energy theorem,
(c) the speed of the mass as a function of the angle 
work done by all the force = change in kinetic energy made by the radius through the mass with the vertical.
1
or Wmg + Wair = mv2 Sol. In the figure h = R (1 – cos )
2

1
 Wair  mv 2  Wmg
2

1
 mv 2  mgh
2

1 2
  5  10    5  10    20 
2 (a) As the mass comes down, potential energy will decrease.
= – 750 J Hence,

Example - 20 U = – mg = – mgR (1 – cos )

A rod of length 1.0 m and mass 0.5 kg fixed at one end is (b) Magnitude of decrease in potential energy = increase in
initially hanging, vertical. The other end is now raised kinetic energy
until it makes an angle 60° with the vertical. How much  Kinetic energy = mgh
work is required ?
= mgR (1 – cos )

Sol. For increase in gravitational potential energy of a rod we

1
see the centre of the rod. (c) mv2  mgR 1  cos  
2

 v  2gR 1  cos  

Example - 22

A smooth narrow tube in the form of an arc AB of a circle

of centre O and radius r is fixed so that A is vertically
W = change in potential energy
above O and OB is horizontal. Particles P of mass m and Q

 mg 1  cos    r 
2 of mass 2 m with a light inextensible string of length  
 2 
Substituting the values, we have
connecting them are placed inside the tube with P at A and
 1.0  Q at B and released from rest. Assuming the string remains
W   0.5  9.8    1  cos 60  taut during motion, find the speed of particles when P
 2 
reaches B.
= 1.225 J
 23 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

5 3 3
and h   sin 37  d  d
4 5 4

Now taking point B as reference level and applying law of

conservation of mechanical energy between A and B,
EA = EB

1 1
or mgh  ky 2  mv 2 [as for B, h = 0 and y = 0]
2 2
Sol. All surface are smooth. Therefore, mechanical energy of
2
the system will remain conserved. 3 1 d 1
or mgd  k    mv 2
4 2 4 2
 Decrease in PE of both the block
= increase in KE of both the blocks
3 1
[as for A, h = d and y = d]
r 1 4 4
 (mgr) + (2mg)     m  2m  v2
 2 2
3g k
or vd 
2d 16 m
2
or v 1    gr
3
Example - 24
Example - 23
The system is released from rest with the string initially
One end of a light spring of natural length d and spring stretched 75 mm. Calculate the velocity v of the block after
constant k is fixed on a rigid wall and the other is attached it has dropped 12 mm. The spring has a stiffness of 1050
to a smooth ring of mass m which can slide without friction N/m. Neglect the mass of the small pulley.
on a vertical rod fixed at a distance d from the wall. Initially
the spring makes an angle of 37° with the horizontal as
shown in figure. When the system is released from rest,
find the speed ofthe ring when the spring becomes
horizontal [sin 37° = 3/5]

Sol. When the block descends 12 mm, spring will further stretch
24 mm.
 Decrease in PE of block = increase in kinetic energy of
block + increase in elastic potential energy of spring.
Hence,
Sol. If l is the stretched length of the spring, then from figure 1
 45 × 9.8 × 0.012 = × 45 × v2
2
d 4 5
 cos 37  , i.e.,   d
 5 4
1
+ × 1050 [(0.075 + 0.024)2 – (0.075)2]
2
5 d
so the stretch y    d  dd
4 4  v = 0.371 m/s
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 24

Example - 25 (a) Potential energy at x = 5.0 m is

A single conservative force F (x) acts on a 1.0 kg particle U = 20 + ((5 –2)2 = 29 J
that moves along the x–axis. The potential energy U (x) is Mechanical energy

given by :
E = K + U = 20 + 29 = 49 J
U (x) = 20 + (x – 2)2
(b) At x = 10 m ,U = 84 J at x = – 10m,
where x is in meters. At x = 5.0 m the particle has a kinetic
energy of 20 J. U = 164 J and at x = 2m, U = minimum = 20 J

(a) What is the mechanical energy of the system ? (c) and (d)

(b) Make a plot of U (x) as a function of x for –10 m < x < 10m, Particle will move between the points where its kinetic
and on the same graph draw the line that represents energy becomes zero or its potential energy is equal to its
the mechanical energy of the sytem. mechanical energy.
Use part (b) to determine Thus, 49 = 20 + (x – 2)2
(c) The least value of x, and or (x – 2)2 = 29
(d) The greatest value of x between which the particle can
or x  2   29  5.38 m
move
(e) The maximum kinetic energy of the particle, and  x = 7.38 m and –3.38 m
(f) The value of x at which it occurs. or the particle will move betwen x = – 3.38 m and x = 7.38 m.
(g) Determine the equation for F (x) as a function of x. (e) and (f) :
(h) For what (finite) value of x does F (x) = 0 ? Maximum kinetic energy is at x = 2m, where the potential
energy is minimum and this maximum kinetic energy is,
Kmax = E – Umin = 49 – 20 = 29 J

dU
(g) F  2  x  2    2  x 
dx

Sol. (h) F (x) = 0, at x = 2.0 m

where potential energy is minimum (the position of stable
equilibrium).
 25 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Work done by Constant force Work done bye Variable Force
2
5. A ball of mass 5 kg experiences a force F = 2 x + x. Work
1.  
A force of 10 ˆi  3 ˆj  6 kˆ N acts on a body of 5 kg and
done in displacing the ball by 2 m is
(a) 22/3 J (b) 44/3 J
   
displaces it from A 6 ˆi  5 ˆj  3kˆ m to B 10 ˆi  2 ˆj  7 kˆ m .
(c) 32/3 J (d) 16/3 J
The work done is
6. The relationship between force and position is shown in
(a) zero (b) 121 J figure (in one dimensional case). The work done by the
(c) 100 J (d) 221 J force in displacing a body from x = 1 cm to x = 5 cm is :
2. A body is under the action of two equal and opposite forces,
each of 3 N. The body is displaced by 2m. The work done is :
(a) + 6 J (b) – 6 J
(c) 0 (d) none of the above
3. A particle is moved from (0, 0) to (a, a) under a force

F  (3i  4j) from two paths. Path 1 is OP and path 2 is OQP..
Let W1 and W2 be the work done by this force in these two
paths. Then : (a) 20 erg (b) 60 erg
(c) 70 erg (d) 700 erg
y
P (a, a) 7. A particle of mass 0.l kg is subjected to a force which varies
with distance as shown in figure. If it starts its journey from
rest at x = 0, its velocity at x = 12 m is
45° x
O Q

(a) W1 = W2 (b) W1 = 2W2 10

F
(c) W2 = 2W1 (d) W2 = 4W1
(N)
4. The net work done by the tension in the figure when the
bigger block of mass M touches the ground is :
0 4 8 12
x (m)

(a) 0 m/s (b) 40 m/s

(c) 20 2 m / s (d) 20 m/s

8. Under the action of a force, a 2 kg body moves such that its

t3
position x as a function of time t is given by x = , where x
3
is in metre and t in second. The work done by the force in
the first two seconds is :
(a) + Mgd (b) – (M + m)gd (a) 1600 J (b) 160 J
(c) – mgd (d) zero (c) 16 J (d) 1.6 J
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 26

9. A particle moves along the x-axis from x = 0 to x = 5 m under (a) 36 J (b) 64 J

2
the influence of a force given by F = 7 – 2x + 3x . Work done (c) 100 J (d) 120 J
in the process is :

(a) 70 (b) 270  
17. The work done by a force F  6x 3 ˆi N is displacing a particle
(c) 35 (d) 135
from x = 4 m to x = –2 m is
10. A particle moves under a force F = CX from X = 0 to X = X1.
The work done is : (a) – 240 J
(b) 360 J
CX12
(a) CX12 (b) (c) 420 J
2
(d) will depend upon the path
(c) 0 (d) CX13
Conservative and Non-conservative forces
11. A particle of mass 0.5 kg is displaced from position
  18. A body of mass 500 g is taken up an inlclined plane of
r1 (2, 3, 1) to r2 (4, 3, 2) by applying a force of magnitude
length 10 m and height 5 m, and then released to slide down
 
30 N which is acting along î  ˆj  k̂ . The work done by to the bottom. The coefficient of friction between the body
the force is and the plane is 0.1. What is the amount of work done by
friction in the round trip ?
(a) 10 3 J (b) 30 3 J
(a) 5 J (b) 15 J
(c) 30 J (d) none of these
12. A box is dragged across a floor by a rope which makes an 5
angle of 45° with the horizontal. The tension in the rope is (c) 5 3 J (d) J
3
100 N while the box is dragged 10 m. The work done is :
(a) 607.1 J (b) 707.1 J 19. A particle is moving in a conservative force field from point
(c) 1414.2 J (d) 900 J A to point B.UA and UB are the potential energies of the
13. A horizonal force F pulls a 10 kg carton across the floor at particle at point A and B and WC is the work done by
a constant speed. If the coefficient of sliding friction
conservative forces in the process of taking the particle
between carton and floor is 0.50, the work done by F in
moving the carton through 5 m is : from A and B :
(a) 196 J (b) 210.5 J (a) WC = UB – UA (b) WC = UA – UB
(c) 245 J (d) 254 J (c) UA > UB (d) UB > UA
14. What average force is necessary to stop a bullet of mass
20. An object of mass m is allowed to fall from rest along a
20 gm and speed 250 m/sec as it penetrates wood to a
distance of 12 cm : rough inclined plane. The speed of the object on reaching
the bottom of the plane is proportional to
(a) 3.4 × 103 newton
(b) 5.2 × 103 newton (a) m° (b) m
(c) 4.0 × 103 newton (c) m2 (d) m–1
(d) 3.6 × 103 newton
21. Work done by the conservative forces on a system is
15. How much work must be done by a force on 50 kg body in
equal to
order to accelerate it from rest to 20 m/s in 10 s ?
(a) 103 J (b) 104 J (a) the change in kinetic energy of the system
(c) 2 × 103 J (d) 4 × 104 J (b) negative of the change in potential energy of the system
16. The displacement of a body of mass 2 kg varies with time
(c) the change in total mechanical energy of the system
t as s = t2 + 2t , where s is in meters and t is in seconds. The
work done by all the forces acting on the body during the (d) none of these
time interval t = 2s to t = 4 s is
 27 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

Gravitational Potential Energy 28. A man has a box of weight 10 kg. The energy of the box,
22. If we shift a body in equilibrium from A to C in a gravitational when the man runs with a constant velocity of 2 m/sec along
field via path AC or ABC with the box behind the bus, is :
(a) 10 joule (b) 30 joule
(c) 20 joule (d) 2 joule
29. What is the shape of the graph between the speed and
kinetic energy of a body ?
(a) straight line (b) hyperbola
(c) parabola (d) exponential

 30. If the linear momentum is increased by 50%, then kinetic

(a) the work done by the force F for both paths will be same energy will be increased by :
(b) WAC > WABC (a) 50% (b) 100%
(c) WAC < WABC (c) 125 % (d) 25%
(d) None of the above 31. A running man has half the KE that a boy of half his mass
–1
Potential Energy has. The man speeds up by 1ms and then has the same KE
–1
23. A meter stick of mass 400 g is pivoted at one end and as that of boy. The original speeds of man and boy in ms
are :
displaced through an angle 60°. The increases in its potential
energy is : (a) ( 2  1), ( 2 1) (b) ( 2 1), 2( 2  1)
(a) 1 J (b) 10 J
(c) 2, 2 (d) ( 2 1), 2( 2 1)
(c) 100 J (d) 1000 J
Spring (Questions of Spring)
24. A man weighing 60 kg lifts a body of mass 15 kg to the top
of a building 10 m high in 3 minutes. His efficiency is 32. A spring of spring constant 8 N/cm has an extension of 5
cm. The minimum work done in joule in increasing the
(a) 20% (b) 10%
extention from 5 cm to 15 cm is
(c) 30% (d) 40% (a) 16 J (b) 8 J
Kinetic Energy (c) 4 J (d) 32 J
25. The P.E. and KE of a helicopter flying horizontally at a height 33. A spring of spring constant 1000 N/m is compressed through
400 m are in the ratio 5 : 2. The velocity of helicopter is 5 cm and is used to push a metal ball of mass 0.1 kg. The
velocity with which the metal ball moves is
(a) 28 m/s (b) 14 m/s
(a) 5 m/s (b) 7.5 m/s
(c) 56 m/s (d) 30 m/s
(c) 10 m/s (d) 2.5 m/s

 
26. A 120 g mass has a verlocity v  2 ˆi  5jˆ ms 1 at a certain 34. The potential energy of a certain spring when stretched
through a distance ‘S’ is 10 joule. The amount of work (in
instant. K.E. of the body at that instant is
joule) that must be done on this spring to stretch it through
(a) 3.0 J (b) 1.74 J an additional distance ‘S’ will be :
(c) 4.48 J (d) 5.84 J (a) 30 (b) 40
27. A body is moving under the action of a force. Suddenly, (c) 10 (d) 20
force is increased to such an extent that its kinetic energy is 35. A block of mass 4 kg falls from a height of 3 m on a spring of
increased by 100%. The momentum increases by : force constant l500 N/m. Calculate maximum compression
(a) 100 % (b) 60 % of spring (g = 9.8 N/kg)

(c) 40 % (d) 20 % (a) 1.35 m (b) 0.686 m

(c) 0.735 m (d) 0.676 m
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 28

36. A toy gun uses a spring of very large value of force constant 41. On changing the length of a spring by 0.1 m there is a
k. When charged before triggered in the upward direction, change of 5 J in its potential energy. The force constant of
the spring is compressed by a small distance x. If mass of the spring is :
shot is m, on being triggered it will go upto a height of :
(a) 80 Nm–1 (b) 10.0 Nm–1
2 2
kx x (c) 90 Nm–1 (d) 1000 N.m–1
(a) (b)
mg kmg
42. An elastic string of unstretched length L and force constant
k is stretched by a small length x. It is further stretched by
kx 2 (kx) 2
(c) (d) another small length y. The work done in the second
2mg mg
stretching is
37. A body is attached to the lower end of a vertical spiral spring
1 2 1
and it is gradually lowered to its equilibrium position. This
stretches the spring by a length d. If the same body attached
(a)
2
ky (b)
2

k x 2  y2 
to the same spring is allowed to fall suddenly, what would
be the maximum stretching in this case ? 1 1
(c) ky 2x  y  (d) k x  y 2
(a) d (b) 2d 2 2

For General body (Involves internal and external work)

1
(c) 3d (d) d
2 43. A block of mass 0.5 kg has an initial velocity of 10 m/s down
an inclined plane 30°, the coefficient of friction between the
38. The force required to stretch a spring varies with the
block and the inclined surface is 0.2. The velocity of the
distance as shown in the figure. If the experiment is performed
with the above spring of half the length, the line OA will : block after it travels a distance of 10 m figure is

(a) shift towards F–axis

(b) shift towards X–axis (a)17 m/s (b) 13 m/s
(c) remain as it is (c) 24 m/s (d) 8 m/s
(d) become double in length 44. A truck weighing 1000 kg changes its speed from 36 km/h to
39. Two springs have their force constants K1 and K2. Both 72 km/h in 2 minutes. Thus the work done by the engine on
are stretched till their elastic energies are equal. Then, the truck is :
5 5
ratio of stretching forces F1/F2 is equal to : (a) 2.5 × 10 J (b) 3.5 × 10 J
(a) K1/K2 (b) K2 : K1 5
(c) 1.5 × 10 J
5
(d) 5.5 × 10 J

(c) K1 : K 2 (d) K 22 : K 22 45. The work done in time t on a body of mass m which is
accelerated from rest to a speed v in time t1 as a function of
40. A sphere of mass 2 kg is moving on a frictionless time t is given by :
horizontal table with velocity . It strikes with a spring
(force constant = 1 N/m) and compresses it by 4 m. The 1 v 2 v 2
(a) 2 m t t (b) m t t
velocity () of the sphere is : 1 1

2
(a) 4 m/s (b) 2 2 m/s 1 mv 2 1 v2 2
(c)   t (d) m t
2  t1  2 t12
(c) 2 m/s (d) 2 m/s
 29 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

46. A coconut of mass 1.0 kg falls to earth from a height of 10 m.

The kinetic energy of the coconut, when it is 4 m above A
ground is :
B
(a) 0.588 joule (b) 58.8 joule
(a) 6 m/s (b) 1 m/s
(c) 5.88 joule (d) 588 joule
(c) 2 m/s (d) 8 m/s
47. Calculate the K.E. and P.E. of the ball half way up, when a
55. A body of mass m was slowly pulled up the hill by a force F
ball of mass 0.1 kg is thrown vertically upwards with an
–1
which at each point was directed along the tangent of the
initial speed of 20 m/s . trajectory. All surfaces are smooth. Find the work performed
(a) 10 J, 20 J (b) 10 J, 10 J by this force :
(c) 15 J, 8 J (d) 8 J, 16 J.
48. If a body of mass 3 kg is droped from top of a tower of
height 250 m, then its kinetic energy after 3 sec. will be F h
(a) 1126 J (b) 1048 J m
(c) 735 J (d) 1296.5 J
49. A body of mass 2 kg moves down the quadrant of a circle of (a) mg (b) – mg
radius 4 m. The velocity on reaching the lowest point is 8 m/s. (c) mgh (d) zero
What is work done against friction ? 56. A particle at rest on a frictionless table is acted upon by a
(a) 14.4 J (b) 28.8 J horizontal force which is constant in magnitude and
(c) 64 J (d) Zero direction. A graph is plotted of the work done on the particle
W, against the speed of the particle v. If there are no frictional
50. The KE of a 500 gram stone is 100 J. Against a force of 50 N, forces acting on the particle, the graph will look like :
how long will it travel ?
(a) 0.2 s (b) 0.1 s
W
(c) 0.3 s (d) 0.4 s W
(a) (b)
51. What average force is necessary to stop a bullet of mass 20 gm
and speed 250 m/sec as it penetrates wood to a distance of v v
12 cm :
3 3
(a) 3.4 × 10 newton (b) 5.2 × 10 newton
W W
3 3
(c) 4.0 × 10 newton (d) 3.6 × 10 newton (c) (d)
52. If water falls from a dam into a turbine wheel 19.6 m below, v v
2
then velocity of water at turbine, is (Take g = 9.8 m/s )
57. A mass M is lowered with the help of a string by a distance
(a) 9.8 m/s (b) 19.6 m/s
g
(c) 39.2 m/s (d) 98.0 m/s x at a constant acceleration . The magnitude of work done
2
53. Three particles A, B and C are projected from the top of a by the string will be :
tower with the same speed. A is thrown straight upwards B
1 2
straight down and C horizontally. They hit the ground with (a) Mgx (b) Mgx
2
speeds vA, vB and vC, then which of the following is correct:
(a) vA = vB > vC (b) vA = vB = vC 1 2
(c) Mgx (d) Mgx
2
(c) vA > vB = vC (d) vB > vC > vA
58. The work done by pseudo forces is
54. A pendulum of length 2 m left at A. When it reaches B, it
looses 10% of its total energy due to air resistance. The (a) positive (b) negative
velocity at B is : (c) zero (d) all of these
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 30

59. A block of mass m is pulled along a horizontal surface by

H 2gH H gH
applying a force at an angle  with the horizontal. If the (a) , (b) , 2
3 3 3 3
block travels with a uniform velocity and has a displacement
d and the coefficient of friction is , then the work done by
2H 2 gH H
the applied force is (c) , (d) , 2 gH
3 3 3

64. A body of mass 2 kg is moved from a point A to a point B

by an external agent in a conservative force field. If the
velocity of the body at the points A and B are 5 m/s and
3 m/s respectively and the work done by the exteranl agent
is –10 J, then the change in potential energy between
mgd mgd cos 
(a) cos    sin  (b) cos    sin  points A and B is
(a) 6 J (b) 36 J

mgd sin  mgd cos  (c) 16 J (d) none of these

(c) cos    sin  (d) cos    sin 
65. An object moving horizontally with kinetic energy of 800 J
experiences a constant opposing force of 100 N while
For Rigid Body (Involves only external work)
moving from a to b (where ab = 2m). The energy of particle
60. A uniform chain of length L and mass M is lying on a smooth at b is :
table and one third of its length is hanging vertically down
(a) 700 J (b) 400 J
over the edge of the table. If g is acc. due to gravity, work
required to pull the hanging part on to the table is (c) 600 J (d) 300 J

(a) MgL (b) Mg L/3 66. A block of mass 0.5 kg has an initial velocity of 10 m/s.
down an inclined plane of angle 30°, the coefficient of friction
(c) Mg L/9 (d) Mg L/18 between the block and the inclined surface is 0.2. The velocity
61. A rod of mass m and length  is lying on a horizontal table. of the block after it travels a distance of 10 m is:
Work done in making it stand on one end will be : (a) 17 m/s (b) 13 m/s
mg (c) 24 m/s (d) 8 m/s
(a) mg (b)
2 67. A body is falling with velocity 1 m/s at a height 3 m from
the ground. The speed at height 2 m from the ground will
mg be :
(c) (d) 2 mg
4
(a) 4.54 m/s (b) 1 m/s
62. A particle is released from the top of two inclined rough (c) 6 m/s (d) 5.32 m/s
surfaces of height ‘h’ each. The angle of inclination of the
68. A car covers a distance of 10 km along an inclined plane
two planes are 30° and 60° respectively. All other factors under the action of a horizontal force of 5 N. The work
(e.g. coefficient of friction, mass of block etc.) are same in done on car is 25 kJ. The inclination of the plane to horizontal
both the cases. Let K1 and K2 be kinetic energies of the is :
particle at the bottom of the plane in two cases. Then (a) 0° (b) 30°
(a) K1 = K2 (b) K1 > K2 (c) 60° (d) 90°

(c) K1 < K2 (d) data insufficient 69. A block is moved from rest through a distance of 4 m
along a st. line path. The mass of the block is 5 kg and the
63. A particle is released from a height H. At certain height its force acting on it is 20 N. If K.E. acquired by the block be
kinetic energy is two times its potential energy. Height 40 J, at what angle to the path is the force acting ?
and speed of particle at that instant are (a) 30° (b) 60°
(c) 45° (d) 0°
 31 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

70. A particle moves on a rough horizontal ground with some 74. A grinding machine whose wheel has radius 1/ metre runs
3 at 2.5 rps, when a tool to be sharpened is held against the
initial velocity 0. If th of its K.E. is lost in friction in wheel with a force of 40 N. If the coefficient of friction between
4
the tool and the wheel is 0.2, power developed is
time t0, the coefficient of friction between the particle and
the ground is (a) 4 W (b) 8 W
v0 v0 (c) 20 W (d) 40 W
(a) 2 gt (b) 4 gt
0 0 75. A train of mass 100 ton is moving up an incline of 1 in 100 at
3 v0 v0 a constant speed of 36 km ph. If the friction per ton is 100 N,
(c) 4 gt (d) gt then power of the engine is
0 0
(a) 198 kW (b) 96 kW
71. If v be the instantaneous velocity of the body dropped from
the top of a tower, when it is located at height h, then which (c) 298 kW (d) 398 kW
of the following remains constant ? 76. The power of a water pump is 2 kW. If g = 10 m/s , the
2

2 v2 amount of water is can raise in one minute to a height of 10

(a) gh + v (b) gh + m is
2
(a) 2000 litre (b) 1000 litre
v2 2
(c) gh – (d) gh – v (c) 100 litre (d) 1200 litre
2
Constant and Variable Power 77. A man is riding on a cycle with velocity 7.2 km/hr up a hill
72. A pump of 200 W power is lifting 2 kg water from an average having a slope 1 in 20. Total mass of the man and cycle is
depth of 10 m per second. Velocity of water delivered by the 100 kg. The power of man is :
2
pump is (g = 9.8 m/s ) (a) 98 W (b) 49 W
(a) 3 m/s (b) 2 m/s (c) 196 W (d) 147 W
(c) 4 m/s (d) 1 m/s Constant and Variable Power
2
73. A machine gun fires 360 bullets per minute, with a velocity 78. Power applied to a particle varies with time as P = (3t – 2t + 1)W,
of 600 m/s. If the power of the gun is 5.4 kW, mass of each where t is in second. Find the change in its kinetic energy
bullet is between time t = 2s and t = 4s.
(a) 5 kg (b) 0.5 kg (a) 32 J (b) 46 J
(c) 5 g (d) 0.5 g (c) 61 J (d) 102 J
 WORK, POWER & ENERGY 32

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. A spring of force constant 800 N/m has an extension of
mv 2 mv 2 2
5 cm. The work done in extending it from 5 cm to 15 cm is (a) 2 t (b) t
T T2
(2002)
(a) 16 J (b) 8 J 1 mv 2 1 mv2 2
(c) t (d) t
(c) 32 J (d) 24 J 2 T2 2 T2
3
2. A spring of spring constant 5 × 10 N/m is stretched initially 9. A spherical ball of mass 20 kg is stationary at the top of a hill
by 5 cm from the unstreched position. Then the work required of height 100 m. It rools down a smooth surface to the
to stretch it further by another 5 cm is (2003) ground, then climbs up another hill of height 30 cm and
finally rolls down to a horizontal base at a height of 20 m
(a) 12.50 N-m (b) 18.75 N-m
above the ground. The velocity attained by the ball is
(c) 25.00 N-m (d) 6.25N-m (2005)
3. A body is moved along a straight line by a machine delivering (a) 40 m/s (b) 20 m/s
a constant power. The distance moved by the body in time
t is proportional to (2003) (c) 10 m/s (d) 10 30 m / s
3/4 3/2
(a) t (b) t 10. The block of mass M moving on the frictionless horizontal
1/4 1/2
(c) t (d) t surface collides with the spring of spring constant k and
compresses it by length L. The maximum momentum of the
4. A particle moves in a straight line with retardation
proportional to its displacement. Its loss of kinetic energy block after collision is (2005)
for any displacement x is proportional to (2004) M
2 x
(a) x (b) e
(c) x (d) loge x
5. A uniform chain of length 2 m is kept on a table such that a kL2
length of 60 cm hangs freely from the edge of the table. The (a) Mk L (b)
2M
total mass of the chain is 4 kg. What is the work done in
pulling the entire chain on the table ? (2004) ML2
(a) 7.2 J (b) 3.6 J (c) zero (d)
k
(c) 120 J (d) 1200 J 11. The potential energy of a 1 kg particle free to move along
 the x–axis is given by
6.  
A force F  5iˆ  3jˆ  2kˆ N is applied over a particle which
  x4 x2 
 
displaces it from its origin to the point r  2iˆ  ˆj m. The V x     J
 4 2 
work done on the particle in joules is (2004)
The total mechanical energy of the particle is 2 J. Then, the
(a) –7 (b) +7 –1
maximum speed (in ms ) is (2006)
(c) +10 (d) +13
3
7. A bullet fired into a fixed target loses half of its velocity after (a) (b) 2
2
penetrating 3 cm. How much further it will penetrate before
coming to rest, assuming that it faces constant resistance 1
(c) (d) 2
to motion ? (2005) 2
(a) 3.0 cm (b) 2.0 cm 12. A bomb of mass 16 kg at rest explodes into two pieces of
(c) 1.5 cm (d) 1.0 cm masses 4 kg and 12 kg. The velocity of the 12 kg mass is
–1
4 ms . The kinetic energy of the other mass is (2006)
8. Abody of mass m is accelerated uniformly from rest to a
speed v in a time T. The instantaneous power delivered to (a) 144 J (b) 288 J
the body as a function of time, is given by (2005) (c) 192 J (d) 96 J
 33 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

13. A 2 kg block slides on a horizontal floor with a speed of 4 m/s. 17. A person trying to lose weight by burning fat lifts a mass
It strikes a uncompressed spring, and compresses it till the of 10 kg upto a height of 1 m 1000 times. Assume that the
block is motionless. The kinetic friction force is 15 N and spring potential energy lost each time he lowers the mass is
constant is 10000 N/m. The spring compresses by (2007) dissipated. How much fat will he use up considering the
work done only when the weight is lifted up ? Fat supplies
(a) 5.5 cm (b) 2.5 cm
3.8 × 10 7 J of energy per kg which is converted to
(c) 11.0 cm (d) 8.5 cm mechanical energy with a 20% efficiency rate.
14. At time t = 0 s particle starts moving along the x–axis. If its
Take g = 9.8 ms–2 : (2016)
kinetic energy increases uniformly with time t, the net force
acting on it must be proportional to (2011) (a) 6.45 × 10–3 kg
(a) t (b) constant (b) 9.89 × 10–3 kg
(c) t (d) 1/ t (c) 12.89 × 10–3 kg
15. When a rubber-band is stretched by a distance x, it exerts (d) 2.45 × 10–3 kg
a restoring force of magnitude F = ax + bx2 where a and b 18. A point particle of mass m, moves along the uniformly
are constants. The work done in stretching the
rough track PQR as shown in the figure. The coefficient of
unstretched rubber-band by L is : (2014)
friction, between the particle and the rough track equals
1 aL2 bL3 . The particle is released from rest, from the point P and it
(a)
2

aL2  bL3  (b)
2

3 comes to rest at a point R. The energies, lost by ball over
the parts, PQ and QR, of the track, are equal to each other,
1  aL2 bL3  and no energy is lost when particle changes direction from
(c) 2  2  3  (d) aL2 + bL3 PQ to QR.
 
The values of the coefficient of friction  and the distance
16. For a simple pendulum, a graph is plotted between its
x (=QR), are, respectively close to : (2016)
kinetic energy (KE) and potential energy (PE) against its
displacement d. Which one of the following represents
these correctly ?
(graphs are schematic and not drawn to scale) (2015)

(a)

(a) 0.2 and 3.5 m

(b) 0.29 and 3.5 m

(b) (c) 0.29 and 6.5 m

(d) 0.2 and 6.5 m
19. A body of mass m = 10-2 kg is moving in a medium and
experiences a frictional force F = -kv2. Its initial speed is v0
(c)
1 2
= 10 ms-1. If, after 10 s, its energy is mv0 , the value of k
8

will be : (2017)
(a) 10-3kg m-1 (b) 10-3 kg s-1
(d)
(c) 10-4 kg m-1 (d) 10-1 kg m-1 s-1
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 34

20. A time dependent force F = 6t acts on a particle of mass 1 26. A small ball of mass m starts at a point A with speed 0 and
kg. If the particle starts from rest, the work done by the moves along a frictionless track AB as shown. The track
force during the first 1 second will be : (2017) BC has coefficient of friction . The ball comes to stop at
C after travelling a distance L which is:
(a) 4.5 J (b) 22 J (2014 Online Set-3)
(c) 9 J (d) 18 J
21. A time dependent force F = 6t acts on a particle of mass 1
kg. If the particle starts from rest, the work done by the
force during the first 1 sec. will be : (2017)
(a) 18 J (b) 4.5 J
(c) 22 J (d) 9 J
22. A body of mass m = 10–2 kg is moving in a medium and
experiences a frictional force F = –kv2. Its initial speed is h  02 h  02
(a) 2  g (b) 2  2g
1 2
v0 = 10 ms–1. If, after 10s, its energy is mv0 , the value of
8
h  02 2h 0 2
k will be : (2017) (c)   2g (d)   2g
(a) 10–1 kg m–1 s–1 (b) 10–3 kg m–1 27. A car of weight W is on an inclined road that rises by 100
(c) 10–3 kg s–1 (d) 10–4 kg m–1 m over a distance of 1 km and applies a constant frictional
23. A particle is moving in a circular path of radius a under the W
force on the car. While moving uphill on the road at a
20
action of an attractive potential U   k . Its total energy
2r 2 speed of 10 ms–1, the car needs power P. If it needs power
is : (2018) P
while moving downhill at speed v then value of v is :
2
3 k
(a) zero (b) 0 2 2 (2016 Online Set-1)
a
(a) 20 ms–1 (b) 15 ms–1
k k (c) 10 ms–1 (d) 5 ms–1
(c) 0 2 (d) 2
4a 2a
28. Velocity-time graph for a body of mass 10 kg is shown in
24. A spring of unstretched length l has a mass m with one figure. Work-done on the body in first two seconds of the
end fixed to a rigid support. Assuming spring to be made
motion is : (2016 Online Set-2)
of a uniform wire, the kinetic energy possessed by it if its
free end is pulled with uniform velocity  is:
(2014 Online Set-2)
1 1
(a) m2 (b) m2
3 6
1 2
(c) m (d) m2
2
25. A body of mass 5 kg under the action of constant force
  (a) 12000 J (b) –12000 J
F  Fx i  Fy j has velocity at t = 0s as v  6i  2j m/s
  (c) –4500 J (d) –9300 J
  29. An object is dropped from a height h from the ground.
and at t = 10s as v  6j m/s. The force F is:
Every time it hits the ground it looses 50% of its kinetic
(2014 Online Set-3) energy. The total distance covered as t   is :
 3 4  (2017 Online Set-1)
(a) 3i  4j N
  (b)   i  j  N (a) 2h (b) 
 5 5 

 3 4  5 8
(d) 3i  4j N
h h
(c)  i  j  N
5 5 
  (c)
3
(d)
3
 35 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

30. A body of mass m starts moving from rest along x-axis so 31. Two particles of the same mass m are moving in circular
that its velocity varies as  = a s where a is a constant 16 3
orbits because of force, given by F  r  = r
and s is the distance covered by the body. The total work r
done by all the forces acting on the body in the first t The first particle is at a distance r =1, and the second, at r
seconds after the start of the motion is : =4. The best estimate for the ratio of kinetic energies of
(2018 Online Set-3) the first and the second particle is closest to :
(2018 Online Set-3)
1 4 2
(a) m a t 4 2
(b) 8 m a t
8 (a) 6×10-2 (b) 3×10-3

1
m a4t2 (c) 10-1 (d) 6×102
(c) 4 m a 4 t 2 (d)
4
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 36

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Work done by Constant Force 280 140

(a) (b)
1. Forces acting on a particle is 2i  3j N. Work done by this
  5 5

force is zero, when a particle is moved on the line 3y + kx = 5. 232 192

(c) (d)
Here, value of k is : 5 5
(a) 2 (b) 4 6. If a person is pushing a box inside a moving train, the work
(c) 6 (d) 8 done in the frame of the earth will be :
2. A small block of mass m is kept on a rough inclined surface
   
(a) F.s0 (b) F.s
of inclination  fixed in an elevator. The elevator goes up
with a uniform velocity v and the block does not slide on   
(c) F.  s  s0  (d) Zero
the wedge. The work done by the force of friction on the
block in a time t will be :  
(where s is the displacement of the box in the train and s0
2
(a) Zero (b) mgvt cos  is the displacement of the train relative to the ground.)
2 1 7. A body is lifted over route I and then route II such that force
(c) mgvt sin  (d) mgvt sin2
2 is always tangent to the path. Coefficient of friction is same
3. A plank of mass 10 kg and a block of mass 2 kg are placed on for both the paths. Work done
a horizontal plane as shown in the figure.

2 kg
10 kg 60 N
There is no friction between plane and plank. The coefficient
of friction between block and plank is 0.5. A force of 60 N is
(a) on both the routes is same
applied on plank horizontally. In first 2 s the work done by
the friction on the block is : (b) on route I is more

(a) – 100 J (b) 100 J (c) on route II is more

(c) zero (d) 200 J (d) on both the routes is zero

Work done by Variable Force 8. An object of mass m is tied to a string of length l and a
variable horizontal force is applied on it, which starts at zero

A force of F  2xi  2j  3z k N is acting on a particle.
2
4. and gradually increases (it is pulled extremely slowly so
that equilibrium exists at all times) until the string makes an
Find the work done by this force in displacing the body
angle  with the vertical. Work done by the force F is :
from (1, 2, 3) m to (3, 6, 1) m.
(a) –10 J (b) 100 J O

(c) 10 J (d) 1 J

5. A force F   3xy  5z  j  4zk is applied on a particle. The
l
work done by the force when the particle moves from point
(0, 0, 0) to point (2, 4, 0) as shown in the figure is
C F
B

(a) mgl (1 – sin ) (b) mgl

(c) mgl (1 – cos ) (d) mgl (1 – tan )
 37 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

9. A particle moves along the x–axis from x= x1 to x = x2 under and b are positive constants. The position of equilibrium x-
the influence of a force given by F = 2x. Work done in the corresponds to
process is

(a) zero (b) x 22  x12

b 2a
(a) (b)
2a b
(c) 2x2 (x2 – x1) (d) 2x1 (x1 – x1)
10. Velocity time graph of a particle of mass 2 kg moving in a
2b a
straight line is as shown in figure. Work done by all forces (c) (d)
on the particle is :
a 2b
14. A uniform chain AB of mass m and length l is placed with
one end A at the highest point of a hemisphere of radius R.
20
Referring to the top of the hemisphere as the datum level,
v
R
(ms–1) the potential energy of the chain is (given that   )
2

t (s) 2

(a) 400 J (b) –400 J

(c) –200 J (d) 200 J mR 2g    mR 2g   
(a)   sin  (b)   sin 
Gravitational Potential Energy  R R 2  R R
11. Work done by a conservative force on a system is equal to
(a) the change in kinetic energy of the system mR 2g    mR 2g   
(c)  sin   (d)    sin 
(b) the change in potential energy of the system 2  R R   R R
(c) the change in total mechanical energy of the system
15. The given plot shows the variation of U, the potential energy
(d) none of the above
of interaction between two particles, with the distance
12. A chain (uniform) of mass m and length l has a small block separating them, r
of mass M attached to one of its ends and hangs from the
surface of a table, with one-third its length resting on it. It is
pulled by a constant horizontal force to lift the block slowly
to the table surface. The work done by the force is

1. B and D are equilibrium points.

2. C is a point of stable equilibrium.
3. The force of interaction between the two particles is
 2   m  g  attractive between points C and B, and repulsive between
(a) (M + m)g   (b)  M    points D and E on the curve.
 3  3  3 
4. The force of interaction between the particles is repulsive
 g   m  2g 
(c)  M  m    (d)  M    between points C and A.
 3  3  3 
Which of the above statements are correct ?
13. A particle located in a one-dimensional potential field has
(a) 1 and 3 (b) 1 and 4
a b
its potential energy function as U(x) = 4  2 where a (c) 2 and 4 (d) 2 and 3
x x
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 38

16. The potential energy function associated with the force (a) 1 : 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 4 : 16

F  4xy i  2x 2 j is (c) 1 : 3 : 5 (d) 1 : 9 : 25
2 2 21. A man throws the bricks to a height of 12 m where they
(a) U = –2x y (b) U = –2x y + constant
reach with a speed of 12 m/s. If he throws the bricks such
2
(c) U = 2x y + constant (d) not defined that they just reach that height, what percentage of energy
 will be saved (g = 9.8 m/s2)
17. The potential energy for a force field F is given by
(a) 29% (b) 46%
U (x, y) = cos(x + y). The force acting on a particle at position
(c) 38% (d) 50%
 
given by coordinates  0,  is 22. A man raises 1 kg wt. to a height of 100 cm and holds it
 4 there for 30 minutes. How much work has he performed ?

1   1   (a) 1 × 9.8 J (b) 1 × 9.8 × 30 × 60 J

(a) 
2
 
ij (b)
2
 
ij (c) 1 × 9.8 × 30 J (d) 1 × 9.8 × 30 erg.
23. A ball is dropped a height of 20 cm. Ball rebounds to a
height of 10 cm. What is the loss of energy ?
1   3  1   3 
(c)  2 i  2 j  (d)  2 i  2 j  (a) 25% (b) 75%
    (c) 50% (d) 100%
18. In the given figure the variation of potential energy of a 24. A machine, which is 75% efficient, uses 12 J of energy in
particle of mass m = 2 kg is represented w.r.t. its x-coordinate. lifting up a 1 kg mass through a certain distance. The mass
The particle moves under the effect of the conservative is then allowed to fall through that distance. the velocity
–1
force along the x-axis. which of the following statements is at the end of its fall is (in ms )
incorrect about the particle. (a) 24 (b) 32

(c) 18 (d) 9
25. A rope ladder with a length l carrying a man with a mass m
at its end is attached to the basket of balloon with a mass
M. The entire system is in equilibrium in the air. As the man
climbs up the ladder into the balloon, the balloon descends
by a height h. Then the potential energy of the man
(a) If it is released at the origin, it will move in negative x-axis (a) increases by mg (l – h)
(b) If it is released at x = 2 +  where   0, then its maximum (b) increases by mgl
speed will be 5 m/s and it will perform oscillatory motion (c) increase by mgh
 (d) increases by mg (2l – h)
 then it will cross x = 10
(c) If initially x = –10 and u  6i,
26. The force acting on a body moving along x–axis varies
(d) x = –5 and x = +5 are unstable equilibrium positions of with the position of the particle as shown in the figure.
the particle The body is in stable equilibrium at :
19. The potential energy for a body of mass m that is acted on

kx 3
by a very massive body is given by U   mgx  . The
3
corresponding force is
2 2
(a) – mg + kx (b) mg – kx
(c) mg – kx (d) – mg + kx
20. A ball is released from the top of a tower. The ratio of work
done by force of gravity in first, second and third second (a) x = x1 (b) x = x2
of the motion of ball is
(c) both x1 and x2 (d) neither x1 nor x2
 39 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

Kinetic Energy
27. If the speed of a vehicle increases by 2 m/s, its K.E. is
doubled. The original speed of the vehicle was

(a)  
2 1 m / s (b) 2  
2 1 m / s

(c) 2  
2 1 m / s (d) 2 m / s.

28. A particle moves in a straight line with retardation

proportional to its displacement. Its loss of KE for any
displacement x is proportional to
2
(a) x (b) x (a) x0 (b) 2x0
0 x
(c) x (d) e (c) 3x0 (d) 1.5x0
29. An engine pumps water continuously through a hole. Speed 32. A spring of stiffness k is kept compressed by applying
with which water passes through the hole nozzle is v and k horizontal force on m by a length x0 (=mg/K). If the force F is
is the mass per unit length of the water jet as it leaves the withdrawn suddenly, the block oscillates and finally stops.
nozzle. Find the rate at which kinetic energy is being imparted In consequence, frictional loss is equal to 50% of the initial
to the water. ptential energy stored in the spring. The coefficient of
friction the between block and the ground is
1 2 1 3
(a) kv (b) kv
2 2

v2 v3
(c) (d)
2k 2k
Springs (Questions of Springs)
30. A block of 4 kg mass starts at rest and slides a distance d
down a frictionless incline (angle 30°) where it runs into a
1 2
spring of negligible mass. The block slides an additional 25 (a) (b)
cm before it is brought to rest momentarily by compressing 2 3
the spring. The force constant of spring is 400 N/m. the
value of d is then 1 1
(c) (d)
–2 2 3
(take g = 10 ms )
33. A mass m is allowed to fall on a pedestal fixed on the top of
a vertical spring. If the height of the mass was H from the
pedestal and the compression of the spring is d then the
spring’s force factor is given by

(a) 25 cm (b) 37.5 cm

(c) 62.5 cm (d) none of the above
31. Two discs, each having mass m, are attached rigidly to the
ends of a vertical spring. One of the discs rests on a
horizontal surface and the other produces a compression x0
on the spring when it is in equilibrium. How much further H  d H  d
(a) Mg (b) 2Mg
must the spring be compressed so that when the force d2 d2

causing compression is removed, the extension of the spring

Mg H H  d
will be able to leift the lower disc off the table (c) 2 2 (d) 2Mg
d d2
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 40

34. A vertical spring of force constant 100 N/m is attached 37. A plot of velocity versus time is shown in figure. A single
with a hanging mass of 10 kg. Now an external force is force acts on the body. The correct statement is :
applied on the mass so that the spring is stretched by
additional 2 m. The work done by the force F is v
2
(g = 10 m/s ) A B

C
O
t
D

(a) in moving from C to D, work done by the force on the

body is positive.
(a) 200 J (b) 400 J (b) in moving from B to C, wrok done by the force on the
body is positive.
(c) 450 J (d) 600 J
(c) in moving from A to B, the body does work on the
35. A block of mass m is attached with a massless spring of force
system.
constant k. The block is placed over a rough inclined surface
for which the coefficient of friction is  = 3/4. The minimum (d) in moving from O to A, work is done by the body and
value of M required to move the block up the plane is (Neglect is negative.
mass of string and pulley and friction in pulley) 38. A mass-spring system oscillates such that the mass moves
on a rough surface having coefficient of friction . It is
compressed by a distance a from its normal length and, on
being released, it moves to a distance b from its equilibrium
position. The decrease in amplitude for one half-cycle
(–a to b) is :
m M
mg 2mg
(a) (b)
37° K K

g K
3 4 (c) (d) mg
(a) m (b) m K
5 5
6 3 39. System shown in figure is released from rest. Pulley and
(c) m (d) m spring is massless and friction is absent everywhere. The
5 2
speed of 5 kg block when 2 kg block leaves the contact with
For General Body (Involves internal and external work)
ground is :
36. Velocity-time graph of a particle moving in a straight line 2
(Take force constant of spring k = 40 N/m and g = 10 m/s )
is as shown in figure. Mass of the particle is 2 kg. Work
done by all the forces acting on the particle in time interval
between t = 0 to t = 10 s is

v (m/s)
10
10
t (s)

–20

(a) 2 m/s (b) 2 2 m / s

(a) 300 J (b) –300 J
(c) 2 m/s (d) 4 2 m / s
(c) 400 J (d) –400 J
 41 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

40. In the given curved road, if particle is released from A then Power
44. A block of mass m is moving with a constant acceleration a
M A on a rough plane. If the coefficient of friction between the
block and the ground is , the power delivered by the external
agent after a time t from the beginning is equal to
2
(a) ma t (b) mgat
(c) m(a + g)gt (d) m(a + g)at
h 45. A block of mass m is being pulled up the rough incline by an
agent delivering constant power P. The coefficient of friction
between the block and the incline is . The maximum speed
of the block during the course of ascent is

(a) kinetic energy at B must be mgh

(b) kinetic energy at B may be zero
(c) kinetic energy at B must be less than mgh
P
(d) kinetic energy at B must not be equal to zero (a) v 
mg sin   mg cos 
For rigid body (involves only external work)
41. A uniform flexible chain of mass m and length 2l hangs in
P
(b) v 
equilibrium over a smooth horizontal pin of negligibile mg sin   mg cos 
diameter. One end of the chain is given a small vertical
2P
displacement so that the chain slips over the pin. The speed of (c) v 
chain when it leaves pin is :
mg sin   mg cos 

(a) 2 g (b) g
3P
(d) v 
mg sin   mg cos 
(c) 4 g (d) 3 g 46. A uniform rope of linear mass density  and length l is coiled
on a smooth horizontal surface. One end is pulled up with
42. A meter stick of mass 400 g is pivoted at one end and
constant velocity v. Then the average power applied by the
displaced through an angle 60°. The increase in its potential
external agent in pulling the entire rope just off the ground
energy is : is
(a) 1 J (b) 10 J
(c) 100 J (d) 1000 J
43. A uniform chain has a mass M and length L. It is placed on
a frictionless table with length l0 hanging over the edge.
The chain begins to slide down. Then, the speed V with
which the end slides down from the edge is given by :

g g
(a) V  ( L  l0 ) (b) V  ( L  l0 ) 1  2 g
L L (a)  v 2  (b) gv
2 2
g 2 2
(c) V  ( L  l0 ) (d) V  2 g ( L  l0 ) 1 3 vg 1 3
L (c) v  (d) gv  v
2 2 2
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 42

47. A particle A of mass 10/7 kg is moving in the positive 51. A dam is situated at a height of 550 m above sea level and
direction of x. Its initial position is x = 0 and initial velocity supplies water to a power house which is at a height of 50m
at x = 10 is (use the graph given) above see level. 2000 kg of water passes through the turbines
per second. What would be the maximum electricl power
output of the power house if the whole system were 80%
efficient ?
(a) 8 MW (b) 10 MW
(c) 12.5 MV (d) 16 MV
–1
52. A 500 kg car, moving with a velocity of 36 km h on a straight
raod unidirectionally, doubles its velocity in one minute.
The power delivered by the engine for doubling the velocity
(a) 4 m/s (b) 2 m/s is
(a) 750 W (b) 1050 W
100
(c) 3 2 m/s (d) m/s (c) 1150 W (d) 1250 W
3
53. The power of a water jet flowing through an orifice of radius
Constant and Variable Power
r with velocity v is
48. Power supplied to a particle of mass 2 Kg varies with time 2 2
as P = 3t2/2 watt, here t is in second. If velocity of particle (a) zero (b) 500 r v
2 3 4
at t = 0 is v = 0. The velocity of particle at time t = 2 s will (c) 500 r v (d) r v
be
Constant and Variable Force Condition
(a) 1 m/s (b) 4 m/s
54. A force F acting on a body depends on its displacement S
(c) 2 m/s (d) 2 2 m / s –1/3
as F  S . The power delivered by F will depend on
49. A constant power P is applied to a particle of mass m. The displacement as :
distance travelled by the particle when its velocity (a) S
2/3
(b) S
–5/3

increases from v1 to v2 is (neglect friction) 1/2 0

(c) S (d) S
3P 2 m
(a) 
v 2  v12  (b)
3P

v 2  v1  55. A pendulum of mass 1 kg and length  = 1 m is released
m from rest at angle  = 60°. The power delivered by all the
2
m 3 m 2 forces acting on the bob at angle  = 30° will be : (g = 10 m/s )
(c)
3P

v 2  v13  (d)
3P

v 2  v12 
(a) 13.5 W (b) 20.4 W
50. A motor drives a body along a straight line with a constant (c) 24.6 W (d) zero
force. The power P developed by the motor must vary with 56. A bob of mass m accelerates uniformly from rest to v1 in time
tiem t as shown in figure. t1. As a function of t, the instantaneous power delivered to
the body is
P P
k
m m
(a) (b) v v

t t m v1t m v1t
(a) t2 (b) t1

P P
m v1t 2 m v12 t
(c) (d)
t1 t12
(c) (d)

t t
 43 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

Potential energy and force analysis 64. Two inclined frictionless tracks of different inclinations meet
57. The potential energy of a particle of mass 1 kg is, U = 10 + (x – 2) .
2 at A from where two blocks P and Q of different masses are
Here, U is in joules and x in metres on the positive x-axis. allowed to slide down from rest at the same time, on on each
Particle travels upto x = +6 m. Choose the correct statement: track, as shown in the figure. Then

(a) On negative x-axis particle travels upto x = – 2m

(b) The maximum kinetic energy of the particle is 16 J
(c) Both (a) and (b) are correct
(d) Both (a) and (b) are wrong
58. The potential Energy as a function of the force between two
a b (a) both blocks will reach the bottom at the same time
atoms in a diatomic molecules is given by U x    ,
x 12 x6
(b) block Q will reach the bottom eartler than block B
where a and b are positive constants and x is the distance
between the atoms. The position of stable equilibrium for (c) both blocks will reach the bottom with the same speed
the system of the two atoms is given (d) block Q will reach the bottom with a higher speed than
block P.
a a
(a) x  (b) x  65. A body of mass m is moving in a straight line at a constant
b b
speed v. Its kinetic energy is K and the magnitude of its
momentum is p. Which of the following relations are correct?
3a  2a 
(c) x  (d) x  6  
b  b  2k
(a) p = 2mk (b) p =
Multiple Type Question m
59. Work done by force of friction
(a) can be zero (b) can be positive 2k
(c) 2K = pv (d) v =
(c) can be negative (d) any of these p
60. When work done by force of gravity is negative,
COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS
(a) PE increases (b) KE decreases
Passage - 1
(c) PE remains constant (d) PE decreases
Using the following passage, sovle Q. 66-68
61. Which of the following may or may not be conserved ?
Sand particles drop vertically at the rate of 2 kg/s on a
(a) Energy (b) Potential energy
conveyor belt moving horizontally with a velocity of 0.2 m/s.
(c) Mechanical energy (d) Kinetic energy
66. The extra force required to keep the belt moving is
62. Internal forces can change
(a) 0.4 N (b) 0.08 N
(a) kinetic energy (b) mechanical energy
(c) 0.04 N (d) 0.2 N
(c) energy (d) momentum
63. In which of the following cases, no work is done by the 67. The extra power required is
force: (a) 0.4 W (b) 0.08 W
(a) A man carrying a bucket of water, walking on a level road (c) 0.04 W (d) 0.2 W
with a uniform velocity
68. The time rate of change of kinetic energy of sand particles is
(b) A drop of rain falling vertically with a constant velocity
(a) 0.4 J/s (b) 0.08 J/s
(c) A man whirling a stone tied to a string in a circle with a
(c) 0.04 J/s (d) 0.2 J/s
constant speed.
(d) A man walking upon a staircase
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 44

Passage - 2 72. If the total mechanical energy of the particle is –40 J, then it
can be found in region
Using the following passage, sovle Q. 69 & 70
(a) x < – 10 and x > 15
A block of mass m is released from a height h1 along a smooth
(b) –10 < x < –5 and 6 < x < 15
track as shown in the figure.
(c) 10 < x < 15
(d) it is not possible.
73. If the particle is isolated and its total mechanical energy is
60 J, then
(a) the particle can be found anywhere from –  < x < 
(b) the particle’s maximum kinetic energy is 95 J.
(c) the particle’s kinetic energy is not getting zero anywhere
69. Determine the force exerted on the block by the track at on x-axis
point 2, where radius of curvature is r1. (d) all of the above.

m(2gh1 ) m(2gh1 ) ASSERTION REASON

(a) mg  r1 (b) 2mg  r1
(A) If both Assertion and Reason are true and the Reason is
correct explanation of the Assertion.
mg m(2gh1 ) m(gh1 ) (B) If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not
(c) 2  r1 (d) mg  r1 correct explanation of the Assertion.
(C) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
70. Determine the minimum safe value of radius of curvature at
point 3, so that the block does not fly off the track. (D) If Assertion is false but Reason is true.

(a) (h1 – h2) (b) 2(h1 – h2) Kinetic energy

74. Assertion : Stopping distance  .
Stopping force
 h1  h 2  2  h1  h 2 
(c) (d) Reason : work done in stopping a body is equal to KE of the
3 3
body.
Passage - 4
(a) A (b) B
Using the following passage, sovle Q. 71 to 73
(c) C (d) D
The given figure shows the variation of potential energy of
75. Assertion : Two springs of force constants k1 and k2 are
a particle as a function of x, the x-coordinateof the region. It
stretched by the same force. If k1 > k2, then work done in
has been assumed that potential energy depends only on x.
stretching the first (W1) is less than work done in stretching
For all other values of x, U is zero, i.e., x < – 10 the x > 15,
the second (W2).
U = 0.
Reason : F = k1x1 = k2x2

x1 k 2
 
x 2 k1

1
k1x12 2
 k2 
W1 2 k k
  1    2
W2 1
k 2 x 22 k 2  k1  k1
2
71. If the total mechanical energy of the particle is 25J, then it
can be found in region As k1 > k2, W1 < W2

(a) –10 < x < –5 & 6 < x < 15 (b) –10 < x < 0 & 6 < x < 10 (a) A (b) B

(c) – 5 < x < 6 (d) –10 < x < 10 (c) C (d) D

 45 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

76. Assertion : A weight lifter does not work in holding the 82. Assertion : If a particle of mass m is connected to a light rod
weight up. and whirled in a vertical circle of radius R, then to complete
Reason : Work done is zero because distance moved is zero. the circle, the minimum velocity of the particle at the bottom
(a) A (b) B point is 5gR .
(c) C (d) D
Reason : Mechanical energy is conserved and in case of
77. Assertion : Mass and energy are not conserved separately,
the minimum velocity at the bottom point, the velocity at
but are conserved as a single entirly ‘mass-energy’.
the top point will be zero.
Reason : This is because one can be obtained at the cost of
(a) A (b) B
the other as per Einstein equaiton.
2 (c) C (d) D
E = mc
(a) A (b) B 83. Assertion : The potential energy of a particle varies with
distance x as shown in the graph.
(c) C (d) D
78. Assertion : Energy released when a mass of one microgram
7
disappears in a process is 9 × 10 J.

1
Reason : It follows from E  mv 2 .
2

(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
79. Assertion : In a circular motion, work done by centripetal The force acting on the particle is zero at point B and C.
force is not zero always. Reason : The slope of the U-x curve is zero at point B and C.
Reason : If speed of the particle increases or decreases in (a) A (b) B
circular motion, net force acting on the particle does not
(c) C (d) D
remain towards centre.
Matching Column Type
(a) A (b) B
84. A man pushes a block of 30 kg along a level floor at a
(c) C (d) D
constant speed with a force directed at 45° below the
80. Assertion : A body is connected to a string and if it just horizontal. If the coefficient of friction is 0.20, then match
completes a circle, it must have zero velocity at the top. the following:
Reason : A body is projected in vertically upward direction, Column I Column II
at the highest point the acceleration of the particle is non-
(a) Work done by all forces (p) zero
zero.
exerted by the surface on
(a) A (b) B
the block in 20 m
(c) C (d) D
(b) Work done by the force (q) 1500 J
81. Assertion : Under the action of a force of constant
magnitude, work done is path independent. of gravity

Reason : Work done by force of gravity is path independent (c) Work done by the man (r) 750 J
only near the surface of Earth. on the block in pushing it
(a) A (b) B through 10 m
(c) C (d) D (d) Net force on the block (s) 30 J
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 46

85. A small object of mass 0.5 kg is attached to an end of a  

87. Two constant forces F1 and F2 are acting on a bock as
massless 2 m long rope. It is rotated under gravity in a vertical

circle with the other end of the rope being at the cnetre of shown. The magnitude of the force F1 is 2 N and that of
the circle. The motion is started from the lowest point. Match 
columns I and II. F2 is 4 N. The velocity of the block at a certain instant is
Column I Column II 3.0 m/sec.
(a) if the speed of the (p) There will be some point on
object at lowest point on the circle at which speed
is 3.5 m/s of the object is zero but tension
in the rope is not zero.
(b) If the speed of the (q) there will be some point on the
object at lowest point circle at which tension in the
is 8 m/s rope is zero but speed of the
(a) Find the power due to each force and the net power.
object is not zero.

(c) if the maximum tension (r) the object will not be able to (b) If the magnitude of the force F2 is increased to 6 N,
in the rope is 15 N reach the highest point
what is the net power at this instant? Is the power constant?
(d) If the maximum tension (s) the object will be able to reach
88. A body of 0.2 kg is suspended through a spring, so that
in the rope is 30 N the highest point.
the spring is stretched by 1.0 cm. A particle of mass 0.12 kg
Interger Answer Type is dropped on the body after the impact. Find the maximum
86. A projectile is thrown with initial velocity at an angle  to extension of the spring (in cm).
the horizontal. Its velocity when it is at the highest point is

2
times the velocity when it is at height half of the
5
maximum height. The angle of projection  with horizontal
is /*. What is the value * ?
 47 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Single Answer Questions 5. An ideal spring with spring-constant k is hung from the
1. A uniform chain of length L and mass M is lying on a ceiling and a block of mass M is attached to its lower end.
smooth table and one-third of its length is hanging The mass is released with the spring initially unstretched.
vertically down over the edge of the table. If g is Then the maximum extension in the spring is : (2002)
acceleration due to gravity, the work required to pull the
4 Mg 2 Mg
hanging part on to the table is : (1985) (a) (b)
k k
(a) MgL (b) MgL/3
(c) MgL/9 (d) MgL/18 Mg Mg
(c) (d)
 k 2k
2.  
A force dF  K y î  x ˆj (where K is a positive constant)
6. If W1, W2 and W3 represent the work done in moving a
acts on a particle moving in the x–y plane. Starting form
particle from A to B along three different paths 1, 2 and 3
the origin, the particle is taken along the positive x-axis to
respectively (as shown) in the gravitational field of a point
the point (a,0) and then parallel to the y-axis to the point
mass m. Find the correct relation between W1, W2 and W3 :
(a,a). The total work done by the force F on the particle is :
(1998) (2003)

(a) –2Ka2 (b) 2Ka2 B

(c) –Ka2 (d) Ka2

3. A spring of force-constant k is cut into two pieces such 1 2
that one piece is double the length of the other. Then the
long piece will have a force-constant of : (1999)
(a) (2/3)k (b) (3/2)k A
(c) 3 k (d) 6 k (a) W1 > W2 > W3 (b) W1 = W2 = W3
4. A particle, which is constrained to move along x-axis, is
(c) W1 < W2 < W3 (d) W2 > W1 > W3
subjected to a force in the same direction which varies
with the distance x of the particle from the origin as 7. A particle is placed at the origin and a force F = kx is
F(x) = –kx + ax3. Here, k and a are positive constant. For acting on it (where k is a positive constant). If U (0) = 0,
x  0, the functional form of the potential energy U (x) of the the graph of U (x) versus x will be (where U is the potential
particle is : (2002) energy function) : (2004)

U(x) U(x) U (x) U (x)

(a) (b)
x x x x
(a) (b)

U(x) U(x) U (x) U (x)

x x (c) (d)
(c) (d) x x
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 48

8. A block (B) is attached to two unstretched spring S1 and are pulled by distance A. Block Q oscillates without
S2 with spring constants k and 4k, respectively. The other slipping. What is the maximum value of frictional force
ends are attached to two supports M1 and M2 not attached between the two blocks ?
to the walls. The springs and supports have negligible
mass. There is no friction anywhere. The block B is
displaced towards wall 1 by a small distance x and released.
The block returns and moves a maximum distance y
towards wall 2. Displacements x and y are measured with
respect to the equilibrium position of the block B. The
(a) kA/2 (b) kA
ratio y/x is (2008)
(c) smg (d) zero

12. Two blocks A and B of masses 2m and m, respectively are

connected by a massless and inextensible string. The whole
system is suspended by a massless spring as shown in the
fig. The magnitudes of acceleration of A and B, immediately
after the string is cut, are respectively (2006)

(a) 4 (b) 2
(c) 1/2 (d) 1/4
9. A car is moving in a circular horizontal track of radius 10 m
with a constant speed of 10 m/s. A plump bob is suspended
from the roof of the car by a light rigid rod. The angle made
by the rod with the track is (g = 10 m/s2) (1992)
(a) zero (b) 30° (a) g, g/2 (b) g/2, g
(c) 45° (d) 60° (c) g, g (d) g/2, g/2
10. An insect crawls up a hemispherical surface very slowly 13. A block of mass 2kg is free to move along the x–axis. It is
(see figure) The coefficient of friction between the insect at rest and from t = 0 onwards it is subjected to a time-
and the surface is 1/3. If the line joining the centre of the dependent force F(t) in the x direction. The force F(t) varies
hemispherical surface to the insect makes an angle  with with t as shown in the figure. The kinetic energy of the
the vertical, the maximum possible value of  is given by block after 4.5 seconds is (2010)

F (t)

4N

4.5 s
(a) cot  = 3 (b) tan  = 3 t
O 3s
(c) sec  = 3 (d) cosec  = 3
11. A block P of mass m is placed on a horizontal frictionless
plane. A second block of same mass m is placed on it and is (a) 4.50 J (b) 7.50 J
connected to a spring of spring constant k. The two blocks (c) 5.06 J (d) 14.06 J
 49 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

14. A tennis ball is dropped on a horizontal smooth surface. It

bounces back to its original position after hitting the
18.  
A force F = – K yiˆ  xjˆ (whre K is a positive constant act
surface. The force on the ball during the collision is on a particle moving in the xy plane. Starting from the
proportional to the length of compression of the ball. origin, the particle is taken along the positive x–axis to the
Which one of the following sketches describes the point (a, 0), and then parallel to the y–axis to the point (a, a).
variation of its kinetic energy K with time t most The total work done by the force F on particle is : (1998)
appropriately? The figures are only illustrative and not to (a) –2 Ka2 (b) 2Ka2
the scale. (c) –Ka2 (d) Ka2
19. A block of mass M has a circular cut with a frictionless
surface as shown. The block rests on the horizontal
frictionless surface of a fixed table. Initially the right edge
(a)
of the block is at x = 0, in a co-ordinate system fixed to the
table. A point mass m is released from rest at the topmost
point of the path as shown and it slides down. When the
mass loses contact with the block, its position is x and the
(b) velocity is  . At that instant, which of the following
options is/are correct? (2017)

(c)

(d)

Objective Question (More than one option are correct) 2g R

(a) The velocity of the point mass m is :  
15. A particle is acted upon by a force of constant magnitude m
1
which is always perpendicular to the velocity of the particle. M
The motion of the particle takes place in a plane. It follows
m
that : (1987) (b) The velocity of the block M is : V   2g R
M
(a) its velocity is constant
mR
(b) its acceleration is constant (c) The position of the point mass is x   2
M m
(c) its kinetic energy is constant
(d) The x component of displacement of the center of mass
(d) it moves in a circular path
16. A body is moved along a straight line by a machine mR
of the block M is : 
delivering constant power. The distance moved by the M m
body in time t is proportional to : (1984) 20. A particle of mass m is initially at rest at the origin. It is
(a) t1/2 (b) t3/4 subjected to a force and starts moving along the x-axis. Its
(c) t3/2 (d) t2 kinetic energy K changes with time as dK/dt = t, where 
is a positive constant of appropriate dimensions. Which
17. A uniform chain of length L and mass M is lying on a
of the following statements is (are) ture ? (2018)
smooth table and one third of its length is hanging
(a) The force applied on the particle is constant
vertically down over the edge of the table. If g is
acceleration due to gravity, the work required to pull the (b) The speed of the particle is proportional to time
hanging part on to the table is (1985) (c) The distance of the particle from the origin increases
(a) MgL (b) MgL/3 linearly with time
(c) MgL/9 (d) MgL/18 (d) The force is conservative
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 50

PASSAGE (a) A (b) B

Using the following passage, solve Q. 21 & 22 (c) C (d) D
A small block of mass 1 kg is released from rest at the top 24. A particle of unit mass is moving along the x-axis under
of a rough track. The track is a circular arc of radius 40m.
the influence of a force and its total energy is conserved.
The block slides along the track without toppling and a
frictional force acts on it in the direction opposite to the Four possible forms of the potential energy of the particle
instantaneous velocity. The work done in overcoming the are given in column I (a and U0 constant). Match the
friction up to the point Q, as shown in the figure, is 150 J. potential energies in column I to the corresponding
(Take the acceleration due to gravity, g = 10 ms–2). statement(s) in column II. (2015)
y Column–I Column–II
R
P 2
30° U  x 
2
(A) U1  x   0 1    (P) The force acting on the
2   a  
Q R particle is zero at x = a
2
x U0  x 
O (B) U 2  x     (Q) The force acting on the
2 a
21. The speed of the block when it reaches the point Q is particle is zero at x = 0
(a) 5 ms–1 (b) 10 ms–1
2
U0  x    x 2 
(c) 10 3 ms 1
(d) 20 ms –1 (C) U3  x     exp     (R) The force acting on the
2 a   a  
22. The magnitude of the normal reaction that acts on the
block at the point Q is particle is zero at x = a
(a) 7.5 N (b) 8.6 N U0  x 1  x 3 
(D) U 4  x        (S) The particle experiences
(c) 11.5 N (d) 22.5 N 4  a 3  a  
Assertion and Reason an attractive force
This question contains, statement I (assertion) and towards x = 0 in
Statement II (reason) the region |x| < a.
(A) Statement–I is true, statement–II is true; statement–II is a (T) The particle with total
correct explanation for statement–I.
U0
(B) Statement–I is true, statement–II is true; statement–II is energy can
4
NOT a correct explanation for statement–I.
oscillate about the
(C) Statement–I is true, statement–II is false.
point x = a
(D) Statement–I is false, statement–II is true.
Subjective Questions
23. Statement–I : A block of mass m starts moving on a rough
25. The displacement x of a particle moving in one dimension,
horizontal surface with a velocity v. It stop due to friction
between the block and the surface after moving through a under the action of a constant force is related to the time t
certain distance. The surface is now tilted to an angle of by the equation t  x  3
30° with the horizontal and the same block is made to go up
where x is in metre and t in second. Find (1980)
on the surface with the same initial velocity v. The decrease
in the mechanical energy in the second situation is smaller (a) The displacement of the particle when its velocity is
than that in the first situation. zero, and
Statement-II : The coefficient of friction between the block (b) The work done by the force in the first 6 s.
and the surface decreases with the increase in the angle of
inclination. (2007)
 51 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

26. In the figures (a) and (b) AC, DG and GF are fixed inclined 30. A hemispherical bowl of radius R = 0.1 m is rotating about
planes, BC = EF = x and AB = DE = y. A small block of mass its own axis (which is vertical) with an angular velocity . A
M is released from the point A. It slides down AC and particle of mass 10–2 kg on the frictionless inner surface of
reaches C with a speed VC. The same block is released from the bowl is also rotating with the same . The particle is at
rest from the point D. It slides down DGF and reaches the a height h from the bottom of the bowl. (1983)
point F with speed VF. The coefficients of kinetic frictions
(i) Obtain the relation between h and . What is the
between the block and both the surfaces AC and DGF are
minimum value of  needed, in order to have a non–
. Calculate VC and VF. (1980)
zero value of h ?
(ii) It is desired to measure g (acceleration due to gravity)
A D
using the set–up, by measuring h accurately.
G
Assuming that R and  are known precisely, and that
the least count in the measurement of h is 10–4 m,
what is the minimum possible error g in the measured
B C E F
(a) (b) value of g?
31. A smooth semicircular wiretrack of radius R is fixed in a
27. A body of mass 2 kg is being dragged with a uniform vertical plane. One end of a massless spring of natural
velocity of 2 m/s on a rough horizontal plane. The coefficient length 3R/4 is attached to the lowest point O of the
of friction between the body and the surface is 0.20, wiretrack. A small ring of mass m, which can slide on the
2
J = 4.2 J/cal and g = 9.8 ms/ . Calculate the amount of heat track, is attacked to the other end of the spring. The ring
generated in 5 s. (1980) is held stationary at point P such that the spring makes
28. A lead bullet just melts when stopped by an obstacle. an angle of 60° with the vertical. The spring constant
Assuming that 25 per cent of the heat is absorbed by the K = mg/R. Consider the instant when the ring is released,
obstacle, find the velocity of the bullet if its initial and
temperature is 27°C. (Melting point of lead = 327°C, specific
heat of lead = 0.03 gal/g–C°, latent heat of fusion of
lead = 6 cal/g–°C, J = 4.2 J/cal). (1981)
29. Two block A and B are connected to reach other by a string
and a spring; the string passesover a frictionless pulley as
shown in the figure. Block B slides over the horizontal top
surface of a stationary block C and the block A slides along
the vertical side of C, both with the same uniform speed.
The coefficient of friction between the surfaces of blocks
is 0.2. Force constant of the spring is 1960 N/m. If mass of
block A is 2 kg. Calculate the mass of block B and the (i) draw the free body diagram of the ring,
energy stored in the spring. (1982) (ii) determine the tangential acceleration of the ring and
the normal reaction. (1996)
32. A bullet is fired at a target. Its velocity is decreased by
50% after penetrating 21 cm into the target. Find the
additional thickness (in cm) that the bullet will penetrate
before coming to rest. (2008)
WORK, POWER & ENERGY 52

33. A light inextensible string that goes over a smooth fixed 35. A particle of mass 0.2 kg is moving in one dimension under
pulley as shown in the figure connects two blocks of a force that delivers a constant power 0.5 W to the particle.
–1
masses 0.36 and 0.72 kg. Taking g = 10 m/s2, find the work If the initial speed (in ms ) of the particle is zero, the speed
–1
done (in joules) by the string on the block of mass 0.36 kg (in ms ) after 5s is (2013)
during the first second afer the system is released from
36. Consider an elliptically shaped rail PQ in the vertical plane
rest. (2009)
with OP =3m and OQ = 4m. A block of mass 1 kg is pulled
along the rail from P to Q with a force of 18 N, which is
always parallel to line PQ (see the figure given) Assuming
no frictional losses, the kinetic energy of the block when it
reaches Q is (n×10) Joules. The value of n is (take
acceleration due to gravity = 10 ms–2) (2014)

34. A bob of mass m, suspended by a string of length l1, is

given a minimum velocity required to complete a full circle
in the vertical plane. At the highest point, it collides
elastically with another bob of mass m suspended by a
string of lenght l2, which is initially at rest. Both the strings
are massless and inextensible. If the second bob, after
collision acquires the minimum speed required to complete

1
a full circle in the vertical plane, the ratio is (2013)
2


 53 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (d) 10. (b)
11. (b) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (a)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (a) 25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (c) 29. (c) 30. (c)
31. (b) 32. (b) 33. (a) 34. (a) 35. (b) 36. (c) 37. (b) 38. (a) 39. (c) 40. (b)
41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (b) 44. (c) 45. (d) 46. (b) 47. (b) 48. (d) 49. (a) 50. (a)
51. (b) 52. (b) 53. (b) 54. (a) 55. (c) 56. (d) 57. (c) 58. (d) 59. (b) 60. (d)
61. (b) 62. (c) 63. (b) 64. (a) 65. (c) 66. (b) 67. (a) 68. (c) 59. (b) 70. (a)
71. (b) 72. (b) 73. (c) 74. (d) 75. (a) 76. (d) 77. (a) 78. (b)

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (a) 9. (a) 10. (a)
11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (b) 16. (d) 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (c) 20. (a)
21. (b) 22. (d) 23. (a) 24. (a) 25. (d) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (c) 29. (a) 30. (a)
31. (a)

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (c) 9. (b) 10. (b)
11. (d) 12. (d) 13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (c) 16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (c)
21. (c) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (c) 25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (b) 29. (b) 30. (b)
31. (b) 32. (c) 33. (d) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (a) 37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (b)
41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (c) 44. (d) 45. (a) 46. (c) 47. (a) 48. (c) 49. (c) 50. (a)
51. (a) 52. (d) 53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (a) 56. (d) 57. (c) 58. (d) 59. (a, b, c, d)
60. (a, b) 61. (b, c, d) 62. (a, b) 63. (a, b, c) 64. (b, c) 65. (a, c) 66. (a) 67. (b) 68. (c) 69. (a)
70. (b) 71. (a) 72. (d) 73. (d) 74. (a) 75. (a) 76. (a) 77. (a) 78. (c) 79. (d)
80. (d) 81. (d) 82. (d) 83. (a) 84. (aq; bp; cr; dp) 85. (a  p,r; b  q,r; c  r; d  q,s)
86. (0003) 87. (0006) 88. (0006)

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (d) 5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (c) 9. (c) 10. (a)
11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (c,d) 16. (c) 17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (a, d) 20. (a, b, d)
21. (b) 22. (a)
23. (c) 24. (A P,Q,R,T; B Q, S; C P,Q,R,S; D P, R,T) 25. (a) zero (b) zero
26. VC  VF  2 gy  gx  27. 9.33 cal 28. 409.8 m/s 29. 10 kg, 0.098 J

g 5 3 3 mg
30. (i) h  R  , (ii) ± 9.8 × 10–3 ms2 31. (ii) g, 32. (0007) 33. (0005) 34. (0005) 35. 0005
2 3 8
36. (0005)

Dream on !!

 02
CIRCULAR MOTION
 55 CIRCULAR MOTION

Circular Motion

1. ANGULAR DISPLACEMENT 2. ANGULAR VELOCITY

Introduction : Angle subtended by position vector It is defined as the rate of change of angular displace-
of a particle moving along any arbitrary path w.r.t. ment of a body or particle moving in circular path.
some fixed point is called angular displacement. (i) It is a vector quantity.
(ii) Its direction is same as that of angular
displacement i.e. perpendicular to plane of
Q rotation.
Note : If the particle is revolving in the clockwise direction
 P then the direction of angular velocity is
perpendicular to the plane downwards. Whereas
O in case of anticlockwise direction the direction
Fixed point
(a) Particle moving in an arbitrary path will be upwards.
(iii) Its unit is Radian/sec
(iv) Its dimension is [M0L0T–1]
Q Types of Angular Velocity :
2.1 Average Angular Velocity :
O 
 Total angular displaceme nt
 av =
P Total time taken
(b) Particle moving in straight line 2.2 Instantaneous Angular velocity :
The intantaneous angular velocity is defined as the
angular velocity at some particular instant.
Q Instantaneous angular velocity

S  d
O   = lim =
t 0 t dt
r
P Note: Instantaneous angular velocity can also be
called as simply angular velocity.
(c) Particle moving in circular path 3. RELATION BETWEEN LINEAR VELOCITYA N D
(i) Angular displacement is a vector quantity. ANGULAR VELOCITY
(ii) Its direction is perpendicular to plane of rotation
d d ds 1
and given by right hand screw rule. We have      =  =      . v
dt ds dt r
Note: Clockwise angular displacement is taken as
negative and anticlockwise displacement as ds arc
positive. [ d = , angle =
dr radius
arc linear displaceme nt ds
angle = = and v = = linear velocity]
radius radius dt
(iii) For circular motion S = r ×   v = r
(iv) Its unit is radian (in M.K.S)
In vector form,   
v   r
Note : Always change degree into radian, if it occurs
in numerical problems. Note :
360 o (i) When a particle moves along a curved path, its
Note : 1 radian =     radian = 180º linear velocity at a point is along the tangent
2
drawn at that point
(v) It is a dimensionless quantity i.e. dimension
(ii) When a particle moves along curved path, its
[M0L0T0]
velocity has two components. One along the
CIRCULAR MOTION 56

radius, which increases or decreases the radius 5. RELATION BETWEEN ANGULAR ACCELERATION
and another one perpendicular to the radius, AND LINEAR ACCELERATION
which makes the particle to revolve about the
point of observation. Linear acceleration = Rate of change of linear
velocity
 vsin 
(iii) = = dv
t r  a = ....(i)
dt
4. ANGULAR ACCELERATION Angular acceleration = Rate of change of angular
velocity
The rate of change of angular velocity is defined as
angular acceleration. d
  = ....(ii)
If  be change in angular velocity in time t, then dt
angular acceleration From (i) & (ii)
  a dv d(r)
 d = =
  lim =  d d
t 0 t dt d
(i) It is a vector quantity = r [ r is constant] = r
d
(ii) Its direction is that of change in angular velocity  a =  r
 
(iii) Unit : rad/sec2 In vector form

a =  r
(iv) Dimension : M0L0T–2

6. EQUATION OF LINEAR MOTION AND ROTATIONAL MOTION

(i) With constant velocity a = 0, s = ut  = 0 ,  = t

(ii) With constant acceleration (i) Average velocity (i) Average angular velocity
v u 1  2
v av =    av =
2 2
(ii) Average acceleration (ii) Average angular acceleration
v u 2  1
a av = a av =
t t
v u 1  2
(iii) s = v av t = t (iii)  = av. t = t
2 2
(iv) v = u + at (iv) 2 = 1 + t
1 2 1
(v) s = ut + at (v)  = 1t + t2
2 2
1 2 1
(vi) s = vt – at (vi)  = 2 t – t 2
2 2
(vii) v2 = u2 + 2as (vi) 22 = 12 + 2
1 1
(viii) Sn = u + (2n–1)a (viii) n = 1 + (2n–1)
2 2
displacement in nth sec Angular displacement in nth sec
ds
(iii) With variable acceleration (i) v = (i)  = d/dt
dt
(ii)  ds =  v dt (ii)  d =   dt
dv dv d d
(iii) a = = v (iii)  = = 
dt ds dt d
(iv)  dv =  a dt (iv)  d =   dt
(v)  v dv =  a ds (v)   d =   d
 57 CIRCULAR MOTION


7. CENTRIPETAL ACCELERATION AND (ii) The direction of ac would be the same as that

CENTRIPETAL FORCE of  v
(iii) Because velocity vector at any point is tangential
(i) A body or particle moving in a curved path
to the circular path at that point, the acceleration
always moves effectively in a circle at any
vector acts along radius of the circle at that
instant. point and is directed towards the centre. This is
(ii) The velocity of the particle changes moving on the reason that it is called centripetal
acceleration.
the curved path, this change in velocity is
brought by a force known as centripetal force
and the acceleration so produced in the body 7.2 Expression for Centripetal force
If v = velocity of particle, 
is known as centripetal acceleration. v
r = radius of path 
(iii) The direction of centripetal force or acceleration  v
Then necessary centripetal force Fc
 
is always towards the centre of circular path. Fc = mass × acceleration Fc Fc

7.1 Expression for Centripetal Acceleration v2 Fc
Fc = m 
r v 
 This is the expression for v
v2
centripetal force

P2(t + t) – v1 
v2 (i) It is a vector quantity
r A

O  v1 (ii) In vector form r

v 2 2 O
P1(t)  mv mv 
Fc = – . r̂ = – 2 r
r r
(a) Particle moving (b) Vector diagram of  
in circular path of velocities = – m2r r̂ = –m2 r = – m ( v ×  )
radius r negative sign indicates direction only
  
The triangle OP1P2 and the velocity triangle are | Fc | = m ( v ×  )
similar
(iii) For circular motion :
P1P2 AB 
 = | Fc | = m (v  sin 90º) = mv
P1O AQ
s v  Note :

 = [| v1 | = | v 2 | = v]
r v 1. Centripetal force is not a real force. It is only
v the requirement for circular motion.
 v = s
r 2. It is not a new kind of force. Any of the forces
v v s found in nature such as gravitational force,
 = electric friction force, tension in string reaction
t r t
force may act as centripetal force.
lim v v lim  s 
 =  
t 0 t r t 0  t 
8. TYPE OF CIRCULAR MOTION
v v2
 ac =
v = = r2 8.1 Uniform circular motion
r r
This is the magnitude of centripetal acceleration 8.2 Non Uniform Circular Motion :
of particle
8.1 Uniform Circular Motion :
(i) It is a vector quantity. In vector form If m = mass of body,
  
ac =  v r = radius of circular orbit,
v = magnitude of velocity
CIRCULAR MOTION 58

ac = centripetal acceleration, v2
 (v) Make it equal to required centripetal force.
v1
at = tangential acceleration (vi) For remaining components see according to
In uniform circular motion : question.

  
(i) | v1 | = | v 2 | = | v 3 | = constant  Note:
v3
i.e. speed is constant When a system of particles rotates about an axis,
the angular velocity of all the particles will be same,
but their linear velocity will be different, because of
 ac
(ii) As | v | is constant different distances from axis of rotation i.e. v = r.
so tangential acceleration at = 0
8.1.2 Motion In Horizontal Circle : Conical pendulum
at = 0
This is the best example of uniform circular motion
A conical pendulum consists of a body attached to
Fc a string, such that it can revolve in a horizontal
(iii) Tangential force Ft = 0 circle with uniform speed. The string traces out a
Ft = 0
cone in the space.
(i) The force acting on the bob are
(a) Tension T (b) weight mg
(iv) Total acceleration

v2
a = a c2  a t 2 = ac = (towards the centre)
r
Note:
(i) Because Fc is always perpendicular to velocity
or displacement, hence the work done by this
force will always be zero.
(ii) Circular motion in horizontal plane is usually
uniform circular motion.
(ii) The horizontal component T sin  of the tension
(iii) There is an important difference between the T provides the centripetal force and the vertical
projectile motion and circular motion. component T cos  balances the weight of bob
In projectile motion, both the magnitude and the mv 2
direction of acceleration (g) remain constant,  T sin  =
r
while in circular motion the magnitude remains and T cos  = mg
constant but the direction continuously changes.
From these equation
Hence equations of motion are not applicable
for circular motion. v4
T = mg 1 ....(i)
Remember that equations of motion remain valid r 2 g2
only when both the magnitude & direction of v2
acceleration are constant. and tan  = ....(ii)
rg
8.1.1 Hint to solve numerical problem : Also if h = height of conical pendulum
(i) Write down the required centripetal force OP r
(ii) Draw the free body diagram of each component tan  = = ....(iii)
OS h
of system. From (ii) & (iii),
(iii) Resolve the forces acting on the rotating particle v2 g
along radius and perpendicular to radius 2 = 2 =
r h
(iv) Calculate net radial force acting towards centre The time period of revolution
of circular path.
 59 CIRCULAR MOTION

Angle between F & Ft is (90º – )

h cos 
T = 2 = 2
g g

[where OS = l]

8.2 Non-uniform Circular Motion :

(i) In non-uniform circular motion :

| v |  constant   constant
i.e. speed  constant
i.e. angular velocity  constant (vii) Net acceleration towards the centre
= centripetal acceleration
(ii) If at any instant
v = magnitude of velocity of particle v2 Fc
 ac = = 2r =
r = radius of circular path r m
 = angular velocity of particle, (viii) Net acceleration,
then v = r Fnet
a = a c2  a 2t =
(iii) Tangential acceleration : m

dv The angle made by 'a' with ac,

at = at Ft
dt
tan  = =
ac Fc
ds
where v= and s = arc - length
dt
(iv) Tangential force :
Ft = mat
ac
(v) Centripetal force : ac 

mv 2
Fc = = m2r
r at
(vi) Net force on the particle : Special Note :
   (i) In both uniform & non-uniform circular motion Fc
F = Fc + F t
is perpendicular to velocity ; so work done by
 F = Fc2  Ft 2 centripetal force will be zero in both the cases.

If  is the angle made by [Note angle between (ii) In uniform circular motion Ft = 0, as at = 0, so
work done will be zero by tangential force.
Fc and Ft is 90º] F with Fc, then
But in non-uniform circular motion Ft  0, thus
there will be work done by tangential force in
Ft this case.
tan  =
Fc Rate of work done by net force in non-uniform
circular motion = Rate of work done by tangential
 Ft 
  = tan–1   force
 Fc 

dW    dx
 P = = Ft . v = F t .
dt dt
CIRCULAR MOTION 60

Motion in Vertical Circle : Motion of a body (b) Tangential force for the motion
suspended by string : Ft = mg sin 
This is the best example of non-uniform circular This force retards the motion
motion.
(ii) Results :
B
When the body rises from the bottom to the height
h apart of its kinetic energy converts into potential
energy C
Total mechanical energy remains conserved
Total (P.E. + K.E.) at A = Total (P.E. + K.E.) at P u
A
1 1 (a) Tension at the lowest point A :
 0+ mu2 = mgh + mv2
2 2
mvA2
TA = + mg
 v = u2  2gh = u 2  2g(1  cos ) 
(Here  = 0º)
mu2
TA = + mg

(b) Tension at point B :

mv B 2
TB = – mg


mu2
TB = – 5mg

[Where  is length of the string] ( = 180º)
Tension at a point P : (c) Tension at point C :
(i) At point P required centripetal force mv C 2
2 TC =
mv 
=
 mu2
(a) Net force towards the centre : TC = – 2mg

T – mg cos , which provides required centripetal (Here  = 90º)
force. Thus we conclude that
T A> T C > T B
and also TA – TB = 6 mg
TA – T C = 3 mg
TC – TB = 3 mg
(iii) Cases :

(a) If u > 5g

In this case tension in the string will not be
mv 2 zero at any of the point, which implies that the
 T – mg cos  =
 particle will continue the circular motion.

v2 (b) If u = 5g
T = m [ g cos  + ]
 In this case the tension at the top most point
m (B) will be zero, which implies that the particle
= [u2 – gl (2 – 3cos )]
 will just complete the circular motion.
61 CIRCULAR MOTION

(c) Critical Velocity : The minimum velocity at direction of centrifugal force is opposite to the direction of
centripetal force i.e. centrifugal force acts along the radius
which the circular motion is possible
and away from the centre of the circle.
The critical velocity at A = 5g
Note that centripetal and centrifugal forces, being the
The critical velocity at B = g forces of action and reaction act always on different
bodies. For example, when a piece of stone tied to one end
The critical velocity at C = 3g of a string is rotated in a circle, centripetal force F1 is applied
Also TA = 6 mg, TB = 0, TC = 3 mg on the stone by the hand. In turn, the hand is pulled
outwards by centrifugal force F2 acting on it, due to
(d) If 2g < u < 5g tendency of the stone to regain its natural straight line
In this case particle will not follow circular path. The centripetal and centrifugal forces are shown in
Fig.
motion. Tension in string becomes zero
somewhere between points C & B whereas
F2 Stone
velocity remain positive. Particle leaves circular
F1
path and follow parabolic trajectory Hand

10. ROUNDING A LEVEL CURVED ROAD

When a vehicle goes round a curved road, it requires

some centripetal force. While rounding the curve, the
wheels of the vehicle have a tendency to leave the curved
path and regain the straight line path. Force of friction
(e) If u = 2g between the wheels and the road opposes this tendency
In this case both velocity and tension in the of the wheels. This force (of friction) therefore, acts,
string becomes zero between A and C and towards the centre of the circular track and provides the
necessary centripetal force.
particle will oscillate along semi-circular path.
Three forces are acting on the car, fig.
(f) If u < 2g
R
The velocity of particle remains zero between A
and C but tension will not be zero and the
particle will oscillate about the point A.
F
9. CENTRIFUGAL FORCE
The natural tendency of a body is to move uniformly
along a straight line. When we apply centripetal force on
mg
the body, it is forced to move along a circle. While moving
actually along a circle, the body has a constant tendency
(i) The weight of the car, mg, acting vertically downwards,
to regain its natural straight line path. This tendency
gives rise to a force called centrifugal force. Hence (ii) Normal reaction R of the road on the car, acting vertically
upwards,
Centrifugal force is a force that arises when a body is
moving actually along a circular path, by virtue of (iii) Frictional Force F, along the surface of the road, towards
tendency of the body to regain its natural straight line the centre of the turn, as explained already.
path. As there is no acceleration in the vertical direction,
Centrifugal forces can be regarded as the reaction of R – mg = 0 or R = mg ...(1)
centripetal force. As forces of action and reaction are always The centripetal force required for circular motion is along
equal and opposite, therefore, magnitude of centrifugal force the surface of the road, towards the centre of the turn.
= m v2/r, which is same as that of centripetal force. However,
CIRCULAR MOTION 62

As explained above, it is the static friction that provides

the necessary centripetal force. Clearly,

mv 2 R Rcos
F ...(2) 
r Rsin A
OUTER
where v is velocity of car while turning and r is radius of EDGE
RAISED
circular track. mg
O X
As F = sR = s mg, [using (1)]  B

where s is coefficient of static friction between the tyres

and the road. Therefore, from (2),

mv 2
  s mg or v   s rg  v max   s rg
r
...(3) R R sin
A
Hence the maximum velocity with which a vehicle can go 
round a level curve ; without skidding is F cos
R sin 
v   s rg .
F sin 
O X
The value of depends on radius r of the curve and on mg
coefficient of static friction (s) between the tyres and
the road. Clearly, v is independent of mass of the car. Three forces are acting on the vehicle as shown in Fig.
(i) Weight mg of the vehicle acting vertically downwards.
11. BANKING OF ROADS (ii) Normal reaction R of the banked road acting upwards in
a direction perpendicular to OA.
The maximum permissible velocity with which a vehicle
can go round a level curved road without skidding (iii) Force of friction F between the banked road and the
depends on , the coefficient of friction between the tyres tyres, acting along AO.
and the road. The value of  decreases when road is R can be resolved into two rectangular components :-
smooth or tyres of the vehicle are worn out or the road is (i) R cos , along vertically upward direction
wet and so on. Thus force of friction is not a reliable source (ii) R sin , along the horizontal, towards the centre of the
for providing the required centripetal force to the vehicle. curved road.
A safer course of action would be to raise outer edge of F can also be resolved into two rectangular components
the curved road above the inner edge. By doing so, a :
componenet of normal reaction of the road shall be spared
(i) F cos , along the horizontal, towards the centre of
to provide the centripetal force. The phenomenon of
curved road
raising outer edge of the curved road above the inner
edge is called banking of roads. We can calculate the (ii) F sin , along vertically downward direction.
angle of banking , as detailed below: As there is no acceleration along the vertical direction,
In Fig., OX is a horizontal line. OA is the level of banked the net force along this direction must be zero. Therefore,
curved road whose outer edge has been raised. XOA R cos = mg + F sin ...(1)
=  = angle of banking. If v is velocity of the vehicle over the banked circular
road of radius r, then centripetal force required = mv2/r.
This is provided by the horizontal components of R and
F as shown in Fig.

mv 2
 R sin   Fcos   ...(2)
r
 63 CIRCULAR MOTION

But F < s R, where s is coefficient of static friction and the road, and the vehicle will not skid.
between the banked road and the tyres. To obtain vmax, The speed limit at which the curve can be negotiated
we put F = s R in (1) and (2). safely is clearly indicated on the sign boards erected
along the curved roads.
R cos  = mg + s R sin  ...(3)
Note that curved railway tracks are also banked for the
2 same reason. The level of outer rail is raised a little above
mv
and R sin  + s R cos  = ...(4) the level of inner rail, while laying a curved railway track.
r
From (3), R (cos – s sin ) = mg 12. BENDING OF A CYCLIST

mg When a cyclist takes a turn, he also requires some

R ...(5)
cos   s sin  centripetal force. If he keeps himself vertical while turning,
his weight is balanced by the normal reaction of the
ground. In that event, he has to depend upon force of
mv 2 friction between the tyres and the road for obtaining the
From (4), R(sin  + s cos ) =
r necessary centripetal force. As force of friction is small
and uncertain, dependence on it is not safe.
mg  sin   s cos   mv 2 To avoid dependence on force of friction for obtaining
Using (5), 
 cos   s sin   r centripetal force, the cyclist has to bend a little inwards
from his vertical position, while turning. By doing so, a
rg  sin   s cos   component of normal reaction in the horizontal direction
 v2   provides the necessary centripetal force. To calculate
 cos   s sin   the angle of bending with vertical, suppose
rg cos   tan   s  m = mass of the cyclist,
cos  1  s tan   v = velocity of the cyclist while turning,
1/ 2 r = radius of the circular path,
 rg  s  tan   
v  ...(6)  = angle of bending with vertical.
 1  s tan   
In Fig., we have shown weight of the cyclist (mg) acting
vertically downwards at the centre of gravity C. R is force
This is the max. velocity of vehicle on a banked road.
of reaction of the ground on the cyclist. It acts at an
Discussion angle with the vertical.
1. If s = 0, i.e., if banked road is perfectly smooth, then R
Rcos
from eqn. (51),

Y
1/ 2 C
Rsin
v 0   rg tan   ...(7) 

This is the speed at which a banked road can be rounded mg

even when there is no friction. Driving at this speed on a
banked road will cause almost no wear and tear of the
O X
tyres.
R can be resolved into two rectangular components:
2 2
From (7), v 0
= rg tan  or tan   v / rg ...(8)
0 R cos , along the vertical upward direction,
2. If speed of vehicle is less than v0, frictional force will be R sin , along the horizontal, towards the centre of the
up the slope. Therefore, the vehicle can be parked only if circular track.
tan  < s. In equilibrium, R cos  balances the weight of the cyclist i.e.
Roads are usually banked for the average speed of R cos  = mg ...(1)
vehicles passing over them. However, if the speed of a
vehicle is somewhat less or more than this, the self and R sin provides the necessary centripetal force (m v2/r)
adjusting static friction will operate between the tyres
CIRCULAR MOTION 64

9. On a rotating platform, to avoid the skidding of

m v2
 R sin   ...(2) an object placed at a distance r from axis of
r
rotation, the maximum angular velocity of the
R sin  m v 2 platform,   = (g / r ) , where  is the
Dividing (2) by (1), we get 
R cos  r mg
coefficient of friction between the object and
the platform.
v2
tan   10. If an inclined plane ends into a circular loop of
rg
radius r, then the height from which a
Clearly, would depend on v and r. body should slide from the inclined plane in
order to complete the motion in circular track is
For a safe turn,  should be small, for which v should be
h = 5r/2.
small and r should be large i.e. turning should be at a
slow speed and along a track of larger radius. This means, 11. Minimum velocity that should be imparted to a
a safe turn should neither be fast nor sharp. pendulum to complete the vertical circle is
(5g ) , where l is the length of the pendulum.
TIPS AND TRICKS 12. While describing a vertical circle when the stone
1. Centripetal force does not increase the kinetic is in its lowest position, the tension in the string
energy of the particle moving in circular path, is six times the weight of the stone.
hence the work done by the force is zero.
13. The total energy of the stone while revolving in
2. Centrifuges are the apparatuses used to vertical circle is (5/2) mgl.
separate small and big particles from a liquid.
14. When the stone is in horizontal position then
3. The physical quantities which remain constant
the tension in the string is 3mg and the velocity
for a particle moving in circular path are speed,
kinetic energy and angular momentum. of the stone is ( 3g  ) .
4. If a body is moving on a curved road with speed 15. If the velocity of the stone at the highest point
greater than the speed limit, the reaction at the is X mg, then the tension at the lowest point
inner wheel disappears and it will leave the will be (X + 6)mg.
ground first.
16. If a body of mass m is tied to a string of length
5. On unbanked curved roads the minimum radius
l and is projected with a horizontal velocity u
of curvature of the curve for safe driving is r = v2/
g, where v is the speed of the vehicle and  is such that it does not complete the motion in
small. the vertical circle, then
6. If r is the radius of curvature of the speed (a) the height at which the velocity vanishes is
breaker, then the maximum speed with which u2
the vehicle can run on it without leaving contact h =
2g
with the ground is v = ( gr )
(b) the height at which the tension vanishes is
7. While taking a turn on the level road sometimes
u 2  g
vehicles overturn due to centrifugal force. h =
3g
8. If h is the height of centre of gravity above the
17. K.E. of a body moving in horizontal circle is
road, a is half the wheel base then for road
same throughout the path but the K.E. of the
mv 2 body moving in vertical circle is different at
safety .h < mg . a,  Minimum safe speed different places.
r

for no overturning is v = ( gar / h) .

 65 CIRCULAR MOTION

SOLVED EXAMPLES
Ex.1 The magnitude of the linear acceleration, the 2 2
     
particle moving in a circle of radius of 10 cm Change in velocity v =    
 30   30 
with uniform speed completing the circle in 4 s,
will be - 
= 2 cm/s
30
(A) 5 cm/s2 (B) 2.5 cm/s2
Hence correct answer is (B)
(C) 52 cm/s2 (D) 2.52 cm/s2
Sol.(D) The distance covered in completing the circle is Ex.4 An electron is moving in a circular orbit of ra-
2r = 2 × 10 cm dius 5.3 × 10–11 metre around the atomic
The linear speed is nucleus at a rate of 6.6 × 1015 revolutions per
2r 2  10 second. The acceleration of the electron and
v = = = 5 cm/s centripetal force acting on it will be - (The mass
t 4
The linear acceleration is, of the electron is 9.1 × 10–kg)
2 (A) 8.3 × 10–8N (B) 3.8 × 10–8N
v2 (5 )
a = = = 2.5 2 cm/s2 (C) 4.15 × 10–8N (D) 2.07 × 10–8N
r 10
This acceleration is directed towards the centre
Sol.(A) Let the radius of the orbit be r and the number
of the circle
of revolutions per second be n. Then the velocity
Hence correct answer is (D)
of electron is given by
v = 2nr,
Ex.2 A cane filled with water is revolved in a
vertical circle of radius 4 m and water just does v2 4 2r 2n 2
not fall down. The time period of revo-
 Acceleration a = =
r r
lution will be - = 4 2 r n2
(A) 1 s (B) 10 s Substituting the given values, we have
(C) 8 s (D) 4 s a = 4 × (3.14)2 × (5.3 × 10–11) (6.6 × 1015)2
= 9.1 × 1022 m/s2 towards the nucleus.
Sol.(D) We know that The centripetal force is
Circumfere nce 2r FC = ma = (9.1 × 10–31) (9.1 × 1022)
Time period = Critical speed = gr = 8.3 × 10–8 N towards the nucleus.
Hence correct answer is (A)
2  22  4
=
7  10  4 = 4 sec Ex.5 An air craft executes a horizontal loop of radius
1 km with a steady speed of 900 km/h. The ratio
Hence correct answer is (D)
of centripetal acceleration to that gravitational
acceleration will be-
Ex.3 The length of second's hand in a watch is 1
(A) 1 : 6.38 (B) 6. 38 : 1
cm. The change in velocity of its tip in 15
(C) 2.25 : 9.8 (D) 2.5 : 9.8
seconds is -
 Sol.(B) Given that radius of horizontal loop
(A) 0 (B) cm/s r = 1 km = 1000 m
30 2
9000  5
  2 Speed v = 900 km/h =
(C) cm/s (D) cm/s 18
30 30
= 250 m/s
Circumference 2r
Sol.(B) Velocity = Time of revolution = v2 250  250
60 Centripetal acceleration ac= =
r 1000
2  1  = 62.5 m/s2
= = cm/s
60 30
CIRCULAR MOTION 66

Centripetal acceleration ac mv 2
 = mg – R, R should not be negative.
Gravitational acceleration = g (r  h)
Therefore v2  (r + a)g = (8.9 + 1.1) × 10
62.5
=
9 .8
= 6.38 : 1 or v2  10 × 10v  10 m/sec
Hence correct answer is (B)  vmax = 10 m/sec
Hence correct answer is (C)
Ex.6 A car driver is negotiating a curve of radius 100
m with a speed of 18 km/hr. The angle through Ex.9 The maximum speed at which a car can turn
which he has to lean from the vertical will be - round a curve of 30 metre radius on a level road
if the coefficient of friction between the tyres
1 1 and the road is 0.4, will be -
(A) tan–1 (B) tan–1
4 40 (A) 10.84 m/s (B) 17.84 m/s
(C) 11.76 m/s (D) 9.02 m/s
 1  1 
(C) tan–1   (D) tan–1  
2  20  Sol.(A) Let W = Mg be the weight of the car. Friction
force = 0.4 W
2
 5 
v 2
18   Mv 2 Wv 2
Sol.(B) We know that, tan  = =  18  Centripetal force = =
rg r gr
100  10

1 1 Wv 2
=   = tan–1 0.4 W =
gr
40 40
Hence correct answer is (B)  v2 = 0.4 × g × r = 0.4 × 9.8 × 30 = 117.6
Ex.7 Write an expression for the position vector r for  v = 10.84 m/sec
a particle describing uniform circular motion, Hence correct answer is (A)
using rectangular co-ordinates and the unit
vectors i and j. The vector expressions for the Ex.10 The angular speed with which the earth would
velocity v and acceleration a will be- have to rotate on it axis so that a person on the
(A) r2 (B) –2r/2 equator would weight (3/5)th as much as present
will be: (Take the equatorial radius as 6400 km)
(C) –r2 (D) –2r
(A) 8.7 × 104 rad/sec (B) 8.7 × 103 rad/sec
Sol.(D) r = î x + ĵ y, x = r cos ,
(C) 7.8 × 104 rad/sec (D) 7.8 × 103 rad/sec
y = r sin  where  = t Sol.(C) Let v be the speed of earth's rotation.
r = î ( r cos t) + ĵ (r sin t) We know that W = mg

v = dr/dt = – î (r sin t) – ĵ ( r cos t)

3 mv 2
Hence W = mg –
5 r
a = d2 r/dt2 = – 2 r
Hence correct answer is (D) 3 mv 2
or mg = mg –
Ex.8 The vertical section of a road over a canal bridge 5 r
in the direction of its length is in the form of
circle of radius 8.9 metre. Find the greatest 2 mv 2 2g r
 mg = or v2 =
speed at which the car can cross this bridge 3 r 5
without losing contact with the road at its
highest point, the center of gravity of the car 2  9.8  ( 6400  10 3 )
Now v2 =
being at a height h = 1.1 metre from the ground. 5
(Take g = 10 m/sec2) Solving, we get v = 5 × 109 m/sec,
(A) 5 m/s (B) 7 m/s
(C) 10 m/s (D) 13 m/s  2g 
Sol.(C) Let R be the normal reaction exerted by the =   = 7.8 × 104 radian/sec.
 5r 
road on the car. At the highest point, we have
Hence correct answer is (C)
 67 CIRCULAR MOTION

Ex.11 A man whirls a stone round his head on the end Ex.12 A smooth table is placed horizontally and a
of a string 4.0 metre long. Can the string be in spring of unstreched length l0 and force constant
a horizontal, plane? If the stone has a mass of k has one end fixed to its centre. To the other
0.4 kg and the string will break, if the tension end of the spring is attached a mass m which
in it exceeds 8 N. The smallest angle the string is making n revolutions per second around the
can make with the horizontal and the speed of centre. Tension in the spring will be
the stone will respectively be (Take g = 10 m/ (A) 42 m k l0 n2/ (k – 42 m n2)
sec2) (B) 42 m k l0 n2/ (k + 42 m n2)
(A) 30º, 7.7 m/s (B) 60º, 7.7 m/s (C) 22 m k l0 n2/ (k – 42 m n2)
(C) 45º, 8.2 m/s (D) 60º, 8.7 m/s (D) 2 m k l0 n2/ (k – 42 m n2)
Sol.(A) O Sol.(A) Let T be the tension produced in the stretched
string. The centripetal force required for the mass
m to move in a circle is provided by the tension
 l
T. The stretched length of the spring is r (radius
T Tcos of the circle). Now,
T  Elongation produced in the spring = (r – l0)

A  Tsin  Tension produced in the spring,

T = k (r – l0) ........ (1)
mg
Where k is the force constant
mg
Form figure Linear velocity of the motion v = 2 r n
T cos  = mg ...... (1)
mv 2 m(2rn)2
 Centripetal force = =
mv 2 mv 2 r r
T sin  = = ...... (2) 2 2
r  sin = 4 r n m ........ (2)
Equating equation. (1) and (2), we get
mg
Form eq. (1) T = k (r – l0) = 42 r n2 m
cos 
( T = mv2/r)
When the string is horizontal,  must be 90º
i.e.,cos 90º = 0  kr – k l0 = 4 2 r n2 m
mg r (k – 42 n2 m) = k l0
 T = = 
0 k 0
Thus the tension must be infinite which is  r = (k  4 2n 2m) ........(3)
impossible, so the string can not be in horizontal
Substituting the value of r in eqn. (1) we have
plane.
The maximum angle  is given by the breaking  k 0 
tension of the string in the equation T cos  = T = k  2 2
 0 
m.g  (k  4 n m) 
Here T (Maximum) = 8 N and m = 0.4 kg
 8 cos  = 0.4 × g = 0.4 × 10 = 4 4  2 n 2m  0 k
or T = ........ (4)
(k  4 2n 2m)
1
cos  = (4/8) = ,  = 60º Hence correct answer is (A)
2
The angle with horizontal = 90º – 60º = 30º
Ex.13 A motor car is travelling at 30 m/s on a circular
0.4  v 2 road of radius 500 m. It is increasing its speed
From equation (2), 8 sin 60º =
4 sin 60 o at the rate of 2 m/s2. Its net acceleration is (in
m/s2) –
32 sin2 60º (A) 2 (B) 1. 8
v2 = = 80 sin2 60º
0.4 (C) 2.7 (D) 0
Sol.(C) Two types of acceleration are experienced by
 v= 80 sin 60º = 7.7 m/sec the car
Hence correct answer is (A) (i) Radial acceleration due to circular path,
 CIRCULAR MOTION 68

v2 (30 )2 From equation (2) v 2D = 2g (h – 2r),

ar = = = 1.8 m/s2
r 500 5
(ii) A tangential acceleration due to increase of  2g (h – 2r)  r g  h  r
2
tangential speed given by Hence correct answer is (A)
at = v/t = 2 m/s2
Radial and tangential acceleration are
Ex.15 An aircraft loops the loop of radius R = 500 m
perpendicular to each other.
with a constant velocity v = 360 km/hour. The
Net acceleration of car a
weight of the flyer of mass m = 70 kg in the
2 lower, upper and middle points of the loop will
= ar2  a 2t = (1.8 )2  ( 2) 2 = 2.7 m/s
respectively be-
Hence correct answer is (C) (A) 210 N, 700 N, 1400 N
(B) 1400 N, 700 N, 2100 N
Ex.14 In figure ABCDE is a channel in the vertical (C) 700 N, 1400 N, 210 N,
plane, part BCDE being circular with radius r. A (D) 2100 N, 700 N, 1400 N
ball is released from A and slides without friction Sol.(D) See fig, Here v = 360 km/hr = 100 m/sec
and without rolling. It will complete the loop path
-
(A) if h is greater than 5r/2 N
(B) if h is less than 5r/2 mg
(C) if h is greater than 2r/5  N
(D) if h is less than 2r/5
Sol.(A) N
A
D
E
h r
C mg
r
r mv 2
At lower point, N – mg = ,
R
B

Let m be the mass of the ball. When the ball mv 2

N = weight of the flyer = mg +
comes down to B, its potential energy mgh which R
is converted into kinetic energy. Let vB, be the
70  (10000 )
N = 70 × 10 + = 2100 N
velocity of the ball at B. Then, mgh = 500

1 mv 2
m vB 2 At upper point, N + mg = ,
2 R

The ball now rises to a point D, where its mv 2

N = – mg = 1400 – 700 = 700 N
potential energy is mg(h – 2r). If vD be the R

velocity of the ball at D, then, mv 2

At middle point, N = = 1400 N
R
1
m g (h – 2 r) = m v 2D ......(2) Hence correct answer is (D)
2
Now to complete the circular path, it is Ex.16 A particle of mass 3 kg is moving under the
necessary that the centrifugal force acting action of a central force whose potential energy
upward at point D, should be equal or greater is given by U(r) = 10 r3 joule. For what energy
than the force mg acting downward at point D and angular momentum will the orbit be a circle
should be equal or greater than the force mg of radius 10 m-
acting downward. Therefore
(A) 2.5 × 104 J, 3000 kgm 2/sec
(B) 3.5 × 104 J, 2000 kgm 2/sec
2
mv D
 mg or v 2D  r g
r (C) 2.5 × 103 J, 300 kgm 2/sec
(D) 3.5 × 103 J, 300 kgm 2/sec
 69 CIRCULAR MOTION

Sol.(A) Given that U(r) = 10r3

2 
(A) (B)
So the force F acting on the particle is given by, 3 3

U  4 5
F = – = – (10 r3) (C) (D)
r r 3 3

= –10 × 3 r2 = –30 r2  Total angular displaceme nt

Sol.(A) We have  av =
For circular motion of the particle, Total time
For first one third part of circle,
mv 2
F = = 30 r2 angular displacement,
r
S1 2r / 3
3  v2 1 = =
Substituting the given values, we have, r r
10 For second one third part of circle,

= 30 × (10)2 or v = 100 m/s 2r / 3 2

2 = = rad
r 3
The total energy in circular motion
Total angular displacement,
1
E = K.E. + P.E. = mv2 + U(r)  = 1 + 2 = 4/3 rad
2
Total time = 2 + 1 = 3 sec
1
= × 3 × (100)2 + 10 + (10)3  4 / 3
2   av = rad/s
3
= 2.5 × 104 joule 4 2
Angular momentum = = rad/s
6 3
= mvr = 3 × 100 × 10 = 3000 kg–m 2/sec Hence correct answer is (A)
2r 2    10 
Also time period T = = = sec Ex.19 The ratio of angular speeds of minute hand and
v 100 5
Hence correct answer is (A) hour hand of a watch is -
Ex.17 A particle completes 1.5 revolutions in a circular (A) 1 : 12 (B) 6 : 1
path of radius 2 cm. The angular displacement (C) 12 : 1 (D) 1 : 6
of the particle will be -
(in radian) Sol.(C) Angular speed of hour hand,
(A) 6  (B) 3 
(C) 2  (D)   2
1 = = 12  60 rad/sec
t
Sol.(D) We have angular displacement
linear displaceme nt angular speed of minute hand,
=
radius of path
S 2 2 12
  = 2 = rad/sec   =
r 60 1 1
Here, S = n(2r)
= 1.5 (2 × 2 × 10–2) Hence correct answer is (C).
= 6 × 10–2
Ex.20 The angular displacement of a particle is given
6  10 2
  = = 3 radian 1 2
2  10  2 by  = 0t + t , where 0 and  are constant
Hence correct answer is (B) 2
and 0 = 1 rad/sec,  = 1.5 rad/sec2. The angular
Ex.18 A particle revolving in a circular path completes velocity at time, t = 2 sec will be (in rad/sec) -
first one third of circumference in 2 sec, while
(A) 1 (B) 5 (C) 3 (D) 4
next one third in 1 sec. The average angular
velocity of particle will be : 1 2
Sol.(D) We have  = 0t + t
(in rad/sec) 2
 CIRCULAR MOTION 70

d a 3t  2
 = 0 + t  =
  =
dt r 2  10  2
This is angular velocity at time t. Now Angular acceleration at
angular velocity at t = 2 sec will be t = 2 sec

 d  3  22 8
 =  dt  = 0 + 2 ()at t = 2sec = 2 × 102
=
  t 2 sec 2  10 2
= 4 × 102 = 400 rad/sec2
= 1 + 2 x 1.5 = 4 rad/sec
Hence correct answer is (C)
Hence correct answer is (D)

Ex.21 A particle moves in a circle of radius 20cm with Ex.24 A grind stone starts from rest and
a linear speed of 10m/s. The angular velocity will has a constant-angular acceleration of
be - 4.0 rad/sec2.The angular displacement and an-
(A) 50 rad/s (B) 100 rad/s gular velocity, after 4 sec. will respectively be -
(C) 25 rad/s (D) 75 rad/s (A) 32 rad, 16 rad/sec (B) 16rad, 32 rad/s
Sol. The angular velocity is (C) 64rad, 32 rad/sec (D) 32 rad, 64rad/sec
v Sol. Angular displacement after 4 sec is
=
r 1
 = 0t + t2
Hence v = 10 m/s 2
r= 20 cm = 0.2 m, 1 1
= t2 = × 4 × 42
  = 50 rad/s 2 2
Hence correct answer is (A) = 32 rad
Angular velocity after 4 sec
Ex.22 The angular velocity of a particle is given by  =
1.5 t – 3t 2 + 2, the time when its angular  = 0 + t
acceleration decreases to be zero will be - = 0 + 4 × 4 = 16 rad/sec
(A) 25 sec (B) 0.25 sec Hence correct answer is (A)
(C) 12 sec (D) 1.2 sec
Ex.25 The shaft of an electric motor starts from rest
Sol.(B) Given that  = 1.5t – 3t2 + 2 and on the application of a torque, it gains an
d angular acceleration given by
 = = 1.5 – 6t  = 3t – t2 during the first 2 seconds after it
dt
When  = 0 starts after which  = 0. The angular velocity
 1.5 – 6t = 0 after 6 sec will be -
1 .5
 t = = 0.25 sec (A) 10/3 rad/sec (B) 3/10 rad/sec
6
(C) 30/4 rad/sec (D) 4/30 rad/sec
Hence correct answer is (B)
Sol.(A) Given  = 3t – t2
Ex.23 A particle is moving in a circular path with veloc- d
ity varying with time as v = 1.5t2 + 2t. If 2 cm  = 3t – t2
dt
the radius of circular path, the angular accelera- d = (3t – t2)dt

tion at t = 2 sec will be -
(A) 4 rad/sec2 (B) 40 rad/sec2 3t 2 t3
 =  c
(C) 400 rad/sec2 (D) 0.4 rad/sec2 2 3
at t = 0,  = 0
Sol.(C) Given v = 1.5 t2 + 2t
Linear acceleration a 3t 2 t3
 c = 0,  = 
dv 2 3
= = 3t + 2
dt Angular velocity at
This is the linear acceleration at time t t = 2 sec, t = 2 sec
Now angular acceleration at time t 3 8 10
= (4)  = rad/sec
2 3 3
 71 CIRCULAR MOTION

Since there is no angular acceleration

after 2 sec mv 2
Sol.(A) F = = mr2
r
 The angular velocity after 6 sec remains the
same. Here m = 0.10 kg,
Hence correct answer is (A) r = 0.5 m
Ex.26 A ball is fixed to the end of a string and is 2n 2  3.14  10
and = =
rotated in a horizontal circle of radius 5 m with t 31.4
a speed of 10 m/sec. The acceleration of the = 2 rad/s
ball will be - F = 0.10 × 0.5 × (2)2 = 0.2
(A) 20 m/s2 (B) 10 m/s2 Hence correct answer is (A)
(C) 30 m/s2 (D) 40 m/s2 Ex.29 A body of mass 4 kg is moving in a
horizontal circle of radius 1 m with an
v2 angular velocity of 2 rad/s. The required cen-
Sol.(A) We know a = tripetal force, will be -
r
Hence v = 10 m/s, r = 5 m (A) 16 N (B) 1.6 N
(C) 16 Dyne (D) 1.6 Dyne
(10 )2 Sol.(A) F = mr2= 4 × 1 × 22 = 16 N
 a = = 20 m/s2
5 Hence correct answer is (A)
Hence correct answer is (A) Ex.30 The safe velocity required for scooterist
Ex.27 A body of mass 2 kg lying on a smooth surface negotiating a curve of radius 200 m on a road
is attached to a string 3 m long and then whirled with the angle of repose of tan–1(0.2) will be-
round in a horizontal circle making 60 revolution (A) 20 km/hr (B) 200 m/s
per minute. The centripetal acceleration will (C) 72 km/hr (D) 72 m/s
be - Sol.(C) As the centripetal force is supplied by the
(A) 118.4 m/s2 (B)1.18 m/s2 frictional force, hence
(C) 2.368 m/s 2 (D) 23.68 m/s2 mv 2 v2
 mg =  0.2 =
Sol.(A) Given that the mass of the particle, r 200  10
m = 2 kg  = tan–1 (0.2) = tan –1 ()   = (0.2)]
radius of circle = 3 m
 v = 20 m/s
Angular velocity = 60 rev/minute 18
The safe speed is 20 × = 72 km/hr
5
60  2 Hence correct answer is (C)
= rad/sec
60
Ex.31 A body of mass 4 kg is tied to one end of a rope
= 2 rad/sec of length 40 cm and whirled in a horizontal circle.
The maximum number of revolutions per minute
Because the angle described during
it can be whirled so that the rope does not snap
1 revolution is 2 radian
as the rope can with stand to a tension of 6.4
The linear velocity Newton, will be -
v = r (A) 1.91 (B) 19.1 (C) 191 (D) 1910
= 2 × 3 m/s = 6 m/s Sol.(B) Tension in the rope = mr2 = mr 42n2
Maximum tension = 6.4 N
The centripetal acceleration  6.4 = 4 × 0.4 × 4 × 2n2
 Number of revolutions per minutes
v2 ( 6 )2 = 60/= 19.1
= = m/s2 = 118.4 m/s2
r 3 Hence correct answer is (B)
Hence correct answer is (A) Ex.32 A certain string which is 1 m long will break, if
Ex.28 A body of mass 0.1 kg is moving on circular the load on it is more than 0.5 kg. A mass of
path of diameter 1.0 m at the rate of 10 0.05 kg is attached to one end of it and the
revolutions per 31.4 seconds. The centripetal particle is whirled round a horizontal circle by
force acting on the body is - holding the free end of the string by one hand.
(A) 0.2 N (B) 0.4 N The greatest number of revolutions per minute
(C) 2 N (D) 4 N possible without breaking the string will be-
(A) 9.45 (B) 94.5 (C) 99.5 (D) 9.95
CIRCULAR MOTION 72

Sol.(B) Mass of the body m = 0.05 kg , Net force towards the centre,
Radius of circular path = 1 m
GMm
The maximum tension in the string can FG =
withstand = 0.5 kg wt = 0.5 × 9.8 N = 4.9 N r2
Hence the centripetal force required to (This force will provide required centripetal force)
produce the maximum tension in the string is Therefore FC = FG
4.9 N
mv 2 GMm
4.9 4.9  =
i.e. mr2 = 4.9  2 = = 0.05  1 = 98 r r2
mr
GM
98  v=
  = 98  n = 98  n = r
2 Hence correct answer is (A)
= 1.1576 rev/sec = 94.5 rev/min
Hence correct answer is (B) Note :
Ex.33 A body of mass m is attached with a string of
(i) From above example we see that orbital velocity
length l. If it is whirled in a horizontal circular
of a body is independent to its mass
path with velocity v. The tension in the string will
be - (ii) If we are asked to find out time period of above
body then time period can be calculated as
mv 2
(A) mv2l (B)
 2r r3
T = = 2
m mv 2 v GM
(C) (D) 2 3
v2 2 T  r this is Kepler's law.
Sol.(B) Required centripetal force , Ex.35 Three identical particles are connected by three
strings as shown in fig. These particles are
mv 2
Fc = revolving in a horizontal plane. The velocity of
 outer most particle is v. Then T1 : T2 : T3 will
Here centripetal force is provided by the tension be - (Where T1 is tension in the outer most
in the string string etc.)
v

T mv 2
 m  O
m m m
l l l

mg
mv 2
T = Fc =

Hence correct answer is (B) (A) 3 : 5 : 7 (B) 3 : 5 : 6
Ex.34 A satellite of mass m is revolving around the (C) 3 : 4 : 5 (D) 7 : 5 : 3
earth of mass M in circular orbit of radius r. The Sol.(B) For A :
orbital velocity of the satellite will be - vc vB vA

GM Gm GM Gm
(A) (B) (C) (D) O B
r r mr Mr T3 C T2 T1 A

Sol. The required centripetal force,

mv 2 Required centripetal force
FC = (towards the centre)
r mvA2
=
v  3l
FG (net force towards centre = T1)
O This will provide required centripetal force
mvA2
particle at A, T 1 =
3l
 73 CIRCULAR MOTION

For B : mv 2
(iii) Reaction of the centripetal force acting
Required centripetal force r
radially outwards.
m(vB2 )
= Resolving N into horizontal and vertical
2 components we obtain
Remember  i.e. angular velocity, of all the
particles is same mv 2
N cos  = and N sin  = mg
vA vB vC r
 = = =
3 2 
Thus for B, centripetal force
2mv 2A
=
9
Net force towards the centre
2mv 2A
T2 – T1 =
9
2mv 2A 5mv 2A
 T2 = + T1 =
9 9l
(Putting value of T1)
N sin  mg
 =
For C : N cos  mv 2 / r
mvC2 mvA2 rg
Centripetal force. =  tan  = 2
3l 9l v
Net force towards centre = T3 – T2 r
But tan  =
h
mv A2
 T3 – T2 = r rg
9l  = 2
h v
mvA2
 T3 = + T2
9l  v= hg = 9.8  9.8  10 2
6 mvA2 = 0.98 m/s
T3 = Hence correct answer is (B)
9l
(on putting value of T2) Ex.37 A string of length 1 m is fixed at one end and
carries a mass of 100 gm at the other end. The
1 5 6 string makes 2/ revolutions per second about
Now T1 : T2 : T3 = : : = 3 : 5 : 6
3 9 9 a vertical axis through the fixed end. The angle
of inclination of the string with the vertical, and
Note: It is to be pondered from the above example that the linear velocity of the mass will respectively
as the velocity is increased continuously, the be - (in M.K.S. system)
innermost string will break first i.e. T3 > T2 > T1
(A) 52º14', 3.16 (B) 50º14', 1.6
Hence correct answer is (B) (C) 52º14', 1.6 (D) 50º14', 3.16
Ex.36 A particle describes a horizontal circle on the Sol.(A) Let T be the tension,  the angle made by the
smooth surface of an inverted cone. The height string with the vertical through the point of sus-
of the plane of the circle above the vertex is 9.8 pension.
cm. The speed of the particle will be -
The time period

(A) 9.8 m/s (B) 0.98 m/s 

h 1 T
(C) 0.098 m/s (D) 98 m/s t = 2 g = frequency = /2
h
Sol.(B) The force acting on particle are
(i) weight mg acting vertically downward
(ii) Normal reaction N of the smooth surface of the Therefore =
g
= 4 
h
cone.
mg
CIRCULAR MOTION 74

at = 100 m/sec2 (given)

h 1
 g =  anet = a c2  a 2t  2a c a t cos 90 o
16

h g
= ac 2  a t 2
cos  = = = 0.6125   = 52º 14'
 16 = ( 400 )2  (100 )2
Linear velocity = 100 17 m/s2
= (l sin ) =1 × sin 52º 14' × 4 = 3.16 m/s [Remember the angle between a t i.e. the
Hence correct answer is (A) tangential acceleration and ac i.e. the radial
Ex.38 A particle of mass m is moving in a circular acceleration, is always 90º]
path of constant radius r such that its centripetal Hence correct answer is (A)
acceleration ac is varying with time t as ac = Ex.40 The kinetic energy of a particle moving along a
k2rt2, where k is a constant. The power delivered circle of radius R depends on distance covered
(s) as T = as2, where a is constant. The force
to the particle by the forces acting on it will be
acting on the particle as a function of s will be
-
-
(A) mk 2t2r (B) mk 2r2t2
1/ 2
(C) m 2k 2t2r2 (D) mk 2r2t  s2  2as
(A) 2as 1  2  (B)
Sol.(D) Centripetal acceleration,  R  R
v2 2as
ac = = k 2 rt2
r (C) 2as s2  R2 (D)
R
 Variable velocity
Sol.(A) The kinetic energy
v= k 2r 2 t 2 = k r t T = as2
The force causing the velocity to varies
1 2
dv  mv = as2
F = m = m k r 2
dt mv 2 2as 2
The power delivered by the force is,  =
R R
P = Fv = mkr × krt = mk 2r2t  Centripetal force or Radial force,
Hence correct answer is (D) 2as 2
Fc = .... (1)
Ex.39 A car is moving in a circular path of radius 100 R
m with velocity of 200 m/sec such that in each
 Further mv2 = 2as2
sec its velocity increases by 100 m/s, the net
acceleration of car will be - 2a
 v= s .... (2)
(in m/sec) m
(A) 100 17 (B) 10 7 dv 2a ds
 =
(C) 10 3 (D) 100 3 dt m dt
Sol.(A) We know centripetal acceleration 2a
2
= v .... (3)
(tangential velocity ) m
a c= Using (2) and (3) gives tangential acceleration,
radius
dv 2a
(200 ) 2 at =
dt
=
m
.v
= = 400 m/sec2
100 2
at  2a 
=   s = 2a s
m  m
 
 m at = 2as
ac  Tangential force,
O Ft = mat = 2as
As centripetal and tangential force are mutually
perpendicular, therefore

Tangential acceleration Total Force, F = Fc2  Ft2

 75 CIRCULAR MOTION

2
 2as 2 
   (2as )2 s2 mv 2
=  = 2as 1 Sol.(A) Maximum tension T = + mg
R  r
  R2
Hence correct answer is (A)
mv 2
Note:  = T – mg
r
In the above example the angle made by F from the
centripetal acceleration will be  4v 2
or = 163.6 – 4 × 9.8
1
 v = 6 m/s
Hence correct answer is (A)

Fc Fc
 Ex.43 The string of a pendulum is horizontal. The mass
Ft of the bob is m. Now the string is released. The
Ft 2as R tension in the string in the lowest position is -
tan  = = 2
= (1) 1 mg (2) 2 mg
Fc 2as / R s
(3) 3 mg (4) 4 mg
Ex.41 A particle of mass m tied with a string of length Sol.(C) The situation is shown in fig. Let v be the velocity
 is released from horizontal as shown in fig. of the bob at the lowest position. In this position
The velocity at the lowest portion will be - the P.E. of bob is converted into K.E. hence -
(A) g (B) 2g
1 1
(C) g (D) g
2 2
Sol.(B) Suppose v be the velocity of particle at the
lowest position B.
According to conservation of energy 1
(K.E. + P.E.) at A = (K.E. + P.E.) at B mgl = mv2
2
 v2 = 2gl ....(1)
l A
O If T be the tension in the string,
mv 2
l then T – mg = ....(2)

From (1) & (2) T = 3 mg
B Hence correct answer is (C)

Ex.44 A ball is released from height h as shown in fig.

mg
Which of the following condition hold good for
1 the particle to complete the circular path?
 0 + mgl = mv2 + 0
2
 v= 2g
Hence correct answer is (B)

Ex.42 A 4 kg balls is swing in a vertical circle at the

end of a cord 1 m long. The maximum speed at
which it can swing if the cord can sustain 5R 5R
maximum tension of 163.6 N will be - (A) h  (B) h 
2 2
(A) 6 m/s (B) 36 m/s 5R 5R
(C) 8 m/s (D) 64 m/s (C) h < (D) h >
2 2
CIRCULAR MOTION 76

Sol.(B) According to law of conservation of energy Sol.(A) Let the particles leaves the sphere at height h,
(K.E + P.E.) at A = (K.E + P.E) at B A
1 N
 0 + mgh = mv2 + 0
2 B
 v = 2gh h
 
But velocity at the lowest point of circle, mg v
5R mv 2
v  5gR  2gh  5gR  h  = mg cos  – N
2 R
Hence correct answer is (B)
When the particle leaves the sphere
Ex.45 The roadway bridge over a canal is the form of i.e. N = 0
an arc of a circle of radius 20 m. What is the mv 2
= mg cos 
minimum speed with which a car can cross the R
bridge without leaving contact with the ground at  v2 = gR cos  ....(1)
the highest point (g = 9.8 m/s2) According to law of conservation of energy
(K.E. + P.E.) at A = (K.E. + P.E.) at B
(A) 7 m/s (B) 14 m/s
1
(C) 289 m/s (D) 5 m/s  0 + mgR = mv2 + mgh
2
Sol.(B) The minimum speed at highest point of a vertical  v2 = 2g (R – h) ....(2)
circle is given by 2
From (1) & (2) h = R
3
vc= rg = 20  9.8 = 14 m/s 2
Also cos  =
Hence correct answer is (B) 3
Hence correct answer is (A)

Ex.46 A cane filled with water is revolved in a vertical Ex.48 A body of mass m tied at the end of a string of
circle of radius 0.5 m and the water does not
length l is projected with velocity 4l g , at what
fall down. The maximum period of revolution must
be - height will it leave the circular path -
(A) 1.45 (B) 2.45 5 3
(A) l (B) l
(C) 14.15 (D) 4.25 3 5
Sol.(A) The speed at highest point must be 1 2
(C) l (D) l
2 3 3
v > gr , v = r = r
T Sol.(A) Let the body will have the circular path at height
h above the bottom of circle from figure
2
 r > rg
T

2r r 0 .5
T < < 2 < 2 < 1.4 sec
rg g 9 .8
Maximum period of revolution = 1.4 sec
Hence correct answer is (A)
Ex.47 A particle of mass m slides down from the vertex
of semi-hemisphere, without any initial velocity.
At what height from horizontal will the particle
leave the sphere- mv 2
= T + mg cos 

2 3 On leaving the circular path
(A) R (B) R
3 2 T= 0

5 8 mv 2
(C) R (D) R  = mg cos 
8 5 
 v2 = g l cos ....(1)
 77 CIRCULAR MOTION

According to law of conservation of energy (A) tan–1(0.283) (B) tan–1(2. 83)

(K.E. + P.E.) at A = (K.E. + P.E.) at B
(C) tan–1(0.05) (D) tan–1(0.5)
1 50
 0 + 2mgl = mv2 + mgh
2 Sol.(A) v = 60 km/hr = m/s
3
 v2 = 2g(2l – h) ....(2)
r = 0.1 km = 100m
5
From (1) & (2) h = l
3 v2
h  tan  = = 0.283
rg
Also cos  =

Hence correct answer is (A)   = tan–1 (0.283)
Hence correct answer is (A)
Ex.49 A vehicle of mass 1000 kg is moving along a
Ex.51 A train has to negotiate a curve of radius 400
curved both of length 314 m with a speed of 72
m. By how much should the outer rail be raised
km/hr. If it takes a turn of 90º, the centripetal with respect to inner rail for a speed of 48 km/
force needed by the vehicle is - hr. The distance between the rail is 1 m.
(A) 20 N (B) 200 N (A) 12 m (B) 12 cm
(C) 2000 N (D) 2 N (C) 4.5 cm (D) 4.5 m
Sol. As the vehicle has a turn of 90º, the length of
1 v2
the path is the part of the circle of Sol.(C) We know that tan  = ..... (1)
4 rg
radius r. Let h be the relative raising of outer rail with
Hence length of the path respect to inner rail. Then
2r h
= 314 = tan  = ...... (2)
4 
4  314
or r = = 200 m (l = separation between rails)
2
v2
mv 2 From (1) & (2) , h = x l
Centripetal force, Fc = rg
r
2 120
1000  5 
= ×  72   = 2000 N Hence v = 48 km/hr = m/s,
200  18  9
Hence correct answer is (C) (r = 400 m, l = 1m),

Ex.50 For a heavy vehicle moving on a circular curve (120 / 9)2  1

h= 400  9.8
= 0.045 m = 4.5 cm
of a highway the road bed is banked at an angle
 corresponding to a particular speed. The Hence correct answer is (C)
correct angle of banking of the road for vehicles
moving at 60 km/hr will be - (If radius of curve
= 0.1 km)
 CIRCULAR MOTION 78

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Equations of Motion Uniform Circular Motion
1. A wheel is subjected to uniform angular 7. A teachnometer is a device to measure -
acceleration about its axis. Initially its angular velocity (A) gravitational pull (B) speed of rotation
is zero. In the first 2 sec, it rotates through an angle ;
(C) surface tension (D) tension in a spring
in the next 2 sec, it rotates through an additional angle
2. The ratio of 2 /1 is- 8. The ratio of angular speed of hours hand and seconds
(A) 1 (B) 2 hand of a clock is-
(C) 3 (D) 5 (A) 1 : 1 (B) 1 : 60
2. In applying the equation for motion with uniform (C) 1 : 720 (D) 3600 : 1
angular acceleration  = 0 +  t, the radian measure - 9. The ratio of angular speeds of minutes hand and hour
(A) must be used for both  and  hand of a watch is -
(B) may be used for both  and  (A) 1 : 12 (B) 6 : 1
(C) may be used for  but not  (C) 12 : 1 (D) 1:6
(D) cannot be used for both  and 
10. Two cars of masses m1 and m2 are moving along the
3. The linear and angular acceleration of a particle are circular path of radius r1 and r2. They take one round in
10 m/sec2 and 5 rad/sec2 respectively it will be at a the same time. The ratio of angular velocities of the
distance from the axis of rotation - two cars will be-
(A) 50 m (B) 1/2 m (A) m1 : m2 (B) r1 : r2
(C) 1 m (D) 2 m (C) 1 : 1 (D) m1 r1 : m2 r2
4. A grinding wheel attained a velocity of 20 rad/sec
11. The angular velocity of earth about its axis of rotation
in 5 sec starting from rest. Find the number of
is-
revolutions made by the wheel.
(A) 2 / ( 60 × 60 × 24 ) rad / sec

(A) revolution per sec (B) 2 / ( 60 × 60 ) rad / sec
25
(C) 2 / 60 rad / sec
1 (D) 2 / ( 365 × 24 × 60 × 60 ) rad / sec
(B) revolution per sec

12. A bottle of soda water is grasped by the neck and swing
25 briskly in a vertical circle. Near which portion of the
(C) revolution
 bottle do the bubbles collect?
(D) None (A) near the near bottom
5. A wheel having a diameter of 3 m starts from rest (B) in the middle of the bottle
and accelerates uniformly to an angular velocity of
210 r.p.m. in 5 seconds. Angular acceleration of the (C) near the neck
wheel is - (D) uniformly distributed in the bottle
rad rad 13. In circular motion, the centripetal acceleration is given
(A) 1.4 (B) 3.3
s2 s2 by-
rad rad (A) a × r (B)  × v
(C) 2.2 2 (D) 1.1
s s2 (C) a × v (D)  × r
6. A wheel starts rotating at 10 rad/sec and attains the 14. The ratio of angular speeds of minutes hand and hour
angular velocity of 100 rad/sec in 15 seconds. What hand of a watch is -
is the angular acceleration in rad/sec2?
(A) 1 : 12 (B) 6 : 1
(A) 10 (B) 110/15
(C) 12 : 1 (D) 1 : 6
(C) 100/15 (D) 6
CIRCULAR MOTION 79

15. A particle moves in a circle of radius 25 cm at two revo- (C) both acceleration and velocity change
lutions per second. The acceleration of particle in m/s2
(D) both acceleration and speed are constant
is -
22. When a body moves with a constant speed along a
(A) 2 (B) 82
circle-
(C) 42 (D) 22
(A) no work is done on it
16. A particle moves in circular path with uniform speed v.
The change in its velocity on rotating through 60º is - (B) no acceleration is produced in the body
(C) no force acts on the body
v
(A) v 2 (B) (D) its velocity remains constant
2
23. What happens to the centripetal acceleration of a
(C) v (D) Zero
revolving body if you double the orbital speed v and
17. Two bodies of masses 10 kg and 5 kg moving on con-
halve the angular velocity  ?
centric orbits of radii R and r such that their period of
revolution are same. The ratio of their centripetal accel- (A) the centripetal acceleration remains unchanged
eration is - (B) the centripetal acceleration is halved

R r (C) the centripetal acceleration is doubled

(A) (B)
r R (D) the centripetal acceleration is quadrupled
24. A body of mass m is moving in a circle of radius r with
R2 r2
(C) 2 (D) a constant speed v. The force on the body is mv2/r and
r R2 u is directed towards the centre. What is the work done
18. A particle is moving in a horizontal circle with constant by this force in moving the body over half the
speed. State whether, the- circumference of the circle?
(A) K.E. is constant (A) mv2/r x r (B) zero
(B) P.E. is constant (C) mv2/r (D) r2/mv2
(C) Both K.E. and P.E. are constant 25. Centrifugal force is considerd as pseudo force when
(D) Neither K.E. nor P.E. are constant (A) An observer at the centre of circular motion
19. A stone of mass m is tied to a string of length l and (B) An outside observe
rotated in a circle with a constant speed v. If the string
(C) An observer who is moving with the particle which
is released, the stone flies-
is experiencing the force
(A) radially outward
(D) None of the above
(B) radially inward
26. A stone of mass 0.5 kg tied with a string of length 1
(C) tangentially outward
metre is moving in a circular path with a speed of 4 m/
(D) with an acceleration mv2/l sec. The tension acting on the string in Newton is-
20. If a particle moves in a circle describing equal angles in (A) 2 (B) 8
equal interval of times, its velocity vector –
(C) 0.2 (D) 0.8
(A) remains constant
27. The breaking tension of a string is 10 N. A particle of
(B) changes in magnitude
mass 0.1 kg tied to it is rotated along a horizontal circle
(C) changes in direction of radius 0.5 metre. The maximum speed with which the
(D) changes both in magnitude and direction particle can be rotated without breaking the string is-
21. In uniform circular motion-
(A) 5 m/sec (B) (50 ) m/sec
(A) both velocity and acceleration are constant
(B) acceleration and speed are constant but velocity (C) (500 ) m/sec (D) (1000 ) m/sec
changes
 CIRCULAR MOTION 80

28. A car of mass m is taking a circular turn of radius 'r' on 34. A particle is moving along a circular path of radius
a frictional level road with a speed v. In order that the 6 m with uniform speed of 8 ms–1. The average
car does not skid- acceleration when the particle completes one half of
the revolution is -
mv 2 mv 2
(A)  mg (B)  mg 16 32
r r (A) m/s2 (B) m/s2
3 3
mv 2 v
(C) = mg (D) = mg
r r 64
(C) m/s2 (D) None of these
Where '' is coefficient of friction 3

29. What happens to centripital force of a revolving body 35. A string of length 1 m is fixed at one end and carries
if you double the orbital speed v and halve the angular a mass of 100 gm at the other end. The string makes
velocity - (2/) revolutions per second around vertical axis
through the fixed end. Calculate the tension in the
(A) Centripetal force remains unchanged
string-
(B) Centripital force is halved
(A) 1.0 N (B) 1.6 N
(C) Centripital force is doubled
(C) 2 N (D) 4 N
(D) Centripital force is quadrupled 36. A chain of 125 links is 1.25 m long and has a mass
30. A body is moving with a constant speed v in a circle of of 2 kg with the ends fastened together it is set
radius r. Its angular acceleration is-
rev
rotating at 3000 . Find the centripetal force on
v min
(A) Zero (B)
r each link -
v2 v2 (A) 3.14 N (B) 314 N
(C) 2 (D)
r r
31. A body of mass 10 kg is rotated in vertical circle of 1 1
(C) N (D) N
radius 4 cm at constant angular velocity of 5 rad/ sec. 3.14 314
The maximum tension in the string is- 37. When the road is dry and the coefficient of friction
(A) 100 N (B) 600 N is , the maximum speed of a car in a circular path
is 10 m/s, if the road becomes wet and ’ = /2.
(C) 110 N (D) 1100 N
What is the maximum speed permitted ?
32. If both the speed and radius of circular path of a
(A) 5 m/s (B) 10 m/s
revolving body are doubled, the magnitude of
centripetal force will be (C) 10 2 m/s (D) 5 2 m/s
(A) equal to the former
38. A person with a mass of M kg stands in contact
(B) twice the former against the wall of the cylindrical drum of radius r
(C) 4 times the former rotating with an angular velocity . The coefficient
(D) 8 times the former of friction between the wall and the clothing is .
The minimum rotational speed of the cylinder which
33. A particle is acted upon by a force of constant
enables the person to remain stuck to the wall when
magnitude which is always perpendicular to the
the floor is suddenly removed is -
velocity of the particle. The motion of the particle
takes place in a plane. it follows that– g r
(A) its velocity is constant (A) min = (B) min = g
r
(B) its acceleration is constant
(C) its kinetic energy is constant 2g gr
(C) min = (D) min =
(D) it moves in circular path r 
CIRCULAR MOTION 81

39. A body is revolving with a uniform speed V in a 44. A coin placed on a rotating turn table just slips if
circle of radius r. The angular acceleration of the it is at a distance of 40 cm from the centre if the
body is - angular velocity of the turntable is doubled, it will
just slip at a distance of
V
(A) (A) 10 cm (B) 20 cm
r
(B) Zero (C) 40 cm (D) 80 cm
45. A stone of mass 0.5 kg tied with a string of length
V2 1 m is moving in a circular path with a speed of 4
(C) along the radius and towards the centre
r m/sec. The tension acting on the string in Newton
is
V2
(D) along the radius and away from the centre (A) 2 (B) 8
r
(C) 0.2 (D) 0.8
40. A particle completes 3 revolutions per second on a
circular path of radius 8 cm. Find the values of 46. A particle is acted upon by a constant force always
angular velocity and centripetal acceleration of the normal to the direction of motion of the particle. It
particle - is therefore inferred that-
(a) Its velocity is constant
rad cm (b) It moves in a straight line
(A) 6 ; 2882 2
s s (c) Its speed is constant
rad cm (d) It moves in circular path
(B)  ; 2752 2
s s (A) a, d (B) c, d
(C) a, b (D) a, b, c
rad cm
(C) 6 ; 288 2 Non uniform Circular motion
s s
47. A particle is projected so as to just move along a vertical
(D) None
circle of radius r. The ratio of the tension in the string
41. A car of mass 1000 kg moves on a circular track of when the particle is at the lowest and highest point on
radius 20 m. if the coefficient of friction is 0.64, what the circle is -
is the maximum velocity with which the car can be
moved? (A) 1 (B) finite but large

(A) 1.12 m/s (B) 11.2 m/s (C) zero (D) Infinite
48. A block of mass m slides down along the surface of the
0 . 64  20 1000 bowl from the rim to the bottom as shown in fig. The
(C) m/s (D) 0 .64  20 m/s
1000 velocity of the block at the bottom will be-
42. The earth, radius 6400 km, makes one revolution
about its own axis in 24 hours. The centripetal
acceleration of a point on its equator is nearly -

cm cm
(A) 340 (B) 3.4
sec 2 sec 2
(A) Rg (B) 2 Rg
cm cm
(C) 34 (D) 0.34
sec 2 sec 2 (C) 2Rg (D) gR

43. A stone of mass 0.1 kg tied to one end of a string 49. A sphere is suspended by a thread of length l. What
1.0 m long is revolved in a horizontal circle at the minimum horizontal velocity is to be imparted to the
rate of 10/ revolution per second. Calculate the sphere for it to reach the height of suspension?
tension of the string ?
(A) gl (B) g l
(A) 30 N (B) 40 N
(C) 50 N (D) 60 N (C) 2g l (D) l /g
 CIRCULAR MOTION 82

50. A body of mass 2 kg is moving in a vertical of radius 2 57. A motor-cycle is moving in a vertical circular path.
m. The work done when it moves from the lowest point At what stage will the speed of the motor cycle be
to the highest point is- maximum ?
(A) 80 J (B) 40 J (A) At the highest point of the path

(C) 20 J (D) 0 (B) At the lowest point of the path

(C) At the mid height of the path
51. A particle rests on the top of the hemisphere of radius
R. The small horizontal velocity that must be imparted (D) At all the points in the path
to the particle if it is to leave the hemisphere without 58. An aeroplane flying at 100 m/sec dives in a vertical
sliding down. is- plane along the circle of radius 200 m. The mass of
the pilot is 75 kg. What will be the force exerted by
(A) v = (2gR)1/2 (B) v = (gR/2)1/2
the pilot on his seat when the aeroplane is at the
(C) v = (gR)1/2 (D) v = (2g/R)1/2 maximum height
52. A mass m is revolving in a vertical circle at the end of a (A) 300 kg wt (B) 200 kg wt
string of length 20 cm. By how much does the tension (C) 450 kg wt (D) 100 kg wt
of the string at the lowest point exceed the tension at
59. In the above question, the force exterted when the
the top most point? pilot is at the lowest point is
(A) 2 m g (B) 4 m g (A) 450 kg wt (B) 250 kg wt
(C) 6 m g (D) 8 m g (C) 300 kg wt (D) 100 kg wt
53. A car is travelling with linear velocity v on a circular 60. A string can bear a maximum tension of 100 Newton
road of radius r. If it is increasing it speed at the rate of without breaking. A body of mass 1 kg is attached
'a' metre/sec2, then the resultant acceleration will be- to one end of 1 m length of thin string and it is
revolved in a horizontal plane. The maximum linear
 v2   v4  velocity which can be imparted to the body without
(A)
  a2   2
(B)  2  a  breaking the string, will be -
r 2 
  r  (A) 10 m/s (B) 1 m/s
(C) 100 m/s (D) 1000 m/s
v 4 v 2 
2 61. A cane filled with water is revolved in a vertical circle

(C)  2  a  (D)
  a2 
 r2  of radius 4 metre and the water just does not fall down.
r   
The time period of revolution will be -
54. On an unbanked road, a cyclist negotiating a bend of (A) 1 sec (B) 10 sec
radius r at velocity v must lean inwards by an angle  (C) 8 sec (D) 4 sec
equal to - 62. A 2 kg stone at the end of a string 1 m. long is whirled
in a vertical circle at a constant speed. The speed of the
(A) tan–1 (v2/g) (B) tan–1 (g/v)
stone is 4 m /sec. The tension in the string will be 52 N
(C) tan–1 (v2 / gr) (D) tan–1 (rg/v2) when the stone is-
55. A particle of mass m is rotating by means of a string in (A) at the top of the circle
a vertical circle. The difference in the tension at the (B) at the bottom of the circle
bottom and top would be-
(C) half way down
(A) 6 mg (B) 4 mg (D) none of the above
(C) 3 mg (D) 2 mg 63. The roadway of a bridge over a canal is in the form of
a circular arc of radius 18 m. What is the greatest speed
56. A body of mass m crosses the top most point of a
with which a motor cycle can cross the bridge without
vertical circle with critical speed. What will be tension
leaving ground.
in string when it is horizontal-
(A) mg (B) 2 mg (A) 98 m/s (B) 18  9.8 m / s

(C) 3 mg (D) 6 mg (C) 18 × 9.8 m/s (D) 18/9.8 m/s

CIRCULAR MOTION 83

64. The maximum speed with which a car can cross a 71. A cyclist taking turn bends inwards while a car
convex bridge over a river with radius of curvature passenger taking the same turn is thrown outwards.
9 m is : (given that the centre of gravity of car is 1m The reason is -
above the road) (A) that car is heavier than cycle
(A) 50 m/s (B) 30 m/s (B) that car has four wheels, while cycle has only
(C) 20 m/s (D) 10 m/s two
65. A car is moving with speed 30 m/s on a circular path (C) that cyclist has to counteract the centrifugal
of radius 500 m. Its speed is increasing at the rate force, while the passenger is only thrown by it
of 2 m/s2. The net acceleration of the car is- (D) the difference in the speed of the two
(A) 3.7 m/s2 (B) 2.7 m/s2 Theta, omega, alpha, equations of motion
(C) 1.8 m/s2 (D) 2 m/s2 72. A particle is moving along a circular path with uniform
Banking of roads speed. Through what angle does its angular velocity
66. A cyclist taking turn bends inwards while a car change when it completes half of the circular path ?
passenger take the same turn is thrown outwards. The (a) 0° (b) 45°
reason is-
(c) 180° (d) 360°
(A) car is heavier then cycle 73. What is the angular velocity in rad/s of a fly wheel making
(B) car has four wheels while cycle has only two 300 r.p.m. ?
(C) difference in the speed of the two (a) 600  (b) 20 
(D) Cyclist has to counteract the centrifugal force while (c) 10  (d) 30
in the case of car only the passenger is thrown by 74. The angular velocity of a particle moving in a circle of
this force
radius 50 cm is increased in 5 min from 100 revolutions
67. A cyclist turns around a curve at 15 miles/hour. If he per minute to 400 revolutions per minute. Find tangential
turns at double the speed, the tendency to overturn is- acceleration of the particle.
2 2
(A) doubled (B) quadrupled (a) 60 m/s (b) /30 m/s
2 2
(C) halved (D) unchanged (c) /15 m/s (d) /60 m/s
68. A cyclist is moving on a circular track of radius 80 m 75. A particle covers equal distance around a circular path,
with a velocity of 72 km/hr. He has to lean from the in equal intervals of time. Which of the following
vertical approximately through an angle quantities connected with the motion of the particle
(A) tan–1 (1/4) (B) tan–1 (1) remains constant with time ?
(C) tan–1 (1/2) (D) tan–1 (2) (a) Displacement (b) Velocity
69. Keeping the banking angle same to increase the (c) Speed (d) Acceleration
maximum speed with which a vehicle can travel on a 76. A particle is moving along a circular path of radius 2m
–1
curved road by 10%, the radius of curvature of road with uniform speed of 5 ms . What will be the change in
has to be changed from 20 m to- velocity when the particle completes half of the revolution?
–1
(A) 16 m (B) 18 m (a) Zero (b) 10 ms
(C) 24.25 m (D) 30.5 m
10
70. A motor cyclist moving with a velocity of 72 km per (c) 10 2 ms 1 (d) ms1
2
hour on a flat road takes a turn on the road at a point
where the radius of curvature of the road is 20 metres. 77. A particle is moving along a circular path of radius 5m
–1
The acceleration due to gravity is 10 m/s2. In order to with a uniform speed 5 ms . What will be the average
avoid skidding, he must not bend with respect to the acceleration when the particle completes half revolution?
vertical plane by an angle greater than- (a) Zero (b) 10 ms
–1

(A) = tan–1 6 (B)  = tan–1 2

10 2
(C)  = tan–1 25.92 (D)  = tan–14 (c) 10 ms
–2
(d) ms

 CIRCULAR MOTION 84

Vertical Circular Motion 80. A particle moves in a circle of a radius 30 cm. Its linear
78. What should be the minimum velocity at the highest point speed is given by : v=2t, where t in second and v in m/s.
of a body tied to a string, so that the string just does not Find out its radial and tangential acceleration at t = 3 sec.
slack ? respectively :
2 2
(a) 220 m/sec , 50 m/sec
(a) Rg (b) 5Rg 2 2
(b) 100 m/sec , 5 m/sec
3/ 2 2 2
R (c) 120 m/sec , 2 m/sec
(c)   (d) 2Rg 2
(d) 110 m/sec , 10 m/sec
2
g

79. A bead can slide on a smooth circular wire frame of radius

r which is fixed in a vertical plane. The bead is displaced
slightly from the highest point of the wire frame. The speed
of the bead subsequently as a function of the angle 
made by the bead with the vertical line is :

(a) 2gr (b) 2gr(1  sin )

(c) 2gr(1  cos ) (d) 2 gr

CIRCULAR MOTION 85

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. If the body is moving in a circle of radius r with a 8. A car sometimes overturns while taking a turn. When
constant speed v , its angular velocity is[CPMT 1975] it overturns, it is [AFMC 1988]
(a) v 2 / r (b) vr (a) The inner wheel which leaves the ground first
(c) v / r (d) r / v (b) The outer wheel which leaves the ground
first
2. Two racing cars of masses m 1 and m 2 are moving in
(c) Both the wheels leave the ground
circles of radii r1 and r2 respectively. Their speeds simultaneously
are such that each makes a complete circle in the same (d) Either wheel leaves the ground first
duration of time t . The ratio of the angular speed of
9. A tachometer is a device to measure [DPMT 1999]
the first to the second car is [CBSE PMT 1999]
(a) Gravitational pull (b) Speed of rotation
(a) m 1 : m 2 (b) r1 : r2
(c) Surface tension (d) Tension in a spring
(c) 1 : 1 (d) m 1 r1 : m 2 r2 10. Two bodies of mass 10 kg and 5 kg moving in concentric
3. A cyclist turns around a curve at 15 miles/hour. If he orbits of radii R and r such that their periods are the
turns at double the speed, the tendency to overturn same. Then the ratio between their centripetal
is [CPMT 1974; AFMC 2003] acceleration is [CBSE PMT 2001]
(a) Doubled (b) Quadrupled (a) R / r (b) r / R
(c) Halved (d) Unchanged
(c) R 2 / r 2 (d) r 2 / R 2
4. If a particle moves in a circle describing equal angles
in equal times, its velocity vector [CPMT 1972, 74] 11. A particle is moving in a horizontal circle with constant
speed. It has constant [AFMC 1993; CPMT 1997]
(a) Remains constant
(a) Velocity (b) Acceleration
(b) Changes in magnitude
(c) Kinetic energy (d) Displacement
(c) Changes in direction
12. A train is moving towards north. At one place it turns
(d) Changes both in magnitude and direction
towards north-east, here we observe that
5. When a body moves with a constant speed along a [AIIMS 1980]
circle [CBSE PMT 1994]
(a) The radius of curvature of outer rail will be
(a) No work is done on it greater than that of the inner rail
(b) No acceleration is produced in the body (b) The radius of the inner rail will be greater
(c) No force acts on the body than that of the outer rail
(d) Its velocity remains constant (c) The radius of curvature of one of the rails
will be greater
6. A body of mass m moves in a circular path with
uniform angular velocity. The motion of the body has (d) The radius of curvature of the outer and inner
constant [MP PET 2003] rails will be the same
(a) Acceleration (b) Velocity 13. The angular speed of a fly wheel making 120
revolutions/minute is [CBSE PMT 1995]
(c) Momentum (d) Kinetic energy
7. A cyclist taking turn bends inwards while a car (a) 2 rad / s (b) 4  2 rad / s
passenger taking same turn is thrown outwards. The
reason is [CPMT 1974] (c)  rad / s (d) 4 rad / s
(a) Car is heavier than cycle 14. The length of second’s hand in a watch is 1 cm. The
(b) Car has four wheels while cycle has only change in velocity of its tip in 15 seconds is
two [MP PMT 1987, 2003]
(c) Difference in the speed of the two 
(a) Zero (b) cm / sec
(d) Cyclist has to counteract the centrifugal force 30 2
while in the case of car only the passenger is
  2
thrown by this force (c) cm / sec (d) cm / sec
30 30
 CIRCULAR MOTION 86

15. A particle moves in a circle of radius 25 cm at two (a) 14 m/s (b) 3 m/s
revolutions per second. The acceleration of the (c) 3.92 m/s (d) 5 m/s
2
particle in m / s is [DPMT 1999] 23. A body of mass 5 kg is moving in a circle of radius 1 m
(a)  2 (b) 8 2 with an angular velocity of 2 radian/sec. The
centripetal force is [AIIMS 1998]
(c) 4 2 (d) 2 2
(a) 10 N (b) 20 N
16. An electric fan has blades of length 30 cm as measured (c) 30 N (d) 40 N
from the axis of rotation. If the fan is rotating at 1200
24. A sphere of mass m is tied to end of a string of length
r.p.m. The acceleration of a point on the tip of the
blade is about [CBSE PMT 1990] l and rotated through the other end along a horizontal
circular path with speed v . The work done in full
(a) 1600 m / sec 2 (b) 4740 horizontal circle is [CPMT 1993]
(c) 2370 (d) 5055 2
mv 
17. The force required to keep a body in uniform circular (a) 0 (b)  l  . 2l
 
motion is [EAMCET 1982; AFMC 2003]
(a) Centripetal force (b) Centrifugal force 2
mv 
(c) Resistance (d) None of the above (c) mg . 2l (d)  l  . (l)
 
18. A particle moves in a circular orbit under the action of
a central attractive force inversely proportional to the 25. A body is whirled in a horizontal circle of radius 20 cm.
distance 'r' . The speed of the particle is It has angular velocity of 10 rad/s. What is its linear
[CBSE PMT 1995] velocity at any point on circular path
[CBSE PMT 1996]
(a) Proportional to r 2 (b) Independent of r (a) 10 m/s (b) 2 m/s
(c) Proportional to (d) Proportional to (c) 20 m/s (d) 2 m/s
19. A mass of 2 kg is whirled in a horizontal circle by
26. Find the maximum velocity for skidding for a car moved
means of a string at an initial speed of 5 revolutions on a circular track of radius 100 m. The coefficient of
per minute. Keeping the radius constant the tension friction between the road and tyre is 0.2
in the string is doubled. The new speed is nearly [CPMT 1996]
[MP PMT/PET 1998; JIPMER 2000] (a) 0.14 m/s (b) 140 m/s
(a) 14 rpm (b) 10 rpm (c) 1.4 km/s (d) 14 m/s
(c) 2.25 rpm (d) 7 rpm
27. A car when passes through a convex bridge exerts a
20. The magnitude of the centripetal force acting on a force on it which is equal to [AFMC 1997]
body of mass m executing uniform motion in a circle
of radius r with speed v is Mv 2 Mv 2
(a) Mg  (b)
r r
[AFMC 1998;MP PET 1999]
(a) mvr (b) mv 2 / r (c) Mg (d) None of these
28. The angular speed of seconds needle in a mechanical
(c) v / r 2 m (d) v / rm watch is [CPMT 1997]
21. A 500 kg car takes a round turn of radius 50 m with a 
velocity of 36 km/hr. The centripetal force is (a) rad/s (b) 2 rad/s
30
[CBSE PMT 1999]
(a) 250 N (b) 750 N 60
(c)  rad/s (d) rad/s
(c) 1000 N (d) 1200 N 
22. A ball of mass 0.25 kg attached to the end of a string of 29. The angular velocity of a particle rotating in a circular
length 1.96 m is moving in a horizontal circle. The string orbit 100 times per minute is
will break if the tension is more than 25 N. What is the [SCRA 1998; DPMT 2000]
maximum speed with which the ball can be moved (a) 1.66 rad/s (b) 10.47 rad/s
[CBSE PMT 1998]
(c) 10.47 deg/s (d) 60 deg/s
CIRCULAR MOTION 87

30. A body of mass 100 g is rotating in a circular path of

radius r with constant velocity. The work done in one O
complete revolution is [AFMC 1998]
(a) 100 rJ (b) (r / 100 )J l

(c) (100 / r)J (d) Zero

m
31. A particle comes round a circle of radius 1 m once. The
time taken by it is 10 sec. The average velocity of motion
is [JIPMER 1999] T T
(a) 0.2 m / s (b) 2 m / s
F
(c) 2 m / s (d) Zero (a) (b)
32. An unbanked curve has a radius of 60 m . The maximum W W
speed at which a car can make a turn if the coefficient
of static friction is 0.75, is [JIPMER 1999] T T

(a) 2.1 (b) 14

(c) 21 (d) 7 F F F
(c) (d)
33. A particle of mass M is moving in a horizontal circle of
radius R with uniform speed V. When it moves from W W
one point to a diametrically opposite point, its
[CBSE PMT 1992] 37. If a cyclist moving with a speed of 4.9 m/s on a level
road can take a sharp circular turn of radius 4 m, then
(a) Kinetic energy changes by MV 2 / 4 coefficient of friction between the cycle tyres and road
is [AIIMS 1999; AFMC 2001]
(b) Momentum does not change
(a) 0.41 (b) 0.51
(c) Momentum changes by 2MV (c) 0.61 (d) 0.71
(d) Kinetic energy changes by MV 2 38. A car moves on a circular road. It describes equal
angles about the centre in equal intervals of time.
34. A ball of mass 0.1 Kg. is whirled in a horizontal circle of Which of the following statement about the velocity
radius 1 m. by means of a string at an initial speed of 10 of the car is true [BHU 2001]
R.P.M. Keeping the radius constant, the tension in the
string is reduced to one quarter of its initial value. The (a) Magnitude of velocity is not constant
new speed is [MP PMT 2001] (b) Both magnitude and direction of velocity change
(a) 5 r.p.m. (b) 10 r.p.m. (c) Velocity is directed towards the centre of
the circle
(c) 20 r.p.m. (d) 14 r.p.m.
(d) Magnitude of velocity is constant but direction
35. In uniform circular motion, the velocity vector and
acceleration vector are [DCE 2000, 01, 03] changes
(a) Perpendicular to each other 39. The maximum velocity (in ms–1) with which a car driver
(b) Same direction must traverse a flat curve of radius 150 m and
coefficient of friction 0.6 to avoid skidding is
(c) Opposite direction [AIEEE 2002]
(d) Not related to each other (a) 60 (b) 30
36. A point mass m is suspended from a light thread of (c) 15 (d) 25
length l, fixed at O, is whirled in a horizontal circle at 40. A car is moving with high velocity when it has a turn.
constant speed as shown. From your point of view, A force acts on it outwardly because of
stationary with respect to the mass, the forces on the [AFMC 2002]
mass are [AMU (Med.) 2001] (a) Centripetal force (b) Centrifugal force
(c) Gravitational force (d) All the above
 CIRCULAR MOTION 88

41. A motor cycle driver doubles its velocity when he is

46. A block of mass m at the end of a string is whirled
having a turn. The force exerted outwardly will be
[AFMC 2002] round in a vertical circle of radius . The critical speed
of the block at the top of its swing below which the
(a) Double (b) Half
string would slacken before the block reaches the top
1 is [DCE 1999, 2001]
(c) 4 times (d) times
4
(a) Rg (b) (Rg )2
42. If a r and a t represent radial and tangential
(c) R / g (d) Rg
accelerations, the motion of a particle will be uniformly
circular if [CPMT 2004] 47. A wheel is subjected to uniform angular acceleration
(a) ar = 0 and a t  0 (b) ar = 0 but a t  0 about its axis. Initially its angular velocity is zero. In
the first 2 sec, it rotates through an angle 1 . In the
(c) a r  0 but at = 0 (d) None of these
next 2 sec, it rotates through an additional angle  2 .
43. In 1.0 s, a particle goes from point A to point B, moving
in a semicircle of radius 1.0 m (see figure). The The ratio of  2 / 1 is [AIIMS 1985]
magnitude of the average velocity is (a) 1 (b) 2
[IIT-JEE 1999]
(c) 3 (d) 5
A
48. A 1 kg stone at the end of 1 m long string is whirled in
a vertical circle at constant speed of 4 m/sec. The
1.0 m
tension in the string is 6 N, when the stone is at
(g = 10 m/sec2) [AIIMS 1982]
B (a) Top of the circle (b) Bottom of the circle
(c) Half way down (d) None of the above
(a) 3 .14 m / s (b) 2.0 m / s 49. A cane filled with water is revolved in a vertical circle
of radius 4 meter and the water just does not fall down.
(c) 1.0 (d) Zero The time period of revolution will be [CPMT 1985]
44. A stone ties to the end of a string 1m long is whirled (a) 1 sec (b) 10 sec
in a horizontal circle with a constant speed. If the stone (c) 8 sec (d) 4 sec
makes 22 revolution in 44 seconds, what is the
50. The string of pendulum of length l is displaced
magnitude and direction of acceleration of the stone
through 90° from the vertical and released. Then the
[CBSE PMT 2005]
minimum strength of the string in order to withstand
2 the tension, as the pendulum passes through the mean
(a) ms  2 and direction along the radius position is [MP PMT 1986]
4
towards the centre (a) mg (b) 3 mg
(c) 5 mg (d) 6 mg
(b)  2 ms 2 and direction along the radius
51. The maximum velocity at the lowest point, so that
away from the centre the string just slack at the highest point in a vertical
(c) 2 ms–2 and direction along the radius towards circle of radius l [CPMT 1999]
the centre
(a) gl (b) 3 gl
(d) 2 ms–2 and direction along the tangent to the
circle
(c) 5 gl (d) 7 gl
45. In a circus stuntman rides a motorbike in a circular
track of radius R in the vertical plane. The minimum 52. If the equation for the displacement of a particle moving
speed at highest point of track will be on a circular path is given by ( )  2 t 3  0 .5 , where 
[CPMT 1979; JIPMER 1997; RPET 1999] is in radians and t in seconds, then the angular velocity
of the particle after 2 sec from its start is [AIIMS 1998]
(a) 2 gR (b) 2 gR
(a) 8 rad/sec (b) 12 rad/sec
(c) 3 gR (d) gR (c) 24 rad/sec (d) 36 rad/sec
CIRCULAR MOTION 89

53. The tension in the string revolving in a vertical circle 58. For a particle in a non-uniform accelerated circular
with a mass m at the end which is at the lowest motion [AMU (Med.) 2000]
position [AIIMS 2001]
(a) Velocity is radial and acceleration is
2 2
mv mv transverse only
(a) (b)  mg
r r
(b) Velocity is transverse and acceleration is
radial only
mv 2
(c)  mg (d) mg
r (c) Velocity is radial and acceleration has both
radial and transverse components
54. A block follows the path as shown in the figure from
height h . If radius of circular path is r , then relation (d) Velocity is transverse and acceleration has
that holds good to complete full circle is both radial and transverse components
[RPET 1997] 59. A ball is moving to and fro about the lowest point A of a
smooth hemispherical bowl. If it is able to rise up to a
height of 20 cm on either side of A, its speed at A must be
(Take = 10 m/s2, mass of the body 5 g) [JIPMER 2000]
(a) 0.2 m/s (b) 2 m/s
h
(c) 4 m/s (d) 4.5 ms–1
r 60. A particle is kept at rest at the top of a sphere of
diameter 42 m. When disturbed slightly, it slides down.
At what height ‘h’ from the bottom, the particle will
(a) h  5r / 2 (b) h  5r / 2 leave the sphere [BHU 2003]
(a) 14 m (b) 28 m
(c) h  5r / 2 (d) h  5r / 2
(c) 35 m (d) 7 m
55. A pendulum bob on a 2 m string is displaced 60o from
the vertical and then released. What is the speed of 61. A small disc is on the top of a hemisphere of radius R .
the bob as it passes through the lowest point in its What is the smallest horizontal velocity v that should
path [JIPMER 1999] be given to the disc for it to leave the hemisphere and
(a) 2 m/s (b) 9 .8 m / s
not slide down it ? [There is no friction] [CPMT 1991]

(a) v  2 gR (b) v  gR
(c) 4.43 m/s (d) 1 / 2 m / s

56. A fan is making 600 revolutions per minute. If after g

(c) v  (d) v  g 2 R
some time it makes 1200 revolutions per minute, then R
increase in its angular velocity is [BHU 1999]
62. A body of mass 0.4 kg is whirled in a vertical circle
(a) 10  rad / sec (b) 20  rad / sec making 2 rev/sec. If the radius of the circle is 2 m, then
tension in the string when the body is at the top of the
(c) 40  rad / sec (d) 60  rad / sec circle, is [CBSE PMT 1999]
57. A stone tied with a string, is rotated in a vertical circle. (a) 41.56 N (b) 89.86 N
The minimum speed with which the string has to be
rotated [CBSE PMT 1999] (c) 109.86 N (d) 115.86 N

(a) Is independent of the mass of the stone 63. A bucket full of water is revolved in vertical circle of
(b) Is independent of the length of the string radius 2m. What should be the maximum time-period
of revolution so that the water doesn’t fall off the
(c) Decreases with increasing mass of the
stone bucket [AFMC 2004]
(d) Decreases with increase in length of the (a) 1 sec (b) 2 sec
string
(c) 3 sec (d) 4 sec
 CIRCULAR MOTION 90

64. Figure shows a body of mass m moving with a uniform 68. Two cars of masses m1 and m2 are moving in circles of radii
speed v along a circle of radius r. The change in velocity
r1 and r2, respectively. Their speeds are such that they
in going from A to B is [DPMT 2004]
make complete circles in the same time t. The ratio of their

B
centripetal acceleration is (2012)
(a) m1r1 : m2r2 (b) m1 : m2

C A (c) r1 : r2 (d) 1 : 1
O
69. A particle is moving with a uniform speed in a circular
orbit of radius R in a central force inversely proportional
D
to the nth power of R. If the period of rotation of the
particle is T, then : (2018)
(a) v 2 (b) v / 2
(n 1) n
(c) v (d) zero
(a) T  R 2 (b) T  R 2
65. A particle is acted upon by a force of constant magnitude
which is always perpendicular to the velocity of the 3 n
1
particle. The motion of the particle takes place in a plane, it (c) T  R 2 For any n. (d) T  R 2
follows that (2004)
70. A particle is released on a vertical smooth semicircular
(a) its velocity is constant
track from point X so that OX makes angle  from the
(b) its acceleration is constant vertical (see figure). The normal reaction of the track on
(c) its kinetic energy is constant the particle vanishes at point Y where OY makes angle 
(d) it moves in a straight line with the horizontal. Then : (2014 Online Set-4)

66. For a particle in uniform circular motion the acceleration a
at a point P (R, ) on the circle of radius R is (here  is
measured from the x–axis (2010)

v2 v2 v2 v2
(a)  cos  ˆi  sin  ˆj (b)  sin  ˆi  cos  ˆj
R R R R

v2 v2 v2 ˆ v2 ˆ
(c)  cos  ˆi  sin  ˆj (d) i j 1
R R R R (a) sin   cos  (b) sin  = cos 
2
67. A point P moves in counter–clockwise direction on a
circular path as shown in the figure. The movement of P is 2 3
3 (c) sin   cos  (d) sin   cos 
such that it sweeps out a length s = t + 5, where s is in 3 4
metre and t is in second. The radius of the path is 20 m. The
acceleration of P when t = 2 s is nearly (2010) 71. A particle starts moving on a circle of radius R with initial
velocity v0 such that centripetal L tangential acceleration
are equal at all instants. Maximum time for which it can
move. (2015 Online)

R 2R
(a) v (b) v
0 0

–2 –2
R
(a) 13 ms (b) 12 ms (c) 2v (d) Infinite
–2 –2 0
(c) 7.2 ms (d) 14 ms
CIRCULAR MOTION 91

72. A cubical block of side 30 cm is moving with velocity 2 74. A conical pendulum of length 1 m makes an angle   45º
ms”1 on a smooth horizontal surface. The surface has a
bump at a point O as shown in figure. The angular velocity w.r.t. Z-axis and moves in a circle in the XY plane. The
(in rad/s) of the block immediately after it hits the bump, radius of the circle is 0.4m and its center is vertically
is : (2016 Online Set -1) below O. The speed of the pendulum, in its circular path,
will be : (Take g = 10 ms–2) (2017 Online Set-2)

(a) 5.0 (b) 6.7

(c) 9.4 (d) 13.3
73. A civil engineer has to design a circlular banked racing
track on which cars can move up to speed of 360 km/hr
1 (a) 0.4 m/s (b) 4 m/s
with coefficient of friction   and radius 4 km. Angle
8 (c) 0.2 m/s (d) 2 m/s
of banking for safe racing should be :
(2016 Online Set-2)

1  7  1  4 
(a) tan   (b) tan  
 33   33 

1  13  1  7 
(c) tan   (d) tan  
 33   29 
 CIRCULAR MOTION 92

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Q.1 A rubber band of length l has a stone of mass m Q.5 A car is moving with a speed of 30 m/sec on a
tied to its one end. It is whirled with speed v so circular path of radius 500 m. Its is increasing at the
that the stone describes a horizontal circular path. rate of 2 m/sec2. What is the acceleration of the car?
The tension T in the rubber band is - (A) 9.8 m/sec2 (B) 2.7 m/sec2
(A) zero (B) mv2 /l (C) >
2 2
(C) 2.4 m/sec2 (D) 1.8 m/sec2
(mv )/l (D) < mv /l

Q.2 A smooth wire is bent into a vertical circle of radius Q.6 The equation of motion of a particle moving on
a . A bead P can slide A circular path (radius 200 m) is given by s = 18

smoothly on the wire. The t + 3t2 – 2t3 where s is the total distance covered
circle is rotated about from straight point in metres at the end of t seconds.
diameter AB as axis with a a The maximum speed of the particle will be-
speed  as shown in figure. 0 (A) 15 m/sec (B) 23 m/sec
The bead P is at rest with (C) 19.5 m/sec (D) 25 m/sec
a/2 P
respect to the circular ring
in the position shown. Then
Q.7 The kinetic energy of a particle moving along a
2 is equal to- B
circle of radius R depends on the distance covered
(A) 2g /a (B) 2g / (a 3) s as T = KS2 where K is a constant. Find the force
(C) g 3g / a (D) 2a / (g 3) acting on the particle as a function of S -

2 2
Q.3 A heavy small sized sphere is suspended by a 2K S R 
(A) 1   (B) 2KS 1   
string of length . The sphere rotates uniformly in S R S
a horizontal circle with the string making an angle
 with the vertical. Then the time period of this 2 2
conical pendulum is- S 2S R 
(C) 2KS 1    (D) 1  
R  K S
 l sin  
(A) T = 2 (B) T=2  
 g  Q.8 A point moves along a circle with velocity v=
at where a 0.5 m/sec2. Then the total acceleration of
 l cos    l  the point at the moment when it covered (1/10) th
(C) T = 2   (D) T=2  g cos  
 g    of the circle after beginning of motion -
(A) 0.5 m/sec2 (B) 0.6 m/sec2
Q.4 A simple pendulum of length L and mass M is (C) 0.7 m/sec2 (D) 0.8 m/sec2
oscillating in a plane about a vertical line between
angular limits –  and + . For an angular Q.9 A solid body rotates about a stationary axis so that
displacement  [ | < ], the tension in the string its angular velocity depends on the rotation angle
and the velocity of the bob are T and v respectively.  as  = 0 – k , where 0 and k are positive
The following relation holds good under the above constants. At the moment t = 0, the angle  = 0.
conditions- Find the time dependence of rotation angle -
(A) T = Mg cos  0 –kt
(A) K. 0e–kt (B) [e ]
(B) T cos  = Mg K
(C) T – Mg cos  = Mv2/L
0 K
(D) T + Mg cos  = Mv2/L (C) [1–e–k.t] (D)  [ e–kt – 1]
K 0
CIRCULAR MOTION 93

Q.10 A heavy particle hanging from a fixed point by a rotating the turn table with a constant angular
light inextensible string of length l is projected velocity of 102 rad-sec–1 the ball moves away from
horizontally with speed ( gl) . Then the speed of the initial position by a distance nearly equal to-
the particle and the inclination of the string to the
vertical at the instant of the motion when the tension
in the string equal the weight of the particle-
O
3l lg
(A) –1 , cos–1 (2/3)
g , cos (3/2) (B)
3
3g gl 0.1m
(C) , cos–1 (2/3) (D) , sin–1 (2/3)
l 3
(A) 10–1
m (B) 10–2 m
(C) 10–3 m (D) 2 × 10–1 m
Q.11 A small body of mass m slides without friction from
the top of a hemispherical
Q.15 A particle of mass m is attached to one end of a
cup of radius r as shown
h string of length l while the other end is fixed to a
in the following figure. If Q
point h above the horizontal table, the particle is
it leaves the surface of the
made to revolve in a circle on the table so as to
cup at a vertical distance
make p revolutions per second. The maximum value
'h' below the highest
r of p if the particle is to be in contact with the table
point, then-
will be-
(A) h = r (B) h = r/3
(C) h = r /2 (D) h = 2r /3 (A) 2 p gh (B) ( g / h)

Q.12 A body is allowed to slide on a frictionless track 1

(C) 2p (h / g) (D) ( g / h)
from rest position under gravity. The track ends into 2
a circular loop of diameter D. What should be the
minimum height of the body in terms of D so that Q.16 A gramophone record is revolving with an angular
it may complete successfully the loop? velocity  . A coin is placed at a distance r from the
4 5 centre of the record. The static coefficient of friction
(A) D (B) D (C) 1 D
5 4 is . The coin will revolve with the record if-
(D) 2 D (A) r > g 2 (B) r = g /2 only
(C) r < g /2 only (D) r  g /2
Q.13 A body is rotated in
the vertical plane by B vB Q.17 A car is moving with a speed V on a road inclined
means of a thread of at an angle  in a circular arc of radius r, the minimum
coefficent of friction so that the car does not slip
length l with minimum
away-
possible velocity. vA A C
When the body up and V2
(A) =  tan  (B) = V2 /rg
reaches at the heighest point b of hits path, the rg
thread breaks and the body moves on a parabolic
path under the influence the gravitational field as V 2 cos   rg sin  V 2 cos   rg sin 
(C) (D)
shown in the diagram. The horizontal range AC in rg cos   V 2 sin  rg cos   V 2 sin 
the plane of A would be-
(A) x = l (B) x = 2 l Q.18 A mass of 2.9 kg, is suspended from a string of
length 50 cm, and is at rest. Another body of mass
(C) x = 2 l (D) x = 2 2 l
100 gm moving horizontally with a velocity of 150 m/
Q.14 A circular turn table of radius 0.5 m has a smooth
sec, strikes and sticks to it. What is the tension in
groove as shown in fig. A ball of mass 90 g is placed the string when it makes an angle of 60º with the
inside the groove along with a spring of spring vertical
constant 102 N/cm. The ball is at a distance of 0.1 (A) 153.3 N (B) 135.3 N
m from the centre when the turn table is at rest. On (C) 513.3 N (D) 351.3 N
 CIRCULAR MOTION 94

Q.19 The vertical section of a road over a canal bridge in Q.24 A stone is rotated steadily in a horizontal circle
the direction of its length is in the form of circle of with a time period T  72km/hr.
radius 8.9 metre. Then the greatest spped at which by means of a string
the car can cross this bridge wihout losing contact of length l . If the
P
with the road at its hgihest point, the centre of tension in the string is
gravity of the car being at a height h = 1.1 metre kept constant and length l increase by 1%,
from the ground. Take g = 10 m/sec2- then percentage change in time period T is-
(A) 1 % (B) 0.5 %
(A) 5 m/sec (B) 10 m/sec
(C) 2 % (D) 0.25 %
(C) 15 m/sec (D) 20 m/sec
Q.25 If mass ,speed and radius of rotation of a body
Q.20 A smooth table is placed horizontally and an ideal moving in a circular path are all increased by 50%,
spring of spring constant k = 1000 N/m and unextended the necessary force required to maintain the body
length of 0.5 m has one end fixed to its centre. The moving in the circular path will have to be increased
other end is attached to a mass of 5 kg which is by-
moving in a circle with constant speed 20 m/s. Then (A) 225% (B) 125%
the tension in the spring and the extension of this (C)150% (D)100 %
spring beyond its normal length are-
(A) 500 N, 0.5 m (B) 600 N, 0.6 m (C) 700 N, 0.7 m Q.26 A particle describing circular
(D) 800 N, 0.8 m motion as shown in figure.
The velocity of particle in
m/s is-
Q.21 A body of mass 2 kg is tied at one end of a string
(A) 2.82
1 m long. The other end is fixed and the body
(B) 2.8
revolves in a horizontal circle. The maximum tension
(C) 1.42 80cm
which the string can withstand is 2000 N. Calculate (D) 1.4
the maximum number of revolutions per minute the
body will make and its linear velocity when the Q.27 A particle P is moving in a circle of radius 'a' with
string just breaks- a uniform speed v. C is the centre of the circle and
(A) 203 rpm, 13.6 m/sec (B) 32 AP is diameter. The angular velocity of P about A
rpm, 16.3 m/sec and C are in the ratio-
(C) 302 rpm, 61.3 m/sec (D) 302 (A) 1 :1 (B) 1 : 2
rpm, 31.6 m/sec (C) 2 : 1 (D) 4 : 1
Q.28 A coin placed on a rotating turn table just slips if
Q.22 A car of mass 1000 kg moves on a circular path with it is placed at a distace of 4 cm from the centre. If
the angular velocity of the turn table is doubled, it
constant speed of 16 m/s. It is turned by 90º after
will just slip at a distance of-
travelling 628 m on the road. The centripetal force
(A) 1 cm (B) 2 cm
acting on the car is-
(C) 4 cm (D) 8 cm
(A) 160 N (B) 320 N Q.29 In an atom two electrons move round the nucleus
(C) 640 N (D) 1280 N in circular orbits of radii r and 4r. The ratio of the
Q.23 A car while travelling at a speed of 72 km/hr. Passes time taken by them to complete one revolution is-
through a curved portion of road in the form of an (A) 4 :1 (B) 1: 4 (C) 1 : 8
arc of a radius 10 m. If the mass of the car is 500 kg
(D) 8 : 1
the reaction on the car at the lowest point P is-
Q.30 A boy revolves two balls each of mass 100 gm and
(A) 25 KN (B) 50 KN
tied with strings of 1 metre length in horizontal
(C) 75 KN (D) None of these
circle as shown in figure. If the speed of outermost
ball is 6 m/s , then tension in string-1 is-
(A) 2.4 N (B) 2.7 N
(C) 2 N (D) 1.2 N
CIRCULAR MOTION 95

Q.31 Three small balls each of mass 100 gm are attached Q.35 A particle is moving along a circular path of radiu 3
at distance of 1 m, 2 m and 3 m from end D of a meter in such a way that the distance travelled
3 m length of string. The string measured along the circumference is given by S =
is rotated with uniform t2 t3
angular velocity in a 2  . The accelration of particle when t = 2 sec
horizontal plane about D. If 2 3
1
the outside ball is moving at is-
a speed of 6 m/s, the ratio of (A) 1.3 m/s2 (B) 13 m/s2
(C) 3 m/s 2 (D) 10 m/s2
tension in the three parts of
the string from inside-
(A) 6 : 5 : 4 (B) 3 : 2 :1 Q.36 A partcile of mass m is moving in a circular path of
(C) 3 : 5 : 6 (D) 6 : 5 : 3 constant radius r such that its centripetal
Q.32 A stone of mass 1 kg tied to a light inextensible acceleration ac is varying with time t as ac= k2 r t2,
string of length 10/3 metre is whirling in a vertical where k is a constant, the power delivered to the
circle. If the ratio of maximum tension to minimum particle by the forces acting on it is-
tension in the string is 4, then speed of stone st (A) 2  m k2 r2 t (B) m k2 r2 t
4 2 5
(C) (m k r t )/3 (D) 0
highest point of the circle is- [g = 10 m/s2]
(A) 20 m/s (B) 10 3 m/s Q.37 A partcle rests on the top of a hemisphere of radiu R.
(C) 5 2 m/s (D) 10 m/s Find the smallest horizontal velocity that must be
imparted to the particle if it is to leave the hemisphere
without sliding down it-
Q.33 Tow moving particles P and Q are 10 m apart at a
certain instant. The velocity of P is 8 m/s making 30º (A) gR (B) 2gR
with the line joining P and Q and that of Q is 6 m/
s making an angle 30º with PQ as shown in the (C) 3gR (D) 5gR
firuge .Then angular velocity of P with respect to
Q is- Q.38 A particle P will be in equilibrium inside a hemispherical
bowl of radius 0.5 m at a height 0.2 m from the bottom
when the bowl is rotated at an angular speed ( g = 10 m/
sec2) 
(A) 10 / 3 rad/sec
(B) 10 3 rad/sec 0.5m
(C) 10 rad/sec 0.3m
(D 20 rad/sec 0.4m P
(A) 0 rad/s (B) 0.1 rad/s
0.2m
(C) 0.4 rad/s (D) 0.7 rad/s

Q.34 A racing car is travelling along a track at a constant

speed of 40 m/s. A T.V. camera men is recording Theta, omega, alpha, equations o motion
the event from a distance of 30 m directly away 39. A car is moving along a circular path of radius 500 m with
from the track as shown in figure. In order to keep a speed of 30 m/s. If at some instant, its speed increases
the car under view in the positio shown, the angular 2
at the rate of 2 m/s , then at that instant the magnitude of
speed with which the camera should be rotated, is- resultant acceleration will be :
Car 2 2
 40m/s (a) 4.7 m/s (b) 3.8 m/s
2 2
(c) 3 m/s (d) 2.7 m/s
30m 40. A wet, open umbrella is held vertical and is twirled about
30º the handle at a uniform rate of 21 revolutions in 44 second.
If the rim of the umbrella is a circle of 1 metre in diameter
T.V. Camera and the height of the rim above the floor is 4.9 metre, then
(A) 4/3 rad/sec (B) 3/4 rad/sec the angular speed of the umbrella is :
(C) 8/3 3 rad/sec (D) 1 rad/sec (a) 3 radian/sec (b) 1.5 radian/sec

(c) 1 radian/sec (d) 2.5 radian/sec

 CIRCULAR MOTION 96

41. In the above question, the tangential speed of the water (a) E and E (b) E and 4E
drop on leaving the rim of the umbrella is : (c) 4E and E (d) E and 3E
(a) 3 m/s (b) 1.5 m/s
47. A particle moves in a uniform circular motion. Choose the
(c) 1 m/s (d) 2.5 m/s wrong statement :

42. In the above question, the locus of the drops is a circle (a) The particle moves with constant speed
of radius : (b) The acceleration is always normal to the velocity
(a) 3 m (b) 1.5 m
(c) The particle moves with uniform acceleration
(c) 1 m (d) 2.5 m (d) The particle moves with variable velocity
43. If the equation for the displacement of a particle moving
48. A particle is moving on a circular track of radius 30 cm
on a circular path is given by :
3
with a constant speed of 6 m/s. It acceleration is :
 = 2t + 0.5
(a) zero (b) 120 m/s2
where  is in radian and t in second, then the angular
velocity of the particle at t = 2 sec (c) 1.2 m/s2 (d) 36 m/s2
(a) 8 rad/sec (b) 12 rad/sec 49. Let ar and at represent radial and tangential acceleration.
(c) 24 rad/sec (d) 36 rad/sec The motion of a particle may be circular if :
44. A body moves in a circular path of radius r = 500 m with (a) ar = 0, at = 0 (b) ar = 0, at  0
2
tangential acceleration at = 2 ms . When its tangential
(c) ar  0, at = 0 (d) none of these
linear velocity is 30 m/s, the total acceleration will be :
(a) 5.4 ms
–2
(b) 3.9 ms
–2 50. Two particle of equal masses are revolving in circular
–2 –2 paths of radii r1 and r2 respectively with the same speed.
(c) 2.7 ms (d) 2.1 ms
The ratio of their centripetal forces is :
Horizontal Circular Motion
45. A light rigid rod of length L has a bob of mass M attached r2 r2
(a) (b)
to one of its end just like a simple pendulum. Speed at the r1 r1
lowest point when it is inverted and relesed is
2 2
r  r 
(c)  1  (d)  2 
 r2   r1 
51. An unbanked curve has a radius of 60 m. The maximum
speed at which a car can make a turn if the coefficient of
static friction is 0.75 is :
(a) 2.1 m/s (b) 14 m/s
(a) gL (b) 2gL (c) 21 m/s (d) 7 m/s
52. If the banking angle of curved road is given by tan–1 (3/5)
(c) 2 gL (d) 5gL
and the radius of curvature of the road is 6 m, then the
46. Two identical particles, A and B, are attached to a string of safe driving speed should not exceed : (g = 10 m/s2)
length 2l, A to middle and B to one of the ends. The string (a) 86.4 km/h (b) 43.2 km/h
is whirled in a horizontal circle, with the end O fixed. If the
kinetic energy of B relative to A is E, then the absolute (c) 21.6 km/h (d) 30.4 km/h
kinetic energies of A and B are 53. A circular road of radius 1000 m has banking angle 45°.
The maximum safe speed of a car having mass 200 kg will
be, if the coefficient of friction between tyres and road is
0.5 :
(a) 172 m/s (b) 124 m/s
(c) 99 m/s (d) 86 m/s
CIRCULAR MOTION 97

54. A motorcyclist wants to drive on the vertical surface of 58. A bob is suspended from a crane by a cable of length
wooden ‘well’ or radius 5 m, with a minimum speed of  = 5 m. The crane and load are moving at a constant
speed v0. The crane is stopped by a bumper and the bob
5 5 m/s. The minimum value of coefficient of friction on the cable swings out an angle of 60°. The initial speed
between the tyres and the wall of the well must be : v0 is (g = 9.8 m/s2)
(take g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 0.10 (b) 0.20 l
(c) 0.30 (d) 0.40 v0
Vertical Circular Motion
55. A simple pendulum is oscillating without damping. When
the displacement of the bob is less than maximum, its (a) 10 m/s (b) 7 m/s

acceleration vector a is correctly shown in :
(c) 4 m/s (d) 2 m/s
59. A particle suspended from a fixed point, by a light
a inextensible thread of length L is projected horizontally
(a) (b)
from its lowest position with velocity 7 gL / 2 . The

a string will slack after swinging through an angle , such

that  equals :
(a) 30° (b) 135°
(c) 120° (d) 150°
(c) (d)
a 60. A simple pendulum is released from rest from the point A
a at an angle 30° with vertical. Then :

56. A ball of mass m is attached to one end of a light rod of

length l, the other end of which is hinged. What minimum 30°
velocity v should be imparted to the ball downwards, so
that it can complete the circle.

l
(a) vertical component of velocity of the bob is always
less than its, horizontal component.
u
(b) vertical component of velocity is less than, equal to
or more than the horizontal component on different
(a) g (b) 5g 
position.

(c) 3g  (d) 2g (c) vertical component of velocity is always more than
the horizontal component.
57. A particle is given an initial speed u inside a smooth (d) acceleration of the bob is constant throughout.
spherical shell of radius R = 1 m that it is just able to
complete the circle. Acceleration of the particle when its 61. With what minimum speed v must a small ball should be
velocity is vertical is pushed inside a smooth vertical tube from a height h so
that it may reach the top of the tube ? Radius of the tube is R.

R
u
R

h v
(a) g 10 (b) g

(c) g 2 (d) 3g
 CIRCULAR MOTION 98

67. The ring shown in the figure is given a constant horizontal

5
(a) 2 g h  2R  (b) R acceleration (a0 = g/ 3 ). Maximum deflection of the string
2
from the vertical is 0, then
(c) g 5R  2h  (d) 2g 2R  h 

62. A body of mass 1 kg is moving in a verticle circular path

of radius 1 m. The difference between the kinetic energies
at its highest and lowest position is :
(a) 20 J (b) 10 J

(c) 4 5 J (d) 10  5  1 J (a) 0 = 30° (b) 0 = 60°

63. A block of mass m, slides down along the surface of a (c) at maximum deflection, tension in string is equal to mg.
bowl (radius R) from the rim to the bottom. The velocity (d) At maximum deflection, tension in string is equal to
of the block at the bottom will be :
2mg
.
(a) R g (b) 2  R g 3

Passage - 3
(c) 2R g (d) gR
Using the following passage, sovle Q. 68 to 70
64. A simple pendulum 1 metre long has a bob of 10 kg. If the
A small ball is given some velocity at point A towards right
pendulum swings from a horizontal position, the K.E. of
so that it moves on teh semicirculare track and does not
the bob, at the instant it passes through the lowest
leave contact upto the highest point B. After leaving the
position of its path is highest point B. it falls at the top of a building of height R
(a) 89 joule (b) 95 joule and width x(x << 2R). ( All the surface are frictionless.)
(c) 98 joule (d) 85 joule 68. The velocity given to the ball at point A so that it may hit
65. A small body of mass m slides without friction fron the the top of the building is
top of a hemisphere of radius r. At what height will the
body be detached from the centre of hemisphere ?

r r (a) 4gR (b) 2gR

(a) h = (b) h =
2 3
(c) gR (d) 6gR
2r r
(c) h = (d) h =
3 4 69. If the collision of ball with the building is elastic, then the
66. A particle moves from rest at A on the surface of a smooth angle with the horizontal at which the ball will rebound
circular cylinder of radius r as shown. At B it leaves the from the top of the building is
cylinder. The equation relation  and  is : (a) 60° (b) 45°
(c) 30° (d) none
70. The horizontal distance of the ball from the foot of building
where the ball strikes the horizontal ground will be

(a) 3 sin  = 2 cos (b) 2 sin  = 3 cos 

(a) 2R 
(b) 1  2 R 
(c) 3 sin  = 2 cos  (d) 2 sin  = 3 cos 

(c) 2 1  2 R  (d) 12R
CIRCULAR MOTION 99

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

SECTION - A ends. The tube is then rotated in a horizontal plane
1. The coordinates of a moving particle at any time ‘t’ are about one of its ends with a uniform angular velocity
given by x = t3 and y = t3 . The speed of the particle .The force exerted by the liquid at the other end
at time ‘t’ is given by – [AIEEE-2003] is – [IIT -1992]

(A) 3t 2  2   2 (B) t 2  2   2 (A) ML 2 /2 (B) ML 2

(C) ML 2 /4 (D) ML22 /2
(C)  2  2 (D) 3t  2   2
4. A stone of mass m, tied to the end of a string, is
whirled around in a horizontal circle (neglect the force
2. Which of the following statements is FALSE for a due to gravity). The length of the string is reduced
particle moving in a circle with a constant angular gradually keeping the angular momentum of the stone
speed? [AIEEE-2004] about the centre of the circle constant. Then, the
(A) The velocity vector is tangent to the circle tension in the string is given by T = Arn, where A is a
(B) The acceleration vector is tangent to the circle constant, r is the instantaneous radius of the circle,
(C) The acceleration vector ponits to the centre of the and n = ...... [IIT– 1993]
circle (A) –3 (B) –5 (C) 3 (D) 5
(D) The velocity and acceleration vectors and
5. A particle of mass m is moving in a circular path of
perpendicular to each other
constant radius r such that its centripetal
acceleration ac is varying with time t as ac = k2 rt2 ,
3. A particle is acted upon by a force of constant where k is a constant . The power delivered to the
magnitude which is always perpendicular to the particle by the forces acting on it is – [IIT - 1994]
velocity of the particle, the motion of the particle takes
place in a plane. It follows that – [AIEEE-2004] (A) 2mk2 r2t (B) mk2r2t
(C) (mk4r2t5) /3 (D) zero
(A) Its velocity is constant
(B) Its acceleration is constant 6. A small block is shot into each of the four tracks
(C) Its kinetic energy is constant as shown below. Each of the tracks rises to the
(D) It moves in a straight line same height. The speed with which the block enters
the track is the same in all cases. At the highest
point of the track, the normal reaction is maximum
SECTION - B in – [IIT - 2001]
1. A rod of length L is hinged from one end. It is
brought to a horizontal position and released. The
(a) V (b) V
angular velocity of the rod when it is in vertical
position is – [IIT- 1990]

(A) 2g / L (B) 3g / L (c) V (d) V

7. An insect crawls up a hemispherical surface very

(C) g / 2L (D) g/L slowly (see the figure). The coefficient of friction
2. A car is moving in a circular horizontal track of between the insect and the surface is 1/3. If the line
radius 10 m with a constant speed of joining the centre of the hemispherical surface to the
10 m/s. A plumb bob is suspended from the roof of insect makes an angle  with the vertical, the maximum
the car by a light rigid rod of length 1.0 m. The angle possible value of  is given by – [IIT-2001]
made by the rod with the track is– [IIT- 1992]
(A) Zero (B) 30º
(C) 45º (D) 60º
3. A tube of length L is filled completely with an
incompressible liquid of mass M and closed at both (A) cot  = 3 (B) tan  = 3
(C) sec = 3 (D) cosec  = 3
 CIRCULAR MOTION 100

8. A bob of mass M is suspended by a massless string 10. The work done on a particle of mass m by a force,
of length L. The horizontal velocity V at position A
 
is just sufficient to make it reach the point B. The x i  y j  (K being a constant of
K 3/ 2 3/ 2
 x 2  y2 
angle  at which the speed of the bob is half of that
    x 2  y2 
at A satisfies – [IIT-2008]
B appropriate dimensions), when the particle is taken from
the point (a, 0) to the point (0, a) along a circular path of
radius a about the origin in the x-y plane is (2013)

 2K K
L (a) (b)
a a
V
A K
(c) (d) 0
   2a
(A)  = (B) <  <
4 4 2 11. A ball of mass (m) 0.5 kg is attached to the end of a string
having length (L) 0.5 m. The ball is rotated on a horizonal
 3
(C) << (D) << circuit path about vertical axis. The maximum tension
2 4
that the string can bear is 324 N. The maximum possible
9. A stone tied to a string of length L is whirled in a vertical value of angular velocity of ball (in rad/s) is : 2011
circle with the other end of the string at the centre. At a
certain instant of time, the stone is at its lowest position,
and has a speed u. The magnitude of the change in its
velocity as it reaches a position where the string is
horizontal is : (1998)

(a) 9 (b) 18
(a) u 2  2 gL (b) 2 gL
(c) 27 (d) 36

(c) u 2  gL (d) 
2 u 2  gL 


CIRCULAR MOTION 101

ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (c) 10. (c)
11. (a) 12. (c) 13. (b) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (c)
21. (c) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (b) 25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (b) 29. (a) 30. (a)
31. (c) 32. (b) 33. (c) 34. (c) 35. (b) 36. (b) 37. (d) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (a)
41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (b) 44. (a) 45. (b) 46. (b) 47. (d) 48. (c) 49. (c) 50. (a)
51. (c) 52. (c) 53. (b) 54. (c) 55. (a) 56. (c) 57. (b) 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (a)
61. (d) 62. (b) 63. (b) 64. (d) 65. (b) 66. (d) 67. (b) 68. (c) 69. (c) 70. (b)
71. (c) 72. (a) 73. (c) 74. (d) 75. (c) 76. (b) 77. (d) 78. (a) 79. (c) 80. (c)

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (a)
11. (c) 12. (a, c) 13. (d) 14. (d) 15. (c) 16. (b) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (b)
21. (c) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (a) 25. (b) 26. (d) 27. (d) 28. (a) 29. (b) 30. (d)
31. (d) 32. (c) 33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (c) 37. (c) 38. (d) 39. (b) 40. (b)
41. (c) 42. (c) 43. (b) 44. (c) 45. (d) 46. (d) 47. (c) 48. (a) 49. (d) 50. (b)
51. (c) 52. (c) 53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (c) 56. (b) 57. (a) 58. (d) 59. (b) 60. (c)
61. (b) 62. (d) 63. (c) 64. (a) 65. (c) 66. (c) 67. (d) 68. (c) 69. (a) 70. (c)

71. (a) 72. (a) 73. (b) 74. (d)

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (c) 5. (b) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (d) 9. (c) 10. (b)
11. (b) 12. (b) 13. (b) 14. (b) 15. (d) 16. (d) 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (a)
21. (d) 22. (c) 23. (a) 24. (b) 25. (b) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (a) 29. (c) 30. (b)
31. (d) 32. (d) 33. (d) 34. (d) 35. (b) 36. (b) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (a)
41. (b) 42. (d) 43. (c) 44. (c) 45. (c) 46. (b) 47. (c) 48. (b) 49. (c) 50. (a)
51. (c) 52. (c) 53. (a) 54. (d) 55. (c) 56. (d) 57. (a) 58. (b) 59. (c) 60. (a)
61. (d) 62. (a) 63. (c) 64. (c) 65. (c) 66. (c) 67. (b, c) 68. (d) 69. (b) 70. (c)

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Section - A
1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (c)
Section - B
1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (d) 9. (d) 10. (d)
11. (d)
Dream on !!

 03
CENTRE OF MASS,
MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 103

THEORY

1. CENTRE OF MASS (b) For multiple systems of point objects

In the first part of mechanics, we have discussed all about System 1 System 2
point objects. In this chapter, we shall deal with the cases of Y
large objects or system of point objects. M1 M2
To deal with such scenarios, we need to know about centre x1, y1 x2, y2
of mass of an object or a system.
System 3
1.1 Definition
M3
It is the weighted mean of the positions of all the point
objects with masses as their weight. x3, y3
Example : O X
M 1, x 1 M 2, x 2 M 3, x 3 M n, x n
X Consider three systems, where total and position of COM
O mass of all the particles in system 1, is M1 and (x1, y1), in
system 2 is M2 and (x2, y2) and in system 3 is M3 and (x3, y3).
then
Then  COM of all particles in all compined systems is
m x  m 2 x 2  ......  m n x n
X cm  1 1
m1  m 2 ......  m n M1 x1  M 2 x 2  M3 x 3 M y  M2 y2  M3 y3
Xcm  and Ycm  1 1
M1  M 2  M3 M1  M2  M3
Similarly :
 (c) Continuous Objects :
  mi ri
rcm  COM of continuous objects can be found with help of
 mi
integration. Presently we shall focus on the location of COM
for same continuous objects.
 mi x i  mi yi
 X cm  and Ycm 
 mi  mi X Uniform Rod

1.2 Location of COM

(a) For 2 point objects 2R

R C  semicircular disk

a b O
X
M1 M2
c C 4R
R  semicircular disk
3
m2c O
a
m1  m 2

m1c C
b R
m1  m 2 R C hollow hemisphere
2
* COM will be towards the heavier mass. O
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 104

The above relation is very useful in solving complicated

problems.

C (d) We know
R 3R
C solid hemisphere   
8  M v  M 2 v 2  ......M n v n
O Vcm  1 1
M1  M 2  ......M n
   
 Mv cm  m1 v1  m 2 v 2  ......  m n v n
   
h Psys  P1  P2  ......  Pn
C h
C solid right circular cone Total momentum of system of all particles is total mass times
4 
O Vcm .
Above relation helps us in applying momentum related
1.3 Kinematics of COM equations in complex problems.

We know 1.5 Example of Motion of COM and its applications

   
 M r  M 2 r2  M 3 r3  ......M n rn (a) Trajectory of COM remains unchanged on disintegration of
rcm  1 1
M1  M 2  ......M n 
an unstable nucleus or a bomb till the time  Fext on system
Taking time derivatives both sides. does not change.
    (b) Motion of binary stars.
M v  M 2 v 2  ......M n v n
Vcm  1 1
M 1  M 2 ......M n (c) Cons. of momentum during disintegration of an unstable
nucleus.
Taking time derivations both sides
(d) Motion of earth-moon system about sun.
  
 M a  M 2 a 2  ......M n a n
a cm  1 1 2. COLLISIONS
M1  M 2  ......M n
We define a collision as an isolated event in which two or
1.4 Properties and Application of COM more colliding bodies exert relatively strong forces on
(a) Entire mass is supposed to be concentrated at COM. eachother for a relatively short time.
(b) If some force is applied on a free object, the body does not Two key rules of the collision game are :
rotate if line of action of force passes through centre of (i) Law of conservation of linear momentum, and (ii) Law
mass. of conservation of energy.
We know Types of Collision
    Collisions between particles have been divided broadly
M a  M 2 a 2  ......M n a n
A cm  1 1 into two types :
M1  M 2  ......M n
1. Elastic collisions, 2. Inelastic collisions
   
 MAcm = M1a1  M 2 a 2  ......M n a n (a) Elastic collision : A collision in which there is absolutely
By Newton’s 2 law.
nd no loss of kinetic energy is called an elastic collision.
  For example, collision between atomic and sub atomic
M1a1  F1 and similarly for all objects, with terms having particle are elastic collisions. Practically collision between
the obvious meanings. two ivory balls can also be taken as an elastic collision.
    The basic characteristics of an elastic collision are :
  F1  F2  ......Fn  MAcm
 (i) The linear momentum is conserved,

  Fext  MAcm (ii) Total energy of the system is conserved,
 CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 105

(iii) The kinetic energy is conserved. kinetic energy and continuing to move along the same
(iv) The forces involved during elastic collisions must be straight line after collision.
conservative forces. Suppose two balls A and B of masses m1 and m2 are moving
(b) Inelastic collision : A collision in which there occurs some initially along the same straight line with velocities u1 and
loss of kinetic energy is called an inelastic collision. u2 respectively, figure (a).

At there is always some loss of kinetic energy in most of

m1 m1
the collision, therefore, collisions we come across in daily m2 m2
life are generally inelastic. u1 u2
A B A B
The basic characteristics of an inelastic collision are :
(i) The linear momentum is conserved. Before During
Collision Collision
(ii) Total energy is conserved.
(a) (b)
(iii Kinetic energy is NOT conserved. Obviously, a part of
kinetic energy is converted into some other form of energy m1
m2
e.g., heat energy, sound energy etc. v1 v2
(iv) some or all the forces involved in an inelastic collision A B
may be non-conservative in nature.
After
2.1 Coefficient of Restitution or Coefficient of Resilience Collision
(c)
Coefficient of restitution or coefficient of resilience of a
collision is defined as the ratio of relative velocity of
separation after collision to the relative velocity of When u1 > u2, relative velocity of approach before collision,
approach before collision. = u1 – u2

It is represented by ‘e’. Therefore, two balls collide, figure (b). Let the collision be
perfectly elastic. After collision, suppose v1 is velocity of
relative velocity of separation (after collision) A and v2 is velocity of B along the same straight line,
e=
relative velocity of approach (before collision) figure (c). When v2 > v1, the bodies separate after collision.
Relative velocity of separation after collision = v2 – v1
v  v1 Linear momentum of the two balls before collision
e= 2
u1  u 2 = m1u1 + m2u2

where u1, u2 are velocities of two bodies before collision, Linear momentum of the two balls after collision
and v1, v2 are their respective velocities after collision. = m1v1 + m2v2
For a perfectly elastic collision, relative velocity of As linear momentum is conserved in an elastic collision,
separation after collision is equal to relative velocity of therefore
approach before collision. m1v1 + m2v2 = m1u1 + m2u2 ...(1)
 e 1 or m2 (v2 – u2) = m1 (u1 – v1) ...(2)

For a perfectly inelastic collision, rel. vel. of separation Total K.E. of the two balls before collision
after collision = 0 1 1
 m1 u12  m 2 u 22 ...(3)
 e0 2 2
Total K.E. of the two balls after collision
For all other collisions, e lies between 0 and 1, i.e., 0 < e < 1.
1 1
2.2 Elastic Collision in One Dimension  m1 v12  m 2 v 22 ...(4)
2 2
It involves two bodies moving initially along the same As K.E. is also conserved in an elastic collision, therefore
straight line, striking against each other without loss of from,
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 106

1 1 1 1  m  m2   2m 2 
m1 v12  m 2 v 22  m1 u12  m 2 u 22  u1 1  1
2 2 2 2   u2   1
 m1
 m 2 
m
 1  m 2 
1 1
or m 2  v 22  u 22   m1  u12  v12   m  m 2  m1  m 2   2m 2  m1  m 2 
2 2  u1  1   u2  
 m1  m 2   m1  m 2 
or m 2  v 22  u 22   m1  u12  v12  ...(5)
2m1 u1  m 2  m1  u 2
Dividing, (5) by (2) we get v2   ...(8)
m1  m 2 m1  m 2
m 2  v 22  u 22  m1  u12  v12 
 Memory note
m2  v2  u 2  m1  u1  v1 
The expression for v2 can be obtained from, the expression
for v1, by replacing m1 by m2 and u1 by u2. The reverse is
v 2
 u 2  v 2  u 2  u 1
 v1  u1  v1  also true, i.e., can also be obtained from.
or 
v 2  u2  u 1  v1 
Particular Cases
or v2 + u2 = u1 + v1 1. When masses of two bodies are equal,
i.e., m1 = m2 = m, say
or v 2  v1  u1  u 2 ...(6)
2 mu 2
Hence, in one dimensional elastic collision, relative velocity From (7), v1   u 2 , i.e., velocity of A after collision
2m
of separation after collision is equal to relative velocity of
= velocity of B before collision.
approach before collision.
2 m1 u1
v  v1 From (8), v 2   u1 , i.e., velocity of B after collision
From (6), 2 1 2m1
u1  u 2
= velocity of A before collision
v 2  v1 Hence, when two bodies of equal masses undergo of
By definition,  e 1 perfectly elastic collision is one dimension, their velocities
u1  u 2
are just interchanged.
Hence, coefficient of restitution/resilience of a perfectly
Before Collision During Collision After Collision
elastic collision in one dimension is unity.

2.3 Calculation of velocities after collision (a) A B A B A B

Velocity of A :
From (6), v2 = u1 – u2 + v1 (b) A B A B A B
Putting in, we get m1v1 + m2 (u1 – u2 + v1) = m1u1 + m2 u2
m1v1 + m2u1 – m2u2 + m2v1 = m1u1 + m2u2 (c) A B A B A B
v1 (m1 + m2) = (m1 – m2) u1 + 2 m2 u2
2. When the target body B is initially at rest, i.e., u2 = 0
m  m 2  u1 2m 2 u 2
v1  1
 ...(7) m 1
 m 2  u1
m1  m 2 m1  m 2 From (7), v1  ...(9)
m1  m 2
Velocity of B : 2m1u1
From (8), v 2  ...(10)
Put this value of v1 from m1  m 2
Three cases arises further :
m 1
 m 2  u1 2m 2 u 2
v 2  u1  u 2   (a) When masses of two bodies are equal, i.e., m1 = m2
m1  m 2 m1  m 2
From, v1 = 0
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 107

2m1 u1 The overhead arrows for vectors have been avoided as

From, v2   u1 the collision is one dimensional and velocity components
2m1
along one axis are used.
i.e., body A comes to rest and body B starts moving with
If we know masses m1, m2, initial velocities u1, u2 and one
the initial velocity of A. Obviously, in such collision, 100%
of the final velocities, we can calculate the other final
K.E. of A is transferred to the body B. This is shown in
velocity from equation.
figure.
Perfectly inelastic collision in one dimension
(b) When body B at rest is very heavy, i.e., m2 >> m1, i.e., m1
Figure shows perfectly inelastic collision between two
can be ignored compared to m2
bodies of masses m1 and m2. The body of mass m2 happens
m2 to be initially at rest (u2 = 0) We refer to this body as the
Putting m1 = 0, we obtain v1   u1  u1 ; v2  0 target. The incoming body of mass m1, moving with initial
m2
velocity u1 is referred to as the projectile. After the
Hence, when a light body A collides against a heavy body collision, the two bodies move together with a common
B at rest; A rebounds with its own velocity and B continues velocity V. The collision is perfectly inelastic.
to be at rest. This is what happens when a ball reboudns
to the same height from which it was thrown, on striking a m1 m1
m2 m2
floor. u1
V
(c) When body B at rest has negligible mass,
i.e., m2 << m1; i.e., m2 can be ignored compared to m1 Before Collision AfterCollision
Putting m2 = 0,
As the total linear momentum of the system remains
m 2m1 u1 constant, therefore Pi = Pf
we get v1  1 u1  u1 ; v 2   2u1
m1 m1
i.e., m1u2 + m2u2 = (m1 + m2) V or m1u1 = (m1 + m2) V
Hence, when a heavy body A undergoes an elastic collision
u 2
 0
with a light body B at rest, the body A keeps on moving
with the same velocity of its own and the body B starts m1 u1
moving with double the initial velocity of A. or V
m1  m 2
2.4 Inelastic Collision in One Dimension
2.5 Elastic Collision in two Dimensions of Oblique Collision
Figure show two bodies of masses m1 and m2 moving with
velocities, u1 and u2 respectively, along a single axis. They If the initial velocities and final velocities of both the bodies
collide involving some loss of kinetic energy. Therefore, are along the same straight line, then it is called a one-
the collision is inelastic. Let v1 and v2 be the velocities of dimensional collision or head on collision. In the case of
the two bodies after collision. small spherical bodies, this is possible if the direction of
travel of body 1 passes through the centre of body 2.

u1 u2 v1 v2 When two bodies travelling initially along the same straight

line collide without loss of kinetic energy and move along
m2 m2 different directions in a plane after collision, the collision
m1 m1
is said to be elastic collision in two dimensions.
Before Collision AfterCollision
Suppose m1, m2 are the masses of two bodies A and B
As the two bodies form one system, which is closed and moving initially along X–axis with velocities u1 and u2
isolated, we can write the law of conservation of linear respectively.
momentum for the two body system as :
When u 1 > u2, the two bodies collide. After collision,
Total momentum before the collision (Pi) = Total momentum let the body A move with a velocity v1 at an angle  with
after the collision (Pf) X–axis. Let the body B move with a velocity v2 at an angle
m1 u1 + m2 u2 = m1 v1 + m2 v2 ...(11)  with X–axis as shown in figure.
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 108


along X–axis to initial momentum Pi   along the same
Y
v1 axis, we get
m1v1 cos  + m2v2 cos  = m1u1 + m2u2 ...(16)
A
As initial momentum of the two bodies along Y–axis is
zero, therefore applying the law of conservation of linear
m2
A X momentum along Y–axis, we get
u1 B u2
0 = m1v1 sin  – m2v2 sin  ...(17)
As initial momentum of the two bodies along Y–axis is
B
zero, therefore applying the law of conservation of linear
v2 momentum along Y–axis, we get
Y' 0 = m1 v1 sin  – m2v2 sin 
Knowing m1, m2 ; u1, u2 ;  and  we can calculate v1 and
As the collision is elastic, kinetic energy is conserved. v2 from equation.

 Total K.E. after collision = Total K.E. before collision Perfectly inelastic collision in two dimensions
Figure shows perfectly inelastic collision between two
1 1 1 1 bodies of masses m1 and m2. The body of mass m2 is moving
or m1 v12  m 2 v 22  m1 u12  m 2 u 22 ...(12)
2 2 2 2 initially with velocity u2 along X–axis. The body of mass
m1 is moving with velocity u1 at an angle  with X–axis as
or m1 v12  m 2 v 22  m1 u12  m 2 u 22 ...(13) shown.
As linear momentum is conserved in elastic collision,
therefore, along X–axis, total linear mometum after collision Y
= total linear momentum before collision.
m1
m1v1 cos  + m2v2 cos  = m1u1 + m2u2 ...(14) u1
Now, along Y–axis, linear momentum before collision is
m2 u2
zero (as both the bodies are moving along X–axis). And X
O
after collision, total linear momentum along Y–axis is
(m1v1 sin  – m2v2 sin )
m1v1sin  – m2v2 sin  = 0 ...(15) V

From three equations (13), (14) and (15), we have to Y'

calculate four variable v1, v2,  and , which is not possible.
We have, therefore, to measure experimentally any one After the collision at O, the two bodies stick to eachother
and move with a common velocity V at an angle  with X–
parameter, i.e., final velocities v1,v2 of A, B or their direction
axis as shown in figure.
 and . The rest of the three parameters can then be
calculated from the three equations. As the system is closed and isolated, the total linear
momentum of the system remains constant.
When two bodies travelling initially along the same straight
Referring to figure, and equating initial momentum along
line collide involving some loss of kinetic energy, and move
X–axis to final momentum along the same axis, we get
after collision, along different directions in a plane, the
collision is said to be inelastic collision in two dimensions. m1u1 cos  + m2u2 = (m1 + m2) v cos  ...(18)
Again, applying the law of conservation of linear
As the system is closed and isolated, the total linear
  momentum alogn y–axis, we get.
momentum of the system remains constant, i.e., Pf  Pi
m1u1 sin  + 0 = (m1 + m2) V sin  ...(19)
 Knowing m1, m2 ; u1, u2 and  we can calculate final
Referring to figure and equating final momentum Pf   velocity V and its direction, i.e.,  from equations (18)
and (19).
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 109

SOLVED EXAMPLES

Example - 1 Example - 5
In which, elastic or inelastic collision, the momentum is Underline the correct alternative :
conserved ? What about K.E. ? (a) When a conservative force does positive work on a
body, the potential energy of the body increases/
Sol. Momentum is conserved in both the types of collisions, but
decreases/remains unaltered.
K.E. is conserved only in elastic collisions.
(b) Work done by a body against friction always results in
Example - 2 a loss of its kinetic/potential energy.
(c) The rate of change of total momentum of a many-
Can a body have momentum when its energy is negaive ?
particle system is proportional to the external force/
sum of the internal forces on the system.
Sol. Yes, when K < V, total energy E = K + V is negative. The
(d) In an inelastic collision of two bodies. the quantities
body has the momentum K  0  . For example, in an atom, which do not change after the collision are the total
electron has momentum, though its energy is negative. kinetic energy/total linear momentum/total energy of
the system of two bodies.
Example - 3
Sol. (a) The work done by a conservative force is equal to the
The velocity of an aeroplane is doubled. negative of the potential energy. When the work done
(a) What will happen to its momentum ? Will the is positive, the potential energy decreases.
momentum remain conserved ? (b) Friction always opposes motion. A body does work
(b) What will happen to its KE ? Will the energy remain against friction at the expense of its kinetic energy. Work
done by a body against friction results in a loss of its
conserved ?
kinetic energy.
(c) Internal forces in a many-particle system cancel out in
Sol. (a) When the velocity of the aeroplane is doubled, its
pairs and so they cannot change the net momentum of
momentum also gets doubled. However, the combined the system. Only the external forces can produce
momentum of aeroplne and air is conserved. As the change in momentum. The rate of change of mometum
momentum of the aeroplane increases, the momentum of air of a many-particle system is proportional to the external
also increases by an equal amount in the opposite direction. force on the system.
(b) The kinetic energy becomes four times. The additional (d) In an elastic collision, the kinetic energy of the system
energy is obtained by burning of fuel. However, the total decreases after the collision but the total energy of the
system and its total linear momentum do not change
energy is still conserved.
after the inelastic collision.

Example - 4 Example - 6
A rocket explodes in mid air. How does this affect State if each of the following statements is true of false.
(a) its total momentum and Give reasons for your anser.
(a) In an elastic collision of two bodies, the momentum
(b) its total kinetic energy ?
and energy of each body is conserved.
(b) Total energy of a system is always conserved, no matter
Sol. (a) Because no external force acts on the rocket, its total
what internal and external forces on the body are
momentum remains unchanged. present.
(b) When the rocket explodes, its fragments receive additional (c) Work done in the motion of a body over a closed loop
kinetic energy from the explosion. The chemical energy of is zero for every force in nature.
the fuel changes into kinetic energy. As a result of this, the (d) In an inelastic collision, the final kinetic energy is always
total kinetic energy gets increased. less than the initial kinetic energy of the system.
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 110

Sol. (a) False. Total momentum and total energy of the entire Sol. Let R =resistance force offered by the planks,
system are conserved and not of individual bodies. t1 = thickness of first plank,
(b) False. The external forces acting on a body may change t2 = thickness of second plank.
its energy.
For first planks :
(c) False. In case of a non-conservative froce like friction,
loss in KE = work against resistance
the work in the motion of a body over a closed loop is
2
not zero. 1 1 4 
mv 2  m  v   Rt 1
(c) True. In an elastic collision, a part of the initial KE of 2 2 5 
the system always changes into some other form of
energy. 1  9 
 mv 2    Rt 1 ... (i)
2  25 
Example- -20
Example 7
For second plank :
Answer carefully, with reasons :
2
(a) In an elastic collision of two billiard balls, is the total 1 4 
m  v   0  Rt 2
kinetic energy conserved during the short time of 2 5 
collision of the balls (i.e., when they are in contact) ?
(b) Is the total linear momentum conserved during the 1  16 
 mv 2    Rt 2 ... (ii)
short time of an elastic collision of two balls ? 2  25 
(c) What are the answers to (a) and (b) for an inelastic Dividing (i) and (ii)
collision ?
(d) If the potential energy of two billiard balls depends t1 9
 
only on the separation distance between their centres, t 2 16
is the collision elastic or inelastic ? (Note, we are talking
Example - 9
here of potential energy corresponding to the force
during collision, not gravitational potential energy). A bullet of mass 2 gm travelling at a speed of 500 m/s is
fired into a ballistic pendulum of mass 1.0 kg suspended
Sol. (a) During the short time of collision when the balls are in from a cord 1.0 m long. The bullet penetrates the pendulum
contact, the kinetic energy of the ball gets converted and emerges with a velocity of 100 m/s. Through what
into potential energy. In an elastic collision, though the
vertical height will the pendulum rise ?
kinetic energy before collision is equal to the kinetic
energy after the collision but kinetic energy is not
conserved during the short time of collision.
(b) Yes, the total linear momentum is conserved during the
short time of an eleastic collision of two balls.
(c) In an inelastic collision, the total KE is not conserved
during collision as well as even after the collision. But
the total linear momentum of the two balls is conserved.
(d) The collision is elastic because the forces involved are
conservative. Sol. Let m = 2 ×1 0–3 kg ; M = 1.0 kg
u = 500 m/s, v1 = 100 m/s
Example - 8
v2 = speed of the pendulum after impact.
A bullet leaving the muzzle of a rifle barrel with a velocity
mu = mv1 + Mv2
v penetrates a plank and loses one fifth of its velocity. It
then strikes second plank, which it just penetrates (conservation of momentum)
through. Find the ratio of the thickness of the planks
m ( u  v1 ) 2
supposing average resistance to the penetration is same  v2   (500  100)  0.8 m / s.
M 1000
in both the cases.
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 111

The block swings and its kinetic energy gets converted Example - 11
into potential energy.
An explosion blows a rock into three parts. Two pieces go
1 off at right angles to each other, 1.0 kg piece with a velocity
Mv 22  Mgh
2 of 12 m/s and other 2.0 kg piece with a velocity 8 m/s. If the
v 22 0.8  0.8 8 third piece flies off with a velocity 40 m/s, compute the
 h   m mass of third piece.
2g 2  9 .8 245

Example - 10 Sol. Let m1, m2 and m3 be the masses of three pieces.

m1 = 1.0 kg, m2 = 2.0 kg
Two equal spheres of mass m are in contact on a smooth
horizontal table. A third identical sphere impinges Let v1 = 12 m/s
symmetrically on them and is reduced to rest. Prove that v2 = 8 m/s, v3 = 40 m/s
e = 2/3 and find the loss of KE. Let v1 and v2 be directed along X and Y axes respectively.
Let v3 be directed as shown.
Sol.

Let u = velocity of sphere A before impact. As the spheres

are identical, the triangle ABC formed by joining their
centres is equilateral. The spheres B and C will move in
direction AB and AC after impact making an angle of 30°
with the original line of motion of ball A. By conservation of momentum :

Let v = speed of the other balls after impact Initial momentum = 0

Momentum conservation : Along X–axis : 0 = m1v1 – m3v3 cos 

mu = mv cos 30° + mv cos 30° Along Y–axis : 0 = m2v2 – m3v3 sin 
 m1v1 = m3v3 cos and m2v2 = m3v3 sin 
 u=v 3 ... (i)
Squaring and adding, we get :
Newton’s experimental Law :
For an oblique collision, we have to take components along m12 v12  m 22 v 22  m 32 v 32
normal i.e., along AB for balls A and B.
 v – 0 = e (u cos 30° – 0) 12 (12) 2  ( 2) 2 (8) 2
 m 32   m 3  0.5 kg.
 v = eu cos 30° ... (ii) ( 40) 2
Combining (i) and (ii), we get :
e = 2/3. Example
Example--512
Calculate the moment of inertia of a :
1 1 
Loss in KE  mu 2  2 mv 2  (a) Disc about an axis passing through its edge and
2 2 
perpendicular to the circular base of the disc.
2
1  u  1 (b) Solid sphere about an axis touching the sphere at its
 mu 2  m    mu 2
2  3 6 surface.
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 112
2
Sol. (a) I= Icm + MR Example - 14

1 3 A particle of mass 2 kg is initially at rest. A force starts

I MR 2  MR 2 I MR 2 acting on it in one direction whose magnitude changes
2 2
with time. The force graph is shown in figure
ICM

2
(b) I = Icm + MR

2 7
I MR 2  MR 2 I MR 2
5 5 Find the velocity of the particle at the end of 10 s.

Example - 13 Sol. Using impulse = change in linear momentum (or are a under
A disc of mass m and radius R has a concentric hole of F–t graph)
radius r. Its moment of inertia about an axis through its We have m (vf – vi) = Area
centre and perpendicular to its plane is : 1
or 2 (vf – 0) = × 2 × 10 + 2 × 10
2
1 1
(a)
2
m R  r 
2
(b)
2

m R 2  r2  1 1
+ × 2× (10 + 20) + × 4 × 20
2 2
1 1
(c)
2
m R  r 
2
(d)
2

m R2  r2  = 10 + 20 + 30 + 40
or 2vf = 100
 vf = 50 m/s
M
Sol. Let = mass per unit area =
 (R 2  r 2 ) Example - 15

If we fill the hole with mass densities +and –, then the Two blocks A and B of equal mass m = 1.0 kg are lying on
system can be treated as a combination of two discs of a smooth horizontal surface as shown in figure. A spring
radii r and R and densities –and +. of force constant k = 200 N/m is fixed at one end of block
A. Block B collides with block A with velocity v0 = 2.0 m/
1 1 s. Find the maximum compression of the spring.
I = I1 + I2  M1R 12  M 2 R 22
2 2

Sol. At maximum compression (xm) velocity of both the blocks is

same, say it is v. Applying conservation of linear momentum,
we have,
r (mA + mB) v = mBv0

v0 2.0
1  r2  1  R2  or v   1.0 m / s
    r 2       R 2 
 2  2


2 2
2 2   
Using conservation of mechanical energy, we have


 4 4

R r  

M R4  r4

M 2 2
R r   1 1 1
m B v02   m A  m B  v 2  kx m2
4  2
4 R r 2
4  2 2 2
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 113

Substituting the values, we get 2

v 2 10 /11
Now h    4.1102 m
1 2 1 2 1 2g 2 10
 1   2.0    1.0  1.0   1.0     200   x 2m
2 2 2
Example - 18
or 2 = 1.0 + 100 x 2m or xm = 0.1 = 10.0 cm
The friction coefficient between the horizontal surface and
Example - 16 each of the block shown in the figure is 0.2. The collision
between the blocks is perfectly elastic. Find the separation
A ball is moving with velocity 2 m/s towards a heavy wall
between them when they come to rest.
moving towards the ball with speed 1 m/s as shown in
2
figure. Assuming collision to be elastic, find the velocity (Take g = 10 m/s )
of ball immediately after the collision.

Sol. Velocity of first block before collision,

Sol. The speed of wall will not change after the collision. So, let
v be the velocity of the ball after collision in the direction v12  12  2  2   0.16  1  0.64
shown in the figure. Since collision is elastic (e = 1), v1 = 0.6 m/s

By conservation of momentum, 2 × 0.6 = 2v1'  4v'2

also v'2  v1'  v1 for ealstic collision

It gives v'2 = 0.4 m/s

separation speed = approach speed v1' = – 0.2 m/s

or v–1=2+1 or v = 4 m/s
Now distance moved after collision

Example - 17 2 2
 0.4   0.2 
–2 –2 s1  and s 2 
A pendulum bob of mass 10 kg is raised to a height 5 × 10 m 2 2 2 2
and then released. At the bottom of its swing. It picks up a
–3  s = s1 + s2 = 0.05 m = 5 cm
mass 10 kg. To what height will the combined mass rise ?
Example - 19
Sol. Velocity of pendulum bob in mean position
Three identical balls, ball I, ball II and ball III are placed on
v1  2 gh a smooth floor on a straight line at the separation of 10 m
between balls as shown in figure. Initially balls are
stationary.
 2  10  5  10 2  1m / s
–3
Ball I is given velocity of 10 m/s towards ball II, collision
When the bob picks up a mass 10 kg at the bottom, then between ball I and II is inelastic with coefficient of
by conservation of linear momentum the velocity of restitution 0.5 but collision between ball II and III is
coalesced mass is given by perfectly elastic. What is the time interval between two
m1v1 + m2v2 = (m1 + m2) v consecutive collisions between ball I and II ?
–2 –3 –2 –3
10 + 10 × 0 = (10 + 10 ) v
2
10 10
or v 2
 m/s
1.110 11
 CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 114

Sol. Let velocity of I ball and ball II ball after collision be v1 and Example - 21
v2 .
In the shown figure the wedge of mass M has a semicircular
v2 – v1 = 0.5 × 10 ...(i) groove of radius R. A particle of mass m is released from A.
mv2 + mv1 = m × 10 ... (ii) Mass of wedge is twice to that of small mass. It slides on the
v2 + v1 = 10 smooth circular track and starts climbing on the right face.

Solving equation (i) and (ii)
v1 = 2.5 m/s, v2 = 7.5 m/s
Ball II after moving 10 m collides with ball III elastically and
stops. But ball I moves towards ball II. Time taken between
two consecutive collisions
(a) Find the maximum value of  which it can subtend with
2.5
10  10  vertical and also find the distance moved by wedge at this
10 7.5  4s
 position.
7.5 2.5
(b) Find the velocity of wedge when  = 60°.
Example - 20
A plank of mass 5 kg is placed on a frictionless horizontal Sol. (a) For maximum value of 
plane. Further a block of mass 1 kg is placed over the (M + m) v = 0  v = 0
plank. A massless spring of natural length 2 m is fixed to So possible value of  = 90°
the plank by its one end. The other end of spring is
compressed by the block by half of spring’s natural length. Mx  m  2R  x 
The system is now released from the rest. What is the rCM  0 
Mm
velocity of the plank when block leaves the plank ? (The
stiffness constant of spring is 100 N/m) 2mR 2
 x  R
Mm 3

2
So wedge is displaced R leftwards.
3

Sol. Let the velocity of the block and the plank, when the block (b) Conserving momentum in horizontal direction
leaves the spring be u and v respectively. 0 = – MV + m (v cos 60° – V)
1 2 1 1
By conservation of energy kx  mu 2  Mv2 v 
MV  m   v   V 
mv

v
2 2 2  2 M  m 6
2 
[M = mass of the plank, m = mass of the block]
2 2
 100 = u + 5v ...(i)
By conservation of momentum
mu + Mv = 0
 u = – 5v ...(ii)
Conserving energy :
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii)
Decrease in potential energy of m
2 10 = increase in kinetic energy of M and m
30 v = 100  v  m/s
3
1 1
From this moment until block falls, both plank and block  mgR cos 60° = mv 2  MV 2
2 2
keep their velocity constant.
gR
10 Substituting M = 2m and v = 6V we get, V 
Thus when block falls, velocity of plank  m/s . 38
3
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 115

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Discreet Practices 6. Three rods of the same mass are placed as shown in the
1. The position of centre of mass of a system consisting of figure. What will be the co-ordinate of centre of mass of the
two particles of masses m1 and m2 separated by a distance L system ?
apart, from m1 will be :
m1L m2 L
(a) m  m (b) m  m
1 2 1 2

m2 L L
(c) m (d)
1 2
2. A system consists of mass M and m (<< M). The centre of
mass of the system is : a a  a a 
(a)  ,  (b)  , 
(a) at the middle (b) nearer to M 2 2  2 2
(c) nearer to m (d) at the position of larger mass
 2a 2a  a a
3. Four identical sphere each of radius 10 cm and mass 1 kg are (c)  ,  (d)  , 
 3 3  3 3
placed on a horizontal surface touching one another so that
their centres are located at the corners of square of side 20 7. Four particles of mass m1 = 2m, m2 = 4m, m3 = m and m4 are
cm. What is the distance of their centre of mass from centre placed at four corners of a square. What should be the
of either sphere ? value of m4 so that the cente of mass of all the four particles
(a) 5 cm (b) 10 cm are exactly at the centre of the square ?
(c) 20 cm (d) none of these m4 m3
4. Four bodies of masses 2, 3, 5 and 8 kg are placed at the four
corners of a square of side 2 m. The position of CM will be:

 8 13   7 11 
(a)  ,  (b)  , 
9 9  9 9 

m1 m2
 11 13   11 8 
(c)  ,  (d)  , 
9 9  9 9 (a) 2 m (b) 8 m
5. Masses of 2 kg each are placed at the corners B and A of a (c) 6 m (d) none of these
rectangular plate ABCD as shown in the figure. A mass of 8
8. All the particles of a body are situated at a distance R from
kg to be placed on the plate so that the centre of mass of the
system should be at the centre O. Then the mass should be the origin. The distance of centre of mass of the body from
placed at : the origin is :

4m (a) = R (b) < R

B H C (c) > R (d) > R
(2 kg)
Continuous Body
O
F E 9. A uniform metal disc of radius R is taken and out of it, a disc
of diameter R is cut-off from the end. The centre of mass of
(2 kg) the remaining part will be :
A G D
(a) 1 m from O on OE (b) 2 m from O on OF (a) R/4 from the centre (b) R/3 from the centre

(c) 2 m from O on OG (d) 2 m from O on OH (c) R/5 from the centre (d) R/6 from the centre
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 116

10. A uniform square plate ABCD has mass of 10 kg. If two 13. A uniform circular disc of radius a is taken. A circular portion
points masses of 5 kg each are placed at the corners C and of radius b has been removed from its as shown in the figure.
D as shown in the adjoining figure, then the centre of mass If the centre of hole is at a distance c from the centre of the
shifts to the mid-point of :
disc, the distance x2 of the centre of mass of the remaining
part from the initial centre of mass O is given by :

(a) OH (b) DH
(c) OG (d) OF
b 2 cb 2
11. A square plate of side 20 cm has uniform thickness and
(a) a 2  c2 (b) a 2  b 2
density. A circular part of diameter 8 cm is cut out    
symmetrically as shown in figure. The position of centre of
mass of the remaining portion is :
c2 ca 2
(c) a 2  b 2 (d) c 2  b 2
   
Velocity, Momentum and Acceleration of Centre of mass
O O1
14. Two blocks of mass 10 kg and 4 kg are connected by a
spring of negligible mass and placed on a frictionless
horizontal surface. An impulse gives a velocity of 14 m/s to
(a) at O1 the heavier block in the direction of the lighter block. The
(b) at O velocity of the centre of mass is :
(c) 0.54 cm from O on the left hand side (a) 30 m/s (b) 20 m/s
(d) none of the above (c) 10 m/s (d) 5 m/s
12. A uniform metal rod of length 1 m is bent at 90° so as to form 15. Two balls are thrown simultaneously in air. The acceleration
two arms of equal length. The centre of mass of this bent of the centre of mass of the two balls while in air :
rod is :
(a) depends on the direction of the motion of the balls
 1  (b) depends on the masses of the two balls
(a) on the bisector of the angle,   m from vertex
 2
(c) depends on the speeds of the two balls

 1  (d) is equal to g
(b) on the bisector of the angle,   m from vertex
2 2 16. Consider a system of two identical particles. One of the

particles is at rest and the other has an acceleration a . The
1 centre of mass has an acceleration.
(c) on the bisector of the angle,   m from vertex
2
1
(a) zero (b) a
2
 1 
(d) on the bisector of the angle,   m from vertex  
4 2 (c) a (d) 2 a
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 117

17. Two particles of equal mass have co-ordinates (2m, 4m, 6m) 23. Two particles A and B start moving due to their mutual
and (6m, 2m, 8m). Of these one particle has a velocity  
interaction only. If at any time ‘t’ a A and a B are their
   
   
v1  2 ˆi m/s and another particle has velocity v2  2 ˆj m/s respective accelerations, v A and v B are their respective
at time t = 0. The coordinate of their centre of mass at time velocities, and upto that time WA and WB are the work done
t = 1s will be : on A and B, respectively by the mutual force, mA and mB are
their masses, respectively, then which of the following is
(a) (4m, 4m, 7m) (b) (5m, 4m, 7m) always correct.
(c) (2m, 4m, 6m) (d) (4m, 5m, 4m)    
(a) vA  vB  0 (b) m A v A  m B vB  0
18. Two particles are shown in the figure. At t = 0 a constant
force F = 6 N starts acting on the 3 kg man. Find the velocity  
(c) WA  WB  0 (d) a A  a B  0
of the centre of mass of these particles at t = 5 s.
Momentum and Energy based problems
24. Two bodies A and B having masses in the ratio 3 : 1 possess
the same kinetic energy. The ratio of linear momentum of A
to B is :
(a) 5 m/s (b) 4 m/s
(c) 6 m/s (d) 3 m/s (a) 1 : 3 (b) 3 : 1

Dynamics and Kinematics (Fnet = Macm) (c) 1 : 3 (d) 3 :1

19. Two bodies A and B are attracted towards each other due to 25. If the linear momentum is increased by 5%, the kinetic energy
gravitation. Given that A is much heavier than B, which of will increase by :
the following correctly describes the motion of the centre of (a) 50% (b) 100%
mass of the bodies ?
(c) 125% (d) 10%
(a) It moves towards A
26. A 4 kg mass and a 1 kg mass are moving with equal kinetic
(b) It remains at rest energies. The ratio of their momenta is
(c) It moves towards B (a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 1
(d) It moves perpendicular to the line joining the particles (c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 1
20. Two particles of masses 4 kg and 8 kg are separated by a 27. A block of mass 2 kg collides with a horizontal massless
distance of 12 m. If they are moving towards each other –1
spring of force constant 2 Nm . The block compresses the
under the influence of a mutual force of attraction, then the spring 4 m from the rest position. Speed of the block at the
two particles will meet each other at a distance of : instant of collision is
(a) 6 m from 8 kg mass (b) 2 m from 8 kg mass (a) 16 m/s (b) 4 m/s
(c) 4 m from 8 kg mass (d) 8 m from 8 kg mass (c) 8 m/s (d) 12 m/s
21. Two particles A and B initially at rest, move towards each 28. A shell of mass m moving with velocity v suddenly breaks
other under a mutual force of attraction. At the instant when
into 2 pieces. The part having mass m/4 remains stationary.
the speed of A is v and the speed of B is 2v, the speed of
The velocity of other part will be
centre of mass of the system is :
(a) v (b) 2v
(a) zero (b) v
(c) 1.5 v (d) 3 v 3 4
(c) v (d) v
4 3
22. A meter stick is placed vertically at the origin on a frictionless
–1
surface. A gentle push in +x direction is given to the top 29. A 50 gram bullet moving with a velocity of 10 ms gets
most point of the rod, when it has fallen completely x embedded into a 950 g stationary body. The loss in K.E. of
coordinate of centre of rod is at : the system will be
(a) origin (b) – 0.5 m (a) 95% (b) 100%
(c) – 1 m (d) + 0.5 m (c) 5% (d) 50%
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 118

30. A bullet weighing 50 gm leaves the gun with a velocity of 30 36. Consider the following two statements :
m/s. If the recoil speed imparted to the gun is 1 m/s, the (A) Linear momentum of the system remains constant
mass of the gun is : (B) Centre of mass of the system remains at rest
(a) 15 kg (b) 30 kg (a) A implies B and B implies A
(c) 1.5 kg (d) 20 kg (b) A does not imply B and B does not imply A
31. A spacecraft of mass M moves with velocity V in free space (c) A implies B but B does not imply A
at first, then it explodes, breaking into two pieces. If after (d) B implies A but A does not imply B
explosion a piece of mass m comes to rest, the other piece of
37. Condsider the following two statements :
spacecraft will have a velocity :
(A) Linear momentum of a system of particles is zero
MV MV (B) Kinetic energy of a system of particles is zero
(a) (b)
Mm Mm
(a) A implies B and B implies A
(b) A does not imply B and B does not imply A
mV mV
(c) (d) (c) A implies B but B does not imply A
Mm Mm
(d) B implies A but A does not imply B
32. A body of mass 1 kg initially at rest, explodes and breaks
38. A machine gun fires a steady stream of bullets at the rate of
into three fragments of masses in the ratio 1 : 1 : 3. The two
n per minute into a stationary target in which the bullets get
pieces of equal mass fly off perpendicular to each other, embedded. If each bullet has a mass m and arrives at the
with a speed of 15 m/s each. The speed of the heavier target with a velocity v, the average force on the target is :
fragment is :
60 v
(a) 60 mnv (b)
(a) 5 2 ms 1
(b) 45 ms
–1
mn

(c) 5 ms
–1
(d) 15 ms
–1 mnv mv
(c) (d) 60 n
–1
60
33. A bullet of mass 5 g is fired at a velocity 900 ms from a rifle

of mass 2.5 kg. What is recoil velocity of the rifle ? 39. A particle of mass 15 kg an initial velocity vi  ˆi  2 ˆj m/s. It
(a) 0.9 ms
–1
(b) 180 ms
–1 collides with another body and the impact time is 0.1 s,

–1 –1 resulting in a velocity vf  6iˆ  4 ˆj  5 kˆ m/s after impact.
(c) 900 ms (d) 1.8 ms
The average force of impact on the particle is :
34. A mass m with velocity u strikes a wall normally and returns
with the same speed. What is magnitude of the change in (a) 15 5iˆ  6 ˆj  5 kˆ (b) 15 5iˆ  6 ˆj  5 kˆ
momentum of the body when it returns :
(c) 150 5iˆ  6 ˆj  5 kˆ (d) 150 5iˆ  6 ˆj  5 kˆ
(a) 4 mu (b) mu
(c) 2 mu (d) zero 40. A man of mass M stands at one end of a plank of length L
which lies at rest on a frictionless surface. The man walk to
35. One projectile moving with velocity v in space, gets burst
M
into 2 parts of masses in the ratio 1 : 3. The smaller part the other end of the plank. If the mass of the plank is ,
3
becomes stationary. What is the velocity of the other part ?
the distance that the man moves relative to the ground is :
(a) 4 v (b) v
3L L
(a) (b)
4 4
4v 3v
(c) (d)
3 4 4L L
(c) (d)
5 3
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 119

41. A particle is projected from a point at an angle with the 44. A shel is fired from cannon with a velocity v at an angle 
horizontal. At any instant t, if p is the linear momentum and with the horizontal direction. At the highest point in its path
E the kinetic energy, then which of the following graphs it explodes into two pieces of equal mass. One of the pieces
is/are correct ? retrace its path then find the velocity of other piece
immediately after the explosion is :
(a) 3 v cos  (b) 2 v cos 

3 3
(a) (b) (c) v cos  (d) v cos 
2 2

45. A ball hits the floor and rebounds after an inelastic collision.
in this case :
(a) the momentum of the ball just after the collision is the
same as that just before the collision
(c) (d) (b) the mechanical energy of the ball remains the same in
the collision
(c) the total momentum of the ball and the earth is conserved
42. In a gravity free space, a man of mass M standing at a (d) the total energy of the ball and the earth is conserved
height h above the floor, throws a ball of mass m straight –1
46. A projectile is moving at 20 ms at its highest point where it
down with a speed u. When the ball reaches the floor, the
breaks into equal parts due to an internal explosion. One
distance of the man above the floor will be : –1
part moves vertically up at 30 ms with respect to the ground.
Then the other part will move at
 m  M
(a) h 1   (b)  1   h
 M  m (a) 20 m/s (b) 10 13 m / s

m (c) 50 m/s (d) 30 m/s

(c) h (d) h
M 47. A particle of mass m moving towards the east with speed v
collides with another particle of the same mass and same
43. A shell of mass m is moving horizontally with velocity v0
speed v moving towards the north. If the two particles stick
and collides with a wedge of mass M just above point A, as
to each other, the new particle of mass 2m will have a speed
shown in the figure. As a consequence, wedge starts to
of
move towards left and the shell returns with a velocity in x–
y plane. The principle of conservation of momentum can be (a) v (b) v/2
applied for : v
(c) (d) v 2
2

Impulse, Coefficient of restitution

48. A ball is dropped from a height of 1 m. If coefficient of
restitution between the surface and the ball is 0.6, the ball
rebounds to a height of
(a) 0.6 m (b) 0.4 m
(c) 1 m (d) 0.36 m
(a) system (m + M) along any direction 49. When a ball of mass = 5 kg hits a bat with a velocity =3 m/s,
(b) system (m + M) along vertical in positive direction and it moves back back with a velocity
= 4 m/s, find the impulse in SI units :
(c) system (m + M) horizontally
(a) 5 (b) 15
(d) none of the above
(c) 25 (d) 35
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 120

50. Ablock of mass m moving at a velocity v collides with Head-on collision

another block of mass 2 m at rest. The lighter block comes to 56. P and Q are two identical masses at rest suspended by an
rest after collision. Find the coefficient of restitution : inextensible string passing over a smooth frictionless pulley.
(a) 1/2 (b) 1 Mass P is given a downward push with a speed v as shown
in figure 6.25. It collides with the floor and rebounds. What
(c) 1/3 (d) 1/4 happens immediately after collision ?
51. The magnitude of the impulse developed by a mass of 0.2
kg which changes its velocity from 5 ˆi  3 ˆj  7 kˆ m/s to

2 ˆi  3 ˆj  kˆ m/s is :

(a) 2.7 N–s (b) 1.8 N–s

(c) 0.9 N–s (d) 3.6 N–s
52. A steel ball strikes a steel plate at an angle  with the vertical. v P Q
If the coefficient of restitution is e, the angle at which the
rebound will take place is : Floor

(a) P and Q both move upwards with equal speeds

1  tan  
(a)  (b) tan  
 e  (b) P and Q both move upwards with different speeds
(c) P moves upwards & Q moves downwards with equal speed
1  e  (d) Both P and Q are at rest.
(c) e tan  (d) tan  
 tan   57. A body of mass m1 moving with a uniform velocity of 40 m/
53. A 2kg of block of wood rests on a long table top. A 5 g bullet s. collides with another of mass m2 at rest and then the two
moving horizontally with a speed of 150 m/s is shot into the together begin to move with a uniform velocity of 30 m/s.
block and sticks to it. The block then slides 2.7 m along the The ratio of their masses (m1/m2) is
table top and comes to a stop. The force of friction between (a) 0.75 (b) 4.0
the block and the table is : (c) 3 (d) 1.33
(a) 0.052 N (b) 3.63 N 58. A body of mass m strikes a stationary body of mass M and
(c) 2.50 N (d) 1.04 N undergoes an elastic collision. After collision, m has a speed
one-third its initial speed. The ratio M/m is
54. Two balls of equal mass have a head on collision with speed
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1
6 m/s each in opposite direction. If the coefficient of
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 3 : 1
1
restitution is , the speed of each ball after impact will be : 59. A massive ball moving with speed v collides with a tiny ball
3
of negligible mass. The collision is elastic. The second ball
(a) 18 m/s (b) 2 m/s will move with a speed equal to
(c) 6 m/s (d) data insufficient (a) v (b) 2 v
55. A 50 kg mass is travelling at a speed of 2 m/s. Another 60 kg (c) v/2 (d) zero
mass travelling at a speed of 12 m/s in the same direction, 60. An object of mass 2 kg is moving with a velocity of 3 m/s
strikes the first mass. After the collision the 50 kg mass is and collides head on with an object B of mass 1 kg moving
travelling with a speed of 4 m/s. The coefficient of restitution in the opposite direction with a velocity of 4 m/s. After
of the collision is collision, both objects coalesce so that they move with a
common velocity v equal to
19 30
(a) (b)
30 19 2
(a) m/s (b) 1 m/s
3
20 11
(c) (d) (c) 2 m/s (d) 3 m/s
11 20
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 121
–1
61. A bullet of mass 0.01 kg and travelling at a speed of 500 ms 65. Three balls A, B and C (mA = mC = 4mB) are placed on a
strikes a block of 2 kg, which is suspended by a string of smooth horizontal surface. Ball B collides with ball C with
length 5 m. The centre of gravity of the block is found to rise an initial velocity v as shown. Total number of collsions
through a vertical height of 0.1 m. The speed of the bullet between the balls will be (all collisions are elastic)
after it emerges from the block is
(a) 200 m/s (b) 240 m/s
(c) 220 m/s (d) 280 m/s
(a) one (b) two
62. A bag of mass M hangs by a long thread and a bullet of
mass m comes horizontally with velocity v and gets caught (c) three (d) four
in the bag. Then for the combined (bag + bullet) system, Oblique Collision
66. Two ice skaters A and B approach each other at right angles.
mvM 1
(a) momentum  (b) KE = mv2 Skater A has a mass 30 kg and velocity 1 m/s skater B has
mM 2
mass 20 kg and velocity 2 m/s. They meet and cling together.
Their final velocity of the couple is :
1 2
m2 v2
(c) KE =  m  M  v (d) KE = 2 M  m (a) 2 m/s (b) 1.5 m/s
2  
(c) 1 m/s (d) 2.5 m/s
63. A bullet of mass m moving with velocity v strikes a 67. The collision of two balls of equal mass takes place at the
suspended wooden block of mass M. If the block rises to a origin of co-ordinates. Before collision, the components of
height h, the initial velocity of the bullet will be : velocities are (vx = 50 cm/s, vy = 0) and (vx = –40 cm/s and
vy = 30 cm/s). The first balls comes to rest after collison. The
Mm
(a) 2gh (b) 2 gh velocity components (vx and vy respectively) of the second
m
ball are :
m Mm (a) 10 and 30 cm/s
(c) 2 gh (d) 2gh
Mm m
(b) 30 nad 10 cm/s
64. Two perfectly elastic particles A and B of equal mass (c) 5 and 15 cm/s
travelling along the line joining them with velocities 15 m/s
and 10 m/s. After collision, their velocities will be : (d) 15 and 5 cm/s

A B Variable Mass System

(a) 0 25 68. 10,000 small balls, each weighing 1 g, strike one square cm
of area per second with a velocity 100 m/s in a normal
(b) 5 20 direction and rebound with the same velocity. The value of
(c) 10 15 pressure on the surface will be :
3 2 5 2
(a) 2 × 10 N/m (b) 2 × 10 N/m
(d) 20 5
7 2 7 2
(c) 10 N/m (d) 2 × 10 N/m
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 122

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. Two identical particles move towards each other with 6. A man of 50 kg is standing at one end on a boat of length
velocity 2v and v respectively. The velocity of centre of 25 m and mass 200 kg. If he starts running and when he
mass is (2002) reaches the other end, he has a velocity 2 ms–1 with respect
(a) v (b) v/3 to the boat. The final velocity of the boat is (in ms–1)

(c) v/2 (d) zero 2 2

–1
(a) (b) (2006)
2. A mass of 100 g strikes the wall with speed 5 ms at an 5 3
angle as shown in figure and it rebounds with the same
speed. If the contact time is 2 × 10–3 s, what is the force 8 8
(c) (d)
applied on the wall ? (2005) 5 3
7. In the motion of a rocket, physical quantity which is
conserved is (2007)
(a) angular momentum (b) linear momentum
(c) force (d) work
8. A circular disc of radius R is removed from a bigger circular
(a) 250 3 N to right (b) 250 N to right disc of radius 2R, such that the circumference of the discs
coincide. The centre of mass of the new disc is R from
(c) 250 3 N to left (d) 250 N to left
the centre of the bigger disc. The value of  is (2007)
3. A body A of mass M while falling vertically downwards
under gravity breaks into two parts; a body B of mass (a) 1/3 (b) 1/2

1 2 (c) 1/6 (d) 1/4

M and, a body C of mass m. The centre of mass of
3 3 9. A truck is moving on a frictionless surface with uniform
bodies B and C taken together shifts compared to that of velocity of 10 ms–1. A leak occurs in the water tank of the
body A towards (2005) truck at the rate of 2 kgs–1. What is the speed of truck after
(a) depends on height of breaking 50 s if the mass of truck is 100 kg and mass of water in the
(b) does not shift truck initially was 100 kg ? (2008)
(c) body C (a) 20 ms –1
(b) 10 ms –1

(d) body B (c) 5 ms–1 (d) none of these

4. A ball of mass m moves with speed v and it strikes normally 10. A body of mass 1000 kg is moving horizontally with a
with a wall and reflected back normally. If its time to contact velocity 50 ms–1. A mass of 250 kg is added. Find the final
with wall is t, then find force exerted by ball on the wall
velocity (2008)
2mv mv (a) 40 ms –1
(b) 23 ms –1
(a) (b) (2005)
t t
(c) 12 ms–1 (d) 32.5 ms–1
mv 11. A shell of mass 10 kg is moving with a velocity of 10 ms–1
(c) mvt (d)
2t when it blasts and forms two parts of mass 9 kg and 1 kg
5. A rocket of mass 1000 kg is exhaust gases at a rate of 4 respectively. If the 1st mass is stationary, the velocity of
kgs–1 with a velocity 3000 ms–1. The thrust developed on the 2nd is : (2008)
the rocket is (2006) (a) 1 ms–1 (b) 10 ms–1
(a) 12000 N (b) 120 N
(c) 100 ms–1 (d) 1000 ms–1
(c) 800 N (d) 200 N
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 123

12. A gun fires N bullets per second, each of mass m with 17. Two masses of M and 4M are moving with equal kinetic
velocity v. The force exerted by the bullets on the gun is energy. The ratio of their linear momenta is (2009)
(a) 1 : 8 (b) 1 : 4
mv
(a) vNm (b) (2008) (c) 1 : 2 (d) 4 : 1
N
18. A 5000 kg rocket is set for vertical firing. The exhaust speed
mv2 is 800 ms–1. To give an initial upward acceleration of 20 ms–2,
(c) mvN2 (d)
N the amount of gas ejected per second to supply the needed
thrust will be (g = 10 ms–2) (2009)
13. The rate of mass of the gas emitted from rear of a rocket is
initially 0.1 kgs–1. If the the speed of the gas relative to the (a) 127.5 kgs–1 (b) 187.5 kgs–1
rocket is 50 ms–1 and mass of the rocket is 2 kg, then the (c) 185.5 kgs–1 (d) 137.5 kgs–1
acceleration of the rocket (in ms–2) is (2008) 19. A stationary body of mass 3 kg explodes into three equal
(a) 5 (b) 5.2 pieces. Two of the pieces fly off in two mutually
(c) 2.5 (d) 25 perpendicular directions, one with a velocity of 3iˆ ms 1
14. A gun fires bullets each of mass 1 g with velocity of 10 ms–1
and other with a velocity of 4 ˆjms 1 . If the explosion
by exerting a constant force of 5 g weight. Then the number
of bullets fired per second is occurs in 10–4 s, the average force acting on the third piece
in newton is (2009)
Take g = 10 ms–2) (2008)
(a) 50 (b) 5  
(a) 3iˆ  4jˆ  10
4
 
(b) 3iˆ  4ˆj 10
4

(c) 10 (d) 25
15. A thin rod of length L is lying along the x–axis with its ends  
(c) 3iˆ  4jˆ  10
4
 
(d)  3iˆ  4jˆ 10
4

at x = 0 and x = L. Its linear density (mass/length) varies x as

20. A bullet of mass 10 g moving with 300 ms–1 hits a block of ice
n
x of mass 5 kg and drops dead. The velocity of ice is(2009)
k   , where n can be zero or any positive number. If the
L (a) 500 cm/s (b) 60 cm/s
position xCM of the centre of mass of the rod is plotted n, (c) 40 cm/s (d) 200 cm/s
which of the following graphs best approximates the 21. The figure shows the position time (x–t) graph of one-
dependence of xCM on n ? (2008) dimentsional motion of a body of mass 0.4 kg. The
magnitude of each impulse is (2010)

(a) (b) 2
x (m)

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
(c) (d) t (s)

(a) 0.4 Ns (b) 0.8 Ns

16. If the resultant of all the external forces acting on a system (c) 1.6 Ns (d) 0.2 Ns
of particles is zero, then from an inertial frame, one can 22. A stationary bomb explodes into three pieces. One piece
surely say that (2009) of 2 kg mass mvoes with a velocity of 8 ms–1 at right angles
(a) linear momentum of the system does not change in time to the other piece of mass 1 kg moving with a velocity of 12
ms–1. If the mass of the third piece is 0.5 kg, then its velocity
(b) kinetic energy of the system does not change in time
is : (2011)
(c) angular momentum of the system does not change in time
(a) 10 ms–1 (b) 20 ms–1
(d) potential energy of the system does not change in time
(c) 30 ms–1 (d) 40 ms–1
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 124

23. A cricket ball of mass 0.25 kg with speed 10 m/s collides 29. In a collinear collision, a particle with an initial speed v0
with a bat and returns with same speed with in 0.01s. The strikes a stationary particle of the same mass. If the final
force acted on bat is (2011) kinetic energy 50% greater than the original kinetic energy,
(a) 25 N (b) 50 N the magnitude of the relative velocity between the two
particles, after collision, is : (2018)
(c) 250 N (d) 500 N
–1
24. Ablock of mass 0.50 kg is moving with a speed of 2.00 ms v0 v0
on a smooth surface. It strikes another mass of 1.00 kg and (a) (b)
2 2
then they move together as a single body. The energy loss
during the collision is (2012) v0
(c) (d) 2v0
(a) 0.16 J (b) 1.00 J 4
(c) 0.67 J (d) 0.34 J 30. Three masses m, 2m and 3m are moving in x-y plane with
25. Distance of the centre of mass of a solid uniform cone speed 3u, 2u, and u respectively as shown in figure. The
three masses collide at the same point at P and stick
from its vertex is z0. If the radius of its base is R and its
height is h then z0 is equal to : (2015) together. The velocity of resulting mass will be:
(2014 Online Set-2)
5h 3h 2
(a) (b)
8 8R

h2 3h
(c) (d)
4R 4
26. A particle of mass m moving in the x direction with speed
2v is hit by another particle of mass 2m moving in the y
u ˆ u ˆ
direction with speed v. If the collision is perfectly inelastic,
the percentage loss in the energy during the collision is
(a)
12

i  3jˆ  (b)
12

i  3jˆ 
close to : (2015) u ˆ u ˆ
(a) 56% (b) 62%
(c)
12
i  3jˆ  (d)
12

i  3jˆ 
(c) 44% (d) 50% 31. A thin bar of length L has a mass per unit length , that
increases linearly with distance from one end. If its total
27. It is found that if a neutron suffers an elastic collinear mass is M and its mass per unit length at the lighter end is
collision with deuterium at rest, fractional loss of its energy 0, then the distance of the centre of mass from the lighter
is pd, while for its similar collision with carbon nucleus at end is: (2014 Online Set-3)
rest, fractional loss of energy is pc.The values of pd and pc
L  0 L2 L  0 L2
are respectively : (2018) (a)  (b) 
3 4M 3 8M
(a) (0, 0) (b) (0, 1)
(c) (.89, .28) (d) (.28, .89) 2L  0 L2 L 0 L2
(c)  (d) 
3 6M 2 4M
28. The mass of a hydrogen molecule is 3.32  1027 kg. If 1023 32. A uniform thin rod AB of length L has linear mass density
hydrogen molecules strike, per second, a fixed wall of area bx
2cm2 at an angle of 45 0 to the normal, and rebound (x) = a + , where x is measured from A. If the CM of
L
elastically with a speed of 103m/s, then the pressure on
the wall is nearly : (2018) 7
the rod lies at a distance of   L from A, then a and b
 12 
(a) 2.35 102 N / m2 (b) 4.70 102 N / m2 are related as : (2015 Online)
(a) a = 2b (b) 2a = b
(c) 2.35 103 N / m2 (d) 4.70 103 N / m 2 (c) a = b (d) 3a = 2b
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 125

33. A large number (n) of identical beads, each of mass m and 35. Two particles A and B of equal mass M are moving with
radius r are strung on a thin smooth rigid horizontal rod of the same speed v as shown in the figure. They collide
length L (L >>r) and are at rest at random positions. The completely in elastically and move as a single particle C.
rod is mounted between two rigid supports (see figure). If
The angle  that the path of C makes with the X-axis is
one of the beads is now given a speed v, the average force
experienced by each support after a long time is (assume given by : (2017 Online Set-2)
all collisions are elastic) :

(2015 Online)
3 2 3 2
mv 2 mv2 (a) tan   (b) tan  
(a) 2 L  nr (b) 1 2 1 2
  L  2nr

mv 2 1 2 1 3
(c) (d) zero (c) tan   (d) tan  
L  nr 2 (1  3) (1  2)
34. In the figure shown ABC is a uniform wire. If centre of 36. A proton of mass m collides elastically with a particle of
unknown mass at rest. After the collision, the proton and
BC
mass of wire lies vertically below point A, then is the unknown particle are seen moving at an angle of 900
AB with respect to each other. The mass of unknown particle
close to : (2016 Online Set-2) is : (2018 Online Set-2)
m
(a) (b) m
2
m
(c) (d) 2m
3
(a) 1.85 (b) 1.37
(c) 1.5 (d) 3
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 126

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Discreet Particles 4. From a circular disc of radius R, a square is cut out with a
1. Three idential spheres, each of mass 1 kg are placed touching radius as its diagonal. The centre of mass of remainder is at
each other with their centres on a straight line. Their centre a distance (from the centre) :
are marked P, Q and R respectively. The distance of centre R R
of mass of the system from P is : (a)  4  2  (b)
2
PQ  PR  QR PQ  PR
(a) (b) R R
3 3 (c)    2  (d)  2  2 

PQ  QR 5. You are supplied with three identical rods of same length

(c) (d) none of these
3 and mass. If the length of each rod is 2. Two of them are
converted into rings and then placed over the third rod as
2. A circular ring of mass 6 kg and radius a is placed such that
shown in figure. If points A is considered as origin of the
its centre lies at the origin. Two particles of masses 2 kg
co-ordinate system the co-ordinate of the centre of mass
each are placed at the intersecting points of the circle with
will be (you may assume AB as x–axis of the co-ordinate
+ve x–axis and +ve y–axis. Then, the angle made by the
system) :
position vector of centre of mass of entire system with
x–axis is :
(a) 45° (b) 60°

1  4 
(c) tan   (d) 30°
5
  1  2
(a)  ,  (b)  , 
Continuous Body  2 3  2 3
3. A carpenter has constructed a toy as shown in the adjoining
figure. If the density of the material of the sphere is 12 times  1  2
(c)  ,  (d)  , 
that of cone, the position of the centre of mass of the toy is  3  3
given by :
6. An object comprises of a uniform ring of radius R and its
uniform chord AB (not necessarily made of the same material)
O2 2R as shown. Which of the following can not be the centre of
the mass of the object ?

O1 4R

2R
R R  R R 
(a)  ,  (b)  , 
(a) at a distance of 2R from O 3 3  2 2
(b) at a distance of 3R from O
(c) at a distance of 4R from O R R
(c)  ,  (d) None of these
4 4
(d) at a distance of 5R from O
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 127

7. A circular plate of diameter d is kept in contact with a square Velocity, Momentum and Acceleration of Centre of Mass
plate of edge d as shown in figure. The density of the material
10. Block A and B are resting on a smooth horizontal surface
and the thickness are same everywhere. The centre of mass
given equal speeds of 2 m/s in opposite sense as shown in
of the compositive system will be
the figure. At t = 0, the position of block are shown, then the
coordinates of centre of mass at t = 3 s will be :

a a
(a) (1, 0) (b) (3, 0)

(a) inside the circular plate (c) (5, 0) (d) (2.25, 0)

11. Two balls of equal mass are projected from a tower
(b) inside the square plate
simultaneously with equal speeds. One at angle  above
(c) at the point of contact the horizontal and the other at the same angle  below the
horizontal. The path of the centre of mass of the two balls is :
(d) outside the system
(a) a vertical straight line
8. Three identical uniform rods of the same mass M and length
(b) a horizontal straight line
L are arranged in xy plane as shown. A fourth uniform rod of
(c) a straight line at angle  (< ) with horizontal
mass 3M has been placed as shown in the xy plane. What
should be the value of the length of the fourth rod such that (d) a parabola
the center of mass of all the four rods lie at the origin ? 12. A cracker is thrown into air with a velocity of 10 m/s at an
angle of 45° with the vertical. When its is at a height of
1
  m from the ground, it explodes into a number of peices
2
which follow different parabolic paths. What is the velocity
of centre of mass, when it is at a height of 1 m from the
–2
ground ? (g = 10 m/s )

(a) 4 5 ms1 (b) 2 5 ms1

(a) 3L (b) 2L
–1
(c) 5 4 ms1 (d) 5 ms
(d) L( 2  1) / 3 (d) L(2 2  1) / 3
13. In a free space, a rifle of mass M shoots a bullet of mass m at
9. A circular plate of uniform thickness has a diameter of 28
a stationary block of mass M distance D away from it. When
cm. A circular portion of diameter 21 cm is removed from the
the bullet has moved through a distance d towards the block,
plate as shown. O is centre of mass of complete plate. The
the centre of mass of the bullet-block system is at a distance of:
position of centre of mass of remaining portion will shift
towards left from ‘O’ by D  d m
(a) from the bullet
Mm

md  MD
(b) from the block
Mm

2md  MD
(c) from the bullet
Mm

(a) 5 cm (b) 9 cm D  d M
(d) from the bullet
(c) 4.5 cm (d) 5.5 cm Mm
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 128
 
14. Two bodies having masses m1 and m2 and velocity u1 and u 2
 
collide and form a composite system. If m1 u1  m 2 u 2  0

 m1  m2  , the velocity of composite system will be :

   
(a) u1  u 2 (b) u1  u 2 m m 3
(a) (b)
  2 2
u1  u 2
(c) (d) zero
2 m
(c) m 2 (d)
3
15. Two bodies with masses, m1 and m2 (m1 > m2) are joined by
a string passing over a fixed pulley. The centres of gravity 19. Two blocks m1 and m2 are pulled on a smooth horizontal
of the two masses are initially at the same height. Assume surface, and are joined together with a spring of stiffness k
masses of pulley and weight of the thread negligible. The as shown. Suddenly, block m2 receives a horizontal velocity
acceleration of the centre of mass of m1 and m2, is : v0, then the maximum extension xm in the spring is

 m1  m 2  m1g
(a)  m  m  g (b)  m  m 
 1 2  1 2

2 m1m 2
 m1  m 2  m2g (a) v0 m  m
(c)   g (d)  m  m  1 2
 m1  m 2  1 2

16. Two persons A and B having masses 50 kg and 60 kg 2m1m 2

(b) v0
respectively are sitting at the two extreme to a 4 m long  m1  m2  k
plateform of mass 40 kg kept on smooth ice. If they come to
the middle of the boat then how (approximately) far does m1m 2
the boat move on the ice during the process : (c) v0 2 m  m k
 1 2
(a) 10 cm (b) 18 cm
(c) 16 cm (d) 13 cm m1m 2
(d) v0
17. Both the blocks as shown in the given arrangement are
 m1  m2  k
given together a horizontal velocity towards right. If acm be
Dynamics and Kinematics (Fnet = Macm)
subsequent acceleration of the centre of mass of the system
of block then acm equals : 20. A 50 kg man is standing on a flat boat at rest in a river. He
moves 5 m to north and halts. If the boat has a mass of 450
kg, then the boat moves through :
(a) 0.5 m to the south (b) 0.25 m to the south
(c) 0.5 m to the north (d) 0 m

5 21. A boy is standing at the centre of a boat, which is free to

(a) 0 m/s
2
(b) m / s2 move on water. If the masses of the boy ant the boat are m1
3
and m2 respectively, and the boy moves a distance of 1 m
forward, then the movement of the boat is ..... metres :
7
(c) m / s2 (d) 2 m/s
2

3 m1 m2
(a) m  m (b) m  m
18. In the arrangement as shown, mass of block A is m. What 1 2 1 2

should be the mass of the block B so that magnitude of

m1 m2
acceleration of centre of mass of both the blocks is zero : (c) m (d) m
2 1
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 129

m R
22. A man of mass m stands on a plane plank of mass   , 26. A ball of mass m and radius   is placed as shown, on a
2  10 
lying on a smooth horizontal floor. Initially both are at rest. block B of mass 9 m which is placed on a smooth surface.
Then the man starts walking on the plank towards the east When the ball comes down to the lowest position, the block
and stops after a distance l on the plank. Then : B will move to the left by a distance of :
(a) the plank will side to the west by a distance l/3
(b) the planks will continue to move towards the west over
the smooth floor.
2
(c) the plank will slide to the west by   l and then stop (a) 0.25 R (b) 0.14 R
3
(d) none of the above (c) 0.15 R (d) 0.20 R

23. A boy of mass m is standing on a block of mass M kept on 27. A car of mass m is initially at rest on the boat of mass M tied
to the wall of dock through a massless, inextensible string
a rough surface. When the boy walks from left to right on
as shown in figure. The car accelerates from rest to velocity
the block, the centre of mass (boy + block) of system :
v0 in time t0. At t = t0 the car applies brake and comes to rest
(a) remains stationary relative to the boat in negligible time. Neglect friction
(b) shift towards left between the boat and water; the time ‘t’ at which boat will
strike the wall is :
(c) shifts towards right
(d) shifts towards right if M > m and towards left if M < m
24. Block A and B shown in the figure are having equal masses
m. The system is released from rest with the spring
unstretched. The string between A and ground is cut when
there is maximum extension in the spring. The acceleration
L (M  m)
of centre of mass of the two blocks at this instant is : (a) t0 + L/v0 (b) t 0  mv0

LM
(c) mv (d) None of the above
0

28. Two identical spheres A and B of radius r are released

simultaneously from the positions as shown, in a vessel C
of radius (R + r) and which moves on a smooth surface. If
1
g coefficient of restitution is , find the velocity of A after
(a) g (b) 2
2 collision with B.
(c) 2 g (d) zero
25. A man of mass m moves with a constant speed on a plank of
mass M and length l kept initially at rest on a frictionless
horizontal surface, from one end to the other in time t. The
speed of the plank relative to ground while man is moving, is

M  m 
(a)   (b)  
tm t  mM (a) 2gR (b) gR

 M  gR
(c)   (d) none of these (c) (d) 2 gR
t Mm 2
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 130

29. A block of mass M is tied to one end of a massless rope. The

2 mv 2
other end of the rope is in the hands of man of mass 2M as (c) must be acting on the system
r
shown. The block and the man are resting on a rough wedge
of mass M. The whole system is resting on a smooth
horizontal surface. The man starts walking towards right 2 mv 2
(d) must be acting on the ring.
while holding the rope in his hands. Pulley is massless and r
frictionless. Find the displacement of the wedge when the 32. A stationary body explodes into four identical fragments
block meets the pulley? Assume wedge is sufficiently long such that three of them fly off mutually perpendicular to
so that man does not fall down. each other, each with same KE, E0.The energy of explosion
will be

4E 0
(a) 6 E0 (b)
3

(a) 1/2 m towards right (c) 4 E0 (d) 8 E0

(b) 1/2 m towards left Momentum and Energy based problems
(c) the wedge does not move at all 33. Two bodies of massses m1 and m2 have equal momenta. If
(d) 1 m towards left E1 and E2 be their respective K.E., the ratio E1 : E2 is equal :
30. In a vertical plane inside a smooth hollow thin tube, a block (a) m1 : m2 (b) m2 : m1
of same mass as that of tube is released as shown. When it
is slightly disturbed it moves towards right. By the time the (c) m1 : m 2 (d) m12 : m 22
block reaches the right end of the tube, the displacement of
34. Two vehicles of equal masses are moving with same speed
the tube will be (where ‘R’ is the mean radius of tube the
v on two roads inclined at an angle . They collide
assume that the tube remains in vertical plane)
inelastically at the junction and, then move together. The
speed of the combination is :

2R 4R
(a) (b)
 

R (a) v cos  (b) 2 v cos 

(c) (d) R
2
3 v 
(c) v cos  (d) cos
Energy of Centre of Mass 2 2 2
31. A heavy ring of mass m is clamped on the peripheri of a light 35. In a two block system an initial velocity v0 with respect to
circular disc. A small particle having equal mass is clamped ground is given to block A :
at the centre of the disc. The system is rotated in such a way
that the centre moves in a circle of radius r with a uniform
speed v. We conclude that an external force

mv 2 (a) the momentum of block A is not conserved

(a) must be acting on the central particle
r (b) the momentum of system of block A and B is conserved
(c) the increase in momentum of B is equal to the decrease in
2 mv 2 momentum of block A
(b) must be acting on the central particle
r
(d) all the above
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 131

36. An object of mass 3 m splits into three equal fragments. is 50 cm. The two masses stick together. The maximum height
2
Two fragments have velocities v ˆj and v ˆi. The velocity of reaches by the system now is : (g = 10 m/s )
the third fragment is :

 
(a) v ˆj  ˆi  
(b) v ˆi  ˆj

 
(c)  v ˆi  ˆj (d)
 
v ˆi  ˆj
2
(a) 7.5 cm (b) 5 cm
37. A mass of 100 g strikes the wall with speed 5 m/s at an angle
as shown in figure and it rebounds with the same speed. If (c) 2.5 cm (d) 1.25 cm
–3
the contact time is 2 × 10 s, what is the force applied on the 42. A bullet of mass 0.01 kg and travelling at a speed of 500 m/s
mass by the wall ? strikes a block of mass 2 kg, which is suspended by a string
of length 5 m. The centre of gravity of the block is found to
rise a vertical distance of 0.1 m. What is the speed of the
bullet after it emerges from the block :
(a) 780 m/s (b) 220 m/s
(c) 1.4 m/s (d) 7.8 m/s
43. A cannon ball is fired with a velocity 200 m/s at an angle of
(a) 250 3 N to right (b) 250 N to right
60° with the horizontal. At the highest point of its flight, it
(c) 250 3 N to left (d) 250 N to left explodes into 3 equal fragments, one going vertically
upwards with a velocity 100 m/s, the second one fallings
38. A projectile is moving at 60 m/s at its highest point, where it vertically downwards with a velocity 100 m/s. The third
breaks into two equal parts due to an internal explosion. fragement will be moving with a velocity.
One part moves vertically up at 50 m/s with respect to the
(a) 100 m/s in the horizontal direction
ground. The other part will move at :
(b) 300 m/s in the horizontal direction
(a) 110 m/s (b) 120 m/s
(c) 300 m/s in a direction making an angle of 60° with the horizontal
(c) 130 m/s (d) 10 61 m / s (d) 200 m/s in a direction making an angle of 60° with the horizontal

39. A man weighing 80 kg is standing on a trolley weighing 320 44. An isolated particle of mass m is moving in a horizontal
kg. The trolley is resting on frictionless horizontal rails. If plane (x, y) along the x–axis at a certain height above the
the man starts walking on the trolley along the rails at a ground. It suddenly explodes into two fragments of masses
speed of 1 m/s relative to trolley, then after 4 s, his m 3m . An instant later, the smaller fragment is at
displacement relative to the ground will be : and
4 4
(a) 4.2 m (b) 4.8 m y = + 15 cm. The larger fragment at this instant is at :
(c) 3.2 m (d) 3.0 m (a) y = – 5 cm (b) y = + 20 cm
40. A body of mass 5 kg explodes at rest into three fragments (c) y = + 5 cm (d) y = – 20 cm
with masses in the ratio 1 : 1 : 3. The fragments with equal
45. A gun is attached to a trolley that can move freely on a
masses fly in mutually perpendicular directions with speeds
smooth level road. The total mass of the gun and the trolley
of 21 m/s. The velocity of the heaviest fragment will be :
is 10 kg. A bullet of mass 0.005 kg is shot horizontally to the
(a) 11.5 m/s (b) 14.0 m/s right and is observed to have travelled a distance of 50 m in
(c) 7.0 m/s (d) 9.87 m/s 0.2 s. In this interval of time, the trolley has moved a distance:

41. A mass of 10 g moving horizontally with a velocity of 100 (a) 2.5 cm (b) 6.0 cm
cm/s strikes a pendulum bob of mass 10 g. Length of string (c) 4 m (d) 4 cm
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 132

46. A bob of mass m is suspended by a string of length l from a 50. A bullet hits a block kept at rest on a smooth horizontal
train of mass M free to move on a smooth horizontal surface. surface and gets embedded into it. Which of the following
does not change ?
The bob is given a horizontal velocity v0. The maximum
height attained by the bob is : (a) linear momentum of the block
(b) kinetic energy of the block
(c) gravitational potential energy of the block
(d) temperature of the block
51. A body at rest breaks into two pieces of equal masses. The
parts will move
(a) in same direction
2 2
v Mm v  m 
(a)
0
  (b)
0
  (b) along different lines
2g  M  2g  M  m 
(c) in opposite directions with equal speeds

v 02  M  v 02  M  m  (d) in opposite directions with unequal speeds

(c)   (d)  
2g  M  m  2g  m  52. A nucleus moving with a velocity v emits an –particle.
Let the velocities of the –particle and the remaining
47. A block of mass m is pushed towards a movable wedge of  
mass nm and height h, with a velocity u. All surfaces are nucleous be v1 and v2 and their masses be m1 and m2.
smooth. The minimum 5value of u for which the block reach   
(a) v, v1 and v 2 must be parallel to each other..
the top of the wedge is :
  
(b) None of the two of v, v1 and v 2 should be parallel to
each other.
  
(c) v1  v2 must be parallel to v .
  
(d) m1 v  m 2 v 2 must be parallel to v .
(a) 2gh (b) 2 ngh 53. The sphere A of mass m1 moves with velocity V on a
frictionless horizontal surface and strikes with sphere B of
 1  1 mass m2 at rest. The sphere A comes back with speed V/10.
(c) 2gh 1   (d) 2gh 1   Find the correct option :
 n  n

48. A projectile of mass 3 m explodes at highest point of its

path. It breaks into three equal parts. One part retraces its
path, the second one 5comes to rest. The range of the (a) m1 > m2 (b) m1 = m2
projectile was 100 m if no explosion would have taken place. (c) m1 < m2 (d) none of these
The distance of the third part from the point of projection
54. At time t = 0, a particle P of mass m moving in a circular path
when it finally lands on the ground is :
of radius R with a constant velocity V2 is at a point (2R, 0)
(a) 100 m (b) 150 m while another particle Q of same mass moving along y-axis
(c) 250 m (d) 300 m with constant velocity V1 is at origin (0, 0). Find linear
49. At high altitude, a body explodes at rest into two equal momentum of particle P relative to Q when their velocities
fragments with one fragment receiving horizontal velocity are mutually perpendicular for first time :
of 10 m/s. Time taken by the two radius vectors connecting
point of explosion of fragments to make 90° is :
2
(g = 10 m/s )
(a) 10 s (b) 4 s
(c) 2 s (d) 1 s
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 133
 
 V ^ ^  V ^ ^ (a) v, direction OA (b) 2v, direction OA
(a) m  V2 sin 2 t  i  V1 j (b) m  V2 cos 2 t  i  V1 j  
 R    R   (c) 2v, direction OB (d) v, direction BO
 V ^ ^ 60. Two identical small balls, each of mass m, are connected by
 R  

(c) m  V1 sin 1 t  i  V2 j (d)  m v 2 ˆi  v1ˆj  a massless and inextensible string of length l and placed on
a smooth horizontal xy plane. An external agent starts pulling
55. The ball B is at rest. A moving ball A collides elastically with the string from its mid-point along y-axis with velocity v0 as
it in one dimension. The masses of balls are equal. For ball shown. When the separation between the two balls reduces
B, which of the following will be greatest, if velocity of A is
to l/2, then the speed of each ball will be
greater than 2m/sec. ?
(a) Kinetic energy (b) Momentum
(c) Potential energy (d) None of these
56. In the previous problem, if mB >> mA, which of the following
will be greatest for ball B ?
(a) Speed (b) Momentum
(c) Kinetic energy (d) None of these (a) 2v0 (b) v0

57. A body of mass M is hung by a long thread and a bullet of v0

(c) (d) none of the above
mass m hits it horizontally with a velocity v and gets 2
embedded in the body. Then for the body and the bullet Impulse, Coefficient of Restitution
system. 61. A sphere of mass m moving with a constant velocity u hits
another stationary sphere of same mass. If e is the coefficient
 Mm 
(a) momentum =  v v1
Mm of restitution, then ratio of velocities of the two spheres v
2

1 after collision will be :

(b) kinetic energy  mv 2
2 2
u
1

(c) momentum 
M  m  mv 1 e 1 e
M (a) (b)
1 e 1 e
m2v2 e 1 e 1
(d) kinetic energy 
2 M  m (c) (d)
e 1 e 1
–1
58. A 50 g bullet moving with a velocity of 10 ms gets embeded 62. A mass m moves with a velocity v and collides inelastically
into a 950g stationary body. The loss in KE of the system with another identical mass. After collision the Ist mass
will be
v
(a) 95% (b) 100% moves with velocity in a direction perpendicular to the
3
(c) 5% (d) 50% initial direction of motion. Find the speed of the 2nd mass
59. Three particles A, B and C of equal masses move with equal after collision :
speeds v along the medians of an equalateral triangle. They
collide at the centroid O of the triangle. After collision A
comes to rest while B retraces its path with speed v. The
velocity of C is then

2 v
(a) v (b)
3 3

(c) v (d) 3v
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 134

63. A particle A of mass m initially at rest slides down a height 67. A girl throws a ball with initial velocity v at an inclination of
of 1.25 m on a frictionless ramp, collides with and sticks to 45°. The ball strikes the smooth vertical wall at a horizontal
an identical particle B of mass m at rest as shown in the distance d from the girl and after rebouncing return to her
figure. Then particles A and B together collide elastically hand. What is the coefficient of restitution between wall
with particle C of mass 2 m at rest. The speed of particle A and the ball ?
2
after the collision with particle B would be : (g = 10 m/s ) 2
gd
(a) v – gd (b) 2
v  gd

gd v2
(c) 2 (d)
v gd

68. Two blocks A and B each of mass m are connected by a

massless spring of spring constant k. The blocks are initially
(a) 2.0 m/s (b) 1.25 m/s resting on a smooth horizontal floor with the spring at its
natural length as shown in figure. A third identical block C
(c) 2.5 m/s (d) 5 m/s
also of mass m moving on the floor with a speed v along the
64. A particle of mass m moving with velocity u makes an elastic line joining A and B collides elastically with A then :
one dimenstional collision with a stationary particle of mass
m, They are in contact for a brief time T. Their force of

T
interaction increases from zero to F0 linearly in time and (a) the kinetic energy of the (A + B) system at maximum
2
compression of the spring is zero
T (b) the kinetic energy of the (A + B) system at maximum
decreases linearly to zero in further time . The magnitude
2 1
compression of the spring is mv2 and that of C is zero
of F0 is : 4

1 2
mu 2 mu (c) the total kinetic energy of (A + B + C) system is   mv
(a) (b) 2
T T
at maximum compression.

mu 1
(c) (d) none of these (d)
2
 PEspring  = kinetic energy of (A + B) system at
2T
maximum compression
65. Two identical sphere A and B lie inside a smooth horizontal
69. A ball thrown with velocity 30 m/s and making an anlge 370°
circular tube at the opposite ends of diameter. At t = 0, A is
with horizontal. The ball strikes a vertical wall at a distance
projected along the tube and at the time t = 4 s, collides with
of 12 m from the point of projection and coefficient of
B. If the coefficient of restitution is 0.2, the second collision
restitution between wall and the ball is equal to 0.5. What is
will occur after a minimum time of :
the velocity of the ball just after impact on the wall ?
(a) 40 s (b) 20 s
(a) 17.7 m/s (b) 15.6 m/s
(c) 20  s (d) 40  s
(c) 20.4 m/s (d) 19.4 m/s
66. After a totally inelastic collision, two objects of the same
70. The quantities remaining constant in a collision are
mass and initial speed are found to move together at half
their initial speed. The angle between the initial velocities of (a) momentum, kinetic energy and temperature
the objects is : (b) momentum and kinetic energy but not temperature
(a) 30° (b) 60° (c) momentum and temperature but not kinetic energy
(c) 120° (d) 45° (d) momentum, but neither kinetic energy nor temperature
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 135

71. The sphere A starts moving from one end with velocity V on 75. The balls of mass m0 and m are on a smooth horizontal
the stationary wedge B of mass M, as shown, Find the surface connected with a string. A bullet of mass m0 moving
coefficient of restitution, if A falls off after rising upto top of with a speed V0 collides with ball of mass m0. Find the speed
of ball of mass m, if coefficient of restitution is e :
the wedge B with zero velocity (w.r.t. wedge):
m0V0 e m0V0 1 e 
(a)  m +m  (b)
0  2 m0 +m 

m0V0 1 e   m0 – m V0 e

(c) (d)
m cos  m0 +m   m0 +m 
(a) (b) 0
M 76. In the previous problem, when the string is taut the velocity
M cos  M of the centre of mass is :
(c) (d)
m m m0V0 2 m0V0
72. A sphere A of mass m moving with a velocity hits another (a)  m +m  (b)  m +m 
0 0
stationary sphere B of same mass. If the ratio of the velocities
m0V0  m0 +m V0
VA 1 – e (c)  2 m +m  (d)
of the spheres after collision is V  1 e where e is the 0  2 m0 +m 
B
77. Four particles A, B, C and D of equal masses are placed at
coefficient of restitution, what is the initial velocity of sphere the corners of a square. They move with equal uniform speed
A with which it strikes : V towards the intersection of the diagonals. After collision,
(a) VA + VB (b) VA – VB A comes to rest, B traces its path back with same speed and
C and D move with equal velocities. What is the velocity of
VA  VB  C after collision :
(c) VB – VA (d)
2
2V
73. A sphere B of mass m is moving towards a bigger fixed (a) (b) 2V
3
sphere A with velocity V on a smooth horizontal surface, as
shown. Sphere B moves and returns back after making an V
(c) (d) V
elastic collision and being in contact with sphere A for a 2
very short time t. The sphere A exerts a contact force of 78. N identical balls are placed on a smooth horizontal surface.
An another ball of same mass collides elastically with
 m V 48 
  . Find the angle between contact force and the velocity u with first ball of N balls. A process of collision is
 3 t  thus started in which first ball collides with second ball and
horizontal at the point of contact : the second ball with the third ball and so on. The coefficient
of restitution for each collision is e. Find speed of Nth ball :
N N–1
(a) (1 + e) u (b) u(1 + e)
N –1
u 1 e  N N
(c) (d) u (1 + e)
(a) 45° (b) 30° 2 N –1
(c) 60° (d) zero 79. The velocity of centre of mass of the system after all collisions
74. A ball strikes a horizontal floor at 45°.25% of its kinetic energy have taken place, in the previous problem will be :
is lost in collision. Find the coefficient of restitution : mu
(a) N  m+1 (b) Nu
1 1
(a) (b)
2 2
uN
(c)  N +1 (d) Zero
1 1
(c) (d)
2 2 4
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 136

80. A bullet of mass m is fired with velocity u 2 relative to

gun at an angle of 45° from a gun of mass M placed on a
smooth floor, towards a wall which is moving with half the
velocity of the velocity of the gun towards it. The coefficient
of restitution between bullet and wall is e. Find the horizontal
velocity of the bullet after collision with wall:
(a) both A and B rise to the same height
mu 1 – e  mu e (b) both A and B come to rest at B
(a) eu  2 M  m (b) eu  2  M  m 
  (c) both A and B move with the same velocity of A
(d) A comes to rest and B moves with the velocity of A
mu 1  e  2mu e
(c) eu  2 M  m (d) eu   M  m  84. A body of mass M1 collides elastically with another body of
  mass M2 at rest. There is maximum transfer of energy when:
81. Body A of mass m and B of mass 3 m move towards each (a) M1 > M2
other with velocities V and 2V respectively from the positions (b) M1 < M2
as shown, along a smooth horizontal circular track of radius (c) M1 = M2
r. After the first elastic collision, they will collide again after
(d) same for all values of M1 and M2
the time :
85. A moving particle of mass m, makes a head on elastic collision
with a particle of mass 2m, which is initially at rest. The
fraction of energy lost by colliding particle is :

1 2
(a) (b)
9 3

8
(c) (d) no loss
9

86. A body A of mass 2 kg is projected upward from the surface

2r r
(a) (b) of the ground at t = 0 with a velocity of 20 m/s. One second
V 2V
after a body B, also of mass 2 kg is dropped from a height of
r 2r 20 m. If they collide elastically, then their velocities just after
(c) (d) collision are :
V 3V
Head-on-collision (a) vA = 5 m/s downward, vB = 5 m/s upward
82. A smooth sphere of mass M moving with velocity u directly (b) vA = 10 m/s downward, vB = 5 m/s upward
collides elastically with another sphere of mass m at rest.
(c) vA = 10 m/s upward, vB = 10 m/s downward
After collision their final velocities are V and v respectively.
The value of v is : (d) both move downward with velocity 5 m/s

2u M 2um 87. A pendulum consists of a wooden bob of mass m and of

(a) (b) lenght l. A bullet of mass m1 is fired towards the pendulum
m M
with a speed v1. The bullet emerges out of the bob with a
2u 2u speed v1/3 and the bob just completes motion along a vertical
(c) (d)
m M circle. Then v1 is
1 1
M m
m 3 m 
83. The bob A or a simple pendulum is released when the string (a)  m  5g (b) 2  m  5g
makes an angle of 45° with the vertical. It hits another bob B  1  1
of the same material and same mass kept at rest on a table. If
2  m1   m1 
the collision is elastic : (c)   5g (d)   g
3 m  m
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 137

88. Two pendulums each of length l are initially situated as 91. Ball A strikes with velocity u elastically with identical ball B
shown. The first pendulum is released and strikes the at rest, inclined at an angle of 60° with line joining the centres
second. Assume that the collision is completely inelastic of two balls. What will be the speed of ball B after collision:
and neglect the mass of the string and any frictional effects.
How high does the centre of mass rise after the collision? u 3
(a) u (b)
2

u u
(c) (d)
2 2
92. A smooth sphere is moving on a horizontal surface with
velocity vector 2iˆ  2ˆj immediately before it hits a vertical
2
 m1   m1 
wall. The wall is parallel to ĵ vector and the coefficient of
(a) d   (b) d  m  m 
  m1  m 2    1 2 
restitution between the sphere and the wall is e = 1/2. The
velocity vector of the sphere after it hits the wall is :
2 2
d  m1  m 2   m2 
(c) (d) d   (a) ˆi  ˆj (b) ˆi  2ˆj
m2   m1  m 2  
89. Figure shows two blocks of masses 2 kg and 4 kg resting on (c) ˆi  ˆj (d) 2iˆ  ˆj
a horizontal surface and a spring of spring constant k = 100
93. Particles P and Q of masses 20 g and 40 g respectively are
N/m attached to a fixed wall. All the three lie along the same
projected from positions A and B on the ground. The initial
line. The space between the two blocks is smooth, while the
velocities of P and Q make angles of 45° and 135°, repectively
space between the 4 kg block and wall is rough ( = 0.5). If
with the horizontal as shown. Each particle has an initial
the 2 kg block is given a velocity of 10 m/s, then the maximum
speed of 49 m/s. The separation AB is 245 m. Both particles
compressin of the spring is (collision between the two blocks
travel in the same vertical plane and undergo a collision.
is perfectly inelastic)
After the collision P retraces its path. The position of Q
when it hits the ground is

(a) 25 cm (b) 10 cm 245

(a) 245 m (b) m
3
(c) 15 cm (d) 5 cm
245 245
Oblique Collision (c) m (d) m
2 2
90. A small ball falling vertically downward with constant 94. A bal falls on an inclined plane as shown. The ball is dropped
velocity 2 m/s strikes elastically an inclined plane moving from height h. Coefficient of restitution for collision is e and
with velocity 2 m/s as shown in figure. The velocity of the surface is frictionless. If h1, h2 ... hn are height of h
rebound of the ball with respect to ground is : projectiles and t1, t2, ...tn are their corresponding time of
flights, then

(a) 4 m/s (b) 2 5 m / s

i. t1, t2, ..., tn form a geometric progression of common ratio e.
(c) 2 2 m / s (d) 2 m/s
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 138

ii. h1 > h2 > h3 > ... > hn. u  3 e – 1

2 (a) the velocity of ball B after collision is .
iii. t1, t2, ..., tn form a geometric progression of common ratio e . 4
iv. h1, h2, ..., h3 form a geometric progression of common u  2 e  1
ratio e. (b) the velocity of ball B after collision is .
4
Evaluate the above statement and choose the correct option (c) After collision, ball A will move away by distance
from the following d  2e 1
.
(a) Statements i, ii are true and iii, iv are false d  2e – 1
(b) Statements i, ii are false and iii, iv are true (d) After collision, ball A will move away by distance
(c) All statements are true d  e 1
.
(d) All statements are false  3e –1
More than One Correct Answers 98. Two blocks A and B each of mass m are connected by a
95. The inclined plane is smooth and horizontal plane is rough. massless spring of natural length L and spring constant K.
The ball place at A collides elastically with similar ball placed
The blocks are initially resting on a smooth horizontal floor
at C. After moving a distance R, the ball at C stops :
with the spring at its natural length, as shown. A third
identical block C (of mass m) moves on the floor with a
speed V along the line joining A and B and collides elastically
with A :
(a) the deceleration of ball A on horizontal plane is g, if  is
the coefficient of friction.
(b) the deceleration of ball A on horizontal plane is 2g.
(c) the value of coefficient of friction is 0.25. (a) the kinetic energy of (A – B) system at maximum
(d) the value of coefficient of friction is 0.50. compression of the spring is zero.
96. A ball A of mass m is given an initial velocity to slide down (b) the kinetic energy of (A – B) system at maximum
and collide with ball B of mass (2m) so that ball B now has 2
compression of the spring is mV /4.
sufficient energy just to hit ball at C. As the ball A slides
down its velocity becomes twice of its initial velocity before (c) the maximum compression of the spring is V  m/K 
collision. The coefficient of restitution is (1/2) :
(d) the maximum compression of the spring is V  m/ 2 K 
99. Which of the following is/are correct?
(a) If centre of mass of three particles is at rest and it is
known that two of them are moving along different lines
then the third particle must also be moving.
(a) the velocity of ball B after collision is  2 g  h+s  
(b) If centre of mass remains at rest, then net work done by
(b) the velocity of ball B after collision is 2 g  h+s  . the forces acting on the system must be zero.
(c) If centre of mass remains at rest then the net external
(c) the initial velocity of ball A is 2 g  h+s  . force must be zero.
(d) the initial velocity of ball A is 2 g  h+s  . (d) If speed of centre of mass is changing then there must
be some net work being done on the system.
97. A ball A of mass 3m is placed at a distance d from the wall on
100. A bag P (mass M) hang by a long thread and a bullet (mass m)
a smooth horizontal surface. Another ball B of mass m
comes horizontally with velocity v and gets caught in the
moving with velocity u collides with ball A. The coefficient
bag. Then for the combined (bag + bullet) system,
of restitution between the balls and the wall and between
the balls is e : (a) momentum is mv throughout
(b) momentum is (M + m)v throughout

1 2
(c) kinetic energy is mv throughout
2
(d) loss in kinetic energy in collision process is
1 2 M 
mv  
2 Mm
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 139

101. The momentum of a particle is given by Comprehension Type Questions


P  4sin tj  4 cos tj kg m / s . Select the correct
  Passage–1
Using the following passage, solve Q. 105 to 108
alternative(s).
The entire mass of a system is assumed to be concentrated
(a) Momentum P of the particle is always parallel to F.
at a point, to which we call the centre of mass. Such an
(b) Momentun P of the particle is always perpendicular to F. assumption must be in someway helpful to us. This point
(c) Magnitude of momentum P is always constant. may even be outside of the system. Once the journey has
(d) None of the above started, a given system may have exploded by itself or have
broken down into number of pieces, each piece moving with
102. A body moving towards a body of finite mass at rest collides
with it. It is possible that a different velocity in a different direction than that of the
original system, but this point of centre of mass will continue
(a) both bodies come to rest
to move with same velocity in the same direction, as if
(b) both bodies move after collision nothing has happened.
(c) the moving body stops and the body at rest starts moving Suppose a man of mass 60 kg is on a trolley of mass 40 kg
(d) the stationary body remains stationary and the moving moving at a speed of 4 m/sec. The man jumps off the trolley
body rebounds in the direction opposite to the motion of the trolley with a
103. Which of the following statement are true? speed of 2 m/sec.
(a) In an elastic collision of two bodies, the momentum and 105. What may be essential condition to work out the velocity
energy of each body is conserved. and direction of centre of mass :
(b) The total energy of a system is always conserved (a) Centre of mass moves with constant velocity.
irrespective of whether external forces act on the system.
(b) The system breaks down into number of fragments.
(c) The work done by a force in nature on a body, over a
(c) There is no external force acting on the system
closed loop, is not always zero.
(d) In an inelastic collision of two bodies, the final kinetic (d) The different parts of the system move with different
energy is less than the initial kinetic energy of the system. velocities.
104. A pendulum bob of mass m connected to the end of an ideal 106. If V1 and V2 are velocities of centre of mass of the system
string of length l is released from rest from horizontal just before and after the man jumps off the trolley, find correct
position as shown. At the lowest point, the bob makes an option :
elastic collision with a stationary block of mass 5m, which is
dept on a frictionlass surface. Mark out the correct (a) V1 = V2 (b) V1 > V2
statement(s) for the instant just after the impact. (c) V1 < V2 (d) Unpredictable
107. The velocity of centre of mass of the system just after the
man jumps off the trolley is :
(a) 2 m/sec (b) 3 m/sec
(c) 4 m/sec (d) 8 m/sec
108. The speed of the trolley when man jumps off is
(a) 8 m/sec (b) 10 m/sec
(a) Tension in the string is 17 mg/9
(c) 13 m/sec (d) 15 m/sec
(b) Tension in the string is 3 mg
Passage–2
2g Using the following passage, solve Q. 109 to 111
(c) The velocity of the block is
3
A box B of mass M having a frictionless spherical empty
(d) The maximum height attained by the pendulum bob after space of radius R (as shown) is placed on a smooth horizontal
4 floor. A ball C and mass m is placed at the bottom position of
impact is (measured from the lowest position)
9 the spherical space of box B. A ball A of mass M0 strikes
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 140

elastically with the box with velocity V while moving on the Passage - 4
same floor. Using the following passage, solve Q. 114 and 115
A smooth ball is dropped from height h on a smooth incline
as shown. After collision the velocity of the ball is directed
horizontally.

109. If M = 2m and M0 = 3m find the height upto which ball C

inside the box will rise after the impact :
2
(a) Zero (b) V /4g
2 2
(c) V /2g (d) V /g
110. If M = 3m and M0 = 4 m find the height upto which ball C
inside the box will rise after the impact : 114. Find the coefficient of restitution.
2 2 2 2
(a) V / 4g (b) V / 2g (a) cot  (b) sin 
2 2 2
(c) V / g (d) Zero (c) tan  (d) cos 
111. What should be the value of M so that ball C of mass m 115. If the collision is elastic, what is the impulse on the ball?
rises above the bottom most point so that M0 = M + m :
(a) 2m 2gh tan  (b) 2m 2gh sin 
(a) 10 m (b) 8 m
(c) 6 m (d) None of these (c) 2m 2gh cot  (d) 2m 2gh cos

Passage - 3 Match the Column

Using the following passage, solve Q. 112 and 113 116. Two particles of mass m1 and m2 have velocity of centre of
mass as V. Match the columns :
A ball of mass m moving with velocity v strikes the bob of a
pendulum at rest. The mass of the bob is also m. Column–I Column–II
(a) If velocity of two particles are (P) V  V0
112. If the collision is perfectly inelastic, the height to which the
bob will rise is given by same (say V0), then
(b) If velocity of two particles are (Q) V  V0
v2 v2 not same (velocity of one
(a) (b)
8g 4g
particle is V0), then

v2 v2 1
(c) (d) (c) When velocities of the particles (R)  m1 +m2 V02
2g g 2
are same (say V0), then kinetic
113. If the collision is elastic, the height to which the bob will rise
will be energy of the system will be

1
v2 v2 (d) When velocities of the particles (S)  m1 +m2 V 2
(a) (b) 2
8g 2g
are not same (velocity of one

2v 2 v2 particle is V0), then kinetic energy

(c) (d) of the system will be
g g
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 141

117. Match the columns : (a) A (b) B

Column–I Column–II (c) C (d) D
(a) Elastic collision (P) Constant kinetic 121. Statement–1 : In a particular frame of reference, law of
conservation of momentum holds good.
energy
Statement–2 : Momentum of a body will depend upon the
(b) Inelastic collision (Q) Work done is path frame of reference.
independent (a) A (b) B
(c) Non conservative forces (R) Constant linear (c) C (d) D
momentum 122. Statement–1 : Centre of mass of a body will continue to
move with constant velocity, if external forces acting on it
(d) Conservative forces (S) None of the above
are zero.
118. Centre of mass of a system is a unique point which is very Statement–2 : Centre of mass of a moving car is achieved to
helpful in solving the problems related to the motions of come to rest by applying brakes as the internal forces of the
rigid bodies. In columns I and II, some statements regarding brakes bring the required change.
centre of mass are given. Match the columns:
(a) A (b) B
Column I Column II (c) C (d) D
(a) in the absence of external (p) inside the material of the 123. Statement–1 : When initial and final velocities are equal, a
force, the internal forces body quick and slow collision between two bodies will be equally
(b) Centre of mass of a (q) may affect the motion of violent.
Statement–2 : Whether a force is small or large, rate of
body can be individuals
change of momentum will determine the state of collision of
(c) The kinetic energy (r) do not affect the motion of being violent or not.
of the system of two centre of mass (a) A (b) B
blocks (c) C (d) D
(d) Centre of mass of (s) outside the material of the 124. Statement–1 : Internal forces can change the momentum of
solid cylinder is body the system.
119. Match the following: Statement–2 : Internal forces can change the kinetic energy
Column I Column II of the system.
(a) Inelastic collisions (p) Kinetic energy of the system (a) A (b) B
may decrease
(c) C (d) D
(b) Elastic Collisions (q) Kinetic energy of the system
may increase 125. Statement–1 : In one dimensional elastic collision between
(c) Total work done is (r) kinetic energy of the system an incoming body A and body B which is at rest, mass of
zero may remain constant body B should be quite lesser than mass of body A so that
(d) Non-conservative (s) just before and after collision, body B recoil with greatest speed.
forces are not present momentum remains constant Statement–2 : Linear momentum and energy is conserved
Assertion-Reason Type Questions in elastic collision.
(a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct (a) A (b) B
explanation for assertion.
(c) C (d) D
(b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the
correct explanation for assertion. 126. Statement–1: A particle strikes head–on with another
(c) Assertion is true and reason is false. stationary particle such that first particle comes to rest after
(d) Assertion is false and reason is true. collision. The collision should necessarily be elastic.
120. Statement–1 : It is not possible to know details of final Statement–2: In elastic collision there is no loss of
motion just by knowing details of initial motion and without momentum of the system of both the particles.
knowing the forces which are changing the motion of the
system. (a) A (b) B


(c) C (d) D
dp
Statement–2 : Fext 
dt
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 142

127. Statement–1: If a sphere of mass m moving with speed u Interger Type

undergoes a perfectly elastic head–on collision with another 131. Two blocks A and B of equal mass m = 1 kg are lying on a
sphere of heavier mass M at rest (M > m), then direction of smooth horizontal surface as shown in the figure. A spring
velocity of sphere of mass m is reversed due to collision (no of force constant K = 200 N/m is fixed at one end of the
external force acts on system of two spheres). block A. Block B collides with block A with velocity
Statement–2: During a collision of spheres of unequal v0 = 2 m/sec. What will be the maximum compression of the
–1
masses, the heavier mass exerts more force on the lighter spring (in 10 m)?
mass in comparison to the force which lighter mass exerts
on the heavier one.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
132. Two particles of masses 5 kg and 3 kg are at a separation of
128. Statement – 1: If no external force acts on a system of 8 m. If the 5-kg mass is moved towards the 3-kg mass by a
particles, then the centre of mass will not move in any distance of 1.8 m, then by what distance and in which
direction. direction the second particle should be moved so that the
Statement – 2: If net external force is zero, then the linear centre of the system does not change (in m)?
momentum of the system remains constant. 133. Blocks A and B of mass 1 kg each are moving with 4 m/sec
(a) A (b) B and 2 m/sec, respectively, as shown in the figure. The
(c) C (d) D coefficient of friction for all surfaces is 0.10. Find the distance
129. Statement – 1: We apply the principle of conservation of by which the centre of mass travels before coming to rest
linear momentum in collision and explosion phenomena even (in m).
in the presence of external forces. 134. Two balls A and B of masses 0.10 kg and 0.25 kg, repectively,
Statement – 2 : During collision and explosion net impulse are connected by a stretched spring. The system is placed
2
on the system should be zero to apply the principle of on a smooth table. The initial acceleration of B is 2 m/sec
conservation of linear momentum. westwards when the system is released. Find the magnitude
2
(a) A (b) B and direction of the acceleration of A (in m/sec ) towards
(c) C (d) D east.

130. Statement–1: If net force acting on a system is zero then

centre of mass of the system always remains at rest.
Statement–2: If net force acting on a system is zero then
acceleration of centre of mass is zero.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 143

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Fill in the Blanks 6. Two particles of masses m1 and m2, in projectile motions,
have velocities v1 < v2 respectively at time t = 0. They collide
1. A particle of mass 4 m which is at rest explodes into three
 
fragments. Two of the fragments each of mass m are found at time t0. Their velocities become v '1 and v '2 at time 2t0
to move with a speed v each in mutually perpendicular while moving in air. The value of
directions. The total energy released in the process of
   
explosion is............. (1987)    
 m1 v '1  m 2 v '2  –  m1 v1  m 2 v 2  is (2001)
   
2. The magnitude of the force (in newton) acting on a body
varies with time t (in micro second) as shown in the figure (a) zero (b) (m1 + m2) gt0
AB, BC and CD are straight line segements. The magnitude
of the total impulse of the force on the body from t = 4 s to 1
(c) 2(m1 + m2) gt0 (d) (m + m2) gt0
t = 16 s is ...... Ns. (1994) 2 1

7. Two blocks of masses 10 kg and 4 kg are connected by a

spring of negligible mass and placed on a frictionless
horizontal surface. An impulse gives a velocity of 14 m/s to
the heavier block in the direction of the lighter block. The
velocity of the centre of mass is (2002)
(a) 3 m/s (b) 20 m/s
True/False
(c) 10 m/s (d) 5 m/s
3. Two particles of mass 1 kg and 3 kg move towards each
other under their mutual force of attraction. No other force 8. Look at the drawing given in the figure, which has been
acts on them. When the relative velocity of approach of the drawn with ink of uniform line-thickness. The mass of ink
two particles is 2m/s, their centre of mass has a velocity of used to draw each of the two inner circles, and each of the
0.5 m/s. When the relative velocity of approach becomes two line segments is m. The mass of the ink used to draw the
3 m/s, the velocity of the centre of mass is 0.75 m/s. (1989) outer circle is 6 m. The coordinates of the centres of the
different parts are : outer circle (0, 0), left inner circle (–a, a),
Multiple Choice Questions with One Correct Answer
right inner circle (a, a), vertical line (0, 0) and horizontal line
4. Two particles A and B initially at rest, move towards each (0, –a). The y–coordinate of the centre of mass of the ink in
other under mutual force of attraction. At the instant when this drawing is (2009)
the speed of A is v and the speed of B is 2v, the speed of the
y
centre of mass of the system is (1982)
(a) 3v (b) v
(c) 1.5 v (d) zero x
5. An isolated particle of mass m is moving in horizontal plane
(x – y) along the x-axis at a certain height above the ground.
It suddenly explodes into two fragments of masses m/4 and
a a
3m (a) (b)
an instant later, the smaller fragment is at y = +15 cm. 10 8
4
The larger fragment at this instant is at (1997)
a a
(a) y = – 5 cm (b) y = + 20 cm (c) (d)
12 3
(c) y = + 5 cm (d) y = – 20 cm
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 144

9. Two small particles of equal masses start moving in opposite (c) At a later time the external force F balances the resistive
directions from a point A in a horizontal circular orbit. Their force
tangential velocities are v and 2 v respectively, as shown in
(d) The resistive force experienced by the plate is
the figure. Between collisions, the particles move with
proportional to
constant speeds. After making how many elastic collisions,
other than that at A, these two particles will again reach the 12. A point mass of 1 kg collides elastically with a stationary
point A ? (2009) point mass of 5 kg. After their collision, the 1 kg mass
reverses its direction and moves with a speed of 2 ms–1.
v A
2v Which of the following statement(s) is (are) correct for
the system of these two masses ? (2010)
(a) Total momentum of the system is 3 kg ms–1.
(b) Momentum of 5 kg mass after collision is 4 kg ms–1.
(a) 4 (b) 3 (c) Kinetic energy of the centre of mass is 0.75 J.
(c) 2 (d) 1 (d) Total kinetic energy of the system is 4 J.

10. A ball of mass 0.2 kg rests on a vertical post of height 5 m. A 13. A ball hits the floor and rebounds after an inelastic collision.
bullet of mass 0.01 kg, travelling with a velocity v m/s in a In this case (1986)
horizontal direction, hits the centre of the ball. After the (a) the momentum of the ball just after the collision is the
collision, the ball and bullet travel independently. The ball same as that just before the collision.
hits the ground at a distance of 20 m and the bullet at a (b) The mechanical energy of the ball remains the same in
distance of 100 m from the foot of the post. The initial velocity the collision.
v of the bullet is (2011)
(c) the total momentum of the ball and the earth is conversed.
V m/s
(d) the total energy of the ball and the earth is conserved.
14. A uniform bar of length 6a and mass 8m lies on a smooth
horizontal table. Two point masses m and 2m moving in the
same horizontal with speed 2v and v respectively, strike the
bar [as shown in the figure.] and stick to the bar after
collision. Denoting angular velocity (about the centre of
0 20 100 mass), total energy and centre of mass velocity by , E and
vc respectively, we have after collision. (1991)
(a) 250 m/s (b) 250 2 m / s

(c) 400 m/s (d) 500 m/s

Multiple Choice Questions with One or More than One Correct

Answer
11. A flat plate is moving normal to its plane through a gas
under the action of a constant force F. The gas is kept at a (a) vc  0
very low pressure. The speed of the plate  is much less
3v
than the average speed u of the gas molecules. Which of (b) 
5a
the following options is/are true? (2018)
(a) The pressure difference between the leading and v
(c) 
trailing faces of the plate is proportional to u 5a
(b) The plate will continue to move with constant non-
3m v 2
zero acceleration, at all times (d) E 
5
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 145

15. Two blocks A and B, each of mass m, are connected by a 18. If the resultant of all the external forces acting on a system
massless spring of natural length L and spring constant K. of particles is zero, then from an inertial frame, one can surely
The blocks are initially resting on a smooth horizontal floor say that (2009)
with the spring at its natural length, as shown in figure. A (a) linear momentum of the systmem does not change in time
third identical block C, also of mass m, moves on the floor (b) kinetic energy of the system does not change in time
with a speed v along the line joining A and B, and collides
(c) angular momentum of the system does not change in time
elastically with A. Then. (1993)
(d) potential energy of the system does not change in time
PASSAGE
A small block of mass M moves on a firctionless surface of
an inclined plane, as shown in figure. The angle of the incline
suddenly changes from 60° to 30° at point B. The block is
initially at rest at A. Assume that collisions between the
(a) the kinetic energy of the A–B system, at maximum 2
block and the incline are totally inelastic (g = 10 m/s )
compression of the spring, is zero.
A
(b) the kinetic energy of the A–B system, at maximum M
m v2
compression of the spring, is .

v
4 60° B

m
(c) the maximum compression of the spring, is v   .
K
30° C
 m 
(d) the maximum compression of the spring, is v  . 3m 3 3m
 2K 
19. The speed of the block at point B immediately after it strikes
 ^  ^
the second incline is (2008)
16. Two balls, having linear momenta p1  pi and p 2  – p i ,
(a) 60 m / s (b) 45 m / s
undergo a collision in free space. There is no external force
  (c) 30 m / s (d) 15 m / s
acting on the balls. Let p '1 and p '2 be their final momenta.
The following option(s) is/are NOT ALLOWED for any non- 20. The speed of the block at point C, immediately before it
zero value of p, a1, a2, b1, b2, c1 and c2. (2008) leaves the second incline is (2008)

 ^ ^ ^  ^ ^ (a) 120 m / s (b) 105 m / s

(a) p '1  a1 i  b1 j  c1 k, p '2  a 2 i  b 2 j
(c) 90 m / s (d) 75 m / s
 ^  ^
(b) p '1  c1 k, p '2  c 2 k 21. If collision between the block and the incline is completely
elastic, then the vertical (upward) component of the velocity
 ^ ^ ^  ^ ^ ^
(c) p '1  a1 i  b1 j  c1 k, p '2  a 2 i  b 2 j  c1 k of the block at point B, immediately after it strikes the second
incline is (2008)
 ^ ^  ^ ^
(d) p '1  a1 i  b1 j, p '2  a 2 i  b 2 j (a) 30 m / s (b) 15 m / s
17. A shell is fired from a cannon with a velocity v (m/s) at an
(c) zero (d)  15 m / s
angle  with the horizontal direction. At the highest point in
its path it explodes into two pieces of equal mass. One of (A) Satement I is true, Satement II is true; Satement II is the
the pieces retraces its path to the cannon and the speed (in correct explanation of Satement I.
m/s) of the other piece immediately after the explosion is (B) Satement I is true, Satement II is true; Satement II is not the
(a) 3v cos  (b) 2v cos  (2008) correct explantion of statement I.
(C) Satement I is false, Satement II is true.
3 3 (D) Satement I is true, Satement II is false.
(c)  cos  (d)  cos 
2 2
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 146

22. Statement I A point particle of mass m moving with speed v 27. A block of mass M, with a semicircular track of radius R,
collides with stationary point particle of mass M. If the rests on a horizontal frictionless surface. A uniform cylinder
1 2 of radius r and mass m is released from rest at the top point
maximum energy loss possible is given as f  mv  , then
2  A, as shown in figure. The cylinder slips on the semicircular
frictionless track. How far has the block moved when the
 M 
f  . cylinder reaches the bottom (point B) of the track ? How
Mm
fast is the block moving when the cylinder reaches the bottom
Statement II Maximum energy loss occurs when the particles of the track ? (1983)
get stuck together as a result of the collision. (2013)
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
23. Satement I : Two particles moving in the same direction do
not lose all their energy in a completely inelastic collision.
Satement II : Principal of conservation of momentum holds 28. Two bodies A and B of mass m and 2m respectively are
true for all kinds of collisions. (2010) placed on a smooth floor. They are connected by a spring.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
SUBJECTIVE PROBLEMS
24. A circular plate of uniform thickness has a diameter of 56 m. A third body C of mass m moves with velocity v0 along the
A circular portion of diameter 42 cm is removed from one line joining A and B and collides elastically with A as shown
edge of the plate as shown in figure. Find the position of the in figure. At a certain instant of time t0 after collision, it is
found that the instantaneous velocities of A and B are the
centre of mass of remaining porition. (1981)
same. Further at this instant the compression of the spring
is found to be x0. Determine
(i) the common velocity of A and B at time t0 and
(ii) the spring constant. (1987)
29. A ball of mass 100g is projected vertically upwards from the
ground with a velocity of 49 m/sec. At the same time another
identical ball is dropped from a height of 98 m to fall freely
along the same path as that followed by the first ball. After
25. A body of mass 1 kg, initially at rest, explodes and breaks some time the two balls collide and stick together and finally
into three fragments of masses in the ratio 1 : 1 : 3. The two fall to the ground. Find the time of flight of the masses.
pieces of equal mass fly off perpendicular to each other (1985)
with a speed of 30 m/ sec each. What is the velocity of the 30. A simple pendulum is suspended from a peg on a vertical
heavier fragments ? (1981) wall. The pendulum is pulled away from the wall to a
26. Three particles A, B, and C of equal mass move with equal horizontal position (see figure) and released. The ball hits
speed v along the medians of an equilateral triangle as
2
showin in figure the collide at the centroid of the triangle. the wall, the co-efficient of restitution being . What is
5
After the collision, A comes to rest, B retraces its path with
the speed v. What is the velocity of C ? (1982) the minimum number of collisions after which the amplitude
of oscillations becomes less than 60 degree ? (1987)
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 147

31. An object of mass 5 kg is projected with a velocity of (b) Find the equation of the trajectory of a point on the rod,
20 m/s at an angle of 60° to the horizontal. At the highest located at a distance r, from the lower end. What is the
point of its path the projectile explodes and breaks up into shape of the path of this point ? (1993)
two fragments of masses 1 kg and 4 kg. The fragments
35. A small sphere of radius R is held against the inner surface
separate horizontally after the explosion. The explosion
of a larger sphere of radius 6R. The masses of the large and
releases internal energy such that the kinetic energy of the
small spheres are 4M and M respectively. This arrangement is
system at the highest point is doubled. Calculate the
placed on a horizontal table. There is no friction between any
separation between the two fragments when they reach the
surfaces of contact. The small sphere is now released. Find the
ground. (1990)
coordinates of the centre of the large sphere when the smaller
32. A block A of mass 2m is placed on another block B of mass sphere reaches the other extreme position. (1996)
4m which in turn is placed on a fixed table. The two blocks
have same length 4d and they are placed as shown in figure.
The coefficient of friction (both static and kinetic) between
the block B and table is . There is no friction between the
two blocks. A small object of mass m moving horizontally
along a line passing through the centre of mass (COM), of
the block B and perpendicular to its face with a speed v collides
elastically with the block B at a height d above the table.
36. Two blocks of mass 2 kg and M are at rest on an inclined
plane and are separated by a distance of 6.0 m as shown in
figure. The co-efficient of friction between reach of the blocks
and the inclined plane is 0.25. The 2 kg block is given a
velocity of 10.0 m/s up the inclined plane. It collides with M,
comes back and has a velocity of 1.0 m/s when, it reaches its
(a) What is the minimum value of v (call it v0) required to initial position. The other block M after the collosion moves
make the block A topple ? 0.5 m up and comes to rest. Calculate the coefficient of
(b) If v = 2v0, find the distance (from the point p in the figure) restitution between the blocks and the mass of the block M.
at which the mass m falls on the table after collision. (Ignore [Taken sin   tan  = 0.05 and g = 10 m/s ]
2
(1999)
the role of friction during the collision). (1991)
–2
33. A cylindrical solid of mass 10 kg and cross-sectional area
–4 2
10 m is moving parallel to its axis (the x-axis) with a uniform
3
speed of 10 m/s in the positive direction. At t = 0, its front
face passes the plane x = 0. The region to the right of this
37. A car P is moving with a uniform speed of 5 3 m/s towards
plane is filled with dust particle of uniform density
–3 3 a carriage of mass 9 kg at rest kept on the rails at a point B as
10 kg/m . When a dust particle collides with the face of the
shown in figure. The height AC is 120 m. Cannon balls of 1
cylinder, it sticks to its surface. Assuming that the
kg are fired from the car with an initial velocity 100 m/s at an
dimensions of the cylinder remain practically unchanged
angle 30° with the horizontal. The first cannon ball hits the
and that the dust sticks only to the front face of the x-
stationary carriage after a time t0 and sticks to it. Determine
coordinate of the front of the cylinder. Find the x-coordinate
t0. At t0, the second cannon ball is fired. Assume that the
of the front of the cylinder at t = 150 s. (1993)
resistive force between the rails and the carriage is constant
34. A uniform thin rod of mass M and length L is standing and ignore the vertical motion of the carriage throughout. If
vertically, along the y-axis, on a smooth horizontal surface, the second ball also hits and sticks to the carriage, what will
with its lower end at the origin (0, 0). A slight disturbance at be the horizontal velocity of the carriage just after the second
t = 0 causes the lower end to slip on the smooth surface impact. (2001)
along the positive x-axis and the rod starts falling.
(a) What is the path, followed by the centre of mass of the
rod, during its fall ?
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 148

38. A particle of mass m, moving in a circular path of radius R

with a constant speed v2 is located at point (2R, 0) at time
t = 0 and a man starts moving with a velocity v1 along the
+ve of y-axis from origin at time t = 0. Calculate the linear
momentum of the particle with respect to the man as a
function of time. (2003)
It is given : n = 100, M = 3kg, m = 0.01 kg
2
b = 2m, a= 1m, g = 10 m/s . (2006)
41. A spring-block system is resting on a frictionless floor as
–1
shown in the figure. The spring constant is 2.0 Nm and the
mass of the block is 2.0 kg. Ignore the mass of the spring.
Initially the spring is in unstretched condition. Another
39. Two masses m1 and m2 are connected by a light spring of –1
neutral length l0 which is compressed completely and tied block of mass 1.0 kg moving with a speed of 2.0 ms collides
by a string. This system while moving with a velocity v0 elastically with the first block. The collision is such that the
along + ve x-axis passes through the origin at t = 0. At this 2.0 kg block does not hit the wall. The distance, in metres,
position the string snaps. Position of mass m1 at time t is between the two blocks when the spring returns to its
given by the equation x1(t) = v0t – A(1 – cos t). Calculate. unstretched position for the first time after the collision is
(a) position of the particle m2 as a function of time. ....................... (2018)
(b) l0 in terms of A. (2003)
40. There is a rectangular plate of mass M kg, of dimensions
(a × b). The plate is held in the horizontal position by striking
n small balls, each of mass m, per unit area per unit time.
These are striking in the dotted half region of the plate. The
balls are colliding elastically with velocity v. What is v ?


CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 149

ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a) 5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (b) 9. (d) 10. (a)
11. (d) 12. (d) 13. (b) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (c)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (d) 25. (d) 26. (c) 27. (b) 28. (d) 29. (a) 30. (c)
31. (a) 32. (a) 33. (d) 34. (c) 35. (c) 36. (d) 37. (d) 38. (c) 39. (d) 40. (b)
41. (d) 42. (a) 43. (c) 44. (a) 45. (c) 46. (c) 47. (c) 48. (d) 49. (d) 50. (a)
51. (b) 52. (b) 53. (a) 54. (b) 55. (a) 56. (b) 57. (c) 58. (a) 59. (b) 60. (a)
61. (c) 62. (d) 63. (b) 64. (c) 65. (b) 66. (c) 67. (a) 68. (d)

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (a)
11. (c) 12. (a) 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (a) 16. (a) 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (b)

21. (b) 22. (d) 23. (d) 24. (c) 25. (d) 26. (a) 27. (c) 28. (c) 29. (d) 30. (c)

31. (c) 32. (b) 33. (b) 34. (b) 35. (a) 36. (b)

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (d) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (c) 10. (d)
11. (d) 12. (a) 13. (d) 14. (d) 15. (c) 16. (d) 17. (d) 18. (d) 19. (d) 20. (a)
21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (a) 25. (b) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (c) 29. (b) 30. (c)
31. (c) 32. (a) 33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (d) 36. (c) 37. (c) 38. (c) 39. (c) 40. (d)
41. (d) 42. (b) 43. (b) 44. (a) 45. (a) 46. (c) 47. (c) 48. (c) 49. (c) 50. (c)
51. (c) 52. (d) 53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (a) 56. (b) 57. (d) 58. (a) 59. (d) 60. (d)
61. (b) 62. (a) 63. (c) 64. (b) 65. (a) 66. (c) 67. (b) 68. (b) 69. (a) 70. (d)
71. (b) 72. (a) 73. (b) 74. (b) 75. (b) 76. (c) 77. (c) 78. (c) 79. (d) 80. (c)
81. (d) 82. (c) 83. (d) 84. (c) 85. (c) 86. (a) 87. (b) 88. (a) 89. (a) 90. (b)
91. (c) 92. (b) 93. (c) 94. (a) 95. (a, d) 96. (b, c) 97. (a) 98. (b, d) 99. (a, c) 100. (a, d)
101. (b, c) 102. (b, c) 103. (c, d) 104. (a,c,d) 105. (c) 106. (a) 107. (c) 108. (c)0 109. (a) 110. (d)
111 (d) 112. (a) 113. (b) 114. (c) 115. (d) 116. (AQ; BP; CR,S; DS)
117. (A  P,R; B  R; C  S; D  Q) 118. (a  q, r; b  p, s; c  r; d  p)
119. (a  p, s; b  r, s; c  r; d  p, q, r) 120. (d) 121. (d) 122. (c) 123. (d) 124. (d) 125. (a)
126. (d) 127. (c) 128. (d) 129. (c) 130. (d) 131. (0001) 132. (0003) 133. (0003) 134. (0005)
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS 150

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

3 2
1.   mv 2. 0.005 3. False 4. (d) 5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (c)
2

10. (d) 11. (a) 12. (a, c) 13. (c) 14. (a,c,d) 15. (b,d) 16. (a) 17. (a) 18. (a)
19. (b) 20. (b) 21. (c) 22. (a) 23. (a)

24. 9 cm to left of centre of bridge circle. 25. 10 2 m/s 26. v = v = velocity of C.

m R – r  2g  R – r  0 2m 20 73 5
27.  i  Mm
,  ii  m
M M  m 28.  i  ,  ii  29. 30. 4 31. 44.25 m
3 3x 20 2

5 6 x2 y2
32.  a   0  6gd ,  b  3d g 33. 105 m 34. (i) Straight line, (ii) 2
 =1, Ellipse 35. (L + 2R, 0)
2 5 L  r2
 – r
 2 
36. 0.84, 15.05 kg
^ ^ v2
37. t0 = 12 second, 15.75 m/s. 38. –mv2 sin t i  m  v 2 cos t – v1  j where  
R

m1A  m1 
39. (a) x 2  0 t  m 1– cos t  , (b) l 0   m 1 A. 40. 10 m/s 41. (2.09)
2  2 

Dream on !!

 04
ROTATIONAL MOTION
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 152

Rotational Motion
1. KINEMATICS OF SYSTEM OF PARTICLES It is always along the axis of the motion.
(c) Angular Acceleration
1.1 System of particles can move in different ways as observed
Angular acceleration of an object about any point is rate of
by us in daily life. To understand that we need to understand
change of angular velocity about that point.
few new parameters.
(a) Angular Displacement A
A B
Consider a particle moves from A to B in the following figures. B

A A B
B

d d
 
O O dt dt
2
Angle is the angular displacement of particle about O. Units  Rad/s
Units  radian It is a vector quantity. If  is constant then similarly to
(b) Angular Velocity equation of motion (i.e.)
The rate of change of angular displacement is called as  t are related  = 0 + t
angular velocity.
1
A   0 t  t 2
2
A B
B
f2  02  2
1.2 Various types of motion

(a) Translational Motion

System is said to be in translational motion, if all the particles
lying in the system have same linear velocity.
O
O Example

d d
 
dt dt

Units  Rad/s
It is a vector quantity whose direction is given by right
hand thumb rule.
According to right hand thumb rule, if we curl the fingers of
right hand along with the body, then right hand thumb gives
Motion of a rod as shown.
us the direction of angular velocity.
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 153

Example
vp
P
a
r
O

Motion of body of car on a straight rod.

In both the above examples, velocity of all the particles is   
v p   r
same as they all have equal displacements in equal intervals
   
of time. a    r  2 r
(b) Rotational Motion Example
A system is said to be in pure rotational motion, when all the B vB
points lying on the system are in circular motion about one
common fixed axis.
A
L
B
L/2
A
C B
O
O A
B L
A vB = L and vA  , with directions as shown in figure.
D 2
O B
A Now in rotational + translational motion, we just superimpose
velocity and acceleration of axis on the velocity and
In pure rotational motion.
acceleration of any point about the axis. (i.e.)
Angular velocity of all the points is same about the fixed
P
axis.
(c) Rotational + Translational
A system is said to be in rotational + translational motion, Q O v
when the particle is rotating with some angular velocity j
about a movable axis.
For example : i

vPO  Riˆ

v v v0  v ˆi
O
  
 vP  v0  v PO
  
 v P  v PO  vO
v = velocity of axis.
 = Angular velocity of system about O. R  viˆ

1.3 Inter Relationship between kinematics variable Similarly vQO  Rjˆ
In general if a body is rotating about any axis (fixed or 
v0  v ˆi
movable), with angular velocity  and angular acceleration
 then velocity of any point p with respect to axis is 
 vQ  v ˆi  R ˆj
      
v   r and a    r  2 r .
Inter-relation between v of axis and  or a of axis and 
i.e., depends on certain constraints.
ROTATIONAL MOTION 154

General we deal with the case of no slipping or pure rolling. Torque  = rf sin  about a point O.
Where r = distance from the point O to point of application
of force.
v f= force
O No slipping
 
 = angle between r and f

vP Platform
A f
The constraint in the above case is that velocity of points
of contact should be equal for both rolling body and
playfrom. r

(i.e.) v – r = vP
If platform is fixed then  Torque about O.
 A is point of application of force.
vP = 0  v  r
Magnitude of torque can also be rewritten as
An differentiating the above term we get
  rf  or   r f where
dv r d
 . f  = component of force in the direction  to r .
dt dt

r = component of force in the direction  to f .
dv
Now if a Direction :
dt
v Direction of torque is given by right hand thumb rule. If we
a 
d curl the fingers of right hand from first vector  r  to second

dt 

vector f then right hand thumb gives us direction of their
then a  r cross product.
 Torque is always defined about a point or about an axis.
Remember if acceleration is assumed opposite to velocity
 When there are multiple forces, the net torque needs to be
dv dv
then a   instead of a  . calculated, (i.e.)
dt dt   
net  F  F  ...........F
1 2 n

d
Similary : If  and  are in opposite direction the    . All torque about same point/axis.
dt
If    0, then the body is in rotational equilibrium.
Accordingly the constraints can change depending upon
the assumptions.  If  F  0 along with    0 , then body is in mechanical
equilibrium.
2. ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS  If equal and opp. force act to produce same torque then
they constitutes a couple.
2.1 Torque
 For calculating torque, it is very important to find the eff.
Similar to force, the cause of rotational motion is a physical point of application of force.
quantity called a torque.  Mg  Acts at com/centre of gravity..
Torque incorporates the following factors.
 Amount of force.
 Point of application of force.
 Direction of application of force.  N  Point of application depends upon situation to
Combining all of the above. situation.
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 155

2.2 Newtwon’s Laws

   I.
 I = moment of Inertia
r
  = Angular Acceleration. 2m

2.3 Moment of Inertia

 Gives the measure of mass distribution about on axis.

 I   m i ri2
th
ri  distance of the i mass from axis. axis
 Always defined about an axis.
I axis   r 2 dm

3. MOMENT OF INERTIA
r1
M1 3.1 Moment of inertia of Continuous Bodies
r4 r2
M4 M2 When the distribution of mass of a system of particle is continuous,
r3 the discrete sum I   m i ri2 is replaced by an integral. The
M3
moment of inertia of the whole body takes the form

2
I r dm

I  M1 r12  M 2 r22  M 3 r32  M 4 r42

2
 SI units  kgm
 Gives the measure of rotational inertia and is equavalent to r dm
mass.
(a) Moment of Inertia of a discreet particle system :

M1 Keep in mind that here the quantity r is the perpendicular distance

to an axis, not the distance to an origin. To evaluate this integral,
r1 r2 we must express m in terms of r.

M2
Comparing the expression of rotational kinetic energy with
2
1/2 mv , we can say that the role of moment of inertia (I) is
same in rotational motion as that of mass in linear motion. It
r3 is a measure of the resistance offered by a body to a change
axis in its rotational motion.
M3
3.2 Moment of Inertia of some important bodies
I  M1r12  M 2 r22  M3 r32
(b) Continuous Mass Distribution 1. Circular Ring
For continuous mass distribution, we need to take help of Axis passing through the centre and perpendicular to the plane
integration : of ring.
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 156
2
I = MR (b) Axis passing through an end and perpendicular to the
rod:
axis R
M 2
I
3

2. Hollow Cylinder
2
I = MR

3.3 Theorems on Moment of Inertia

hollow
1. Parallel Axis Theorem : Let Icm be the moment of inertia
of a body about an axis through its centre of mass and Let Ip be
axis the moment of inertia of the same body about another axis which
is parallel to the original one.
3. Solid Cylinder and a Disc
If d is the distance between these two parallel axes and M
About its geometrical axis : is the mass of the body then according to the parallel axis theorem :
1
I MR 2 ICM
2 IP

d
solid

CM P
axis

4. (a) Solid Sphere 2

Ip = Icm + Md
Axis passing through the centre :
2
2. Perpendicular Axis Theorem :
I = 2/5 MR
Consider a plane body (i.e., a plate of zero thickness) of mass M.
Let X and Y axes be two mutually perpendicular lines in the plane
of the body. The axes intersect at origin O.

Z
(b) Hollow Sphere
Axis passing through the centre : Y
2
I = 2/3 MR
5. Thin Rod of length l : X
(a) Axis passing through mid point and perpendicular to the
length :
Let Ix = moment of inertia of the body about X–axis.
Let Iy = moment of inertia of the body about Y–axis.
The moment of inertia of the body about Z–axis (passing through
O and perpendicular to the plane of the body) is given by :
Iz = Ix + Iy
M 2
I The above result is known as the perpendicular axis theorem.
12
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 157

3.4 Radius of Gyration (compare with linear momentum p = mv in linear motion)

L is also a vector and its direction is same as that of  (i.e. clockwise
If M is the mass and I is the moment of inertia of a rigid body, then
or anticlockwise)
the radius of gyration (k) of a body is given by :
We knows,
I  
k L  I
M
 
dL d 
4. ANGULAR MOMENTUM (L) AND IMPULSE I  I  = 
dt dt net

4.1 Angular Momentum 4.2 Conservation of angular momentum


(a) For a particle If  net  0
Angular momentum about origin (O) is given as : 
dL
      0
L  r  p  r   mv  dt

where r = position vector of the particle ; v = velocity  L = constant
 
y  L f  Li

4.3 Angular Impulse

v
A   
r 
J   dt  L

r 5. WORK AND ENERGY

x
O
5.1 Work done by a Torque
 L = mv r sin  = mv (OA) sin  = mvr
Consider a rigid body acted upon by a force F at perpendicular
where r = perpendicular distance of velocity vector from O. distance r from the axis of rotation. Suppose that under this force,
(b) For a particle moving in a circle the body rotates through an angle .

For a particle moving in a circle of radius r with a speed v, its linear Work done = force × displacement
momentum is mv, its angular momentum (L) is given as : W = F r. 

L  mvr  mvr W = 

Work done = (torque) × (angular displacement)

mv dW d
Power    
r dt dt

5.2 Kinetic Energy

(c) For a rigid body (about a fixed axis) Rotational kinetic energy of the system
L = sum of angular momentum of all particles
1 1
 m1 v12  m 2 v 22  ......
= m1v1r1 + m2v2r2 + m3v3r3 + ...... 2 2

 m1r12   m 2 r22   m 3 r32   ...... (v = r) 1 1

 m1r12 2  m 2 r22 2  .........
2 2
 
 m1r12  m 2 r22  m 3 r32  ......   L = I
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 158

1 1 

2
 
m1r22  mr22  m 3 r32  .........  2 (ii) K  Icm 2  MVcm
2

2 2
1 2
Hence rotational kinetic energy of the system = I
2
M
The total kinetic energy of a body which is moving through space cm Vcm
as well as rotating is given by : A
K = Ktranslational + Krotational P

1 2 1 where (a) IP = Icm + MR2 (parallel axes theorem)

K MVCM  I CM  2
2 2
(b) Vcm = R [pure] rolling condition.
where VCM = velocity of the centre of mass 4. Forward Slipping
ICM = moment of inertia about CM
 = angular velocity of rotation H
v v+
6. ROLLING v + C = v
L
1. Friction is responsible for the motion but work done or v f v–
v=0
dissipation of energy against friction is zero as there is Translation Rotation Rolling (Sliding)
no relative motion between body and surface at the point
of contact. The bottom most point slides in the forward direction w.r.t.
2. In case of rolling all point of a rigid body have same angular ground, so friction force acts opposite to velocity at lowest
speed but different linear speed. The linear speed is point i.e. opposite to direction of motion e.g. When sudden
maximum for the point H while minimum for the point L. brakes are applied to car its ‘v’ remain same while ‘r’
decreases so its slides on the ground.
H H H 5. Backward Slipping
v v+
C v + C = C v
L v v+
v v–
L L v + v
=
Translation Rotation Pure Rolling
v –v f
v=0
3. Condition for pure rolling : (without slipping)
Translation Rotation Rolling (Sliding)

The bottom most point slides in the backward direction

Vcm w.r.t. ground, so friction force acts opposite to velocity
(i) A i.e. friction will act in the direction of motion e.g. When
B car starts on a slippery ground, its wheels has small ‘v’
but large ‘r’ so wheels slips on the ground and friction
general (when surface is moving) acts against slipping.
in terms of velocity : Vcm –R = VB 6.1 Rolling and sliding motion on an inclined plane
in terms of rotation : acm – R = aB
special case (when VB = 0)
in terms of velocity : Vcm = R
in terms of acceleration : acm  R h h
(ii) Total KE of Rolling body :

1 Pure Rolling Sliding

(i) K  I P 2 OR
2
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 159

Physical Quantity Rolling Sliding Falling

Velocity VR  2gh  /  VS  2 gh VF  2 gh

Acceleration aR = g sin / aS = g sin  aF = g

Time of descend t R  1 / sin  2h / g  t S  1 / sin   2h / g t F  2h / g

(where  = [1 + I/Mr2])

 Velocity of falling and sliding bodies are equal and is more than rollings.
 Acceleration is maximum in case of falling and minimum in case of rolling.
 Falling body reaches the bottom first while rolling last.

SOLVED EXAMPLES

Example - 1
a t  R  0.3 0.5  0.15 m / s 2
A flywheel of radius 30 cm starts from rest and accelerates
2
with constant acceleration of 0.5 rad/s . Compute the 2
 0.15 = 0.646 m/s2
2
tangential, radial and resultant accelerations of a point on a net  a 2r  a 2t 
25
its circumference :
Example - 2
(a) Initially at  = 0°
(b) After it has made one third of a revolution. A wheel mounted on a stationary axle starts at rest and is
given the following angular acceleration :
Sol. (a) At the start :  = 9 – 12 t (in SI units)
2
 = 0.5 rad/s where t is the time after the wheel begins to rotate. Find
the number of revolutions that the wheel turns before it
R = 0.3 m
stops (and begins to turn in the opposite direction).
 = i = 0 rad/s
2
Radial acceleration = ar =  R = 0 m/s Sol. The kinematic equations do not apply because the angular
2
Tangential acceleration = at = R = (0.3) (0.5) = 0.15 m/s acceleration  is not constant.
Net acceleration = anet We start with the basic definition :  = d/dt to write

 a 2r  a 2t  0 2  0.152  0.15 m / s 2 t t
  0    dt   9  12 t  dt  9 t  6t 2 (in SI units)
0 0
(b) After  = 120° (2 /3) :
We find the elapsed time t between
2f  i2  2  0  20.52 / 3
0 = 0 and = 0 by substituting these values :
2
2 0 – 0 = 9t – 6t
 f  rad / s
3 Solving for t, we obtain t = 9/6 = 1.50 s
From  = ddt, we have
a r  2 R  2 / 3 0.3   / 5 m / s 2
0
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 160

t t
Dividing (iii) by R and adding to (i) and (ii),
 9t  6t  dt  4.5 t
2 2
   dt   2t 3
0 0 M
m 2 g  m1g  m 2 a  m1a  R
2
Substituting 0 = 0 and t = 1.5 s, we obtain
2 3
0 = 4.5 (1.5) – 2 (1.5) = 3.375 rad  M
 m 2 g  m1 g   m 2  m 1   a
 2
Example - 3
In the given figure, calculate the linear acceleration of the m 2  m1 10  8g 20
blocks. a g   m / s2
M 2 19
m 2  m1  10  8 
2 2
Example - 4
A uniform rod of length L and mass M is pivoted freely at
B
one end.
A
(a) What is the angular acceleration of the rod when
Mass of block A = 10 kg it is at angle to the vertical ?
Mass of block B = 8 kg (b) What is the tangential linear acceleration of the
Mass of disc shaped pulley = 2 kg (take g = 10 m/s )
2 free end when the rod is horizontal ? The moment of
2
inertia of a rod about one end is 1/3 ML .
Sol. Let R be the radius of the pulley and T1 and T2 be the Sol. The figure shows the rod at an angle to the vertical. If we
tensions in the left and right portions of the string. take torques about the pivot we need not be connected
Let m1 = 10 kg ; m2 = 8 kg ; M = 2 kg. with the force due to the pivot.
Let a be the acceleration of blocks.
+
T1 T2

m1g m2g mg

For the blocks (linear motion) The torque due to the weight is mgL/2 sin so the second
(i) T1 – m1g = m1a law for the rotational motion is

(ii) m2g – T2 = m2a mgL ML2 3 g sin 

sin    Thus  
For the pulley (rotation) 2 3 2L
Net torque = I When the rod is horizontal /2 and = 3g/2L.
The tangential linear acceleration of the free end is

T1 T2 3g
a t  L 
2
Example - 5
1 2
(iii) T2R – T1R = MR 
2 A turntable rotates about a fixed vertical axis, making one
revolution in 10 s. The moment of inertia of the turntable
2
The linear acceleration of blocks is same as the tangential about the axis is 1200 kg m . A man of mass 80 kg initially
acceleration of any point on the circumference of the pulley standing at the centre of the turntable, runs out along a
which is R. radius. What is the angular velocity of the turntable when
(iv) a = R the man is 2m from the centre ?
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 161

Sol. Sol. Before Collision After Collision

M
VCM
m v m v1

There is no external impulse on the system.

I0 = initial moment of inertia of the system  Linear momentum is conserved and Angular momentum
about any point is conserved.
I0 = Iman + Itable
2
(i) Pi = Pf
I0 = 0 + 1200 = 1200 kg m
mv = mv1 + MVCM ...(i)
(Iman = 0 as the man is at the axis)
(ii) (LCM)i = (LCM)f about CM of rod.
I = final moment of inertia of the system
 mv1 
I = Iman + Itable mv  0   ICM  ...(ii)
2
2 2
I = mr + 1200
(iii) At colliding points
Vsep = eVapp

  
 VCM    v1   ev ...(iii)
 2 
2m
e = 1 (Elastic collision)
Solving (i), (ii) and (iii) we get :

2
I = 80 (2) + 1200 = 1520 kg m
2  4m  M  2m
v1    v ; VCM  v
 4 m  M  4 m  M
By conservation of angular momentum :
I0 0 = I  12 m  v
   
Now 0 = 2/T0 = 2/10 = /5 rad/s  4 m  M   
I 0 0 1200  
  = 0.51 rad/s Example - 7
I 1520  5
A solid sphere of radius r and mass m rolls without slipping
Example - 6
down the track shown in the figure. At the end of its run
A meter stick lies on a frictionless horizontal table. It has at point Q its center–of–mass velocity is directed upward.
a mass M and is free to move in any way on the table. A
hockey puck m, moving as shown with speed v collide
elastically with the stick.
M

centre
R
m v
(a) Determine the force with which the sphere presses
(a) What is the velocity of the puck after impact ? against the track at B.
(b) What is the velocity of the CM and the angular velocity (b) Upto what height does the CM rise after it leaves
of the stick after impact ? the track ?
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 162

Sol. (a) From A to B Sol. When the body is placed on the inclined plane, it tries to
Loss in GPE = gain in KE slip down and hence a static friction f acts upwards. This
friction provides a torque which causes the body to rotate.
1 1
mg 10 R   2
m Vcm 1
 I cm 12 Let ACM be the linear acceleration of centre of mass and 
2 2
be the angular acceleration of the body.
For rolling without slipping on a fixed surface.
From force diagram :
Vcm1 = R1
For linear motion parallel to the plane
The CM follows a circular path of radius R – r
mg sin  – f = ma
2
mVcm
AT B, net force towards centre = N – mg = For rotation around the axis through centre of mass
R r 2
Net torque = I  f R = (mk ) 
m 100 gR  mg 107 R  7 r 
 N  mg  
7 R  r 7 R  r
N
(b) From A to Q, mg (9R + r) f
2
1 2 1  Vcm 2 
 mv cm 2
 I cm  

2 2  r 

V cm 2  r2 at Q 

As there is no slipping, the point of contact of the body

Top
with plane is instantaneously at rest.
A
 v = R  and ACM = R
Solve the following three equations for a and f :
10 R + r mg sin  – f = m
2
Q f R = mk 
ACM = R
B
g sin  mg sin 
A CM  2
and f 
From Q to P,  does not change because about C.M torque k R2
1 2 1 2
is zero in air. R k

gain in GPE = loss in KE We can also derive the condition for pure rolling (rolling
1 without slipping) :
2
 mg × gain in height = mVcm
2 2 To avoid slipping, f < sN
2
Vcm 5 g sin 
 h 2
 9R  r    s mg cos 
2g 7 1 R 2 / k 2
52 R 5 r
 height above the base = R + h =  tan 
7 7  s 
R2
Example - 8 1 2
k
A rigid body of radius of gyration k and radius R rolls
(without slipping) down a plane inclined at an angle  This is the condition on s so that the body rolls without
with horizontal. Calculate its acceleration and the frictional slipping.
force acting on it.
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 163

Example - 9  Potential energy (U) = –k/r

A particle of mass m is subject to an attractive central (Compare the expression of force with gravitational force)
2
force of magnitude k/r where k is a constant. At the From conservation of energy,
instant when the particle is at an extreme position in its
total energy at P1 = total energy at P2
closed elliptical orbit, its distance from the centre of force

k 1 k 1 k 
is ‘a’ and its speed is mv12     mv 22   
2 ma . Calculate its distance from 2 r
 1  2  r2 
force-centre when it is at the other extreme position.
From conervation of angular momentum about C,

Sol. Let P be the particle and C be the force–centre. P1 and P2 m v1 r1 = m v2 r2

are its extreme positions at distance r1 and r2 from C. We have to find r2. Hence we eliminate v2.

2
v1 1 k 1 v r  k
mv12   m  1 1  
r1 = a r2 P2 2 r1 2  r2  r2
P1 C
v2 k
Substituting v1 = 2 ma and r1 = a

k
We have r1 = a and v1 = 2 ma 1 k k 1 ma 2 k 
m   
2 2ma a 2 r22 2 ma r2
As the force is directed towards C, torque about C is zero.
Hence we will apply conservation of angular momentum  3r22  4 ar2  a 2  0
about C and conservation of energy. r2 = a, a/3

2
F = k/r
The other extreme position is at a distance of a/3 from C.
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 164

EXERCISE - 1 BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Discreet Particles 7. If the radius of a solid sphere is 35 cm, calculate the radius
1. The moment of inertia of a body does not depend on: of gyration when the axis is along a tangent:

(a) the mass of the body (a) 7 10cm (b) 7 35 cm

(b) the angular velocity of the body
7 2
(c) the axis of rotation of the body (c) cm (d) cm
5 5
(d) the distribution of the mass in the body
2. Three point masses m1, m2 and m3 are located at the vertices 8. The moment of inertia of a straight thin rod of mass M,
of an equilateral triangle of side ‘a’. What is the moment of length L about an axis perpendicular to its length and passing
inertia of the system about an axis along the altitude of the through its one end is:
triangle passing through m1? 1 1
2
(a) ML2 (b) ML
a2
a2 12 3
(a)  m1  m 2  (b)  m2  m3 
4 4
1 2
(c) ML (d) ML2
a2 a2 2
(c)  m1  m3  (d)  m1  m 2  m3 
4 4
9. A closed tube partly filled with water lies in a horizontal
Continuous Body plane. If the tube is rotated about perpendicular bisector,
3. A circular disc X of radius R is made from an iron plate of the moment of inertia of the system:
thickness t, and another disc Y of radius 4R is made from an (a) increases (b) decreases
iron plate of thickness t/4. Then the relation between the (c) remains constant (d) depends on sense of rotation
moment of inertia IX and IY is :
10. Two rings of same and mass are placed such that their centres
(a) IY = 32 IX (b) IY = 16 IX are at a common point and their planes are perpendicular to
(c) IY = IX (d) IY = 64 IX each other. The moment of inertia of the system about an
4. The ratio of the squares of radii of gyration of a circular axis passing through the centre and perpendicular to the
disc and a circular ring of the same radius about a tangential plane of one of the rings is (mass of the ring = m, radius = r)
axis is :
1 2
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 5 : 6 (a) 2 mr 2 (b) mr

(c) 2 : 3 (d) 2 : 1
3 2
5. Moment of inertia of a uniform annular disc of internal radius (c) 2 mr 2 (d) 2mr
r and external radius R and mass M about an axis through its
11. What is the moment of inertia I of a uniform solid sphere of
centre and perpendicular to its plane is:
mass M and radius R, privoted about an axis that is tangent
1 1 to the surface of the sphere?
(a) M (R2  r 2 ) (b) M (R2  r 2 )
2 2

M (R4  r 4 ) 1 M (R4  r 4 )
(c) (d)
2( R 2  r 2 ) 2 (R2  r 2 )

6. For the same total mass which of the following will have the
largest moment of inertia about an axis passing through the
centre of gravity and perpendicular to the plane of the body?
2 3
(a) A disc of radius a (b) A ring of radius a (a) 3 MR 2 (b) 5 MR 2

(c) A square lamina of side 2a

6 7
(d) Four roads forming square of side 2a (c) 5 MR 2 (d) 5 MR 2
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 165

Parallel axis theorem 17. Moment of inertia of a circular wire of mass M and radius
R about its diameter is :
12. The moment of inertia of a solid cylinder of mass M, radius
R and Length L about its axis (a) MR2/2 (b) MR2

(a) ML2 (b) MR2 (c) 2 MR2 (d) MR2/4

18. One solid sphere A and another hollow sphere B are of
MR 2 MR 2 same mass and same outer radii. Their monents of inertia
(c) (d)
L 2 about their diameters are respectively IA and IB such that
13. The moment of inertia of a metre stick of mass 300 gm, about an (a) IA = IB (b) IA > IB
axis at right angles to the stick and located at 30 cm mark, is:
IA dA
5 2 2 (c) IA < IB (d) I  d
(a) 8.3  10 g  cm (b) 5.8g  cm B B

(c) 3.7 105 g  cm 2 (d) none of these 19. Three point masses, each of mass m, are placed at the corners
of an equilateral triangle of side. l. Then the moment of
14. The moment of inertia of a solid sphere about an axis passing inertia of this system about an axis along one side of the
triangle is:
2
through centre of gravity is MR 2 ; then its radius of gyration (a) 3ml
2
(b) ml
2
5
about a parallel axis at a distance 2R from first axis is: 3 2 3 2
(c) ml (d) ml
(a) 5R (b) 4 2
22 / 5 R
20. Moment of inertia of a uniform circular disc about a diameter
5 is I. Its moment of inertia about an axis perpendicular to its
(c) R (d) 12 / 5 R
2 plane and passing through a point on its rim will be:
15. Four spheres of diameter 2a and mass M are placed with (a) 5I (b) 3I
their centres on the four corners of a square of side b. Then
(c) 6I (d) 4I
the moment of inertia of the system about an axis along one
of the sides of the square is: 21. The moment of inertia of a circular ring of radius R and mass
M about a tangent in its plane is:
4 8
(a) Ma 2  2 Mb 2 (b) Ma 2  2 Mb 2 (a) MR2 (b) (1/ 2)MR 2
5 5
(c) (3/ 2)MR 2 (d) 2MR 2
8 2 4 2 2
(c) Ma (d) Ma  4 Mb
5 5 22. A wheel comprises of a ring of radius R and mass M and
three spokes of mass m each. The moment of inertia of the
Perpendicular axis theorem
wheel about its axis is :
16. For the given uniform square lamina ABCD, whose centre
is O
F
D C
R

A B
E  m 2 2
(a)  M   R (b) (M + m) R
 4
(a) 2 I AC  I EF (b) IAD = 3IEF
2 Mm 2
(c) IAC = IEF (d) I AC  2 I EF
(c) (M + 3m) R (d)  R
 2 
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 166

23. Four identical rods are joined end to end to form a square. Rotational Equilibrium
The mass of each rod is M. The moment of inertia of the
27. A cubical block of mass M and edge a slides down a rough
square about the median line is:
inclined plane of inclination  with a uniform velocity. The
M 2
M 2
torque of the normal force on the block about its centre has
(a) (b)
3 4 a magnitude:

M 2 2M  2 (a) zero (b) Mga

(c) (d)
6 3
Mga sin 
(c) Mga sin  (d)
Point of application 2
24. When a steady torque or couple acts on a body, the body: 28. A T-shaped object with dimensions shown in the figure, is
(a) continues in a state of rest or of uniform motion by 
lying on a smooth floor. A force F is applied at the point P
Newton’s 1st law
parallel to AB, such that the object has only the translational
(b) gets linear acceleration by Newton’s 2nd law
motion without rotation. Find the location of P with respect
(c) gets an angular acceleration to C:
(d) continues to rotate at a steady rate.
25. A uniform rod is kept on a frictionless horizontal table and
two forces F1 and F2 are acted as shown in figure. The line of
action of force FR1 (which produces same torque) is at a
perpendicular distance ‘C’ from O. Now F1 and F2 are
interchanged and F1 is reversed. The new forces FR2 (which
produces torque of same magnitude in the present case) 4l
(a) (b) l
C 3
has its line of action at a distance from O. If the FR1 :
2
2l 3l
FR2 in the ratio 2:1, then a:b is ( assume F2 a  Fb (c) (d)
1 ): 3 2

F1 29. An equilateral prism of mass m rests on a rough horizontal

O
surface with cofficient of friction  . A horizontal force F is
a b applied on the prism as shown in the figure. If the coefficient
F2 of friction is sufficiently high so that the prism does not
slide before toppling, then the minimum force required to
2 F2  F1 F2  4 F1
(a) 4 F  F (b) 4 F  F topple the prism is:
3 1 2 1

F2  3F1 F2  F1
(c) F  F (d) 2 F  3F
1 2 2 1


26. What is the torque of force F  2iˆ  3 ˆj  4kˆ acting at a

point r  3iˆ  2 ˆj  3kˆ about the origin?
mg mg
(a) 3 (b) 4
(a) 6iˆ  6 ˆj  12kˆ (b) 6iˆ  6 ˆj  12kˆ
 mg  mg
(c) (d)
(c) 17iˆ  6 ˆj  13kˆ (d) 17iˆ  6 ˆj  13kˆ 3 4
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 167

Rotational Kinematics 37. A disc of radius r rolls on a horizontal ground with linear
30. The driving side belt has a tension of 1600 N and the slack acceleration a and angular acceleration  as shown in
side has 500 N tension. The belt turns a pulley 40 cm in figure. The magnitude of acceleration of point P shown in
radius at a rate of 300 rpm. This pulley drives a dynamo figure at an instant when its linear velocity is v and angular
having 90% efficiency. How many kilowatts are being velocity is  will be:
delivered by the dynamo ?
(a) 12.4 (b) 6.2
(c) 24.8 (d) 13.77
31. The angular velocity of a wheel increases from 100 rps to
300 rps in 10 s. The number of revolutions made during that
time is:
(a) 600 (b) 1500
(c) 1000 (d) 2000 ar
(a) ( a  r  ) 2  ( r 2 ) 2 (b)
R
32. When a ceiling fan is switched off, its angular velocity falls
to half while it makes 36 rotations. How many more rotations
will it make before coming to rest? (c) r 2 2  r 2 4 (d) r

(a) 24 (b) 36 38. An electric fan has blades of length 30 cm as measured from
(c) 18 (d) 12 the axis of rotation. If the fan is rotating at 1200 rpm, the
33. A rigid body rotates about a fixed axis with variable angular acceleration of a point on the tip of a blade is about:
2 2
velocity equal to  t at time t where  and  are constants. (a) 4740 m/sec (b) 5055 m/sec
The angle through which it rotates before it comes to rest is: (c) 1600 m/sec
2
(d) 2370 m/sec
2

2  2  2 Rotational Dynamics
(a) (b)
2 2
39. A flywheel of mass 50 kg and radius of gyration about its
2 2
  (  ) axis of rotation of 0.5m is acted upon by a constant torque
(c) (d)
2 2 of 12.5 Nm. Its angular velocity at t = 5 sec is:
34. A wheel is subjected to uniform angular acceleration about (a) 2.5 rad/sec (b) 5 rad/sec
its axis. Initially, its angular velocity is zero. In the first 2s, it
(c) 7.5 rad/sec (d) 10 rad/sec
rotates through an angle 1 , in the next 2s, it rotates through
40. A uniform metre stick of mass M is hinged at one end and
an angle 2 . The ration of 2 / 1 is: supported in a horizontal direction by a string attached to
(a) 1 (b) 2 the other end. What should be the initial acceleration (in
2
(c) 3 (d) 5 rad/sec ) of the stick if the string is cut?

35. The linear velocity of a particle on the equator is nearly 3

(radius of the earth is 4000 miles): (a) g (b) g
2
(a) zero (b) 10 mile/hr
(c) 3g (d) 4g
(c) 100 mile/hr (d) 1000 mile/hr
36. A stone of mass m is tied to a string of length L and rotated 41. A thin hollow cylinder is free to rotate about its geometrical
in a circle with a constant speed v; if the string is released axis. It has a mass of 8 kg and a radius of 20 cm. A rope
the stone files: is wrapped around the cylinder. What force must be
(a) Radially outward exerted along the rope to produce an angular acceleration of
2
(b) Radially inward 3 rad/sec ?

(c) Tangentially (a) 8.4 N (b) 5.8 N

2
(d) With an acceleration mv /L (c) 4.8 N (d) None of these
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 168

42. In the pulley system shown, if radii of the bigger and smaller
pulley are 2 m and 1m respectively and the acceleration of
2
block A is 5m/s in the downward direction, then the
L
acceleration of block B will be: R

1  L2  1
(a) m2  R 2   (b) m2 R 2
2  12  2

1
(c) m  2 L2 (d) none of these
24
2 2
(a) 0 m/s (b) 5 m/s 46. A uniform rod of length L is free to rotate in a vertical plane
(c) 10 m/s
2
(d) 5/2 m/s
2 about a fixed horizontal axis through B. The rod begins
rotating from rest from its unstable equilibrium position.
43. Figure shows a uniform rod of length  and mass M which is When it has turned through an angle  its average angular
pivoted at end A such that it can rotate in a vertical plane. The velocity  is given as :
free end of the rod ‘B’ is initially vertically above the pivot A
and then released. As the rod rotates about A, its angular
acceleration when it is inclined to horizontal at angle  is A'

B L

B B'

6g 6g 
(a) sin  (b) sin
A L L 2
3g g
(a) cos  (b) tan  6g  6g
2  (c) cos (d) cos 
L 2 L
5g g
(c) sin  (d) sin  Kinematics (Rigid Body)
4 
Rotational Energy 47. A string of negligible thickness is wrapped several times
around a cylinder kept on a rough horizontal surface. A man
44. In the above quesiton, the end B of the rod will hit the
standing at a distance from the cylinder holds one end of
ground with a linear speed :
the string and pulls the cylinder towards him. There is no
(a) 2 g (b) 5g slipping anywhere. The ratio of length of the string passed
through the hand of the man to the distance moved by
2g centre of mass of cylinder is:
(c) 3g (d)


45. A uniform rod of mass M and length L lies radially on a disc

rotating with angular speed  in a horizontal plane about its
axis. The rod does not slip on the disc and the centre of the
rod is at a distance R from the centre of the disc. Then the (a) 1 (b) 2
kinetic energy of the rod is :
(c) 3 (d) 4
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 169

48. A solid sphere of mass M and radius R is placed on a rough 53. In the above question, the minimum value of coefficient of
horizontal surface. It is pulled by a horizontal force F acting friction so that sphere may roll without slipping is :
through its centre of mass as a result of which it begins to
roll without slipping. Angular acceleration of the sphere 2 2
(a) sin  (b) cos 
can be expressed as: 7 7

3F 5F
(a) 4MR (b) 7MR 2 2
(c) tan  (d) cot 
7 7
7F 5F
(c) 11MR (d) 2MR 54. A hoop rolls without slipping down an incline of slope 30°.
Linear acceleration of its centre of mass is
49. A sphere cannot roll on :
(a) a smooth horizontal surface g g
(a) 2 (b) 3
(b) a rough horizontal surface
(c) a smooth inclined surface g g
(c) 4 (d) 6
(a) a rough inclined surface
50. A hoop rolls on a horizontal ground without slipping with Total Energy
linear speed v. Speed of a particle P on the circumference of 55. A 6 kg ball starts from rest and rolls down a rough gradual
the hoop at angle  is : slope until it reaches a point 80 cm lower than its starting
point. Then the speed of the ball is :
–1 –1
(a) 1.95 ms (b) 2.5 ms
v –1 –1
(c) 3.35 ms (d) 4.8 ms
–1
56. A uniform solid sphere rolls on a horizonal surface at 20 ms .
P It then rolls up an incline having an angle of inclination at 30°
with the horizontal. If the friction losses are negligible, the
value of height h above the ground where the ball stops is :
 (a) 14.3 m (b) 28.6 m
(a) 2 v sin (b) v sin 
2
(c) 57.2 m (d) 9.8 m
 57. A solid sphere is rolling on a frictionless surface, shown in
(c) 2 v cos (d) v cos 
2 figure with a translational velocity v m/s. If it is to climb the
inclined surface then v should be :
Dynamics
51. A sphere of mass m rolls without slipping on an inclined
h
plane of inclination . The linear acceleration of the sphere is: v

1 2
(a) g sin  (b) g sin 
7 7 10
(a)  gh (b)  2 gh
7
3 5
(c) g sin  (d) g sin 
7 7 10
(c) 2 gh (d) gh
52. In the above question, the force of friction on the sphere is: 7

1 2 58. A disc is rolling on an inclined plane. What is the ratio of its

(a) Mg sin  (b) Mg sin  rotational K.E. to the total K. E. ?
7 7
(a) 1 : 3 (b) 3 : 1
3 5
(c) Mg sin  (d) Mg sin  (c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 : 1
7 7
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 170

59. A spherical ball of mass 20 kg is stationary at the top of a hill 63. A particle of mass m = 5 units is moving with a uniform
of height 100 m. It rolls down a smooth surface to the ground, speed v  3 2 m in the XOY plane along the line Y = X + 4.
then climbs up another hill of height 30 m and finally rolls
The magnitude of the angular momentum of the particle
down to a horizontal base at a height of 20 m above the about the origin is :
ground. The velocity attained by the ball is :
(a) zero (b) 60 unit
(a) 40 m/s
(c) 7.5 unit (d) 40 2 unit
(b) 20 m/s
64. A particle is moving along a straight line parallel to x–axis
(c) 10 m/s
with constant velocity. Its angular momentum about the
(d) 10 30 m/s origin :

60. Figure shows a hemisphere of radius 4R. A ball of radius R is (a) decreases with time (b) increases with time
released from position P. It rolls without slipping along the (c) remains constant (d) is zero
inner surface of the hemisphere. Linear speed of its centre 65. If a particle moves in the X–Y plane, the resultant angular
of mass when the ball is at position Q is : momentum has :
(a) only x–component
(b) only y–component
(c) both x & y component
(d) only z–component
Torque relation and Angular Impulse
30 gR 24 gR 66. A constant torque acting on a uniform circular wheel changes
(a) (b)
7 5 its angular momentum from A0 to 4A0 in 4 seconds. The
magnitude of this torque is :
40 gR (a) 3A0/4 (b) A0
(c) (d) 6gR
9 (c) 4A0 (d) 12A0
61. If a spherical ball rolls on a table without slipping, the fraction 
ˆ  r  , where
67. A particle moves in a force field given by : F  rF
of its total energy associated with rotation is

r̂ is a unit vector along the position vector, r, then which
3 2
(a) 5
(b) 7 is true ?
(a) The torque acting on the particle is not zero
2 3
(c) 5
(d) 7 (b) The torque acting on the particle produces an angular
acceleration in it
Particle
(c) The angular momentum of the particle is conserved
62. A particle of mass m is projected with a velocity v making an
(d) The angular momentum of the particle increases
angle of 45° with the horizontal. The magnitude of angular
momentum of the projectile about an axis of projection when Rigid Body in fixed axis rotation
the particle is at maximum height h is : 68. A rigid body rotates with an angular momentum L. If its
rotational kinetic energy is made 4 times, its angular
mv3
(a) zero (b) momentum will become :
4 2g
(a) 4 L (b) 16 L

mv 2 (c) (d) 2 L
(c) (d) m 2gh 3 2L
2g
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 171

 72. A thin circular ring of mass M and radius R is rotating about

69. The position of a particle is given by : r  ˆi  2ˆj  kˆ and its
its axis with a constant angular velocity . Two objects,
 each of mass m, are attached gently to the opposite ends of
linear momentum is given by : P  3iˆ  4ˆj  2kˆ . Then its
a diameter of the ring. The ring rotates now with an angular
angular momentum, about the origin is perpendicular to :
velocity :
(a) YZ plane (b) z–axis
M   M  2m 
(c) y–axis (d) x–axis (a) (b)
Mm M  2m
Angular Momentum Conservation
M M  m
1 (c) (d)
70. If the radius of earth contracts of its present day value, M  2m M
n
73. If a gymnast, sitting on a rotating stool with his arms
the length of the day will be approximately :
outstretched, suddenly lowers his arms :
24 24 (a) the angular velocity increases
(a) h (b) h
n n2 (b) his moment of inertia increases
2
(c) 24n h (b) 24n h (c) the angular velocity remains same
71. A disc of moment of inertia I1 is rotating freely with angular (d) the angular momentum increases
velocity 1 when a second, non-rotating disc with moment 74. A thin uniform circular disc of mass M and radius R is
of inertia I2 is dropped on it gently the two then rotate as a rotating in a horizontal plane about an axis passing through
unit. Then the total angular speed is : its centre and perpendicular to the plane with angular
velocity . Another disc of same mass but half the radius is
I11 I 2 1 gently placed over it coaxially. The angular speed of the
(a) I (b) I composite disc will be :
2 1

5 4
(a)  (b) 
(c)
I11
(d)
 I1  I2  1 4 5
I 2  I1 I2
2 5
(c)  (d) 
5 2
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 172

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. Initial angular velocity of a circular disc of mass M is 1. 6. A particle performing uniform circular motion has angular
Then two small spheres of mass m are attached gently to momentum L. If its angular frequency is doubled and its kinetic
two diameterically opposite points on the edge of the disc. energy halved, then the new angular momentum is : (2003)
What is the final angular velocity of the disc ? (2002)
(a) L/4 (b) 2L
Mm Mm (c) 4 L (d) L/2
(a)   1 (b)   1
 M   m  
7. Let F be the force acting on a particle having position
 
 M   M  vector r and  be the torque due to this force about the
(c)   1 (d)   1
 M  4m   M  2m  origin. Then : (2004)
   
2. A solid sphere, a hollow sphere and a ring are release from (a) r .   0 and F .   0
top of an inclined plane (frictionless) so that they slide down
the plane. Then maximum acceleration down the plane is for    
(b) r .   0 and F .   0
(no rolling) (2002)
   
(a) solid sphere (b) hollow sphere (c) r .   0 and F .   0
(c) ring (d) all same  
 
3. Moment of inertia of a circular wire of mass M and radius R (d) r .   0 and F .   0
about its diameter is (2002)
8. A solid sphere is rotating in free space. If radius of the
MR 2
2
sphere is increased keeping mass same which one of the
(a) (b) MR following will not be affected ? (2004)
2
(a) Moment of inertia
2 MR 2
(c) 2 MR (d)
4 (b) Angular momentum
4. A particle of mass m moves along line PC with velocity v as (c) Angular velocity
shown. What is the angular momentum of the particle about
(d) Rotational kinetic energy
P? (2002)
9. One solid sphere A and another hollow sphere B are of same
C
mass and same outer radii. Their moment of inertia about
their diameters are respectively IA and IB such that (2004)
(a) IA = IB (b) IA > IB
P
IA dA
(c) IA < IB (d) I  d
B B

O 10. The moment of inertia of a uniform semicircular disc of mass

(a) mvL (b) mvl M and radius r about a line perpendicular to the plane of the
(c) mvr (d) zero disc through the centre is (2005)
5. A circular disc X of radius R is made from an iron plate of
thickness t, and another disc Y of radius 4R is made from an 1
(a) Mr
2
(b) Mr 2
iron plate of thickness t/4. Then the relation between the 2
moment of inertia IX and IY is (2003)
(a) Iy = 32 Ix (b) Iy = 16 Ix 1 2
(c) Mr 2 (d) Mr 2
4 5
(c) Iy = Ix (d) Iy = 64 Ix
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 173

11. A T shaped object with dimensions shown in the figure, is 14. A thin circular ring of mass m and radius R is rotating about
 itsaxiswith a constant angular velocity . Two objects each
lying on a smooth floor. A forced F is applied at the point P
parallel to AB, such that the object has only the translational of mass M are attached gently to the opposite ends of a
motion without rotation. Find the location, of P with respect diameter of the ring. The ring now rotates with an angular
to C. (2005) velocity ’ = (2006)

m  m  2M 
(a) (b)
A B m  2M  m

 m  2M  m
(c) (d)
P
m  2M  m  M 
F 15. Four point masses, each of value m, are placed at the corners
of a square ABCD of side l. The moment of inertia of this
system about an aixs through A and parallel to BD is(2006)
2 2
C (a) ml (b) 2ml
2 2
4 (c) 3 ml (d) 3 ml
(a) l (b) l
3 16. A round uniform body of radius R, mass M and moment of
3 3 inertia I, rolls down (without slipping) an inclined plane making
(c) l (d) l an angle  with the horizontal. Then, its acceleration is(2007)
4 2
12. An annular ring with inner and outer radii R1 and R2 is rolling g sin  g sin 
(a) (b)
without slipping with a uniform angular speed. The ratio of 1  MR 2 / I 1  I / MR 2
the forces experienced by the two particles situated on the
inner and outer parts of the ring, F1/F2 is (2005) g sin  g sin 
(c) (d)
1  MR 2 / I 1  I / MR 2
R1
(a) 1 (b) R 17. Angular momentum of the particle rotating with a central
2
force is constant due to (2007)
2
R2  R1  (a) constant force
(c) R (d)  
1  R2  (b) constant linear momentum

13. A force of –F k̂ acts on O, the origin of the coordinate (c) constant torque
system. The torque about the point (1, –1) is (2006) (d) zero torque

z 18. For the given uniform square lamina ABCD, whose centre
is O (2007)

F
D C

O y O

A B
x E

 
(a)  F î  ˆj  
(b) F î  ĵ
(a) I AC  2 I EF (b) 2 I AC  I EF

(c)  F î  ĵ (d) F î  ĵ (c) IAD = 3 IEF (d) IAC = IEF
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 174

19. Consider a uniform square plate of side a and mass m. The 23. A pulley of radius 2 m is rotated about its axis by a force
2
moment of inertia of this plate about an axis perpendicular F = (20 t – 5t ) N (where t is measured in seconds) applied
to its plane and passing through one of its corners is tangentially. It the moment of inertia of the pulley about its
2
(2008) axis of rotation is 10 kg–m the number of rotations made by
the pulley before its direction of motion if reserved, is
2 5 (a) more than 3 but less than 6 (2011)
(a) ma 2 (b) ma 2
3 6 (b) more than 6 but less than 9
(c) more than 9
1 7
(c) ma 2 (d) ma 2 (d) less than 3
12 12
24. A particle of mass m is projected with a velocity v making an
20. A thin uniform rod of length l and mass m is swinging freely angle of 30° with the horizontal. The magnitude of angular
about a horizontal axis passing through its end. Its maximum momentum of the projectile about the point of projection
angular speed is . Its centre of mass rises to a maximum when the particle is at its maximum height h is (2011)
height of (2009)
3 mv 2
1  
2 2
1  (a) (b) zero
2 g
(a) (b) 6 g
3 g
mv3 3 mv3
(c) (b)
1  2 2 1  22 2g 16 g
(c) (d)
2 g 6 g 25. A mass m hangs with the help of a string wrapped around a
21. A small particle of mass m is projected at an angle  with the pulley on a frictionless bearing. The pulley has mass m and
radius R. Assuming pulley to be a perfect uniform circular
x-axis with an initial velocity v0 in the x–y plane as shown in
disc, the acceleration of the mass m, if the string does not
v 0 sin  slip on the pulley, is (2011)
the figure. At atime t  , the angular momentum of
g 2
(a) g (b) g
the particle is (2010) 3
g 3
(c) (d) g
3 2
26. A hoop of radius r and mass m rotating with an angular
velocity 0 is placed on a rough horizontal surface. The
initial velocity of the centre of the hoop is zero. What will be
the velocity of the centre of the hoop when it ceases to slip?
r0 r0
(a) (b) (2013)
4 3
(a) mgv0 t 2 cos  ˆj (b) mgv0 t cos  kˆ
r0
(c) (d) r0
1 1 2
(c)  mgv0 t cos  kˆ mgv0 t 2 cos  ˆi
2
(d)
2 2 27. A bob of mass m attached to an inextensible string of
22. A thin horizontal circular disc is rotating about a vertical length l is suspended from a vertical support. The bob
rotates in a horizontal circle with an angular speed  rad/
axis passing through its centre. An insect is at rest at a point
s about the vertical. About the point of suspension :(2014)
near the rim of the disc. The insert now moves along a
diameter of the disc to reach its other end. During the journey (a) angular momentum changes in magnitude but not in
of the insect, the angular speed of the disc (2011) direction.

(a) continuously decreases (b) angular momentum changes in direction but not in
magnitude
(b) continuously increases
(c) angular momentum changes both in direction and
(c) first increases and then decreases magnitude
(d) remain unchanged
(d) angular momentum is conserved.
ROTATIONAL MOTION 175

28. A mass ‘m’ is supported by a massless string would arround   R 

a uniform hollow cylinder of mass m and radius R. If the (b) L  mv   a  k when the particle ismoving from
string does not slip on the cylinder, with what acceleration  2 
will the mass fall on release ? (2014) B to C.
 mv 
(c) L  R k when the particle is moving from D to A.
2

 mv 
(d) L   R k when the particle is moving from A to B.
2
31. A roller is made by joining together two cones at their
vertices O. It is kept on two rails AB and CD which are
placed asymmetrically (see figure), with its axis
perpendicular to CD and its centre O at the centre of line
joining AB and CD (see figure). It is given a light push so
g 5g that it starts rolling with its centre O moving parallel to CD
(a) (b)
2 6 in the direction shown. As it moves, the roller will tend to
: (2016)
2g
(c) g (d)
3
29. From a solid sphere of mass M and radius R a cube of
maximum possible volume is cut. Moment of inertia of
cube about an axis passing through its centre and
perpendicular to one of its faces is : (2015)

4 MR 2 4 MR 2
(a) (b)
9 3 3 3
(a) turn right

MR 2 MR 2 (b) go straight
(c) (d) (c) turn left and right alternately
32 2 16 2
(d) turn left
30. A particle of mass m is moving along the side of a square
of side ‘a’, with a uniform speed v in the x – y plane as 32. A slender uniform rod of mass M and length l is pivoted at
shown in the figure : one end so that it can rotate in a vertical plane (see figure).
There is negligible friction at the pivot. The free end is
held vertically above the pivot and then released. The
angular acceleration of the rod when it makes an angle 
with the vertical is: (2017)

Which of the following statements is false for the angular


momentum L about the origin ? (2016)

  R  3g 2g
(a) L  mv   a  k when the particle ismoving from (a) sin  (b) sin 
 2  2 3
C to D.
3g 2g
(c) cos  (d) cos 
2 3
ROTATIONAL MOTION 176

33. The moment of inertia of a uniform cylinder of length  8 15

and radius R about its perpendicular bisector is  . What (a) (b)
7 14
 8 15
is the ratio such that the moment of inertia is minimum? (c) (d)
R 7 14
(2017)
36. A ball of mass 160 g is thrown up at an angle of 60° to the
horizontal at a speed of 10 ms–1. The angular momentum
3 3
(a) (b) of the ball at the highest point of the trajectory with respect
2 2
to the point from which the ball is thrown is nearly
3 (g = 10 ms–2) (2014 Online Set-4)
(c) 1 (d)
2 (a) 6.0 kg m2/s (b) 3.0 kg m2/s

34. From a uniform circular disc of radius R and mass 9 M, a (c) 1.73 kg m2/s (d) 3.46 kg m2/s
37. Consider a cylinder of mass M resting on a rough horizontal
R
small disc of radius is removed as shown in the figure. rug that is pulled out from under it with acceleration ‘a’
3
perpendicular to the axis of the cylinder. What is Ffriction at
The moment of inertia of the remaining disc about an axis point P ? It is assumed that the cylinder does not slip.
perpendicular to the plane of the disc and passing through (2014 Online Set-4)
centre of disc is : (2018)

Ma
(a) Ma (b)
2
Ma
(c) Mg (d)
3
37
(a) 10 MR 2 (b) MR 2 38. A uniform disc of radius R and mass M is free to rotate
9 only about its axis. A string is wrapped over its rim and a
body of mass m is tied to the free end of the string as
40 shown in the figure. The body is released from rest. Then
(c) 4 MR 2 (d) MR 2
9 the acceleration of the body is : (2017 Online Setp-1)
35. A cylinder of mass Mc and sphere of mass Ms are placed at
points A and B of two inclines, respectively. (See figure).
If they roll on the incline without slipping which that their
sin c
accelerations are the same. then the ratio sin  is.
s
(2014 Online Set-1)

2 mg 2 Mg
(a) 2 m  M (b) 2 m  M

2 mg 2 Mg
(c) 2 M  m (d) 2 M  m
ROTATIONAL MOTION 177

39. Moment of inertia of an equilateral triangular lamina ABC,

about the axis passing through its centre O and
perpendicular to its plane is I0 as shown in the figure. A
cavity DEF is cut out from the lamina, where D, E, F are the
mid points of the sides. Moment of inertia of the remaining
part of lamina about the same axis is :
(2017 Online Set-1)

73 181
(a) MR 2 (b) MR 2
2 2

19 55
(c) MR 2 (d) MR 2
2 2
42. A force of 40 N acts on a point B at the end of an L-shaped
7 15 object, as shown in the figure. The angle  that will
(a) Io (b) Io
8 16 produce maximum moment of the force about point A is
given by : (2018 Online Set-1)
3Io 31Io
(c) (d)
4 32

R
40. A circular hole of radius is made in a thin uniform disc
4
having mass M and radius R, as shown in figure. The
moment of inertia of the remaining portion of the disc about
an axis passing through the point O and perpendicular to
the plane of the disc is : (2017 Online Set-2)

1
(a) tan  = (b) tan  = 2
2
1
(c) tan  = 4 (d) tan  =
4
43. A uniform rod AB is suspended from a point X, at a variable
distance x from A, as shown. To make the rod horizontal, a
mass m is suspended from its end A. A set of (m, x) values
is recorded. The appropriate variables that give a straight
line, when plotted, are : (2018 Online Set-1)
219 MR 2 237 MR 2
(a) (b)
256 512

19 MR 2 197 MR 2
(c) (d)
512 256
41. Seven identical circular planar disks, each of mass M and
radius R are welded symmetrically as shown. The moment 1
(a) m, x (b) m,
of inertia of the arrangement about the axis normal to the x
plane and passing through the point P is : (2018)
1
(c) m, (d) m, x2
x2
ROTATIONAL MOTION 178

44. A disc rotates about its axis of symmetry in a horizontal 46. A thin road MN, free to rotate in the vertical plane about
plane at a steady rate of 3.5 revolutions per second. A the fixed end N, is held horizontal. When the end M is
coin placed at a distance of 1.25 cm from the axis of rotation released the speed of the this end, when the rod makes an
remains at rest on the disc. The coefficient of friction angle  with the horizontal, will be proportional to : (see
between the coin and the disc is : (g = 10 m/s2) figure) (2018 Online Set-2)
(2018 Online Set-2)
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.3
(c) 0.7 (d) 0.6
45. A thin uniform bar of length L and mass 8 m lies on a
smooth horizontal table. Two point masses m and 2m are
moving in the same horizontal plane from opposite sides
of the bar with speeds 2v and v respectively. The masses
stick to the bar after collision at a distance (a) sin  (b) sin 
L L (c) cos  (d) cos 
and respectively from the centre of the bar. If the bar
3 6
47. A thin circular disk is in the xy plane as shown in the
starts rotating about its center of mass as a result of figure. The ratio of its moment of inertia about z and z axes
collision, the angular speed of the bar will be : will be : (2018 Online Set-3)
(2018 Online Set-2)

 6
(a) (b)
5L 5L

3 
(c) (d)
5L 6L (a) 1 : 3 (b) 1 : 4
(c) 1 : 5 (d) 1 : 2
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 179

EXERCISE - 3 ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Continuous Body
2 2
(a) 3 m
2
(b) 2ml
1. A uniform solid cylinder has a radius R and length L. If
the moment of inertia of this cylinder about an axis passing
through its centre and normal to its circular face is equal to 2 8
(c) 3ml (d) 3 m2
the moment of inertia of the same cylinder about an axis
passing through its centre and normal to its length, then 6. A thin rod of length 4l and mass 4m is bent at the point as
shown in the figure. What is the moment of inertia of the rod
(a) L = R (b) L  3 R
about the axis passing through point O and perpendicular
(c) L  R / 3 (d) L = 0 to the plane of the paper.

2. A cricket mat of mass 50 kg is rolled loosely in the form of a

cylinder of radius 2m. Now again it is rolled tightly so that
the radius becomes 3/4th of original value; then the ratio of
moment of inertia of mat in the two cases is:
M 2 10M 2
(a) 1 : 3 (b) 4 : 3 (a) (b)
3 3
(c) 3 : 5 (d) 16 : 9
3. A circular disc is to be made using iron and aluminium. To M 2 M 2
(c) (d)
keep its moment of inertia maximum about a geometrical 12 24

axis, it should be so prepared that: Parallel axis theorem

(a) aluminium at interior and iron surrounds it
7. Consider a uniform square plate of side a and mass m. The
(b) iron at interior and aluminium surrounds it moment of inertia of this plate about an axis perpendicular
(c) aluminium and iron layers in alternate order to its plane and passing through one of its corners is
(d) sheet of iron is used at both external surface and
2 5
aluminium sheet as inner material. (a) ma 2 (b) ma 2
3 6
4. Three identical rods, each of mass m and length l, form an
equaliteral triangle. Moment of inertia about one of the sides is 1 7
(c) ma 2 (d) ma 2
12 12
8. From a circular disc of radius R and mass 9M, a small disc
of radius R/3 is removed from the disc. The moment of
inertia of the remaining disc about an axis perpendicular to
the plane of the disc and passing through O is :
m 2 2 R/3
(a) (b) ml
4

3m 2 m 2
(c) (d)
4 2

5. The moment of inertia of a system of four rods, each of R O

length l and mass m, about the axis shown is

40
(a) 4 MR2 (b) MR2
9
37
(c) 10 MR2 (d) MR2
9
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 180

9. The moment of inertia of a hollow cylinder of mass M,

I
radius R and Length L about its axis
(a) MR2 r
2
(b) ML

MR 2
(c)
L
2 2
(a) R (b) R
MR 2 15 5
(d)
2
3 3
10. Two thin discs, each of mass M and radius r m, are attached (c) R (d) R
15 15
as shown in the figure, to form a rigid body. The rotational
inertia of this body about an axis perpendicular to the plane 13. Let I be the moment of inertia of a uniform square plate
of disc B and passing through its centre is : about an axis AB that passes through its centre and is
parallel to two of its sides. CD is a line in the plane of the
plate that passes through the centre of the plate and makes
an angle  with AB. The moment of inertia of the plate
about the axis CD is then equal to:

(a) I (b) I sin2 

(c) I cos2  (d) I cos2 /

2 2
(a) 2Mr (b) 3Mr Point of application
2 2
(c) 4Mr (d) 5Mr
14. A stone of mass m tied to a string of length l is rotating
11. A uniform rod of mass m is bent into the form of a semicircle along a circular path with constant speed v. The torque
of radius R. The moment of inertia of the rod about an axis on the stone is :
passing through A and perpendicular to the plane of the
(a) m v l (b) m v/l
paper is
(c) m v2/l (d) zero
15. A body is under the action of two equal and oppositely
directed forces and the body is rotating with constant
acceleration. Which of the following cannot be the
separation between the lines of action of the forces?
2 2
(a) 3 mR 2 (b) mR (a) 1 m (b) 0.4 m
(c) 0.25 m (d) Zero
5 2
Rotational Equilibrium
(c)  mR 2 (d) 2mR
16. A unifrom ladder of mass 10 kg leans against a smooth
Perpendicular axis theorem vertical wall making an angle of 53° with it. The other end
12. A solid sphere of radius R has moment of inertia I about its rest on a rough horizontal floor. The normal force and
geometrical axis. If it is melted into a disc of radius r and frictional force that the floor exerts on the ladder are
thickness t. If it’s moment of inertia about the tangential respectively
axis (which is perpendicular to plane of the disc), is also (a) 98 N, 65 N (b) 98 N, 0
equal to I, then the value of r is equal to : (c) 0, 65 N (d) 65 N, 98 N
ROTATIONAL MOTION 181

17. A uniform beam of length L whose mass ‘m’ is 1.8 kg rests (a) 5 N (b) 10 N
with its ends on two digital scales, as in figure. A uniform (c) 15 N (d) 20 N
block whose mass M is 2.7 kg rests on the beam, its centre
20. A weightless ladder 20 ft long rests against a frictionless
a distance L/4 from the beam’s left end. What do the scales
wall at an angle of 60° from the horizontal. A 150 lb man is
read ?
4 ft from the top of the ladder. A horizontal force is needed
to keep it from slipping. Choose the correct magnitude
from the following
(a) 175 lb (b) 100 lb
(c) 150 lb (d) 70 lb
21. A horizontal bar of length l and negligible mass is
supported at its two ends. A mass M is hung form the bar
at a distance ‘a’ from the left end, as shown. What is the
magnitude of the force that the support on the right applies
to the bar?

(a) 29 N on right scale and 15 N on left scale

(b) 15 N on right scale and 29 N on left scale
(c) 10 N on right scale and 20 N on left scale
(d) 2.25 N on right scale and 7 N on left scale
18. O is the centre of an equilateral triangle ABC. F1, F2 and F3
are three forces acting along the sides AB, BC and AC as
shown in the adjoining diagram. What should be the
a 
magnitude of F3 so that the total torque about O is zero ? (a) Mg  (b) Mg a

A a 
(c) Mg   a (d) Mg   a

Rotational Kinematics
F3
O 22. A motor car is travelling at 60 ms/ on a circular road of
radius 1200 m. It is increasing its speed at the rate of 4 m/s2.
B F2
C The acceleration of the car is :
(a) 3m/s2 (b) 4 m/s2
F1
(c) 5 m/s2 (d) 7 m/s2
23. A particle moves in a circle of radius 25 cm at two
F1  F2 revolutions per sec. The acceleration of the particle in
(a) (b) 2 (F1 + F2)
2 m/s2 is :
(c) (F1 + F2) (d) (F1 – F2) (a) 2 (b) 8 2
19. A solid cube of side 1 m is just tilted by a horizontal force (c) 4 2 (d) 2 2
of 10 N. The weight of cube is 24. The maximum possible velocity of the bob at the lowest
position of a simple pendulum of length L to oscillate is
10 N
(a) 5 gL (b) 3 gL

(c) 2 gL (d) gL
ROTATIONAL MOTION 182

25. A pendulum of mass m is oscillating in a vertical circle 30. A circular disc of M.I 0.5 kg m2 and radius 0.2 m has a
with angular amplitude of 90°. The acceleration of the weightless string passing round its rim. The string is pulled
bob at ‘B’ is down by a force F and it acquires an angular speed of 5
revolution seconds per second in 5 sec. The force F is
(a) 5 N (b) 4 N
O (c) 2.5 N (d) 2 N
90°
B
31. A mass of 2 kg is whirled in a horizontal circle by means of
a string at an initial speed of 5 rpm. Keeping the radius
A
constant, the tension in the string is doubled. The new
speed is nearly.
(a) g
(a) 14 rmp (b) 10 rpm
(b) zero
(c) greater than g (c) 2 rpm (d) 7 rpm

(d) less than g but not zero 32. For a particle in uniform circular motion, the acceleration

26. Two racing cars of mass m1 and m2 are moving in circles a at a point P ( R,  ) on the circle of radius R is
of radii r1 and r2 respectively; their speeds are such that
they each make a complete circle in the same length of v2 ˆ v2 ˆ v2 v2
(a) i j (b)  cos iˆ  sin ˆj
time t. The ratio of the angular speed of the first to the R R R R
second car is :
(a) m1 : m2 (b) r1 : r2 v2 v2 v2 v2
(c)  sin iˆ  cos ˆj (d)  cos iˆ  sin ˆj
(c) 1 : 1 (d) none R R R R

27. For a particle of a rotating rigid body v = r. So : 33. A particle P is moving in a circle of radius ‘a’ with uniform
speed v. C is the centre of the circle and AB is a diameter.
(a)   1/r  (b)   v
The angular velocity of P about A and C are in the ratio:
(c) v  r (d) none of these
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
28. A planet P revolves around the Sun in a circular orbit,
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 1
with the sun at the center, which is coplanar with and
concentric to the circular orbit of Earth E around the Sun. 34. Two particles A and B are situated at a distance d=2 m
P and E revolve in the same direction. The time required apart. Particle A has a velocity of 10 m/s at an angle of 60º
for the revolution of P and E around the sun are 3 year and particle B has a velocity v at an angle 30º as shown in
and 1 year respectively. The time required for P to make figure. The distance d between A and B is constant. The
one revolution around the sun relative to E is angular velocity of B with respect to A is:
(a) 1.5 year (b) 3 year
(c) 10 year (d) 1 year
29. A toy car travels in horiztonal circle of radius 2a, kept on
the track by a radial elastic string. Its period is T. The
length of the unstretched string is found to be a. When
the car is speeded up, the string stretches until the car is
moving in a circle of radius 3a. Assuming that the string 5
obeys Hookes’ law, the period of revolution is (a) 5 3 rad/sec (b) rad/sec
3

(a) T(3/4) (b) T 3 / 4

10
(c) 10 3 rad/sec (d) rad/sec
(c) T 4 / 3 (d) T 3
ROTATIONAL MOTION 183

35. Two particles A and B are moving as shown in figure. At Rotational Dynamics
this moment of time, the angular speed of A with respect
to B is : 38. A wheel of moment of inertia 5 × 10–3 kg–m2 is making 20
rev/sec. The torque required to stop it in 10 sec. is.
vb
(a) 2 × 10–2 N–m (b)  × 10–2 N–m
va
(c) 2 × 102 N–m (d) 4 × 10–2 N–m
r
39. A mass m is hanged from a solid cylindrical shaft of radius
A B R and mass 2m (as shown in the figure). Shaft is free to
rotate. What is the acceleration of mass m
(a)
v a  v b 
r

(b) v a  v b 
r

(c)
v b sin  b  v a sin  a  in anticlockwise direction m
r

(d)
v b sin  b  v a sin  a  in anticlockwise direction (a) g (b) 2g/3
r
(c) g/2 (d) g/3
36. A wheel initially at rest, is rotated with a uniform angular
40. The moment of inertia of a body about a given axis is 1.2
acceleration. The wheel rotates through an angle 1 in
first one second and through an additional angle 2 in the kg m2. Initially, the body is at rest. In order to produce a
next one second. The ratio 2/1 is : rotational kinetic energy of 1500 joule, an angular
acceleration of 25 radian/sec2 must be applied about that
(a) 4 (b) 2
axis for a duration of
(c) 3 (d) 1
(a) 4 seconds (b) 2 seconds
37. A sphere S rolls without slipping, moving with a constant
speed on a plank P. The friction between the upper surface (c) 8 seconds (d) 10 seconds
of p and the sphere is sufficient to prevent slipping, while 41. In the above question, the tension in the cords is :
the lower surface of P is smooth and rests on the ground.
(a) Mg/2 (b) Mg/3
Initially, P is fixed to the ground by a pin N. If N is suddenly
revmoved. (c) Mg/6 (d) Mg/12
42. A mass M is supported by a massless string wound round
S a uniform cylinder of mass M and radius R. On releasing
the mass from rest, it will fall with acceleration.
N r
P

M R
(a) S will begin to slip on P
(b) P will begin to move backwards M
(c) the speed of S will decrease and its angular velocity
will increase (a) g (b) g/2
(d) there will be no change in the motion of S and P will (c) g/3 (d) 2g/3
still be at rest.
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 184

43. Each pulley shown in the given figure below has radius r 47. A wheel of mass 2 kg, having practically all the mass
and moment of inertia I. The acceleration of the block is concentrated along the circumference of a circle of radius
20 cm, is rotating on its axis with an angular velocity of
100 rad/s. The rotational kinetic energy of the wheel is :
(a) 4 joule (b) 70 joule
(c) 400 joule (d) 800 joule
48. A rod AB is 1 m long. It is hinged at A so as to rotate in a
vertical plane. Initially the rod is horizontally placed and
then it is released from rest. Obtain the angular speed of
the rod and the linear speed of its free end as it passes
through the position shown in the diagram
M  mg  M  m g
(a)  M  m  2I2  (b)  M  m  2I2 
 r   r 
A B
60°
 M  m g  M  m g
(c)  I  (d)  I 
M  m  2  M  m  2 
 r   r 
B'
Rotational Energy
44. A uniform rod of length 2l is placed with one end in
(a)  = 5.05 rad/s, v = 5.05 m/s
contact with the horizontal table and is then inclined at
an angle  to the horizontal and allowed to fall. When it (b)  = 1 rad/s,  = 1 m/s
becomes horizontal, its angular velocity will be (c)  = 4.04 rad/s, v = 2.02 m/s
(d)  = 5.05 rad/s, v = 1.01 m/s
3g sin  2
(a) (b) 49. A rod AB of length L revolves in a horizontal plane about
2 3g sin 
the axis YY’ with an angular velocity w. If A is area of
cross-section of rod and  its density, its kinetic energy
g sin   is
(c) (d)
 g sin 
Y

45. A fly wheel rotating about a fixed axis has a kinetic energy
of 360 joule when its angular speed is 30 radian/sec. The A B
moment of inertia of the wheel about the axis of rotation is
Y'
(a) 0.6 kg m2 (b) 0.15 kg m2

(c) 0.8 kg m2 (d) 0.75 kg m2 (a) 1/3AL3w2 (b) 1/2AL3w2

46. A ring of radius r and mass m rotates about an axis passing (c) 1/24AL3w2 (d) none of these
through its centre passing through its centre and 50. A rod of length L is hinged from one end. It is brought to
perpendicular to its plane with angular velocity . Its a horizontal position and released. The angular velocity
kinetic energy is : of the rod when it is in vertical position is :

(a) mr (b) 1/2mr2 (a) 2g / L (b) 3g / L

(c) mr22 (d) 1/2 mr22
ROTATIONAL MOTION 185

(c) g / 2L (d) g/L (a) 1 / 3 u (b) 3/ 5 u

51. A street light of mass M is suspended from the end of a

(c) 2/5 u (d) 2/3 u
uniform rod of length L in different possible patterns as
shown in figure, then: 56. A solid sphere radius 1 m and mass 2 kg is rolling with a
linear speed of 2 m/s. What is speed of point A

(a) pattern A is more sturdy

(b) pattern B is more study
(c) pattern C is more study (a) 2 m/s (b) 2 2 m / s
(d) all will have same sturdiness.
(c) 4 m/s (d) 2 m/s
52. A cylindrical rod of mass M, length L and radius R has two
57. Consider a wheel of a bicycle rolling on a level road at a
cords wound around it whose ends are attached to the
linear speed V0. Choose the incorrect statement
ceiling. The rod is held horizontally with the two cords
vertical. When the rod is released, the cords unwind and
the rod rotates the linear acceleration of the cylinders as it C
falls, is : D

(a) g (b) g/3

B V0
(c) 2g/3 (d) g/2 O

Kinematics (Rigid Body)

53. A hollow sphere and a solid sphere of same mass and
A
radius are allowed to roll down an inclined plane from
same height simultaneously. Which will reach bottom first.
(a) the speed of the particle A is zero
(a) Hollow sphere (b) Solid sphere
(b) the speed of C is 2 V0
(c) Both together (d) None of these
54. A bicycle is moving at speed 30 km/h. Then speeds at the (c) the speed of B, C and D are all equal to V0
highest and lowest point of the front wheel are (d) the speed of B is greater than the speed of O
(radius = 2 m) 58. A circular disc rotates in a vertical plane about a fixed
(a) 60 km/h and 0 respectively horizontal axis which passes through a point X on the
(b) 60 km/h for both the points circumference of the disc. When the centre of the disc
(c) 30 km/h for both the points moves with speed v, the speed of the opposite end of the
diameter through X is
(d) Not possible to calculate
55. A body of mass m slides down an incline and reaches the (a) 2v (b) 2v
bottom with a velocity u. If the same were in the form of a
hollow cylinder which rolls down from this incline, the (c) v (d) 1/2 v
velocity of the disc at the bottom would be 59. Ring, hollow sphere and solid sphere are rolled down
from inclined plane. Which will take least time to reach
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 186

the ground ? contact with the plane is conserved

(a) solid sphere (b) hollow sphere (c) Only the rotational kinetic energy about the centre of
mass is conserved
(c) ring (d) both 2 and 3
(d) Angular momentum about centre of mass is conserved
60. A cylindrical drum is pushed along by a board of length .
The drum rolls forward on the ground a distance of /2. 64. An inclined plane makes an angle of 30° with the
There is no slipping at any instant. During the process of horizontal. A solid sphere rolling down this inclined plane
pushing the board, the distance moved by the man on the from rest without slipping has a linear acceleration equal to :
ground is: (a) g/3 (b) 2g/3
(c) 5g/7 (d) 5g/14
65. A round uniform body of radius R, mass M and moment
of inertia I, rolls down (without slipping) an inclined plane
 3 making an angle  with the horizontal. Then, its acceleration is
(a) (b)
2 4
g sin  g sin 
(c)  (d) none of these (a) (b)
1  I / MR 2 1  MR 2 / I
61. A wheel of radius r rolls without slipping with a speed v
on a horizontal road. When it is at a point A on the road, a g sin  g sin 
(c) (d)
small blob of mud separates from the wheel at its highest 1  I / MR 2 1  MR 2 / I
point and lands at point B on the road. 66. A solid sphere and a hollow sphere of equal mass and
radius are placed over a rough horizontal surface after
(a) AB  v r / g (b) AB  2 v r / g
rotating it about its mass centre with same angular velocity
0. Once the pure rolling starts let v1 and v2 be the linear
(c) AB  4 v r / g
speeds of their centre of mass. Then :

(d) If v  4 rg , the blob of mud will land on the wheel (a) v1 = v2 (b) v1 > v2

and not on the road (c) v1 < v2 (d) data is insufficient

Dynamics 67. In the above probelm, let t1 and t2 be the times when pure
rolling of solid sphere and of hollow sphere is started.
62. A string is wrapped several times round a solid cylinder Then:
and then the end of the string is held stationary while the
(a) t1 = t2 (b) t1 < t2
cylinder is released from rest with no initial motion. The
acceleration of the cylinder and tension in the string will be (c) t1 > t2 (d) none of these
68. A constant horizontal force F is applied on the top of a
solid sphere and a hollow sphere of same mass and radius
both kept on a sufficiently rough surface. Let a1 and a2 be
their linear accelerations then :

F F
mg

(a) 2/3 g and mg/3 (b) g and mg/2

(c) g/3 and mg/2 (d) g/2 and mg/3 Solid sphere Hollow sphere
63. A solid homogeneous shpere is moving on a rough
(a) a1 = a2 (b) a1 > a2
horizontal surface, partly rolling and partly sliding. During
this kind of motion of the sphere (c) a1 < a2 (d) data sufficient
69. A uniform ball of radius r rolls without slipping down from
(a) Total kinetic energy is conserved
the top of a sphere of radius R. The angular velocity of teh
(b) Angular momentum of the sphere about the point of ball when it breaks from the sphere is
ROTATIONAL MOTION 187

(b) The speeds will be same but time of descent will be

5g  R  r  10g  R  r 
(a) (b) different
17r 2 17r 2
(c) The speeds will be different but time of descent will be
same
5g  R  r  10g  R  r 
(c) (d) (d) Speeds and time of descent both will be different.
10r 2 7r 2
74. A ball rolls down an inclined groove acquiring a velocity
70. A solid sphere of mass m is lying at rest on a rough
Vr as it reaches the bottom. If the same ball slid without
horizontal surface. The coefficient of firction between the
friction rather than rolled from the same height down a
ground and sphere is . The maximum value of F, so that
similar track to acquire a velocity Vs, which of the following
the sphere will not slip, is equal to
statement is true ?
(a) Vr < Vs, because work must be done by the rolling ball
against frictional forces
(b) Vr > Vs, because the rotational kinetic energy acquired
makes the rolling ball travel faster
(c) Vr = Vs, because the kinetic energy must be conserved.
(d) Vr < Vs, because the rolling ball acquires rotational as
7 4 well as translational kinetic energy
(a) 5 mg (b) 7 mg
(e) Vr < Vs, because the rotating ball has an angular
acceleration as well as a linear acceleration
5 7
(c) 7 mg (d) 2 mg 75. The speed of a homogeneous solid sphere after rolling
down an inclined plane of vertical height h from rest
Total Energy without sliding is
71. A disc of radius R and mass M is rolling horizontally
10 gh
without slipping with speed V. It then moves up an incline (a) (b) gh
7
as shown.
The maximum height upto which it can reach is 6 gh
(c) 2 gh (d)
5
76. A spherical ball rolls on a table without slipping. The the
fraction of its total energy associated with rotation is :
v (a) 2/5 (b) 2/7
(c) 3/5 (d) 3/7
77. A person slides freely down a frictionless inclined plane
while his bag falls down vertically from the same height.
(a) v2/g (b) v2/2g The final speeds of the man (vM) and the bag (vB) should
(c) v2/3g (d) 3v2/4g be such that:
72. A ring of 1 kg mass and 1 m radius is moving forward with (a) vM  vB
velocity 1 m/s by rolling without slipping in a horizontal
plane. Its kinetic energy would be : (b) vM  vB

(a) (1/2) joule (b) 1 joule (c) the depend on the masses

(c) 2 joule (d) 4 joule (d) vM  vB

73. A solid sphere rolls down two different inclined planes of
78. A wheel of mass M and radius a and M.I.IG (about centre
the same height but of different inclinations :
of mass) is set rolling with angular velocity  up a rough
(a) In both cases the speeds and time of descent will be inclined plane of inclination . The distance travelled by it
same up the plane is :
ROTATIONAL MOTION 188

I G 2 
2 Ma 2  I G 
(a) (b)
2 mg sin  2 Mg sin 

I G 2 IG 
(c) (d) 2 Mg sin 
2  Mg sin 
79. A loop and a disc have the same mass and roll without
slipping with the same linear velocity v. If the total K.E. of
the loop is 8 J, the K.E. of the disc must be :
(a) 6 J (b) 8 J
(c) 12 J (d) 16 J (a) MvRk
Particle (b) Mvk
80. A particle of mass m is projected with a velocity v making
an angle of 45° with the horizontal. The magnitude of the  2  R 2 
i  R k 
angular momentum of the projectile about the point of (c) Mv    

projection when the particle is at maximum height h is
3  2  R 2 
(a) zero (b) mv / 4 2 g i  R k 
(d) Mv    
3 3

(c) mv / 2 g (d) m / 2 gh
Torque relation and Angular Impulse
81. When a mass is rotating in a plane about a fixed point its
angular momentum is directed along 85. A penguin of mass m falls from rest at point A. A horizontal
(a) The radius distance d from the origin O
(b) the tangent to orbit
Q A
(c) line at an angle of 45° to the plane of rotation d
(d) the axis of rotation
82. A mass M is moving with constant velocity parallel to penguin
x–axis. Its angular momentum with respect to origin.
(a) is zero (b) remain constant
(c) goes on increasing (d) goes on decreasing
(A) What is the angular momentum of the falling penguin
83. A projectile is projected at certain angle. The angular
about O
momentum about origin will
(B) What torque does the weight mg acting on the penguin
(a) always increase
exert about the origin O
(b) always decrease
(a) 0 for (A) mu2/R for (B) where R is the height of A from
(c) will first increase then decrease
ground.
(d) Remain constant
(b) 0 for (A) and 0 for (B)
84. A conical pendulum consists of a mass M suspended from
a strong sling of length l. The mass executes a circle of (c) mg td for (A) and mgd for (B)
radius R in a horizontal plane with speed v. At time t, the (d) Since angular momentum and torque both vary
mass is at postion Ri and has vj velocity. At time t, the continuously so it is not possible to calculate them
angular momentum vector of mass M about the point from 86. Angular momentum of the particle rotating with a central
which the string passes on the ceiling is force is constant due to
(a) constant force
(b) constant linear momentum
(c) zero torque
ROTATIONAL MOTION 189

(d) constant torque hand and the string by the other. The object is set into
rotation in a circle of radius R and velocity V. The string is
Rigid Body in fixed axis rotation
then pulled down, shortening the radius of path to r. What
87. A particle performs uniform circular motion with an angular is conserved ?
momentum L. If the frequency of particle’s motion is (a) angular momentum (b) linear momentum
doubled and its kinetic energy is halved, the angular
(c) K. E. (d) None of these
momentum becomes :
92. An athlete diving off a high spring board can perform a
(a) 2L (b) 4L variety of physical movements in the air before entering
(c) L/2 (d) L/4 the water below. Which one of the following parameters
will remain constant during the fall ? The athlete’s
Rigid Body in moving axis rotation
(a) linear velocity (b) linear momentum
88. A disc of mass m and radius R moves in the x–y plane as
shown the figure. The angular momentum of the disc about (c) moment of inertia (d) angular momentum
the origin O at the instant shown is 93. Initial angular velocity of a circular disc of mass M is 1.
Then two small spheres of mass m each are attached gently
to two diametrically opposite points on the edge of the
disc. What is the final angular velocity of the disc ?

Mm Mm
(a)   1 (b)   1
 M   m 
5 7
(a) 2 mR 2 (b) 3 mR 2
 M   M 
(c)   1 (d)   1
(c)
9
mR 2 (d)
3
mR 2  M  4m   M  2m 
2 2
89. A uniform sphere of mass m, radius r and moment of inertia 94. A uniform disc of radius a and mass m, is rotating freely
I about its centre moves along the x-axis as shwon in the with angular speed w in a horizontal plane, about a smooth
figure. Its centre of mass moves with velocity = v0, and it fixed vertical axis through its centre. A particle, also of
rotates about its centre of mass with angular velocity = 0. mass m, is suddenly attached to the rim of the disc and
Let L = I0 + mv0r. The angular momentum of the body rotates with it. The new angular speed is
about the roigin O is
(a) w / 3 (b) w/3

(c) w / 5 (d) w/5

95. A rigid horizontal smooth rod A B of mass 0.75 kg and

(a) L, only if v0 = 0r length 40 cm can rotate freely about a fixed vertical axis
through its midpoint O. Two ring each of mass 1 kg initially
(b) greater than L, if v0 > 0r
at rest at a distance of 10 cm from O on either side of the
(c) less than L is v0 > 0r
rod. The rod is set in rotation with an angular velocity of
(d) L, for all values of 0 and v0 30 radians per sec. and when the rings reach the ends of
Angular Momentum Conservation the rod, the angular velocity in rad/sec. is
90. A stone attached to one end of a string is revolved around (a) 5 (b) 10
a stick so that the string winds upon the stick and gets
shortened. What is conserved. (c) 15 (d) 20
(a) angular momentum (b) linear momentum 96. A rigid spherical body is spinning around an axis without
(c) K. E. (d) None of these any external torque. Due to changes in temperature, the
91. A particle of mass m is attached to a light string which volume increases by 1%. Its angular speed will
passes through a hollow tube. The tube is held by one (a) increase approximately by 1%
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 190

(b) decrease approximately by 1% centre of mass), total energy and velocity of centre of
mass by , E and v0 respectively, after the collision which
(c) decrease approximately by 0.67%
of the following is incorrect
(d) decrease approximately by 0.33%
2m
97. A solid sphere is rotating in free space. If radius of the v
sphere is increased keeping mass same which one of the C
following will not be affected ? 8m
(a) Moment of inertia (b) Angular momentum 2a a 2a a
2v
(c) Angular velocity (d) Rotational kinetic energy m
98. A cubical block of side a is moving with velocity v on a (a) v0 = 0 (b)  = (3v/5a)
horizontal smooth plane as shown in figure. It hits a ridge (c)  = v/5a (d) E = 3mv2/5
at point O. The angular speed of the block after it hits O is: 102. A stick of length L and mass M lies on a frictionless horizontal
a surface on which it is free to move in any way. A ball of mass
a v m moving with speed v collides elastically with the stick as
M O shown in the figure. If after the collision the ball comes to
rest, then what should be the mass of the ball ?
3v 3v L
(a) (b)
4a  2a 
(c) 3v  2 a (d) Zero
99. In the following figure a massive rod AB is held in
horizonatial position by two massless strings. If the string
m
at B breaks and if the horizontal acceleration of centre of
(a) m = 2 M (b) m = M
mass, vertical acceleration and angular acceleration of rod
(c) m = M/2 (d) m = M/4
about the centre of mass are ax, ay and a, respectively, then
103. A mass m is moving at speed v perpendicular to a rod of
length d and mass M = 6 m which pivots around a frictionless
axle running through its centre. If strikes and sticks to the
end of the rod. The moment of inertia of the rod about its
2
centre is Md /12. Then the angular speed of the system just
(a) 2 3a y  3a  2ax (b) 3a y  3a  ax after the collision is :

(c) a y  3a  2ax (d) 2a y  a  2 3ax

Collision between point mass and Rigid Body
100. A meter rule is freely pivoted about its centre. A piece of
putty of mass 20g travelling at 5 ms–1 strikes and adheres
to one end of the rule so that the rule starts to rotate in a 2v 2v
horizontal circle. Given that the moment of inertia of the (a) (b)
3d d
rule and putty about pivot is 0.02 kg m2, the initial angular v 3v
velocity of the rule is (c) (d)
d 2d
(a) 1.58 rad s–1 (b) 2.24 rad s–1 Multiple Answer Questions
(c) 2.50 rad s–1 (d) 5.00 rad s–1 104. The moment of inertia of a thin square plate ABCD, of
101. A uniform bar of length 6a and mass 8m lies on a smooth uniform thickness about an axis passing through the centre
horizontal table. Two point masses m and 2m, moving in O and perpendicular to the plane of the plate is
the same horizontal plane withe speeds 2v and v
respectively, strike the bar (as shown in figure) and stick
to the bar after collision. Denoting angular velocity (about
ROTATIONAL MOTION 191

4 2 2
A B 1
(a) the x–axis is m
3

3 4
O (b) the z–axis is m 2
3

D C 2
(c) and axis parallel to the z–axis and passing through a

10
(a) I1 + I2 (b) I3 + I4 corner is m 2
3
(c) I1 + I3 (d) I1 + I2 + I3 + I4

where I1, I2, I3 and I4 are respectively moments of inertia 5 2

about axes 1, 2, 3 and 4 which are in the plane of the plate. (d) one side is m
3
105. A pair of uniform identical wires are bent into semicircular
107. A circular disc of mass M1 and radius R1 initially moving
rings, and then glued together so that the two rings have
with an angular speed 0 about the horizontal centroidal
a common centre but the planes of the semicircles are
axis is brought in contact with another stationary circular
mutually perpendicular as shown in the figure :
disc of mass M2 and radius R2 as shown in the figure.
Note that B is the common mid–point of the semicircular
rings. While O is the centre of the rings. If m is the total
mass of the system and R is the radius of the rings. Which
of the following statements is true.

E
A O C

B
axis

(a) Moment of inertia of the system about the axis OB is

given by mR2

(b) Moment of inertia of the system about the axis OB is

given by mR2/2 (a) Friction force decelerates the disc M1 and accelerates
(c) Radius of gyration of the system about the axis OB is the disc M2.
(b) The final angular speeds of the discs are in the ratio
given by R / 2
1 R 1
(d) Radius of gyration of the system about the axis OB is  .
2 R 2
given by R.
106. Four identical rods, each of mass m and length l, are joined (c) The angular momentum of the system (M1 + M2) is
to form a rigid square frame. The frame lies in the xy plane, conserved about the point of contact.
with its centre at the origin and the sides parallel to the x (d) The final rotational energy is less than the initial
and y axis. Its moment of inertia about. rotational energy.
ROTATIONAL MOTION 192

108. A constant external torque  acts for a very brief period t (c) the disc will make one rotation in time T/2
on a rotating system having moment of inertia I. (d) the disc will cover a distance greater than in further
(a) The angular momentum of the system will change by time T
t 111. A particle of mass m is travelling with a constant velocity
(c) The angular velocity of the system will change by t/I  
v  v 0 î along the line y = b, z = 0. Let dA be the area
(c) If the system was initially at rest, it will acquire rotational swept out by the position vector from origin to the particle
2 in time dt and L the magnitude of angular momentum of
kinetic energy  t  particle about origin at any time t. Then :
2I
(a) L = constant (b) L  constant

(d) The kinetic energy of the system will change by

t 2 dA 2L dA L
I (c)  (d) 
dt m dt 2m
109. In the figure, the disc D does not slip on the surface S. The 112. A ring rolls without slipping on the ground. Its centre C
pulley P has mass, and the string does not slip on it. The moves with a constant speed u. P is any point on the ring.
string is wound around the disc.
The speed of P with respect to the ground is v.

D P (a) 0 < v < 2 u

(b) v = u, if CP is horizontal

S B
(c) v = u, if CP makes an angle of 30° with the horizontal
and P is below the horizontal levels of C
(a) The acceleration of the block B is double the
acceleration of the centre of D (d) v  2 u , if CP is horiztonal.
(b) The force of friction exerted by D on S acts to the left
113. The disc of redius r is confined to roll without slipping at A
(c) The horizontal and the vertical sections of the string and B. If the plates have the velocities shown then:
have the same tension
(d) The sum of the kinetic energies of D & B is less than
the loss in the potential energy of B as it move down.
110. A disc of circumference s is at rest at a point A on a
horizontal surface when a constant horizontal force begins
to act on its centre.
(a) Angular velocity of the disc is 2V/r

Force (b) Linear velocity, V0 = V

B
(c) Angular velocity of the disc is 3V/2r
A s
(d) None of these
Between A and B there is sufficient friction to prevent 114. A ring (R), a disc (D), a solid sphere (S) and a hollow sphere
slipping, and the surface is smooth to the right of with thin walls (H), all lhaving the same mass but different
B. AB = s. The disc moves from A to B in time T. To the radii, start together from rest at the top of an inclined plane
right of B– and roll down without slipping. Then:
(a) the angular acceleration of the disc will disappear,
(a) all of them will reach the bottom of the incline together
linear acceleration will remain uncharged
(b) the body with the maximum radius will reach the bottom
(b) linear acceleration of the disc will increase
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 193

first angular velocity of the disc

(c) they will reach the bottom in the order S, D, H andR (d) (2/3)rd of the initial kinetic energy changes to heat

(d) all of them will have the same kinetic energy at the bottom 119. A rod AC of length l and mass m is kept on a horizontal
smooth plane. It is free to rotate and move. A particle of
of the incline
same mass m moving on the plane with velocity v strikes
115. A particle of mass m is projected with a velocity v making an rod at point B making angle 37° with the rod. The collision
angle of 45° with the horizontal. The magnitude of the angular is elastic. After collision.
momentum of the projectile about the point of projection
when the particle is at its maximum height h, are:

Mv3 B
(a) zero (b) 2g
4 A 37° C

(c) Mv3 / 2g (d) m  2gh 

3
V
116. A thin uniform rod of mass m and length l is free to rotate
about its upper end. When it is at rest, it receives an 72 v
impulse I at its lowest point, normal to its length. (a) The angular velocity of the rod will be
55 
Immediately after impact,
(a) the angular momentum of the rod is Il 
(b) The centre of the rod travel a distance in the time it
3
(b) the angular velocity of the rod is 3I/ml
2
which it makes half rotation
(c) the kinetic energy of the rod is 3I /2m
24 mv
(d) the linear velocity of the midpoint of the rod is 3I/2m (c) impulse of the impact force is
55
117. A small ball of mass m suspended from the ceiling at a
(d) None of these
point O by thread of length l moves along a horizontal
circle with a constant angular velocity . Comprehension Type

Using the following Passage, solve Q. 120 to Q. 122

PASSAGE - 1
Two rods 1 and 2 are released from rest as shown in figure.
Given : l1 = 4l, m1 = 2m, l2 = 2l and m2 = m. There is no
friction between the two rods. If  be the angular
(a) angular momentum is constant about O acceleration of rod 1 just after the rods are released. Then :
(b) angular momemtum is constant about C
1
(c) vertical component of angular mementum about O is
constant 2
(d) magnitude of angular momentum about O is constant
A B
118. A horizontal disc rotates freely about a verical axis through
l
its centre. A ring, having the same mass and radius as the
disc, is now gently placed on the disc. After some time, 120. What is the normal reaction between the two rods at this
the two rotate with a common angular velocity, then: instant ?
(a) some friction exists between the disc and the ring 4 m
(b) the angular momentum of the “disc plus ring” is (a) 16 3 m (b)
3
conserved
rd
(c) the final common angular velocity is 2/3 of the initial 32 m
(c) (d) 12 3 m
3 3
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 194

121. What is the horizontal force on rod 1 by hinge A at this plane with v0 = 10 m/s and rotating with  = 2 rad/ sec in
instant ? anticlockwise direction.

 32  12 3   16  2 3  A
(a)   m (b)  
 
 3 3   3 

 
(c) 14  2 3 m (d) 3 m V0 = 10 m/s

122. What is initial angular acceleration of rod 2 in terms of the

B
given parameters in the question ?

2 3 g  3 3 g  126. Velocity of ends A and B when velocity of CM is

(a)  2  2 3   (b)    3   perpendicular to rod are :
   
(a) 30 m/s, 10 m/s (b) 10 m/s, 30 m/s
6 3 g  3 3 g 8  (c) 15 m/s, 25 m/s (d) 25 m/s, 15 m/s
(c)  8   5 3   (d)  8   
   3  127. When velocity of CM is perpendicular to rod the distance
of point ‘P’ from centre which is instantaneously at rest is :
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 123 to Q. 125 (a) 5m (b) 2.5 m
PASSAGE - 2 (c) 7.5 m (d) 8 m
A uniform rod of mass M = 2 kg and length L is supended by 128. The time t0 at which velocity of point P becomes maximum
two smooth hinges 1 and 2 as shoen in the figure. A force is (At t = 0 velocity of CM is perpendicular to rod)
F = 4 N is applied downward at a distance L/4 from hinge 2.
(a) /2 (b) /4
Due to the application of force F, hinge 2 breaks. At this (c) 3/4 (d) None of these
instant, applied force F is also removed. The rod starts to
129. Distance travelled by C.O.M. during time t = 0 to t = t0 is :
rotate downward about hinge 1.
(a) 7.5  (b) 5 
(c) 2.5  (d) None of these

Using the following Passage, solve Q. 130 to Q. 132

PASSAGE - 4
123. The reaction at hinge 1, before hinge 2 breaks, is In the given figure, a uniform solid sphere is released on the
(a) 24 N (b) 12 N top of a fixed inclined plane of inclination 37° and height ‘h’.
It rolls without sliding.
(c) 11 N (d) 10 N
124. The reaction at hinge 1, just after breaking of hinge 2, is
(a) 20 N (b) 10 N
(c) 5 N (d) 0
125. The acceleration of the end point of rod of small mass dm at
the end point of rod, when the rod becomes vertical is
2 2
(a) 30 m/s (b) 20 m/s 130. The acceleration of the centre of the sphere is
2
(c) 10 m/s (d) 0
3g 4g
(a) 5 (b) 5
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 126 to Q. 129
PASSAGE - 3 4g 3g
(c) 7 (d) 7
Rod AB of length 20 m is moving on an smooth horizontal
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 195

131. The speed of the point of contact of the sphere with the Statement-II : The moment of inertia of hard boiled egg is
inclined plane when the sphere reaches the bottom of the more as compared to raw egg.
incline is (a) A (b) B

10gh (c) C (d) D

(a) 2gh (b)
7
136. Statement–1: The mass of a body cannot be considered
(c) zero (d) 2 2gh to be concentrated at the centre of mass of the body for
the purpose of computing its moment of inertia.
132. The time taken by the sphere to reach the bottom is
Statement–2: For then the moment of inertia of every body
2h 70h
(a) (b) about an axis passing through its centre of mass would be
g 9g
zero.
25h 25h (a) A (b) B
(c) 18g (d) 6g
(c) C (d) D

Using the following Passage, solve Q. 133 to Q. 135 137. Statement–I : Angular velocity is a characteristic of the
rigid body as a whole.
PASSAGE - 5 Statement-II : Angular velocity may be different for
A hollow sphere is released from the top of an inclined plane different particles of rigid body about the axis of rotation.
of inclination . (a) A (b) B
133. What should be the minimum coefficient of friction between (c) C (d) D
the sphere and the plane to prevent sliding? 138. Statement 1 : A uniform thin rod of length L is hinged
about one of its end and is free to rotate about the hinge
6 4
(a) tan  (b) tan  without friction. Neglect the effect of gravity. A force F is
5 5
applied at a distance x from the hinge on the rod such that
force always is perpendicular to the rod. As the value of x
2 1
(c) tan  (d) tan  is increased from zero to L, the component of reaction by
5 5
hinge on the rod perpendicular to length of rod increases.
134. Find the kinetic energy of the sphere as it moves down a Statement 2 : Under the conditions given in statement 1
length l on the incline if the friction coefficient is half the as x is increased from zero to L, the angular acceleration
value calculated in problem 131. of rod increases.
9 (a) A (b) B
(a) mg sin  (b) 7 mg sin 
5 8 (c) C (d) D
139. Statement 1 : A rigid disc rolls without slipping on a fixed
3 5
(c) mg sin  (d) mg sin  rough horizontal surface with uniform angular velocity.
8 8
Then the acceleration of lowest point on the disc is zero.
Assertion Reason Statement 2 : For a rigid disc rolling without slipping on
a fixed rough horizontal surface, the velocity of the lowest
(A) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–II point on the disc is always zero.
is a correct explanation for Statement–I.
(a) A (b) B
(B) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–2 is (c) C (d) D
NOT a correct explanation for Statement–I. 140. Statement–1: A solid sphere is rolling on a rough horizontal
(C) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is False. surface. Accerleration of contact point is zero.
Statement–2: A solid sphere can rool on the smooth
(D) Statement–I is False, Statement–II is True.
surface.
135. Statement-I : The hard boiled egg and raw egg can be (a) A (b) B
distinguished on the basis of spinning of both.
(c) C (d) D
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 196

141. Statement–1: A sphere is performing pure rolling on a through centre of curvilinear motion
rough horizontal surface with constant angular velocity.
mass
Frictional force acting on the sphere is zero.
Statement–2: Velocity of contact point is zero. 146. A disc of radius R is rolling with angular velocity ,
angular acceleration  and linear acceleration a, along x–
(a) A (b) B
direction. There are 4 points A, B, C and D on the disc as
(c) C (d) D
shown.
142. Statement–1: A disc is rolling on a rough horizontal surface.
The instantaneous speed of the point of contact during A
perfect rolling is zero with respect to the ground.
Statement–2: The force of friction can help in achieving x
D B a
pure rolling condition.
(a) A (b) B C
(c) C (d) D
Column–I Column–II
143 Statement–1: A ring moving down on a smooth inclined
plane will be in slipping motion. (a) Acceleration of point A (p) a   R   R 
2 2 2

Statement–2: Work done by friction in pure rolling motion

is zero.
(b) Acceleration of point B (q) a  R 2  2 R 2
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
(c) Acceleration of point C (r) a  R 2  2 R 2
144. Statement–1: Torque is equal to rate of change of angular
momentum.
(d) Acceleration of point D (s) a   R   R 
2 2 2

Statement–2: Angular momentum depends on the moment

of inertia and angular velocity. 147. In each situation of column–I, a uniform disc of mass m
(a) A (b) B and radius R rolls on a rough fixed horizontal surface as
shown. At t = 0 (initially) the angular velocity of disc is 0
(c) C (d) D
and velocity of centre of mass of disc is v0 (in horizontal
Match the following direction). The relation between v0 and 0 for each situation
145. In Column I information about the force(s) acting on a body and also initial sense of rotation is given for each situation
are mentioned, while in Column II information about the in column–I. The match the statements in Column–I with
motion of a body is given. Match the entries of Column II the corresponding results in column–II.
with the entries of Column I. Column–I Column–II
Column I Column II
(a) A single force throug (p) Rotational motion (a) (p) The angular momentum of
centre of mass v0 disc about point A remains
O conserved.
(b) Equal and opposite (q) Translational motion A
forces separated by
non-zero distance (b) (q) The kinetic energy of disc
(c) Equal and opposite (r) No motion after it starts rolling
v0 without slipping is less
forces acting at same O
than its initial kinetic enegy.
A
point
(d) A single force not (s) Centre of mass performs
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 197

151. A rigid body rotates about a fixed axis. Its angular velocity
is varibale and is given by  – t, where  and  are
(c) (r) In the duration disc rolls
constants and t is the time. The angle through which it
with slipping, the friction
v0
O acts on disc towards left. rotates before coming to rest is given by 2
, where I is

A I

an integer. Find I.
(d) (s) In the duration disc rolls
152. The figure shows a thin ring of mass M = 1 kg and radius
with slipping, the friction
R = 0.4 splinning about a vertical diameter (Take I =
v0 acts on disc for sometime
O to right and for sometime 1 2
A MR ). A small bead of mass m = 0.2 kg can slide without
to left. 2
friction along the ring. When the bead is at the top fo the
ring, the angular velocity is 5 rad/s. What is the angular
Interger Type Questions
velocity when the bead slips halfway to the horizontal
148. A man whose mass is 75 kg holds the 25 kg mass. The ( = 45°).
platform on which the man is standing is suspended by
two ropes at A and two ropes at B. Determine the tension
in one of the ropes at A as shown in figure m
R

A B 153. A body rotating at 20 rad/s is acted upon by a constant

2
25 kg torque providing it a deceleration of 2 rad/s . At what time
will the body have kinetic energy same as the initial value
Man 75 kg
if the torque continues to act ?
1m 2m 154. If the square of the velocity of a body sliding down an
2 2
incline is 160 (m /sec ), find the approximate velocity of a
149. A smooth solid sphere of weight 1000 N is supported by ring of same mass at the bottom which rolls down this
2
incline (in m/sec) (g = 10 m/sec )
the light frame OAB as shown in figure. The frame is
hinged at O. Determine the reactions at A, B and C. 155. A uniform ring of mass m, radius R, and centre C lies at rest
on a smooth horizontal table. An impulse of mv 7 is given
to a point P on the circumference hroizontally to move in a
300 mm
direction at 60° to PC. Find the initial speed of point P
O (* × 10 m/sec).
156. A particle of mass m and velocity v0 is fired at a solid
600 mm
A C cylinder of mass M and radius R. The cylinder is initially
D = 300 mm
at rest and is mounted on a fixed horizontal axle that runs
through the centre of mass. The line of motion of the
B particle is perpendicular to the axle and at a distance d,
less than R, from the centre.
150. The angular velocity of the rotation of a disc as a function (a) Find the angular speed of the system just after the
of time is given by  = 2 + 6t. The disc is homogeneous particle strikes and sticks to the surface of the cylinder.
with a radius 0.2 m and mass 5 kg. It rotates around an axis (b) Is mechanical energy conserved in this process ?
passing through its cnetre. Find the tangential force Explain your answer.
applied to the rim of the disc (in N).
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 198

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS (Only one correct answer) (a) is zero (b) remains constant
1. A thin circular ring of mass M and radius r is rotating about (c) goes on increasing (d) goes on decreasing
its axis with a constant angular velocity . Two objects
each of mass m, are attached gently to the opposite ends 6. A cubical block of side a moving with velocity v on a
of a diameter of the ring. The wheel now rotates with an horizontal smooth plane as shown. It hits a ridge at point
angular velocity : (IIT-JEE 1983) O. The angular speed of the block after it hits O is :
(IIT-JEE 1999)
(a) M/ (M + m) (b) (M – 2m)/ (M +2m)
(c) M/ (M +2m) (d) (M +2m)/ M a
2. A particle of mass m is projected with a velocity v making
an angle of 45° with the horizontal. The magnitude of the v
angular momentum of the projectile about the point of
projection when the particle is at its maximum height h is: O
(IIT-JEE 1990)
(a) 3v/ 4a (b) 3v/ 2a
(a) zero (b) mv3/ (4 2 g)
(c) 3 / 2a (d) zero
3 3
(c) mv /( 2 g) (d) m 2 gh
7. A smooth sphere A is moving on a frictionless horizontal
3. A tube of length L is filled completely with an plane with angular velocity  and centre of mass velocity
incompressible liquid of mass M and closed at both the v. It collides elastically and head on with an identical sphere
ends. The tube is then rotated in a horizontal plane about B at rest. Neglect friction everywhere. After the collision
one of its ends with a uniform angular velocity . The force
their angular speeds are A and B respectively. Then :
exerted by the liquid at the other end is :
(IIT-JEE 1999)
(IIT-JEE 1992)
(a) A < B (b) A = B
M 2 L (c) A =  (d) B = 
(a) (b) M L
2
8. A disc of mass M and radius R is rolling with angular
M 2 L M 2 L2 speed  on a horizontal plane as shown. The magnitude of
(c) (d)
4 2 angular momentum of the disc about the origin O is :
4. Two point masses of 0.3 kg and 0.7 kg are fixed at the ends (IIT-JEE 1999)
of a rod of length 1.4 m and of negligible mass. The rod is
set rotating about an axis perpendicular to its length with a Y
uniform angular speed. The point on the rod through which
the axis should pass in order that the work required for
rotation of the rod is minimum, is located at a distance of : M
(IIT-JEE 1995)
(a) 0.42 m from mass of 0.3 kg O X

(b) 0.70 m from mass of 0.7 kg

1 2
(c) 0.98 m from mass of 0.3 kg (a)   MR  (b) MR2 
2
(d) 0.98 m from mass of 0.7 kg
5. A mass m is moving with a constant velocity along a line 3 2
parallel to the x-axis, away from the origin. Its angular (c)   MR  (d) 2 MR2 
2
 
momentum with respect to the origin :
 ROTATIONAL MOTION 199

9. An equilateral triangle ABC formed from a uniform wire L3 L3

has two small identical beads initially located at A. The (a) (b)
8 2 16  2
triangle is set rotating about the vertical axis AO. Then the
beads are released from rest simultaneously and allowed 5 L3 3 L3
to slide down, one along AB and other along AC as shown. (c) (d)
16  2 8 2
Neglecting frictional effects, the quantities that are
conserved as beads slides down are : (IIT-JEE 2000) 12. A cylinder rolls up an inclined plane, reaches some height
and then rolls down (without slipping throughout these
A motions). The directions of the frictional force acting on
the cylinder are : (IIT-JEE 2002)
g (a) up the incline while ascending and down the incline
while descending.
(b) up the incline while ascending as well as
descending
(c) down the incline while ascending and up the incline
while descending.
B C
O (d) down the incline while ascending as well as
descending
(a) angular velocity and total energy (kinetic and
potential) 13. A circular platform is free to rotate in a horizontal plane
about a vertical axis passing through its centre. A tortoise
(b) total angular momentum and total energy is sitting at the edge of the platform. Now the platform is
(c) angular velocity and moment of inertia about the axis given an angular velocity 0. When the tortoise move along
of rotation a chord of the platform with a constant velocity (with
(d) total angular momentum and moment of inertia about respect to the platform). The angular velocity of the platform
the axis of rotation. (t) will vary with time t as : (IIT-JEE 2002)

10. A cubical block of side L rests on a rough horizontal surface

with coefficient of friction . A horizontal force F is applied
on the block as shown. If the coefficient of friction is
sufficiently high, so that the block does not slide before (a) (b)
toppling, the minimum force required to topple the block is:
(IIT-JEE 2000) t t

F
L
(c) (d)

(a) infinitesimal (b) mg/4 t t

(c) mg/2 (d) mg (1–) 14. Consider a body, shown in figure, consisting of two
identical balls, each of mass M connected by a light rigid
11. A thin wire of length L and uniform linear mass density  rod. If an impulse J = Mv is imparted to the body at one of its
is bent into a circular loop with centre at O as shown. The end, what would be its angular velocity ? (IIT-JEE 2003)
moment of inertia of the loop about the axis XX is :
(IIT-JEE 2000) L
M M
X X'
90°
O J = Mv

(a) v/L (b) 2v/L

(c) v/3L (d) v/4L
ROTATIONAL MOTION 200

15. A particle undergoes uniform circular motion. About which 20. A small object of uniform density rolls up a curved surface
point on the plane of the circle, will the angular momentum with an initial velocity v. It reaches up to a maximum height
of the particle remain conserved ? (IIT-JEE 2004) of 3v2/4g with respect to the initial position. The object
is : (IIT-JEE 2007)
(a) Centre of circle
(b) On the circumference of the circle
(c) Inside the circle
(d) Outside the circle
16. A disc is rolling (with slipping) on a horizontal surface. C is its V
centre & Q & P are two points equidistant from C. Let vP, vQ,
vC be the magnitude of velocities of points P, Q & C
respectively, then : (IIT-JEE 2004) (a) ring (b) solid sphere
(c) hollow sphere (d) disc
Q
21. During paddling of a bicycle, the force of friction exerted
C
P
by the ground on the two wheels is such that it acts
(IIT-JEE 1990)
(a) in the backward direction on the front wheel and in the
(a) vQ > vC > vP (b) vQ < vC < vP forward direction on the rear wheel
(b) in the forward direction on the front wheel and in the
1 backward direction on the rear wheel
(c) vQ = vP, vC = v (d) vQ < vC > vP
2 P (c) in the backward direction on both the front and the
17. A child is standing with folded hands at the centre of a rear wheels
platform rotating about its central axis. The kinetic energy (d) in the forward direction on both the front and the rear
of the system is K. The child now stretches his arms so wheels
that the moment of inertia of the system doubles. The 22. A long horizontal rod has a bead which can slide along its
kinetic energy of the system now is : (IIT-JEE 2004) length and is initially placed at a distance L from one end
(a) 2K (b) K/2 A of the rod. The rod is set in angular motion about A
with a constant angular acceleration, . If the coefficient
(c) K/4 (d) 4K of friction between the rod and bead is , and gravity is
18. A particle moves in a circular path with decreasing speed. neglected, then the time after which the bead starts
Choose the correct statement : (IIT-JEE 2005) slipping is (IIT-JEE 2000)
(a) Angular momentum remains constant 

 (a) (b)
(b) Acceleration a  is towards the centre  
(c) Particle moves in a spiral path with decreasing radius 1
(d) The direction of angular momentum remains constant. (c)  (d) infinitesimal
19. A ball moves over a fixed track as shown in the figure.
23. A block of mass m is at rest under the action of force F
From A to B the ball rolls without slipping. If surface BC is
against a wall as shown in figure. Which of the following
frictionless and KA, KB and Kc are kinetic energies of the
statement is incorrect ? (IIT-JEE 2005)
ball at A, B and C respectively, then : (IIT-JEE 2006)

A C
F
hA hC

B (a) f = mg [where f is the frictional force]

(b) F = N [where N is the normal force]
(a) hA > hc; KB > Kc (b) hA > hc; Kc > KA
(c) F will not produce torque
(c) hA = hc; KB = Kc (d) hA < hc; KB > Kc
(d) N will not produce torque
ROTATIONAL MOTION 201

24. If the resultant of all the external forces acting on a system this instant the distance of the other mass from O is
of particles is zero, then from an inertial frame, one can (2015)
surely say that
(a) linear momentum of the system does not change in time
(b) kinetic energy of the system does not change in time
(c) angular momentum of the system does not change in time
(d) potential energy of the system does not change in time
25. A block of base 10 cm×10 cm and height 15 cm is kept on
an inclined plane. The coefficient of friction between them
2 1
is 3 . The inclination  of this inclined plane from the (a) R (b) R
3 3
horizontal plane is gradually increased from 0°. Then,
(IIT 2009) 3 4
(c) R (d) R
(a) at  = 30°, the block will start sliding down the plane 5 5
(b) the block will remain at rest on the plane up to certain 28. A uniform wooden stick of mass 1.6 kg and length l
 and then it will topple rests in an inclined manner on a smooth, vertical wall of
(c) at  = 60°, the block will start sliding down the plane height h (< l) such that a small portion of the stick extends
and continue to do so at higher angles. beyond the wall. The reaction force of the wall on the
(d) at  = 60°, the block will start sliding down the plane stick is perpendicular to the stick. The stick makes an
and on further increasing , it will topple at certain  angle of 30° with the wall and the bottom of the stick is
26. A wire, which passes through the hole in a small bead, is on a rough floor. The reaction of the wall on the stick is
bent in the form of quarter of a circle. The wire is fixed equal in magnitude to the reaction of the floor on the
vertically on ground as shown in the figure. The bead is stick. The ratio h/l and the frictional force f at the bottom
of the stick are (g = 10 m s–2) (2016)
released from near the top of the wire and it slides along
the wire without friction. As the bead moves from A to B, h 3 16 3 h 3 16 3
the force it applies on the wire is : (2014) (a)  , f  N (b)  , f  N
l 16 3 l 16 3

h 3 3 8 3 h 3 3 16 3
(c)  , f  N (d)  ,f  N
l 16 3 l 16 3
ASSERTION REASONS
(A) If Statement–I is true, Statement–II is true; Statement–II is
the correct explanation for Statement–I.
(a) always radially outwards.
(B) If Statement–I is true, Statement–II is true; Statement–II is
(b) always radially inwards. not a correct explanation for Statement–I.
(c) radially outwards initially and radially inwards later. (C) If Statement–I is true; Statement–II is false.
(d) radially inwards initially and radially outwards later. (D) If Statement–I is false; Statement–II is true.
27. A ring of mass M and radius R is rotating with angular 29. Statement–I : Two cylinders, one hollow (metal) and the
speed  about a fixed vertical axis passing through its other solid (wood) with the same mass and identical
dimensions are simultaneously allowed to roll without
M
centre O with two point masses each of mass at rest slipping down an inclined plane from the same height. The
8
hollow cylinder will reach the bottom of the inclined plane
at O. These masses can move radially outwards along first.
two massless rods fixed on the ring as shown in the figure.
Statement–II : By the principle of conservation of energy,
8 the total kinetic energies of the both the cylinders are
At some instant the angular speed of the system is 
9 identical when they reach the bottom of the incline.(2008)
3 (a) A (b) B
and one of the masses is at a distance of R from O. At
5 (c) C (d) D
ROTATIONAL MOTION 202

COMPREHENSION

PASSAGE - 1 y
Two discs A and B are mounted coaxially on a vertical axle.
The discs have moments of inertial I and 2I respectively
about the common axis. Disc A is imparted an initial angular
velocity 2 using the entire potential energy of a spring
d
compressed by a distance x1. Disc B is imparted an angular
velocity  by a spring having the same spring constant R v0

and compressed by a distance x2. Both the discs rotate in

the clockwise direction. x

x1 33. The net external force acting on the disk when its centre
30. The ratio is (IIT-JEE 2007) of mass is at displacement x with respect to its equilibrium
x2
position is (IIT-JEE 2008)
(a) 2 (b) 1/2 (a) – kx (b) – 2kx
(c) 2 (d) 1 / 2  kx 4 kx
31. When disc B is brought in contact with disc A, they acquire (c)  (d) 
3 3
a common angular velocity in time t. The average frictional
34. The centre of mass of the disk undergoes simple harmonic
torque on one disc by the other during this period is
motion with angular frequency  equal to (IIT-JEE 2008)
(IIT-JEE 2007)
2 I 9 I k 2k
(a) (b)
(a) 3 t (b) 2 t M M

2k 4k
9 I 3 I (c) (d)
(c) 4 t (d) 2 t 3M 3M
35. The maximum value of v0 for which the disk will roll without
32. The loss of kinetic energy during the above process is :
slipping is (IIT-JEE 2008)
(IIT-JEE 2007)
I 2 I 2 M M
(a) (b) (a) g (b) g 2 k
2 3 k
I 2 I 2
(c) (d)
4 6 3M 5M
(c) g (d) g 2 k
PASSAGE - 2 k

A uniform thin cylindrical disk of mass M and radius R is PARAGRAPH 1

attached to two identical massless springs of spring A frame of reference that is accelerated with respect to an
constant k which are fixed to the wall as shown in the inertial frame of reference is called a non-inertial frame of
figure. The springs are attached to the axle of the disk reference. A coordinate system fixed on a circular disc
diammetrically on either side at a distance d from its centre. rotating about a fixed axis with a constant angular velocity
The axle is massless and both the springs and the axle are in  is an example of a non-inertial frame of reference. The

a horizontal plane. The unstretched length of each spring relationship between the force Frot experienced by a
is L. The disk is initially at its equilibrium position with its particle of mass m moving on the rotating disc and the
centre of mass (CM) at a distance L from the wall. The 
force Fin experienced by the particle in an inertial frame of
 
disk rolls without slipping with velocity v 0  v 0 î . The reference is
coefficient of friction is .       
Frot  Fin  2m  v rot    m   r   
ROTATIONAL MOTION 203

 after collision. Denoting angular velocity (about the

where vrot is the velocity of the particle in the rotating
 centre of mass), total energy and centre of mass velocity
frame of reference and r is the position vector of the by , E and vc respectively, we have after collision
particle with respect to the centre of the disc.
(IIT-JEE 1991)
Now consider a smooth slot along a diameter of a disc of
radius R rotating counter-clockwise with a constant 2m
angular speed  about its vertical axis through its center. v
We assign a coordinate system with the origin at the center
c
of the disc, the x-axis along the slot, the y-axis
perpendicular to the slot and the z-axis along the rotation 2v


 
axis   k̂ . A small block of mass m is gently placed in m
a 2a

the slot at r   R / 2  ˆi at t = 0 and is constrained to move
3v
only along the slot. (a) vC = 0 (b)  
5a

v 3
(c)   (d) E  mv 2
5a 5

39. The torque  on a body a bout a given point is found to
   
be equal to A  L, where A is a constant vector and L is
angular momentum of the body about that point. From
this it follows that (IIT-JEE 1998)

dL 
36. The distance r of the block at time t is (a) is perpendicular to L at all instants of time
dt
R R 2 t  
(a)
2
cos2t (b)
4

e  e 2 t  (b) the component of L in the direction of A does not
change with time

R R t (c) The magnitude of L does not change with time
(c)
2
cos t (d)
4

e  e t  
(d) L does not change with time
37. The net reaction of the disc on the block is 40. A solid sphere is in pure rolling motion on an inclined
(a) m R sin t ˆj  mg kˆ
2 surface having inclination  (IIT-JEE 2006)

(b) – m2 R cos t ˆj  mg kˆ

1
(c)  
m 2 R et  et ˆj  mg kˆ
2

1
(d)
2
 
m 2 R e 2t  e 2 t ˆj  mg kˆ (a) frictional force acting on sphere is f =  mg cos 
(b) f is dissipative force
OBJECTIVE QUESTION (One or more than one correct answer)
(c) friction will increase its angular velocity and decrease
38. Uniform bar of length 6 a and mass 8 m lies on a smooth its linear velocity
horizontal table. Two point masses m and 2 m moving in
(d) If  decreases, friction will decrease
the same horizontal plane with speed 2v and v respectively,
strike the bar [as shown in the figure] and stick to the bar
ROTATIONAL MOTION 204

41. A small ball starts moving from A over a fixed track as (c) The magnitude of angular momentum of center of
shown in the figure. Surface AB has friction. From A to B mass of the assembly about the point O is 81 ma2
the ball rolls without slipping. Surface BC is frictionless (d) The center of mass of the assembly rotates about
KA, KB and KC are kinetic energies of the ball at A, B and C the z-axis with an angular speed of /5

respectively. Then (2006) 44. The position vector r of a particle of mass m is given
by the following equation

r  t   t 3 ˆi   t 2 ˆj
where  =10/3 m s–3 ,  = 5 m s–2 and m = 0.1 kg. At t =1
s, which of the following statement(s) is(are) true about
the particle? (2016)
(a) hA > hC; KB > KC (b) hA > hC; KC > KA

(a) The velocity v is given by v  10 ˆi  10 ˆj ms
 
1
(c) hA = hC; KB = KC (d) hA < hC; KB > KC
42. A sphere is rolling without slipping on a fixed horizontal 
(b) The angular momentum L with respect to the origin
plane surface. In the fig., A is the point of contact. B is 
the centre of the sphere and C is its topmost point. Then, is given by L = – (5/3) k̂ N m s
(IIT 2009)  

(c) The force F is given by F  ˆi  2ˆj N 
C

(d) The torque  with respect to the origin is given by

B   (20 / 3)kˆ Nm
45. Consider a body of mass 1.0 kg at rest at the origin at

time t = 0. A force F =  ti+B j is applied on the body,,
A
       
 
(a) v C  v A  2 v B  v C  (b) v C  v B  v B  v A
where  = 1.0 Ns -1 and  = 1.0 N The torque acting
       
(c) | v C  v A |  2 | v B  v C | (d) | v C  v A |  4 | v B | on the body about the origin at time t = 1.0 s is  .
Which of the following statements is (are) true?
43. Two thin circular discs of mass m and 4m, having radii (2018)
of a and 2a, respectively, are rigidly fixed by massless,
 1
rigid rod of length l  24 a through their centers. (a)  = Nm
3
This assembly is laid on a firm and flat surface, and set 
(b) The torque  is in the direction of the unit vector +
rolling without slipping on the surface so that the angular
speed about the axis of the rod is . The angular k
momentum of the entire assembly about the point ‘O’ is (c) The velocity of the body at t = 1 s is
  1
L (see the figure). Which of the following statement(s)
is(are) true? (2016) 2

v  iˆ  2 ˆj ms 1 
(d) The magnitude of displacement of the body at t = 1
1
s is m
6
FILL IN THE BLANKS
46. A uniform cube of side a and mass m rests on a rough
horizontal table. A horizontal force F is applied normal to
one of the faces at a point that is directly above the centre
 of the face, at a height 3a/4 above the base. The minimum
(a) The magnitude of the z-component of L is 55 ma2
value of F for which the cube begins to tip about the edge
(b) The magnitude of angular momentum of the assembly is ............... (Assume that the cube does not slide).
about its center of mass is 17 ma2 /2 (IIT-JEE 1984)
ROTATIONAL MOTION 205

47. A smooth uniform rod of length L and mass M has two The angular acceleration in both the cases will be the
identical beads of negligible size, each of mass m, which same. (IIT-JEE 1985)
can slide freely along the rod. Initially the two beads are at
the centre of the rod and the system is rotating with an
angular velocity 0 about an axis perpendicular to the rod
and passing through the mid–point of the rod (see figure).
There are no external forces. When the beads reach the A C B
ends of the rod, the angular velocity of the system is
F
.............. (IIT-JEE 1988)

53. A thin uniform circular disc of mass M and radius R is

L/2 L/2 rotating in a horizontal plane about an axis passing through
its centre and perpendicular to its plane with an angular
velocity . Another disc of the same dimensions but of mass
48. A cylinder of mass M and radius R is resting on a horizontal
M/4 is placed gently on the first disc coaxially. The angular
platform (which is parallel to the x–y plane) with its axis
fixed along the y–axis and free to rotate about its axis. The velocity of the system now is 2 / 5 . (IIT-JEE 1986)
platform is given a motion in the x–direction given by
x = A cos (t). There is no slipping between the cylinder 54. A ring of mass 0.3 kg and radius 0.1 m and a solid cylinder
and platform. The maximum torque acting on the cylinder of mass 0.4 kg and of the same radius are given the same
during its motion is .............. (IIT-JEE 1988) kinetic energy and released simultaneously on a flat
49. A stone of mass m, tied to the end of a string, is whirled horizontal surface such that they begin to roll as soon as
around in a horizontal circle. (Neglect the force due to released towards a wall which is at the same distance from
gravity). The length of the string is reduced gradually the ring and the cylinder. The rolling friction in both cases
keeping the angular momentum of the stone about the is negligible. The cylinder will reach the wall first.
centre of the circle of the circle constant. Then, the tension (IIT-JEE 1989)
in the string is given by T = Arn, where A is a constant, r is ANALYTICAL & DESCRIPTIVE QUESTIONS
the instantaneous radius of the circle. Then n = .............. 55. A particle is projected at time t = 0 from a point P on the
(IIT-JEE 1993)
ground with a speed v0, at an angle of 45° to the horizontal.
50. A uniform disc of mass m and radius R is rolling up a Find the magnitude and direction of the angular momentum
rough inclined plane which makes an angle of 30° with the of the particle about P at time
horizontal. If the coefficients of static and kinetic friction
t = v0/g. (IIT-JEE 1984)
are each equal to  and the only forces acting are
gravitational and frictional, then the magnitude of the 56. A small sphere rolls down without slipping from the top of
frictional force acting on the disc is ............... and its a track in a vertical plane. The track has an elevated section
direction is .............. (write up or down) the inclined plane. and a horizontal part. The horizontal part is 1.0 m above
(IIT-JEE 1997C) the ground level and the top of the track is 2.6 m above the
ground. Find the distance on the ground with respect to
51. A rod of weight W is supported by two parallel knife edges
the point B (which is vertically below the end of the track as
A and B and is in equilibrium in a horizontal position. The
shown in figure) where the sphere lands. During its flight
knives are at a distance d from each other. The centre of
as a projectile, does the sphere continue to rotate about its
mass of the rod is at distance x from A. The normal reaction
on A is ............. and on B is .............. (IIT-JEE 1997) centre of mass ? Explain. (IIT-JEE 1987)

TRUE/FALSE
52. A triangular plate of uniform thickness and density is made
to rotate about an axis perpendicular to the plane of the
paper and 2.6 m A
(a) passing through A,
1.0 m
(b) passing through B, by the application of the same
force, F, at C (mid–point of AB) as shown in the figure. B
ROTATIONAL MOTION 206

57. A thin uniform bar lies on a frictionless horizontal surface velocity such that the block X starts moving up the plane.
and is free to move in any way on the surface. Its mass is (IIT-JEE 1994)
0.16 kg and length is Y
3 m. Two particles, each of mass
0.08 kg are moving on the same surface and towards the
bar in a direction perpendicular to the bar one with a X
velocity of 10 m/s, and the other with 6 m/s, as shown in
figure. The first particle strikes the bar at points A and the 30°
other at point B.

10 m/s A
(a) Find the tension in the string during the motion.
(b) At a certain instant of time the magnitude of the
angular velocity of Y is 10 rad s–1. Calculate the
B
distance travelled by X from that instant of time untill
6 m/s
it comes to rest.
Points A and B are at a distance of 0.5 m from the centre of 61. Two uniform rods A and B of length 0.6 m each and of
the bar. The particles strike the bar at the same instant of masses 0.01 kg and 0.02 kg respectively are rigidly joined
time and stick to the bar on collision. Calculate the loss of
end to end. The combination is pivoted at the lighter end,
kinetic energy of the system in the above collison process.
(IIT-JEE 1989) P as shown in figure. Such that it can freely rotate about
58. A carpet of mass M made of inextensible material is rolled point P in a vertical plane. A small object of mass 0.05 kg,
along its length in the form of a cylinder of radius R and is moving horizontally, hits the lower end of the combination
kept on a rough floor. The carpet starts unrolling without and sticks to it. What should be the velocity of the object,
sliding on the floor when a negligibly small push is given so that the system could just be raised to the horizontal
to it. Calculate the horizontal velocity of the axis of the
position. (IIT-JEE 1994)
cylindrical part of the carpet when its radius reduces to R/2.
(IIT-JEE 1990) P
59. A homogeneous rod AB of length L = 1.8 m and mass M is
pivoted at the centre O in such a way that it can rotate A
freely in the vertical plane (figure). The rod is initially in
the horizontal position. An insect S of the same mass M
falls vertically with speed v on the point C, midway B
between the points O and B. Immediately after falling, the
insect moves towards the end B such that the rod rotates
with a constant angular velocity . (IIT-JEE 1992)
62. A rectangular rigid fixed block has a long horizontal edge.
S
A solid homogeneous cylinder of radius R is placed
v horizontally at test with its length parallel to the edge
such that the axis of the cylinder and the edge of the
×
block are in the same vertical plane as shown in figure.
A O C B
L/2 L/4 L/4
There is sufficient friction present at the edge, so that a
very small displacement causes the cylinder to roll off
(a) Determine the angular velocity  in terms of v and L. the edge without slipping. Determine: (IIT-JEE 1995)
(b) If the insect reaches the end B when the rod has turned
through an angle of 90°, determine v.
60. A block X of mass 0.5 kg is held by a long massless string
on a frictionless inclined plane of inclination 30° to the R
horizontal. The string is wound on a uniform solid
cylindrical drum Y of mass 2 kg and of radius 0.2 m as
shown in figure. The drum is given an initial angular
ROTATIONAL MOTION 207

(a) the angle c through which the cylinder rotates before as a function of time and the total work done by it
it leaves contact with the edge, over a time t much longer than t0.
(b) The speed of the center of mass of the cylinder before 65. A uniform circular disc has radius R and mass m. A particle,
leaving contact with the edge and also of mass m, is fixed at a point A on the edge of the disc
(c) The ratio of the translational to rotational kinetic as shown in the figure. The disc can rotate freely about a
energies of the cylinder when its centre of mass is in horizontal chord PQ that is at a distance R/4 from the
centre C of the disc. The line AC is perpendicular to PQ.
horizontal line with the edge.
63. Two thin circular discs of mass 2 kg and radius 10 cm each A
are joined by a rigid massless rod of length 20 cm. The axis
of the rod is along the perpendicular to the planes of the R

disc through their centres. This object is kept on a truck in C R/4

such a way that the axis of the object is horizontal and P Q
perpendicular to the direction of motion of the truck. It
friction with the floor of the truck is large enough, so that Initially the disc is held vertical with the point A at its
the object can roll on the truck without slipping. Take highest position. It is then allowed to fall, so that it starts
x–axis as the direction of motion of the truck and z–axis as rotation about PQ. Find the linear speed of the particle as
the vertically upwards direction. If the truck has an it reaches its lowest position. (IIT-JEE 1998)
acceleration 9 m/s2, calculate (IIT-JEE, 1997) 66. A man pushes a cylinder of mass m1 with the help of a
plank of mass m2 as shown. There is no slipping at any
contact. The horizontal component of the force applied
by the man is F. Find : (IIT-JEE 1999)
O
F m2

20cm m1

(a) the force of friction on each disc and

(b) the magnitude and direction of the frictional torque (a) the acceleration of the plank and the centre of mass
acting on each disc about the centre of mass O of the of the cylinder and
object. Express the torque in the vector form in terms (b) the magnitudes and directions of frictional forces at
contact points.
of unit vectors î , ĵ and k̂ in x, y and z–directions.
67. A rod AB of mass M and length L is lying on a horizontal
64. A uniform disc of mass m and radius R is projected frictionless surface. A particle of mass m travelling along
horizontally with velocity v0 on a rough horizontal floor, the surface hits the end A of the rod with a velocity v0 in a
so that it starts off with a purely sliding motion at t = 0. direction perpendicular to AB. The collision is elastic. After
After t0 seconds, it acquires purely rolling motion as shown the collision the particle comes to rest. (IIT-JEE 2000)
in figure. (IIT-JEE 1997) (a) Find the ratio m/M.
(b) A point P on the rod is at rest immediately after
collision. Find the distance AP.
v0 (c) Find the linear speed of the point P a time L/3v0 after
the collision.
t=0 t = t0 68. Two heavy metallic plates are joined together at 90° to
each other. A laminar sheet of mass 30 kg is hinged at the
(a) Calculate the velocity of the centre of mass of the line AB joining the two heavy metallic plates. The hinges
disc at t0. are frictionless. The moment of inertia of the laminar sheet
about an axis parallel to AB and passing through its centre
(b) Assuming the coefficient of friction to be , calculate
of mass is 1.2 kg–m2. Two rubber obstacles P and Q are
t0. Also calculate the work done by the frictional force
ROTATIONAL MOTION 208

fixed, one on each metallic plate at a distance 0.5 m from 70. A solid cylinder of mass M and radius R rolls without
the line AB. This distance is chosen, so that the reaction due slipping on an inclined plane inclined at an angle . Find
to the hinges on the laminar sheet is zero during the impact. the linear acceleration of the cylinder. (IIT-JEE 2005)
71. Four solid spheres each of diameter 5 cm and mass 0.5 kg
A
are placed with their centres at the corners of a square of
side 4 cm. The moment of inertia of the system about the
Q –4 2
diagonal of the square is N × 10 kg m , then N is.
(IIT-JEE 2011)
B 72. A boy is pushing a ring of mass 2 kg and radius 0.5 m with a
stick as shown in the figure. The stick applies a force of 2 N
on the ring and rolls it without slipping with an acceleration
2
of 0.3 m/s . The coefficient of friction between the ground
Initially the laminar sheet hits one of the obstacles with an and the ring is large enough that rolling always occurs and
angular velocity 1 rad/s and turns back. If the impulse on the coefficient of friction between the stick and the ring is
the sheet due to each obstacle is 6N –s. (IIT-JEE 2001)
P
(a) Find the location of the centre of mass of the laminar   . The value of P is. (IIT-JEE 2011)
 10 
sheet from AB.
(b) At what angular velocity does the laminar sheet come
back after the first impact ?
(c) After how many impact, does the laminar sheet come
to rest ?
69. Three particles A, B and C, each of mass m, are connected
to each other by three massless rigid rods to form a rigid
equilateral triangular body of side l. This body is placed
on a horizontal frictionless table (x – y plane) and is hinged 73. A uniform circular disc of mass 50 kg and radius 0.4 m is
to it at the point A, so that it can move without friction
rotating with an angular velocity of 10 rad/s about its own
about the vertical axis through A (see figure). The body is
axis, which is vertical. Two uniform circular rings, each of
set into rotational motion on the table about A with a
mass 6.25 kg and radius 0.2 m, are gently placed
constant angular velocity . (IIT-JEE 2002)
symmetrically on the disc in such a manner that they are
y touching each other along the axis of the disc and are
A x
horizontal. Assume that the friction is large enough such
that the rings are at rest relative to the disc and the system
rotates about the original axis. The new angular velocity
–1
(in rad s ) of the system is (IIT-JEE 2013)
74. Two identical ladders are arranged as shown in the figure.
Mass of each ladder is M and length L. They system is in
F B C equilibrium. Find direction and magnitude of frictional force
acting at A or B. (2005)
(a) Find the magnitude of the horizontal force exerted by
the hinge on the body. P
(b) At time T, when the side BC is parallel to the x–axis, a
L
force F is applied on B along BC (as shown). Obtain
m
the x–component and the y–component of the force
exerted by the hinge on the body, immediately after A B
time T.
ROTATIONAL MOTION 209

75. A horizontal circular platform of radius 0.5 m and mass 77. The densities of two solid spheres A and B of the same
0.45 kg is free to rotate about its axis. Two massless spring
r
toy-guns, each carrying a steel ball of mass 0.05 kg are radii R vary with radial r as A (r)  k   and
R
attached to the platform at a distance 0.25 m from the centre
on its either sides along its diameter (see figure). Each gun 5
 r
simultaneously fires the balls horizontally and B (r)  k   , respectively, where k is a constant. The
perpendicular to the diameter in opposite directions. After R
leaving the platform, the ball have horizontal speed of 9 moments of inertia of the individual spheres about axes
ms–1 with respect to the ground. The rotational speed of passing through their centres are IA and IB, respectively.
the platform in rad s–-1 after the balls leave the platform is IB n
(2014) If I  10 , the value of n is : (2015)
A

78. Two identical uniform discs roll without slipping on two

different surfaces AB and CD (see figure) starting at A
and C with linear speeds v1 and v2, respectively, and always
remain in contact with the surfaces. If they reach B and D
with the same linear speed and v1 = 3 m/s then v2 in m/s is
(g = 10 m/s2) (2015)
76. A uniform circular disc of mass 1.5 kg and radius 0.5 m is
initially at rest on a horizontal frictionless furface. Three
forces of equal magnitude F= 0.5 N are applied
simultaneously along the three sides of an equilateral
triangle XYZ with its vertices on the perimeter of the disc
(see figure). One second after applying the forces, the
angular speed of the disc in rad s–1 is (2014)

79. A ring and a disc are initially at rest, side by side, at the
top of an inclined plane which makes an angle 60 o with
the horizontal. They start to roll without slipping at the
same instant of time along the shortest path. If the time
difference between their reaching the ground is

 2 - 3  s, then the height of the top of the inclined plane,

10
in metres, is ______. Take g = 10 ms–2. (2018)


ROTATIONAL MOTION 210

ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (b) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (a)

10. (c) 11. (d) 12. (d) 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (c)
19. (c) 20. (c) 21. (c) 22. (b) 23. (d) 24. (c) 25. (b) 26. (d) 27. (d)
28. (a) 29. (a) 30. (a) 31. (d) 32. (d) 33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (d) 36. (c)
37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (a) 41. (c) 42. (d) 43. (a) 44. (c) 45. (a)
46. (b) 47. (b) 48. (b) 49. (c) 50. (a) 51. (d) 52. (b) 53. (c) 54. (c)
55. (c) 56. (b) 57. (b) 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (a) 61. (b) 62. (b) 63. (b)
64. (c) 65. (d) 66. (a) 67. (c) 68. (d) 69. (d) 70. (b) 71. (c) 72. (c)
73. (a) 74. (b)

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (d) 6. (a) 7. (d) 8. (b) 9. (c)

10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (d) 16. (b) 17. (d) 18. (d)

19. (a) 20. (d) 21. (c) 22. (c) 23. (a) 24. (d) 25. (b) 26. (c) 27. (b)

28. (a) 29. (a) 30. (a, c) 31. (d) 32. (a) 33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (d) 36. (b)
37. (d) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (b) 41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (b) 44. (d) 45. (b)
46. (a) 47. (a)

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (d) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (a)

10. (d) 11. (d) 12. (a) 13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (a) 17. (b) 18. (c)
19. (d) 20. (d) 21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (c) 25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (c)
28. (a) 29. (b) 30. (a) 31. (d) 32. (d) 33. (b) 34. (b) 35. (c) 36. (c)
37. (d) 38. (a) 39. (c) 40. (b) 41. (c) 42. (d) 43. (a) 44. (a) 45. (c)
46. (d) 47. (c) 48. (a) 49. (c) 50. (b) 51. (a) 52. (c) 53. (b) 54. (a)
55. (b) 56. (b) 57. (c) 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (c) 61.(c) 62. (a) 63. (b)
64. (d) 65. (a) 66. (c) 67. (b) 68. (b) 69. (b) 70. (d) 71. (d) 72. (b)
73. (b) 74. (d) 75. (a) 76. (b) 77. (b) 78. (b) 79. (a) 80. (b) 81. (d)
82. (b) 83. (a) 84. (c) 85. (c) 86. (c) 87. (d) 88. (a) 89. (d) 90. (a)
91. (a) 92. (d) 93. (c) 94. (b) 95. (b) 96. (c) 97. (b) 98. (a) 99. (d)
100. (c) 101. (b) 102. (d) 103. (a) 104. (a, b) 105. (b, c) 106. (a,b,c,d) 107. (a, c, d)
108. (a, b, c) 109. (a, b, d) 110. (b, c, d) 111. (a, d) 112. (a, c, d)
113. (a, b) 114. (c, d) 115. (b, d) 116. (a,b,c,d) 117. (b, c, d) 118. (a, b, d)
119. (a, b, c) 120. (c) 121. (a) 122. (d) 123. (c) 124. (c) 125. (a) 126. (b) 127. (a)
ROTATIONAL MOTION 211

128. (a) 129. (b) 130. (d) 131. (c) 132. (b) 133. (c) 134. (b) 135. (c) 136. (a)
137. (c) 138. (d) 139. (d) 140. (d) 141. (b) 142. (b) 143. (b) 144. (b)
145. (A  Q; B  P; C  R; D  P, Q, S) 146. (A  Q); (B  S); (C  R); (D  P)

 1000 500 
147. (A  P, Q, R); (B  P, Q, R); (C  P, Q); (D  P, Q, R) 148.  R A  N, R B  N
 3 3 

1000 1000
149. ( R A  N, R C  N, R B  1000 N ) 150. (0003) 151. (0002) 152. ( = 3.6 rad/s)
3 3

mv 0 d
153. (20 s) 154. (0009) 155. (0002) 156. (a)   , (b) No
1 2
R M  2m 
2

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (c) 5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (c) 9. (b)

10. (c) 11. (d) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (a) 16. (a) 17. (b) 18. (d)
19. (a) 20. (d) 21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (d) 24. (a) 25. (b) 26. (d) 27. (d)
28. (d) 29. (d) 30. (c) 31. (a) 32. (b) 33. (d) 34. (d) 35. (c) 36. (d)
37. (c) 38. (a, c, d) 39. (a, b, c) 40. (c, d) 41. (a, b) 42. (b, c) 43. (b,d ) 44. (a,b,d) 45. (a, c)

2 M0 1 2 mg dx xW
46. mg 47. M  6 m 48. MRA 49. –3 50. , up 51.   W, 52. False 53. False
3 3 6  d  d

mv 30
54. False 55. in a direction perpendicular to paper inwards. 56. 2.13 m, yes 57. 2.72 J
2 2g

14 Rg 12 v
58. v  59. (a) , (b) 3.5 ms–1 60. (a) 1.63 N, (b) 1.22 m 61. 6.3 m/s
3 7L

4 4 gR
62. (a)   cos
1

7
, (b)
7
, (c) 6    
63. (a) 6 î , (b) 0.6 k̂  ĵ , 0.6  ĵ  k̂ , 0.85 N–m

2 v0 m gt  mv 02
64. (a) v 0 , (b)
3 g , For t < t , W = 3 gt  2 v 0 , 65. 5 gR
3 0 f
2 6

4F 8F 3 Fm1 Fm1 1 2 v0
66.(a) a CM  3m  8m , a plank  3m  8m , (b) 3m  8m , 3m  8m 67. (a) , (b) L , (c)
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 4 3 2 2

F 2
68. (a) 0.1 m, (b) 1 rad/s, (c) sheet will never come to rest 69. (a) 3 m2 , (b) Fnet x  , Fnet y  3 m2 70. g sin 
4 3

Mm
71. 0009 72.0004 73. 0008 74. f    g cot  75. (0004) 76. (0002) 77. (0006)
 2 
78. (0007) 79. 0.75

Dream on !!

 05
GRAVITATION
GRAVITATION 213

Gravitation
1. INTRODUCTION
The constitutents of the universe are galaxy, stars, planets, Where  r̂12  is a unit vector drawn from particle m1 to
comets, asteriods, meteroids. The force which keeps them
particle m2.
bound together is called gravitational force. Gravitation is

a nature phenomenon by which material objects attract  
Similarly, the force F12 exerted on particle m1 by particle
towards one another.
m2 is given by
In 1687 A.D. English Physicist, Sir Isaac Netwon published
principia Mathematica, which explains the inverse-square  mm
F12   G 1 2 2  rˆ12  ...(ii)
law of gravitation. r

2. NEWTON’S LAW OF GRAVITATION Where  r̂12  is a unit vector drawn from particle m1 to
2. 1 Defintion particle m2
Every particle of matter attracts every other particle of From (i) and (ii)
matter with a force which is directly proportional to the  
 F12  F21
product of their masses and inversely proportional to the
square of the distance between them.
3. UNIVERSAL CONSTANT OF GRAVITATION

Fr 2
Universal gravitation constant is given as, G =
m1 m 2

Suppose that, m1 = m2 = 1, and r = 1 then G = F

2.2 Mathematical Form  Universal gravitation constant is numerically equal to the
force of attraction between two unit masses placed at unit
If m1 and m2 are the masses of the particles and r is the
distance apart.
distance between them, the force of attraction F between
the particles is given by 3.1 Unit

m1m 2 2
F newton  metre  Nm2
r2 SI unit : 2
=
 kilogram  kg 2
m1m 2
 F G CGS Unit : dyne cm /gm
2 2
r2
Where G is the universal constant of gravitation. 3.2 Value of G
–11 2 2
2.3 Vector Form G = 6.67 × 10 Nm /kg
Dimensions of G
In vector form, Newton’s law of gravitation is represented

 
in the following manner. The force F21 exerted on particle
[G] =
 F  r 2 
=
 M1L1T 2   M 0 L2 T 0 

m2 by particle m1 is given by,  m1m2   M 2 L0 T 0 

 mm
–1
= [M L T ]
3 –2

F21   G 1 2 2  ˆr12  ...(i)

r
GRAVITATION 214

GM
gh  ...(ii)
 2
R  h
1. The gravitational force is independent of the intervening
Dividing eq (ii) by eq (i), we get,
medium.
2. The gravtional force is a conservative force. gh R2

3. The force exerted by the first particle on the second is g  R  h 2
exactly equal and opposite to the force exerted by the
second particle on the first.
 R2 
4. The gravitational force between two particles act along  gh   2
g
the line joining the two particles and they from an action-   R  h  
reaction pair.
4.2 Acceleration due to gravity at a very small height

4. VARIATION IN ‘g’ 2
Rh
gh  g  
4.1 The Acceleration due to Gravity at a height h above  R 
the Earth’s surface 2
 h
 g 1  
Let M and R be the mass and radius of the earth and g be  R
the acceleratio due to gravity at the earth’s surface.
Suppose that a body of mass m is placed on the surface of  2h h 2 
the earth.  g 1   2 ........ 
 R R 
The weight ‘mg’ of the body is equal to the gravitational
If h << R, then neglecting high power’s of ‘h’ we get,
force acting on it.
 2h 
GMm g h  g 1  
 mg   R 
R2
4.3 Effect of depth on a acceleration due to Gravity
GM
 g 2 ...(i) Also g in terms of 
R
Now suppose that the body is raised to a height h, above GM
g
the earth’s surface, the weight of the body is now mgh and R2
GMm If  is density of the material of earth, then
the gravitational force acting on it is 2
R  h 4 3
M R 
3

4
G  R 3
 g 3
R2

4
 g GR ...(i)
3
Let gd be acceleration due to gravity at the point B at a
depth x below the surface of earth. A body at the point B
will experience force only due to the portion of the earth of
radius OB (R – d). The outer spherical shell, whose
GMm
mg h  thickness is d, will not exert any force on body at point B.
 2
R  h  Because it will acts as a shell and point is inside.
GRAVITATION 215
2
g A  g’ = g – r cos
Now, r = R cos  (where R is the radius of the earth)
g' B d 2
Then g’ = g – (R cos )  cos 
R M 2 2
 g’ = g – R cos 
R–d
M' The effective acceleration due to gravity at a point ‘P’ is
O given by,
2 2
g’ = g – R cos .
Thus value of ‘g’ changes with ‘’ and ‘’
1. At poles,
 = 90,
2 2
4 3 g’ = g – R  cos 90.
Now, M   R  x 
3 g’ = g
This is maximum acceleration due to gravity.
4
or gd  G  R  d   ...(ii) 2. At equator
3
= 0,
Dividing the equation (ii) by (i), we have 2 2
g’ = g – R cos 0
2
4 g’ = g – R
G  R  d    d
gd 3 R d
  or g d  g 1   ...(iii) This is minimum acceleration due to gravity.
g 4 R  R
GR
3

Therefore, the value of acceleration due to gravity

decreases with depth. The variation of acceleration due to gravity according to
the depth and the height from the earth’s surface can be
4.4 Variation of ‘g’with latitude due to Rotational motion of Earth
expressed with help of following graph.
2
Due to the rotational of the earth the force mr cos  acts
radially outwards. Hence the net force of attraction exerted
by the earth of the particle and directed towards the centre A
of the earth is given by g' Ou
h
art
2 t si
mg’ = mg – mr cos
h ee de
t
where g’ is the value of the acceleration due to gravity at et he
sid ea
rth
the point P. In

B
O depth altitude
R

r P
5. SATELLITE
R mg
R
5.1 Definition

Any smaller body which revolves around another larer

body under the influence of its gravitation is called a
satellite. The satellite may be natural or artificial.
1. The moon which revolves around the earth, is a satellite
of the earth. There are sixteen satellites revolving around
the planet Jupiter. These satellite are called natural
satellites.
GRAVITATION 216

2. A satellite made and launched into circular orbit by man is 1. If the velocity of the projection is less than the critical
called an artificial satellite. The first satellite was launched velocity then the satellite moves in elliptical orbit, but the
by USSR named SPUTNIK–I and the first Indian satellite point of projection is apogee and int he orbit, the satellite
was ‘ARYABHATTA’. comes closer to the earth with its perigee point lying at
180°. If it enters the atmosphere while coming towards
5.2 Minimum two stage rocket is used to project
perigee it will loose energy and spirally comes down. If it
a satellite in a cirular orbit round a planet does not enters the atmosphere it will contiune to move in
Suppose that a single stage launching system (i.e. a rocket), elliptical orbit.
carrying satellite at its tip, is used to project the satellite 2. If the velocity of the projection is equal to the critical velocity
from the surface of the earth. When the fuel in the rocket then the satellite moves in circular orbit round the earth.
is ignited, the rocket begins to move upwards. The rocket 3. If the velocity of the projection is greater than the critical
attains maximum velocity when all the fule is exhausted. velocity but less than the escape velocity, then the satellite
1. If the maximum velocity attained by the rocket is equal to moves in elliptical orbit and its apoagee, or point of greatest
or greater than the escape velocity, the rocket overcomes distance from the earth, will be greater than projection
the eath’s gravitational influence and escapes into space height.
alogn with the satellite. 4. If the velocity of the projection is equals to the escape
3. If the maximum velocity attained by the rocket is less velocity, then the satellite moves in parabolic path.
escape velocity, the rocket cannot overcome the earth’s 5. It the velocity of the projection is greater than the escape
gravitational influence and both the rocket and the satellite velocity, then orbit will hyperbolic and will escape the
eventually fall on the earth’s surface due to gravity. gravitational pull of the earth and continue to travel
Thus a single stage rocket is unable to launch a satellite in infinitely.
a circular orbit round the earth. Therefore a launching
system (i.e. a rocket) having two or more stages must be 6. ORBITAL VELOCITY
used to launch a satellite in a circular orbit round the earth.
6.1 Definition
5.3 Different cases of Projection
The horizontal velocity with which a satellite must be
When a satellite is taken to some height above the earth projected from a point above the earth’s surface, so that it
and then projected in the horizontal direction, the following revolves in a circular orbit round the earth, is called the
four cases may occur, depending upon the magnitude of orbital velocity of the satellite.
the horizontal velocity.
6.2 An Expression for the Critical Velocity of
a Satellite revolving round the Earth

Suppose that a satellite of mass m is raised to a height h

above the earth’s surface and then projected in a horizontal
direction with the orbital velocity vc. The satellite begins
to move round the earth in a circular orbit of radius, R + h,
where R is the radius of the earth.
GRAVITATION 217

GMm
The gravitational force acting on the satellite is 2 ,
R  h
where M is the mass of the earth and G is the constant of
gravitation.
For circular motion,
Centrifugal force = Centripetal force

mvc2 GMm
  ,
 R  h   R  h 2
GM
GM  vc  ...(i)
vc  r
 R  h If T is the period of revolution of the satellite,
This expression gives the critical velocity of the satellite. circumference of orbit 2r
Period (T)  
From the expression, it is clear that the critical velocity critical velocity vc
depends upon.
2r
1. Mass of the earth T ...(From i)
GM
2. Radius of earth and r
3. Height of the satellite above the surface of the earth.
r3
 T  2
7. PERIOD OF REVOLUTION OF A SATELLITE GM
The time taken by a satellite to complete one revolution This expression gives the periodic time of the satellite.
round the earth is called its period or periodic time (T). Squaring the expression, we get
Consider a satellite of mass m revolving in a circular orbit
4 2 r 3
with a orbital velocity vc at a height h above the surface of  T2 
GM
the earth. Let M and R be the mass and the radius of the
2 3
earth respectively. The radius (r) of the circular orbit of the  T r ...(since G and M are constants)
satellite is r = R + h. Thus, the square of the period of revolution of a satellite
For the circular motion, is directly proportional to the cube of the radius of its
orbit.
GRAVITATION 218
GRAVITATION 219

8. GRAVITATIONAL FIELD point is equal to the potential energy of a unit mass placed
at that point.
The space surrounding any mass is called a gravitational
feld. If any other mass is brought in this space, it is acted 3. If a small point mass m is placed in a gravitational field at a
upon by a gravitational force. In short, the space in which point where the gravitational potential is V, the gravitational
any mass experiences a gravitational force, is called a potential energy (P.E.) of the mass m is given by.
gravitational field. P.E. = mass × gravitational potential
= mV
9. GRAVITATIONAL INTENSITY
The gravitational intensity at any point in a gravitational GMm
P.E.  
field is defined as the force acting on a unit mass placed at r
that point.
10.1 Gravitational Potential Energy
1. The gravitational intensity (E) at a point at distrance r
Gravitational potential energy of a body at a point is
from a point mass M is given by
defined as the work done in bringing the body from infinity
GM to that point.
E (Where G is the constant of gravitation.)
r2 Let a body of mass m is displaced through a distance ‘dr’
towards the mass M, then work done given by,
2. If a point mass m is placed in a gravitational field of intensity
E, the force (F) acting on the mass m is given by r
GMm GMm
F = mE. dW  F dr 
r2
dr   dW  

r2
dr

10. GRAVITATIONAL POTENTIAL

Gravitational potential energy, U  
GMm
The gravitational potential at any point in a gravitational r
field is defined as the work done to bring a unit mass from
(i) From above equation, it is clear that gravitational potential
infinity to that point.
energy increases with increase in distance (r) (i.e. it
1. The gravitational potential (V) at a point at distance r from becomes less negative).
a point mass M is given by,
(ii) Gravitational P.E. becomes maximum (or zero) at r = .
GM
V (Where G is the constant of gravitation) 10.2 Expressions for different Energies of Satellite
r
2. The work done on a unit mass is converted into its 1. Potential Energy
potential energy. Thus, the gravitational potential at any 2. Kinetic Energy
 GRAVITATION 220

3. Total Energy and 4. Binding energy (B.E.) : From the expression for the total
4. Binding energy energy, it is clear that if the satellite is given energy equal

Let M = mass of the earth GMm

to  2  R  h  the satellite will escape to infinity where its
R = radius of the earth
m = mass of the satellite total energy is zero.
G = constant of gravitation
 GMm  GMm
h = height of satellite  B.E. = – (T.E.) =    
 
2 R  h   2 R  h 
1. Potential energy (P.E.) : The satellite is at a distance (R + h)
from the centre of the earth. 5. Binding Energy of a satellite
The minimum energy which must be supplied to a satellite,
so that it can escape from the earth’s gravitation field, is
called the binding energy of a satellite.
When the body of mass m is at rest on the earth’s surface,
its gravitational potential energy is given by,

GMm
U 
R

GMm
If the body is give an energy equal to  , it will
R
escape to infinity.

GMm
 Binding energy of the body = 
Gm1m 2 R
U
r
11. ESCAPE VELOCITY OF A BODY
GMm
 U 11.1 Expression for the escape velocity of
Rh
a body at rest on the earth’s surface
2. Kinetic energy (K.E.) : The satellite is revolving in a
circular orbit with the critical velocity (vc). Hence its kinetic The minimum velocity with which a body should be
energy is given by, projected from the surface of the earth, so that it escapes
from the earth’s gravitational field, is called the escape
1
K.E.  m vc2 velocity. Thus, if a body or a satellite is given the escape
2
velocity, its kinetic energy of projection will be equal to its
GM binding energy.
But vc 
Rh Kinetic Energy of projection = Binding Energy.

1  GM  GMm 1 GMm
 K.E.  m    mve2 
2  R  h  2R  h 2 R
3. Total energy (T.E.)
2GM
T. E = P.E. + K.E.  ve 
R
GMm GMm GMm
   11.2 Expression for ‘Ve’ in terms’s of ‘g’
R  h 2R  h 2R  h
The escape velocity for any object on the earth’s surface
The –ve sign indicates that the satellite is bound to the is given by.
earth.
 GRAVITATION 221

2GM 1 GMm
ve   mve2 
R 2 2

If m is the mass of the object, its weight mg is equal to the 2GM

gravitational force acting on it.  ve  ...(ii)
R
GMm From Eq (i) and Eq. (ii), we get,
 mg 
R2
2 ve  2 v c
 G M = gR
Substituting this value in the expression for ve we get, 12. COMMUNICATION SATELLITE
ve  2gR An artificial satellite revolving in a circular obrit round the
earth in the same sense of the rotational of the earth and
11.3 Expression for the escape velocity of a body from having same period of revolution as the period of rotation
Earth in terms of mean density of the planet of the earth (i.e. 1 day = 24 hours = 86400 seconds) is
called as geo-stationary or communication satellite.
1. Derive expression for
As relative velocity of the satellite with respective to the
2GM earth is zero it appears stationary from the earth’s surface.
ve  Therefore it is know as geo-stationary satellite or
R
geosynchronous satellite.
2. Let  be the mean density of the planet. Then,
1. The height of the communication satellite above the earth’s
4 surface is about 36000 km and its period of revolution is 24
M R 3
3 hours or 24 × 60 × 60 seconds.
2. The satellite appears to be at rest, because its speed relative
2G 4 3 to the earth is zero, hence it is called as geostationary or
ve   R 
R 3 geosynchronous satellite.

12.1 Uses of the communication satellite

2G
ve  2R 1. For sending TV signals over large distances on the earth’s
3
surface.
11.4 The escape velocity of a body from the surface of the 2. Telecommunication.
earth is 2 times its critical velocity when it 3. Weather forescasting.
revolves close to the earth’s surface 4. For taking photographs of astronomical objects.

Let M and R be the mass and radius of the earth and m be 5. For studying of solar and cosmic radations.
the mass of the body. When orbiting close to the earth’s
13. WEIGHTLESSNESS
surface, the radius of the orbit is almost equal to R. If vc is
the critical velocity of the body, then for a circular orbit. 1. The gravitational force with which a body is attracted
Centripetal force = Gravitational force towards the centre of earth is called the weight of body.
Weightlessness is a moving satellite is a feeling. It is not
GMm due to weight equal to zero.
 mv c2 
R2 2. When an astronaut is on the surface of earth, gravitational
force acts on him. This gravitational force is the weight of
GM astronaut and astronant exerts this force on the surface of
 vc  ...(i)
R earth. The surface of earth exerts an equal and opposte reaction
and due to this reaction he feels his weight on the earth.
If ve is the escape velocity from the earth’s surface,
3. for an astronaut in an orbiting satellite, the satellite and
K.E. of projection = Binding energy astronaut both have same acceleration towards the centre
 GRAVITATION 222

of earth and this acceleration is equal to the acceleration due to (The shaded areas are equal). Naturally the planet has to
gravity of earth. move faster from C to D.
4. Therefore astronaunt does not produce any action on the
floor of the satellite. Naturally the floor does not exert any
force of reaction on the astronaut. As there is no reaction,
the astronaut has a feeling of weightlessness. (i.e. no sense
of his own weight).

1. The sensation of weightlessness experienced by an

aastronaut is not the result of there being zero gravitational area swept
Areal velocity 
acceleration, but of there being zero difference between time
the acceleration of the spacecraft and the acceleration of
1
the astronaut. r rd
1 d
 2  r2  cosntant
2. The most common problem experienced by astronauts in dt 2 dt
the initial hours of weightlessness is known as space 1 2
adaptation snydrome (space sickness). Hence r  = constant.
2
14.3 Law of Periods
14. KEPLER’S LAWS
The square of the time for the planet to complete a
14.1 Law of Orbit revolution about the sun is proportional to the cube of
semimajor axis of the elliptical orbit.
Each Planet move surround the sun in an elliptical orbit
with the sun at one of the foci as shown in figure. The
eccentricity of an ellipse is defined as the ratio of the
SO
distance SO and AO i.e. e 
AO
SO
 e SO  ea
a i.e. Centripetal force = Gravitational force

mv 2 GMm GM
 2
  v2
R R R

Now, velocity of the planet is

Circumference of the circular orbit 2R

v 
Time period T

The distance of closest approach with sun at F1 is AS. Substituting Value in above equation
This distance is called perigee. The greatest distance (BS)
of the planet from the sun is called apogee. GM 4 2 R 2 2 4 2 R 3
  or T 
Perigee (AS) = AO – OS = a – ea = a (1 – e)
R T2 GM

apogee (BS) = OB + OS = a + ea = a (1 + e)  4 2 
Since   is constant,

14.2 Law of Area  GM 
The line joining the sun and a planet sweeps out equal
areas in equal intervals of time. A planet takes the same T2
 T 2  R 3 or  constant
time to travel from A to B as from C to D as shown in figure. R3
GRAVITATION 223

14.4 Gravity Astronomical Data

Gravity is the force of attraction exerted by earth towards is

centre on a body lying on or near the surface of earth. Gravity
is merely a special case of gravitation and is also called
earth’s gravitational pull.
Weight of a body is defined as the force of attraction exerted
by the earth on the body towards its centre.
The units and dimenstions of gravity pull or weight are the
same as those of force.

LAUNCHING OF AN ARTIFICIAL SATELLITE AROUND EARTH

The satellite is placed upon the rocket which is launched from the earth. After the rocket reaches its maximum vertical height
h, a spherical mechanism gives a thrust to the satellite at point A (figure) producing a horizontal velocity v. The total energy
of the satellite at A is thus,

1 GMm
E mv 2 
2 Rh
The orbit will be an ellipse (closed path), a parabola, or an hyperbola depending on whether E is negative, zero, or positive. In all cases
the centre of the earth is at one focus of the path. If the energy is too low, the elliptical orbit will intersect the earth and the satellite will
fall back. Otherwise it will keep moving in a closed orbit, or will escape from the earth, depending on the values of v and R.
Hence a satellite carried to a height h (<< R) and given a horizontal velocity of 8 km/sec will be placed almost in a circular orbit
around the earth (figure). If launched at less than 8 km/sec, it would get closer and closer to earth until it hits the ground. Thus
8 km/sec is the critical (minimum) velocity.

14.5 Intertial mass GM m G F F

F or m G  
Inertial mass of a body is related to its inertia in linear motion; R 2
GM / R 2
 I 
and is defined by Newton’s second law of motion.
The mass mG of the body in this sence is the gravitational
Let a body of mass mi move with acceleration a under the mass of the body. The intertia of the body has no effect on
action of an external force F. According to Newton’s second the gravitational mass of the body.
law of motion, F = mi a or mi = F/a
mG = F
Thus, inertial mass of a body is equal to the magnitude of
Thus, Gravitational mass of a body is defined as the
external force required to produce unit acceleration in the
magnitude of gravitational pull experienced by the body in
body.
a gravitational field of unit intensity.
14.6 Gravitational mass
14.7 Centre of Gravity
Gravitational mass of a body is related to gravitational pull
Centre of gravity of a body placed in the gravitational field is
on the body, and is defined by Newton’s law of gravitational.
that point where the net gravitational force of the field acts.
GRAVITATION 224

SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1
Sol. Following are the basic conditions :
Gravitational force is a weak force but still it is considered (i) The rocket must take the satellite to a suitable height above
the most important force. Why ? surface of earth.

Sol. Gravitational force plays an important role for initiating the (ii) From the desired height, the satellite must be projected with
birth of stars, for controlling the entire structure of the a suitable speed, called the orbital speed.
universe and evolution of the universe. It helped to explain (iii) In the orbital path of satellite, the air resistance should be
many natural phenomena. negligible so that its speed does not decrease and it does
Example - 2 not burn due to the heat produced.

Is the value of g same every where on the surface of Example - 6

earth ? How has it been decided ? Two artificial satellites, one close to the surface and the
other away are revolving around the earth. Which has
Sol. The value of g is different places on the surface of earth. larger speed ?
The shape of the earth is not exactly spherical ; it is flattened
at the poles and is bulging out at the equator. Due to which Sol. The relation for orbital speed is v = GM /  R  h  , where
the radius of the earth is smaller at poles and is larger at
2
equator. Since, g  1/R , therefore, the acceleration due to h is the height of the satellite above the earth’s surface.
gravity is smaller at equator than that at poles. Clearly, the smaller is the value of h, greater is the value of v
and vice versa. Hence, satellite revolving close to earth has
Example - 3
larger speed.
The line that joins the Saturn to the Sun sweeps areas
Example - 7
A1, A2 and A3 in time intervals of 6 weeks, 3 weeks and
2 weeks respectively as shown in the figure. What is the Should the speed of two artificial satellites of the earth
correct relation between A1, A2 and A3 ? having different masses but the same orbital radius, be the
3 weeks same ?
A2
Sol. Yes, it is so because the orbital speed of a satellite is
independent of the mass of a satellite. Therefore, the speeds
6 weeks A3 2 weeks
A1 of the artificial satellites of different masses but of the same
Sun orbital radius will be the same.
Saturn
Example - 8
Sol. According to Kepler’s law of area, the areal velocity of planet What would happen if gravity suddenly disappear ?
around the sun is constant. Therefore,
A1 > A2 > A3 and A1 = 2, A2, A1 = 3 A3. Sol. If gravity suddently disappears,
Example - 4 (i) all bodies will lose their weights.
Earth is continuously pulling Moon towards its centre. Why (ii) We shall be thrown away from the surface of earth due to
does not Moon fall on to Earth. centrifugal force.
(iii) The motion of planets around the sun will cease because
Sol. It is so because the gravitational attraction of earth provides centripetal force shall not be provided.
the necessary centripetal force to the moon for its orbital
motion around the earth. Due to it, the moon is revolving (iv) Motion of the satellite around earth will also be not possible
around the earth. as no centripetal force will be provided.
Example - 5 Example - 9
What are the conditions under which a rocket fired from Why are space rockets usually launched from west to east
the Earth, launches an artificial satellite of Earth ? in the equatorial line ?
GRAVITATION 225

Sol. We know that earth revolves from west to east about its Sol. The distance between moon and earth is very small as
polar axis. Therefore, all the particles on the earth have compared to the distance between earth and sun. Since, the
velocity from the west to east. This velocity is maximum in tidal effect on oscen water of earth is inversely proportional
the equatorial line, as v = R , where R is the radius of earth to the cube of the distance, therefore, tidal effect on oscen
and  is the angular velocity of revolution of earth about its water due to moon is larger than that due to sun.
polar axis. When a rocket is launched from west to east in Example - 14
equatorial plane, the maximum linear velocity is added to
Why does a body lose weight at the centre of the earth ?
the launching velocity of the rocket, due to it, launching
becomes easier. Sol. The weight of the body is the force with which the body is
Example - 10 attracted by the earth towards its centre. Quantitatively, the
The escape speed of the projectile on the earth’s surface weight of body of mass m is equal to mg. Where g is the
is ve. A body is projected out with thrice of this speed. acceleration due to gravity. At the centre of earth, g = 0, so
What is the speed of the body after crossing the weight of body is zero at the centre of earth.
gravitational field of the earth ? Ignore the presence of Example - 15
Sun and the another planets.
Explain, why a tennis ball bounces higher on hills than in
Sol. The speed with which the projectile is projected, v = 3 ve. plains.
Let. m be the mass of the projectile and v0 be the speed of
projectile after crossing the gravitational field. Using law of Sol. Let u be the velocity of the tennis ball with which it bounces
conservation of energy, we have at a place, where acceleration due to gravity is g’. The ball
will go up till its velocity becomes zero. If h is the height
1 1 1 upto which the ball rises up at a place, then initial K.E. of
mv02  mv2  mve2 or v02  v 2  ve2
2 2 2 ball is equal to final P.E. of ball at highest point. i.e.,

2 1 u2
or v 0 v 2  v e2   3v e   v e2  2 2 v e mu 2  m g h or h 
2 2 g
Example - 11
As acceleration due to gravity (g’) on hill is less than that
Will 1 kg sugar be more at poles or at the equator. on the surface of earth (due to altitude effect), so the tennis
ball will bounce higher on hills than on plains.
Sol. The value of g is larger at the poles than at the equator. If
Example - 16
the sugar is weighed in a physical balance then there will be
no difference. If it is weighed by a spring balance, calibrated Air friction increases the velocity of the satellite. Explain.
at the equator, then 1 kg of sugar will have a lesser amount
Sol. If a statellite of mass m is revolving in a circular orbit of
at poles.
radius r, with speed v around the earth of mass M, the
Example - 12 centripetal force is provided by the gravitational pull, i.e.,

Why does moon have no atmosphere ? mv 2 GM m 2

 or mv r = GM m
r r2
Sol. Moon has no atmosphere because the value of acceleration
due to gravity ‘g’ on surface of moon is small. Therefore, or (mvr) v = GM m = a constant
the value of escape speed on the surface of moon is small or Lv = a constant
–1
(only 2.5 km s ). The molecules of the atmospheric gases
where mvr = L is the angular momentum of the satellite. As
on the surface of the moon have thermal speeds greater
the air friction causes the retarding torque, it will decrease
than the escape speed. That is why all the molecules of
the angular momentum L of the satellite. Due to it, the
gases have escaped and there is no atmosphere on moon.
velocity of the satellite v increases in order to keep Lv = a
Example - 13 constant.

Although gravitation pull of sun on earth is more than that Example - 17

of moon, yet moon’s contribution towards tide formation A body is taken from the centre of the earth to the moon.
on earth is greater than that due to sun. Why ? What will be the changes in the weight of the body ?
GRAVITATION 226

Sol. The weight of the body at the centre of earth will be zero Example - 22
because g = 0 there. The weight of the body will increase in Why is gravitational potential energy negative ?
moving from the centre of the surface of earth (due to
increase in g) and becomes maximum at the surface of earth. Sol. Because it arises due to attractive forces.
In moving above the surface of earth, the weight of body
will decrease (due to decrease in g) and at one place, where Example - 23
the gravitational attractions of earth and moon are equal Why do different planets have different escape speeds ?
and opposite, the weight will become zero. Beyond this up
to moon, the gravitational attraction of the moon becomes
Sol. As, escape speed = 2 GM / R , therefore its values are
prominent, hence the weight of body will go on increasing.
different for different planets which are of different masses
Example - 18
and different sizes.
If an earth satellite moves to a lower orbit there issome
dissipation of energy, and yet its speed increases. Explain. Example - 24
Sol. The orbiting satellite loses kinetic energy due to atmospheric What is the sense of rotation of stationary satellite around
friction. Therefore, in a particular orbit, the gravitational the earth ?
attraction on the satellite becomes greater than the force
required to keep the satellite in that orbit. Due to it, the Sol. West to East.
satellite moves down towards the earth into a lower orbit. In Example - 25
the lower orbit the potential energy decreases (becomes The distances of two planets from the Sun are 10 and
13

more negative) so that the K.E. correspondingly increases. 12

10 metre respectively. Find the ratio of time periods and
That is why, the satellite describes a smaller orbit with speed of the two planets.
increased speed. Infact, due to atmospheric friction, the
satellite spirals down towards the earth with increasing speed 13 12 T1 v
and ultimately burns out in the lower denser atmosphere. Sol. Here, r1 = 10 m; r2 = 10 m;  ?; 1  ?
T2 v2
Example - 19
3/ 2
Moon travellers tie heavy weight at their back before T2 r3 T r   1013 
landing on the moon. Why ? Now 12  13 or 1   1    12   10 10
T2 r2 T2  r2   10 
Sol. The value of g on moon is small, therefore, the weight of
moon travellers will also be small. 2 r1 2 r2
v1  and v 2 
T1 T2
Example - 20
Is it possible to put an artificial satellite on an orbit in such v1 r1 T2 1013 1 1
a way that it always remains visible directly over      
v 2 r2 T1 1012 10 10 10
Chandigarh ?
Example - 26
Sol. No, because to put an artificial satellite in an orbit such that Let the speed of the planet at the perihelion P in figure be
it always remains directly over a particular place, its time vp and the sun-planet distance SP ber rp. Relate rp, vp to the
period should be the same as that of the earth in the corresponding quantities at the aphelion (rA, vA). Will the
equatorial plane. As Chandigarh does not lie on the equatorial planet take equal times to traverse BAC and CPB ?
plane, a geostationary satellite cannot be seen over
Chandigarh.
B
Example - 21
When a body falls towards earth, earth moves towards the
body. Why is earth’s motion not noticed ?
P A
S S'
Sol. The motion of earth is not noticed because the acceleration
produced in earth is negligible small, due to large mass of C
the earth.
GRAVITATION 227
  Example - 28
Sol. Refer figure, we note that rp and v p are perpendicular to
  Three equal masses of m kg each are fixed at the vertices
each other. Similarly, rA and v A are perpendicular to each
of an equilateral triangle ABC. Figure. (i) What is the force
other. Using the law of conservation of angular momentum. acting on a mass 2 m placed at the centroid G of the triangle ?
Angular momentum of planet at P = angular momentum of (ii) What is the force if the mass at the vertex A is doubled ?
planet at A Take AG = BG = CG = 1 m.
B A

vP
A
P rP rA
S
vA

C G

mPvPrP = mPvArA
B C
v P rA
or 
vA rP Sol. (i) Refer figure, the gravitational force on mass 2 m at G due
to mass at A is,
Since, rA > rP, so vP > vA.
Am
Here, area SBAC is greater than area SCPB. As the areal
velocity of a planet is constant around the sun, i.e., equal
areas are swept in equal time. Hence planet will take longer
F1
time to traverse BAC than CPB.
Example - 27 G
D E
Gravitational force between a point masses m and M 30° 30°
separated by a distance is F. Now if a point mass 3 m is F2 F3
m m
placed next to m, what will be the (a) force on M due to m H C
B
(b) total force on M ?
m  2m 2
Sol. (a) If r is the distance between two point masses m and M, F1  G = 2 G m along GA
12
then the gravitational force on m due to mass M is
Gravitational force on mass 2 m at G due to mass at B is,
GM m
F . m2m
r2 F2  G 2
= 2 G m along GB.
12
Since, the gravitational force between two point masses is
Gravitational force on mass 2 m at G due to mass at C is,
independent of the presence of other masses, so if a point
mass 3 m is placed next to m, the force on M due to m2m 2
F3  G = 2G m along GC.
12
GM m
mF
r2 Draw DE parallel to BC passing through point G. Then EGC
= 30° = DGB.
(b) Total force on body of mass M is,
 
Resolving F2 and F3 into two rectangular components, we
GM   m  3m 
F  have
r2
F2 cos 30° along GD and F2 sin 30° along GH; F3 cos 30°
4 GM m along GE and F3 sin 30° along GH.
  4F
r2 Here, F2 cos 30° and F3 cos 30° are equal in magnitude and
 GRAVITATION 228

acting in opposite directions, cancel out each other. The resultant

4
force on the mass 2 m at G is  weight at a height h = mg’ = 6.4 × 10 × N
9
= F1 – (F2 sin 30° + F3 sin 30°)
= 28.44 N
2  2 1 2 1 Example - 31
= 2Gm –  2G m   2 G m    0.
 2 2
Ffind the percentage decrease in the weight of the body
(ii) When mass at A is 2 m, then gravitational force on mass 2 m when taken to a height of 16 km above the surface of Earth.
at G due to mass 2 m at A is Radius of the Earth is 6400 km.

2m  2m 2
Sol. Here, h = 16 km, R = 6400 km.
F1  G = 4 G m along GA
12
 2h  2 hg
The resultant force on mass 2 m at G due to masses at A, B Now g   g  1    g or g – g’ = 2gh/R.
 R  R
and C is = F1 – (F2 sin 30° + F3 sin 30°)
mg  mg  g  g
 % decrease in weight =  100  100
 1 1 mg g
 4 G m2   2 G m2   2G m2  
 2 2
2 gh 16
= 2 G m along GA   100  2   100 = 0.5%.
gR 6400
Example - 29
A planet whose size is the same and mass 4 times as that of Example - 32
Earth, find the amount of energy needed to lift a 2 kg mass How much below the surface does the acceleration due to
vertically upwards through 2m distance on the planet. The gravity become 70% of its value on the surface of Earth.
–2 6
value of g on the surface of Earth is 10 ms . Radius of Earth = 6.4 × 10 m.

Sol. Let M, R be the mass and radius of earth. Therefore, mass of Sol. Here g’/g = 70/100 = 7/10 and d = ?
planet M’ = 4 M and radius of planet R’ = R
Let g, g’ be the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of  d g d 7 d
Now g   g  1   ;   1  or  1
earth and planet respectively. Then,  R g R 10 R

GM GM  G 4 M d 7 3
g 2
and g    or  1 
R R 2 R2 R 10 10
–2
= 4 g = 4 × 10 = 40 m s
3R 3  6.4  106
 Energy needed to lift the body = mg’ h = 2 × 40 × 2 = 160 J or d 
10 10
Example - 30 6
= 1.92 × 10 m
A body weighs 64 N on the surface of Earth. What is the
gravitational force on it due to the Earth, at a height equal Example - 33
to half the radius of Earth. Acceleration due to gravity on Calculate that imaginary angular velocity of the earth for
–2
the surface of Earth is 10 ms . which effective acceleration due to gravity at the equator
becomes zero. In this condition, find the length (in hours)
Sol. Weight of body = mg = 64 N –2
of a day ? Radius of earth = 6400 km. g = 10 ms .

64 64 Sol. At equator, latitude  = 0°. Let g be the acceleration due to

 mass of body, m = g  10  6.4 kg.
gravity if the earth were at rest. The acceleration due to
gravity (g’) at the equator, when earth is rotating with angular
At height h, the value of g’ is given by,
velocity  be zero.
2  2
R2  R  4  g’ = g – R  cos  = 0
g’ = g 2
 10    10  2 2 2
R  h  R R/2 9 or g = R  cos 0° = R  ( = 0°)
GRAVITATION 229

g 10 –3 –1 a
or   = 1.25 × 10 rad s . Thus, OA = OB = OC =
R 6400  103 3

 New time period of rotation of earth The gravitational intensity at O due to mass m at A is,

g 10 Gm Gm
  IA   along OA.
= 5024 s = 1.4 h.  OA 
 2
R 6400 103  a/ 3 
Example - 34 Similarly the gravitational intensity at O due to mass m at B
Two bodies of masses 100 kg and 10,000 kg are at a distance is,
1m apart. At which point on the line joining them will the
resultant gravitational field intensity is zero ? Gm Gm
IB  2
 2 along OB
 OB  a / 3 
Sol. Let x be the distance of the point P from 100 kg body where
the resultant gravitational intensity is zero.
and gravitational intensity at O due to mass m at C is,
 Gravitational intensity at P due to body of mass 100 kg is
equal and opposite to that due to body of mass 10,000 kg. Gm Gm
IC   along OC.
Hence,  OC 
2 2
a / 3 
G  100 G  10, 000
 As IA, IB and IC are equal in magnitude and equally inclined
x2 1  x 
2
to each other, the resultant gravitational intensity at O is
or
2
10 x = (1 – x)
2 zero.

or 10x = 1 – x Gravitational potential at O due to masses at A, B and C is

or 11x = 1 or x = 1/11 m. Gm  Gm   Gm  3Gm 3Gm

V    
Example - 35 OA  OB   OC  OA a / 3
Three particles, each of mass m are placed at the vertices
of an equilateral triangle of side a. What are the gravitational 3 3 Gm

field and gravitational potential at the centroid of the a
triangle.
Example - 36
Sol. Refer figure, O is the centroid of triangle ABC, where A satellite orbits the earth at a height of 600 km from its
surface. Calculate (i) kinetic energy (ii) potential energy
A
m (iii) total energy. Mass of the satellite is 300 kg, mass of the
24 6
earth is 6 × 10 kg, radius of the earth is 6.4 × 10 m and G
–11 2 –2
is 6.67 × 10 N m kg . Will your answer alter if the earth
were to shrink suddently to half its size ?

F IA E 6 3 6
Sol. Here, r = R + h = 6.4 × 10 + 600 × 10 = 7.0 × 10 m;
O 24
m = 300 kg; M = 6 × 10 kg;
–11 2 –2
IB IC G = 6.67 × 10 Nm kg .
m m
B D C 1 1 Gm
(i) K.E. of satellite = mv2  m
2 2 r
2 2
OA  AD  (AB sin 60°)
3 3 1
  300 

6.67 1011  6  1024 9
= 8.7 × 10 J
  
2 7  106
2 3 3 a
 a a  (ii) P.E. of the satellite
3 2 2 3
GRAVITATION 230

Example - 38
=– 
11
 24
GM m  6.67 10  6 10  300    What is the minimum energy required to launch a satellite
r 7  106 of mass m kg from the earth’s surface of radius R in a
= – 17.4 × 10 J
9 circular orbit at an altitude of 2 R ?
9 9
(iii) Total energy = K.E. + P.E. = 8.7 × 10 + (– 17.4 × 10 ) Sol. Energy of satellite on the surface of earth
9
= – 8.7 × 10 J
GM m mg R 2
If the earth shrinks suddenly to half its radius (R becomes) E1      mg R ...(i)
R/2) but distance r remains unchanged, then the answer will R R
not alter. If v is the velocity of the satellite at the distance 2R from the
Example - 37 surface of the earth, then total energy of the satellite
Find the potential energy of a system of four particles 1 GM m
2
each of mass m placed at the vertices of a square of side l. E2 = K.E. + P.E. = 2 mv   2R  R  ...(ii)
Also obtain the potential at the centre of the square.
Orbital velocity of satellite,
Sol. Refer to figure.
A l B GM GM
v or v2 
2R  R 3R

So, 1 mv 2  GM m
l l 2 6R
O
GM m GM m GM m mg R
 E2    
6R 3R 6R 6
D l C
 Minimum energy required to launch the satellite is
AC = BD = l 2
1 5
 2  = E2 – E1 =  mgR + mg R  mg R .
OA = OB = OC = OD =  6 6
2 2
Example - 39
Using superposition principle, total potential energy of the
A remote sensing satellite of the Earth in a circular orbit at
system of four particles placed at the vertices A, B, C and D
a height of 400 kg above the surface of Earth. What is the
of a square is
(a) orbital speed, and (b) period of revolution of satellite ?
6
Radius of Earth = 6 × 10 m and acceleration due to gravity
 G m  m   G m  m G m  m  2
U    at the surface of Earth is 10 m/s .
 AB   BC AC 
6 2
Sol. Here, R = 6 × 10 m; g = 10 m/s ;
 G m  m G m  m  G m  m  3 6
    h = 400 × 10 m = 0.4 × 10 m
 AD BD CD 
g 10
4 G m 2 2G m 2 2 G m 2  1  (a) Orbital speed, v  R  6  106
   2   Rh 6  106  0.4  106
  2   2
3
= 7.5 × 10 m/s.
5.414 Gm 2
 2 R  h
3
 (b) Period of revolution, T 
R g
Total Gravitational potential at the centre O of the square is
3

V
G m  4 4 Gm
  4 2
Gm
. 
2   22 / 7   6  10 6
 0.4  10 6  = 5368.5 s
OA / 2  6  10 6 10
GRAVITATION 231

Example - 40 Example - 43
An Earth satellite has time period of 90 minutes. Assuming A saturn year is 29.5 times the Earth year. How far is the
8
the orbit to be circular, calculate its height. Given, radius of Saturn from the sun if the Earth is 1.50 × 10 km away from
–2
Earth = 6380 km, g at the surface of Earth = 9.8 ms . the Sun ?

Sol. Here, T = 90 minutes = 90 × 60 s = 5400 s; Sol. As we know from the Kepler’s third law
6 –2
R = 6380 km = 6380 × 1000 m = 6.38 × 10 m; g = 9.8 ms .
T12 R13
1

T22 R 32
 g R 2T2 3
We know, h   2  R
 4  2/3 2/3
T   29.5 
 R 2  R1  2  
 1.5 108  
1  T1   1 
 9.8  6.38 106 2   5400 2  3

   6.38  106 8
2 = (1.5 × 10 ) × 9.547
 4   22 / 7  
  = 14.32 × 10 km.
8

6
= 6.652 × 10 – 6.380 × 10 = 2.72 × 10 m.
6 5 Example - 44
Two bodies of masses m1 and m2 are placed at a distance ‘r’
Example - 41
a part. Show that the position where the gravitational field
Determine the escape speed of Moon. Given, the radius of due to them is zero, the potential is given by
6 22
Moon is 1.74 × 10 m, its mass is 7.36 × 10 kg. Does your
answer throw light on why the Moon has no atmosphere ? –G (m1 + m2 + 2 m1m2 / r.
–11 2 –2
G = 6.67 × 10 N m kg .
Sol. Consider the two bodies A and B of masses m1 and m2
6 22
Sol. Here, R = 1.74 × 10 m; M = 7.36 × 10 kg; produce zero resultant gravitational field at C, where AC = x.
–11 2 –2
G = 6.67 × 10 Nm kg , ve = ? We have, BC = (r – x)

2 GM 2  6.67 1011  7.3 1022 Hence,

Gm1 Gm2
ve   
R 1.74 106 x2 r  x
2

–1 –1
= 2375 ms = 2.38 km s .
m1 m2
Since, the average thermal speed of the gas molecules like or 
oxygen, hydrogen etc. on the surface of Moon is greater x r  x 
–1
than the escape speed of moon (= 2.38 km s ), hence these
gases have escaped from the surface of Moon and Moon or (r –x) m1  x m 2
has no atmosphere.
Example - 42 r m1
or x
Assuming the Earth to be a sphere of uniform mass density, m1  m 2
how much would a body weigh half way down to the centre
of the Earth if it weighed 250 N on the surface ?
 
r m1
and r  x  r   
 d  d  m1  m 2 
Sol. As gd = g 1    mgd = mg 1  
 R  R

R  r m2 
Here, d =  
2  m1  m 2 
 R
1  2  1
Hence, mgd = (250) ×    250  = 12.5 N. 1 m1  m 2
 R  2 Thus, 
  x r m1
GRAVITATION 232

1 m1  m 2 h
and   0.414
R
r  x r m2
3
h = 0.414 × 6400 × 10
Gravitational potential at P
h = 6400 × 414
2
Gm1  Gm2  h = 414 × 64 × 10
 m1 m 2 
     G    2
h = 26496 × 10 m
x   r  x    x r x
3
h = 2649.6 × 10 m
h = 2649.6 km

 G  m1
 m1  m 2 m  2 m1  m 2 


Example - 46
 r m1 r m1 
  At a certain height above the surface of the earth the
gravitational acceleration is 90% of its value at the earth’s
G surface. Determine that height above the earth’s surface.

r 
m1  
m1  m 2  m 2  
m1  m 2 
 (Radius of the earth is 6400 km).

G 2

r 
m1  m 2  2 m1m 2  .
   R 
Sol. g h    g
Rh
Example - 45
2
At what height from the surface of earth the value of gh  R 
 
acceleration due to gravity will fall to half that on the surface g Rh
of the earth (radius of earth R = 6400 km)
2
9  R 
Sol. Given :  
3
10  R  h 
R = 6400 km = 6400 × 10 m
Rh 10
1 
gh = g R 9
2
To Find : h = ? Rh 1
= AL [log 10 – log 9]
We have, R 2
2
 R  Rh 1 
gh    g = AL   0.0458
Rh R 2 

gh R2 Rh
 = AL = [0.0229]
g  R  h 2 R

2 Rh
1  R  = 1.054
  R
2 Rh
RhR
R 1 = 1.054 – 1
 R
Rh 2
h
Rh = 0.054
 2 R
R
h = 0.054 × 6400
RhR h = 64 × 5.4
 1.414  1
R h = 345.6 km
GRAVITATION 233

Example - 47 2
1  4   9.8
Calculate the acceleration due to gravity at the surface of g2 
6 80
the earth (radius of earth R = 6.4 × 10 m, means density of
3
the earth = 5.5 × 103 kg/m )
16  9.8
g2 
Sol. We have, 80
2 2
GM = gR g2 = 1.96 m/s

GM Example - 49
 g ...(1)
R2 Find the height of a satellite from the surface of the earth
–11 2 2
whose critical velocity is 5 km/s. (G = 6.67 × 10 Nm /kg
24
M mass of earth M = 6 × 10 kg and radius of earth

V R = 6400 km).

M=×V
GM
4  Sol. vc 
  R 3   Rh
...(2)
3 
GM
substituting (2) in (1) vc2 
Rh
G 4 3
g  R   GM
R2 3  Rh 
v2c
4R G
g
3 6.67 1011  6  1024
Rh 
25  106
4  3.142  6.4 106  5.5  103  6.67  1011

3 40.02  1013  106
Rh 
25
12.568  35.2  6.67 102 7
 g R + h = 1.6008 × 10
3 7
h = (1.6008 × 10 ) – R
–2
g = 4.189 × 35.2 × 6.67 × 10 h = 1.6008 × 10 – 6400 × 10
7 3

–2
g = AL [log 4.189 + log 35.2 + log 6.67] × 10 h = 16.008 × 10 – 6.4 × 10
6 6

6
g  AL  0.6229  1.5465  0.8241  2.9927   102 h = 9.608 × 10 m
–2 h = 9608 km
g = 983.3 × 10
2
g = 9.833 m/s Example - 50
Calculate the critical speed of a satellite orbiting close to the
Example - 48 2
earth’s surface. (Radius of the earth R = 6400 km, g = 9.8 m/s ).
Find the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the
moon. Given that the mass of the moon is 1/80 times that of Sol.  The satellite is orbiting very lose to the surface of the
the earth and the diameter of the moon is 1/4 times that of earth
2
the earth (g = 9.8 m/s ).
 R+h  R

Sol. Taking ratio of ‘g’ we get GM

 vc 
R
g 2 M 2 R12
   2
g1 M1 R 22 But GM = gR
GRAVITATION 234

 vc  gR 66.7  5.98  106


8
v c  9.8  6.4  106
66.7  5.98
vc  9.8  6.4 103 103
8

1 
vc  AL   log 9.8  log 6.4    103 1 
2   AL   log 66.7  log 5.98  log 8   103
 2 

1 
vc  AL   0.9912  0.8062  1.7974   103 1 
 2   AL  1.8241  0.776700.9031  1.6977   103
2 
3
1  = AL [0.8488] × 10
vc  AL  1.7974   103 3
2  = 7.06 × 10 m/s
3
vc = 7.920 × 10 m/s = 7.06 km/s
vc = 7.920 km/s Hence the body will not revolve round the earth.
Example - 52
Example - 51
A satellite is revolving around the earth in a circular orbit
A body is raised to a height of 1600 km above the earth’s 7
at a distance of 10 m from its centre. Find the speed of
surface and projected with a horizontal velocity of 6 km/s. –11
the satellite. (G = 6.67 × 10 S.I. unit and mass of earth
Will it revolve around the earth as a satellite ? 24
–11
= 6 × 10 kg)
(G = 6.67 × 10 S.I. unit, radius of earth R = 6400 km, mass
24
of earth = 5.98 × 10 kg) GM
Sol. 
Rh
Sol. In order that the body revolves in circular orbit round the
earth
6.67  1011  6 1024
Horizontal Velocity = Critical Velocity 
107
GM
vc 
Rh  6.67  6 1013 107

 40.02  103 = 6.326 km/s

6.67  1011  5.98  1024
 Velocity is 6.326 km/s
 6400  1600 10 
3

Example - 53
What would be the new period of rotation of the earth
6.67  5.98 1013
 around the Sun if the distance between the earth and the
8000  103
sun is doubled ?

6.67  5.98  1013  106 2

Sol. T  r
3

8
T22 r23
 
6.67  5.98  107 T12 r13

8
T12  r23
T22 
6.67  5.98  107 r13

8 = 1 × (2)
3
GRAVITATION 235

T22  8 T12  r13

T2  8 year T22  r23

2 3
T2  2 2  T1   r1 
   
T2 = 2 × 1.414  T2   r2 
T2 = 2.828 years
2 3
 T2 = 2.82 × 365  8   r1 
   
= 1032 days  1   r2 

Example - 54 r1 4
 ...(2)
A communication satellite is at a height of 36000 km from r2 1
earth’s surface. What will be its new period when it is
brought down to a height of 20,000 km (Radius of earth vc1 1
= 6400 km)  ... from (1) and (2)
v c2 4
Sol. As per kepler’s law,
2 3 vc1 1
T r  
vc2 2
2 3
 T2   r2 
    Example - 56
 T1   r1  Calculate the height of a communication satellite.
–11 2 2 24
2 3 (G = 6.67 × 10 Nm /kg ; mass of earth = 5.98 × 10 kg,
 T2   26.4  6
  24    42.4  radius of earth = 6.4 × 10 S.I. units).
   

T2  26.4 
3/ 2
r3
   Sol. T  2
24  42.4  GM

3   r3 
T2  AL   log 26.4  log 24   log 42.4  T 2  4 2  
 2   GM 
 T2 = AL [(2.1324 + 1.3802) – 2.4410]
 T2 = AL [1.0716] T 2  GM
r3 
4 2
 T2 = 11.79 hours

Example - 55 24  24  3600  3600  6.67  1011  5.98  1024

r3 
Compare the critical speeds of two satellites if the ratio of 4  9.872
their periods is 8 : 1.
576 1296  6.67  5.98  104  1013
r3 
GM 39.488
Sol. vc1  r1
1
r  AL [log 576  log1296  log 6.67  log 5.98  17 log10)
3
GM
v c2 
r2  log 39.488]

v c1 r2 1 
 r  AL   2.7604  3.1126  0.824  0.7767  17   1.5964  
v c2 r1 ...(1) 3 
GRAVITATION 236

1 Example - 58
 r  AL  22.8774  Determine the (a) K.E. (b) P.E. (c) total energy and (d)
3
binding energy of a satellite of mass 50 kg in a circular
 r = AL (7.6258) orbit round the earth at a height of 600 km, above the
6 6
= 42.24 × 10 – 6.4 × 10 earth’s surface (Radius of earth R = 6400 km; mass of earth
24 –11
=R+h M = 6 × 10 kg, G = 6.67 × 10 S.I. units).
6
 h = 42.24 × 10 – 6.4
6 GMm
= 42.24 × 10 m Sol. P.E. 
6
Rh
h = 35.84 × 10 m
= 35840 km 6.67  6  50 1011 1024

Example - 57 7 106
Calculate the work done in mowing a body of mass 1000 kg
6.67  6  50  1013
a from a height R to a height 2R above the surface of 
–11 2 2
the earth. (G = 6.67 × 10 Nm /kg , mass of the earth 7  106
24
M = 6 × 10 kg. Radius of earth R = 6400 km).
6.67  6  50
  10 7
Sol. r1 = R + h1 7
=R+R ... (h1 = R)
6.67  30
=2R   108
7
r2 = R + h2 8
= – AL [(log 6.67 + log 30) – log 7)] × 10
= R + 2R ... (h2 = R) 8
= – AL {[0.8241 + 1.4771) – 0.8451]} × 10
=3R
 W = P.E.2 – P.E.1   AL  2.3012  0.8451 108 = – 2.859 × 109 J

GMm  GMm  GMm

   K.E. 
r2  r1  2R  h

GMm GMm  1  GMm   1 

          P.E.
r1 r2  2  R  h   2 

1 1 1
 GMm    
2

 2.852  109 
 r1 r2 
9
= 1.4295 × 10 J
GMm  1 1 
    GMm
R  2 3
T. E. = 2  R  h 
GMm 1
 
R 6  1  GMm 
   
 2  R  h 
6.67  1011  6  1024  103
Work done 
6.4  106  6 1
   P.E.
2
6.67 1013  103

6.4 1
10

2
 
 2.852 109 = – 1.4295 × 109 J
= 1.042 × 10 J
GRAVITATION 237

GMm GMm
B.E.  B.E.  (for satellite at height h)
2R  h 2R  h

 GMm  6.67  1011  5.98  1024  80

  1   
 2R  h  
2 2  106 
9
= (–1) (T.E.) = 1.4295 × 10 J
6.67  5.98  8  108

Example - 59 28
8
What will be the B.E. of a satellite of mass 80 kg revolving = AL [(log 6.67 + log 5.98) – log 2] × 10
in an orbit close to earth’s surface. Also calculate its B.E. = AL [0.8241 + 0.7767 – 0.3010] × 10
8

at a height of 1600 km from earth’s surface. (Mass of earth 8

24 = AL [1.6008 – 0.3010] × 10
= 5.98 × 10 kg; radius of earth = 6400 km). 8
= AL (1.2998) × 10
9
GMm = 1.994 × 10 J.
Sol. B.E.  2  R  h 
Example - 60
Calculate the escape velocity from the surface of the planet
GMm of radius 2000 km, if acceleration due to gravity at the
 2
2R surface of the planet is 2.5 m/s .

1  6.67 1011  5.98 1024  80 

   2GM
2 6.4 106  Sol. ve 
R

1  6.67  5.98  80 107  2gR 2

   ve 
2 6.4  R

1  6.67  5.98  8  108  ve  2 gR

  
2 6.4 
v e  2  2.5  2  106
1
   AL   log 6.67  log 5.98  log 8   log 6.4    108 v e  4  2.5  106
2 

1 v e  10  10 6
  AL  0.8241  0.7767  0.9031  2.5039   0.8062   108
2
ve  10  103
1
  AL  2.5039  0.8062  1.6977    108

2  1 
  AL   log10    103
 2 
1
  AL 1.6977   108 
2
 1 
v e   AL   1.0000    103
1  2 
  4.985  109
2 3
= AL (0.5000) × 10
9
= 2.4925 × 10 J = 3.162 × 10
3

Also, = 3.162 km/s

GRAVITATION 238

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Newtons Law of Gravitation

ge Re ge R e
1. The SI unit of gravitational constant G is (a) g . R (b) g . R
m m m m
–2 2 –2
(a) Nm kg (b) Nm kg
2 –1 –1 g e R e2 g e2 R e
(c) Nm kg (d) Nm kg (c) g . 2 (d) .
m Rm g 2m R m
2. The value of gravitational constant G depends upon
8. Two planets of radii R1 and R2 are made from the same
(a) the masses of the bodies
material. The ratio of the accelerations due to gravity g1/g2
(b) the sizes of the bodies
at the surfaces of the planets is
(c) the separation of the bodies
R1 R2
(d) none of the above quantities (a) R (b) R
2 1
3. A rocket is fired from the earth to the moon. The distance
between the earth and the moon is r and the mass of the  R1 
2
 R2 
2

earth is 81 times the mass of the moon. The gravitational (c)   (d)  
force on the rocket will be zero, when its distance from the  R2   R1 
moon is Variation of acceleration due to gravity (with height and depth)
r r 9. Assuming that the earth is a sphere of radius R, at what
(a) (b) altitude will the value of the acceleration due to gravity be
20 15
half its value at the surface of the earth ?
r r
(c) (d) R
10 5 R
(a) h  (b) h 
4. A mass M is divided into two parts xm and (1 – x) m. For a 2 2
given separation, the value of x for which the gravitational
attraction between the two pieces becomes maximum is
(c) h   2 1 R  (d) h   2 1 R 
10. The height of the point vertically above the earth’s surface
1 3 at which the acceleration due to gravity becomes 1% of its
(a) (b)
2 5 value at the surface is (R is the radius of the earth)
(c) 1 (d) 2 (a) 8 R (b) 9 R
Acceleration due to gravity (c) 10 R (d) 20 R
–2
5. The acceleration due to gravity g on earth is 9.8 ms . What 11. The radius of the earth is about 6400 km and that of mars is
would the value of g for a planet whose size is the same as about 3200 km. The mass of the earth is about 10 times the
that of earth but the density in twice that of earth ? mass of mars. An object weighs 200 N on the surface of the
(a) 19.6 ms
–2
(b) 9.8 ms
–2 earth. Its weight on the surface of mars would be

(c) 4.9 ms
–2
(d) 2.45 ms
–2 (a) 6 N (b) 20 N

6. If both the mass and the radius of the earth decrease by 1%, (c) 40 N (d) 80 N
the value of the acceleration due to gravity will Variation of acceleration due to gravity (due to rotation of earth)
(a) decrease by 1% (b) increase by 1% 12. What must be the angular velocity of rotation of the earth
(c) increase by 2% (d) remain unchanged so that the effective acceleration due to gravity at the
4
equator is zero ? The radius of the earth = 64 × 10 m.
7. The acceleration due to gravity on earth of radius Re is ge
–3 –1 –3 –1
and that on moon of radius Rm is gm. The ratio of the masses (a) 3.3 × 10 rad s (b) 3.5 × 10 rad s
–3 –1 –3 –1
of the earth and the moon is given by (c) 3.7 × 10 rad s (d) 3.9 × 10 rad s
GRAVITATION 239

13. If a man at the equator would weigh (3/5)th of his weight, (a) The total energy of the system is zero.
the angular speed of the earth is
(b) The force between them is not zero.

2 g g (c) The centre of mass of the system is at rest.

(a) (b)
5 R R (d) All the above are true.
18. A body is released from a height equal to the radius (R) of
R 2 R the earth. The velocity of the body when it strikes the surface
(c) (d)
g 5 g of the earth will be
Field due to discreet mass
(a) gR (b) 2 gR
14. Three particles, each of mass m, are placed at the vertices of
an equilateral triangle of side a. The gravitational field
intensity at the centroid of the triangle is (c) 2 2 gR (d) 2 gR

Gm 2 19. A high jumper can jump 2.0 m on earth. With the same effort
(a) zero (b) 2 how high will he be able to jump on a planet whose density
a
is one-third and radius one-fourth those of the earth ?
2 Gm 2 3 Gm 2 (a) 4 m (b) 8 m
(c) (d)
a2 a2
(c) 12 m (d) 24 m
15. Infinite number of masses, each of mass m, are placed along
Potential Energy for multiple mass system
a straight line at distances of r, 2r, 4r, 8r, etc. from a reference
point O. The gravitational field intensity at point O will be 20. A body of mass m is raised to a height h above the surface
of the earth of mass M and radius R until its gravitational
5 Gm 4 Gm
(a) (b)
4r2 3r2 1
potential energy increases by mgR. The value of h is
3
3 Gm 2 Gm
(c) (d) (a) R/3 (b) R/2
2 r2 r2
Field due to continuous mass mR mR
(c) (d)
16. A mass m is placed in the cavity inside a hollow sphere of M  m  M
mass M as shown in the figure. What is the gravitational
21. The change in the gravitational potential energy when a
force on mass m?
body of mass m is raised to a height nR above the surface of
the earth is (here R is the radius of the earth)

 n   n 
(a)   mgR (b)   mgR
 n 1  n 1 

mgR
GMm GMm (c) nmgR (d)
(a) (b) n
R2 r2
22. A body of mass m is placed on earth surface is taken to a
GMm height of h = 3R, then change in gravitation potential energy
(c) 2 (d) zero is
R  r
Work and Potential Energy mgR 2
(a) (b) mgR
17. Two objects of masses m and 4m are at rest at infinite 4 3
separation. They move towards each other under mutual
gravitational attraction. Then, at a separation r, which of the 3 mgR
(c) mgR (d)
following is true ? 4 4
GRAVITATION 240

Escape velocity and Maximum height 29. The ratio of the escape velocity of an earth satellite to its
23. The masses and radii of the earth and moon are M1, R1 and orbital velocity is very nearly equal to
M2, R2 respectively. Their centres are a distance d apart. (a) (b) 2
2
The minimum speed with which a particle of mass m should
be projected from a point midway between the two centres (c) 1/2 (d) 1 / 2
so as to escape to infinity is given by Satellite Motion
1/ 2 1/ 2 30. An earth satellite is kept moving in orbit by the centripetal
 G M1  M 2    G M1  M 2  
(a) 2   (b) 2   force provided by
 md   d 
(a) the burning of fuel in its engine
1/ 2 1/ 2 (b) the ejection of hot gases from its exhaust
 G M1  M 2    G M1  M 2  
(c) 2   (d) 2   (c) the gravitational attraction of the sun
 md   d 
24. A rocket is launched vertically from the surface of the earth (d) the gravitational attraction of the earth
of radius R with an initial speed v. If atmospheric resistance 31. An instrument package is released from an orbiting earth
is neglected, the maximum height attained by the rocket is satellite by simply detaching it from the outer wall of the
given by satellite. The package will
(a) go away from the earth and get lost in outer space
R R
(a) h  (b) h  (b) fall to the surface of the earth
 2gR   2gR 
 2  1  2  1
 v   v  (c) continue moving along with the satellite in the same
orbit and with the same velocity
 2gR   2gR  (d) fall through a certain distance and then move in an orbit
(c) h  R  2  1 (d) h  R  2  1
 v   v  around the earth.
25. The escape velocity of a body projected vertically upwards 32. A satellite is moving around the earth in a stable circular
from the surface of the earth is v. If the body is projected in orbit. Which one of the following statements will be wrong
a direction making an angle  with the vertical, the escape for such a satellite ?
velocity would be (a) It is moving at a constant speed.
(a) v (b) v cos  (b) Its angular momentum remains constant.
(c) v sin  (d) v tan 
(c) It is acted upon by a force directed away from the centre
–1
26. For earth the escape velocity is 11.2 kms . For a planet of the earth which counter balances the gravitational
whose mass and radius are twice those of the earth, the pull of the earth.
escape velocity will be (d) It behaves as if it were as freely falling body.
–1 –1
(a) 44.8 kms (b) 22.4 kms 33. Astronauts in a stable orbit around the earth are said to be
–1 –1 in a weightless condition. The reason for this is that
(c) 11.2 kms (d) 2.8 kms
(a) the capsule and its contents are falling freely at the same rate
27. The escape velocity from the earth is ve. What is the escape
velocity from a planet whose mass and radius are twice (b) there is no gravitational force acting on them
those of the earth ? (c) the gravitational force of the earth balances that of the sun
(a) ve (b) 2 ve (d) there is no atmosphere at the height at which they are orbiting.
(c) 4 ve (d) 16 ve
Orbital Velocity
28. A body is projected up with a velocity equal to 3/4 of the
escape velocity from the surface of the earth. The height it 34. Choose the wrong statement. The orbital velocity of a body
reaches is : (Radius of the earth = R) in a stable orbit around a planet depends upon
(a) the average radius of the planet
10 R 9R
(a) (b) (b) the height of the body above the planet
9 7
(c) the acceleration due to gravity
9R 10 R
(c) (d) (d) the mass of the orbiting body
8 3
GRAVITATION 241

35. An object weights W newton on earth. It is suspended from

the lower end of a spring balance whose upper end is fixed R g
(a) T  2 (b) T  2
to the ceiling of a space capsule in a stable orbit around the g R
earth. The reading of the spring balance will be
(a) W (b) less than W MR mR
(c) T  2 (d) T  2
(c) more than W (d) zero mg Mg

36. Two satellites of masses 3M and M orbit the earth in circular 42. A satellite is launched into a circular orbit of radius R around
orbits of radii r and 3r respectively. The ratio of their speeds is the earth. A second satellite is launched into an orbit of
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 3 :1 radius 1.01 R. The period of the second satellite is longer
than that of the first by approximately
(c) 3 : 1 (d) 9 : 1
(a) 0.5% (b) 1.0%
37. The gravitational force between two objects is proportional
2 (c) 1.5% (d) 3.0%
to 1/R (and not as 1/R ) where R is separation between them,
then a particle in circular orbit under such a force would 43. If the distance between the earth and the sun were half its
have its orbital speed v proportional to present value, the number of days in a year would have been

1 (a) 64.5 (b) 129

0
(a) (b) R
R2 (c) 182.5 (d) 730

1 1 Kepler’s Second Law

(c) R (d)
R 44. Two satellites A and B of masses m1 and m2 (m1 = 2m2) are
Kinetic, Potential, Binding Total Energy moving in circular orbits of radii r1 and r2 (r1 = 4r2),
38. Two satellites of the same mass are orbiting round the earth respectively, around the earth. If their periods are TA and TB,
at heights of R and 4R above the earth’s surface: R being the then the ratio TA/TB is
radius of the earth. Their kinetic energies are in the ratio of
(a) 4 (b) 16
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 3 : 2
(c) 2 (d) 8
(c) 4 : 3 (d) 5 : 2
Kepler’s Third Law
39. An artificial satellite moving in a circular orbit around the
45. A geostationary satellite is orbiting the earth at a height of
earth has a total (kinetic + potential) energy E0. Its potential
6R above the surface of the earth; R being the radius of the
energy is
earth. What will be the time period of another satellite at a
(a) – E0 (b) 1.5 E0
height 2.5 R from the surface of the earth ?
(c) 2 E0 (d) E0
(a) 6 2 hours (b) 6 2.5 hours
Time Period of revolution
40. A satellite is orbiting the earth in a circular orbit of radius r. (c) 6 3 hours (d) 12 hours
Its period of revolution varies as
46. Two satellites A and B are orbiting around the earth in circular
(a) r (b) r
orbits of the same radius. The mass of A is 16 times that of B.
3/2 2
(c) r (d) r The ratio of the period of revolution of B to that of A is

41. A satellite of mass m is in a stable circular orbit around the (a) 1 : 16 (b) 1 : 4
earth at an altitude of about 100 kilometres. If M is the mass of (c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 1
the earth, R its radius and g the acceleration due to gravity,
the time period T of the revolution of the satellite is given by
GRAVITATION 242

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. Energy required to move a body of mass m from an orbit of 8. A satellite of mass m revolves around the earth of radius R
radius 2R to 3R is (2002) at a height x from its surface. If g is the acceleration due to
gravity on the surface of the earth, the orbital speed of the
GMm GMm satellite is (2004)
(a) (b)
12 R 3R gR
(a) gx (b)
GMm GMm Rx
(c) (d) 1/ 2
8R 6R  gR 2 
gR 2
2. The kinetic energy needed to project a body of mass m from (c) (d)  

Rx Rx
the earth surface (radius R) to infinity is (2002)
9. The time period of an earth satellite in circular orbit is
mgR independent of (2004)
(a) (b) 2 mgR
2 (a) the mass of the satellite
mgR (b) radius of its orbit
(c) mgR (d) (c) both the mass and radius of the orbit
4
3. The escape velocity of a body depends upon mass as(2002) (d) neither the mass of the satellite nor the radius of its orbit
10. If g is the acceleration due to gravity on the earth's surface,
(a) m0 (b) m1
the gain in the potential energy of an object of mass m
(c) m2 (d) m3 raised from the surface of the earth to a height equal to the
4. If suddenly the gravitational force of attraction between radius R of the earth is (2004)
earth and a satellite revolving around it becomes zero, then 1
the satellite will (2002) (a) 2 mgR (b) mgR
2
(a) continue to move in its orbit with same velocity 1
(b) move tangentially to the original orbit in the same velocity (c) mgR (d) mgR
4
(c) become stationary in its orbit 11. Suppose the gravitational force varies inversely as the n
th

(d) move towards the earth power of distance. Then the time period of a planet in circular
5. The time period of a satellite of earth is 5 h. If the separation orbit of radius R around the sun will be proportional to (2004)
between the earth and the satellite is increased to 4 times the  n 1   n 1 
   
previous value, the new time period will become (2003) (a) R  2  (b) R  2 

(a) 10 h (b) 80 h
 n 2 
(c) 40 h (d) 20 h  
(c) Rn (d) R  2 
6. Two spherical bodies of mass M and 5M and radii R and 2R
respectively are released in free space with initial separation 12. Average density of the earth (2005)
between their centres equal to 12R. If they attract each other (a) is directly proportional to g
due to gravitational force only, then the distance covered (b) is inversely proportional to g
by the smaller body just before collision is (2003) (c) does not depend on g
(a) 2.5 R (b) 4.5 R
(d) is a complex function of g
(c) 7.5 R (d) 1.5 R
13. The change in the value of g at a height h above the surface
7. The escape velocity for a body projected vertically upwards of the earth is the same as at a depth d below the surface of
from the surface of earth is 11 km/s. If the body is projected earth. When both d and h are much smaller than the radius
at an angle of 45° with the vertical, the escape velocity will of earth, then which of the following is correct ? (2005)
be (2003)
(a) d = 2h (b) d = h
(a) 11 2 km / s (b) 22 km/s
h 3h
(c) d  (d) d 
(c) 11 km/s (d) 11 / 2 km / s 2 2
GRAVITATION 243

14. A particle of mass 10 g is kept on the surface of a uniform 20. Four particles, each of mass M and equidistant from each
sphere of mass 100 kg and radius 10 cm. Find the work to be other, move along a circle of radius R under the action of
done against the gravitational force between them to take their mutual gravitational attraction. The speed of each
the particle far away from the sphere. (2005) particle is (2014)
–11 2 2
(you may take G = 6.67 × 10 Nm /kg ) GM GM
(a) 2 2
R
(b)
R

1 2 2 
(a) 6.67 × 10–9 J (b) 6.67 × 10–10 J
(c) 13.34 × 10–10 J (d) 3.33 × 10–10 J 1 GM GM
15. A planet in a distance solar system is 10 times more massive
(c)
2 R

1 2 2  (d)
R
than the earth and its radius is 10 times smaller. Given that
–1 21. From a solid sphere of mass M and radius R, a spherical
the escape velocity from the earth is 11 km s , the escape
portion of radius R/2 is removed, as shown in the figure.
velocity from the surface of the planet would be (2008) Taking gravitational potential V = 0 at r = , the potential
(a) 0.11 km s–1 (b) 1.1 km s–1 at the centre of the cavity thus formed is
(G = gravitational constant) (2015)
(c) 11 km s–1 (d) 110 km s–1
16. The height at which the acceleration due to gravity becomes
g
(where g = the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of
9
the earth) in terms of R, the radius of the earth is (2009)

(a) 2 R (b) R / 3 2GM 2GM

(a) (b)
3R R
(c) R/2 (d) 2R
17. Two particles of equal mass m go around a circle of radius R GM GM
(c) (d)
under the action of their mutual gravitational attraction. The 2R R
speed of each particle with respect to their centre of mass is 22. A satellite is revolving in a circular orbit at a height ‘h’
from the earth’s surface (radius of earth R; h << R). The
Gm Gm minimum increase in its orbital velocity required, so that
(a) (b) (2011)
R 4R the satellite could escape from the earth’s gravitational
field, is close to : (Neglect the effect of atmosphere.)
Gm Gm
(c) (d) (2016)
3R 2R
18. Two bodies of masses m and 4 m are placed at a distance r. (a) gR (b) gR / 2
The gravitational potential at a point on the line joining
them where the gravitational field is zero, is (2011) (c) gR  2 1 (d) 2gR

4Gm 6 Gm 23. The variation of acceleration due to gravity g with distance

(a)  (b)  d from centre of the earth is best represented by
r r
(R = Earth’s radius) : (2017)
9Gm
(c)  (d) zero
r
19. What is the minimum energy required to launch a satellite of
mass m from the surface of a planet of mass M and radius R (a) (b)
in a circular orbit at an altitude of 2R ? (2013)

5GmM 2GmM
(a) (b)
6R 3R

GmM GmM (c) (d)

(c) (d)
2R 3R
GRAVITATION 244

24. India’s Mangalyan was sent to the Mars by lauching it removed sphere is 3R, the gravitational force between the
into a transfer orbit EOM around the sun. It leaves the two spheres is: (2014 Online Set-3)
earth at E and meets Mars at M. If the semi-major axis of
Earths’s orbit is aE = 1.5 × 1011 m, that of Mar’s orbit aM =
2.28 × 1011 m, taken Kepler’s laws give the estimate of time
for Mangalyan to reach Mars from Earth to be close to:
(2014 Online Set-1)

41GM 2 59 GM 2
(a) (b)
450 R 2 450 R 2

41GM 2 GM 2
(c) (d)
3600 R 2 225 R 2

27. In an experiment for determining the gravitational

(a) 500 days (b) 320 days acceleration g of a place with the help of a simple pendulum,
(c) 260 days (d) 220 days the measured time period square is plotted against the
25. Two hypothetical planets of masses m1 and m2 are at rest string length of the pendulum in the figure
when they are infinite distance apart. Because of the
gravitational force they move towards each other along
the line joining their centres. What is their speed when
their separation is ‘d’? (Speed of m1 is 1 and that of m2 is
2) (2014 Online Set-2)

2G 2G
(a) 1  m 2 d  m  m  2  m1 d  m  m  What is the value of g at the place ?
1 2 1 2

(2014 Online Set-4)

2G 2G 2
(b) 1  m1 2  m 2 (a) 9.91 m/s (b) 9.81 m/s2
d  m1  m 2  d  m1  m 2 
(c) 10.0 m/s2 (d) 9.87 m/s2
28. The gravitational field in a region is given by
2G 2G 
(c) 1  m 2 g  5N / kgiˆ  12N / kg ˆj . The change in the gravitational
m1 2  m1 m
2
potential energy of a particle of mass 2 kg when it is taken
(d) 1 = 2
from the origin to a point (7m, - 3m) is :
26. From a sphere of mass M and radius R, a smaller sphere of
(2014 Online Set-4)
radius R/2 is carved out such that the cavity made in the
original sphere is between its centre and the periphery. (a) 13 58 J (b) 71 J
(See figure). For the configuration in the figure where the (c) –71 J (d) –1 J
distance between the centre of the original sphere and the
GRAVITATION 245

29. Which of the following most closely depicts the correct 32. If the Earth has no rotational motion, the weight of a person
variation of the gravitation potential V(r) due to a large on the equator is W. Determine the speed with which the
planet of radius R and uniform mass density ? earth would have to rotate about its axis so that the person
(figures are not drawn to scale) (2015 Online)
3
at the equator will weigh W. Radius of the Earth is 6400
4
km and g = 10m/s2. (2017 Online Set-1)
–3
(a) (b) (a) 1.1 × 10 rad/s
(b) 0.83 × 10–3 rad/s
(c) 0.63 × 10–3 rad/s
(d) 0.28 × 10–3 rad/s
33. The mass density of a spherical body is given by

(c) (d) k
 (r)  for r  R and  (r)  0 for r  R, where r is the
r
distance from the centre.The correct graph that describes
30. Figure shows elliptical path abcd of a planet around the qualitatively the acceleration, a, of a test particle as a
function of r is : (2017 Online Set-2)
1
sun S such that the area of triangle csa is the area of the
4
ellipse. (See figure) With db as the semimajor axis, and ca
as the semiminor axis. If t1 is the time taken for planet to go
over path abc and t2 for path taken over cda then : (a) (b)
(2016 Online Set-1)

(c) (d)
(a) t1 = t2 (b) t1 = 2t2
(c) t1 = 3t2 (d) t1 = 4t2
31. An astronaut of mass m is working on a satellite orbiting, 34. A body of mass m is moving in a circular orbit of radius R
the earth at a distance h from the earth’s surface. The abut a planet of mass M. At some instant, it splits into two
radius of the earth is R, while its mass is M. The equal masses. The first mass moves in a circular orbit of
gravitational pull FG on the astronaut is:
R
(2016 Online Set-2) radius , and the other mass, in a circular orbit of
2
(a) Zero since astronaut feels weightless
3R
GMm radius . The difference between the final and initial
(b) 0  FG  2
R2
total energies is : (2018 Online Set-1)
GMm GMm
(c)  FG  GMm GMm
(R  h)2 R2 (a) - (b) +
2R 6R
GMm
(d) FG  GMm GMm
(R  h) 2 (c) (d) -
2R 6R
GRAVITATION 246

35. Take the mean distance of the moon and the sun from the 36. Suppose that the angular velocity of rotation of earth is
increased. Then, as a consequence:
earth to be 0.4 ×106 km and 150 ×106 km respectively..
(2018 Online Set-3)
Their masses are 8 ×1022 kg and 2 ×1030 kg
(a) Weight of the object, everywhere on the earth, will
respectively. The radius of the earth is 6400 km. Let  F1 increase.
be the difference in the forces exerted by the moon at the
(b) Weight of the object, everywhere on the earth, will
nearest and farthest points on the earth and  F2 be the
decrease
difference in the force exerted by the sun at the nearest
(c) There will be no change in weight anywhere on the
and farthest points on the earth. Then, the number closest
earth.
F1
to F is : (2018 Online Set-1) (d) Except at poles, weight of the object on the earth will
2 decrease.
(a) 2 (b) 10-2 37. The relative uncertainty in the period of a satellite orbiting
around the earth is 10-2. If the relative uncertainty in the
(c) 0.6 (d) 6
radius of the orbit is negligible, the relative uncertainty in
the mass of the earth is : (2018 Online Set-3)

(a) 10–2 (b) 2×10-2

(c) 3×10-2 (d) 6×10-2

GRAVITATION 247

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Newtons Law of Gravitation 7. The distance of the centres of moon and earth is D. The
mass of earth is 81 times the mass of the moon. At what
1. The gravitational force between two objects does not distance from the centre of the earth, the gravitational
depend on force will be zero
(a) Sum of the masses (a) D/2 (b) 2D/3
(b) Product of the masses (c) 4D/3 (d) 9D/10
(c) Gravitational constant 8. Four identical point masses each equal to m are placed at
(d) Distance between the masses the corners of a square of side a. The force on a point
mass m’ placed at the point of intersection of the two
2. The mass of the moon is about 1.2% of the mass of the diagonals is :
earth. Compared to the gravitational force the earth exerts on (a) (4Gmm’)/a
2
(b) (2Gmm’)/a
2

the moon, the gravitational force the moon exerts on earth 2

(c) (Gmm’)/a (d) zero
(a) Is the same (b) Is smaller Acceleration due to gravity
(c) Is greater (d) Varies with its phase 9. Two planets have the same average density but their radii
3. Three identical point masses, each of mass 1 kg lie in the x-y are R1 and R2. If acceleration due to gravity on these planets
plane at points (0, 0), (0, 0.2m) and (0.2m, 0). The net be g1 and g2 respectively, then
gravitational force on the mass at the origin is g R g R
1 1 1 2
(a) g  R (b) g  R
(a) 1.67  10
9
 ˆi  ˆj N (b) 3.34  10
10 ˆ ˆ
 
i j N 2 2 2 1

1g 1 R2 g1 1 R3
(c) g  2 (d) g  3
(c) 1.67 10
9
 ˆi  ˆj N (d) 3.34  10
10
 ˆi  ˆj N 2 R2 2 R2

4. Four particles of masses m, 2m, 3m and 4m are kept in 10. An iron ball and a wooden ball of the same radius are
sequence at the corners of a square of side a. The released from a height ‘h’ in vacuum. The time taken by
magnitude of gravitational force acting on a particle of both of them to reach the ground is
mass m placed at the centre of the square will be (a) Unequal (b) Exactly equal

24m 2 G 6m 2 G (c) Roughly equal (d) Zero

(a) (b)
a2 a2 11. The correct answer to above question is based on
(a) Acceleration due to gravity in vacuum is same irrespective
4 2Gm 2 of size and mass of the body
(c) (d) zero
a2 (b) Acceleration due to gravity in vacuum depends on
5. If the distance between two masses is doubled, the the mass of the body
gravitational attraction between them (c) There is no acceleration due to gravity in vacuum
(a) Is doubled (d) In vacuum there is resistance offered to the motion of
(b) becomes four times the body and this resistance depends on the mass of
the body
(c) Is reduced to half
12. A body weighs 700 gm wt on the surface of the earth. How
(d) Is reduced to a quarter much will it weigh on the surface of a planet whose mass
6. The gravitational force between two stones of mass 1 kg
1
each separated by a distance of 1 metre in vacuum is is and radius is half that of the earth
7
–5
(a) zero (b) 6.675 × 10 newton
–11 –8 (a) 200 gm wt (b) 400 gm wt
(c) 6.675 × 10 newton (d) 6.675 × 10 newton
(c) 50 gm wt (d) 300 gm wt
GRAVITATION 248

13. Assume that the acceleration due to gravity on the surface 19. Suppose a vertical tunnel is dug along the diameter of
of the moon is 0.2 times the acceleration due to gravity on earth assumed to be a sphere of uniform mass having
the surface of the earth. If Re is the maximum range of a density  If a body of mass m is thrown in this tunnel, its
projectile on the earth's surface, what is the maximum range
acceleration at a distance y from the centre is given by
on the surface of the moon for the same velocity of projection
(a) 0.2 Re (b) 2 Re
m
(c) 0.5 Re (d) 5 Re
Variation of acceleration due to gravity (with height and depth) y

14. The escape velocity for a body projected vertically upwards

–1
from the surface of the earth is 11.2 km s . If the body is
projected in a direction making an angle 45° with the vertical,
the escape velocity will be :
4 3
(a) Gym (b) Gy
3 4
11.2
(a) km s 1 (b) 11.2  2 kms 1
2 4 4
(c) y (d) Gy
–1 –1 3 3
(c) 11.2 × 2 km s (d) 11.2 km s
15. A spring balance is graduated on sea level. If a body is 20. At what height above the earth’s surface does the
weighed with this balance at consecutively increasing acceleration due to gravity fall to 1% of its value at the
heights from earth’s surface, the weight indicated by the earth’s surface ?
balance (a) 9R (b) 10R
(a) Will go on increasing continuously (c) 99 R (d) 100 R
(b) Will go on decreasing continuously 21. At what height above the earth’s surface is the acceleration
(c) Will remain same due to gravity 1% less than its value at the surface ?

(d) Will first increase and then decrease [R = 6400 km]

16. An object weights 72 N on earth. Its weight at a height of (a) 16 km (b) 32 km

R/2 from earth is
(c) 64 km (d) 32 2 km
(a) 32 N (b) 56 N
(c) 72 N (d) Zero 22. At what depth below the surface of the earth acceleration
17. The depth d at which the value of acceleration due to due to gravity will be half its value 1600 km above the surface
of the earth ?
1
gravity becomes times the value at the surface, is [R = (a) 4.3 × 106 m (b) 2.4 × 106 m
n
radius of the earth] (c) 3.2 × 106 m (d) 1.6 × 106 m
R  n 1  Variation of acceleration due to gravity (due to rotation of energy)
(a) (b) R  
n  n  23. The rotation of the earth about its axis speeds up such that
R a man on the equator becomes weightless. In such a
 n 
(c) (d) R   situation, what would be the duration of one day ?
n2  n 1 

18. At what distance from the centre of the earth, the value of 1
(a) 2 R / g (b) R/g
acceleration due to gravity g will be half that on the surface 2
(R = radius of earth)
1
(a) 2 R (b) R (c) 2 Rg (d) Rg
2
(c) 1.414 R (d) 0.414 R
GRAVITATION 249

Field due to discreet mass

3 5
24. There are two bodies of masses 10 kg and 10 kg separated
by a distance of 1 km. At what distance from the smaller P

body, the intensity of gravitational field will be zero

(a) 1/9 km (b) 1/10 km
(c) 1/11 km (d) 10/11 km
(a) I1 > I2 (b) I1 < I2
25. In some region, the gravitational field is zero. The
gravitational potential in this region (c) I1 = I2 (d) No definite relation

(a) Must be variable (b) Must be constant 29. A particle of mass m is placed inside a spherical shell,
away from its centre. The mass of the shell is M.
(c) Cannot be zero (d) Must be zero
(a) The particle will move towards the centre.
Field due to continuous mass
(b) The particle will move away from the centre, towards
26. The magnitudes of the gravitational field at distance r1 the nearest wall.
and r2 from the centre of a uniform sphere of radius R and
mass M are F1 and F2 respectively. Then (c) The particle will move towards the centre it m < M, and
away from the centre if m > M.
F1 r1
(a)  if r1  R and r2  R (d) The particle will remain stationary.
F2 r2
30. A uniform ring of mass m and radius r is placed directly
F1 r22
(b)  if r1  R and r2  R above a uniform sphere of mass M and of equal radius. The
F2 r12
centre of the ring is at a distance 3 r from the centre of the
F1 r1
(c)  if r1  R and r2  R sphere. The gravitational force exerted by the sphere on the
F2 r2
ring will be
F1 r12 GMm GMm
(d)  if r1  R and r2  R
F2 r22 (a) (b)
8r 2 4r 2
27. Two concentric shells of mass M1 and M2 are having radii 3 GMm GMm
r1 and r2. Which of the following is the correct expression (c) (d)
8r 2
16r 2
for the gravitational field on a mass m.
31. A solid sphere of radius R/2 is cut out of a solid sphere of
M2 r2 radius R such that the spherical cavity so formed touches
M1 the surface on one side and the centre of the sphere on the
r r1 other side, as shown. The initial mass of the solid sphere
was M. If a particle of mass m is placed at a distance 2.5 R
m
from the centre of the cavity, then what is the gravitational
attraction on the mass m ?
G  M1  M 2 
(a) I  for r  r1
r2
G  M1  M 2 
(b) I  for r  r2
r2
M2
(c) I  G for r1  r  r2
r2
GM1
(d) I  for r1  r  r2
r2
GMm GMm
28. A spherical shell is cut into two pieces along a chord as (a) (b)
shown in the figure. P is a point on the plane of the chord. R2 2R 2
The gravitational field at P due to the upper part is I1 and
that due to the lower part is I2. What is the relation between GMm 23 GMm
(c) (d)
them 8R 2 100 R 2
GRAVITATION 250

32. A solid sphere of uniform density and radius R applies a 35. Gravitational field at the centre of a semicircle formed by a
gravitational force of attraction equal to F1 on a particle thin wire AB of mass m and length l is :
placed at a distance 2R from the centre of the sphere. A
spherical cavity of radius R/2 is now made in the sphere as
shown in the figure. The sphere with the cavity now applies
a gravitational force F2 on the same particle. The ratio F1/F2
is

Gm Gm
(a) along + x axis (b) along +y axis
2  2

2 Gm 2 Gm
(c) along + x aixs (d) along + y axis
1 3 2 2
(a) (b)
2 4 36. Two identical thin uniform rods of mass m and lenght L are
placed as shown in figure. The gravitational interaction force
7 9 between the two rods is
(c) (d)
8 7

33. The following figure shows two shells of masses m1 and m2.
The shells are concentric. At which point, a particle of mass
m shall experience zero force ?
Gm2 Gm2
(a) (b)
4L2 2L2

Gm2 Gm 2 4
(c) (d) n  
9L2 L2 3

37. Two rings having masses M and 2M, respectively, having

same radius are placed coaxially as shown in figure.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
34. A solid sphere of uniform density and mass M has radius 4
m. Its centre is at the origin of the coordinate system. Two
spheres of radii 1 m are taken out so, that their centres are at
P (0, –2, 0) and Q (0, 2, 0), respectively. This leaves two
spherical cavities. What is the gravitational field at the origin
of the coordinate axes ? If the mass distribution on both the rings is non-uniform,
the gravitational potential at point P is

GM  1 2 
(a)    
R  2 5

GM  2 
(b)  1
R  2 
31GM Gm
(a) (b)
1024 1024 (c) zero

(c) 31 GM (d) zero (d) cannot be determined from given information

GRAVITATION 251

Work and Potential Energy 43. P is a point at a distance r from the centre of a spherical
shell of mass M and radius a, where r < a. The gravitational
38. The magnitude of gravitational potential energy of a body
potential at P is
at a distance r from the centre of earth is u. Its weight at a
distance 2r from the centre of earth is GM GM
(a)  (b) 
u u r a
(a) (b)
r 4r
r ar
u 4r (c) GM (d) GM  2 
(c) (d) a2  a 
2r u
Potential Energy for multiple mass system Potential due to continuous mass (formula only)
44. P is a point at a distance r from the centre of a solid sphere
39. Three particles each of mass 100 gm are brought from a
of radius a. The gravitational potential at P is V. If V is
very large distance to the vertices of an equilateral triangle
plotted as a function of r, which is the correct curves ?
whose side is 20 cm in length. The work done will be
(a) 0.33 × 10–11 Joule
(b) – 0.33 × 10–11 Joule
(c) 1.00 × 10–11 Joule (a) (b)

(d) –1.00 × 10–11 Joule

40. The change in potential energy, when a body of mass m is
raised to a height nR from the earth’s surface is (R = Radius
of earth)
n (c) (d)
(a) mgR (b) nmgR
n 1

n2 n
(c) mgR 2 (d) mgR Relation of Potential and Potential Energy
n 1 n 1
45. The gravitational potential due to the earth at infinite
41. What impulse need to be given to a body of mass m, released distance from it is zero. Let the gravitational potential at a
from the surface of earth along a straight tunnel passing point P be –5 J/kg. Suppose, we arbitrarily assume the
through centre of earth, at the centre of the earth, to bring it gravitational potential at infinity to be + 10 J/kg, then the
to rest. (Mass of earth M, radius or earth R) gravitational potential at P will be
(a) –5 J/kg (b) +5 J/kg
GM GMm
(a) m (b) (c) –15 J/kg (d) +15 J/kg
R R
46. A person brings a mass of 1 kg from infinity to a point A.
GM Initially the mass was at rest but it moves with a speed of
(c) m (d) zero
2R 2 m/s as it reaches A. The work done by the person on the
mass is – 3 J. The potential of A is
Potential due to discreet mass
(a) – 3 J/kg (b) – 2 J/kg
42. Two bodies of masses m and M are placed a distance d
(c) – 5 J/kg (d) – 7 J/kg
apart. The gravitational potential at the position where
Escape velocity and Maximum height
the gravitational field due to them is zero is V, then
47. The escape velocity for the earth is 11.2 km/sec. The mass
G Gm of another planet is 100 times that of the earth and its
(a) V   m  M (b) V   radius is 4 times that of the earth. The escape velocity for
d d
this planet will be
GM G 2 (a) 112.0 km/s (b) 5.6 km/s
(c) V  
d
(d) V  
d
 m M  (c) 280.0 km/s (d) 56.0 km/s
GRAVITATION 252

48. The ratio of the radii of planets A and B is k1 and ratio of (c) The water and the glass have the same acceleration,
acceleration due to gravity on them is k2. The ratio of equal to g, towards the centre of the earth, and hence
escape velocities from them will be there is no relative motion between them
(a) k 1 k 2 (b) k 1 k 2 (d) The gravitation attraction between the glass and the
water balances the earth’s attraction on the water.
k1 k2 54. If a small part separates from an orbiting satellite, the part
(c) k2 (d) k1 will

49. For a satellite escape velocity is 11 km/s. If the satellite is (a) fall to the earth directly
launched at an angle of 60° with the vertical, then escape (b) move in a spiral and reach the earth after a new rotations
velocity will be (c) continue to move in the same orbit as the satellite
(a) 11 km/s (b) 11 3 km/s
(d) move farther away from the earth gradually
11 Orbital Velocity
(c) km/s (d) 33 km/s
3 55. If ve and v0 represent the escape velocity and orbital
Satellite Motion velocity of a satellite corresponding to a circular orbit of
50. A person sitting in a chair in a satellite feels weightless radius R, then
because
(a) ve = v0 (b) 2vo  v e
(a) The earth does not attract the objects in a satellite
(b) The normal force by the chair on the person balances (c) ve  v0 / 2 (d) ve and v0 are not related
the earth’s attraction
56. Two satellites of masses m1 and m2(m1 > m2) are revolving
(c) The normal force is zero
round the earth in circular orbits of radius r1 and r2(r1 > r2)
(d) The person in satellite is not accelerated respectively. Which of the following statements is true
51. Planetary system in the solar system describes regarding their speeds v1 and v2 ?
(a) Conservation of energy (a) v1 = v2 (b) v1 < v2
(b) Conservation of linear momentum v1 v 2
(c) Conservation of angular momentum (c) v1 > v2 (d) r  r
1 2
(d) None of these
57. A satellite is moving around the earth with speed v in a
52. A satellite S is moving in an elliptical orbit around the
earth. The mass of the satellite is very small compared to circular orbit of radius r. If the orbit radius is decreased by
the mass of earth 1%, its speed will
(a) The acceleration of S is always directed towards the (a) Increase by 1% (b) Increase by 0.5%
centre of the earth
(c) Decrease by 1% (d) Decrease by 0.5%
(b) The angular momentum of S about the centre of the
earth changes in direction but its magnitude remains 58. Two satellite A and B go round a planet P in circular orbits
constant having radii 4R and R respectively. If the speed of the
(c) The total mechanical energy of S varies periodically satellite A is 3v, the speed of the satellite B will be
with time (a) 12 v (b) 6 v
(d) The linear momentum of S remains constant in 4 3
magnitude (c) v (d) v
3 2
53. Inside a satellite orbiting very close to the earth’s surface,
59. If orbital velocity of planet is given by v = Ga Mb Rc, then
water does not fall out of a glass when it is inverted. Which
of the following is the best explanation for this ? 1 1 1 1 1 1
(a) a  , b  , c   (b) a  ,b ,c
(a) The earth does not exert any force on the water. 3 3 3 2 2 2
(b) The earth’s force of attraction on the water is exactly
balanced by the force created by the satellite’s 1 1 1 1 1 1
(c) a  ,b ,c (d) a  ,b ,c
motion. 2 2 2 2 2 2
GRAVITATION 253

60. Two satellites of same mass are launched in the same orbit of b
radius r around the earth so as to rotate opposite to each a
A
other. If they collide inelastically and stick together as
S
wreckage, the total energy of the system just after collision is
2GMm GMm B
(a)  (b)  d c
r r
(a) t1 < t2 (b) t1 > t2
GMm
(c) (d) zero (c) t1 = t2 (d) t1  t2
2r
Kinetic, Potential, Binding, Total Energy 66. The earth E moves in an elliptical orbit with the sun S at
61. Two identical satellites are at R and 7R away from earth one of the foci as shown in figure. Its speed of motion will
surface, the wrong statement is (R = Radius of earth) be maximum at the point
(a) Ratio of total energy will be 4 C
E
(b) Ratio of kinetic energies will be 4
A B
(c) Ratio of potential energies will be 4 S

(d) Ratio of total energy will be 4 but ratio of potential and D

kinetic energies will be 2 (a) C (b) A
62. Energy required in moving a body of mass m from a distance (c) B (d) D
2R to 3R from centre of earth of mass M is
Triple Star Motion
GMm GMm
(a) (b) 67. Four particles, each of mass M move along a circle of radius
12R 2 3R 2 R under the action of their mutual gravitational attraction.
The speed of each particle is
GMm GMm
(c) (d)
8R 6R
GM GM
(a) (b) 2 2
Time Period of revolution R R
63. A satellite whose mass is M, is revolving in circular orbit
of radius r around the earth. Time of revolution of satellite
GM GM  2 2  1 
is (c)
R

2 2 1  (d) 
R  4 

r5 r3
(a) T  (b) T 
GM GM Multiple Answer Questions

r r3 68. Which of the following statements is/are true about the

(c) T  (d) T  gravitational constant G ?
GM 2 / 3 GM1 / 4
(a) G is a dimensionless number.
64. The distances of two satellites from the surface of the
earth are R and 7R. Their time periods of rotation are in the (b) The value of G is the same anywhere in the universe.
ratio : (c) G has the same value in all systems of units.

(a) 1 : 7 (b) 1 : 8 (d) The value of G does not depend on the nature of the
medium between the two bodies.
(c) 1 : 49 (d) 1 : 73/2
69. The value of the acceleration due to gravity g on earth
Kepler’s Second Law depends upon
65. The figure shows the motion of a planet around the sun in (a) the mass of the earth
an elliptical orbit with sun at the focus. The shaded areas A
(b) the average radius of the earth
and B are also shown in the figure which can be assumed
(c) the average density of the earth
to be equal. If t1 and t2 represent the time for the planet to
move from a to b and d to c respectively, then (d) none of the above quantities
GRAVITATION 254

70. Choose the correct statement (s) from the following 76. A satellite is orbiting the earth in a circular orbit of radius r. Its
(a) The gravitational forces between two particles are an (a) kinetic energy varies as 1/r
action and reaction pair.
(b) angular momentum varies as 1/ r
(b) Gravitation constant (G) is scalar but acceleration due to
gravity (g) is a vector. (c) linear momentum varies as 1/ r
3/2
(c) The values of G and g are to be determined experimentally. (d) frequency of revolution varies as 1/r
(d) G and g are constant everywhere. 77. An object is taken from a point P to another point Q in a
71. Choose the correct statement (s) from the following gravitational field
(a) The magnitude of the gravitational force between two (a) assuming the earth to be spherical, if both P and Q lie on
bodies of mass 1 kg each and separated by a distance of earth’s surface the work done is zero
1 m is 9.8 N.
(b) If P is on earth’s surface and Q above it, the work done is
(b) Higher the value of the escape velocity for a planet, the
minimum when it is taken along the straight line PQ
higher is the abundance of lighter gases in its atmosphere.
(c) The work done depends only on the position of P and Q and
(c) The gravitational force of attraction between two bodies
of ordinary mass is not noticeable because the value of is independent of the path along which the particle is taken
the gravitation constant is extremely small. (d) there is no net work done if the object is taken from P to
(d) Force of friction arises due to gravitational attraction. Q and then brought back to P, along any path
72. Choose the wrong statement (s) from the following 78. Consider a planet moving in an elliptical orbit around the
(a) It is possible to shield a body from the gravitational field sun. The work done on the planet by the gravitational force
of another body by using a thick shielding material of the sun
between them.
(a) is zero in any small part of the orbit.
(b) The escape velocity of a body is independent of the
mass of the body and the angle of projection. (b) is zero in some parts of the orbit.
(c) The acceleration due to gravity increases due to the (c) is zero in complete revolution
rotation of the earth.
(d) is zero in no part of the motion
(d) The gravitational force exerted by the earth on a body is
greater than that exerted by the body on the earth. 79. Let V and E denote the gravitational potential and
73. A comet is revolving around the sun in a highly elliptical gravitational field at a point. It is possible to have
orbit. Which of the following will remain constant (a) V = 0 and E = 0 (b) V = 0 and E  0
throughout its orbit ?
(c) V  and E = 0 (d) V  0 and E  0
(a) Kinetic energy (b) Potential energy
80. An orbiting satellite will escape if
(c) Total energy (d) Angular momentum
(a) its speed is increased by 41%
74. The weight of an object will be
(a) zero at the centre of the earth (b) its speed in the orbit is made 1.5 times of its initial
(b) one-fourth of its value at sea level at a height equal to
value
the radius of the earth above its surface.
(c) its KE is doubled
(c) same in all satellites
(d) same at all points on the surface of the earth (d) it stops moving in the orbit

75. For two satellites at distance R and 7R above the earth’s 81. An astronaut, inside an earth satellite, experiences weightless-
surface, the ratio of their ness becasue
(a) total energies is 4 and potential and kinetic energies is 2 (a) no external force is acting on him
(b) potential energies is 4 (b) he is falling freely
(c) kinetic energies is 4 (c) no reaction is exerted by floor of the satellite
(d) total energies is 4 (d) he is far away from earth’s surface
GRAVITATION 255

82. If the radius of the earth suddenly decreases to 80% of its 87. Assertion : Generally the path of a projectile from the
present value, the mass of the earth remaining the same, the earth is parabolic but it is elliptical for projectiles going to
value of the acceleration due to gravity will a very large height.
–2
(a) remain unchanged (b) become 9.8/0.64 ms Reason : The path of a projectile is independent of the
(c) increase by 36% (d) increase by about 56% gravitational force of earth.
83. Which of the following are correct ? (a) A (b) B (c) C
(a) Escape velocity tells us how fast an object needs to go (d) D (e) E
to escape the planet’s gravity. 88. Assertion : We can not move even a finger without
(b) The time period of a geostationary satellite is 24 h. disturbing all the stars.
Reason : Every body in this universe attracts every other
(c) If a satellite revolves close to the earth’s surface, then
body with a force which is inversely proportional to the
velocity of the satellite is gR . square of distance between them.
(d) When a statellite is revolving around the earth in a fixed (a) A (b) B (c) C
orbit, its linear momentum changes continuously. (d) D (e) E
Assertion and Reason (For Q. 84 to 88) Assertion and Reason (For Q. 89 to 94)
(A) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true and (A) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is a
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
correct explanation for Statement-1.
(B) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true but reason
(B) Statement-1True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is NOT
is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
a correct explanation for Statement-1.
(C) If ASSERTION is true but REASON is false.
(C) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is False.
(D) If both ASSERTION and REASON are false.
(D) Statement-1 is False, Statement-2 is True.
(E) If ASSERTION is false but REASON is true.
89. Statement - 1 : Escape velocity is independent of the angle
84. Assertion : If earth suddenly stops rotating about its axis,
of projection.
then the value of acceleration due to gravity will become
same at all the places. Statement - 2 : Escape velocity from the surface of earth is
Reason : The value of acceleration due to gravity is gR where R is radius of earth.
independent of rotation of earth.
(a) A (b) B
(a) A (b) B (c) C
(d) D (e) E (c) C (d) D

85. Assertion : Orbital velocity of a satellite is greater than its 90. Statement - 1 : Gravitational potential is zero inside a shell.
escape velocity. Statement - 2 : Gravitational potential is equal to the work
Reason : Orbit of a satellite is within the gravitational field done in bringing a unit mass from infinity to a point inside
of earth whereas escaping is beyond the gravitational field gravitational field.
of earth.
(a) A (b) B
(a) A (b) B (c) C
(c) C (d) D
(d) D (e) E
91. Statement - 1 : A spherically symmetric shell produces no
86. Assertion : The time period of revolution of a satellite
gravitational field anywhere.
close to surface of earth is smaller than that revolving
away from surface of earth. Statement - 2 : The field due to various mass elements
Reason : The square of time period of revolution of a cancels out, everywhere inside the shell.
satellite is directly proportional to cube of its orbital radius. (a) A (b) B
(a) A (b) B (c) C (c) C (d) D
(d) D (e) E
GRAVITATION 256

92. Statement - 1 : Rate of change of weight near the earth’s 96. If object having total energy E1 is having same PE curve as
surface with height h is porportional to h°. shown in figure, then
(a) r0 is the maximum distance of object from earth's centre
Statement - 2 : Since gravitational potential is given by
v = – GM/r. (b) this object and earth system is bounded one
(c) the KE of the object is zero when r = r0
(a) A (b) B
(d) all the above
(c) C (d) D
97. If both the object have same PE curve as shown in figure, then
93. Statement - 1 : Two particles are to be projected from the (a) for object having total energy E2 all values of r are possible
surface of earth so that particles just leave the gravitational (b) for object having total energy E2 values of r < r0 are only
field of earth. One particle is projected vertically upward possible
and another is at an angle of 45° with vertical. Speed given (c) for object having total energy E1 all values of r are possible
to both particles is same. (d) none of these
Statement - 2 : Escape speed does not depend upon angle
of projection. Using the following Passage, solve Q. 98 to Q. 104
Passage – 2
(a) A (b) B
The satellites when launched from earth are not given the
(c) C (d) D orbital velocity initially, in practice, a multi-stage rocket
94. Statement - 1 : For a satellite revolving very near to earth’s propeller carries the space-craft upto its orbit and during
each stage rocket has been fired to increase the velocity to
surface the time period of revolution is given by 1 h 24 min.
acquire the desired velocity for a particular orbit. The last
Statement - 2 : The period of revolution of a satellite depends stage of the rocket brings the satellite in circular/elliptical
only upon its height above the earth’s surface. (desired) orbit.
Consider a satellite of mass 150 kg in low circular orbit, in this
(a) A (b) B orbit, we can't neglect the effect of air drag. This air drag
(c) C (d) D opposes the motion of satellite and hence total mechanical
energy of earth-satellite system decreases means total energy
Paragraph becomes more negative and hence orbital radius decreases
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 95 to Q. 97 which causes the increase in KE. When the satellite comes in
enough low orbit, the excessive thermal energy generation
Passage – 1 due to air friction may cause the satellite to burn up.
In the graph shown, the PE of earth-satellite system is shown 98. What is the reason that during launching of satellite, while
by solid line as a function of distance r (the separation crossing the atmosphere it don't get burnt, but while falling down
between earth's centre and satellite). The total energy of towards earth or if orbiting in lower orbit, it gets burnt up ?
two objects which may or may not be bounded to earth are (a) While going up air friction force doesn't come into existence
shown in figure by dotted lines. (b) While going up satellite is with launching vehicle whose
speed is controllable
(c) While going up space-craft is protecting the satellite
from air friction by itself getting burned
(d) None of these
99. What would be the motion of satellite if air drag has to be
considered ?
(a) Moves with uniform speed in the launching orbit
(b) Orbital radius decreases continuously as a result moves
95. Mark the correct statement(s) with non-uniform velocity in elliptical orbit
(a) The object having total energy E1 is bounded one. (c) Orbital radius decreases continuously and hence
(b) The object having total energy E2 is bounded one. collapses with earth after some time in random manner
and there is equal chance of burning up the satellite due
(c) Both the objects are bounded one. to air friction also
(d) Both the objects are unbounded one. (d) Moves with non-uniform speed in the launching orbit
GRAVITATION 257

100. It has been mentioned in passage that as r decreases, E 105. The minimum and maximum speeds
decreases but K increases. The increases in K is [E = Total
GM 2GM GM 3GM
mechanical energy, r = Orbital radius, K = Kinetic energy] is (a) , (b) ,
9R R 5R 2R
(a) due to increase in gravitational PE
(b) due to decrease in gravitational PE GM 2GM GM 5GM
(c) , (d) ,
6R 3R 3R 2R
(c) due to work done by air friction force
106. Radius of curvature at the point of minimum distance is
(d) both (b) and (c)
101. If due to air drag, the orbital radius of earth decreases from 8R 5R
(a) (b)
R to R – R, R << R, then the expression for increase in 3 3
orbital velocity v is
4R 7R
(c) (d)
R GM R GM 3 3
(a) (b) 
2 R3 2 R3 Match the Columns
GM GM 107. For a planet orbiting about sun in elliptical orbit, some
(c) R (d)  R incomplete statements regarding physical quantities are
R3 R3
given in Column–I, which can be completed by using entries
102. For information given in above question, the change in KE, of Column–II. Match the entries of Column–I with the entries
k is
of Column–II.
GMm GMm Column–I Column–II
(a)   R (b)  R
R2 R2 (A) Maximum PE of sun planet system (P) is at perihelion.

GMm GMm (B) Maximum speed of planet (Q) is at aphelion

(c) R (d)   R (C) Minimum PE of sun planet system (R) is independent of
2R 2 2R 2
mass of planet
103. For information given in question no. 101, the change in PE, (D) Minimum kinetic energy of planet (S) is dependent on
U is semi-major axis of
orbit.
GMm GMm
(a)  R (b) R 108. Four identical satellites are orbiting in four elliptical orbits
R2 R2
having same semi-major axis but different eccentricities. In
GMm GMm Column–I some quantities associated with four orbits are
(c) R (d)  R given and in Column–II the words which can give the
2R 2 2R 2
information about physical quantities mentioned in Column–I.
104. For information given in question no. 101, the work done by Match the entries of Column–I with the entries of Column–II.
air friction force W, is 4
3
GMm GMm
(a)  R (b) R
R2 R2 1 E 2
r1 r2
GMm GMm
(c) R (d)  R
2R 2 2R 2
r1 r 2
where M is the mass of earth and m is mass of satellite. Column–I Column–II
Passage - 1 (A) Total energy of all four orbits (P) Same
For problems 1 and 2 (B) Speed of satellite in all four orbits (Q) Different
The minimum and maximum distances of a satellite from the (C) Velocity of satellite in all four orbits (R) Constant
centre of the earth are 2R and 4R, respectively, where R is (D) Angular momentum of satellites about (S) Varying
the radius of earth and M is the mass of the earth. centre of earth in all four orbits
GRAVITATION 258

109. Considering earth to be a homogeneous sphere but keeping 113. Two satellites A and B of equal mass move in the equitorial
in mind its spin, match the following : plane of the earth, close to the earth's surface. Satellite A
Column I Column II moves in the same direction as that of the rotation of the
(a) Acceleration due to (p) May change from point to earth while satellite B moves in the opposite direction.
Calculate the ratio of the kinetic energy of B to that of A in
gravity point.
the reference frame fixed to the earth.
(b) Orbital angular momentum (q) Does not depend on
(g = 9.8 m/s2, R = 6.37 × 106 m)
of the earth as seen from direction of projection
114. Three particles of mass m each are placed at the three corners
a distant star of an equilateral triangle of side a. Find the work (in 10–10 J)
(c) Escape velocity from the (r) Remains constant which should be done on this system to increase the sides

earth of the triangle to 2a. (m = 5 kg, a = 10 cm)

(d) Gravitational potential (s) Depend on direction 115. Earth is a shpere of uniform mass density. How much would
due to earth at a particular of projection a body weigh (in × 10 N) half ways down the centre of earth
if it weighed 100 N on the surface ?
point
116. An infinite collection of equal masses of 2 kg are kept on a
Integer type
horizontal line (x–axis) at positions x = 1, 2, 4, 8, ...... Find the
110. A sky lab of mass 2 × 103 kg is first launched from the surface gravitational potential at x = 0 (in –Gj units).
of earth in a circular orbit of radius 2R and then it is shifted
from this circular orbit to another circular orbit of radius 3R. 117. Two satellites of mass ratio 1 : 2 are revolving around the
Calculate the minimum energy (in 108 J) required to shift earth in circular orbits such that the distance of the second
the lab from first orbit to the second orbit. R = 6400 km, satellite is four times as compared to the distance of the first
g = 10 m/s2 satellite. Find the ratio of their centripetal force.
111. Distance between the centres of two stars is 10 a. The masses 118. Distance between the centre of two stars is 10a. The masses
of these stars are M and 16M and their radii a and 2a
of these stars are M and 16 M and their radii are a and 2a,
respectively. A body of mass m is fired straight from the surface
respectively. A body of mass m is fired straight from the
of the larger star towards the smaller star. What should be its
minimum initial speed (in km/s) to reach the surface of the surface of the larger star towards the smaller star. What
smaller star ? (M = 6 × 1022 kg, a = 1200 km) should be its minimum speed to reach the surface of the
112. A man can jump vertically to a height of 1.5 m on the earth. smaller star (round off to the nearest integer in the unit of
Calculate the radius of a planet of the same mean density as
GM
that of the earth from whose gravitational field he could )
escape by jumping. Radius of earth is 6.41 × 106 m. a
GRAVITATION 259

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Single Answer Questions 6. A simple pendulum has a time period T1 when on the earth’s
surface and T2 when taken to a height R above the earth’s
1. If the radius of the earth were to shrink by one per cent, its surface, where R is the radius of the earth. The value of
mass remaining the same ,the acceleration due to gravity on T2/T1 is : (2001)
the earth's surface would (1981)
(a) decrease (b) remain unchanged (a) 1 (b) 2
(c) increase (d) be zero (c) 4 (d) 2
2. If g is the acceleration due to gravity on the earth's surface, 7. A geostationary satellite orbits around the earth in a circular
the gain in the potential energy of an object of mass m orbit of radius 36,000 km. Then, the time period of a spy
raised from the surface of the earth to a height equal to the satellite orbiting a few hundred km above the earth's surface
radius R of the earth, is (1983)
(Re = 6400 km) will approximately be (2002)
1 (a) 1/2 h (b) 1 h
(a) mgR (b) 2 mgR
2
(c) 2 h (d) 4 h
1 8. A double star system consists of two stars A and B which
(c) mgR (d) mgR
4 have time periods TA and TB. Radius RA and RB and mass
3. Imagine a light planet revolving around a very massive star MA and MB. Choose the correct option. (2006)
in a circular orbit of radius R with a period of revolution T. If
the gravitational force of attraction between the planet and (a) If TA > TB then RA > RB (b) If TA > TB then MA > MB
–5/2
the star is proportional to R , then (1989) 2 3
T  R 
2
(a) T is proportional to R 2
(c)  A    A  (d) TA = TB
 TB   RB 
2 7/2
(b) T is proportional to R
9. A spherically symmetric gravitational system of particles
(c) T2 is proportional to R3/2
(d) T2 is proportional to R3.75  0 for r  R
has a mass density   
4. If the distance between the earth and the sun were half its 0 for r  R
present value ,the number of days in a year would have
where 0 is a constant. A test mass can undergo circular
been (1996)
motion under the influence of the gravitational field of
(a) 64.5 (b) 129 particles. Its speed v as a function of distance r from the
(c) 182.5 (d) 730 centre of the system is represented by (2008)

5. A satellite S is moving in an elliptical orbit around the earth.

The mass of the satellite is very small compared to the mass
of the earth (1998)
(a) the acceleration of S is always directed towards the centre (a) (b)
of the earth.
(b) the angular momentum of S about the centre of the earth
changes in direction, but its magnitude remains constant
(c) the total mechanical energy of S varies periodically with
time.
(c) (d)
(d) the linear momentum of S remains constant in magnitude.
GRAVITATION 260

10. A satellite is moving with a constant speed v in a circular (a) the gravitational field due to this object at the origin is
orbit about the earth. An object of mass m is ejected from zero
the satellite such that it just escapes from the gravitational (b) the gravitational field at the point B (2, 0, 0) is zero
pull of the earth. At the time of its ejection, the kinetic energy (c) the gravitational potential is the same at all points of
of the object is : (2011) 2 2
circle y + z = 36
1 (d) the gravitational potential is the same at all points on
(a) mv2 (b) mv
2
2 2
2 the circle y + z = 4
3 2 2
14. The magnitudes of the gravitational field at distance r1 and
(c) mv (d) 2 mv
2 r2 from the centre of a uniform sphere of radius R and mass

1 M are F1 and F2 respectively. Then (1994)

11. A planet of radius R = × (radius of Earth) has the same
10 F1 r1
(a)  if r1 < R and r2 < R
F2 r2
R
mass density as Earth. Scientists dig a well of depth on
5 F1 r22
(b)  if r1 > R and r2 > R
it and lower a wire of the same length and of linear mass F2 r12
density 10–3 kgm–1 into it. If the wire is not touching
anywhere, the force applied at the top of the wire by a F1 r13
(c)  if r1 < R and r2 < R
person holding it in place is (take the radius of Earth F2 r23
= 6 ×106m and the acceleration due to gravity on Earth is
10 ms–2) (2014) F1 r12
(d)  if r1 < R and r2 < R
(a) 96 N (b) 108 N F2 r22
(c) 120 N (d) 150 N 15. Two bodies, each of mass M, are kept fixed with a separation
Assertion Reason 2L. A particle of mass m is projected from the mid-point of
12. Statement–I : An astronaut in an orbiting space station above the line joining their centres, perpendicular to the line. The
the earth experiences weightlessness. gravitational constant is G. The correct statement(s) is (are)
Statement–II : An object moving around the earth under (2013)
the influence of earth's gravitational force is in a state of
(a) The minimum initial velocity of the mass m to escape
'free-fall'. (2008)
(a) If Statement–I is true, Statement–II is true; Statement–II GM
the gravitational field of the two bodies is 4
is the correct explanation for Statement–I. L
(b) If Statement–I is true, Statement–II is true; Statement–II (b) The minimum initial velocity of the mass m to escape
is not a correct explanation for Statement–I.
GM
(c) If Statement–I is true; Statement–II is false. the gravitationl field of the two bodies is 2
L
(d) If Statement–I is false; Statement–II is true.
Multiple Answer Questions (c) The minimum initial velocity of the mass m to escape
13. A solid sphere of uniform density and radius 4 units is located 2GM
with its centre at the origin O of coordinates. Two spheres the gravitational field of the two bodies is
L
of equal radii 1 unit, with their centres at A (–2, 0, 0) and
B (2, 0, 0) respectively, are taken out of the solid leaving (d) The energy of the mass m remains constant.
behind spherical cavities as shown in figure. (1993) Fill in the Blanks
16. The numerical value of the angular velocity of rotation of
the earth should be ................ rad/s in order to make the
effective acceleration due to gravity at equator equal to
zero. (1984)
17. According to Kepler's second law, the radius vector to a
planet from the sun sweeps out equal areas in equal intervals
of time. This law is a consequence of the conservation of
Then, ................ . (1985)
 GRAVITATION 261

18. A geostationary satellite is orbiting the earth at a height of 26. Distance between the centres of two stars is 10 a. The masses
6 R above the surface of the earth where R is the radius of of these stars are M and 16 M and their radii a and 2a
earth. The time period of another satellite at a height of 3.5 R respectively. A body of mass m is fired straight from the
from the surface of the earth is ................ hours. (1987) surface of the larger star towards the surface of the smaller
star. What should be its minimum initial speed to reach the
19. The masses and radii of the Earth and the Moon are M1, R1
surface of the smaller star ? Obtain the expression in terms
and M2, R2 respectively. Their centres are a distance d apart. of G, M and a. (1996)
The minimum speed with which a particle of mass m should
R
be projected from a point midway between the two centres 27. There is a crater of depth on the surface of the moon
so as to escape to infinity is ................ . (1988) 100
(radius R). A projectile is fired vertically upward from the
20. The ratio of earth's orbital angular momentum (about the
15 2
crater with velocity, which is equal to the escape velocity v
sun) to its mass is 4.4 × 10 m /s. The area enclosed by from the surface of the moon. Find the maximum height
2
earth's orbit is approximately ................ m . (1997) attained by the projectile. (2003)
21. A particle is projected vertically upwards from the surface
6
of earth (radius R) with a kinetic energy equal to half of the 28. Gravitational acceleration on the surface of a planet is g,
11
minimum value needed for it to escape. The height to which
where g is the gravitational acceleration on the surface of
it rises above the surface of earth is ................ . (1997)
the earth. The average mass density of the planet is 2/3
True/False times that of the earth. If the escape speed on the surface of
–1
22. It is possible to put an artificial satellite into orbit in such a way the earth is taken to be 11 kms , the escape speed on the
that it will always remain directly over New Delhi. (1984) –1
surface of the planet in kms will be (2010)
Subjective Questions 29. A large spherical mass M is fixed at one position and two
identical point masses m are kept on a line passing through
23. Two satellites S1 and S2 revolve round a planet df in coplanar the centre of M (see figure). The point masses are connected
circular orbits in the same sense. Their periods of revolution by rigid massless rod of length l and this assembly is free
are 1 h and 8 h respectively. The radius of the orbit of S1 is to move along the line connecting them. All three masses
4 interact only through their mutual gravitational interaction.
10 km. When S2 is closest to S1. Find (1986)
When the point mass nearer to M is at a distance r = 3l from
(a) the speed of S2 relative to S1
 M 
(b) the angular speed of S2 as actually observed by an M, the tension in the rod is zero for m = k   . The
astronaut in S1.  288 
24. Three particles, each of mass m, are situated at the vertices value of k is (2015)
of an equilateral triangle of side length a. The only forces
acting on the particles are their mutual gravitational forces.
It is desired that each particle moves in a circle while
maintaining the original mutual separation a. Find the initial
velocity that should be given to each particle and also the
time period of the circular motion. (1988) 30. A bullet is fired vertically upwards with velocity v from
25. An artificial satellite is moving in a circular orbit around the the surface of a spherical planet. When its reaches its
earth with a speed equal to half the magnitude of escape maximum height, its acceleration due to the planet’s
velocity from the earth. (1990) 1
gravity is th of its value of the surface of the planet. If
(a) Determine the height of the satellite above the earth's 4
surface.
the escape velocity from the planet is vesc  v N, then
(b) If the satellite is stopped suddenly in its orbit and
allowed to fall freely onto the earth, find the speed with the value of N is (ignore energy loss due to atmosphere)
which it hits the surface of the earth. (2015)


 GRAVITATION 262

ANSWER KEY

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (a)

9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (d) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (d)
17. (d) 18. (a) 19. (d) 20. (b) 21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (a)
25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (a) 30. (d) 31. (c) 32. (c)
33. (a) 34. (d) 35. (d) 36. (b) 37. (b) 38. (d) 39. (c) 40. (c)
41. (a) 42. (c) 43. (b) 44. (d) 45. (a) 46. (d)

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (d)

9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (a) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (d) 16. (a)
17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (c) 21. (d) 22. (c) 23. (d) 24. (c)
25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (d) 29. (c) 30. (c) 31. (d) 32. (c)
33. (b) 34. (d) 35. (a) 36. (d) 37. (b)

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (c) 5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (d)

9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (d) 14. (d) 15. (b) 16. (a)
17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (d) 20. (a) 21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (c)
25. (b) 26. (a, b) 27. (d) 28. (c) 29. (d) 30. (c) 31. (d) 32. (d)
33. (d) 34. (d) 35. (d) 36. (d) 37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (d)
41. (a) 42. (d) 43. (b) 44. (c) 45. (b) 46. (c) 47. (d) 48. (b)
49. (a) 50. (c) 51. (a, c) 52. (a) 53. (c) 54. (c) 55. (b) 56. (b)
57. (b) 58. (b) 59. (b) 60. (a) 61. (d) 62. (d) 63. (b) 64. (b)
65. (c) 66. (b) 67. (d) 68. (b, d) 69. (a,b,c) 70. (a,b,c) 71. (b,c) 72. (a,c,d)
73. (c, d) 74. (a, b, c) 75. (b,c,d) 76. (a,c,d) 77. (a,c,d) 78. (b, c) 79. (a, c, d) 80. (a, c)
81. (b, c) 82. (b, d) 83. (a, b, c, d) 84. (c) 85. (e) 86. (a) 87. (c) 88. (a)
89. (c) 90. (d) 91. (d) 92. (b) 93. (a) 94. (a) 95. (a) 96. (d)
97. (a) 98. (b) 99. (c) 100. (b) 101. (a) 102. (c) 103. (a) 104. (d)
105. (c) 106. (a) 107. (A – Q, S; B – P, R, S; C – P, S; D – Q, S) 108. (A – P, R; B – Q, S; C – Q, S; D – Q, R)
109. (a – p, q; b – r; c – q, s; d – r) 110. ( 0106) 111. (0006) 112. ( 3100) 113. (0001) 114. (0250)
115. (0005) 116. (0004) 117. (0008) 118. (0003)
 GRAVITATION 263

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (d)

9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (a) 13. (a, c, d) 14. (a, b) 15. (b, d) 16. 1.24 × 10–3

G
17. angular momentum 18. 8.48 19. v  2 M1  M 2  20. 6.94 × 1022 21. h = R 22. F
d

Gm a3
4 –4
23. (a) –  × 10 km/h (b) 3 × 10 rad/s 24. v  , T  2 25. (a) 6400 km, (b) 7.9 km/s
a 3 Gm

3 5 GM
26. 27. 99.5 R 28. 0003 29. (0007) 30. (0002)
2 a

Dream on !!

 2

Published by
Vedantu Innovations Private Limited
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
Vedantu Innovations Private Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by
any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the
publishers.
Notice : Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best of the resources and
knowledge. Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book
from sources regarded as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this
book. However, we as authors and publishers are not to be held responsible for
unintentional mistakes that might have crept in. Having stated that, errors (if any)
brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged and rectified in upcoming
editions.

Printed by
Colours Imprint
475C, Adugodi Main Road,
8th Block, Koramangala, Bengaluru 560 095
www.coloursimprint.com
3
 4

Founder’s Message
Dear Student,

It gives me immense pleasure to present to you a Ready Reckoner and Practice booklet by
Vedantu - ‘TATVA’. Tatva in Sanskrit, means a collection of “Core” content/truth and isn’t that
what Vedantu brings to your table - the Core? Vedantu, at all times, ensures that you have
easy accessibility to a collection of all essential concepts, theory, derivations, definitions, solved
examples, concept videos, and practice questions, important questions from competitive
examinations and pleased to say that all questions come with detailed solutions.

Tatva is the result of the constant endeavour and research done by our highly experienced
team of teachers and subject experts to compile relevant content for you to succeed in IIT JEE/
NEET and Olympiads. We strongly believe and vouch for the effectiveness and relevance of
this booklet to grab the desired rank in IIT JEE/ NEET.

Key Points on ‘How to obtain optimal benefits from ‘Tatva’ ?

 We suggest starting with the Practice of ‘Tatva questions’ at the end of a chapter
after revision and Practice of basic questions.
 For daily practice of questions attempt we strongly recommend session assignments
along with Vedantu live sessions
 Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you
revise concepts, mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary and eventually
clear all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
 Attempt Tatva questions post revision of 11th and 12th Grade topics. Take one topic at
a time to solve. Attempt any revision test series for NEET/JEE once you have resolved
Tatva questions. Following this will not only help you during revision but also give a
major boost to your confidence.
 First solve basic level questions and gradually progress to the advanced level.
 Practice basic level questions regularly all through your journey of preparation.
 Your success is our dream-come-true

I wish you all the best.

Anand Prakash
Founder, Academic Head
Vedantu

Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing

Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
 5

Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Theodore Roosevelt

Tatva is the brainchild of the creative Vedans who The managers who understood every aspect of what
strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you. Our the leadership were trying to accomplish and brought
heartfelt thanks to the Super Vedans who give wings so much of their own to the table and managed the
to the vision of Vedantu. execution of ‘Tatva’ immaculately.

Our leaders who have been our guiding light and Kiran Kumari Harish Rao
encouragement in every step: Bhavya Bangera Shraddha
Vamsi Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Sir Sushmitha Akshatha
Charubak Chakrabarti
Our gratitude to the insightful leadership and
guidance of our leaders who dreamt about ‘Tatva’, Our heartfelt gratitude to ourcreative content
steered the project in the right direction and were developers, the dedicated master teachers and the
instrumental in making this dream into a reality: DTP team who have put in their hard work, insights,
eagerness to execute and nurtured Tatva into ‘your
Sahil Bhatia Shubam Gupta ready handbook’ and to bring positive learning
Arshad Shahid Ajay Mittal experience to you.
JaideepSontakke Sudhanshu Jain

Physics Team

Teachers SME DTP

Aarzoo Walia Satyam Kumar Atul Singh (Team Lead) Jitender Singh
Ishani Mitra Santosh Kumar Nanda Pukhraj Singh Yamala Santhosh Kumar
Shubham Ghar Anmol Gupta Saurabh Sharma
Anand M Rohit Thakur
Vijayalakshmi Viswanathan
Pritesh Ranjan
Ravneet Wadhwa

A loud shout out for our media team - a bunch of creative minds with contagious energy. We cannot thank
them enough.

Suraj Bhan Singh

Gadde Ranjith
Ranjeeth Ramesh
Sreyoshi Biswas
Devika Ramachandran

Special thanks and appreciation for the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal,
Dipshi Shetty, Mohamed Anzar and Anuska Singh.

The journey of the imagination to the reality of ‘Tatva’ would not have been possible without our enthusiastic
Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated team of Teachers and our talented Tech
Team.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

FLUID MECHANICS
Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 8

Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 14

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 22

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 32

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 37

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 48

Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 157

ELASTICITY
Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 55

Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 59

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 65

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 69

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 71

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 75

Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 159

OSCILLATION & WAVES
Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 78

Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 90

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 104

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 115

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 123

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 145

Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 161

 01
FLUID MECHANICS
 Chapter 01 9

FLUID MECHANICS THEORY

1. FLUID MECHANICS
 The liquids and gases together are termed as fluids, in
other words, we can say that the substances which can
flow are termed as fluids. p1 – p2 = la
 We assume fluid to be incompressible (i.e., the density of and tan  = a/g, where  is the angle which the liquid’s free
liquid is independent of variation in pressure and remains surface is making with horizontal.
constant) and non-viscous (i.e. the two liquid surfaces in (d) Pressure at two points within a liquid at vertical separation
contact are not exerting any tangential force on each other). of h when the liquid container is accelerating up are related
by expression
1.1 Fluid Statics
1.1.1 Fluid Pressure

Pressure p at any point is defined as the normal force per

unit area.

dF p2 – p1 =  (g + a) h
p
dA
If container is accelerating down, then p2 – p1 = (g – a) h.

2 1.1.2 Atmospheric Pressure

The SI unit of pressure is the Pascal and 1 Pascal = 1 N/m
 Fluid force acts perpendicular to any surface in the fluid,  It is the pressure exested by earth’s atmosphere. Normal
no matter how that surface is oriented. Hence pressure, atmospheric pressure at sea level (an average value) is 1
5
has no intrinsic direction of its own, it is a scalar. atmosphere (atm) that is equal to 1.013 × 10 Pa.
Variation of Pressure  The excess pressure above atmospheric pressure is called
(a) Pressure at two points in a horizontal plane or at same gauge pressure, and total pressure is called absolute pressure.
level when the fluid is at rest or moving with constant  Barometer is a device used to measure atmospheric
velocity is same. pressure while U–tube manometer or simply manometer is
a device used to measure the gauge pressure.

1.1.3 Pascal’s Law

 A change in the pressure applied to an enclosed fluid is
transmitted equally to every portion of the fluid in all
(b) Pressure at two points which are at a depth separation of
direction of to the walls of the containing vessel.
h when fluid is at rest or moving with constant velocity is
related by the expression  There are a lot of practical applications of Pascal’s law e.g
Hydraulic lift


p2 – p1 = gh, where  is the density of liquid.

(c) Pressure at two points in a horizontal plane when fluid
container is having some constant horizontal acceleration
are related by the expression

SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 10

According to principle of hydraulics, A1

F1 F2 A A2
P1  P2    F2  2 F1
A1 A2 A1
v1 v2
1.1.4 Archimedes Principle

 When a body is partially or fully dipped into a fluid, the

fluid exerts contact force on the body. The resulatant of all  A1 V1 = A2 V2
these contact forces is called buoyant force (upthrust).  mass flows rate = AV
 F = weight of fluid displaced by the body. (where  is the density of the liquid.)
 This force is called buoyant force and acts vertically  Thus AV = constant velocity of liquid is smaller in codes
upwards (opposite to the weight of the body) through the parts and vice versa
centre of gravity of the displaced fluid. 1.2.2 Bernoulli’s Theorem
F = Vg In a stream line flow of an ideal fluid, the sum of pressure
where, v = volume of liquid displaced energy per unit volume, potential energy per unit volume
and kinetic energy per unit volume is always constant at
 = density of liquid.
all cross section of the liquid.
 Apparent decrease in weight of body = upthrust – weight
of liquid displaced by the body. ρV 2
P+ρgh+ =Constant
Wapp = U – W 2
 Floation :  It is a mathematical consequences of low of conservation
(a) A body floats in a liquid if the average density of the body of energy an fluid dynamics.
is less than that of the liquid.
C P2
(b) The weight of the liquid displaced by the immersed part of
A2 v2
body must be equal to the weight of the body.
(c) The centre of gravity of the body and centre of buoyancy P1 B
v1 h2
must be along the same vertical line.
A1
h1
1.2 Fluid Dynamics

 Steady Flow (Stream Line Flow)

 Bernoulli’s equation is valid only for incompressible
The flow in which the velocity of fluid particles crossing a steady flow of a fluid with no viscosity.
particular point is the same at all the times. Thus, each
 Application of Bernoulli’s Theorem.
particle takes the same path as taken by a previous particle
through that point. (a) Velocity of Efflux
 Line of flow
It is the path taken by a particle in flowing liquid. In case of a
steady flow, it is called streamline. Two steamlines can never
intersect. Streamlims do not intersect each other
 Tusbent flow
It is irregular flow in which particles move in zig zag way

1.2.1 Equation of Continuity

In a time t, the volume of liquid entering the tube of flow

in a steady flow is A1 V1 t. The same volume must flow
out as the liquid is incompressible. The volume flowing Let us find the velocity with which liquid comes out of a
out in t is A2 V2 t. It is a consequences of conservation hole at a depth h below the liquid surface.
of mass. Using Bernoulli’s theorem,

SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 11

1 2 1 2 Q
2
Q
2
PA  V  gh A  PB  VB  gh B   2 hg
2 A 2 
A2
2 2
A1
(Q = AV)

1 2 1 2
 Patm  VA  gh  Patm  V  0
2 2 2hg
 Q  A1A 2 2 2
(Note: PB = Patm, because we have opened the liquid to A  A2
1

atmosphere)
2 2
Here Q is the rate of fluid flow
 V = VA + 2gh
1.3 Viscosity
Using equation of continuity
AVA = aV The property of a fluid by virtue of which it opposes
the relative motion between its different layers is known
A: area of cross-section of vessel
as viscosity and the force that is into play is called the
a: area of hole viscous force.

a2 2 Viscous force is given by :

 V2  V  2gh
A2 dv
F  A
dx
2gh
 V  2gh (if the hole is very small) Newton’a law of viscocity :
1  a 2 / A2
It defines relationship between the shear strers and rate of
(b) Venturi Meter fluid subjected to an externals strers.
where  is a constant depending upon the nature of the
This is an instrument for measuring the rate of flow of fluids.
liquid and is called the coefficient of viscosity and velocity
It is an instrument to measure speed of fluid. gradient = dv/dx
–2
S.I. unit of coefficient of viscosity is Pa.s or Nsm .
CGS unit of viscocity is poise. (1 Pa.s = 10 Poise)

1.3.1 Stoke’s Law

 When a solid moves through a viscous medium, its motion

is opposed by a viscous force depending on the velocity
and shape and size of the body.
 The viscous drag on a spherical body of radius r, moving with
velocity v, in a viscous medium of viscosity  is given by
If PA is pressure at A and PB is pressure at B,
Fviscous = 6rv
PA – PB = hg
This relation is called Stoke’s law.
[h : difference of heights of liquids of density  in vertical
 Importance of Stoke’s law
tubes]
(a) This law is used in the determination of electronic charge
If V1 is velocity at A and V2 is velocity at B
with the help of milikan’s experiment.
Q = A1V1 = A2V2 [equation of continuity]
(b) This law accounts the formation of clouds.
2 2
V 1 V 2 (c) This law accounts why the speed of rain drops is less
PA    PB   [Bernoulli’s Theorem]
2 2 then that of a body falling freely with a constant velocity
from the height of clouds.
2 2 2 2 (d) This law helps a man coming down with the help of a
 V2  V1   PA  PB   hg
  parachute.

SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 12

1.3.2 Terminal Velocity

F
So, S  where S = surface tension of liquid.
It is maximum constant velocity acquired by the body while 
falling freely in a viscous medium. Surface tension is a property of liquid where liquid surface
2 behaves like a stretched membrane which have the
2r    0  g tendency to contract tending to have minimum possible
vr 
9 area at the surface. The property is called surface tension.
2
Where r is rduis of body  is density of body,  is density Unit of surface tension in MKS system : N/m, J/m
2
of liquid and  is coefficient of viscosity. CGS system  Dyne/cm, erg/cm

1.3.3 Poiseuille’s Formula 1.4.1 Surface Energy

This law states that the flow of liquid depend on variables In order to increase the surface area, the work has to be
such as length of tube (L) radius(r), pressure difference done over the surface of the liquid. This work done is
(P) and coefficient of visocity  stored in the liquid surface as its potential energy. Hence
Poiseuille studied the stream-line flow of liquid in capillary the surface energy of a liquid can be defined as the excess
tubes. potential energy per unit area of the liquid surface.

Volume of liquid coming out of tube per second in given by

4
 Pr
V
8

1.3.4 Reynold Number W = SA, where A = increase in surface area.

 The stability of laminar flow is maintained by viscous Note:
forces. It is obverved, however that laminar or steady flow (1) Work dione in formation of drop of radius r = surface
is disrupted when the rate of flow is large. Irregular, 2
tension × A = 4r S
unsteady motion, turbulence, sets in at high flow rates.
(2) Work dione in formation of soap bubble = 2 × surafce
 Reyonlds defined as a dimensionless number whose value 2
gives one an approximate idea, whether the flow rate would tension × A = 8r S
be turbulent or laminar.
1.4.2 Excess Pressure
This number, called the Reynolds number Re is defined as,
 Excess pressure in a liquid drop or bubble in a liquid is
vD
Re 
 2S
P , S is surface tension
R
where,  = the density of the fluid flowing with a speed
v. 4S
 Excess pressure in a soap bubble is P =
R
D = the diameter of the tube. (because it has two free surfaces)
 = the coefficient of viscosity of the fluid.
1.4.3 Angle of Contact
 It is found that flow is streamline or laminar for Re less
than 1000. The flow is turbulent for Re > 2000. The flow  The angle between the tangent to the liquid surface at the
becomes unsteady for Re between 1000 and 2000. point of contact and the solid surface inside the liquid is
Note:- called the angle of contact. It depends upon nature of
liqiud and solid in contact.
For lower density and higher viscosity fluids laminar flow
is more probable.  If the glass plate is immersed in mercury, the surface is
curved and the mercury is depressed below. Angle of
1.4 Surface Tension
contact is obtuse for mercury.
The surface tension of a liquid is defined as the force per  If the plate is dipped in water with its side vertical, the
unit length in the plane of the liquid surface at right angles water is drawn-up along the plane and assumes the curved
to either side of an imaginary line drawn on that surface. shape as shown. Angle of contact is acute for water.

SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 13

1.4.4 Capillary Tube and Capillarity Action In such a case, liquid rises to the top of the capillary tube
of length l (l < h) and adjusts the radius of curvature of its
 A very narrow glass tube with fine bore and open at both
meniscus until the excess pressure is equalised by the
ends is known as capillary tube. When a capillary tube in
pressure of liquid column of length l. (Note liquid does
dipped in a liquid, then liquid will rise or fall in the tube,
not overflow).
this action is termed as capillarity.
2
  g ... (i)
r
If r were the actual radius of curvature,
2
  h g ...(ii)
r
Comparing (i) and (ii)

2Scos  2S
h 
rg Rg
where, S = surface tension,
 = angle of contact,
r = radius of capillary tube,
R = radius of meniscus, and 2
 r   hr
 = density of liquid. g

 Capillary rise in a tube of insufficient length : hr

 r  i.e. radius of curvature r’ can be calculated.
If the actual height to which a liquid will rise in a capillary 
tube is ‘h’ then a capillary tube of length less than ‘h’ can
be called a tube of “insufficient length”.

Adhesion > Cohesion Adhesion = Cohesion Adhesion < Cohesion

1. Liquid will wet the solid. 1. Critical. 1. Liquid will not wet the solid.
2. Meniscus is concave. 2. Meniscus is plane. 2. Meniscus is convex.
3. Angle of contact is acute  < 90°). 3. Angle of contact is 90°. 3. Angle of contact is obtuse  > 90°).
4. Pressure below the meniscus is 4. Pressure below the 4. Pressure below the meniscus
lesser than above it by (2T/r), meniscus is same as more then above it by (2T/r),

i.e. P  P0  2T . above it, i.e. P = P0. i.e., P  P0  2T .

r r
5. In capillary there will be rise. 5. No capillarity. 5. In capillary there will be fall

SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 14

SOLVED EXAMPLES

Example - 1
The two thigh bones (femurs) each of cross-sectional area 0.84
2 or h1 = 1.2 h2 = 0.7 h2
10 cm support the upper part of a human body of mass
40 kg. Estimate the average pressure sustained by the From (i),
femurs.
2
h2 – 0.7 h2 = 9
g = 10 m/s .
or
Sol. Total cross-sectional area, 0.3 h2 = 9 or h2 = 30 cm
2 –4 2 and h1 = 0.7 × 30 = 21 cm
A = 2 × 10 cm = 20 × 10 m
Pressure at the common surface
F = 40 kg wt = 40 × 10 N = 400 N = h22g
3
Average pressure, = 0.30 × (0.84 × 10 ) × 10

F 400 = 2520 pa
P= A
5
= 2 × 10 pa.
20 104 Example - 4
Determine height h of oil in the U tube as shown in Fig.
Example - 2 Density of oil = 0.9 g/cc ; Density of liquid is 1.6 g/cc and
What is the pressure on a swimmer 10 m below the surface density of mercury. = 13.6 g/cc.
–2 5
of lake ? g = 10 ms ; atmospheric pressure = 1.01 × 10 Pa.

Sol. Here, h = 10 m,
5
Pa = 1.01 × 10 Pa
Total pressure = Pa +  gh
5
= 1.01 × 10 + 1000 × 10 × 10
5
= 2.01 × 10 Pa = 2 atm.
Example - 3
Two liquids of specific gravity 1.2 and 0.84 are poured into Sol. In equilibrium state, the pressure of liquid at the same level
the limbs of a U tube until the difference in levels of their must be equal. Taking pressure at level C in both arms of U
upper surfaces is 9 cm. What will be heights of their tube, we have
respective surfaces above the common surface in U tube ? Pressure due to h cm of oil + pressure due to (20 – h) cm of
What is the pressure at the common surface ? mercury
-2
(g = 10 ms ). = pressure of 20 cm of liquid
Sol. Let h1, h2 be the heights of denser and lighter liquids above i.e., h × 0.9 × g + (20 – h) × 13.6 × g = 20 × 1.6 × g
the common level. Then or 0.9 h + 272 - 13.6 h = 32
h2 – h1 = 9.0 cm ...(i) or 12.7 h = 240
At the common surface , h11g = h22g or
i.e., h1 × 1.2 × g = h2 × 0.84 × g 240
h = 12.7 = 18.9 cm
FLUID MECHANICS 15

3
Example - 5 (b) Gauge pressure, P = P – Pa = g h = (1.03 × 10 ) × 10 × 1000
5
The vessel shown in Fig. has two sections of area of cross = 103 × 10 Pa.
section A1 and A2. A liquid of density  fills both the (c) The pressure outside the submarine is P = Pa + g h and the
sections, upto a height h in each. Neglect atmospheric pressure inside the submarine is Pa.
pressure. Pressure difference on the window of the submarine = P – Pa
Find (a) the pressure at the base of vessel = g h.
(b) the force exerted by the liquid on the base of the vessel Force on the window = pressure difference × area of window
5 5
(c) the downward force exerted by the walls of the vessel = g h × A = 103 × 10 × (0.04) = 4.12 × 10 N.
at the level B. Example - 7
In a car lift, compressed air exerts a force F1 on a small
piston having a radius of 5.0 cm. This pressure is
transmitted to a second piston of radius 10.0 cm. If the
mass of the car to be lifted is 1350 kg, calculate F1. What is
the pressure necessary to accomplish this task ?
–2
(g = 9.8 ms )

5
Sol. Here, F1 = ? ; r1 = m,
100
F2 = 1350 kg, f = 1350 × 9.8 N ;

10
r2 = m
100
Sol. (a) Pressure at the base of vessel is the pressure due to
height of liquid column = h + h = 2. It is given by F1 F2 1a  r2
1
As,  or F1  a F1   r 2 F2
P = 2 h g. a1 a 2 2 2

(b) The force exerted by the liquid on the base of the vessel,
r2
1 (5 / 100) 2

F = P × A2 = 2 h g A2 or F1  r 2 F2  (10 / 100) 2  1350  9.8  3307 N

2

(c) Since the liquid exerts equal pressure in all directions, so

the force on the wall of vessel at level B in action is equal to F1 F1 3307 5
Pressure, P   = 4.21 × 10 Pa
a1 r12 (22 / 7)(5 / 100) 2
the downward force exerted by the wall of vessel on the
liquid at level B Example - 8
= Pressure × (A2 - A1) = h g × (A2 - A1) –3
A piece of pure gold of density 19.3 g cm is suspected to
Example - 6 be hollow inside. It weighs 38.250 g in air and 33.865 g in
water. Calculate the volume of the hollow portion of the
At the depth of 1000 m in an ocean (a) what is the absolute
gold, if any :
pressure ? (b) What is the gauge pressure ? (c) Find the
force acting on the window of area 20 cm × 20 cm of a Sol. Here, density of pure gold  = 19.3 g cm ;
–3

submarine at this depth, the interior of which is maintained

at sea-level atmospheric pressure. The density of sea water Mass of gold piece, M = 38.250 g
3 –3 –2
is 1.03 × 10 kg m , g = 10 ms . Atmospheric pressure
5
= 1.01 × 10 Pa.  Volume of the gold piece,

Sol. Here, M 38.25 3 3

5 3 –3
V =   19.3 cm = 1.982 cm
Pa = 1.01 × 10 Pa ; = 1.03 × 10 kg m ;
2
h = 1000 m; A = 0.20 × 0.20 = 0.04 m . mass of gold piece in water, = 33.865 g
(a) Absolute pressure P = Pa + g h Therefore apparent loss in weight of the gold piece in water
5 3 5
= 1.01 × 10 + 1.03 × 10 × 10 × 1000 = 104.01 × 10 Pa. = 38.250 – 33.865 = 4.385 g.
FLUID MECHANICS 16

–3
As, density of water is 1 g cm , therefore, the volume of Example - 11
4.385 3
(a) There is a rectangular frame of wire measuring
displaced water = = 4.385 cm 20 cm × 13 cm. Calculate (i) the side of the square and
1
(ii) radius of the circle, which will have the same perimeter
 Volume of the hollow portion of the gold = 4.385 – 1.982 as the rectangular frame. (b) Show that of the three, the
3
= 2.403 cm circle has the maximum surface area.
Example - 9
Sol. (a) Perimeter of the rectangular frame = (20 + 13)2 = 66 cm
The tension in a string holding a solid block below the
Let l be the side of the square and r be the radius of the
surface of a liquid (of density greater than that of solid) as
square having the same perimeter as that of rectangular
shown in Fig. is T0, when the system is at rest. What will
frame.
be the tension in the string if the system has upward
acceleration a ? (i) For square, the perimeter of square = 4 l = 66 cm
or l = 66/4 = 16.5 cm
(ii) For circle, the perimeter of circle = 2 r = 66

66 66
or r =  = 10.5 cm.
2 2  22 / 7

(b) Area of rectangle = 20 × 13 = 260 sq. cm.

Area of square = 16.5 × 16.5 = 272.25 sq. cm.

2 22 2
Sol. Let V be the volume of block of density . Let be the Area of circle = r  × (10.5) = 346.5 sq. cm
7
density of liquid. Mass of block, m = V .
Hence, out of the three, circle encloses the maximum area.
Initially for the equilibrium of block, we have
Example - 12
upward thrust = V g = T0 + V g or T0 = V ()g
If excess of pressure inside a soap bubble of radius 1 cm is
When the lift is accelerated upwards, then g  g + a, balanced by that due to column of oil (sp. gravity 0.8) 2 mm
so, T = V ()(g + a) high, find surface tension of soap bubble.
Therefore, T/T0 = [(g + a)/g] or T = T0[(g + a)/g] –2 3 –3
Sol. Here, r = 1 cm = 10 m ; density of oil,  = 0.8 × 10 kg m
–3
Example - 10 ; h = 2 mm = 2 × 10 m
–3
A wire ring of 30.0 mm radius resting flat on the surface of Pressure due to 2 mm column of oil, p = h  g = (2 × 10 )
3
the liquid is raised. The pull required is 3.03 g f more, before (0.8 × 10 ) × 9.8 = 2 × 0.8 × 9.8 Pa
the film breaks than it is after. Calculate the surface tension
4S
of the liquid. In case of a soap bubble, p = r

Sol. Here, r = 30.0 mm = 3 cm ; F = 3.03 gf = 3.03 × 980 dyne. Since

pr 2  0.8  9.8 102 –2 –1
the liquid is touching the ring, both inside as well as outside, or S =  = 3.92 × 10 Nm
4 4
therefore, force acting on the ring due to surface tension is
given by Example - 13

F’ = 2 (S × circumference of ring) = 2 (S × 2  r) Find the height to which water will rise in a capillary tube of
–3 –1
1.5 mm diameter. Surface tension of water is 7.4 × 10 Nm .
22
=4Sr=4×S× × 3 dyne –3
7 Sol. Here, h = ? ; r = D/2 = 1.5/2 = 0.75 mm = 0.75 × 10 m ;
–3 –1 3 –3
S = 7.4 × 10 Nm . For water,  = 10 kg m and angle of
22 o
As F’ = F  4 × S × × 3 = 3.03 × 980 contact  = 0
7
2Scos  2  7.4 103  cos 0o
3.03  980  7 Now, h =  = 0.0021m
or S= = 78.76 dyne/cm. rg (0.75 103 ) 103  9.8
4  22  3
FLUID MECHANICS 17

Example - 14 Example - 18
The terminal velocity of a copper ball of radius 2.0 mm Water flows through a horizontal pipe of which the cross-
o –1
falling through a tank of oil at 20 C is 6.5 cm s . Compute the section is not constant. The pressure is 1 cm of mercury
–1
o 3 –3
viscosity of the oil at 20 C. Density of oil is 1.5 × 10 kg m , where the velocity is 0.35ms . Find the pressure (in terms
–1
3
density of copper is 8.9 × 10 kg/m .
3 of mercury column) at a point where the velocity is 0.65ms .

–2 –1 –3
Sol. Here, v = 6.5 × 10 ms ; r = 2.0 × 10 m ; g = 9.8 m/s ,
2 Sol. At one point,
3
P1 = 1 cm of Hg = 0.01 m of Hg = 0.01 × (13.6 × 10 ) × 9.8 Pa ;
3 3
 = 8.9 × 10 kg/m . –1
v1 = 0.35 ms
3 3
 = 1.5 × 10 kg/m –1 3 –3
At another point, P2 = ?, v2 = 0.65 ms and  = 10 kg m .
2r 2 (  ) g 2  (2.0 103 ) 2  (8.9  1.5) 103  9.8 According to Bernoulli’s theorem
  
9v 9  (6.5 102 )
1 1
–1
P1  v12  P2  v22
= 9.9 × 10 Pa–s. 2 2
Example - 15 1
or P2 = P1 –  (v 22  v12 )
A rain drop of radius 0.3 mm has a terminal velocity in air 2
–5 –2
1 m/s. The viscosity of air is 18 × 10 dyne cm s. Find the
3 1 3 2 2
viscous force on the rain drops in newton. = 0.01 × 13.6 × 10 × 9.8 – 2 × 10 × [(0.65) – (0.35) ]
–3 –1
Sol. Here, r = 0.3 mm = 0.3 × 10 m ; v = 1 ms 1182.8
 = 18 × 10–5 dyne cm–2 s = 18 × 10–6 Pa-s. = 1182.8 Pa = = 0.00887 m of Hg
9.8  (13.6 103 )

22 –6
Example - 19
Viscous force, F = 6  r v = 6 × × (18 × 10 )
7 Find the velocity of efflux of water from an orifice near the
–3
× (0.3 ×10 ) × 1 = 1.018 × 10 N.
–7 bottom of a tank in which pressure is 500 gf/sq cm above
atmosphere.
Example - 16
At what speed will the velocity head of stream of water be 500 2 –
equal to 40 cm ? Sol. Pressure at orifice, P = 500 gf/sq cm = × 9.8 × (100) Nm
1000
2 –2
= 500 × 98 Nm
v2
Sol. Here, velocity head, = 40 cm Let h be the depth of orifice below the surface.
2g

–1 P 500  98
 v  2g  40  2  980  40 = 280 cm s As, P = h  g,  h =  g  3 =5m
10  9.8
Example - 17
–1
At what speed will the velocity of a stream of water be The velocity of effux, v = 2 gh = 2  9.8  5 = 9.893 ms .
–2
equal to 20 cm of mercury column. Taking g = 10 ms . Example - 20
A bottle full of a liquid is fitted with a tight cork. Explain
Sol. Here, velocity head = 20 cm of Hg = 20 × 13.6 cm of water ; why a slight blow on the cork may be sufficient to break
–2 –2
g = 10 ms = 1000 cm s . the bottle.
v2
As velocity head = Sol. If the blow given to a cork of area of cross-section a exerts
2g a force F on cork, then increase in pressure on liquid is
=  a . According to Pascal’s law, the increase in pressure at
v2
 20 × 13.6 = one part of liquid is communicated equally at all other parts
2 1000 of liquid. So the increase in force on the area A of the vessel
–1
is F’ = (F/a) A. Since A > > a, so F’ > > F. As a result of which
or v= 20 13.6  2 1000 = 737.56 cm/s = 7.3756 ms the bottle may break.
FLUID MECHANICS 18

Example - 21 of a large iron ship, the weight of water displaced by the

A balloon filled with helium does not rise in air indefinitely ship is higher than the weight of ship, hence the ship floats
but halts after a certain height. (Neglect winds). in water.
Example - 26
Sol. In the beginning the balloon filled with helium rises in air
Does Archimede’s principle hold in a vessel in free fall ?
because weight of the air displaced by balloon is more than
the weight of the balloon and helium gas filled inside balloon. Sol. Archimede’s principle does not hold good in this situation
We know that the density of air and the value of acceleration as the vessel in free fall is in a condition of weightlessness,
due to gravity decreases with height. Due to it, the weight where the buoyant force accounting for Archimede’s
of air decreases at greater height. The balloon halts at such principle does not exist.
a height where the weight of the air displaced just equals to
Example - 27
the weight of helium gas and the balloon.
A block of wood floats in a bucket of water in a lift. Will the
Example - 22
block sink more or less if the lift starts accelerating up ?
The force required by a man to move his limbs immersed in
water is smaller than the force for the same movement in air. Sol. When the lift starts accelerating up, the block of wood will
float at the same level in a bucket of water in a lift. It is so
Sol. The upthurst on the limbs of a man is more when immersed because the equilibrium of floating body is unaffected by
in water than in air. As a result of it, the effective weight of variation is acceleration due to gravity ‘g’. However, thrust
limbs of a man is less in water than in air. Hence the force of liquid and weight of body both depend on g and will
required to move his limbs is less in water than that in air. increase equally.
Example - 23 Example - 28
Ice floats in water with about nine tenths of its volume A shot is obtained by pouring molten lead through narrow
submerged. What is the fractional volume submerged for holes into water from certain height. The falling lead
an ice berg floating on a fresh water lake of a (hypothetical) solidifies and takes the form of small spheres. Explain the
planet whose gravity is ten times that of the earth ? phenomenon.

Sol. The fractional volume of ice submerged in water is Sol. The molten lead comes out of a narrow hole in the form of a
independent of the value of acceleration due to gravity ‘g’. fine stream. When it falls from a height into a vessel
So, it is nine tenths on new planet also. containing cold water, it breaks into spherical drops due to
thrust of water and surface tension. These are cooled on
Example - 24
entering the water and thus solidify into small spheres.
What is the fractional volume of an ice cube in a pail of
Example - 29
water produced in an enclosure which is freely falling
under gravity ? Why does oil spread over the surface of water ?

Sol. For a free fall, the effective value of acceleration due to Sol. Surface tension of oil is less than that of water. When oil is
gravity is zero. Therefore, there will be no weight of ice cube dropped on the surface of water, the force of surface tension
and hence no upward thrust on ice cube. As a result of it, of water being larger than that of oil, stretches the oil drops
the ice cube can float with any value of fractional volume on all sides. Hence, the oil spreads over the surface of water.
submerged. Example - 30
Example - 25 Why the tip of the nib of a pen is split ?
Explain why a small iron needle sinks in water while a
large iron ship floats ? Sol. The tip of the nib of a pen is split in order to provide a
capillary which helps the ink to rise to the end of the nib and
Sol. A body will float in a liquid if the weight of the liquid enables it to write continuously.
displaced by the immersed part of the body in liquid is equal
to weight of body. In case of iron needle, the weight of Example - 31
water displaced by needle is much less than the weight of It is better to wash the clothes in hot soap solution.
needle, hence, the iron needle sinks into the water. In case Why ?
FLUID MECHANICS 19

Sol. The soap solution has less surface tension as compared to Sol. Because in strameline flow all particles maiontain their
ordinary water and its surface tension decreases further on constant speed and the relative separation between them
heating. The hot soap solution can, therefore, spread over Example - 37
large surface area and as such it has more wetting power. It
What happens to the pressure of an ideal liquid when it
is on account of this property that hot soap solution can
passes through a region where its speed increases ?
penetrate and clean the clothes better than the ordinary water.
Example - 32 Sol. The pressure of an ideal liquid decreases when it passes
Why surface tension concept is only held for liquids and through a region where it speed increases, according to
not for gases which are also fluids ? Bernoulli’s theorem.
Example - 38
Sol. We know that the intermolecular distance between the gas
molecules is quite large as compared to that of liquid. Due The shapes of cars and planes are streamlined. Why ?
to it, the forces of cohesion in the gas molecules are very
Sol. When a body moves through a fluid, its motion is opposed
small and these are quite large for liquids. Therefore, the
concept of surface tension is applicable to liquids but not by the force of fluid friction, which increases with the speed
to gases. of the body. When cars and planes, move through air, their
motion is opposed by the air friction, which in turn, depend
Example - 33 upon the shape of the body. It is due to this reason that the
Rain drops falling under gravity do not acquire very high cars or planes are given such shapes (known as stream-
velocity. Why ? lined shapes) so that air friction is minimum. Rather the
movement of air layers on the upper and lower side of
Sol. When a rain drop falls under gravity through a viscous
streamlined shaped body provides a lift which helps in
medium (say air) a viscous drag force acts on it in a direction
increasing the speed of the car.
opposite to that of motion. According to Stoke’s law, this
viscous drag force goes on increasing with the increasing Example - 39
velocity of the drop till a stage comes when the total Why two holes are made to empty an oil tin ?
downward force on the drop is just balanced by the upward
viscous drag force. At this stage, there is no net force to Sol. When oil comes out through a tin with one hole, the pressure
accelerate rain drop. Hence the rain drop starts moving with inside the tin becomes less than the atmospheric pressure.
uniform velocity. This velocity is called ‘terminal velocity’. This stops the oil from flowing out. When two holes are
Example - 34 made in the tin, air keeps on entering the tin through the
A bigger rain drop falls faster than smaller one. Why ? other hole and maintains pressure inside.
Example - 40
Sol. When the rain drops of different sizes fall under gravity,
An air bubble of 1 mm diameter rises in water with terminal
they ultimately move with their terminal velocities due to –3
velocity. If viscosity of water is 1.0 × 10 decapoise and
viscous drag force of air. As terminal velocity of a drop –3
density of air is 1.3 kgm , calculate the terminal velocity of
varies as the square of its radius, therefore a bigger drop
the air bubble.
will have greater terminal velocity and hence fall faster than
a small rain drop. –3 3
Sol. Given  = 1.0 × 10 decapoise, density of water  = 10 kg
Example - 35 –3 –3
m , diameter of bubble, d = 1 mm = 1 × 10 m
Machine parts are jammed in winter. Why ?
2 r 2 (  )g
Sol. A lubricating oil is generally used between the various parts Using the formula, V =
9 
of a machine to reduce the friction. In winter, since the
temperature is low, the viscosity of oil between the machine
2 (0.5 103 ) 2 (103  1.3) 9.8
parts increases considerably, resulting in jamming of the We have v 
9 1.0 103
machine parts.
–1
Example - 36 = 0.54 ms .
Two stream lines of fluid can not cut each other. Why ?
FLUID MECHANICS 20

Example - 41 Example - 47
A cylinder of height 20 m is completely filled with water. Why does mercury not wet glass ?
–1
Find the velocity of efflux of water (in ms ) through a
small hole on the side wall of the cylinder near its bottom. Sol. This is because the force of cohesion between mercury
–2
Given g = 10ms . molecules is stronger than the force of adhesion between
the molecules of glass and mercury.
–2
Sol. Given h = 20 m, g = 10ms , Velocity of efflux = ?
Example - 48
Velocity of efflux = 2gh Explain the working of mercury barometer to measure the
atmospheric pressure.
–1
2 10  20 = 20 ms .

Example - 42
How can we suck soft drink through a straw ?

Sol. When we suck the air in the straw, the Pressure inside straw
becomes less than atmospheric preasure. Due to this presure
difference, the soft drink rises up through the straw.

Example - 43
Why does water not flow out of dropper unless the rubber
ball is pressed ?

Sol. The upward air pressure at the tip of the dropper is equal to Sol. (i) The pressure of the atmosphere at any point is equal to
the pressure of the liquid column in it. When we press the the weight of a column per air of unit cross sectional area
rubber ball, the downward pressure increases making the extending from that point to the top of the atmosphere.
liquid flow out.
(ii) A long glass tube closed at one end and filled with mercury
Example - 44 is inverted into a trough of mercury. This device is known
A block of wood is floating in a lake. What is the apparent as mercury barometer.
weight of the floating block ? (iii) The space above the mercury column in the tube contains
only mercury. Vapour whose pressure P is so small that it
Sol. The apparent weight of the block is equal to zero because
may be neglected.
the weight of the block acting vertically downward is
balanced by the buoyant force acting, on the block upward. (iv) The pressure inside the column at point A must be equal to
the pressure at point B which is at the same level.
Example - 45
 Pa = gh
Why is wet ink absorbed by a blotting paper ?
where is the density of mercury and h is height of mercury
Sol. Blotting paper has fine pores which act as capillaries. The column in the tube.
ink rises in these capillarises. Thus, the ink is absorbed by (v) It is found that the mercury column in the barometer has a
the blotting paper. height of about 76 cm at sea level equivalent to one
Example - 46 atmosphere.
Why does water wet glass ? (vi) Hence,
Pa = 0.76 × Density of mercury × g
Sol. This is because the force of adhesion between the 3
molecules of water and the glass is stronger than the force  Pa = 0.76 × 13.6 × 10 × 9.8
5
of cohesion between water molecules.  Pa = 1.013 × 10 pa
Teacher’s Note:

If you are interested in aerospace engineering, you need to

master this chapter. If you want to become a hematologist,

you still need to master this chapter

"Samajh ayega to mazaa ayega,

Mazaa ayega to samajh ayega".

Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing

Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
FLUIDS MECHANICS 22

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Pressure due to fluids 7. A given shaped glass tube having uniform cross-section is
1. Pressure at a point inside a liquid does not depend on: filled with water and is mounted on a rotatable shaft as
shown in fig. If the tube is rotated with a constant angular
(a) the depth of the point below the surface of the liquid
velocity  then:
(b) the nature of the liquid
(c) the acceleration due to gravity at that point
(d) the shape of the containing vessel
2. Two stretched membranes of area 2 cm2 and 3 cm2 are
placed in a liquid at the same depth. The ratio of the
pressure on them is:
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 22 : 32
3. A dam for water reservoir is built thicker at the bottom (a) water levels in both A and B go up
than at the top because:
(b) water level in section A goes up and that in B comes
(a) pressure of water is very large at the bottom due to its down
large depth
(c) water level in section A comes down and that in B it
(b) water is likely to have more density at the bottom due goes up
to its large depth
(d) water level remain same in both sections.
(c) quantity of water at the bottom is large
(d) none of the above 8. The height to which a cylindrical vessel be filled with a
homogeneous liquid, to make the average force with which
4. A vessel contains liquid of density as shown in fig.
the liquid presses the side of the vessel equal to the force
The gauge pressure at the point P is:
exerted by the liquid on the bottom of the vessel, is equal to:
(a) half of the radius of the vessel
(b) radius of the vessel
(c) one-fourth of the radius of th vessel
(d) three-fourths of the radius of the vessel
9. A uniformly tapering vessel is filled with a liquid of density
(a) hg (b) Hg 900 kg/m3. The force that acts on the base of the vessel due
(c) (H – h)g (d) (H – h) g cos  to the liquid is: (g = 10 m/s2)
5. A tank 5 m high is half filled with water and then is filled
to the top with oil of denisty 0.85 g/cm3. The pressure at
the bottom of the tank, due to these liquids, is:
(a) 1.85 gf/cm2 (b) 89.25 gf/cm2
(c) 462.5 gf/cm2 (d) 500 gf/cm2
6. A piston of cross-sectional area 100 cm2 is used in a
hydraulic press to exert a force of 107 dyne on the water.
The cross-sectional area of the other piston which
supports an object having a mass 2000 kg is:
(a) 3.6 N (b) 7.2 N
(a) 100 cm2 (b) 109 cm2
(c) 9.0 N (d) 14.4 N
(c) 2 × 104 cm2 (d) 2 × 1010 cm2
FLUIDS MECHANICS 23

2
10. In the given figure shown. 14. A tube 1 cm in cross section is attached to the top of a
2
vessel 1 cm high and of cross section 100 cm . Water is
poured into the system filling it to a depth of 100 cm above
the bottom of the vessel as shown in the figure. Take
–2
g = 10 ms . Find the correct statement.

(a) p1 > p0 (b) p > p0

(c) p1 > p2 (d) p = 0
2
11. A cylindrical jar of cross-sectional area 0.01 m is filled
with water to a height of 50 cm. It carries a tight-fitting
(a) The force exerted by the water against the bottom of
piston of negligible mass. What is the pressure at the
the vessel is 100 N.
bottom of the jar when a mass of 1 kg is placed on the
–2
piston ? Take g = 10 ms . (b) The weigth of water in the system is 1.99 N.
5
(a) 10 Pa (b) 6000 Pa (c) Both (a) and (b) are correct

(c) 5000 Pa (d) 1000 Pa (d) Neither (a) nor (b) is correct.
12. Two vessels A and B of different shapes have the same Container in Motion
base area and are filled with water upto the same height h 15. A container containing water has a constant acceleration
(see figure). The force exerted by water on the base is FA for ‘a’ in the horizontal drection. Free surface of water gets
vessel A and FB for vessel B. The respective weights of the sloped with the horizontal at angle:
vessels are WA and WB. Then
1 g
(a) cos  
a

1 g
(b) sin  
a 

1 a
(c) tan  
(a) FA > FB ; WA > WB (b) FA = FB ; WA > WB g
(c) FA = FB ; WA < WB (d) FA > FB ; WA = WB
1 a 
13. A U-tube contains water and oil separated by mercury. (d) sin  
The mercury columns in the two arms are at the same g
level with 10 cm of water in one arm and 12.5 cm of oil in 16. Fig. (A), (B) and (C) show three different situations of the
the other, as shown in figure. What is the relative density surface of liquid contained in a vessel that is moving
of oil ? towards right.

These figures indicate, respectively, that the vessel is:

(a) moving with uniform speed, accelerating, decelerating
(b) moving with uniform speed, decelerating, accelerating
(a) 0.8 (b) 1.0
(c) accelerating, decelerating, moving with uniform speed
(c) 1.25 (d) none of these
(d) decelerating, accelerating, moving with uniform speed
FLUIDS MECHANICS 24

17. The minimum horizontal acceleration of the container so Pascals Law

that the pressure at the point A of the container becomes
20. A hydraulic lift is used to lift a car of mass 3000 kg. The
atmospheric is (the tank is of sufficient height)
cross-sectional area of the lift on which the car is
–2
supported is 5 × 10 m. What is the pressure on the smaller
piston, if both the pistons are at the same horizontal level ?
–2
Take g = 10 ms .
5 5
(a) 6 × 10 Pa (b) 5 × 10 Pa
5 5
(c) 4 × 10 Pa (d) 3 × 10 Pa
21. Figure shown water filled in a symmetrical container. Four
pistons of equal area A are used at the four openings to
keep the water in equilibrium. Now an additional force F is
applied at each piston. The increase in the pressure at the
3 4 centre of the container due to this addition is
(a) g (b) g
2 3

4 3
(c) g (d) g
2 4
18. A sealed tank containing a liquid of density  moves with
horizontal acceleration a as shown in the figure. The
difference in pressure between two points A and B will be

(a) hg (b) lg

F 2F
(c) hg – la (d) hg + la (a) (b)
A A
19. A U-tube of base length ‘l’ filled with same volume of two
liquids of densities  and 2 is moving with an acceleration 4F
(c) (d) 0
‘a’ on the horizontal plane. If the height difference between A
the two surfaces (open to atmosphere) becomes zero, then
BUOYANCY
the height h is given by
22. When a body is wholly or partially immersed in a liquid it
appears to lose weight. This loss of weight is equal to the
weight to:
(a) water displaced by the body
(b) liquid displaced by the body
(c) equal volume of water
(d) equal volume of liquid
23. Two pieces of metal when immersed in a liquid have equal
a 3a upthrust on them; then:
(a)  (b) 
2g 2g (a) both pieces must have equal weights
a 2a (b) both pieces must have equal densities
(c)  (d)  (c) both pieces must have equal volumes
g 3g
(d) both are floating to the same depth
FLUIDS MECHANICS 25

24. When a body is weighed in a liquid, the loss in its weight 31. A beaker containing water weighs 100 g. It is placed on the
depends upon: pan of a balance and a piece of metal weighing 70 g and
(a) volume of the body (b) mass of the body having a volume of 10 cm3 is placed inside the water in the
beaker. The weight of the beaker and the metal would be:
(c) shape of the body (d) CG of the body
(a) 170 g (b) 160 g
25. An iron ball is weighed in air and then in water by a
(c) 100 g (d) 30 g
spring balance:
32. A body carries a fish in one hand and a bucket of water in
(a) its weight in air is more than in water
the other hand; if he places the fish in the bucket, the
(b) its weight in water is more than in air weight now carried by him:
(c) its weight is same both in air and water (a) is less than before
(d) its weight is zero in water (b) is more than before
26. A body weighs 40 g in air. If its volume is 10 cc, in water (c) is the same as before
it will weigh: (d) depends upon his speed
(a) 30 g 33. A block of wood is floating in a lake. The apparent weight
(b) 40 g of the floating block is
(c) 50 g (a) equal to its true weight
(d) data are insufficient to calculate (b) less than its true weight
27. A block of metal (density 7 g/cc) of size 5 cm × 5 cm × 5 cm (c) more than its true weight
is weighed completely submerged in water. What will be (d) equal to zero
its apparent weight (density of water = 1 g/cc)?
9 th
(a) (6 × 5 × 5 × 5)g (b) (4 × 4 × 4 × 7)g 34. An ice cue floats on water in a beaker with of its
10
(c) (7 × 5 × 5 × 5)g (d) (4 × 4 × 4 × 6)g
volume submerged under water. What fraction of its volume
28. A weightless rubber balloon has 100 g of water in it. Its
will be submerged if the beaker of water is taken to the
weight in water will be: th
moon where the gravity is 1/6 that on the earth ?
(a) 100 g (b) 200 g
(a) 9/10 (b) 27/50
(c) 50 g (d) zero
(c) 2/3 (d) zero
29. The reading of a spring balance when a block is
35. When a ship floats on water:
suspended from it in air is 60 N. This reading is changed
to 40 N when the block is submerged in water. The specific (a) it displaces no water
gravity of the block must therefore be: (b) the mass of water displaced is equal to the mass of the
(a) 3 (b) 2 ship
(c) the mass of water displaced is lesser than the mass of
(c) 6 (d) 3/2
the ship
30. A vessel with water is placed on a weighing pan and
(d) the mass of water displaced is greater than the mass of
reads 600 g. Now a ball of 40 g and density 0.80 g/cc is
the ship
sunk into the water with a pin as shown in fig., keeping it
sunk. The weighing pan will show a reading. 36. A hydrogen-filled balloon stops rising after it has attained
a certain height in the sky. This happens because
(a) the atmospheric pressure decreases with height and
becomes zero when maximum height is attained
(b) the temperature of the air at maximum height equals that of
the hydrogen in the balloon
(c) viscous effects become negligible
(d) at the highest point, the density of air is such that the
(a) 600 g (b) 550 g
buoyant force on the balloon equals its weight
(c) 650 g (d) 632 g
FLUIDS MECHANICS 26

37. An iceberg is floating partially immersed in sea water. If 45. A jar is filled with two non-mixing liquids 1 and 2 having
the density of sea water is 1.03 g/cc and that of ice is 0.92 densities 1 and 2 respectively. A solid ball, made of a
g/cc, the fraction of the total volume of iceberg above the material of density 3, is dropped in the jar. It comes to
level of sea water is: equilibrium in the position shown in the fig. Which of the
(a) 8% (b) 11% following is true for 1, 2 and 3 ?
(c) 34% (d) 89%
38. Two solids A and B float in a liquid. It is observed that A
floats with half its volume immersed and B floats with (2/3)
of its volume immersed. Compare the densities of A and B:
(a) 4 : 3 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 3 : 4 (d) 1 : 3
39. A body weights W in air and it loses its weight by 25% in
water. The relative density of the body is
(a) 4 (b) 1/4 (a) 3 < 1 < 2 (b) 1 > 3 > 2
(c) 3/4 (d) 4/3 (c) 1 > 2 > 3 (d) 1 < 3 < 2
40. A body floats with (1/3) of its volume outside water and 46. A wooden piece floats half submerged in a tub of water. If
(3/4) of its volume outside another liquid. The density of the system is transferred to a lift ascending with
the other liquid is: acceleration the wooden piece will:
(a) sink a little more (b) rise a little
(a) (9/4) g/cc (b) (4/9) g/cc
(c) remain half submerged (d) sink to the bottom
(c) (8/3) g/cc (d) (3/9) g/cc 47. A piece of ice, with a stone frozen inside it, is floating in
41. A raft of wood (density 600 g/m3) of mass 120 kg floats in water contained in a beaker. When the ice melts, the level
water. How much weight can be put on the raft to make it of water in the beaker
just sink? (a) rises
(a) 120 kg (b) 200 kg (b) falls
(c) remains unchanged
(c) 40 kg (d) 80 kg
(d) falls at first and then rises to the same height as before.
42. A boat 3m long and 2 m wide is floating in a lake. When a
48. A metallic sphere floats in an immiscible mixture of water
man climbs over it, it sinks 1 cm further into water. The (w = 103 kg/m3) and a liquid (l = 13.5 × 103 kg/m3) such
mass of the man is:
4 1
(a) 60 kg (b) 64 kg that its th portion is in water and th portion is in
5 5
(c) 70 kg (d) 72 kg liquid. Density of the metal is:
43. A man is sitting in a boat which is floating in a pond. If the (a) 4.5 × 103 kg/m3 (b) 4.0 × 103 kg/m3
man drinks some water from the pond, the level of water in 3
(c) 3.5 × 10 kg/m 3
(d) 1.9 × 103 kg/m3
the pond will: 49. A vessel contains an immiscible mixture of water and a
(a) rise a little (b) sink a little liquid of density 0.8 gm/cc. A cube of side 10 cm is placed
in the mixture and it is observed that the water-liquid
(c) remain stationary (d) none of these interface is at the middle of cube height. Mass of the
44. A boat carrying a number of large stones is floating in a cube is:
water tank. What will happen to the water level if the stones (a) 420 gm (b) 680 gm
are unloaded into the water? The water level (c) 225 gm (d) 900 gm
(a) remains unchanged 50. A metal ball of density 7800 kg/m3 is suspected to have a
large number of inner cavities. It weighs 9.8 kg when
(b) rises weighed directly on a balance and 1.5 kg less when
(c) falls immersed in water. The fraction by volume of the cavities
in the metal ball is apporximately:
(d) rises till half the number of stones are unloaded and
then begins to fall (a) 20% (b) 30%
(c) 16% (d) 11%
FLUIDS MECHANICS 27

51. A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in 55. A cylinder of height 20 m is completely filled with water.
–1
water as shown in the figure. The distance h and l are The velocity of efflux of water (in ms ) through a small
shown there: hole on the side wall of the cylinder near its bottom, is
(a) 10 (b) 20
(c) 25.5 (d) 5
56. A sphere of solid material of specific gravity 8 has a
concentric spherical cavity and just sinks in water. Then,
the ratio of the radius of the cavity to the outer radius of
the sphere must be
3 3
3 5
(a) (b)
2 2
After sometime, the coin falls into the water. Then:
(a) both l and h increase
3
7 2
(c) (d) 3
(b) both l and h decrease 2 7

(c) l decreases and h increases Continuity Equation, Bernoulli’s

(d) l increases and h decreases Equation and Torricelli’s Equation

52. A body is just floating on the surface of a liquid. The 57. A piston of a syringe pushes a liquid with a speed of 1 cm/
density of the body is same as that of the liquid. The body sec. The radii of the syringe tube and the needle are R = 1
is slightly pushed down. What will happen to the body? cm and r = 0.5 mm respectively. The velocity of the liquid
(a) It will come back slowly to its earlier position. coming out of the needle is
(b) It will remain submerged where it is left. (a) 2 cm/sec (b) 20 cm/sec
(c) It will sink. (c) 10 cm/sec (d) 400 cm/s
(d) It will come out violently. 58. Bernoulli’s theorem is a consequence of
53. A piece of ice floats in a vessel with water above which a (a) conservation of mass
layer of lighter oil is poured. When the whole of ice melts, (b) conservation of energy
which one of the following statements will be true? (c) conservation of linear momentum
(a) The level of the interface will remain the same.
(d) conservation of angular momentum
(b) The total level of the liquids in the vessel will rise.
59. In the given figure, the velocity v3 will be
(c) The total level of the liquids in the vessel will fall while
the level of interface will go up.
(d) The level of interface as well as the total level of liquids
in the vessel will fall.
54. A cubical block of side 10 cm floats at the interface of an
oil and water. The pressure above that of atmosphere at
the lower face of the block is (a) 2 m/s (b) 4 m/s
(c) 1 m/s (d) 3 m/s
60. The velocity of efflux of a liquid through an orifice in the
bottom of a tank does not depend upon
(a) density of liquid
(b) height of the liquid column above orifice
(c) acceleration due to gravity
2 2
(a) 200 N/m (b) 680 N/m (d) None of these
(c) 400 N/m2 (d) 800 N/m2
FLUIDS MECHANICS 28

61. A hole is made at the bottom of the tank filled with water 66. A water tank standing on the floor has two small holes
(density = 1000 kg/m3). If the total pressure at the bottom punched in the vertical wall one above the other. The holes
of the tank is three atmospheres (1 atmosphere = 105 N/ are 2.4 cm and 7.6 cm above the floor. If the jest of water
m2), then the velocity of efflux is from the holes hit the floor at the same point, then the
height of water in the tank is :
(a) 400 m / s (b) 200 m / s (a) 10 cm (b) 5 cm
(c) 20 cm (d) 48 cm
(c) 600 m / s (d) 500 m / s
67. Water is flowing through two horizontal pipes of different
62.  
A small hole is made at a height of h '  1 / 2 m from the diameters whcih are connected together. The diameter of
the two pipes are 3 cm and 6 cm respectively. If the speed
bottom of a cylindrical water tank and at a depth of of water in the narrower tube is 4 m/s. Then, the speed of
h  2 m form the upper level of water in the tank. The water in the wider tube is :
(a) 16 m/s (b) 1 m/s
distance where the water emerging from the hole strikes
the ground is (c) 4 m/s (d) 2 m/s
68. The pressure of water in a pipe when tap is closed is 5.5 ×
105 N/m2. When tap gets open, pressure reduces to 5 × 105
N/m2. The velocity with which water comes out on opening
the tap is :
(a) 10 m/s (b) 5 m/s
(c) 20 m/s (d) 15 m/s
69. A tank is filled with water up to height H. When a hole is
made at a distance h below the level of water. What will be
horizontal range of water jet ?
(a) 2 2 m (b) 1 m
(a) 2 h (H  h) (b) 4 h (H  h)
(c) 2 m (d) none of these
63. The level of water in a tank is 5 m high. A hole of area 1 cm2 (c) 4 h (H  h) (d) 2 h (H  h)
is made at the bottom of the tank. The rate of leakage of
Viscosity
water from the hole is (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 10–3 m3/s (b) 10–4 m3/s3 70. The ratio of the terminal velocities of two drops of radii R
3 –2 3
and R/2 is
(c) 10 m /s (d) 10 m /s
(a) 2 (b) 1
64. Spherical balls of radius R are falling in a viscous fluid of
(c) 1/2 (d) 4
viscosity  with a velocity . The retarding viscous force
acting on the spherical ball is 71. Units of coefficient of viscosity are
(a) Nms–1 (b) Nm2s–1
(a) directly proportional to R but inversely proportional to .
(c) Nm–2s (d) None of these
(b) directly proportional to both radius R and velocity .
72. The terminal velocity v of a small steel ball of radius r
(c) inversely proportional to both radius R and velocity .
falling under gravity through a column of viscous liquid
(d) inversely proportional to R but directly proportional to of coeffcient of viscosity  depends on mass of the ball m,
velocity . acceleration due to gravity g, coefficient of viscossity 
65. If the terminal speed of a sphere of gold (density and radius r. Which of the following relations is
–3 –1
= 19.5 kgm ) is 0.2 ms in a viscous liquid (density = 1.5 dimensionally correct ?
–3
kgm ), find the terminal speed of a sphere of silver (density mgr
–3
= 10.5 kg/m ) of the same size in the same liquid. (a) v  (b) v  mgr

–1 –1
(a) 0.4 ms (b) 0.133 ms
–1 –1 mg mg
(c) 0.1 ms (d) 0.2 ms (c) v  (d) v 
r 
FLUIDS MECHANICS 29

73. A rain drop of radius r falls in air with a terminal speed vt. Surface Tension
What is the terminal speed of a rain drop of radius 2r ? 80. The water droplets in free fall are spherical due to
(a) vt/2 (b) vt
(a) gravity
(c) 2vt (d) 4vt
74. Eight spherical rain drops of the same mass and radius are (b) viscosity
–1
falling down with a terminal speed of 6 cm s . If they (c) surface tension
coalesce to form one big drop, what will be its terminal (d) intermolecular attraction
speed ? Neglect the buoyancy due to air. 81. Tiny insects can float and walk on the surface of water
–1 –1
(a) 1.5 cms (b) 6 cms
–1 –1 due to
(c) 24 cms (d) 32 cms
(a) buoyancy alone
75. Two equal drops of water are falling through air with a
steady velocity v. If the drops coalesce, then new velocity (b) surface tension alone
will be : (c) both buoyancy and surface tension
(a) 2 v (b) 2v (d) neither buoyancy nor surface tension
82. Two small drops of mercury each of radius r from a single
v large drop. The ratio of surface energy before and after
2/3
(c) 2 v (d)
2 this change is :
76. As the temperature of water increases, its viscosity (a) 2 : 22/3 (b) 22/3 : 1
(a) remains unchanged
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 2
(b) decreases
83. If the angle of contact is less than 90°, then pressure just
(c) increases
(d) increases or decreases depending on the external inside the surface of a meniscus
pressure (a) is less than atmospheric pressure
77. The rate of flow of liquid in a tube of radius r, length l, (b) is greater than atmospheric pressure
whose ends are maintained at a pressure difference p is (c) is same as the atmospheric pressure
4
Qpr (d) none of these
V , where  is coefficient of the viscosity and Q
 84. If two soap bubbles of different radii are connected by a
is : tube
(a) 8 (b) 1/8 (a) air flows from the bigger bubble to the smaller bubble
(c) 16 (d) 1/16 till the sizes become equal
78. Two capillary tubes of the same length but different radii (b) air flows from bigger bubble to the smaller bubble till
r1 and r2 are fitted in parallel to the bottom of a vessel. The the sizes are interchanged
pressure head is p. What should be the radius of a single
tube that can replace the two tubes so that the rate of flow (c) air flows from the smaller bubble to the bigger
is same as before ? (d) there is no flow of air.
r1r1 85. Which of the following is not the unit of surface tension?
(a) r1 + r2 (b) r  r (a) Newton/metre (b) Joule/(metre)2
1 2
(c) kg/(second)2 (d) 3Watt/metre
r1  r2 86. Surface tension is due to
(c) (d) None of these
2
(a) friction forces between molecules
79. A viscous fluid is flowing through a cylindrical tube. The
(b) cohesive forces between molecules
velocity distribution of the fluid is best represented by
the diagram (c) adhesive forces between molecules
(d) gravitational forces
87. A 20 cm long capillary tube is dipped in water. The water
(a) (b) rises upto 8 cm. If the entire arrangement is put in a freely
falling elevator, the length of water column in the capillary
tube will be
(a) 8 cm (b) 10 cm
(c) (d) None of these
(c) 4 cm (d) 20 cm
FLUIDS MECHANICS 30

88. The spiders and insects move and run on the surface of 95. The work done to break up a drop of a liquid of radius R
water without sinking, because and surface tension  into eight drops, all of the same size, is
2 2
(a) elastic membrane is formed on water due to property of (a) 4R (b) 2R
surface tension
1 2 1 2
(b) spiders and insects are lighter (c) R (d) R
2 4
(c) spiders and insects swim on water
96. Water is flowing at a speed of 1.5 ms–1 through a horizontal
(d) spiders and insects experience upthrust
tube of cross-sectional area 10–2m2 and you are trying to
89. Small droplets of liquid are usually more spherical in shape
than larger drops of the same liquid because stop the flow by your palm. Assuming that the water stops
immediately after hitting the palm, the minimum force that
(a) force of surface tension is equal and opposite to the
force of gravity you must exert should be (density of water = 103 kgm–3).
(b) force of surface tension predominates the force of (a) 15 N (b) 22.5 N
gravity (c) 33.7 N (d) 45 N
(c) force of gravity predominates the force of surface 97. Two water droplets coalesce to form a large drop. In this
tension process,
(d) force of gravity and force of surface tension act in the (a) energy is liberated
same direction and are equal
(b) energy is absorbed
90. Hair of shaving brush cling together when it is removed
(c) energy is neither liberated nor absorbed
from water due to
(a) force of attraction between hair (d) a small amount of mass is converted into energy in
accordance with Einstein’s mass-energy equivalence
(b) surface tension 2
relation E = mc .
(c) viscosity of water 6
98. A mercury drop of radius 1 cm is sprayed into 10 drops of
(d) characteristic property of hair
equal size. The energy expended in joule is (surface tension
91. A square frame of side L is dipped in a liquid. On taking –3
of mercury is 460 × 10 Nm )
–1

out, a membrane is formed. If the surface tension of the

(a) 0.057 (b) 5.7
liquid is T, then force acting on one side of the frame will –4 –6
be: (c) 5.7 × 10 (d) 5.7 × 10
(a) 8 TL (b) 4 TL 99. If work W is done in blowing a bubble of radius R from
soap solution, then the work done in blowing a bubble of
TL radius 2R from the same solution is
(c) TL (d)
2 (a) W/2 (b) 2W
92. Water does not wet an oily glass, because
1
(a) cohesive force of oil > adhesive force between oil and (c) 4W (d) 2 W
glass 3
(b) cohesive force of oil > cohesive force of water 100. If two soaps bubbles of equal radii r coalesce, then the
(c) oil repels water radius of curvature of interface between two bubble will
(d) cohesive force of water > adhesive force between water be:
and oil molecules (a) r (b) 0
93. If the surface tension of soap solution is , what is the (c) infinity (d) r/2
work done in blowing soap bubble of radius r ? 101. A glass plate is partly dipped vertically in the mercury and
2 2
(a) r  (b) 2r  angle of contact is measured. If the plate is inclined, then
2 2
(c) 4r  (d) 8r  the angle of contact will
94. The average mass of rain drops is 3.0×10–5 kg and their (a) increase (b) remain unchanged
average terminal velocity is 9 m/s. Calculate the energy (c) increase or decrease (d) decrease
transferred by rain to each square metre of the surface at 102. A liquid wets a solid completely. The meniscus of the liquid
a place which receives 100 cm of rain in a year. in a sufficiently long tube is
(a) 4.05 ×104 J (b) 3.5 ×105 J
(a) flat (b) concave
(c) 9.0 ×104 J (d) 3.0 ×105 J (c) convex (d) cylindrical
FLUIDS MECHANICS 31

103. If two soap bubble of different radii are in communication 108. Water rises to a height of 30 mm in a capilary tube. If the
with each other
3
(a) air flow from larger bubble into the smaller one radius of the capillary tube is made th of its previous
4
(b) the size of the bubbles remains the same value. The height to which the water will rise in the tube is:
(c) air flows from the smaller bubble into the large one and (a) 30 mm (b) 20 mm
the larger bubble grows at the expense of the smaller one
(c) 40 mm (d) 10 mm
(d) None of the above
109. When two capillary tubes of different diameters are dipped
104. The excess pressure due to surface tension in a spherical vertically, then rise of the liquid is:
liquid drop of radius r is directly proportional to
(a) same in both the tubes
(a) r (b) r2
(b) more in the tube of larger diameter
(c) r–1 (d) r–2
(c) less in the tube of smaller diameter
105. The excess pressure across a soap bubble of radius r is
(d) more in the tube of smaller diameter
p = 4/r, where  is the surface tension of soap solution.
What is the excess pressure across an air bubble of the 110. Water rises to a height h in a capillary tube held vertically
same radius r formed inside a container of soap solution ? in a beaker containing water. If the capillary tube is inclined
at an angle 30° with the water surface, the length to which
 2 water rises in the capillary will be
(a) (b)
r r (a) h/2 (b) h

4 2h
(c) (d) none of these (c) (d) 2h
r 3
106. Two soap bubbles of radii r1 and r2 equal to 4cm and 5cm 111. Two parallel glass plates are dipped partly in the liquid of
are touching each other over a common surface S1S2 density d keeping them vertical. If the distance between
(shown in figure). Its radius will be : the plates is x surfazce tension for the liquids is T and
angle of contact , then rise of liquid between the plates
due to capillary will be :

T cos  2T cos 
(a) (b) xdg
xd

2T T cos 
(c) xdg cos  (d) xdg
(a) 4 cm (b) 20 cm
(c) 5 cm (d) 4.5 cm
112. Water rises up to 10 cm height in a long capillary tube. If
CAPILLARY RISE OR FALL this tube is immersed in water so that the height above the
water surface is only 8 cm, then
107. If a capillary tube is dippped into liquid and the levels of (a) water flows out continuously from the upper end
the liquid inside and outside are same, then the angle of
(b) water rises upto upper end and forms a spherical surface
contact is :
(a) 0° (b) 90° (c) water only rises upto 6 cm height
(c) 45° (d) 30° (d) water does not rise at all
FLUIDS MECHANICS 32

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. A small spherical ball of radius r falls freely under gravity 5. A pendulum clock loses 12 s a day if the temperature is
through a distance h before entering a tank of water. If, 40°C and gains 4s in a day if the temperature is 20°C. The
after entering the water, the velocity of the ball does not temperature at which the clock will show correct time, and
change, then h is proportional to (2015) the coefficient of linear expansion () of the metal of the
(a) r2 (b) r3 pendulum shaft are, respectively. (2016)

(c) r4 (d) r5 (a) 25°C,  = 1.85 × 10–5/°C

2. A cylindrical block of wood (density = 650 kg m-3), of base (b) 60°C,  = 1.85 × 10–4/°C
area 30 cm2 and height 54 cm, floats in a liquid of density (c) 30°C,  = 1.85 × 10–3/°C
900 kg m-3. The block is depressed slightly and then (d) 55°C,  = 1.85 × 10–2/°C
released. The time period of the resulting oscillations of
6. The temperature of an open room of volume 30 m3 increases
the block would be equal to that of a simple pendulum of
from 170C to 270C due to the sunshine. The atmospheric
length (nearly) : (2015)
(a) 52 cm (b) 65 cm pressure in the room remains 1 105 Pa . If ni and n f are
(c) 39 cm (d) 26 cm the number of molecules in the room before and after
3. The excess pressure across a soap bubble of radius r is p heating, then n f  ni will: (2017)
= 4/r, where  is the surface tension of soap solution.
What is the excess pressure across an air bubble of the (a) 1.61  1023 (b) 1.38  10 23
same radius r formed inside a container of soap solution ?
(c) 2.5 1025 (d) 2.5  1025
 2
(a) (b) (2015) 7. A copper ball of mass 100 gm is at a temperature T. It is
r r
dropped in a copper calorimeter of mass 100 gm, filled
with 170 gm of water at room temperature. Subsequently,
4
(c) (d) none of these the temperature of the system is found to be 750C. T is
r
given by :
4. Which of the following option correctly describes the (Given : Room temperature = 300C, Specific heat of copper
variation of the speed v and acceleration ‘a’ of a point = 0.1 cal/gm0C) (2017)
mass falling vertically in a viscous medium that applies a
(a) 885°C (b) 1250°C
force F =”kv, where ‘k’ is a constant, on the body ? (Graphs
are schematic and not drawn to scale) (c) 825°C (d) 800°C

(2016) 8. An external pressure P is applied on a cube at 00C so that

it is equally compressed from all sides. K is the bulk
modulus of the material of the cube and  is its coefficient
of linear expansion. Suppose we want to bring the cube to
(a) (b) its original size by heating. The temperature should be
raised by : (2017)

P P
(a) (b)
3 K K

(c) (d)
3
(c) (d) 3PK 
PK
FLUIDS MECHANICS 33

9. The following observations were taken for determining 13. A small soap bubble of radius 4 cm is trapped inside
surface tension T of water by capillary method : diameter another bubble of radius 6 cm without any contact. Let P2
of capillary, D = 1.25 × 10–2 m rise of water, h = 1.45×10–2 m. be the pressure inside the inner bubble and P0, the pressure
Using g = 9.80 m/s 2 and the simplified relation outside the outer bubble. Radius of another bubble with
pressure difference P2-P0 between its inside and outside
rhg
T 103 N / m, the possible error in surface tension would be: (2018)
2
(a) 12 cm (b) 2.4 cm
is closest to: (2017)
(c) 6 cm (d) 4.8 cm
(a) 10% (b) 0.15%
(c) 1.5% (d) 2.4% 14. A boy’s catapult is made of rubber cord which is 42 cm
long, with 6 mm diameter of cross-section and of negligible
10. Two tubes of radii r 1 and r 2, and lengths l 1 and l 2, mass. The boy keeps a stone weighing 0.02 kg on it and
respectively, are connected in series and a liquid flows stretches the cord by 20 cm by applying a constant force.
through each of them in steam line conditions P1 & P2 are When released, the stone flies off with a velocity of 20 ms1.
pressure differences across the two tubes. Neglect the change in the area of cross-section of the
cord while stretched. The Young’s modulus of rubber is
1
If P2 is 4P1 and l2 is , then the radius r2 will be equal to: closest to: (2019)
4
(a) 106 N/m–2 (b) 104 N/m–2
(2017)
(c) 108 N/m–2 (d) 103 N/m–2
(a) r1 (b) 2r1
15. Water from a pipe is coming at a rate of 100 litres per
r1 minute. If the radius of the pipe is 5 cm, the Reynolds
(c) 4r1 (d) number for the flow is of the order of: (density of water =
2
1000 kg/m3, coefficient of viscosity of water = 1 mPa s)
11. A thin uniform tube is bent into a circle of radius r in the
(2019)
vertical plane. Equal volumes of two immiscible liquids,
3 4
(a) 10 (b) 10
whose densities are 1 and 2  1 > 2  , fill half the 2
(c) 10 (d) 106
circle. The angle  between the radius vector passing
16. If ‘M’ is the mass of water that rises in a capillary tube of
through the common interface and the vertical is : radius ‘r’, then mass of water which will rise in a capillary
(2018) tube of radius ‘2r’ is: (2019)

  M
(a)  = tan -1   1  (b)  = tan -1   2  (a) M (b)
2
 2  2  1 
(c) 4 M (d) 2 M

-1     -    -1   1 + 2  4
(c)  = tan   1 2   (d)  = tan   17. A wooden block floating in a bucket of water has of its
 2  1 + 2   2  1 - 2  5
volume submerged. When certain amount of an oil poured
12. When an air bubble of radius r rises from the bottom to into the bucket, it is found that the block is just under the
5r oil surface with half of its volume under water and half in
the surface of a lake, its radius becomes . Taking the oil. The density of oil relative to that of water is:
4
atmospheric pressure to be equal to 10 m height of water (2019)
column, the depth of the lake would approximately be (a) 0.5 (b) 0.8
(igno re the sur face tension and the effect of (c) 0.6 (d) 0.7
temperature) : (2018 )
18. A cylinder with fixed capacity of 67.2 lit contains helium
(a) 11.2 m (b) 8.7 m gasat STP. The amount of heat needed to raise the
(c) 9.5 m (d) 10.5 m temperatureof the gas by 20°C is closest to (in J): [Given
that R = 8.31 J mol-1 K-1] (2019)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 34

19. A cubical block of side 0.5 m floats on water with 30% of 24. Water flows into a large tank with flat bottom at the rate of
its volume under water. What is the maximum weight that 10–4m3s–1 Water is also leaking out of a hole of area 1 cm2 at
can be put on the block without fully submerging it under its bottom. If the height of the water in the tank remains
3 3 steady, then this height (in cm) is:
water? (Take, density of water  10 kg / m ] (2019)
(2019)
(a) 46.3 kg (b) 87.5 kg 25. A long cylindrical vessel is half filled with a liquid. When
(c) 65.4 kg (d) 30.1 kg the vessel is rotated about its own vertical axis, the liquid
20. A submarine experiences a pressure of 5.05  106 Pa at rises up near the wall. If the radius of vessel is 5 cm and its
rotational speed is 2 rotations per second, then the
depth of d1in a sea. When it goes further to a depth of d2it
difference in the heights between the centre and the sides,
experiences a pressure of 8.08  106 Pa. Then d2 – d1 is in cm, will be
(2019)
approximately (density of water  103 kg / m3 and
(a) 2.0 (b) 0.1
acceleration due to gravity  10 ms 2 ): (2019) (c) 0.4 (d) 1.2
26. A soap bubble, blown by a mechanical pump at the mouth
(a) 300 m (b) 400 m of a tube, increases in volume, with time, at a constant
(c) 600 m (d) 500 m rate. The time dependence of pressure inside the bubble
21. Water from a tap emerges vertically downwards with an is given by :
initial speed of 1.0 ms–1The cross-sectional area of the tap (2019)
is 10–4m2. Assume that the pressure is constant throughout
(a)  t 2 (b)  t –3
the stream of water and that the flow is streamlined. The
cross-sectional area of the stream, 0.15 m below the tap –
1
1
would be: [Take g = 10ms–2] (c)  t 3 (d) 
t
(2019)
27. A cylindrical vessel containing a liquid is rotated about
(a) 2 105 m 2 (b) 5 105 m 2 its axis so that the liquid rises at its sides as shown in the
(c) 5 104 m2 (d) 1105 m2 figure. The radius of vessel is 5 cm an and the angular

22. A solid sphere, of radius R acquires a terminal velocity v1 speed of rotation is  rad s 1. The difference in the height,
when falling (due to gravity) through a viscous fluid h (in cm) of liquid at the centre of vessel and at the side
havinga coefficient of viscosity  . The sphere is broken will be : (2020)
into 27 identical solid spheres. If each of these spheres
acquires a terminal velocity, v2, when falling through the

 v1 
same fluid, the ratio  v  equals: (2019)
 2

1
(a) 9 (b)
27

1
(c) (d) 27
9
23. The top of a water tank is open to air and its water level is
maintained. It is giving out 0.74m3 water per minute through
a circular opening of 2 cm radius in its wall. The depth of
the centre of the opening from the level of water in the
tank is close to: 52 22
(a) (b)
(2019) 2g 25g
(a) 6.0 m (b) 4.8 m
(c) 9.6 m (d) 2.9 m 252 22
(c) (d)
2g 5g
FLUIDS MECHANICS 35

28. A capillary tube made of glass of radius 0.15 mm is dipped 34. In an experiment to verify Stokes law, a small spherical
vertically in a beaker filled with methylene iodide (surface ball of radius r and density  falls under gravity through
tension = 0.05 Nm–1, density = 667 kg m–3) which rises to
a distance h in air before entering a tank of water. If the
height h in the tube. It is observed that the two tangents
terminal velocity of the ball inside water is same as its
drawn from liquid-glass interfaces (from opp. Sides of the
capillary) make an angle of 60º with one another. Then h is velocity just before entering the water surface, then the
close to (g = 10 ms–2). (2020) value of h is proportional to : (ignore viscosity of air)
(a) 0.172 m (b) 0.049m (2020)
(c) 0.087 m (d) 0.137 m (a) r 4
(b) r
29. Pressure inside two soap bubbles are 1.01 and 1.02 (c) r 3
(d) r2
atmosphere, respectively. The ratio of their volumes is :
35. A fluid is flowing through a horizontal pipe of varying
(2020)
cross-section, with speed v ms-1 at a point where the
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 2 : 1
pressure is P pascal. At another point where pressure is
(c) 0.8 : 1 (d) 8 : 1
30. When a long glass capillary tube of radius 0.015 cm is P
Pascal its speed is V ms-1. If the density of the fluid is
dipped in a liquid, the liquid rises to a height of 15 cm 2
within it. If the contact angle between the liquid and glass kg m-3 and the flow is streamline, then V is equal to :
to close to 0º, the surface tension of the liquid, in milli
Newton m–1, is (2020)

[(liquid)  900 kgm 3 , g  10 ms2 ] (Give answer in P P

(a)  v2 (b)  v2
closest integer) ……….. . 2 
(2020)
31. An air bubble of radius 1 cm in water has an upward 2P P
acceleration 9.8 cm s-2. The density of water is 1 gm cm-3 (c)  v2 (d) v
 
and water offers negligible drag force on the bubble. The
mass of the bubble is (g = 980 cm/s2). 36. An ideal fluid flows (laminar flow) through a pipe of non-
(2020) uniform diameter. The maximum and minimum diameters of
(a) 1.52 gm (b) 4.51 gm the pipes are 6.4cm and 4.8cm, respectively. The ratio of
(c) 3.15 gm (d) 4.15 gm minimum and maximum velocities of fluid in this pipe is
32. A cube of metal is subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of (2020)
4 GPa. The percentage changein the length of the side of
the cube is close to : 3 9
(Given bulk modulus of metal, B = 8 × 1010 Pa) (a) (b)
2 16
(2020)
(a) 0.6 (b) 20 3 3
(c) 1.67 (d) 5 (c) (d)
4 2
33. A hollow spherical shell at outer radius R floats just
submerged under the water surface. The inner radius of 37. A leak proof cylinder of length 1 m, made of metal which
the shell is r. If the specific gravity of the shell material is has very low coefficient of expansion is floating in water
at 0o C such that its height above the water surface is 20
27
w.r.t water, the value of r is : (2020) cm. When the temperature of water is increases to 4o C,
8
the height of the cylinder above the water surface becomes
4 8 21 cm. The density of water at T = 4oC relative to the
(a) R (b) R density at T=0o C is close to
9 9
(2020)
1 2
(c) R (d) R (a) 1.01 (b) 1.03
3 3
(c) 1.26 (d) 1.04
FLUIDS MECHANICS 36

38. Consider a solid sphere of density 40. An ideal liquid (water) flowing through a tube of non-
uniform cross-sectional area,where area at A and B are 40
 r2 
  r   0 1   , 0  r  R . The minimum density of a cm2 and 20 cm2respectively. If pressure differencebetween
 R2 
A & B is 700 N/m2, then volume flow rate is (density of
liquid in which it floatisjust (2020) water = 1000kgm–3) (2020)

2 2
(a) 0 (b) 0
5 3

0 0
(c) (d)
5 3

39. Two liquids of density 1 and  2   2  2 1  are filled up (a) 2720 cm3/s (b) 2420 cm3/s

behind a square wall of side 10 as shown in figure. Each (c) 1810 cm3/s (d) 3020 cm3/s
liquid has a height of 5 . The ratio of forces due to these 41. A small spherical droplet of densityd is floating exactly
liquids exerted on the upper part MN to that at the lower half immersed in a liquid of density  and surface tension
part NO is (Assume that the liquids are not mixing)
T. The radius of droplet is (take note that the surface
(2020)
tension applied an upward force on droplet)
(2020)

2T T
(a) r  3    d  g (b) r    d  g
2 1
(a) (b)
3 2 T 3T
1 1 (c) r  d    g (d) r   2d    g
(c) (d)
4 3
FLUIDS MECHANICS 37

EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Single Correct Options 4. A beaker containing water is placed on the platform of a
1. A cube of mass m and density D is suspended form the spring balance. The balance reads 1.5 kg. A stone of mass
3
point P by a spring of stiffness k. The system is kept 0.5 kg and density 500 kg/m is immersed in water without
inside a beaker filled with a liquid of density d. The touching the walls of the beaker. What will be the balance
elongation in the spring, assuming D > d, is reading now?
(a) 2 kg (b) 2.5 kg
(c) 1 kg (d) 3 kg
5. An ornament weighing 36 g in air weighs only 34 g in
water. Assuming that some copper is mixed with gold to
prepare the ornament, find the amount of copper in it.
Specific gravity of gold is 19.3 and that of copper is 8.9.
(a) 2.2 g (b) 4.4 g

mg  d mg  D  (c) 1.1 g (d) 3.6 g

(a) 1   (b) 1  
k  D k  d 6. A uniform cylinder of length L and mass M having cross-
mg  d sectional area A is suspended, with its length vertical from
(c) 1   (d) none of these a fixed point by a massless spring such that it is half
k  D 
submerged in a liquid of density  at equilibrium position.
2. A cubical block of steel of each side equal to  is floating
on mercury in a vessel. The densities of steel and mercury The extension x0 of the spring when it is in equilibrium is
and s and m. The height of the block above the mercury
level is given by
Mg Mg  LA 
      (a) (b) 1  
(a)  1  s  (b)  1  s  k k  M 
  m    m 

      Mg  LA  Mg  LA 
(c)  1  m  (d)  1  m  (c) 1   (d) 1  
  k  2M  k  M 
 s   s 
3. The tension in a string holding a solid block below the 7. A long metal rod of length  and relative density  is held
surface of a liquid (where liquid > block) as in shown in the vertically with its lower end just touching the surface of
figure is T when the system is at rest. water. The speed of the rod when it just sinks in water is
given by

(a) 2g (b) 2g

 1 
(c) 2g 1   (d) 2g  2  1
 2 
8. A large block of ice 5m thick has a vertical hole drilled
Then what will be the tension in the string if the system
through it and is floating in the middle of a lake. The
has upward acceleration a?
minimum length of the rope required to scoop up bucket
 a  a full of water through the hole is
(a) T 1   (b) T 1  
 g  g (the relative density of ice = 0.9)
a  a (a) 1 m (b) 0.9 m
(c) T   1 (d) g T (c) 0.5 m (d) 0.45 m
g 
FLUIDS MECHANICS 38

–3
9. Two identical cylindrical vessels, each of base area A, 14. A vessel contains oil of density 0.8 gcm floating over
–3
have their bases at the same horizontal level. They contain mercury of density 13.6 gcm . A homogeneous sphere
a liquid of density . In one vessel the height of the liquid floats with half its volume immersed in mercury and the
is h1 and in the other h2 > h1. When the two vessels are –3
other half in oil. The density of the sphere in gcm is
connected, the work done by gravity in equalizing the
(a) 3.3 (b) 6.4
levels is
(a) 2 Ag (h2 – h1)
2
(b) Ag (h2 – h1)
2 (c) 7.2 (d) 12.8

1 2 1 2
15. Water from a tap emerges vertically downwards with an
(c) Ag  h 2  h1  (d) Ag  h 2  h1  –1
initial speed of 1.0 ms . The cross-sectional area of the
2 4
–4 2
tap is 10 m . Assume that the pressure is constant
10. Two bodies with volumes V and 2V are equalized on a
throughout the stream of water and that the flow is steady.
balance. The larger body is then immersed in oil of density
The cross-sectional area of the stream 0.15 m below the
d1 = 0.9 g/cm3 while the smaller body is immersed in another –2
tap is (take g = 10 ms )
liquid when it is found that the equilibrium of the balance –4 2 –5 2
is not disturbed. The density of the second liquid is then: (a) 5.0 × 10 m (b) 1.0 × 10 m
–5 2 –5 2
(a) 2.4 g/cm3 (b) 1.8 g/cm3 (c) 5.0 × 10 m (d) 2.0 × 10 m
16. A cubical block of wood of specific gravity 0.5 and a chunk
(c) 0.45 g/cm3 (d) 2.7 g/cm3
of concrete of specific gravity 2.5 are fastened together.
11. If a sample of metal weighs 210 g in air, 180 g in water and
The ratio of mass of wood to the mass of concrete which
120 g in a liquid:
makes the combination to float with its entire volume
(i) RD of metal is 3 (ii) RD of metal is 7 submerged in water is:
(iii) RD of liquid is 3 (iv) RD of liquid is (1/3) (a) 1/5 (b) 1/3
(a) (i, ii) (b) (i, iii)
(c) 3/5 (d) 2/5
(c) (ii, iv) (d) (ii, iii)
17. The figure shows a liquid of density  flowing through a
12. In a test experiment on a model aeroplane in a wind tunnel, tube with velocity v. The h1 and h2 are the heights of liquid
the flow speeds on the lower and upper surfaces of the in the straight and L-shaped tubes, respectively. Choose
wing are v and 2 V respectively. If the density of air is the correct statements.

 and the surface area of the wing is A, the dynamic lift on

the wing is given by

1 1 2
(a) v 2 A (b) v A
2 2
2
(c) 2 v A (d) 2 v 2 A .
(a) The pressure at the point A is gh1
13. The cylindrical tube of a spray pump has a radius R, one (b) The pressure at the point B is gh2
end of which has n fine holes, each of radius r. If the speed
of flow of the liquid in the tube is V, the speed of ejection (c) The velocity of flow is, v  2gh 2
of the liquid through the holes is
(d) The velocity of flow is, v  2g  h 2  h1 
1/ 2
VR VR
(a)   (b)   18. A ball is made of a material of density  where oil <  <
nr n r 
water with oil and water representing the densities of oil
and water, respectively. The oil and water are immiscible.
3/ 2 2
VR VR If the above ball is in equilibrium in mixture of this oil and
(c)   (d)  
nr  nr  water, which of the following pictures represents its
equilibrium position ?
FLUIDS MECHANICS 39

(a) Water will rise above A in the capillary

(b) Water will fall below A in the capillary tube
Water Oil (c) There will be no effect on the level of water in the
capillary tube.
(a) (b) (d) Air will emerge from end B in the form of bubbles.
Oil Water 22. There is a circular tube in a vertical plane. Two liquids
which do not mix and of densities d1 and d2 are filled in the
tube. Each liquid subtends 90° angle at centre. Radius
joining their interface makes an angle  with vertical.

Water d1
Oil Ratio d is :
2

(c) (d)
Oil Water

19. In a cylindrical water tank there are two small holes Q and
P on the wall at a depth of h1 form upper level of water and
at a height of h2 from the lower end of the tank respectively
as shown in the figure. Water coming out from both the
holes strike the ground at the same point. The ratio of h1
1  cos  1  tan 
and h2 is (a) (b)
1  cos  1  tan 
(a) 1 (b) 2
1  sin  1  sin 
(c) > 1 (d) < 1 (c) (d)
1  cos  1  sin 
20. An open glass tube is immersed in mercury in such a way 23. Tanks A and B open at the top contain two different liquids
that a length of 8 cm extends above the mercury level. The upto certain height in them. A hole is made to the wall of
open end of the tube is then closed and sealed and the each tank at a depth ‘h’ from the surface of the liquid. The
tube is raised vertically up by additional 46 cm. What will area of the hole in A is twice that of in B. If the liquid mass
be length of the air column above mercury in the tube flux through each hole is equal, then the ratio of the densities
now? of the liquids respectively, is
(Atmospheric pressure - 76 cm of Hg) (a) 2/1 (b) 3/2

(a) 22 cm (b) 38 cm (c) 2/3 (d) 1/2

(c) 6 cm (d) 16 cm 24. The velocity of the liquid coming out of a small hole of a
vessel containing two different liquids of densities 2 and
21. Water stands at level A in the arrangement shown in figure. as shown in the figure is
What will happen if a jet of air is gently blown into the
horizontal tube in the direction shown in the figure ?

(a) 6gh (b) 2 gh

(c) 2 2gh (d) gh

FLUIDS MECHANICS 40

25. Figure shows two holes in a wide tank containing a liquid 30. The limbs of a glass U-tube are lowered into vessels A and
column. The water streams coming out of these holes strike B, A containing water. Some air is pumped out through the
the ground at the same point. The height of liquid column top of the tube C. The liquid in the left hand limb A and the
in the tank is right hand limb B rise to heights of 10 cm and 12 cm
respectively. The density of liquid B is:

(a) 10 cm (b) 8 cm
(c) 9.8 cm (d) 980 cm
26. Two communicating vessels contain mercury. The diameter
of one vessel is four times larger than the diameter of the
other. A column of water of height h0 = 70 cm is poured
into the left hand vessel (the narrower one). How much (a) 0.75 g/cm3 (b) 0.83 g/cm3
will be mercury level rise in the right hand vessel? (Specific (c) 1.2 g/cm3 (d) 0.25 g/cm3
density of mercury = 13.6)
(a) 0.3 cm (b) 0.7 cm 31. A capillary tube is immersed vertically in water and the
height of the water column is x. When this arrangement is
(c) 0.1 cm (d) 1.0 cm
taken into a mine of depth d, the height of the water column
27. Two capillary tubes A and B of radii ra and rb and lengths a is y. If R is the radius of the earth, the ratio x/y is
and b respectively are held horizontally. The volume of
(a) (1 – d/R) (b) (1 + d/R)
water flowing per second through tube A is Qa when the
(c) (R – d/R + d) (d) (R + d/R – d)
pressure difference across its ends is maintained at P.
When the same pressure difference is maintained across 32. If a number of identical droplets of water, each of radius r,
tube B, the volume of water flowing per second through it coalesce to form a single drop of radius R, the resulting
is Qb. The ratio Qa/Qb is rise in the temperature of water is given by (here  is the
density of water, s its specific heat and  its surface tension)
2
 r   r 
(a) b  a  (b) b  a   1 1  3  1 1 
 a  rb   a  rb  (a)    (b)   
s  r R  s  r R 
3 4
  ra   r   1 1  3  1 1 
(c) b   (d) b  a  (c)    (d)   
a  rb   a  rb  s  r R  s  r R 
28. A U-tube is partially filled with water. Oil, which does not 33. When at rest, a liquid stands at the same level in the tubes
mix with water, is next poured into one side until water as shown in the figure. But as indicated, a height difference
rises by 25 cm on the other side. If the density of oil be 0.8, h occurs when the system is given an acceleration a
the oil level will stand higher than the water level by: towards the right. Then h is equal to
(a) 6.25 cm (b) 12.50 cm
(c) 31.25 cm (d) 20 cm
29. Two capillary tubes A and B of equal radii ra = rb = r and
equal lengths a = b =  are held horizontally. When the
same pressure difference P is maintained across each tube,
the rate of flow of water in each is Q. If the tubes are
connected in series and the same pressure difference P is
maintained across the combination, the rate of flow through aL gL
the combination will be (a) (b)
2g 2a
(a) Q/2 (b) Q
gL aL
(c) 2Q (d) none of these (c) (d)
a g
FLUIDS MECHANICS 41

34. A tiny sphere of mass m nad density x is dropped in a tall jar 37. A siphon tube is used to remove liquid from a container as
of glycerine of density y. When the sphere acquires terminal shown in the figure.
velocity, the magnitude of the viscious force acting on it is
(a) mgx/y (b) mgy/x
(c) mg (1 – y/x) (d) mg (1 + x/y)
35. Two immiscible liquids P and Q of different densities are
contained in a wide U-tube as shown in fig. The heights of
the two liquids above the horizontal line XX` which cuts
the boundary between the liquids are H P and H Q
respectively. The U-tube is transported to a planet where
the acceleration of free fall is 2/3 that on the earth, where
the liquids do not evaporate and where the heights of If the tube is initially filled with liquid, then the speed of
liquid (measured relative to XX`) are hP and hQ respectively. the liquid through the siphon is
Which of the given statements is correct? (a) 2gy (b) 2g  h  y 

(c) 2g  H  h  y  (d) none of the above

38. Water is flowing continuously from a tap having an internal

–3
diameter 8 × 10 m. The velocity as it leaves the tap is
–1
0.4 ms . The water diameter of the water stream at a
–1
distance 2 × 10 m below the tap is close to
–3 –3
(a) 7.5 × 10 m (b) 9.6 × 10 m
–3 –3
(c) 3.6 × 10 m (d) 5.0 × 10 m
2
39. A tank with a square base of area 2.0 m is divided into two
(a) The liquid levels are unchanged, i.e.,
compartments by a vertical partition in the middle. There is
hP = HP and hQ = HQ 2
a small hinged door of face area 20 cm at the bottom of the
(b) Both liquid levels rise up so that hP/HP = hQ/HQ partition. Water is filled in one compartment and an acid of
(c) Both liquid levels rise up so that h P - h Q relative density 1.5 in the other, both to a height of 4 m. If
–2
= HP - H Q g = 10 ms , the force necessary to keep the door closed is
(a) 10 N (b) 20 N
(d) The liquid P falls and liquid Q rises such that
(c) 40 N (d) 80 N
hP 2 HP
 40. In the diagram shown, the difference in the two tubes of
hQ 3 HQ the manometer is 5 cm, the cross section of the tube at A
and B is 6 mm2 and 10 mm2 respectively. The rate at which
36. A cylindrical vessel filled with water is released on an water flows through the tube is :
inclined surface of angle  as shown in the figure. The
(g = 10 ms–2)
friction coefficient of surface with vessel is  (< tan ).
Then the constant angle made by the surface of water
with the incline will be

–1 –1 (a) 10.0 cc/s (b)8.0 cc/s

(a) tan  (b)  – tan 
–1 –1 (c) 7.5 cc/s (d) 12.5 cc/s
(c)  + tan  (d) cot 
FLUIDS MECHANICS 42

Multiple Correct Options 44. Equal volumes of liquid are poured in the three vessels A,
B and C (h1 < h2 < h3). All the vessels have same base area.
41. The figure shows a container filled with a liquid of density
Select the correct alternatives.
. Four points A, B, C and D lie on the vertices of a vertical
square. Points A and C lie on a vertical line and points B
and D lies on a horizontal line. Choose the correct
statement(s) about the pressure at the four points.
(a) The force on the base will be maximum in vessel A.
(b) The force on the base will be maximum in vessel C.
(c) Net force exerted by the liquid in all the three vessels is
equal.
(d) Net force exerted by the liquid in vessel A is maximum.
45. If the velocity head of a stream of water is equal to 10 cm
then its speed of flow is approximately
(a) pD = pB (b) PA < pB = pD < pC (a) 1.0 m/s (b) 1.4 m/s
pC  p A pC  pA (c) 140 m/s (d) 10 m/s
(c) p D  pB  (d) p D  pB 
2 2 46. A circular cylinder of radius r and height H is filled with
42. The vessel shown in the figure has two sections of areas water to a height 2/3 H. It starts rotating about its axis with
of cross section A1 and A2. A liquid of density  fills both constantly increasing angular speed. Choose the correct
the sections, up to a height h in each. Neglect atmospheric alternatives.
pressure.

A1
h

X
A2
(a) At all speeds, shape of the free surface is parabolloid.
h
(b) The free surface touches first the brim of cylinder and
then the base of the cylinder.
(c) The free surface cannot touch the base without
spilling water
(a) The pressure at the base of the vessel is 2hg.
(d) The free surface touches the brim as well as base at
(b) The force exerted by the liquid on the base of the the same instant.
vessel is 2hgA2.
47. A spherical pot is more than half filled with water as shown
(c) The weight of the liquid is < 2hgA2. in the figure. Choose the correct statement(s) about the
(d) The walls of the vessel at the level X exert a downward forces exerted by water on the pot.
force hg(A2–A1) on the liquid.
43. Water flows steadily through a horizontal pipe of a variable
cross-section. If the pressure of water is p at a point where
the velocity of flow is v, what is the pressure at another
point where the velocity of flow is 2v;  being the density
of water ? (a) It is always normal to the surface of pot.
(b) Everywhere it acts in the downward direction.
3 2 3 2 (c) The net horizontal force on the pot is zero.
(a)    v (b)    v
2 2
(d) The net vertical force on the pot is in the downward
2 2
(c)  – 2v (d)  + 2v direction.
FLUIDS MECHANICS 43

48. A tank is filled to a height H. The range of water coming 51. The figure shows a siphon tube removing liquid from a
out of a hole which is a depth H/4 from the surface of container. Choose the correct statements.
water level is

2H 3H
(a) (b)
3 2

3H
(c) 3H (d)
4
49. A wall of length  supports water to a height has shown (a) The siphon tube removes liquid only when h1 > 0
figure. Choose the correct statement(s). Take  as the
density of water. (b) The velocity of flow is v  2g  h1  h 2 

(c) The pressure at the point B is pB = p0 – gh3

(d) The pressure at the point D is p0
52. A tank is filled upto a height h with a liquid and is placed
on a platform of height h from the ground. To get maximum
range xm a small hole is punched at a distance of y from the
free surface of the liquid. Then
(a) The force exerted by water on the wall per unit length
2
is 1/2 gH 
2
(b) The force exerted by water on the wall is 1/2 gH 
(c) The point of application of the resultant force acts
2H/3 below the free surface.
(d) The point of application of the resultant force acts H/3
below the free surface.
50. The tank shown in figure has the base area ( × b). It is
(a) xm = 2 h (b) xm = 1.5 h
filled with a liquid of density  to a height H. Choose the
correct alternative (s). (c) y = h (d) y = 0.75 h
53. A cylindrical vessel of 90 cm height is kept filled up to the
brim. It has four holes 1, 2, 3 and 4 which are, repectively,
at height of 20 cm, 30 cm, 40 cm and 50 cm from the
horizontal floor PQ. The water falling at the maximum
horizontal distance from the vessel comes from
(a) The force at the base of the container is,
F = 1/2gH ( + 2H cot ) b.
(b) The horizontal component of the force acting on the
2
inclined wall is Fh = 1/2 gH b
(c) The vertical component of the force acting on the

1 2
inclined wall is Fv  gbH cos ec.
2 (a) hole number 4
(d) The vertical component of the force acting on the (b) hole number 3
(c) hole number 2
1
inclined wall is Fv  gbH 2 cot . (d) hole number 1
2
FLUIDS MECHANICS 44

54. A cylindrical vessel is filled with a liquid up to a height H. 57. A spherical solid ball of volume V is made of a material of
A small hole is made in the vessel at a distance y below, density 1. It is falling through a liquid of density 2.
the liquid surface as shown in figure. The liquid emerging (2 < 1). [Assume that the liquid applies a viscous
from the hole strike the ground at distance x force on the ball that is proportional to the square of
2
its speed , ie, Fviscous = –kv (k > 0). The terminal
speed of the ball is

Vg 1   2  Vg 1
(a) (b)
k k

(a) x is equal if hole is at depth y or H – y Vg 1 Vg (1   2 )

(c) (d)
H k k
(b) x is maximum for y 
2 58. A rectangular metal plate has dimensions of 10 cm × 20cm.
(c) Both (a) and (b) are correct A thin film of oil separates the plate from a fixed horizontal
(d) Both (c) and (d) are wrong surface. The separation between the rectangular plate and
the horizontal surface is 0.2 mm. An ideal string is attached
55. An open vessel containing liquid is moving with constant to the plate and passes over an ideal pulley to a mass m.
acceleration a on a levelled horizontal surface. For this When m = 125 g, the metal plate moves at constant speed
situation mark out the correct statement(s).
of 5 cm/s across the horizontal surface. Find the coefficient
–1 2 2
of viscosity of oil in 10 dyne-s/cm . [g = 10 m/s ]

(a) The maximum pressure is at the leftmost bottom corner.

(b) Along a horizontal line within the liquid as we move 59. The liquid in the capillary tube will rise, if the angle of
from left to right the pressure decreases. contact is
(c) The pressure at all points on a line making an angle of (a) 0° (b) 90°
a (c) obtuse (d) acute
tan 1   with horizontal would be same.
g 60. What is the excess pressure inside a bubble of soap solutions
(d) Along a horizontal line within the liquid as we move of radius 5.00 mm ? Given that the surface tension of soap
–2
from left to right, the pressure remains same. solution at the temperature (20°C) is 2.50 × 10 N/m. If an air
Integer Type Questions bubble of the same dimension were formed at a depth of 4.0
56. A tube with both ends open floats vertically in water. Oil cm inside a container containing soap solution (relative
3
with a density 800 kg/m is poured into the tube. The tube density 1.20), what would be the pressure inside the
–2 5
is filled with oil upto the top end while in equilibrium. The bubble (in 10 atm) ? (1 atm = 1.01 × 10 Pa)
length of the tube outside the water is 10 cm. Determine
the depth (in cm) upto which the oil will be filled in tube. ASSERTION REASON
(A) Statement I is true, Statement II is true and Statement II is
a correct explanation for Statemetn I.
(B) Statement I is true, Statement II is true and Statement II is
NOT the correct explanation for Statement I.
(C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
(D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
FLUIDS MECHANICS 45

61. Statement I : To float, a body must displace liquid whose 67. Statement I : In taking into account the fact that any object,
weight is greater than the actual weight of the body. which floats, must have an average density less than that
Statement II : The body will experience no net downward of water, during World War I, a number of cargo vessels
force, in the case of floating.
were made of concrete.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D Statement II : Concrete cargo vessels were filled with air.
62. Statement I : All the raindrops hit the surface of the earth (a) A (b) B
with the same constant velocity.
(c) C (d) D
Statement II : An object falling through a viscous medium
eventually attains a terminal velocity. Match the Column
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D 68. Match the column I and column II -
63. Statement I : Tiny drops of liquid resist deforming forces Column-I Column-II
better than bigger drops. (A) If the radius of soap bubble A is (P) 16 : 9
Statement II : Excess pressure inside a drop is directly fource times that of another soap
proportional to surface tension. bubble B, then the ratio of excess
(a) A (b) B pressuren (PB/PA) will be
(c) C (d) D 1/3
(B) If two small drops of mercury, each (Q) 2 : 1
64. Statement I : A block is immersed in a liquid inside a beaker,
of radius R coalesce to form a single
which is falling freely. Buoyant force acting on block is
zero. large drop, the ratio of the total surface
Statement II : In case of freely falling liquid there is no energy before and after change will be
pressure difference between any two points. (C) The enrgy required to blow a bubble (R) 4 : 1
of radius 4 cm and 3cm in the same
liquid is in the ratio of
(D) Two soap bubbles are blown. In the (S) 1 : 4
first bubble excess pressure in 4 times
that of the second soap bubble. The
(a) A (b) B
ratio of radii of first to second soap
(c) C (d) D
65. Statement I : Pascal’s law is the working principal of a bubble.
hydraulic lift. COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS
Statement II : Pressure is equal to thrust acting per unit Passage - 1
area.
(a) A (b) B Using the following Passage, solve Q. 69 to Q. 73
(c) C (d) D If the container filled with liquid gets accelerated
66. Statement I : When a body floats such that its parts are horizontally or vertically, pressure in liquids gets changed.
immersed into two immiscible liquids then force exerted In case of horizontally accelerated liquid (ax), the free
by liquid I is of magnitude 1v1g. surface has the slope ax/g. In case of vertically accelerated
Statement II : Total buoyant force = 1v1g + 2v2g. liquid (ay) for calculation of pressure, effective g is used.
A closed box with horizontal base 6 m by 6m and a height
2m is half filled with liquid. It is given constant horizontal
acceleration g/2 and vertical downward acceleration g/2.
69. The angle of the free surface with the horizontal is equal to
–1
(a) 30 (b) tan (2/3)
–1
(c) tan (1/3) (d) 45º
70. Length of exposed portion of top of box is equal to -
(a) A (b) B (a) 2m (b) 3m
(c) C (d) D (c) 4m (d) 2.5 m
FLUIDS MECHANICS 46

71. Water pressure at the bottom of centre of box is equal 78. The velocity profile for above problem :
to (atmospheric pressure = 105 N / m 2 , density of water

= 1000 kg / m3 , g  10 m / sec 2 )
(a)
(a) 1.1 MPa (b) 0.11 MPa
(c) 0.101 MPa (d) 0.011 MPa
72. Maximum value of water pressure in the box is equal to -
(a) 1.4 MPa (b) 0.14 MPa
(c) 0.104 MPa (d) 0.014 MPa
(b)
73. What is the value of vertical acceleration of box for given
horizontal acceleration (g/2), so that no part of bottom of
box is exposed -
(a) g/2 upward (b) g/2 downward
(c) g/4 upward (d) not possible
(c)
Passage - 2

Using the following Passage, solve Q. 74 to Q. 78

The space between two large horizontal metal plates 6 cm
2
apart is filled with a liquid of viscosity 0.8 N sec/m . A thin
2
plate of surface area 0.01 m is moved parallel to the length (d)
of the plate with constant speed 1 m/sec such that :
74. It is equidistant from the two stationary plates then the
force exerted by the liquid on the plate is approximately : Passage - 3
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 79 to 81
(a) 0.53 N (b) 0.26 N
(c) 0.72 N (d) zero A dam of width w = 10 m is filled with water up to height
75. A barometer kept in an elevator reads 76 cm when it is at H = 22 m as shown in the figure. As we go down in the
rest. If the elevator goes up with increasing speed, then dam, pressure increases, so the thickness of the wall also
reading will be increases from top to bottom. There is a stony glass
(a) zero (b) 76 cm window of radius r = 10 cm at a height h = 2 m from the
(c) > 76 cm (d) < 76 cm bottom as shown in the figure. The other side of the glass
window is open to the atmoshphere.
76. If the thin plate moves such that the plate is at a distance
of 2 cm from one of the plates and 4 cm from the other, now
the force exerted by the luqid on the plate is :
(a) 0.6 N (b) 0.4/3 N
(c) 1.6/3 N (d) None
77. Two capillary of length L and 2L and of radius R and 2R
are connected in series. The net rate of flow of fluid through
them will be (given rate of the flow through single capillary,
3 2
X = pR4/8L) (density of water = 1000 kg/m , g = 10 m/s , atmospheric
5 2
pressure = 1 × 10 N/m )
8 9
(a) X (b) X 79. The net force on the glass window due to fluid pressure
9 8
on both sides is
5 7 (a) kN (b) kN
(c) X (d) X
7 5 (c)  N (d)  N
FLUIDS MECHANICS 47

80. The net force on the wall due to fluid pressure on both 84. Minimum and maximum values of F to keep the cylinder in
sides is static equilibrium just after the water starts to spill through
(a) 44000 kN (b) 12100 kN the hole, if the coefficient of static friction between contact
surfaces is 0.01, are
(c) 24200 kN (d) 48400 kN
(a) 0, 40 N (b) 5.4 N, 52.2 N
81. If the glass window breaks, speed of water at this instant
coming out through the window is (c) 0, 70 N (d) 0, 52.2 N

(a) 20 m/s (b) 6 m/s Passage - 5

(c) 20.2 m/s (d) 14 m/s Using the following Passage, solve Q. 85 & 86

Passage - 4 A rod of length 6 m has a mass 12 kg. It is hinged at one

end A at a distance of 3 m below the water surface. The
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 82 to 84
2
specific gravity of the material of rod is 0.5.
A cylindrical tank having cross sectional area A = 0.5 m is
–3
filled with two liquids of density 1 = 900 kg m and
–3
2 = 600 kg m , to a height h = 60 cm each as shown in the
2
figure. A small whole having area a = 5 cm is made in right
vertical wall at a height y = 20 cm from the bottom. A
horizontal force F is applied on the tank to tank to keep it
in static equilibrium. The tank is lying on a horizontal
surface. Neglect mass of cylindrical tank in comparison to
–2
mass of liquids (take g = 10 ms ).
85. What weight must be attached to the other end B so that
5 m of the rod is immersed in water?
(a) 7 kgf (b) 20kgf

7 7
(c) kgf (d) kgf
5 2
86. Find the magnitude and direction of the force exerted by
the hinge on the rod.

17
82. The velocity of efflux is (a) kgf in the downward direction
3
–1 –1
(a) 10 ms (b) 20 ms
–1 –1
(b) 8 kgf in the downward direction
(c) 4 ms (d) 35 ms
(c) 4 kgf in the downward direction
83. Horizontal force F to keep the cylinder in static equilibrium,
(d) 5 kgf in the downward direction
if it is placed on a smooth horizontal plane, is
(a) 7.2 N (b) 10 N
(c) 15.5 N (d) 20.4 N
FLUIDS MECHANICS 48

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Single Correct Options
1. A hemispherical portion of radius R is removed from the
bottom of a cylinder of radius R. The volume of the
remaining cylinder is V and mass M. It is suspended by a
string in a liquid of density , where it stays vertical. The
upper surface of the cylinder is at a depth h below the
liquid surface. The force on the bottom of the cylinder by
the liquid is (2001)

(a) Find the total force exerted by liquid A on the cylinder.

(b) Find h, the length of the part of the cylinder in air.
(c) The cylinder is depressed in such a way that its top
surface is just below the upper surface of liquid A and is
then released. Find the acceleration of the cylinder
immediately after it is released.

4. Water is filled in a cylindrical container to a height of 3 m.

(a) Mg The ratio of the cross-sectional area of the orifice and the
(b) Mg – Vg beaker is 0.1. The square of the speed of the liquid coming
2 2
(c) Mg + R hg out from the orifice is (g = 10 m/s ) (2005)
2
(d) g (V + R h)
2. A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in
water as shown in figure. The distance l and h are shown
there. After sometime the coin falls into the water. Then

2 2 2 2
(a) 50 m /s (b) 50.5m /s
2 2 2 2
(c) 51m /s (d) 52 m /s

5. A glass tube of uniform internal radius (r) has a value

separating the two identical ends. Initially, the valve is in
(a) l decreases and h increases (2002) a tightly closed position. End 1 has a hemispherical soap
(b) l increases and h decreases bubble of radius r. End 2 has sub-hemispherical soap
(c) Both l and h increase bubble as shown in figure.
(d) Both l and h decrease Just after opening the valve. (2008)
2
3. A uniform solid cylinder of density 0.8 g/cm floats in
equilibrium in a combination of two non-mixing liquids A
and B with its axis vertical. The densities of the liquids A
and B are 0.7 g/cm3 and 1.2 g/cm3 respectively. The height
of liquid A is hA = 1.2 cm. The length of the part of the
cylinder immersed in liquid B is hB = 0.8 cm. (2002)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 49

(a) air from end 1 flows towards end 2. No change in the 8. Two spheres P and Q of equal radii have densities  and
volume of the soap bubbles , respectively. The spheres are connected by a massless
(b) air from end 1 flows towards end 2. Volume of the soap string and placed in liquids L1 and L2 of densities  & 
bubble at end 1 decreases. and viscosities  and , respectively. They float in
equilibrium with the sphere P in L1 and sphere Q in L2 and
(c) no change occurs
the string being taut (see figure). If sphere P alone in L2
(d) air from end 2 flows towards end 1. Volume of the soap 
bubble at end 1 increases. has terminal velocity VP and Q alone in L1 has terminal
6. A glass capillary tube is of the shape of a truncated cone 
velocity VQ , then (2015)
with an apex angle  so that its two ends have cross
sections of different radii. When dipped in water vertically,
water rises in it to a height h, where the radius of its crosss
section is b. If the surface tension of water is S, its density
is , and its contact angle with glass is , the value of h
will be (g is the acceleration due to gravity) (2014)

 
VP  VP 
(a) V  1 (b) V  2
Q
 2 Q
1
   
(c) VP .VQ  0 (d) VP .VQ  0
9. A uniform capillary tube of inner radius r is dipped
vertically into a beaker filled with water. The water rises
to a height h in the capillary tube above the water surface
2S 2S in the beaker. The surface tension of water is  . The
(A) cos      (B) cos     
b g b g angle of contact between water and the wall of the capillary
2S 2S tube is . Ignore the mass of water in the meniscus. Which
(C) bg cos    /2  (D) cos    /2  of the following statements is (are) true? (2018)
bg
(a) For a given material of the capillary tube, h decreases
Multiple Answer Question
with increase in r
7. A spherical body of radius R consists of a fluid of constant (b) For a given material of the capillary tube, h is
density and is in equilibrium under its own gravity. If P(r) independent of 
is the pressure at r(r < P), then the correct option(s) is
(c) If this experiment is performed in a lift going up with a
(are). (2015)
constant acceleration, then h decreases
(a) P(r = 0) = 0
(d) h is proportional to contact angle 
P  r  3R / 4  63 10. A cylindrical capillary tube of 0.2 mm radius is made by
(b) P r  2R / 4  80
  joining two capillaries T1 and T2 of different materials
having water contact angles of 0° and 60° respectively.
P  r  3R / 5 16 The capillary tube is dipped vertically in water in two
(c) P r  2R / 5  21 different configurations, case I and II as shown in figure.
 
Which of the following option(s) is (are) correct?

P  r  R / 2  20 [Surface tension of water = 0.075 N/m , density of water =

(d) P r  R / 3  27 1000 kg/m3, take g = 10m/s2]
 
(2019)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 50

13. A cylindrical vessel of height 500 mm has an orifice (small

hole) at its bottom. The orifice is initially closed and water
is filled in it upto height H.Now the top is completely sealed
with a cap and the orifice at the bottom is opened. Some
water comes out from the orifice and the water level in the
vessel becomes steady with height of water column being
200 mm. Find the fall in height (in mm) of water level due to
opening of the orifice.
5 –2
(a) For case I, if the joint is kept at 8 cm above the water [Take atmospheric pressure = 1.0 × 10 Nm , density of
–3 –2
surface, the height of water column in the tube will be 7.5 water = 1000 kg m and g = 10 ms . Neglect any effect of
surface tension.] (2009)
cm. (Neglect the weight of the water in the meniscus)
14. Consider two solid spheres P and Q each of density 8gm
(b) For case I, capillary joint is 5cm above the water
cm–3 and diameters 1 cm and 0.5cm, respectively. Sphere P
surface, the height of water column raised in the tube will
is dropped into a liquid of density 0.8gm cm–3 and viscosity
be more than 8.75 cm. (Neglect the weight of the water in  = 3 poiseulles. Sphere Q is dropped into a liquid of
the meniscus) density 1.6gm cm–3 and viscosity  = 2 Poiseulles. The
(c) The correction in the height of water column raised in ratio of the terminal velocities of P and Q is (2016)
the tube, due to weight of water contained in the
4
meniscus, will be different for both cases. 15. A beaker of radius r is filled with water (refractive index )
3
(d) For case II, the capillary joint is 5 cm above the water
up to a height H as shown in the figure on the left. The
surface, the height of water column raised in the tube will
beaker is kept on a horizontal table rotating with angular
be 3.75 cm. (Neglect the weight of the water in the
speed  . This makes the water surface curved so that
meniscus) the difference in the height of water level at the center
Integer Type and at the circumference of the beaker is(h << H, h <<
r), as shown in the figure on the right. Take this surface
11. A horizontally oriented tube AB of length 1m rotates with to be approximately spherical with a radius of curvature s.
Which of the following is/are correct? (g is the
a constant angular velocity 10 3 rad/s about a stationary
acceleration due to gravity) (2020)
vertical axis O1O2 passing through the end A. The tube is
filled with an ideal fluid. The end A is open and end B has
a very small hole. Find the velocity of the fluid (in m/s)
from hole when the length of the liquid column is half the
length of tube.

h2 + r2
(a) R =
2h
12. Two soap bubbles A and B are kept in a closed chamber 3r 2
–2
where the air is maintained at pressure 8 Nm . The radii of (b) R =
2h
bubbles A and B are 2 cm, respectively. Surface tension of
–1 (c) Apparent depth of the bottom of the beaker is close
the soap-water used tomake bubbles is 0.04 Nm . Find
-1
nB 3H  2 H 
to 1+ 
the ratio n , where nA and nB are the number of moles of 2  2g 
A

ain in bubbles A and B, respectively. [Neglect the effect of (d) Apparent depth of the bottom of the beaker is close to
gravity] (2009) -1
3H  2 H 
1+ 
4  4g 
FLUIDS MECHANICS 51

16. A train with cross-sectional area St is moving with speed List List II
P. Lift is accelerating vertically up. 1. d = 1.2 m
 t inside a long tunnel of cross-sectional area
Q. Lift is accelerating vertically down 2. d > 1.2 m
S0 (S0 = 4St ) . Assume that almost all the air (density  )
with an acceleration less than the
in front of the train flows back between its sides and the
walls of the tunnel. Also, the air flow with respect to the gravitational acceleration.
train is steady and laminar. Take the ambient pressure R. Lift is moving vertically up with 3. d < 1.2 m
and that inside the train to be p0 .If the pressure in the constant speed
region between the sides of the train and the tunnel walls S. Lift is falling freely. 4. No water leaks out
7 of the jar
is p, then p 0 - p = Vt2 . The value of N is ________.
2N (A) P -2, Q-3, R-2, S-4 (B) P-2, Q-3, R-1, S-4
(2020) (C) P-1, Q-1, R-1, S-4 (D) P-2, Q-3, R-1, S-1
17. A hot air balloon is carrying some passengers, and a few
sandbags of mass 1 kg each so that its total mass is 480 Comprehension Type
kg. Its effective volume giving the balloon its PASSAGE - 1
buoyancy is V. The balloon is floating at an equilibrium
height of 100 m. When N number of sandbags are thrown A wooden cylinder of diameter 4r, height h and density
out, the balloon rises to a new equilibrium height close to /3 is kept on a hole of diameter 2r of a tank, filled with
150 m with its volume V remaining unchanged. If the liquid of density  as shown in the figure.
variation of the density of air with height h from the
h
-
ground is (h) =  e h 0 , where 0 = 1.25 kg m-3 and
0

h 0 = 6000 m, the value of N is _________.

(2020)
Assertion Reason 20. Now level of the liquid starts decreasing slowly. When
18. Statement–I : The stream of water flowing at high speed the level of liquid is at a height h1 above the cylinder the
from a garden hose pipe tends to spread like a fountain block starts moving up. At what value of h1, will the block
when held vertically up, but tends to narrow down when
rise? (2006)
held vertically down. (2003)
(a) 4h/9 (b) 5h/9
Statement–II : In any steady flow of an incompressible
fluid, the volume flow rate of the fluid remains constant. 5h
(a) If Statement I is true. Statement Ii is true; Statement Ii is (c) (d) Remains same
3
the correct explanation for Statement I.
21. The block in the above question is maintained at the
(b) If Statement I is true, Statement Ii is true; Statement Ii is
not a correct explanation for Statement I. position by external means and the level of liquid is lowered.
The height h2 when this external force reduces to zero is
(c) If Statement I is true; Statement II is false.
(d) If Statement I is false; Statement II is true.
Match the Column
19. A person in a lift is holding a water jar, which has a small
hole at the lower end of its side. When the lift is at rest, the
water jet coming out of the hole hits the floor of the lift at
a distance d of 1.2 m from the person. In the following, 4h 5h
state of the lift’s motion is given in List I and the distance (a) (b) (2006)
9 9
where the water jet hits the floor of the lift is given in List
II. Match the statements from List I with those in List II 2h
(c) remains same (d)
and select the correct answer using the code given below 3
the lists. (2014)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 52

22. If height h2 of water level is further decreased, then 26. If the piston is pushed at a speed of 5mms–1, the air comes
(2006) out of the nozzle with a speed of (2014)
(a) cylinder will not move up and remains at its original (A) 0.1 ms–1 (B) 1 ms–1
position
(C) 2ms–1 (D) 8 ms–1
(b) for h2 = h/3, cylinder again starts moving up
27. If the density of air is a and that of the liquid l then for a
(c) for h2=h/4, cylinder again starts moving up given piston speed the rate (volume per unit time) at which
(d) for h2 = h/5, cylinder again starts moving up the liquid is sprayed will be proportional to (2014)
PASSAGE - 2
a
When liquid medicine of density  is to be put in the eye, (A) (B) a l
l
it is done with the help of a dropper. As the bulb on the top
of the dropper is pressed, a drop forms at the opening of
the dropper. We wish to estimate the size of the drop. l
(C) a (D) l
We first assume that the drop formed at the opening is
spherical because that requires a minimum increase in its Analytical & Descriptive Question
surface energy. To determine the size, we calculate the net
vertical force due to the surface tension T when the radius 28. A container of width 2a is filled with a liquid. A thin wire of
of the drop is R. When this force becomes smaller than the weight per unit length  is gently placed over the liquid
weight of the drop, the drop gets detached from the dropper. surface in the middle of the surface as shown in the fig. As
23. If the radius of the opening of the dropper is r, the vertical a result, the liquid surface is depressed by a distance y
force due to the surface tension on the drop of radius R (y <<a). Determine the surface tension of the liquid.
(assuming r << R) is (2010) (2004)
(a) 2rT (b) 2 RT

2r 2 T 2R 2 T
(c) (d)
R r
–4 3 –3 –2 –1
24. If r = 5 × 10 m,  = 10 kg m , g = 10 ms , T = 0.11 Nm ,
the radius of the drop when it detaches from the dropper
is approximately
–3 –3
(a) 1.4 × 10 m (b) 3.3 × 10 m
–3 –3
(c) 2.0 × 10 m (d) 4.1 × 10 m 29. Consider a horizontally oriented syringe containing water
25. After the drop detaches, its surface energy is located at a height of 1.25m above the ground. The diameter
–6 –6
(a) 1.4 × 10 J (b) 2.7 × 10 J of the plunger is 8mm and the diameter of the nozzle is
–6 –9
(c) 5.4 × 10 J (d) 8.1 × 10 J 2mm. The plunger is pushed with a constant speed of 0.25
PASSAGE - 3 m/s. Find the horizontal range of water stream on the
2
A spray gun is shown in the figure where a piston pushes ground. (Take g = 10m/s ). (2004)
air out of a nozzle. A thin tube of uniform cross section is
connected to the nozzle. The other end of the tube is in a
small liquid container. As the piston pushes air through
the nozzle, the liquid from the container rises into the nozzle
and is sprayed out. For the spray gun shown, the radii of
the piston and the nozzle are 20 mm and 1 mm respectively.
The upper end of the container is open to the atmosphere.

30. A small sphere falls from rest in a viscous liquid. Due to

friction, heat is produced. Find the relation between the
rate of production of heat and the radius of the sphere at
terminal velocity. (2004)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 53

31. A U-shaped tube contains a liquid of density  and it is

rotated about the line as shown in the figure. Find the
difference in the levels of liquid column. (2005)

32. What is the excess pressure inside a bubble of soap

solutions of radius 5.00 mm ? Given that the surface tension
–2
of soap solution at the temperature (20°C) is 2.50 × 10 N/m.
If an air bubble of the same dimension were formed at a
depth of 4.0 cm inside a container containing soap
solution (relative density 1.20), what would be the
–2
pressure inside the bubble (in 10 atm) ? (1 atm = 1.01
5
× 10 Pa) (2007)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 54

FLUIDS MECHANICS
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
 02
ELASTICITY
 Chapter 02 56

ELASTICITY THEORY

1. ELASTICITY
Deforming force
1.1 Rigid body stress 
area of cross section
A body whose size and shape cannot be changed how-
ever large the applied force may be Unit N / m 2 or pascal
1.2 Deforming Force and Restoring Force  The deformation of the solid is described in terms of a
 Deforming force is the external force applied to a body physical quantity strain, that is created in the body as a
which tends to change the size or shape of the body. result of deformation force.

 Under the action of deforming force, a body opposes any

change in dimension
change in its shape & size due to the net effect of internal strain 
original dimension
(molecular) forces. The resulting force which opposes the
deformation is known as restoring force.
It has no unit.
1.3 Elasticity
1.4 Hooke’s Law
 The property of a body due to which it opposes the action
If the deforming forces are within a limit (known as elastic
of the deforming forces is called Elasticity.
limit), the stress created in the body is proportional to the
 A material is said to be elastic if it returns back to its original resulting strain.
shape or size, when the deforming forces are removed.
i.e. stress  strain.
 Plastic materials on the other hand, remain permanently
distorted when the deforming forces are removed. This stress
The ratio is known as modulus of Elasticity..
property is called Plasticity. strain

 Some of the examples of elestic materials are rubber bond, According to various types of stresses, we have
steel, etc. corresponding modulii of elasticity.
 The deforming force is measured (described) in terms of a Units of modules of elesticity is same as the unit of stress
physical quantity, the stress, that it develops in the body.

1.5 Stress, Strain and Various Elastic Moduli

Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

modulus modulus Mater
FL
Longitudinal (Tensile or compressive) Two equal and opposite Elongation or Y Young’s Solid
AL
forces perpendicular to compression modulus
opposite faces (L/L)
= F/A)

SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
ELASTICITY 57

Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

modulus modulus Mater

x FL
Shearing Two equal and opposite tan   G Shear modulus Solid
L A.x
forces parallel to
opposite surfaces
( = F/A)

 PV
Hydraulic/volume Forces perpendicular Volume change B Bulk modulus Solid, liquid
V
everywhere to the (V/V) and gas
surface, force per unit
area (pressure) same
everywhere.

1.6 Stress-strain Curve  Point E is known as elastic limit or yield–point.

If by gradually increasing the load on a vertically  The region OPE represents the elastic behaviour of the material
suspended metal wire, a graph is plotted between stress of wire.
(or load) and longitudinal strain (or elongation) we get the
curve as shown in figure. From this curve it is clear that :  Yield point is the stress beyond which the material becomes
plastic.

(c) If the wire is stretched beyond the elastic limit E (i.e.,

Breaking
strength between EA)
Elastic limit  the strain increases much more rapidly
P
 if the stretching force is removed the wire does not come
Stress

back to its natural length. Some permanent increase in length

O Strain
takes place.

(a) When the strain is small (< 2%) (i.e., in region OP) (d) If the stress is increased further,
 Stress is proportional to strain.  A very small increase in stress produces a very large
 Hooke’s law is obeyed. increase in strain (region AB).
 The point P is called limit of proportionality and  After reaching point B, the strain increases even if the
 Slope of line OP gives the Young’s modulus of the material wire is unloaded and ruptures at C.
of the wire. Y = tan .
 In the region BC the wire literally flows. The maximum
Note: Electric limit
stress corresponding to B after which the wire begins to
The maximum value of the stress within which the body flow and breaks is called breaking or tensile strength.
regains its original shape and size.
 The region EABC represents the plastic behaviour of the
(b) If the strain is increased a little bit (i.e., in the region PE)
material of wire.
 The stress is not proportional to strain.
 The wire still regains its original length after the removal  Stress-strain curve for different materials.
of stretching force.

SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
ELASTICITY 58

1.8 Poisson’s Ratio

Elastic Hysteresis :
The strain persists even when the stress is removed. This When a rod or bar is subjected to a longitudinal stress,
lagging behind of strain is called elastic hysteresis. This not only its length changes but its transverse dimensions
is the reason why the values of strain for same stress also change and thus giving rise to transverse or lateral
are different while increasing the load and while strain in additional to longitudinal strain.
decreasing the load.
g
sin
load or stress

rea

g
sin
nc

rea
di

ec
loa

dd
loa

b
extension or strain Transverse or lateral strain is
b
Brittle material
The plastic region between E and C is small for brittle The ratio of transverse to longitudinal strain is termed as
Poisson’s ratio, .
material and it will break soon after the elastic limit is
crossed. b / b

Ductile material  / 
The material of the wire have a good plastic range and
such materials can be easily changed into different shapes transverse strain
Since, σ 
and can be drawn into thin wires. longitrdinal strain
Elastomers
Negative sign is introduced to make  a positive quantity.
Stress strain curve is not a straight line within the elastic
Since, an increase in length always results in a decrease in
limit for elastomers and strain produced is much larger transverse dimensions and vice-versa.
than the stress applied. Such materials have no plastic
Note:
range and the breaking point lies very close to elastic
limit. eg. rubber. (1)  has no units, as its a ratio
(2) 0    0.5
1.7 Elastic Energy

When an elastic body is deformed, work is done by the

applied force. This work is stored as elastic potential energy
and is released when the body returns back to its original
shape or size.
Elastic energy stored per unit volume

1
= (stress) (strain)
2

1 2
= (modulus of elasticity) (strain)
2
2
1  stress 
=
2 modulus of elasticity

 In case of a longitudinal stress (compressive or tensile)

2
Energy stored 1  Δl 
= Y 
volume 2  l 
1 YA 2 1
Total energy = .  Δl  = F Δl
2 l 2

SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
ELASTICITY 59

SOLVED EXAMPLES

Example - 1 Example - 5

What is more elastic rubber or steel ? Explain. A metallic wire is stretched by suspending weight to it. If
 is the longitudinal strain and Y its Young’s modulus of
Sol. Consider two rods of rubber and steel each of length l and elasticity, show that the elastic potential energy per unit
2
area of cross section a. Let Yr, Ys be the Young’s modulus of volume is given by Y  /2.
elasticity or rubber and steel respectively. When a stretching
force F is applied on each rod, let lr, ls be the extension in Sol. Stress = Young’s modulus × strain = Y × 
the rubber rod and steel rod respectivley; where lr > ls Elastic potential energy per unit volume is
F F  1
Then, Yr  and Ys  u= × stress × strain
a  r a  s 2

Ys  r 1 1 2
 = × Y  ×  = Y .
 Yr  s > 1 i.e. Ys > Yr 2 2
Example - 6
Therefore steel is more elastic the rubber.
Example - 2 A structural steel rod has a radius of 10 mm and a length of
1m. A 100 k N force stretches it along its length. Calculate
An elastic wire is cut to half its original length. How would (a) the stress (b) elongation, and (c) percentage strain on
it affect the maximum load that the wire can support ? the rod. Given that the Young’s modulus of elasticity of
11 –2
the structural steel is 2.0 × 10 Nm .
Sol. Since breaking load = breaking stress × area, is free from the
length of elastic wire, therefore, if the cable is cut to half of Sol. Here;
its original length, there is no change in its area of cross
–3 –2
section and breaking stress. Hence thre is no effect on the r = 10 mm = 10 × 10 m = 10 m; l = 1 m;
maximum load (breaking load), the cable can support. 3 5
F = 100 kN = 100 × 10 N = 10 N;
11 2
Example - 3 Y = 2.0 × 10 N/m
Why is a spring made of steel, not of copper ?
F F 105
Stress =  2 
Sol. A spring will be better one, if a large restoring force is set up A r  22 / 7   102  
in it on being deformed, which in turn depends upon the 8 –2
elasticity of the material of the spring. Since the Young’s = 3.18 × 10 Nm
modulus of elasticity of steel is more than that of copper, The elongation,
hence steel is preferred in making the springs.
Example - 4  
F / A 

 3.18 10  1 8

Y 2  1011
Why are the bridges declared unsafe after long use ?
–3
= 1.59 × 10 m = 1.59 mm
Sol. A bridge during its use undergoes alternating stresses and
strains for a large number of times each day, depending  1.59  103
The strain =   1.59  10 3
upon the movement of vehicles on it. When a bridge is used  1
for long time, it loses its elastic strength. Therefore, the Percentage strain in rod
amount of strain in the bridge for a given stress will become –3
large and ultimately, the bridge may collapse. That is why = 1.59 × 10 × 100
the bridges are declared unsafe after long use. = 0.159%  0.16%
ELASTICITY 60

Example - 7
Four identical cylindrical columns of steel support a big
structure of mass 50,000 kg. The inner and outer radii of
each column are 30 cm and 40 cm respectively. Assume
the load distribution to be uniform, calculate the
compressional strain of each column. The Young’s
11
modulus of steel is 2.0 × 10 Pa.

Sol. Here, M = 50,000 kg; r1 = 0.30 m and r2 = 0.40 m;

11
Y = 2.0 × 10 Pa.
Area of cross section of each column;
2 2
 
A   r22  r12    0.4    0.3    0.07 m 2
 
Whole weight of the structure = Mg = 50000 × 9.8 N Sol. Here, the pulling force F (= mg) is same on both the wires.
Let l1, l2 be the elongations in the two wires.
This weight is equally shared by four columns,
F F
5000  9.8 As, Y  or  
 Compressional force on one column, F  N  r 2  Y  r2
4

F/ A mg
For wire A, 1 
Now, Y  compressional strain Y  r2

F 5000  9.8 / 4 mg  2   mg

Fow wire B,  2  
 Compressional strain = AY    0.07  2.0  1011 Y   2r 
2
2 Y  r2
 
–7
= 2.785 × 10 mg 1 mg
Total elongation = 1   2  
Example - 8 Y  r2 2 Y  r2
Find the greatest length of copper wire, that can hang
7 2
without breaking. Breaking stress = 7.2 × 10 N/m . Density 3 mg
2
 .
of copper 7.2 g/cc. g = 10 m/s . 2 Y  r2
7 2 Example - 10
Sol. Given, breaking stress, S = 7.2 × 10 N/m ; Density of wire, 
3 3
= 7.2 g/cc = 7.2 × 10 kg/m . A copper wire of length 2.2 m and a steel wire of length
Let l be the greatest length of wire that can hang without 1.6 m, both of diameter 3.0 mm are connected end. When
breaking and a be the area of cross section of the wire. stretched by a load, the net elongation is found to be
0.70 mm. Obtain the load applied. Young’s modulus of
Weight of wire = (a l)  g. 11 –2
copper is 1.1 × 10 N m and Young’s modulus of steel is
11 –2
2.0 × 10 Nm .
Breaking stress, S=
weight of wire a g
=
area of cross section a –3
Sol. For copper wire, l1 = 2.2 m; r1 = 1.5 mm = 1.5 × 10 m;
11 –2
Y1 = 1.1 × 10 Nm
S 7.2  107
or    1000 m For steel wire, l2 = 1.6 m; r2 = 1.5 mm = 1.5 × 10 m,
–3
 g 7.2  103  10
11 2
Y2 = 2.0 × 10 N/m .
Example - 9
Also, l1 + l2, = 0.70 mm ...(i)
Two wires A and B of length l, radius r and length 2l,
radius 2r having same Young’s modulus Y are hung with a Since both the wires have same tension and same area of
weight mg, Figure. What is the net elongation in the two cross section, hence have the same tensile stress S.
wires ? Thus, S = Y × longitudinal strain
ELASTICITY 61

F   Example - 13
  Y1  1  Y2  2
a 1 2 The average depth of Indian ocean is about 3000 m.
Calculate the fractional compression, V/V, of water at the
1 1 Y2 2.2 2.0  1011 bottom of the ocean, given that the bulk modulus of water
or      2.5 9 –2
is 2.2 × 10 Nm . Take g = 10 ms .
–2
 2  2 Y1 1.1 1.1 1011

or l1 = 2.5 l2. Sol. Here, h = 3000 m; B = 2.2 × 10 N/m ,

9 2

From (i) 2.5 l2 + l2 = 0.70 or l2 = 0.2 mm 3

p = h  g = 3000 × 10 × 10 = 3 × 10 N m
7 –3

–4
 l1 = 0.5 mm = 5 × 10 m
V p 3 107
1   Compessional strain,    1.36 102 .
Thus, F  aY1  r12 Y1 1 V B 2.2  109
1 1
Example - 14
22 2 5 104 A square lead slab of side 50 cm and thickness 10.0 cm is

7

 1.5 103  1.1 1011 
2.2 subjected to a shearing force (on its narrow face) of
4
2 2 magnitude 9.0 × 10 N. The lower edge is riveted to the
= 1.77 × 10  1.8 × 10 N.
floor as shown in figure. How much is the upper edge
9
Example - 11 displaced, if the shear modulus of lead is 5.6 × 10 Pa ?
3
Find the change in volume which 1 m of water will undergo F
when taken from the surface, to the bottom of sea 1 km
deep. Given the elasticity of water is 20,000 atmosphere. 1
5
atmosphere = 1.013 × 10 N m .
–2 50 cm

3 3 3 6 –2
Sol. Here, V = 1 m ; p = h  g = 10 × 10 × 9.8 = 9.8 × 10 Nm
4 5 –2 9
B = 20,000 atm. = 2 × 10 × 1.013 × 10 × N m = 2.026 × 10
–2
Nm m
Sol. Here, L = 50 cm = 50 × 10–2 ;

As, B 
pV
or V 
pV

9.8 10  1  6
 9
G = 5.6 × 10 Pa, F = 9.0 × 10 N.
4

V B 2.026  109 Area of the face on which force is applied,

–3 3 2
= 4.83 × 10 m a = 50 × 10 = 500 sq cm = 0.5 m .
Example - 12 If L is the displacement of the upper edge of the slab due
A solid ball 3 cm in diameter is submerged in a lake to a to tangential force F applied, then
3 –2
depth, where the pressure is 10 kg f m . Find the change
in volume of the ball, if bulk modulus of the material of the F/a FL 9  104  50  10 2
G or L  
7 2
ball is 10 dyne/cm . L / L Ga 5.6  109  0.05
–4
–2 –2 = 1.6 × 10 m
Sol. Here, 2 r = 3 cm = 3 × 10 m or r = (3/2) × 10 m
3 2 3 2 7 2 6 2 Example - 15
p = 10 kg f/m = 10 × 9.8 N/m , B = 10 dyne/cm = 10 N/m
3 Two parallel and opposite forces, each 500 kgf are applied
4 3 4 22  3 
Volume of the ball, V   r      10 2  m 3 tangentially to the upper and lower faces of a cubical metal
3 3 7 2  block 25 cm on a side. Find the angle of shear and the
pV displacement of the upper surface relative to the lower
Now, B  10
surface. The shear modulus of the metal is 8 × 10 Nm ;
–2
V –2
g = 10 ms .
3
4 22  3 
   102   103  9.8
Vp 3 7  2
–2
 Sol. Here F = 500 kgf = 500 × 10N; L = 25 × 10 m;
or V  
B 106 –2 2
a = (25 × 10 ) = 6.25 × 10 m ;
–2 2

–6 3 3
= 0.1386 × 10 m = 0.1386 cm 10
G = 8 × 10 Nm
–2
ELASTICITY 62

Angle of shear or shear strain, Example - 18

F 500 10 A wire of radius r stretched without tension along a straight

–6
  = 10 rad lie is tightly fixed at A and B. Figure. What is the tension in
aG  2
6.25  10  8 10  
10
 the wire when it is pulled in the shape ACB ? Assume
Young’s modulus of material of the wire to by Y.
L –2 –6
Now,   or L = L = (25 × 10 ) × 10 rad
L
–7
= 25 × 10 m.
Example - 16
When load on the wire is increased slowly from 2 kg to
4 kg, the elongation increases from 0.5 mm to 0.9 mm. If Sol. Let 2 l be the original length of wire AB, i.e., L = 2l. When
–2
g = 10 , find the work done during the extention of the wire. wire is pulled into shape ACB, the increase in length,
2 2 1/2
L = (AC + CB) – AB = 2 (l + d ) – 2l.
Sol. Here, F1 = 2 kgf = 2 × 10 N; F2 = 4 kgf = 4 × 10 N
–3 –3
l1 = 0.5 mm = 0.5 × 10 m; l2 = 0.9 mm = 0.9 × 10 m 1/ 2

Longitudinal strain  L 
2 2  d2    2
1 1 L 2
Work done, W  F2   2  F1  1
2 2
2l[(1  d 2 / l 2 )1 / 2  1]
=
1 –3 –3 2l
 [4 × 10 × 0.9 × 10 –2 × 10 × 0.5 × 10 ]
2
–3
= 13 × 10 J.  1 d2  d2
 1   1  2
 2   2
2

Example - 17
2
A 45 kg boy whose leg bones are 5 cm in area and 50 cm tension F
long falls through a height of 2 m without breaking his leg Longitudinal stress   2
8 –2
area r
bones. If the bones can stand a stress of 0.9 × 10 Nm ,
calculate the Young’s modulus for the material of the bone.
–2 longitudinal stress
Use, g = 10 ms .  Young’s Modulus, Y 
longitudinalstrain
–4 2
Sol. Here, m = 45 kg; h = 2m; L = 0.50 m; A = 5 × 10 m
F / r 2
Loss in gravitational energy = gain in elastic energy in both 
d 2 / 2 2
leg bones.
2 2 2
 Tension in the wire, F = Y × r × d /2l .
1 
So, mgh  2    stress  strain  volume 
2  Example - 19
–4
Here, volume = AL = 5 × 10 × 0.50 = 2.5 × 10 m
–4 3 What happens to the work done during stretching of a wire?

1  Sol. The work done in stretching the wire is stored in it in the

 45 × 10 × 2 = 2 ×   0.9 108  strain  2.5  104  form of the elastic potential energy.
 2 

Example - 20
45  10  2
or strain =  0.04
0.9  2.5  10  4 What is meant by saying that crystalline solids are
anisotropic ?
stress 0.9  108
 Y  Sol. The physical properties like thermal conductivity, electrical
strain 0.04
conductivity, compressibility, etc. have different values in
9 –2
= 2.25 × 10 N m different directions.
ELASTICITY 63

Example - 21 F L F YA
Sol. Y  . 
Do liquids possess rigidity ? A   L
Sol. No, liquids do not possess rigidity, because they have no F YA
shapes of their own. Force constant, K   .
 L
Example - 22 Example - 30

How does young’s modulus change with the rise of How does young’s modulus change with the rise of
temperarure ? temperature ?

F/A 1 Sol. Young’s modulus decreases with the rise in temperature.

Sol. As Y  Y 
 /  
Example - 31
So, as temperature increase, lenght also increase Hence,
Young’s modulus decreases with the rise in temperature. Distinguish between elasticity and plasticity of materials.

Example - 23 Sol.

Give two examples which are nearly perfectly plastic. Elasticity Plasticity
1. It is the property of the 1. It is the property of the
Sol. Putty and paraffin wax.
body due to which the body due to which it
Example - 24 body regains its original does not regain to its
The length of a wire is cut to half. What will be the effect configuration (length, original configuration;
on the increase in its length under a given load ? volume or shape) when when the deforming
Sol. Increase in length will be reduced to half as l  l. the deforming forces are force is removed from
removed. it.
Example - 25
2. The bodies, which has 2. The body, which has
Write copper, glass, rubber and steel in the order of
increasing coefficient of elasticity. this property, are called this property is called
elastic bodies, e.g., Iron, plastic body, e.g., clay
Sol. Rubber, glass, copper and steel.
copper, gold etc. etc.
Example - 26
Example - 32
Which is more elastic-water or air ? Why ?
What is elastic hysteresis ?
Sol. Water is more elastic than air, because bulk modulus of
elasticity is reciprocal of the compressibility and air is more Sol. When a deforming force is applied on a body, then the strain
compressible than water. does not change simultaneously with stress, rather it lags
behind the stress. The lagging of strain behind the stress is
Example - 27
called the elastic hysteresis. This is the reason why the
What is the value of Bulk modulus for an incompressible values of strains for the same stress are different while
liquid ? increasing the load and while decreasing the load as shown
Sol. Infinite. in the figure.
Example - 28
What is the limitation of the Hooke’s low ?

Sol. It holds good, when a wire is loaded within its elastic limit.
Example - 29

A wire of length L and of area of cross-section A is stretched

through a certain length l. If Y is the Young’s modulus of
elasticity of the material of the wire, what is the force
constant of the wire ?
ELASTICITY 64

Example - 33 Sol. Given M = 15 kg, L = 2.0 m each.

A steel wire of length 4.7 m and cross-section 3.0 × 10 m

–5 2 Let T be the tension in each wire. As the bar is supported
stretches by the same amount as a copper wire of length symmetrically by thethree wires, the increasesin length L
–5 2
3.5 m and cross-section 4.0 × 10 m under a given load. of each wire should be same.
What is the ratio of the Young’s modulus of steel to that The expression for Young’s modulus is
of copper ?
FL TL
–5 2
Y 
Sol. Given steel : LS = 4.7 m, AS = 3.0 × 10 m , LC = 3.5 m, A L A L
–5 2
A = 4.0 × 10 m
Now, for all wires, L, L, and T is same, therefore, we have
Applied force F and extension L are same for both wires.
Young’s modulus of steel, 1 D 2 1
A or 
Y 4 Y
FLS F  4.7
YS   Hence,
AS L 3.0  105  L

Young’s modulus for copper D Cu YFe 1.9  1011

   1.3
D Fe YCu 1.1 1011
FL C F  3.5
YC  
A C L 4.0  10 5  L Example - 36

Hence, What is the density of ocean water at a depth, where the

pressure is 80.0 atm, given that its density at the surface is
YS F  4.7 4 105  L 3 –3
1.03 × 10 kg m ? Compressibility of water = 45.8 × 10
–11
 5
 = 1.79
YC 3.0  10  L F  3.5 –1 5
Pa . Given, 1 atm = 1.013 × 10 Pa.
Example - 34 –11 –1
Sol. Given, compressibility of water = 1/K = 45.8 × 10 Pa ,
9 –2 13 5
The breaking stress for a metal is 7.8 × 10 Nm . Calculate p = 80.0 atm = 80.0 × 1.0 × 10 Pa, density of water at the
3 –3
the maximum length of the wire made of this metal which surface,  = 1.03 × 10 kg m .
may be suspended without breaking. The density of the Suppose that a volume V of the ocean water is taken to a
3 –3 –2
metal = 7.8 × 10 kg m . Take g = 10 ms . depth where the pressure is 80.0 atm. Let V be the decrease
9 –2 in volume.
Sol. Given Breaking stress = 7.8 × 10 N m , L = ?,
3 –3 pV
 = 7.8 × 10 kgm . Then K 
V
When the wire is suspended vertically, it tends to break
under its own weight. Let its length be L and cross-sectional pV –11
area be A. or V   80  1.013 105  V × 45.8 × 10
K
Weight of wire = mg = volume × density × g = ALg
= 0.0037 V
weight ALg If V’ is volume of the water, when taken to the depth, then
Stress =   Lg
area A
V’ = V – V = V – 0.0037 V
For the wire not to break, this must be equal to the breaking = 0.9963 V
stress, therefore, we have
Let ’ be the density of water at the depth, where the pressure
7.8  10 9 is 80.0 atm. Since the mass of water remains same, therefore,
Lg  7.8  109 or L   105 m
7.8  103  10 we have

Example - 35 V’ ’ = V
3
A rigid bar of mass 15 kg is supported symmetrically, by or 0.9963 V × ’ = V × 1.03 × 10
3 –3
three wires each 2.0 m long. Those at each end are of or ’ = 1.034 × 10 kg m
copper and the middle one is of iron. Determine the ratios
of their diameters if each is to have the same tension.
ELASTICITY 65

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Stress, Strain, Hooke’s Law,
10 2
6. Young’s modulis of brass and steel are 10 × 10 N/m and
Modulus of Elasticity
11 2
2 × 10 N/m , respectively. A brass wire and a steel wire of the
same length are extended by 1 mm under the same force. The
1. The force constant of a wire does not depend on
radii of the brass and steel wires are RB and RS respectively.
(a) Nature of the material Then
(b) Radius of the wire R
(c) Length of the wire (a) RS = 2 RB (b) R S  2B
(d) none of these
R
2. The ratio of radii of two wire of same material is 2 : 1. (c) RS = 4RB (d) R S  4B
Stretched by same force, then the ratio of stress is
7. Two blocks of masses 1 kg and 2 kg are connected by a metal
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 wire going over a smooth pulley as shown. The breaking
(c) 1 : 4 (d) 4 : 1 40 2
stress of the metal is 3  106 N / m 2 . If g = 10 m/s , then what
3. One end of a uniform rod of mass m1 and cross-sectional
area A is hung from a ceiling. The other end of the bar is should be the minimum radius of the wire used if it is not to
supporting mass m2. The stress at the midpoint is break?

g m 2  2m1  g m 2  m1  (a) 0.5 mm (b) 1 mm

(a) (b)
2A 2A (c) 1.5 mm (d) 2 mm
8. A wire elongates by l mm when a load w is hanged from it. If
g 2m 2  m1  g m 2  m1  the wire goes over a pulley and two weights w each are hung
(c) (d)
2A 2A at the two ends, the elongation of the wire will be
4. A wire of cross section A is stretched horizontally between (in mm)
two clamps located 2 metres apart. A weight W kg is (a) l (b) 2 l
Suspended from the mid-point of the wire. If the mid-point (c) zero (d) l/2
sags vertically through a distance x < 1 the strain produced 9. Two wires are made of the same material and have the same
is: volume. However, wire 1 has cross-sectional area A and wire-
2 has cross sectional areal 3A. If the length of wire 1 in-
2x 2 x2
creases by x on aplying force F, how much force is needed
(a) (b) to stretch wire 2 by the same amount ?
2 2
(a) F (d) 4F
x2 (c) 6F (d) 9F
(c) (d) None of these
2 2 10. A metal rod of Young’s modulus Y and coefficient of thermal
expansion  is held at its two ends such that its length remains
5. A wire fixed at the upper end stretches by length l by
invariant. If its temperature is raised by t°C, the linear stress
applying a force F. The work done in stretching is : developed in it is

F t Y
(a) (b) F l (a) (b)
2 Y t

1
F (c) Yt (d)
(c) 2F l (d) Yt
2
ELASTICITY 66

16. Two wires of the same material and same mass are stretched
 4MLg  by the same force. Their lengths are in the ratio 2 : 3. Their
11. In the determination of Young’s modulus  Y   by
 d 2  elongations are in the ratio
using Searle’s method, a wire of length L = 2 m and diameter (a) 3 : 2 (b) 2 : 3
d = 0.5 mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an extension l = (c) 4 : 9 (d) 9 : 4
0.25 mm in the length of the wire is observed. Quantities d 17. The length of a wire is increased by 1 mm on the application
and l are measured using a screw gauge and a micrometer, of a given load. In a wire of the same material, but of length
repectively. They have the same pitch of 0.5 mm. The number and radius twice that of the first, on application of the same
load, extension is
of divisions on their circular scale is 100. The contributions
to the maximum probable error of the Y measurement is (a) 0.25 mm (b) 0.5 mm
(c) 2 mm (d) 4 mm

(a) due to the errors in the measurements of d and l are the Longitudinal Strain
same
18. If equal and opposite forces applied to a body tend to
(b) due to the error in the measurement of d is twice that due elongate it, the stress so produced is called
to the error in the measurement of l. (a) Tensile stress (b) Compressive stress
(c) due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that due (c) Tangential stress (d) Working stress
to the error in the measurement of d. 19. The longitudinal extension of any elastic material is very
small. In order to have an appreciable change, the material
(d) due to the error in the measurement of d is four times that must be in the form of
due to the error in the measurement of l. (a) Long thick wire (b) Short thick wire
12. One end of a horizontal thick copper wire of length 2L and (c) Long thin wire (d) Short thin wire
radius 2R is welded to an end of another horizontal thin 20. You are given three wires A, B and C of the same length and
copper wire of length L and radius R. When the arrangement cross section. They are each stretched by applying the same
is stretched by applying forces at two ends, the ratio of the force to the ends. The wire A is stretched least and comes
back to its original length when the stretching force is
elongation in the thin wire to that in the thick wire is removed. The wire B is stretched more than A and also comes
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.50 back to its original length when the stretching force is
(c) 2.00 (d) 4.00 removed. The wire C is stretched most and remains stretched
even when stretching force is removed. The greatest
6 2
13. A cylindrical tree has a breaking stress of 10 N/m . The Young’s modulus of elasticity is possessed by the material
maximum possible height of the tree is 5 m. the density of of wire
2
material of the tree is (take g = 10 m/s ) (a) A (b) B
3
(a) 10 kg/m
3 4
(b) 10 kg/m
3 (c) C
4 3 3 (d) All have the same elasticity
(c) 2 × 10 kg/m (d) 1 kg/m
14. The length of a steel cylinder is kept constant by applying Shearing Strain
pressure at its two ends. When the temperature of rod is 21. The face EFGH of the cube shown in the figure is displaced
5
increased by 100°C from its initial temperature, the increase 2 mm parallel to itself when forces of 5 × 10 N each are
in pressure to be applied at its ends is applied on the lower and upper faces. The lower face is
fixed. The strain produced in the cube is
11 2 –6 5 2
(Ysteel = 2 × 10 N/m , steel = 11 × 10 /°C, 1 atm = 10 N/m )
7 3
(a) 22 × 10 atm (b) 2.2 × 10 atm
3
(c) zero (d) 4.3 × 10 atm
15. A wire can sustain the weight of 20 kg before breaking. If
the wire is cut into two equal parts, each part can sustain a
weight of
(a) 10 kg (b) 20 kg
(a) 2 (b) 0.5
(c) 40 kg (d) 35 kg 8
(c) 0.05 (d) 1.2 × 10
ELASTICITY 67

22. The reason for the change in shape of a regular body is

(a) Volume stress (b) Shearing strain
(c) Longitudinal strain (d) Metallic strain

Volumetric strain

23. If a rubber ball is taken at the depth of 200 m in a pool. Its

volume decreases by 0.1%. If the density of the water is
3 3 2
1 × 10 kg/m and g = 10 m/s , then the volume elasticity in (a) Elasticity of wire P is maximum
2
N/m will be (b) Elasticity of wire Q is maximum
8 8
(a) 10 (b) 2 × 10 (c) Elasticity of R is maximum
9 9
(c) 10 (d) 2 × 10 (d) None of the above is true
–5
24. The compressibility of water is 4 × 10 per unit atmospheric 28. The figure shows the stress-strain graph of a certain
pressure. The decrease in volume of 100 cubic centimetre of substance. Over which region of the graph is Hooke’s law
water under a pressure of 100 atmosphere will be obeyed
–5
(a) 0.4 cc (b) 4 × 10 cc
(c) 0.025 cc (d) 0.004 cc

Stress – Strain Curve

25. The stress versus strain graphs for wires of two materials A
E
and B are as shown in the figure. If YA and YB are the Young’s
modulii of the materials, then (a) AB (b) BC
(c) CD (d) ED
2
29. Which one of the following is the Young’s modulus (in N/m )
for the wire having the stress-strain curve shown in the
figure

(a) YB = 2YA (b) YA = YB

(c) YB = 3YA (d) YA = 3YB
26. The stress-strain curves for brass, steel and rubber are
shown in the figure. The lines A, B and C are for
11 11
(a) 24 × 10 (b) 8.0 × 10
11 11
(c) 10 × 10 (d) 2.0 × 10

Springs
30. If the potential energy of a spring is V on stretching it by 2
cm, then its potential energy when it is stretched by 10
cm will be
(a) V/25 (b) 5V
(a) Rubber, brass and steel respectively (c) V/5 (d) 25V
(b) Brass, steel and rubber 31. Two wires of the same material and length but diameters in
(c) Steel, brass and rubber respectively the ratio 1 : 2 are stretched by the same force. The potential
(d) Steel, rubber and brass energy per unit volume for the two wires when stretched
27. The strain stress curves of three wires of different materials will be in the ratio
are shown in the figure. P, Q and R are the elastic limits of (a) 16 : 1 (b) 4 : 1
the wires. The figure shows that (c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
ELASTICITY 68

32. What amount of work is done in increasing the length of a

wire through unity?

YL YL2
(a) 2A (b)
2A

YA YL
(c) 2L (d) A

33. When the load on a wire is slowly increased from 3 to 5 kg

wt, the elongation increases from 0.61 to 1.02 mm. The work
done during the extension of wire is
(a) 0.16 J (b) 0.016 J
(c) 1.6 J (d) 16 J

Elastic Energy and Energy Density

34. Two wires of same diameter of the same material having

the length  and 2. If the force F is applied on each, the
ratio of the work done in the two wires will be
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
35. A wire suspended vertically from one of its ends is
stretched by attaching a weight of 200 N to the lower end.
The weight stretches the wire by 1 mm. Then the elastic
energy stored in the wire is :
(a) 0.2 J (b) 10 J
(c) 20 J (d) 0.1 J
36. If S is stress and Y is Young’s modulus of material of a wire,
the energy stored in the wire per unit volume is

2
S2
(a) 2 S Y (b)
2Y

2Y S
(c) 2 (d) 2 Y
S
ELASTICITY 69

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. A pendulum made of uniform wire of cross sectional area 5. A uniformly tapering conical wire is made from a material
A has time period T. When an addition mass M is added of Young’s modulus Y and has a normal, unextended
to its bob, the time period changes to TM. If the Young’s length L. The radii, at the upper and lower ends of this
1 conical wire, have values R and 3 R, respectively. The
modulus of the material of the wire is Y then is equal upper end of the wire is fixed to a rigid support and a
Y
to: (g = gravitational acceleration) (2015) mass M is suspended from its lower end. The equilibrium
extended length, of this wire, would equal
  TM 2  A   T 2  A (2016)
(a) 1   T   Mg (b) 1   T   Mg
      M  
 2 Mg   1 Mg 
(a) L 1   (b) L 1  
 9 YR 2   3 YR 2 
 TM 2  A  TM 2  Mg
(c)  T   1 Mg (c)  T   1 A
       1 Mg   2 Mg 
(c) L 1   (d) L 1  
2. A man grows into a giant such that his linear dimensions  9 YR 2   3 YR 2 
increase by a factor of 9. Assuming that his density 6. A bottle has an opening of radius a and length b. A cork
remains same, the stress in the leg will change by a factor
of length b and radius (a + a ) where (a  a) is
of : (2017)
compressed to fit into the opening completely (See figure).
1 If the bulk modulus of cork is B and frictional coefficient
(a) (b) 9
81 between the bottle and cork is  then the force needed
to push the cork into the bottle is : (2016)
1
(c) (d) 81
9

3. An external pressure P is applied on a cube at 0°C so that

it is equally compressed from all sides. K is the bulk
modulus of the material of the cube and  is its coefficient
of linear expansion. Suppose we want to bring the cube
to its original size by heating. The temperature should be
raised by : (2017)
(a) (B b) a (b) (2B b) a
P
(a) 3PKa (b)
3K (c) (B b) a (d) (4B b) a
7. A compressive force, F is applied at the two ends of a
P 3
(c) (d) long thin steel rod. It is heated, simultaneously, such that
K PK
its temperature increases by T . The net change in its
2
4. A steel rail of length 5m and area of cross section 40 cm length is zero. Let l be the length of the rod, A its area of
is prevented from expanding along its length while the cross-section, Y its Young’s modulus, and  be its
temperature rises by 10ºC, If coefficient of linear expansion coefficient of linear expansion. Then, F is equal to :
and Young’s modulus of steel are 1.2 × 10–5 K–1 and 2 × (2017)
1011 Nm–2 respectively, the force developed in the rail is
(a) 2 Y  T (b)  AY  T
approximately : (2017)
(a) 2×107 N (b) 1×105 N AY
(c) 2×109 N (d) 3×10–5 N (c) AY  T (d)  T
ELASTICITY 70

8. A solid sphere of radius r made of a soft material of bulk 12. Young’s moduli of two wires A and B are in the ratio 7 : 4.
modulus K is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical
Wire A is 2 m long and has radius R. Wire B is 1.5 m longand
container. A massless piston of area a floats on the surface
of the liquid, covering entire cross section of cylindrical has radius 2 mm. If the two wires stretch by the samelength
container. When a mass m is placed on the surface of the for a given load, then the value ofR is close to :
piston to compress the liquid, the fractional decrement in
(2019)
 dr 
the radius of the sphere,   is (2018) (a) 1.5 mm (b) 1.9 mm
 r 
(c) 1.7 mm (d) 1.3 mm
mg mg 13. In an environment, brass and steel wires of length 1 m
(a) (b)
3K a Ka
each with areas of cross section 1mm2 are used. The
Ka Ka
(c) mg (d) 3mg wires are connected in series and one end of the combined
wire is connected to a rigid support and other end is
9. As shown in the figure, forces of 105 N each are applied in subjected to elongation. The stress required to produce a
opposite directions, on the upper and lower faces of a net elongation of 0.2 mm is:
cube of sides 10 cm, shifting the upper face parallel to
[Given, the Young’s modulus for steel and brass are,
itself by 0.5 cm. If the side of another cube of the same
material is 20 cm, then under similar conditions as above, respectively, 120  109 N / m 2 and 60  109 N / m 2 ]
the displacement will be : (2018)
(2019)

(a) 1.2  106 N / m 2 (b) 4.0  106 N / m2

(c) 8 106 N / m2 (d) 0.2 106 N / m2

14. The elastic limit of brass is 379 M Pa. What should be the
(a) 0.25 cm (b) 0.37 cm
minimum diameter of a brass rod if it is to support a 400 N
(c) 0.75 cm (d) 1.00 cm load without exceeding its elastic limit? (2019)
10. A boy’s catapult is made of rubber cord which is 42 cm (a) 1.00 mm (b) 1.15 mm
long, with 6 mm diameter of cross-section and of negligible (c) 0.90 mm (d) 1.36 mm
mass. The boy keeps a stone weighing 0.02 kg on it and 15. A load of mass M kg is suspended from a steel wire of
stretches the cord by 20 cm by applying a constant force. length 2m and radius 1.0 mm in Searle’s apparatus
When released, the stone flies off with a velocity of 20 ms1. experiment. The increase in length produced in the wire is
Neglect the change in the area of cross-section of the cord 4.0 mm. Now the load is fully immersed in a liquid of relative
density 2. The relative density of the material of load is 8.
while stretched. The Young’s modulus of rubber is closest
The new value of increase in length of the steel wire is
to: (2019)
_____.
(a) 106 N/m–2 (b) 104 N/m–2 (2019)
8 –2 3 –2
(c) 10 N/m (d) 10 N/m (a) 3.0 mm (b) 4.0 mm
11. A steel wire having a radius of 2.0 mm, carrying a load of 4 (c) 5.0 mm (d) Zero
–2
kg, is hanging from a ceiling. Given that g = 3.1 ms , what 16. Two steel wires having same length are suspended from a
will be the tensile stress that would be developed in the ceiling under the same load. If the ratio of their energy
wire? (2019) stored per unit volume is 1: 4, the ratio of their diameters is:
6 –2 6 –2 (2020)
(a) 6.2 × 10 Nm (b) 5.2 × 10 Nm
(c) 3.1 × 106 Nm–2 (d) 4.8 × 106 Nm– (a) 2 :1 (b) 1: 2
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 : 1
ELASTICITY 71

EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. The length of an elastic string is a meter when the 6. A small but heavy block of mass 10 kg is attached to a wire
7 2
longitudinal tension is 4 N and b metre when the tension 0.3mlong. Itsbreaking stressis4.8 × 10 N/m . The area of
–6 2
is 5 N. The length of the string (in metre) when the cross section of the wire is 10 m . The maximum angular
longitudinal tension is 9 N is velocity with which the block can be rotated in the
(a) a – b (b) 5b – 4a horizontal circle is
(c) 2b – a/2 (d) 4a – 3b (a) 4 rad/s (b) 8 rad/s
2. A uniform rod of mass m, length L, area of cross-section A (c) 10 rad/s (d) 32 rad/s
is rotated about an axis passing through one of its ends
7. Two bars A and B of circular cross section and same volume
and perpendicular to its length with constant angular
and made of the same material are subjected to tension. If
velocity  in a horizontal plane. If Y is the Young’s
the diameter of A is half that B and if the force applied to
modulus of the material of rod, the increase in its length
due to rotation of rod is both the rod is the same and it is in the elastic limit, the
ratio of extension of A to that of B will be
m2 L2 m2 L2 (a) 16 (b) 8
(a) (b)
AY 2AY (c) 4 (d) 2
2 2 2 2 5
m L 2m L 8. A substance breaks down under a stress of 10 Pa. If the
(c) (d) 3 3
3AY AY density of the wire is 2 × 10 kg/m , find the minimum
length of the wire which will break under its own weight
3. A slightly conical wire of length L and end radii r1 and r2 is 2
stretched by two forces F, F applied parallel to length in (g = 10 m/s ).
opposite directions and normal to end faces. If Y denotes (a) 10 m (b) 2.5 m
the Young’s modulus, then extension produced is (c) 4 m (d) 5 m
FL FL 9. A 5 kg rod of square cross section 5 cm on a side and 1 m
(a) r 2 Y (b) r Y long is pulled along a smooth horizontal surface by a force
1 1
applied at one end. The rod has a constant acceleration of
FL FLY 2
2 m/s . Determine the elongation in the rod. (Young’s
(c) r r Y (d) r r 9 2
1 2 1 2 modulus of the material of the rod is 5 × 10 N/m )
4. A uniform rod of length L has a mass per unit length  and (a) Zero, as for elongation to be there, equal and opposite
area of cross section A. The elongation in the rod is  due force must act on the rod
to its own weight if it is suspended from the ceiling of a (b) Non-zero but can’t be determine from the given
room. The Young’s modulus of the rod is situation
2gL2 gL2 (c) 0.4 m
(a) (b)
A 2A (d) 16 m
10. A solid sphere of radius R, made up of a material of bulk
2gL g 2
(c) (d) modulus k is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical
A AL
container. A massless piston of area A floats on the surface
5. One end of uniform wire of length L and of weight W is of the liquid. When a mass M is placed on the piston to
attached rigidly to a point in the roof and a weight W1 is compress the liquid, the fractional change in the radius of
suspended from its lower end. If s is the area of cross the sphere is
section of the wire, the stress in the wire at a height (3L/4)
from its lower end is Mg Mg
(a) (b) 3AK
W
AK
W  
(a) s 1 (b)  W1  4  s
 
3Mg Mg
(c) (d)
 3W  W1  W AK 2AK
(c)  W1  4  / s (d) s

ELASTICITY 72

11. A bar of cross section A is subjected to two equal and 15. A heavy block of mass 150 kg hangs with the help of three
opposite tensile force as shown. Consider a cross section vertical wires of equal length and equal cross sectional
BB as shown in figure. The shearing stress at this point is area as shown in the figure.

Fcos 2  F
(a) (b) A
A

Fsin 2
(c) 2A
(d) zero Wire is attached to the mid-point (centre of mass) of block.
Take Y2 = 2Y1. For this arrangement mark out the correct
Multiple Answer Questions statment(s).

12. A metal wire length L, cross section area A, and Young’s (a) The wire I and III should have same Young’s modulus.
modulus Y is stretched by a variable force F. F is varying (b) Tension in I and III would be always equal.
in such a way that F is always slightly greater than the (c) Tension in I and III would be different.
elastic forces of resistance in the wire. When the elongation
(d) Tension in II is 75 g.
in the wire is l, up to this instant
16. Two wires A and B have the same cross-section and are
YA 2 made of the same material, but the length of wire A is twice
(a) the work done by F is
2L that of B. Then, for a given load
(a) the extension of A will be twice that of B
YA 2
(b) the work done by F is
L (b) the extensions of A and B will be equal
(c) the strain in A will be half that in B
YA2
(c) the elasitc potential energy stored in wire is (d) the strains in A and B will be equal
2L

(d) no energy is lost during elongation 17. Figure shows the stress-strain graphs for materials A
13. A composite rod consists of a steel rod of length 25 cm and B.
and area 2A and a copper rod of length 50 cm and area A.
The composite rod is subjected to an axial load F. If the
Young’s mouduli of steel and copper are in the ratio 2 : 1,
then
(a) the extension produced in copper rod will be more
(b) the extension in copper and steel parts will be in the
ratio 1 : 8
(c) the stress applied to copper rod will be more From the graph it follows that
(d) no extension will be produced in the steel rod (a) material A has a higher Young’s modulus
14. Choose the correct statements from the following : (b) material B is more ductile
(a) Steel is more elastic than rubber. (c) material A is more brittle
(b) The stretching of a coil spring is determined by the (d) material A can withstand a greater stress
Young’s modulus of the wire of the spring.
Integer Type Questions
(c) The frequency of a tuning fork is determined by the
shear modulus of the material of the fork. 18. A block of mass m produces an extension of 9 cm in an
elastic spring of length 60 cm when it is hung by it, and the
(d) When a material is subjected to a tensile (stretching)
system is in equilibrium. The spring is cut in two parts of
stress the restoring forces are caused by interatomic 40 cm and 20 cm lenghts. The same block hangs in
attraction. equilibrium with the help of these two parts. Find the
extension (in cm) in this case.
ELASTICITY 73

Assertion Reason (C) Longitudinal stress (R) Internal developed forces

(A) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true and reason are attractive in nature.
is the correct explanation of the assertion. (D) Lateral strain (S) Internal developed forces
(B) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true but reason is are repulsive in nature
not the correct explanation of the assertion. COMPREHENSION
(C) If ASSERTION is true but REASON is false. Passage - 1
(D) If both ASSERTION and REASON are false.
Using the following Passage, Solve Q. 22–23
(E) If ASSERTION is false but REASON is true.
A light rod of length L = 2 m is suspended horizontally
19. Assertion : The stress–strain graphs are shown in the from the ceiling by two wires A and B of equal lengths.
figure for two materials A and B are shown in figure. Young’s The wire A is made of steel with the area of cross section
modulus of A is greater than that of B. –5 2
As = 1×10 m , while the wire B is made of brass of cross
–5 2
sectional area Ab = 2 × 10 m . A weight W is suspended at
a distance x from the wire A as shown in figure.
Take, Young’s modulus of steel and brass as
11 –2 11 –2
Ys = 2 × 10 Nm and Yb = 1 × 10 Nm .

Reason : The Young’s modules for small strain is,

stress
Y  slope of linear portion, of graph; and slope
strain
of A is more than slope that of B.
(a) A (b) B
22. Determine the value of x so that equal stresses are
(c) C (d) D produced in each wire.
(e) (E) (a) 1.33 m (b) 2.5 m
(c) 3.6 m (d) 2.1 m
20. Assertion : Young’s modulus for a perfectly plastic body
is zero. 23. Determine the value of x so that equal strains are produced
in each wire.
Reason : For a perfectly plastic body, restoring force is
zero. (a) 1 m (b) 2 m

(a) A (b) B (c) 3 m (d) 2.2 m

(c) C (d) D Passage - 2
(e) E Using the following Passage, Solve Q. 24 to 26
–5 2
Match the Column A steel bolt of cross sectional area Ab = 5 × 10 m is
passed through a cylindrical tube made of aluminium.
21. In the Column I type of stresses or strains are mentioned –4 2
and some effect of these stresses within the body are Cross sectional area of the tube material is At = 10 m and
mentioned in Column II. Match the entries of Column-I its length is l = 50 cm. The bolt is just taut so that there is
with the entries of Column-II. no stress in the bolt. And temperature of the assembly is
increased through  = 10° C. Given, coefficient of linear
Column-I Column-II –5
thermal expansion of steel, b = 10 /°C.
(A) Compressive stress (P) Intermolecular separation in
stresssed state is greater
than equilibrium separation.
(B) Tensile stress (Q) Intermolecular separation in Young’s modulus of steel Yb = 2 × 10 N/m .
11 2

stressed state is less than 11 2

Young’s modulus of Al, Yt = 10 N/m , coefficient of linear
equilibrium separation. –5
thermal expansion of Al t = 2 × 10 /°C.
ELASTICITY 74

24. The compressive strain in tube is

–4 –5
(a) 10 (b) 5 × 10
–3 –6
(c) 2 × 10 (d) .10

25. The compressive stress in tube is

6 2 5 2
(a) 5 × 10 N/m (b) 10 N/m
8 2 3 2
(c) 10 N/m (d) 10 N/m
26. The tensile stress in bolt is
4 2 7 2
(a) 10 N/m (b) 10 N/m
8 2 10 2
(c) 2 × 10 N/m (d) 10 N/m
Passage - 3
Using the following Passage, Solve Q. 27 to 29
According to Hooke’s law, within the elastic limit stress/
strain = constant. This constant depends on the type of
strain or the type of force acting. Tensile stress might
result in compressional or elongative strain; however, a
tangential stess can only cause a shearing strain. After
crossing the elastic limit, the material undergoes elongation
and beyond a stage beaks. All modulus of elastically are
basically constants for the materials under stress.
27. Two wires of same material have length and radius (l, r)
 r
and  2, 2  . The ratio of their Young’s modulus is
 

(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
28. Just on crossing the yield region, the material will have
(a) reduced stress
(b) increased stress
(c) breaking stress
(d) constant stress
stress
29. If strain be x in elastic region and y in the region of yield,
then
(a) x = y (b) x > y
(c) x < y (d) x = 2y
ELASTICITY 75

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Single Correct Options 4. One end of a horizontal thick copper wire of length 2L and
radius 2R is welded to an end of another horizontal thin
1. The adjacent graph shows the extension (l) of a wire of copper wire of length L and radius R. When the
length 1m suspended from the top of a roof at one end and arrangement is stretched by applying forces at two ends,
with a load W connected to the other end. If the cross- the ratio of the elongation in the thin wire to that in the
sectional area of the wire is 10–6 m2, calculate from the graph thick wire is (2013)
the Young’s modulus of the material of the wire. (2003)
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.50
(c) 2.00 (d) 4.00

Multiple Correct Options

5. In plotting stress versus strain curves for two materials P

and Q, a student by mistake puts strain on the y-axis and
stress on the x-axis as shown in the figure. Then the
correct statement(s) is (are). (2015)

(a) 2 × 1011 N/m2 (b) 2 × 10–11 N/m2

(c) 3 × 1012 N/m2 (d) 2 × 1013 N/m2
5
2. The pressure of a medium is changed from 1.01 × 10 Pa to
5
1.165 × 10 Pa and change in volume is 10% keeping
temperature constant. The bulk modulus of the medium is
(2005)
5 5
(a) 204.8 × 10 Pa (b) 102.4 × 10 Pa
5 5
(c) 51.2 × 10 Pa (d) 1.55 × 10 Pa (a) P has more tensile strength than Q
 4MLg  (b) P is more ductile than Q
3. In the determination of Young’s modulus  Y  
 d 2  (c) P is more brittle than Q
by using Searle’s method, a wire of length L = 2 m and (d) The Young’s modulus of P is more than that of Q.
diameter d = 0.5 mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an
extension l = 0.25 mm in the length of the wire is observed. Integer Type
Quantities d and l are measured using a screw gauge and
6. A block of weight 100 N is suspended by copper and
a micrometer, repectively. They have the same pitch of 0.5
steel wires of same cross sectional area 0.5 cm2 and, length
mm. The number of divisions on their circular scale is 100.
The contributions to the maximum probable error of the Y 3 m and 1 m, respectively. Their other ends are fixed on
measurement is (2012) a ceiling as shown in figure. The angles subtended by
(a) due to the errors in the measurements of d and l are the copper and steel wires with ceiling are 30° and 60°,
same respectively. If elongation in copper wire is ( c) and
(b) due to the error in the measurement of d is twice that
due to the error in the measurement of l. c
elongation in steel wire is (s) , then the ratio is
(c) due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that  s
due to the error in the measurement of d. ___ . (Young’s modulus for copper and steel are 1 × 1011
(d) due to the error in the measurement of d is four times N/m2 and 2 × 1011 N/m2, respectively)
that due to the error in the measurement of l. (2019)
ELASTICITY 76

Analytical & Descriptive Questions

8. In Searle’s experiment, which is used to find Young’s
modulus of elasticity, the diameter of experimental wire is
D = 0.05 cm (measured by a scale of least count 0.001 cm)
and length is L = 110 cm (measured by a scale of least
count 0.1 cm). A weight of 50 N causes an extension of
l = 0.125 cm (measured by a micrometer of least count
dP 0.001 cm). Find maximum possible error in the values of
7. A cubical solid aluminium (bulk modulus =  V = 70
dV Young’s modulus. Screw gauge and meter scale are free
GPa) block has an edge length of 1 m on the surface of the from error. (2004)
earth. It is kept on the floor of a 5 km deep ocean. Taking
the average density of water and the acceleration due to
gravity to be 103 kg m 3 and 10 ms 2 , respectively, the
change in the edge length of the block in mm is _____.
(2020)
ELASTICITY 77

ELASTICITY
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
 03
OSCILLATION & WAVES
 Chapter 03 79

OSCILLATION & WAVES

THEORY

1. INTRODUCTION 2 m m
Time period (T) =  2 as  
(1) A motion which repeats itself over and over again after a  k k
regular interval of time is called a periodic motion.
3. Frequency
(2) Oscillatory or vibratory motion is that motion in which a
The frequency of a particle executing S.H.M. is equal to
body moves to and fro or back and forth repeatedly about
the number of oscillations completed in one second.
a fixed point in a definite interval of time.
(3) Simple harmonic motion is a specific type of oscillatory  1 k
 
motion, in which 2 2 m
(a) particle moves in one dimension, 4. Phase
(b) particle moves to and fro about a fixed mean position The phase of particle executing S.H.M. at any instant is its
(where Fnet = 0), state as regard to its position and direction of motion at
(c) net force on the particle is always directed towards that instant. It is measured as argument (angle) of sine in
means position, and the equation of S.H.M.

(d) magnitude of net force is always proportional to the Phase = (t + )

displacement of particle from the mean position at that At t = 0, phase = ; the constant  is called initial phase of
instant. the particle or phase constant.
So, Fnet = –kx 1.2 Important Relations
where, k is known as force constant
1. Position
 ma = – kx
k
 a x or a  2 x +a
m
where,  is known as angular frequency. T/2 T
O
d2 x
  2 x –a
dt 2
This equation is called as the differential equation of If mean position is at origin the position (X coordinate)
S.H.M. depends on time in general as :
The general expression for x(t) satisfying the above x (t) = sin (t + )
equation is :
• At mean position, x = 0
x (t) = A sin (t + )
• At extremes, x = + A, –A
1.1 Some Important terms
2. Velocity
1. Amplitude
The amplitude of particle executing S.H.M. is its maximum Vmax
displacement on either side of the mean position.
T/2 T
A is the amplitude of the particle. O
2. Time Period
Time period of a particle executing S.H.M. is the time taken
to complete one cycle and is denoted by T. • At any time instant t, v (t) = A  cos (t + )

SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
OSCILATION AND WAVES 80

• At any position x, v (x) = ±  A 2  x 2 1 2 1

Ux  kx  mA 2 2 sin 2  t   
2 2
• Velocity is minimum at extremes because the particles
is at rest.
U max
i.e., v = 0 at extreme position.

• Velocity has maximum magnitude at mean position.

T/2 T
|v|max = A at mean position.

3. Acceleration
1 2
• U is maximum at extremes, Umax = kA
2
Amax
• U is minimum at mean position
T/2 T
O Total Energy

T.E.
• 2
At any instant t, a (t) = –  A sin (t + )
• At any position x, a (x) = – 2x
• Acceleration is always directed towards mean position.
• The magnitude of acceleration is minimum at mean 1 2 1
T.E.  kA  mA 2 2
position and maximum at extremes. 2 2
|a|min = 0 at mean position. and is constant at all time instant and at all positions.
2
|a|max =  A at extremes. Energy position graph
4. Energy
Kinetic energy Energy
Total energy (E)
1 1
• K  mv2  K  m2 A 2  x 2
2 2
  Potential energy (U)

1
 m2 A 2 cos 2  t    Kinetic energy (K)
2
x=–a x=0 x=+a
K max
2. TIME PERIOD OF S.H.M.
T/2 T To find whether a motion is S.H.M. or not and to find its
time period, follow these steps :
• K is maximum at mean position and minimum at extremes. (a) Locate the mean (equilibrium) position mathematically by
balancing all the forces on it.
1 1
• K max  m 2 A 2  kA 2 at mean position (b) Displace the particle by a displacement ‘x’ from the mean
2 2 position in the probable direction of oscillation.
• Kmin = 0 at extemes. (c) Find the net force on it and check if it is towards mean
position.
Potential Energy
(d) Try to express net force as a proportional function of its
If potential energy is taken as zero at mean position,
displacement ‘x’.
then at any position x,

SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
OSCILATION AND WAVES 81

• If step (c) and step (d) are proved then it is a simple

m
harmonic motion. • Time period : T  2
k
(e) Find k from expression of net force (F = – kx) and find time
(c) Combination of springs :
m
period using T  2 . 1. Springs in series
k
2.1 Oscillations of a Block Connected to a Spring When two springs of force constant K1 and K2 are
connected in series as shown, they are equivalent to a
(a) Horizontal spring :
single spring of force constant K which is given by
Let a block of mass m be placed on a smooth horizontal
surface and rigidly connected to spring of force constant 1 1 1
 
K whose other end is permanently fixed. K K1 K 2

K1 K 2
K
K1  K 2

block in equilibrium

mean position
K1 K
x

block displaced K2
K1K2
K = ––––––
K1 + K2
• Mean position : when spring is at its natural length.

m 2. Springs in parallel
• Time period : T  2
k
For a parallel combination as shown, the effective
(b) Vertical Spring : spring constant is K = K1 + K2

If the spring is suspended vertically from a fixed point

and carries the block at its other end as shown, the
block will oscillate along the vertical line.

elongation block elongation

=d displaced =d+x
downwards
by x K1 K2

block in equilibrium
K1 + K2

mg
• Mean position : spring in elongated by d 
k

SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
OSCILATION AND WAVES 82

2.2 Oscillation of a Cylinder Floating in a liquid R

• Time period : T  2 = 84.6 minutes
Let a cylinder of mass m and density d be floating on g
the surface of a liquid of density . The total length of where, R is radius of earth.
cylinder is L.
2.5 Angular Oscillations

Instead of straight line motion, if a particle or centre of

mass of a body is oscillating on a small arc of circular
L path then it is called angular S.H.M.
l l+x For angular S.H.M., = – k
 I = –k

cylinder in equilibrium cylinder displaced downwards I

 Time period, T  2
by a distance x k
Ld
• Mean position : cylinder is immersed upto   2.5.1 Simple Pendulum

Ld  
• Time period : T  2  2 • Time period : T  2
g g g

2.3 Liquid Oscillating in a U–Tube • Time period of a pendulum in a lift :

Consider a liquid column of mass m and density  in a U- 

T  2 (if acceleration of lift is upwards)
tube of area of cross section A. ga


x T  2 (if acceleration of lift is downwards)
ga
x
• Second’s pendulum
Time period of second’s pendulum is 2s.
Length of second’s pendulum on earth surface  1m.
In equilibrium liquid displaced by x 2.5.2 Physical Pendulum
I
• Mean position : when height of liquid is same in both limbs. Time period : T  2
mg
m (2L  A) L
• Time period : T  2  2  2
2Ag 2Ag 2g
O
where, L is length of liquid column.

2.4 Body Oscillation in tunnel along any chord of earth l

mg
• Mean position : At the centre of the chord

SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
OSCILATION AND WAVES 83

where, I is moment of inertia of object about point of

2π
suspension, and • Angular frequency () : It is defined as w = = 2πn
Τ
l is distance of centre of mass of object from point of
suspension. • Phase : Phase is a quantity which contains all information
related to any vibrating particle in a wave. For equation y
3. DAMPED AND FORCED OSCILLATIONS = A sin (t – kx); (t – kx) = phase.
1. Damped Oscillation :
2π
• Angular wave number (k) : It is defined as k =
(i) The oscillation of a body whose amplitude goes on λ
decreasing with time is defined as damped oscillation.
(ii) In this oscillation the amplitude of oscillation   1 k
• Wave number (  ) : It is defined as  = = = number
λ 2π
decreases exponentially due to damping forces like
frictional force, viscous force etc. of waves in a unit length of the wave pattern.
• Particle velocity, wave velocity and particle's
+a acceleration : In plane progressive harmonic wave
particles of the medium oscillate simple harmonically
about their mean position. Therefore, all the formulae what
O t we have read in SHM apply to the particles here also. For
x
example, maximum particle velocity is ± A at mean
–a position and it is zero at extreme positions etc. Similarly
maximum particle acceleration is ±2A at extreme positions
(iii) Due to decrease in amplitude the energy of the and zero at mean position. However the wave velocity is
oscillator also goes on decreasing exponentially. different from the particle velocity. This depends on certain
2. Forced Oscillation : characteristics of the medium. Unlike the particle velocity
(i) The oscillation in which a body oscillates under the which oscillates simple harmonically (between + A and
influence of an external periodic force are known as – A) the wave velocity is constant for given
forced oscillation. characteristics of the medium.
(ii) Resonance : When the frequency of external force is • Particle velocity in wave motion :
equal to the natural frequency of the oscillator, then
The individual particles which make up the medium do
this state is known as the state of resonance. And this
frequency is known as resonant frequency. not travel through the medium with the waves. They
simply oscillate about their equilibrium positions. The
4. WAVES instantaneous velocity of an oscillating particle of the
• Wavelength () [length of one wave] medium, through which a wave is travelling, is known as
Distance travelled by the wave during the time, any one "Particle velocity".
particle of the medium completes one vibration about its
mean position. We may also define wavelength as the
distance between any two nearest particles of the medium,
vibrating in the same phase.
• Frequency (n): Number of vibrations (Number of complete
wavelengths) complete by a particle in one second.
• Time period (T) : Time taken by wave to travel a distance
equal to one wavelength.
• Wave velocity : The velocity with which the disturbance,
• Amplitude (A): Maximum displacement of vibrating
or planes of equal phase (wave front), travel through the
particle from its equilibrium position.
medium is called wave (or phase) velocity.

SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
OSCILATION AND WAVES 84

• Relation between particle velocity and wave velocity : beyond the particle 1, the particles start oscillating. If the
speed of the wave be v, then it will reach particle 6, distant
Wave equation :- y = A sin (t – kx), Particle velocity v
x from the particle 1, in x/v sec. Therefore, the particle 6
y will start oscillating x/v sec after the particle 1. It means
= = A cos (t – kx). that the displacement of the particle 6 at a time t will be the
t
same as that of the particle 1 at a time x/v sec earlier i.e.
λ ω ω y at time t – (x/v). The displacement of particle 1 at time t
Wave velocity = vP= =λ = , – (x/v) can be the particle 6, distant x from the origin
T 2π k x
(particle 1), at time t is given by

A 1 y  x
= –Ak cos (t – kx) = –
ω
k cos (t – kx) = – v
p t
y = a sin   t  
 v
y 1 y
 =–  
x v P t But  = 2 n, y = a sin (t – kx) k  v  ...(ii)
 
y
Note : represent the slope of the string (wave) at the  2   
x y = a sin  t  x Also k = ...(iii)
T   
point x.
Particle velocity at a given position and time is equal to  t x
y = a sin 2    ...(iv)
negative of the product of wave velocity with slope of T 
the wave at that point at that instant.
This is the equation of a simple harmonic wave
travelling along +x direction. If the wave is travelling
Equation of a Plane Progressive Wave along the –x direction then inside the brackets in the
If, on the propagation of wave in a medium, the particles above equations, instead of minus sign there will be
of the medium perform simple harmonic motion then the plus sign. For example, equation (iv) will be of the
wave is called a 'simple harmonic progressive wave'.  t x
Suppose, a simple harmonic progressive wave is following form : y = a sin 2  +  . If f be the
T λ
propagating in a medium along the positive direction of
the x-axis (from left to right). In fig. (a) are shown the phase difference between the above wave travelling
equilibrium positions of the particles 1, 2, 3 ....... along the +x direction and an other wave, then the
equation of that wave will be
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (a)
  t x 

y = a sin  2π  –  ±  
3   T λ  
4
2
a (a) Speed of longitudinal wave
y
1 5 9 x
• Speed of longitudinal wave in a medium is given by
x 6 8
E
7 (b) v

Direction of wave
When the wave propagates, these particles oscillate where, E is the modulus of elasticity,  is the density
about their equilibrium positions. In Fig. (b) are shown of the medium.
the instantaneous positions of these particles at a • Speed of longitudinal wave in a solid in the form of rod
particular instant. The curve joining these positions is given by
represents the wave. Let the time be counted from the
instant when the particle 1 situated at the origin starts Y
oscillating. If y be the displacement of this particle after v

t seconds, then y = a sin t...(i)
where a is the amplitude of oscillation and  = 2 n, where where, Y is the Young’s modulus of the solid,  is the
n is the frequency. As the wave reaches the particles density of the solid.

SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
OSCILATION AND WAVES 85

• Speed of longitudinal wave in fluid is given by • Nodes : Amplitude = 0

B 2A sin kx = 0
v
 x = 0, /k, 2/k.......
x = 0, /2, , 3/2, 2........
where, B is the bulk modulus,
• Antinodes : Amplitude is maximum.
 is the density of the fluid.
(b) Newton’s formula sin kx = ± 1

• Newton assumed that propagation of sound wave in x = /2k, 3/2k

gas is an isothermal process. Therefore, according to x = /4, 3/4, 5/4

P • Nodes are completely at rest. Antinodes are oscillating

Newton, speed of sound in gas is given by v  with maximum amplitude (2A). The points between a

node and antinode have amplitude between 0 and 2 A.
where P is the pressure of the gas and  is the density
of the gas. • Separation between two consecutive (or antinodes)
= /2.
• According to the Newton’s formula, the speed of sound
in air at S.T.P. is 280 m/s. But the experimental value of • Separation between a node and the next antinode=/4.
the speed of sound in air is 332 ms–1. Newton could not • Nodes and antinodes are alternately placed.
explain this large difference. Newton’s formula was
corrected by Laplace.
t=0 t = T/2
(c) Laplace’s correction
• Laplace assumed that propagation of sound wave in t = T/8 t = 3T/8
gas in an adiabatic process. Therefore, according to
Laplace, speed of sound in a gas is given by
t = T/4
N1 N2 t = T/4 N N
P
v

t = 3T/8 t = T/8
• According to Laplace’s correction the speed of sound
in air at S.T.P. is 331.3 m/s. This value agrees farily well t = T/2 t=0
with the experimental values of the velocity of sound
in air at S.T.P.
• It is clear from the figure that since nodes are, at rest
5. WAVES TRAVELLING IN OPPOSITE SIDECTIONS they don’t transfer energy. In a stationary wave, energy
is not transferred from one point to the other.
• When two waves of same amplitude and frequency
travelling in opposite directions 5.1 Vibrations in a stretched string
y1 = A sin (kx – t) • Law of length : For a given string, under a given tension,
y2 = A sin (kx + t) the fundamental frequency of vibration is inversely

interfere, then a standing wave is produced which is 1

proportional to the length of the string, i.e, n  (T and
given by, 
y = y1 + y2 m are constant)
 y = 2A sin kx cos t • Law of tension : The fundamental frequency of vibration
• Hence the particle at location x is oscillating in S.H.M. of stretched string is directly proportional to the square
with angular frequency  and amplitude 2A sin kx. As root of the tension in the string, provided that length and
the amplitude depends on location (x), particles are mass per unit length of the string are kept constant.
oscillating with different amplitude.
n  T (  and m are constant)

SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
OSCILATION AND WAVES 86

• Law of mass : The fundamental frequency of vibration of

a stretched string is inversely proportional to the square T = Mg
root of its mass per unit length provided that length of
the string and tension in the string are kept constant, i.e., M

1
n (  and T are constant)
m Thus if p loops are formed in the thread, then the

• Melde's experiment : In Melde's experiment, one end of a 2p T

frequency of the tuning fork is n =
flexible piece of thread is tied to the end of a tuning fork. 2 m
The other end passed over a smooth pulley carries a pan
which can be loaded. There are two arrangements to SONOMETER :
vibrate the tied fork with thread. Sonometer consists of a hollow rectangular box of light
Transverse arrangement : wood. One end of the experimental wire is fastened to one
end of the box. The wire passes over a frictionless pulley
Case 1. In a vibrating string of fixed length, the product
P at the other end of the box. The wire is stretched by a
of number of loops and square root of tension are
tension T.
constant or p T = constant.
B1 B2
A

T = Mg P

M
The box serves the purpose of increasing the loudness of
Case 2. When the tuning fork is set vibrating as shown in the sound produced by the vibrating wire. If the length
fig. then the prong vibrates at right angles to the thread. the wire between the two bridges is , then the frequency
As a result the thread is set into motion. The frequency
l T
of vibration of the thread (string) is equal to the frequency of vibration is n =
2 m
of the tuning fork. If length and tension are properly
adjusted then, standing waves are formed in the string. To test the tension of a tuning fork and string, a small
(This happens when frequency of one of the normal paper rider is placed on the string. When a vibrating
modes of the string matched with the frequency of the tuning fork is placed on the box, and if the length between
tuning fork). Then, if p loops are formed in the thread, the bridges is properly adjusted, then when the two
then the frequency of the tuning fork is given by frequencies are exactly equal, the string quickly picks up
the vibrations of the fork and the rider is thrown off the wire.
p T
n= 1. Fixed at both ends.
2 m
• Transverse standing waves with nodes at both ends
Case 3. If the tuning fork is turned through a right angle,
of the string are formed.
so that the prong vibrates along the length of the thread,
then the string performs only a half oscillation for each n
complete vibrations of the prong. This is because the • So, length of string,   if there are (n + 1) nodes
2
thread only makes node at the midpoint when the prong
and n antinodes.
moves towards the pulley i.e. only once in a vibration.
• Frequency of oscillations is
Longitudinal arrangement :
The thread performs sustained oscillations when the v nv
  
natural frequency of the given length of the thread under  2
tension is half that of the fork.

SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
OSCILATION AND WAVES 87

L L nv
• So, Frequency of oscillations is  
2

A A A
N N
N N N

• Fundamental frequency (x = 1)

v
0 
2L
It is also called first harmonic.
• Second harmonic or first overtone

2v 2. Closed organ pipe (One end closed)


2L
• The open end becomes antinode and closed end
• The nth multiple of fundamental frequency is known become a node.
as nth harmonic or (n – 1)th overtone.
• If there are n nodes and n antinodes,
2. Fixed at one end
L = (2n – 1) /4
• Transverse standing waves with node at fixed end and
• So frequency of oscillations is
antinode at open end are formed.

 v  2n  1 v
• So, length of string    2n  1 if there are n nodes  
4  4L
and n antinodes.
• Frequency of oscillations

v  2n  1 v
  
 4

v
• Fundamental frequency, (n = 1)  0 
4L
It is also called first harmonic.
• First overtone or third harmonic.

3v
  3 0 • There are only odd harmonics in a tube closed at one end.
4
• Only odd harmonics are possible in this case. 5.3 Waves having different frequencies

5.2 Vibrations in an organ pipe Beats are formed by the superposition of two waves of
slightly different frequencies moving in the same
1. Open Organ pipe (both ends open) direction. The resultant effect heard in this case at any
• The open ends of the tube becomes antinodes because fixed position will consist of alternate loud and weak
the particles at the open end can oscillate freely. sounds.
• If there are (n + 1) antinodes in all, Let us consider net effect of two waves of frequencies
n  1 and  2 and amplitude A at x = 0.
length of tube,  
2

SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
OSCILATION AND WAVES 88

y1  A sin 21 t Sing Convention. All velocities along the direction S

to L are taken as positve and all velocities along the
y 2  A sin 2 2 t direction L to S are taken as negative.
When the motion is along some other direction the
 y = y1 + y2
component of velocity of source and listener along the
 y = A  sin 21t  sin 2 2 t  line joining the source and listener is considered.
Special Cases :
y   2A cos   1   2  t  sin   1   2  t (a) If the source is moving towards the listener but the
listener is at rest, then vs is positive and vL = 0 (figure
Thus the resultant wave can be represented as a
a). Therefore,
   2 
travelling wave whose frequency is  1  and v
 2      i.e. ’ > 
v  vs
amplitude is 2A cos  ( 1–  2) t.
As the amplitude term contains t, the amplitude varies (b) If the source is moving away from the listener, but the
periodically with time. listener is at rest, then vs is negative and vL = 0 (figure
b). Therefore,
For Loud Sounds : Net amplitude = ± 2A
 cos  ( 1 –  2) t = ± 1 v v
    i.e. ’ < 
v    vs  v  vs
  (1 – 2) t = 0, , 2, 3 .......
(c) If the source is at rest and listener is moving away from
1 2 ........
 t  0, , the source, the vs = 0 and vL is positive (figure c).
1   2 1   2
Therefore,
Hence the interval between two loud sounds is given as :

1

1   2

 the number of loud sounds per second =  1 –  2

 beat per second =  1 –  2
Note that  1 –  2 must be small (0 – 16 Hz) so that
sound variations can be distinguished.

Note:-
• Filling a tuning fork increases its frequency of vibration.
• Loading a tuning fork decreases its frequency of vibration.

6. DOPPLER EFFECT
According to Doppler’s effect, whenever there is a relative
motion between a source of sound and listener, the apparent
frequency of sound heard by the listener is different from
 v  vL 
the actual frequency of sound emitted by the source.    i.e. ’ < 
v
Apparent frequency,
(d) If the source is at rest and listener is moving towards
v  vL
   the source, then vs = 0 and vL is negative (figure d).
v  vs Therefore,

SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
OSCILATION AND WAVES 89

v   vL  v  vL
    i.e. v’ > 
v v

(e) If the source and listener are approaching each other,

then v s is positive and v L is negative (figure e).
Therefore,

v   vL   v  vL 
     i.e. ’ > 
v  vs  v  vs 

(f) If the source and listener are moving away from each
other, then vs is negative and vL is positive, (figure f).
Therefore,

v  vL v  vL
    i.e. ’ < 
v    vs  v  vs

(g) If the source and listener are both in motion in the

same direction and with same velocity, then vs = vL = v’
(say) (figure g). Therefore,

 v  v 
   i.e. ’ = 
 v  v 

It means, there is no change in the frequency of sound

heard by the listerner.
Apparent wavelength heard by the observer is
v  vs
 
v
Note:-
If case the medium is also moving, the speed of sound
 
with respect to ground is considered. i.e. v  v m

7. CHARACTERISTICS OF SOUND
• Loudness : of sound is also called level of intensity of
sound.
In decibel the loudness of a sound of intensity I is
given by

 I 
L = 10 log10   . (I0 = 10–12 w/m2)
 I0 

• Pitch : It is pitch depends on frequency, higher the

frequency higher will be the pitch and shriller will be
the sound.

SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
OSCILATION AND WAVES 90

SOLVED EXAMPLES
OSCILLATIONS
Example - 1 A = 4.00 m ,  =  rad/s, 0 = /4
Write the displacement equation representing the following (a) Displacement at t = 1.00 s i.e.,
conditions obtained in a simple harmonic motion. Amplitude
x = (4.00 m)cos( × 1 + /4) = (4.00) (–cos /4)
= 0.01 m, frequency = 600 Hz, initial phase = /6.
= (4.00) (–0.707) = –2.83 m
Sol. Here A = 0.01 m, v = 600 Hz, 0 = /6 (b) Velocity at t = 1.00 s, i.e., v = – A sin (t + 0)
The displacement equation of simple harmonic motion is or v = – (rad/s)(4.00 m)sin [ × 1 + /4]
y = A sin (t + 0) = A sin(vt + 0) = –(4.00 )(–sin /4) m/s
or y = (0.01 m) sin (1200 t + /6) = (4.00 × 3.14)(0.707) m/s
Example - 2 = 8.89 m/s
A particle executes SHM of amplitude 25 cm and time period (c) Acceleration,
3 s. What is the minimum time required for the particle to 2
a = –  A cos (t + 0)
move between two points 12.5 cm on either side of the 2
= –  × 4.00 cos ( × 1 + /4)
mean position ?
2 2
= – (4.00  )(–cos /4)m/s
Sol. With usual notation, we are given that amplitude A = 25 cm, 2 2
time period T = 3s = 4.00 × (3.14) × 0.707 m/s
2
= 27.9 m/s
Displacement from the mean position, y = 12.5 cm
(d) Maximum velocity, vmax = A =  × 4.00 = 12.6 m/s
If t is the time taken by the particle to move from the mean
2 2
position to a point 12.5 cm on any side of the mean position, Maximum acceleration, amax =  A =  × 4.00
2
= 39.5 m/s
 2   2 
y = A sin t = A sin  t  or 12.5 = 25 sin  t 
 T   3    9
(e) Phase, (t + 0) = (rad/s) × 2s + = 2 + = .
4 4 4
 2  1   2   Example - 4
or sin  t    sin or  t  
 3  2 6  3  6
A block is resting on a piston which is moving vertically
or t = 0.25 s with a SHM of period 1.0 s. At what amplitude of vibration
Obviously, time taken by the particle to move between two will the block and the piston separate ? What is the
points 12.5 cm on either side of the mean position. maximum velocity of the piston at this amplitude ?

= 2t = 2 × 0.25 = 0.5 s. Sol. We are given that T = 1.0 s

Further, the maximum acceleration in SHM, i.e.,
Example - 3
2
amax =  A
A body oscillates with SHM along with X-axis. Its
displacement varies with time according to the equation : For the block and the piston to separate,
2
x = (4.00 m) cos(t + /4) amax  g or  A  g
Calculate at t = 1.00 s : (a) displacement (b) velocity gT 2
2
(c) acceleration (d) Also calculate the maximum speed and or (2/T) A  g or A 
4 2
maximum acceleration and (e) phase at t = 2.00 s.

Sol. By comparing the given equation with the general equation (9.8 m / s 2 )(1.0 s) 2 2
or A (as 4 = 39.48)
for SHM along X-axis, i.e., 39.48

x = Acos (t + 0), we get or A  0.248 m

OSCILATION AND WAVES 91

Thus, the block and the piston separate, when

T'
A = 0.248 m or = (1 + 0.005) = 1.005
T
Clearly,
or T’ = (1.005)T = 1.005 × 2
 2   2  3.14  (as for a second pendulum, T = 2s)
vmax = A =   A    (0.248 m) = 1.56 m/s
 T   1.0 s  or T’ = 2.01 s

Example - 5 Since the time period has increased, the pendulum will make
lesser number of vibrations per day. In other words, it will
A point particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of amplitude run slow.
0.1 m. When the particle passes through the mean position,
–3
its kinetic energy is 8 × 10 J. Obtain the equation of motion Loss in time in 2 s = 0.01 s
o
of this particle if the initial phase of oscillations is 45 .
0.01s
Sol. Here, m = 0.1 kg, A = 0.1 m, Loss in 1 day (i.e., 86400 s) = 2 s × 86400 s = 432 s
–3
K0 (kinetic energy at mean position) = 8 × 10 J, Example - 7
o
0 = 45 = /4 A spring compressed by 10 cm develops a restoring force
of 10 N. A body of mass 9 kg is placed on it. What is the
1 2 2 1 2 2 –3 force constant of the spring ? What is the depression in
Since K0 = m A ,  (0.1 kg) (0.1 m) = 8 × 10 J
2 2 the spring under the weight of the body ? What is the
period of oscillation if the body is disturbed from its
or  = 4 rad/s
equilibrium position ? [Take g = 10 N/kg]
The equation of motion of a particle executing SHM is given
by Sol. Here, F = 10 N, y = 10 cm = 0.1 m
y = Asin(t + 0)
F 10 N
or y = (0.1 m)sin [(4 rad/s) t + /4] Force constant, k = y = 0.1m = 100 N/m
Example - 6
Further, when F = weight of the body = 9 kg wt = 90 N,
If the length of a second pendulum is increased by 1%,
how many seconds will it lose in a day ? F 90 N
y = k  100 N / m = 0.9 m
Sol. If l be the length of the second pendulum and T be its time
period, then m
Time period, T = 2
k
l
T = 2 ...(i)
g 9  3
= 2 s = 2   s
When length is increased by 1%, i.e., by 1/100, 100  10 
new length = l + (l/100) = l (1 + 1/100) 3
or T= s = 1.88 s.
If T’ be its changed time period, 5
Example - 8
l (1  1/100)
T’ = 2 ...(ii) Write the values of amplitude and angular frequency in the
g
following simple harmonic motion :
From eqns. (i) and (ii),
x = 0.70 cos (180t + 0.23)
1/ 2
T'  1   1  where the various quantities are in SI units.
 1    1  
T  100   100 
Sol. Comparing the given simple harmonic motion with the
T'  1  standard SHM equation
or  1   (applying binomial theorem)
T  200  x = Acos(t + 0), we have A = 0.70 m,  = 180 rad/s
OSCILATION AND WAVES 92

Example - 9 Sol. We are given that time period of a simple pendulum on Earth,
i.e., TE = 3.5 s
Two simple harmonic motions are represented by the 2
equations y1 = 10 sin (3t + /4) and Acceleration due to gravity on Earth, i.e., gE = 9.8 m/s
2
Acceleration due to gravity on Moon, i.e., gM = 1.7 m/s .
y2 = 5 (sin 3t + 3 cos 3t)
Let TM be the time period of the simple pendulum on Moon.
Find the ratio of their amplitudes. Clearly,

Sol. We are given that l l

y1 = 10 sin (3t + /4) ...(i) TE = 2 and TM = 2
gE gE
y2 = 5 (sin 3t + 3 cos 3t)
TM 2 l / g M gE 9.8
or   
= 10[(1/2)sin 3t + ( 3 / 2) cos 3t] TE 2 l / g E gM 1.7 = 2.4

= 10 [cos (/3) sin 3t + sin (/3) cos 3t] Clearly, TM = 2.4 TE = 2.4 × 3.5 = 8.4 s
= 10 sin [3t + (/3)] ...(ii) Example - 12
From eqns. (i) and (ii), it is clear that the amplitudes of both
A body of mass 1 kg is made to oscillate in turn on two
SHM’s are equal i.e., these are in the ration of 1 : 1.
springs, one of force constant 1 N/m and another of 16 N/m.
Example - 10 Calculate the time period in each case.
How will the time period of a simple pendulum change if its
length is doubled ? Sol. For the first spring, m = 1 kg and k = 1 N/m

m 1
Sol. For a simple pendulum, Thus, T1 = 2   = 2 s
k 1
l For the second spring, m = 1 kg, k = 16 N/m
T = 2
g
m 1 
Thus, T2 = 2    s .
For two pendulums of lengths l1 and l2, let their time periods k 16  2 
be T1 and T2. Example - 13
A spring balance has a scale that reads from 0 to 50 kg. The
l1
Clearly, T1 = 2 length of the scale is 20 cm. A body suspended from this
g
spring, when displaced and released, oscillates with a
period of 0.60 s. What is the weight of the body ?
l2
and T2 = 2 Sol. If k is the spring constant of the spring balance,
g

F 50 kg wt  50  9.8 N
T2 l2 k= = 0.2 m 0.20 m = 2450 N/m
Thus, T  l  2 (as l2/ l1 = 2) l
1 1
Let  be the angular frequency of the spring balance.
or T2 = 2 T1
2 2
Clearly,  =  = 10.47 rad/s
Thus, the time period of the simple pendulum increases by T 0.60
a factor of 2. If m is the mass of the body,
Example - 11
k k 2450
or m = 2  (10.47)2 = 22.35 kg
2
The acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the Moon  =
2 m
is 1.7 m/s . What is the time-period of a simple pendulum
on the Moon if its time period on the Earth is 3.5 s ? Weight of the body = mg = 22.35 kg wt
2
(g on Earth = 9.8 m/s ) = 22.35 × 9.8 N = 219 N
OSCILATION AND WAVES 93

Example - 14 Sol. With usual notations, we are given that

A small trolley of mass 2.0 kg resting on a horizontal m = 3.0 kg, k = 1200 N/m, A = 2.0 cm = 0.02 m
turntable is connected by a light spring to the centre of (a) The frequency of oscillation of the mass m is given as
the table. When the turntable is set into rotation at a speed
of 300 rpm, the length of the stretched spring is 40 cm. If 1 k 1 1200 20 –1 –1
the original length of the spring is 35 cm, determine the f=  or f = s = 3.2 s
2 m 2  3.14 3 6.28
force constant of the spring.
(b) The maximum acceleration of the mass, i.e.,
Sol. We are given that 2 2 2 2
amax =  A = (2f) A = 4 f A
mass of the trolley, m = 2.0 kg 2 2 2
or amax = [(39.48)(3.2) (0.02)]m/s = 8.1 m/s
frequency of rotation of the turntable,
(c) The maximum speed of the mass, i.e.,
300 vmax = A = 2fA
v= = 5 rps
60 or vmax = (2 × 3.14 × 3.2 × 0.02) m/s = 0.4 m/s
length of the stretched spring, Example - 16
r = 40 cm = 0.4 m In above problem, what is
original length of the spring, (a) the speed of the mass when the spring is compressed
L = 35 cm = 0.35 m by 1.0 cm ?
extension produced in the spring, (b) potential energy of the mass when it momentarily
comes to rest ?
l = r – L = 0.05 m
tension in the spring = centripetal force, (c) total energy of the oscillating mass ?

mv2 2 2 Sol. (a) Speed v =  A 2  x 2  2f A 2  x 2

Fc = = 4 v mr
r
= 2 × 3.14 × 3.2 (0.02) 2  ( 0.01) 2
If k is the spring constant of the spring,
F = kl = 0.35 m/s (as f = 3.2, A = 0.02 m, x = –0.01 m)

F 4 2 v 2 mr (b) PE of the mass when it momentarily comes to rest (at the

or k=  extreme position), i.e.,
l l

4  9.87  (5) 2  2  0.4 1 1

U0 = m2 A 2  m(2f)2A2 = 22mf2A2
or k= 2 2
0.05
2 2
= 15792 N/m = 1.6 × 10 N/m
4 = 2 × 9.87 × 3 × (3.2) × (0.02) = 0.24 J
Example - 15 (c) Total energy of the oscillating mass (E) = its potential energy
at the extreme position (U0) = 0.24 J
A spring of force constant 1200 N/m is mounted on a
horizontal table as shown in Figure. A mass of 3.0 kg, Example - 17
attached to the free end of spring, is pulled sideways to a In above problem, let us take the position of the mass
distance of 2.0 cm and released. when the spring is unstretched as x = 0, and the direction
from left to right is the positive direction of X-axis. Give x
as a function of time t for the oscillating mass. If at the
moment we start the stop watch (t = 0) ; the mass is
(a) at the mean position
(b) at the maximum stretched position
Determine : (a) the frequency of oscillations,
(c) at the maximum compressed position.
(b) the maximum acceleration of the mass,
In what way do these different functions for SHM differ ?
(c) the maximum speed of the mass. Frequency ? Amplitude ? Or initial phase ?
OSCILATION AND WAVES 94

Sol. For SHM along X-axis,

We know that, V =  a 2  y 2
x = Acos(t + 0) ...(i)
(a) When at t = 0, x = 0, Case (I) 4 =  a 2  32 ...(i)
0 = Acos( × 0 + 0)
Case (II) 3 =  a 2  4 2 ...(ii)
or cos 0 = 0 or 0 = – /2
From eqn. (i), x = A cos(t – /2) = A sin t Dividing (i) by (ii), we get

or x = 2 sin (20 t) 2
4  a 9 16 a 2  9
–1  or 9  a 2  16
(as A = 2 cm,  = 2f = 2 × 3.142 × 3.2 = 20 s ) 3  a 2  16
(b) When at t = 0, x = A, 2 2 2
or 16 a – 256 = 9 a – 81 or 7 a = 256 – 81 = 175
A = Acos( × 0 + 0)
2 175
or cos 0 = –1 or 0 = 0 or a = = 25 or a = 25 = 5
7
From eqn. (i) x = A cos t = 2cos (20t)
Substituting it in (i), we get
(c) When at t = 0, x = –A,
–A = Acos( × 0 + 0) 4 =  52  32   25  9 =  × 4
–1
or cos 0 = – 1 or 0 =  or w = 4/4 = 1 rad s
From eqn. (i), x = Acos(t + ) When the particle is at a distance 2.5 m from the extreme
= –A cos t position, then its distance from the mean position,
or x = –2cos(20 t) x = 5 – 2.5 = 2.5 m
Example - 18 Since, the time is to be noted from the extreme postion for
SHM therefore, we shall use the relation
A spring compressed by 0.1 m develops a restoring force
10 N. A body of mass 4 kg is placed on it. Deduce (i) the x = a cos t
force constant of the spring (ii) the depression of the spring
2.5 1 
under the weight of the body (take g = 10 N/kg) and (iii) the or 2.5 = 5 cos 1 × t = 5 cos t or cos t =   cos
5 2 3
period of oscillation, if the body is disturbed.
 22
Sol. Here, F = 10 N ;  l = 0.1 m ; m = 4 kg or t = 3  7  3 = 1.048 s.

F 10 –1 Example - 20
(i) k = = = 100 Nm
l 0.1 A simple harmonic oscillation is represented by the
equation y = 0.40 sin (440 t + 0.61) here, y and t are in m
mg 4 10 and s respectively. What are the values of (i) amplitude
(ii) y =  = 0.4 m
k 100 (ii) angular frequency (iii) frequency of oscillations
(iv) time period of oscillations and (v) initial phase ?
m 22 4
(iii) T = 2 =2× = 1.26 s Sol. The given equation is y = 0.40 sin (440 t + 0.61)
k 7 100
Comparing it with the equation of SHM y = a sin (t + 0)
Example - 19
We have, (i) Amplitude, a = 0.40 m
A particle executing SHM along a st. line has a velocity of
–1
4 ms , when at a distance of 3 m from its mean position (ii) Angular frequency,  = 440 Hz
–1
and 3 ms , when at a distance of 4 m from it. Find the time  440
it takes to travel 2.5 m from the positive extremity of its (iii) Frequency of oscillations, f = 2  2  22 / 7 = 70 Hz.
oscillation.
1 1
–1 (iv) Time period of oscillations, T =  = 0.0143
Sol. Here (case i), V1 = 4 ms ; y1 = 3m ; f 70
–1
(case ii), V2 = 3 ms ; y2 = 4m. (v) Initial phase angle, 0 = 0.61 rad.
OSCILATION AND WAVES 95

Example - 21 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
A particle executes SHM of time period 10 s. The Sol. K.E. = m (a –y ) and P.E. = m y
2 2
displacement of particle at any instant is given by the
relation x = 10 sin t (in cm). (i) Find the velocity of body 1 2 2 2 1 2 2
2 s after it passes through the mean position and (ii) the As, K.E. = P.E.  m (a –y ) = m  y
2 2
acceleration 2 s after it passes the mean position.
2 2 2 2 2
or a – y = y or y = a /2 or y = a/ 2 = 0.71 a
2 2 –1
Sol. Here ; T = 10 s ;  =  rad/s ; amplitude, r = 10 cm. Example - 24
T 10
A mass of 1 kg is executing SHM which is given by,
Velocity of the particle at any instant t is given by V = r  cos t
x = 6.0 cos (100 t + /4) cm. What is the maximum kinetic
2  2  energy ?
(i) When t = 2 s, V = 10 × cos   2  = 2  cos (0.4 ) =
10  10  Sol. Here, m = 1 kg.
1.942 cm/s.
The given equation of SHM is x = 6.0 cos (100 t + /4)
(ii) Acceleration at any time t is given by
Comparing it with the equation of SHM x = a cos (t + ),
2 –1
2  2   2  2 we have, a = 6.0 cm = 6/100 m and  = 100 rad s
A = – r sin t = –   × 10 × sin   2  = –3.754 cm/s
10
   10 
2
1 2
In fact, the acceleration is 3.754 cm/s and is directed towards Max. kinetic energy = m(Vmax)
2
the mean position.
2
Example - 22 1 2 1  6 
= m(a) = × 1 ×  100  = 18 J
A particle executes simple harmonic motion with a time 2 2  100 
period of 16 s. At time t = 2 s, the particle crosses the mean
–1 Example - 25
position while at t = 4 s, its velocity is 4 ms . Find its
amplitude of motion. An 8 kg body performs SHM of amplitude 30 cm. The
restoring force is 60 N, when the displacement is 30 cm.
Sol. Here, T = 16 s ; At t = 2 s, y = 0 and at t = 4 s ; Find (a) time period (b) the acceleration, P.E and K.E., when
–1
displacement is 12 cm.
V = 4 ms ; a = ?
2 Sol. Here, m = 8 kg ; a = 30 cm = 0.30 m ;
For simple harmonic motion, y = a sin t = a sin t
T (a) F = 60 N ; y = 0.30 m
When t = 4 s, the time taken by particle to travel from the
F 60
mean position to a given position = 4 – 2 = 2 s. The F = ky or k = y  0.30 = 200 Nm
–1

displacement,

 2   a k 200
y = a sin   2  = a sin    ...(i) As  =  = 5 rad/s
–1
 16  4 2 m 8

Velocity, V =  a 2  y 2
2 2  22 44
Time period, T =   7  5  35 = 1.256 s
 2  2 2  a
 4 =   a a / 2  
16
  8 2 (b) Here, y = 12 cm = 0.12 m
2 2 –2
32 2  Acceleration, A =  y = (5) × 0.12 = 3.0 ms
or a= = 14.4 m.
 1 2 1 2
P.E. = ky = × (200) × (0.12) = 1.44 J
Example - 23 2 2
A particle executes SHM of amplitude a. At what distance
from the mean position is its K.E. equal to its P.E. ? 1 2 2 1 2 2
K.E. = k (a – y ) = × 200 × [(0.30) – (0.12) ] = 7.56 J
2 2
OSCILATION AND WAVES 96

–1
Example - 26 Sol. (a) Here m = 200 g = 0.2 kg, k = 90 Nm
Two identical springs of spring constant k are attached to k 90 –1 –1
a block of mass m and to fixed supports as shown in Figure.   = 450 Nm kg
m 0.2
Show that when the mass is displaced from its equilibrium
position on either side, it executes a simple harmonic
b2 (0.04) 2
motion. Find the period of oscillation.  2 –2
4m 4  (0.2) 2 = 0.01 kg s
2

m
k k k b2 k b2 k
As,  , therefore, ’ =  2

m 4m 2 m 4m m

2 m 22 0.2
T=  2  2  0.3 s.
' k 7 90

Sol. Let the mass m be displaced by a small distance x to the (b) If T is the time, when amplitude drops to half value then
right as shown in Figure. Due to it, the spring on the left amplitude of the damped oscillations at time t is
–bt/2m
hand side gets stretched by length x and the spring on the a = x0 e
right hand side gets compressed by length x. The forces when t = T, a = x0/2
acting on the mass due to springs are
F1 = – kx towards left hand side x0 –bT/2m
 = x0 e
F2 = – kx towards left hand side 2

bT/2m bT
or 2=e or log e 2 =
F1 F2 2m

2m 2.3026  2m
or T= loge2 = log102
b b

2.3026  2  0.2  0.3010

x =
0.04
Therefore, total restoring force on mass m is
= 6.93 s.
F = F1 + F2 = – kx + (– kx) = –2 kx ...(i)
(c) If T’ is the time, when mechanical energy drops to half its
Here –ve sign shows that force F is directed towards the
mechanical energy E0, then mechanical energy E of the
equilibrium position O and F  x. Therefore, if the mass m is
damped oscillations at an instant t is given by
left free, it will execute linear SHM.
–bt/m
E = E0 e
Comparing (i) with the relation, F = – kx, we have Spring
factor, K = 2 k E0 –bT’/m
When t = T’, E = E0/2 then = E0e
Here, interia factor = mass of the block = m 2
bT’/m
or 2=e
inertia factor m
As time period, T = 2  2
spring factor 2k bT '
or loge2 =
Example - 27 m

For the damped oscillator shown in Figure, the mass m of m

–1
the block is 200 g, k = 90 Nm and the damping constant b or T’ = 2.3026 log102 ×
–1
b
is 40 gs . Calculate (a) the period of oscillation, (b) time
taken for its amplitude of vibrations to drop to half of its 0.2
initial value and (c) the time taken for its mechanical energy or T’ = 2.3026 × 0.3010 × = 3.46 s.
0.04
to drop to half its initial value.
OSCILATION AND WAVES 97

WAVES (a) The reflected sound is travelling in air.

Example - 28 Therefore if a is the wavelength of the reflected wave,

An observer standing at the sea coast observes 54 waves va 340 m / s

a   –4
reaching the coast per minute. If the wavelength of the f 106 s 1 = 3.4 × 10 m
wave is 10m, find the speed. What types of waves did he
observe? Explain (b) Further, the transmitted wave is travelling through water
Sol. Since 54 waves reach the coast in 1 min (i.e., 60 s), and as such wavelength of the transmitted wave, i.e.,

54 v w 1486 m / s
w   –3
= 1.49 × 10 m
frequency of the waves, i.e., f = = 0.9 Hz f 106 s 1
60
As  = 10 m, speed of the waves Example - 31
2
v = f = (0.9 × 10) m/s = 9 m/s A travelling harmonic wave on a string is described by :
The waves are transverse. Strictly speaking, these waves y = 7.5 sin (0.0050 x + 12t + /4)
are ripples, which are neither entirely transverse nor (a) What are the displacement and velocity of oscillation
longitudinal. This is due to the reason that the water particles of a point at x = 1 cm and t = 1 a ? Is this speed equal to
while moving up and down, also move back and forth the speed of wave propagation ?
horizontally. Thus, water waves are wrongly classified as (b) Locate the points of the string which have the same
transverse waves. transverse displacements and velocity as the x = 1 cm
Example - 29 point at t = 2 s, 5 s, 11 s.
How far does the sound travel in air when a tuning fork of
Sol. We are given that
frequency 560 Hz makes 30 vibrations ? Given speed of
sound in air = 336 m/s. y = 7.5 sin (0.0050 x + 12t + /4) ...(i)
(a) At x = 1 cm and t = 1 s, displacement,
Sol. Here, speed of sound in air,
y = 7.5 sin (0.0050 × 1 + 12 × 1 + /4)
v = 336 m/s
or y = 7.5 sin (12.7904 rad)
frequency of the tuning fork, f = 560 Hz
Time taken to complete 30 vibrations, i.e.,  180 
or y = 7.5 sin 12.7904  
  
30 3
t=  s = 7.5 sin 732.83°
560 56
y = 7.5 sin (720° + 12.83°)
Distance travelled by sound,
= 7.5 sin 12.83°
 3  or y = (7.5 × 0.2215) cm = 1.666 cm
s = vt = (336 m/s)  s  = 18 m
 56  Speed of oscillation at a point,
Example - 30
dy
A bat emits ultrasonic sound of frequency 1000 kHz in air. vp 
dt
If this sound meets a water surface, what is the wavelength
of : (a) the reflected sound (b) the transmitted sound ? or v p = 7.5 × 12 × cos (0.0050 x + 12t + /4)
Speed of sound in air = 340 m/s and in water = 1486 m/s.
= 90 cos (0.0050 x + 12t + /4)
Sol. We are given that frequency of the ultrasonic sound, When x = 1 cm and t = 1 s,
6
f = 1000 kHz = 10 Hz v p = (90 cos 12.83°) cm/s
speed of sound in air, va = 340 m/s
= (90 × 0.9751) cm/s = 87.75 cm/s
speed of sound in water,
The general equation of the travelling harmonic wave
vw = 1486 m/s (travelling towards left) is
OSCILATION AND WAVES 98

y = A sin [t + kx + 0] ...(ii) Sol. We are given that

Comparing eqns. (i) and (ii), we get frequency of the fundamental mode, f = 45 Hz
–2
A = 7.5 cm,  = 12 rad/s linear density of the wire,  = 4 × 10 kg/m
–2
k = 0.0050 rad/cm mass of the wire, M = 3.5 × 10 kg
Speed of wave propagation, Clearly, length of the wire,
–2 –2
L = M/ = (3.5 × 10 kg)/ (4 × 10 kg/m) = 0.875 m
 12 rad / s
v = k  0.0050 rad / cm = 2400 cm/s = – 24 m/s (a) When the string is vibrating in its fundamental mode,
L = /2
(Negative sign has been taken as the wave travels towards left)
or  = 2L = (2 × 0.875) m = 1.75 m
We thus find that vp (particle speed) is not equal to v (wave-
If v is the speed of transverse wave on the string,
speed*).
v = f = (45 × 1.75) m/s = 79 m/s
 2 2 (b) If T is the tension in the string,
(b) As k = ,   = 12.6 m
 k 0.0050
All points located at distances, x = n (where n = + 1, +2, + 3, ...) T 2
v= or T = v 
from the point x = 1 cm have the same displacement and velocity. 
Example - 32 or
2 –2
T = (79) (4 × 10 ) = 248 N
A uniform rope of length 12 m and mass 6 kg hangs
Example - 34
vertically from a rigid support. A block of mass 2 kg is
One end of a long string of linear mass d ensity
attached to the free end of the rope. A transverse pulse of –3
= 8.0 × 10 kg/m is connected to an electrically driven
wavelength 0.06 m is produced at the lower end of the
tuning fork of frequency 256 Hz. The other end passes
rope. What is the wavelength of the rope when it reaches
over a pulley and is tied to a pan containing a mass of
the top of the rope ?
90 kg. The pulley end absorbs all the incoming energy so
Sol. Tension at the lower end, T1 = 2 kg wt that reflected waves at this end have negligible amplitude.
Tension at the top end T2 = 2 kg wt + 6 kg wt = 8 kg wt At t = 0, the left end (fork end) of the string x = 0 has zero
transverse displacement (y = 0) and is moving along
Speed of the wave at the lower end,
positive y-direction. The amplitude of the wave is 5.0 cm.
v1 = T1 /  Write down the transverse displacement y as a function
of x and t that describes this wave on the string.
Speed of the wave at the top end,
Sol. We are given that,
v2 = T2 / 
tension in the string, T = (90 × 9.8) N = 882 N
mass per unit length of the string,
v1 T1 2 1
Thus, v  T  8  2
–3
 = 8.0 × 10 kg/m
2 2
frequency of the wave, f = 256 Hz
or v2 = 2v1 or f2 = 2 (f1) or 2 = 21
amplitude of the wave, A = 5.0 cm = 0.05 m
(as frequency remains the same) Since the wave propagation along the string is a transverse
As 1 = 0.06 m, travelling wave, the velocity of the wave is given by
2 = 2 (0.06 m) = 0.12 m
T 882 N 2
Example - 33 v=  = 3.32 × 10 m/s
 8 103 kg / m
A wire stretched between two rigid supports vibrates in its
3
fundamental mode with a frequency of 45 Hz. The mass of Now,  = 2f = (2 × 3.14 × 256) rad/s = 1.61 × 10 rad/s
–2 –2
the wire is 3.5 × 10 kg and its linear density is 4 × 10 kg/m.
What is : (a) speed of a transverse wave on the string and   1.61103 rad / s
As v = ,k   = 4.84 rad/m
(b) the tension in the string ? k v 3.32 102 m / s
OSCILATION AND WAVES 99

As the wave travels towards the positive direction of X- Example - 36

axis, the equation of the wave is : Calculate the speed of sound in a liquid of density
3 9 2
y = Asin(t – kx) 8000 kg/m and bulk modulus 2 × 10 N/m .
where x, y and A are in metres. Thus, 3
3
Sol. Here,  = 8000 kg/m
y = 0.05 sin (1.61 × 10 t – 4.84 x) 9 2
and B = 2 × 10 N/m
Example - 35
A uniform rope of mass 0.1 kg and length 2.45 m hangs B 2 109 N / m 2
Thus,  = 
from a ceiling.  8000 kg / m 3
(a) Find the speed of transverse wave in the rope at a point
= 500 m/s
0.5 m distant from the lower end.
Example - 37
(b) Calculate the time taken by a transverse wave to travel a 10
full length of the rope. For aluminium, the bulk modulus of elasticity is 7.5 × 10
2 3 3
N/m and density is 2.70 × 10 kg/m . Deduce the speed of
Sol. (a) If L is the length of the rope and m is its mass, then mass longitudinal waves in aluminium.
per unit length of the rope, i.e.,
Sol. We are given that
m 10 2
B = 7.5 × 10 N/m ,  = 2.7 × 10 kg/m
3 3
=
L
Tension at a point distant y from the lower end, i.e., B 7.5 1010 N/m 2
Thus,  = 
 2.70 103 kg/m3
T = weight of the rope of length y = yg
3
If  is the speed of the transverse wave set up in the rope, = 5.3 × 10 m/s.
Example - 38
yg
= T/   yg The prongs of a tuning fork A, originally in unison with

tuning fork B are filed. Now the tuning forks on being
When y = 0.5 m, sounded together produce 2 beats/s. What is frequency
of A after filing, if frequency of B is 250 Hz ?
= (0.5 m)(9.8 m / s 2 ) = 2.2 m/s
Sol. On filing, the frequency of tuning fork A increases.
dy dy dy
(b) As  = therefore  yg or dt = The new frequency of A after filing
dt dt gy
= (250 + 2) Hz = 252 Hz
Integrating both sides within proper limits, we get
Example - 39
t L L
1 dy 1 1/ 2 A sitar wire and a tabla when sounded together give four
 dt 
0 g
0 y

g
y0
dy
beats/s. What do we conclude from this ? As the tabla
membrane is tightened, the beat rate may decrease or
L increase. Explain.
1  y1 / 2 
or t=  
g  (1/ 2)  0 Sol. Let f1 and f2 be the frequencies of the sitar wire and the tabla
membrane respectively. Since in this case 4 beats/s are heard,
2 L f1 = f2 + 4
= [ L  0]  2
g g
On tightening the tabla membrane, its frequency increases.
Now there are two possibilities :
2.45 m
As L = 2.45 m, t = 2 (i) If f1 < f2, the number of beats increases on tightening the
9.8 m / s 2 membrane.
(ii) If f1 > f2, the number of beats decreases on tightening the
 1
membrane.
or t =  2 4  s = 1 s
 
OSCILATION AND WAVES 100

Example - 40 Example - 42
A tuning fork of unknown frequency gives 4 beats/s. With Two travelling waves of equal amplitudes and equal
another fork of frequency 310 Hz, it gives the same number frequencies move in opposite directions along a string.
of beats/s when loaded with wax. Find the unknown They interfere to produce a standing wave having the
frequency. equation
y = A cos kx sin t
Sol. Let us name the tuning fork of unknown frequency as A and –1 –1
where A = 1.0 mm, k = 1.57 cm and  = 78.5 s
the tuning fork of known frequency i.e., 310 Hz as B. When
A and B are sounded together, 4 beats are heard per second. Find : (a) the velocity of the component waves (b) the
node closest to the origin (in the region x > 0) and (c) the
Thus, frequency of A, i.e.,f is either (310 + 4) Hz = 314 Hz
antinode closest to the origin (x > 0) and (d) the amplitude
or f = (310 – 4) Hz = 306 Hz of the particle at x = 2.33 cm.
In case, the frequency of A is 306 Hz, on loading it with wax,
Sol. (a) The standing wave is formed by the superposition of
its frequency decreases and may become 305 Hz, 304 Hz,
303 Hz etc. In that case, the number of beats given by it the waves y1 = (A/2) sin (t – kx) and
per second when sounded with B will be (310 – 305) = 5, y2 = A/2 sin (t + kx) as y = y1 + y2
(310 – 304) = 6, (310 – 303) = 7 etc. i.e., the number of beats/ The wave velocity (magnitude) of either wave, i.e.,
s is more than 4. Thus, f = 306 Hz is not possible. If f = 314
 78.5s 1
Hz, on loading A with wax, its frequency may decrease to  = k  1.57 cm 1 = 50 cm/s
306 Hz and then it will give (310 – 306) = 4 beats/s with B.
Thus, the unknown frequency is 314 Hz. (b) For a node, y = 0, i.e., cos kx = 0
Example - 41 
or kx = (for the smallest positive value of x)
Calculate the speed of sound in a gas in which two 2
wavelength 204 cm and 208 cm produce 20 beats in 6 second.
 / 2 3.14 / 2
Sol. Here, wavelength of one wave, 1 = 204 cm or x = k  1.57 cm 1 1cm

Wavelength of the second wave 2 = 208 cm (c) For an antinode, |cos kx| = 1
Let speed of sound in the gas =  cm/s or kx =  (for the smallest positive value of x)
Frequency of one wave = f0

Frequency of second wave = f2 or x = = 2 cm
k
Number of beats produced per second, (d) The amplitude of vibration of the particle at x is given by
|A cos kx|.
20
fb = For the given point (x = 2.33 cm),
6
–1
amplitude = Acos kx = (1.0 mm)cos [(1.57 cm )(2.33 cm)]
As f1 – f2 = fb,
= (1.00 mm) cos (3.658 rad) = 0.875 mm
  20    [cos (3.658 rad) = cos (3.658 × 57°)
   as f1  and f 2  
204 208 6  1 2  = cos 209° = cos (180° + 29°)
= – cos 29° = –0.875
 (208  204) 20 = 0.875 in magnitude]
or 
204  208 6
Example - 43
A 3.6 g string of a sonometer is 64 cm long. What should
 20   204  208 
or    cm/s be the tension in the string in order that it may vibrate in
 6  4 
2 segments with a frequency of 256 Hz ?
= 35360 cm/s = 353.6 m/s
OSCILATION AND WAVES 101

Sol. Here, l = 64 cm = 0.64 m, (On shortening the length, the frequency of the wire
–3 –2
 = 3.6 × 10 kg/64 × 10 m = 5.6 × 10 kg/m,
–3 increases)

f1 = 256 Hz According to the law of length,

Since the string vibrates in 2 segments, vf = f’L’

f1 = 2f or f × 73 = (f + 3) (72.5) = 72.5 f + 217.5

or 73 f – 72.5 f = 217.5 or 0.5 f = 217.5
1 T f = 435 Hz
or 256 = 2 ×
2 
Example - 46
A string vibrates with a frequency 200 Hz. Its length is
1 T doubled and its tension is altered until it begins to vibrate
or 256 =
0.64 (5.6 103 ) with frequency 300 Hz. What is the ratio of the new tension
2 –3 to the original tension ?
or T = (256 × 0.64) (5.6 × 10 ) N = 150 N
Example - 44 Sol. Let f1 and f2 be the frequencies in the two cases and L1, L2
A wire of length 1.5 m is stretched by a force of 44 N. The and T1, T2 be respectively the corresponding lengths of the
3
diameter of the wire is 2 mm and its density is 1.4 g/cm . string and tensions under which it is vibrating.
Calculate the frequency of the fundamental note emitted
by it. 1 T1
f1 = ,
2L1 
Sol. With ususal notation, we are given that
L = 1.5 m, T = 44 N 1 T2
–3 f2 =
D = 2 mm = 2 × 10 m 2L2 
3 3
 = 1.4 g/cm = 1400 kg/m
(For the same string,  in both the cases remains same)
1 T
We know that f = f1 L 2 T1
LD  Thus, f  L T2
2 1

1 44
= Hz 200 T
1.5(2 103 ) (22 / 7) 1400 or 2 1
300 T2
100
= Hz = 33.3 Hz. (as f1 = 200 Hz, f2 = 300 Hz and L2 = 2L1 or L2/L1 = 2)
3
Example - 45 2 T 4 T T
or  2 1 or  4 1 or 2  9
When the wire of a sonometer is 73 cm long, it is in 3 T2 9 T2 T1
resonance with a tuning fork. On shortening the wire by
Thus, the new tension is 9 times the original tension.
0.5 cm, it makes 3 beats with the same fork. Calculate the
frequency of the tuning fork. Example - 47
A wire of length 108 cm produces a fundamental note of
Sol. We are given that frequency 256 Hz, when stretched by a weight of 1 kg. By
L (original length of the wire) = 73 cm how much its length should be increased so that its pitch
L’ (shortened length of the wire) = (73 – 0.5) cm = 72.5 cm is raised by a major tone, if it is now stretched by a weight
of 4 kg ?
Let f be the frequency of the tuning fork.
This also is the frequency of the wire when its length is L as Sol. Case I. Frequency of the fundamental note, f = 256 Hz
it is then in resonance with the tuning fork. Let f’ be the length of the wire, L = 108 cm
frequency of the wire when its length is L’. Since it then
stretching force, T = 1 kg f
produces 3 beats/s with the tuning fork, f’ = f + 3
OSCILATION AND WAVES 102

Case II. Frequency of the major tone emitted harmonics are present whereas in the case of a closed organ
pipe only odd harmonics are present.
9 9
i.e., f’ = f    256 Hz = 288 Hz Example - 49
8 8
Find the ratio of length of a closed pipe to that of the open
stretching force, T = 4 kg f pipe in order that the second overtone of the former is in
Let the length be increased by x. unison with fourth overtone of the latter.
Increased length of the wire, i.e.,
Sol. Let f and f’ be the fundamental frequencies of the open and
L’ = L + x = (108 + x) cm the closed pipes respectively of lengths L and L’.

1 T v v
Clearly, f = and f’ = ...(i)
As f = , 2L 4L '
2L 
where v is the speed of sound.
1 1kg f Second overtone of the closed pipe = 5f’
for Case I, 256 =
2 108  Fourth overtone of the open pipe = 5f

and for Case II, Since the two notes are to be in unison,
5f’ = 5f or f’ = f
1 4 kg f
288 = Thus, from eqns. (i) and (ii),
2  (108  x) 
v v
Dividing, we get 
4L ' 2L
256 108  x L' 2 1
 or 4L’ = 2L or   or L’ : L :: 1 : 2
288 108  4 L 4 2
Example - 50
8 108  x 108  x
or   or 972 + 9x = 1728 3
A brass rod (density 8.3 g/cm ), 3 m long is clamped at the
9 108  2 216
centre, It is excited to give longitudinal vibrations and the
frequency of the fundamental note is 600 Hz. Calculate the
756
or 9x = 1728 – 972 = 756 cm or x = = 84 cm velocity of sound in the rod and its Young’s modulus.
9
Thus, the length should be increased by 84 cm. Sol. Here, density of the brass rod,
3 3 3
 = 8.3 g/cm = 8.3 × 10 kg/m
Example - 48
A pipe of length 2L open at both ends has the same length of the rod, L = 3 m
frequency as another pipe of length L closed at one end. frequency of the note produced, f = 600 Hz
Prove this. Also state if the sounds will be identical for the Let the wavelength of vibration in the rod = 
two pipes.
As the rod is clamped at its centre, the centre is a node and
Sol. Fundamental frequency of open pipe of length 2L, i.e., free ends are antinodes.
Thus,  = 2 L = 6m
v v
f = 2  2L  4L ...(i) If speed of sound in brass is , then
Fundamental frequency of a closed pipe of length L, i.e.,  = f
3
v or = (600 Hz) (6 m) = 3.6 × 10 m/s
f’ = ...(ii) Let Young’s modulus of the material of the rod = Y
4L
From eqns. (i) and (ii), f = f’
As = Y/ ,
The sound (i.e., its quality) which depends upon the number 2
of harmonics and their relative intensities will not be the Y= ×
3 2 3 3 11 2
same in the two cases. In case of an open organ pipe, all the = (3.6 × 10 m/s) (8.3 × 10 kg/m ) = 1.1 × 10 N/m .
OSCILATION AND WAVES 103

Example - 51 From eqns. (i) and (ii),

A steel rod 100 cm long is clamped at its middle. The 2 s f
fundamental frequency of longitudinal vibrations of the rod f’ – f’’ = (1 + s/)f – (1 – s/)f =

is given to be 2.53 kHz. What is the speed of sound in steel?
(f '  f '')f 3 340 m / s
or s = 
Sol. Here, length of the steel rod, L = 100 cm = 1m 2f 2  340 = 1.5 m/s
fundamental frequency of the longitudinal vibrations,
3
(as v’ – v’’ = 3, v = 340 m/s and f = 340 Hz)
f = 2.53 kHz = 2.53 × 10 Hz
Example - 53
If is the wavelength of the wave generated,
Consider a source moving towards an observer at the speed
/2 = L or = 2L = 2m of s = 0.95v. Deduce the observed frequency if the original
Therefore, speed of sound in steel rod, i.e., is 500 Hz. (Think what would happen if s>. Jet planes
3
 = f = (2.53 × 10 )(2 m) moving faster than sound are now so common). Here, is
3
the speed of sound.
= 5.06 × 10 m = 5.06 km/s
Aliter : For a rod vibrating longitudinally, Sol. We are given that v = 500 Hz, s = 0.95 v.
fundamental frequency, Since the observer is at rest and the source is moving towards
the observer, the apparent frequency,
v
f=
2L       500
or
3 –1
= 2fL = 2 (2.53 × 10 s )(1 m) f’ =     f   500 =
 s     0.95   0.05
3
or = 5.06 × 10 m/s = 5.06 km/s
or f’ = 10,000 Hz
Example - 52
If s >(–s) is negative and as such f’ is negative which
Two tuning forks with natural frequencies of 340 Hz each
has no meaning. Thus, Doppler formula is applicable so
move relative to a stationary observer. One fork moves
long as the velocity of the source does not exceed the
away from the observer while the other moves towards
velocity of the wave. In case of jet planes which move with
him at the same speed. The observer hears beats of
speed greater than the sound, a shock wave is formed whose
frequency 3 Hz. Find the speed of the tuning fork. Speed
wavefront is a cone with the plane at its apex. The semi-
of sound in air = 340 m/s. –1
vertical angle of the cone is sin (/s)
Sol. Let s be the speed of source and  be that of the sound Example - 54
waves. Let f be the frequency of the tuning fork. If v’ is its What is the speed of the observer for whom a note is
apparent frequency when it moves towards the stationary 10 per cent lower than the emitted frequency ?
observer,
Sol. As the apparent frequency (f’) is less than emitted frequency
   1 (f), the observer must move away from the source.
f’ =  f  f = (1 – S/)–1 f
 (    )
S 
(1  S
/ )
If is the speed of sound and o that of the observer, then
Applying binomial theorem (as S/ < 1), we get   o
f’ = f
 s  
f’ = 1  f ...(i) As the apparent frequency is 10% lower than the emitted
  
frequency,
If f’’ is the apparent frequency of the tuning fork when it
moves away from the stationary source, 10 90
f’ = f – f f = 0.9 f
100 100
   1
f’’ =  f  f = (1 + s/)–1f    o     o 
   s  (1  S / ) or 0.9 f =  f or 0.9 =  
     
Applying binomial theorem (since s/< 1), we get or 0.9  = –0 or 0 = – 0.9 = 0.1 
f’’ = (1 – s/)f ...(ii) Thus, speed of the observer is (1/10)th of the speed of sound.
OSCILLATION & WAVES 104

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

SHM Basics Phase, Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, Kinetic,

1. Which of the following equations does not represent a Potential Energy as a funtion of time and positon
simple harmonic motion ? 6. A particle is performing S.H.M. along X-axis with amplitude 4
cm and time period 1.2 sec. The minimum time taken by the
(a) y = a sin  t
particle to move from x = + 2 cm to x = + 4 cm and back again
(b) y = b cos  t is given by
(c) y = a sin  t + b cos  t (a) 0.6 s (b) 0.4 s
(d) y = a tan  t (c) 0.3 s (d) 0.2 s
7. The displacement of an oscillating particle varies with time
2. A particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of amplitude 0.1
m. When the particle passes through the mean position,  t 1
–3 (in seconds) according to the equation y = sin   ,
its K.E. is 8 × 10 J. The equation of motion of the particle, 2 2 3
o
when the initial phase of oscillation is 45 , is where y is in cm. The maximum acceleration of the particle is
(a) y = 0.1 cos (3 t + /4) (b) y = 0.1 sin (3 t + /4) approximately
–2 –2
(a) 0.62 cm s (b) 1.81 cm s
(c) y = 0.1 sin (4 t + /4) (d) y = 0.1 cos (4 t + /4) –2 –2
(c) 3.62 cm s (d) 5.2 cm s
3. The displacement of a particle is represented by the equation:
8. The kinetic energy of a particle executing S.H.M. is 16 J when
  it is in its mean position. If the amplitude of oscillations is 25
y = 3 cos   2t 
4  cm and the mass of the particle is 5.12 kg, the time period of
its oscillation in second is
The motion of the particle is :
(a) simple harmonic with period 2/ (a) /5 (b) 2 

(b) simple harmonic with period / (c) 5  (d) 20 

(c) periodic but not simple harmonic 9. Two pendulums of time period 3 s and 8 s respectively starts
oscillating simultaneously from two opposite extreme
(d) non-periodic positions. After how much time they will be in the same
4. For the two curves choose the correct option. phase ?
24 12
(a) s (b) s
5 5

24 12
(c) s (d) s
11 11
10. The force constant of a weightless spring is 16 N/m. A body
of mass 1.0 kg suspended from it is pulled down through 5
(a) (Amplitude)A > (Amplitude)B cm from it’s mean position and then released. The maximum
(b) (Time period)A > (Time period)B kinetic energy of the system (spring + body) will be
–2 –2
(c) Both (a) and (b) are correct (a) 2 × 10 J (b) 4 × 10 J
–2 –2
(c) 8 × 10 J (d) 16 × 10 J
(d) Both (a) and (b) are incorrect
11. The time taken by a particle executing S.H.M. of period T to
5. The phase difference between x1 = A sin t and x2 = A cos
move from the mean position to half the maximum
t is : displacement is
(a) /2 (b) 4 (a) T/2 (b) T/4
(c) /3 (d) /6 (c) T/8 (d) T/12
OSCILLATION & WAVES 105

12. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion with 17. The relation between acceleration and displacement of four
frequency f. The frequency at which its kinetic energy particles are given below :
changes into potential energy is which one of the particles is executing simple harmonic
(a) f/2 (b) f motion ?
2
(c) 2 f (d) 4 f (a) ax = + 2x (b) ax = + 2x
2
13. A particle executes simple harmonic motion between x = –A (c) ax = – 2x (d) ax = – 2x
and x = + A. The time taken for it to go from 0 to A/2 is t1 and 18. A particle executing SHM has a maximum speed of 30 cm/s
to go from A/2 to A is t2. Then 2
and a maximum acceleration of 60 cm/s . The period of
(a) t1 < t2 (b) t1 > t2 oscillation is :
(c) t1 = t2 (d) t1 = 2 t2 
14. For a particle executing simple harmonic motion, the (a)  s (b) s
2
displacement x is given by x = A sin t. Identify the graph,
which represents the variation of potential energy (PE) as a 
(c) 2 s (d) s
function of time t and displacement x 4

II A
19. A block is left from x = + A, its speed at x  is
2
Energy

( = 2 rad/s).
t

Energy

III IV (a) (3A) m/s (b) ( 3A) m/ s

(c) (2A) m/s (d) ( 2A) m/ s

x
–A +A 20. For a particle in SHM, if the amplitude of the displacement is
(a) I, III (b) II, III a and the amplitude of velocity is v the amplitude of
(c) I, IV (d) II, IV acceleration is :
15. The potential energy of a harmonic oscillation of mass 2 kg
in its mean position is 5 J. If its total energy is 9 J and its v2
(a) va (b)
amplitude is 0.01 m, its time period of oscillation will be a
(a) (/10) s (b) (/20) s
(c) (/50) s (d) (/100) s v2 v
(c) (d)
16. A mass m is performing linear simple harmonic motion, then 2a a
which of the following graph represents correctly the variation
21. The displacement of an object attached to a spring and
of acceleration a corresponding to linear velocity v ? –2
executing simple harmonic motion is given by x = 2×10 cos
v2 v2 t m. The time at which the maximum speed first occurs is :
(a) 0.5 s (b) 0.75 s
(a) (b) (c) 0.125 s (d) 0.25 s
2 2
a a 22. What is the ratio of maximum acceleration to the maximum
2
v v 2 velocity of a simple harmonic oscillator ?
(a)  (b) /2

(c) (d) (c) 1/ (d) 2

a2 a2
OSCILLATION & WAVES 106

23. If a conservative force is acting on a system in SHM. The 29. Two bodies M and N of equal masses are suspended from
two separate massless springs of spring constant k1 and k2
total mechanical energy is :
respectively. If the two bodies oscillate vertically such that
(a) time dependent their maximum velocities are equal, the ratio of the amplitude
of M to that of N is
(b) position dependent
(c) amplitude dependent (a) k1/ k2 (b) k1 / k 2

(d) Both (a) and (c) are correct (c) k2 / k1 (d) k 2 / k1

24. The expression for displacement of an object in SHM is x = 30. The period of oscillation of a mass m suspended from a
spring is 2 seconds. If along with it another mass of 2 kg is
T also suspended, the period of oscillation increases by one
A cos (t). The potential energy at t  is :
4 second. The mass m will be
(a) 2 kg (b) 1 kg
1 2 1 2 (c) 1.6 kg (d) 2.6 kg
(a) kA (b) kA
2 8 31. In the figure shown below, the block is moved sideways by
a distance A. The |net force| on the block is :
1 2
(c) kA (d) zero
4

25. A body executes simple harmonic motion. The potential

energy (PE), the kinetic energy (KE) and total energy (TE)
are measured as function of displacement x. Which of the (a) (k1 – k2) A (b) (k2 – k1) A
following statements is true ? (c) (k1 + k2) A (d) None of the above
(a) KE is maximum when x = 0 32. A block is in SHM on a frictionless surface as shown in the
figure. The position x = 0 shows the unstretched position of
(b) TE is zero when x = 0 the spring.
(c) KE is maximum when x is maximum
(d) PE is maximum when x = 0

Spring Block Oscillation

Choose the correct option with reference to the above
26. A force of 6.4 N stretches a vertical spring by 0.1 m. The system.
mass that must be suspended from the spring so that it (a) +A and –A are maximum displacements where, A is
oscillates with a period of (/4) second is amplitude
(a) (/4) kg (b) 1 kg (b) x = 0 indicate the equilibrium position
(c) The block executes to and fro motion about the mean
(c) () kg (d) 10 kg position, when pulled aside and released
27. A mass of 1 kg attached to the bottom of a spring has a (d) All of the above
certain frequency of vibration. The following mass has to 33. The time period of a spring mass system shown below is
be added to it in order to reduce the frequency by half. equal to :

(a) 1 kg (b) 2 kg
(c) 3 kg (d) 4 kg
28. If a spring has time period T, and is cut into n equal parts,
then the time period of each part will be
2m m
T (a) 2 (b) 2
(a) T n (b) k 4k
n
2 2 m
(c) nT (d) T (c) (d) None of these
k
OSCILLATION & WAVES 107

34. There are two springs mass systems as shown in the figures. 37. A coin is placed on a horizontal platform which undergoes
Resistive forces are absent everywhere. Let the time vertical simple harmonic motion of angular frequency . The
periods of two systems are T1 and T2. The relation between amplitude of oscillation is gradually increased. The coin will
T1 and T2 is : leave contact with the platform for the first time
(a) at the highest position of the platform
(b) at the mean position of the platform

g
(c) at an amplitude of
2

T2 g2
(a) T1  (d) for an amplitude of
2 2
Angular SHM
T1 38. A man measures time period of a simple pendulum inside a
(b) T2  T
2 stationary lift and find it to be T. If the lift starts accelerating
upwards with an acceleration g/4, then the time period of
(c) T1 = T2 pendulum will be
(d) Cannot establish the relation between them
2T 5T
35. If the block is pulled by a distance x and left, the block will (a) (b)
5 2
start oscillating. The value of x, so that at a moment when
speed of the block become zero the spring become 5 2
(c) (d)
unstretched. 2T 5T

39. A simple pendulum is oscillating without damping, as showm

in figure. When the displacement of the bob is less than

maximum, its acceleration vector a is correctly shown in

(a) mg/2k (b) 2k/mg

(c) mg/k (d) 2mg/k (a) (b)
a
36. Two identical springs are connected in series and parallel
as shown in the figure. If fs and fp are frequencies of series a
fs
and parallel arrangements, what is ?
fp

(c) (d)

a
a

40. If we do an experiment by swinging a small ball by a thread

of length 100 cm, what will be the approximate time for
complete to and fro periodic motion ?
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1 (a) 4s (b) 2s
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 3 : 1 (c) 6s (d) 1s
OSCILLATION & WAVES 108

41. A simple pendulum is suspended from the ceiling of a lift. 46. The displacement equation of a particle is
When the lift is at rest its time period is T. With what x = 3 sin 2 t + 4 cos 2 t
acceleration should the lift be accelerated upwards in order The amplitude and maximum velocity will be respectively
to reduce its period to T/2? (g is acceleration due to gravity). (a) 5, 10 (b) 3, 2
(a) 2g (b) 3g (c) 3, 4 (d) 4, 2
(c) 4g (d) g 47. The displacement of a particle varies with time according to
the relation : y = asin t + bcos t.
42. A simple pendulum has a time period T1 when on the Earth’s
Choose the correct statement.
surface and T2 when taken to a height 2R above the Earth’s
surface, where R is the radius of the Earth. The value of (a) The motion is oscillatory but not SHM.
(T1/T2) is : (b) The motion is SHM with amplitude (a + b).
2 2
(c) The motion is SHM with amplitude (a + b )
(a) 1/9 (b) 1/3

(c) (d) 9 (d) The motion is SHM with amplitude a 2  b2 .

3
48. A block of mass 1 kg hangs without vibrating at the end of
43. A hollow sphere is filled with water through the small hole
a spring whose force constant is 200 N/m and which is
in it. It is then hung by a long thread and made to oscillate.
attached to the ceiling of an elevator. The elevator is rising
As the water slowly flow out of the hole at the bottom, the with an upward acceleration of g/3 when the acceleration
period of oscillation will : suddenly ceases. The angular frequency of the block after
(a) continuously decrease the acceleration ceases is
(a) 13 rad/s (b) 14 rad/s
(b) continuously increase
(c) 15 rad/s (d) None of these
(c) first decrease then increase
49. A body is moving in a room with a velocity of 20 m/s
(d) first increase then decrease perpendicular to the two walls separated by 5 m. There is no
44. What is the velocity of the bob of a simple pendulum at its frictrion and the collisions with the walls are elastic. The
mean position, if it is able to rise to vertical height of 10 cm? motion of the body is
(g = 9.8 ms ).
–2 (a) not periodic
(b) periodic but not simple harmonic
(c) periodic and simple harmonic
(d) periodic with variable time period
50. The transverse displacement y (x, t) of a wave on a string is
given by


 ax 2  bt 2  2 ab xt 
y  x, t   e
–1 –1
(a) 2.2 ms (b) 1.8 ms
–1 –1 b
(c) 1.4 ms (d) 0.6 ms (a) wave moving in –x direction with speed
a
Miscellaneous SHM problems
(b) standing wave of frequency b
45. Four simple harmonic motions ; x1 = 8 sin t ; x2 = 6 sin
(t + /2) ; x3 = 4 sin (t + ) and x4 = 2 sin (t + 3 /2) are
1
superimposed on each other. The resulting amplitude and (c) standing wave of frequency
its phase difference with x1 are respectively b
–1
(a) 20, tan (1/2) (b) 4 2 , /2
a
–1 (d) wave moving in +x direction with speed
(c) 20, tan (2) (d) 4 2 , /4 b
OSCILLATION & WAVES 109

51. A particle of mass m moving along the x-axis has a potential 57. A travelling wave represented by y = A sin (t – kx) is
2
energy U(x) = a + bx where a and b are positive constants. superimposed on another wave represented by
It will execute simple harmonic motion with a frequency y = A sin (t + kx). The resultant is
detemined by the value of
 1
(a) b alone (b) b and a alone (a) A standing wave having nodes at x   n   ,
 22
(c) b and m alone (d) b, a and m alone n = 0, 1, 2
52. A metre stick swinging in vertical plane about a fixed (b) A wave travelling along + x direction
horizontal axis passing through its one end undergoes small
(c) A wave travelling along –x direction
oscillation of frequency f0. If the bottom half of the stick
were cut off, then its new frequency of small oscillation n
would become. (d) A standing wave having nodes at x  ; n = 0, 1, 2
2

WAVE
Wave Parameter
58. A string of 5.5 m length has a mass 0.035 kg. If the tension in
the string is 77 N, then the speed of wave on the string is :
(a) 77 m/s (b) 102 m/s
(a) f0 (b) 2 f0
(c) 110 m/s (d) 164 m/s
(c) 2f0 (d) 2 2 f 0 59. The equation which represents a sinusoidal (harmonic) wave
53. Which of the following expressions corresponds to simple travelling along the positive direction of the X-axis is :
harmonic motion along a straight line, where x is the (a) y (x, t) = a sin (kx – t + )
displacement and a, b, c are positive constant?
(b) y (x, t) = a sin (kx + t + )
(a) a + bs – cx2 (b) a – bx + cx2
(c) bx2
(d) – bx (c) y (x, t) = a sin (kx + t)

54. A physical pendulum is positioned so that its centre of (d) y (x, t) = a sin (t + kx)
gravity is above the suspension point. When the pendulum 60. A sinusoidal travelling wave is described by y (x, t) = a sin
is released it passes the point of stable equilibrium with an (kx – t + ), where y(x, t) is the displacement as a function
angular velocity . The period of small oscillations of the of position x and time t.
pendulum is
With reference to the above equation, match the items in
4 2 Column-I with terms in Column-II and choose the correct
(a) (b) option from the codes given below.
 
Column-I Column-II
 
(c) (d) (A) a denotes 1. angular frequency of the wave
 2
(B)  denotes 2. angular wave number
55. A wave y = a sin (t – kx) on a string meets with another
wave producing a node at x = 0. Then the equation of the (C) k denotes 3. amplitude of the wave
unknown wave is : (D)  denotes 4. Initial phase angle at x = 0, t = 0
(a) y = a sin (t + kx) (b) y = – a sin (t + kx) Codes
(c) y = a sin (t – kx) (d) y = – a sin (t – kx) A B C D
56. Length of a string tied to two rigid supports is 40 cm.
(a) 3 2 4 2
Maximum length (wavelength in cm) of a stationary wave
produced on it is : (b) 3 2 1 4

(a) 20 (b) 80 (c) 3 1 2 4

(c) 40 (d) 120 (d) 4 1 2 3

OSCILLATION & WAVES 110

61. The minimum distance between the two points having the Standing Wave on Stretched String
same phase is : 67. A standing wave consisting of 3 nodes and 2 antinodes is
formed between the two atoms having a distance of 1.21 Å
(a) wavelength of the wave
between them. The wavelength of the standing wave is :
(b) amplitude of the wave (a) 1.21 Å (b) 2.42 Å
(c) wave number (c) 6.05 Å (d) 3.63 Å
(d) frequency of the wave 68. A string is stretched between fixed points separated by 75.0 cm.
62. A wave equation is given by It is observed to have resonant frequencies of 420 Hz and
315 Hz. There are no other resonant frequencies between
  t x 1  these two. Then the lowest resonance frequency for this
y  4 sin        string is
  5 9 6 
(a) 1.05 Hz (b) 1050 Hz
where, x is in cm and t is in seconds. The wavelength of the (c) 10.5 Hz (d) 105 Hz
wave is: –4
69. A stretched string of length 1 m and mass 5 × 10 kg, fixed
(a) 18 cm (b) 9 cm at both ends, is under a tension of 20 N. If it is plucked at
points situated at 25 cm from one end, it would vibrate with
(c) 36 cm (d) 6 cm
a frequency :
63. The distance travelled by the wave pattern in the time (a) 400 Hz (b) 200 Hz
required for one full oscillation by any constituent of the
(c) 100 Hz (d) 256 Hz
medium is equal to :
Direction for questions 70 to 81
(a) wavelength of the wave
Answer to these questions are based on the given
(b) amplitude of the wave paragraph. Choose the correct option from those given
below for each question.
(c) wave number of the wave
A standing wave is formed on a string fixed at both the
(d) both (a) and (b) ends. The individual waves i.e., incident wave and reflected
64. The equation of progressive wave is wavearey1 (x, t) = a sin (kx – t) and y2 (x, t) = a sin (kx + t),
respectively. The two waves have same wavelength ‘’.
 t x 
y  0.2sin 2    , where x and y are in metres and 70. The position of nodes is given as
 0.01 0.3 
t is in seconds. The velocity of propagation of the wave is : n
(a) x  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
–1 –1 2
(a) 30 ms (b) 40 ms
–1 –1
(c) 300 ms (d) 400 ms (2n  1)
(b) x  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
65. A cylinderical tube, open at both ends, has a fundamental 2
frequency, f, in air. The tube is dipped vertically in water so (c) x = n; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
that half of it is in water. The fundamental frequency of the (d) x = (2n + 1) ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
air-column is now
71. The position of anti-nodes is given by the equation,
f
(a) f (b)  1
2 (a) x   n   ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
 2 2
(c)
3f (d) 2f
4 n
(b) x  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
66. A long string having mass density as 0.01 kg/m is subjected 2
to a tension of 64 N. The speed of the transverse wave on
(2n  1)
the string is: (c) x  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
–1 –1
2
(a) 100 ms (b) 120 ms
–1 –1
(d) x = (2n + 1); n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
(c) 80 ms (d) 90 ms
OSCILLATION & WAVES 111

72. The distance between any two consecutive anti-nodes is 76. A wire under tension vibrates with a fundamental frequency
of 600 Hz. If the length of the wire is doubled, the radius is
(a)  (b) /2
halved and the wire is made to vibrate under one-ninth the
(c) 3/2 (d) 2 tension. Then, the fundamental frequency will become:
73. When temperature increase, the frequency of a tuning fork (a) 400 Hz (b) 600 Hz
(a) increases (c) 300 Hz (d) 200 Hz
(b) decreases Sound Wave
(c) remains same
77. When sound propagates through air, the region of high
(d) increases of decreases depending on the material density of air molecules is called:
74. Column-I has figures showing different modes of oscillation (a) compression (b) rarefaction
of the system (a string tied at both the ends) and Column-II (c) denser (d) None of the above
has name of the corresponding modes. Match the items in 78. The relation for Bulk modulus of a medium is given by
Column I with terms in Column II and choose the correct
option from the codes given below. p V
(a) B   (b) B  
V / V p / p

p p
(c) B  (d) B  
V / V V / V
79. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have frequencies (f
– 1), f, (f + 1). They superpose to give beats. The number of
beats produced per second will be
(a) 4 (b) 3
(c) 2 (d) 1
80. The speed of a longitudinal wave in air is given by:

 B
(a) v  (b) v 
B 

(V / V)
Codes : (c) v  (d) both (a) and (c)
p
A B C D
(a) 4 2 3 1 81. Match the items in Column I with terms in Column-II and
choose the correct option from the codes given below.
(b) 4 3 1 2
Column-I Column-II
(c) 3 2 1 4
(A) Bulk modulus (isothermal) 1. p
(d) 2 3 1 4
(B) Bulk modulus (adiabatic) 2. 
75. A uniform wire of length L, diameter D and density S is
stretched under a tension T. The correct relation between (C) Laplace correction/Netwon’s 3. p
its fundamental fequency f, the length L and the diameter D formula
is :
Codes :
1 1 A B C
(a) f  (b) f 
LD L D (a) 1 2 3
(b) 2 3 1
1 1 (c) 3 1 2
(c) f  (d) f 
D2 LD2
(d) 3 2 1
OSCILLATION & WAVES 112

82. Oxygen is 16 times heavier than hydrogen. Equal volumes 88. An open organ pipe of length l vibrates in its fundamental
of hydrogen and oxygen are mixed. The ratio of speed of mode. The pressure variation is maximum :
sound in the mixture to that in hydrogen is :
(a) at the two ends
2 (b) at the distance l/2 inside the ends
(a) 8 (b)
17
(c) at the distance l/4 inside the ends
1 32 (d) at the distance l/8 inside the ends
(c) (d)
8 17 89. A pipe closed at one end and open at the other end resonates
Standing Wave in organ Pipe with sound waves of frequencies 135 Hz and also 165 Hz
but not with any wave of frequency intermediate between
83. A pipe closed at one end produces a fundamental note of these two. The frequency of the fundamental note is :
412 Hz. It is cut into two equal length, the fundamental notes (a) 30 Hz (b) 15 Hz
produced by the two pieces are
(c) 60 Hz (d) 7.5 Hz
(a) 206 Hz, 412 Hz (b) 206 Hz, 824 Hz
90. A pipe closed at one end and open at the other end resonates
(c) 412 Hz, 824 Hz (d) 824 Hz, 1648 Hz with sound waves of frequency 135 Hz and also 165 Hz but
84. An open pipe is suddenly closed at one end with the result not with any wave of frequency intermediate between these
that the frequency of third harmonic of the closed pipe is two. Then the frequency of the fundamental note is
found to be higher by 100 Hz than fundamental frequency (a) 30 Hz (b) 15 Hz
of the open pipe. The fundamental frequency of the open
(c) 60 Hz (d) 7.5 Hz
pipe is
Beats
(a) 200 Hz (b) 300 Hz
91. Two wires are fixed on a sonometer. Their tensions are in the
(c) 240 Hz (d) 480 Hz ratio 8 : 1, their lengths are in the ratio 36 : 35, the diameters
85. A vehicle with a horn of frequency n is moving with a are in the ratio 4 :1 and densities are in the ratio 1 : 2. If the
–1
velocity of 30 m/s in a direction perpendicular to the straight note of the higher pitch has a frequency 360 s , the frequency
line joining the observer and the vehicle. The observer of beats produced is
–1 –1
perceives the sound to have a frequency (n + n1). If velocity (a) 5 s (b) 10 s
of sound in air is 300 m/s, n1 would be (c) 15 s
–1
(d) 20 s
–1

(a) n1 = 10 n (b) n1 = 0 92. Two sources A and B are sounding notes of frequency
(c) n1 = 0.1 n (d) n1 = – 0.1 n 680 Hz. A listener moves from A to B with a constant velocity
–1
u. If speed of sound is 340 ms , what should be the value of
86. An open pipe is in resonance in 2nd harmonic with frequency
u so that he hears 10 beats/s ?
f1. Now one end of the tube is closed and frequency is
–1 –1
increased to f2 such that the resonance again occurs in nth (a) 2.0 ms (b) 3.0 ms
–1 –1
harmonic. Choose the correct option. (c) 2.5 ms (d) 3.5 ms
93. Two sound waves with wavelength 5.0 m and 5.5 m
3 5
(a) n = 3, f2 = f1 (b) n = 3, f2 = f1 respectively, each propagate in a gas with velocity 330 m/s.
4 4
We expect the following number of beats/sec.
5 3 (a) 6 (b) 12
(c) n = 5, f2 = f (d) n = 5, f2 = f
4 1 4 1 (c) 0 (d) 1
87. If the length of a closed organ pipe is 1 m and velocity of 94. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have frequencies (f
sound is 330 m/s, then the frequency of 1st overtone is : – 1), f and (f + 1). They superpose to give beats. The number
(a) 4 (330/4) Hz (b) 3 (330/4) Hz of beats per second will be :

(c) 2 (330/4) Hz (d) none of these (a) 4 (b) 3

(c) 2 (d) 1
OSCILLATION & WAVES 113

95. A tuning fork vibrating with a sonometer having 20 cm wire 102. Two trains, each moving with a velocity of 30 m/s, cross
produces 5 beats/s. The beat frequency does not change if each other. One of the trains gives a whistle whose frequency
the length of the wire is changed to 21 cm. The frequency of is 600 Hz. If the speed of sound is 330 m/s, the apparent
the tuning fork must be : frequency for passengers sitting in the other train before
(a) 200 Hz (b) 210 Hz crossing would be :
(c) 205 Hz (d) 215 Hz (a) 600 Hz (b) 630 Hz
96. A source of frequency f gives 5 beats/s when sounded (c) 920 Hz (d) 720 Hz
with a frequency 200 Hz. The second harmonic of source 103. A whistle producing sound waves of frequencies 9500 Hz
gives 10 beats/s when sounded with a source of frequency and above is approaching a stationary person with speed v
420 Hz. The value of f is : m/s. The velocity of sound in air is 300 m/s. If the person
(a) 200 Hz (b) 210 Hz can hear frequencies upto a maximum of 10,000 Hz, the
maximum value of v upto which he can hear the whistle is :
(c) 205 Hz (d) 195 Hz
(a) 15 / 2 m/s (b) 15 m/s
Dopplers Effect

97. When a source is going away from a stationary observer (c) 30 m/s (d) 15 2 m/s
with a velocity equal to velocity of sound in air, then the 104. A vehicle with a horn of frequency f is moving with a velocity
frequency heard by the observer will be of 30 m/s in a direction perpendicular to the straight line
(a) same (b) double joining the observer and the vehicle. The observer perceives
(c) half (d) one third the sound to have a frequency f + f1. If the velocity of
sound in air is 300 m/s, f1 would be :
98. A car sounding its horn at 480 Hz moves towards a high wall
–1
at a speed of 20 ms , the frequency of the reflected sound (a) f1 = 10 f (b) f1 = 0
heard by the man sitting in the car will be nearest to ; (speed (c) f1 = 0.1f (d) f1 = –0.1 f
of sound 330 m/s)
Miscellaneous
(a) 480 Hz (b) 510 Hz
(c) 540 Hz (d) 570 Hz 105. The path difference between the two waves
99. A siren placed at a railway platform is emitting sound of 2x 

frequency 5 k Hz. A passenger sitting in a moving train A y1  a1 sin  t  
  
records a frequency of 5.5 k Hz, while the train approaches
the siren. During his return journey in a different train B, he
 2x 
records a frequency of 6.0 k Hz, while approaching the same and y 2  a 2 cos  t     is
siren. The ratio of the velocity of train B to that of train A is   
(a) 242/252 (b) 2
   
(c) 5/6 (d) 11/6 (a)  (b)  
2 2  2
100. A car is moving towards a high cliff. The driver sounds a
horn of frequency f. The reflected sound heard by the driver 2   2
has a frequency 2 f. If v be the velocity of sound, then the (c)
 
 
2
(d)  

velocity of the car, in the same velocity units would be
(a) v/4 (b) v/2 106. The equation of a wave travelling on a string is

(c) v/ 2 (d) v/3  x

y  4sin  8t  
2 8
101. A police car with a siren of frequency 8 kHz is moving with
uniform velocity of 36 km/h towards a tall building which if x and y are in centimetres, then velocity of wave is
reflects the sound waves. The speed of sound in air is 320 m/s. (a) 64 cm/sec in –ve x-direction
The frequency of the siren heard by the car driver is : (b) 32 cm/sec in –ve x-direction
(a) 8.50 kHz (b) 8.25 kHz (c) 32 cm/sec in +ve x-direction
(c) 7.75 kHz (d) 7.50 kHz (d) 64 cm/sec in +ve x-direction
OSCILLATION & WAVES 114

107. A transverse wave is described by the equation 111. An increase in intensity level of 1 dB implies an increase in
Intensity of (given antilog10 0.1 = 1.2589)
 x
y  y0 sin 2  ft   (a) 1 % (b) 3.01 %
 
(c) 26 % (d) 0.1 %
The maximum particle velocity is equal to four times the 112. The intensity level of two sounds are 100 dB and 50 dB.
wave velocity if What is the ratio of their intensities?
1 3
(a) 10 (b) 10
y0 y0
(a)   (b)   (c) 10
5
(d) 10
10
4 2
113. A source of sound emits 200 W power which is uniformly
(c)   y0 (d)   2y0 distributed over a sphere of radius 10 m. What is the
loudness of sound on the surface of the sphere?
108. Wave pulse on a string shown in figure is moving to the
(a) 70 dB (b) 74 dB
right without changing shape. Consider two particles at
positions x1 = 1.5 m and x2 = 2.5 m. Their transverse velocities (c) 80 dB (d) 117 dB
at the moment shown in figure are along directions

(a) positive y-axis and positive y-axis respectively

(b) negative y-axis and positive y-axis respectively
(c) positive y-axis and negative y-axis respectively
(d) negative y-axis and negative y-axis respectively
109. A progressive wave is given by
y = 3 sin 2[(t/0.04) – (x/0.01)]
Where x, y are in cm and t in s. The frequency of wave and
maximum acceleration will be
3 2 3 2
(a) 100 Hz, 4.7 × 10 cm/s (b) 50 Hz, 7.5 × 10 cm/s
4 2 4 2
(c) 25 Hz, 4.7 × 10 cm/s (d) 25 Hz, 7.5 × 10 cm/s
110. Which of the following is not true for the progressive wave

 t x 
y  4sin 2   
 0.02 100 

Where x and y are in cm and t in seconds.

(a) The amplitude is 4 cm
(b) The wavelength is 100 cm
(c) The frequency is 50 Hz
(d) The velocity of propagation is 50 cm/s
OSCILLATION & WAVES 115

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

OSCILLATIONS
1. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum is T =
(d)
L
2 . Measured value of L is 20.0 cm known to 1 mm
g
accuracy and time for 100 oscillations of the pendulum is 5. A 1 kg block attached to a spring vibrates with a frequency
found to be 90 s using a wrist watch of 1s resolution. The of 1 Hz on a frictionless horizontal table. Two springs
accuracy in the determination of g is : (2015) identical to the original spring are attached in parallel to
(a) 1% (b) 5% an 8 kg block placed on the same table. So, the frequency
of vibration of the 8 kg block is : (2017)
(c) 2 % (d) 3%
2. A particle is performing S.H.M. along X-axis with amplitude 1 1
(a) Hz (b) Hz
4 cm and time period 1.2 sec. The minimum time taken by 4 2 2
the particle to move from x = + 2 cm to x = + 4 cm and back
again is given by (2015)
1
(a) 0.6 s (b) 0.4 s (c) Hz (d) 2 Hz
2
(c) 0.3 s (d) 0.2 s
6. In an experiment to determine the period of a simple
3. A particle performs simple harmonic motion with amplitude
pendulum of length 1 m, it is attached to different spherical
A. Its speed is tripled at the instant that it is at a distance
bobs of radii r1 and r2. The two spherical bobs have uniform
2A
from equilibrium position. The new amplitude of the mass distribution. If the relative difference in the periods,
3
motion is : (2016) is found to be 5 × 10–4 s, the difference in radii, r1  r2 is

(a) 3A (b) A 3
best given by :     r1 , r2   (2017)
7A A
(c) (d) 41 (a) 1 cm (b) 0.1 cm
3 3
(c) 0.05 cm (d) 0.01 cm
4. A particle is executing, simple harmonic motion with a time
period T. At time t = 0, it is at its position of equilibrium. 7. A sliver atom in a solid oscillates in simple harmonic motion
The kinetic energy–time graph of the particle will look like in some direction with a frequency of 1012/sec What is the
: (2017) force constant of the bonds connecting one atom with
(a) the other? (Mole wt. of siver =108 and Avagadro number
= 6.02× 1023 gm mole–1) (2018)
(a) 2.2 N/m (b) 5.5 N/m
(b) (c) 6.4 N/m (d) 7.1 N/m
8. A pendulum with time period of 1s is losing energy due to
damping. At certain time its energy is 45 J. If after
completing 15 oscillations, its energy has become 15 J, its
damping constant (in s) is : (2015)
(c) 1 1
(a) (b) ln3
2 30

1
(c) 2 (d) ln3
15
OSCILLATION & WAVES 116

9. Two particles are performing simple harmonic motion in a Parameters Curve

straight line about the same equilibrium point. The (a) A  B, a = b;  = 0 Parabola
amplitude and time period for both particles are same and

equal to A and T, respectively. At time t = 0 one particle (b) A = B, a = b;  = Line
2
has displacement A while the other one has displacement

A 
and they are moving towards each other. If they cross (c) A  B, a = b;  = Ellipse
2 2

each other at time t, then t is : (2016) 

(d) A = B, a = 2b;  = Circle
2
T 5T
(a) (b) 14. An oscillator of mass M is at rest in its equilibrium position
6 6
1 2
in a potential V = k  x - X  . A particle of mass m
T T 2
(c) (d)
3 4 comes from right with speed u and collides completely
10. In an engine the piston undergoes vertical simple inelastically with M and sticks to it. This process repeats
harmonic motion with amplitude 7 cm. A washer rests on every time the oscillator crosses its equilibrium position.
top of the piston and moves with it. The motor speed is The amplitude of oscillations after 13 collisions is : (M=10,
m=5, u=1, k=1) (2018)
slowly increased. The frequency of the piston at which
the washer no longer stays in contact with the piston, is 1 1
(a) (b)
close to : (2016) 3 2
(a) 0.1 Hz (b) 1.2 Hz
2 3
(c) 0.7 Hz (d) 1.9 Hz (c) (d)
3 5
11. The ratio of maximum acceleration to maximum velocity in
15. A particle executes simple harmonic motion and is located
a simple harmonic motion is 10 s–1. At, t = 0 the displacement
at x =a, b and c at times t0, 2t0 and 3t0 respectively. The
is 5 m. What is the maximum acceleration? The initial phase
frequency of the oscillation is : (2018)
 1
is . (2017) -1  a + c 
4 (1) 2t cos  2b 
0  

(a) 500 m/s2 (b) 500 2 m/s 2 1 -1  a + b 

(2) 2t cos  2c 
0  
(c) 750 m/s2 (d) 750 2 m/s 2
1 -1  2a + 3c 
12. A block of mass 0.1 kg is connected to an elastic spring of (3) 2t cos  b 
0  
spring constant 640 Nm–1 and oscillates in a damping
medium of damping constant 10–2 kg s–1, The system 1 -1  a + 2b 
dissipates its energy gradually. The time taken for its (4) 2t cos  3c 
0  
mechanical energy of vibration to drop to half of its initial
value, is closest to : (2017) 16. A damped harmonic oscillator has a frequency of
5oscillations per second. The amplitude drops to half
(a) 2 s (b) 3.5 s
itsvalue for every 10 oscillations. The time it will take to
(c) 5 s (d) 7 s
13. Two simple harmonic motions, as shown below, are at right 1
drop to of the original amplitude is close to :
angles. They are combined to form Lissajous figures. 1000
x  t  = A sin  at +   (2019)
(a) 50 s (b) 100 s
y  t  = Bsin  bt 
(c) 20 s (d) 10 s
Identify the correct match below. (2018)
OSCILLATION & WAVES 117

17. A simple pendulum oscillating in air has period T. The bob 21. A cylindrical plastic bottle of negligible mass is filled with
of the pendulum is completely immersed in a non-viscous 310 ml of water and left floating in a pond with still water. If
pressed downward slightly and released, it starts
1
liquid. The density of the liquid is th of the material of performing simple harmonic motion at angular frequency
16 ω. If the radius of the bottle is 2.5 cm then ω is close to:
the bob. If the bob is inside liquid all the time, its period of (density of water = 103 kg/m3)
oscillation in this liquid is: (2019) (2019)
1 1 (a) 3.75 rad s–1 (b) 1.25 rad s–1
(a) 2T (b) 2T (c) 2.50 rrad s–1 (d) 8.00 rad s–1
10 14
22. A particle undergoing simple harmonic motion has time
1 1
(c) 4T (d) 4T t
15 14 dependent displacement given by x  t   A sin . The
90
m ratio of kinetic to potential energy of this particle at t = 210
18. Two masses m and are connected at the two ends of a
2 s will be : (2019)
massless rigid rod of length l. The rod is suspended by a
thin wire of torsional constant k at the centre of mass of 1
(a) (b) 1
the rod-mass system (see figure). Because of torsional 9
constant k, the restoring torque is τ = k for angular (c) 2 (d) 3
displacement . If the rod is rotated by an angle 0 and 23. A simple pendulum oflength 1 mis oscillating with an
released, the tension in it when it passes through its mean
position will be: (2019) angularfrequency
10 rad/s. The support of the pendulum startsoscillating up
and down with a small angular frequency of1 rad/s and an
amplitude of 10–2 m. The relative change inthe angular
frequency of the pendulum is best given by: (2019)

(a) 10–3 rad/s (b) 1 rad/s

–1
(c) 10 rad/s (d) 10–5 rad/s
3k02 2k 02
(a) (b) 24. A simple harmonic motion is represented by:
l l

k02 k02  
y  5 sin 3 t  3 cos 3 t cm . The amplitude and time
(c) (d)
l 2l period of the motion are : (2019)
19. A rod of mass ‘M’ and length ‘2L’ is suspended at its middle
by a wire. It exhibits torsional oscillations; If two masses
each of ‘m’ are attached at distance ‘L/2’ from its centre on 3 3
(a) 10 cm, s (b) 10 cm, s
both sides, it reduces the oscillation frequency by 20%. 2 2
The value of m/M is close to :
(2019) 3 2
(c) 5 cm, s (d) 5 cm, s
(a) 0.77 (b) 0.57 2 3
(c) 0.37 (d) 0.17 25. This displacement time graph of a particle executing S.H.M.
20. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion (SHM) of
amplitude A, along the x-axis, about x = 0. When its is given in figure : (sketch is schematic and not to scale)
potential Energy (PE) equals kinetic energy (KE), the
position of the particle will be: (2019)

A A
(a) (b)
2 2 2
A
(c) (d) A Which of the following statements is/are true for this
2
motion ?
OSCILLATION & WAVES 118

3T WAVES
(A) The force is zero at t 
4 29. A train is moving on a straight track with speed 20 ms–1. It
(B) The acceleration is maximum at t = T is blowing its whistle at the frequency of 1000 Hz. The
T percentage change in the frequency heard by a person
(C) The speed is maximum at t  standing near the track as the train passes him is (speed
4
of sound = 320 ms–1) close to: (2015)
T
(D) The P.E. is equal to K.E. of the oscillation at t  (a) 18% (b) 24%
2
(2020) (c) 6% (d) 12%
(a) (B), (C) and (D) (b) (A), (B) and (D)
30. A signal of 5 kHz frequency is amplitude modulated on a
(c) (A) and (D) (d) (A), (B) and (C) carrier wave of frequency 2 MHz. The frequencies of the
26. A block of mass m attached to a massless spring is
resultant signal is/are : (2015)
performing oscillatory motion of amplitude ‘A’ on a
frictionless horizontal plane. If half of the mass of the block (a) 200 kHz, 2000 kHz and 1995 kHz
breaks off when it is passing through its equilibrium point, (b) 2000 kHz and 1995 kHz
the amplitude of oscillation for the remaining system
(c) 2 MHz only
become fA. The value of f is : (2020)
(d) 2005 kHz, and 1995 kHz
1 1 31. A uniform string of length 20 m is suspended from a rigid
(a) (b)
2 2 support. A short wave pulse is introduced at its lowest
end. It starts moving up the string. The time taken to reach
(c) 1 (d)2
the support is : (take g = 10 ms–2) (2016)
27. A ring is hung on a nail. It can oscillate, without slipping or
sliding (i) in its plane with a time period T1 and, (ii) back (a) 2s (b) 2 2 s
and forth in a direction perpendicular to its plane, with a

T1 (c) 2s (d) 2π 2 s
period T2. The ratio T will be : (2020)
2
32. A pipe open at both ends has a fundamental frequency f
3 2 in air. The pipe is dipped vertically in water so that half of
(a) (b)
2 3 it is in water. The fundamental frequency of the air column
is now : (2016)
2 2
(c) (d)
3 3 3f
(a) (b) 2f
28. When a particle of mass m is attached to a vertical spring 4

of spring constant k and released, its motion is described

f
by y  t   y0 sin 2 t , where ‘y’ is measured from the lower (c) f (d)
2
end of unstretched spring. Then is: (2020)
33. An observer is moving with half the speed of light towards
a stationary microwave source emitting waves at frequency
g 1 g 10 GHz. What is the frequency of the microwave measured
(a) y0 (b) 2 y0 by the observer? (speed of light =3×108 ms–1) (2017)
(a) 12.1 GHz (b) 17.3 GHz
2g g
(c) y0 (d) 2 y0 (c) 15.3 GHz (d) 10.1 GHz
OSCILLATION & WAVES 119

34. A source of sound emits sound waves at frequency f0. It is

moving towards an observer with fixed speed vs (vs< v,
where v is the speed of sound in air). If the observer were
to move towards the source with speed v0, one of the
following two graphs (A and B) will given the correct (a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
variation of the frequency f heard by the observer as v0 is
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 4 : 1
changed.
38. A standing wave is formed by the superposition of two
waves travelling in opposite directions. The transverse
displacement is given by (2017)

 5 
y (x, t)  0.5 sin  x  cos (200t).
 4 

What is the speed of the travelling wave moving in the

The variation of f with v0 is given correctly by : (2015)
positive x direction ?
f0
(a) graph A with slope   v  v  (x and t are in meter and second, respectively.)
s
(a) 160 m/s (b) 90 m/s
f0
(b) graph B with slope   v  v  (c) 180 m/s (d) 120 m/s
s
39. A tuning fork vibrates with frequency 256 Hz and gives
f0 one beat per second with the third normal mode of
(c) graph A with slope   v  v  vibration of an open pipe. What is the length of the pipe ?
s
(Speed of sound in air is 340 ms-1) (2018)
f0
(d) graph B with slope   v  v  (1) 220 cm (2) 190 cm
s

35. Two engines pass each other moving in opposite (3) 180 cm (4) 200 cm
directions with uniform speed of 30 m/s. One of them is 40. 5 beats/ second are heard when a tuning fork is sounded
blowing a whistle of frequency 540 Hz. Calculate the with a sonometer wire under tension, when the length of
frequency heard by driver of second engine before they the sonometer wire is either 0.95 m or 1m. The frequency
pass each other. Speed of sound is 330 m/sec : (2016) of the fork will be : (2018)
(a) 450 Hz (b) 540 Hz (a) 195 Hz (b) 150 Hz
(c) 648 Hz (d) 270 Hz
(c) 300 Hz (d) 251 Hz
36. A toy-car, blowing its horn, is moving with a steady speed
of 5 m/s, away from a wall. An observer, towards whom 41. Two sitar strings, A and B, playing the note ‘Dha’ are
the toy car is moving, is able to hear 5 beats per second. If slightly out of tune and produce beats of frequency 5 Hz.
the velocity of sound in air is 340 m/s, the frequency of The tension of the string B is slightly increased and the
the horn of the toy car is close to : (2016) beat frequency is found to decrease by 3 Hz. If the
(a) 680 Hz (b) 510 Hz frequency of A is 425 Hz, the original frequency of B is :
(c) 340 Hz (d) 170 Hz (2018)
37. Two wires W 1 and W 2 have the same radius r and (1) 430 Hz (2) 420 Hz
respective densities 1 and 2 such that 2 = 4 1. They (3) 428 Hz (4) 422 Hz
are joined together at the point O, as shown in the figure.
The combination is used as a sonometer wire and kept 42. The end correction of a resonance column is 1 cm. If the
under tension T. The point O is midway between the two shortest length resonating with the tuning fork is 10 cm,
bridges. When a stationary wave is set up in the composite the next resonating length should be : (2018)
wire, the joint is found to be a node. The ratio of the (a) 28 cm (b) 32 cm
number of antinodes formed in W1 to W2 is : (2017) (c) 36 cm (d) 40 cm
OSCILLATION & WAVES 120

43. The P = 0.01sin[1000t–3x]Nm–2 pressure wave,corresponds (c)

to the sound produced by a vibrating blade on a day when
atmospheric temperature is 0°C. On some other day when
temperature is T, the speed of sound produced by the same
blade and at the same frequency is found to be 336ms–1.
Approximate value of T is: (2019) (d)
(a) 4°C (b) 11°C
(c) 12°C (d) 15°C
44. Two cars A and B are moving away from each other in
opposite directions. Both the cars are moving with a speed
of 20 ms 1 with respect to the ground. If an observer in car
A detects a frequency 2000 Hz of the sound coming from 48. A source of sound S is moving with a velocity of 50 m/s
car B, what is the natural frequency of the sound source in towards a stationary observer. The observer measures the
frequency of the source as 1000 Hz. What will be the
car B?(Speed of sound in air  340 ms 1 ) (2019)
apparent frequency of the source when it is moving away
(a) 2250 Hz (b) 2060 Hz from the observer after crossing him? (Take velocity of
(c) 2300 Hz (d) 2150 Hz sound in air 350 m/s) (2019)
45. A string 2.0 m long and fixed at its ends is driven by a 240 (a) 750 Hz (b) 857 Hz
Hz vibrator. The string vibrates in its third harmonic mode. (c) 1143 Hz (d) 807 Hz
The speed of the wave and its fundamental frequency is: 49. A progressive wave travelling along the positive x-
(2019) direction is represented by y  x, t   A sin  kx  t    .
(a) 180 m / s,80 Hz (b) 320 m / s,80 Hz Its snapshot at t = 0 is given in the figure. (2019)
(c) 320 m / s,120 Hz (d) 180 m / s,120 Hz
46. A stationary source emits sound waves of frequency 500Hz.
Two observers moving along a line passing through
thesource detect sound to be of frequencies 480 Hz and
530 Hz. Their respective speeds are, in ms-1,
(Given speed of sound= 300 m/s) (2019)
For this wave, the initial phase  is
(a) 12, 16 (b) 12, 18
(c) 16, 14 (d) 8, 18 
(a)  (b) 
47. The correct figure that shows, schematically, the wave 2
pattern produced by superposition of two waves of
frequencies 9 Hz and 11 Hz is: (2019) 
(c) 0 (d)
(a) 2
50. A submarine (A) travelling at 18 km/hr is being chased
along the line of its velocity by another submarine (B)
travelling at 27 km/hr. B sends a sonar signal of 500 Hz to
detect A and receives a reflected sound of frequency  .
The value of  (in Hz) is close to: (Speed of sound in
water = 1500 ms-1). Write the nearest integer as the answer.
(2019)
51. A tuning fork of frequency 480Hz is used in an experiment
(b)
for measuring speed of sound (v) in air by resonance tube
method. Resonance is observed to occur at two successive
lengths of the air column, l1 = 30 cm and l2 = 70 cm. then, v
is equal to: (2019)

(a) 332 ms-1 (b) 384 ms-1

(c) 338 ms-1 (d) 379 ms-1
OSCILLATION & WAVES 121

52. A small speaker delivers 2 W of audio output. At what 58. A musician using an open flute of length 50 cm produces
distance from the speaker will one detect 120 dB intensity second harmonic sound waves. A person runs towards
sound? [Given reference intensity of sound as 10-12 W/m2] the musician from another end of the hall at a speed of 10
(2019) km/h. If the wave speed is 330 m/s, the frequency heard by
(a) 40 cm (b) 20 cm the running person shall be close to:
(c) 10 cm (d) 30 cm (2020)
53. A heavy ball of mass M is suspended from the ceiling of a
(a) 666 Hz (b) 753 Hz
car by a light string of mass m (m << M). When the car is at
(c) 500 Hz (d) 333 Hz
rest, the speed of transverse waves in the string is 60 ms–
1
. when the car has acceleration a, the wave-speed increases 59. Two identical strings X and Z made of same material have
to 60.5 ms–1. The value of a, in terms of gravitational
tension Tx and Tz in them. If their fundamental
acceleration g, is closest to: (2019)
frequencies are 450 Hz and 300 Hz, respectively, then the
g g
(a) (b) ratio Tx/Tz is :
30 5
(2020)
g g
(c) (d) (a) 2.25 (b) 1.25
10 20
(c) 0.44 (d) 1.5
54. A closed organ pipe has a fundamental frequency of 1.5
kHz. The number of overtones that can be distinctly heard 60. A wire of density 9 × 10 kg cm–3 is stretched between two
–3

by a person with this organ pipe will be: (Assume that the clamps 1 m apart. The resulting strain in the wire is 4.9 × 10–
highest frequency a person can hear is 20,000 Hz) 4
. The lowest frequency of the transverse vibrations in the
(2019)
(a) 6 (b) 4 wire is (Young’s modulus of wire Y = 9 × 1010 Nm–2), (to the
(c) 7 (d) 5 nearest integer),………. .
55. A string of length 1 m and mass 5 g is fixed at both ends. (2020)
The tension in the string is 8.0 N. The string is set into
61. A uniform thin rope of length 12 m and mass 6 kg hangs
vibration using an external vibrator of frequency 100 Hz.
The separation (in cm) between successive nodes on the vertically from a rigid support and a block of mass 2 kg is
string is: attached to its free end. A transverse short wavetrain of
(2019) wavelength 6 cm is produced at the lower end of the rope.
What is the wavelength of the wavetrain (in cm) when it
56. Equation of travelling wave on a stretched string of linear
reaches the top of the rope ?
density 5 g/m is y = 0.03 sin (450 t – 9x) where distance and
(2020)
time are measured in SI units. The tension in the string (in (a) 12 (b) 3
N) is: (2019) (c) 9 (d) 6
57. A travelling harmonic wave is represented by the equation 62. For a transverse wave travelling along a straight line, the
distance between two peaks (crests) is 5m, while the
y  x, t   103 sin  50t  2 x  , where x and y are in metres distance between one crest and one trough is 1.5m. The
and t is in seconds. Which of the following is a correct possible wavelengths (in m) of the waves are:
statement about the wave? (2020)
(2019) (a) 1, 3, 5,…. (b) 1,2,3,…
(a) The wave is propagating along the negative X-axis with 1 1 1 1 1 1
(c) , , ,... (d) , , ,...
speed 25 ms .–1 2 4 6 1 3 5
(b) The wave is propagating along the positive X-axis with 63. The driver of a bus approaching a big wall notices that the
speed 100 ms .–1 frequency of his bus’s hornchanges from 420 Hz to 490 Hz
when he hears it after it gets reflected from the wall.Find
(c) The wave is propagating along the positive X-axis with
the speed of the bus if speed of the sound is 330 ms–1.
speed 25 ms–1. (2020)
(d) The wave is propagating along the negative X-axis (a) 81 kmh–1
(b) 91 kmh –1

with speed 100 ms–1. (c) 71 kmh–1 (d) 61 kmh–1

OSCILLATION & WAVES 122

64. Assume that the displacement (s) of air is proportional to 69. A one metre long (both ends open) organ pipe is kept in a
the pressure difference (p) created by a sound wave.
Displacement(s) further depends on the speed of sound gas that has double the density of air at STP. Assuming
(), density of air () and the frequency (f). If the speed of sound in air at STP is 300 m/s, the frequency
p  10Pa,   300m / s,   1 kg/m and f  000 Hz,
3
difference between the fundamental and second harmonic
then s will be of the order of (take the multiplicative constant of this pipe is______Hz. (2020)
to be 1) (2020)
70. A transverse wave travels on a taut steel wire with a velocity
(a) 1 mm (b) 10 mm
of V when tension in it is 2.06 × 104 . When the tension is
1 3
(c) mm (d) mm V
10 100 changed to T, the velocity changed to The value
2
65. In a resonance tube experiment when the tube is filled
with water up to a height of 17.0 cm from bottom, it of T is close to (2020)
resonates with a given tuning fork. When the water level
is raised the next resonance with the same tuning fork (a) 30.5 × 104 N (b) 2.50 × 104 N
occurs at a height of 24.5 cm. If the velocity of sound in air
(c) 10.2 × 102 N (d) 5.15 × 103 N
is 330 m/s, the tuning fork frequency is : (2020)
(a) 2200 Hz (b) 550 Hz 71. Three harmonic waves of same frequency (v) and intensity
(c) 3300 Hz (d) 1100 Hz
66. A driver in a car, approaching a vertical wall notices that
 
(I0) having initial phaseangles 0, , radrespectively..
the frequency of his car horn, has changed from 440 Hz to 4 4
480 Hz, when it gets reflected from the wall. If the speed of When they are superimposed, the resultant intensityis
sound in air is 345 m/s, then the speed of the car is : close to (2020)
(2020)
(a) 24 km/hr (b) 36 km/hr (a) 5.8 I0 (b) I0
(c) 54 km/hr (d) 18 km/hr
(c) 3 I0 (d) 0.2 I0
67. An object of mass m is suspended at the end of a massless
72. For a transverse wave travelling along a straight line, the
wire of length L and area of cross-section A. Young distance between two peaks (crests) is 5m, while the
modulus of the material of the wire is Y. If the mass is distance between one crest and one trough is 1.5m. The
pulled down slightly its frequency of oscillation along the possible wavelengths (in m) of the waves are:
vertical direction is: (2020) (2020)
(a) 1, 3, 5,…. (b) 1,2,3,…
1 mL
(a) f  1 YA (b) f 
2 mL 2 YA 1 1 1 1 1 1
(c) , , ,... (d) , , ,...
2 4 6 1 3 5
1 YL 1 mA
(c) f  (d) f  73. A simple pendulum oscillating in air has period T. The bob
2 mA 2 YL
of the pendulum is completely immersed in a non-viscous
68. A stationary observer receives sound from two identical
1
tuning forks, one of which approaches and the other one liquid. The density of the liquid is th of the material of
16
receded with the same speed (much less than the speed of the bob. If the bob is inside liquid all the time, its period of
sound). The observer hears 2 beats/sec. The oscillation oscillation in this liquid is:
frequency of each tuning fork is (2020)
vo = 1400 Hz and the velocity of sound in air is 350 m/s. The
1 1
speed of each tuning fork is close to (2020) (a) 2T (b) 2T
10 14
1
(a) m/s (b) 1 m/s
4 1 1
(c) 4T (d) 4T
1 1 15 14
(c) m/s (d) m/s
2 8
OSCILLATION & WAVES 123

EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

OSCILLATION 6. The variation of the acceleration a of the particle executing

S.H.M. with displacement x is as shown in the figure.
Single Correct Options
(a) (b) a
1. A simple harmonic motion is represented by a
x (t) = 10 sin (20 t + 0.5). The amplitude of the S.H.M. is
(a) A = 30 (b) A = 20
(c) A = 10 (d) A = 5
2. The vertical motion of a ship at sea is described by the x
x

d2x (c) (d)

equation   4x , where x is the vertical height of the
dt 2 a a

ship (in metre) above its mean position. If it oscillates

through a height of 1 m x x
(a) its maximum vertical speed will be 1 m/s
(b) its maximum vertical speed will be 2 m/s
(c) its greatest vertical acceleration is 2 m/s2 7. What is the maximum acceleration of the particle doing
(d) its greatest vertical acceleration is 1 m/s 2 the SHM ?

3. A body of mass 0.01 kg executes simple harmonic motion  t 

y  2sin    , where y is in cm.
(S.H.M.) about x = 0 under the influence of a force shown 2 
below : The period of the S.H.M. is
 2
(a) cm/s 2 (b) cm/s 2
F(N) 2 2

8.0  2
+2.0 (c) cm/s 2 (d) cm/s 2
x(m) 4 4
-2.0 8. The acceleration a of a particle undergoing SHM is shown
-8.0
in the figure. Which of the labelled points corresponds to
the particle being at –xmax ?
(a) 1.05 s (b) 0.52 s
(c) 0.25 s (d) 0.30 s
4. If a particle under S.H.M. has time period 0.1 sec and
amplitude 2 × 10–3 m. It has maximum velocity
 
(a) m/s (b) m/s
25 26
(a) 4 (b) 3

(c) m/s (d) None of these (c) 2 (d) 1
30
9. The equation of motion of a particle executing simple
5. For a particle executing simple harmonic motion, which of harmonic motion is a + 162x = 0. In this equation, a is the
the following statements is not correct
linear acceleration in m/s2 of the particle at a displacement
(a) The total energy of the particle always remains the same
x in metre. The time period in simple harmonic motion is
(b) The restoring force is always directed towards a fixed point
(c) The restoring force is maximum at the extreme positions 1 1
(a) s (b) s
(d) The acceleration of the particle is maximum at the 4 2
equilibrium position. (c) 1 s (d) 2 s
OSCILLATION & WAVES 124

10. The displacement of a particle moving in S.H.M. at any 17. A particle of mass 0.1 kg executes SHM under a force
instant is given by y  a sin t . The acceleration after time F = (–10x) Newton. Speed of particle at mean position is 6 m/
s. Then amplitude of oscillations is
T (a) 0.6 m (b) 0.2 m
t is (where T is the time period)
4 (c) 0.4 m (d) 0.1 m
(a) a (b) a 18. The displacement time equation of a particle executing
SHM is : x = A sin (t + ). At time t = 0 position of the
(c) a 2 (d)  a 2 particle is x = A/2 and it is moving along negative x-
11. The potential energy of a particle executing S.H.M. is 2.5 J, direction. Then the angle  can be :
when its displacement is half of amplitude. The total (a) /6 (b) /3
energy of the particle is (c) /3 (d) 5/6
(a) 18 J (b) 10 J 19. Two simple harmonic motions are represented by the
(c) 12 J (d) 2.5 J
 
12. A particle is vibrating in a simple harmonic motion with equations y1  0 . 1 sin  100  t   and y 2  0 .1 cos  t.
 3
amplitude 4 cm. At what displacement from the equilibrium
is its energy half potential and half kinetic ? The phase difference of the velocity of particle 1 with
respect to the velocity of particle 2 is
(a) 2 2 cm (b) 2 cm  
(c) 3 cm (d) 1 cm (a) (b)
3 6
13. Energy of particle executing SHM depends upon
 
(a) amplitude only (b) amplitude and frequency (c) (d)
6 3
(c) velocity only (d) frequency only
20. If < E > and < U > denote the average kinetic and the
14. A particle of mass 0.10 kg executes SHM with an amplitude
average potential energies respectively of mass describing
0.05 m and frequency 20 vib/s. Its energy of oscillation is
a simple harmonic motion, over one period, then the correct
(a) 2 J (b) 4 J
relation is
(c) 1 J (d) zero (a) < E > = < U > (b) < E > = 2 <U >
15. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion with a period (c) < E > = – 2 <U > (d) < E >= – < U >
of T seconds and amplitude a metre. The shortest time it 21. The following figure depicts a circular motion. The radius
a of the circle, the period of revolution, the initial position
takes to reach a point m from its mean position in and the sense of revolution are indicated on the figure.
2
The simple harmonic motion of the x–projection of the
seconds is radius vector of the rotating particle P can be shown as :
T
(a) T (b)
4

T T
(c) (d)
8 16
16. A particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of amplitude 0.1
m. When the particle passes through the mean position,
its KE is 8 × 10–3 J. Find the equation of motion of the
particle, if the initial phase of oscillation is 45°
 2t  
 (a) x  t   a cos   
  4 4
(a) y  0.1cos  3t  
 4
 t  
  (b) x  t   a cos   
(b) y  0.1sin  6t    4 4
 4

   2 t  
(c) x  t   a sin   
(c) y  0.1sin  4t    4 4
 4

   t  
(d) y  0.1cos  4t   (d) x  t   a cos   
 4  3 2
OSCILLATION & WAVES 125

22. A particle moves with simple harmonic motion in a straight

t
line. In first s, after starting from rest it travels a distance 28. A particle moves according to the law x = a cos . The
2
a, and in next  s it travels 2a, in same direction, then :
distance covered by it in the time interval between t = 0
(a) time period of oscillations is 8
to t = 3 s is
(b) amplitude of motion is 4a (a) 2 a (b) 3 a
(c) time period of oscillations is 6 (c) 4 a (d) 5 a
(d) amplitude of motion is 3a 29. The potential energy of a harmonic oscillator of mass 2 kg
in its mean position is 5J. If its total energy is 9J and its
23. In SHM for how many times potential energy is equal to amplitude is 0.01 m, its time period will be
kinetic energy during one complete period ?
 
(a) 1 (b) 2 (a) s (b) s
100 50
(c) 4 (d) 8
 
24. Velocity at mean position of a particle executing SHM is v. (c)   s (d) none of these
Velocity of the particle at a distance equal to half of the  20 
amplitude will be 30. Two particles are executing SHM in a straight line.
Amplitude A and time period T of both the particles are
v v equal. At time t = 0, one particle is at displacement x1 = +A
(a) (b)
2 2 A
and the other at x 2  and they are approaching
2
3 3 towards each other. After what time they cross each other ?
(c) v (d) v
2 4 (a) T/3 (b) T/4
25. A particle executes linear simple harmonic motion with an (c) 5T/6 (d) T/6
31. A particle is executing S.H.M. of amplitude 5 cm and period
amplitude of 2 cm. When the particle is at 1 cm from the
6 sec. How long will it take to move from one end of its
mean position the magnitude of its velocity is equal to
path on one side of mean position to a position 2.5 cm on
that of its acceleration. Then its time period in seconds is the same side of the mean position ?
1 (a) 1.5 sec (b) 1 sec
(a) (b) 2 3 (c) 3 sec (d) 3.5 sec
2 3 32. A particle executing harmonic motion is having velocities
v1 and v2 at distance x1 and x2 from the equilibrium position.
2 3 The amplitude of the motion is
(c) (d)
3 2
v12 x22  v22 x12 v12 x12  v22 x22
26. A particle of mass m executes simple harmonic motion (a) (b)
v12  v22 v12  v22
with amplitude a and frequency . The average kinetic
energy during its motion from the position of equilibrium v12 x22  v22 x12 v12 x22  v22 x12
to the ends is (c) (d)
v12  v22 v12  v22
2 2 2 2 2 2
(a) 2 ma  (b)  ma 
33. A certain simple harmonic vibrator of mass 0.1 kg has a
1 2 2 2 total energy of 10 J. Its displacement from the mean
(c)  ma  (d) 42ma22 position is 1 cm when it has equal kinetic and potential
4
energies. The amplitude A and frequency f of vibtration of
27. The maximum acceleration of a particle in SHM is made the vibrator are
two times keeping the maximum speed to be constant. It is 500
possible when (a) A  2 cm, f  Hz
π
(a) amplitude of oscillation is doubled while frequency 1000
remains constant (b) A  2 cm, f  Hz
π
(b) amplitude is doubled while frequency is halved 1 500
(c) frequency is doubled while amplitude is halved (c) A  cm, f  Hz
2 π
(d) frequency of oscillation is doubled while amplitude 1 1000
remains constant (d) A  cm, f  Hz
2 π
OSCILLATION & WAVES 126

34. A particle of mass m is executing simple harmonic 41. Two bodies M and N of equal masses are suspended from
oscillations about the origin on the x-axis. Its potential two separate massless springs of force constants k1 and
3
energy is U(x) = k | x | , where k is a positive constant. If the k2 respectively. If the two bodies oscillate vertically such
amplitude of oscillation is a, then its time period T is that their maximum velocities are equal, the ratio of the
(a) proportional to 1/ a (b) proportional to a amplitude M to that of N is

3/2 k1 k1
(c) proportional to a (d) proportional a (a) k (b)
2 k2
35. The displacement of the particle from its mean position (in
metre) is given by k2 k2
y = 0.2 sin (10t + 1.5) cos (10t + 1.5). (c) k (d) k1
1
The motion of the particle is
(a) periodic but not simple harmonic motion 42. In arrangement given in figure, if the block of mass m is
(b) non periodic displaced, the frequency is given by
(c) simple harmonic motion with period of 0.1 s A B
(d) simple harmonic motion with period of 0.2 s. m
36. Maximum velocity in SHM is m. The average velocity k1 k2
during motion from one extreme point to the other extreme
point will be : 1  K1 – K 2 
(a) f 
π 2 2  m 
(a) vm (b) v m
2 π
4 π
(c) v m (d) v m 1  K1  K 2 
π 4 (b) f 
2  m 
37. Force constant of a weightless spring is 16 N/m. A body of
mass 1.0 kg suspended from it is pulled down through 5
cm from its mean position and then released. The maximum 1  m 
kinetic energy of the body will be (c) f  2  K  K 
 1 2
(a) 2 × 10–2 J (b) 4 × 10–2 J
(c) 8 × 10–2 J (d) 16 × 10–2 J
1  m 
38. A particle is attached to a vertical spring and is pulled (d) f   
2  K1 – K 2 
down a distance 0.04 m below its equlibrium position and
is released from rest. The initial upward acceleration of the 43. Three masses 700g, 500g, and 400g are suspended at the
particle is 0.30 m/s2. The period of the oscillation is end of as spring as shown and are in equilibrium. When
(a) 4.08 s (b) 1.92 s the 700g mass is removed, the system oscillates with a
(c) 3.90 s (d) 2.29 s period of 3 seconds, when the 500 gm mass is also
removed, it will oscillate with a period of
39. Frequency of a particle executing SHM is 10 Hz. The
particle is suspended from a vertical spring. At the hightest
point of its oscillation the spring is unstretched. Maximum
speed of the particle is : (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 2m/s (b) m/s
(c) 1/m/s (d) 1/2m/s 700 gm
40. To make the frequency double of an oscillator, we have to 500 gm
400 gm
(a) Double the mass
(b) Half the mass (a) 1 s (b) 2 s
(c) Quadruple the mass
12
(d) Reduce the mass to one-fourth (c) 3 s (d) s
5
OSCILLATION & WAVES 127

44. On a smooth inclined plane, a body of mass M is attached (a) system will perform SHM with angular frequency given
between two springs. The other ends of the springs are
k  m1  m 2 
fixed to firm supports. If each spring has force constant by .
K, the period of oscillation of the body (assuming the m1m 2
springs as massless) is
(b) system performs SHM with angular frequency given

k
by m1  m 2 .

M (c) tension in string will be 0 when the system is released.

m2g
(d) maximumdisplacement of m1 will be .
 k
47. A massless rod is pivoted at point O. A string carrying a
mass m at one end is attached to the point A on the rod.
1/2 1/ 2
 m   2m  The period of small vertical oscillation of mass m around
(a) 2   (b) 2  
 2K   K  its equilibrium position is :

1/2
Mg sin   2 Mg 
(c) 2 (d) 2  
2K  K 
45. Four massless springs whose force constants are 2k, 2k, k
and 2 k respectivley are attached to a mass M kept on a
frictionless plane (as shown in figure). If the mass M is
displaced in the horizontal direction, then the frequency a m a m
(a) T  2 (b) T  
of the system. b k b k

b m b m
(c) T  2 (d) T  
a k a k
48. A block of mass m, attached to a fixed position O on a
smooth inclined wedge of mass M, oscillates with
amplitude A and linear frequency f. The wedge is located
1 k 1 4k on a rough horizontal surface. If the angle of the wedge is
(a) (b) 60°, then the force of friction acting on the wedge is given
2 4M 2 M
by (coefficient of static friction = )

1 k 1 7k
(c) (d)
2 7M 2 M

46. m1 and m2 are connected with a light inextensible string

with m1 lying on smooth table and m2 hanging as shown
in figure. m1 is also connected to a light spring which is
initially unstretched and the system is released from rest (a)  (M + m) g

1
(b) m2 A sin t
2

(c)   M  m  2 A sin t

 3 2 
(d)   M  m  g  2 m A sin t 
 
OSCILLATION & WAVES 128

49. In the figure, the block of mass m, attached to the springs 52. A wooden cube (density of wood d) of side l floats in a
of stiffness k is in contact with the completely elastic wall, liquid of density  with its upper and lower surfaces
and the compression in the spring is x. The spring is horizontal. If the cube is pushed slightly down and
compressed further by x by displacing the block towards released, it performs simple harmonic motion of period T.
left and is then released. If the collision between the block Then T is equal to
and the wall is completely elastic then the time period of
oscillations of the block will be :  d
(a) 2 (b) 2
  d  g g

 d
(c) 2 (d) 2
dg   d  g
2 m m 53. The friction coefficient between two blocks of masses 1
(a) (b) 2
3 k k kg and 4 kg shown in figure is  and the horizontal plane
surface is smooth. If the system is slight displaced from
 m  m the mean position and released, it will execute SHM. The
(c) (d)
3 k 6 k maximum amplitude for which the upper block does not
slip relative to the lower will be –(K is spring constant)
50. A uniform cylinder of length L and mass M having cross-
sectional area A is suspended with its length vertical from
a fixed point by a light spring such that it is half submerged
in a liquid of density  at equilibrium position. When the
cylinder is given a small downward push and released it
starts oscillating with small amplitudes. If the spring has a
force constant k, then its time period of oscillations will be

M M
(a) T  2 (b) T  2 5 g g
Ag k (a) (b)
K K

3 g 2 g
M (c) (d)
(c) T  2 (d) none of these K K
k  Ag
54. A mass M = 5 kg is attached to a spring a shown in the
51. One end of a spring of force constant k is fixed to a vertical figure and held in position, so that the spring remains
wall and the other to a block of mass m resting on a smooth unstretched. The spring constant is 200 N/m. The mass M
horizontal surface. There is another wall at a distance x 0 is, then released and begins to undergo small oscillations.
from the black. The spring is then compressed by 2x 0 The amplitude of oscillation is
and released. The time taken to strike the wall is

2x0 x0

1 k k
(a)  (b)
6 m m

(a) 0.5 m (b) 0.25 m

2 m  k
(c) (d) (c) 0.2 m (d) 0.1 m
3 k 4 m
OSCILLATION & WAVES 129

55. A spring has a natural length of 50 cm and a force constant 60. The ratio of frequencies of two pendulums are 2 : 3, then
of 2.0 × 103 Nm–1. A body of mass 10 kg is suspended from their length are in ratio
it and the spring is stretched. If the body is pulled down to (a) 2/3 (b) 3/ 2
a length of 58 cm and released, it executes simple harmonic
motion. What is the net force on the body when it is at its 4 9
(c) (d)
9 4
lowermost position of its oscillation ? (Take g = 10 ms–2)
(a) 20 N (b) 40 N 61. In a seconds pendulum, mass of the bob is 30 g. If it is
(c) 60 N (d) 80 N replaced by 90 g mass then its time period will be
56. A spring of force constant 200 N/m is mounted as shown (a) 1 s (b) 2 s
in figure and a mass 2 kg is attached to the free end. If the
(c) 4 s (d) 3 s
system is given an initial displacement of 0.05 m and an
initial velocity of 2 m/sec, find the amplitude of simple 62. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum of length
harmonic motion. L suspended from the roof of a vehicle which moves
without friction down an inclined plane of inclination ,
is given by

L L
(a) 2 (b) 2
g cos  g sin 

(a) 0.4 m (b) 0.206 m L L

(c) 2 (d) 2
(c) 0.3 m (d) 0.5 m g g tan 
57. The mass and diameter of a planet are twice those of
earth. The period of oscillation of pendulum on this planet 63. In case of a simple pendulum, time period versus length is
will be (If it is a second’s pendulum on earth) depicted by

1
(a) sec (b) 2 2 sec
2

1
(c) 2 sec (d) sec (a) (b)
2
58. A man measures the period of a simple pendulum inside a
stationary lift and finds it to be T sec. If the lift accelerates
upwards with an acceleration g / 4 , then the period of the
pendulum will be

Pendulum
(c) (d)
Lift

64. A simple pendulum has time period T = 2 s is air. If whole

(a) T (b) T/4
arrangement is placed in nonviscous liquid whose density
2T
(c) (d) 2T 5 is 1/2 times the density of bob. The time period in the
5
liquid will be :
59. The length of second’s pendulum of the earth is about 1
m. What should be the length of second’s pendulum on
2
the moon ? (a) s (b) 4 s
2
1
(a) 1 m (b) m
6 (c) 2 2 s (d) 4 2 s
(c) 6 m (d) 36 m
OSCILLATION & WAVES 130

65. A horizontal rod of mass m and length L is pivoted smoothly 68. The displacement equation of a particle is
at one end. The rod’s other end is supported by a spring x = 3 sin 2t + 4 cos 2t
of force constant k. The rod is rotated (in vertical plane) The amplitude and maximum velocity will be respectively
(a) 5, 10 (b) 3, 2
by a small angle  from its horizontal equilibrium position
(c) 4, 2 (d) 3, 4
and released. The angular frequency of the subsequent
69. The equation of a SHM is given by x = 3 sin 5t + 4cos 5t,
simple harmonic motion is
where x is in cm and time t is in seconds. Find the phase
constant of the motion.
(a) 45° (b) 30°
(c) 53.1° (d) 60°
70. A particle undergoing SHM has the equation : x = A sin (t + ),
where x represents the displacement of the particle. The
kinetic energy oscillates with time period
2 
(a) (b)
 
4
(c) (d) none of these

3k k 71. The potential energy of a particle of mass 1 kg in motion
(a) (b) along the x–axis is given by : U = 4 (1 – cos 2x) J
m 3m
Here x is in metres. The period of small oscillations (in sec)
is:
3k 3g k
(c)  (d) (a) 2  (b) 
m 2L m
(c) /2 (d) 2
66. A uniform rod of length L is suspended from a point P and 72. A rectangular block of mass m and area of cross-section A
is made to undergo small oscillations. Time period of floats in a liquid of density . If it is given small vertical
oscillation is (O is centre of mass) : displacement from equilibrium, it undergoes oscillation with
a time period T, then
(a) T  m (b) T 

1 1
(c) T  (d) T 
A 
73. A U tube of uniform bore of cross-sectional area A has
been set up vertically with open ends facing up. Now M
gm of a liquid of density d is poured into it. The column of
liquid in this tube will oscillate with a period T such that
3L L M MA
(a) 2 (b) 2 (a) T  2 (b) T  2
g g g gd

7L L
(c) 2 (d) 2 M M
12 g 12 g (c) T  2 (d) T  2
gdA 2 Adg
67. The motion of a particle is given x = A sin t + B cos t. 74. The metallic bob of a simple pendulum has the relative
The motion of the particle is density . The time period of this pendulum is T. If the
(a) not simple harmonic metallic bob is immersed in water, then the new time period
(b) simple harmonic with amplitude A + B is given by
 1 
 A  B (a) T  (b) T   1
(c) simple harmonic with amplitude
2
 1 
(d) simple harmonic with amplitude A 2  B2 (c) T  (d) T   1
OSCILLATION & WAVES 131

75. One end of a spring of force constant K is fixed to a vertical

wall and the other to a body of mass m resting on a smooth
horizontal surface. There is another wall at a distance x0
from the body. The spring is then compressed by 3x0 and
released. The time taken to strike the wall from the instant
–1
of release is (given sin (1/3) = (/9))

 m 2 m m1g
(a) (b) (a) the amplitude of oscillation is
6 K 3 K k
 m1  m 2  g
 m 11 m (b) the amplitude of oscillation is
(c) (d) k
4 K 18 K
k
76. A mass m is suspended from a spring of force constant k (c) the system oscillates with angular frequency m2
and just touches another identical spring fixed to the floor
as shown in the figure. The time period of small oscillations (d) the system oscillates with angular frequency
is k
 m1  m 2 
79. A particle is subjected to two simple harmonic motions
along x and y directions according to x = 3 sin 100 t; y
= 4sin 100 t
(a) Motion of particle will be on ellipse travelling in
clockwise direction.
m m m (b) Motion of particle will be on a straight line with slope
(a) 2 (b)   4/3.
k k k/2
(c) Motion will be simple harmonic motion with
m m m amplitude 5.
(c)  (d)  
3k / 2 k 2k (d) Phase difference between two motions is /2.
Multiple Correct Options 80. A rectangular block of mass m and area of cross section A
77. A coin is placed on a horizonatal platform, which floats on a liquid of density . If it is given a small
undergoes vertical simple harmonic motion of angular displacement, it oscillates with a period T, then
frequency . The amplitude of oscillation is gradually
increased. The coin will leave contact with the platform (a) T  m (b) T  
for the first time
(a) at the highest position of the platform 1 1
(c) T  (d) T 
(b) at the mean position of the platform A r
2
(c) for an amplitude of g/ 81. The potential energy of a particle of mass 0.1 kg, moving
along the x-axis, is given by U = 5x(x – 4) J, where x is in
(d) for an amplitude of g/
meter. It can be concluded that
78. Two masses m1 and m2 are suspended together by a light
(a) the particle is acted upon by a constant force.
spring of spring constant k as shown in the figure. When
the system is in equilibrium, the mass m1 is removed (b) the speed of the particle is maximum at x = 2 m.
without disturbing the system, as a result of this removal (c) the particle executes SHM.
mass m2 performs simple harmonic motion. For this
(d) the period of oscillation of the particle is (/5) s.
situation mark the correct statement(s).
OSCILLATION & WAVES 132

82. The angular frequency of the damped oscillator is given Passage - 2

Using the following passage, solve Q. 87 to 89
k r2 
by,    
 m 4m 2  where k is the spring constant, m A small block of mass m is fixed at upper end of a massive
  vertical spring of spring constant k = 4 mg/L and natural
is the mass of the oscillator and r is the damping constant. length ‘10L’. The lower end of spring is free and is at a
height L from fixed horizontal floor as shown. The spring
r2 is initially unstressed and the spring-block system is
If the ratio is 8%, the change in time period compared
mk released from rest in the shown position.
to the undamped oscillator is approximately as follows:
(a) increases by 8% (b) decreases by 8%
(c) increases by 1% (d) decrease by 1%
83. A body is in simple harmonic motion with time period half
second (T = 0.5 s) and amplitude one cm (A = 1 cm). Find
the average velocity in the interval in which it moves
87. At the instant the speed of block is maximum, the
from equilibrium position to half of its amplitude.
magnitude of force exerted by the spring on the block is
(a) 6 cm/s (b) 4 cm/s
(c) 16 cm/s (d) 12 cm/s mg
(a) (b) mg
2
Comprehension Type Questions
(c) zero (d) None of these
Passage - 1
88. As the block is coming down, the maximum speed attained
Using the following passage, solve Q. 84 to 86 by the block is
One end of an ideal spring is fixed to a wall at origin O and
the axis of spring is parallel to x-axis . A block of mass m = (a) gL
1 kg is attached to free end of the spring and it is performing
SHM. Equation of position of the block in co-ordinate (b) 3gL
system shown in figure is x = 10 + 3 sin (10 t), where t is in
second and x in cm. 3
(c) gL
2
Another block of mass M = 3 kg, moving towards the
origin with velocity 30 cm/s collides with the block
performing SHM at t = 0 and gets stuck to it. 3
(d) gL
2
89. Till the block reaches its lowest position for the first time,
the time duration for which the spring remains
compressed is

L L 1
84. Angular frequency of oscillation after collision is (a)   sin 1
2g 4g 3
(a) 20 rad/s (b) 5 rad/s
(c) 100 rad/s (d) 50 rad/s
 L L 1
85. New amplitude of oscillation is (b)  sin 1
4 g 4g 3
(a) 3 cm (b) 20 cm
(c) 10 cm (d) 100 cm L L 2
(c)   sin 1
86. New equation for position of the combined body is 2g 4g 3
(a) (10 + 3 sin 5t) cm (b) (10 – 3 sin 5t) cm
(c) (10 + 3 cos 10 t) cm (d) (10 – 3 cos 10t) cm  L L 2
(d)  sin 1
2 2g 4g 3
OSCILLATION & WAVES 133

Passage - 3 94. Velocity of the block as a function of time can be

expressed as
Using the following passage, solve Q. 90 to 94

A 100 g block is connected to a horizontal massless spring (a) v  48sin 16t   cm / s
of force constant 25.6 N/m. As shown in figure (a), the  2
block is free to oscillate on a horizontal frictionless surface. 
The block is displaced 3 cm from the equilibrium position (b) v  48sin 16t   cm / s
 3
and, at t = 0, it is released from rest at x= 0. It executes
simple harmonic motion with the positive x-direction  
(c) v  56sin  16t   cm / s
indicated in figure (a).  4
The position-time(x-t) graph of motion of the block is as  
shown in figure (b). (d) v  56sin  16t   cm / s
 6

Match the Following

95. Two particles ‘A’ and ‘B’ start SHM at t = 0. Their positions
as function of time are given by
XA = A sin t
XB = A sin t + /3)
Column I Column II

(a) Minimum time when x is same (p)
3

(b) Minimum time when velocity is same (q)


(c) Minimum time after which (r)
2
vA < 0 and vB < 0
5
90. When the block is at position A on the graph, its (d) Minimum time after which (s)
6
(a) position and velocity both are negative xA < 0 and xB < 0
(b) position is positive and velocity is negative 96. A simple harmonic oscillator consists of a block attached
(c) position is negative and velocity is positive to a spring with k = 200 N/m. The block slides on a
(d) position and velocity both the positive. frictionless horizontal surface, with equilibrium point x =
91. When the block is at position B on the graph, its 0. A graph of the block’s vleocity v as a function of time t
(a) position and velocity are positive is shown. Correctly match the required information in
(b) position is positive and velocity is negative 2
Column I with the values given in Column II (use  = 10):
(c) position in negative and velocity is positive
(d) position and velocity are negative
92. When the block is at position C on the graph, its
(a) velocity is maximum and acceleration is zero
(b) velocity is minimum and acceleration is zero
(c) velocity is zero and acceleration is negative
(d) velocity is zero and acceleration is positive
93. Position of the block as a function of time can now be Column I Column II
expressed as (a) The block’s mass in kg (p) –200
(b) The block’s displacement (q) 0.20
    at t = 0 in metres
(a) x  3cos 16t   cm (b) x  3cos 16t   cm
 2  3 (c) The block’s acceleration (r) 4.0
2
at t = 0.10s in m/s
    (d) The block’s maximum (s) –0.20
(c) x  3.5cos 16t   cm (d) x  3.2cos 16t   cm
 6  4  kinetic energy in joules
OSCILLATION & WAVES 134

WAVES a
101. An equation of plane progressive wave y = sin
Single Correct Options 

97. A mass m is suspended at the end of a massless wire of 2  x 

 t   . If maximum velocity of particle and velocity
length L and cross-sectional area A. If Y is the Young’s 3  b
modulus of the material of the wire, the frequency of
oscillations along the vertical line is given by a
of wave are equal. Now will be
b
1 mL
(a) f  2 3
2 YA (a) (b)
3 2
1 YL 1
(b) f  (c) (d) none of these.
2 mA 2
102. A transverse wave is represented by the equation
1 AL 2 (vt – x) for what value of the maximum
(c) f  y  y 0 sin 
2 Ym 
particle velocity is equal to two times the wave velocity?
1 YA
(d) f  y 0
2 mL (a)   (b) y0
2
98. The amplitude of a wave disturbance propagating along
2y 0
1 (c) = 2y0 (d)  
positve x-axis is given by y  at t = 0 and 2
1 x2
103. Transverse waves are produced in a long string by
1 attaching its free end to a vibrating tuning fork. Figure
y at t = 2 s where x and y are in metres. The
1  (x  1) 2 below shows the shape of a part of string. Which pairs of
shape of the wave disturbance does not change with time. points are in phase?
The velocity of the wave is
(a) 0.5 m/s (b) 1 m/s
(c) 2 m/s (d) 4 m/s
99. The distance between two consecutive crests in a wave
train produced in string is 5 cm. If two complete waves
pass through any point per second, the velocity of the
wave is (a) A and D (b) B and E
(a) 10 cm/s (b) 2.5 cm/s (c) C and F (d) A and G
(c) 5 cm/s (d) 15 cm/s 104. When a wave travels in a medium, the particle
displacements are given by y (x, t) = 0.03 sin  (2t – 0.01 x)
100. A equation of plane progressive wave y = a sin ( t + kx).
where y and x are in meters and t in seconds.
Its wrong statement is
The wave length of the wave is
2 (a) 10 m (b) 20 m
(a) is wave length
k (c) 100 m (d) 200 m
 105. Transverse wave of amplitude 10 cm is generated at one
(b) is velocity of wave end (x = 0) of a long string by a tuning fork of frequency
k
500 Hz. At a certain instant of time, the displacement of a
 particle A at x = 100 cm is – 5 cm and of particle B at x = 200
(c) is frequency of wave cm is + 5 cm. What is the wave length of the wave?
2
k (a) 2 m (b) 3 m
(d) is maximum velocity of particle (c) 4 m (d) 5 m

OSCILLATION & WAVES 135

106. A source of sound vibrates according to the equation 113. The speed of sound in oxygen (O2) at a certain temperature
–1 –1
y = 0.05 cos  t. It sends out waves of velocity 1.5 ms . is 460 ms . The speed of sound in helium (He) at the same
The wave length of the waves is temperature will be (assume both gases to be ideal) (2008)
–1 –1
(a) 1.5 m (b) 3.0 m (a) 330 ms (b) 460 ms
–1 –1
(c) 4.5 m (d) 6.0 m (c) 500 ms (d) 1420 ms
107. A progressive wave in a medium is represented by the 114. The speed of sound in a gas is v and the root mean square
speed of gas molecules is vrmsIf the ratio of the specific
5
equation y = 0.1 sin 10 t  x  where y and x are in heats of the gas  = 1.5, then the ratio of speed of sound
 11  to vrms is
cm and t in seconds. The maximum speed of a particle of
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 2
the medium due to the wave is
–1 –1
(a) 1 cm s (b) 10 cm s (c) 1: 3 (d) 1 : 3
–1 –1
(c)  cms (d) 10  cms 115. Under the same conditions of pressure and temperature,
108. The potential energy of a particle executing simple the velocity of sound in oxygen and hydrogen gases are
harmonic motion at a distance x from the equilibrium v0 and vH then :
position is proportional to (a) vH = 2v0 (b) vH = 4v0
(a) (b) x (c) v0 = 4vH (d) vH = v0
x
(c) x
2
(d) x
3 116. If the temperature of the gaseous medium drops by 1%,
the velocity of sound in that medium :
5  x (a) increase by 5% (b) remains unchanged
109. The equation of wave y  sin  t   where
2  2 (c) decreases by 0.5% (d) decreases by 2%
displacement is in cm and time in sec. The phase angle 117. The velocity of sound through a diatomic gaseous medium
between two particles at distance 12 cm is of molecular weight M at 0°C :
0
(a) 6 (b) 6 radian
R 3R
(c) 3
0
(d) 3 radian (a) (b)
M M
110. The particle displacement in a travelling harmonic wave is
given by y (x, t) = 2.0 cos 2  (10t – 0.008x + 0.35) where x 382 R 273 R
(c) (d)
and y are in centimetres and t is in seconds. What is the M M
phase difference between oscillatory motion at two point 118. Two periodic waves of amplitudes a and b pass through a
separated by a distance of 4 m? region at the same in the same direction. If a > b, the
(a) 0.2  (b) 6.4  difference in the maximum and minimum possible
amplitudes is :
(c) 0.6  (d) 0.8 
(a) a + b (b) a – b
111. Transverse waves of the same frequency are generated in (c) 2 a (d) 2 b
two steel wires A and B. The diameter of A is twice that of 119. The extension in a string, obeying Hookes’ law, is x. The
B and the tension in A is half that in B. The ratio of the speed of the wave in the stretched string is v. If the extension
velocities of waves in A and B is in the string is increased to 1.5 x, the speed of the wave in
the string will be
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 2
(a) 1.22 v (b) 0.61 v
(c) 1 : 2 2 (d) 3 : 2 2 (c) 1.50 v (d) 0.75 v
112. The velocity of sound in air is 332 m/s. If the air consits of 120. A uniform rope of mass 0.1 kg and length 2.45 m hangs
nitrogen and oxygen in the ratio 4 : 1, the velocity of sound from a ceiling. The time taken by a transverse wave to
2
in oxygen is travel the full length of the rope is (g = 9.8 m/s )
(a) 1 s (b) 2 s
(a) 372 m/s (b) 278 m/s
(c) 3 s (d) 4 s
(c) 418 m/s (d) 315 m/s
OSCILLATION & WAVES 136

–8 –2
121. A sound has an intensity of 2 × 10 Wm . Its intensity
level in decibels is : (log10 2 = 0.3)  x
129. A wave is incident on fixed target as y= 5sin 2   t   ,
(a) 23 (b) 4.3  2
(c) 43 (d) none of these
the equation of reflected wave through rigid target
122. Two waves represented by the following equations are
travelling in the same medium  x
y1 = 5 sin 2 (75t – 0.25 x), (a) y = –5 sin 2  t  
 2
y2 = 10 sin 2 (150 t – 0.50 x)

I1  x
The intensity ratio I of the two waves is : (b) y = +5 sin 2  t  
2  2
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4
(c) 1 : 8 (d) 1 : 16  x
(c) y = +5 sin 2  t  
123. The intensity level of a sound wave is 4 dB. If the intensity  2
of the wave is doubled, then the intensity level of the
sound, as expressed in dB, would be :
 x
(a) 8 (b) 16 (d) y = –5 sin 2  t  
 2
(c) 7 (d) 14
124. Two sound waves of the same frequency have respective 130. Two loudspeakers A and B, 1.0 m apart, produce sound waves
amplitudes of 3 units and 1 unit and are travelling in of the same wavelength and in the same phase. A sensitive
opposite directions in the same straight line. At a particular sound detector, moving along PQ, parallel to line AB, 2.4 m
place in that line, the resultant wave will vary in loudness. away, detects maximum sound at P (on the perpendicular
The ratio maximum loudness/minimum loudness is
bisector of AB) and another maximum sound when it first
(a) 9/1 (b) 6/1
reaches Q directly opposite to B, as shown in Figure. What is
(c) 9/2 (d) 2/1
the wavelength of sound emitted by the speakers ?
125. A sound absorber attenuates the sound level by 20 dB.
The intensity decreases by a factor of
(a) 100 (b) 1000
(c) 10000 (d) 10
2 2
126. Two sounds waves have intensties 100W/m and 400W/m
respectively. The later sound is
(a) 6 decibel louder than the other
(b) 4 decibel louder than the other
(c) 0.6 decibel louder than the other
(a) 0.1 m (b) 0.2 m
(d) data’s are insufficient.
127. The power of a sound from the speaker of a radio is 20 (c) 0.3 m (d) 0.4 m
mW. By turning the knob of the volume control, the power 
of the sound is increased to 400 mW. The power increase 131. When two sound waves with a phase difference of ,
2
in decibels as compared to the original power is
and each having amplitude A and frequency , are
(a) 13.0 dB (b) 10 dB
superimposed on each other, then the maximum amplitude
(c) 20 dB (d) 8000 dB
and frequency of resultant wave is :
128. A bat flying above a lake emits ultrasonic sound of 100
kHz. When this wave falls on the water surface, it is partly A  A
reflected and partly transmitted. What are the wavelengths (a) : (b) :
2 2 2
of the reflected and transmitted waves? The speed of
–1 –1
sound in air is 340 ms and in water 1450 ms .

(a) 6.8 mm and 2.9 cm (b) 3.4 mm and 7.8 mm (c) 2 A; (d) 2A :
2
(c) 3.4 mm and 14.5 mm (d) 6.8 mm and 1.45 cm
OSCILLATION & WAVES 137

132. Two waves are passing through a region in the same 138. The fundamental frequency of sonometer wire is 600 Hz
st
direction at the same time. If the equation of these waves when length of wire is short by 25%. Now frequency of 1
are : overtone will be
(a) 800 Hz (b) 1200 Hz
2
y1  a sin  vt  x  (c) 1600 Hz (d) 2000 Hz

139. The length of sonometer wire is 1.8 m. What is wavelength
2 of wave when number of nodes are 10
y 2  b sin  vt  x   x 0 
  (a) 20 cm (b) 36 cm
(c) 40 cm (d) 72 cm
 140. The length of a sonometer wire AB is 110 cm. Where should
then the amplitude of the resultant wave for x 0  , is :
2 the two bridges be placed from A, to divide the wire in 3
(a) | a – b | (b) (a + b) segments whose fundamental frequencies are in the ratio
of 1 : 2 : 3?
(c) zero (d) a 2  b2 (a) 30 cm, 60 cm (b) 40 cm, 80 cm
133. A string fixed at both ends is vibrating in the lowest mode (c) 60 cm, 90 cm (d) 30 cm, 90 cm
of vibration for which a point at quarter of its length from 141. The total length of a sonometer wire between fixed ends
one end is a point of maximum displacement. The is 110 cm. Two bridges are placed to divide the length of
frequency of vibration in this mode is 100 Hz. What will be wire in ratio 6 : 3 : 2. The tension in the wire is 400 N and
the frequency emitted when it vibrates in the next mode the mass per unit length is 0.01 kg/m. What is the minimum
such that this point is again a point of maximum common frequency with which three parts can vibrate ?
displacement ? (a) 1100 Hz (b)100 Hz
(a) 400 Hz (b) 200 Hz (c) 166 Hz (d) 1000 Hz
(c) 600 Hz (d) 300 Hz 142. Figure shows a stationary wave between two fixed point P
134. A string is stretched between fixed points separated by 75 cm. and Q. Which point(s) of 1,2 and 3 are in phase with the
It is observed to have resonant frequencies of 420 Hz and point X ?
315 Hz. There are no other resonant frequencies between
these two. Then, the lowest resonant frequency for this
string is
(a) 10.5 Hz (b) 105 Hz (a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2 only
(c) 1.05 Hz (d) 1050 Hz (c) 2 and 3 only (d) 3 only
135. Two stretched strings of same material are vibrating under 143. Particle displacements (in cm) in a standing wave are given by
the same tension in fundamental mode. The ratio of their y (x, t) = 2 sin (0.1  x) cos (100  t).
frequencies is 1 : 2 and ratio of the length of the vibrating The distance between a node and the next anti–node is
segments is 1 : 4. Then the ratio of the radii of the strings is : (a) 2.5 cm (b) 5.0 cm
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 7.5 cm (d) 10.0 cm
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 8 : 1 144. Two parts of a sonometer wire, divided by a movable knife–
edge, differ in length by 1 cm and produce 1 beat per second
136. A string of length 1 m has the mass per unit length 0.1 g
–1 when sounded together. If the total length of the wire is 100
cm . What would be the fundamental frequency of
cm, the frequencies of the two parts of the wire are
vibrating of this string under tension of 400 N ?
(a) 51 Hz, 50 Hz (b) 50.5 Hz, 49.5 Hz
(a) 400 Hz (b) 100 Hz
(c) 49 Hz, 48 Hz (d) 49.5 Hz, 48.5 Hz
(c) 50 Hz (d) 200 Hz 145. A tuning fork of frequency 340 Hz is sounded above a
137. Four wires of identical length, diameters and of the same cylindrical tube 1 m high. Water is slowly poured into the
–1
material are stretched on a sonometre wire. If the ratio of tube. If the speed of sound is 340 ms , at what levels of
their tensions is 1 : 4 : 9 : 16, then the ratio of their water in the tube will the sound of the fork be appreciably
fundamental frequencies are : intensified?
(a) 16 : 9 : 4 : 1 (b) 4 : 3 : 2 : 1 (a) 25 cm, 75 cm (b) 20 cm, 80 cm
(c) 1 : 4 : 2 : 16 (d) 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 (c) 15 cm, 85 cm (d) 17 cm, 83 cm
OSCILLATION & WAVES 138

146. An organ pipe closed at one end is excited to support the 154. An organ pipe P1, closed at one end vibrating in its first
third overtone. It is found that air in the pipe has harmonic and another pipe P2, open at both ends vibrating
(a) 3 nodes and 3 antinodes in its third harmonic, are in resonance with a given tuning
(b) 3 nodes and 4 antinodes fork. The ratio of the lengths of P1 and P2 is
(c) 4 nodes and 3 antinodes
8 1
(d) 4 nodes and 4 antinodes (a) (b)
3 6
147. Two organ pipes A and B are closed and open respectively.
Third overtone of each are unison. The ratio of their length is
1 1
(a) 8/7 (b) 7/8 (c) (d)
2 3
(c) 7/4 (d) 4/7
148. The fundamental frequency of open organ pipe is f when 155. Two closed pipes produce 10 beats/s when emitting their
it filled with one–fourth length with water now frequency fundamental nodes. If their length are in ratio of 25 : 26.
will be Then their fundamental frequency in Hz, are :
(a) f (b) f / 3 (a) 270, 280 (b) 260, 270
(c) 2f/3 (d) 4f/3 (c) 260, 250 (d) 260, 280
149. Two organ pipes, each closed at one end, give 5 beats per 156. A weight is attached to the free end of a sonometer wire. It
second when emitting their fundamental notes. If their gives resonance at a length 40 cm when it is resonaced with
lengths are in the ratio of 50 : 51, their fundamental a tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz. The weight is then
frequencies (in Hz) are
immersed wholly in water, the resonant length is reduced to
(a) 250, 255 (b) 255, 260
30 cm. The relative density in which weight suspended is
(c) 260, 265 (d) 265, 270
150. Standing waves are produced by the superposition of two 16 16
(a) (b)
waves y1 = 0.05 sin (3  t – 2x) and y2 = 0.05 sin (3  t + 2x) 9 7
where x and y are expressed in metres and t is in seconds.
What is the amplitude of a particle at x = 0.5 m. Given cos 16 16
0
(57.3 ) = 0.54 (c) (d)
5 3
(a) 2.7cm (b) 5.4 cm
157. Two tuning forks A and B produce 10 beats per second
(c) 8.1 cm (d) 10.8 cm
when sounded together. On slightly loading fork A with a
151. A pipe of length 20 cm is open at both ends. Which
little wax, it was observed that 15 beats are heard per second.
harmonic mode of the pipe is resonantly excited by a 1700
Hz source? The speed of sound = 340 ms .
–1 If the frequency of fork B is 480 Hz, what is the frequency of
(a) First harmonic (b) Second harmonic fork A before it was loaded?
(c) Third harmonic (d) Fourth harmonic (a) 465 Hz (b) 470 Hz
152. A knife–edge divides a sonometer wire into two parts. (c) 490Hz (d) 495 Hz
The fundamental frequencies of the two parts are f1 and f2. 158. Nine tuning forks are arranged in order of increasing
The fundamental frequency of the sonometer wire when frequency. Each tuning fork produces 4 beats per second
the knife–edge is removed will be when sounded with either of its neighbours. If the
1 frequency of the 9th tuning fork is twice that of the first,
(a) f1 + f2 (b) (f1  f 2 ) what is the frequency of the first tuning fork?
2
(a) 32 Hz (b) 40 Hz
f1 f 2
(c) f1f 2 (d) f  f (c) 48 Hz (d) 56 Hz
1 2
159. A tuning fork produces 4 beats per second when sounded
153. A tube closed at one end containing air, produces, when with a sonometer of vibrating length 48 cm. It produces 4
excited, the fundamental note of frequency 512 Hz. If the beats per second also when the vibrating length is 50 cm.
tube is open at both ends, the fundamental frequency that What is the frequency of the tuning fork?
can be excited is (in Hz) (a) 196 Hz (b) 284 Hz
(a) 1024 (b) 512 (c) 375 Hz (d) 460 Hz
(c) 256 (d) 128
OSCILLATION & WAVES 139

160. 1 = 100 cm, 2 = 99 cm and velocity of sound = 396 m/s. 167. Two trains, one coming towards and another going away
The number beats (in Hz) are : from an observer both with the speed of 4 m/s, produces
(a) 4 (b) 2 whistle simultaneously of frequency 300 Hz. Find the
(c) 3 (d) 1 number of beats produced (V = 330 m/s).

161. Following two wave trains are approaching each other : (a) 5 (b) 6
(c) 7 (d) 12
y1 = a sin 2000 t
168. A metal wire of diameter 1 mm is held on two knife edges
y2 = a sin 2008 t
separated by a distance of 50 cm. The tension in the wire
The number of beats heard per second is :
is 100 N. The wire vibrating with its fundamental frequency
(a) 8 (b) 4 and a vibrating tuning fork together produce 5 beats per
(c) 1 (d) zero second. The tension in the wire is then reduced to 81 N.
162. A tuning fork of frequency 480 Hz produces 10 beat/s, When the two are excited, beats are heard at the same rate.
when sounded with a vibrating sonometer string. What What is the frequency of the fork?
must be frequency of the string, if a slight increase in (a) 90 Hz (b) 95 Hz
tension produces more beats per sec then before ? (c) 100 Hz (d) 105 Hz
(a) 460 Hz (b) 470 Hz 169. Two whistles A and B have frequencies 660 Hz and 590 Hz
(c) 480 Hz (d) 490 Hz respectively. An observer is standing in the middle of line
163. When two tuning forks A and B are sounded together, x joining the two sources. Source B and observer are moving
beats/sec are heard. Frequency of A is n. Now, when one towards right with velocity 30 m/s and A is standing to the
prong of fork B is loaded with a little wax, the number of left side. If the velocity of sound in air is 300 m/s. The
beats decreases. The frequency of fork B is : number of beats/second listened by the observer are :
(a) n + x (b) n – x (a) 8 (b) 6
(c) n + 2x (d) n – 2x (c) 4 (d) 2
164. A tuning fork of frequency 100 when sound together with 170. A closed organ pipe and an open organ pipe of same length
another tuning fork of unknown frequency produces 2 produce 2 beats when they are set into vibrations
beats/s. On loading the tuning fork whose frequency is simultaneously in their fundamental mode. The length of
not known and sounded together with the same tuning open organ pipe is now halved and of closed organ pipe is
fork produces one beat, then the frequency of the unknown doubled. The number of beats produced will be :
tuning fork is : (a) 8 (b) 7
(a) 102 (b) 98 (c) 4 (d) 2
(c) 99 (d) 101 171. A source of sound is travelling towards a stationary
165. An unknown tuning fork sounded together with a tuning observer. The frequency of sound heard by the observed
fork of frequency 256 emits two beats. On loading tuning is of three times the original frequency. The velocity of
fork of frequency 256, the number of beats heard is 1/s. sound is v m/s. The speed of source will be
The frequency of unknown tuning fork is :
2
(a) 257 (b) 258 (a) f (b) f
3
(c) 256 (d) 254
166. An organ pipe, open from both ends produces 5 beats/s 3
(c) f (d) 3 f
when vibrated with a source of frequency 200 Hz in its 2
fundamental mode. The second harmonic of the same pipe
172. An observer moves towards a stationary source of sound
produces 10 beats/s with a source of frequency 420 Hz.
with a velocity one–tenth the velocity of sound. The
The fundamental frequency of pipe is :
apparent increase in frequency is
(a) 195 Hz (b) 205 Hz
(a) zero (b) 5%
(c) 190 Hz (d) 210 Hz
(c) 10% (d) 0.1%
OSCILLATION & WAVES 140

173. A train standing at a certain distance from a railway Multiple Answer Type Question
platform is blowing a whistle of frequency 500 Hz. If the
–1 179. A wave equation which gives the displacement along Y-
speed of sound is 340 ms , the frequency and wavelength
direction is given by
of the sound of the whistle heard by a man running
–4
–1
towards the engine with a speed of 10 ms respectively y = 10 sin(60 t + 2x)
are where x and y are in metres and t is time in seconds. This
(a) 500 Hz, 0.7 m (b) 500 Hz, 0.68 m represents a wave
(c) 486 Hz, 0.7 m (d) 515 Hz, 0.68 m (a) travelling with a velocity of 30 m/s in the negative x-
direction
174. In the above question a wind starts blowing in the direction
from the engine to the platform with a speed of 10 ms .
–1 (b) of wavelength  metres
The frequency and wavelength of the sound of the whistle (c) of frequency 30/ Hertz
–4
heard by a man standing at the platform will be (d) of amplitude 10 m travelling along the negative x-
(a) 500 Hz, 0.68 m (b) 500 Hz, 0.7m direction.
(c) 486 Hz, 0.7 m (d) 515 Hz, 0.68 m 180. For a transverse wave on a string, the string displacement
175. A train blowing its whistle moves with a constant velocity is described by
u away from the observer on the ground. The ratio of the y = (x, t) = f(x – at)
actual frequency of the whistle to that measured by the where f represents a function and a is a negative constant.
observer is found to be 1.2. If the train is at rest and the Then which of the following is/are correct statment(s)?
observer moves away from it at the same velocity, the (a) Shape of the string at time t = 0 is given by f(x)
ratio would be given by
(b) The shape of wave from does not change as it moves
(a) 0.51 (b) 1.25 along the string
(c) 1.52 (d) 2.05 (c) Wave form moves in +ve x-direction
176. A motorcycle starts from rest and accelerates along a (d) The speed of waveform is a
2
straight line at 2.2 m/s . At the starting point of the
181. A wave moves at a constant speed along a stretched string.
motorcycle, there is a stationary electric siren. How far
Mark the incorrect statement out of the following:
has the motorcycle gone when the driver hears the
(a) Particle speed is constant and equal to the wave speed.
frequency of the siren at 90% of its value when the
–1
motorcycle was at rest ? (Speed of sound in air = 330 ms ) (b) Particle speed is independent of amplitude of the
priodic motion of the source.
(a) 123.75 m (b) 247.5 m
(c) Particle speed is independent of frequency of periodic
(c) 495 m (d) 990 m
motion of the source.
177. A whistle emitting a sound of frequency 440 Hz is tied
(d) Particle speed is dependent on tension and linear mass
to a string of 1.5 m length and rotated with an angular
density the string.
velocity of 20 rad/s in the horizontal plane. Then the
range of frequencies heard by an observer stationed at 182. An observer A is moving directly towards a stationary
a large distance from the whistle will be (Speed of sound sound source while another observer B is moving away
v = 330 m/s) from the source with the same velocity. Which of the
following statments are correct?
(a) 400.0 Hz to 484.0 Hz (b) 403.3 Hz to 480.0 Hz
(a) Average of frequencies recorded by A and B is equal
(c) 400.0 Hz to 480.0 Hz (d) 403.3 Hz to 484.0 Hz
to natural frequency of the source.
178. A car sounding its horn at 480 Hz moves towards a high
–1 (b) Wavelength of wave received by A is less than that of
wall at a speed of 20 m/s. If the speed of sound is 340 m/s ,
waves received by B.
the frequency of the reflected sound heard by the man
sitting in the car will be nearest to (c) Wavelength of waves received by two observers will
be same.
(a) 480 Hz (b) 510 Hz
(c) 540 Hz (d) 570 Hz (d) Both the observers will observe the wave travelling
with same speed.
OSCILLATION & WAVES 141

Integer Type D

183. A body of mass 1kg falls from a height 25cm on to the pan L/4 L/4
of a spring balance. The masses of the pan and spring are L/2
negligible. The spring constant of the spring is 100N/m. A B
Having stuck to the pan the body starts performing
harmonic oscillations in the vertical direction. Find the
amplitude of oscillation (in cm). M M

188. Two narrow cylindrical pipes A and B have the same length.
Pipe A is open at both ends and is filled with a monoatomic
gas of molar mass MA. Pipe B is open at one end and
closed at the other end, and is filled with a diatomic gas of
molar mass MB. Both gases are at the same temperature. If
the frequency of the second harmonic of the fundamental
mode in pipe A is equal to the frequency of the third
184. A pendulum inside an elevator has a time period T1, when
harmonic of the fundamental mode in pipe B, determine
the elevator is at rest; 10s, when the elevator accelerates, –3
the value of MA/MB. (in 10 ).
up; 50 s, when the elevator accelerates down. Determine
T1 in seconds. 189. A “pop” gun consists of a tube 25 cm long closed at one
end by a cork and at the other end by a tighly fitted piston.
185. The cylinder body floats in water and has a mass of The piston is pushed slowly in. When the pressure rises
250kg with a low centre of mass to keep it stable in the to one and half times the atmospheric pressure, the cork is
upright position. Determine the natural frequency  of violently blown out. Calculate the frequency of the “pop”
the body. caused by its ejection. (v = 340 m/s)
ASSERTION AND REASON
(A) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true and reason
D=4m is the correct explanation of the assertion.
250 kg (B) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
water
(C) If ASSERTION is true but REASON is false.

186. A uniform rod PQ of mass 0.1 kg and length 0.12 m can (D) If both ASSERTION and REASON are false.
swing in a vertical plane about A as a pendulum. A particle (E) If ASSERTION is false but REASON is true.
of mass 0.2 kg is attached to the rod at a distance x from
190. Assertion : All oscillatory motions are necessarily periodic
A. Find x such that the period of vibration is minimum.
motion but all periodic motion are not oscillatory.

A Reason : Simple pendulum is an example of oscillatory

P motion.
x=?
(a) A (b) B
(c) C
(d) D (e) E
Q 191. Assertion : When a simple pendulum is made to oscillate
on the surface of moon, its time period increases.
187. A string has a mass 10 g and a length L = 3 m. Its two ends
are tied to two walls at a distance D = 2 m apart. Two Reason : Moon is much smaller as compared to earth.
blocks of mass M = 2 kg each are suspended from the (a) A (b) B
string as shown in figure. In what time in ms will a wave (c) C (d) D
pulse sent from a point A, reach point B ? (e) E
OSCILLATION & WAVES 142

192. Assertion : In extreme position of a particle executing 199. Assertion : Where two vibrating tuning forks having
S.H.M., both velocity and acceleration are zero. frequencies 256 Hz and 512 Hz are held near each other,
Reason : In S.H.M., acceleration always acts towards
beats cannot be heard.
mean position.
(a) A (b) B Reason : The principle of superposition is valid only if
(c) C (d) D the frequencies of the oscillators are nearly equal.
(e) E (a) A (b) B
193. Assertion : Soldiers are asked to break steps while (c) C
crossing the bridge. (d) D (e) E
Reason : The frequency of marching may be equal to the
natural frequency of bridge and may lead to resonance Match the Column
which can break the bridge.
200. Match the column correctly
(a) A (b) B
Column–I Column–II
(c) C (d) D
(e) E (a) The displcement of a (p) increase
194. Assertion : In simple harmonic motion the total energy is particle in simple
proportional to the square of the amplitude. harmonic motion in one
2
Reason : Total energy is given by 1/2 kA time period will
(a) A (b) B (b) The average in one time (q) decrease
(c) C (d) D period in a S.H.M. will
(e) E (c) A spring pendulum (r) zero
195. You are given an assertion and reason.
perform SHM with a
Assertion : Both transverse and longitudinal mechanical
waves can propagate in solids but only longitudinal frequency f. It is taken
mechanical waves can propagate in gases. in a lift slowly accelerating
Reason : Gases cannot withstand a shearing stress; hence upward, the frequency will
they have only bulk modulus. Choose the correct statement (d) A pendulum is suspended (s) remain constant
from the following. from the ceiling of the
(a) A (b) B compartment of a train.
(c) C (d) D When the train is stationary,
(e) E
the time period of the
196. Assertion : Compression and rarefaction involve changes
in density and pressure. pendulum is T. If the train
Reason : When particles are compressed, density of accelerates the time period
medium increases and when they are rarefied, density of of pendulum.
medium decreases. 201. Match the column
(a) A (b) B Column I Column II
(c) C (d) D (A) Wave in solids (P) Transverse only
(e) E (B) electromagnetic waves (Q) Can be transverse
197. Assertion : The phase difference between two medium
or longitudinal
particle having a path difference  is 2  . (C) Longitudinal waves (R) Require a medium
Reason : The phase difference is directly proportional to to propagate
path difference of a particle. (D) Pressure waves (S) Elastic parameters
(a) A (b) B dependent
(c) C (d) D 202. Match the column :
(e) E For the travelling wave
198. Assertion : Sound would travel faster on a hot summer y = 0.02 sin 2 (10t – 5x), (all in SI units)
day than on a cold winter day. Column I Column II
Reason : Velocity of sound is directly proportional to the (A) Speed of wave (P) 10
square of its absolute temperature. (B) Frequency of wave (Q) 0.4 
(a) A (b) B (C) Wavelength of wave (R) 2
(c) C (d) D (D) Maximum particle speed (S) 0.2
(e) E
OSCILLATION & WAVES 143

Comprehension Type 208. What is the displacement of the particle of the string at x
= 50 cm at time t = 0.05 s?
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 203 to Q. 205
Passage – 1 1
(a) cm
The spring shown in figure is unstretched when a man 2
start pulling the block. The mass of the block is M. If the
man exerts a constant force F. (b) 2cm

k F 3
(c) cm
2

2
203. The amplitude and time period of the motion of the block is (d) cm
3
F M F M 209. What is the velocity of this particle at this instant?
(a) , 2 (b) , 2
k k 2k 2k
(a) 10 2  cm/s
2F M
(c) , 2 (d) none of these (b) 40 2  cm/s
k 4k
204. The energy stored in spring when the block passes (c) 30 2  cm /s
through the equilibrium position is
(d) 20 2  cm /s
2F2 F2
(a) (b) Using the following Passage, solve Q. 210 to Q. 212
k k
Passage – 3
F2 F2 A train approaching a hill at a speed of 40 km/hr sounds a
(c) (d)
4k 2k whistle of frequency 580 Hz when it is at a distance of 1 km
205. The kinetic energy of the block at this position is (at from the hill. A wind with a speed of 40 km/hr is blowing in the
equilibrium position) direction of motion of train. Velocity of sound = 1200 km/hr.
210. Find the frequency of the whistle as heard by an observer
F2 F2 on the hill
(a) (b)
2k k (a) 599.33 Hz
(b) 590.33 Hz
2F2 F2
(c) (d) (c) 582.30 Hz
k 4k
(d) 370.22 Hz
Passage - 2 211. What is the distance from the hill at which the echo from
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 206 to Q. 209 the hill is heard by the driver ?
2
A long string having a cross-sectional area 0.80 mm
3
and density 12.5 g/cm is subjected to a tension of 64 N 15
(a) km
along the x-axis. One end (at x = 0) of this string is 16
attached to a vibrator moving in transverse direction at
a frequency of 20 Hz. At, t = 0, the source is at a maximum 20
(b) km
displacement y = 1.0 cm. 31
206. Find the speed of the wave travelling on the string.
17
(a) 20 m/s (b) 10 m/s (c) km
18
(c) 80 m/s (d) 40 m/s
207. Write the equation for the wave. 29
–1 –1 (d) km
(a) y = (1.0 cm) cos[(40 s )t – {(/2m )x}] 30
–1 –1
(b) y = (1.0 cm) cos[(40 s )t + {(/2m )x}] 212. What is the frequency heard by the driver ?
–1 –1
(c) y = (1.0 cm) cos[(40 s )t – {(/4m )x}] (a) 620 Hz (b) 630 Hz
–1 –1
(d) y = (1.0 cm) cos[(40 s )t + {(/4m )x}] (c) 650 Hz (d) 640 Hz
OSCILLATION & WAVES 144

Using the following Passage, solve Q. 213 to Q. 215

Passage – 4
RADAR is the acronym of radio detection and ranging. A
radar detects an enemy aircraft by the use of radio-waves
which are received after reflection. In analogy with plane
mirror reflection, one can take the reflected wave to be
coming from a virtual source. If the reflector is moving
with a speed u, the speed of source relative the receiver
can be 2u. Even when this kind of motion exist with the
source and to the receiver, Doppler’s effect can be applied.
According to Doppler’s effect as a source and an observer
are approaching each other, the apparent frequency f’, of
a signal of frequency f is,

 v  v0 
f 'f 
 v  vs 
Using the elaborated idea solve the following questions:
213. If an aircraft is approaching a given radar with a speed u,
the apparent frequency of f, received by the radar will be
[v – velocity of e.m. wave]

 v   v 
(a) f   (b) f  
vu vu

 v   v 
(c) f   (d) f  
vu  v  2u 
214. The apparent decrease in frequency, if the ari-craft moves
away is
2u u
(a) f (b) f
v v
u 2uf
(c) f (d)
2v v  2u
215. In a detective system, the apparent frequency found with
the source moving with a speed u = 0.8v is f1 and the
source being at rest and the RADAR moving with u = 0.9v
is f2, then
(a) f1 = f2 (b) f1 > f2

8
(c) f1 < f2 (d) f 2  f1
9
OSCILLATION & WAVES 145

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

OSCILLATIONS 5. A simple pendulum has time period T1. The point of
Single Correct Options suspension is now moved upward according to the relation
y = kt2, (k = 1 m/s2) where y is the vertical displacement.
1. The period of oscillation of simple pendulum of length L T12
suspended from the roof of the vehicle which moves The time period now becomes T2. The ratio of is
T22
without friction, down an inclined plane of inclinations ,
is given by : (2000) (Take g = 10 m/s2) (2005)
(a) 6/5 (b)5/6
L L
(a) 2 (b) 2 (c) 1 (d) 4/5
g cos  g sin 
6. The x–t graph of a particle undergoing simple harmonic
L L motion is shown below. The acceleration of the particle at
(c) 2 (d) 2 t = 4/3 s is : (2009)
g g tan 
x
2. A particle executes simple harmonic motion between x = – A (cm)
and x = + A. The time taken for it to go from O to A/2 is t1 1
and to go from A/2 to A is t2, then : (2001)
(a) t1< t2 (b) t1> t2 0 t(s)
4 8 12
(c) t1= t2 (d) t1= 2t2
3. For a particle executing SHM the displacement x given by –1
x = A cos t. Identify the graph which represents the
variation of potential energy (PE) as a function of time t 3 2 2
(a)  cm s 2 (b) cm s2
and displacement x : (2003) 32 32

2 3 2
(c) cm s 2 (d)   cm s 2
32 32
7. A uniform rod of length l and mass M is pivoted at the
centre. Its two ends are attached to two springs of equal
(a) I, III (b) II, IV spring constant k. The springs are fixed to rigid supports
(c) II, III (d) I, IV as shown in the figure, and rod is free to oscillate in the
4. A block P of mass m is placed on a horizontal frictionless horizontal plane. The rod is gently pushed through a small
plane. A second block of same mass m is placed on it and angle  in one direction and released. The frequency of
is connected to a spring of spring constant k, the two oscillation is (2009)
blocks are pulled by a distance A. Block Q oscillates without
slipping. What is the maximum value of frictional force
between the two blocks ? (2004)

k
Q
1 2k 1 k
(a) (b)
P 2 M 2 M

1 6k 1 24k
(a) kA/2 (b) kA (c) (d)
2 M 2 M
(c) s mg (d) zero
OSCILLATION & WAVES 146

8. The mass M shown in the figure oscillates in simple

harmonic motion with amplitude A. The amplitude of the Multiple Correct Option
point P is (2009) 12. Function x  A sin 2 t  Bcos 2 t  C sin t cos t
k1 k2
P represents SHM : (2006)
M
(a) for any value of A, B and C (except C = 0)
k1 A k2 A
(a) k (b) k (b) If A = –B, C = 2 B, amplitude = B 2
2 1

(c) If A = B; C = 0
k1 A k2A
(c) k  k (d) k  k (d) If A = B ; C = 2 B, amplitude = |B|
1 2 1 2

9. A wooden block performs SHM on frictionless surface 13. A metal rod of length L and mass m is pivoted at one end.
with frequency f0. The block carries a charge +Q on its A thin disk of mass M and radius R (< L) is attached at its
 centre of the free end of the rod. Consider two ways the
surface. If now a uniform electric field E is switched-on disc is attached. Case A – the disc is not free to rotate
as shown, then the SHM of the block will be (2011) about its centre and Case B – the disc is free to rotate
E about its centre. The rod-disc system performs SHM in
vertical plane after being released from the same displaced
+Q position. Which of the following statement(s) is/are true ?
(2011)

(a) of the same frequency and with shifted mean position

(b) of the same frequency and with the same mean position
(c) of changed frequency and with shifted mean position
(d) of changed frequency and with the same mean position
10. A point mass is subjected to two simultaneous
sinusoidal displacements in x–direction, x 1 (t) = A

 2 
sin t and x2 (t) = A sin  t   . Adding a third
 3  (a) Restoring torque in case A = Restoring torque in case
sinusoidal displacement x3(t) = B sin (t + ) brings the B
mass to a complete rest. The value of B and  are (2011) (b) Restoring torque in case A < Restoring torque in case
B
3 4
(a) 2 A, (b) A, (c) Angular frequency for case A > Angular frequency for
4 3
case B
5  (d) Angular frequency for case A < Angular frequency for
(c) 3A, (d) A,
6 3 case B
11. Two vehicles, each moving with speed u on the same 14. A horizontal stretched string, fixed at two ends, is vibrating
horizontal straight road, are approaching each other. Wind in its fifth harmonic according to the equation, (2013)
blows along the road with velocity w. One of these vehicles –1 –1
y (x, t) = (0.01m)[sin(62.8 m )x]cos[(628s )t].
blows a whistle of frequency f1. An observer in the other
vehicles hears the frequency of the whistle to be f2. The Assuming  = 3.14, the correct statement(s) is (are)
speed of sound in still air is v. The correct statement (s) is (a) the number of nodes is 5
(are) (2013) (b) the length of the string is 0.25 m
(a) If the wind blows from the observer to the source, f2 > f1
(c) the maximum displacement of the mid-point of the string
(b) If the wind blows from the source to the observer, f2 > f1
from its equilibrium position is 0.01 m
(c) If the wind blows from the observer to the source, f2 < f1
(d) If the wind blows from the source to the observer, f2 < f1 (d) the fundamental frequency is 100 Hz
OSCILLATION & WAVES 147

15. A block with mass M is connected by a massless spring Integer Type

with stiffness constant k to a rigid wall and moves without
17. A mass m is undergoing SHM in the vertical direction
friction on a horizontal surface. The block oscillates with
about the mean position y0 with amplitude A and angular
small amplitude A about an equilibrium position x0.
frequency . At a distance y from the mean position, the
Consider two cases: (i) when the block is at x0; and (ii) mass detaches from the spring. Assume that the spring
when the block is at x = x0 + A . In both the cases, a particle contracts and does not obstruct the motion of m.
with mass m (< M) is softly placed on the block after
which they stick to each other. Which of the following Find the distance y* . (measured from the mean position)
statement(s) is(are) true about the motion after the mass such that the height h attained by the block is maximum.
m is placed on the mass M ? (2016)
 A2
g  (2005)
(a) The amplitude of oscillation in the first case changes

M
by a factor of , whereas in the second case it
mM
remains unchanged
(b) The final time period of oscillation in both the cases is
same
(c) The total energy decreases in both the cases 18. A 0.1 kg mass is suspended from a wire of negligible mass.
(d) The instantaneous speed at x0 of the combined masses The length of the wire is 1m and its cross-sectional area is
decreases in both the cases 4.9×10–7 m2. If the mass is pulled a little in the vertically
downward direction and released, it perform simple
16. Two independent harmonic oscillators of equal mass are harmonic motion of angular frequency 140 rad s–1. If the
oscillating about the origin with angular frequencies  Young’s modulus of the material of the wire is n×109 Nm–2
and  and have total energies E1 and E2, respectively, the value of n is (2010)
The variation of their momenta p with positions x are
MATCH THE COLUMN
a a
shown in the figures. If = n2 and = n, then the 19. Column–I describes some situation in which a small object
b R
moves. Column–II describes some characteristics of these
correct equation(s) is (are) (2015)
motions. Match the situations in Column–I with the
characteristic in Column–II. (2007)
Column-I Column-II
(a) The object moves on the x–axis (p)The object
executes under a conservative simple harmonic
force in such a way that its motion.
“speed” and “position” satisfy

(a) E11 = E22 v  c1 c2  x 2 ,where c1 and

 2 c2 are positive constants.

(b)   n
 (b) The object moves on the x–axis (q)The object does not
in such a way that its velocity change its direction
(c) 21 = n2
and its displacement from the
E1 E 2 origin satisfy v = –kx, where k
(d)   
 2
is a positive constant.
OSCILLATION & WAVES 148

(c) The object is attached to one (r) The kinetic energy Compression Type
end of a mass–less spring of a of the object keeps
PASSAGE
given spring constant. The other on decreasing
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 21 to Q. 23
end of the spring is attached to
the ceiling of an elevator. Initially When a particle of mass m moves on the x–axis in a potential
everything is at rest. The elevator of the form V(x) = kx2, it performs simple harmonic motion.
starts going upwards with a m
constant acceleration a. The motion The corresponding time period is proportional to , as
k
of the object is observed from the can be seen easily using dimensional analysis. However,
elevator during the period it the motion of a particle can be periodic even when its
maintains this acceleration. potential energy increases on both sides of x = 0 in a way
(d) The object is projected from the (s) The object can different from kx2 and its total energy is such that the
earth’s surface vertically upwards change its direction particle does not escape to infinity. Consider a particle
of mass m moving on the x–axis. Its potential energy is
GM e
2 , where Me is the mass only once. V(x) = x4 (a > 0) for |x| near the origin and becomes a
Re
constant equal to V0 for |x| > X0 (see figure) (2010)
of the earth and Re is the radius
of the earth. Neglect forces from
V(x)
objects other than the earth.
20. Column-I gives a list of possible set of parameters meased
V0
in some experiments. The variations of the parameters in
the form of graphs are shown in Column-II. Match the set
x
of parameters given in Column-I with the graphs given in X0
Column-II. Indicate your answer by darkening the
appropriate bubbles of the 4 × 4 matrix given in the ORS. 21. If the total energy of the particle is E, it will perform periodic
motion only if
Column-I Column-II
y (a) E < 0 (b) E > 0
(a) Potential energy of a simple pedulum (p)
(c) V0 > E > 0 (d) E > V0
(y-axis) as a function of displacement
22. For periodic motion of small amplitude A, the time period
(x-axis)
T of this particle is proportional to
(b) Displacement (y-axis) as a function (q) O y x
m 1 m
of time (x-axis) for a one dimensional (a) A (b)
 A 
motion at zero or constant accelera-
tion when the body is moving along  1 
(c) A (d)
O x m A m
the positive x-direction.
23. The acceleration of this particle for |x| > X0 is
(c) Range of a projectile (y-axis) as a (r) y
(a) proportional to V0
function of its velocity (x-axis)
V0
when projected at a fixed angle. (b) proportional to mX 0
O x
y
V0
(d) The square of the time period (s) (c) proportional to mX0
(y-axis) of a simple pendulum as a
(d) zero
function of its length (x-axis).
O x
OSCILLATION & WAVES 149

WAVES 29. A sonometer wire resonates with a given tuning fork

forming standing waves with five antinodes between the
Single Correct Options two bridges when a mass of 9 kg is suspended from the
wire. When this mass is replaced by mass M. The wire
24. A train move towards a stationary observer with speed
resonates with the same tuning fork forming three
34m/s. The train sounds a whistle and its frequency
antinodes for the same positions of the bridges. The value
registered by the observers is f1. If the train’s speed is
of M is : (2002)
reduced to 17 m/s, the frequency registered is f2. If the
speed of sound is 340 m/s then the ratio f1/f2 is (2000) (a) 25 kg (b) 5 kg
(a) 18/19 (b) 1/2 (c) 12.5 kg (d) 1/25 kg
(c) 2 (d) 19/18 30. A police car moving at 22 m/s chases a motorcyclist. The
25. Two vibrating strings of the same material but of length police man sounds his horn at 176 Hz, while both of them
L and 2L have radii 2r and r respectively. They are move towards a stationary siren of frequency 165 Hz.
stretched under the same tension. Both the strings vibrate Calculate the speed of the motorcycle. If it is given that
in their fundamental modes. The one of Length L with the motorcyclist does not observe any beats (speed of
frequency f1 and the other with frequency f2. The ratio f1/ sound = 330 m/s) (2003)
f2 is given by (2000)
(a) 2 (b) 4
(c) 8 (d) 1
26. The ends of a stretched wire of length L are fixed at x = 0
and x = L. In one epxeriment the displacment of the wire is
 x 
y1  A sin   sin t and energy is E1 and in other
 L 
(a) 33 m/s (b) 22 m/s
 2x  (c) zero (d) 11 m/s
experiment its displacement is y 2  A sin   sin 2t
 L  31. In the experiment for the determination of the speed of
and energy is E2. Then (2001) sound in air using the resonance column method, the
(a) E2 = E1 (b) E2 = 2E1 length+ of the air column that resonates in the fundamental
(c) E2 = 4 E1 (d) E2 = 16 E1 mode, with a tuning fork is 0.1 m. When this length is
changed to 0.35 m, the same tuning fork resonates with
27. Two pulses in a stretched string, whose centres are initially
the first overtone. Calculate the end correction. (2003)
8 cm apart, are moving towards each other as shown in the
figure. The speed of each pulse is 2 cm/s. After 2 s the (a) 0.012 m (b) 0.025 m
total energy of the pulses will be (2001) (c) 0.05 m (d) 0.024 m
32. A source of sound of frequency 600 Hz is placed inside
water. The speed of sound in water is 1500 m/s and in air it
is 300 m/s. The frequency of sound recorded by an
observer who is standing in air is (2004)
(a) zero
(a) 200 Hz (b) 3000 Hz
(b) purely kinetic
(c) 120 Hz (d) 600 Hz
(c) purely potential
33. A closed organ pipe of length L and an open organ pipe
(d) partly kinetic and partly potential
contain gases of densities 1 and 2 respectively. The
28. A siren placed at a railway platform is emitting sound of
compressibility of gases are equal in both the pipes. Both
frequency 5 kHz. A passanger sitting in a moving train A
the pipes are vibrating in their first overtone with same
records a frequency of 5.5 kHz, while the train approaches
frequency. The length of the open organ pipe is (2004)
the siren. During his return journey in a different train B he
records a frequency of 6.0 kHz while approaching the same (a) L/3 (b) 4L/3
siren. The ratio of the velocity of train B to that of train A is
(a) 242/252 (b) 2 (2002) 4 L 1 4 L 2
(c) (d)
(c) 5/6 (d) 11/6 3 2 3 1
OSCILLATION & WAVES 150

34. An open pipe is in resonance in 2nd harmonic with 38. A vibrating string of certain length l under a tension T
frequency f1. Now one end of the tube is closed and
resonates with a mode corresponding to the first overtone
frequency is increased to f2 such that the resonance again
occurs in nth harmonic. Choose the correct option.(2005) (third harmonic) of an air column of length 75 cm inside a
3 tube closed at one end. The string also generates 4 beats/s
(a) n  3, f 2  f1
4 when excited along with a tuning fork of frequency n.
5 Now when the tension of the string is slightly increased
(b) n  3, f 2  f1
4
the number of beats reduces to 2 per second. Assuming
5
(c) n  5, f 2  f1 the velocity of sound in air to be 340 m/s, the frequency n
4
3 of the tuning fork in Hz is : (2008)
(d) n  5, f 2  f1
4
(a) 344 (b) 336
35. A tuning fork of 512 Hz is used to produce resonance in a
resonance tube experiment. The level of water at first (c) 117.3 (d) 109.3
resonance is 30.7 cm and at second resonance is 63.2 cm.
39. A hollow pipe of length 0.8 m is closed at one end. At its open
The error in calculating velocity of sound is : (2005)
(a) 204.1 cm/s (b) 110 cm/s end a 0.5 m long uniform string is vibrating in its second
(c) 58 cm/s (d) 280 cm/s harmonic and it resonates with the fundamental frequency of
36. A massless rod BD is suspended by two identical massless the pipe. If the tension in the wire is 50 N and the speed of
strings AB and CD of equal lengths. A block of mass m is –1
sound is 320 ms , the mass of the string is : (2010)
suspended from point P such that BP is equal to x. If the
(a) 5 g (b) 10 g
fundamental frequency of the left wire is twice the fundamental
frequency of right wire, then the value of x is: (2006) (c) 20 g (d) 40 g

40. A police car with a siren of frequency 8 kHz is moving with

uniform velocity 36 km/h towards a tall building which
reflects the sound waves. The speed of sound in air is 320
m/s. The frequency of the siren heard by the car driver is
(a) l/5 (b) l/4
(a) 8.50 kHz (b) 8.25 kHz (2011)
(c) 4l/5 (d) 3l/4
37. A transverse sinusoidal wave moves along a string in the (a) 7.75 kHz (d) 7.50 kHz
positive x–direction at a speed of 10 cm/s. The wavelength of
the wave is 0.5 m and its amplitude is 10 cm. At a particular 41. A student is performing the experiment of resonance
time t, the snap-shot of the wave is shown in figure. The column. The diameter of the column tube is 4 cm. The
velocity of point P when its displacement is 5 cm is : (2008) frequency of the tuning fork is 512 Hz. The air temperature
is 38°C in which the speed of sound is 336 m/s. The zero of
the meter scale coincides with the top end of the resonance
column tube. When the first resonance occurs, the reading
of the water level in the column is (2012)

(a) 14.0 cm
3 3
(a) ĵm / s (b)  ĵm / s (b) 15.2 cm
50 50
(c) 16.4 cm
3 3
(c) î m / s (d)  î m / s
50 50 (d) 17.6 cm
OSCILLATION & WAVES 151

42. A student is performing an experiment using a resonance

x0
column and a tuning fork of frequency 244s–1. He is told (c) When spring achieves an extension of for the
that the air in the tube has been replaced by another gas 2
(assume that the column remains filled with the gas). If the first time, the speed of the block connected to the spring
minimum height at which resonance occurs is (0.350 
0.005) m, the gas in the tube is M
is 3g
5k
(Useful information: 167 RT  640 j 1/2 mole -1/2;
(d) a2-a1=a1-a3
1/2 -1/2
140 RT  590 J mole . The molar masses M in grams Multiple Correct Options
10 44. A student performed the experiment to measure the speed
are given in the options. Take the values of for each
M of sound in air using resonance air-column method. Two
gas as given there.) (2014) resonances in the air-column were obtained by lowering
the water level. The resonance with the shorter air-column
10 7 is the first resonance and that with the longer air column
(a) Neon (M = 20,  )
20 10 is the second resonance. Then, (2009)
(a) the intensity of the sound heard at the first resonance
10 3
(b) Nitrogen (M = 28,  ) was more than that at the second resonance
28 5
(b) the prongs of the tuning fork were kept in a horizontal
10 9 plane above the resonance tube
(c) Oxygen (M = 32,  ) (c) the amplitude of vibration of the ends of the prongs is
32 16
typically around 1 cm
10 17 (d) the length of the air–column at the first resonance
(d) Argon (M = 36,  )
36 32 was somewhat shorter than l/4th of the wavelength of
43. A block of mass 2M is attached to a massless spring with the sound in air
spring-constant k. This block is connected to two other 45. A person blows into open-end of a long pipe. As a result,
blocks of masses M and 2M using two massless pulleys a high-pressure pulse of air travels down the pipe. When
and strings. The accelerations of the blocks are a1,a2, and this pulse reaches the other end of the pipe, (2012)
a3 as shown in the figure. The system is released from (a) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if
rest with spring in its unstretched state. The maximum the other end of the pipe is open.
extension of the spring is x0. Which of the following (b) a low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if the
option(s) is/are correct? [g is the acceleration due to other end of the pipe is open
gravity. Neglect friction] (2019) (c) a low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if the
other end of the pipe is closed
(d) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if
the other end of the pipe is closed.
46. A particle of mass m is attached to one end of a mass-less
spring of force constant k, lying on a frictionless horizontal
plane. The other end of the spring is fixed. The particle
starts moving horizontally from its equilibrium position at
time t = 0 with an initial velocity u0. When the speed of the
particle is 0.5 u0, it collides elastically with a rigid wall.
After this collision (2013)
x0 (a) the speed of the particle when it returns to its
(a) At an extension of of the spring, the magnitude of equilibrium position is u0
4
3g (b) the time at which the particle passes through the
acceleration of the block connected to the spring is
10 m
4Mg equilibrium position for the first time is t  
(b) x 0  k
k
OSCILLATION & WAVES 152

(c) the time at which the maximum compression of the (a) The plot below represents schematically the variation
of beat frequency with time
4 m
spring occurs is t 
3 k
(d) the time at which the particle passes through the

5 m
equilibrium position for the second time is t 
3 k
47. One end of a taut string of length 3 m along the x axis is
fixed at x = 0. The speed of the waves in the string is 100
ms-1. The other end of the string is vibrating in the y (b) The plot below represents schematically the variation
direction so that stationary waves are set up in the string. of beat frequency with time
The possible waveform(s) of these stationary waves
is(are) (2014)
x 50 t
(a) y (t) = A sin cos
6 3

x 100t
(b) y (t) = A sin cos
3 3

5x 250t (c) The rate of change in beat frequency is maximum when
(c) y (t) = A sin cos
6 3 the car passes through Q
(d) fP + fR = 2 fQ
5x
(d) y (t) = A sin cos 250t
2 Integer Type
48. A container of fixed volume has a mixture of one mole of
hydrogen and one mole of helium in equilibrium at 50. A 20 cm long string, having a mass of 1.0 g, is fixed at both
temperature T. Assuming the gases are ideal, the correct the ends. The tension in the string is 0.5 N. The string is
statement(s) is (are) (2015) set into vibration using an external vibrator of frequency
(a) The average energy per mole of the gas mixture is 2RT 100 Hz. Find the separation (in cm) between the successive
(b) The ratio of speed of sound in the gas mixture to that nodes on the string. (2009)
in helium gas is 6/5 51. A stationary source is emitting sound at a fixed frequency
(c) The ratio of the rms speed of helium atoms to that of f0, which is reflected by two cars approaching the source.
1 The difference between the frequencies of sound reflected
hydrogen molecules is from the cars is 1.2% of f0. What is the difference in the
2
speeds of the cars (in km per hour) to the nearest integer ?
(d) The ratio of the rms speed of helium atoms to that of
The cars are moving at constant speeds much smaller than
–1
1 the speed of sound which is 330 ms .
hydrogen molecules is
2 52. When two progressive waves y1 = 4 sin (2x – 6t) and
49. Two loudspeakers M and N are located 20 m apart and
emit sound at frequencies 118 Hz and 121 Hz, respectively.  
y2 = 3 sin  2x  6t   are superimposed, the amplitude
A car is initially at a point P , 1800 m away from the midpoint  2
Q of the line MN and moves towards Q constantly at 60 of the resultant wave is (2010)
km/hr along the perpendicular bisector of MN. It crosses
Q and eventually reaches a point R, 1800 m away from Q. 53. Four harmonic waves of equal frequencies and equal
Let v(t) represent the beat frequency measured by a  
person sitting in the car at time t. Let fP, fQ and fR be the intensities I0 have phases angles  and . When
 
beat frequencies measured at locations P, Q and R,
respectively. The speed of sound in air is 330 ms–1. Which they are superposed, the intensity of the resulting wave
of the following statement(s) is(are) true regarding the is nI0.The value of n is. (2015)
sound heard by the person?
(2016)
OSCILLATION & WAVES 153

54. Two men are walking along a horizontal straight line in (C) Stretched wire clamped at (r) f = L
the same direction. The man in front walks at a speed 1.0 both ends
ms-1 and the man behind walks at a speed 2.0 ms-1. A third
man is standing at a height 12 m above the same horizontal O L
line such that all three men are in a vertical plane. The two
(D) Strentched wire clamped at (s) f = 2L
walking men are blowing identical whistles which emit a
both ends and at mid-point
sound of frequency 1430 Hz. The speed of sound in air is
330 ms-1. At the instant, when the moving men are 10 m
apart, the stationary man is equidistant from them. The O L
frequency of beats in Hz, heard by the stationary man at L/2
this instant, is _______. (2018) (t) f = 4L
55. A train S1, moving with a uniform velocity of 108 km/h, 57. A musical instrument is made using four different metal
approaches another train S2 standing on a platform. An strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 with mass per unit length , 2, 3 and
observer O moves with a uniform velocity of 36 km/h 4 respectively. The instrument is played by vibrating
towards S2, as shown in figure. Both the trains are blowing the strings by varying the free length in between the range
whistles of same frequency 120 Hz. When O is 600 m L0 and 2L0. It is found that in string-1() at free length L0
away from S2 and distance between S1 and S2 is 800 m, and tension T0 the fundamental mode frequency is f0.
the number of beats heard by O is ______ . (Speed of the List-I List-II
sound = 330 (2019) (I) String-1() (P) 1

(II) String-2() (Q) 1 2

1
(III) String-2() (R)
2

1
(IV) String-4() (S)
3
(T) 3/16
(U) 1/16
If the tension in each string is T0, the correct match for
the highest fundamental frequency in f0 units will be :
Match the Column (2019)
(a) I  P, II  Q, III  T, IV  S
56. Column-I show four systems, each of the same length L,
for producing standing waves. The lowest possible natural (b) I  P, II  R, III  S, IV  Q
frequency of a system is called its fundamental frequency, (c) I  Q, II  S, III  R, IV  P
whose wavelength is denoted as f. Match each system (d) I  Q, II  P, III  R, IV  T
with statements given in Column-II describing the nature 58. A musical instrument is made using four different metal
and wavelength of the standing waves. (2011) strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 with mass per unit length , 2, 3 and
Column-I 4 respectively. The instrument is played by vibrating
Column-II the strings by varying the free length in between the range
L0 and 2L0. It is found that in string-1() at free length L0
(A) Pipe closed at one end (p) Longitudinal waves and tension T0 the fundamental mode frequency is f0.
(2019)
List-I List-II
O L (I) String-1() (P) 1

(B) Pipe open at both ends (q) Transverse waves (II) String-2() (Q) 1 2

1
(III) String-2() (R)
2
O L
OSCILLATION & WAVES 154

1 Assume that the sound of the whistle is composed of

(IV) String-4() (S) components varying in frequency from f1 = 800 Hz to
3
f2 = 1120 Hz, as shown in the figure. The spread in the
(T) 3/16 frequency (highest frequency–lowest frequency) is thus
(U) 1/16 320 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s.
The length of the strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 are kept fixed at L0, 62. The speed of sound of the whistle is (2007)
3L0 5L0 7L (a) 340 m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for passengers in B
, and 0 , respectively. Strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 are
2 4 4 (b) 360 m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for passengers in B
vibrated at their
(c) 310 m/s for passengers in A and 360 m/s for passengers in B
1st, 3rd, 5th and 14th harmonics, respectively such that all
the strings have same frequency. The correct match for (d) 340 m/s for passengers in both the trains
the tension in the four strings in the units of T0 will be : 63. The distribution of the sound intensity of the whistle as
(a) I  P, II  R, III  T, IV  U observed by the passengers in train A is best represented
(b) I  P, II  Q, III  R, IV  T by (2007)
(c) I  P, II  Q, III  T, IV  U
(d) I  T, II  Q, III  R, IV  U

Comprehension Type
(a)
Passage - I
Two plane harmonic sound waves are expressed by the f1 f2 Frequency
equations.
y1 (x, t) = A cos (0.5 x – 100 t)
y2 (x, t) = A cos (0.46 x – 92 t)
(All parameters are in MKS)
59. How many times does an observer hear maximum intensity
(b)
in one second ? (2006)
(a) 4 (b) 10 f1 f2 Frequency
(c) 6 (d) 8
60. What is the speed of the sound ? (2006)
(a) 200 m/s (b) 180 m/s
(c) 192 m/s (d) 96 m/s
61. At x = 0 how many times the amplitude of y1 + y2 is zero in (c)
one second ? (2006)
(a) 192 (b) 48 f1 f2 Frequency
(c) 100 (d) 96
Passage - II
Two trains A and B are moving with speeds 20 m/s and 30
m/s respectively in the same direction on the same straight
track, with B ahead of A. The engines are at the front ends.
The engine of train A blows a long whistle. (d)

f1 f2 Frequency

64. The spread of frequency as observed by the passengers

in train B is
(a) 310 Hz (b) 330 Hz
f1 f2 Frequency
(c) 350 Hz (d) 290 Hz
OSCILLATION & WAVES 155

Subjective 68. In a resonance tube experiment to determine the speed of

sound in air, a pipe of diameter 5 cm is used. The air column
65. A 3.6 m long pipe resonates with a source of frequency
in pipe resonates with a tuning fork of frequency 480 Hz
212.5 Hz when water level is at certain heights in the pipe.
when the minimum length of the air column is 16 cm. Find
Find the heights of water level (from the bottom of the
the speed of sound in air at room temperature. (2003)
pipe) at which resonances occur. Neglect end correction.
69. A string of mass per unit length  is clamped at both ends
Now the pipe is filled to a height H (  3.6m). A small hole
such that one end of the string is at x = 0 and the other is
is drilled very close to its bottom and water is allowed to
at x = l. When string vibrates in fundamental mode
leak. Obtain an expression for the rate of fall of water level amplitude of the mid-point O of the string is a, and tension
in the pipe as a function of H. If the radii of the pipe and in the string is T. Find the total oscillation energy stored
the hole are 2 × 10–2 m and l × 10–3 m respectively. Calculate in the string. (2003)
the time interval between the occurrence of first two 70. An observer standing on a railway crossing receives
resonances. Speed of sound in air is 340 m/s and g = 10m/s2. frequency of 2.2 kHz and 1.8 kHz when the train
(2000) approaches and recedes from the observer. Find the
66. A boat is travelling in a river with a speed 10 m/s along the velocity of the train.
stream flowing with a speed 2 m/s. From this boat a sound (The speed of the sound in air is 300 m/s.) (2005)
transmitter is lowered into the river through a rigid support. 71. A harmonically moving transverse wave on a string has a
The wavelength of the sound emitted from the transmitter maximum particle velocity and acceleration of 3 m/s and 90
2
inside the water is 14.45 mm. Assume that attenuation of m/s respectively. Velocity of the wave is 20 m/s. Find the
sound in water and air is negligible. (2001) waveform. (2005)

(a) What will be the frequency detected by a receiver Fill in the blanks
kept inside the river downstream? 72. A stationary tuning fork is in resonance with an air column
(b) The transmitter and the receiver are now pulled up into in a pipe. If the tuning fork is moved with a speed of 2 ms–
1
air. The air is blowing with a speed 5 m/s in the direction in front of the open end of the pipe and parallel to it, the
length of the pipe should be changed for the resonance
opposite to the river stream. Determine the frequency of
to occur with the moving tuning fork. If the speed of
the sound detected by the receiver. (Temperature of the air sound in air is 320 ms –1, the smallest value of the
and water =20° C ; Density of river water = 103 kg/m3 ; Bulk percentage change required in the length of the pipe is
modulus of the water =2.088 × 109 Pa ; Gas constant R = ………… . -
(2020)
8.31 J/mol-K ; Mean molecular mass of air = 28.8 × 10–3 kg/
mol; Cp/CV for air = 1.4)
67. Two narrow cylindrical pipes A and B have the same
length. Pipe A is open at both ends and is filled with a
monoatomic gas of molar mass MA. Pipe B is open at one
end and closed at the other end, and is filled with a
diatomic gas of molar mass MB. Both gases are at the
same temperature. (2002)
(a) If the frequency to the second harmonic of pipe A is
equal to the frequency of the third harmonic of the
fundamental mode in pipe B, determine the value of MA/
MB.
(b) Now the open end of the pipe B is closed (so that the
pipe is closed at both ends). Find the ratio of the
fundamental frequency in pipe A to that in pipe B.
OSCILLATION & WAVES 156

OSCILLATION & WAVES

Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
 157

Answer Key
CHAPTER -1 FLUID MECHANICS

EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (a) 1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (c)

5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (b) 5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (a) 8. (c)
9. (b) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (b) 9. (c) 10. (d) 11. (c) 12. (c)
13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (a)
13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (d)
17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (a)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23.(c) 24. (a) 17. (c) 18. (748.00) 19. (b) 20. (a)
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (d) 21. (b) 22. (a) 23.(b) 24. (5.00)
29. (a) 30. (c) 31. (a) 32. (c) 25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (c)
33. (d) 34. (a) 35.(b) 36. (d) 29. (d) 30. (101.00) 31. (d) 32. (3)
37. (b) 38. (c) 39. (a) 40. (c)
33. (b) 34. (a) 35.(b) 36. (b)
41. (d) 42. (a) 43. (c) 44. (c)
45. (d) 46. (c) 47. (b) 48. (c) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (c) 40. (a)
49. (d) 50. (c) 51. (b) 52. (c) 41. (d)
53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (b) 56. (c)
57. (d) 58. (b) 59. (c) 60. (a)
61. (a) 62. (c) 63. (a) 64. (b)
65. (c) 66. (a) 67. (b) 68. (a)
69. (a) 70. (d) 71. (c) 72. (c)
73. (d) 74. (c) 75. (c) 76. (b)
77. (b) 78. (d) 79. (c) 80. (c)
81. (c) 82. (a) 83. (a) 84. (c)
85. (d) 86. (b) 87. (d) 88. (a)
89. (b) 90. (b) 91. (a) 92. (d)
93. (d) 94. (a) 95. (a) 96. (b)
97. (a) 98. (a) 99. (c) 100. (c)
101. (b) 102. (b) 103. (c) 104. (c)
105. (b) 106. (b) 107. (b) 108. (c)
109. (d) 110. (d) 111. (b) 112. (b)
ANSWER KEY 158

EXERCISE - 3 : EXERCISE - 4 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE -
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (b)
1. (d)
5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (c)
2. (d)
9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (b)
3. (a) zero (b) 0.25 cm (c) g/6)
13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (c)
4. (a) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (b, c)
17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (d) 8. (a, d) 9. (a, c) 10. (a, c, d) 11. (0015)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23.(d) 24. (b) 12. (0006) 13. (0006) 14. (0003) 15. (a, d)
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (d) 28. (b)
16. (009.00) 17. (004.00) 18. (a) 19. (c)
29. (a) 30. (b) 31. (a) 32. (b)
20. (c) 21. (a) 22. (a) 23.(c)
33. (d) 34. (c) 35.(a) 36. (a)
24. (a) 25. (b) 26. (c) 27. (a)
37. (b) 38. (c) 39. (c) 40. (c)
28. ((ga/2y))
41. (a, b, d) 42. (a, b, c, d) 43. (a) 44. (b, c)
29. (2m)
45. (b) 46. (a, b, c) 47. (a, c, d) 48. (b)
49. (b, c) 50. (b, d) 51. (b, d) 52. (a, c) dR
53. (a, b) 54. (c) 55. (a, b, c) 56. (0050) 30.  r5
dt
57. (a) 58. (0025) 59. (a, d)
60. (1.01×10 ) 61. (c)
5
62. (d) 63. (c)  2 L2
64. (a) 65. (b) 66. (d) 67. (b) 31. ( H  )
2g
68. (AR); (B  Q);(C  P);(D  S)
32. (1.01 × 10 Pa)
5
69. (d) 70. (c) 71. (b) 72. (b)
73. (a) 74. (a) 75. (d) 76. (a)
77. (b) 78. (a) 79. (b) 80. (c)
81. (a) 82. (c) 83. (a) 84. (d)
85. (b) 86. (a)
 159

Answer Key
CHAPTER -2 ELASTICITY
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (c) 1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (b)

5. (d) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (a) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (a)
9. (d) 10. (c) 11. (a) 12. (c) 9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (c) 12. (c)
13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (c) 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (a) 16. (a)
17. (b) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (a)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23.(d) 24. (a)
25. (d) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (d)
29. (d) 30. (d) 31. (a) 32. (c)
33. (b) 34. (a) 35.(d) 36. (b)
ANSWER KEY 160

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 4: PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (b) 1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (c)

5. (c) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (d) 5. (a, b) 6. (2.00) 7. (000.23 to 000.24)
9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (a, c, d) 8. (1.09 × 10 N/M )
10 2

13. (a, b, c) 14. (a, d) 15. (a, b, d) 16. (a, 2)

17. (a, d) 18. (2) 19. (a) 20. (a)
21. (A  Q,S);(B  P, R);(C  P, Q, R,S);(D  P, Q, R,S)

22. (a) 23.(a) 24. (b) 25. (a)

26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (a, c) 29. (b)
ANSWER KEY 161

Answer Key
CHAPTER -3 OSCILLATION AND WAVES
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (d) 1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (a)

5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (a)
5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (d)
9. (b) 10. (a) 11. (d) 12. (c)
9. (a) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (d)
13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (d) 16. (d)
17. (d) 18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (b) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (a) 16. (c)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23.(c) 24. (d) 17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (c)
25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (b) 21. (d) 22. (d) 23.(a) 24. (a)
29. (d) 30. (c) 31. (c) 32. (d)
25. (d) 26. (d) 27. (c) 28. (d)
33. (c) 34. (c) 35.(d) 36. (a)
37. (c) 38. (a) 39. (c) 40. (b) 29. (d) 30. (d) 31. (b) 32. (c)
41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (d) 44. (c) 33. (b) 34. (c) 35.(c) 36. (d)
45. (d) 46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (b) 37. (b) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (a)
49. (b) 50. (a) 51. (c) 52. (b) 41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (a) 44. (a)
53. (d) 54. (a) 55. (b) 56. (b)
45. (b) 46. (b) 47. (c) 48. (a)
57. (a) 58. (c) 59. (a) 60. (c)
49. (b) 50. (502.00) 51. (b) 52. (a)
61. (a) 62. (a) 63. (a) 64. (a)
65. (a) 66. (c) 67. (a) 68. (d) 53. (b) 54. (a) 55. (20.00) 56. (12.50)
69. (b) 70. (a) 71. (a) 72. (a) 57. (a) 58. (a) 59. (a)
73. (b) 74. (b) 75. (a) 76. (d) 60. (035.00) 61. (a) 62. (d) 63. (b)
77. (a) 78. (a) 79. (c) 80. (b)
64. (d) 65. (a) 66. (c) 67. (a)
81. (c) 82. (b) 83. (d) 84. (a)
85. (b) 86. (c) 87. (b) 88. (b) 68. (a) 69. (106.05) 70. (d) 71. (a)
89. (b) 90. (b) 91. (b) 92. (c) 72. (d) 73. (c)
93. (a) 94. (c) 95. (c) 96. (c)
97. (c) 98. (c) 99. (b) 100. (d)
101. (a) 102. (d) 103. (b) 104. (b)
105. (b) 106. (d) 106. (b) 107. (b)
108. (b) 109. (d) 110. (d) 111. (c)
112. (c) 113. (d)
ANSWER KEY 162

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

115. (d) 116. (c) 117. (c) 118. (d)
119. (a) 120. (a) 121. (c) 122. (b)
123. (c) 124. (d) 125. (a) 126. (a)
127. (a) 128. (c) 129. (a) 130. (b)
131. (d) 132. (a) 133. (d) 134. (b)
135. (d) 136. (b) 137. (d) 138. (c)
139. (c) 140. (c) 141. (d) 142. (d)
143. (b) 144. (b) 145. (a) 146. (d)
147. (b) 148. (d) 149. (a) 150. (b)
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. 151. (b) 152. (d) 153. (a) 154. (b)
155. (c) 156. (b) 157. (b) 158. (a)
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a)
159. (a) 160. (a) 161. (b) 162. (d)
5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (d)
163. (a) 164. (a) 165. (b) 166. (b)
9. (b) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (a)
167. (c) 168. (b) 169. (c) 170. (b)
13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (c) 171. (a) 172. (c) 173. (d) 174. (b)
17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (a) 175. (b) 176. (b) 177. (d) 178. (c)
21. (a) 22. (c) 23.(c) 24. (c) 179. (c, d) 180. (a, b, d) 181. (a, b, c, d) 182. (a, c)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (b) 183. (0034) 184. (0014) 185. (0022) 186. (0003)
29. (a) 30. (d) 31. (b) 32. (c) 187. (98) 188. (6349) 189. (510) 190. (b)
33. (a) 34. (a) 35.(c) 36. (b) 191. (b) 192. (c) 193. (a) 194. (a)
37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (d) 40. (d) 195. (a) 196. (a) 197. (b) 198. (c)
41. (d) 42. (b) 43. (b) 44. (a) 199. (c) 200. (a - r, s; b - r, s; c- s; d - q)
45. (b) 46. (b) 47. (a) 48. (b) 201. (a - q; b - p; c - r, s; d - r)
49. (a) 50. (c) 51. (c) 52. (b) 202. (a - r; b - p; c- s; d - q) 203. (a) 204. (d)
53. (a) 54. (a) 55. (c) 56. (b) 205. (a) 206. (c) 207. (a) 208. (a)
57. (b) 58. (c) 59. (b) 60. (d) 209. (d) 210. (a) 211. (d) 212. (a)
61. (b) 62. (a) 63. (d) 64. (c) 213. (d) 214. (a) 215. (c)
65. (a) 66. (c) 67. (d) 68. (a)
69. (c) 70. (b) 71. (c) 72. (d)
73. (d) 74. (d) 75. (d) 76. (d)
77. (a, c) 78. (a, c) 79. (b, c) 80. (a, b, d)
81. (b, c, d) 82. (c) 83. (d) 84. (b)
85. (a) 86. (b) 87. (b) 88. (c)
89. (b) 90. (b) 91. (c) 92. (c)
93. (c) 94. (d) 95. (a - p; b - s; c - r; d - q)
96. (a - q; b - s; c - p; d - r) 97. (d) 98. (a)
99. (a) 100. (d) 101. (b) 102. (b)
103. (d) 104. (d) 105. (a) 106. (b)
107. (c) 108. (c) 109. (b) 110. (b)
111. (c) 112. (d) 113. (d) 114. (b)
ANSWER KEY 163

EXERCISE - 4: PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

2 a 2 T
69. ( )
4

70. (uT = 30 m/s)

71. (y = (0.1 m) sin [(30 rad/s) t ± (1.5 m–1) x + ])
72. (000.62 to 000.63)

DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (a)

5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (d)
9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (a, b) 12. (b, d)
13. (a, d) 14. (b, c) 15. (a, b, d) 16. (b, d)
17. (0)
18. (4)
19. (a – p); (b – q, r); (c – p); (d – q, s)
20. (a  p or p, s); (b  q, s or q, r, s) (c  s); (d  q)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23.(d) 24. (d)
25. (d) 26. (c) 27. (b) 28. (b)
29. (a) 30. (b) 31. (b) 32. (d)
33. (c) 34. (c) 35.(d) 36. (a)
37. (b) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (a)
41. (b) 42. (d) 43. (d) 44. (a, d)
45. (b, d) 46. (a, d) 47. (a, c, d) 48. (a, b, d)
49. (a, b, c) 50. (0005) 51. (0007) 52. (0005)
53. (0003) 54. (0005) 55. (8.13)
56. (A – p, t; B – p, s; C – q, s; D – q, r)
57. (b) 58. (c) 59. (a) 60. (a)
61. (c) 62. (b) 63. (a) 64. (a)

dH
65. (3.2 m, 2.4 m, 1.6 m, 0.8 m,  
 1.11  10 2  H , 43 s )
dt

66. (a) 1.0069 × 105 Hz (b) 1.0304 × 105 Hz)

400 3
67. (a) (b)
189 4

68. (336 m/s)

Note
 2

Published by
Vedantu Innovations Private Limited
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
Vedantu Innovations Private Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by
any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the
publishers.
Notice : Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best of the resources and
knowledge. Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book
from sources regarded as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this
book. However, we as authors and publishers are not to be held responsible for
unintentional mistakes that might have crept in. Having stated that, errors (if any)
brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged and rectified in upcoming
editions.

Printed by
Colours Imprint
475C, Adugodi Main Road,
8th Block, Koramangala, Bengaluru 560 095
www.coloursimprint.com
3
 4

Founder’s Message
Dear Student,

It gives me immense pleasure to present to you a Ready Reckoner and Practice booklet by
Vedantu - ‘TATVA’. Tatva in Sanskrit, means a collection of “Core” content/truth and isn’t that
what Vedantu brings to your table - the Core? Vedantu, at all times, ensures that you have
easy accessibility to a collection of all essential concepts, theory, derivations, definitions, solved
examples, concept videos, and practice questions, important questions from competitive
examinations and pleased to say that all questions come with detailed solutions.

Tatva is the result of the constant endeavour and research done by our highly experienced
team of teachers and subject experts to compile relevant content for you to succeed in IIT JEE/
NEET and Olympiads. We strongly believe and vouch for the effectiveness and relevance of
this booklet to grab the desired rank in IIT JEE/ NEET.

Key Points on ‘How to obtain optimal benefits from ‘Tatva’ ?

 We suggest starting with the Practice of ‘Tatva questions’ at the end of a chapter
after revision and Practice of basic questions.
 For daily practice of questions attempt we strongly recommend session assignments
along with Vedantu live sessions
 Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you
revise concepts, mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary and eventually
clear all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
 Attempt Tatva questions post revision of 11th and 12th Grade topics. Take one topic at
a time to solve. Attempt any revision test series for NEET/JEE once you have resolved
Tatva questions. Following this will not only help you during revision but also give a
major boost to your confidence.
 First solve basic level questions and gradually progress to the advanced level.
 Practice basic level questions regularly all through your journey of preparation.
 Your success is our dream-come-true

I wish you all the best.

Anand Prakash
Founder, Academic Head
Vedantu

Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing

Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
 5

Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Theodore Roosevelt

Tatva is the brainchild of the creative Vedans who The managers who understood every aspect of what
strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you. Our the leadership were trying to accomplish and brought
heartfelt thanks to the Super Vedans who give wings so much of their own to the table and managed the
to the vision of Vedantu. execution of ‘Tatva’ immaculately.

Our leaders who have been our guiding light and Kiran Kumari Harish Rao
encouragement in every step: Bhavya Bangera Shraddha
Vamsi Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Sir Sushmitha Akshatha
Charubak Chakrabarti
Our gratitude to the insightful leadership and
guidance of our leaders who dreamt about ‘Tatva’, Our heartfelt gratitude to ourcreative content
steered the project in the right direction and were developers, the dedicated master teachers and the
instrumental in making this dream into a reality: DTP team who have put in their hard work, insights,
eagerness to execute and nurtured Tatva into ‘your
Sahil Bhatia Shubam Gupta ready handbook’ and to bring positive learning
Arshad Shahid Ajay Mittal experience to you.
JaideepSontakke Sudhanshu Jain

Physics Team

Teachers SME DTP

Aarzoo Walia Satyam Kumar Atul Singh (Team Lead) Jitender Singh
Ishani Mitra Santosh Kumar Nanda Pukhraj Singh Yamala Santhosh Kumar
Shubham Ghar Anmol Gupta Saurabh Sharma
Anand M Rohit Thakur
Vijayalakshmi Viswanathan
Pritesh Ranjan
Ravneet Wadhwa

A loud shout out for our media team - a bunch of creative minds with contagious energy. We cannot thank
them enough.

Suraj Bhan Singh

Gadde Ranjith
Ranjeeth Ramesh
Sreyoshi Biswas
Devika Ramachandran

Special thanks and appreciation for the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal,
Dipshi Shetty, Mohamed Anzar and Anuska Singh.

The journey of the imagination to the reality of ‘Tatva’ would not have been possible without our enthusiastic
Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated team of Teachers and our talented Tech
Team.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS

Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 8

Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 32

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 41

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 51

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 55

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 70

Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 84

Teacher’s Note:

If I had to tell an alien species about any one law of physics,

I will go with the laws of thermodynamics. the simplest of

ideas that powered the entire industrial revolution and brought

us out of the dark ages. ONE MORE THING, THE SIGN OF

WORK IS OPPOSITE TO WHAT IS TAUGHT IN CHEMISTRY

"Samajh ayega to mazaa ayega,

Mazaa ayega to samajh ayega".

Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing

Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
 01
HEAT AND
THERMODYNAMICS
 Chapter 01 9

HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS

THEORY

tF
1. THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER
212
In this topic, we discuss various phenomenas involving

Temperature (°F)
thermal and how does a matter behave on experiencing the
flow of thermal energy. Primarily we study tF=180

• Thermal Expansion
• Heat & Clorimetry
• Heat Transfer
O
1.1 Temperature and Heat Temperature (°C) 100 tC

Temperature : Temperature is a relative measure of hotness 1.2.2 Absolute Temperature Scale

or coldness of a body.
It is kelvin scale
SI Unit : Kelvin (K)
Ice point  273.15 K
Commonly Used Unit : °C or °F
Steam point  373.15 K
Conversion : t(k) = t°C + 273.15
Comparing it with the celcius scale, number of scale
Heat : Heat is a form of energy flow (i) between two bodies division in both the scales is same.
or (ii) between a body and its surroundings by virtue of
temperature difference between them t c  0C t k  273.15

SI Unit : Joule (J) 100 100
Commonly Used Unit : Calorie (Cal) • Kelvin scale is called as absolute scale, because it is
Conversion : 1cal = 4.186 J practically impossible to go beyond 0 K in the negative
side.
• Heat always flows from a higher temperature system
to a lower temperature system. Steam
373.15 K 100°C 212.0°F
Point
1.2 Measurement of Temperature
Ice
273.15 K 0°C 32°F
Principle : Observation of Thermometric property with the Point

change in temperature and comparing it with certain

reference situations.
• Reference situation is generally ice point or steam point. Absolute
0K –273.15°C –459.67°F
zero
1.2.1 Celcius and Fahrenheit Temperature Scales Kelvin Scale Celcius Scale Fahrenheit Scale

In Celsius Scale In Fahrenheit Scale 1K 1°C 1.8°F

Ice point  0°C Ice point  32°F Comparison of Temperature Scales

Steam point  1000°C Steam point  212°F
1.2.3 Thermometers
It implies that 100 division in celcius scales is equivalent to
Instrument used to measure temperature of any system is
180 scale divisions in fahrenheit scale.
called as thermometer.
t f  32 t Examples : Liquid in Glass thermometer, Platinum
Hence   c
180 100 Resistance Thermometer, Constant Volume Gas
Thermometers.

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 10
• Liquid in Glass thermometer and Platinum Resistance • All gases converge to absolute zero at zero pressure.
thermometer give uniform readings for ice point & steam point
but go non uniform for different liquids and different materials. 1.3 Thermal Expansion
• Constant volume gas thermometer gives same readings
It is widely observed, that most materials expand on heating
irrespective of which gas. It is based on the fact that at low and contract on colling.
pressures and constant volume, P × T for a gas is constant.
This expansion is in all dimensions.
Pressure
Experimentaly it has been observed that fractional change
Gas A
in any dimension is proportional to the change in
temperature.
Gas B

–273.15°C 0°C Temperature

(°C)

x
 KT constant (K)
x

L
Linear Expansion   T Coefficient of Linear expansion () :
L
Increase in length per unit length per degree rise in temp.
L

A
Area Expension   T Coefficient of Area Expansion () :
A
A

Increase in area per unit area per degree rise in temp.

V
Volume Expansion   T Coefficient of volume expansion () :
V
Increase in area per unit volume per degree rise in temp.

V

Units of ,, = /°C or /K

• In general with change in volume the density will also
change.
•  for metals generally higher than  for non-metals
• is nearly constant at high temperatures but all low temp it
depends on temp.
Coefficient of volume expansion of Cu as a function of
temperature.

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 11
• For ideal gases  is inversely propertional to temp. at we know
constant pressure
V
nRT  T  compressive strain
V V
P
V T YL YL
  Also     Thermal stress
V T L L

1 T  YT
 
T Where Y = young madulus of elasticity ...(3)
• As an exception, water contracts on heating from 0°C to • Practical applications in railway tracks, metal tyres of cart
4°C and hence its density increases from 0°C to 4°C. Thus wheels, bridges and so many other applications.
is called as anamolous expansion
1 gm/cc 1.4 Heat & Calorimetry
Density
When two systems at different temperatures are connected
together then heat flows from higher temperature to lower
temperature till the time their temperatures do not become
same.
Principle of calorimetry states that, neglecting heat loss to
4°C 4°C
(a) (b) surroundings, heat lost by a body at higher temperature is
• In general equal heat gained by a body at lower temperature.
heat gained = heat lost
3
  3   Whenever heat is given to any body, either its temperature
2
changes or its state changes.
Proof : Imagine a cube of length, l that expands equally in
all directions, when its temperature increases by small T; 1.4.1 Change in Temperature

We have When the temp changes on heating,

l = lT Then
Also Heat supplied change in temp (T)
3 3 3 2 2 2 3
V = (l l) – l = l + 3l l + 3ll + l – l amount of substance (m/n)
2
= 3l l ...(1) nature of substance (s/C)
2 3
In Equation (1) we ignore 3ll & l as l is very small as  H = msT
compared to l. m = Mass of body
So s = specific heat capacity per kg
3V V T = Change in temp
V  l = 3VT [Using  l2 ] ...(2)
l l or H = nCT
V n = Number of moles
 3T
 V C = Specific/Molar heat Capacity per mole
T = Change in temp
  = 3
• Specific Heat Capacity : Amount of heat required to raise
Similarly we can prove for area expansion coefficient the temperature of unit mass of the substance through one
• In case, thermal expansion is prevented inside the rod by degree.
fixing its ends rigidly, then the rod acquires a compressive Units
strain due to external fones at the ends corresponding stress
SI  J/KgK SH O L  = 1 cal/g°C
set up in the rod is called thermal stress. 2

Common  Cal/gC° SH Oice  = 0.5 cal/g°C

2

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 12
• Molar Heat Capacity : Amount of heat required to raise the On heating.
temperature of unit mole of the substance through one degree Step - 1 : Temp changes to 0°C first
Units Step - 2 : Ice melts to H2O(l) keeping the temp constant
SI  J/mol K Step - 3 : Temp. increase to 100°C
Common  Cal/g°C Step - 4 : H2O(l) boils to steam keeping the temp constant
• Heat Capacity : Amount of heat required to raise the Step - 5 : Further temp increases
temperature of a system through one degree
 H = ST Temp
(5)
where S = Heat Capacity
Units (4)
(2) (3)
SI  J/K
(1)
Common  Cal/°C
• For H2O specific heat capacity does change but fairly very Heat
less.
• The slope is inversely proportional to heat capacity.
• Materials with higher specific heat capacity require a lot of
• Length of horizontal line depends upon mL for the process.
heat for same one degree rise in temperature
1.4.3 Pressure dependence on melting point and boiling point
1.4.2 Change in state
• For some substance melting point decreases with increase
When the phase changes on heating
in pressure and for other melting point increases
Then
• Melting poing increases with increase in temperature. We
Heat supplied  amount of substance which changes the can observe the above results through phaser diagrams.
state (m)
 nature of substance (L) P B P B
(atm) (atm)
 H = mL C C
Liq Liq
Where L = Latent Heat of process Solid Solid

• Latent Heat : Amount of heat required per mass to change O Vapour O Vapour
the state of any substance. A A
T(°C) T(°C)
Units For H2O For CO2
SI  J/Kg
Common  Cal/g Line AO  Sublimation curve

• The change in state always occurs at a constant Line OB  Fusion curve

temperature. Line OC  Vapourization curve
For example Point O  Triple Point

Solid  Liq Lf Point C  Critical temperature

Triple Point : The combination pressure and temperature
Liq  Gas Lv at which all three states of matter (i.e. solids, liquids gases
Lf = Latent Heat of fusion co-exist.

Lv = Latent heat of vaporization For H2O it is at 273.16 K and 0.006 Atm.

• In case any material is not at its B.P or M.P, then on heating Critical Point : The combination of pressure & temp
the temperature will change till the time a particular state beyond which a vapour cannot be liquified is called as
change temperature reaches. critical point.

For Example : If water is initially at –50°C at 1 Atm pressure Corresponding temperature, pressure are called as critical
in its solid state. temperature & critical pressure.

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 13
• From the phasor diagram, we can see that melting point Coefficient of Thermal Conductivity : It is defined as
decreases with increases in pressure for H2O. amount of heat conducted during steady state in unit time
through unit area of any cross-section of the substance
Based on this is the concept of reglation.
under unit temperature gradient, the heat flow being normal
Reglation : The phenomena of refreezing of water melted to the area.
below the normal melting point due to increase in pressure.
Units
• It is due to this pressure effect on melting point that cooking
SI  J/msK or W/mK.
is tough on mountains and easier in pressure cooker.
• Larger the thermal conductivity, the greater will be rate of
1.5 Heat Transfer
heat energy flow for a given temperature difference.
There are three modes of heat transfer.
• Kmetals > Knon metals
• Conduction
• Thermal conductivity of insulators is very low. Therefore,
• Convection air does not let the heat energy to be conducted very easily.
• Radiation • For combinations of rods between two ends kept at different
temperatures, we can use the concept of equivalent thermal
1.5.1 Conduction
conductivity of the composite rod.
Thermal conduction is the process in which thermal energy
For example :
is transferred from the hotter part of a body to the colder
one or from hot body to a cold body in contact with it
without any transference of material particles.
T1 L1 , K 1, A L2 , K 2, A T2 º T1 L , K eq, A
1 T2

TC > TD
TC TD
L

A
where Keq is the equivalent thermal conductivity of the
Direction of
compositinde.
heat flow
T
C  TD 
• The term in equation (i) is called as Temperature
L
At steady state,
Gradient.
The rate of heat energy flowing through the rod becomes
Temperature Gradient : The fall in temperature per unit
constant. length in the direction of flow of heat energy is called as
Temperature Gradient
TC  TD 
This is rate Q  KA ...(i) Units
L
SI  K/m
for uniform cross-section rods
• The term Q, (i.e.) rate of flow of heat energy can also be
where Q = Rate of heat energy flow (J/s or W) named as heat current
2
A = Area of cross-section (m ) • The term (L/KA) is called as thermal resistance of any
TC,TD = Temperature of hot end and cold end respectively conducting rod.
(°C or K) Thermal Resistance : Obstruction offered to the flow of
heat current by the medium
L = Length of the rod (m)
Units  K/W
K = coefficient of thermal conductivity

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 14

1.5.2 Convection Dimensions of  : M1 L0 T–3 –4

The process in which heat is transferred from one point to Total radiation energy emitted out by surface of area A in
another by the actual movement of the heated material time t :
particles from a place at higher temperature to another place Ideal black body QIBB =  A T 4 t and for any other body
of lower temperature is called as thermal convection. QGB = erA T4 t
Rate of emission of radiation
• If the medium is forced to move with the help of a fan or a
pump, it is called as forced convection. When Temperature of surrounding T0 (Let T0 < T)
Rate of emission of radiation from ideal black body surface
If the material moves because of the differences in density
E1 =  T4
of the medium, the process is called natural or free
Rate of emission of radiation from surrounding
convection.
E2 = T04
• Examples of forced convection
Net rate of loss of radiation from ideal black body surface
Circulatory system, cooling system of an automobile heat is E = E1 – E2 = T4–  T04 =  ( T4 – T04 )
connector Net loss of radiation energy from entire surface area in
• Examples of natural convection time t is QIBB = A ( T4 – T04 ) t
For any other body QGB = er A ( T4 – T04 ) t
Trade winds, Sea Breeze/Land Breeze, Monsoons, Burning
of Tea. If in time dt the net heat energy loss for ideal black body is
dQ and because of this its temperature falls by d
1.5.3 Radiation
dQ
It is a process of transmission of heat in which heat travels Rate of loss of heat RH = = σ A(T 4 – T04 )
dt
directly from one place to another without the agency of
any intervening medium. It is also equal to emitted power or radiation emitted per
second
• This radiation of heat energy occurs in the form of EM
Rate of fall in temperature (Rate of cooling)
waves.

• These radiators are emitted by virtue of its temperature, like dθ σA 4 4  dQ dθ 

RF = dt = ms J (T – T0 )  dt = m s J dt 
the radiation by a red hot iron or light from a filament lamp.  

• Every body radiates energy as well as absorbs energy from

(b) Newtons Law of cooling
surroundings.
Newton’s Law of cooling states that, the rate of loss of heat
• The proportion of energy absorbed depends upon the colour
of the body.  dQ
of the body is directly proportional to the difference
dt
(a) Stefan's Law
The amount of radiation emitted per second per unit area of temp between body and surrounding.
by a black body is directly proportional to the fourth power
 ds
of its absolute temperature. Now  k  T2  T1  ...(4)
dt
4
Amount of radiation emitted E  T
where T = temperature of ideal black body (in K) where k is a positive constant depending upon area and
E=T 4 nature of the surface of the body. Suppose a body of mass
This law is true for only ideal black body m, specific heat capacity s is at temperature T2 & T1 be the
SI Unit : E = watt/m2 temp of surroundings, if dT the fall of temperature in time
dt.
 = Stefen's constant = 5.67 × 10–8 watt /m2 K4

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 15

Amount of heat lost is • Approximation : If a body cools from Ta to Tb in t times in

medium where surrounding temp is T0, then
dQ = msdT

 Rate of loss of heat is given by Ta  Tb  T  Tb 

 K a  T0 
t  2 
dQ dT
 ms ...(5)
dt dt • Newton’s Law of cooling can be verified experimentally.

From Equation 4 and 5

T2 T1

dT
 ms  k  T2  T1 
dt

loge (T2-T1)
C
dT k
  dt  Kdt V
T2  T1 ms
t
(a) (b)
k
where K 
ms Set Up : A double walled vessel (v) containng water in
between two walls.
On integrating
A copper calorimeter (C) containing hot water placed inside
log (T2 – T1) = –Kt + C
–Kt C
the double walled vessel. Two thermometers through the
or T2 = T1 + C1e where C1 = e ...(6)
lids are used to note the temperature T2 of H2O in calorimeter
equation (6) enables you to calculate the time of cooling of and T1 of water in between the double walls respectively.
a body through a particular range of temperature.
Experiment : The temperature of hot water in the calorimeter
after equal intervals of time.

Result : A graph is plotted between log (T2 – T1) and time

(t). The nature of the graph is observed to be a straight line
as it should be from Newton’s law of cooling.

WEIN'S DISPLACEMENT LAW

The wavelength corresponding to maximum emission of

radiation decrease with increasing temperature

 1
 m  T  . This is known as Wein's displacement law..
 

mT = b where b Wein's constant = = 2.89 × 10–3 mK.

Dimensions of b : = M0 L1 T0 1

• For small temp diff, the rate of cooling, due to conduction,

c
convection & radiation combined is proportional to Relation between frequency and temperature  m  T
b
difference in temperature.

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 16
The energy that is transferred from one system to another
2. THERMODYNAMICS
by force moving its point of application in its own direction
It is the study of interrelations between heat and other is called work.
forms of energy
dx
Thermodynamic System : A collection of large number of
molecules of matter (solid, liquid or gas) which are so
arranged that these possess certain values of pressure, System
volume and temperature forms a thermodynamic system. F s = P sA

• The parameters pressure, volume, temperature, internal

energy etc which determine the state or condition of system
are called thermodynamic state variables.
In thermodynamics we deal with the thermodynamic systems Work done by the system   F dx
as a whole and study the interaction of heat & energy during
the change of one thermodynamic state to another.   Ps Adx

2.1 Thermal Equilibrium

  Ps dV
The term ‘equilibrium’ in thermodynamics implies the state
Where Ps is the Pressure of system on the piston. This
when all the macroscopic variables characterising the
work done by system is positive if the system expands & it
system (P, V, T, mass etc) do not change with time.
is negative if the system contracts.
• Two systems when in contact with each other come to
• Work and Heat are path functions whereas internal energy
thermal equilibrium when their temperatures become same. is a state function.
• Based on this is zeroth law of thermodynamics. According • Heat & work are two different terms through they might
to zeroth law, when the thermodynamic systems A and B look same.
are separately in thermal equilibrium with a third
thermodynamic system C, then the systems A and B are in 2.3 Important Thermodynamics Terms
thermal equilibrium with each other also. State Variables : P, V, T, no. of moles and internal energy
2.2 Heat, Work and Internal Energy They can be extensive or intestive.

Internal Energy is the energy possessed by any system Equation of State : The equation which connects the
due to its molecular K.E. and molecular P.E. Here K.E & P.E pressure (P), the volume (V) and absolute temperature (T)
of a gas is called the equation of state.
are with respect to centre of mass frame. This internal
energy depends entirely on state and hence it is a state PV = constant (Boyle’s Law)
variable. For a real gases internal energy is only by virtue
V
of its molecular motion. = constant (Charle’s Law)
T
nf RT  PV = nRT
U= for ideal gases where
2
Thermodynamic Process : A thermodynamic process is
n = number of moles said to take place when some changes occur in the state of
f = Degree of fredom a thermodynamic system, i.e., the thermodynamic
parameters of the system change with time. Types of these
R = Universal Gas Constant
thermodynamic process are Isothermal, Adiabatic, Isobaric
T = Temperature in Kelvin and Isocboric
Internal Energy can be change either by giving heat energy Quasi Static Process : A thermodynamic process which is
or by performing some work. infinitely slow is called as quasi-static process.
Heat Energy is the energy transformed to or from the system • In quasi static process, system undergoes change so slowly,
because of the difference in temperatures by conduction, that at every instant, system is in equilibrium, both thermal
convection or radiation. and mechanical, with the surroundings.

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 17
• Quasi-static process is an idealised processed. We generally 2.5.1 Isothermal Process
assume all the processes to be quasistatic unless stated.
Description : A thermodynamic process in which
Indicator or P-V, Diagram : A graph between pressure and temperature remains constant
volume of a gas under thermodynamic operation is called Condition : The walls of the container must be perfectly
P-V. diagram. conducting to allow free exchange of heat between gas
and its surroundings.
The process of compression or expansion should be slow
so as to provide time for exchange of heat.
These both conditions are perfectly ideal.
Equation of State : T = Constant or PV = Constant
Indicator Diagram :
P P
a Isobaric
b Isothermal
c Adiabatic
d Isochoric v
T
• Area under P – V diagram gives us work done by a gas.
Slope of P  V curve is dp at any point.
st
2.4 1 Law of Thermodynamics dv
PV = nRT
Let Q = Heat supplied to the system by the surroundings
  dp  V  p  dv   0
W = Work done by the system on the surroundings
dp P
U = Change in internal energy of the system.  –
dV V
First law of thermodynamics states that energy can neither
U = 0 (Temperature remains constant)
be created nor be destroyed. It can be only transformed
v2
from the form to another.
Mathematically : Q = U + W
W=  P dV
v2
g

Sign Conventions : v2
nRT
=  dV [Using PV = nRT)
• When heat is supplied to the system, then Q is positive V
v2
and when heat is withdrawn from the system, Q is
negative. v2
= nRT l n v
• When a gas expands, work done by the gas is positive & 1

when a gas contracts then work is negative Since P1V1 = P2V2

• U is positive, when temperature rises and U is negative,  P1 
when temperature falls. Therefore, W = nRTln  P 
 2
Remember here we always take work done by the system.
First Law of Thermodynamics
In chemistry, work done on the system is considered. Hence Q = U + W
st
there is some different look of 1 law of Thermodynamics in v2
chemistry.  Q = nRT l n v
1
Q + W = U Remarks : All the heat supplied is used entirely to do work
where Q, U have same meanings but W stands for against external sorroundings. If heat is supplied then the
work done on the system gas expands & if heat is withdrawn then the gas contracts.
2.5 Application of the First of Law of Thermodynamics Practical Examples :
st
Here we see how 1 Law of Thermodynamics is applied to Melting of ice at 0°C
various thermodynamic processes. Boiling of H2O at 100°C

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 18

2.5.2 Adiabatic Process  PV   constant 

Description : When there is not heat exchange with  
  P  constant 
surroundings  V 
Conditions : The walls of the container must be perfectly V2

non-conducting in order to prevent any exchange of heat  V  1 
= constant   
between the gas and its surroundings.  1  V 1

The process of compression or expansion should be rapid

so there is no time for the exchange of heat. constant  1 1 
=   1   1 
These conditions are again ideal condition and are hard to 1   V2 V  1

obtain
Equation of State : Also we know

Pv = constant P1 V1  P2 V2  constant
 –1
or TV = constat
1  P2 V2  P1 V1 

   
or PT 1
 cons tan t 1    V2 1 V1 1 

Indicator Diagram
P2 V2  P1 V1 nR  T1  T2 
W = 
1   1

First Law of Thermodynamics

Q = UT + W
Substituting the values
We get Q = 0
Remarks : If gas expands adiabatically then its temp
decreases & vice versa
dP Practical Example
Slope of adiabatic curve 
dV • Propagation of sound waves in the form of compression &
 rarefaction
PV const
• Sudden bursting of a cycle tube.
 P V  –1  dv    dP  V   0
2.5.3 Isochoric Process
dP – P Description : Volume remains constant
 
dV V Condition : A gas being heated or cooled inside a rigid
• As shown in graph adiabatic curve is steeper than container.
isothermal curve.
P
Equation of State : V = constant or = constant
nfRdT nR  T2  T1  P2 V2  P1 V1 T
U   
2  1  1
P V P
Work Done by Gas : If a gas adiabatically expands from V1
to V2
V2

W=
V1
 P  dv  V T T

V2
dV n f R T
U =
= constant V  2
V1

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 19
Work First Law of Thermodynamics
W = 0 as gas does not expands Q = U + W
First Law of thermodynamics
nfRT
Q = U + W  Q =  nRT
2
n f R T
 Q= ...(7)  fR 
2  Q = n  R  T ...(10)
 2 
Remarks : Since we have studied earlier, that when heat is
supplied to any process. its temp increases according to Remarks : Similar to CV, we can define molar heat capacity
relation at constant pressure

Q = nCT Q 
 CP = nT  ...(11)
P
Q
 C=
n T From equation 10 & 11
Now this C depends upon external conditions for gases.
fR
We get CP = R ...(12)
Q  2
Here it is refered as nT  ...(8)
v From equation 9 & 12

i.e. Molar heat capacity at constant volume fR

Replacing by CV we get
Comparing equation 7 and 8 2
CP = CV + R ...(13)
fR
We getCv = ...(9) which is also called as Mayer’s Relation.
2
• Similar to molar specific heat at constant pressure and molar
2.5.4 Isobaric Process specific heat at constant volume, we can define molar
Description : When pressure remains constant specific heat for any process.
Condition : When in one container, the piston is free to For example :
move and is not connected by any agent. C adiabatic = 0
Equation of State : P = constant Cisothermal = 

V Basically gas does not possess a unique specific heat.

= constant Mainly we have CP & CV
T
Indicator Diagram : Specific Heat at Constant Volume : It is defined as the
amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1g of a
gas through 1C°, when its volume is kept constant. It is
denoted as CV.
Specific Heat at Constant Pressure : It is defined as the
amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1g of a
gas through 1C° keeping its pressure constant. It is denoted
as CP.
• Please Note CP, CV means Molar heat Capacity & cP, cV
n f R T
U = same as always means specific heat capacity
2
• CV = MCV & CP = MCP where M stands for molar mass of
W =  PdV  PV any sample.

(as pressure is constant) R

• CP  CV 
= PV2 – PV1 = nRT M

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 20

2.5.5 Melting Process 2.7 Heat Engines

In any case first law is always applicable It is a device that converts heat energy into mechanical
energy.
Q= mLf as learned earlier.
Key Elements :
W=0
• A source of heat at higher temperature
(In the change of state from solid to liquid we ignore any
expansion or contraction as it is very small) • A working substance

According to first law of thermodynamics • A sink of heat at lower temperature.

U = Q – W Working :

U = mLf • The working substance goes through a cycle consisting of

several processes.
Remark : The heat given during melting is used in
increasing the internal energy of any substance • In some processes it absorbs a total amount of heat Q1 from
the source at temperature T1.
2.5.6 Boiling Process
• In some processes it rejects a total amount of heat Q2 to the
Here sink at some lower temperature T2.
Q = mLV • The work done by the system in a cycle is transferred to the
environment via some arrangement.
W = P[V2 – V1]
Schematic Diagram
(Pressure is constant during boiling and it is equal to
atmospheric pressure) W
 U = Q – W
U = mLV – P(V2 – V1)
Source or Q1 Working Q2 Sink or
2.5.7 Cyclic Process Hot Reservoir Substamnce Cold Reservoir

A cyclic process is one is which the system returns to its

T1 T2
initial stage after undergoing a serves of change
Indicatgor Diagram First Law of Thermodynamics
P  Energy is always conserved
A  Q1 = W + Q2 ...(14)
Thermal Efficiency of a heat engine is defined of the ratio
B
of net work done per cycle by the engine to the total amount
V of heat absorbed per cycle by the working substance from
the source. It is denoted by .
U = 0
W = Area under the loop. W
= Q ...(15)
Q = W as per First Law of thermodynamics 1

Here W is positive if the cycle is clockwise & it is negative Using equation 14 and 15 we get
if the cyclic is anti clockwise.
Q2
2.6 Limitations of the First Law of Thermodynamics  = 1 Q ...(16)
1

• The first law does not indicate the direction in which the Ideally engines shuld have efficiency = 1
change can occur. Remarks : The mechanism of conversion of heat into work
• The first law gives no idea about the extent of change varies for different heat engines.
• The first law of thermodynamics gives no information about • The system heated by an external furnace, as in a steam
the source of heat. i.e. whether it is a hot or a cold body. engine. Such engines are called as external combustion
engine.

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 21
• The system is which heat is produced by burning the fuel 2.9 Second Law of Thermodynamics
inside the main body of the engine. Such an engine is called
There are number of ways in which this law can be stated.
as Internal Combustion Engine.
Though all the statements are the same in their contents,
2.8 Refrigerator and Heat Pumps the following two are significant.

A refrigertor or heat pump is a device used for cooling Kelvin Planck Statement : No process is possible whose
things. sole result is the absorption of heat from a reservoir and the
complete conversion of the heat into work.
Key Elements :
Clausius Statement : No process is possible whose sole
• A cold reservoir at temperature T2.
result is the transfer of heat from a colder object to a hotter
• A working substance. object.
• A hot reservoir at temperature T1 Significance : 100% efficiency in heat engines or infinite
Working CoP in refrigerators is not possible.
• The working substance goes through a cycle consisting of 2.10 Reversible and Irreversible Process
several process.
Reversible Process : A thermodynamic process taking a
• A sudden expansion of the gas from high to low pressure system from initial state i to final state f is reversible, if the
which cool it and converts it into a vapour-liquid mixture. process can be turned back such that both, the system and
• Absorption by the cold fluid of heat from the region to be the surroundings return to their original states, with no
cooled converting it into vapour. other change anywhere else in the universe.
• Heating up of the vapour due to external work done on the Conditions for reversibility :
working substance. 1. Process should proceed at an extremely slow rate, i.e.,
process is quasistatic so that system is in equilibrium with
• Release of heat by the vapour to the sorroundings bringing
surroundings at every stage.
it to the initial state and completing the cycle.
2. The system should be free from dissipative forces like
Sychematic Diagram. friction, inelasticity; viscosity etc.
Examples : No process is exactly reversible, though a slow
expansion of an ideal gas is approximately reversible.
Irreversible Process : A process which does not satisfy
any of the conditions for reversible is called an irreversible
process.
Causes :
• Spontaneous process
First Law of Thermodynamics
• Presence of friction, viscosity and such dissipative forces
Q2 + W = Q1 ...(17)
Significance of Reversibility :
Coefficient of Performance of refrigerator () is defined as
the ratio of quantity of heat removed per cycle from contents • Main concern of thermodynamics is the efficiency with
of the refrigerator (Q2) to the energy spent per cycle (W) to which the heat is converted into Mechanical Energy.
remove this heat • Second Law of Thermodynamics rules out the possibility
of a perfect heat engine with 100% efficiency.
Q2
 ...(18) • It turns out that heat engine based on idealised reversible
W processes achieves the highest possible efficiency.
Using equation 17 and 18 we get 2.11 Carnot Engine
Q2 Sadi Carnot devised on ideal cycle of operation for a heat
 engine called as carnot cycle.
Q1  Q 2
Engine used for realising this ideal cycle is called as carnot
Ideally heat pumps should have  =  heat engine.
Constructions : The essential parts of an ideal heat engine
or Carnot heat engine are shown in figure.

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 22

Consider one gram mole of an ideal gas enclosed in the

cylinder. Let V1, P1, T1 be the initial volume, pressure and
temperature of the gas. The initial state of the gas is
represented by the point A on P–V. diagram, We shall
Cylinder
Ideal assume that all the four processes are quasi-static and
Gas dissipative, the two conditions for their reversibility.
Steps
Source at Insulating Sink at
Temp. T1 Pad Temp. T 2 1. Isothermal Expansion :
The cylinder is placed on the source and gas is allowed to
(i) Source of heat : The source is maintained at a fixed higher expand by slow outward motion of piston. Since base is
temperature T1, from which the working substance draws perfectly conducting therefore the process is isothermal.
heat. The source is supposed to possess infinite thermal
Now
capacity and as such any amount of heat can be drawn
from it without changing its temperature. U1 = 0
(ii) Sink of heat : The sink is maintained at a fixed lower
V2
temperature T2, to which any amount of heat can be rejected q1 = W1 = RT1l n . V = Area ABMKA
1
by the working substance. It has also infinite thermal
capacity and as such its temperature remains constant at q1  Heat absorbed by gas
T2, even when any amount of heat is rejected to it.
w1  work done by gas
(iii) Working substance : A perfect gas acts as the working
substance. It is contained in a cylinder with non-conducting 2. Adiabatic Expansion :
sides but having a perfectly conducting-base. This cylinder The cylinder is now removed from source and is placed on
is fitted with perfectly non-conducting and frictionless the perfectly insulating pad. The gas is allowed to expand
piston. further from B(P2, V2) to C (P3, V3). Since the gas is thermally
Apart from these essential parts, there is a perfectly insulated from all sides, therefore the processes is adiabatic
insulating stand or pad on which the cylinder can be placed. q2 = 0
It would isolate the working substance completely from the
surroundings. Hence, the gas can undergo adiabatic R  T2  T1 
U 2 
changes.  1
The Carnot cycle consists of the following four stages :
1. Isothermal expansion R  T1  T2 
W2  = Area BCNMB
 1
2. Adiabatic expansion
3. Isothermal compression 3. Isothermal Compression :
4. Adiabatic compression. The cylinder is now removed from the insulating pad and is
The cycle is carried out with the help of the Carnot engine placed on the sink at a temperature T2. The piston is moved
as detailed below : slowly so that the gas is compressed until is pressure is P4
and volume is V4.
P U3 = 0
Pressure (P)

A(V1, P1) V4
W3  –RT2 l n
B(V 2, P 2)
V3 = – Area CDLNC
Q1 T1
D(V4, P4)
C(V 3, P 3) V4
q 3  –RT2 l n
Q2
T2 V3
X
O K L M N q3 = Heat absorbed in this process
Volume (V)
W3 = Work done by gas

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 23
4. Adiabatic Compression : Q1 T1

The cylinder is again placed on the insulating pad, such Q 2 T2
that the process remains adiabatic. Here the gas is further
compressed to its initial P1 and V1. T2
 Carnot  1 
T1
R  T1  T2 
U 4  • Carnot engine - depends only upon source temperature and
 1
sink temperature.

–R  T1  T2  • Carnot engine =1 only when T2 = 0 K or T1 =  which is

W4  = – area DAKLD impossible to attain.
 1
• If T2 = T1   =  Heat cannot be converted to mechanical
q4 = 0 energy unless there is same difference between the
W4 = work done by the gas temperature of source and sink.
Analysis : 2.12 Carnot Theorem
Total work done by the engine per cycle. Statement :
= W1 + W2 + W3 + W4 (a) Working between two given temperatures, T 1 of hot
= W1 + W 3 reservoir (the source) and T2 of cold reservoir (the sink
give closing parenthesis, no engine can have efficiency
V2 V more than that of the Carnot engine.
W = RT1l n – RT2 l n 4
V1 V3 (b) The efficiency of the Carnot engine is independent of the
nature of the working substance.
Q1 = Total heat absorbed = q1
Engine used for realising this ideal cycle is called as carnot
V heat engine.
= RT1l n 2 ...(19)
V1 Proof :
Q2 = Total heat released = –q3 Step - 1 : Imagine a reversible engine R and an irreversible
engine-I working between the same source (hot reservoir T1)
[q3 = Heat absorbed & not heat released]
and sink (cold reservoir T2).
V3 Step - 2 : Couple two engines such that I acts like heat
= RT2 l n ...(20)
V4 engine and R acts like refrigerator.
Step - 3 : Let engine I absorb Q1 heat from the source deliver
We can see that for heat engine 1 1
work W and release the balance Q1 – W to the sink in one
W = Q 1 – Q2 cycle.
= Area under ABCDA
Efficiency of Carnot Engine

W Q
  1 2
Q1 Q1

Now steps 2 is adiabatic and step 4 is also adiabatic

 T1 V2 1  T2 V3 1

and T1 V1 1  T2 V4 1 Step - 4 : Arrange R, such that it returns same heat Q, to
the source, taking Q 2 from the sink and requiring work
V2 V3 W = Q1 – Q2 to be done on it.
  ...(21)
V1 V4 Step - 5 : Supppose R < I (i.e.) If R were to act as an
engine it would give less work output than that of I (i.e.)
From equation 19, 20 and 21 we get 1 1
W < W for a given Q1 and Q1 – W > Q1 – W

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 24
Step - 6 : In totality, the I-R system extracts heat (Q1 – W) – • There is no force of attraction or repulsion amongst the
1 1
(Q1 – W ) = W – W & delivers same amount of work in one molecules of an ideal gas.
cycle, without any change in source or anywhere else. This
3.2.2 Real Gas
is against second Law of Thermodynamics. (Kelvin - Planck
statement of second law of thermodynamics) All gases are referred to as real Gases.

Hence the assertion Qn1 > nR is wrong. All real gas near the ideal gas behaviour at low pressures
and temperatures high enough, where they cannot be
• Similar argument can be put up for the second statement of
liquified.
carnot theorem, (i.e) Carnot efficiency is independent of
working substance. 3.2.3 Ideal Gas Laws
 We use ideal gas for calculating but the relation. Avogadro Hypothesis : Equal volumes of all gas under
identical conditions of pressure and temperature would
Q1 T1 contain equal number of molecule.

Q 2 T2 will always hold true for any working substance
Perfect Gas Equation :
used in a carnot engine. PV = nRT

3. KINETIC THEORY OF GASES nRT

and P
M
In this topic, we discuss the behaviour of gases and how
are the various state variable like P, V, T, moles, U are inter- where n = Number of moles.
related with each other R = Universal Gas constant = NAkB
where NA = Avagadro No.
3.1 Molecular Nature of Matter
kB = Boltzman constant
Same as Atomic Theory given by Delton. According to
R = 8.031 J/mol K.
him, atoms are the smallest constituents of elements. All
atoms of one element are identical, but atoms of different R = 1.98 Cal/mol K.
element are different. Boyle’s Law : When temperature of a given mass of gas is
In solids : Atoms tightly packed, interatomic spacing about kept constant, its pressure varies inversely as the volume
of gas.
1A° . Interatomic force of attraction are strong.
(i.e.) PV = constant
In liquids : Atoms are not as rigidly fixed as in solids.
Interatomic spacing is about the same 2Å. Interatomic force Charles Law : When pressure of a given mass of kept
a attraction are relative weaker. constant, volume of the gas varies directly as the
temperature of the gas.
In Gases : Atoms very free. Inter atomic spacing is about
tens of Angstroms. Interatomic forces are much weaker in (i.e.) V T
gases than both in solids and liquids. Dalton’s Law of Partial Pressure : The total pressure of a
mixture of ideal gases is the sum of partial pressures exerted
In this chapter, we mainly focus on gases.
by the individual gases in the mixture.
3.2 Molecular Nature of Matter PV = (n1 + n2 + n3 + ...)RT

3.2.1 Ideal Gas RT

 P = (n1 + n2 + n3 + ...)
V
That gas which strictly obeys the gas laws, (such as Boyle’s
Law, Charles, Gay Lussac’s Law etc.) P = P1 + P2 + ......
Characteristics
n1RT
• The size of the molecule of an ideal gas is zero. where P1 = Pressure of gas
V

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 25
Deviation of Real Gas from Ideal Gas : 4. The molecules do not exert any fore of attraction or
repulsion on each other, except during collision.
5. The collisions of the molecules with themselves and with
the walls of the vessel are perfectly elastic. As such, that
momentum and the kinetic energy of the molecules are
conserved during collisions, though their individual
velocities change.
6. There is no concentration of the molecules at any point
inside the container i.e. molecular density is uniform
throughout the gas.
7. A molecule moves along a straight line between two
successive collisions and the average straight distance
covered between two successive collisions is called the
1.6 mean free path of the molecules.
1.4 8. The collisions are almost instantaneous, i.e., the time of
P 1.2
collision of two molecules is negligible as compared to time
interval between two successive collisions.
1.0 T1
3.4 Pressure of an Ideal Gas and its Expression
T1 > T2 > T3
0.8
T1 Pressure exerted by the gas is due to continuous bombardment
0.6
of gas molecules against the walls of the container.
0.4 T2 T2 Expression :
T3
0.2 Consider a gas enclosed in a cube of side l. Take the axes to
0
T3 be parallel to the sides of the cube, as shown in figure. A
20 60 100 140 160 220 molecule with velocity (vx, vy, vz) hits the planar wall parallel
2
V to yz-plane of area A (= l ). Since the collision is elastic, the
molecule rebounds with the same velocity; its y and z
1.2 components of velocity do not change in the collision but
P1 > P2 > P3 the x-component reverses sign. That is, the velocity after
1.0 collision is (–vx,vz, vy). The change in momentum of the
T 0.8 P1 molecule is : –mx – (mx) = – 2mx. By the principle of
conservation of momentum, the magnitude of momentum
0.6 imparted to the wall in the collision = 2mvx.
P2
0.4
P3
0.2

0
0 100 200 300 400 500
V

3.3 Kinetic Theory Postulates

1. A gas consists of a very large number of molecules (of the To calculate the force (and pressure) on the wall, we need
23
order of Avogadro’s number, 10 ), which are perfect elastic to calculate momentum imparted to the wall per unit time, if
spheres. For a given gas they are identical in all respects, it is within the distance vx t from the wall. that is, all
but for different gases, they are different. molecules within the volume, Avx t only can hit the wall in
2. The molecules of a gas are in a state of incessant random 1
time T is A vx t n, where n is the number of molecules
motion. They move in all directions with different speeds., 2
( of the order of 500 m/s) and obey Newton’s laws of motion. per unit volume. The total momentum transferred to the
3. The size of the gas molecules is very small as compred to 1
the distance between them. If typical size of molecule is 2 wall by these molecules in time t is : Q = (2mvx) (
n Avvxt)
2
Å, average distance between the molecules is ³ 20 Å. Hence
The force on the wall is the rate of momentum transfer Q/t
volume occupied by the molecules is negligible in
and pressure is force per unit area :
comparison to the volume of the gas. 2
P = Q/(A t) = nm vx

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 26
Actually, all molecules in a gas do not have the same with equation 23 and Ideal gas equation
velocity; there is a distribution in velocities. The above
1
equation therefore, stands for pressure due to the group of nRT  Mv 2
molecules with speed vx in the x-direction and n stands for 3
the number density of that group of molecules. The total 1
pressure is obtained by summing over the contribution due  nRT  Nmv 2
3
to all groups:
n 3RT 1
P  nmv 2x   mv 2
N 2 2
where v 2x is the average of v 2x . Now the gas is isotropic, Also N = nNA
i.e. there is no preferred direction of velocity of the molecules 3 R 1
in the vessel. Therefore by symmetry,  T  mv 2
2 NA 2
v 2x  v 2y  v 2z
3
 K B T   K .E avg
1 1 2
Vx2     v 2x  v 2y  v 2z     v 2
3
     3 3
Average KE of translation per molecule of the gas kBT
where v is the speed and v 2 denotes the mean of the squared 2
speed. Thus 3.5 Kinetic Interpretation of Temperature
1 From above equations, we can easily see that KE of one
P    nmv 2
 3 molecule is only dependent upon its temperature.
1 2 1M 1 2  KE of molecule will cease if, the temperature of the gas
P  mn    v ...(22)
3 3V 3 molecules become absolute zero.

M = Total mass of gas moleculus  Absolute zero of a temperature may be defined as that
temperature at which the root mean square velocity of the
V = Total volume fo gas molecules gas molecule reduces to zero.
3.4.1 Relation between Pressure and KE of Gas Molecules All the ideal gas laws can be derived from Kinetic Theory
of gases.
From equation 22
3.6 Derivation of Gas Laws from Kinetic Theory
1
P   2
3 3.6.1 Boyle’s Law
2 1 –2 
 p  MV  2
3V  2  We know that PV  NK
3
2 K .E
P where K is the average kinetic energy of translation per
3 V
gas molecule. At constant temperature. K is constant and
2
 P E for a given mass of the gas. N is constant.
3
 Pressure exerted by an ideal gas is numerically equal to two Thus, PV = constant for given mass of gas at constant
third of mean kinetic temperature, which is the Boyle’s Law.

3.4.2 Average KE per molecule of the Gas 3.6.2 Charle’s Law

From equation 22 2
We know that PV  NK
3
We know, P  1 M v 2
3V For a given mass of gas, N is constant.

1
 PV  Mv 2 ...(23)
3

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 27

3 r vrms
Since K  k B T, K  T and as such PV  T.
2
3P 3P 1
If P is constant, V  T, which is the Charles’ Law. But as v rms  
,r

or r 

3.6.3 Constant Volume Law
Therefore, if r1 and r2 are the rates of diffusion of two gases
2 of densities 1 and 2 respectively,
We know that PV  NK
3
r1 2
For a given mass of gas, N is constant. Since 
r2 1
3
K k B T, K  T The rates of diffusion of two gases are thus inversely
2
proprotional to the square roots of their densities which is
Thus, PV  T Graham’s Law of diffusion.
If V is constant, P  T, which the constant volume law.
3.6.7 Dalton’s Law of Partial Pressures
3.6.4 Ideal Gas Equation
The kinetic theory of gases attributes the gas pressure to
2 3 the bombardment of the walls of the containing vessel by
As PV  NK and K  k B T
3 2 molecules. In a mixture of ideal gases, we might therefore
expect the total pressure (P) to be the sum of the partial
2 3 
PV  N  k B T  or PV = Nk T pressures (p1, p2, ...) due to each gas, i.e.,
3 2  B

which is the ideal gas equation. 2 N1 2 N2

P  p1  p 2  ...  K1  K 2  ...
3 V1 3 V2
3.6.5 Avogadro’s Law

Consider two gases 1 and 2. We can write 2 N N 

or P   1 K1  2 K 2  ... 
3  V1 V2 
2 2
P1 V1  N1 K 1 , P2 V2  N 2 K 2
3 3 In equilibrium, the average kinetic energy of the molecules
If their pressures, volumes and temperatures are the same, of different gases will be equal, i.e.,
then
3
K1  K 2  ...K n  k BT
P1 = P2, V1 = V2, K1  K 2 . 2
Clearly, N1 = N2 Thus : Thus,
Equal volumes of all ideal gases existing under the same
2 3
conditions of temperature and pressure contain equal P  n1  n 2  ...  k B T    n1  n 2  ... k B T ...(24)
3 2 
number of molecules which is Avogadro’s Law or
hypothesis.
N1 N2
This law is named after the Italian physicist and chemist, where n1  V , n 2  V ...
1 2
Amedeo Avogadro (1776–1856).
Equation (24) represents Dalton’s Law of partial pressures
PV
Alliter : As PV  Nk B T, N  which states that :
k BT
The resultant pressure exerted by a mixture of gases or
If P, V and T are constants, N is also constant. vapours which do not interact in any way is equal to the
3.6.6 Graham’s Law of Diffusion sum of their individual (i.e., partial) pressures.
Figures shows a model explaning kinetic theory of gases. It
The rate (r) of diffusion of a gas through a porous pot or
has been constructed in accordance with theory on one
into another gas is determined by the rms speed of its
molecules, i.e., hand and real experimental observations on the other hand.

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 28

1 2 N = Number of degrees of freedom of the system

mv  K
I PV = nRT 2 III N = 3A– R
3
 k BT
2 3.8.1 Monoatomic Gases
Based on Based on combining
experimental two mathematical
Based on models of a gas in
The molecules of a monoatomic gas (like neon, argon,
observations
of gases 1  Nm  2 Newtonian boxes I and II helium etc) consists only of one atom.
II P  v mechanical
3  V  treatment of  A=1
gas as
collection of R=0
particles
 N=3
2 Here 3 degrees of freedom are for translational motion
PV  NK
3 (IV)
= NkB T 3.8.2 Diatomic Gases
Based on substituting
and rearranging the expression A=2
for K back into equation in box II
Assuming the distance between the two molecules is fixed
The above piece of logic is tempting but false. This is due then R = 1
to the reason that though the equation in box IV is useful,
 N=3×2–1=5
it does not tell us anything new, since it results from
combining equations in boxes II and III. Here 5 degrees of freedom implies combination of 3
translational energies and 2 rotational energies.
3.7 Internal Energy
As studied in thermodynamics, Internal Energy of any
substance is the combination of Potential Energies &
Kinetic Energies of all molecules inside a given gas.
• In real gas
Internal Energy = P.E of molecules + K.E of Molecules
• In real gas
Y Y
Internal Energy = K.E of Molecules
Here PE of molecules is zero as assumed in Kinetic theory
postulates; There is no interaction between the molecules A1
A1 A2
X X
hence its interactional energy is zero. A2

3.8 Degree of Freedom Z Z (i) (ii)

(a) (b)
Y
The number of degrees of freedom of a dynamical system is
defined as the total number of co-ordinates or independent A1
quantities required to describe completely the position &
X
configuration of the system. A2 A3
Example :
Z
(c)
• A particle moving in straight line, say along X-axis need
only x coordinate to define itself. It has only one degree of If vibrational motion is also considered then [only at very
freedom. high temperatures]
• A particle in a plane, needs 2 co-ordinates, hence has 2 N=7
degrees of freedom. where 3 for translational
In general if 2 for rotational
A = number of particles in the system 2 for vibrational
R = number of independent relations among the particles

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 29

3.8.3 Triatomic Gas dy

where  vibrational velocity
dt
Linear
ky 2
A=3 and = Energy due to configuration
R=2 2
 N=3×3–2=7 According to Law of Equipartition
Non-Linear
1
Energy per degree of freedom  k BT
2

1 1
 Total energy  k B T  k B T  k B T is energy for
2 2

A=3 complete one vibrational mode.

R=3 3.10 Specific Heat Capacity

 N=3×3–3=6 With the knowledge of law of equipartition, we can predict
• Here again vibrational energy is ignored. the heat capacity of various gases.

3.8.4 Polyatomic Gas 3.10.1 Monoatomic Gas

A polyatomic gas has 3 translational, 3 rotational degrees Degree of freedom = 3.

of freedom. Apart from them if there V vibrational modes  Average Energy of a molecule at temperature T
then there will be additional 2V vibrational degrees of
freedom. 1 
 E  3 k BT 
 Total degree of freedom 2 
n = 3 + 3 + 2V = 6 + 2V Energy for one mole  E × NA
3.9 Law of Equipartition of Energy 3
 U  k B NA  T
Statement : According to this law, for any dynamical system 2
in thrmal equilibrium, the total energy is distributed equally
amongst all the degrees of freedom, and the energy 3
 U RT
associated with each molecule per degree of freedom is 2

1 In thermodynamics, we studied
k B T , where kB is Boltzman constant and T is temperature
2
Q  U
of the system. CV   [ W = 0 for constant v]
T  V T
k BT
Application : U  f where f = Total degree of freedom. 3R
2  CV 
This law is very helpful in determining the total internal 2
energy of any system be it monoatomic, diatomic or any
polyatomic. Once the internal energy is know we can very 5R CP 5
 CP  &  
easily predict Cv & CP for such systems. 2 CV 3 .

Remark : In case vibrational motion is also there in any 3.10.2 Diatomic Gases
system, say for diatomic molcule, then there should be
When no vibration
energy due to vibrational as well given by
Degree of freedom = 5
2
1  dy  1 2
EV  m    ky 5
2  dt  2 Average energy for one mole = RT
2

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 30

U 5 Therefore the atoms do not possess any translational or

 CV   R rotational degree of freedom.
T 2
On the other hand, the molecules do possess vibrational
7R
CP  motion along 3 mutually perpendicular directions.
2
Hence for 1 mole of a solid, threre are NA number of atoms.
C 7
 P  The energy associated with every molecule
CV 5
 1 
When vibration is present.  3  2  k B T   3K B T
 2 
There is only one mode of vibration between 2 molecules.
 U = 3 RT for one mole
 Degree of freedom = 7
Q U
7  C   3R
 U  RT T T
2
• The above equation is called as Dulong & Petit’s Law.
7 • At low temperatures the vibrational mode may not be that
 CV  R
2 active hence, heat capacity is low at low temperatures for
9 solids.
and CP  R
2 C
3R
9
and 
7
3.10.3 Polyatomic Gases
T
Degree of freedom 300 K
= 3 for translational 3.10.5 Specific heat capacity of Water
+ 3 for rotational
Water is treated like solid.
+ 2vV for vibrational
Water has three atoms, 2 of hydrogen and one of oxygen
= 6 + 2V
 Total degree of freedom for every atom
if v = Number of vibrational modes
=3×2=6
RT  Total degree of freedom for every molecule of water
 U   6  2V  K
2 = 3 × 6 = 18
 CV = (3 + V)R
 1 
18  RT 
CP = (4 + V) R
 Q U  2 
C  
T T T
4V
and 
3 V C = 9R

3.10.4 Specific heat capacity of solids 3.11 Maxwell Law of Distribution of Molecular
• In solids, there is very less difference between heat capacity Assumptions of Maxwell Distribution
at constant pressure or at constant volume. Therefore we
• Molecules of all velocities between 0 to  are present.
do not differentiate between CP & CV for solids.
• Velocity of one molecule, continuously changes, though
Q U fraction of molecules in one range of velocities is constant.
 C 
T T Result
{As solids hardly expand or expansion is negligible} 3/ 2 mv2
 M  
Now in solid the atoms are arranged in an array structure N V  4N   V 2e 2 k BT

and they are not free to move independently like in gases.  2k B T 

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 31
Expression :
dN V
Where NV  Mean Free Path
dV

Where dNV = Total number of molecules

with speeds between V & V + dV
N = Total number of molecules.

NV

Suppose the molecules of a gas are spheres of diameter d.

Focus on a single molecule with the average speed V . It
will suffer collision with any molecule that comes within a
V distance d between the centres. In time t, it sweeps a
Vmp Vav Vrms
volume d2 V t wherein any other molecule will collide
Based on this we define three types of speed for molecules with it (as shown in figure). If n is the number of molecules
of gas per unit volume, the molecule suffers nd2 V t collisions
1/ 2
1 
1/ 2 in time t. thus the rate of collisions is nd2 V or the time
 
Vrms  V 2    V 2 dNv 
N 
between two successive collisions is on the average.
 = 1/(n V d2)
3RT
Vrms  The average distance between two successive collisions,
M called the mean free path l, is :
Where M = Molecular Mass of Gas l = V = 1/(nd2)
1 In this derivation, we imagined the other molecules to be at
Similarly Vav  V  VdN V
N rest. But actually all molecules are moving and the collision
rate is determined by the average relative velocity of the
8RT molecules. Thus we need to replace V by V in equation. A

M more exact treatment.
1
=
But VMP is velocity at which
dN V
0 
2nd 2 
dv Result
1
l=
 VMP 
3RT  2nd 2 
M
for N molecules PV = NKoT
Physically VMP is velocity possessed by Maximum number
N p
of molecules. n 
V K BT
Remarks :
Vrms > Vav > VMP K BT

2 d 2 P
3.12 Mean Free Path Remark : Mean free path depends inversely on the number
The path tranversed by a molecule between two successive density and size of the molecule.
collisions with other molecule is called the mean free path 3.13 Brownian Motion
Total distance travelled by a molecule The irregular movement of suspended particles like tiny
l
No. of collisions it makes with other molecules. dust particles or pollen grains in a liquid is called Brownian
Motion.

SCAN CODE
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 32

SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1 (d) The atmosphere serves purpose of a blanket over the
Burns from steam are usually more serious than those earth and it does not allow earth’s heat to be radiated
during night.
from boiling water. Why ?
(e) This is due to the fact that steam contains more heat in
Sol. For water, the latent heat of fusion and vaporisation are, the form of latent heat (540 calories/ gram) than water.
Lf = 3.33 × 105 J kg–1 and LV = 22.6 × 105 J respectively. It
means 3.33 × 105 J of heat are needed to melt 1 kg of ice at Example - 3
0°C and 22.6 × 105 J of heat are needed to convert 1 kg of Two slabs thickness l1 and l2 and conductivities K1 and
water to steam at 100°C. So, steam at 100°C carries 540 cal/gm K2 are in the thermal constant with each other as shown
more heat than water at 100°C. This is why burns from steam in the figure alongside. The temperature of their outer
are usually more serious than those from boiling water. surfaces are T1 and T2 respectively (T1 > T2). Determine
Example - 2 the temperature at their interface and the rate of heat
transfer through the slabs in the steady state condition.
Explain why :
Also find the equivalent conductivity of the system.
(a) a body with large reflectivity is a poor emitter.
(b) a brass tumbler feels colder than a wooden tray in
winter.
(c) On optical pyrometry (for measuring high
temperatures) caliberated for an ideal black body
radiation, gives too low a value for the temperature
of a red hot iron piece in the open, but gives a correct
value for the temperature when the same piece is in
the furnace. Sol. If T be the temperature at the interface, then the rate at
which heat is transferred through slab ‘2’ is given by :
(d) the earth without its atmosphere would be
inhospitably cold. d1 K1A  T1  T 
 ...(i)
(e) a heating system based on circulation of steam are dt l1
more efficient in warming a building than those based
d 2 K 2 A  T  T2 
on circulation of hot water. and  ...(ii)
dt l2
Sol. (a) The body with large reflectivity would be poor absorber In steady state,
of radiations. Poor absorbers are poor radiators of
radiation. Hence, body with large reflectivity is a poor K1 A  T1  T  K 2 A  T  T2 

emitter. l1 l2
(b) Brass is a good conductor of heat. When we touch
K1T1l2  K 2 l1T2
brass tumbler with our fingers, our body heat is quickly  T ...(iii)
K1l2  K 2 l1
conducted to the brass tumbler and hence temperature
of the finger tips is reduced. Thus, the brass-tumbler Putting the value of (iii) in equations (i) or (ii), we get
feels colder.
d A  T1  T2 
On the other hand, wood is a bad conductor, hence  [ l1 = l2]
dt  l1 l 
our body heat is not conducted to the wooden tray.   2 
(c) The temperature of red hot iron in the oven is given by  K1 K 2 
E 1 =  T 4. When iron is taken out in the open 2K 1 K 2
temperature (T 0), its radiation energy is given by, or
 l +l 
1 2
 K  K K
K
ES =  (T4 – T04). Thus, the pyrometer measures low  l1 l  1 2
  2 
values for the red hot iron in the open.  K1 K 2 
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 33
Example - 4 Example - 6

Two rods A and B are of equal length. Each ends at Answer the following questions based on the p-T phase
temperatures T1 and T2. What is the condition that will diagram of CO2 :
ensure equal rates of flow of heat through the rods A and (a) At what temperature and pressure can the solid, liquid
B? and vapour phases of CO2 and CO exist in equilibrium.
(b) What is the effect of decrease of pressure on the fusion
Sol. Suppose that the two rods 1 and 2 have same temperature
and boiling point of CO2?
difference T1 – T2 across their ends and the length of each
rod is ‘d’. (c) What are the critical temperature and pressure for CO2?
What is their significance?
For their same rate of heat condition, we have
(d) Is CO2 solid, liquid or gas (i) – 70°C under 1 atm,
K1 A1  T1  T2  K 2 A 2  T1  T2  (ii) –60°C under 10 atm
=
d d
(iii) 15°C under 56 atm.
 K1A1 = K2A2 Sol. (a) Liquid and vapour phases co-exist with solid phase at
the triple point temperature –56.6°C and a pressure of 5.11
A1 K 2
 atm.
A 2 = K1
(b) The boiling point as well as freezing poing decreases with
i.e., for the same rate of heat conduction, the area of cross- the decrease in pressure.
section of the two rods should be inversely proportional
to their coefficients of thermal conductivity.
73.0
Example - 5 56.0
P (atm)

Solid Liquid
The difference between length of a certain brass rod and
that of a steel rod is claimed to be constant at all 5.11
1.0
temperatures. Is this possible ?
Vapour
Sol. Yes, it is possible. Let 1, and 2 be the coefficients of –78.5 –56.6 20 31.1
linear expansion and l1 and l2 be the lengths of brass and T(°C)
steel rods respectively. Suppose that the temperature of
the rod is increased by T. Then, change in length of brass (c) The critical temperatures is 31.1°C and critical pressure is
rod, 73.0°C.
l1 = l1 1 T (d) (i) It is vapour, (ii) it is solid (iii) It is liquid.
and change in the length of the steel rod, Example - 7
l2 = l2 2 T. A blacksmith fixes iron ring on the rim of the wooden
wheel of a bullock cart. The diameter of the rim and the
If the difference between the lengths of the two rods is to
iron ring are 5.243 m and 5.231 m respectively at 27°C. To
remain same, then
what temperature should be ring be heated so as to fit the
or l1 = l2
rim of the wheel ?
or l1 1 T = l2 2 T.
Sol. Given, T1 = 27°C, L T = 5.231 m 1

l1 
or  2 L T = 5.243 m
l2 1 2

So, L T = L T [1 + 1 (T2 – T1)]

Thus, the lengths of the two rods should be in the inverse 2 1

ratio of their coefficients of linear expansion.  5.243 = 5.231 [1 + 1.20 × 10–5 °C–1 (T2– 27°C)]
or T2 = 218°C.
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 34
Example - 8 Example - 9
Two ideal gas thermometers A and B use oxygen and What is the temperature of the steel-copper junction in
hydrogen respectively. The following observations are the steady state of the system. Length of the steel rod
made : = 15.0 cm; length of the copper rod = 10.0 cm, temperature
Temperature Pressure Pressure of the furnace = 300°C, temperature of the other end
thermometer A thermometer B = 0°C. The area of cross-section of the steel rod is twice
Triple point 5
1.250 × 10 Pa 0.200 × 105 Pa that of the copper rod. [Theorem conductivity of steel
of water = 50.2 Js –1 m–1 K–1; and of copper = 385 Js–1 m–1 K–1]
Normal melting 1.797 × 105 Pa 0.287 × 105 Pa Steel

point of sulphur Furnace Ice

(300°) 0°C
(a) What is the absolute temperature of normal melting Insulating
Copper
material
point of sulphur as read by the thermometer A and B ?
(b) What do you think is the reason for the slightly Sol. Heat loss is reduced by placing insulating material around
different answers from A and B? (Thermometers are the rods. In the steady state, the rate of heat flowing across
a cross-section of the rod is the same at every point along
not faulty). What further procedure is needed in the
the length of the combined steel-copper rod. Let T be the
experiment to reduce the discrepancy between the
temperature of the steel-copper junction in the steady state.
two readings ?
K1A1  300  T  K2A2 T  0
Sol. (a) For thermometer A, Then, 
L1 L2
5
ptr = 1.250 × 10 Pa
Where 1 and 2 refer to the steel and copper rods
Ttr = 273.16 K respectively. For A1 = 2A2, L1 = 15 cm,
p = 1.797 × 105 Pa L2 = 10 cm,
and T=? K1 = 50.2, K2 = 385, we have

p tr p T 50.2  2  300  T  385T

Now, using   T  p tr 
Ttr T p tr 15 10
Solving it, we get, T = 44.4°C
5
1.797  10  273.16 Example - 10
=
1.250  105
A brass boiler has a base area of 0.15 m2 and thickness 1.0 cm.
= 392.69 K It boils water at the rate of 6.0 kg/min when placed on a
gas stove. Estimate the temperature of the part of the
For the thermometer B, flame in contact with the boiler. Thermal conductivity of
p tr = 0.200 × 105 Pa, Ttr = 273.16 K brass = 109 Js–1 m–1 °C–1. (Heat of vaporization of water
= 2256 × 103 J kg–1)
P = 0.287 × 105 Pa, T = ?
Sol. Here, base area A = 0.15 m2
T 0.287  105
Ttr = p. tr   273.16 Thickness, x = 1 cm = 1 × 10–2 m
p tr 0.200  105
K = 109 Js–1 m–1 °C–1
= 391.98 K L = 2256 × 103 J kg–1
(b) The discrepancy between the two readings is due to the T = (T – 100)
fact that the gases are not perfectly ideal gases. To reduce Here, T = temperature of the part of the flame in contact
the discrepancy, the readings should be taken at low with boiler.
pressures so that the gases could show perfect behaviour. Rate of boiling of water = 6 kg min–1. Rate at which heat is
being supplied to water is :
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 35

 mL 6  2256  103 Example - 12

 
t t 60 A body takes 5 minutes to cool from 80°C to 65°C and 10
minutes to cool to 55°C. Find the temperature of the
= 2.2556 × 105 Js–1
surroundings.
  L  Sol. In the first case, T1 = 80°C, T2 = 65°C, t = 5 min
Also, = KA  
t  x 
Let T0 be the temperature of the surroundings
109  0.15   T  100 
=  T1  T0 
1 102 From ln T  T  Kt, we get
 2 0
= 1635 (T – 100)

 80  T0 
Equating the above two values of ln 65  T  5K ...(i)
t  0

1635 (T – 100) = 2.256 × 105 In the second case,

5
2.256  10 T1 = 65°C, T2 = 55°C, t = 10 min – 5 min = 5 min
 T – 100 =  138
1635
 T1  T0 
 T = 138 + 100 = 238°C From ln T  T  Kt, we get
 2 0
Example - 11
A clock which keeps correct time at 25°C has a pendulum
 65  T0 
made of brass. How many seconds will it gain per day ln 55  T  5K ...(ii)
when the temperature falls to the freezing point? (brass =
 0

18.7 × 10–6/°C) From equation (i) and (ii),

Sol. Let l0 be the length of the pendulum at 0°C and l at 25°C
and let T0 and T be the corresponding time periods.  80  T0   65  T0 
ln 65  T = ln 55  T
 0  0

T l l 1  t 
Thus, T =  0  1  t
0 l0 l0 80  T   65  T 
0 0
or 
 65  T   55  T 
0 0
= 1  18.7  10 6  25
or (80 – T0) (55 – T0) = (65 – T0)2
1/ 2
= 1  467.5  106  or 4400 – 55T0 – 80T0 + T02 = 4225 – 130T0 + T02
or 5T0 = 175 or T0 = 35°C
1
=  1  (467.5 × 10–6) = 1.00023375 Example - 13
2
A ‘thermocole’ ice box is a cheap and efficient material for
But as the pendulum keeps correct time at 25°C, T = 1s and storing small quantities of cooked food in summer in
so at this temperature the pendulum makes (24 × 60 × 60 = particular. A cubical ice box of side 30cm has a thickness
86400) complete oscillations. of 5.0 cm. If 4.0 kg of ice are put in the box, estimate the
1 amount of ice remaining after 6 h. The outside temperature
At 0°C, the time period is given by T0  s is 45°C, and coefficient of thermal conductivity = 0.01 J/s
1.00023375
mC°. Heat of fusion of water = 335 J/kg.
Number of oscillations made per day
Sol. We are given that
86400s
 each of side of cubical box, L = 30 cm = 0.3 m
1/1.00023375 s
thickness of each side, x = 5 cm = 0.05 cm
Number of seconds gained by the clock temperature difference between the outside and the inside
= 86420.2 s – 86400 s = 20.2 s of the box,
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 36
T1 – T2 = 45 – 0 = 45°C
4
time for which heat flow is considered Hence, V’ = × 3.143 × (1.5 × 10–8)3 × 6.023 × 1023
3
t = 6 h = (6 × 60 × 60)s = 21600 s
= 8.52 cm3
thermal conductivity of thermocole, k = 0.01 J/s mC°
Fraction of molecular volume to actual
heat of fusion of water, L = 335 J/g
surface area of the box V'
Volume =
V
= 6 (0.30 m × 0.30 m) = 0.54 m2
If m is the mass of ice that melts in 6 h, 8.52
= = 3.8 × 10–4  4 × 10–4.
Q = mL ...(i) 22400

kA  T1  T2  t Example - 15
Also, Q  ...(ii)
x Figure shows plot of pV/T versus p for 1.00 × 10–3 kg of
oxygen gas at two different temperatures.
From equations (i) and (ii), we get
y
kA  T1  T2  t
mL  pV
x JK 1 
T T1
T2
kA  T1  T2  t
or m
Lx x

(a) What does the dotted plot signify?

0.01 J / smC   0.54 m 2   45 C   21600s  (b) Which is true : T1 > T2 or T1 < T2 ?
or m
 335 J / g   0.05m  (c) What is the value of pV/T where the curves meet on
the y-axis
= 313 g = 0.313 kg
(d) If we obtained similar plots for 1.00 × 10–3 kg of
Mass of ice left after 6 h = 4 kg – 0.313 kg
hydrogen, would we get the same value of pV/T at
= 3.687 kg = 3.7 kg the point where the curves meet on the y-axis? If not,
Example - 14 what mass of hydrogen yields the same value of
Estimate the fraction of molecular volume to the actual pV/T (for low pressure high temperature region of the
volume occupied by oxygen gas at STP. Take the diameter plot)? (Molecular mass of H2 = 2.02 u, of O2 = 32.0 u,
of an oxygen molecule to be 3 Å. R = 8.31 J mol–1 K–1).

Sol. At S.T.P., actual volume occupied by 1 mole of oxygen is pV

Sol. (a) The dotted plot shows that is a constant quantity
T
V = 22400 ml = ( µR). This signifies the ideal gas behaviour.
= 22400 cm3 (b) Here T1 > T2
Also, molecular volume, (c) At the point where the curve meets the y-axis, we have

4 pV
V’= R 3 N = µR, where µ is the number of moles of oxygen gas.
3 T
Here, Mass of oxygen,
D 3 m = 1.00 × 10–3 kg
where R =  Å
2 2
Also, molecular mass,
3 M = 32 × 10–3 kg
=  10 8 = 1.5 × 10–8 cm
2
m 1.00  10 3 1
23 No. of moles, µ =  
and N = 6.023 × 10 M 32  10 3
32
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 37

pV 1 m
= R   8.31 = 0.26 J K–1 Now, µ =
T 32 M
 m = Mµ = 18.23 × 32 × 10–3 kg
pV
(d) Since the value of depends upon the number of moles, or m = 0.58 kg
T
Under the final conditions :
pV
we will not get the same value for in case of hydrogen. V’= 30 litre = 30 × 10–3 m3
T
p’ = 11 atm = 11 × 1.01 × 105 Pa
1 pV
To obtain the same value of µ (i.e., ) and hence , we T’= 17°C = 17 + 273 = 290 K
32 T
must have p 'V '
We have, µ’ =
RT '
Mass of hydrogen
= Molecular mass of hydrogen 11  1.01 10530  10 3
= = 13.83
8.31 290
1
= m’ = µ’m
32
= 13.83 × 32 × 10–3 kg = 0.44 kg
Hence, mass of hydrogen
Mass of the oxygen taken out of the cylinder
1 = m – m’ = 0.58 – 0.44 = 0.14 kg
=  molecular mass
32 Example - 17
An air bubble of volume 1.0 cm3 rises from the bottom of
1
=  2  103 kg a lake 40 m deep at temperature of 12°C. To what volume
32 does it grow when it reaches the surface, which is at a
= 6.25 × 10–5 kg temperature of 35°C ?
Example - 16
Sol. Volume of the bubble inside,
An oxygen cylinder of volume 30 litres has an initial gauge
V1 = 1 cm3 = 1 × 10–6 m3
pressure of 15 atm and a temperature of 27°C. After some
oxygen is withdrawn from the cylinder, the gauge pressure Pressure on the bubble = Pressure of water + atmospheric
drops to 11 atm and its temperature drops to 17°C. Estimate pressure,
the mass of oxygen taken out of the cylinder. = gh + 1.01 × 105
(R = 8.31 J mol–1 K–1, molecular mass of O2 = 32 u). = 1000 × 9.8 × 40 + 1.01 × 105 = 4.93 × 105 Pa
Temperature,
Sol. Under the initial conditions,
T1 = 12°C = 273 + 12 = 285 K
V = 30 litre = 30 × 10–3 m3
Also, pressure outside the lake
p = 15 atm = 15 × 1.01 × 105 Pa
p2 = 1.01 × 105 Nm–2
T = 27°C = 273 + 27 = 300 K
Temperature,
Also, R = 8.31 J mol–1 K–1 and molar mass, M = 32 × 10–3 kg.
T = 35° = 35 + 273 = 308 K
Using the relation,
Volume, V2 = ?
pV = µRT
p1 V1 p2 V2 pV T
pV Now, = or V2 = 1 1  2
 µ= T1 T2 T1 p2
RT

15  1.01  105  30  10 3 4.93  105  1  10 6  308

= = 18.23 = = 5.3 × 10–6 m3.
8.31  300 285  1.01 105
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 38
Example - 18 Also, R = 8.31 J mole–1 K–1
Estimate the average thermal energy of a helium atom at kB = 1.38 × 10–23 J K–1
(i) room temperature (27°C), (ii) the temperature on the Now, for one mole of a gas,
surface of the Sun (6000 K), (iii) the temperature of 10
pV = RT
millsion kelvin (the typical core temperature in the case
of a star). RT
or V= p
Sol. The average thermal energy of an atom is

3 8.31  290
E= kBT =
2 2.026  105

where kB = 1.38 × 10–23 J K–1 or V = 1.189 × 10–2 m3

is the Boltzmann’s const. Number of molecules per unit volume,

(i) At room temperature, N

n =
T = 27°C = 27 + 273 = 300K V

3 6.023  10 23
E=  1.38  1023  300 = 6.21 × 10–23 J  n= = 5.06 × 1025 m–3
2 1.189  10 2
(ii) At the temperature on the surface of the sun, i.e. T = 6000 K Now, mean free path, 

3 1 1
E=  1.38  1023  6000 = 1.24 × 10–19 J = 2
 2
2 2nd 2n  2r 
(iii) At
1
T = 10 million Kelvin = 1.414  3.14  5.06  1025  (2  1 1010 ) 2
= 10 × 106 K.
= 1.1 × 10–7 m
3 23 6
E = 1.38  10  10  10
2 3RT
Also, Vrms =
–16
= 2.1 × 10 J. M

Example - 19
3  8.31 290
Estimate the mean free path and collision frequency of a = = 5.08 × 102 ms–1
28 103
nitrogen molecule in a cylinder containing nitrogen at 2.0
atm and temperature 17°C. Take the radius of a nitrogen Collision frequency,
molecule to be roughly 1.0 Å. Compare the collision time Vrms 5.08  10 2
with the time the molecule moves freely between two = 
 1.1  10 7
successive collisions (Molecular mass of N2 = 28.0 u).
Time between successive collisions
Sol. Here, p = 2 atm
= 2 × 1.013 × 105 Pa 1 1
= V  5.08  109 = 1.97 × 10–10 s
= 2.023 × 105 Pa rms

T = 17°C Also, the collision time

= 17 + 273 = 290K d 2r
Radius, R = 10Å = 1 × 10–10 m = V V
rms rms

Molecular, mass (m)

= 28 u = 28 × 1.66 × 10–27 2  1 10 10
= = 3.94 × 10–29 s.
5.08  109
= 4.65 × 10–26 kg
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 39
Example - 20 Sol. No, as according to the second law of thermodynamics,
Consider in ideal gas with following distribution of speeds heat cannot be transferred on its own, from a body at lower
temperature to another at higher temperature. The maximum
Speed (m/s) % of molecules
temperature we can produce by this method is 6000 K.
200 10
400 20 Example - 22
600 40 A refrigerator is to maintain eatables kept inside at 9°C. If
800 20 room temperature is 36°C, calculate the coefficient of
1000 10 performance.
(i) Calculate Vrms and hence T (m = 3 × 0 × 10–26 kg)
Sol. Given : T1 = 36°C = (36 + 273) = 309 K
(ii) If all the molecules with speed 1000 m/s escape from the
T2 = 10°C = (10 + 273) = 283 K
system, calculate new Vrms and hence T.
T2 283 283
Sol. (i)By definition,  COP = T  T  309  283  26  10.9
1 2
2
 n i Vi
2 i Example - 23
V =
rms
 ni Two different adiabatic parts for the same gas intersect
two isothermals at T1 and T2 as shown in P-V diagram.
10(200) 2  20(400) 2  40(600) 2  20(800) 2  10(1000) 2
 How does the ratio (Va/Vd) compare with the ratio Vb/Vc)?
10  20  40  20  10
Y
105 [4  32  144  128  100]
2
Vrms =  408  103
100 A
P T1
B
Vrms = 408  103  6.39  10 2 m / s
T2
D
1 2 3 C
As mVrms  kT
2 2
X
2
O V a Vd Vb Vc
mVrms 3  1026  4.08  105 V
 T  23
 2.96  102 K.
3k 3 1.38  10
Sol. For adiabatic curve BC : T1Vb  1  T2 Vc  1
(ii) When all the molecules with speed 1000 m/s escape from
the system.
For adiabatic curve AD : T1Va  1  T2 Vd  1
10(200) 2  20(400) 2  40(600) 2  20(800) 2
2
Vrms = Dividing, we get
10  20  40  20
  1   1
 Va  V 
105  4  32  144  128  308    d 
=   104  Vb   Vc 
90 9

308 Va Vb
Vrms   102 m / s  5.85  102 m / s or 
9 Vd Vc

2
mVrms 3  1026  308  104 Va Vd
As above, T    
3k 3 1.38  1023 Vb Vc

T = 248 K. i.e., the ratio remains the same.

Example - 21 Example - 24
The temperature of the surface of sun is about 6000 K. A quantity of air at normal temperature is compressed
Can we produce a temperature of 7000 K by converging (a) slowly (b) suddenly to one third of its volume. Find
sun’s rays using a large convex lens ? the rise in temperature, if any in each case,  = 1.4
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 40

1 W 80
Sol. Here, V2 = V1 ; (T2 – T1) = ?
3  = Q  200  0.40
1

 = 1.4, T1 = 0°C = 273 K According to Carnot theorem, no engine can have

(a) when the gas is compressed slowly, the change is efficiency greater than that of Carnot engine.
isothermal, i.e., temperature remains constant.
 T  300
Therefore T = 0°  0.40  1  2   1
 T1  T1
(b) When the compression is sudden, the change is adiabatic,
300
T2 V2  1  T1 V1  1 or  1  0.40  0.60
T1
  1
 V1  300
T2 = T1    T1   500K
 V2  0.6
T2 = 273 (3)(1.4 – 1) = 273 (3)0.4 = 423.6 K Hence, minimum temp. of hot reservoir is
T2 – T1 = 426.6 – 273 = 150.6 K T1 = 500 K
= 150.6°C Example - 27
Example - 25 From what height must a block of ice be dropped in order
Water of one kg mass at 373 K is converted into steam at that it may melt completely. It is assumed that the whole
the same temperature and at atmospheric pressure. On of energy is retained by ice.
boiling, 1 c.c. of water takes a volume of 1671 c.c.. Calculate (Latent heat of ice = 3.33 × 105 J/kg)
the change in internal energy of the system, taking the heat
of vaporisation to be 540 cal. g–1. Sol. Let mass of ice block = m (kg)
Height through which it is dropped = h (m)
Sol. Here, m = 1 kg = 103 g
PE of the block, W = mgh (J)
Initial volume, V1 = 103 c.c.
Since it is assumed that whole of this energy is retained by
Final volume, V2 = 1671 × 103 c.c.
ice and is converted into heat Q,
P = 1 atmosphere
Q = mgh (J) ...(i)
= 1.0 13 × 106 dyne/cm2
If this heat is to melt the ice, then
From first law of thermodynamics
Q = (m kg) × (3.33 × 105 J/kg) = 3.33 × 105 m(J) ...(ii)
dU = dQ – dW = mL – P (V2 – V1)/J
From equation (i) and (ii),
3
1.013  106  103 1671  1 mgh = 3.33 × 105 m
= 10  540  7
4.2  10
3.33  105
dU = 540 × 103 – 40.16 × 103 or h= or h = 3.4 × 104 m
9.8
= 499.84 × 103 cal. Example - 28
= 499.84 k cal. Is it possible to heat a room by means of a refrigerator ? If
Example - 26 so, is this method the most advantageous from energetic
A heat engine operates between a cold reservoir at temp. point of view ?
T2 = 300 K and a hot reservoir at temp. T1. It takes 200 J of
Sol. Yes, a refrigerator can remove heat from the outside air and
heat from hot reservoir and delivers 120 J of heat to cold
reject it into the room. If P is the power consumed by the
reservoir in a cycle. What could be the minimum
refrigerator and Q is the heat removed from the outside air
temperature of hot reservoir ?
in a unit time, the heat rejected into the room per second =
Sol. Work done by the engine in one cycle P + Q.
W = Q1 – Q2 = 200 – 120 = 80 J
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 41

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Measurement of temperature (a) 14.17 cm, 9.17 cm (b) 9.17 cm, 14.17 cm
(c) 28.34 cm, 18.34 cm (d) 14.17 cm, 18.34 cm
1. At absolute zero
6. Two metal rods A and B are having their initial length in the
(a) all substances exist in solid form
ratio 2 : 3 and the co-efficients of linear expansion in the
(b) molecular motion ceases
ratio 3 : 4. When they are heated through the same
(c) water freezes
temperature difference, the ratio of their linear expansion is
(d) None of the above
(a) 3 : 4 (b) 1 : 2
2. At critical temperature, the surface tension of a liquid is :
(c) 2 : 3 (d) 4 : 3
(a) zero
7. A bi-metallic strip is made of two strips A and B having co-
(b) infinity
(c) the same as that at any other temperature efficient linear expansion A and B. If A <B, then on
(d) cannot be determined heating the strip will
3. The graph between two temperature scales A and B is (a) bend with A on outer side
shown in figure. (b) bend with B on outer side
(c) not bend at all
(d) None of these
8. As the temperature is increased, the time period of a
pendulum :
(a) increases as its effective length increases even though
its centre of mass still remains at the centre of the bob.
(b) decreases as its effective length increases even though
its centre of mass still remains at the centre of the bob.
(c) increases as its effective length increases due to shifting
Between upper fixed point and lower fixed point, there are of centre of mass below the centre of the bob.
150 equal divisions on scale A and 100 on scale B. The (d) decreases as its effective length remains same but the
relationship for conversion between the two scales is given centre of mass shifts above the centre of the bob.
by : 9. Two rods of different materials having coefficients of
thermal expansion 1 and 2 and Young’s moduli Y1 and Y2
t A  180 t B t A  30 t
(a)  (b)  B respectively are fixed between two rigid massive walls. The
100 150 150 100
rods are heated such that these undergo the same increase
t B  180 t A t B  40 t A in temperature. There is no bending of the rods. If 1 : 2 =
(c)  (d)  2 : 3, the thermal stresses developed in the two rods are
150 100 100 180
equal, provided Y1 : Y2 is
4. The reading of Centigrade thermometer coincides with
(a) 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 1
that of Fahrenheit thermometer in a liquid. The
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 4 : 9
temperature of the liquid is :
(a) –40°C (b) 0°C Volume Expansion
(c) 100°C (d) 300°C
10. The radius of a metal sphere at room temperature T is R,
Linear Expansion and the coefficient of linear expansion of the metal is . The
5. What should be the lengths of steel and copper rods at sphere is heated a little by a temperature T so that its new
0°C so that the length of the steel rod is 5 cm longer than temperature is (T + T). The increases in the volume of the
the copper rod at any temperature? sphere is approximately :
 (Steel) = 1.1 × 10–5 °C–1 and (a) 2R T (b) R2 T
 (Copper) = 1.7 × 10–5 °C–1 (c) 4R3 T/3 (d) 4R3 T
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 42

11. Which of the following qualities are best suited for a Phase Change
cooking utensil
17. Dimensions of latent heat are
(a) high specific heat and low thermal conductivity
(a) [M1 L2 T–2] (b) [M0 L2 T–2]
(b) high specific heat and high thermal conductivity 1 1 –1
(c) [M L T ] (d) [M1 L1 T–2]
(c) low specific heat and low thermal conductivity
(d) low specific heat and high thermal conductivity Heating Curve
12. Relation between molar and principal specific heat of gases 18. Equal masses of two liquids A and B contained in vessels
(a) Cp = Mcp (b) Cp = M + cp of negligible heat capacity are supplied heat at the same
(c) cp = MCp (d) Cp = M – cp rate. The (temperature vs time) graphs for the two liquids
Temperature Change are shown in figure. If S represents specific heat and L
represents latent heat of liquid, then
13. Liquids at temperature 60°C and 20°C, respectively, have
mass ratio 3 : 4 and their specific heats in the ratio 4 : 5. If
the two liquid mixed, the resultant temperature
(a) 70°C (b) 0°C
(c) 35°C (d) 40°C
14. Three copper blocks of masses M 1, M 2 and M 3 kg,
respectively are brought into thermal contact till they reach
equilibrium. Before contact, they were at temperatures T1,
T2, T3 (T1 > T2 > T3). Assuming there is no heat loss to the
surroundings, the equilibrium temperature T is :
(a) SA > SB ; LA < LB
T  T2  T3 (b) SA > SB ; LA > LB
(a) T  1
3 (c) SA < SB ; LA < LB
(d) SA < SB ; LA > LB
M1T1  M 2 T2  M 3 T3 19. Which of the following parameters does not characterize
(b) T 
M1  M 2  M 3 the thermodynamic state matter?
(a) temperature
M1T1  M 2 T2  M 3 T3
(c) T  (b) pressure
3  M1  M 2  M 3 
(c) work
(d) volume
M1T1s  M 2 T2 s  M 3 T3s
(d) T 
M1  M 2  M 3 Work done by pressure
(s is specific heat of copper) 20. An ideal gas undergoes cyclic process ABCDA as shown
15. Heat given to a body which raises its temperature by 1°C in given P-V diagram
is P
(a) water equivalent D C
2P0
(b) thermal capacity
(c) specific heat P0 B
A
(d) temperature gradient
V
16. If m is the mass,  is temp. and ‘s’ is specific heat, then V0 3V0
thermal capacity K is given by The amount of work done by the gas is:
(a) K = ms  (b) K = m  (a) 6P0V0
(b) –2P0V0
ms (c) +2P0V0
(c) K  (d) K = ms
 (d) +4P0V0
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 43

Graphical Analysis (Sign Convention) Degrees of Freedom

21. Work done by the gas in the process shown in figure is 27. The increase in internal energy of a gas per unit mass per
B
unit rise in tempeature is equal to
(a) Cp (b) Cp + Cv
P
C A (c) Cp – Cv (d) Cv
28. Cooking gas containers are kept in a lorry moving with
D uniform speed. The temperature of the gas molecules inside
V will
(a) positive (b) negative (a) increase
(c) zero (d) cannot say (b) decrease
(c) remain same
Internal Energy
(d) decrease for some, while increase for others
22. A gas is compressed at a constant pressure of 50 N/m2 29. For hydrogen, Cp = 3400 cal/kg.K, Cv = 2400 cal/kg.K,
from a volume of 10 m3 to a volume of 4 m3. Energy of R = 8400 J/kmole.K. If the molecular weight of H2 is 2, the
100 J is then added to the gas by heating. Its internal value of J is
energy is:
(a) 4.1 J/cal (b) 4.18 J/cal
(a) increased by 400 J
(c) 4.2 J/cal (d) 4.3 J/cal
(b) increased by 200 J
30. Which of the following statements is correct for any
(c) increased by 100 J thermodynamic system ?
(d) decreased by 200 J (a) The internal energy changes in all processes
23. A perfect gas is filled at same temperature in three (b) Internal energy and entropy are state functions
containers of volumes V, V/2 and V/4. If the respective (c) The change in entropy can never be zero
masses of the gas are M, M/2 and M/4, the pressures
(d) The work done in an adiabatic process is always zero
exerted on the walls of three containers are
31. The difference between two principal specific heats of
(a) Unequal and maximum in the container of the smallest
nitrogen is 300 J/kg.K and ratio of the two specific heats is
volume
1.4. Cp is
(b) Unequal and maximum in the container of the largest
(a) 1050 J/kg.K (b) 750 J/kg.K
volume
(c) 650 J/kg.K (d) 150 J/kg.K
(c) Equal in all the three cases
32. A system goes from A to B via two process I and II as
(d) Equal in the two containers
shown in figure. If U1 and U2 are the changes in
24. Peffect gas is one whose molecules
internal energies in the processes I and II respectively,
(a) Attract one another weakly then
(b) Repel one another weakly
(c) Strongly attract or repel one another
(d) Neither attract or repel one another
25. The internal energy of an ideal gas depends on :
(a) Pressure (b) Volume I

(c) Temperature (d) Size of the molecule

26. A given system undergoes a change in which work done
(a) U2  U1
by the system equals the decrease in its internal energy.
The system must have undergone (b) U2  U1
(a) isothermal change (b) adiabatic change (c) U1  U2
(c) isobaric change (d) isochoric change (d) relation between U1 and U2 cannot be determined
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 44

33. The density of a gas is 6 × 10–2 kg/m3 and the RMS velocity 37. If CP and CV denote the specific heats of nitrogen per unit
of the gas molecules is 500 m/s. The pressure exerted by mass at constant pressure and constant volume
the gas on the walls of the vessel is respectively, then
(a) 5 × 103 N/m2 (b) 0.83 × 10–4 N/m2 R
(a) CP – CV = 28R (b) CP – CV =
(c) 1.2 × 10 N/m –4 2
(d) 30 N/m2 28
34. If the pressure of the gas is doubled at constant volume
R
and mass, the frequency of collision of the molecules (c) CP – CV = (d) CP – CV = R
14
with the walls of a container will
(a) Not change Mean Free Path
(b) Increase four times 38. The mean free path of a gas molecule at 27°C is 2 cm. If the
(c) Be doubled rms velocity of the gas at that temperature is 10 m/s, what
is the time interval between two successive collisions ?
(d) Increase by 2 times
35. A cubic vessel (with faces horizontal + vertical) contains 1 1
(a) s (b) s
an ideal gas at NTP. The vessel is being carried by a 5 500
rocket which is moving at a speed of 500 m/s in vertical
direction. The pressure of the gas inside the vessel as 1 1
(c) s (d) s
observed by us on the ground: 50 250
(a) remains the same because 500 m/s is very much smaller 39. Mean free path () is
than Vrms of the gas (a) inversely proportional to the diameter of molecule
(b) remains the same because motion of the vessel as a (b) inversely proportional to the square of diameter of
whole does not affect the relative motion of the gas molecule
molecules and the walls (c) inversely proportional to the number of molecules per
2 unit volume.
(c) will increase by a factor equal to  Vrms   500   / Vrms ,
2 2

(d) both b and c

where vrms was the original mean square velocity of the 40. Four molecules of speed 2 km/s, 3 km/s, 4 km/s and 5 km/s.
gas The RMS speed of these molecules in km/s is
(d) will be different on the top wall and bottom wall of the
vessel 54
(a) (b) 3.5
36. 1 mole of an ideal gas is contained in a cubical vessel, 4
ABCDEFGH at 300 K, figure.
54
(c) (d) 3 3
B C 2
41. Two gases are at absolute temperature 300 K and 350 K
A D
respectively. The ratio of average kinetic energies of their
F G molecules is
E
H
3.5 3
(a) (b)
One face (EFGH) of the vessel is made up of a material 3 3.5
which totally absorbs any gas molecule incident on it. At (c) 6 : 7 (d) 36 : 49
any given time: 42. A sample of oxygen and a sample of hydrogen have the
(a) the pressure on EFGH would be zero same mass, volume and pressure. The ratio of their absolute
(b) the pressure on all the faces will be equal temperature is
(c) the pressure on EFGH would be double the pressure (a) 1/4 (b) 1/16
on ABCD (c) 4 (d) 16
(d) the pressure on EFGH would be half that on ABCD
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 45

43. Three perfect gases at absolute temperature T1, T2 and 48. An ideal gas undergoes four different processes from the
T3 are mixed. The masses of molecules are m1, m2 and same initial state, as shown in figure. Four processes are
m3 and the number of molecules are n 1 , n2 and n3 adiabatic, isothermal, isobaric and isochoric. Out of 1, 2, 3
respectively. Assuming no loss of energy, the final and 4 which one is adiabatic?
temperature of the mixture is P

n1T1  n 2 T2  n 3T3 4
(a) n1  n 2  n 3 3
2
1
2 2 2
n T n T n T
1 1 2 2 3 3
(b) V
n1T1  n 2 T2  n 3T3 (a) 4 (b) 3
(c) 2 (d) 1
n12 T12  n 22 T22  n 32 T32
(c) 49. Consider P-V diagram for an ideal gas shown in figure
n1T1  n 2 T2  n 3 T3
P

 T1  T2  T3  1
(d) constant
3 P
V

First Law of thermodynmics 2

V
44. The slopes of the isothermal and adiabatic curves are Out of the following diagrams, which represents the T-P
related as :
diagram?
(a) isothermal curve slope = adiabatic curve slope
T T
(b) isothermal curve slope =  × adiabatic curve slope
(c) adiabatic curve slope =  × isothermal curve slope 2
2
(d) adiabatic curve slope = (1/2) × isothermal curve slope
45. At 27°C, a gas is compressed suddenly such that its (i) (ii)
pressure becomes (1/8)th of its original pressure. Final 1 1
temperature will be ( = 5/3) : P P
(a) 420 K (b) 300 K T T
(c) –142°C (d) 327°C
46. In an adiabatic change, the pressure P and temperature T
2 1 1 2
of a diatomic gas are related by the relation P  TC, where
C is equal to : (iii) (iv)
(a) 5/3 (b) 2/5
(c) 3/5 (d) 7/2 P P
47. The P-V diagram shows seven curved paths (connected (a) (iv) (b) (ii)
by vertical paths) that can be followed by a gas. Which (c) (iii) (d) (i)
two of them should be parts of a closed cycle if the net 50. Consider two containers A and B containing identical
work done by the gas is to be at its maximum value gases at the same pressure, volume and temperature. The
P a gas in container A is compressed to half of its original
b volume isothermally while the gas in container B is
c compressed to half of its original value adiabatically. The
d
ratio of final pressure of gas in B to that of gas in A is:
e
f  1

–1
1
g (a) 2 (b)  
2
V
 1 2

(a) ac (b) cg  1   1 
(c)   (d)  
(c) af (d) cd 1     1 
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 46

51. A and B are two adiabatic curves for two different gases. Using Ideal Gas Equation
Then A and B correspond to
57. One mole of an ideal gas at an initial temperature of T K
does 6 R joule of work adiabatically. If the ratio of specific
heats of this gas at constant pressure and at constant
P A volume is 5/3, the final temperature of the gas will be
B (a) (T + 4) K (b) (T – 4) K
(c) (T + 2.4) K (d) (T – 2.4) K

V 58. If pressure and temperature of an ideal gas are doubled

and volume is halved, the number of molecules of the gas
(a) Ar and He resp. (b) He and H2 resp.
(a) become half (b) become 4 times
(c) O2 and H2 resp. (d) H2 and He resp.
(c) become two times (d) remain constant
52. In a given process for an ideal gas, dW = 0 and dQ < 0.
59. In the diagrams (i) to (iv) of variation of volume with
Then for the gas,
changing pressure is shown. A gas is taken along the path
(a) temperature will decrease ABCD. The change in internal energy of the gas will be
(b) volume will increase
(c) pressure will remain constant V D V D
C C
(d) temperature will increase
53. Which of the following is incorrect regarding the first law
of thermodynamics ? A A B
B
(a) It introduces the concept of the internal anergy
(i) P (ii) P
(b) It introduces the concept of entropy
(c) It is not applicable to any cyclic process
D C D
(d) It is a restatement of the principle of conservation of V V
C
energy
54. Starting with the same initial conditions, an ideal gas
expands from volume V1 to V2 in three different ways. The A
work done by the gas is W1 if process is isothermal, W2 if A B B
isobaric and W3 if adiabatic. Then, P (iv) P
(iii)
(a) W2 > W1 > W3 (b) W2 > W3 > W1
(c) W1 > W2 > W3 (d) W1 = W2 = W3 (a) Positive in all cases (i) to (iv)
55. In the following indicator diagram, the net amount of work (b) Positive in cases (i), (ii) and (iii) but zero in (iv) case
done will be
(c) Negative in cases (i), (ii) and (iii) but zero in (iv) case
P
(d) Zero in all four cases
1 2 60. Real gases obey gas laws more closely at
(a) High pressure and low temperature
V (b) Low pressure and high temperature
(a) Positive (b) Negative (c) High pressure and high temperature
(c) Zero (d) Infinity
(d) Low pressure and low temperature
56. One mole of an ideal gas requires 207 J heat to raise the
temperature by 10 K, when heated at constant pressure. If 61. An air sample consists of 78% N2 and 22% oxygen. The
values of Cv for N2 and O2 is 0.2 kcal/kg/K and 0.15 kcal/
the same gas is heated at constant volume to raise the
kg/K. Heat required to raise the temperature of 1 kg of air
temperature by 10K, then heat required is (R = 8.3 J/mol.K) through 1°C is
(a) 12.4 J (b) 290 J (a) 0.350 cal (b) 0.189 cal
(c) 124 J (d) 29 J
(c) 0.350 kcal (d) 0.189 kcal
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 47

62. Consider a process shown in the figure. During this process 67. Two metal rods A and B of equal lengths and equal cross
the work done by the system sectional areas are joined end-to-end. The co-efficients of
P
thermal conductivity of A and B are in the ratio 2 : 3. When
the free end of A is maintained at 100°C and the free end of
B B is maintained at 0°C, the temperature of the junction is
A
(a) 30°C (b) 40°C
(c) 50°C (d) 60°C
V
68. In steady state
(a) Continuously increases (a) temperature does not change with time
(b) Continuously decreases (b) all parts of the body are at same temperature
(c) First increases, then decreases (c) there is no flow of heat
(d) First decreases, then increases (d) all of the above
63. A thermally insulated vessel contains an ideal gas of
69. Two metallic plates of equal thicknesses and thermal
molecular mass M and ratio of specific heats . It is conductivities K1 and K2 are put together face to face and
moving with speed v and its suddenly brought to rest a common plate is constructed, figure. The equivalent
Assuming no heat is lost to the surroundings, its thermal conductivity will be:
temeprature increases by k1 k2

   1 Mv 2 l l
(a) Mv2 K (b) K
2R 2R K1 K 2 2K1 K 2
(a) K  K (b) K  K
   1    1 2
1 2 1 2

(c) Mv 2 K (d) 2   1 R Mv K
2R   3/ 2
K1  K 2 K 2
1
 K 22 
64. By what percentage should the pressure of a given mass (c) (d)
2 2K1 K 2
of a gas be increased so as to decrease its volume by 10%
at a constant temperature? 70. Two metallic plates of equal lengths and thermal
(a) 8.1% (b) 10.1% conductivities k1 and k2 are put together such that their
(c) 9.1% (d) 11.1% ends coincide. If their cross-sectional areas are the same,
65. A cylinder containing an ideal gas is in vertical position then the equivalent thermal conductivity of the
and has a piston of mass M that is able to move up or combination will be :
down without friction, as shown in figure. If the k1
A
temperature is increased.
A k2
M

k1 k 2 2k1 k 2
(a) k  k (b) k  k
1 2 1 2

k1  k 2
(c) (d) k1 k 2
(a) both P and V of the gas will change 2
(b) only P will increase according to Charle’s law
Radiation
(c) V will change but not P
(d) P will change but not V 71. A sphere, a cube and a thin circular plate, all of same
material and same mass, are initially heated to same high
Conduction temperature. Choose the correct statement.
66. Dimension of co-efficient of thermal conductivity are (a) The plate will cool fastest and cube the slowest.
(b) The sphere will cool fastest and cube the slowest.
(a) [L0M1T–3K–1] (b) [L1M1T–3K–1]
(c) The plate will cool fastest and sphere the slowest.
(c) [L1M1T–3K] (d) [L1M–1T–2K–1] (d) The cube will cool fastest and plate the slowest.
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 48

72. Velocity of heat radiation v as related to the velocity of 78. The temperature of coffee in a cup with time is most likely
light c is given by the curve in figure.
(a) v > c (b) v = c
(c) v < c (d) no definite relation

Temperature

Temperature
73. Heat is transferred most rapidly by the process of
(a) Conduction (b) Convection (a) (b)
(c) Radiation (d) Combustion
74. Boltzmann’s constant k = 1.38 × 10–23 J/K. The energy Time Time

associated with helium atom at the surface of sun, where

surface temperature is 6000 K is

Temperature

Temperature
(a) 1.242 × 10–19 J (b) 2.484 × 10–19 J
(c) 207 × 10–19 J (d) 0.621 × 10–19 J
(c) (d)
75. A container with insulating walls is divided into two
equal parts by a partition fitted with a valve. One part
Time Time
is filled with an ideal gas at a pressure P and temperature
T, whereas the other part is completely evacuated. If the 79. A block of steel heated to 100°C is left in a room to cool.
valve is suddenly opened, the pressure and temperature Which of the curves shown in the figure represents the
of the gas will be decrease of temperature with time?

P P T
(a) ,T (b) , D
2 2 2 C
Temperature

B
T A
(c) P, T (d) P ,
2
Time
Newtons Law of Cooling
(a) A (b) B
76. Two circular discs A and B with equal radii are blackened. (c) C (d) D
They are heated to same temperature and then cooled 80. A body cools from 50°C to 46°C in 5 minutes and to 40°C
under identical conditions. What inference do you draw
in the next 10 minutes. The surrounding temperature is :
from their cooling curves as shown in figure?
(a) 30°C (b) 28°C
B (c) 36°C (d) 32°C
81. Newton’s law of cooling is used in laboratory for
R A determining:
(a) Specific heat of gases (b) Specific heat of liquids
(c) Latent heat of gases (d) Latent heat of liquids

( – 0)
82. If the rate of change of temperature is 0.2°C/ min and excess
(a) A and B have same specific heats temperature of a body over surrounding is 20°C, the
(b) specific heat of A is less constant of proportionality is
(c) specific heat of B is less (a) 0.1 (b) 0.01
(d) nothing can be said (c) 1 (d) 0.001
77. A bucket full of hot water is kept in a room and it cools 83. Newton’s law of cooling is applicable for
from 75°C to 70°C in T1 minutes, from 70°C to 65°C in T2 (a) Any excess of temperature over the surrounding
minutes and from 65°C to 60°C in T3 minutes then (b) Small excess of temperature over the surrounding
(a) T1 = T2 = T3 (b) T1 < T2 > T3 (c) Large excess of temperature over the surrounding
(c) T1 > T2 > T3 (d) T1 < T2 < T3 (d) Very large excess of temperature over the surrounding
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 49

84. Assuming the sun to be a spherical body of radius R at a (a) (b)

temperature of T K, evaluate the total radiant power, T
incident on earth, at a distance r from the sun, where r0 is T
radius of earth
O t t
4r02 R 2 T 4 r02 R 2 T 4 O
(a) (b)
r2 r2
(c) (d) T
T
r02 R 2 T 4 R 2 T 4
(c) (d)
4r 2 r2
t O t
O
85. Newton’s law of cooling leads us to the following
expression, 91. “Heat cannot by itself flow from a body at lower
temperature to a body at higher temperature” is a statement
(a) ( – 0) = Kt + C (b) log ( – 0) = Kt + C
or consequence of
(c) log  = Kt + C (d)  = K0 + C
(a) second law of thermodynamics
86. Two spheres of the same material have radii 1 m and 4 m
(b) conservation of momentum
and temperatures 4000 K and 2000 K respectively. The
(c) conservation of mass
ratio of the energy radiated per second by the first sphere
(d) first law of thermodynamics
to that by the second is
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 16 : 1 Engine and Efficiency
(c) 4 : 1 (d) 1 : 9
92. Even Carnot engine cannot give 100% efficiency because
87. Which of the following is more close to a black body? we cannot
(b) Black board paint (b) Green leaves (a) prevent radiation
(c) Black holes (d) Red roses (b) find ideal sources
88. Infrared radiations are detected by (c) reach absolute zero temperature
(a) spectrometer (b) pyrometer (d) eliminate friction
(c) nanometer (d) photometer 93. Which statement is incorrect ?
89. A liquid in a beaker has temperature (t) at time t and 0 is (a) all reversible cycles have same efficiency
temperature of surroundings, then according to Newton’s (b) reversible cycle has more efficiency than the irreversible
law of cooling, the correct graph between loge ( – 0) and one
t is : (c) Carnot cycle is a reversible one
(d) Carnot cycle has the maximum efficiency in all cycles
94. A Carnot engine, having an efficiency of  = 1/10 as heat
engine, is used as a refrigrator. If the work done on the
system is 10 J, the amount of energy absorbed from the
reservior at lower temperature is
(a) 100 J (b) 99 J
(c) 90 J (d) 1J

Wein's displacement law

95. The maximum wavelength of radiations emitted at 900 K is
4 m. What will be the maximum wavelength of radiations
emitted at 1200K:
90. If a piece of metal is heated to temperature  and then
allowed to cool in a room which is at temperature 0. The (a) 3 m (b) 0.3 m
graph between the temperature T of the metal and time t (c) l m (d) none of these
will be closed to :
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 50

96. The intensity of radiation emitted by the sun its maximum

value at a wavelength of 510 nm and that emitted by the
North Star has the maximum value at 350 nm. If these stars
behave like black bodies, then the ratio of the surface
temperature of the sun and North Star is :
(a) 1.46 (b) 0.69
(c) 1.21 (d) 0.83

Miscellaneous
97. If mass-energy equivalence is taken into account, when water
is cooled to form ice, the mass of water should
(a) increase
(b) remain unchanged
(c) decrease
(d) first increase then decrease
98. A Carnot engine takes 3 × 106 cal of heat from a reservoir
at 627°C, and gives it to a sink at 27°C. The work done by
the engine is
(a) 4.2 × 106 J (b) 8.4 × l06 J
6
(c) 16.8 × l0 J (d) zero
99. If the temperature of the sun were to increase from T to 2T
and its radius from R to 2R, then the ratio of the radiant
energy received on earth to what it was previously, will be
(a) 4 (b) 16
(c) 32 (d) 64
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 51

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. Consider a spherical shell of radius R at temperature T.

The black body radiation inside it can be considered as an
ideal gas of photons with internal energy per unit volume

U
u  T 4 and pressure P = 1  U  . If the shell now
V 3 V
undergoes an adiabatic expansion the relation between T
and R is : (2015) 3 P0V0 9 P0V 0
(a) (b)
2nR 2nR
1 1
(a) T  (b) T  9 P0V 0 9 P0V 0
R R3 (c) (d)
nR 4nR
(c) T  e R (d) T  e 3R 6. A pendulum clock loses 12 s a day if the temperature is
40°C and gains 4 s a day if the temperature is 20°C. The
2. Consider an ideal gas confined in an isolated closed
temperature at which the clock will show correct time,
chamber. As the gas undergoes an adiabatic expansion, and the co-efficient of linear expansion () of the metal of
the average time of collision between molecules increases the pendulum shaft are respectively : (2016)
as Vq, where V is the volume of the gas. The value of q is: (a) 60°C;  = 1.85 × 10–4/°C
(b) 30°C;  = 1.85 × 10–3/°C
 Cp 
   (2015) (c) 55°C;  = 1.85 × 10–2/°C
 Cv 
(d) 25°C;  = 1.85 × 10–5/°C
7. An ideal gas undergoes a quasi static, reversible process
 1  1 in which its molar heat capacity C remains constant. If
(a) (b)
2 2 during this process the relation of pressure P and volume
V is given by PVn = constant, then n is given by (Here CP
3  5 3  5 and CV are molar specific heat at constant pressure and
(c) (d) constant volume, respectively) : (2016)
6 6

3. An experiment take 10 minutes to raise the temperature of C  CP CP  C

(a) n  C  C (b) n  C  C
water in a container from 0°C to 100°C and another 55 V V

minutes to convert it totally into steam by a heater

C  CV CP
supplying heat at a uniform rate. Neglecting the specific (c) n  C  C (d) n  C
heat of the container and taking specific heat of water to P V

be 1cal/ g° C, the heat of vapourization according to this 8. 200 g water is heated from 40°C to 60°C. Ignoring the
experiment will come out to be : (2015) slight expansion of water, the change in its internal energy
is close to (Given specific heat of Water = 4184 J/kg/K) :
(a) 560 cal/g (b) 550 cal/g
(2016)
(c) 540 cal/g (d) 530 cal/g (a) 8.4 kJ (b) 4.2 kJ
4. Heat required to raise the temperature of 54 grams steam (c) 16.7 kJ (d) 167.4 kJ
(H2O) by 5°C in a rigid & closed vessel is: (2015) 9. The ratio of work done by an ideal monoatomic gas to the
(a) 373 Joules (b) 413 Joules heat supplied to it in an isobaric process is: (2016)
(c) 512 Joules (d) 347 Joules 3 2
(a) (b)
5. ‘n’ moles of an ideal gas undergoes a process AB as 5 3
shown in the figure. The maximum temperature of the gas 2
3
during the process will be : (2016) (c) (d)
2 5
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 52

10. A simple pendulum made of a bob of mass m and a 14. Cp and Cv are specific heats at constant pressure and
metallic wire of negligible mass has time period 2 s at constant volume respectively. It is observed that Cp - Cv =
T = 0°C. If the temperature of the wire is increased and a for hydrogen gas Cp - Cv = b for nitrogen gas. The
the corresponding change in its time period is plotted correct relation between a and b is : (2017)
against its temperature, the resulting graph is a line of
slope S. If the coefficient of linear expansion of metal is α 1
(a) a  b (b) a = b
then the value of S is (2016) 14
(c) a = 14 b (d) a = 28b

(a)  (b) 15. N moles of a diatomic gas in a cylinder are at a temperature
2
T. Heat is supplied to the cylinder such that the
1 temperature remains constant but n moles of the diatomic
(c) 2 (d) gas get converted into monoatomic gas. What is the

change in the total kinetic energy of the gas ? (2017)
11. A Carnot freezer takes heat from water at 0ºC inside it and
rejects it to the room at a temperature of 27ºC. The latent 1
(a) nRT
T (b) 0
heat of ice is 336 × 103J kg–1. If 5 kg of water at 0ºC is 2
converted into ice at 0ºC by the freezer, then the energy
consumed by the freezer is close to : (2016) 3 5
(c) nRT
T (d) nRT T
2 2
(a) 1.67 × 105J (b) 1.68 × 106J
16. A copper ball of mass 100 gm is at a temperature T. It is
(c) 1.51 × 105J (d) 1.71 × 107J dropped in a copper calorimeter of mass 100 gm, filled
12. Which of the following shows the correct relationship with 170 gm of water at room temperature. Subsequently,
between the pressure ‘P’ and density  of an ideal gas at the temperature of the system is found to be 75°C. T is
constant temperature ? (2016) given by : (Given : room temperature = 30°C, specific heat
of copper = 0.1 cal/gm°C) (2017)
(a) (b)
(a) 825°C (b) 800°C
(c) 885°C (d) 1250°C
17. In an experiment a sphere of aluminium of mass 0.20 kg is
heated upto 150° C. Immediately, it is put into water of
volume 150 cc at 27°C kept in a calorimeter of water
equivalent to 0.025 kg. Final temperature of the system is
40°C. The specific heat of aluminium is :
(take 4.2 Joule = 1 calorie) (2017)
(a) 378 J/kg–°C (b) 315 J/kg–°C
(c) (d)
(c) 476 J/kg–°C (d) 434 J/kg–°C
18. An engine operates by taking n moles of an ideal gas
through the cycle ABCDA shown in figure. The thermal
efficiency of the engine is :
(Take Cv =1.5 R, where R is gas constant) (2017)

13. The temperature of an open room of volume 30 m3

increases from 17°C to 27°C due to the sunshine. The
atmospheric pressure in the room remains 1× 105 Pa. If ni
and nf are the number of molecules in the room before and
after heating, then nf – ni will be : (2017)
(a) –2.5 × 1025 (b) – 1.61 × 1023
(a) 0.24 (b) 0.15
(c) 1.38 × 1023 (d) 2.5 × 1025
(c) 0.32 (d) 0.08
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 53

19. An ideal gas has molecules with 5 degrees of freedom. 22. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is compressed
The ratio of specific heats at constant pressure (Cp) and isothermally in a rigid vessel to double its pressure at
at constant volume (Cv) is : (2017) room temperature, 270C. The work done on the gas will
be: (2018)
7 (a) 300 R (b) 300 R ln 6
(a) 6 (b)
2 (c) 300 R ln 2 (d) 300 R ln 7
23. Two Carnot engines A and B are operated in series. Engine
5 7 A receives heat from a reservoir at 600 K and rejects heat
(c) (d) to a reservoir at temperature T. Engine B receives heat
2 5
rejected by engine A and in turn rejects it to a reservoir at
20. For the P-V diagram given for an ideal gas, 100 K. If the efficiencies of the two engines A and B are
represented A and B , by respectively, then what is the
B
value of  ? (2018)
A

12 7
(a) (b)
7 12
out of the following which one correctly represents the
12 5
T-P diagram ? (2017) (c) (d)
5 12
(a)
24. The value closest to the thermal velocity of a Helium
atomat roomtemperature(300K) in ms-1 is : [kB = 1.4 × 10-
23
J/K; mHe = 7 ×10-27 kg] (2018)
(a) 1.3×104 (b) 1.3×103

(c) 1.3×105 (d) 1.3×102

(b)
25. A body takes 10 minutes to cool from 600 C to 500 C. The
temperature of surroundings is constant at 250 C. Then,
the temperature of the body after next 10 minutes will be
approximately : (2018)
(a) 470 C (b) 410 C
(c) 450 C (d) 430 C
26. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is taken along the
(c)
path ABCA as shown in the PV diagram. The maximum
temperature attained by the gas along the path BC is
given by: (2018)

(d)

21. A Carnot’s engine works as a refrigerator between 250 K

and 300 K. It receives 500 cal heat from the reservoir at
the lower temperature. The amount of work done in each 25 P0 V0 25 P0 V0
(a) (b)
cycle to operate the refrigerator is : (2018) 16 R 8 R
(a) 420 J (b) 772 J 25 P0 V0 5 P0 V0
(c) (d)
(c) 2100 J (d) 2520 J 4 R 8 R
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 54

27. Two moles of helium are mixed with n moles of hydrogen. 32. Consider one mole of helium gas enclosed in a container
CP 3 at initial pressure P1 and V1. It expands isothermally to
If C = 2 for the mixture, then the value of n is :(2018) volume 4V1. After this, the gas expands adiabatically and
V its volume becomes 32V1. The work done by the gas during
(a) 1 (b) 3 isothermal and adiabatic expansion processes are Wiso

3 Wiso
(c) 2 (d) and Wadia, respectively. If the ration W  f ln 2, then
2 adia
28. Following figure shows two processes A and B for a gas. f is ……….. . - (2020)
If QA and QB are the amounts of heat absorbed by 33. A thermally isolated cylindrical closed vessel of height 8
m is kept vertically. It is divided into two equal parts by a
the system in two cases, and U A and U B are changes diathermic (perfect thermal conductor) frictionless
in internal energies, respectively, then: (2019) partition of mass 8.3 kg. Thus the partition is held initially
at a distance of 4 m from the top, as shown in the schematic
figure below. Each of the two parts of the vessel contains
0.1 mole of an ideal gas at temperature 300 K. The partition
is now released and moves without any gas leaking from
one part of the vessel to the other. When equilibrium is
reached, the distance of the partition from the top (in m)
will be _______ (take the acceleration due to gravity =10
ms–2and the universal gas constant = 8.3 J mol-1K -1 ).
(2020)
(a) Q A  Q B , U A  U B
(b) Q A  Q B , U A  U B
(c) Q A  Q B , U A  U B
(d) Q A  Q B , U A  U B
29. Under an adiabatic process, the volume of an ideal gas
gets doubled. Consequently, the mean collision time
between the gas molecules changes from 1 to  2 .If
34. A spherical bubble inside water has radius R. Take the
Cp  pressure inside the bubble and the water pressure to be
  for this gas, then a good estimate for 2 is given
CV 1 P0 . The bubble now gets compressed radially in an
adiabatic manner so that its radius becomes(R – a). For a
by (2020)
<< R the magnitude of the work done in the process is
 1
1 1 2 given by (4p0 Ra 2 ) X ,where X is a constant
(a) (b)  
2 2
and  = Cp / Cv = 41/ 30 . The value of Xis________.

1 (2020)
(c)   (d) 2 35. A container with 1 kg of water in it is kept in sunlight,
2
which causes the water to get warmer than the
30. A gas mixture consists of 3 moles of oxygen and 5 moles
surroundings. The average energy per unit time per unit
of argon at temperature T. Assuming the gases to be
ideal and the oxygen bond to be rigid, the total internal area received due to the sunlight is 700Wm–2 and it is
absorbed by the water over an effective area of 0.05m2.
energy (in units of RT) of the mixture is : (2020)
Assuming that the heat loss from the water to the
(a) 11 (b) 13
surroundings is governed by Newton’s law of cooling,
(c) 15 (d) 20
the difference (in ºC) in the temperature of water and the
31. When the temperature of a metal wire is increased from
0ºC to 10ºC, its length increases by 0.02%. The percentage surroundings after a long time will be _____________.
change in its mass density will be closest to : (2020) (Ignore effect of the container, and take constant for
(a) 0.06 (b) 0.008 Newton’s law of cooling=0.001s–1, Heat capacity of
(c) 2.3 (d) 0.8 water = 4200 J kg –1 K –1 (2020)
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 55

EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Single Correct Options (a) 24 N (b) 36 N
(c) 12 N (d) 6 N
1. Find the ratio of the lengths of an iron rod and an aluminium
rod for which the difference in the lengths is independent 7. A solid ball of metal has a spherical cavity inside it. If
of temperature. Coefficients of linear expansion of iron the ball is heated the volume of cavity will :
and aluminium are 12 × 10 –6 /°C and 23 × 10 –6/°C (a) increase
respectively. (b) decrease
(a) 23 : 12 (b) 12 : 23 (c) remain unchanged
(c) data insufficient (d) Not possible (d) data insufficient
2. A blacksmith fixes iron ring on the rim of the wooden 8. The coefficient of volume expansion of glycerin is 49 × 10–5
wheel of a bullock cart. The diameter of the rim and the K–1. What is the fractional change in its density for a
iron ring are 5.243 m and 5.231 m respectively at 27°C. To 30°C rise in temperature ?
what temperature should the ring be heated so as to fit
(a) increases by 0.015
the rim of the wheel ? ( for iron = 1.2 × 10–5/°C)
(b) increases by 0.005
(a) 191 °C (b) 254 °C
(c) decreases by 0.015
(c) 218 °C (d) 164 °C
3. A hole is drilled in a copper sheet. The diameter of the (d) decreases by 0.005
hole is 4.24 cm at 27.0°C. What is the change in the diameter 9. The temperature of the two outer surface of a composite
of the hole when the sheet is heated to 227°C ? Coefficient slab, consisting of two materials having coefficients of
of linear expansion of copper = 1.70 × 10–5 K–1. thermal conductivity K and 2K thickness x and 4x,
(a) Diameter decreases by 7.2 × 10–3 cm respectively are T2 and T1 (T2 > T1). The rate of heat transfer
(b) Diameter increases by 7.2 × 10–3 cm
 A  T2  T1  K 
(c) Diameter decreases by 1.44 × 10–2 cm through the slab, in a steady state is   f,
 x 
(d) Diameter increases by 1.44 × 10–2 cm
4. The radius of a ring is R and its coefficient of linear with f equals to
expansion is . If the temperature of ring increases by , x 4x
then its circumference will increase by :
(a)  R (b) 2 R

  T2 K 2K T1
(c)  R (d)  R
2 4
5. If two rods of length L and 2L, having coefficient of linear
expansion  and 2 respectively are connected end–on–
end, the average coefficient of linear expansion of the (a) 1 (b) 1/2
composite rod, equals :
(c) 2/3 (d) 1/3
3 5 10. A steel rod is clamped at its two ends and rests on a fixed
(a)  (b) 
2 2 horizontal base. The rod is unstrained at 20°C. Find the
longitudinal strain developed in the rod if the temperature
5
(c)  (d) none of these rises to 50°C. Coefficient of linear expansion of steel = 1.2
3
× 10–5/°C.
6. A steel wire of cross–sectional area 0.5 mm2 is held (a) 6 × 10–4
between two fixed supports. If the wire is just taut at
(b) 3.6 × 10–5
20°C, determine the tension when the temperature falls to
0°C. Coefficient of linear expansion of steel is 1.2 × 10–5/ (c) 2.4 × 10–4
°C and its Young’s modulus is 2.0 × 1011 N/m2. (d) 3.6 × 10–4
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 56

11. The temperature-entropy diagram of a reversible engine 16. Calculate the time required to heat 20 kg of water from
cycle is given in the figure. Its efficiency is 10°C to 35°C using an immersion heater rated 1000 W.
T Assume that 80% of the power input is used to heat the
water. Specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J/kg–K.
2T0
(a) 60 min (b) 35 min
T0 (c) 52 min (d) 44 min

S
17. A sphere of aluminium of 0.06 kg placed for sufficient
S0 2S0 time in a vessel containing boiling water, so that the sphere
(a) 1/3 (b) 2/3 is at 100°C. It is then immediately transfered a vessel
containing 0.25 kg of water at 20°C. The temperature of
(c) 1/2 (d) 1/4
water rises and attains a steady state at 24°C. Calculate the
12. Two rods of different materials having coefficients of specific heat capacity of aluminium. (neglect heat loss to
thermal expansion 1, 2 and Young’s modulli Y1, Y2 vessel and surroundings)
respectively are fixed between two rigid massive walls.
The rods are heated such that they undergo the same (a) 870 J kg–1 k–1 (b) 1024 J kg–1 k–1
increase in temperature. There is no bending of the rods. (c) 921 J kg–1 k–1 (d) 708 J kg–1 k–1
If1 : 2 = 2 : 3, the thermal stresses developed in the two
18. A metal block is made from a mixture of 2.4 kg of aluminium
rods are equal provided Y1 : Y2 is equal to :
1.6 kg of brass and 0.8 kg of copper. The amount of heat
required to raise the temperature of this block from 20°C to
80°C is (specific heats of aluminium, brass and copper are
0.216,0.0917 and 0.0931 cal/kg°C respectively):
(a) 96.2 cal (b) 44.4 cal
(c) 86.2 cal (d) 62.8 cal
(a) 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 1 19. Suppose the specific heat capacity of a substance is
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 4 : 9 varying with temperature according to, s = A + BT2 where
13. An iron ball of mass 0.2 kg is heated to 10°C and put into A and B are positive constants and T is temperature in °C.
a block of ice at 0°C. 2.5 g of ice melts. If the latent heat of If temperature of m kg of this substance has to raise from
fusion of ice is 80 cal/g, then the specific heat of iron T°C to 2T°C, then the amount of energy supplied to the
in cal/g°C is : substance is
(a) 1 (b) 0.1
 7BT 3   5BT 3 
(c) 0.8 (d) 0.08 (a) m  AT  J (b) m  AT  J
 3   3 
14. Equal masses of three liquids A, B and C have temperatures
10°C, 25°C and 40°C respectively. If A and B are mixed, the (c) m [AT + 2BT3] J (b) None of these
mixture has a temperature of 15°C. If B and C are mixed, the 20. A mass of a material exists in its solid form at its melting
mixture has a temperature of 30°C. If A and C are mixed, the temperature 10°C. The following processes then occur to
mixture will have a temperature of: the material.
(a) 16°C (b) 20°C
Process I : An amount of thermal energy Q is added to the
(c) 25°C (d) 29°C material and 3/4 of the material melts.
15. The temperatures of equal masses of three different Process II : An identical additional amount of thermal
liquids A, B and C are 12°C, 19°C and 28°C respectively. energy Q is added to the material and the material is now a
The temperature when A and B are mixed is 16°C, and liquid at 50°C.
when B and C are mixed, it is 23°C. What will be the
What is the ratio of the latent heat of fusion to the specific
temperature when A and C are mixed ? heat of the liquid for this material ?
(a) 15.6 °C (b) 23.2 °C (a) 80°C (b) 60°C
(c) 20.3 °C (d) 25.8 °C (c) 40°C (d) None of these
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 57

21. 50 g of ice at 0°C is mixed with 50 g of water at 60°C, final 27. If Maxwell distribution is valid and VP denotes the most
temperature of mixture will be : probable speed, V the average speed and Vrms the root–
(a) 0°C (b) 40°C mean–square speed, then :
(a) V < VP < Vrms (b) V < Vrms < VP
(c) 10°C (d) 15°C
(c) VP < V < Vrms (d) VP < Vrms < V
22. When 0.15 kg of ice of 0°C mixed with 0.30 kg of water at
50°C in a container, the resulting temperature is 6.7°C. 28. The root–mean–square (rms) speed of oxygen molecules
Calculate the heat of fusion of ice. (swater = 4186 J kg–1 (O2) at a certain absolute temperature is V. If the temperature
K–1) is doubled and the oxygen gas dissociates into atomic
oxygen, the rms speed would be :
(a) 3.34 × 105 J kg–1 k–1
(a) V (b) 2V
(b) 3.63 × 105 J kg–1 k–1
(c) 2V (d) 2 2V
(c) 3.34 × 106 J kg–1 k–1
29. The temperature at which the root mean square speed of a
(d) 4.19 × 105 J kg–1 k–1 gas will be half its value at 0°C is (assume the pressure
remains constant) :
23. A copper block of mass 2.5 kg is heated in a furnace to a
temperature of 500 °C and then placed on a large ice block. (a) – 86.4°C (b) – 204.75°C
What is the maximum amount of ice that can melt ? (Specific (c) – 104.75°C (d) – 68.25°C
heat of copper = 0.39 J g–1 K–1; heat of fusion of water 30. When an ideal diatomic gas is heated at constant pressure,
= 335 J g–1). the fraction of the heat energy supplied which increases
the internal energy of the gas, is
(a) 2.6 kg (b) 10 kg
2 3
(c) 3.8 kg (d) 1.5 kg (a) (b)
5 5
24. A block of ice of mass M = 10 kg is moved back and forth 3 5
over the flat horizontal surface of a large block of ice. Both (c) (d)
7 7
blocks are at 0°C and the force that produces the back–
31. During the melting of a slab of ice at 273 K at atmospheric
and –forth motion acts only horizontally. The coefficient
pressure
of friction between the two surfaces is 0.060. If m = 15.2 g
(a) Positive work is done by ice-water system on the
of water is produced, the total distance travelled by the
atmosphere
upper block relative to the lower is :
(b) Positive work is done on the ice-water system by the
(Lice = 3.34 × 105 J/kg)
atmosphere
(a) 432 m (b) 863 m (c) The internal energy of the ice-water system increases
(c) 368 m (d) 216 m (d) The internal energy of the ice-water system decreases
25. Which one of the following gases possesses the largest 32. A monoatomic ideal gas, initially at temperature T1, is
internal energy enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a frictionless piston. The
gas is allowed to expand adiabatically to a temperature. T2
(a) 2 moles of helium occupying 1m3 at 300 K by releasing the piston suddenly. If L1 and L2 are the
(b) 56 kg of nitrogen at 107 Nm–2 and 300 K lengths of the gas column before and after expansion
respectively, then T1/T2 is given by
(c) 8 grams of oxygen at 8 atm and 300 K

(d) 6 × 1026 molecules of argon occupying 40m3 at 900 K 2/3

 L1  L1
26. What will be the temperature when the rms velocity is (a)  
 (b) L
 L2  2
double of that at 300 K :
(a) 300 K (b) 600 K L2  L2 
2/3

(c) 900 K (d) 1200 K (c) L (d)  

1  L1 
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 58

33. A mono atomic gas is supplied the heat Q very slowly 38. When an ideal gas ( = 5/3) is heated under constant
keeping the pressure constant. The work done by the gas pressure, then what percentage of given heat energy will
will be be utilised in doing external work

2 3 (a) 40 % (b) 30 %
(a) Q (b) Q (c) 60 % (d) 20 %
3 5
39. The shown P–V diagram represents the thermodynamic
2 1 cycle of an engine, operating with an ideal monoatomic
(c) Q (d) Q
5 5 gas. The amount of heat, extracted from the source in a
34. An ideal gas expands isothermally from a volume V1 to V2 single cycle is :
and then compressed to original volume V1 adiabatically.
Initial pressure is P1 and final pressure is P3. The total
work done is W. Then

(a) P3 > P1, W > 0 (b) P3 < P1, W < 0

(c) P3 > P1, W < 0 (d) P3 = P1, W = 0
35. A cylindrical tube of uniform cross-sectional area A is fitted
with two air tight frictionless pistons. The pistons are
(a) P0V0 (b)  13  P0 V0
connected to each other by a metallic wire. Initially the 2
pressure of the gas is P 0 and temperature is T 0 ,
atmospheric pressure is also P0. Now the temperature of  11 
(c)   P0 V0 (d) 4P0V0
the gas is increased to 2T0, the tension in the wire will be 2
40. Two samples A and B of a gas initially at the same pressure
and temperature are compressed from volume V to V/2
Wire (A isothermally and adiabatically). The final pressure of A is
(a) Greater than the final pressure of B
(b) Equal to the final pressure of B
(c) Less than the final pressure of B
(a) 2P0A (b) P0A (d) Twice the final pressure of B
P0 A 41. A thermodynamic system is taken through the cycle
(c) (d) 4P0A PQRSP process. The net work done by the system is
2
36. The molar heat capacity in a process of a diatomic gas if it

Q
does a work of when a heat of Q is supplied to it is
4

2 5
(a) R (b) R
5 2 (a) 20 J (b) – 20 J
(c) 400 J (d) – 374 J
10 6
(c) R (d) R 42. Two rigid boxes containing different ideal gases are placed
3 7
on a table. Box A contains one mole of nitrogen at
temperature T0, while Box B contains one mole of helium
37. The temperature of a hypothetical gas increases to 2
at temperature (7/3) T0. The boxes are then put into thermal
times when compressed adiabatically to half the volume. contact with each other and heat flows between them until
Its equation can be written as the gases reach a common final temperature. (Ignore the
(a) PV3/2 = constant (b) PV5/2= constant heat capacity of boxes). Then, the final temperatue of the
(c) PV7/3 = constant (d) PV4/3 = constant gases, Tf, in terms of T0 is
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 59

5 3
(a) Tf  T0 (b) Tf  T0
2 7  

7 3
(c) Tf  T0 (d) Tf  T0
3 2 (c) (d)

43. An ideal gas of mass m in a state A goes to another state B P P

via three different processes as shown in figure. If Q1, Q2 46. A hot body, obeying Newton’s law of cooling is cooling
and Q3 denote the heat absorbed by the gas along the down from its peak value 800C to an ambient temperature
three paths, then of 300C. It takes 5 minutes in cooling down from 800C to
400C. How much time will it take to cool down from 620C to
P A
320C? (Given ln 2 = 0.693, ln 5 = 1.609)
(a) 3.75 minutes (b) 8.6 minutes
3 (c) 6.5 minutes (d) 9.6 minutes
2
1
47. A thermodynamic process is shown in the figure. The
B pressures and volumes corresponding to some points in
the figure are :
V
PA = 3 × 104 Pa, PB = 8 × 104 Pa
(a) Q1 < Q2 < Q3 (b) Q1 < Q2 = Q3
and VA = 2 × 10–3m3, VD = 5 × 10–3 m3
(c) Q1 = Q2 > Q3 (d) Q1 > Q2 > Q3 In process AB, 600 J of heat is added to the system and in
44. One end of a thermally insulated rod is kept at a temperature process BC, 200 J of heat is added to the system. The
T1 and the other at T2. The rod is composed of two sections change in internal energy of the system in process AC
of lengths l1 and l2 and thermal conductivities K1 and K2 would be
respectively. The temperature at the interface of the two B
P C
sections is
l1 l2
T1 T2

A D
O V

(a) 560 J (b) 800 J

K1 K2
(c) 600 J (d) 640 J
(a) (K2l2T1 + K1l1T2)/(K1l1 + K2l2)
48. An ideal gas is taken through the cycle A  B  C  A,
(b) (K2l1T1 + K1l2T2)/(K2l1 + K1l2) as shown in the figure. If the net heat supplied to the gas
(c) (K1l2T1 + K2l1T2)/(K1l2 + K2l1) in the cycle is 5 J, the work done by the gas in the process
(d) (K1l1T1 + K2l2T2)/(K1l1 + K2l2) C  A is

45. Which of the following graphs correctly represents the

V(m3)
variation of b = – (dV/dp) /V with P for an ideal gas at C B
2
constant temperature

1
A
 
10 P(N/m2)

(a) (b) (a) – 5 J (b) – 10 J

P P (c) – 15 J (d) – 20 J
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 60

49. In the cyclic process shown in the figure, the work done (a) The change in internal energy in the process CA is 700 R.
by the gas in one cycle is
(b) The changes in internal energy in the process AB
P is –350 R.
7P1
(c) The change in internal energy in the process BC is
–500 R.
(d) The change in internal energy in whole cyclic process
is 250 R.
P1
V 53. A thermodynamic system undergoes cyclic process ABCDA
V1 4V1
as shown in figure. The work done by the system is
(a) 28 P1V1 (b) 14 P1V P
C B
(c) 18 P1V (d) 9 P1V 3P0

50. Heat energy absorbed by a system in going through a

2P0 O
cyclic process shown in figure is

V (litre) P0
A D
30 V
V0 2V0

(a) P0V0 (b) 2P0V0

10

10 30 P (kPa) P0 V0
(c) (d) Zero
2
(a) 107 J (b) 104 J
54. In the following P-V diagram two adiabatics cut two
(c) 102  J (d) 10–3  J isothermals at temperatures T1 and T2 (fig.). The value of
51. Assume that a drop of liquid evaporates by decrease in its
Va
surface energy, so that its temperature remains unchanged.
Vd will be
What should be the minimum radius of the drop for this to
be possible ? The surface tension is T, density of liquid is P
 and L is its latent heat of vaporization :
a b T1
(a) L/T (b) d c
T / L
T2
(c) T/L (d) 2T/L
52. One mole of diatomic ideal gas undergoes a cyclic process Va Vd Vb Vc V
ABC as shown in figure. The process BC is adiabatic.
Vb Vc
The temperatures at A, B and C are 400 K, 800 K and 600 (a) V (b) V
c b
K respectively. Choose the correct statement :
Vd
(c) V (d) VbVc
a

55. When water is boiled at 2 atm pressure the latent heat of

vapourization is 2.2 × 106 J/kg and the boiling point is
120°C. At 2 atm pressure 1 kg of water has a volume of 10–
3 m3 and 1 kg of steam has a volume of 0.824 m3. The

increase in internal energy of 1 kg of water when it is

converted into steam at 2 atm pressure and 120°C is
[1 atm presure = 1.013 × 105 N/m2]
(a) 2.033 J (b) 2.033 × 106 J
(c) 0.167 × 106 J (d) 2.267 × 106 J
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 61

56. Two samples A and B of same gas have equal volumes 61. A wall has two layers A and B, each made of different
and pressures. The gas in sample A is expanded material. Both the layers have the same thickness. The
isothermally to double its volume and the gas in sample B
is expanded to double its volume adiabatically. If work thermal conductivity for A is twice that of B and, under
done by the gas is same in two processes, then value of  steady condition, the temperature difference across the
for the gas is best given by wall is 36°C. The temperature difference across the layer
(a) 1 – 2– = (– 1) ln 2 A is:
(b) 1 – 2–( – 1) = ( – 1) ln 2 (a) 6°C (b) 12°C
(c) 1 – 2–( – 1) = 2 ( – 1) ln 2
(c) 24°C (d) 18°C
(d) None of these
62. Three rods of same dimensions have thermal conductivities
57. If CV for an ideal gas is given by CV = 3 + 2T, where T is the
absolute temperature of gas, then the equation of adiabatic 3k, 2k and k. They are arranged as shown, with their ends
process for this gas is at 100°C, 50°C and 0°C. The temperature of their junction is :
(a) VT2 = constant (b) VT2e2T = constant
(c) VT3e–2T = constant (d) VT3e2T = constant
58. Two Carnot engines A and B are operated in succession.
The first one, A receives heat from a source at T = 800 K
and rejects to sink at T2. The second engine B receives
heat rejected by the first engine and rejects to another 200
sink at T3 = 300 K. If the work outputs of two engines are (a) 75°C (b) C
3
equal, then the value of T2 is
(a) 100K (b) 300K
100
(c) 550K (d) 700K (c) 40°C (d) C
3
59. A reversible engine converts one-sixth of the heat input
63. Two identical square rods of metal are welded end to end
into work. When the temperature of the sink is reduced by
62°C, the efficiency of the engine is doubled. The as shown in figure (i), 20 cal of heat flows through it in 4
temperatures of the source and sink are min. If the rods are welded as shown in figure (ii), the same
(a) 80°C, 37°C (b) 95°C, 28°C amount of heat will flow through the rods in :
(c) 90°C, 37°C (d) 99°C, 37°C
60. A wooden wheel of radius R is made of two semicircular
parts (see figure). The two parts are held together by a
ring made of a metal strip of cross-sectional area S and
length L. L is slightly less than 2R. To fit the ring on the
wheel, it is heated so that its temperature rises by T and (a) 1 min (b) 2 min
it just steps over the wheel. As it cools down to
surrounding temperature, it presses the semicircular parts (c) 4 min (d) 16 min
together. If the coefficient of linear expansion of the metal 64. An ideal monoatomic gas is confined in a cylinder by a
is  and its Young’s modulus is Y, the force that one part
of the wheel applies on the other part is spring loaded piston of cross section 8.0 × 10–3m2. Initially
the gas is at 300 K and occupies a volume of 2.4× 10–3 m3
and the spring is in its relaxed state as shown in figure.
The gas is heated by a small heater until the piston moves
out slowly by 0.1 m. The force constant of the spring is
8000 N/m and the atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 N/m2.
The cylinder and the piston are thermally insulated. The
piston and the spring are massless and there is no friction
(a) 2SYT (b) SYT between the piston and the cylinder. The final temperature
(c) SYT (d) 2SYT of the gas will be:
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 62

(Neglect the heat loss through the lead wires of the heater. 68. Two rods of copper and brass (KC > KB ) of same length
The heat capacity of the heater coil is also negligible) and area of cross-section are joined as shown. End A is
kept at 100°C and end B at 0°C. The temperature at the
junction:

A Copper Brass B

(a) will be more than 50°C

(b) will be less than 50°C
(a) 500 K (b) 300 K (c) will be 50°C
(c) 800 K (d) 1000 K (d) may be more or less than 50°C depending upon the
65. The length of the two rods made up of the same metal and size of rods
having the same area of cross-section are 0.6 m 0.8 m and 69. If wavelength of maximum intensity of radiation emitted
respectively. The temperature between the ends of first by sun and moon are 0.5 × 10–6 m and 10–4 m respectively
rod is 90°C and 60°C and that for the other rod is 150°C the ratio of their temperature is :
and 110°C. For which rod the rate of conduction will be (a) 2000 (b) 1000
greater
(c) 100 (d) 200
(a) first (b) second
70. A black body radiates power P and maximum energy is
(c) same for both (d) none of these
radiated by it around a wavelength 0 . The temperature of
66. Equal temperature differences exist between the ends of the black body is now changed such that it radiates
two metallic rods 1 and 2 of equal lengths. Their thermal
conductivities are Kl and K2 and area of cross-section are 3 0
maximum energy around the wavelength . The power
Al and A2, respectively. The condition of equal rates of 4
heat transfer is : radiated by it now is :
(a) K1A2 =K2A1 256 27
(a) P (b) P
(b) K1A1 = K2A2 81 64
(b) K1A12 = K2A22 64 81
(c) P (d) P
(d) K12A2 = K22A1 27 256
67. A ring consisting of two parts ADB and ACB of same 71. The maximum energy in thermal radiations from a
conductivity K carries an amount of heat H. The ADB part blackbody occurs at wavelength 4000 Å. The effective
is now replaced with another metal keeping the temperature of the source is :
temperatures T1 and T2 constant. The heat carried increases (a) 7000 K (b) 80000 K
to 2 H. What should be the conductivity of the new ADB
(c) 104 K (d) 106 K
ACB 72. When a system is taken from state i to state f along the
part ? Given  3:
ADB path iaf, it is found that Q = 50 cal and W = 20 cal. Along
the path ibf Q = 36 cal. W along the path ibf is

7
(a) K (b) 2 K
3
(a) 14 cal (b) 6 cal
5
(c) K (d) 3 K (c) 16 cal (d) 66 cal
2
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 63

73. In the figure, the distribution of energy density of the 79. If the total surface area of human body is 1.2 m2 and the
radiation emitted by a black body at a given temperature is temperature is 30°C, then the net rate of radiation from the
shown. The possible temperature of the black body is : body if surrounding temperature is 20°C would be [Take
emissivity of human body = 1]
(a) 574 W (b) 72 W
(c) 800 W (d) 60 W
80. A solid sphere cools at the rate of 2.8°C/min, when its
temperature is 127°C. The rate at which another solid sphere
(a) 1500 K (b) 2000 K
of same material of twice the radius will lose its temperature
(c) 2500 K (d) 3000 K at 327°C is given by [Take the surrounding temperature at
74. A long metallic bar is carrying heat from one of its ends to 27°C]
the other end under steady–state. The variation of
temperature  along the length x of the bar from its hot end (a) 6.8 °C/min (b) 5.6 °C/min
is best described by which of the following figure ? (c) 4.2 °C/min (d) 8.4 °C/min
(a) (b) 81. A body cools from 50°C to 40°C in 5 min. The surrounding
temperature is 20°C. In what further time (in min) will it
cool to 30°C?

15
(a) 5 (b)
2
(c) (d)

25
(c) (d) 10
3

82. If a body cools down from 80°C to 60°C in 10 min when the
75. If a black body radiates 10 cal/s at 227°C, it will radiate at temperature of the surrounding is 30°C. Then, the
727°C : temperature of the body after next 10 min will be :
(a) 10 cal/s (b) 80 cal/s (a) 50°C (b) 48°C
(c) 160 cal/s (d) none of these (c) 30°C (d) none of these
76. The temperature of body is increased from 27°C at 127°C.
83. A liquid cools from 50°C to 45°C in 5 min and from 45°Cto
The radiation emitted by it increases by a factor of :
41.5°C in the next 5 min. The temperature of the
(a) 256/81 (b) 15/9
surrounding is :
(c) 4/5 (d) 12/27
(a) 27°C (b) 40.3°C
77. A sphere has a surface area of 1.0 m2 and a temperature of
400 K and the power radiated from it is 150 W. Assuming (c) 23.3°C (d) 33.3°C
the sphere is a black body radiator, the power in kilowatt
84. Water is being boiled in a flat bottomed kettle placed on a
radiated when the area expands to 2.0m2 and the
temperature changes to 800 K is : stove. The area of the bottom is 300 cm2 and the thickness
is 2 mm. If the amount of steam produced is 1g min–1, then
(a) 6.2 (b) 9.6
the difference of the temperature between the inner and
(c) 4.8 (d) 16
the outer surface of the bottom is : (thermal conductivity
78. The area of a hole of heat furnace is 10 –4 m2. It radiates of the material of the kettle = 0.5 cal–cm–1 °C–1 S–1 and
l.58 × 105 cal of heat per hour. If the emissivity of the
latent heat of the steam is equal to 540 cal g–1)
furnace is 0.80, then its temperature is :
(a) 12°C (b) 1.2°C
(a) 1500 K (b) 2000 K
(c) 0.2°C (d) 0.012°C
(c) 2500 K (d) 3000 K
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 64

85. Tyre of a bicycle has volume 2 × 10–3 m3. Initially the tube
d
is filled to 75% of its volume by air at atmospheric pressure 89. In Newton’s law of cooling,  k    0  , the
dt
of p0 = 105 N/m2. When a rider rides rides the bicycle the
area of contact of tyre with road is A = 24 × 10–4 m2. The constant ‘k’ is proportional to :
mass of rider with bicycle is 120 kg. The number of strokes (a) A, surface area of the body
which delivers, V = 500 cm3 volume of air in each stroke
(b) S, specific heat of the body
required to inflate the tyres is [Take g = 10 m/s2]
(c) 1/m, m being mass of the body
(a) 10 (b) 11
(c) 20 (d) 21 (d) e, emmisivity of the body
86. A gas molecule of mass M at the surface of the Earth has 90. During an experiment, an ideal gas is found to obey a
kinetic energy equivalent to 0°C. If it were to go up straight P2
without colliding with any other molecules, how high it condition = constant [  = density of the gas]. The

would rise ? Assume that the height attained is much less
gas is initially at temperature T, pressure P and density  .
than radius of the earth. (kB is Boltzmann constant)
The gas expands such that density changes to  /2 -
273k B 546 k B
(a) 2 Mg (b) 3 Mg (a) The pressure of the gas changes to 2P

819 k B (b) The temperature of the gas changes to 2T

(c) 0 (d) 2 Mg
(c) The graph of the above process on the P-T diagram is
parabola
Multiple Correct Question
(d) The graph of the above process on the P-T diagram is
87. Two identical beakers are filled with water to the same hyperbola
level at 4°C. If one say A is heated while the other B is
91. A gaseous mixture consists of 16 g of helium and 16 g of
cooled, then:
oxygen, The ratio CP/CV of the mixtrue is
(a) water level in A will rise
(a) 1.4 (b) 1.54
(b) water level in B will rise
(c) 1.59 (d) 1.62
(c) water level in A will fall
92. Three moles of an ideal gas [Cp=(7/2)R] at pressure PA and
(d) water level in B will fall
temperature TA is isothermally expanded to twice its initial
88. Two identical objects A and B are at temperatures TA and volume. It is then compressed at constant pressure to its
TB respectively. Both objects are placed in a room with
original volume. Finally the gas is compressed at constant
p e r f e c t l y a b s o r b i n g wa l l s m a i n t a i n e d a t a
volume to its original pressure PA. The correct P-V and P-
temperature T (TA > T > TB). The objects A and B attain
T diagrams indicating the process are
the temperature T eventually. Select the correct statements
from the following
(a) A only emits radiations, while B only absorbs it until
(a) (b)
both attain the temperature T.
(b) A loses more heat by radiation than it absorbs, while B
absorbs more radiation than it emits, until they attain the
temperature T
(c) Both A and B only absorb radiation, but do not emit
it, until they attain the temperature T. (c) (d)
(d) Each object continues to emit and absorb radiation
even after attaining the temperature T.
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 65

93. An aluminium sphere of 20 cm diameter is heated from 97. A black coloured solid sphere of radius R and mass M is
0°C to 100°C. Its volume changes by (given that inside a cavity with vacuum inside. The walls of the cavity
coefficient of linear expansion for aluminium Al = 23 × are maintained at temperature T0. The initial temperature
10–6/°C) of the sphere is 3T0. If the specific heat of the material of
(a) 28.9 cc (b) 2.89 cc the sphere varies as T3 per unit mass with the temperature
T of the sphere, where  is a constant, then the time taken
(c) 9.28 cc (d) 49.8 cc
for the sphere to cool down to temperature 2T0 will be (
94. Pick the correct statement (s) - is Stefan Boltzmann constant)
(a) The rms translational speed for all ideal-gas molecules
at the same temperature is not the same but it depends on M 3 M  16 
(a) 2
n   (b) n  
2
the mass 4R   2  16R   3 
(b) Each particle in gas has average translational kinetic
M 3 M  16 
1 2 3 (c) 2
n   (d) n  
2
energy and the equation mv rms  kT establishes the 16R   2  4R   3 
2 2
relationship between the average translational kinetic energy 98. In a certain process, final volume of the gas is equal to its initial
per particle and temperature of an ideal gas. It can be volume. Then for this process
concluded that single particle has a temperature. (a) work done by the gas may be equal to zero
(c) Temperature of an ideal gas is doubled from 100°C to (b) work done by the gas is zero
200°C. The average kinetic energy of each particle is also
doubled. (c) change in internal energy of the gas may be equal to zero

(d) It is possible for both the pressure and volume of a (d) ratio of final to initial pressure is equal to ratio of final
monoatomic ideal gas to change simultaneously without to initial temperature
causing the internal energy of the gas to change 99. 1 mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is confined in a cylinder
95. A Carnot engine absorbs 1000 J of heat energy from a fitted with a piston as shown in the figure. Take mass of
reservoir at 1270C and rejects 600 J of heat energy during the piston as 0.5 kg, spring constant, k = 100 N/m,
each cycle. The efficiency of engine and temperature of atmospheric pressure p0 = 105 N/m2, and the cross–section
sink will be: area of piston, A = 50 cm2. If energy of 50 J has been
(a) 50% and – 200C (b) 40% and – 330C supplied to the system, then piston moves up by 5 cm
[Take g = 10 m/s2]. Initially the spring is in its natural
(c) 70% and – 100C (d) 20% and – 430C
position. Mark out the correct statement(s).
96. For the P–V diagram shown, for path 1  2  3, 100 J of
heat is given to the system and 40 J of work is done by the
system. For path 1  4  3, the work done by system is 10
J. Then

(a) Increase in internal energy of the system is 24.625 J.

(a) U3 – U1 = 60 J (b) Initial pressure of the gas is 1.01 × 105 N/m2.

(b) For 3  1 the heat is rejected and equal to 85 J (c) For the change described, the temperature of the gas
increases by 2 K.
(c) For 1  4 the work done by system is 10 J
(d) For the change described, the temperature of the gas
(d) For 1  4 the heat given to system is 20 J
decreases by 2 K.
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 66

100. A monoatomic ideal gas having an initial volume of 0.1 m3 104. 100 g of water is heated from 30°C to 50°C. Ignoring the
and a pressure of 106 N/m2 absorbs 6 × 104 J of heat. For slight expansion of the water, the change in its internal
this situation mark out the correct statement(s). energy is (specific heat of water is 4184 j/kg/K).
(a) The change in internal energy if process is isobaric (a) 8.4 kJ (b) 84 kJ
is 3.6 × 104 J.
(c) 2.1 kJ (d) 4.2 kJ
(b) The change in internal energy if process is isobaric
105. The temperature T of a point at distance r from the centre
is 6 × 104 J.
in steady state condition where R1 < r < R2 is
(c) The change in internal energy if process is isochoric
is 6 × 104 J.  R 2  r  R1  
(a)  T1  T2   r R  R 
(d) The change in internal energy if process is isothermal   2 1 
is 6 × 104 J.

Use the following passage, solve Q. 101 to Q. 105  R  r  R1  

(b) T1   T1  T2   2
 r  R  R  
PASSAGE –1  2 1 

The rate of flow of heat depends on the nature of material,  R1  r  R1  

cross-sectional area and temperature gradient. If a material (c)  T1  T2   r R  R 
of conductivity k has set up a temperature gradient in x   2 1 

direction, then rate of heat flow at cross-section having

 R r  R2  
(d) T1   T1  T2   1
area A is
dQ
kA
dT  r  R  R  
 2 1 
dt dx
Use the following passage, solve Q. 106 to Q. 110
Between any two points of conductor, if temperature
difference is T and rate of heat flow is H, then the PASSAGE –2
resistance or opposition offered by the material to flow is Two closed identical conducting containers are found in
the laboratory of an old scientist. For the verification of
T
defined as = . Now consider two very thin concentric the gas some experiments are performed on the two boxes
H and the results are noted.
metallic shells A and B of radii R1 and R2 (R2 > R1) and
temperature T1 and T2 (T1 > T2) respectively. The hollow
space between them is filled with sand of thermal
conductivity k.
101. Thermal resistance offered by the sand is

1  1 1  1  1 1 
(a)    (b) 4k  R  R 
2k  R1 R 2   1 2  Experiment 1 : When the two containers are weighed
WA = 225 g, WB = 160 g and mass of evacuated container
 1  1 1  WC=100 g.
1 
(c) 4k    (d) 2k   
 R1 R 2   R1 R 2  Experiment 2 : When the two containers are given same
amount of heat same temperature rise is recorded. The
102. Assume the gas to be ideal the work done by the gas in
pressure change found are PA = 2.5 atm, PB = 1.5 atm
taking it from A to B is
Required data for unknown gas:
(a) 200 R (b) 300 R
(c) 400 R (d) 500 R Mono (molar gas)

103. The rate of heat flow through the sand is He Ne Ar Kr Xe Rd

g4 g 20 g 40 g 84 g 131 g 222 g
R1R 2 R1R 2
(a) 4k  T1  T2  (b) 2k  T1  T2  Dia (molar gas)
R1  R 2 R1  R 2
H2 F2 N2 O2 Cl2
 T1  T2   1 1   T1  T2   1 1  2g 19 g 28 g 32 g 71 g
(c)    (d)   
4k  R1 R2  2k  R1 R2 
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 67

106. Identify the type of gas filled in container A and B 113. The system shown in figure consists of 3 springs
respectively - and two rods. If the temperature of the rod is
increased by T, then the total energy stored in three
(a) Mono, mono (b) Dia, dia
(c) Mono, dia (d) Dia, mono 99
springs is  × kL22(T)2. Determine the value of .
484
107. Identify the gas filled in the container A and B -
The springs are initially relaxed and there is no friction
(a) N2, Ne (b) He, H2 anywhere. For rods the coefficient of linear expansion is
(c) O2, Ar (d) Ar, O2 .
108. Total number of molecules in 'A' (Here NA = Avagadro
number)
125
(a) N (b) 3.125 NA
64 A
114. A cylindrical rod of length 50 cm and cross–sectional area
125
(c) N (d) 31.25 NA 1 cm2 is fitted between a large ice chamber at 0°C and an
28 A evacuated chamber maintained at 27°C as shown in figure.
109. The initial internal energy of the gas in container 'A', if the Only small portions of the rod are inside the chambers and
containers were at room temperature 300K initially - the rest is thermally insulated from the surrounding. The
cross–section going into the evacuated chamber is
(a)1406.25 cal (b) 1000 cal
blackened so that it completely absorbs any radiations
(c) 2812.5 cal (d) none of these falling on it. The temperature of the blackened end is 17°C
110. If the gases have initial temperature 300K and they are when steady state is reached. Stefan constant  = 6 × 10–8
mixed in an adiabatic container having the same volume W/m2–K4. Find the thermal conductivity of the material of
as the previous containers. Now the temperature of the the rod.
mixture is T and pressure is P. Then -
(a) P > PA, T > 300K (b) P > PB, T = 300K 17°C

(c) P < PA, T = 300K (d) P > PA, T < 300K 0°C 27°C

Integer type ASSERTION REASON

111. Two cylinders A and B fitted with pistons contain equal
(A) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–II is
amounts of an ideal diatomic gas at 300 K. The piston of A
a correct explanation for Statement–I.
is free to move, while that of B held fixed. The same amount
of heat is given to the gas in each cylinder. Determine the (B) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–2 is
greatest integral value of the ratio of change in temperature NOT a correct explanation for Statement–I.
of B to the change in temperature of A. (C) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is False.

112. On mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is taken through a (D) Statement–I is False, Statement–II is True.
thermodynamic process shown in the p–V diagram. The
heat supplied to the system in this process is K × ( + 10) 115. Statement -1 : The internal energy of a given sample of an
p0V0. Determine the value of K. ideal gas depends only its temperature according to kinetic
theory of gases.
Statement -2 : The ideal gas molecules do not exert inter-
molecular forces.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 68

116. Statement -1: Internal energy change is zero if the temp is 122. Statement - 1 : The expanded length l of a rod of original
constant, irrespective of the process being cyclic or non- length l0 is not correctly given by (assuming  to be
cyclic. constant with T) l = l0 (1 + T),

Statement -2 : dU = n CvdT for all process and is if T is large.

independent of path. Statement - 2: It is given by l = l0 eT, which cannot be
treated as being approximately equal to l = l0 (1 + T) for
(a) A (b) B
large values of T.
(c) C (d) D
(a) A (b) B
117. Statement -1 : A body that is a good radiator is also a
(c) C (d) D
good absorber of radiation at a given wavelength
123. Statement - 1 : Two stars S1 and S2 radiate maximum
Statement -2 : According to Kirchoffs Law the absorptivity energy at 360 nm and 480 nm, respectively. Ratio of their
of a body is equal to it’s emissivity at a given wavelength. absolute temperature is 4 : 3.
(a) A (b) B Statement - 2 : According to Wien’s law T = b (constant).
(c) C (d) D (a) A (b) B
118. Statement -1 : A drop of cool water accidentally falls on an (c) C (d) D
incandescent lamp which is continuously glowing from
124. Statement - 1 : The coefficient of volume expansion has
long time, then the bulb breaks.
dimension K–1.
Statement -2 : As temperature of an object decreases then Statement - 2 : The coefficient of volume expansion is
it tries to contract and thermal contraction occurs. defined as the change in volume per unit volume per unit
(a) A (b) B change in temperature.
(c) C (d) D (a) A (b) B
119. Statement -1 : If a pack of potato chips is purchased in a (c) C (d) D
plain region and then taken to high mountains region, 125. Statement - 1 : A quasi-static process is so called because
then the chips packet is puffed up like a balloon. it is a sudden and large change of the system.
Statement -2 : At high altitude the atmospheric pressure Statement - 2 : An adiabatic process is not quasi-static
is less than the pressure at plain regions. because it is a sudden and large change of the system.

(a) A (b) B (a) A (b) B

(c) C (d) D (c) C (d) D
120. Statement - 1 : It is necessary to wait for thermal 126. Statement - 1 : When an ideal gas is taken from a given
equilibrium to be established before recording the thermodynamics state A to another given thermodynamic
temperatures of any system/systems in thermal interaction. state B by any polytropic process, the change in the
internal energy of the system will be the same in all
Statement - 2 : Heat of thermal energy is exchanged processes.
between systems only when they are in thermal equilibrium.
Statement - 2 : Internal energy of the gas depends only
(a) A (b) B upon its absolute temperature.
(c) C (d) D (a) A (b) B
121. Statement - 1 : In natural convection, the fluid motion is (c) C (d) D
caused due to density difference produced by temperature 127. Statement - 1 : Work done by a gas in isothermal expansion
gradient. is more than the work done by the gas in the same
Statement - 2 : In forced convection, the fluid is forced to expansion adiabatically.
flow along the solid surface by means of fans or pumps. Statement - 2 : Temperature remains constant in isothermal
expansion but not in adiabatic expansion.
(a) A (b) B
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
(c) C (d) D
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 69

128. Statement - 1 : In an isothermal process whole of the heat

energy supplied to the body is converted into internal
energy.
Statement - 2 : According to the first law of
thermodynamics Q = U + PV
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
129. Statement - 1 : In an adiabatic process, change in internal
energy of a gas is equal to work done on or by the gas in
the process.
Statement - 2 : Temperature of gas remains constant in a
adiabatic process.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D

MATCH THE COLUMN

130. A ball has surface temperature T initially at time t = 0, that
is less than surrounding constant temperature T0. On the
vertical axis of the graph shown has either thermal energy
radiated/absorbed per unit time or total energy radiated/
absorbed till time t by the ball. Correctly match the curves
marked in the graph :

Column I Column II
(A) Thermal energy emitted per unit time (p) 1
(B) Thermal energy absorbed per unit time (q) 2
(C) Total energy emitted till time t (r) 3
(D) Total energy absorbed till time t (s) 4
131. Match the quantities given in column I with column II
Column I Column I
(A) Adiabatic bulk modulus (p) – P/V
(B) Slope of P-V graph in isothermal (q) 2/(–1)
process
(C) Degree of freedom (r) P

(D) The ratio of molar heat capacity (s)
 1
at constant pressure to universal
gas constant R
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 70

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Single Correct Options 4. Starting with the same initial conditions, an ideal gas expands
1. A monoatomic ideal gas, initially at temperature T1, is from volume Vl to V2 in three different -ways. The work done
enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a frictionless piston. The by the gas is W1 if the process is purely isothermal, W2 if
gas is allowed to expand adiabatically to a temperature T2 purely isobaric and W3 if purely adiabatic. Then (2000)
by releasing the piston suddenly. If L1 and L2 are the lengths
of the gas column before and after expansion respectively,
T1
then T is given by (2000)
2

2/ 3
 L1  L1
(a)   (b) L
 L2  2

2/ 3
L2  L2 
(c) L (d)   (a) W2 > Wl > W3 (b) W2 > W3 > Wl
1  L1 
(c) W1 > W2 > W3 (d) W1 > W3 > W2
2. A block of ice at - 10°C is slowly heated and converted to
steam at 100°C. Which of the following curves represents 5. The plots of intensity versus wavelength for three black
the phenomenon qualitatively ? (2000) bodies at temperatures T1, T2 and T3 respectively are as
shown. Their temperature are such that (2000)

(a) (b)

(c) (d)

(a) T1 > T2 > T3 (b) T1> T3 > T2

3. An ideal gas is initially at temperture T and volume V. Its
(C) T2 > T3 > T1 (d) T3 > T2 > T1
volume is increased by V due to an increase in temperature
V 6. Three rods made of same material and having the same cross-
T , pressure remaining constant. The quantity   VT section have been joined as shown in the figure. Each rod is
varies with temperature as (2000) of the same length. The left and right ends are kept at 0°C
and 90°C respectively. The temperature of the junction of
the three rods will be (2001)

(a) (b)

(c) (d)
(a) 45°C (b) 60°C
(c) 30°C (d) 20°C
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 71

7. In a given process on an ideal gas dW = 0 and dQ < 0. Then 11. An ideal black-body at room temperature is thrown into a
for the gas (2001) furnace. It is observed that (2002)
(a) the temperature will decrease (a) initially it is the darkest body and at later times the
brightest
(b) the volume will increase (b) it is the darkest body at all times
(c) the pressure will remain constant (c) it cannot be distinguished at all times
(d) the temperature will increase. (d) initially it is the darkest body and at later times it cannot
be distinguished.
8. P-V plots for two gases during adiabatic processes are
12. The graph, shown in the adjacent diagram, represents the
shown in the figure. Plots 1 and 2 should correspond
variation of temperature (T) of two bodies, x and y having
respectively to (2001) same surface area, with time (t) due to the emission of
radiation. Find the correct relation between the emissivity
and absorptivity powers of the two bodies (2003)

(a) Ex > Ey and ax < ay (b) Ex < Ey and ax > ay

(c) Ex > Ey and ax > ay (d) Ex < Ey and ax < ay
(a) He and O2 (b) O2 and He 13. Two rods, one of aluminium and the other made of steel,
having initial lengths l1 and l2 are connected together to
(c) He and Ar (d) O2 and N2
form a single rod of length l1 + l2. The co-efficients of linear
9. When a block of iron floats in mercury at 0ºC, fraction k1 of expansion for aluminium and steel are  a and s
its volume is submerged, while at the temperature 60ºC, a
respectively. If the length of each rod increases by the same
fraction k2 is seen to be submerged. If the coefficient of amount when their temperature are raised by t°C, then find
volume expansion of iron is Fe and that of mercury is Hg, l1
then the ratio k1/k2 can be expressed as (2001) the ratio l  l  (2003)
1 2
1  60  Fe 1  60  Fe s a
(a) (b)
1  60  Hg 1  60  Hg (a)  (b) 
a s

1  60  Fe 1  60  Hg s a
(c) (d) (c)      (d)     
1  60  Hg 1  60  Fe s a a s
14. The PT diagram for an ideal gas is shown in the figure,
10. An ideal gas is taken through the cycle A  B  C  A,
where AC is an adiabatic process. Find the corresponding
as shown in the figure, if the net heat supplied to the gas in PV diagram. (2003)
the cycle is 5 J, the work done by the gas in the process
C  A is (2002)

(a) (b)

(a) - 5 J (b) - 10 J
(c) - 15 J (d) - 20 J (c) (d) None of these
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 72

15. 2 kg of ice at - 20°C is mixed with 5 kg of water at 20°C in an 20. Variation of radiant energy emitted by sun, filament of
insulating vessel having a negligible heat capacity. Calculate tungsten lamp and welding arc as a function of its
the final mass of water remaining in the container. It is given wavelength is shown in figure. (2005)
that the specific heats of water and ice are 1 kcal/kg°C and 0.5
kcal/kg°C while the latent heat of fusion of ice is 80 kcal/kg
(a) 7kg (b) 6kg (2003)
(c) 4kg (d) 2kg
16. If liquefied oxygen at 1 atmospheric pressure is heated from
50 K to 300 K by supplying heat at constant rate, the graph
of temperature vs time will be (2004)

Which of the following option is the correct match?

(a) Sun-T3, tungsten filament-T1, welding arc-T2
(a) (b) (b) Sun-T2, tungsten filament-T2, welding arc-T3
(c) Sun-T3, tungsten filament-T2, welding arc-T1
(d) Sun-T1, tungsten filament-T2, welding arc-T3
21. In which of the following processes, convection does not
take place primarily? (2005)
(c) (d) (a) sea and land breeze
(b) boiling of water
(c) heating air around a furnace
17. Two identical rods are connected between two conatiners.
(d) warming of glass of bulb due to filament.
One of them is at 100°C containing water and another is at
22. A spherical body of area A and emissivity e = 0.6 is kept
0°C containing ice. If rods are connected in parallel then the
inside a perfectly black body. Energy radiated per second
rate of melting of ice is ql g/s. If they are connected in series
by the body at temperature T is (2005)
q2 T4
(a) 0.4 e  AT T4
(b) 0.8 e  AT
then the rate is q2. The ratio q is (2004)
1 T4
(c) 0.6 e  AT T4
(d) l.0 e  AT
(a) 2 (b) 4 23. Calorie is defined as the amount of heat required to raise
temperature of 1 g of water by 1°C and it is defined under
1 1 which of the following conditions? (2005)
(c) (d)
2 4 (a) From 14.5°C to 15.5°C at 760 mm of Hg
18. An ideal gas expands isothermally from a volume V1 to V2 (b) From 98.5°C to 99.5°C at 760 mm of Hg
and then compressed to original volume V1 adiabatically. (c) From 13.5°C to 14.5°C at 76 mm of Hg
Initial pressure is P1 and final pressure is P3. The total work
(d) From 3.5°C to 4.5°C at 76 mm of Hg
done is W. Then (2004)
(a) P3 > P1, W > 0 (b) P3 < P1, W < 0 24. Water of volume 2 litre in a container is heated with a coil of
1 kW at 27°C. The lid of the container is open and energy
(c) P3 > P1, W < 0 (d) P3 = P1, W = 0
dissipates at rate of 160 J/s. In how much time temperature
19. Three discs, A, B and C having radii 2 m, 4 m and 6 m wil rise from 27°C to 77°C.
respectively are coated with carbon black on their outer
[Given specific heat of water is 4.2 kJ/kg] (2005)
surfaces. The wavelengths corresponding to maximum
intensity are 300 nm, 400 nm and 500 nm, respectively. The (a) 7 min (b) 6 min 2 s
power radiated by them are QA, QB and QC respectively (c) 8 min 20s (d) 14 min
(2004) 25. An ideal gas is expanding such that PT2 = constant . The
(a) QA is maximum (b) QB is maximum coefficient of volume expansion of the gas is (2008)

(c) QC is maximum (d) QA = QB = QC (a) 1/T (b) 2/T

(c) 3/T (d) 4/T
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 73

26. A real gas behaves like an ideal gas if its (2010) Configuration II
(a) pressure and temperature are both high
Configuration I
(b) pressure and temperature are both low
2K
(c) pressure is high and temperature is low
(d) pressure is low and temperature is high K 2K K
27. 5.6 L of helium gas at STP is adiabatically compressed to X
0.7 L. Taking the initial temperature to be T1, the work done (a) 2.0 s (b) 3.0 s
in the process is (2011) (c) 4.5 s (d) 6.0 s
31. Two non-reactive monoatomic ideal gases have their atomic
9 3
(a) RT1 (b) RT1 masses in the ratio 2 : 3. The ratio of their partial pressures,
8 2
when enclosed in a vessel kept at a constant temperature,
15 9 is 4 : 3. The ratio of their densities is : (2013)
(c) RT1 (d) RT1
8 2 (a) 1 : 4 (b) 1 : 2
28. A mixture of 2 moles of helium gas (atomic mass = 4 amu) (c) 6 : 9 (d) 8 : 9
and 1 mole of argon gas (atomic mass = 40 amu) is kept at 32. A gas is enclosed in a cylinder with a movable frictionless
300 K in a container. The ratio of the rms speeds piston. Its initial thermodynamic state at pressure Pi = 105
Pa and volume Vi = 10–3 m3 changes to a final state at Pf = (1/
 v rms  helium   32) × 105 Pa and Vf = 8 × 10–3 m3 in an adiabatic quasi-static
  is : (2012)
 v rms  argon   process, such that P 3V5 = constant. Consider another
thermodynamic process that brings the system from the
(a) 0.32 (b) 0.45 same initial state to the same final state in two steps : an
(c) 2.24 (d) 3.16 isobaric expansion at P i followed by an isochoric
29. Three very large plates of same area are kept parallel and (isovolumetric) process at volume Vf. The amount of heat
close to each other. They are considered as ideal black supplied to the system in the two-step process is
surfaces and have very high thermal conductivity. The first approximately (2016)
and third plates are maintained at temperatures 2T and 3T (a) 112 J (b) 294 J
respectively. The temperature of the middle (i.e., second) (c) 588 J (d) 813 J
plate under steady state condition is : (2012) 33. The ends Q and R of two thin wires, PQ and RS, are
soldered (joined) together. Initially each of the wires has
1 1
 65  4  97  4 a length of 1 m at 10°C. Now the end P is maintained at
(a)   T (b)   T 10°C, while the end S is heated and maintained at 400°C.
 2   4 
The system is thermally insulated form its surroundings.
1 If the thermal conductivity of wire PQ is twice that of the
 97  4 1 wire RS and the coefficient of linear thermal expansion of PQ
(c)   T (d)  97  4 T
 2  is 1.2 × 10–5 K–1, the change in length of the wire PQ is (2016)
(a) 0.78 mm (b) 0.90 mm
30. Two rectangular blocks, having indentical dimensions, can
(c) 1.56 mm (d) 2.34 mm
be arranged either in configuration I or in configuration II
34. A water cooler of storage capacity 120 litres can cool water
as shown in the figure. One of the blocks has thermal
at a constant rate of P watts. In a closed circulation system
conductivity K and the other 2K. The temperature difference (as shown schematically in the figure), the water from the
between the ends along the x-axis is the same in both the cooler is used to cool an external device that generates
configurations. It takes 9s to transport a certain amount of constantly 3 kW of heat (thermal load). The temperature of
heat from the hot end to the cold end in the configuration I. water fed into the device cannot exceed 30°C and the entire
The time to transport the same amount of heat in the stored 120 litres of water is initially cooled to 10°C. The
configuration II is : (2013) entire system is thermally insulated. The minimum value of
P (in watts) for which the device can be operated for 3
hours is (2016)
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 74

37. Consider a gas of triatomic molecules. The molecules are

assumed to be triangular and made of massless rigid rods
whose vertices are occupied by atoms. The internal energy
of a mole of the gas at temperature T is : (2020)

(Specific heat of water is 4.2 kJ kg–1 K–1 and the density of

water is 1000 kg m–3)
(a) 1600 (b) 2067
(c) 2533 (d) 3933
3
35. A current carrying wire heats a metal rod. The wire provides (a) RT (b) 3RT
a constant power (P) to the rod. The metal rod is enclosed 2
in an insulated container. It is observed that the temperature 5 9
(T) in the metal rod changes with time (t) (c) RT (d) RT
2 2
as T(t)  T0 (1   t1/4 ) where  is a constant with 38. Two gases-Argon (atomic radius 0.07nm, atomic weight 40)
appropriate dimension while T0 is a constant with dimension
and Xenon (atomic radius 0.1nm, atomic weight 140) have
of temperature.The heat capacity of metal is : (2019)
the same number density and are at the same temperature.
4P(T(t) - T0 )4 4P(T(t) - T0 )3 The ratio of their respective mean free time is closest to
(a) β 4 T05 (b)
β 4 T04
(2020)
4P(T(t) - T0 ) 4P(T(t) - T0 )2 (a) 4.67 (b) 2.04
(c) (d)
β 4 T02 β 4 T03 (c) 1.83 (d) 3.67
39. When the temperature of a metal wire is increased from 0ºC
36. Two identical beakers A and B contain equal volumes of
to 10ºC, its length increases by 0.02%. The percentage
two different liquids at 60°C each and left to cool down.
change in its mass density will be closest to :
Liquid in A has density of 8 × 102 kg/m3 and specific heat of
(2020)
2000 Jkg–1K–1 while liquid in B has density of 103 kg m–3 and
(a) 0.06 (b) 0.008
specific heat of 4000 Jkg–1K–1. Which of the following best
(c) 2.3 (d) 0.8
describes their temperature versus time graph
schematically? (assume the emissivity of both the beakers Multiple Choice Question
to be the same) (2019)
40. An ideal monoatomic gas is confined in a horizontal cylinder
(a) (b) by a spring loaded piston (as shown in the figure). Initially
the gas is at temperature T1, pressure P1 and volume V1 and
the spring is in its relaxed state. The gas is then heated
very slowly to temperature T2, pressure P2 and volume V2.
During this process the piston moves out by a distance x.
Ignoring the friction between the piston and the cylinder,
the correct statement(s) is (are) (2015)
(c) (d)
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 75

(a) If V2 = 2V1 and T2 = 3T1, then the energy stored in the (a) The process during the path A  B is isothermal
1 (b) heat flows out of the gas during the path B  C  D
spring is PV (c) work done during the path A  B  C is zero
4 1 1
(b) If V2 = 2V1 and T2 = 3T1, then the energy in internal (d) positive work is done by the gas in the cycle ABCDA
energy is 3P1V1 44. One mole of an ideal gas in initial state A undergoes a cyclic
(c) If V2 = 3V1 and T2 = 4T1, then the work done by the gas process ABCA, as shown in the figure. Its pressure at A is p0.
7 Choose the correct option(s) from the following (2010)
is PV
3 1 1
(d) If V2 = 3V1 and T2 = 4T1, then the heat supplied to the
17
gas is PV
6 1 1
41. Initially a black body at absolute temperature T is kept inside
a closed chamber at absolute temperature T0. Now the
chamber is slightly opened to allow sun rays to enter. It is
observed that temperatures T and T0 remains constant.
(a) Internal energies at A and B are the same
Which of the following statements is/are true? (2006)
(a) The rate of emission of energy from the black body (b) Work done by the gas in process AB is p0V0 ln 4
remains the same (c) Pressure at C is p0/4
(b) The rate of emission of energy from the black body (d) Temperature at C is T0/4
increases 45. A composite block is made of slabs A, B, C, D and E of
(c) The rate of absorption of energy by the black body different thermal conductivities (given in terms of a
increases.
constant K) and sizes (given in terms of length L) as shown
(d) The energy radiated by the black body equals the energy
in the figure. All slabs are of same width. Heat Q flows
absorbed by it.
only from left to right through the blocks. Then in steady
42. CV and CP denote the molar specific heat capacities of a gas
at constant volume and constant pressure, respectively. state (2011)
Then, (2009)
(a) CP – CV is larger for a diatomic ideal gas than for a
monoatomic ideal gas
(b) CP + CV is larger for a diatomic ideal gas than for a
monoatomic ideal gas
CP
(c) C is larger for a diatomic ideal gas than for a
V
monoatomic ideal gas
(a) heat flow through A and E slabs are same
(d) CP.CV is larger for a diatomic ideal gas than for a
monoatomic ideal gas (b) heat flow through slab E is maximum
43. The figure shows the p–V plot an ideal gas taken through a (c) temperature difference across slab E is smallest
cycle ABCDA. The part ABC is a semi–circle and CDA is (d) heat flow through C = heat flow through B + heat flow
half of an ellipse. Then, (2009) through D.
46. The figure below shows the variation of specific heat
capacity(C) of a solid as a function of temperature (T). The
temperature is increased continuously from 0 to 500 K at a
constant rate. Ignoring any volume change, the following
statement(s) is (are) correct to reasonable approximation.
(2013)
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 76

49. One mole of a monatomic ideal gas goes through a

thermodynamic cycle, as shown in the volume versus
temperature (V-T) diagram. The correct statement(s) is/are:[R
is the gas constant] (2019)

100 200 300 400 500

T(K)
(a) the rate at which heat is absorbed in the range 0–100 K
varies linearly with temperature T
(a) Work done in this thermodynamic cycle
(b) heat absorbed in increasing the temperature from 0–
1
100 K is less than the heat required for increasing the (1  2  3  4  1)is| w |
RT0
2
temperature from 400–500 K
(b) The ratio of heat transfer during possesses
(c) there is no change in the rate of heat absorbtion in the
range 400–500 K Q12 5
1  2 and 2  3is 
Q 2 3 3
(d) the rate of heat absorption increases in the range 200–300 K
(c) The above thermodynamic cycle exhibits only isochoric
47. Heater of an electric kettle is made of a wire of length L and
and adiabatic processes.
diameter d. It takes 4 minutes to raise the temperature of 0.5 (d) The ratio of heat transfer during processes
kg water by 40 K. This heater is replaced by a new heater
Q12 1
having two wires of the same material, each of length L and 1  2 and 3  4is 
Q34 2
diameter 2d. The way these wires are connected is given in
the options. How much time in minutes will it take to raise 50. A mixture of ideal gas containing 5 moles of monatomic gas
the temperature of the same amount of water by 40 K? (2014) and 1 mole of rigid diatomic gas is initially at pressure P0,
volume V 0 and temperature T 0. If the gas mixture is
(a) 4 if wires are in parallel (b) 2 if wires are in series
adiabatically compressed to a volume V0/4, then the correct
(c) 1 if wires are in series (d) 0.5 if wires are in parallel statement(s)/are,
48. An incandescent bulb has a thin filament of tungsten that is (Given 21.2=2.3;23.2 = 9.2; R is gas constant) (2019)
heated to high temperature by passing an electric current. (a) The final pressure of the gas mixture after compression
The hot filament emits black-body radiation. The filament is is in between 9P0 and 10P0.
observed to break up at random locations after a sufficiently (b) The average kinetic energy of the gas mixture after
long time of operation due to non-uniform evaporation of compression is in between 18RT0 and 19RT0
tungsten from the filament. If the bulb is powered at constant (c) Adiabatic constant of the gas mixture is 1.6
voltage, which of the following statement(s) is(are) true? (d) The work |W| done during the process is 13RT0
51. The filament of a light bulb has surface area 64 mm2. The
(2016) filament can be considered as a black body at temperature
(a) The temperature distribution over the filament is uniform 2500 K emitting radiation like a point source when viewed
(b) The resistance over small sections of the filament from far. At night the light bulb is observed from a distance
decreases with time of 100 m Assume the pupil of the eyes of the observer to be
circular with radius 3 mm. Then
(d) The filament emits more light at higher band of
(Take Stefan-Boltzmann constant = 5.67 × 10–8 Wm–2 K–4,
frequencies before it breaks up Wien’s displacement constant = 2.90 × 10–3 m-K, Planck’
(d) The filament consumes less electrical power towards constant = 6.63 × 10–34Js, speed of light in vacuum = 3.00
the end of the life of the bulb × 108ms–1) - (2020)
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 77

(a) power radiated by the filament is in the range 642W to Integer Type
645W
53. A metal rod AB of length 10x has its one end A in ice at 0°C
(b) radiated power entering into one eye of the observer is
and the other end B in water at 100°C. If a point P on the rod
in the range 3.15 × 10–8W to is maintained at 400°C, then it is found that equal amounts
3.25 × 10–8 W of water and ice evaporate and melt per unit time. The latent
(c) the wavelength corresponding to the maximum intensity heat of evaporation of water is 540 calg–1 and latent heat of
of light is 1160 nm melting of ice is 80 calg–1. If the point P is at a diatance of x
(d) taking the average wavelength of emitted radiation to from the ice end A, find the value of . (Neglect any heat
be 1740 nm, the total number of photons entering per second loss to the surrounding). (2009)
into one eye of the observer is in the range 2.75 × 1011 to 54. Two spherical bodies A (radius 6 cm) and B (radius 18 cm)
2.85 × 1011 are at temperatures T1 and T2, respectively. The maximum
52. As shown schematically in the figure, two vessels contain intensity in the emission spectrum of A is at 500 nm and in
water solutions (at temperature T) of potassium that of B is at 1500 nm. Considering them to be black bodies,
permanganate (KMNO4) of different concentrations n1 and what will be the ratio of the rate of total energy radiated by
n 2 (n 1 > n 2 ) molecules per unit volume with A to that of B ? (2010)
55. A piece of ice (heat capacity = 2100 J kg–1 °C–1 and latent
n  (n1  n 2 )  n1. When they are connected by a tube
heat = 3.36 × 105 J kg–1) of mass m gram is at –5°C at
of small length  and cross-sectional area S, KMnO4 starts atmospheric pressure. It is given 420 J of heat so that the ice
to diffuse from the left to the right vessel through the tube. starts melting. Finally when the ice–water mixture is in
Consider the collection of molecules to behave as dilute equilibrium, it is found that 1 g of ice has melted. Assuming
ideal gases and the difference in their partial pressure in there is no other heat exchange in the process, the value of
the two vessels causing the diffusion. The speed v of the m is (2010)
molecules is limited by the viscous force –v on each 1
molecule, where  is a constant. Neglecting all terms of the 56. A diatomic ideal gas is compressed adiabatically to of
32
order ( n) 2 , which of the following is/are correct ? (kB is its initial volume. If the initial temperature of the gas is Ti (in
the Boltzmann constant) – kelvin) and the final temperature is aTi, the value of a is
(2010)
57. Steel wire of length L at 40°C is suspended from the ceiling
and then a mass m is hung from its free end. The wire is
cooled down from 40°C to 30°C to regain its original length
L. The coefficient of linear thermal expansion of the steel
is 10–5/ºC, Young’s modulus of steel is 1011N/m2 and radius
of the wire is 1 mm. Assume that L>> diameter of the wire.
Then the value of m in kg is nearly. (2011)
58. A thermodynamic system is taken from an initial state i with
internal energy Ui=100 J to the final state f along two different
paths iaf and ibf, as schematically shown in the figure. The
(2020)
work done by the system along the paths af, ib and bf are
(a) the force causing the molecules to move across the
Waf =200 J, Wib=50J and Wbf=100 J respectively. The heat
tube is nk B TS supplied to the system along the path iaf, ib and bf are Qiaf,
Qib and Qbf respectively. If the internal energy of the system
(b) force balance implies n1v  nk B T
in the state b is Ub=200 J and Qiaf= 500 J, the ratio Qbf/Qib is
(c) total number of molecules going across the tube per sec (2014)

 n   k B T 
is    S
    
(d) rate of molecules getting transferred through the tube
does not change with time
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 78

59. Two spherical stars A and B emit black body radiation. The 64. One mole of a monatomic ideal gas is taken along two cyclic
radius of A is 400 times that of B and A emits 104 times the processes E  F  G  E and
 A  E  F  H  E as shown in the p–V diagram.
power emitted from B. The ratio    of their wavelengths The process involved are purely isochoric, isobaric,
 B
isothermal or adiabatic.
A and B at which the peaks occur in their respective
radiation curves is (2015)
60. A metal is heated in a furnace where a sensor is kept above
the metal surface to read the power radiated (P) by the
metal. The sensor has a scale that displays log2 (P/P0), where
P0 is a constant. When the metal surface is at a temperature
of 487°C, the sensor shows a value 1. Assume that the
emissivity of the metallic surface remains constant. What
is the value displayed by the sensor when the temperature
Match the paths in List I with the magnitudes of the work
of the metal surface is raised to 2767°C? (2016)
done in List II and select the correct answer using the codes
61. One mole of a monatomic ideal gas undergoes an adiabatic given below the lists.
expansion in which its volume becomes eight times its initial
List I List II
value. If the initial temperature of the gas is 100 K and the
universal gas contant R = 8.0 J mol–1 K–1, the decrease in its P. G  E 1. 160 p0V0 ln 2
internal energy, in Joule, is................. (2018) Q. G  H 2. 36 p0V0
62. Two conducting cylinders of equal length but different radii R. F  H 3. 24 p0V0
are connected in series between two heat baths kept at
S. F  G 4. 31 p0V0
temperatures T1 = 300 K and T2 = 100 K, as shown in the
figure. The radius of the bigger cylinder is twice that of the Codes
smaller one and the thermal conductivities of the materials P Q R S
of the smaller and the larger cylinders are K1 and K2
(a) 4 3 2 1
respectively. If the temperature at the junction of the two
cylinders is the steady state is 200 K, then K 1/K 2 = (b) 4 3 1 2
_________. (2018) (c) 3 1 2 4
(d) 1 3 2 4
65. Heat given to process is positive, match the following option
of column I with the corresponding option of column II.

ASSERTION REASON
63. Statement-1 : The total translational kinetic energy of all
the molecules of a given mass of an ideal gas is 1.5 times the
product of its pressure and its volume.
Statement-2 : The molecules of a gas collide with each other
and the velocities of the molecules change due to the
collision. (2007) Column I Column II
(a) Statements-1 and 2 are true and statement-2 is a correct (a) JK (p)  W > 0
explanation for statement-1. (b) KL (q)  Q < 0
(b) Statements-1 and 2 are true and statement-2 is not a
(c) LM (r)  W < 0
correct explanation for statement-1.
(c) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is false. (d) MJ (s)  Q > 0
(d) Statement-1 is false, statement-2 is true.
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 79

66. Column I gives some devices and column II gives some 68. One mole of a monatomic ideal gas is taken through a cycle
processes on which the functioning of these devices ABCDA as shown in the p–V diagram. Column II gives
depend. Match the device in column I with the processes in the characteristics involved in the cycle. Match them with
column II. (2007) each of the processes given in Column-I.
Column I Column II
(a) Bimetallic strip (p) Radiation from a hot body
(b) Steam engine (q) Energy conversion
(c) Incandescent lamp (r) Melting
(d) Electric fuse (s) Thermal expansion of solids.
67. Column-I contains a list of processes involving expansion
of an ideal gas. Match this with Column-II describing the
thermodynamic charge during this process. Indicate your
answer by darkening the appropriate bubbles of the 4 ×
4 matrix given in the ORS. Column-I Column-II
Column-I Column-II (a) Process A  B (p) Internal energy decreses
(a) An insulated container two (p)The temperature of the (b) Process B  C (q)Internal energy increases
chambers separated by a gas decreases (c) Process C  D (r) Heat is lost
valve. Chamber I contains an (d) Process D  A (s) Heat is gained
ideal gas and the Chamber II (t)Work is done on the gas
has vacuum. The valve is opened. 69. In a thermodynamic process on an ideal monoatomic gas,
the infinitesimal heat absorbed by the gas is given by TX,
where T is temperature of the system and X is the
infinitesimal change in a thermodynamic quantity X of the
system. For a mole of monatomic ideal gas

3  T   V 
X R n    R n   . Here, R is gas constant, V
(b) An ideal monoatomic gas (q) The temperature of the 2  TA  VA 
expands to twice its original gas increases or remains
is volume of gas. TA and VA are constants. The List-I below
volume such that its pressure constants.
gives some quantities involved in a process and List-II
1 gives some possible values of these quantities.
p , where V is the List-I List-II
V2
volume of the gas 1
(I) Work done by the system (P) RT0 n2
(c) An ideal monoatomic gas (r) The gas loses heat 3
expands to twice its original in process 1  2  3
volume such that its pressure
1
(II) Change in internal energy (Q) RT
1 3
p , where V is its
V4 / 3 in process 1  2  3
volume.
(d) An ideal monoatomic gas (s) The gas gains heat (III) Heat absorbed by the system (R) RT0
expands such that its
in process 1  2  3
pressure p and volume V
follows the behaviour 4
(IV) Heat absorbed by the system (S) RT0
shown in the graph. 3
in process 1  2
1
(T) RT0  3| n 2 
3

5
(U) RT0
6
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 80

If the processon one mole of monatomic ideal gas is as 71. When the gas bubble is at a height y from the bottom, its
1 temperature is
shown in the TV-diagram with P0V0 = RT
T0 , the correct
3 2/5 2/5
 p   gH   p0   g (H  y) 
match is, (a) T0  0 (b) T0  
 p   gy 
 0    p0   gH 

3/ 5 3/ 5
 p0   gH   p0   g (H  y) 
(c) T0   (d) T0  
 p 0   gy   p0   gH 
72. The buoyancy force acting on the gas bubble is (Assume R
is the universal gas constant)
(p 0   gH) 2 / 5
(a)  nRg T0
(p 0   gy) 2 / 5

 nRgT0
(b)
(2019) (p0   gH) [p0   g (H  y)]3 / 5
2/5

(a) I  P, II  R, III  T, IV  S
(b) I  P, II  T, III  Q, IV  T (p 0   gH)3 / 5
(c)  nRgT0
(c) I  S, II  T, III  Q, IV  U (p 0   gy)8 / 5
(d) I  P, II  R, III  T, IV  P  nRgT0
(d)
Comprehension (p0   gH) [p0   g (H  y)]2 / 5
3/ 5

PASSAGE PASSAGE
 5 In the figure a container is shown to have a movable (without
A small spherical monoatomic ideal gas bubble     is
 3 friction) piston on top. The container and the piston are all
trapped inside a liquid of density l (see figure). Assume made of perfectly insulating material allowing no heat transfer
that the bubble does not exchange any heat with the liquid. between outside and inside the container. The container is
The bubble contains n moles of gas. The temperature of the divided into two compartments by a rigid partition made of
gas when the bubble is at the bottom is T0, the height of the a thermally conducting material that allows slow transfer of
heat. The lower compartment of the container is filled with 2
liquid is H and the atmospheric pressure is p0. (Neglect
moles of an ideal monoatomic gas at 700 K and the upper
surface tension) (2008)
compartment is filled with 2 moles of an ideal diatomic gas at
400 K. The heat capacities per mole of an ideal monoatomic
3 5
gas are CV  R , CP  R , and those for an ideal
2 2

5 7
diatomic gas are CV  R , CP  R . (2014)
2 2

70. As the bubble moves upwards, besides the buoyancy force

the following forces are acting on it
(a) Only the force of gravity
(b) The force due to gravity and the force due to the pressure
of the liquid.
(c) The force due to gravity, the force due to the pressure of
the liquid and the force due to viscosity of the liquid
(d) The force due to gravity and the force due to viscosity
of the liquid
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 81

73. Consider the partition to be rigidly fixed so that it does not 78. A monoatomic ideal gas of two moles is taken through a
move. When equilibrium is achieved, the final temperature cyclic process starting from A as shown in figure. The volume
of the gases will be VB VD
ratios are = 2 and = 4. If the temperature TA at
(a) 550 K (b) 525 K VA VA
(c) 513 K (d) 490 K A is 27°C. Calculate : (2001)
74. Now consider the partition to be free to move without friction
so that the pressure of gases in both compartments is the
same. Then total work done by the gases till the time they
achieve equilibrium will be
(a) 250R (b) 200R
(c) 100R (d) –100R
(a) the temperature of the gas at point B,
Subjective
(b) heat absorbed or released by the gas in each process,
75. Two moles of an ideal monoatomic gas taken through a (c) the total work done by the gas during the complete cycle.
cycle ABCA as shown in the P-T diagram. During the
Express your answer in terms of the gas constant R.
process AB, pressure and temperature of the gas vary such
79. A cubical box of side 1 meter contains helium gas (atomic
that PT = Constant. If T1 = 300 K, calculate (2000)
weight 4) at a pressure of 100 N/m2. During an observation
time of 1 second, an atom travelling with the root mean
square speed parallel to one of the edges of the cube, was
fouind to make 500 hits with a particular wall, without any
 25 
collision with other atoms. Take R    J/mol-K and
 3 
k = 1.38 × 10–23 J/K. (2002)
(a) Evaluate the temperature of the gas.
(b) Evaluate the average kinetic energy per atom.
(c) Evaluate the total mass of helium gas in the box.
80. An insulated container containing monoatomic gas of molar
(a) the work done on the gas in the process AB and mass M is moving with a velocity v0. If the container is
(b) the heat absorbed or released by the gas in each of the processes suddenly stopped, find the change in temperature. (2003)
Give answer in terms of the gas constant R. 81. Hot oil is circulated through an insulated container with a
wooden lid at the top whose conductivity K = 0.149 J/(m-°C-
76. An ice cube of mass 0.1 kg at 0°C is place in an isolated
sec), thickness t = 5 mm, emissivity = 0.6. Temperature of the
container which is at 227°C. The specific heat s of the
top of the lid is maintained at T1 = 127° C. The ambient
container varies with temperature T according to the
temperature Ta = 27 ºC. Calculate (2003)
empirical relation s = A + BT, where A = 100 cal/kg-K and
B = 2 × 10–2 cal/kg-K2. If the final temperature of the container
is 27°C, determine the mass of the container. (Latent heat of
fusion of water = 8 × 104 cal/kg, Specific heat of water = 103
cal/kg-K). (2001)
77. A 5 m long cylindrical steel wire with radius 2 × 10–3 m is
suspended vertically from a rigid support and carries a
bob of mass 100 kg at the other end. If the bob gets
snapped, calculate the change in temperature of the wire
ignoring radiation losses. (For the steel wire : Young’s
(a) rate of heat loss per unit area due to radiation from the lid
modulus = 2.1 × 10 11 Pa; Density = 7860 kg/m3; Specific
heat = 420 J/kg-K). (2001) (b) temperature of the oil.
17
(Given    108 Wm 2 K 4 )
3
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 82

82. A diatomic gas is enclosed in a vessel fitted with massless 86. A cylinder of mass 1 kg is given heat of 20,000 J at
movable piston. Area of cross section of vessel is 1m2. Initial atmospheric pressure. If initially the temperature cylinder is
height of the piston 1 m (see the figure). The initial temperature 20°C, find
of the gas is 300 K. The temperature of the gas is increased to
(a) final temperature of the cylinder.
400 K, keeping pressure constant. Calcualte the new height
of the piston. The piston is brought to its initial position with (b) workdone by the cylinder.
no heat exchange. Calculate the final temperature of the gas. (c) change in internal energy of the cylinder.
You can leave answer in fraction. (2004)
(Given that specific heat of cylinder = 400 J kg–l ºC–1,
co-efficient of volume expansion = 9 × 10 –5 ºC –1 ,
Atmospheric pressure = 105 N/m2 and Density of cylinder
= 9000 kg/m3). (2005)
87. 0.05 kg steam at 373 K and 0.45 kg of ice at 253 K are mixed
in an insulated vessel. Find the equilibrium temperature of
83. A small spherical body of radius r is falling under gravity in the mixture. (2006)
a viscous medium. Due to friction the medium gets heated. Given, Lfusion = 80 cal/g = 336 J/g,
How does the rate of heating depend on radius of body Lvaporisation = 540 cal/g = 2268 J/g,
when it attains terminal velocity? (2004)
Sice = 2100 J/kg, K = 0.5 cal/g K
84. A cylindrical rod of length l, thermal conductivity K and area of
cross-section A has one end in the furnace at temperature T1 and Swater = 4200 J/kg K = 1 cal/gK
and the other end in surrounding at temperature T2. Surface of Fill in the blanks
the rod exposed to the surrounding has emissivity e. Also T2 =
A fixed thermal conducting cylinder has a radius R and
Ts + T and TS >> T .
height L0. The cylinder is open at its bottom and has a
If T1 - Ts  T , find the proportionality constant. small hole at its top. A piston of mass M is held at a
(2004) distance L from the top surface, as shown in the figure.
The atmospheric pressure is p0.

85. A cubical block of co-efficient of linear expansion s , is

submerged partially inside a liquid of co-efficient of volume
expansion  . On increasing the temperature of the system 88. A liquid at 30° C is poured very slowly into a open
Calorimeter that is at temperature of 110°C. The boiling
T , the height of the cube inside the liquid remains temperature of the liquid is 80°C. It is found that the first 5
unchanged. Find the relation between s , and l . gm of the liquid completely evaporates. After pouring
(2004) another 80 gm of the liquid the equilibrium temperature is
found to be 50°C. The ratio of the Latent heat of the liquid
to its specific heat will be _____ ºC. (Neglect the heat
exchange with surrounding]
(2019)
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS 83

HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS

Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
 84

Answer Key
CHAPTER -1 HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS

EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (a) 1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (a)

5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (a) 5. (d) 6. (d) 7. (a) 8. (c)

9. (c) 10. (d) 11. (d) 12. (a) 9. (d) 10. (a) 11. (a) 12. (d)

13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (d) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (a) 16. (c)
17. (bn) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (b) 17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (c)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23.(c) 24. (d) 21. (a) 22. (c) 23.(a) 24. (b)
25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (c) 25. (d) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (c)
29. (c) 30. (b) 31. (a) 32. (c) 29. (c) 30. (c) 31. (a)
33. (a) 34. (d) 35.(b) 36. (d) 32. (001.77 to 001.78)
37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (c) 33. (006.00)
41. (c) 42. (d) 43. (a) 44. (c) 34. (002.05)
45. (c) 46. (d) 47. (c) 48. (c)
35.(008.33)
49. (c) 50. (a) 51. (d) 52. (a)
53. (b, c) 54. (a) 55. (b) 56. (c)
57. (b) 58. (a) 59. (d) 60. (b)
61. (d) 62. (a) 63. (c) 64. (d)
65. (c) 66. (b) 67. (b) 68. (a)
69. (b) 70. (c) 71. (c) 72. (b)
73. (c) 74. (a) 75. (a) 76. (c)
77. (d) 78. (c) 79. (a) 80. (b)
81. (b) 82. (b) 83. (b) 84. (b)
85. (b) 86. (a) 87. (c) 88. (b)
89. (d) 90. (c) 91. (a) 92. (c)
93. (a) 94. (c) 95. (a) 96. (b)
97. (c) 98. (b) 99. (d)
ANSWER KEY 85

EXERCISE - 3 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS 121. (b) 122. (a) 123. (a) 124. (a)
125. (d) 126. (a) 127. (a) 128. (d)
129. (c)
130. (A - p; B - q; C - s; D - r)
131. (A - r; B - p; C - q; D - s)

DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (b)

5. (c) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (c)
9. (d) 10. (d) 11. (a) 12. (c)
13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (d)
17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (a)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23.(d) 24. (b)
25. (b) 26. (d) 27. (c) 28. (c)
29. (b) 30. (d) 31. (b ,c) 32. (d)
33. (c) 34. (c) 35.(b) 36. (c)
37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (c)
41. (b) 42. (d) 43. (a) 44. (c)
45. (a) 46. (b) 47. (a) 48. (a)
49. (d) 50. (c) 51. (d) 52. (c)
53. (d) 54. (a) 55. (b) 56. (b)
57. (d) 58. (c) 59. (d) 60. (d)
61. (b) 62. (b) 63. (a) 64. (c)
65. (c) 66. (b) 67. (a) 68. (a)
69. (d) 70. (a) 71. (a) 72. (b)
73. (b) 74. (b) 75. (c) 76. (a)
77. (c) 78. (c) 79. (b) 80. (c)
81. (c) 82. (b) 83. (d) 84. (d)
85. (d) 86. (d) 87. (a, b) 88. (b, d)
89. (a, c) 90. (b, d) 91. (d) 92. (a)
93. (a) 94. (a, d) 95. (b) 96. (a, b, c)
97. (b) 98. (a, c, d) 99. (a, b, c) 100. (a, c)
101. (b) 102. (c) 103. (a) 104. (a)
105. (b) 106. (c) 107. (d) 108. (b)
109. (c) 110. (b) 111. (0001) 112. (0001)
113. (0003) 114. (0002) 115. (a) 116. (a)
117. (a) 118. (a) 119. (a) 120. (c)
ANSWER KEY 86

EXERCISE - 4 : 78. (a) 600 K,

PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
(b) 1500 R, 831.8 R, –9000 R, –831.8 R,
(c) 600 R
79. (a) 160 K,
(b) 3.132 × 10–21 J,
(c) 0.3 gram

Mv02
80. ( )
3R
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. 81. (a) 595 W/m2, (b) 420 K)

1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (a) 4 4

2/5

82. ( m, 400   K)
5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (b) 3 3

9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (a) 12. (c) 83. (Rate of heat produced  r 5 )
13. (c) 14. (d) 15. (b) 16. (c)
4eTs3
17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (a) 84. ( 1  )
K
21. (d) 22. (c) 23.(a) 24. (c)
25. (c) 26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (d) 85. (  l  2s )
29. (c) 30. (a) 31. (d) 32. (c) 86. (a) 70°C, (b) 0.05 J, (c) 19999.95 J
33. (a) 34. (b) 35.(b) 36. (b)
87. (273 K or 0°C)
37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (a) 40. (a, b, c)
88. (270.00)
41. (a, d) 42. (b, d) 43. (b, d) 44. (a, b)
45. (a, c, d) 46. (b, c, d) 47. (b, d) 48. (c, d)
49. (a, b) 50. (a, c, d) 51. (b, c, d) 52. (a, b, c)
53. (0009) 54. (0009) 55. (0008) 56. (0004)
57. (0003) 58. (0002) 59. (2) 60. (9)
61. (900) 62. (4) 63. (b) 64. (a)
65. (a – q); (b – p,q); (c – s); (d – q,r)

66. (a – s); (b – q); (c – p); (d – r)

67. (a – q); (b – p, r); (c – p, s); (d – q, s)

68. (a – p, r, t); (b – p, r); (c – q, s); (d – r, t)

69. (d) 70. (d) 71. (b) 72. (b)
73. (d) 74. (d)
75. (a) +1200 R, (b) –2100 R, 1500 R, 831.8 R)
76. (0.495Kg)
77. (0.00457°C)
Note